This is a modern-English version of The Boy Mechanic, Book 2: 1000 Things for Boys to Do, originally written by unknown author(s).
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Transcriber's Notes
Two minor typographical errors were found and corrected. In the chapters on making fly-fishing rods (pages 59-71), two lists of materials that were printed as running text have been reformatted as unsigned lists for clarity. The text is unchanged.
Two minor typos were found and fixed. In the chapters on making fly-fishing rods (pages 59-71), two lists of materials that were printed as regular text have been reformatted as bullet points for clarity. The text remains unchanged.
The page numbers that appear in the right margin are links. To snap a page to the top of the window, click the page number. To obtain a link to a particular page, right-click on the page number and copy the link.
The page numbers in the right margin are clickable links. To bring a page to the top of the window, click the page number. To get a link to a specific page, right-click on the page number and copy the link.
To speed loading, drawings in-line with the text are at most 512 pixels wide, often less. Drawings that have dimensions or other details that are important to properly executing a project (as well as some drawings that are simply charming to look at) are preserved as higher-resolution images linked to the embedded images. When an in-line image has a thin black border, you can click on it to open the larger version. These larger images are sized to print correctly at 150 px/in (60 px/cm).
To speed up loading, images in line with the text are a maximum of 512 pixels wide, and often less. Images with dimensions or other details that are crucial for completing a project (along with some images that are just nice to look at) are kept as higher-resolution versions linked to the embedded images. When an in-line image has a thin black border, you can click on it to view the larger version. These larger images are set to print correctly at 150 px/in (60 px/cm).
THE BOY MECHANIC
BOOK 2
The
Boy Mechanic
BOOK 2
1000 THINGS FOR BOYS TO DO
HOW TO CONSTRUCT
DEVICES FOR WINTER SPORTS, MOTION-PICTURE CAMERA, INDOOR
GAMES, REED FURNITURE, ELECTRICAL NOVELTIES,
BOATS, FISHING RODS, CAMPS AND CAMP
APPLIANCES, KITES AND GLIDERS,
PUSHMOBILES, ROLLER
COASTER, FERRIS
WHEEL
AND
HUNDREDS OF OTHER THINGS WHICH DELIGHT EVERY BOY
WITH 995 ILLUSTRATIONS
COPYRIGHTED, 1915, BY H. H. WINDSOR
COPYRIGHTED, 1915, BY H. H. WINDSOR
CHICAGO
POPULAR MECHANICS CO.
PUBLISHERS
CHICAGO
POPULAR MECHANICS CO.
PUBLISHERS

After the First Station has been Selected, It is Marked by a Pile of Stones, a Stake, or, If Precise Work is to be Done, a Tack in the Top of a Stake. The Table is Then Set Up over This Station Point and Leveled So That the Surface of the Paper will Be Truly Horizontal (Inset: UNCLE JOHN'S FARM Scale 1/16" = 1' Jimmy Smith—Surveyor)
After the first station is selected, it’s marked by a pile of stones, a stake, or, if precise work is needed, a tack on top of a stake. The table is then set up over this station point and leveled so that the surface of the paper is perfectly horizontal. (Inset: UNCLE JOHN'S FARM Scale 1/16" = 1' Jimmy Smith—Surveyor)
Plane-Table Surveying
By Harold G. McGee
[In the training of a boy for a trade or profession there is none so profitable for outdoor work as that of a surveyor. This article sets forth how to accomplish surveying and the making of simple maps with the use of commonplace tools that any boy can make.—Editor.]
[When training a boy for a trade or profession, there's nothing more beneficial for outdoor work than becoming a surveyor. This article explains how to do surveying and create simple maps using basic tools that any boy can make.—Editor.]
Surveying and map making have always been two of the most interesting things a civil engineer has had to do. And, like George Washington, many of the men we look up to today as successes in different lines worked as surveyors in their younger days. Surveying takes one out of doors, and is apt to lead him into the unknown and unexplored byways of the earth.
Surveying and map-making have always been two of the most fascinating tasks for civil engineers. Like George Washington, many of the successful figures we admire today started out as surveyors in their youth. Surveying gets you outside and often leads you into the unknown and uncharted paths of the earth.
Though modern surveyors often use precise and expensive instruments, creditable surveys can be made with simple and inexpensive apparatus. Of such apparatus, two of the simplest are the plane table and the camera. Since one must know the principles of plane-table surveying before he can do camera surveying, this paper will describe the plane table alone, leaving the camera for another chapter.
Though modern surveyors often use precise and expensive tools, reliable surveys can be done with simple and affordable equipment. Two of the simplest tools are the plane table and the camera. Since you need to understand the principles of plane-table surveying before you can do camera surveying, this paper will focus on the plane table alone and cover the camera in a later chapter.
A plane table is simply a drawing board mounted on a tripod so that it can be set up and worked upon in the field. One kind of plane table, which is used in the army for reconnaissance, does not even have a tripod; it is simply strapped to the arm of the man who is using it.
A plane table is just a drawing board attached to a tripod so that it can be set up and used outdoors. One type of plane table, used by the military for scouting, doesn't even have a tripod; it's just strapped to the arm of the person using it.
Plane-table maps vary greatly in scale and the area they represent. Landscape artists' plans may show only single city lots, while some topographic maps cover hundreds of square miles on a single sheet. For maps of a small farm, a park, or a residence block in the city, a plane table is almost ideal, since plane-table maps are made with rather simple apparatus and do not require much actual measuring on the ground. Most objects are located without ever going to them, or even sending a rod-man to them.
Plane-table maps can differ a lot in scale and the areas they cover. Landscape artists' plans might only show individual city lots, while some topographic maps can cover hundreds of square miles on one sheet. For mapping a small farm, a park, or a city block, a plane table is nearly perfect because plane-table maps are created using fairly simple tools and don’t need much actual measuring on-site. Most features are located without having to go to them or even sending someone to measure them.

Just a Few Weeks After George Washington's Sixteenth Birthday, in 1748, Lord Fairfax, Owner of a Large Estate in Virginia, Took Him into His Employ as a Surveyor
Just a few weeks after George Washington's sixteenth birthday, in 1748, Lord Fairfax, who owned a large estate in Virginia, hired him as a surveyor.
[2] Besides the plane table itself and a sheet of paper, only a small carpenter's level, a tape to measure a few distances with, and some spikes for markers, a hard lead pencil, a ruler, and a few needles are absolutely necessary for this sort of a map.
[2] Besides the plane table itself and a sheet of paper, you only need a small carpenter's level, a tape measure for a few distances, some spikes for markers, a hard lead pencil, a ruler, and a few needles for this kind of map.

Three Stations are Used for Setting the Plane Table in Succession to Locate the Various Objects
Three stations are used to set up the plane table in sequence to locate the different objects.
TABLE AT STA. A - TABLE AT STA. B - TABLE AT STA. C
TABLE AT STA. A - TABLE AT STA. B - TABLE AT STA. C
To start a plane-table map, a station must first be selected from which as many as possible of the objects to be located on the finished map can be seen. Ordinarily, the objects one would locate are corners of buildings, fence corners, intersections of roads, corners of lots, banks of streams, possibly trees, and section and quarter-section corners in the country. A railroad, a lake, a mountain, or anything which forms a noticeable landmark in any particular locality, ought to be on the map. In mapping a territory which has never been surveyed before, the first surveyor may name the hills and streams.
To create a plane-table map, you first need to choose a station from which you can see as many of the objects to be included on the final map as possible. Generally, the objects you would locate are building corners, fence corners, road intersections, lot corners, riverbanks, and possibly trees, along with section and quarter-section corners in rural areas. A railroad, a lake, a mountain, or any significant landmark in the area should also be included on the map. When mapping an area that has never been surveyed before, the first surveyor can name the hills and streams.
After the first station has been selected, it is marked by a pile of stones, a stake, or, if precise work is to be done, a tack in the top of a stake. The table is then set up over this station point and leveled so that the surface of the paper will be truly horizontal. Generally, too, the board is "oriented," that is, placed so that two of its edges point north and south and two east and west. It is then clamped so that it will not move while working on it.
After the first station is chosen, it’s marked with a pile of stones, a stake, or, for more precise work, a tack in the top of a stake. The table is then set up over this station point and leveled to ensure the surface of the paper is perfectly horizontal. Usually, the board is also "oriented," meaning it's positioned so that two of its edges face north and south while the other two face east and west. It’s then clamped down so it won’t move while you’re working on it.
To begin the map, a point on the table is chosen to represent the station on the ground over which the table is set. This point is marked by sticking a fine needle into the paper, vertically. A small triangle should be drawn around the needle hole in the paper and labeled "Sta. A," so that it will not be lost in the maze of points which will soon cover the sheet. By sighting past this needle toward some object which is wanted on the map, like the corner of a house, its direction can be marked by setting another needle on the far side of the table, in line with the first and the given object. Then, if a ruler or straightedge be placed against these two needles and a fine line drawn connecting them, this line will show the exact direction of the object from Sta. A. All the other objects which are wanted on the finished map and can be seen from Sta. A are located by direction in the same way.
To start the map, pick a point on the table to represent the station on the ground where the table is positioned. Mark this point by inserting a fine needle straight into the paper. Draw a small triangle around the needle hole and label it "Sta. A," so it won't get lost in the jumble of points that will soon cover the sheet. By aiming past this needle toward an object you want on the map, like the corner of a house, you can mark its direction by placing another needle on the opposite side of the table, in line with the first needle and the object. Then, if you place a ruler or straightedge against these two needles and draw a fine line connecting them, this line will show the exact direction of the object from Sta. A. All the other objects you want on the final map that can be seen from Sta. A can be located in the same way by direction.
The first points to have their direction thus marked ought to be the next stations to be occupied. If all the objects to be located can be seen from three stations, or even two of three stations, three stations will be sufficient. The distance to one of them from Sta. A should be carefully measured and laid off to scale along its direction line on the map. Its place on the map should be marked exactly as the first station was, substituting B for A. It is wise, after every few sights at other objects, to take a sight along the line AB to make sure that the board has not turned. A good map is impossible if the board twists.
The first points that need to have their direction marked should be the next stations to be occupied. If all the objects to be located can be seen from three stations, or even two out of three stations, then three stations will be enough. The distance from Station A to one of them should be measured carefully and marked to scale along its direction line on the map. Its location on the map should be marked exactly as the first station was, replacing A with B. It’s a good idea, after taking a few sights at other objects, to check along the line AB to make sure the board hasn’t twisted. A good map is impossible if the board rotates.
To measure the distance between [3] stations, a 50 or 100-ft. tape, or some accurate substitute, is necessary. An ordinary piece of iron telegraph wire, 105 ft. long, is a good substitute. A point, about 2-1/2 ft. from one end, is marked with a little lump of solder. A chisel dent in this solder will mark one end of the 100-ft. section. Then, with a borrowed tape or a good rule, measure off and mark every 10 ft., just as the first point was marked, until the entire 100 ft. have been laid off. The last 10 ft. should be divided into feet. In all this measuring and marking, the wire must be stretched out taut and straight. The extra 2-1/2 ft. at each end are used for making handles. By estimating the tenths of a foot, measurements can be made with such a tape, or "chain," as an old-time surveyor might call it, just as accurately as they can be laid off on the map.
To measure the distance between [3] stations, you need a 50 or 100-ft. tape, or some precise alternative. A regular piece of iron telegraph wire, 105 ft. long, works well as a substitute. Mark a point about 2-1/2 ft. from one end with a small lump of solder. A chisel dent in this solder will indicate one end of the 100-ft. section. Then, using a borrowed tape or a good ruler, measure and mark every 10 ft., just like the first point, until the entire 100 ft. is measured out. The last 10 ft. should be divided into feet. Throughout this measuring and marking, the wire must be kept taut and straight. The extra 2-1/2 ft. at each end are used to create handles. By estimating tenths of a foot, measurements can be taken with this tape, or "chain," as an old-time surveyor might call it, just as accurately as they can be plotted on the map.

An Alidade, Consisting of Two Sights and a Straightedge, Takes the Place of the Two Needles
An alidade, made up of two sights and a straightedge, replaces the two needles.

Two men are required for measuring, or "chaining," a head and a rear chainman. The rear chainman holds the 100-ft. end of the tape on the station point, while the head chainman takes his end forward toward the station to which they are measuring. When he has gone nearly the length of the tape, the rear chainman calls "halt." The head chainman stops and draws the tape up tight, while the rear chainman holds his division end on the starting point. Then the head chainman sticks a spike into the ground to mark the place where his division end comes, calls out "stuck," and starts on toward the object point.
Two men are needed for measuring, or "chaining," a front chainman and a rear chainman. The rear chainman holds the 100-ft. end of the tape at the starting point, while the front chainman takes his end forward toward the point they're measuring. When he has almost reached the length of the tape, the rear chainman calls out "halt." The front chainman stops and pulls the tape taut, while the rear chainman keeps his end at the starting point. Then, the front chainman pushes a spike into the ground to mark where his end is, calls out "stuck," and continues toward the target point.
Large spikes make good marking pins, especially if they have little red or white strips of cloth tied to them. Surveyors use 11 markers. One is stuck into the ground at the starting point and is carried forward by the rear chainman, who also picks up the markers at each 100-ft. point as soon as the head chainman calls "stuck." In this way, the number of markers which the rear chainman has in his hand is always the same as the number of hundreds of feet which the last set marker is from the starting point.
Large spikes make great marking pins, especially if they have little red or white strips of cloth tied to them. Surveyors use 11 markers. One is placed in the ground at the starting point and is carried forward by the rear chainman, who also picks up the markers at each 100-ft point as soon as the head chainman calls "stuck." This way, the number of markers the rear chainman has in his hand is always the same as the number of hundreds of feet the last set marker is from the starting point.
In measuring between two points, care must be taken to draw the tape out taut and straight, its two ends must be level with each other, and it must be exactly in line with the two points between which the measurement is being made. In measuring downhill, one end may have to be held up high, and the point on the ground where the end division would come, found by dropping a stone from the place where it is in the air and watching for the spot where the rock strikes the ground. A surer way to do this is to hold a plumb-bob string on the last division and carefully let the bob down until it touches the ground. A rod with a red or white flag on it ought to be placed at or just beyond the point to which the measurement is to be made so that the rear chainman can [4] easily line in the head chainman. The latter, before he places his marker, looks back to the rear chainman to be told whether or not he is "on line" with the object point. If he is not, and ought to go to the rear chainman's right to get "on," the latter holds out his right arm and the head chainman moves accordingly. When he reaches the right point, the rear chainman signals "all right" by holding out both of his arms and then dropping them to his side; the marker is stuck, and both move up a hundred feet and repeat the process.
When measuring between two points, you need to pull the tape tight and straight, ensuring both ends are level with each other and perfectly aligned with the two points you're measuring between. When measuring downhill, you might need to hold one end up high, and to find where the end should land on the ground, you can drop a stone from where it is suspended and watch where it hits. A more reliable method is to hold a plumb-bob string at the last measurement mark and carefully lower the bob until it touches the ground. You should place a rod with a red or white flag at or just beyond the point where you’re measuring, so the rear chainman can easily align with the head chainman. Before placing his marker, the head chainman looks back at the rear chainman to check if he is “on line” with the target point. If he isn’t and needs to move to the right of the rear chainman to get aligned, the rear chainman will extend his right arm, and the head chainman will adjust accordingly. Once he reaches the right spot, the rear chainman signals “all right” by extending both arms and then dropping them to his sides; the marker is placed, and both then move up a hundred feet and repeat the process.
After all the points possible have been located from Sta. A, and the direction lines labeled lightly in pencil so that they can be distinguished when the board has been removed from the station, the plane table is picked up and carried to Sta. B. Here it is again set up, leveled, and oriented by making the direction of the line AB on the paper exactly the same as that of the line from Sta. A to Sta. B on the ground. This is done by placing needles at points A and B on the table and then turning the board until the two needles and Sta. A are in line. Sights are taken on the same objects which were "shot" at Sta. A, and to objects which were not visible from Sta. A. The intersection of the lines of sight toward a given object from A and from B marks the location on the paper of that object. If the two ends of a straight fence have been located in this way, a straight line joining the points will show the location of the fence on the map. By exactly similar methods, every other object is located on the paper.
After all possible points have been found from Station A, and the direction lines are lightly marked in pencil so they can be seen when the board is taken away from the station, the plane table is picked up and taken to Station B. Here, it is set up again, leveled, and oriented by aligning the direction of line AB on the paper with that of the line from Station A to Station B on the ground. This is done by placing needles at points A and B on the table and then rotating the board until the two needles and Station A are in a straight line. Observations are taken on the same objects that were aimed at from Station A, as well as on objects that were not visible from Station A. The point where the sight lines toward a specific object from A and from B intersect marks the object's location on the paper. If the two ends of a straight fence have been located this way, a straight line connecting the points will represent the fence's location on the map. Using the same methods, every other object is located on the paper.
In order to avoid errors, it is an excellent scheme to locate three stations near the outside edges of the area to be mapped, and locate all objects possible by sights from each of the three stations. If, instead of all three crossing each other at a point, the lines of sight from the three stations form a triangle, something is wrong. If the triangle is very small, it may be safe to use its center as the correct point; if not, the work must be repeated and checked. Locating even a few points by this method may prevent some bad blunders. The three stations ought to form as nearly as possible, an equilateral triangle; and the distances between all of them should be measured and laid out accurately on the plane table.
To avoid mistakes, it’s a good idea to set up three stations near the outer edges of the area you want to map, and identify all possible objects by sight from each of the three stations. If, instead of all three lines crossing at one point, the sight lines from the three stations create a triangle, then there’s an issue. If the triangle is very small, it might be safe to use its center as the accurate point; if not, you need to redo the work and verify it. Identifying even a few points using this method can help prevent major errors. The three stations should ideally form an equilateral triangle, and the distances between all of them should be measured and accurately drawn on the plane table.

A Rigid Tripod is Made of Strips for Legs, Which are Fastened to a Large Top
A rigid tripod is made from strips for legs, which are attached to a large top.
There are two ways in which the map may be finished, inked, or traced. By drawing in the "culture," that is, the things built by man, like the houses, the fences, the roads, and the railroads, in black ink; the topography, that is, the hills and valleys, in brown; the water, in blue, and then erasing all the construction lines, a very neat map can be made. Another way is to get some "onion-skin" paper, or some tracing cloth, tack it over the penciled map, and trace the lines right through, using black India ink. This tracing can be blueprinted, just as a photographic film. A plain, neat title, describing location of map; who made it and when; the scale used; why it was made, if it was made for a special [5] purpose, and the direction of the north point, ought to be on every map. The topographic sheets published by the United States Geological Survey are good samples to follow. They have been published for a great many places all over the country, and single copies can be obtained by sending 10 cents to the Director, United States Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.
There are two ways to finish the map: ink it or trace it. You can draw in the "culture," which refers to man-made structures like houses, fences, roads, and railroads in black ink; the topography, or natural features like hills and valleys, in brown; and water in blue. Then, erase all the construction lines to create a clean map. Another option is to use some "onion-skin" paper or tracing cloth, lay it over the penciled map, and trace the lines with black India ink. This tracing can be reproduced as a blueprint, similar to a photographic film. Every map should include a straightforward and clear title that describes its location, who created it and when, the scale used, its purpose if it was made for a specific reason, and the direction of true north. The topographic sheets published by the United States Geological Survey are great examples to follow. They have been made for numerous locations across the country, and you can get individual copies by sending 10 cents to the Director, United States Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.

From an Original Drawing of a Survey of Mount Vernon, Made by George Washington at the Age of 14
From an Original Drawing of a Survey of Mount Vernon, Made by George Washington at the Age of 14
Plane tables are almost as easily made as they are bought. If there is no old drawing board around the house, a new bread board from the ten-cent store will serve. For ordinary work, a table which is 15 or 20 in. square will do very well. The board must be mounted on a tripod so that it will be rigid while it is being worked upon and yet can be unclamped and oriented. A brass plate, with a hole in it and a nut soldered over the hole, screwed to the bottom of the board will permit the board and tripod to be bolted together in good shape. Another method, which is not nearly as good, is to drill a hole clear through the board, countersink it on top for a bolt head, and bolt the board and tripod head directly together. With the brass plate and nut, the camera tripod can be pressed into service if a nut of the proper size has been used. The camera tripod is, however, apt to be wabbly with a drawing board on top; a much more satisfactory tripod can be built as shown in the accompanying drawings. Each leg is made of two strips of wood, 3/4 by 3/8 in. and 3 ft. long. These strips are screwed together at their lower ends, gripping a spike between them which will prevent the legs from slipping on the ground. The tops of the strips are spread apart and screwed to the opposite ends of an oak or maple cleat. This cleat is, in turn, screwed to the under side of the circular tripod head.
Plane tables are almost as easy to make as they are to buy. If there isn’t an old drawing board lying around the house, a new breadboard from the dollar store will work. For regular use, a table that’s 15 or 20 inches square will be just fine. The board needs to be mounted on a tripod so it stays steady while you work on it, but can still be unclamped and repositioned. A brass plate with a hole in it and a nut soldered over the hole, screwed to the bottom of the board, will let you bolt the board and tripod together securely. Another method, which isn’t as effective, is to drill a hole all the way through the board, countersink it on the top for a bolt head, and bolt the board and tripod head directly together. With the brass plate and nut, a camera tripod can work if a correctly sized nut is used. However, a camera tripod is likely to be wobbly with a drawing board on top; a much better tripod can be built as shown in the accompanying drawings. Each leg is made of two strips of wood, measuring 3/4 by 3/8 inches and 3 feet long. These strips are screwed together at their lower ends, holding a spike between them to prevent the legs from slipping on the ground. The tops of the strips are spread apart and screwed to the opposite ends of an oak or maple cleat. This cleat is then screwed to the underside of the circular tripod head.
In place of the two needles and the ruler described for marking the line of sight, most plane-table men use an alidade, which is a combination of two sights and a straightedge. A very simple alidade may be made by mounting two needles on a ruler. The straight edge of the ruler is placed against the needle which marks the station at which the plane table is set up. Then, by swinging the ruler around this needle until its two sighting needles come in line with some object, the line of sight can be drawn directly on the paper along the edge of the ruler. A surveyor in India once made an alidade out of a piece of straightedge and two sights made of native coins hammered out by a native blacksmith. Two pieces of cigar box, one with a fine vertical saw slit in it, and the other with a vertical slot and a piece of fine wire or silk thread stretched down the center, glued to a well planed, straight, flat piece of wood, make a fine alidade. A careful worker may be able to put his sights on hinges so that they will fold down when not in use.
Instead of the two needles and ruler used for marking the line of sight, most plane-table operators use an alidade, which combines two sights with a straightedge. A very simple alidade can be made by attaching two needles to a ruler. The straight edge of the ruler is placed against the needle that marks the station where the plane table is set up. Then, by pivoting the ruler around this needle until both sighting needles align with some object, the line of sight can be drawn directly on the paper along the edge of the ruler. A surveyor in India once created an alidade from a straightedge and two sights made from local coins hammered by a native blacksmith. Two pieces of cigar box, one with a narrow vertical slit and the other with a vertical slot and a piece of fine wire or silk thread stretched down the middle, glued to a well-planed, straight, flat piece of wood, make a great alidade. A careful worker might even be able to attach his sights with hinges so they fold down when not in use.
More than anything else, map making rewards care and accuracy, and shows up slipshod workmanship. If the pencils are sharp, the lines fine, and if the work is checked often, beautiful maps can be made with very simple apparatus.
More than anything else, making maps rewards carefulness and precision, and reveals poor workmanship. If the pencils are sharp, the lines are fine, and if the work is frequently checked, beautiful maps can be created with very basic tools.
White marks on waxed surfaces may be removed by rubbing lightly with a soft rag moistened in alcohol, after which rub with raw linseed oil.
White marks on waxed surfaces can be removed by gently rubbing with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, then rubbing with raw linseed oil.
Machine for Sketching Pictures
An ordinary drawing board, with the attachments shown, provides an easy way to sketch pictures, even if one is not proficient in this line of work. It is only necessary to look through the sight and move the pencil about so that the knot in the thread follows the outline of the landscape or object being drawn.
An ordinary drawing board, with the attachments shown, offers a simple way to sketch pictures, even for those who aren’t skilled in this area. You just need to look through the sight and move the pencil around so that the knot in the thread follows the outline of the landscape or object you're drawing.

This Machine Aids a Person in Drawing the True Outline of a Picture
This machine helps a person draw the actual outline of a picture.
The size of the machine depends on the one building it, but a fair-sized drawing board is sufficient for the beginner. A strip of wood is fastened to the board, near one edge, which has a metal piece on each end, fastened to the under side and bent up over the end to form an extension for the rod to support the moving parts. The strip of wood should be 3/4 in. wide and 1/4 in. thick, and the sliding arm, holding the pencil, 1/2 in. wide and 1/4 in. thick. A like strip, but much shorter than the one fastened to the board, is also fitted with metal pieces in an inverted position so the projections will be downward. A 3/16-in. rod is run through holes in the metal pieces of the strips at both ends, and soldered to those on the strip fastened to the board. This will make a hinged joint, as well as one that will allow the upper strip to slide horizontally.
The size of the machine varies based on the person making it, but a reasonably sized drawing board is enough for a beginner. A piece of wood is attached to the board, near one edge, which has a metal piece at each end, fixed to the underside and bent up over the end to create an extension for the rod to support the moving parts. The piece of wood should be 3/4 in. wide and 1/4 in. thick, and the sliding arm that holds the pencil should be 1/2 in. wide and 1/4 in. thick. A similar strip, but much shorter than the one attached to the board, is also fitted with metal pieces in an inverted position so the projections point downward. A 3/16-in. rod is passed through holes in the metal pieces of both strips at each end and soldered to the ones on the strip attached to the board. This creates a hinged joint that allows the upper strip to slide horizontally.
Centrally located on the upper strip are two more strips, fastened with screws at right angles to the former, with a space between them of 1/2 in. for the sliding center piece holding the pencil. These pieces are further braced with a wire at the back, and crosspieces are screwed both on top and under side, to make a rigid guide for the sliding pencil holder. An upright is fastened to the side of one of these pieces over the center of the upper horizontal sliding piece for a screw eye to hold the thread. Another screw eye is turned into the crosspiece just under the one on the support, so that the thread will run perpendicularly between them. Two more screw eyes are fastened, one into the upper surface of the rear crosspiece, and the other in the end of the pencil holder, near the pencil. By connecting these screw eyes, as shown, with a thread, having a rubber band fastened in the rear end and a knot tied in it near the screw eye in the upper end of the vertical stick, a means for following the outlines of the picture is provided.
Centrally located on the upper strip are two additional strips, secured with screws at right angles to the former, with a 1/2 inch gap between them for the sliding center piece that holds the pencil. These pieces are further supported with a wire at the back, and crosspieces are screwed onto both the top and bottom to create a stable guide for the sliding pencil holder. An upright is attached to the side of one of these pieces over the center of the upper horizontal sliding piece for a screw eye to hold the thread. Another screw eye is installed in the crosspiece just below the one on the support, ensuring that the thread runs vertically between them. Two more screw eyes are attached, one to the upper surface of the rear crosspiece and the other to the end of the pencil holder near the pencil. By connecting these screw eyes with a thread, and securing a rubber band at the back end with a knot tied near the screw eye on the upper end of the vertical stick, a method for tracing the outlines of the picture is created.
A vertical stick is fastened to the front edge of the board by means of a notch and wedge. In the upper end of this stick a very small hole is bored for a sight, similar to a peep sight on a rifle.
A vertical stick is attached to the front edge of the board using a notch and a wedge. At the top of this stick, a tiny hole is drilled for a sight, similar to a peep sight on a rifle.
To use the machine, set the board on a table, or tripod, and level it up in front of the object to be drawn. Look through the sight at the front of the board and move the pencil about to keep the knot of the thread on the outlines of the picture to be drawn.—Contributed by Wm. C. Coppess, Union City, Ind.
To use the machine, place the board on a table or tripod and level it in front of the object you want to draw. Look through the sight at the front of the board and move the pencil around to keep the knot of the thread aligned with the outlines of the picture you’re drawing. —Contributed by Wm. C. Coppess, Union City, Ind.
A walnut filler is made of 3 lb. burnt Turkey umber, 1 lb. of burnt Italian sienna, both ground in oil, then mixed to a paste with 1 qt. of turpentine and 1 pt. of japan drier.
A walnut filler is made of 3 lbs. burnt Turkey umber, 1 lb. of burnt Italian sienna, both ground in oil, then mixed into a paste with 1 quart of turpentine and 1 pint of Japan drier.
Camera Surveying
By Harold G. McGee
[This article explains the preparation of the camera for taking the pictures at each of the three stations, after which the plates are developed, printed and kept until a convenient time may be had for plotting the ground. The succeeding article will give in detail the making of the map from the photographs.—Editor.]
[This article explains how to set up the camera for taking pictures at each of the three locations. After that, the plates are developed, printed, and stored until the right time to plot the land. The next article will provide detailed information on creating the map from the photographs.—Editor.]
Camera surveying is simply plane-table surveying in which the landscape has been photographically picked up and carried indoors. It has the enormous advantage that one can obtain a record of the utmost fidelity in a small fraction of the time taken to do the field work of even a sketchy plane-table survey, and that plotting can be done in the comfort and with the conveniences of a drafting room. When the hours one can work are short or the periods of clear, dry weather are few and far between, a camera is an ideal surveying instrument. It sees and records with the click of the shutter.
Camera surveying is basically plane-table surveying where the landscape has been captured in photographs and brought indoors. It has the huge advantage of allowing you to obtain a highly accurate record in a fraction of the time it takes to do even a rough plane-table survey in the field, and plotting can be done comfortably with all the conveniences of a drafting room. When the hours available for work are limited or there are few clear, dry days, a camera is an excellent surveying tool. It captures and records with just the click of the shutter.
Surveying by camera was proposed early in the infant days of photography; but not until the eighties were photographic surveys commenced in earnest. With the extensive surveys of the Canadian Rockies by the Canadian government within the past decade and the topographic surveys of the Alps, the camera has very recently indeed achieved the dignity of being known as a "sure-enough" surveying instrument. Even today, few surveyors have ever used photography for making surveys, even though for mountain topography or any survey which includes a large number of distinctive, inaccessible landmarks, the camera asks no odds of either the plane table or the stadia transit.
Surveying with a camera was suggested in the early days of photography, but it wasn't until the 1880s that serious photographic surveys began. With the extensive surveys of the Canadian Rockies conducted by the Canadian government over the past decade and the topographic surveys of the Alps, the camera has recently gained recognition as a reliable surveying tool. Even today, few surveyors have actually used photography for surveys, despite the fact that for mountain terrain or any survey that includes a lot of unique, hard-to-reach landmarks, the camera performs just as well as both the plane table and the stadia transit.
A camera survey taken of the summer cottage or the camping ground will be a source of great delight while it is being plotted up of winter evenings. There is something weird in watching each tent and dock slip into its place with naught but a pair of dividers and a few pictures to do the trick. And when the map is done, there are all the data to tell just where a tennis court can go or a walk ought to be built.
A camera survey of the summer cottage or campsite will be a great source of joy during long winter evenings as it's being drawn up. There's something fascinating about watching each tent and dock come together with just a pair of dividers and a few pictures to guide you. And when the map is finished, you have all the information needed to decide where a tennis court can go or where a path should be built.
In making surveys, a plate camera will do more accurate work than will a film camera; and a fixed focus is a big help in plotting. In spite of the special and expensive instruments which have been designed solely for surveying work, a little ingenuity on the part of the owner of most any kind of a camera, be it big or little, film or plate, box or folding, will do wonders toward producing good results.
When conducting surveys, a plate camera will produce more accurate results than a film camera; and a fixed focus is very helpful in plotting. Despite the specialized and costly tools designed specifically for surveying, a bit of creativity from the owner of almost any type of camera—whether it's large or small, film or plate, box or folding—can significantly improve the outcomes.

A T-Shaped Level with Adjusting Nuts is Located on the Camera Box, or on the Bed of the Folding Camera
A T-shaped level with adjusting nuts is located on the camera box or on the bed of the folding camera.
To be used for surveying, a camera must be fitted with a spirit level and some arrangement for cross hairs. A T-shaped level on the bed or the box, carefully adjusted, will show when the [9] plate is vertical and when the perpendicular line from the center of the plate to the center of the lens is horizontal. Actual cross hairs in the camera are not as good as four tiny points of V's, one projecting from the middle of each side, top, and bottom of the camera box, just in front of the plate holder. How the level is to be adjusted so that a line between the upper and lower points will be truly vertical, and one through the die-side points truly horizontal and on a level with the center of the lens when the bubbles are in the center of the spirit level, will be described later.
To use a camera for surveying, it needs to be equipped with a spirit level and some sort of crosshairs. A T-shaped level on the base or box, properly calibrated, will indicate when the [9] plate is vertical and when the line from the center of the plate to the center of the lens is horizontal. Actual crosshairs in the camera aren't as effective as four tiny V points, one extending from the middle of each side, top, and bottom of the camera box, positioned just in front of the plate holder. The method for adjusting the level so that a line between the upper and lower points is perfectly vertical, and one through the side points is truly horizontal and aligned with the center of the lens when the bubbles are centered in the spirit level will be explained later.

To Prepare a Camera for Surveying, It is Necessary to Arrange That the Axial Center Line through Lens to the Plate Shall be Level
To get a camera ready for surveying, it’s essential to ensure that the central line through the lens to the plate is level.
(Inset: The Camera is Set Up, Complete with Thread or Pencil-Line Cross Hairs and Level, Then Focused on a Stake so That Its Top will Just Come to the Horizontal Cross Hair at the Center of the Plate When the Level Tube Parallel with the Center Line of Lens Reads Level)
(Inset: The camera is set up, complete with thread or pencil-line crosshairs and a level, then focused on a stake so that its top is aligned with the horizontal crosshair at the center of the plate when the level tube parallel with the center line of the lens reads level.)
Camera Preparation
To prepare a camera for surveying, it is necessary to arrange that the axial center line through the lens to the plate shall be level, and that the location of the horizontal and vertical center lines shall be indicated on the plate. A spirit level is the best solution of the first problem, and indicated center points of the second.
To get a camera ready for surveying, you need to make sure that the center line going through the lens to the plate is level, and that the horizontal and vertical center lines are marked on the plate. A spirit level is the best way to address the first issue, while marked center points will help with the second.
The spirit level preferably may be of the T-form, with two level tubes, or of the "universal" circular form, with which some hand cameras are equipped. However, ordinary hand-camera levels are generally too rough and difficult of adjustment to insure accurate work. On a view camera, the level may be conveniently located on the bed which carries the lens board. If it is screwed to the under side of the arms it will be convenient for use and out of the way. The bed is likewise a good location for the level on a folding hand camera, while the top of the box is about the only possible location with a box-type instrument.
The spirit level is ideally a T-shape with two level tubes, or a "universal" circular design, like some hand cameras have. However, standard levels in hand cameras are usually too rough and hard to adjust for precise work. On a view camera, the level can be conveniently placed on the bed that holds the lens board. If it’s attached to the underside of the arms, it will be easy to use and out of the way. The bed is also a good spot for a level on a folding hand camera, while the top of the box is pretty much the only viable place for a box-type camera.
The cross hairs or center-line indicators should be placed on the back of the camera, just in front of the plate. If indicators are used, fine-thread cross hairs or pencil lines drawn on the ground glass must be used temporarily for making adjustments. Generally, the two cross hairs will divide the plate vertically and horizontally into four equal parts and the hairs or indicators will join the center point of the sides and top and bottom of the opening immediately in front of the plate. But it is essential that the cross hairs have their intersection in a line perpendicular to the plate and passing through the center of the lens. Thus in a camera in which the lens is not placed in the center of the plate, or in which the rising and sliding front has placed the lens off center, either or both of the cross hairs may be off center with regard to the plate.
The crosshairs or centerline indicators should be located on the back of the camera, just in front of the plate. If indicators are used, fine-thread crosshairs or pencil lines drawn on the ground glass must be used temporarily for making adjustments. Generally, the two crosshairs will divide the plate vertically and horizontally into four equal parts, and the hairs or indicators will connect the center point of the sides and the top and bottom of the opening directly in front of the plate. However, it's crucial that the crosshairs intersect at a line that is perpendicular to the plate and passes through the center of the lens. In a camera where the lens is not positioned in the center of the plate, or where the rising and sliding front has shifted the lens off center, either or both crosshairs may be off center regarding the plate.

The Ordinary Round Level may be Used, but It Is Not so Good as the T-Level
The regular round level can be used, but it's not as good as the T-level.
After the cross-hair indicators and the level have been attached to the camera, adjustments are necessary. Surveyors distinguish between permanent and temporary adjustments, permanent adjustments being those for which the instrument maker is responsible, and temporary adjustments being those which can be and are made in the field. The principal permanent or maker's adjustments of the surveying camera are those which insure the center line through the lens, or axial center line, or line of collimation, being perpendicular to the plate, the intersection of the cross hairs being on this line, and that the cross hairs themselves are mutually perpendicular. Temporary or field adjustments must be so made that one tube of the spirit [10] level shall be parallel with the axial center line through the lens and the other parallel with the horizontal cross hair.
After attaching the cross-hair indicators and the level to the camera, adjustments are needed. Surveyors differentiate between permanent and temporary adjustments. Permanent adjustments are the ones the instrument maker is responsible for, while temporary adjustments are made in the field. The main permanent adjustments of the surveying camera ensure that the center line through the lens, known as the axial center line or line of collimation, is perpendicular to the plate, that the intersection of the cross hairs is on this line, and that the cross hairs themselves are at right angles to each other. Temporary or field adjustments need to be made so that one tube of the spirit level is parallel to the axial center line through the lens, and the other is parallel to the horizontal cross hair. [10]

The Cross Hairs or Center-Line Indicators should be Placed on the Back of the Camera
The crosshairs or center-line indicators should be placed on the back of the camera.
The first field adjustment is made in the following manner. The camera is set up, complete with thread or pencil-line cross hairs and level, and focused on a stake whose top shall just come to the horizontal cross hair at the center of the plate, when the level tube parallel with the center line of the lens reads level. This stake may be driven to the required elevation or a rod may be held on it and the point where, in the image on the ground glass, it is intersected by the cross hair marked with pencil on the rod as it is held vertically on the stake. The distance to this stake is measured from the camera and another similar stake set at the same elevation by the same method, but in an opposite direction and at the same distance from the camera. The two stakes or the mark on the vertical rod which is held on these stakes in turn will be level with each other, though they may not be level with the camera. The camera is then moved to a point very much closer to one stake than to the other and again leveled. The vertical distance from one stake-top or mark on the rod is measured and the camera then focused on the second stake. If the level is actually in adjustment, the distance from the second stake top or mark will be exactly the same as it was on the first. If not, the difference, or "error," is found between the two vertical distances from the cross hair to the two stake tops. Half this error is corrected by raising or lowering one end of the level tube by means of the threaded nuts which are placed on it for the purpose. The whole process is then repeated until the vertical distances from the horizontal cross hair at the center to the two level stakes, one close to and one distant from the camera, are identical. The axial center line of the lens, or the line of collimation, is then in adjustment with the level. All that remains is to make the horizontal cross hair parallel with the cross level.
The first field adjustment is done in the following way. Set up the camera with crosshairs marked by thread or a pencil line, and use a level. Focus on a stake so that its top aligns with the horizontal crosshair in the middle of the plate when the level tube is parallel to the lens's centerline. This stake can be adjusted to the needed height, or a rod can be held on it, marking where the crosshair intersects the image on the ground glass with pencil while holding it vertically on the stake. Measure the distance from the camera to this stake and set another stake at the same height using the same method but facing the opposite direction, at the same distance from the camera. The two stakes or the mark on the vertical rod at these stakes will be level with each other, even if they’re not level with the camera. Next, move the camera much closer to one stake than the other and level it again. Measure the vertical distance from the top of one stake or mark on the rod, then focus the camera on the second stake. If the level is properly adjusted, the distance to the top of the second stake or mark will match the first exactly. If not, find the difference, or "error," between the two vertical distances from the crosshair to the stake tops. Correct half of this error by adjusting one end of the level tube using the threaded nuts designed for this purpose. Repeat the entire process until the vertical distances from the horizontal crosshair in the center to both stakes—one close to the camera and the other far—are the same. The axial center line of the lens, or line of collimation, will then be in alignment with the level. Finally, all that’s left is to ensure the horizontal crosshair is parallel to the cross level.

The Maker's Adjustments Should Insure the Line of Collimation being Perpendicular to the Plate
The manufacturer's adjustments should ensure that the line of collimation is perpendicular to the plate.
This is done by using one marked stake. The camera is leveled as far as the "fore-and-aft" level is concerned and the horizontal cross-hair point at the center marked on the stake. The camera is then swung round until the stake just shows on one edge of the ground glass, the fore-and-aft or longitudinal level being checked to make sure its bubble is still in the center. Then the bubble in the cross or transverse level tube is brought to the center by means of the threaded adjusting nuts, and the camera is thrown hard over so that the stake appears along the opposite edge of the plate. This time, the bubble of the longitudinal level being kept in the center, half the error introduced by turning from one edge to the other [11] is corrected. All of the adjustments are then rechecked, and if they are found correct the instrument is ready for use. If a circular level be used, the method of adjustment is exactly the same, the swing of the bubble along the axis of the camera and transverse to it being used to determine the longitudinal and transverse adjustments. Slips of paper may be used for lifting one side in place of the adjustment nuts of the T-level.
This is done using a marked stake. The camera is leveled in terms of the "fore-and-aft" level, with the horizontal cross-hair point at the center marked on the stake. The camera is then swung around until the stake just appears on one edge of the ground glass, while checking the fore-and-aft or longitudinal level to ensure the bubble is still centered. Next, the bubble in the cross or transverse level tube is centered using the threaded adjusting nuts, and the camera is tilted heavily so that the stake appears along the opposite edge of the plate. This time, while keeping the bubble of the longitudinal level centered, half the error introduced by swinging from one edge to the other [11] is corrected. All adjustments are then rechecked, and if everything is correct, the instrument is ready for use. If a circular level is used, the adjustment method is exactly the same, using the bubble's swing along the camera's axis and transverse to it to determine the longitudinal and transverse adjustments. Slips of paper can be used to lift one side instead of the adjustment nuts of the T-level.
A leveling head or ball-and-socket joint on the top of the tripod will be found of material aid in leveling the instrument.
A leveling head or ball-and-socket joint on top of the tripod will be very helpful in leveling the instrument.
No great mechanical genius is necessary to prepare a camera for or to make a successful camera survey. But if a boy have not patience and an infinite desire for accuracy, camera surveying, or indeed any sort of surveying, will be a source of neither pleasure, satisfaction, nor profit.
No exceptional mechanical talent is needed to set up a camera or to conduct a successful camera survey. However, if a person lacks patience and an unwavering desire for precision, camera surveying—or any kind of surveying—will not provide enjoyment, fulfillment, or benefit.
To Make Transparent Paper
Transparent paper of parchmentlike appearance and strength, which can be dyed with almost all kinds of aniline dyes and assumes much more brilliant hues than ordinary colored glass, can be made in the following manner: Procure a white paper, made of cotton or linen rags, and put it to soak in a saturated solution of camphor in alcohol. When dry, the paper so treated can be cut up into any forms suitable for parts of lamp shades, etc.
Transparent paper that looks and feels like parchment but is much stronger can be dyed with almost any type of aniline dyes, resulting in much more vibrant colors than regular colored glass. Here’s how to make it: Get white paper made from cotton or linen rags and soak it in a saturated solution of camphor in alcohol. Once dry, the treated paper can be cut into any shapes suitable for lamp shades and other purposes.
Toasting Bread over an Open Fire
Having experienced some difficulty in obtaining good toast over a gas or open fire I tried the following plan with good results: An old tin pan was placed over the flame and the ordinary wire bread toaster clasping the slice of bread was held about 1/2 in. from the pan. In a few minutes the toast was crisp and ready to serve.—Contributed by Katy Doherty, New York City.
Having some trouble getting good toast over a gas or open flame, I tried this method with great results: I placed an old tin pan over the flame and held a regular wire bread toaster, which held the slice of bread, about 1/2 inch from the pan. In a few minutes, the toast was crispy and ready to serve.—Contributed by Katy Doherty, New York City.
Adjustable Stilts
The beginner with stilts always selects short sticks so that he will not be very far from the ground, but as he becomes more experienced, the longer the sticks the better. Then, too, the small boy and the large boy require different lengths of sticks. The device shown makes a pair of sticks universal for use of beginners or a boy of any age or height.
The beginner with stilts always chooses shorter poles so he won't be too far from the ground, but as he gains more experience, longer poles become better. Also, a small boy and a large boy need different lengths of poles. The device shown makes a pair of poles suitable for beginners or boys of any age or height.

Stilts Having Stirrups That can be Set at Any Desired Height
Stilts with stirrups that can be adjusted to any height you want.
To make the stilts, procure two long sticks of even length, and smooth up the edges; then begin at a point 1 ft. from one end and bore 12 holes, 3/8 in. in diameter and 2 in. apart from center to center. If there is no diestock at hand, have a blacksmith, or mechanic, make a thread on both ends of a 3/8-in. rod, 12 in. long. Bend the rod in the shape shown, so that the two threaded ends will be just 2 in. apart from center to center. The thread on the straight horizontal end should be so long that a nut can be placed on both sides of the stick. A piece of a garden hose or small rubber hose, slipped on the rod, will keep the shoe sole from slipping. The steps can be set in any two adjacent holes to give the desired height.—Contributed by Walter Veene, San Diego, Cal.
To make the stilts, get two long sticks of the same length and smooth the edges. Then, starting about 1 ft from one end, drill 12 holes that are 3/8 in. in diameter and 2 in. apart from center to center. If you don't have a die on hand, ask a blacksmith or mechanic to create threads on both ends of a 3/8-in. rod that's 12 in. long. Bend the rod into the shape shown, ensuring that the two threaded ends are 2 in. apart from center to center. The thread on the straight horizontal end should be long enough to fit a nut on both sides of the stick. A piece of garden hose or small rubber hose placed on the rod will prevent the shoe sole from slipping. The steps can be set in any two adjacent holes to achieve the desired height.—Contributed by Walter Veene, San Diego, Cal.
Grape Arbor Built of Poles
In building outdoor structures, such as grape arbors, pergolas, or arches, it is not necessary to use sawed lumber, as they can be built as substantial, and frequently more artistic and cheap, of poles. These are easily obtained, especially in the country or in the smaller cities where there usually are many trees and gardens.
In constructing outdoor structures like grape arbors, pergolas, or arches, it’s not essential to use cut lumber, as you can make them just as sturdy, and often more artistic and cost-effective, with poles. These are readily available, especially in rural areas or smaller towns where there are usually plenty of trees and gardens.

Arbor Made of Poles Which are Supported by One Row of Uprights (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Arbor Made of Poles Supported by One Row of Uprights (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The illustrated grape arbor consists of but one row of uprights. Across the top of each is placed a horizontal support for the roof poles, as shown in Fig. 1, which is carried near its outer end by an inclined brace. The brace should be connected at each end with a toe joint, as shown in Fig. 2. The upper end of the upright is beveled off on both sides, to form a double-splayed joint with the crosspiece. In order to securely bind the roof of the arbor, the long poles, or roof beams, should be notched near each end to fit over the supports. Similar notches in the poles forming the side of the arbor are to fit the uprights, thereby binding them together and preventing toppling over. Each set of long poles connecting two uprights should have the end notches the same distance apart, one pole being used as a gauge. All the joints and notches may be cut with a sharp hatchet.
The illustrated grape arbor has only one row of vertical posts. Each post has a horizontal support on top for the roof poles, as shown in Fig. 1, which is supported near its outer end by an angled brace. The brace should be connected at both ends with a toe joint, as shown in Fig. 2. The upper end of each upright is beveled on both sides to create a double-splayed joint with the crosspiece. To securely attach the roof of the arbor, the long poles, or roof beams, should be notched near each end to fit over the supports. Similar notches in the poles that form the sides of the arbor should fit the uprights, holding them together and preventing them from tipping over. Each set of long poles connecting two uprights should have the end notches evenly spaced, using one pole as a gauge. All the joints and notches can be cut with a sharp hatchet.
In setting the arbor, the uprights should first be assembled complete with braces and roof supports, and placed in the ground a distance apart corresponding to that of the notches on the long poles. The uprights being set, the long poles are placed and fastened with nails.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, Ohio.
In setting up the arbor, the vertical posts should first be fully assembled with braces and roof supports, and placed in the ground at a distance that matches the notches on the long poles. Once the vertical posts are set, the long poles are positioned and secured with nails.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, Ohio.
Forcing Fruit Blossoms for Decorations
Twigs trimmed from the fruit trees rather late in the season had quite large buds on them, and we experimented with them in this way: A large box was filled with wet sand, and the twigs were stuck in it and the box set in the warmest corner of the yard. The buds soon swelled and burst into bloom. We then arranged a smaller box of sand and put the blooming twigs into it, and took it into the house where they remained fresh for several days.—Contributed by A. Louise Culver, Oakland, Cal.
Twigs cut from the fruit trees a bit late in the season had pretty big buds on them, so we tried this: We filled a large box with wet sand and stuck the twigs in it, placing the box in the warmest spot in the yard. The buds quickly swelled and bloomed. Then we set up a smaller box with sand, put the blooming twigs in it, and brought it inside where they stayed fresh for several days.—Contributed by A. Louise Culver, Oakland, Cal.
Corner Cleaner Attached to a Scrubbing Brush

Dirt will accumulate and harden in the corners of a floor and the baseboard just because the end of the scrubbing brush will not enter them. The water gets in with the dirt and leaves a hard crust. This may be easily cleaned out if a metal point is attached to the end of the brush handle, as shown in the illustration. It is used as a scraper to break up the crust and clean it out where the bristles will not enter.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York City.
Dirt will build up and harden in the corners of a floor and along the baseboard simply because the end of the scrubbing brush can’t reach them. Water mixes with the dirt and creates a hard crust. This can be easily cleaned out if you attach a metal point to the end of the brush handle, as shown in the illustration. It works as a scraper to break up the crust and remove it from places where the bristles can’t reach.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York City.
Plotting a Camera Survey
By Harold G. McGee
[The camera records pictures that can be taken in camp or on a vacation trip and kept until more leisure may be had in winter for plotting the ground.—Editor.]
[The camera captures images that can be taken at camp or during a vacation and saved until winter when there's more free time to plan the layout.—Editor.]
A previously measured base triangle with "stations" at each corner is necessary for making a camera survey, just as it is for the plane-table survey. It is preferable to have each of the three sides measured independently, though if one side has been accurately chained, the other two may be less satisfactorily determined by the use of the plane table. If the camera has a fixed focus, it is possible to make an entire survey from the two ends of a single base line; but this method has no check and should be used only when and where the triangle method is impossible. With an adjustable focus, it will rarely give good results.
A previously measured base triangle with "stations" at each corner is necessary for taking a camera survey, just like it is for the plane-table survey. It’s better to measure each of the three sides independently, although if one side is measured accurately, the other two can sometimes be determined less precisely using the plane table. If the camera has a fixed focus, you can complete an entire survey from the two ends of one base line; however, this method lacks a verification check and should only be used when the triangle method isn't feasible. With an adjustable focus, it rarely produces good results.

Two Fine Hair Lines must be Scratched on Each Plate Before It is Used to Plot From, or to Make Pictures from Which the Plotting is Done
Two fine hairlines must be scratched on each plate before it is used to plot from or to create pictures from which the plotting is done.
Once the triangle has been laid out, the fieldwork is very simple. The camera is set up at one station, carefully leveled, and then a series of pictures is taken, each single plate overlapping the last so as to form a panorama of the area to be mapped. The focus of the lens must not be changed during a series, and plotting is facilitated by keeping the focus constant during all the exposures which make up a survey. To secure good depth of focus, a small stop is generally used, since it is necessary to use a tripod to keep the camera level. If contours are to be drawn, the height of the lens above the ground at the station should be measured and recorded. After a series has been taken at each station, the fieldwork is complete. It is an excellent plan to keep a record of the plate numbers, and the order in which and the station from which the exposures were made, so [15] that the 10 or 12 plates which a small survey will comprise may not get hopelessly mixed up. If the camera is turned each time to the right, clockwise, and the plates are numbered A-1, A-2, B-4, etc., indicating by A-1, for example, the leftmost plate taken at Sta. A; by A-2, the plate just to the right of A-1, just as II is to the right of I on the clock dial, and by B-4, the fourth to the right taken at Sta. B, there ought to be no difficulty in identifying the plates after the exact details of the ground are forgotten.
Once the triangle has been set up, the fieldwork is quite straightforward. The camera is positioned at one station, carefully leveled, and then a series of photos is taken, with each shot overlapping the last to create a panorama of the area being mapped. The lens focus must remain unchanged throughout the series, and keeping the focus consistent during all the exposures helps with plotting. To achieve good depth of field, a small aperture is usually used, as it's important to use a tripod to keep the camera steady. If contour lines are to be drawn, the height of the lens above the ground at the station should be measured and noted. After taking a series of photos at each station, the fieldwork is done. It's a smart idea to keep a record of the plate numbers and the sequence of exposures along with the station from which they were taken, so that the 10 to 12 plates for a small survey don’t get completely mixed up. If the camera is rotated each time to the right, clockwise, and the plates are labeled A-1, A-2, B-4, etc., with A-1 representing the leftmost plate taken at Station A; A-2 being the plate immediately to the right of A-1, much like II is to the right of I on a clock face; and B-4 being the fourth plate to the right taken at Station B, then identifying the plates later should be easy even after the specific details of the ground have faded from memory.

Plot of the Ground as It Should Appear After Locating the Objects as They are Shown on the Pictures from Each Point of the Triangle
Plot of the Ground as It Should Appear After Locating the Objects as They are Shown in the Pictures from Each Point of the Triangle
While the pictures are being taken, "flags" of white wood or with white-cloth streamers tied to them must be stuck in the ground or held at the other stations in order that their exact location can be readily and certainly found on the plates. A few distinctive stakes, some with one and some with two or three strips of cloth tied to them, placed at important points on the ground will help immensely in the location of knolls and shore lines.
While the pictures are being taken, "flags" made of white wood or with white cloth streamers tied to them need to be stuck in the ground or held at the other stations so their exact location can be easily and accurately found on the plates. A few distinctive stakes, some with one and some with two or three strips of cloth tied to them, placed at important points on the ground will greatly help in locating hills and shorelines.
In plotting a camera survey, either the original plates, the prints, or enlargements may be used. The plates are the most accurate if a corrected lens has been used; and the enlargements made back through the lens will be best if the images on the plates are distorted. In any case, two fine hair lines must be scratched on each plate before it is used to plot from, or to make the prints from which the plotting is to be done. One of these lines should connect the points at the top and bottom of the plate, and the other, the points at the sides. The vertical line divides the objects which were on the right of the center of the camera from those that were on the left, and the horizontal line connecting the points on the sides separates the objects that were above the camera from those that were below.
When planning a camera survey, you can use the original plates, prints, or enlargements. The plates are the most accurate if a corrected lens has been used, and the best enlargements are created through the lens if the images on the plates are distorted. In any case, two fine hairlines must be scratched on each plate before using it for plotting or making the prints for plotting. One line should connect the points at the top and bottom of the plate, and the other should connect the points on the sides. The vertical line separates the objects that were on the right side of the camera's center from those on the left, while the horizontal line connecting the points on the sides divides the objects that were above the camera from those that were below.
If the survey has been made with a lens that does not cover the plate fully or that has considerable uncorrected aberration, causing distorted shapes near the edges and corners of the picture, results can be materially improved by plotting from enlargements. In making the enlargements, the back of the camera should be removed and the light should be allowed to pass through the plate and the lens in the reverse order and direction of that in which it passed when the negative was made. In this way, the errors which were made by the lens originally will be straightened out, and the resulting enlargements will be free from distortion. To make successful enlargements for surveying work, the easel on which the bromide paper is tacked must be square with the camera, and the paper itself should be flat and smooth. It is just as necessary to keep the easel at a constant distance from the camera during the enlarging [16] as it was to keep the same focus while the original negatives were being made.
If the survey was done with a lens that doesn't fully cover the plate or has significant uncorrected distortion, resulting in warped shapes near the edges and corners of the image, the outcomes can be greatly improved by using enlargements. When creating the enlargements, the back of the camera should be taken off, allowing light to pass through the plate and lens in the opposite direction of how it went when the negative was created. This way, the original lens errors will be corrected, and the resulting enlargements will be free from distortion. To successfully enlarge images for surveying, the easel with the bromide paper must be aligned squarely with the camera, and the paper itself should be flat and smooth. It’s just as important to maintain a consistent distance between the easel and the camera during the enlargement process as it was to keep the same focus when the original negatives were created. [16]

In Plotting a Camera Survey the Base Triangle is First Carefully Laid Out on the Paper to Such a Scale That the Map will be of Desirable Size
In Plotting a Camera Survey, the Base Triangle is first carefully drawn on the paper to a scale that ensures the map is the desired size.
In plotting a camera survey the base triangle is first carefully laid out on the paper to such a scale that the map will be of a desirable size. With the apex of the triangle representing Sta. A, say, as a center, a circle is drawn with a radius as nearly equal as possible to the distance between the optical center of the lens and the plate when the picture was taken. Ordinarily this will be the focal length of the lens; but if the camera was not focused most sharply on an object a great distance off, the radius may be greater. This radius is called the "mapping constant." When an approximate distance for the mapping constant has been determined by measurements on the camera or by knowing the focal length of the lens, the circle, or rather the arc, FG between the two lines to stations B and C, is drawn. The plates taken at Sta. A, and ranged around this circle on the outside and just touching it, will show the landscape exactly as seen from A.
In planning a camera survey, the base triangle is first carefully drawn on the paper to a scale that makes the map the right size. With the top point of the triangle representing Station A at the center, a circle is drawn with a radius as close as possible to the distance between the lens's optical center and the plate when the picture was taken. Usually, this will be the lens's focal length, but if the camera wasn’t focused sharply on a distant object, the radius might be larger. This radius is known as the "mapping constant." Once an approximate distance for the mapping constant has been determined through measurements on the camera or by knowing the lens's focal length, the arc FG between the two lines to stations B and C is drawn. The plates taken at Station A, arranged around this circle on the outside and just touching it, will display the landscape exactly as seen from point A.
In the accompanying diagram showing the method of determining the mapping constant and of locating the traces of the plates, the letters F, G, H, J, P, R and S designate points referring to the true mapping constant, and the construction necessary to locate the traces of the plates. The primed letters F', F'', G', G'', etc., are used to show similar points where the trial mapping constant is either too long or too short. The following description refers equally to the construction necessary with true or trial-mapping constants.
In the diagram provided that illustrates how to determine the mapping constant and locate the traces of the plates, the letters F, G, H, J, P, R, and S represent points related to the actual mapping constant and the construction needed to find the traces of the plates. The marked letters F', F'', G', G'', etc., indicate similar points where the trial mapping constant is either too long or too short. The following description applies equally to the construction required for both the true and trial mapping constants.
Next, a line FH is drawn perpendicular to the line AB of the triangle at the point F where the arc intersects it. On this line is laid off, in the proper direction, a distance equal to the distance on the plate or print from Sta. B to the center vertical line. From this point is drawn a light line, HJ, toward the center of the arc. Where this line crosses the arc, at J, a tangent, KJM, is drawn, which will show the location of the plate A-1 on the drawing. This line is called the trace of the plate. An object which appears both on plate A-1 and A-2 is next picked out and its location on the trace of plate A-1 determined by measuring the distance JN equal to the distance on the plate from the image of the object to the center vertical line. A light line, NO, joining this last-found point with Sta. A, is then drawn. Where this last line crosses the arc, at O, a tangent, OP, to the arc is drawn, and the trace of the plate A-2 is found with the aid of the point which appears on both plates just as plate A-1 was located from the picture of Sta. B. The traces of plates A-3 and A-4 are found in exactly the same way as was that of A-2. If the radius of the arc has been estimated correctly, Sta. C will be found to be exactly on the point where the trace of the plate showing the station crosses the line AC on the paper. If it does not fall on the line AC, which is generally the case, everything must be erased except the original triangle. First, however, a radial line S'G', or S''G'', is drawn from the location of Sta. C on the trace of the plate A-2, 3 or 4, as the case may be, to the arc, and the point of intersection of this line and the arc, G' or G'', is preserved. If this point, G' or G'', is outside the base triangle, the next trial arc should be drawn with a larger mapping constant as a radius, or vice versa. If the second mapping constant is off, find again the point of intersection of the radial line through the new location of Sta. C on the newly located trace of the last plate and the new arc. Join this point and the one found previously, in the same manner, with a straight line, G'G''. The point G where this last drawn line intersects the line AC of the base triangle, will be the point through which the arc, with the correct mapping constant as radius, ought to pass, provided the first two approximations were not too far in error. This third trial ought to make the location of the traces of the plates exactly correct. If, however, the focus of the camera was changed between [17] exposures at one station, the traces of the plates will not all be at an equal distance from the station point, and their location will be an almost impossible task. The traces of the plates taken at stations B and C are found in exactly the same manner as were those for Sta. A. After the traces have all been located, it is a good plan to ink them in lightly and erase the pencil construction lines which would otherwise form an impenetrable maze. The traces located, the difficult and tiresome part of the plotting is over; the landscape, brought indoors photographically, is located as with the plane table; all that remains to be done is to take the sights and find the points on the paper which show where the objects were on the ground.
Next, draw a line FH that’s perpendicular to line AB of the triangle at point F, where the arc intersects it. On this line, measure out a distance equal to the distance on the plate or print from Sta. B to the center vertical line, in the right direction. From this point, draw a light line, HJ, towards the center of the arc. Where this line crosses the arc at J, draw a tangent, KJM, which indicates where plate A-1 will be on the drawing. This line is called the trace of the plate. Next, pick an object that appears on both plate A-1 and A-2, and find its location on the trace of plate A-1 by measuring the distance JN, which matches the distance on the plate from the image of the object to the center vertical line. Draw a light line, NO, connecting this point with Sta. A. Where this last line crosses the arc at O, draw a tangent, OP, to the arc, and determine the trace of plate A-2 using the point that appears on both plates, just as plate A-1 was located from the image of Sta. B. The traces of plates A-3 and A-4 are found in exactly the same way as A-2. If the radius of the arc has been estimated correctly, Sta. C will be located exactly where the trace of the plate showing the station intersects line AC on the paper. If it doesn’t fall on line AC, which is usually the case, erase everything except the original triangle. First, however, draw a radial line S'G', or S''G'', from Sta. C’s location on the trace of plate A-2, either 3 or 4, to the arc, and keep track of the intersection point of this line and the arc, G' or G''. If this point, G' or G'', is outside the base triangle, the next trial arc should be drawn with a larger mapping constant as the radius, or the opposite if it’s too small. If the second mapping constant is off, find the intersection of the radial line through the new location of Sta. C on the newly located trace of the last plate and the new arc. Connect this new point with the previous one using a straight line, G'G''. The point G where this new line intersects line AC of the base triangle will be the point where the arc, with the correct mapping constant as the radius, should pass, provided the first two approximations weren’t too far off. This third trial should make the locations of the traces of the plates accurate. However, if the camera's focus changed between exposures at one station, the traces of the plates will not all be at the same distance from the station point, making their location a challenging task. The traces from stations B and C are located in the same way as those for Sta. A. After all the traces have been found, it’s a good idea to lightly ink them in and erase the pencil construction lines that would otherwise create a confusing maze. With the traces located, the difficult and tedious part of the plotting is done; the landscape, captured photographically indoors, is located as with the plane table; all that’s left to do is take the sights and find the points on the paper that show where the objects were on the ground.

From Each Station the Mapping Constant is Laid Out by the Focal Distance of the Camera or Distance of the Plate from the Lens, and the Location of Traces of the Plates Determined
From each station, the mapping constant is set based on the focal distance of the camera or the distance of the plate from the lens, and the location of the traces of the plates is determined.
This taking the sights is a simple matter. With a pair of dividers, the distance from a given object from the center line of the plate is measured. This distance is laid off on the proper side of the point marking the center line of the trace of the same plate; a radial line is drawn through the trace at the given distance from the center-line point and the station at which the given plate is taken; this is one line of sight to the object. The same object is located from another station in the same way; as on the plane table, the intersection of the two lines to the same object marks the location of the point which represents the object on the map.
Taking in the sights is straightforward. Using a pair of dividers, measure the distance from a specific object to the center line of the plate. This distance is marked on the correct side of the point indicating the center line of the trace on the same plate. A radial line is then drawn through the trace at the specified distance from the center line point and the position where the specific plate is observed; this forms one line of sight to the object. The same object is located from another position using the same method; similar to the plane table, the intersection of the two lines to the same object pinpoint the location of the point that represents the object on the map.
Obtaining elevations for the drawing of contours is a slightly longer process. Contours are lines joining points of equal elevation; they represent successive shore lines, if the area mapped were inundated and the water should rise slowly foot by foot. If the contours are close together, the ground represented has a steep slope, and vice versa. If, on a map, a number of points are of known elevation, it is simply a question of judgment and practice to tell where contour lines go.
Getting elevations for drawing contours takes a bit more time. Contours are lines that connect points of equal elevation; they show what the shoreline would look like if the area were flooded and the water rose gradually, foot by foot. If the contours are close together, the land has a steep slope, and if they're farther apart, the slope is gentler. When you have several points of known elevation on a map, it just comes down to experience and good judgment to figure out where the contour lines should be placed.
Before contours can be drawn the elevations of a considerable number of points must be known. If the elevation of any one of them is known and the difference between that one and any other can be found, determining the elevation of the second point is simply a problem in addition or subtraction. If it be desired to find, for [18] instance, the difference in elevation between Sta. C and the corner of the fence, as shown in the sketch, two solutions are possible, as follows:
Before you can draw contours, you need to know the elevations of a significant number of points. If you know the elevation of any one point and can find the difference between that point and another, figuring out the elevation of the second point is just a matter of adding or subtracting. For example, if you want to find the difference in elevation between Sta. C and the corner of the fence, as shown in the sketch, there are two possible solutions:
First: Perpendicular to the line of sight from Sta. C to the fence corner, two lines are drawn, one at the intersection of the trace of the plate by the line of sight, and one at the point on the paper which shows the location of the fence corner. On the first of these two lines is laid off the distance Y', equal to the distance of the ground at the fence post above or below the horizontal center line on the plate. Through this point, on the first perpendicular on the line of sight, is drawn a line through the Sta. C and extended to an intersection with the second drawn perpendicular. The distance from the corner of the fence, on the paper, to this intersection is the distance Y, the difference in elevation from the center of the camera at Sta. C to the ground at the fence post. This solution is longer and less desirable than the second.
First: Perpendicular to the line of sight from Sta. C to the fence corner, two lines are drawn—one at the intersection of the plate's trace with the line of sight, and the other at the point on the paper representing the location of the fence corner. On the first of these two lines, the distance Y' is marked, which corresponds to the elevation of the ground at the fence post above or below the horizontal center line of the plate. A line is then drawn through this point on the first perpendicular along the line of sight, extending it to intersect with the second drawn perpendicular. The distance from the corner of the fence on the paper to this intersection is the distance Y, which represents the difference in elevation from the center of the camera at Sta. C to the ground at the fence post. This method is longer and not as preferable as the second.
Second: In place of perpendicular lines to the line of sight, the trace of the plate, and a line, through the point representing the object, parallel with the trace, may be used.
Second: Instead of using perpendicular lines to the line of sight, you can use the trace of the plate and a line through the point representing the object that is parallel to the trace.
A datum plane, or reference surface, from which all elevations are measured up to the ground surface must be assumed. The United States Geological Survey uses mean, or average, sea level for the datum in all its topographic sheets. Generally, unless there is a United States Geological Survey "bench mark," a monument of carefully determined elevation referred to sea level, within the limits of the survey, it is better to assume the elevation of some point, as Sta. C, at 100 ft., or greater if necessary to place the datum plane below the ground level at all points within the area to be mapped. Other elevations are figured from the assumed elevation of Sta. C. Allowance must be made for the height of the center of the camera above the ground at Sta. C in computing elevations above Sta. C. All elevations determined for the purpose of drawing contours are ground elevations and not the elevation of the top of objects located on the map. The topographic sheets of the Geological Survey are good examples to follow, in drawing contours. For many purposes, contours are not essential, and the refinements necessary for their drawing may be omitted.
A datum plane, or reference surface, is needed to measure all elevations up to the ground level. The United States Geological Survey uses the mean, or average, sea level as the reference for all its topographic maps. Usually, unless there is a "bench mark" from the United States Geological Survey—a monument with a precisely determined elevation related to sea level—within the survey area, it’s better to assume the elevation of a specific point, like Sta. C, to be 100 ft., or higher if needed, to keep the datum plane below the ground level in all mapped areas. Other elevations are calculated based on the assumed elevation of Sta. C. You must account for the height of the camera's center above the ground at Sta. C when calculating elevations above it. All elevations calculated for drawing contours are based on ground elevations and not the height of objects on the map. The topographic sheets from the Geological Survey serve as great references for drawing contours. For many situations, contours aren’t necessary, and the detailed work required for them can be skipped.
How to Build a Skiff
The following is a description of an easily constructed 12-ft. skiff, suitable for rowing and paddling. This is the type used by many duck hunters, as it may be easily pushed through marshes. It is constructed of 3/4-in. dressed pine, or cypress.
The following is a description of a simple 12-ft skiff that’s great for rowing and paddling. This type is commonly used by duck hunters since it can be easily maneuvered through marshes. It’s made from 3/4-in dressed pine or cypress.

The Skiff is Especially Constructed for Use in Shallow Water and Marshes by Duck Hunters, but with the Addition of a Keel It Makes a Good Craft for Almost Any Water as a Rowboat (Fig. 1)
The skiff is specifically designed for use in shallow water and marshes by duck hunters, but with the addition of a keel, it becomes a great boat for almost any water as a rowboat (Fig. 1).

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
The sides consist of planks, 14 in. [19] wide, but 12-in. planks may be used, the length being 12 ft. 4 in. Two stem pieces are constructed as shown in Fig. 1, and the plank ends are fastened to them with screws. Nail a crosspiece on the plank edges in the exact center, so as to space the planks 34 in. apart, as shown in Fig. 2; then turn it over and nail another crosspiece in the center of the planks for width, and make the spacing of the other edges 40 in. Plane the lower edges so that, in placing a board across them, the surfaces will be level. The floor boards are 6 in. wide and fastened on crosswise, being careful to apply plenty of red lead between all joints and using galvanized nails, 2 in. long.
The sides are made of planks that are 14 in. wide, but you can also use 12-in. planks if needed, and they should be 12 ft. 4 in. long. Two stem pieces are built as shown in Fig. 1, and the ends of the planks are attached to them with screws. Nail a crosspiece to the edges of the planks at the exact center to space them 34 in. apart, as illustrated in Fig. 2; then flip it over and nail another crosspiece in the middle of the planks for the width, spacing the other edges 40 in. apart. Plane the lower edges so that when you lay a board across them, the surfaces will be level. The floorboards are 6 in. wide and are attached crosswise, ensuring you use plenty of red lead between all joints and galvanized nails that are 2 in. long.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
A deck, 18 in. long, is fastened on each end, as shown in Fig. 3. It is made of strips fastened to a crosspiece. The seats, or thwarts, consist of 10-in. boards, and are placed on short strips fastened to the side planks about 5 in. from the bottom. The oarlocks are held in a wedge-shaped piece of wood, having a piece of gas pipe in them for a bushing, the whole being fastened at the upper edge of the side planks with screws, as shown in Fig. 4. The location of these must be determined by the builder.
A deck, 18 inches long, is attached at both ends, as shown in Fig. 3. It's made of strips secured to a crosspiece. The seats, or thwarts, are made from 10-inch boards and are positioned on short strips attached to the side planks about 5 inches from the bottom. The oarlocks are held in a wedge-shaped piece of wood, featuring a piece of gas pipe as a bushing, all fastened at the upper edge of the side planks with screws, as shown in Fig. 4. The builder must determine the placement of these.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
Some calking may be required between the bottom, or floor, boards, if they are not nailed tightly against one another. The calking material may be loosely woven cotton cord, which is well forced into the seams. The first coat of paint should be of red lead mixed with raw linseed oil, and when dry any color may be applied for the second coat.
Some caulking might be needed between the bottom or floorboards if they're not nailed tightly together. The caulking material can be loosely woven cotton cord, which is pressed into the seams. The first coat of paint should be red lead mixed with raw linseed oil, and once it's dry, you can apply any color for the second coat.
While, for use in shallow water, these boats are not built with a keel, one can be attached to prevent the boat from "sliding off" in a side wind or when turning around. When one is attached, it should be 3/4 in. thick, 3 in. wide, and about 8 ft. long.—Contributed by B. Francis Dashiell, Baltimore, Md.
While these boats aren't designed with a keel for shallow water use, you can attach one to stop the boat from "sliding off" in a side wind or when making turns. When attaching one, it should be 3/4 in. thick, 3 in. wide, and about 8 ft. long.—Contributed by B. Francis Dashiell, Baltimore, Md.
An aniline color soluble in alcohol, by adding a little carbolic acid, will hold fast on celluloid.
An alcohol-soluble aniline dye, when mixed with a bit of carbolic acid, will adhere well to celluloid.
Double-Swing Gate with Common Hinge

The Post and Gate are Cut Away Back of the Hinge to Allow the Latter to Swing Back
The post and gate are trimmed back behind the hinge so that the gate can swing open.
Ordinary hinges can be easily bent and so placed on posts that a gate can be swung in either direction. As shown in the illustration, hinges can be made to fit either round or square posts. The gate half of the hinge is fastened in the usual way. The post half is bent and so placed that the hinge pin will approximately be on a line between the centers of the posts. The gate and post should be beveled off to permit a full-open gateway.—Contributed by R. R. Schmitz, Birmingham, Ala.
Ordinary hinges can be easily bent and positioned on posts so that a gate can swing in either direction. As shown in the illustration, hinges can be designed to fit both round and square posts. The gate side of the hinge is attached in the usual manner. The post side is bent and positioned so that the hinge pin is roughly in line with the centers of the posts. The gate and post should be beveled off to allow for a fully open gateway.—Contributed by R. R. Schmitz, Birmingham, Ala.
Testing Out Induction Coils
While winding an induction coil, I found it necessary to test the sections for continuity. Having no galvanometer, I connected a battery and low-resistance telephone receiver in series with the section and battery. The battery and telephone receiver may also be used for testing out the secondary of an induction coil, to determine if it is burnt out.—Contributed by John M. Wells, Moosomin, Can.
While winding an induction coil, I found it necessary to check the sections for continuity. Since I didn't have a galvanometer, I connected a battery and a low-resistance telephone receiver in series with the section and battery. The battery and telephone receiver can also be used to test the secondary of an induction coil to see if it’s burnt out.—Contributed by John M. Wells, Moosomin, Can.
How to Make a Surveyor's Transit
By Bennett Blacklidge

Detail of Parts for the Construction of a Transit Which can be Used, with Fairly Accurate Results, in Doing Amateur Surveying for Railroad Work, Town Sites and the Laying Out of Maps
Detail of Parts for the Construction of a Transit Which can be Used, with Fairly Accurate Results, in Doing Amateur Surveying for Railroad Work, Town Sites and the Laying Out of Maps
A boy who likes to do the things that "grown ups" do can derive considerable pleasure from the making of a transit, which will enable him to start in surveying railroads, laying off town sites, and doing lots of kindred work. It is necessary to have a compass, and one, 1-3/4 in. in diameter, can be purchased at a reasonable price. A hole is bored with an expansive bit into a board, 7/8 in. in thickness, just deep enough to admit the compass snugly, then a circle, A, 4-1/2 in. in diameter, is drawn, having the same center as the compass hole, and the disk is cut out with a compass or scroll saw. A ring, B, is cut in the same manner from the same material, its inside diameter being such that the ring just fits around the disk A, and the outside diameter, 6-3/4 in. Another block, 5-1/2 in. in diameter, is glued to the bottom of the small disk A. This will appear as shown at C. A small hole is bored in the center of the bottom block on the under side to receive the threaded end of the screw on a camera tripod. By careful adjustment the threads in the wood will hold the transit firmly. A plumb bob must be attached exactly in the center of the tripod head. This can be easily done if the head is wood, but in case the top is of metal, the line can be attached to the screw with a double loop, as shown at D, so that the bob will hang centrally. Two standards are made as shown at E, each about 5 in. high, and fastened to the ring B in the positions shown in the drawing of the complete instrument. An arc of a circle is marked on one of the standards, as shown, to designate angles, the markings being laid out with a bevel protractor. The pointer is a hand from an old alarm clock.
A boy who enjoys doing things that "grown-ups" do can find a lot of joy in making a transit, which will allow him to begin surveying railroads, plotting out town sites, and doing plenty of related tasks. He will need a compass, and a 1-3/4 inch diameter one can be bought at a reasonable price. A hole is drilled with a large bit into a board that is 7/8 inch thick, deep enough to fit the compass snugly. Then a circle, A, with a 4-1/2 inch diameter is drawn, centered on the compass hole, and the disk is cut out with a compass or scroll saw. A ring, B, is cut out in the same way from the same material, with an inside diameter just large enough for the ring to fit around disk A, and an outside diameter of 6-3/4 inches. Another block, 5-1/2 inches in diameter, is glued to the bottom of the small disk A. This will look like what is shown at C. A small hole is drilled in the center of the bottom block on the underside to hold the threaded end of a screw from a camera tripod. With careful adjustment, the threads in the wood will keep the transit secure. A plumb bob must be attached exactly in the center of the tripod head. This can easily be done if the head is wooden, but if the top is metal, the line can be attached to the screw with a double loop, as shown at D, to ensure the bob hangs centrally. Two standards are made as shown at E, each about 5 inches high, and attached to the ring B in the positions illustrated in the drawing of the complete instrument. An arc of a circle is marked on one of the standards to indicate angles, with the markings laid out using a bevel protractor. The pointer is a hand from an old alarm clock.
The telescope arrangement consists of a piece of pasteboard tubing, about 1-1/4 in. in diameter, one end being covered with a piece of black paper with a pinhole in the exact center, and the other equipped with "cross hairs." Four small notches are cut in the latter end of the tube, exactly quartering it, and two silk threads as fine as can be obtained, are stretched across in these notches. The tube is fastened to a block of wood, 5 in. wide and 7 in. long, with small tacks and two pieces of fine copper wire. This block is pinioned between the standards with two nails. The hand is secured to the nail in such a position that it will point straight down when the tube is level.
The telescope setup includes a piece of cardboard tubing, about 1-1/4 inches in diameter. One end is covered with black paper that has a pinhole right in the center, while the other end has "cross hairs." Four small notches are cut into the end of the tube, dividing it into quarters, and two silk threads as fine as possible are stretched across these notches. The tube is attached to a piece of wood that is 5 inches wide and 7 inches long using small tacks and two pieces of fine copper wire. This block is secured between the standards with two nails. The hand is fixed to the nail in a way that it points straight down when the tube is level.
The instrument is adjusted in the following manner: It is set up where a lone tree can be seen, about one mile distant, and the center of the cross [21] hairs is carefully set on the tree. Then a very fine wire is stretched across the compass, as shown at F, and while keeping it directly over the center of the compass it is also placed on a direct line pointing to the tree. Very small brass nails, driven in at G and H, serve to fasten it in the position thus found. When this adjustment has been made the telescope can be turned to sight any object, after first placing the instrument so that the needle points to the N on the dial, and a glance at the wire will show the exact direction in which the object is located.
The instrument is set up like this: Position it where a single tree can be seen, about a mile away, and carefully line up the center of the cross [21] hairs with the tree. Next, stretch a very fine wire across the compass, as shown at F, and while keeping it directly over the center of the compass, align it to point straight at the tree. Drive in small brass nails at G and H to secure the wire in place. Once this adjustment is complete, you can use the telescope to focus on any object, making sure the instrument is oriented so the needle points to the N on the dial, and a quick look at the wire will reveal the exact direction of the object.
The instrument is then taken to a level stretch of road and set up, and a stick is placed on end and marked at the height of the telescope. The stick is taken along the road about 200 yd., the telescope sighted on it, and the hand set. This makes the instrument level enough for all practical purposes. The plumb bob is then dropped, a distance of 20 ft. measured from it on the road, and a mark made. The telescope is sighted on this mark, and a mark is made on the standard at the point of the arc, to which the hand points. Another 20 ft. is measured, or 40 ft. from the bob, and another mark made. The telescope is sighted on it, and the location of the hand again marked. This works well up to about 300 ft., then the marks begin to come very close together. This method is used for laying out town sites. The instrument is set up directly over a stake from which to work, and the telescope is turned down until the 20-ft. mark is indicated, when the operator looks through the telescope and tells his helper where to set the stake. Then another is driven at the next point, and so on, until the limit of the instrument is reached.
The instrument is then taken to a flat stretch of road and set up, with a stick placed upright and marked at the height of the telescope. The stick is moved along the road about 200 yards, the telescope aimed at it, and the hand adjusted. This makes the instrument level enough for all practical purposes. The plumb bob is then dropped, and a distance of 20 feet is measured from it on the road, making a mark. The telescope is aimed at this mark, and a mark is made on the standard at the point of the arc where the hand points. Another 20 feet is measured, or 40 feet from the bob, and another mark is made. The telescope is aimed at it, and the position of the hand is marked again. This works well up to about 300 feet; then the marks start to come very close together. This method is used for laying out town sites. The instrument is set up directly over a stake from which to work, and the telescope is pointed down until the 20-foot mark is shown, at which point the operator looks through the telescope and tells their helper where to place the next stake. Then another is driven at the next point, and so on, until the instrument's limit is reached.
When doing railroad surveying several start out together, one with an ax to cut away brush; one to carry pegs; two to measure, or chain, the distance between stakes, and one to do the sighting. In this manner a line can be run that comes very near being perfectly straight for three miles.
When doing railroad surveying, several people start out together: one with an ax to clear away brush, one to carry pegs, two to measure the distance between stakes, and one to do the sighting. This way, a line can be laid out that’s nearly perfectly straight for three miles.
A concrete example of how the transit was used to lay out a map of a ranch will now be given. The start was made on an east and west fence. The instrument was set 5 ft. from the fence at one point, and at the other end of the fence the stick was set at a point 5 ft. from the fence. When the stick was sighted, the wire cut the E and W on the compass, thus showing that the fence was set on a line, due east and west. The distance was measured from the fence to the house, which was 1/4 mile, and this was noted in a book. This operation was repeated on the rear, and the distance found to be 780 ft. while the compass showed the direction to be 4 deg. west of south. The next line ran 427 ft. and 1 deg. east of south. This was kept up all the way around. After these notes had been obtained, it was an easy matter to take a piece of plain paper and strike a line representing north and south and lay off the directions. A bevel protractor was used to find the degrees. The transit was set on the posts of the corrals and this saved the measuring out from the inclosure. The creek was surveyed in the same manner. So many feet south-west, so many feet west, so many feet 5 deg. south of west, and so on, until its length was run.
Here's a practical example of how the transit was used to create a map of a ranch. They started with an east-west fence. The instrument was positioned 5 ft. away from the fence at one end, and at the other end, a stick was placed 5 ft. from the fence. When they lined up the stick, the wire crossed the E and W on the compass, showing that the fence was perfectly aligned due east and west. They measured the distance from the fence to the house, which was 1/4 mile, and recorded this in a logbook. This process was repeated at the back, with the distance found to be 780 ft., and the compass indicated a direction 4 degrees west of south. The next line measured 427 ft. and was 1 degree east of south. This procedure continued all around the property. Once all the notes were collected, it was straightforward to take a sheet of plain paper, draw a line for north and south, and plot the directions accordingly. A bevel protractor was used to measure the angles. The transit was placed on the posts of the corrals, which eliminated the need to measure from inside the enclosure. The creek was surveyed similarly: a specified number of feet southwest, a certain number of feet west, another so many feet 5 degrees south of west, and so on, until its total length was determined.
The transit can also be used for finding distances without measuring. A line from A to B is sighted, and F represents a point 1/2 mile distant, the line from F to G being 100 ft. A line is now sighted from A, through G to C. A person standing at D is directed to move toward the point E and he is stopped as soon as sighted in the telescope. He then measures the distance from D to E. Suppose this distance is 250 ft. As each 100 ft. means 1/2 mile, and the 50 ft., 1/4 mile, the point E is 1-1/4 miles from the transit. This method can be used quite extensively and distances obtained are fairly accurate.
The transit can also be used to find distances without measuring. A line is sighted from A to B, and F represents a point 1/2 mile away, with the line from F to G being 100 ft. Now, a line is sighted from A, through G to C. A person standing at D is instructed to move towards the point E, and he is stopped as soon as he is visible in the telescope. He then measures the distance from D to E. Let's say this distance is 250 ft. Since each 100 ft. equals 1/2 mile and the additional 50 ft. equals 1/4 mile, point E is 1-1/4 miles from the transit. This method can be used quite extensively, and the distances obtained are fairly accurate.
A small whisk broom makes a handy cleaner to brush the caked grease and lint from pulleys and gear wheels where waste and rags are useless.
A small whisk broom is a useful tool for brushing away caked grease and lint from pulleys and gear wheels where waste and rags aren't effective.
To Enlarge or Reduce Plots
Sometimes it is necessary to enlarge or reduce a plot to a different scale. This can be easily and quickly accomplished without resorting to the slow process of protracting the angles and scaling the individual lines.
Sometimes it’s necessary to adjust a plot to a different scale. This can be done easily and quickly without the lengthy process of measuring the angles and scaling the individual lines.

Enlarging and Reducing Plots by Radial Lines from a Common Point Located Properly
Enlarging and Reducing Plots by Radial Lines from a Common Point Positioned Correctly
Take any point, P, and from it draw light pencil lines through each of the corners of the plot. On any one of these lines, as AP, lay off with dividers AC equal to CP. Place a triangle on the line AB and with a straightedge, or another triangle, laid on the line AP, slide the former to the point C, then draw line CD parallel with AB until it intersects the radial line PB. In the same manner draw line DE parallel with BF, and so on, all about the plot. A test of accuracy will be in striking the point C with the last line. If the original plot has a scale of 40 ft. to the inch the reduced plot would be 80 ft. to the inch. If it is required to enlarge the plot to 20 ft. to the inch, make AG equal to AP, and proceed as in the first case, using G as the starting point.
Take any point, P, and draw light pencil lines through each corner of the plot. On one of these lines, like AP, use dividers to mark off AC equal to CP. Place a triangle on the line AB, and with a straightedge or another triangle laid on the line AP, slide the first triangle to point C, then draw line CD parallel to AB until it intersects the radial line PB. Do the same to draw line DE parallel to BF, and continue this all around the plot. You can check for accuracy by making sure the last line hits point C. If the original plot has a scale of 40 ft. to the inch, the reduced plot would be 80 ft. to the inch. If you need to enlarge the plot to 20 ft. to the inch, make AG equal to AP and proceed just like before, starting from point G.
The location of the point P is arbitrary and may be outside of the boundary of the plot or figure to be enlarged or reduced, but should be so located, if possible, that the radial line to any corner does not parallel either of the plot lines to that corner. If the point cannot be so located for all the lines, it may be necessary to scale the lines. A little practice in picking out the best location for the point will give gratifying results.—Contributed by Junius D. McCabe, Pittsburgh, Pa.
The position of point P is flexible and can even be outside the edges of the area being enlarged or reduced. However, it should ideally be placed so that the radial line to any corner doesn’t run parallel to either of the plot lines leading to that corner. If it’s not possible to position the point this way for all lines, you might need to adjust the lines accordingly. With a bit of practice in choosing the best spot for the point, you'll see great results.—Contributed by Junius D. McCabe, Pittsburgh, Pa.
A Lathe Bench
While working at a bench, or foot-power lathe, it is quite convenient to have some sort of a seat to sit on while at work, or between operations. In making such a seat, I used a board, 27 in. long and 12 in. wide, for the top, and two boards, 19 in. long and 12 in. wide, for the supports. These boards were 3/4 in. thick. The supports were squared at the ends and securely fastened to the top with nails, their positions being 3 in. in from the ends of the top board. These were well braced, as shown, and a cross board was placed between them, near the lower ends.
While working at a bench or foot-powered lathe, it's really handy to have a seat to sit on while you work or take breaks. To make such a seat, I used a board that was 27 inches long and 12 inches wide for the top, and two boards that were 19 inches long and 12 inches wide for the supports. These boards were 3/4 inch thick. The supports were squared at the ends and securely attached to the top with nails, positioned 3 inches in from the ends of the top board. These were well braced, as shown, and a cross board was placed between them near the lower ends.

The Bench Provides a Seat for the Worker in Doing Operations on a Small Foot Lathe
The bench offers a place for the worker to perform tasks on a small foot lathe.
The projecting ends of the top were cut out, and a box, 5 in. deep, constructed against the supports. A [23] covering was made to fit in each of the openings in the top board and hinged to the outer edge of the box. The boxes made a convenient place for the tools used in the turning work.—Contributed by Harold R. Harvey, Buhl, Idaho.
The extended ends of the top were cut out, and a box, 5 inches deep, was built against the supports. A [23] cover was created to fit in each opening of the top board and was hinged to the outer edge of the box. The boxes provided a handy storage space for the tools used in the turning work. —Contributed by Harold R. Harvey, Buhl, Idaho.
Cleaning and Polishing Shoes
In using the polishes now on the market for tan shoes, I found that the leather cracked in an unreasonably short time. The following was suggested and tried out with good results. Wash the shoes with castile soap and water by applying the mixture with a dauber. Work up a little lather and then rub dry with a cloth, without rinsing. The leather will be cleaned without becoming dark, and it will not crack. A higher polish may be obtained by using some paste polish in the usual manner.—Contributed by George Bliss, Washington, D. C.
Using the polishes available today for tan shoes, I noticed that the leather cracked in an unreasonably short time. The following method was suggested and test-driven with great results. Clean the shoes with a mixture of castile soap and water using a dauber. Create a little lather, then wipe dry with a cloth without rinsing. The leather will be cleaned without darkening and won't crack. You can achieve a better shine by using some paste polish as you normally would.—Contributed by George Bliss, Washington, D. C.
Shaving Cabinet Mounted on an Adjustable Pedestal
The illustration represents a shaving cabinet mounted on an adjustable pedestal, whose style and size are such that it may easily be moved about or set away without requiring much room. The material required for its construction is as follows:
The illustration shows a shaving cabinet on an adjustable pedestal, designed to be easily moved or stored without taking up much space. The materials needed to build it are as follows:
1 | framed mirror, 8 by 10 in. |
1 | square-head bolt and wing nut, 1/2 by 4 in. |
2 | cabinet sides, 1/2 by 7 by 15 in. |
2 | partitions and shelf, 1/2 by 6 by 6 in. |
1 | cabinet top, 1/2 by 7 by 10-1/2 in. |
1 | cabinet bottom, 1/2 by 6 by 10-1/2 in. |
2 | cabinet backs and doors, 1/2 by 6-1/2 by 10-1/2 in. |
4 | cabinet moldings, 1 by 4 by 4 in. |
1 | cabinet support, 2 by 2 by 26 in. |
4 | pedestal moldings, 1 by 1 by 6 in. |
4 | pedestal frames, 1 by 3 by 36 in. |
1 | base, 2 by 12 by 12 in. |
Screws, nails, and varnish. |

The Mirror and Cabinet are Mounted on a Pedestal That can be Moved as Desired
The mirror and cabinet are placed on a pedestal that can be moved as needed.
The sidepieces of the cabinet are extended at one corner, thereby forming the supports for the mirror. The door fits in between the sides and may be attached either by hinges or two wood screws, one on each side, holes being bored in the sides forming a loose fit for the screw so they can freely turn with the door. The pedestal consists of a 4-in. square box resting on the base block, and secured in place by means of molding strips. The sliding support for the cabinet consists of a 2-in. square piece secured to the bottom of the cabinet by means of molding, and provided with a slot so the support can freely slide over the clamp bolt, which fastens it in place by clamping it against the pedestal. If it is desired to conceal the head of the bolt, a recess should be made in the pedestal frame for it, as shown, so the support will freely slide over it. Before assembling the pedestal it will be necessary to drill a hole in the front side in line with the recess of the back side, and insert the bolt. If this precaution is not taken, it will not be possible to insert the bolt, unless a hole be made for the head either through the back side or front side.—Contributed by D. Toppan, Watervliet, N. Y.
The sides of the cabinet are extended at one corner, creating supports for the mirror. The door fits between the sides and can be attached either with hinges or two wood screws, one on each side. Holes are drilled in the sides to make a loose fit for the screws, allowing them to turn freely with the door. The pedestal is a 4-inch square box sitting on the base block and secured in place with molding strips. The sliding support for the cabinet is a 2-inch square piece attached to the bottom of the cabinet with molding, designed with a slot so the support can slide over the clamp bolt that holds it in place against the pedestal. If you want to hide the bolt head, a recess should be created in the pedestal frame for it, as shown, so the support can slide over it easily. Before you assemble the pedestal, you need to drill a hole in the front side aligned with the recess on the back side and insert the bolt. If you don’t take this step, you won’t be able to insert the bolt unless you make a hole for the head through either the back or front side. —Contributed by D. Toppan, Watervliet, N. Y.
Four-Passenger Coasting Bobsled
By R. H. Allen

Coasting Is One of the Best Sports a Boy Enjoys during Winter, and a Sled of Luxury Is Something to Be Proud of among Others on a Hill or Toboggan Slide
Coasting is one of the best sports for a boy to enjoy during winter, and having a top-notch sled is something to take pride in among others on a hill or toboggan slide.
Coaster bobs usually have about the same form of construction, and only slight changes from the ordinary are made to satisfy the builder. The one shown has some distinctive features which make it a sled of luxury, and the builder will pride himself in the making. A list of the materials required is given on the opposite page. Any wood may be used for the sled, except for the runners, which should be made of ash.
Coaster bobs generally follow a similar construction style, with only minor adjustments needed to meet the builder's preferences. The one shown here has some unique features that classify it as a luxury sled, and the builder will take pride in its creation. A list of the materials needed is provided on the opposite page. Any type of wood can be used for the sled, except for the runners, which should be made of ash.
Shape the runners all alike by cutting one out and using it as a pattern to make the others. After cutting them to the proper shape, a groove is formed on the under edge to admit the curve of a 5/8-in. round iron rod about 1/4 in. deep. The iron rods are then shaped to fit over the runner in the groove and extend up the back part of the runner and over the top at the front end. The extensions should be flattened so that two holes can be drilled in them for two wood screws at each end. If the builder does not have the necessary equipment for flattening these ends, a local blacksmith can do it at a nominal price. After the irons are fitted, they are fastened in place.
Cut the runners to be the same by cutting one out and using it as a pattern to make the others. After cutting them into the right shape, create a groove along the underside to fit a 5/8-inch round iron rod about 1/4 inch deep. Next, shape the iron rods to fit into the groove on the runner and extend up the back and over the front end. The extensions should be flattened so that you can drill two holes in them for wood screws at each end. If you don’t have the tools to flatten these ends, a local blacksmith can do it for a reasonable price. Once the iron rods are shaped, secure them in place.
The top edges of the runners are notched for the crosspieces so that the top surfaces of these pieces will come flush with the upper edges of the runners. The location of these pieces is not essential, but should be near the ends of the runners, and the notches of each pair of runners should coincide. [25] When the notches are cut, fit in the pieces snugly, and fasten them with long, slim wood screws. Small metal braces are then fastened to the runners and crosspiece on the inside, to stiffen the joint.
The top edges of the runners are notched for the crosspieces, so the top surfaces of these pieces will align with the upper edges of the runners. The placement of these pieces isn’t critical, but they should be positioned near the ends of the runners, and the notches of each pair of runners should match up. [25] Once the notches are cut, fit the pieces snugly, and secure them with long, thin wood screws. Then attach small metal braces to the inside of the runners and crosspiece to reinforce the joint.

Details Showing the Method of Rear-Sled Oscillation, the Bracing, and the Steering Wheel
Details Showing the Method of Rear-Sled Oscillation, the Bracing, and the Steering Wheel
As the rear sled must oscillate some, means must be provided for this tilting motion while at the same time preventing sidewise turning. The construction used for this purpose is a hinged joint. The heavy 2 by 5-in. crosspiece is cut sloping on the width so that it remains 2 in. thick at one edge and tapers down to a feather edge at the opposite side. This makes a wedge-shaped piece, to which surface the three large hinges are attached. The piece is then solidly fastened to the upper edges of the runners that are to be used for the rear sled, and so located that the center of the piece will be 8 in. from the front end of the runners.
As the back sled needs to rock a bit, we have to allow for this tilting motion while also stopping it from turning sideways. The design used for this is a hinged joint. The heavy 2 by 5-inch crosspiece is cut at an angle along its width so that it stays 2 inches thick at one edge and tapers down to a thin edge on the other side. This creates a wedge-shaped piece, to which the three large hinges are attached. The piece is then securely fastened to the upper edges of the runners intended for the back sled, positioned so that the center of the piece is 8 inches from the front end of the runners.
The supporting crosspiece on the front sled is fastened on top of the runners, at a place where its center will be 11 in. from the front end of the runners.
The support crosspiece on the front sled is secured on top of the runners, positioned so that its center is 11 in. from the front end of the runners.
The top board is prepared by making both ends rounding and planing the surfaces smooth. On the under side, the two crosspieces are placed, which should have two 1/2-in. holes bored through the width of each, near the ends, to receive the eyebolts. They are placed, one with its center 12 in. from the end to be used for the rear, and the other with its center 8 in. from the front end, and securely fastened with screws. The shore is placed in the center of the board, and wires are run over it connecting the eyebolts. The eyebolts are then drawn up tightly to make the wire taut over the shore. This will prevent the long board from sagging.
The top board is prepared by rounding both ends and smoothing the surfaces. On the underside, two crosspieces are attached, each with two 1/2-inch holes drilled near the ends to hold the eyebolts. One of the crosspieces is positioned with its center 12 inches from the end that will be at the back, and the other with its center 8 inches from the front end, secured tightly with screws. The shore is placed in the center of the board, and wires are run over it connecting the eyebolts. The eyebolts are then tightened to make the wire taut over the shore. This will keep the long board from sagging.
LIST OF MATERIALS
MATERIALS LIST
1 | top. 6-1/2 ft. long, 16 in. wide, and 1-1/4 in. thick. |
4 | runners. 22 in, long, 4 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. |
4 | crosspieces, 16 in. long, 3 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. |
3 | pieces, 16 in, long, 5 in. wide, and 2 in. thick. |
1 | piece, 16 in. long, 5 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. |
1 | shore, 16 in. long, 3 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. |
4 | seat backs. 12 in. long, 16 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. |
1 | dowel. 3 ft. long, and 1 in. in diameter. |
4 | rods. 5/8 in. in diameter, and 30 in. long. |
4 | eyebolts, 1/2 in. by 6 in. long. |
3 | hinges, 5-in. strap. |
8 | hinges, 3-in. strap. |
On the upper side of the board and [26] beginning at the rear end, the backs are fastened at intervals of 18 in. They are first prepared by rounding the corners on the ends used for the tops, and the opposite ends are cut slightly on an angle to give the back a slant. They are then fastened with the small hinges to the top board. On the edges of the top board, 1-in. holes are bored about 1 in. deep, and pins driven for foot rests. These are located 18 in. apart, beginning about 5 in. from the front end. The dowel is used for the pins, which are made 4 in. long.
On the top side of the board and [26] starting from the back end, the backs are attached at intervals of 18 inches. They are initially shaped by rounding the corners on the ends meant for the tops, and the opposite ends are cut at a slight angle to create a slant on the back. They are then secured with small hinges to the top board. On the edges of the top board, 1-inch holes are drilled about 1 inch deep, and pins are inserted for footrests. These are spaced 18 inches apart, starting about 5 inches from the front end. The pins are made from dowels, which are cut to 4 inches long.

The Top Board is Well Braced on the Under Side and Fitted with Four Backs on Top to Make It a Luxurious Riding Sled, and the Runners are Provided with Metal Shoes for Speed
The top board is well-supported underneath and equipped with four backs on top to create a comfortable riding sled, and the runners have metal shoes for added speed.
The steering device consists of a broom handle, cut to 18 in. in length, with one end fastened in a hole bored centrally in the 5-in. crosspiece of the front sled. A hole is bored in the top board through the center of the crosspiece fastened to the under side for the steering post. The broomstick is run through this hole after first placing two metal washers on it. After running the stick through, a collar is fastened to it just above the top board, so that the top cannot be raised away from the sled. At the upper end of the broomstick a steering wheel is attached, made from a nail-keg hoop. A piece of wood is fastened across its diameter, and the hoop is covered with a piece of garden hose and wrapped with twine. In the center of the crosspiece, a hole is bored to snugly fit on the broom handle, which is then fastened with screws.
The steering device is made from a broom handle, trimmed to 18 inches long, with one end secured in a hole drilled into the center of the 5-inch crosspiece of the front sled. There’s a hole drilled in the top board through the middle of the crosspiece attached to the underside for the steering post. The broomstick is passed through this hole after placing two metal washers on it. Once the stick is through, a collar is attached just above the top board, preventing the top from being lifted away from the sled. At the top end of the broomstick, a steering wheel made from a nail keg hoop is secured. A piece of wood is attached across its diameter, and the hoop is covered with a section of garden hose and wrapped with twine. In the center of the crosspiece, a hole is drilled to fit snugly onto the broom handle, which is then secured with screws.
The rear sled is fastened to the top board with screws through the extending wings of the hinges and into the crosspiece. Holes are bored in the front ends of all runners, and a chain or rope is attached in them, the loop end of the rear one being attached to the under side of the top board, and the one in the front used for drawing the sled.
The back sled is attached to the top board with screws that go through the extended wings of the hinges and into the crosspiece. Holes are drilled in the front ends of all the runners, and a chain or rope is connected to them. The loop end of the back one is secured to the underside of the top board, while the one in the front is used for pulling the sled.
To Prevent Drill from Catching As It Passes through Metal
The regular slope of a drill will cause the cutting edge to catch as it breaks through the metal on the opposite side of the piece being drilled. But if a twist drill is ground more flat like a flat drill, it will not "grab" into the metal as it passes through.—Contributed by James H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
The standard angle of a drill can make the cutting edge snag when it breaks through the metal on the other side of the piece being drilled. However, if a twist drill is ground to be flatter like a flat drill, it won't "grab" into the metal as it goes through.—Contributed by James H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
An Ice Boat and Catamaran
By Robert K. Patterson
This combination is produced by using the regular type of ice boat and substituting boats for the runners, to make the catamaran.
This combination is created by using the standard type of ice boat and replacing the runners with boats to form the catamaran.
In constructing the ice boat, use two poles, or timbers, one 16 ft. and the other 10-1/2 ft. long, crossed at a point 2-1/2 ft. from one end of the longer timber. The crossed pieces are firmly braced with wires, as shown.
In building the ice boat, use two poles or beams: one should be 16 ft long and the other 10-1/2 ft long. Cross them at a point 2-1/2 ft from one end of the longer beam. The crossed pieces are securely braced with wires, as illustrated.
The mast, which should be about 12 ft. long, is set into a mortise cut in the long timber, 15 in. from the front end, and is further stabilized by wires, as shown. A jib boom, about 6 ft. long, as well as a main boom, which is 11-1/2 ft. long, are hung on the mast in the usual manner.
The mast, which should be about 12 ft. long, is placed into a notch cut in the long timber, 15 in. from the front end, and is further secured by wires, as shown. A jib boom, about 6 ft. long, and a main boom, which is 11-1/2 ft. long, are attached to the mast in the usual way.

The Ice Boat Provides an Ideal Outing in Winter Where There Is a Body of Water Large Enough for Sailing
The Ice Boat Offers a Perfect Winter Adventure Where There's a Big Enough Stretch of Water for Sailing
The front runners consist of band-iron strips, 18 in. long, 3 in. wide, and 1/8 in. thick, with one edge ground like the edge of a skate, and the ends rounding, which are fastened with bolts to the sides of wood pieces, 18 in. long, 6 in. wide, and 2 in. thick, allowing the ground edge to project about 1 inch.
The front runners are made of iron strips that are 18 inches long, 3 inches wide, and 1/8 inch thick, with one edge sharpened like a skate blade and the ends rounded. These are secured with bolts to wooden pieces that are 18 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 2 inches thick, allowing the sharpened edge to extend about 1 inch.
When the ice-boat frame is made of poles, the runners are attached to a piece of wood, 12 in. long, shaped as shown and fastened at right angles with bolts running through the shouldered part diagonally. This makes a surface on which the pole end rests and where it is securely fastened with bolts. If squared timbers are used, the runners can be fastened directly to them. The rear, or guiding, runner is fastened between two pieces of wood, so that its edge projects; then it is clamped in a bicycle fork, which should be cut down so that about 3 in. of the forks remain. A hole is bored through the rear end of the long pole to receive the fork head, the upper end of which is supplied with a lever. The lever is attached to the fork head by [29] boring a hole through the lever end at a slight angle to fit the head, allowing sufficient end to be slotted, whereupon a hole is bored through the width of the handle, and a bolt inserted, to act as a clamp.
When the ice boat frame is made from poles, the runners are attached to a piece of wood that is 12 inches long, shaped as shown, and secured at right angles with bolts that go through the shouldered part diagonally. This creates a surface for the pole end to rest on and where it is securely fastened with bolts. If squared timbers are used, the runners can be directly fastened to them. The rear, or guiding, runner is secured between two pieces of wood so that its edge sticks out; then it’s clamped in a bicycle fork, which should be shortened to leave about 3 inches of the forks. A hole is drilled through the rear end of the long pole to accommodate the fork head, which has a lever attached at the upper end. The lever connects to the fork head by boring a hole through the lever end at a slight angle to fit the head, allowing enough length to be slotted, after which a hole is drilled through the width of the handle, and a bolt is inserted to serve as a clamp.

The Ice-Boat Details, Showing Construction with Straight Poles Having Detachable Runners So the Boats can be Supplied in Their Stead to Make a Sailing Catamaran for Use in Summer
The Ice-Boat Details, Showing Construction with Straight Poles Having Detachable Runners So the Boats can be Supplied in Their Stead to Make a Sailing Catamaran for Use in Summer
A board is fastened on two crosspieces mortised in the upper part of the pole, for a place to sit on when driving the boat. The sail can be constructed of any good material to the dimensions given.
A board is attached to two crosspieces fixed in the upper part of the pole, providing a seat for driving the boat. The sail can be made from any durable material to the specified dimensions.
To rig up the ice boat for use as a catamaran, place a pole across the stern, the length of the pole being equal to the one used on the front part of the ice boat. Two water-tight boats are constructed, 16 ft. long, 12 in. wide, and 10 in. deep at the center. To make these two boats procure six boards, 16 ft. long, 10 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. Three boards are used to make each boat. Bend one board so that it will be in an arc of a circle, then nail on the two side boards, after which the edges of the sides are cut away to the shape of the bent board. The runners are removed from the ice boat, and the boats fastened to the pole ends. A rudder is attached in the place of the rear, or guiding, runner. The tops of the boats, or floats, can be covered and made water-tight.
To set up the ice boat to function as a catamaran, place a pole across the back, matching the length of the pole used at the front of the ice boat. Construct two watertight boats, each measuring 16 feet long, 12 inches wide, and 10 inches deep in the center. To build these two boats, you'll need six boards, each 16 feet long, 10 inches wide, and 1 inch thick. Use three boards for each boat. Bend one board into an arc, then attach the two side boards, trimming the edges of the sides to match the shape of the bent board. Remove the runners from the ice boat and secure the two boats to the ends of the pole. Attach a rudder in place of the rear guiding runner. Finally, the tops of the boats or floats can be covered and sealed to make them watertight.
Mind-Reading Effect with Cards
Five cards are shown, and some one person is asked to think of two cards in the lot, after which the performer places the cards behind his back and removes any two cards, then shows the remaining three and asks if the two cards in mind have been removed. The answer is always yes, as it cannot be otherwise.
Five cards are displayed, and someone is asked to think of two cards among them. The performer then puts the cards behind their back and takes out any two cards, showing the remaining three. They then ask if the two cards that were thought of have been removed. The answer is always yes, as it can’t be anything else.
To prepare the cards, take any 10 cards from the pack and paste the back of one card to another, making five double cards. Removing any two cards behind the performer's back reduces the number of cards to three, and when these are turned over they will not have the same faces so that the ones first seen cannot be shown the second time even though all five cards were turned over and shown.
To prepare the cards, take any 10 cards from the pack and stick the back of one card to another, making five double cards. Removing any two cards behind the performer’s back brings the number of cards down to three, and when these are flipped over, they won’t have the same faces, so the ones first seen can’t be shown a second time, even though all five cards were turned over and displayed.
An Air Pencil to Make Embossed Letters
The device illustrated is for making embossed letters on show cards, signs, post cards, etc. A small bulb, such as used on cameras, is procured, also the spout from a small oilcan. The bulb is fastened to the spout as shown.
The device shown is for creating embossed letters on display cards, signs, postcards, etc. You’ll need a small bulb, like the ones used for cameras, and the spout from a small oil can. The bulb is attached to the spout as demonstrated.
The material for use in the pencil is quick-drying mucilage thickened with flake white. If some special color is desired, tint the mixture with aniline. Fill the spout with the mixture and attach the bulb. Squeeze the bulb gently while forming the letters, then dust over with bronze, and allow to dry.
The material used in the pencil is quick-drying glue thickened with flake white. If you want a specific color, tint the mixture with aniline. Fill the spout with the mixture and attach the bulb. Gently squeeze the bulb while forming the letters, then dust with bronze and let it dry.

The Oilcan Spout Is the Reservoir to Hold the Paint, and the Bulb Produces the Air Pressure
The oilcan spout is the container for the paint, and the bulb creates the air pressure.
An Endless Dish or Floor Mop
A good way to use up cord that collects about the house, is to make an endless dish or floor mop of it. Procure a thin board that will make a good length and wind the cord around it, then remove it from the board and tie the bunch together in the center.
A great way to use up leftover cord lying around the house is to make an endless dish or floor mop out of it. Get a thin board that's a good length and wrap the cord around it. Then, take it off the board and tie the bundle together in the center.
Combination Tie Rack and Collar Holder
An unusual though simple tie rack can be made by supporting the tie bar in the center. By this arrangement the ties can be placed on it from either end, thus avoiding the tedious threading through, required on the ordinary rack supported at each end. Collars may be hung on a peg placed above the tie bar. The pieces can be glued together and a good finish given in the usual way. The rack can be hung up by two screw eyes. The material required consists of four pieces, dimensioned 5/8 by 5 by 8 in., 3/8 by 7/8 by 7-1/2 in., 3/8 by 5/8 by 3-1/8 in., and 7/8 by 7/8 by 2 in. respectively.—Contributed by Arthur C. Vener, Dallas, Texas.
An unusual yet simple tie rack can be created by supporting the tie bar in the center. This setup allows the ties to be placed on it from either end, avoiding the tedious threading through that is required on a standard rack supported at both ends. Collars can be hung on a peg placed above the tie bar. The pieces can be glued together and finished nicely in the usual way. The rack can be mounted using two screw eyes. The materials needed consist of four pieces, sized 5/8 by 5 by 8 in., 3/8 by 7/8 by 7-1/2 in., 3/8 by 5/8 by 3-1/8 in., and 7/8 by 7/8 by 2 in., respectively.—Contributed by Arthur C. Vener, Dallas, Texas.

Collar and Tie Rack with Open-End Hangers So That the Articles can be Slipped On Easily without being Passed behind a Bar as Is Usually the Case
Collar and Tie Rack with Open-End Hangers So That the Articles can be Slipped On Easily without being Passed Behind a Bar as Is Usually the Case
Skates Made of Wood
Skates that will take the place of the usual steel-runner kind and which will prevent spraining of the ankles, can be made of a few pieces of 1/2-in. boards.
Skates that will replace the usual steel-runner type and will help prevent ankle sprains can be made from a few pieces of 1/2-inch boards.
Four runners are cut out, 2 in. wide at the back and 1-1/2 in. wide at the front, the length to be 2 in. longer than the shoe. The top edges of a pair of runners are then nailed to the under side of a board 4 in. wide, at its edges.
Four runners are shaped, 2 inches wide at the back and 1.5 inches wide at the front, with the length being 2 inches longer than the shoe. The top edges of a pair of runners are then nailed to the underside of a 4-inch wide board at its edges.
A piece of board, or block, 2 in. wide is fastened between the runners at the rear, and one 1 in. wide, in front. Two bolts are run through holes bored in the runners, one just back of the front board, or block, and the other in front of the rear one.
A 2-inch wide board or block is attached between the runners at the back, and a 1-inch wide one is attached at the front. Two bolts are inserted through holes drilled in the runners, one just behind the front board or block, and the other in front of the rear one.
Four triangular pieces are fastened, one on each corner, so that the heel and toe of the shoe will fit between them, and, if desired, a crosspiece can be nailed in front of the heel. Straps are attached to the sides for attaching the skate to the shoe. Both skates are made alike.—Contributed by F. E. Kennar, Hennessey, Okla.
Four triangular pieces are secured, one on each corner, so that the heel and toe of the shoe can fit between them, and if you want, a crosspiece can be nailed in front of the heel. Straps are attached to the sides for securing the skate to the shoe. Both skates are identical.—Contributed by F. E. Kennar, Hennessey, Okla.

Skates Made of Wood to Take the Place of the Steel-Runner Kind and Prevent Sprained Ankles
Skates Made of Wood to Replace the Steel-Runner Type and Prevent Sprained Ankles
The best paint for paper roofing is asphaltum varnish.
The best paint for paper roofing is asphaltum varnish.
An Ice Glider
By Mildred E. Thomas
The enthusiastic pushmobilist need not put aside his hobby during the winter, as an amusement device for use on ice, which will surpass the very best pushmobile, can be easily made as shown in the illustration.
The eager pushmobilist doesn’t have to give up his hobby during winter, as an ice amusement device, which will outdo the best pushmobile, can be easily made as illustrated.

The Glider is Pushed over the Ice Similarly to a Pushmobile, and the Speed That can be Attained is Much Greater
The Glider is Pushed over the Ice Just like a Pushmobile, the Speed that can be Reached is Much Greater
Similar to an ice yacht, only a great deal smaller, the ice glider will require three ordinary skates, two of which are fastened to the ends of the front crosspiece, so that their blades will stand at an angle of about 30 deg. with their edges outward. To get this angle, tapering blocks are fastened to the crosspiece ends, as shown. The skates are then fastened to these blocks.
Similar to an ice yacht, but much smaller, the ice glider will need three regular skates. Two of the skates are attached to the ends of the front crosspiece, so their blades are at about a 30-degree angle with their edges facing outward. To achieve this angle, tapered blocks are attached to the ends of the crosspiece, as shown. The skates are then secured to these blocks.

Detail of the Parts for the Construction of the Ice Glider, or Pushmobile
Detail of the Parts for Building the Ice Glider, or Pushmobile
The crosspiece is 30 in. long and about 8 in. wide. In the center of this piece an upright is constructed, 26 in. high. The edges of the front crosspiece are cut on a slant so that a piece nailed to its front and back edge will stand sloping toward the rear. A handle, 24 in. long, is fastened between the two uprights at the upper end. The rear part is made of a board, 8 in. wide and 40 in. long. The remaining skate is fastened in a perfectly straight position on the rear end. The skates may be attached with screws run through holes drilled in the top plates, or with straps. The front end of the rear board has a hole for a bolt to attach it to the center of the front crosspiece, so that the latter will turn to guide the glider.
The crosspiece is 30 inches long and about 8 inches wide. In the center of this piece, there’s an upright constructed, 26 inches high. The edges of the front crosspiece are cut at an angle so that a piece nailed to its front and back edge will slope toward the rear. A handle, 24 inches long, is attached between the two uprights at the upper end. The rear part is made from a board, 8 inches wide and 40 inches long. The remaining skate is fastened in a perfectly straight position at the rear end. The skates can be attached with screws going through holes drilled in the top plates or with straps. The front end of the rear board has a hole for a bolt to connect it to the center of the front crosspiece, allowing the latter to turn and guide the glider.
A pusher is prepared from a block of wood, into which nails are driven with their ends projecting on the under side. The block is strapped to one shoe, as shown.
A pusher is made from a block of wood, with nails driven into it so that their ends stick out on the underside. The block is attached to one shoe, as shown.

The Block of Wood with Projecting Nails to Fasten on the Shoe That Does the Pushing
The Block of Wood with Projecting Nails to Attach to the Shoe That Does the Pushing
The glider is used in the same manner as a pushmobile.
The glider is used just like a pushmobile.
The pusher can be made in another way by using sole leather instead of the block. Small slots are cut in the sides for the straps. Nails are driven [32] through the leather so that the points project. Either kind of pusher is especially adapted for the pushmobile to prevent wear on the shoe.
The pusher can be made differently by using sole leather instead of a block. Small slots are cut into the sides for the straps. Nails are driven through the leather so that the points stick out. Either type of pusher is particularly suitable for the pushmobile to prevent wear on the shoe.
Prony Brake for Testing Small Motors
The ordinary prony brake is not, as a rule, sensitive enough to make an accurate test on small motors, such as those used in driving sewing machines, washing machines, vacuum cleaners, etc. The arrangement shown in the accompanying sketch has been used for this purpose with good results and was very accurate. The operation of the brake is exceedingly simple.
The regular prony brake typically isn't sensitive enough to provide accurate tests for small motors, like those found in sewing machines, washing machines, vacuum cleaners, and so on. The setup shown in the accompanying sketch has been effectively used for this purpose and yielded very accurate results. The operation of the brake is extremely straightforward.

Prony Brake Used in Connection with a Small Balance to Find the Horsepower
Prony Brake Used with a Small Balance to Determine Horsepower
A pulley without a crown face is attached to the shaft of the motor, which is fastened to the top of a table or bench, and a balance mounted directly over the pulley. The support for the balance should be a narrow strip, which in turn is supported on two upright pieces, as shown. A light rope is put under the pulley, and the ends are looped over the platforms of the balance so that it does not interfere with the operation of the balance. The ends of the rope should be vertical and parallel. The piece upon which the balance rests is raised by inserting wedges, thus increasing the tension in the rope. The resulting friction of the rope on the pulley increases the load.
A pulley without a crown face is attached to the motor shaft, which is secured to the top of a table or workbench, with a balance mounted directly above the pulley. The support for the balance should be a narrow strip, which is then supported by two upright pieces, as shown. A light rope is placed under the pulley, and the ends are looped over the balance platforms so that it doesn’t interfere with the balance’s operation. The ends of the rope should be vertical and parallel. The piece that the balance rests on is raised by inserting wedges, which increases the tension in the rope. The friction of the rope on the pulley adds to the load.
If the motor is running in the direction indicated by the arrow on the pulley, the tension in the left-hand end of the rope will be greater than in the right-hand end and a weight must be placed on the right-hand platform of the balance. When the weight W is adjusted so that the two pointers on the platforms are exactly opposite each other, the value of the weight W, in pounds, will represent the difference in pull, in pounds, between A and B. If the value of the weight W is known and also the speed of the machine when the weight was determined, the horsepower output can be computed by means of the following equation:
If the motor is running in the direction shown by the arrow on the pulley, the tension on the left side of the rope will be greater than on the right side, and a weight needs to be placed on the right platform of the balance. When the weight W is adjusted so that the two pointers on the platforms are perfectly aligned, the value of weight W, in pounds, will indicate the difference in pull, in pounds, between A and B. If the value of weight W is known, along with the speed of the machine when the weight was measured, the horsepower output can be calculated using the following equation:
6.2832 × L × W × R.P.M. | |
Hp. = | |
33,000 × 12 |
In this equation, L is the distance in inches from the center of the pulley to the center of the rope. Two ordinary spring balances may be substituted for the beam balance and the difference in their readings taken for the value W. For best results, the tension in the slack end of the rope should be as small as possible, and it may be necessary to wrap the rope one or more times completely around the pulley.
In this equation, L is the distance in inches from the center of the pulley to the center of the rope. You can use two regular spring scales instead of the beam balance and take the difference in their measurements for the value W. For the best results, the tension in the loose end of the rope should be minimized, and it may be necessary to wrap the rope completely around the pulley one or more times.
A Mystic Fortune Teller
Fortune telling by means of weights striking glasses or bottles is quite mysterious if controlled in a manner that cannot be seen by the audience. The performer can arrange two strikes for "no," and three for "yes" to answer questions. Any kind of bottles, glass, or cups may be used. In the [33] bottles the pendulum can be suspended from the cork, and in the glasses from small tripods set on the table.
Fortune telling using weights, striking glasses, or bottles is quite mysterious when it's done in a way that the audience can’t see. The performer can set up two strikes for "no" and three for "yes" to respond to questions. Any types of bottles, glasses, or cups can be used. In the [33] bottles, the pendulum can be hung from the cork, and in the glasses, it can be supported by small tripods placed on the table.

The Rocking of the Table is Caused by the Pressure of Air in the Bulb under the Foot, the Movement Causing the Pendulum to Swing and Strike the Glass
The rocking of the table is caused by the air pressure in the bulb under the foot, which makes the pendulum swing and hit the glass.
The secret of the trick is as follows: A rubber tube with a bulb attached to each end is placed under a rug, one bulb being located under one table leg and the other near the chair of the performer set at some distance from the table where it can be pressed with the foot. Some one selects a pendulum; the performer gazes intently at it, and presses the bulb under his foot lightly at first; then, by watching the swaying of the pendulum selected, he will know when to give the second impulse, and continue until the weight strikes the glass. As the pendulums are of different lengths they must necessarily swing at different rates per second. The impulses must be given at the proper time or else the pendulum will be retarded instead of increased in amplitude. A table with four legs is best to use, and the leg diagonally opposite that with the bulb beneath it must not touch the carpet or floor. This can be arranged by placing pieces of cardboard under the other two legs.—Contributed by James J. McIntyre.
The secret of the trick is as follows: A rubber tube with a bulb attached at each end is placed under a rug, with one bulb positioned under one table leg and the other near the performer’s chair, set a short distance from the table where it can be pressed with their foot. Someone selects a pendulum; the performer focuses intently on it and lightly presses the bulb under their foot at first. Then, by observing the swaying of the chosen pendulum, they will know when to give the second push and continue until the weight hits the glass. Since the pendulums are of different lengths, they will naturally swing at different rates. The pushes must be given at the right moment; otherwise, the pendulum will slow down instead of swinging wider. It’s best to use a table with four legs, and the leg diagonally opposite the one with the bulb beneath it must not touch the carpet or floor. This can be done by placing pieces of cardboard under the other two legs.—Contributed by James J. McIntyre.
Holding Prints in a Liquid-Filled Tray

Push Pins on the Under Side of the Board Raise It and Provide a Space for the Prints in the Liquid
Push pins on the underside of the board lift it up and create space for the prints in the liquid.
After having considerable trouble in keeping my paper prints in the hypo fixing bath from curling, which would force the edges out of the liquid, I found the plan here illustrated a success. I procured a piece of wood, the size of a postcard, and stuck four glass push pins into one surface, one at each corner, and fastened a handle to the center of the upper side. The papers are first placed in the bath, then the board is set over them with the pins down. This holds the prints under the liquid but does not press them tightly together.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
After struggling to keep my paper prints in the hypo fixing bath from curling and letting the edges pop out of the liquid, I found that the plan illustrated here was effective. I got a piece of wood the size of a postcard and pushed four glass push pins into one side, one at each corner, and attached a handle to the center of the top side. First, I place the papers in the bath, then set the board on top of them with the pins facing down. This keeps the prints submerged in the liquid but doesn’t press them tightly together.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
A piece of an old gunny sack will polish brass work very nicely.
A scrap of an old burlap sack will polish brass really well.
Cellar-Door Holder

A cellar door that opened up against a wall required a catch of some kind to keep it open at times. As I did not want a catch to show on the wall, I devised a holder as shown. Three pieces of wood were nailed to the under side of the door in such positions that they formed a recess in which a fourth piece, 2 in. wide and 1 in. thick, would slide endways. A knob was attached to the upper end of the slide, which served the double purpose of a handle and a stop for the slide. The manner of using the holder is clearly shown.—Contributed by H. T. Smith, Topeka, Kansas.
A cellar door that opened against a wall needed some kind of catch to keep it open sometimes. Since I didn't want a catch visible on the wall, I created a holder as shown. I nailed three pieces of wood to the underside of the door in such a way that they created a recess for a fourth piece, 2 inches wide and 1 inch thick, to slide in sideways. A knob was attached to the top end of the slide, which served both as a handle and a stopper for the slide. The way to use the holder is clearly shown.—Contributed by H. T. Smith, Topeka, Kansas.
An Emergency Pencil Compass

The need of a compass when none was at hand caused me to quickly devise a substitute for the work. A piece of stiff wire, about the length of the pencil, was procured, and several turns were made around the pencil, as shown. The lower straight end was filed to a point. The wire can be bent to obtain the radius distance.—Contributed by Preston Ware, Rome, Ga.
The lack of a compass when I needed one made me quickly come up with a substitute for the task. I got a piece of stiff wire, about the length of a pencil, and wrapped it several times around the pencil, as shown. The lower straight end was sharpened to a point. The wire can be bent to get the desired radius distance. —Contributed by Preston Ware, Rome, Ga.
A very effective dip for brass and copper articles, that will leave a clean and bright finish, is 2 qt. of aqua fortis, 1 gal. of sulphuric acid, 1 pt. of water and a pinch of salt.
A very effective dip for brass and copper items that will leave a clean and shiny finish is 2 quarts of aqua fortis, 1 gallon of sulfuric acid, 1 pint of water, and a pinch of salt.
Renewing Carbon Paper
When carbon paper has been used several times, the preparation becomes almost worn off on some parts, while other parts of the paper are as good as new. The process of renewing is very simple and it can be done by anyone without special apparatus. All that is necessary is to hold the paper in front of a fire or over a radiator a few seconds. The heat will cause the preparation to dissolve and spread over the paper, so that when it is dry the paper will have a new coating. This can be repeated, and in some cases will double the life of the carbon paper.—Contributed by Chester M. Kearney, Danville, Quebec.
When carbon paper has been used multiple times, some areas become almost worn out while other parts still look brand new. Renewing it is very simple and anyone can do it without any special equipment. All you need to do is hold the paper in front of a fire or over a radiator for a few seconds. The heat will cause the coating to dissolve and spread across the paper, so that once it's dry, the paper will have a fresh coating. This can be done repeatedly, and in some cases, it can double the lifespan of the carbon paper.—Contributed by Chester M. Kearney, Danville, Quebec.
How to Clinch a Finishing Nail

A wire or finishing nail may be clinched as nicely as a wrought nail, if a nail punch or piece of iron is placed along the side of it, as shown at A, and the nail hammered into an arched form, as at B. The punch or rod is then withdrawn and the arch driven into the wood.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A wire or finish nail can be clinched just as well as a wrought nail if you place a nail punch or a piece of iron next to it, like shown at A, and then hammer the nail into an arched shape, like at B. After that, take out the punch or rod, and the arch will be pressed into the wood.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
To Prevent Washbasin Bottom from Wearing Out
The ears from some sirup buckets were removed and three of them soldered, at equal distances apart, on the bottom of the washbasin near the outside edge of the lower part. These prevented the wear from coming on the bottom of the basin, and it lasted several times as long as ordinarily.—Contributed by A. A. Ashley, Blanket, Texas.
The ears from some syrup buckets were taken off and three of them were welded, spaced evenly apart, to the bottom of the washbasin near the outer edge of the lower section. These helped prevent wear on the bottom of the basin, making it last much longer than usual.—Contributed by A. A. Ashley, Blanket, Texas.
To curl feathers, heat slightly before a fire, then stroke with something like the back of a case knife.
To curl feathers, warm them a bit in front of a fire, then smooth them with something like the back of a butter knife.
Snowshoes: How to Make and Use Them
By Stillman Taylor
Part I—Shapes of Snowshoes
To the inventive mind of the North American Indian we owe the snowshoe, and its conception was doubtless brought about through that prolific source of invention—necessity. The first models were crude web-footed affairs, but improvements in model and manner of filling the frames were gradually added until the perfected and graceful shoe of the present was finally reached. The first snowshoes were made by the Indians, and the Indians of Maine and Canada continue to fashion the finest models today.
To the creative minds of Native Americans, we owe the snowshoe, which was likely invented because of necessity. The earliest versions were basic, web-footed designs, but over time, enhancements in the shape and how the frames were filled were gradually introduced until we arrived at the refined and elegant snowshoe we have today. The first snowshoes were crafted by Indigenous peoples, and the Indigenous communities in Maine and Canada still create the best models today.
The snowshoe is a necessity for the sportsman and trapper whose pleasure or business leads him out in the open during the winter season, when roads and trails are heavily blanketed by a deep fall of powdery snow. But the use of the web shoe is by no means confined to the dweller in the wilderness, since the charm of wintry wood and plain beckons many lovers of the outdoors to participate in this invigorating sport, and snowshoe tramps are fast growing in popularity in and about our cities and towns.
The snowshoe is essential for anyone who enjoys outdoor activities or trapping during the winter, when roads and paths are covered by a thick layer of soft snow. However, using snowshoes isn't just for people living in remote areas; the beauty of winter landscapes attracts many outdoor enthusiasts to join in this refreshing activity. Snowshoe hikes are becoming increasingly popular in our cities and towns.
All the modern snowshoes are constructed upon practically the same general lines, although the types of frames differ considerably in size as well as in shape, and the filling of hide is often woven in many varied and intricate patterns. The frame or bow—usually made of ash in order to get strength with light weight—is bent in many shapes, but the one shown in the diagram is a typical general-purpose shoe, and may be called standard. The frame is held in shape by means of two wooden cross braces, neatly mortised into the frame. These braces are spaced some 15 or 16 in. apart, and so divide the shoe into three sections, known as the toe, center, and heel. The filling is woven into a lanyard, which is a light strip of hide firmly laced to the frame through a double row of holes drilled in the wood. The center filling is woven of heavy strands of rawhide, in a fairly coarse mesh, because this part of the shoe must bear the weight of the body and the brunt of wear. The end fillers for toe and heel are woven of lighter strands of hide, and the mesh is, of course, smaller.
All modern snowshoes are built on pretty much the same basic design, even though the types of frames vary widely in size and shape, and the hide filling is often woven into many different and complex patterns. The frame or bow—usually made of ash for strength and lightness—is shaped in various ways, but the one shown in the diagram is a typical all-purpose shoe and can be considered standard. The frame is held together by two wooden cross braces, which are neatly fitted into the frame. These braces are spaced about 15 or 16 inches apart, dividing the shoe into three sections: the toe, center, and heel. The filling is woven into a lanyard, a light strip of hide that is securely laced to the frame through a double row of holes drilled in the wood. The center filling uses heavy strands of rawhide in a relatively coarse mesh because this part of the shoe needs to support the body’s weight and take the most wear. The end fillers for the toe and heel use lighter strands of hide, and the mesh is smaller, of course.

The Frame of a Snowshoe in Its Usual Construction, Showing the Crosspieces with Their Laced Fillings of Hide and the Different Parts Named, for a Ready Reference
The frame of a snowshoe in its typical construction, showing the crosspieces with their laced hide fillings and the various parts labeled for quick reference.
As may be noted by referring to the drawing, a center opening or "toe hole" is provided, and as the greater strain on the filling lies directly under the ball of the foot, the shoe is reinforced at this point by the "toe cord" running across, and the "toe-cord stays," which are tied in on each side of the toe hole—one end being fastened to the toe cord and the other lashed over the wooden cross bar of the frame. These reinforcing cords are formed of several strands of hide, the [36] stays being again wound with finer strands.
As you can see in the drawing, there’s a center opening or "toe hole," and since the most pressure on the filling is right under the ball of the foot, the shoe is strengthened at this point by the "toe cord" running across it, along with the "toe-cord stays," which are attached on each side of the toe hole—one end is secured to the toe cord and the other is tied over the wooden crossbar of the frame. These reinforcing cords are made from several strands of hide, with the [36] stays wrapped with finer strands.
To prevent slipping and to secure a good foothold while walking, the manner of attaching the foot to the shoe is of importance, and this is done by making use of a toe strap, which will allow the toe to push down through the toe opening as the heel of the foot is lifted in the act of walking. A second strap, or thong, leading from the top around the foot, above the curve of the heel, is needed to lend additional support in lifting the snowshoe, to effect the easy shambling stride characteristic of the snowshoer.
To avoid slipping and ensure a solid grip while walking, how the foot attaches to the shoe is important. This is achieved with a toe strap that allows the toe to push down through the toe opening as the heel lifts while walking. A second strap, or thong, goes from the top around the foot, above the curve of the heel, providing extra support when lifting the snowshoe, making it easier to shuffle along, which is typical for snowshoers.
There are, of course, a great number of models or styles, some one style being popular in one locality, while an altogether different style is preferred in another part of the country. The most representative types are well shown in the illustrations, and a brief description will point out their practical advantages, because each model possesses certain merits—one model being designed for fast traveling in the open, another better adapted for brush travel, while others are more convenient for use in a hilly country where much climbing is done, and so on.
There are definitely a lot of models or styles, with one style being popular in one area while a completely different style is favored in another part of the country. The most representative types are clearly illustrated, and a quick description will highlight their practical benefits, since each model has specific advantages—one model is made for fast travel in open spaces, another is better for rough terrain, while others are more suitable for hilly areas where there’s a lot of climbing, and so on.

A: Snowshoe Experts Regard This as an Extreme Style, for It is Long and Narrow
A: Snowshoe experts consider this an extreme style because it is long and narrow.
Style A is regarded by snowshoe experts as an extreme style, for it is long and narrow. It is designed for fast traveling over smooth and level country, and over loose, powdery snow. This style is much used by the Cree Indians, and is usually made 12 in. wide by 60 in. long, with a deeply upcurved toe. It is a good shoe for cross-country work, but is somewhat difficult to manage on broken trails, when the snow is packed, and also affords rather slippery footing when crossing ice. Owing to the stout construction of the frame and reinforcement needed to retain the high, curved toe, style A is more difficult to manage than the more conservative models, and its stiffness of frame makes it more fatiguing to wear, while its use is a decided handicap in mountainous districts, because a curved toe always makes hill climbing more difficult.
Style A is considered an extreme snowshoe style by experts because it’s long and narrow. It’s built for quick movement over smooth, flat terrain and loose, powdery snow. The Cree Indians commonly use this style, which typically measures 12 inches wide by 60 inches long, featuring a deeply upturned toe. It's great for cross-country activities but can be tricky to handle on uneven trails when the snow is packed down, and it can be quite slippery on ice. Due to its sturdy construction and the reinforcement required to support the high, curved toe, Style A is harder to manage compared to more traditional models. Its rigid frame can make it tiring to wear, and it poses a real challenge in mountainous areas since the curved toe makes climbing hills more difficult.

B: This Snowshoe is Considered the Ordinary Eastern Model and One Best Adapted for All-Around Use
B: This snowshoe is considered the standard Eastern model and is best suited for general use.
Style B may be considered the ordinary eastern model, and a common style best adapted for all-around use. It is a neat and gracefully designed frame, about 12 in. wide and 42 in. long, and is usually made with a slightly upcurving toe, about 2 in. turn at the toe being correct. When made by the Indians of Maine, this model is fashioned with a rather heavy heel, which is an advantage for fast walking, while it increases the difficulty in quick turning.
Style B can be seen as the standard eastern model and a versatile style that's great for general use. It's a neat and elegantly designed frame, roughly 12 inches wide and 42 inches long, typically featuring a slightly upturned toe, with about a 2-inch curve being ideal. When crafted by the Native Americans of Maine, this model comes with a somewhat heavy heel, which is helpful for fast walking but makes quick turning more challenging.

C: The Style Illustrated Here is Splendid for General Purposes and is a Favorite among Hunters and Woodsmen
C: The Style Illustrated Here is Great for General Purposes and is a Favorite among Hunters and Woodsmen
Style C is a favorite model among the hunters and woodsmen of New England. This is a splendid style for general purposes in this section of the country, since the full, round toe keeps the toe up near the surface, and lets the heel cut down more than the narrow-toe models. Style C is an easy shoe to wear, and while not so fast as the long, narrow frame, its full shape is more convenient for use in the woods. It is usually made with about 1 to 1-1/2-in. turn at the toe.
Style C is a popular choice among hunters and woodsmen in New England. It’s a great style for general use in this area since the full, round toe keeps your toes closer to the surface, allowing the heel to dig in more than narrow-toe models. Style C is comfortable to wear, and while it may not be as fast as the long, narrow designs, its fuller shape is more practical for outdoor activities. It’s typically made with about a 1 to 1-1/2-inch turn at the toe.

D: This is the Familiar "Bear's-Paw" Model, Originated by the Northeastern Trapper for Use on Short Tramps and in Brush
D: This is the familiar "Bear's-Paw" model, created by the Northeastern Trapper for short hikes and in brush.
Style D is the familiar "bear's paw," a model originating with the northeastern trapper. This model is well adapted for short tramps in the brush, and having a flat toe, is likewise a good shoe for mountain climbing. For tramping about in thick brush, a short, full shoe enables one to take a shorter stride and turn more quickly, but it is a slow shoe for straight-ahead traveling.
Style D is the familiar "bear's paw," a design that comes from northeastern trappers. This model is great for short hikes in the brush, and with its flat toe, it’s also a good shoe for mountain climbing. For moving around in dense brush, a short, full shoe helps you take shorter steps and turn more quickly, but it's not the best option for straight-line walking.
When purchasing a pair of snowshoes, some few important considerations should be kept in mind, and the size and model will depend upon the man to some extent, since a large, heavy man will require a larger snowshoe than would suffice for a person of lighter weight. Height also enters into the choice, and while a small person can travel faster and with less fatigue when equipped with a proportionately small shoe, a tall man will naturally pick out a larger-sized snowshoe for his use. For a country where deep snows prevail, larger sizes are best, but in localities where the snow packs solidly and there is considerable ice, and in mountainous districts, [37] or for rough-country traveling, the smaller sizes will give more satisfaction and prove more durable also. For a wet-snow locality, the center filling should be strung in rather coarse mesh, while for soft, powdery snow, a finer mesh will be the logical choice.
When buying a pair of snowshoes, there are a few important things to consider. The size and model will depend on the person to some extent since a large, heavy person will need a bigger snowshoe than someone lighter. Height also plays a role in the choice; a shorter person can move faster and with less fatigue using a proportionately smaller shoe, while a taller person will naturally choose a larger snowshoe. In areas with deep snow, larger sizes are better, but in places where the snow is hard-packed and there’s a lot of ice, or in mountainous regions, [37] or for traveling in rough terrain, smaller sizes will be more satisfactory and also more durable. For locations with wet snow, the center filling should have a coarser mesh, while for soft, powdery snow, a finer mesh is the better option.
There are snowshoes and snowshoes, and while there are fine models regularly stocked by a few of the better sporting-goods firms, there is likewise a deal of poorly made snowshoes on the market. It is well to pay a fair price and secure a dependable handmade article, for the cheaper snowshoes—often filled with seine twine and the cheapest hide (commonly known in the trade as "gut")—will warp and twist in the frame, and the shoddy filling will soon become loosened up and "bag" after a little use. The best snowshoes that the writer is acquainted with are made by the Indians, and the filling is ordinarily made of neat's hide; cowhide for the center filling, and calfskin for the toe and heel. A first-class pair of snowshoes may be had for about $6 to $7.50, and when possible to do so, it is best to have them made to order. This plan is, of course, necessary in case one wishes to incorporate any little wrinkles of his own into their making, or desires a flatter toe, lighter heel, or a different mesh from the usual stock models.
There are snowshoes and snowshoes, and while some great models are regularly available at a few top sporting goods stores, there are also many poorly made snowshoes out there. It's wise to pay a fair price and get a reliable handmade pair, because the cheaper snowshoes—often stuffed with seine twine and the lowest quality hide (commonly referred to in the industry as "gut")—will warp and bend in the frame, and the cheap filling will quickly come loose and "bag" after a little use. The best snowshoes I've come across are made by Native Americans, typically filled with neat's hide; cowhide for the center filling, and calfskin for the toe and heel. A high-quality pair can be purchased for about $6 to $7.50, and when possible, it’s best to have them custom made. This is especially important if you want to add your own personal touches, like a flatter toe, lighter heel, or a different mesh than the standard models.
Where but one pair of snowshoes is purchased, style B will probably prove the best selection, and should be ordered with the flat toe, or a turn not greater than 1 in. The frame may be in either one or two pieces, depending upon the size of the shoe and the ideas of the Indian maker, but it is well to specify white ash for the frames in the order. No Indian maker would be guilty of using screws or other metal fastenings, but many of the cheap and poorly fashioned snowshoes are fastened at the heel with screws, thus making this a decidedly weak point, since the wood is quite certain to split after a little rough service. In contrast to the poor workmanship of these low-priced snowshoes, the Indian-made article is fashioned from sound and properly seasoned wood; the cross bars are snugly fitted by mortising to the frame; the filling is tightly woven, and the heel is properly fastened by lacing with a rawhide [38] it is a good idea to select a filling of good heavy weight and with a firmly woven and open mesh, say, about 3/4 in. The toe and heel sections will, of course, be of finer-cut hide and smaller mesh, and it is wise to avoid those shoes employing seine twine for the end filling. Some factory-made snowshoes are given a coat or two of varnish, but this, while serving to make them partly waterproof, makes them rather slippery when crossing logs and ice. Most woodsmen prefer to leave both frame and filling in their natural condition.
Where only one pair of snowshoes is bought, style B will likely be the best choice and should be ordered with a flat toe or a curve no greater than 1 inch. The frame can be made in either one or two pieces, depending on the size of the shoe and the preferences of the Indigenous maker, but it's advisable to request white ash for the frames in the order. No Indigenous maker would use screws or other metal fasteners, but many cheap and poorly made snowshoes are secured at the heel with screws, which creates a weak point, as the wood will likely split after some rough use. In contrast to the poor craftsmanship of these low-cost snowshoes, the ones made by Indigenous artisans are crafted from solid and properly seasoned wood; the crossbars are tightly fitted to the frame using mortise joints; the filling is closely woven, and the heel is securely attached by lacing with rawhide. [38] It's a good idea to choose a filling that is heavy and has a well-woven, open mesh, about 3/4 inch. The toe and heel sections will naturally be made of finer-cut hide and a smaller mesh, and it's wise to avoid snowshoes that use seine twine for the end filling. Some factory-made snowshoes come with one or two coats of varnish, but while this helps make them somewhat waterproof, it also makes them quite slippery when crossing logs and ice. Most woodsmen prefer to keep both the frame and filling in their natural state.
The Indian-made snowshoe is always thong. However, Indian makers are likely to make the toe small and leave the wood to form a rather heavy heel. Some few woodsmen and sportsmen may prefer this model, but the majority favor a fuller toe and a lighter heel for general use, because the regulation Indian model, cutting down at toe and heel equally deep, increases the difficulty of easy traveling over soft snow, although it is a good shoe when used over broken trails.
The Indian-made snowshoe typically has a thong design. However, Indian makers often create a smaller toe while leaving the wood to form a quite heavy heel. A few woodsmen and athletes might prefer this style, but most people prefer a fuller toe and a lighter heel for everyday use. This is because the standard Indian model, which has an equal cut at the toe and heel, makes it harder to travel easily over soft snow, even though it works well on rough trails.
When buying snowshoes at the store, see that the frames are stoutly and well made, and for all-around use, [39] provided with a generously large toe hole, so that ample foot covering may be used. This point is generally overlooked in the machine-made product, and the toe cords are also frequently roughly formed, thus chafing the feet and making them sore. These details may or may not prove a handicap for short tramps near town, but for long trips through the woods, they are important considerations.
When buying snowshoes at the store, make sure the frames are sturdy and well-made, and for general use, [39] make sure they have a generously large toe hole, so you can wear thicker footwear. This detail is often overlooked in mass-produced options, and the toe cords are frequently poorly made, leading to discomfort and sore feet. These aspects may not matter much for short walks near town, but they are crucial for longer trips in the woods.
The Indian manner of tying the snowshoe to the foot by means of a single twisted and knotted thong is a good method of attachment, in that, if the thong is properly adjusted to the requisite snugness in the first place, the shoes may be quickly removed by a simple twist of the ankle. A better fastening is secured by using a fairly wide (3/4 in.) toe strap and a long thong. The toe strap is placed over the toes, immediately over the ball of the foot, and secured against slipping by weaving the ends in and out between the meshes of the filling until it reaches the frame on either side. This grips the toe strap firmly and does away with the necessity of tying a knot. A narrow thong, about 4 ft. long, is now doubled, the center placed just [40] above the heel of the foot, and the ends passed under the toe cord, just outside of the toe-cord stays on each side. The thong is then brought up and across the toes, one end passing over and the other under the toe strap. Each end of the thong is now looped around the crossed thong, on either side, and then carried back over the back of the heel and knotted with a common square or reef knot. Calfskin makes a good flexible foot binding, or a suitable strip of folded cloth or canvas may be used.
The Indian way of attaching a snowshoe to the foot using a single twisted and knotted thong is an effective method. If the thong is adjusted to the right snugness initially, the shoes can be easily taken off with a simple twist of the ankle. A better attachment can be achieved using a fairly wide (3/4 in.) toe strap and a long thong. The toe strap is placed over the toes, right above the ball of the foot, and secured in place by weaving the ends in and out between the mesh until it reaches the frame on each side. This holds the toe strap firmly and eliminates the need for tying a knot. A narrow thong, about 4 ft. long, is then doubled, with the center positioned just above the heel of the foot, and the ends passed under the toe cord, just outside of the stays on each side. The thong is then brought up and across the toes, with one end going over and the other under the toe strap. Each end of the thong is looped around the crossed thong on either side and then taken back over the heel, then knotted with a common square or reef knot. Calfskin makes for good flexible foot binding, or a suitable strip of folded cloth or canvas can be used.
The regulation snowshoe harness, consisting of a leather stirrup for the toe and an instep and heel strap, will be found more comfortable than the thong, and when once adjusted snugly to the foot, the shoes may be quickly taken off and put on again by pushing the heel strap down, when the foot may be slipped out of the toe stirrup.
The standard snowshoe harness, made up of a leather toe stirrup and straps for the instep and heel, is way more comfortable than the thong version. Once it’s adjusted to fit your foot snugly, you can easily take the shoes off and put them back on again by pushing down on the heel strap, allowing your foot to slide out of the toe stirrup.
The use of heavy leather shoes is of course undesirable, and the only correct footwear for snowshoeing is a pair of high-cut moccasins, cut roomy enough to allow one or more pairs of heavy woolen stockings to be worn. The heavy and long German socks, extending halfway to the knee, drawn on over the trouser legs, are by far the most comfortable for cold-weather wear. The feet, thus shod, will not only be warm in the coldest weather, but the free use of the toes is not interfered with. Leather shoes are cold and stiff, and the heavy soles and heels, chafing against the snowshoes, will soon ruin the filling.
Wearing heavy leather shoes is definitely not a good idea, and the best footwear for snowshoeing is a pair of high-top moccasins that are roomy enough to fit one or more pairs of thick wool socks. The long German socks that go halfway up the knee, pulled over the pant legs, are the most comfortable for cold weather. With this type of footwear, your feet will stay warm even in the coldest conditions, and your toes will have enough room to move freely. Leather shoes are cold and stiff, and their heavy soles and heels can rub against the snowshoes, quickly damaging the insulation.
Soldering and Riveting
By John D. Adams
There are two simple processes that every experimenter should master: soldering and riveting. The large soldering copper will find only a very restricted use with the amateur on account not only of its clumsiness, but of the fact that it requires a fire, which is often impracticable to obtain. The experimenter should therefore construct a small alcohol lamp, which, after a little experience, will reveal the following advantages: It may be brought into instant use at any place; it will make a more perfect connection; with a small blowpipe places may be reached that are entirely inaccessible to the large iron; several small pieces may be set in position and soldered without disturbing them, which is quite impossible with the large iron.
There are two basic skills that every experimenter should learn: soldering and riveting. The large soldering copper has limited use for amateurs, not only because it’s bulky but also because it needs a fire, which can be hard to get. Therefore, the experimenter should make a small alcohol lamp, which, with a bit of practice, will show these benefits: it's easy to use anywhere; it creates a better connection; with a small blowpipe, you can access places that are completely unreachable with the large iron; and you can position and solder several small pieces without disturbing them, which isn't possible with the large iron.

(alcohol lamp)
(alcohol lamp)
To make such a lamp, procure a small wide-mouthed bottle so that very little alcohol will be necessary and the lamp may be tipped at any desired angle. A short piece of seamless brass tubing should be procured, or, preferably, one of those capped brass cylinders for holding pencil leads, the button of which should be sawn off and the cap used to keep the alcohol from evaporating. A good, sound cork is next in order, and in cutting the central hole, use the brass tube, which should be sharpened around the lower end. Proceed with a rotary motion, and a clean core will be removed. If an ordinary lamp wick is not at hand, soft cotton string may be bundled up as a substitute. Such a lamp is safe, odorless and will not blacken the work in the least as in the case of kerosene or gasoline.
To make this lamp, get a small wide-mouthed bottle so that you won't need much alcohol, and the lamp can be tilted at any angle. You should also get a short piece of seamless brass tubing or, preferably, one of those capped brass cylinders used for holding pencil leads; just saw off the button and use the cap to prevent the alcohol from evaporating. Next, you'll need a good cork, and when cutting the central hole, use the brass tube sharpened at the bottom. Move it in a rotary motion to remove a clean core. If you don't have a regular lamp wick, you can bundle up some soft cotton string as a substitute. This type of lamp is safe, odorless, and won't blacken your work at all, unlike kerosene or gasoline.
There are many good soldering fluxes on the market, but that obtained by dissolving as much scrap of zinc as possible in muriatic acid will solder practically everything that may be necessary, provided, of course, the surfaces are filed or scraped bright. Wire [41] solder is usually the most convenient, as small pieces can be readily cut off and placed directly on the work where required. A small blowpipe is often a valuable adjunct, as it makes possible a long, narrow flame that may be directed in almost any direction.
There are many great soldering fluxes available today, but one that works well is made by dissolving as much scrap zinc as possible in muriatic acid. It can solder just about anything you need, as long as the surfaces are filed or scraped clean. Wire [41] solder is generally the easiest to use since you can easily cut off small pieces and place them directly where you need them. A small blowpipe can also be really helpful, as it allows you to create a long, narrow flame that can be directed in almost any direction.

A Small Torch Made of a Penholder is Handy to Use in Soldering Electrical Apparatus
A small torch made from a pen holder is useful for soldering electrical devices.
Where numerous small connections are to be made, as is often the case with electrical apparatus, the small torch illustrated will be found very convenient. It is simply an old penholder with the wood portion shortened somewhat and the metal end filed off square and cleaned out. This is then filled with wicking, and it is only necessary to dip it in alcohol in order to soak up enough to solder an ordinary connection.
Where many small connections need to be made, like with electrical devices, the small torch shown here is really handy. It’s just an old penholder with the wooden part shortened a bit, and the metal end squared off and cleaned out. This is then filled with wick, and you only need to dip it in alcohol to absorb enough for soldering a typical connection.
The second simple process, of which many fail to appreciate the usefulness in experimental work, is that of riveting—particularly when done on a small scale. Very often the material in hand is tempered steel and cannot, therefore, be soldered to advantage, or it may be a case where subsequent heating makes a heat-proof connection imperative. Then, again, the joint may require the combined strength of both solder and rivet.
The second straightforward process, which many overlook in experimental work, is riveting—especially when done on a small scale. Often, the material being used is tempered steel, which can't be effectively soldered, or there might be a situation where post-heating means a heat-proof connection is essential. Additionally, the joint might need the combined strength of both solder and rivet.
When properly set, the strength of the ordinary brass pin, when used as a rivet, is quite great. Should the work require a particularly soft rivet, it is only necessary to hold the pin for a moment in the flame of a match. A somewhat larger and stronger rivet may be made by softening and cutting to the required length the small flat-headed nails used in making cigar boxes. The ordinary shingle nail is also of a suitable shape after the burrs have been filed off under the head.
When set correctly, the strength of a regular brass pin used as a rivet is quite significant. If the job needs a softer rivet, just hold the pin in the flame of a match for a moment. You can create a slightly larger and stronger rivet by softening and cutting down to the needed length the small flat-headed nails that are used for cigar boxes. A regular shingle nail also has the right shape after filing off the burrs under the head.

In setting these small rivets, it is absolutely necessary that they closely fit the holes, as at A, otherwise the result will be as indicated at B in the sketch. Be careful not to leave too great a length for rounding over on the metal. This extra length should approximately equal the diameter of the rivet and must be filed flat on the top before riveting. In case of pins, it will be found easier to cut them off to the proper length after they are inserted. Use the smallest hammer available, striking many light blows rather than a few heavy ones.
When setting these small rivets, it's essential that they fit the holes closely, like at A; otherwise, the outcome will be as shown at B in the sketch. Make sure not to leave too much length for rounding over on the metal. This extra length should be about the same as the rivet's diameter and must be filed flat on top before riveting. For pins, it's easier to cut them off to the right length after they’ve been inserted. Use the smallest hammer you have, hitting with many light blows instead of a few heavy ones.

A Few Joints Where Rivets are Used to Hold the Parts Solidly Together
A Few Joints Where Rivets Are Used to Secure the Parts Firmly Together
A Whistle
Cut a circular piece of tin any convenient size, preferably 3 in. in diameter, and bend it across the diameter so that it will be in a narrow U-shape. Then drill or punch a hole through both parts as shown. Place it in the mouth with the open edges out, being sure to press the lips on the metal tightly on both upper and lower pieces outside of the holes and to rest the tongue against the edge of the tin, even with the holes, and blow.
Cut a circular piece of tin to a convenient size, ideally 3 inches in diameter, and bend it across the diameter to create a narrow U-shape. Then drill or punch a hole through both parts as shown. Place it in your mouth with the open edges facing out, making sure to press your lips tightly against the metal on both the upper and lower sections outside of the holes, and rest your tongue against the edge of the tin, aligned with the holes, and blow.

The result of the first attempt may not be a sound, but with a little practice any familiar tune may be whistled.—Contributed by Chas. C. Bradley, W. Toledo, O.
The outcome of the first try might not be great, but with some practice, you can whistle any tune you know. —Contributed by Chas. C. Bradley, W. Toledo, O.
Card-and-Coin Trick
If a card is balanced on the finger and a coin placed on the card directly over the finger, one would not think that the card could be flipped out leaving the coin on the finger end. This is easily accomplished, if care is taken to snap the card sharply and squarely.—Contributed by R. Neland, Minneapolis, Minn.
If you balance a card on your finger and put a coin on the card right above your finger, you wouldn’t expect the card to be flipped away and leave the coin on your finger. However, this can be done easily if you snap the card quickly and accurately. —Contributed by R. Neland, Minneapolis, Minn.

How to Make a Costumer

With but little skill, and such tools as are ordinarily found around a home, a plain but serviceable costumer can be made, as shown in the sketch. The necessary materials for it are: One main post, 1-1/2 in. square and about 6-1/2 ft. long; four legs, or foot brackets, 3/4 by 6 by 9 in.; four brass clothes hooks, and the necessary screws and varnish for assembling and finishing.
With just a bit of skill and common tools you can find around the house, you can create a simple yet functional costume rack, as illustrated in the sketch. The materials you’ll need are: one main post, 1-1/2 in. square and about 6-1/2 ft. long; four legs or foot brackets, 3/4 by 6 by 9 in.; four brass clothes hooks; and the necessary screws and varnish for assembly and finishing.
The center post should be chamfered at the top to relieve the abruptness. The four legs should all be made alike and in some shape that allows them to be fastened to the post in a simple manner. In the sketch, the legs are fastened to the post by one visible screw at the top and one put in on an incline through the bottom edge of the leg. The clothes hooks are fastened to the post in pairs at different heights, thereby preventing the screws of adjacent hooks from running into one another. The finish of the costumer should be such as to match the woodwork of its surroundings.—Contributed by Harry A. Packard, Norway, Maine.
The center post should be beveled at the top to soften the edge. The four legs should all be identical and in a shape that makes it easy to attach them to the post. In the sketch, the legs are secured to the post with one visible screw at the top and another screw placed on an angle through the bottom edge of the leg. The clothes hooks are attached to the post in pairs at different heights to prevent the screws of adjacent hooks from interfering with each other. The finish of the coat rack should match the woodwork in its surroundings.—Contributed by Harry A. Packard, Norway, Maine.
Window Catch Used for Locking an Extension Table
To prevent the two ends of an extension table from pulling apart when not desired, an ordinary window catch can be fastened and locked in place to the under side of the table top with one part on each end of the table. If but one catch is used and fastened in the center, it is best to mark it off first, and then pull the table ends apart to fasten the catch more easily. It may be desired to use two catches for a very heavy table, in which case it would be best to place one on either side of the center.—Contributed by F. M. Griswold, New York, N. Y.
To stop the two ends of an extension table from pulling apart when you don’t want them to, you can attach a regular window catch and secure it to the underside of the table top, with one part on each end of the table. If you’re using just one catch and installing it in the center, it’s a good idea to mark it first and then pull the table ends apart to make it easier to fasten the catch. If the table is very heavy, you might want to use two catches, placing one on each side of the center.—Contributed by F. M. Griswold, New York, N. Y.
Relieving Pressure on Heated Canned Foods for Opening
In opening a can of food that has been heated, the instant the cover is punctured the steam will force out a part of the contents, which is very annoying. To avoid this, pour a little cold water on the cover and allow it to remain a few seconds, then turn it off and immediately puncture the cover. This will counteract the interior force, and the can may be opened without trouble.—Contributed by Joseph Kohlbecher, Jr., San Francisco, Cal.
When you open a can of food that has been heated, the moment you puncture the lid, steam can push out some of the contents, which can be quite irritating. To prevent this, pour a little cold water on the lid and let it sit for a few seconds, then dry it off and quickly puncture the lid. This will neutralize the pressure inside, allowing you to open the can without any problems.—Contributed by Joseph Kohlbecher, Jr., San Francisco, Cal.
Clothespin Bag

Clothespins are usually kept in a bag, and the one our home possessed had a draw string which would always stick and hold the bag shut. The remedy for this, and a time saver also, was to remove the draw string and insert instead a piece of wire, which was afterward shaped to a circle with an eyelet at the joint. The bag can be hung on a nail and the mouth is always open to its fullest extent, yet lies flat against the wall.—Contributed by Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
Clothespins are typically stored in a bag, and the one we had at home featured a drawstring that would always get stuck and keep the bag closed. The solution for this—and a great time saver—was to take out the drawstring and replace it with a piece of wire, which was then shaped into a circle with a loop at the joint. The bag can be hung on a nail, remaining fully open while lying flat against the wall. —Contributed by Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
Snowshoes: How to Make and Use Them
By Stillman Taylor
Part II—Making the Shoe
[In making the snowshoe it may be necessary to refer to the previous chapter to select the style, or to locate the name of the parts used in the description.—Editor.]
[When making the snowshoe, you might need to look back at the previous chapter to choose the style or find the names of the parts mentioned in the description.—Editor.]
Snowshoe making is an art, and while few, if any, white men can equal the Indian in weaving the intricate patterns which they prefer to employ for filling the frames, it is not very difficult to fashion a good solid frame and then fill it by making use of a simple and open system of meshing. For the frames, white ash is much the best wood, but hickory and white birch are dependable substitutes, if the former cannot be obtained. Birch is perhaps the best wood to use when the sportsman wishes to cut and split up his own wood, but as suitable material for the frames may be readily purchased for a small sum, probably the majority of the readers will elect to buy the material. Any lumber dealer will be able to supply white ash, and it is a simple matter to saw out the frames from the board. The sawed-out frame is inferior to the hand-split bow, but if good, selected material can be obtained, there will be little, if any, difference for ordinary use.
Snowshoe making is an art, and while few, if any, white men can match the Indian in weaving the intricate patterns they prefer to use for filling the frames, it’s not very hard to create a solid frame and then fill it using a simple and open meshing system. For the frames, white ash is the best wood, but hickory and white birch are reliable alternatives if the former isn't available. Birch is possibly the best wood to use if the sportsman wants to cut and split his own wood, but since suitable material for the frames can be easily bought for a small price, most readers will probably choose to purchase the material. Any lumber dealer should have white ash, and it’s straightforward to saw out the frames from the board. A sawed-out frame is not as good as a hand-split bow, but if you can get good, selected material, there will be little to no difference for everyday use.
When dry and well-seasoned lumber is used, the frame may be made to the proper dimensions, but when green wood is selected, the frame must be made somewhat heavier, to allow for the usual shrinkage in seasoning. For a stout snowshoe frame, the width should be about 1-1/16 in.; thickness at toe, 7/16 in., and thickness at heel, 9/16 in. The frame should be cut 2 in. longer [44] than the finished length desired, and in working the wood, remember that the toe of the finished frame will be the center of the stick; the heel, the end of the stick, and the center of the shoe will lie halfway between the heel and toe.
When dry and well-seasoned wood is used, the frame can be made to the correct dimensions. However, if green wood is chosen, the frame has to be a bit heavier to account for the typical shrinkage as it dries. For a sturdy snowshoe frame, the width should be about 1-1/16 in.; the thickness at the toe should be 7/16 in., and at the heel, it should be 9/16 in. The frame should be cut 2 in. longer than the finished length you want, and while working with the wood, keep in mind that the toe of the finished frame will be the center of the stick; the heel will be the end of the stick, and the center of the shoe will be halfway between the heel and toe. [44]

The Design of the Snowshoe is Traced on a Board, and Blocks are Used to Shape the Frame or Bow
The design of the snowshoe is sketched on a board, and blocks are used to shape the frame or bow.
After the frames have been finished, the dry wood must be steamed before it can be safely bent to the required shape, and before doing this, a wooden bending form must be made. An easy way to make this form is to first draw a pattern of the model on a sheet of paper, cut out the pencil mark, and, placing this pattern on a board, carefully trace the design on the wooden form. A number of cleats, or blocks, of wood will now be needed; the inside blocks being nailed in position, but the outside stay blocks being simply provided with nails in the holes, so they may be quickly fastened in position when the steamed frame is ready for the form.
After the frames are finished, the dry wood needs to be steamed before it can be safely bent into the required shape. Before doing this, a wooden bending form must be created. A simple way to make this form is to first draw a pattern of the model on a sheet of paper, cut out the pencil outline, and then place this pattern on a board to carefully trace the design onto the wooden form. Several cleats, or blocks, of wood will be needed; the inside blocks should be nailed in place, while the outside stay blocks should just have nails in the holes, so they can be quickly secured once the steamed frame is ready for the form.
To make the frame soft for bending to shape, steaming must be resorted to, and perhaps the easiest way of doing this is to provide boiling water in a wash boiler, place the wood over the top, and soak well by mopping with the boiling water, shifting the stick about until the fibers have become soft and pliable. After 10 or 15 minutes of the hot-water treatment, wrap the stick with cloth and bend it back and forth to render it more and more pliable, then use the hot-water treatment, and repeat the process until the wood is sufficiently soft to bend easily without splintering. The toe being the greatest curve, must be well softened before putting on the form, otherwise the fibers are likely to splinter off at this point. When the frame is well softened, place it on the bending form while hot, slowly bend it against the wooden inside blocks, and nail on the outside blocks to hold it to the proper curve. Begin with the toe, and after fastening the outside blocks to hold this end, finish one side, then bend the other half to shape. The bent frame should be allowed to dry on the form for at least a week; if removed before the wood has become thoroughly dry and has taken a permanent set, the frame will not retain its shape. The same bending form may be used for both frames, but if one is in a hurry to finish the shoes, two forms should be made, and considerable pains must be taken to make them exactly alike in every way.
To make the frame flexible for shaping, you need to steam it. The easiest way to do this is to boil water in a large pot, then place the wood above it and soak it thoroughly by mopping it with the boiling water, moving the stick around until the fibers are soft and flexible. After 10 to 15 minutes of hot-water treatment, wrap the stick in cloth and bend it back and forth to make it even more pliable. Apply the hot-water treatment again and repeat the process until the wood is soft enough to bend easily without breaking. The toe, which has the most curve, needs to be well softened before putting it on the form; otherwise, the fibers might splinter at that point. Once the frame is sufficiently softened, place it on the bending form while it's still hot, slowly bend it against the wooden inside blocks, and nail the outside blocks to hold it in the correct curve. Start with the toe, and once you've secured the outside blocks for that end, finish one side and then bend the other half into shape. Let the bent frame dry on the form for at least a week; if you remove it before the wood is completely dry and has taken a permanent shape, it won't hold its form. You can use the same bending form for both frames, but if you're in a hurry to finish the shoes, you should make two forms, and it's important to ensure they are exactly identical in every detail.

Locate the Cross Bars by Balancing the Frame, Then Fit the Ends in Shallow Mortises
Locate the crossbars by leveling the frame, then insert the ends into shallow slots.
When the frames are dry, secure the tail end of the frame by boring three holes about 4 in. from the end, and fasten with rawhide. The work of fitting the two cross bars may now be undertaken, and the balance of the snowshoe depends upon fitting these bars in their proper places. Before cutting the mortise, spring the two bars in the frame about 15 in. apart, and balance the shoe in the center by holding it in the hands. When the frame exactly balances, move the bars sufficiently to make the heel about 3 oz. heavier than the toe, and mark the place where the mortises are to be cut. The cross bars and mortise must be a good tight fit, and a small, sharp chisel will enable the builder to make a neat job. It is not necessary to cut the mortise very deep; 1/4 in. is ample to afford a firm and snug mortised joint.
When the frames are dry, secure the tail end of the frame by drilling three holes about 4 inches from the end, and fasten with rawhide. You can now start fitting the two crossbars, and the stability of the snowshoe relies on placing these bars correctly. Before cutting the mortise, position the two bars in the frame about 15 inches apart and hold the shoe in your hands to balance it at the center. Once the frame is perfectly balanced, shift the bars enough so that the heel is about 3 ounces heavier than the toe, and mark where the mortises should be cut. The crossbars and mortise need to fit tightly, and a small, sharp chisel will help you make a clean job. It doesn’t have to be cut very deep; 1/4 inch is enough to create a firm, snug mortised joint.
The lanyard to which the filling is woven is next put in, by boring pairs [45] of small holes in the toe and heel sections, and lacing a narrow rawhide thong through the obliquely drilled holes. Three holes are then bored in the cross bar—one on each side about 1-1/2 in. from the frame, and the third in the center of the bar; the lanyard being carried through these holes in the cross bar.
The lanyard that holds the filling is then inserted by drilling pairs of small holes in the toe and heel sections and threading a narrow rawhide thong through the angled holes. Next, three holes are drilled in the crossbar—one on each side about 1.5 inches from the frame, and the third in the center of the bar; the lanyard is then threaded through these holes in the crossbar.

Begin Weaving the Toe Filling at the Corner of Cross Bar and Frame, Carrying It Around in a Triangle until Complete
Begin weaving the toe filling at the corner of the crossbar and frame, carrying it around in a triangle until it's complete.
Begin the toe filling first, by making an eye in one end of the thong, put the end through the lanyard loop and then through the eye, thus making a slipknot. Start to weave at the corner where the bar and frame are mortised, carry the strand up and twist it around the lanyards in the middle of the toe, then carry it down and make a like twist around the lanyard loop in the opposite corner. The thong is now looped around the next lanyard (No. 2 from the crossbar lanyard) and fastened with the twisted loop knot illustrated. Continue the strand across the width of toe space and make a similar loop knot on No. 2 lanyard on the starting side, twist it around the strand first made and loop it under the next cross-bar lanyard loop, then carry it up and twist it around the lanyard loop in the toe of the frame, continuing in the same manner until the last lanyard of the toe is reached, when the space is finished by making the twisted loop knot until the space is entirely filled. It is a difficult matter to describe by text, but the illustrations will point out the correct way, and show the manner of making an endless thong by eye-splicing, as well as illustrating the wooden bodkin or needle used in pulling the woven strands taut. This bodkin is easily made from a small piece of wood, about 1/4 in. thick, and about 2 in. long. To simplify matters, the heel may be filled in the same manner as the toe.
Start by filling the toe. Create a hole at one end of the thong, pass the end through the lanyard loop, and then through the hole to form a slipknot. Begin weaving at the corner where the bar and frame are joined, bring the strand up and twist it around the lanyards in the middle of the toe, then bring it down and make a similar twist around the lanyard loop in the opposite corner. The thong is now looped around the next lanyard (No. 2 from the crossbar lanyard) and secured with the twisted loop knot shown. Continue the strand across the width of the toe space and create a similar loop knot on No. 2 lanyard on the starting side, twisting it around the first strand made and looping it under the next cross-bar lanyard loop. Then, bring it up and twist it around the lanyard loop in the toe of the frame, continuing in the same way until you reach the last lanyard of the toe. Finish the space by creating the twisted loop knot until it's completely filled. It's challenging to describe in writing, but the illustrations will show the proper method and demonstrate how to create an endless thong by eye-splicing, as well as depict the wooden bodkin or needle used to pull the woven strands tight. This bodkin can be easily fashioned from a small piece of wood, about 1/4 inch thick and 2 inches long. To make things easier, you can fill in the heel the same way as the toe.

An Endless Thong is Made with Eyes Cut in the Ends of the Leather, and Each Part is Run through the Eye of the Other
An endless thong is made with cuts at the ends of the leather, and each part is passed through the eye of the other.
For the center, which must be woven strong and tight, a heavier strand of hide must be used. Begin with the toe cord first, and to make this amply strong, carry the strand across the frame five or six times, finishing with a half-hitch knot, as shown, then carry it up and twist it around the cross bar to form the first toe-cord stay.
For the center, which needs to be woven strong and tight, use a thicker piece of hide. Start with the toe cord first, and to make it strong enough, wrap the strand across the frame five or six times, finishing with a half-hitch knot, as shown. Then take it up and twist it around the cross bar to create the first toe-cord stay.

The Heel Filling is Woven by Making the Connection with the Lanyard in the Same Manner as for the Toe Filling
The heel filling is made by connecting it with the lanyard in the same way as the toe filling.
As may be noted, the center section is filled by looping back and twisting the strands as when filling the toe. However, the filling is looped around the frame instead of a lanyard, and a clove hitch is used. A toe hole, 4 in. wide, must be provided for, and when enough of the filling has been woven in to make this opening, the thong is no longer looped around the cross bar, but woven through the toe cord. As the filling ends in the toe cord, it should be woven in and out at this point several times, finishing the toe hole by looping a strand around the cross bar at the side of the toe hole, then passing it down the toe-cord stay by twisting around it; then twisted around the toe cord along the filling to the other side of the toe hole, where it is twisted around the toe-cord stay on the opposite side, looped around the frame and ended in a clove hitch.
As you can see, the center section is filled by looping back and twisting the strands just like you do when filling the toe. However, instead of using a lanyard, the filling is looped around the frame, with a clove hitch used to secure it. A toe hole that measures 4 inches wide needs to be created, and when enough of the filling has been woven in to create this opening, the thong stops being looped around the cross bar and is instead woven through the toe cord. When the filling reaches the toe cord, it should be woven in and out several times at this spot, finishing the toe hole by looping a strand around the cross bar at the side of the toe hole, then passing it down the toe-cord stay by twisting around it. Next, twist it around the toe cord along the filling to the other side of the toe hole, where it should be twisted around the toe-cord stay on the opposite side, looped around the frame, and finished in a clove hitch.

The Center must be Woven Strong and Tight, and for This Reason a Heavier Strand of Hide must be Used
The Center needs to be woven strong and tight, and for this reason, a heavier strand of hide has to be used.
At the first reading, it will doubtless appear difficult, but a careful examination of the illustrations will soon show how the trick is done, and indeed it is really a very simple matter, being one of those things which are easier to do than it is to tell how to do them. The method of filling has been purposely made simple, but the majority of shoes are filled in practically the same manner, which answers quite as well as the more intricate Indian design.
At first glance, it might seem challenging, but if you take a closer look at the illustrations, you'll quickly see how it's done. In fact, it's quite straightforward—it's one of those things that's easier to do than to explain. The filling technique has been intentionally simplified, but most shoes are filled in a similar way, which works just as well as the more complicated Indian design.
[46] The knack of using the snowshoe is quickly mastered, providing the shoes are properly attached, to allow the toe ample freedom to work down through the toe hole as each foot is lifted. The shoe is, of course, not actually lifted in the air, but rather slid along the surface, half the width of one shoe covering the other when it is lifted in the act of walking. At first the novice may be inclined to think snowshoes a bit cumbersome and unwieldy, and doubt his ability to penetrate the brush. However, as the snowshoer becomes accustomed to their use, he will experience little if any difficulty in traveling where he wills. When making a trail in a more or less open country, it is a good plan to blaze it thoroughly, thus enabling one to return over the same trail, in case a fall of snow should occur in the meantime, or drifting snow fill up and obliterate the trail first made. When the trail is first broken by traveling over it once by snowshoe, the snow is packed well and forms a solid foundation, and even should a heavy fall of snow cover it, the blaze marks on tree and bush will point out the trail, which will afford faster and easier traveling than breaking a new trail each time one journeys in the same direction.
[46] Getting the hang of using snowshoes is easy, as long as they are put on correctly, allowing your toes to move freely through the toe hole as you lift each foot. The shoe doesn’t actually lift into the air; instead, it glides along the surface, with half the width of one shoe covering the other when you walk. At first, beginners might find snowshoes a bit awkward and hard to manage, and they may worry about getting through the brush. However, as they get used to using them, snowshoers will find it’s not too difficult to go where they want. When creating a trail in relatively open areas, it’s a good idea to mark it well, so you can find your way back if it snows later or if wind fills in and hides the trail you made. The first time you travel over a new trail with snowshoes, the snow gets packed down well, making a solid base. Even if heavy snow covers it later, the markings on trees and bushes will help you find the trail again, making it easier and quicker to travel than having to break a new path each time you go in the same direction.
A well-made pair of snowshoes will stand a couple of seasons' hard use, or last for a year or two longer for general wear. To keep them in good shape, they should be dried out after use, although it is never advisable to place them close to a hot fire, or the hide filling will be injured. Jumping puts severe strain on the frame of the shoe, and while damage may not occur when so used in deep, soft snow, it is well to avoid the possibility of breakage. Accidents will now and then happen, to be sure, and as a thong may snap at some unexpected moment, keep a strand or two of rawhide on hand, to meet this emergency.
A good pair of snowshoes can handle a couple of seasons of heavy use or last a year or two longer for regular wear. To keep them in good condition, make sure to dry them out after each use, but avoid placing them too close to a hot fire, as that can damage the hide filling. Jumping puts serious pressure on the snowshoe frame, and while it may not break in deep, soft snow, it's best to avoid the risk of damage. Accidents can happen, so it’s smart to keep a strand or two of rawhide handy in case a thong breaks unexpectedly.
Combination Settee Rocker and Cradle
By fastening a frame with hinges to the front of a settee rocker, a combination piece of furniture can be made, which may be used either as a regular settee or as a cradle. For this purpose, a covered frame should be provided, being sufficiently long to extend across the front between the arm supports and having such a width that it will easily fit under the arms when hinged to the seat, as shown in the illustration. To keep the frame in position while serving as a cradle front, or when turned down for regular use, screw hooks are placed at each end, so that, in the former case, the frame, when swung up, can be secured in place by attaching the hooks to screw eyes fastened under the arm supports; while, for regular use, the frame is secured in its swung-down position by fastening the hooks into screw eyes properly placed in the front legs.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
By attaching a frame with hinges to the front of a rocking settee, you can create a versatile piece of furniture that can serve as either a regular settee or a cradle. For this, you should use a covered frame that is long enough to stretch across the front between the arm supports and wide enough to fit under the arms when hinged to the seat, as shown in the illustration. To keep the frame in place while it's used as a cradle front or when it's turned down for regular use, screw hooks are installed at each end. In the case of using it as a cradle, the frame can be secured in place when swung up by attaching the hooks to screw eyes fastened beneath the arm supports. For regular use, the frame is secured in its swung-down position by fastening the hooks into screw eyes that are correctly placed in the front legs.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.

A Settee Rocker with a Front Attachment to Make It into a Cradle When Desired
A settee rocker with a front attachment that converts it into a cradle when needed.
A Snowball Thrower
By Albert Bates, Jr.
The snow fort with its infantry is not complete without the artillery. A set of mortars, or cannon, placed in the fort to hurl snowballs at the entrenched enemy makes the battle more real. A device to substitute the cannon or a mortar can be easily constructed by any boy, and a few of them set in a snow fort will add greatly to the interest of the conflict.
The snow fort with its troops isn’t complete without the artillery. A set of mortars or cannons placed in the fort to launch snowballs at the defending enemy makes the battle feel more authentic. A simple contraption to replace the cannon or mortar can be easily built by any kid, and a few of them placed in a snow fort will really enhance the excitement of the fight.

The Dimensioned Parts and the Detail of the Completed Snowball Thrower
The Measured Parts and the Details of the Finished Snowball Launcher
The substitute, which is called a snowball thrower, consists of a base, A, with a standard, B, which stops the arm C, controlled by the bar D, when the trigger E is released. The tripping of the trigger is accomplished by the sloping end of D on the slanting end of the upright F. Sides, G, are fastened on the piece F, with their upper ends extending above the bar D, to prevent the latter from jumping out when it is released by the trigger.
The substitute, known as a snowball thrower, has a base, A, with a stand, B, that stops the arm C, controlled by the bar D, when the trigger E is let go. The trigger is activated by the sloped end of D hitting the angled end of the upright F. Sides, G, are attached to piece F, with their upper ends extending above bar D to stop it from popping out when released by the trigger.
The trigger E is tripped with the handle H, connected to the piece J, on which all the working parts are mounted. The upper end of the arm C has a piece, K, to which is attached a tin can, L, for holding the snowball to be thrown. A set of door springs, M, furnishes the force to throw the snowball.
The trigger E is activated with the handle H, which is connected to the piece J, where all the working parts are attached. The upper end of the arm C has a piece, K, to which a tin can, L, is attached to hold the snowball that will be thrown. A set of door springs, M, provides the force needed to throw the snowball.

Cannonading a Snow Fort with the Use of a Snowball Thrower
Cannonading a Snow Fort with the Use of a Snowball Launcher
All the parts are given dimensions, and if cut properly, they will fit together to make the thrower as illustrated.
All the parts have their measurements, and if you cut them correctly, they will fit together to create the thrower as shown.
Springs on the Chains of a Porch Swing
Two coil springs of medium strength placed in the chains of a porch swing will make it ride easier and also take up any unpleasant jars and rattles occasioned when a person sits heavily in the swing. If the swing is provided with a four-chain suspension, the springs should be used on the two rear chains to get the best results.—Contributed by E. K. Marshall, Oak Park, Illinois.
Two medium-strength coil springs placed in the chains of a porch swing will make it ride smoother and also absorb any jarring or rattling when someone sits down hard in the swing. If the swing has a four-chain suspension, the springs should be installed on the two rear chains for optimal results.—Contributed by E. K. Marshall, Oak Park, Illinois.
Homemade Water Meter
Where it is necessary to measure water in large quantities the meter illustrated will serve the purpose as well as an expensive one, and can be made cheaply. The vessel, or bucket, for measuring the water is made diamond-shaped, as shown in Fig. 1, with a partition in the center to make two pockets of a triangular shape, each holding 2 qt., or any amount of sufficient size to take care of the flow of water.
Where it's necessary to measure large amounts of water, the meter shown will work just as well as an expensive one and can be made at a low cost. The container, or bucket, for measuring the water is designed in a diamond shape, as shown in Fig. 1, with a divider in the center to create two triangular pockets, each holding 2 qt., or any amount large enough to handle the water flow.

When a Bucket is Filled to the Proper Amount It is Turned Out by the Weight (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
When a bucket is filled to the right amount, it is emptied based on its weight (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The part forming the pockets is swung on an axis fastened to the lower part, which engages into bearings fastened to the sides of the casing, as shown in Fig. 2. Stops, A, are placed in the casing at the right places for each pocket to spill when exactly 2 qt. of water has run into it. It is obvious that when one pocket is filled, the weight will tip it over and bring the other one up under the flow of water.
The part that forms the pockets is attached to a lower axis, which fits into bearings secured to the sides of the casing, as shown in Fig. 2. Stops, A, are positioned in the casing at the right spots for each pocket to spill when exactly 2 qt. of water has filled it. It's clear that when one pocket is full, the weight will tip it over and raise the other one under the flow of water.
The registering device consists of one or more wheels worked with pawls and ratchets, the first wheel being turned a notch at a time by the pawl B, Fig. 3. If each pocket holds 2 qt., the wheel is marked as shown, as each pocket must discharge to cause the wheel to turn one notch. The second wheel is worked by the lever and pawl C, which is driven with a pin D located in the first wheel. Any number of wheels can be made to turn in a like manner.—Contributed by F. A. Porter, Oderville, Utah.
The registering device consists of one or more wheels operated with pawls and ratchets. The first wheel is turned one notch at a time by pawl B, Fig. 3. If each pocket holds 2 qt., the wheel is marked as shown, since each pocket must discharge to turn the wheel one notch. The second wheel is operated by the lever and pawl C, which is driven by a pin D located in the first wheel. Any number of wheels can be made to turn in the same way.—Contributed by F. A. Porter, Oderville, Utah.
A Snowball Maker
Snowball making is slow when carried on by hand, and where a thrower is employed in a snow fort it becomes necessary to have a number of assistants in making the snowballs. The time of making these balls can be greatly reduced by the use of the snowball maker shown in the illustration.
Snowball making is slow when done by hand, and when a thrower is used in a snow fort, it’s important to have several helpers to make the snowballs. The process of making these balls can be significantly sped up by using the snowball maker shown in the illustration.

A Device for Making Snowballs Quickly and Perfectly Spherical in Shape
A Tool for Quickly Making Snowballs that are Perfectly Round
The base consists of a board, 24 in. long, 6-1/2 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. A block of wood, A, is hollowed out in the center to make a depression in the shape of a hemisphere, 2-1/2 in. in diameter and 1-1/4 in. deep. This block is nailed to the base about 1 in. from one end. To make the dimensions come out right, fasten a block, B, 6 in. high, made of one or more pieces, at the other end of the base with its back edge 14-1/2 in. from the center of the hemispherical depression. On top of this block a lever, C, 20 in. long is hinged. Another block, D, is made with a hemispherical depression like the block A, and fastened to the under side of the lever, so that the depressions in both blocks will coincide. The lever end is shaped into a handle.
The base is a board that measures 24 inches long, 6.5 inches wide, and 1 inch thick. A block of wood, A, has a hollowed-out center creating a depression in the shape of a hemisphere, 2.5 inches in diameter and 1.25 inches deep. This block is attached to the base about 1 inch from one end. To get the dimensions right, attach a block, B, that is 6 inches high, made from one or more pieces, to the other end of the base with its back edge 14.5 inches from the center of the hemispherical depression. On top of this block, a lever, C, that is 20 inches long is hinged. Another block, D, is created with a hemispherical depression like block A and is attached to the underside of the lever so that the depressions in both blocks line up. The end of the lever is shaped into a handle.
[49] Two uprights, E, are fastened to the back side of the block A as guides for the lever C. A piece is fastened across their tops, and a spring is attached between it and the lever. A curtain-roller spring will be suitable.
[49] Two vertical supports, E, are secured to the back side of block A to guide lever C. A piece is attached across their tops, and a spring is connected between this piece and the lever. A curtain-roller spring will work well.
In making the balls a bunch of snow is thrown into the lower depression and the lever brought down with considerable force.—Contributed by Abbott W. France, Chester, Pa.
In making the balls, a bunch of snow is thrown into the lower dip, and the lever is pressed down with significant force. —Contributed by Abbott W. France, Chester, Pa.
An Inexpensive Bobsled

A Bobsled of Simple Construction Using Ordinary Barrel Staves for the Runners
A Simple Bobsled Made from Regular Barrel Staves for the Runners
Any boy who can drive a nail and bore a hole can have a bobsled on short notice. The materials necessary are four good, solid barrel staves; four blocks of wood, 4 in. long, 4 in. wide, and 2 in. thick; two pieces, 12 in. long, 4 in. wide, and 1 in. thick; one piece, 12 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 1-3/4 in. thick; and a good board, 4 ft. long, 12 in. wide, and 1 in. thick.
Any boy who can hammer a nail and drill a hole can build a bobsled really quickly. The materials you need are four sturdy barrel staves; four blocks of wood that are 4 inches long, 4 inches wide, and 2 inches thick; two pieces that are 12 inches long, 4 inches wide, and 1 inch thick; one piece that is 12 inches long, 2 inches wide, and 1 ¾ inches thick; and a solid board that is 4 feet long, 12 inches wide, and 1 inch thick.
The crosspieces and knees are made with the blocks and the 1-in. pieces, 12 in. long, as shown; to which the staves are nailed for runners. One of these pieces with the runners is fastened to one end of the board, the other is attached with a bolt in the center. The 1-3/4 by 2-in. piece, 12 in. long, is fastened across the top of the board at the front end. A rope fastened to the knees of the front runners provides a means of steering the sled.
The crosspieces and knees are made with the blocks and the 1-inch pieces, 12 inches long, as shown; to which the staves are nailed for runners. One of these pieces with the runners is attached to one end of the board, and the other is secured with a bolt in the center. The 1-3/4 by 2-inch piece, 12 inches long, is attached across the top of the board at the front end. A rope connected to the knees of the front runners provides a way to steer the sled.
The sled can be quickly made, and it will serve the purpose well when an expensive one cannot be had.—Contributed by H. J. Blacklidge, San Rafael, Cal.
The sled can be made quickly, and it will do the job well when you can't get a fancy one.—Contributed by H. J. Blacklidge, San Rafael, Cal.
Motor Made of Candles

Tallow Dripping from the Ends Alternately Lessens the Weight of the Arms and Causes the Tube to Tip
Tallow dripping from the ends alternately reduces the weight of the arms and makes the tube tip.
A tube of tin, or cardboard, having an inside diameter to receive a candle snugly, is hung on an axle in the center that turns in bearings made of wood. The construction of the bearings is simple, and they can be made from three pieces of wood as shown. The tube should be well balanced. Pieces of candle are then inserted in the ends, also well balanced. If one is heavier than the other, light it and allow the tallow to run off until it rises; then light the other end. The alternate dripping from the candles will cause the tube to tip back and forth like a walking beam. It will keep going automatically until the candles are entirely consumed.—Contributed by Geo. Jaques, Chicago.
A tube made of tin or cardboard, with an inside diameter that fits a candle snugly, is mounted on an axle in the center that spins in wooden bearings. The construction of the bearings is straightforward, and they can be made from three pieces of wood as shown. The tube needs to be well-balanced. Candle pieces are then placed in the ends, also well-balanced. If one end is heavier, light it and let the wax run off until it rises, then light the other end. The alternating dripping from the candles will cause the tube to tip back and forth like a walking beam. It will keep moving on its own until the candles are completely burned out.—Contributed by Geo. Jaques, Chicago.
Kettle-Handle Support

The handle of a kettle lying on the kettle rim will become so hot that it cannot be held in the bare hand. To keep the handle fairly cool it must be supported in an upright position. To do this, form a piece of spring wire in the shape shown, and slip it over the kettle rim. The shape of the extending end will hold the handle upright and away from the heat.
The handle of a kettle resting on the rim can get so hot that you can't touch it with your bare hand. To keep the handle cool enough to touch, it should be supported in an upright position. To do this, bend a piece of spring wire into the shape shown and slide it over the kettle rim. The shape of the extending end will keep the handle upright and away from the heat.
How to Make a Monorail Sled
A monorail sled, having a simple tandem arrangement of the runners, is very easily constructed as follows: The runners are cut from 1-in. plank of the size and shape given in the sketch, and are shod with strap iron, 1 in. wide and 1/4 in. thick. Round iron or half-round iron should not be used, as these are liable to skid. The square, sharp edges of the strap iron prevent this and grip the surface just as a skate.
A monorail sled, featuring a straightforward tandem setup for the runners, can be easily built like this: The runners are cut from a 1-inch plank, following the dimensions and shape shown in the sketch, and are fitted with strap iron that is 1 inch wide and 1/4 inch thick. Do not use round or half-round iron, as they tend to skid. The square, sharp edges of the strap iron prevent this and grip the surface much like a skate.

An Exhilarating Glide Accompanied by a Buoyant Sense of Freedom Only Obtained in the Monorail Type
An Exciting Ride with a Lighthearted Feeling of Freedom Only Achieved on the Monorail Type
The top is a board 6 ft. long and 1 in. thick, securely fastened to the runners as follows: Blocks are nailed, or bolted, on either side of the upper edge of the rear runner and the top is fastened to them with screws. The runner is also braced with strap iron, as shown. The same method applies to the front runner, except that only one pair of blocks are used at the center and a thin piece of wood fastened to their tops to serve as the fifth wheel.
The top is a board 6 ft. long and 1 in. thick, securely attached to the runners as follows: Blocks are nailed or bolted on either side of the upper edge of the rear runner, and the top is secured to them with screws. The runner is also reinforced with strap iron, as shown. The same method is used for the front runner, but only one pair of blocks is placed at the center, with a thin piece of wood attached to their tops to act as the fifth wheel.

The Construction is Much More Simple Than Making a Double-Runner Bobsled
The construction is way easier than making a double-runner bobsled.
The hole for the steering post should be 6 in. from the front end and a little larger in diameter than the steering post. The latter should be rounded where it passes through the hole, but square on the upper end to receive the steering bar, which must be tightly fitted in place.
The hole for the steering post should be 6 inches from the front end and slightly larger in diameter than the steering post. The steering post should be rounded where it goes through the hole, but square on the top end to attach the steering bar, which must be securely fitted in place.
In coasting, the rider lies full length on the board with his hands on the steering bar. This makes the center of gravity so low that there is no necessity for lateral steadying runners, and aside from the exhilarating glide of the ordinary sled, the rider experiences a buoyant sense of freedom and a zest peculiar to the monorail type. Then, too, the steering is effected much more easily. Instead of dragging the feet, a slight turn of the front runner with a corresponding movement of the body is sufficient to change the direction or to restore the balance. This latter is, of course, maintained quite mechanically, as everyone who rides a bicycle well knows.—Contributed by Harry Hardy, Whitby, Ont.
In coasting, the rider lies flat on the board with their hands on the steering bar. This keeps the center of gravity so low that there's no need for side stabilizers, and in addition to the thrilling glide of a regular sled, the rider feels a liberating sense of freedom and excitement unique to the monorail type. Plus, steering is much easier. Instead of dragging their feet, a slight turn of the front runner with a corresponding body movement is enough to change direction or regain balance. This balance is, of course, maintained quite mechanically, as anyone who rides a bicycle well knows. —Contributed by Harry Hardy, Whitby, Ont.
Binding Magazines
To bind magazines for rough service, proceed as follows: Place the magazines carefully one on top of the other in order, and space the upper one, near the back edge, for two rivets, marking off three equal distances, or, perhaps, the center space longer than the other two. Make two holes through all the magazines on the marks with an awl, or drill, then drive nails of the right length through them. Use small washers on both ends of the nails under the head and at the point, which is cut off and riveted over. This makes a good, serviceable binding for rough use.—Contributed by Carl W. Lindgreen, Los Angeles, Cal.
To bind magazines for heavy use, follow these steps: Carefully stack the magazines on top of each other in order, and position the top one near the back edge for two rivets, marking off three equal spaces, with the center space possibly longer than the others. Use an awl or drill to create two holes through all the magazines at the marks, then drive nails of the appropriate length through them. Place small washers on both ends of the nails, under the head and at the tip, which should be cut off and riveted over. This creates a sturdy binding for rough use.—Contributed by Carl W. Lindgreen, Los Angeles, Cal.

A Shellac Cement
As shellac is the basis of almost all cements, a good cement can be made by thickening shellac varnish with dry white lead. The two may be worked together on a piece of glass with a putty knife.
As shellac is the main ingredient in almost all adhesives, you can create an effective adhesive by thickening shellac varnish with dry white lead. The two can be mixed together on a piece of glass using a putty knife.
A Blackboard for Children
Take a wide window shade and attach it to a roller as if hanging it to a window. Cut it to about 3 ft. in length, hem the lower edge and insert in the slot in the usual manner. Procure some black slate paint and cover the shade on one side, giving it two coats. Allow sufficient time for the first coat to dry before applying the second coat.
Take a wide window shade and attach it to a roller as if you were hanging it in a window. Cut it to about 3 feet in length, hem the bottom edge, and insert it into the slot like you normally would. Get some black slate paint and cover one side of the shade with it, giving it two coats. Make sure to let the first coat dry completely before applying the second coat.
A blackboard of this kind is strong, and if attached to the wall with the shade fixtures, it can be rolled out of the way when not in use.—Contributed by Elizabeth Motz Rossoter, Colorado Springs, Col.
A blackboard like this is sturdy, and if it's mounted on the wall with the shade fixtures, you can roll it out of the way when you don't need it. —Contributed by Elizabeth Motz Rossoter, Colorado Springs, Col.
How to Make a Ski Staff
A ski staff will greatly assist progress over level stretches and is an aid to the ski runner in preserving his balance. A homemade staff that is easy to construct is shown in Fig. 1. At the upper end is a narrow leather loop for the wrist; at the extreme lower end a spike is placed for use on icy ground, and just above this spike is a disk, or stop, which, in deep snow, prevents the staff from sinking in too far and gives the necessary leverage for steering, propelling or righting oneself as needed.
A ski pole will really help you move across flat areas and will help the skier keep their balance. A simple homemade pole that you can easily make is shown in Fig. 1. At the top is a narrow leather loop for your wrist; at the bottom is a spike for use on icy surfaces, and just above this spike is a disk, or stop, which keeps the pole from sinking too deep in snow and provides the needed leverage for steering, pushing, or getting back on your feet as needed.

The Staff, being Made of a Bamboo Pole, is Strong as Well as Light (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The staff, made of a bamboo pole, is both strong and lightweight (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The staff is made of a piece of bamboo pole, 1-1/4 or 1-1/2 in. in diameter, and 4-1/2 ft. long. The leather for the loop can be made from an old strap, shaved down thinner and cut to a width of about 1/2 in. The stop is a disk of wood, 1/2 in. thick and 5 in. in diameter. This material should be well-seasoned white pine or spruce and coated with shellac. A hole is bored through the center of the disk to let it pass upward on the staff about 6 in. Here it is fastened with two pieces of heavy wire, A and B, Fig. 2. In this diagram, C is the staff, and D, the stop or disk. The wire A passes through the staff below the wire B and at right angles to it, wherefore the wire B must be bent as shown. Both wires are fastened to the stop with staples.
The staff is made from a bamboo pole that is either 1-1/4 or 1-1/2 inches in diameter and 4-1/2 feet long. The leather for the loop can come from an old strap that’s shaved down to be thinner and cut to about 1/2 inch wide. The stop is a disk of wood that is 1/2 inch thick and 5 inches in diameter. This material should be well-seasoned white pine or spruce and coated with shellac. A hole is bored through the center of the disk so it can slide up the staff about 6 inches. It’s secured with two pieces of heavy wire, A and B, as shown in Fig. 2. In this diagram, C represents the staff, and D is the stop or disk. The wire A goes through the staff below wire B and at a right angle to it, so wire B must be bent as indicated. Both wires are attached to the stop with staples.
The lower end of the staff, as shown in Fig. 3, is plugged with hard wood, which is bored part way through its center to admit a wire spike. Slight recesses are made in the sides of this hole to anchor the lead which is poured in around the spike. The point of the latter is sharpened and then the bamboo wound with waxed twine, or fine wire, to prevent its splitting.
The bottom of the staff, as shown in Fig. 3, is sealed with hardwood, which has a hole drilled partway through its center to accommodate a wire spike. Small recesses are created in the sides of this hole to secure the lead that is poured in around the spike. The tip of the spike is sharpened, and then the bamboo is wrapped with waxed twine or fine wire to stop it from splitting.
Fine emery cloth, glued to both sides of a piece of bristol board, makes a handy tool for cleaning the platinum points of a vibrator.
Fine emery cloth, glued to both sides of a piece of bristol board, is a useful tool for cleaning the platinum points of a vibrator.
A Game Played on the Ice
A novel and interesting winter game for young and old, described as a novelty by a Swedish paper, is played as follows:
A new and exciting winter game for all ages, which a Swedish newspaper referred to as a novelty, is played like this:

A Player in Action Ready to Spear a Ring that Hangs on the Line between the Poles
A Player in Action Ready to Catch a Ring Hanging on the Line between the Poles
Two poles of convenient height are erected on the ice; if skating on a shallow pond they may be driven through the ice and into the ground, but if the water is deep, holes must be bored through the ice and the poles will soon freeze solidly in them. A rope is stretched between the poles at such a height as is suited to the size of the players, or as agreed on to make the game more or less difficult, and on this are strung a number of pieces of board, A, each having a ring of spring steel, B, attached to its lower end. The purpose of the game is to run at good speed between the poles and catch a ring on a spear, each player being entitled to make a certain number of runs, and the winner being the one who can catch the most rings.
Two poles of convenient height are set up on the ice; if you're skating on a shallow pond, they can be driven through the ice and into the ground, but if the water is deep, holes must be drilled through the ice, and the poles will quickly freeze solid in them. A rope is stretched between the poles at a height that suits the size of the players, or as agreed upon to make the game easier or harder, and several pieces of board, A, each with a ring of spring steel, B, attached to the bottom, are hung from it. The goal of the game is to run quickly between the poles and catch a ring on a spear, with each player allowed a set number of attempts, and the winner being the one who catches the most rings.
The spears may be made of broom handles tapered toward one end, and with a shield made of tin and attached at a suitable distance from the thicker end (Pattern C). The line is fastened at the top of one pole and run through a pulley, D, at the top of the other, thence to a weight or line fastener. Each player should start from the same base line and pass between the poles at such a speed that he will glide at least 100 ft. on the other side of the poles without pushing himself forward by the aid of the skates. Twenty runs are usually allowed each player, or 10 players may divide into two parties, playing one against the other, etc. An umpire will be needed to see that fair play is maintained and settle any disputes that may arise.
The spears can be made from broom handles narrowed at one end, with a shield made of tin attached at a reasonable distance from the thicker end (Pattern C). The line is secured at the top of one pole and runs through a pulley, D, at the top of the other, leading to a weight or line fastener. Each player should start from the same baseline and move between the poles at a speed that allows them to glide at least 100 ft. on the other side without pushing themselves forward using the skates. Typically, twenty runs are allowed for each player, or ten players can split into two teams to compete against each other, etc. An umpire will be necessary to ensure fair play and resolve any disputes that may come up.
An Electric Display for a Show Window
A novel window display that is very attractive, yet simple in construction and operation, can be made in the following manner: First, make a small watertight chamber, A, as long as the focal length of the lens to be used, and having a glass window, B, at one end, and a small round opening, C, at the other. In this opening is placed a cork through which a glass tube about 2 in. long is inserted. The tube makes a smooth passage for the stream of water flowing out of the box. Water from any source of supply enters the chamber through the tube D, which may be a pipe or hose, whichever is most convenient. The interior is painted a dull black.
A new window display that is very appealing, yet simple to build and operate, can be created like this: First, construct a small watertight chamber, A, as long as the focal length of the lens you plan to use, with a glass window, B, at one end and a small round opening, C, at the other. A cork is placed in this opening, and a glass tube about 2 inches long is inserted through it. The tube allows a smooth flow for the stream of water coming out of the box. Water from any supply source enters the chamber through the tube D, which can be a pipe or hose, depending on what’s easiest. The inside is painted a dull black.
A convenient and compact light is placed at the window end of the box. A very good light can be made by placing an electric light with a reflector in a closed box and fastening a biconvex lens, F, in the side facing the window of the water box. When the electric light and the water are turned on, the light is focused at the point where the water is issuing from the box, and follows the course of the stream of water, illuminating it in a pleasing manner.
A handy and compact light is situated at the window end of the box. You can create a great light by putting an electric light with a reflector inside a closed box and attaching a biconvex lens, F, on the side facing the window of the water box. When the electric light and the water are activated, the light focuses at the point where the water flows out of the box and follows the stream of water, lighting it up nicely.

The Arrangement of the Boxes Showing the Path of the Light Rays through the Water
The Layout of the Boxes Demonstrating the Path of Light Rays Through the Water
A still better effect can be obtained by passing colored plates between the lens F and the window B. A glass disk with sectors of different colors may be revolved by any source of [53] power, such as a small electric motor or even a waterwheel turned by the flowing water.
A better effect can be achieved by placing colored plates between the lens F and the window B. A glass disk divided into different colored sections can be spun by any power source, like a small electric motor or even a waterwheel powered by flowing water.
Two or three streams of water flowing in different colors make a very pretty display and may be produced by using two or more boxes made up in the same manner. The apparatus should be concealed and nothing but the box end or tube with the flowing water shown.—Contributed by Grant Linton, Whitby, Ont.
Two or three streams of water flowing in different colors create a lovely display and can be achieved by using two or more boxes set up in the same way. The setup should be hidden, showing only the end of the box or the tube with the flowing water. —Contributed by Grant Linton, Whitby, Ont.
Strainer for a Milk Pail

Even though a milker may be careful, small particles of dirt, hairs, etc., will fall into the milk pail. It is true that the milk is strained afterward, but a large percentage of the dirt dissolves and passes through the strainer along with the milk. The best plan to prevent this dirt from falling into the milk is to put a piece of cheesecloth over the pail opening, securing it there by slipping an open wire ring, A, over the rim. The milk will readily pass through the cloth without spattering.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
Even though a milker might be careful, small bits of dirt, hairs, and so on can still end up in the milk pail. It's true that the milk gets strained afterward, but a significant amount of dirt dissolves and goes through the strainer along with the milk. The best way to stop this dirt from getting into the milk is to place a piece of cheesecloth over the pail opening and secure it by slipping an open wire ring, A, over the rim. The milk will easily pass through the cloth without splattering.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
Baking Bread in Hot Sand
A driving crew on the river wanted to move camp, but the cook objected as he had started to bake. One of the party suggested using a modified form of the method of baking in vogue more than a century ago, which was to place the dough in the hot earth where a fire had been burning. So, to help the cook out, a barrel was sawed in half and the bread, after being properly protected, was placed in each half barrel and covered with hot sand. Two of the men carried the half barrels on their backs. When the new camp was reached the bread was done.—Contributed by F. B. Ripley, Eau Claire, Wis.
A group working on the river wanted to move their camp, but the cook disagreed since he had started baking. One person in the group suggested using an old baking method that was popular over a century ago, which involved placing the dough in hot earth where a fire had been burning. To assist the cook, they sawed a barrel in half, placed the bread in each half while making sure it was properly protected, and covered it with hot sand. Two of the men carried the half barrels on their backs. When they reached the new camp, the bread was ready.—Contributed by F. B. Ripley, Eau Claire, Wis.
How to Make Small Cams

Channels of the Cams Formed with Strips of Brass Soldered to the Drum or Disk
Channels of the Cams Made with Brass Strips Soldered to the Drum or Disk
In making models of machinery or toy machines, cams are very often required. A simple way of making these is to lay out the cam plate, or drum, and then bend pieces of brass to the correct shape and solder them in place, whereupon they may be smoothed up with a file or scraper. A cam of this sort on a drum is shown in the sketch at A, and on a faceplate, at B. The method is not quite as accurate as milling, but answers the purpose in most cases.—Contributed by Chas. Hattenberger, Buffalo, N. Y.
In creating models of machinery or toy machines, cams are often necessary. A straightforward way to make these is to outline the cam plate or drum and then bend pieces of brass into the correct shape and solder them in place. After that, they can be smoothed out with a file or scraper. A cam like this on a drum is shown in the sketch at A, and on a faceplate, at B. This method isn’t as precise as milling, but it works for most situations. —Contributed by Chas. Hattenberger, Buffalo, N. Y.
Display Holder for Coins

Two Pieces of Glass Inclosing between Them Coins of the Same Size and Thickness
Two pieces of glass enclosing coins of the same size and thickness between them.
If the luster of coins fresh from the mint is to be preserved, they must be immediately placed so as to be protected against contact with the hands. A good holder that will display both sides of a coin can be made of two pieces of glass, BB, between which is placed a cardboard cut as shown at A. The cardboard should be about the same thickness as the coins. The glass may be framed by using strips of wood rabbeted to receive the edges of both pieces; or their edges may be bound with passe-partout tape. Even when a frame is used, it is best to bind [54] the edges as this will prevent tarnish from the air. Old negative glass is suitable for making the holder.—Contributed by R. B. Cole, New Haven, Conn.
If you want to keep the shine of coins fresh from the mint, you need to put them away immediately to protect them from being touched. A good display holder that shows both sides of a coin can be made from two pieces of glass, BB, with a piece of cardboard cut out as shown at A. The cardboard should be about the same thickness as the coins. The glass can be framed using wooden strips that have been shaped to hold the edges of both pieces; or you can bind the edges with passe-partout tape. Even if you use a frame, it's best to bind the edges since this will stop tarnishing from the air. Old negative glass works well for making the holder. —Contributed by R. B. Cole, New Haven, Conn.
Holder for Skates while Sharpening
The base of the holder is cut from a board and should be about 3 in. longer than the skate. Two clamps are cut as shown at A, from metal of sufficient thickness to hold the skate firmly, then bent to shape and attached to the baseboard with bolts having wing nuts, as shown at B and C.
The base of the holder is cut from a board and should be about 3 inches longer than the skate. Two clamps are cut as shown at A, from metal thick enough to hold the skate securely, then bent into shape and attached to the baseboard with bolts and wing nuts, as shown at B and C.

The Holder Provides a Way to Grind a Slight Curve in the Edge of a Skate Blade
The Holder Offers a Method to Sharpen a Slight Curve on the Edge of a Skate Blade
One edge of the board is provided with two pins, D and E, solidly fastened, which are of sufficient height to bring the center of the blade on a level with the grinder axle. An adjusting screw, F, is provided for the grinder base to adjust the skate blade accurately. The support G is for use on baseboards where skates with strap heels, H, are to be sharpened. The shape of the clamp for this support is shown at J.
One side of the board has two pins, D and E, securely attached, which are tall enough to align the blade's center with the grinder axle. An adjusting screw, F, is included for the grinder base to accurately set the skate blade. The support G is used on baseboards where skates with strap heels, H, need to be sharpened. The design of the clamp for this support is shown at J.
When the skate is securely clamped to the base the blade can be easily "hollow ground" or given a slight curve on the edge.—Contributed by C. G. Smith, Brooklyn, N. Y.
When the skate is firmly clamped to the base, the blade can be easily "hollow ground" or given a slight curve on the edge. —Contributed by C. G. Smith, Brooklyn, N. Y.
A Homemade Direct-View Finder for Cameras
Every hand camera and most of the tripod cameras are equipped with finders of one type or another, and usually one in which the image of the field is reflected upward on a small ground glass—being, in fact, a miniature camera obscura. The later and generally more approved style of finder has a small concave lens conveniently set on the outer edge of the camera. When this direct-vision type of finder is used, the camera is held so that the finder is at the height of the eye, a condition that is particularly desirable. When in a crowd, of course, the professional and many amateurs are familiar with the method of holding the camera inverted over the head and looking up into the finder to determine the range of the field. Even this method is inconvenient, often impractical.
Every handheld camera and most tripod cameras come with some type of viewfinder, usually one that reflects the image of the scene onto a small piece of ground glass—essentially, a mini camera obscura. The later and generally favored style of viewfinder features a small concave lens conveniently placed on the outer edge of the camera. When using this direct-vision type of viewfinder, the camera is held so that the viewfinder is at eye level, which is particularly ideal. In a crowd, of course, professionals and many enthusiasts are familiar with the technique of holding the camera upside down over their head and looking up into the viewfinder to check the area they want to capture. However, even this method can be inconvenient and often impractical.
The up-to-date newspaper photographer insists on having his camera equipped with direct finders, as it saves him much trouble and many failures. Anyone with a little ingenuity can change one of the old-type finders into a combination device, either direct or indirect. The sketches are self-explanatory, but it may be said that Fig. 1 represents a box camera with a regulation finder set in one corner of the box. To make it a direct finder, a small brass hinge is used. Cut off part of one wing, leaving a stub just long enough to be attached to the front of the camera directly above the lens of the finder and so as not to interfere with it, and high enough to permit the other wing to be turned down on the ground glass, with space allowed for the thin glass mirror A, that is to be glued to the under side of the long wing. The joint of the hinge should work quite stiffly in order to keep it from jarring out of any position in which it may be set.
The modern newspaper photographer insists on having his camera equipped with direct finders, as it saves him a lot of trouble and many mistakes. Anyone with a bit of creativity can modify one of the old-style finders into a combination device, either direct or indirect. The sketches are self-explanatory, but it can be noted that Fig. 1 shows a box camera with a standard finder positioned in one corner of the box. To convert it into a direct finder, a small brass hinge is used. Cut off part of one wing, leaving a stub just long enough to attach to the front of the camera directly above the lens of the finder, ensuring it doesn't interfere and is high enough to allow the other wing to be turned down onto the ground glass, with space for the thin glass mirror A that will be glued to the underside of the long wing. The hinge joint should be quite stiff to prevent it from shifting out of any position it may be set in.

Two Types of Ordinary View Finders and Methods of Converting Them into Direct-View Finders
Two Types of Regular View Finders and Ways to Transform Them into Direct-View Finders
[55] If the wing is turned upward at an angle of 45 deg., the finder can be used as a direct-vision instrument when held at the height of the eyes. The image reflected from the small mirror is inverted, but this is no disadvantage to the photographer. The small pocket mirror given out for advertising purposes serves very well for making the reflecting mirror.
[55] If the wing is angled upward at 45 degrees, the finder can be used as a direct-vision tool when held at eye level. The image reflected from the small mirror is upside down, but this is not a problem for the photographer. The small pocket mirror provided for promotional purposes works great for creating the reflecting mirror.
The finder shown in Fig. 2 is another very common kind, and one that is readily converted into the direct type by inserting a close-fitting mirror, B, on the inside of the shield to be used as a reflector of the finder image. If the mirror is too thick, it may interfere with the closing of the shield, though in many cases this is not essential, but if it should be necessary to close down the shield in order to fold the camera, it can usually be readjusted to accommodate the mirror.
The finder shown in Fig. 2 is another very common type, and it can easily be converted into the direct type by inserting a snug-fitting mirror, B, inside the shield to reflect the finder image. If the mirror is too thick, it might block the shield from closing, although in many cases this isn’t crucial. However, if it becomes necessary to close the shield in order to fold the camera, it can typically be readjusted to fit the mirror.
A Non-Rolling Spool
Bend a piece of wire in the shape shown in the illustration and attach it to a spool of thread. The ends of the wire should clamp the spool slightly and the loop in the wire will keep it from rolling. Place the end of the thread through the loop in the wire and it will not become tangled.—Contributed by J. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
Bend a piece of wire into the shape shown in the illustration and attach it to a spool of thread. The ends of the wire should grip the spool lightly, and the loop in the wire will prevent it from rolling. Thread the end of the thread through the loop in the wire to keep it from getting tangled. —Contributed by J. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.

How to Make a Cartridge Belt
Procure a leather belt, about 2-1/2 in. wide and long enough to reach about the waist, also a piece of leather, 1 in. wide and twice as long as the belt. Attach a buckle to one end of the belt and rivet one end of the narrow piece to the belt near the buckle. Cut two slits in the belt, a distance apart equal to the diameter of the cartridge. Pass the narrow leather piece through one slit and back through the other, thus forming a loop on the belt to receive a cartridge. About 1/4 in. from the first loop form another by cutting two more slits and passing the leather through them as described, and so on, until the belt has loops along its whole length.
Get a leather belt that's about 2-1/2 inches wide and long enough to reach your waist, plus a piece of leather that’s 1 inch wide and twice as long as the belt. Attach a buckle to one end of the belt and rivet one end of the narrow piece to the belt close to the buckle. Cut two slits in the belt, spaced apart equal to the diameter of the cartridge. Thread the narrow leather piece through one slit and back through the other, creating a loop on the belt to hold a cartridge. About 1/4 inch from the first loop, make another by cutting two more slits and threading the leather through them as described. Repeat this until the belt has loops all along its length.

Two Pieces of Leather of Different Widths Forming a Belt for Holding Cartridges
Two pieces of leather of different widths making a belt for holding cartridges.
The end of the narrow leather can be riveted to the belt or used in the buckle as desired, the latter way providing an adjustment for cartridges of different sizes.—Contributed by Robert Pound, Lavina, Mont.
The end of the narrow leather can be attached to the belt or used in the buckle as preferred, with the latter option allowing for adjustments for cartridges of different sizes.—Contributed by Robert Pound, Lavina, Mont.
Removing Iodine Stains
A good way to chemically remove iodine stains from the hands or linen is to wash the stains in a strong solution of hyposulphite of sodium, known as "hypo," which is procurable at any photographic-supply dealer's or drug store.
A good way to remove iodine stains from your hands or fabric is to wash the stains with a strong solution of sodium hyposulphite, commonly called "hypo," which you can find at any photography supply store or drugstore.
There is no danger of using too strong a solution, but the best results are obtained with a mixture of 1 oz. of hypo to 2 oz. of water.
There’s no risk in using a solution that’s too strong, but you’ll get the best results with a mix of 1 oz. of hypo to 2 oz. of water.
Bed-Cover Fasteners
The arrangement shown in the sketch is easily made and will keep the bed covers in place. The covers are provided with eyelets, either sewed, A, or brass eyelets, B, 6 or 8 in. apart along the edge. A wood strip, C, 3 by 1-1/2 in., is cut as long as the width of the bed and fastened to the frame with wire, bolts, or wedges. Screwhooks, about 1-1/4 in. long, are turned into the strip so that they will match with the eyelets placed in the covers. Thus the covers will be kept in place when the bed is occupied, and the bed is also easily made up.—Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
The setup shown in the sketch is simple to make and will keep the bed covers secure. The covers have eyelets, either sewn in, A, or brass eyelets, B, spaced 6 or 8 inches apart along the edge. A wooden strip, C, measuring 3 by 1-1/2 inches, is cut to the width of the bed and attached to the frame using wire, bolts, or wedges. Screw hooks, about 1-1/4 inches long, are screwed into the strip so they align with the eyelets in the covers. This way, the covers will stay in place when the bed is occupied, and making the bed is also easy.—Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.

The Hooks Prevent the Covers from Slipping Off the Sleeper and Keep Them Straight on the Bed
The hooks stop the covers from sliding off the bed and keep them straight on the mattress.
Collar Fasteners

An excellent fastener to be used on soft collars can be assembled from an ordinary paper fastener and two shoe buttons of the desired color. This device keeps the soft collar in good shape at the front, and serves the purpose just as well as a more expensive collar fastener. The illustration shows how it is used.—Contributed by B. E. Ahlport, Oakland, Cal.
An excellent fastener for soft collars can be made using a regular paper fastener and two shoe buttons in your preferred color. This setup keeps the soft collar looking neat at the front and works just as well as a pricier collar fastener. The illustration shows how it’s used.—Contributed by B. E. Ahlport, Oakland, Cal.
Operating a Bathroom Light Automatically
A device for automatically turning an electric light on and off when entering and leaving the room is illustrated in the sketch. A pull-chain lamp socket is placed upon the wall or ceiling, and is connected to a screw hook in the door by a cord and several rubber bands, as shown.
A device that automatically turns an electric light on and off when you enter and leave a room is shown in the sketch. A pull-chain lamp socket is mounted on the wall or ceiling and is connected to a screw hook on the door by a cord and several rubber bands, as illustrated.

Operating the Electric Lamp Switch or Key by the Opening of the Door
Operating the Electric Lamp Switch or Key by Opening the Door
When the door is opened, the lamp is lit, and when leaving the room the opening of the door again turns it out. The hook should be placed quite close to the edge of the door, to reduce the length of the movement, and even then it is too much for the length of the pull required to operate the switch, hence the need of the rubber bands.
When the door opens, the lamp turns on, and when leaving the room, the door opening turns it off again. The hook should be positioned very near the edge of the door to shorten the movement, but even then, it still requires too much pull to operate the switch, which is why rubber bands are necessary.
The lamp chain pulls out just 1 in., and consequently the lamp is lit when the door is opened part way; and swinging the door farther only stretches the rubber. This is an advantage, however, because the lamp is sure to light regardless of the swing of the door. If no rubber were used, the door would have to open just a certain distance each time.
The lamp chain pulls out just 1 inch, and because of that, the lamp turns on when the door is partially opened; swinging the door farther just stretches the rubber. This is actually a benefit since the lamp will definitely light up no matter how far the door swings. If there was no rubber used, the door would need to open exactly the same distance each time.
If the cord is connected to the hook with a loop or a ring, it may be easily disconnected during the day when not needed. A light coil spring may be used in place of the rubbers.—Contributed by C. M. Rogers, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
If the cord is hooked up with a loop or a ring, it can be easily disconnected during the day when it's not needed. A light coil spring can be used instead of the rubber bands.—Contributed by C. M. Rogers, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
A Finger-Ring Trick

A coin soldered to some inexpensive ring, or a piece of brass cut from tubing, will make an interesting surprise coin for friends. The ring when placed on the middle finger with the coin in the palm makes the trick complete. Ask some one if he has ever seen such a coin, or say it is a very old one, as the date is almost worn away. He will try to pick it up, but will find it fast to the finger.—Contributed by Wm. Jenkins, New York City.
A coin attached to a cheap ring, or a piece of brass cut from a tube, will create an interesting surprise coin for friends. When the ring is worn on the middle finger with the coin in the palm, the trick is complete. Ask someone if they’ve ever seen such a coin, or mention it’s a very old one since the date is nearly worn off. They’ll try to pick it up but will discover it’s stuck to the finger.—Contributed by Wm. Jenkins, New York City.
Preventing Marks from Basting Threads on Wool
In making up woolen garments it is necessary to press portions of them before removing the basting threads. Sometimes the marks of the basting threads show after the pressing. This can be avoided by using silk thread for basting instead of the usual cotton thread. The silk thread will not leave any marks.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Gainesville, Ga.
When creating woolen garments, it's important to press certain areas before taking out the basting threads. Sometimes, the basting thread marks can remain after pressing. You can prevent this by using silk thread for basting instead of the typical cotton thread. The silk thread won't leave any marks. —Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Gainesville, Ga.
Cranberries will keep fresh for weeks if placed in water in a cool place.
Cranberries will stay fresh for weeks if you put them in water and keep them in a cool spot.
Skating Merry-Go-Round
By Henry Burich
After once making and using the ice merry-go-round as illustrated, no pond will be complete unless it has one or more of these devices. To construct an amusement device of this kind, select a good pole that will reach to the bottom of the pond. The measurement can be obtained by cutting a hole in the ice at the desired place and dropping in a line weighted on one end. A sufficient length of the pole should be driven into the bottom of the pond to make it solid and allow the upper end to project above the surface of the ice at least 4 feet.
After making and using the ice merry-go-round as shown, no pond will feel complete without one or more of these devices. To create an amusement device like this, choose a sturdy pole that reaches the bottom of the pond. You can find the right length by cutting a hole in the ice where you want it and dropping in a line with a weight on one end. The pole should be driven deep enough into the bottom of the pond to ensure it's stable, with the top end sticking out above the ice surface by at least 4 feet.
A turning crosspiece for the upper end of the pole is made as follows: First prepare the end of the pole by sawing it off level, then cutting off the bark and making it round for a metal ring which should be driven on tightly. A pin, about 3/4 in. in diameter, is then driven into a hole bored in the end of the pole. The crosspiece is made of 2 by 6-in. material, at least 18 ft. long. A hole is bored in the center to receive the pin in the pole end.
A turning crosspiece for the top of the pole is made like this: First, cut the end of the pole flat, then strip off the bark and shape it into a circle so a metal ring can be fitted on tightly. Next, drive a pin, about 3/4 inch in diameter, into a hole drilled in the end of the pole. The crosspiece is made from 2 by 6-inch lumber, at least 18 feet long. Drill a hole in the center to fit the pin from the pole end.

Skaters Holding the Rope Ends are Drawn Around in a Circle Rapidly by the Revolving Crosspiece, Turned near the Center by Other Skaters
Skaters holding the ends of a rope are quickly pulled around in a circle by the spinning crosspiece, which is turned near the center by other skaters.
The crosspiece is easily pushed around the pole and the faster it goes the closer to the center the pushers can travel. Ropes can be tied to the ends of the crosspiece for the skaters to hold on to as they are propelled around in a circle.
The crossbar can be easily moved around the pole, and the faster it goes, the closer the pushers can get to the center. Ropes can be tied to the ends of the crossbar for the skaters to hold onto as they're spun around in a circle.
Relieving Air Pressure When Closing Record Boxes
The ordinary pasteboard boxes for holding phonograph records are very hard to close, due to the air pressure on the inside. I overcome this difficulty by making three small holes in the cover with a pin.—Contributed by Robert Bandul, New Orleans, La.
The regular cardboard boxes for holding phonograph records are really hard to close because of the air pressure inside. I solve this problem by making three small holes in the cover with a pin.—Contributed by Robert Bandul, New Orleans, La.
A Steering Sled

The Extra Runner in Front is Pivoted, and When Turned, Guides the Sled
The extra runner in front is pivoted, and when turned, it guides the sled.
An ordinary hand sled can be easily converted into a sled that can be guided like a bobsled by the addition of one extra runner. To attach this runner, a piece of wood is fastened to the under side and in the center at the front end of the sled top. A runner with a crosspiece on top is pivoted to the extending wood piece, which should be of a length to make the position comfortable when the coaster, sitting on the sled top, has his feet on the ends of the crosspiece. Careful measurements should be made to have the lower edge of the runner on a level with or a little lower than the sled runners.
An ordinary hand sled can easily be turned into a sled that can be steered like a bobsled by adding one extra runner. To attach this runner, a piece of wood is secured to the underside and in the center at the front end of the sled top. A runner with a crosspiece on top is attached to the extending wood piece, which should be long enough to ensure a comfortable position when the person sitting on the sled top has their feet on the ends of the crosspiece. Careful measurements should be taken to ensure the lower edge of the runner is level with or slightly lower than the sled runners.
To Hold a Straw Hat on the Head

The Rubber Bands are Linked Like a Lock Stitch and Fastened in the Band
The rubber bands are connected like a lock stitch and secured in the band.
On windy days it is almost impossible to make a straw hat stay on the head. To avoid this trouble, place rubber bands through the sweatband. Before inserting, make them into loops, as shown, and draw enough to be comfortable to the head. This device will save a good many steps when the wind blows.—Contributed by T. D. Hall, Fort Worth, Texas.
On windy days, it's nearly impossible to keep a straw hat on your head. To avoid this hassle, thread rubber bands through the sweatband. Before inserting them, form them into loops, as shown, and adjust them to be comfortably snug around your head. This trick will save you a lot of hassle when the wind picks up. —Contributed by T. D. Hall, Fort Worth, Texas.
Carrying Fishhooks in a Cane Pole
The person using a cane pole for fishing can easily provide a place for the hooks and sinkers in the first large joint of the pole. Cut the cane off just above the first large joint, and it will leave a space, 4 or 5 in. long, which can be used for the hooks and sinkers. A cork is fitted in the end, to hold them in place.—Contributed by Victor E. Carpenter, South Bend, Ind.
The person using a fishing pole can easily create a spot for the hooks and sinkers in the first large joint of the pole. Cut the pole just above the first large joint, and it will leave a space about 4 or 5 inches long that can hold the hooks and sinkers. A cork is placed at the end to keep them secure.—Contributed by Victor E. Carpenter, South Bend, Ind.
Drying Small Laundered Articles
Where mechanical drying is not in use it takes considerable time to hang out a number of handkerchiefs, laces, collars, etc., and very often the wind will blow away many of them. The task of drying these articles is made light by using a bag of mosquito netting with the articles placed in it and hung on a line. The air can pass through the netting and when the articles are dry it does not take long to take them out.—Contributed by Edward P. Braun, Philadelphia, Pa.
Where mechanical drying isn't used, it takes a lot of time to hang up several handkerchiefs, laces, collars, etc., and often the wind blows away many of them. The task of drying these items is much easier by using a bag made of mosquito netting, with the items placed inside and hung on a line. The air can flow through the netting, and when the items are dry, it doesn't take long to take them out.—Contributed by Edward P. Braun, Philadelphia, Pa.
Decorative Wood Panels
Procure an unplaned board that is deeply scored by the teeth of the saw and mark an outline of the desired figure on its surface. Sandpaper the background lightly, cut in a moon and smooth down the tree trunks. The background can be smoothed with a sharp chisel, or large portions planed, but in all cases leave the foliage rough.
Get an unplaned board that has deep saw marks and sketch the outline of the figure you want on its surface. Lightly sand the background, cut out a moon shape, and smooth the tree trunks. You can smooth the background with a sharp chisel or plane large areas, but in all cases, keep the foliage rough.
Finish the surfaces with oils or stains, applying colors to suit the parts; a piece of dried red cedar, oiled, will produce a warm red, and a green red cedar, oiled, becomes soft yellow, each producing a very pretty effect. These panels offer unlimited opportunity for originality in design and color finishing of different woods.—Contributed by Mrs. Wm. Donovan, Seattle, Wash.
Finish the surfaces with oils or stains, applying colors that match the different parts; a piece of dried red cedar, when oiled, will create a warm red, and green red cedar, when oiled, turns into a soft yellow, each creating a very nice effect. These panels provide endless opportunities for unique designs and color finishes in various woods.—Contributed by Mrs. Wm. Donovan, Seattle, Wash.

The Designs are Worked into the Unfinished Surface of Boards with Sandpaper, Sharp Chisels and a Plane, and Then Colored with Dyes to Produce the Desired Effect
The designs are created on the unfinished surface of boards using sandpaper, sharp chisels, and a plane, then colored with dyes to achieve the desired effect.
Fishing-Rod Making and Angling
By Stillman Taylor
Part I—A One-Piece Casting Rod
The pleasures of outdoor life are most keenly enjoyed by those sportsmen who are familiar with all the little tricks—the "ins and outs"—of the open. It is the active participation in any chosen sport which makes the sport well worth while, for the enjoyment gleaned from little journeys to forest and stream largely rests with the outer's own knowledge of his sport. Not all of the fun of fishing lies in the catching of the fish, since the satisfaction which comes through handling a well-balanced rod and tackle must be reckoned the chief contributor to the outing. In other words, the pleasures of fishing do not depend so much upon the number of fish caught, as the manner in which the person fishes for them. The rod is naturally the first and important consideration in the angler's kit, and it is the purpose of these articles to set forth, at first, a few hints which my own long experience leads me to think may be of some assistance to those anglers who enjoy making and repairing their own rods and tackle, to be followed, later, by some suggestions on the art of angling generally. The hints given are merely my own methods, and while they may not be the best way of accomplishing the desired end, a good fishing rod may be constructed. Like the majority of amateurs, I have achieved the desired results with a few common tools, namely, a saw, plane, jackknife, file, and sandpaper. These simple tools are really all that is needed to turn out a serviceable and well-finished rod of excellent action.
The joys of outdoor life are most fully appreciated by those sports enthusiasts who know all the little tips—the "ins and outs"—of the great outdoors. It's the active involvement in any chosen sport that makes it truly worthwhile, as the enjoyment gained from little trips to the woods and streams mostly depends on the person's own understanding of their sport. The fun of fishing isn't just about catching fish; the satisfaction that comes from using a well-balanced rod and tackle is a major part of the experience. In other words, the enjoyment of fishing isn't so much about how many fish you catch, but how you go about catching them. The rod is, of course, the first and most important part of an angler's gear, and the purpose of these articles is to share a few tips based on my own extensive experience that may help those anglers who like to make and repair their own rods and tackle, followed later by some general advice on the art of fishing. The tips I provide are just my personal methods, and while they might not be the best way to achieve the goal, you can definitely build a good fishing rod. Like many hobbyists, I've gotten the results I wanted with just a few basic tools: a saw, plane, pocket knife, file, and sandpaper. These simple tools are really all you need to create a functional and well-made rod with great performance.
Kind of Material
The great elasticity and durability of the split-cane or split-bamboo rod cannot be easily disputed. The handmade split bamboo is unquestionably the best rod for every kind of fishing, but it is also the most expensive and the most difficult material for the amateur to work. In making the first rod or two, the beginner will be better satisfied with the results in making a good solid-wood rod. Of course, glued-up split-bamboo butts, joints, and tip stock may be purchased, and if the angler is determined to have only bamboo, it is advisable to purchase these built-up sections rather than to risk certain failure by attempting to glue the cane. However, there are several good woods particularly well adapted for rod making, and while slightly inferior to the finest bamboo in elasticity and spring, the carefully made solid-wood rod is good enough for any angler and will probably suit the average fisherman as well as any rod that can be purchased.
The great flexibility and durability of split-cane or split-bamboo rods are hard to argue against. Handmade split bamboo is definitely the best rod for all types of fishing, but it’s also the priciest and the most challenging material for a beginner to work with. When making their first rod or two, newcomers will likely find better satisfaction by creating a solid-wood rod. Naturally, pre-made split-bamboo butts, joints, and tip sections can be bought, and if the angler insists on using only bamboo, it’s wise to opt for these ready-made parts instead of risking failure by trying to glue the cane together. However, there are several excellent types of wood that are especially suited for rod making, and while they might be slightly less elastic and springy than the finest bamboo, a well-crafted solid-wood rod is more than sufficient for any angler and will probably meet the needs of the average fisherman just as well as any rod available for purchase.
Bethabara, or washaba, a native wood of British Guinea, makes a fine rod, but it is a heavy wood, very hard, and for this reason is perhaps less desirable than all other woods. With the single exception of snakewood it is the heaviest wood for rod making and is only used for short bait-casting rods. Possessing considerable strength Bethabara can be worked quite slender, and a 5-ft. casting tip can be safely made of 5 oz. weight.
Bethabara, or washaba, is a native wood from British Guinea that makes a great rod, but it’s quite heavy and very hard, which might make it less desirable than other woods. With the exception of snakewood, it’s the heaviest wood used for making rods and is only suitable for short bait-casting rods. Despite being heavy, Bethabara is strong enough to be crafted into a slim design, and you can safely create a 5-ft. casting tip that weighs 5 oz.
Greenheart, a South American wood, is popular alike with manufacturers and amateur rod makers, and 90 per-cent of the better class of solid-wood rods are made of this material. It resembles Bethabara in color, but is lighter in weight, although it apparently possesses about the same strength and elasticity. In point of fact, there is little, if any, choice between these woods, and providing sound and well-selected wood is used, the merits of a rod made of Bethabara or greenheart are more likely to be due to the careful workmanship of the maker than to the variety of the wood used.
Greenheart, a South American wood, is popular among both manufacturers and hobbyist rod makers, with 90% of high-quality solid wood rods made from this material. It looks similar to Bethabara in color but is lighter in weight, while still offering comparable strength and elasticity. In reality, there’s hardly any difference between these woods, and as long as solid, well-selected wood is used, the advantages of a rod made from Bethabara or greenheart are more likely a result of the maker's craftsmanship than the type of wood used.
Dagame, or dagama, a native of the forests of Cuba, is in many respects the ideal material for rod making, as it has strength and elasticity. This wood is straight-grained and free from [60] knots, which makes it easily worked; it polishes well and is durable. While there is always more or less difficulty about procuring first-class Bethabara and greenheart, dagame of good quality is easily obtained.
Dagame, or dagama, is a native wood from the forests of Cuba and is in many ways the perfect material for making rods, thanks to its strength and flexibility. This wood has a straight grain and is free from [60] knots, making it easy to work with; it takes polish well and lasts a long time. Although it's often challenging to find top-quality Bethabara and greenheart, quality dagame is readily available.
Lancewood is much used in turning out the cheaper grades of fishing rods, but it is somewhat soft and has a marked tendency to take set under the strain of fishing and warp out of shape. It is less expensive than the other woods, and while it has a straight and even grain, there are numerous small knots present which make this material less satisfactory to work than the other woods. For heavy sea rods, lancewood may serve the purpose fairly well, but for the smaller fishing tools this material is inferior to Bethabara, greenheart, and dagame. Other woods are often used, and while a good rod may be frequently made from almost any of them, the three mentioned are held in the highest esteem by the angling fraternity. For the first rod, the amateur will make no mistake in selecting dagame, whether the slender fly rod or the more easily constructed short bait-casting tool is to be made.
Lancewood is commonly used for producing the cheaper grades of fishing rods, but it’s somewhat soft and tends to take a bend under fishing strain, warping out of shape. It’s less expensive than other woods, and while it has a straight and even grain, there are many small knots that make it less satisfactory to work with compared to other woods. For heavy sea rods, lancewood may work fairly well, but for smaller fishing tools, it’s not as good as Bethabara, greenheart, and dagame. Other woods are often used too, and while you can often make a decent rod from almost any of them, the three mentioned are highly regarded by anglers. For the first rod, a beginner won’t go wrong choosing dagame, whether they’re making a slender fly rod or a simpler short bait-casting tool.
The Necessary Tools
The construction of a thoroughly well-made and nicely balanced rod is more a matter of careful work than outfit, but a few suitable tools will greatly facilitate the labor. A good firm workbench, or table, 4 ft. or more in length, will be needed. A regulation bench vise will come in handy, but one of the small iron vises will do very well. A couple of iron planes, one of medium size for rough planing-up work, and a small 4-in. block plane for finishing, will be required. As the cutters of the planes must be kept as sharp as possible to do good work, a small oilstone—preferably one in a wood case with cover to keep out dust—will be needed; a coarse single-cut mill file about 16 in. long; a few sheets of No. 1 and No. 0 sandpaper; a sheet or two of fine emery cloth; a small thin "back" or other saw, and a steel cabinet scraper.
The construction of a well-made and nicely balanced rod depends more on careful work than on equipment, but having the right tools can really make the job easier. You’ll need a sturdy workbench or table that’s at least 4 feet long. A standard bench vise is useful, but a small iron vise will work just fine. You’ll also need a couple of iron planes: a medium-sized one for rough planing and a small 4-inch block plane for finishing. Since the cutters of the planes need to be kept as sharp as possible for effective work, a small oilstone—preferably one in a wooden case with a cover to keep out dust—will be essential. You’ll also need a coarse single-cut mill file, about 16 inches long; a few sheets of No. 1 and No. 0 sandpaper; a couple of sheets of fine emery cloth; a small thin "back" or other saw, and a steel cabinet scraper.

Two Tools for Gauging the Diameter of the Rods, and a Homemade Scraper (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Two Tools for Measuring the Diameter of the Rods, and a DIY Scraper (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A caliper of some kind is a necessity, and while the best is a micrometer, Fig. 1, registering to a thousandth part of an inch, as well as indicating 8ths, 16ths, 32ds, and 64ths, this tool is somewhat expensive, but a very good caliper may be had in the sliding-arm type, Fig. 2, with the scale graduated to 64ths and taking work up to 2 in. in diameter. Cheaper measuring gauges are to be had in plenty, but as the brass and boxwood scales are provided only with coarse graduations, the better quality of mechanics' tools will give better satisfaction.
A caliper of some sort is essential, and while the best option is a micrometer, Fig. 1, which can measure to a thousandth of an inch and also shows measurements in 8ths, 16ths, 32nds, and 64ths, this tool can be quite pricey. However, a decent quality caliper can be found in the sliding-arm style, Fig. 2, which has a scale marked to 64ths and can handle work up to 2 inches in diameter. There are plenty of cheaper measuring gauges available, but since the brass and boxwood scales only come with coarse graduations, higher-quality mechanics' tools will provide better results.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
The set of grooved planes used by the professional rod makers are rather expensive, although they are most convenient for quickly rounding up the rod to the desired diameter. However, the beginner may dispense with the planes by making the tool illustrated in Fig. 3. To make this handy little tool purchase a steel wood scraper, such as cabinetmakers use, and file a series of grooves along the edges with a round file. File at right angles to the steel, finishing up with a finer file to give a sharp cutting edge. The tool thus made is very handy for scraping the rod after it has been roughly rounded with the plane. Its use will be mentioned later on in the description.
The set of grooved planes used by professional rod makers is pretty pricey, but they are really useful for quickly shaping the rod to the right diameter. However, beginners can skip the planes by making the tool shown in Fig. 3. To create this handy little tool, buy a steel wood scraper, like the ones cabinetmakers use, and file a series of grooves along the edges with a round file. File at a right angle to the steel, finishing up with a finer file to create a sharp cutting edge. The tool you make this way is very useful for scraping the rod after it has been roughly shaped with the plane. Its use will be discussed later in the description.
Five-Foot Bait-Casting Rod
The short one-piece bait-casting rod with but one ferrule is the easiest rod to make, and for this reason the beginner will do well to select this popular type for the first attempt. As the total length of the rod is to measure [61] 5 ft., exclusive of the agate tip, the wood should be 1 or 2 in. longer to allow for cutting down to 60 inches.
The short one-piece bait-casting rod with just one ferrule is the easiest rod to make, and for this reason, beginners should choose this popular type for their first attempt. Since the total length of the rod should measure [61] 5 ft., excluding the agate tip, the wood should be 1 or 2 in. longer to allow for trimming down to 60 inches.
Having selected a good strip of dagame, 5/8 in. square, run the plane along each side and from both ends. This will determine the direction in which the grain runs. Drill two holes at the end decided upon for the butt, spacing them about 1/4 in. from the end, as shown in Fig. 4. Drive a stout brad in the corner of the bench top and hook the butt end over the nail. By rigging the stick up in this manner it will be securely held, and planing may be done with the grain with greater ease and accuracy than when the end of the stick is butted up against a cleat nailed to the bench top.
Having chosen a good piece of 5/8 inch square wood, run the plane along each side and from both ends. This will show you the direction in which the grain runs. Drill two holes at the end you decide will be the butt, spacing them about 1/4 inch from the end, as shown in Fig. 4. Drive a sturdy brad into the corner of the bench top and hook the butt end over the nail. By securing the stick this way, it will be held firmly, and planing can be done with the grain more easily and accurately than if you just butted the end of the stick against a cleat nailed to the bench top.
The wood should be planed straight and true from end to end and calipered until it is 1/2 in. square. It may appear crooked, but this need not trouble one at this stage of the work, since it may be made perfectly straight later on. Overlook any kinks, and do not attempt to straighten the stick by planing more from one side than the other. The chief thing to be done is to fashion a square stick, and when the caliper shows the approximate diameter, draw crosslines at the ends to find the center.
The wood should be planed straight and true from end to end and measured until it is 1/2 inch square. It might look crooked, but don’t worry about that at this stage, as it can be made perfectly straight later. Ignore any kinks, and don’t try to fix the stick by planing more off one side than the other. The main task is to create a square stick, and when the caliper shows the approximate width, draw crosslines at the ends to locate the center.
The length of the hand grasp should be marked out. If a double grasp is wanted, allow 12 in. from the butt end. This will afford an 11-in. hand grasp after sawing off the end in which the holes were drilled. For a single hand grasp make an allowance of 11 in. However, the double grasp—with cork above and below the reel seat—is preferred by most anglers because it affords a better grip for the hand when reeling in the line. Mark the hand-grasp distance by running a knife mark around the rod 12 in. from the butt end.
The length of the hand grip should be measured out. If you want a double grip, leave 12 inches from the butt end. This gives you an 11-inch hand grip after cutting off the end where the holes were drilled. For a single hand grip, make a mark at 11 inches. However, most anglers prefer the double grip—with cork above and below the reel seat—because it provides a better hold for your hand when reeling in the line. Mark the hand-grip distance by making a knife mark around the rod 12 inches from the butt end.

Diagram or Layout for a One-Piece Bait-Casting Rod, Showing Calipered Dimensions for Each Six Inches of Length. A Paper Pattern of Any Rod may be Drawn Up, Providing the Amateur Rod Maker Has a Rod to Use for a Pattern, or Possesses the Exact Diameter of the Rod at Intervals of Six Inches along Its Length (Fig. 5)
Diagram or Layout for a One-Piece Bait-Casting Rod, Showing Measured Dimensions for Every Six Inches of Length. A Paper Pattern for Any Rod can be Created, as Long as the Amateur Rod Maker Has a Rod to Use as a Model, or Knows the Exact Diameter of the Rod at Six-Inch Intervals Along Its Length (Fig. 5)
Lay out a diagram showing the full length of the rod by placing a strip of paper—the unprinted back of a strip of wall paper is just the thing—on the bench and drawing two lines from the diameter of the butt to that of the tip. While the caliber of casting rods differs somewhat, the dimensions given will suit the average angler, and I would advise the beginner to make the rod to these measurements. For the butt, draw a line, exactly 1/2 in. long, across the paper and from the center of this line run a straight pencil mark at right angles to the tip end, or 60 in. distant, at which point another crossline is drawn, exactly 1/8 in. long, to represent the diameter. Connect the ends of these two crosslines to make a long tapering form. Divide this pattern into eight equal parts, beginning at 12 in. from the butt end, marking a crossline at every 6 in. This layout is shown exaggerated in Fig. 5. If it is desired to copy a certain rod, find the diameter at the several 6-in. stations with the caliper and write them down at the corresponding sections of the paper diagram. However, if a splendid all-around casting rod is desired, it is perfectly safe to follow the dimensions given in Fig. 5, which show the manner of dividing the paper pattern into the equal parts and the final diameter of the rod at each 6-in. station, or line.
Lay out a diagram that shows the full length of the rod by placing a strip of paper—the unprinted back of wallpaper is perfect—on the table and drawing two lines from the diameter of the butt to that of the tip. While the thickness of casting rods varies a bit, the dimensions provided will work for the average angler, and I suggest beginners follow these measurements for their rod. For the butt, draw a line that is exactly 1/2 inch long across the paper, and from the center of this line, draw a straight pencil line at a right angle to the tip end, which is 60 inches away, where you’ll draw another crossline that is exactly 1/8 inch long to represent the diameter. Connect the ends of these two crosslines to create a long, tapered shape. Divide this pattern into eight equal parts, starting 12 inches from the butt end, marking a crossline every 6 inches. This layout is exaggerated in Fig. 5. If you want to replicate a specific rod, measure the diameter at each 6-inch station with the caliper and write those numbers down at the corresponding sections of the paper diagram. However, if you want a great all-around casting rod, it’s perfectly fine to follow the dimensions provided in Fig. 5, which illustrates how to divide the paper pattern into equal parts and shows the final diameter of the rod at each 6-inch station or line.

Gauge Made of Sheet Brass Having Slots Corresponding in Length and Width with the Caliper-Layout Measurements (Fig. 6)
Gauge Made of Sheet Brass with Slots that Match the Length and Width of the Caliper Layout Measurements (Fig. 6)
Procure a small strip of thin brass, or zinc, and file nine slots on one edge to correspond in diameter with the width of the horizontal lines which indicate the diameter of the rod on the pattern. This piece is shown in Fig. 6. By making use of the pattern and the brass gauge, the rod may be given the desired taper and the work will proceed more quickly than if the caliper is alone relied upon to repeatedly check up the work.
Get a small strip of thin brass or zinc, and file nine slots on one edge to match the diameter of the horizontal lines that show the rod's diameter on the pattern. This piece is shown in Fig. 6. By using the pattern and the brass gauge, you can give the rod the desired taper, and the work will go faster than if you only use the caliper to check the work repeatedly.
When a good layout of the work is thus made, the next step is to carefully plane the stick so that it will be evenly tapered in the square. Plane with the grain and from the butt toward the tip end, and make frequent tests with caliper and gauge, noting the diameter every 6 in. Mark all the thick spots with a pencil, and plane lightly to reduce the wood to the proper diameter. Reduce the stick in this manner until all sides have an even taper from the butt to the tip. The stick should now be perfectly square with a nice, even taper. Test it by resting the tip end on the floor and bending it from the butt end. Note the arch it takes and see if it resumes its original shape when the pressure is released. If it does, the elasticity of the material is as it should be, but if it remains bent or takes "set," the wood is very likely to be imperfectly seasoned and the rod should be hung up in a warm closet, or near the kitchen stove, for a few weeks, to season.
When you have a good layout of the work, the next step is to carefully plane the stick so that it tapers evenly in a square shape. Plane with the grain and work from the thicker end toward the tip, making frequent measurements with a caliper and gauge, checking the diameter every 6 inches. Mark all the thicker spots with a pencil and plane lightly to get the wood to the right diameter. Continue reducing the stick in this way until all sides have a uniform taper from the thicker end to the tip. The stick should now be perfectly square with a nice, even taper. Test it by resting the tip on the floor and bending it from the thicker end. Observe the arch it forms and see if it returns to its original shape when you release the pressure. If it does, the material's elasticity is good; however, if it stays bent or takes a "set," the wood is likely not properly seasoned. In that case, hang it up in a warm closet or near the kitchen stove for a few weeks to season.
To facilitate the work of planing the stick to shape, a length of pine board with a groove in one edge will be found handy. A 5-ft. length of the ordinary tongue-and-groove board, about 1 in. thick, will be just the thing. As the tip of the rod is smaller than the butt, plane the groove in the board to make it gradually shallower to correspond to the taper of the rod. Nail this board, with the groove uppermost, to the edge of the workbench, and place the rod in the groove with one of the square corners up, which can be easily taken off with the finely set plane. Plane off the other three corners in a like manner, transforming the square stick into one of octagon form. This part of the work should be carefully done, and the stick frequently calipered at each 6-in. mark, to obtain the proper taper. It is important to make each of the eight sides as nearly uniform as the caliper and eye can do it. Set the cutter of the small plane very fine, lay the strip in the groove and plane off the corner the full length of the stick, then turn another corner uppermost and plane it off, and so on, until the stick is almost round and tapering gradually from the mark of the hand grasp to the tip.
To make it easier to shape the stick, you’ll need a piece of pine board with a groove on one edge. A 5-foot length of standard tongue-and-groove board, about 1 inch thick, works perfectly. Since the tip of the rod is thinner than the butt, you should plane the groove in the board to gradually get shallower to match the rod's taper. Attach this board, with the groove facing up, to the edge of the workbench, and place the rod in the groove with one of the square corners facing up, which can be easily removed with a finely tuned plane. Plane off the other three corners the same way, turning the square stick into an octagonal shape. This part of the work should be done carefully, and you should frequently measure the stick at every 6-inch mark to achieve the correct taper. It's important to make each of the eight sides as uniform as possible using calipers and your eye. Set the cutter of the small plane very fine, lay the stick in the groove, and plane off one corner the full length of the stick. Then turn another corner up and plane it off, and continue doing this until the stick is almost round and tapers gradually from where you hold it to the tip.
To make the rod perfectly round, use the steel scraper in which the grooves were filed and scrape the whole rod to remove any flat or uneven spots, and finish up by sandpapering it down smooth.
To make the rod perfectly round, use the steel scraper where the grooves were filed and scrape the entire rod to eliminate any flat or uneven spots, and finish by sanding it down smooth.
The action of the rod differs with the material used, and in trying out the action, it is well to tie on the tip and guides and affix the reel by a string in order to try a few casts. If the action seems about right, give the rod a final smoothing down with No. 0 sandpaper.
The action of the rod varies depending on the material used, and when testing the action, it's a good idea to tie on the tip and guides and secure the reel with a string to make a few casts. If the action feels right, finish the rod by giving it a final smooth with No. 0 sandpaper.

The Four Different Types of Hand Grasps Are a Wood Sleeve Bored to Fit the Butt of the Rod; the Built-Up Cork over a Wood Sleeve; a Cane-Wound Grasp, and the Double Cord-Wound Grasps with a Reel Seat between Them (Fig. 7)
The Four Different Types of Hand Grasps are a wooden sleeve shaped to fit the end of the rod; a built-up cork over a wooden sleeve; a cane-wound grip; and the double cord-wound grips with a reel seat in between them (Fig. 7)
For the hand grasp nothing is so good as solid cork, and while hand grasps may be purchased assembled, it is a simple matter to make them. In Fig. 7 are shown four kinds of handles, namely, a wood sleeve, or core, A, bored to fit the butt of the rod and shaped for winding the fishing cord; a built-up cork grasp, B, made by cementing cork washers over a wood sleeve, or directly to the butt of the rod; a cane-wound grip, C, mostly used for salt-water fishing, and the double-wound grip, D, made in one piece, then sawed apart in the center, the forward grip being glued in place after the reel seat is in position.
For the hand grip, nothing is better than solid cork, and while you can buy assembled hand grips, it’s easy to make them yourself. In Fig. 7, there are four types of handles shown: a wooden sleeve or core, A, drilled to fit the end of the rod and shaped for winding the fishing line; a built-up cork grip, B, made by gluing cork washers over a wooden sleeve or directly onto the end of the rod; a cane-wound grip, C, mostly used for saltwater fishing; and the double-wound grip, D, made in one piece and then cut in half, with the front grip glued in place after the reel seat is positioned.
To make a grip, select a number of cork washers, which may be obtained from dealers in the wholesale drug trade, or from any large fishing-tackle dealer. Make a tool for cutting a hole in their centers from a piece of tubing, or an old ferrule of the required diameter, by filing one edge sharp, then [63] covering the other end with several thicknesses of cloth. Turn this tube around in the cork like a wad cutter. If the cutter is sharp, a nice clean cut will result, but the opposite will likely occur if an attempt is made to hammer the tube through the cork.
To create a grip, choose several cork washers, which you can get from wholesale drug suppliers or any large fishing tackle store. Make a tool to cut a hole in the centers using a piece of tubing or an old ferrule of the right diameter. Sharpen one edge by filing it, and then cover the other end with multiple layers of cloth. Rotate this tube in the cork like a wad cutter. If the cutter is sharp, it will make a clean cut; however, trying to hammer the tube through the cork will probably lead to a messy result.
Having cut the butt end of the rod off square, about 1 in. from the end, or enough to remove the holes, smear a little hot glue on the end, drop a cork washer over the tip of the rod and work it down to the butt. Cut another cork, give the first one a coat of glue, slip the former over the tip and press the two together, and so on, until about 10 corks have been glued together in position. This will give a hand grasp a trifle over 5 in. long.
Having cut the end of the rod square, about 1 inch from the end, or enough to remove the holes, smear a little hot glue on the end, drop a cork washer over the tip of the rod, and work it down to the end. Cut another cork, give the first one a coat of glue, slide the second one over the tip, and press the two together, and so on, until about 10 corks have been glued together in place. This will create a grip that's just over 5 inches long.

The Corks Glued in Place on the Butt and the Wood Sleeve, or Reel-Seat Core, Ready to Slide Down and Glue in Position (Fig. 8)
The corks are glued in place on the butt, and the wood sleeve, or reel-seat core, is ready to slide down and be glued in position (Fig. 8)
A sleeve will be needed for the reel seat to slip over, and a soft-wood core of this sort can be purchased from any dealer in rod-making materials, or it can be made at home. For the material procure a piece of white pine, about 3/4 in. in diameter and 5 in. long. A section sawed from a discarded curtain roller will serve the purpose well. Bore a 15/32-in. hole through the piece and plane down the outside until it slips inside the reel seat. It should be well made and a good fit, and one end tapered to fit the taper of the reel seat, while the opposite end should be about 1/4 in. shorter than the reel seat. Slide this wood sleeve down the rod, as shown in Fig. 8, coat the rod and the upper part of the last cork with glue and force the sleeve tightly in place. A day or two should be allowed for the glue to set and thoroughly dry, before giving the hand grasp the final touches.
A sleeve will be needed for the reel seat to slide over, and you can buy a soft-wood core like this from any store that sells rod-making materials or make one at home. For the material, get a piece of white pine that’s about ¾ inch in diameter and 5 inches long. A section cut from an old curtain roller will work great. Drill a 15/32-inch hole through the piece and smooth down the outside until it fits snugly inside the reel seat. It should be well-made and fit well, with one end tapered to match the taper of the reel seat, while the other end should be about ¼ inch shorter than the reel seat. Slide this wood sleeve down the rod, as shown in Fig. 8, coat the rod and the upper part of the last cork with glue, and push the sleeve firmly into place. Allow a day or two for the glue to set and fully dry before giving the hand grip its final touches.
If a lathe is at hand, the hand grasp may be turned to any desired shape, but most anglers prefer a cylindrical-shaped grip, leaving the top cork untrimmed to form a kind of shoulder when the metal reel seat is pressed into the cork. If corks of 1-1/4-in. diameter are purchased, but little trimming will be necessary to work the hand grasp down to 1-1/16 in. in diameter. This size seems to fit the average hand about right. The lower corks will need a little trimming to fit the taper of the butt cap so that it may fit snugly in place. Cement the butt cap in place by heating the cap moderately hot, then rub a little of the melted ferrule cement inside the cap, and force it over the cork butt. When the cement has hardened, drive a small brass pin or brad through the cap, and file the ends off flush with the metal surface. All the guides, ferrules, and reel seat are shown in Fig. 9.
If you have a lathe, you can shape the hand grip any way you want, but most anglers prefer a cylindrical grip. They usually leave the top cork untrimmed to create a shoulder when the metal reel seat is pressed into it. If you buy corks with a diameter of 1-1/4 inches, you won’t need to trim much to reduce the hand grip down to 1-1/16 inches in diameter. This size seems to fit the average hand well. The lower corks will need some trimming to match the taper of the butt cap, so it fits securely. To attach the butt cap, heat it up a bit, apply some melted ferrule cement inside the cap, and press it over the cork butt. Once the cement has set, drive a small brass pin or brad through the cap and file the ends flush with the metal surface. All the guides, ferrules, and reel seat are shown in Fig. 9.
[64] The regulation metal reel seat is about 4-1/2 in. long, and in fitting it to the old type of bait rod, the covered hood is affixed to the upper end of the reel seat. This arrangement is satisfactory enough for the 9-ft. bait rod, but it is rather awkward in fitting it to the short bait-casting rod, as with the hood at the upper end the reel is pushed so far forward that it leaves 1 in. or more of the reel seat exposed, and the hand must grip this smooth metal instead of the cork. To avoid this, it is best to cut the reel seat down to 3-7/8 in. and affix the reel seat to the rod with the hood at the lower end near the hand. For a single hand grasp, a tapered winding check will be needed to make a neat finish and this should be ordered of the correct diameter to fit the reel seat at the lower end and the diameter of the rod at the other. In the double hand grasp the winding check is used to finish off the upper end of the cork, which is tapering to fit the rod at this point.
[64] The standard metal reel seat is about 4.5 inches long, and when attaching it to the old style of bait rod, the covered hood is placed at the top end of the reel seat. This setup works fine for the 9-foot bait rod, but it becomes a bit tricky when trying to fit it to a shorter bait-casting rod. With the hood at the top, the reel is pushed so far forward that it leaves an inch or more of the reel seat exposed, forcing your hand to grip smooth metal instead of cork. To prevent this, it's better to cut the reel seat down to 3.875 inches and attach the reel seat to the rod with the hood at the bottom end near your hand. For a single-handed grip, you'll need a tapered winding check to create a clean finish, and it should be ordered in the right diameter to fit the reel seat at the bottom end and match the rod's diameter at the other end. For a double-handed grip, the winding check is used to finish off the top end of the cork, which tapers to fit the rod at that point.
In assembling the reel seat, push it with the hooded end well down and work it into the cork to make a tight waterproof joint. Push the reel seat up the rod, coat the sleeve with cement and push the reel seat home. Drive a small pin through the hooded end and reel seat to make the whole rigid. This pin should not be driven through the rod or it will weaken it at this point. Just let it enter the wood a short distance to prevent the reel seat from turning.
In putting together the reel seat, push the hooded end down firmly and work it into the cork to create a tight, waterproof seal. Slide the reel seat up the rod, coat the sleeve with adhesive, and push the reel seat into place. Insert a small pin through the hooded end and the reel seat to keep everything secure. This pin shouldn’t go through the rod, as it would weaken that area; just let it penetrate the wood a little to stop the reel seat from twisting.
The upper or double grasp is fashioned after the reel seat is in position, and the corks are cemented on and pushed tightly together in the same manner as used in forming the lower grasp. The first cork should be pressed tightly against the upper end of the reel seat and turned about so that the metal may enter the cork and form a tight joint. As many corks as are required to form a grip of proper length are in turn cemented to each other and the rod. After the glue has become dry, the cork may be worked down and tapered to make a smooth, swelled grasp. The winding check is now cemented on, to make a neat finish between the upper grip and the rod.
The upper or double grip is shaped after the reel seat is in place, and the corks are glued on and pressed tightly together just like in creating the lower grip. The first cork should be pressed firmly against the top end of the reel seat and rotated so that the metal can embed into the cork and create a tight seal. As many corks as needed to achieve the right grip length are glued together and attached to the rod. Once the glue is dry, the cork can be shaped and tapered to create a smooth, tapered grip. The winding check is then glued on to provide a clean finish between the upper grip and the rod.
Before affixing the guides, go over the rod with fine sandpaper, then wet the wood to raise the grain, and repeat this operation, using old sandpaper. If an extra-fine polish is wanted, rub it down with powdered pumice and oil, or rottenstone and oil, and finish off with an oiled rag.
Before attaching the guides, sand the rod with fine sandpaper, then dampen the wood to raise the grain, and repeat this process using worn sandpaper. If you want an extra-fine finish, buff it with powdered pumice and oil, or rottenstone and oil, and then wipe it down with an oiled cloth.
To fit the agate tip, file down the end of the rod with a fine-cut file until it is a good fit in the metal tube. Melt a little of the ferrule cement and smear a little on the tip of the rod, then push the agate down in place.
To fit the agate tip, use a fine file to smooth down the end of the rod until it fits well in the metal tube. Melt a bit of the ferrule cement and apply a small amount to the tip of the rod, then press the agate into place.
Spar varnish is often used to protect the rod, but extra-light coach varnish gives a better gloss, and it is as durable and waterproof as any varnish. It is only necessary to purchase a quarter pint of the varnish, as a very small quantity is used. The final varnishing is, of course, done after the rod has been wound and the guides are permanently whipped in position. However, it is an excellent idea to fill the pores of the wood by rubbing it over with a cloth saturated in the varnish before the silk whippings are put on. Merely fill the cells of the wood and wipe off all surplus, leaving the rod clean and smooth.
Spar varnish is commonly used to protect the rod, but extra-light coach varnish provides a better shine, and it’s just as durable and waterproof as any varnish. You only need to buy a quarter pint of the varnish since a very small amount is used. The final varnishing is, of course, done after the rod has been wound and the guides are permanently wrapped in place. However, it’s a great idea to fill the wood's pores by wiping it down with a cloth soaked in varnish before applying the silk wrappings. Just fill the wood's cells and wipe off any excess, leaving the rod clean and smooth.
The guides may now be fastened in place, and for the 5-ft. rod, but two of them are necessary. The first guide should be placed 19-1/2 in. from the metal taper which finishes off the upper hand grasp, and the second guide spaced 15-1/2 in. from the first. By spacing the guides in this manner, the line will run through them with the least possible friction.
The guides can now be secured in place, and for the 5-ft. rod, only two are needed. The first guide should be positioned 19.5 inches from the metal taper that completes the upper grip, and the second guide should be placed 15.5 inches from the first. By arranging the guides this way, the line will move through them with minimal friction.
Winding, or Whipping, the Rod
Before whipping on the guides, take a fine file and round off the sharp edges of the base to prevent the possibility of the silk being cut. Measure off the required distances at which the guides are to be affixed, and fasten them in position by winding with a few turns of common thread. Ordinary silk of No. A size may be used, but No. 00 is the best for small rods. Most anglers [65] agree that the size of the silk to use for the whippings should be in proportion to the size of the rod—heavy silk for the heavy rod, and fine silk for the small rod. Size A is the finest silk commonly stocked in the stores, but one or more spools of No. 00 and No. 0 may be ordered from any large dealer in fishing tackle. As a rule, size 0 gives a more workmanlike finish to the butt and joints of fly and bait rods, while No. 00 is about right to use for winding the tips. In fact, all rods weighing up to 6 oz. may be whipped with No. 00 size.
Before attaching the guides, use a fine file to smooth out the sharp edges of the base to avoid cutting the silk. Measure the proper distances where the guides should be attached, and secure them in place by wrapping a few turns of regular thread around them. You can use regular silk of size A, but size 00 is best for small rods. Most anglers [65] agree that the size of the silk should match the size of the rod—use heavy silk for heavier rods and fine silk for lighter rods. Size A is the finest silk usually available in stores, but you can order one or more spools of sizes 00 and 0 from any major fishing tackle retailer. Typically, size 0 provides a more professional finish to the butt and joints of fly and bait rods, while size 00 is just right for wrapping the tips. In fact, all rods weighing up to 6 oz. can be wrapped with size 00.

The Mountings Used on a Bait-Casting Rod Consist of a Reel Seat, Butt Cap, Taper Sleeve, Narrow Agate Guide, Agate Offset Top, One Ring Guide, and a Welted, Shouldered Ferrule (Fig. 9)
The mountings on a bait-casting rod include a reel seat, butt cap, taper sleeve, narrow agate guide, agate offset top, one ring guide, and a welted, shouldered ferrule (Fig. 9)
In whipping the rod, the so-called invisible knot is used. Begin the whipping, as shown at E, Fig. 10, by tucking the end under the first coil and holding it with the left thumb. The spool of silk is held in the right hand and the rod is turned to the left, sufficient tension being kept on the silk so that it can be evenly coiled with each strand tightly against the other. A loop of silk, some 4 in. long, is well waxed and placed so that its end will project a short distance beyond the last coil which finishes the whipping. This detail is shown at F. In whipping on guides, begin the whipping at the base and work over the pointed end of the flange, winding on sufficient silk to extend about 1/8 in. beyond the pointed flange of the guide base. When the last coil is made, cut off the thread from the spool and tuck the end under the whipping by pulling on the ends of the waxed loop, as shown at G. Cut off the ends neatly with a sharp knife.
In whipping the rod, the so-called invisible knot is used. Start the whipping, as shown at E, Fig. 10, by tucking the end under the first coil and holding it with your left thumb. Hold the spool of silk in your right hand and turn the rod to the left, keeping enough tension on the silk so that each coil is tightly wrapped against the others. A loop of silk, about 4 in. long, is well waxed and positioned so that its end sticks out slightly beyond the last coil that finishes the whipping. This detail is shown at F. When whipping onto guides, start at the base and work over the pointed end of the flange, winding on enough silk to extend about 1/8 in. beyond the pointed flange of the guide base. Once the last coil is made, cut the thread from the spool and tuck the end under the whipping by pulling on the ends of the waxed loop, as shown at G. Trim the ends neatly with a sharp knife.

Both Ends of the Silk Thread are Placed under the Winding to Form an Invisible Knot (Fig. 10)
Both ends of the silk thread are positioned under the winding to create an invisible knot (Fig. 10)
For colors, bright red and a medium shade of apple green are the best, since these colors keep their original tint after varnishing, and are less likely to fade than the more delicate shades. Red finished off with a narrow circle of green always looks well, and red with yellow is likewise a good combination. Narrow windings look much better than wide whippings, and a dozen turns make about as wide a winding as the angler desires. For edgings, three or four turns of silk are about right, and these should be put on after the wider windings have been whipped on and in the same manner, although it is best to tuck the ends of the edging [66] beneath the wider winding when pulling the end through to make the invisible knot.
For colors, bright red and a medium shade of apple green are the best choices since these colors maintain their original tint after varnishing and are less likely to fade compared to more delicate shades. Red with a narrow circle of green always looks good, and red with yellow is also a great combination. Narrow windings look much better than wide ones, and about a dozen turns make for the desired width in winding. For edges, three or four turns of silk are just right, and these should be added after the wider windings have been wrapped on, in the same way. However, it’s best to tuck the ends of the edging [66] beneath the wider winding when pulling the end through to create the invisible knot.
Varnishing the Rod
After winding the rod, see that all fuzzy ends are neatly clipped off, then go over the silk windings with a coat of shellac. The shellac can be made by dissolving a little white shellac in grain alcohol. Warm the shellac and apply it with a small camel's-hair brush, giving the silk only two light coats. Allow the rod to stand a couple of days for the shellac to become thoroughly dry.
After winding the rod, make sure all the fuzzy ends are neatly trimmed off, then coat the silk windings with a layer of shellac. You can make the shellac by dissolving a bit of white shellac in grain alcohol. Warm the shellac and apply it with a small camel's-hair brush, giving the silk just two light coats. Let the rod sit for a couple of days so the shellac can dry completely.
A small camel's-hair brush will be required for the varnishing—one about 1/2 in. wide will do. If the varnishing is to be done out of doors, a clear and warm day should be selected, and the can of coach varnish should be placed in a pot of hot water for five minutes, so that the varnish will spread evenly. A temperature of about 75 deg. is best for this work, as the varnish will not spread if cold or in a cold place. The varnish should be evenly brushed on, and care taken that no spots are left untouched. Hang up by the tip to dry in a room free from dust. While the varnish will set in four or five hours, it is a good plan to allow three days for drying between coats. Two coats will suffice to protect the rod, but as coach varnish, properly applied, is rather thin in body, three coats will give complete protection to the wood.
A small camel's-hair brush will be needed for varnishing—one that's about 1/2 inch wide will work. If you’re varnishing outdoors, pick a clear, warm day, and place the can of coach varnish in a pot of hot water for five minutes to help it spread evenly. A temperature of around 75 degrees is ideal for this task, as the varnish won't spread well if it's cold or in a chilly environment. Apply the varnish evenly with the brush, making sure not to leave any spots untouched. Hang it up by the tip to dry in a dust-free room. While the varnish will set in four or five hours, it's a good idea to let it dry for three days between coats. Two coats will be enough to protect the rod, but since coach varnish is fairly thin when properly applied, three coats will provide complete protection for the wood.
The materials required for this rod are,
The materials needed for this rod are,
- 1 dagame or greenheart stick, 5 ft. long and 5/8 in. square;
- 1 reel seat with straight hood, 3/4 in.;
- 1 butt cap, 1 in.; 1 taper, small end 15/32 in.;
- 1 offset, or angle, agate top, 3/32 in., and 2 narrow agate guides, 1/2 in., all in German silver;
- 2 doz. corks, 1-1/4 by 1-1/8 in.,
- and two 50-yd. spools of silk, red and green, 00 size.
Automatic Watering System for Poultry Yards
Where a large number of poultry is cared for, the annoyance and attention necessary to furnish a constant water supply can be overcome by using the system shown in the illustration. For this purpose a storage tank must be provided. This may be some old toilet flush tank, or any open reservoir that will hold sufficient water to keep all the drinking pans supplied. A float is provided and connected with a stop valve, so that when the float drops below a certain level, the valve will be turned open, and a fresh supply of water will enter the storage tank, thereby again raising the float and closing the valve.
Where a large number of poultry are kept, the hassle and effort needed to ensure a constant water supply can be solved using the system shown in the illustration. For this, you need to set up a storage tank. This could be an old toilet flush tank or any open reservoir that can hold enough water to keep all the drinking pans filled. A float is included and connected to a stop valve, so that when the float drops below a certain level, the valve opens, allowing a fresh supply of water to enter the storage tank, which raises the float again and closes the valve.

Simple Arrangement of a Flush Tank in Connection with a System of Pipes to Supply One or More Pans of Water for the Poultry Yard
Simple Setup of a Flush Tank Connected to a System of Pipes to Provide One or More Pans of Water for the Poultry Yard
Each drinking pan should be about 10 in. in diameter by 4 in. deep, and is drilled for a 7/8-in. hole to fit a 1/2-in. pipe. At the pan end, the pipe is threaded so that a lock nut and leather washer can be attached on each side of the pan bottom, to provide a watertight joint; at the other end, the pipe [67] is screwed into a tee in the 1/2-in. main line which connects with the storage tank.
Each drinking pan should be about 10 inches in diameter and 4 inches deep, with a 7/8-inch hole drilled to fit a 1/2-inch pipe. At the end of the pan, the pipe is threaded so that a lock nut and leather washer can be attached on each side of the bottom of the pan, creating a watertight seal; at the other end, the pipe [67] is screwed into a tee in the 1/2-inch main line that connects to the storage tank.
In using the system, sufficient water is run into the tank to fill the pans about three-quarters full. The float may then be adjusted to a shut-off position for the inlet valve. All pans are automatically kept at one level, even though several may be used considerably more than others. When the general water level has dropped sufficiently, the float, dropping with it, will open the stop valve, and cause the water to enter the tank and pans until the original level is again restored.—Contributed by D. E. Hall, Hadlyme, Connecticut.
In using the system, enough water is added to the tank to fill the pans about three-quarters full. The float can then be adjusted to shut off the inlet valve. All pans are automatically maintained at the same level, even if some are used significantly more than others. When the overall water level drops enough, the float will drop with it, opening the stop valve and allowing water to flow into the tank and pans until the original level is restored.—Contributed by D. E. Hall, Hadlyme, Connecticut.
Changing Pip on a Card

Cut out the center pip on the five-spot of spades with a sharp knife. Cut a slot centrally in another card, about 3/8 in. wide and 1-1/4 in. long. Glue the surfaces of both cards together near the edges to form a pocket for a slide, which is cut from another card and has one-half of its surface colored black. A drop of sealing wax attached to the back of the sliding part, so that it projects through the slot, provides a means of moving the slide in the pocket. A lightning change can be made from a five-spot to a four-spot while swinging the card.
Cut out the center pip on the five of spades with a sharp knife. Make a slot in another card, about 3/8 inch wide and 1-1/4 inches long, right in the center. Glue the edges of both cards together to create a pocket for a slide, which you’ll cut from another card and color half of it black. Attach a drop of sealing wax to the back of the sliding part, so it sticks out through the slot, allowing you to move the slide within the pocket. You can quickly change from a five of spades to a four of spades while swinging the card.
To Make a Special Envelope
Any size of envelope for mailing special papers or documents can be made as follows: All envelopes are of the same shape as shown in Fig. 1; the size for the papers to be inclosed is represented by the dotted lines in Fig. 2. The projections A are coated with paste, and the flap B is folded over them. The envelope is then ready for the inclosure. The flap C is pasted and folded over as with an ordinary envelope.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York City.
Any size envelope for sending special papers or documents can be made like this: All envelopes have the same shape as shown in Fig. 1; the size for the papers to be included is indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 2. The projections A are coated with glue, and the flap B is folded over them. The envelope is then ready for the contents. The flap C is glued and folded over just like a regular envelope.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York City.

Various Stages in the Forming of an Envelope to Make Any Size for Special Papers (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Various Stages in Creating an Envelope to Fit Any Size for Special Papers (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Automatically Extinguishing a Candle

Candles can be easily fitted with attachments to extinguish the light at a set time. To determine the length of time, it is necessary to mark a candle of the size used and time how long a certain length of it will burn. Then it is sufficient to suspend a small metal dome, or cap, to which a string is attached, directly over the flame, and run the opposite end of the string over nails or through screw eyes, so that it can be tied around the candle such a distance from the flame end, that the part between the flame and the string will be consumed in the time desired for the light to burn. When this point is reached, the string slips off the candle, and the cap drops on the flame.
Candles can easily be equipped with devices to extinguish the flame at a specific time. To figure out the duration, you need to measure a candle of the same size and time how long a certain length will burn. Then, you just need to hang a small metal dome or cap with a string attached directly above the flame and run the other end of the string over nails or through screw eyes so it can be tied around the candle at a distance from the flame. This way, the part between the flame and the string will burn for the desired amount of time. When that time is up, the string slips off the candle, and the cap falls on the flame.
Clothespin Newspaper Holder
A simple newspaper holder can be made by cutting away a portion of one side of an ordinary clothespin, drilling a hole through the thick end for a screw or nail, and fastening it in place where desired. Another way is to split off one side of a clothespin and cut the bottom of the remaining part tapering as shown; then drill a hole to avoid splitting the piece and fasten in a convenient place.—Contributed by J. P. Rupp, Norwalk, O.
A basic newspaper holder can be created by cutting off one side of a regular clothespin, drilling a hole through the thicker end for a screw or nail, and attaching it where needed. Another method is to split one side of a clothespin and shape the bottom of the remaining part to taper as shown; then drill a hole to prevent splitting and fix it in a handy spot.—Contributed by J. P. Rupp, Norwalk, O.

Shaping a Clothespin Head and Fastening It to a Wall Provides a Holder for Newspapers
Shaping a Clothespin Head and Attaching It to a Wall Creates a Holder for Newspapers
Holder for a Dory Rudder
The rudder of a sailing dory or rowboat often comes off in rough water, and in order to keep it in place and yet have it easily detachable at will, the following method is useful: Procure a 10-in. length of soft-iron rod and bend one end of it into a loop large enough to fit around the rudder pin after the latter is inserted in the eyelet. Insert screws at A, B and C, letting them project about 1/2 in. from the surface. Bend the rod at D and A in the shape shown, and with a little adjustment it will easily snap into position. It will prevent the rudder from riding up out of the eyelets, but can be detached instantly. The device should be applied to the upper pin so as to be within easy reach.—Contributed by B. A. Thresher, Lakeville, Connecticut.
The rudder of a sailing dory or rowboat often comes off in rough water. To keep it in place while still allowing it to be easily removed, try this method: Get a 10-inch length of soft iron rod and bend one end into a loop that’s big enough to fit around the rudder pin once it’s inserted in the eyelet. Insert screws at A, B, and C, letting them stick out about half an inch from the surface. Bend the rod at D and A in the shape shown, and with a little adjustment, it should snap into place easily. This will stop the rudder from lifting out of the eyelets but can be removed instantly. The device should be used on the upper pin so it’s within easy reach. —Contributed by B. A. Thresher, Lakeville, Connecticut.

The Loop on the Iron Rod Holds the Pin of the Rudder in the Eye
The loop on the iron rod holds the pin of the rudder in place.
Trimming Photographs
In trimming small photograph prints I experienced some difficulty in getting them square, and I did not care to invest in a trimming board. By following a line drawn around the print with a triangle, it was impossible to make a perfect rectangle. In the place of a trimming board I now use a piece of glass cut a little smaller than the desired print. The edges of the glass are smoothed by filing or grinding them. In making a glass, be sure to have the corners cut at perfect right angles and the edges ground straight.
While trimming small photo prints, I had some trouble getting them squared up, and I didn’t want to buy a trimming board. Following a line drawn around the print with a triangle made it hard to create a perfect rectangle. Instead of a trimming board, I now use a piece of glass that's slightly smaller than the print I want. The edges of the glass are smoothed out by filing or grinding. When making the glass, make sure the corners are cut at perfect right angles and the edges are ground straight.
The glass is easily located over the print, and by holding the two tightly together the edges of the print can be trimmed with a pair of shears.—Contributed by E. Leslie McFarlane, Nashwaaksis, N. B.
The glass is easy to find over the print, and by holding the two firmly together, the edges of the print can be trimmed with a pair of scissors.—Contributed by E. Leslie McFarlane, Nashwaaksis, N. B.
A Metal Polish
A metal polish that is safe to use about the home is composed of 30 parts alcohol, 3 parts ammonia water, 45 parts water, 6-1/2 parts carbon tetrachloride, 8 parts kieselguhr, 4 parts white bole, and 8 parts of chalk. These substances can be purchased at a local drug store and should be mixed in the order named. Any grease on metal will be dissolved by this solution.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A metal polish that's safe to use around the house consists of 30 parts alcohol, 3 parts ammonia water, 45 parts water, 6.5 parts carbon tetrachloride, 8 parts kieselguhr, 4 parts white bole, and 8 parts chalk. You can buy these materials at a local drugstore, and they should be mixed in the order listed. This solution will dissolve any grease on metal.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.

The Making of a Rod Not Only Affords Much Pleasure, but the Rod can be Constructed as Desired
The process of making a fishing rod is not only enjoyable, but it also allows you to build the rod exactly how you want it.
Fishing-Rod Making and Angling
By Stillman Taylor
Part II—Various Two and Three-Piece Rods
While the action of the one-piece rod is undeniably better than when the rod is made in two or three pieces, it is less compact to carry. To make a 5-ft. two-piece bait-casting rod, the same dimensions as given for the one-piece rod will make a very fine fishing tool. It is well to make two tips in view of a possible breakage. The rod may consist of two pieces of equal length, but a rod of better action is secured by making the butt section somewhat shorter with a relatively longer tip. By making the butt section about 23 in. long, exclusive of ferrule and butt cap, and the tip section 32-1/2 in. long, a splendid little rod is obtained which will fit any of the regulation rod cases of 35-in. length. To make a 6-1/2-oz. rod of this kind with a cork hand grasp, caliper it in the same manner as the one-piece rod, making the butt section 32-1/2 in. long, tapering from 15/32 in. at the upper end of the hand grasp to 19/64 in. at the ferrule. The tip is made 33 in. long, tapering from 17/64 in. to 7/64 in. By making the tip and butt to these lengths, both parts will be of equal length when the ferrules and the tops are added. The material list is as follows, the attachments being made of german silver:
While a one-piece rod definitely performs better than a two or three-piece rod, it’s not as easy to carry. For a 5-ft. two-piece bait-casting rod, you can use the same dimensions as the one-piece rod to create an excellent fishing tool. It's a good idea to make two tips in case one breaks. The rod can be made of two equal-length pieces, but you’ll get better action if the butt section is a little shorter than the tip. If you make the butt section about 23 in. long, not including the ferrule and butt cap, and the tip section 32-1/2 in. long, you'll have a great little rod that fits any standard rod case that's 35 in. long. To create a 6-1/2 oz. rod like this with a cork handle, measure it the same way as the one-piece rod, making the butt section 32-1/2 in. long, tapering from 15/32 in. at the upper end of the handle to 19/64 in. at the ferrule. The tip should be 33 in. long, tapering from 17/64 in. to 7/64 in. By making the tip and butt these lengths, both parts will be equal when the ferrules and tops are added. The materials list is as follows, with the attachments made of German silver:
- Dagame or greenheart butt, 5/8 in. by 3 ft. long;
- two tips 3/8 in. by 3 ft. long;
- one 3/4-in. reel seat with straight hood;
- one 1-in. butt cap;
- one taper, 15/32 in. at the small end;
- two 3/32-in. offset agate tops;
- two 1/2-in. narrow agate guides;
- two No. 1 size one-ring casting guides;
- one 17/64-in. welted and shouldered ferrule, with two closed-end centers, one for each tip;
- two dozen cork washers, 1-1/4 in. in diameter,
- and two spools of winding silk.
The three-piece rod should be made up to 6 ft. in length to secure the best action, but even if so made, the use of the extra ferrules makes the rod less resilient and elastic than the rod of one or two-piece construction. The best action is obtained only when the rod bends to a uniform curve, and since the ferrules cannot conform to this curve, or arc, the more joints incorporated in a rod, the less satisfactory it will be from an angling standpoint. [70] Convenience in packing and carrying are the sole merits which the many-jointed rod possesses. Complete specifications for making a three-piece bait-casting rod, together with a material list, is as follows: A rod, about 5-1/2 ft. long with a single or double hand grasp made of cork, will weigh about 7 oz. Caliper the butt so that it will taper from 15/32 in to 11/32 in at the cap of the ferrule, making it 21-1/2 in. long. The middle joint is tapered from 21/64 in. to 15/64 in., and is 21-3/4 in. long. The tips are 21 in. long and are tapered from 13/64 in. to 7/64 in. Dagame or greenheart is used for the butt, joint, and tips, and german silver for the fittings. All pieces are 2 ft. long, the butt is 5/8 in., the joint and tips, 3/8 in.
The three-piece rod should be around 6 ft. long for the best action, but even if it is made that way, the extra ferrules make the rod less flexible and resilient compared to one or two-piece rods. The best action is achieved when the rod bends into a smooth curve, and since the ferrules can’t follow this curve, having more joints in a rod makes it less effective for fishing. [70] The only advantages of a multiple-jointed rod are the convenience of packing and carrying it. Here are the complete specifications for making a three-piece bait-casting rod, along with a list of materials: A rod about 5-1/2 ft. long with a single or double cork grip will weigh around 7 oz. The butt should taper from 15/32 in to 11/32 in at the ferrule cap, measuring 21-1/2 in. long. The middle joint tapers from 21/64 in. to 15/64 in., and is 21-3/4 in. long. The tips are 21 in. long and taper from 13/64 in. to 7/64 in. Use dagame or greenheart for the butt, joint, and tips, and german silver for the fittings. All pieces are 2 ft. long, with the butt at 5/8 in., and the joint and tips at 3/8 in.
- One 3/4-in. reel seat with straight hood;
- one 1-in. butt cap;
- one taper, small end 15/32 in.;
- one 21/64-in. welted and shouldered ferrule;
- one 15/64-in. welted and shouldered ferrule with two closed centers, one for each tip;
- two 3/32-in. offset agate tops;
- two 1/2-in. narrow agate guides;
- two No. 1 size one-ring casting guides;
- two dozen cork washers, and winding silk, size 00 or 0.
Fly Rods for Trout and Bass
Having made a good bait-casting rod, the amateur will find little trouble in making a rod with a number of joints, and no special instructions need be given, since the work of planing and smoothing up the wood, and finishing and mounting the rod, is the same as has been described in detail before. For fly fishing for trout, accuracy and delicacy are of more importance than length of cast, and the rod best suited to this phase of angling differs greatly from that used in bait casting. A stiff, heavy rod is entirely unsuited for fly casting, and while it is, of course, possible to make a rod too willowy for the sport, the amateur, working by rule of thumb, is more likely to err on the other side and make the fly rods of too stout a caliber. The idea is simply to help the amateur over the hard part by giving a list of dimensions of a representative trout and a bass fly rod. To make a 9-ft. trout fly rod, with a cork grasp having a length of 9 in. above the reel seat, caliper the material as follows: The butt is tapered from
Having made a decent bait-casting rod, the beginner will find it easy to create a rod with several sections, and no special instructions are needed, as the steps for shaping and smoothing the wood, as well as finishing and assembling the rod, are the same as previously described. For fly fishing for trout, precision and finesse are more important than the distance of the cast, and the rod best suited for this type of fishing is very different from the one used for bait casting. A stiff, heavy rod is not suitable for fly casting, and while it’s possible to create a rod that’s too flexible for the sport, beginners are more likely to make the mistake of crafting fly rods that are too heavy. The intent is simply to guide the beginner through the challenging part by providing a list of measurements for a standard trout and bass fly rod. To create a 9-ft. trout fly rod, with a cork grip measuring 9 inches above the reel seat, measure the material as follows: The butt is tapered from
- 7/16 in. to 25/64 in. at 1 ft. from the butt end;
- 1-1/2 ft., 11/32 in.;
- 2 ft, 21/64 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft., 5/16 in., and 3 ft., 19/64 in.
- The first 6 in. of the middle joint is calipered to 9/32 in.;
- 1 ft, 17/64 in.;
- 1-1/2 ft, 15/64 in.;
- 2 ft., 7/32 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft, 13/64 in., and
- 3 ft., 3/16 in.
- The first 6 in. of the tips are calipered to 11/64 in.;
- 1 ft, 5/32 in.;
- 1-1/2 ft., 1/8 in.;
- 2 ft., 7/64 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft, 3/32 in., and
- 3 ft., 5/64 in.
All joints are made 36-1/2 in. long. The material used is dagame, or greenheart, the butt being 5/8 in. by 4 ft., the joint 3/8 in. by 4 ft., and the tips 3/8 in. by 4 ft. The attachments, of german silver, are:
All joints are 36-1/2 inches long. The material used is dagame, or greenheart, with the butt measuring 5/8 inches by 4 feet, the joint 3/8 inches by 4 feet, and the tips 3/8 inches by 4 feet. The attachments, made of German silver, are:
- One 3/4 in. reel seat, fly-rod type with butt cap;
- one taper, 33/64 in. at the small end;
- one 9/32-in. welted and shouldered ferrule;
- one 11/64-in. welted and shouldered ferrule with two closed-end centers, one for each tip;
- two No. 4 snake guides for the butt joint;
- three No. 3 snake guides for the middle joint, and
- six No. 2 snake guides, three for each tip section;
- two No. 7 agate angle fly tops, the kind to wind on;
- one dozen cork washers, and
- two 10-yd. spools of winding silk, 00 size.
A bass fly rod 9-1/2 ft. long, weighing 7-1/2 oz., with a cork grasp, 9-1/2 in. above the reel seat, is calipered as follows:
A bass fly rod that’s 9.5 feet long, weighing 7.5 oz., with a cork grip, 9.5 inches above the reel seat, is measured as follows:
- The butt is tapered from 13/32 in. to 25/64 in. 1 ft. from the end;
- 1-1/2 ft. from butt, 23/64 in.;
- 2 ft., 11/32 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft., 21/64 in., and
- 3 ft., 19/64 in.
- The first 6 in. of the middle joint is 19/64 in.;
- 1 ft., 9/32 in.;
- 1-1/2 ft., 17/64 in.;
- 2 ft., 15/64 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft., 7/32 in., and 3 ft., 13/64 in.
- The first 6 in. of the tips, 11/64 in.;
- 1 ft., 5/32 in.;
- 1-1/2 ft., 9/64 in.;
- 2 ft, 1/8 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft., 7/64 in., and
- 3 ft, 5/64 in.
The joints are 36-1/2 in. long. The mountings are the same as for the trout fly rod. Dagame, or greenheart, wood is used, the butt being 5/8 in. by 4 ft., the joint 3/8 in. by 4 ft. and the tips 3/8 in. by 4 feet.
The joints are 36.5 inches long. The mountings are the same as for the trout fly rod. Dagame, or greenheart, wood is used, with the butt measuring 5/8 inch by 4 feet, the joint 3/8 inch by 4 feet, and the tips 3/8 inch by 4 feet.
The two-piece salt-water rod with an 18-in. double cork hand grasp, the whole being 6-1/2 ft. long, is made to weigh about 13 oz., with the following caliperings:
The two-piece saltwater rod with an 18-inch double cork handle, measuring a total of 6.5 feet long, is designed to weigh around 13 ounces, with the following measurements:
- A uniform taper of 35/64 in. to 29/64 in., from the cork grasp to [71] the ferrule, is given to the butt.
- The first 6 in. of the tips is 13/32 in.;
- 1 ft., 25/64 in.;
- 1-1/2 ft., 11/32 in.;
- 2 ft, 21/64 in.;
- 2-1/2 ft., 9/32 in.;
- and to tip, 15/64 in.
The joints are made 36-3/4 in. long. Dagame, or greenheart, is used with german-silver mountings. Both pieces of wood are 4 ft. long, the butt being of 3/4-in. and the tip of 1/2-in. material. One 7/8-in. reel seat with straight hood, one 1-in. butt cap, one 7/16-in. ferrule, one taper with small end 35/64-in.; one 10/32-in. stirrup-tube agate top; two No. 3 bell guides; two dozen cork washers, and two spools, size A, winding silk.
The joints are made to be 36-3/4 in. long. Dagame, or greenheart, is used with german-silver mountings. Both pieces of wood are 4 ft. long, with the butt being 3/4 in. thick and the tip being 1/2 in. thick. There is one 7/8-in. reel seat with a straight hood, one 1-in. butt cap, one 7/16-in. ferrule, one taper with a small end of 35/64 in.; one 10/32-in. stirrup-tube agate top; two No. 3 bell guides; two dozen cork washers, and two size A spools of winding silk.

The Mountings for a Fly Rod Consist of a Reel Seat with a Straight Hood, a Taper, Snake Guide, Agate Angle Top, and Serrated Ferrule. The Toothed Ends are Wound with Silk to Afford Additional Strength
The mountings for a fly rod include a reel seat with a straight hood, a taper, a snake guide, an agate angle top, and a serrated ferrule. The toothed ends are wrapped with silk to provide extra strength.
The Independent-Butt Rod
The independent-butt rod, in which the hand grasp contains the ferrule and the tip is made in one piece, is a favorite type with many of the best fishermen. This mode of construction may be used with all classes of rods, the light fly and bait-casting rods, and the heavier caliber rods used in salt-water angling. In rods of this type, it is only necessary to use the same size ferrule to make as many tips as desired to fit the one butt. Tips of several calibers and weights may thus be fashioned to fit the one butt, and if the single-piece tip is too long for some special use, one tip may be made a jointed one for ease in carrying.
The independent-butt rod, where the handle includes the ferrule and the tip is a single piece, is a popular choice among many of the top anglers. This type of construction can be used for all kinds of rods, including light fly and bait-casting rods, as well as heavier rods for saltwater fishing. With these rods, you only need to use the same size ferrule to create multiple tips that fit the same butt. You can design tips of various sizes and weights to match that one butt, and if the single-piece tip is too long for a particular use, one tip can be made jointed for easier transport.
The independent butt, or hand grasp, is made by fitting the ferrule directly on a length of dagame, or greenheart, which has been rounded so that the seated ferrule will not touch the wood. The ferrule is then cemented and riveted in place, and a soft-pine sleeve is fitted over the wood core and the ferrule. The forward end of the sleeve is, of course, tapered to fit the taper of the reel seat, and when properly fitted, its lower end will project about 1/4 in. beyond the pine sleeve. Glue the sleeve on this wood core, cement the reel seat to the sleeve, and rivet the reel seat in place.
The independent butt, or hand grip, is created by attaching the ferrule directly to a piece of dagame or greenheart that's been shaped so that the ferrule doesn't touch the wood. The ferrule is then glued and riveted in place, and a soft-pine sleeve is placed over the wood core and the ferrule. The front end of the sleeve is tapered to match the taper of the reel seat, and when fitted correctly, its lower end should extend about 1/4 inch beyond the pine sleeve. Apply glue to attach the sleeve to the wood core, attach the reel seat to the sleeve, and rivet the reel seat in place.
The cork washers are glued in position, working the first one into the metal edge of the reel seat, to make a nice, tight joint at this point. The other corks are then glued in place until the hand grasp is of the desired length. The projecting end of the wood core is then cut off flush with the last cork, and the rod is mounted in the usual manner.
The cork washers are glued in place, starting with the first one pushed into the metal edge of the reel seat to create a nice, tight fit. The other corks are then attached until the grip is the desired length. The excess end of the wood core is then trimmed down to be even with the last cork, and the rod is assembled in the usual way.
In making a double hand grasp, the forward grasp may be fitted over the wood core in the fashion already described in making the hand grasp for the one-piece bait-casting rod, or the forward grasp may be fitted to the tip, just above the ferrule, as preferred. Both methods are commonly used, the only difference being in the manner of finishing up the forward grasp. If the forward grip is affixed to the ferruled end of the tip, two tapered thimbles will be required to make a nice finish.
In making a double hand grip, the front grip can be placed over the wood core in the way already explained for the hand grip on a one-piece bait-casting rod, or the front grip can be positioned at the tip, right above the ferrule, depending on your preference. Both methods are commonly used, with the only difference being how the front grip is finished. If the front grip is attached to the ferruled end of the tip, you'll need two tapered thimbles to create a clean finish.
The heavy-surf, or tarpon, rod is made up of an independent, detachable butt, 20 in. long, having a solid-cork or cord-wound hand grasp, and a one-piece tip, 5-1/2 ft. long, altogether weighing 23-1/2 oz. It is uniformly calipered to taper from 29/32 in to 5/16 in. One [72] piece of dagame, or greenheart, 1 in. by 6-1/2 ft., will be required.
The heavy surf or tarpon rod consists of a separate, detachable butt that's 20 inches long, with either a solid cork or cord-wound grip, and a one-piece tip that measures 5.5 feet long, weighing in total 23.5 ounces. It has a consistent taper from 29/32 inch to 5/16 inch. One [72] piece of dagame or greenheart, measuring 1 inch by 6.5 feet, will be needed.
- One 1-in. reel seat for detachable butt, including one 3/4-in. male ferrule;
- one 1-1/8-in. butt cap; two No. 11 wide, raised agate guides;
- two No. 1 trumpet guides;
- one 3/8-in. agate stirrup top;
- two spools of winding silk, A-size, and
- two dozen cork washers, or sufficient fishline to cord the butt.
The guides are whipped on double, the first set spaced 10 in. from the top, and the second, 26 in. from the reel. The core of the independent, or detachable, butt is constructed of the same material as the rod, which makes the hand grasp somewhat elastic and very much superior to a stiff and rigid butt.
The guides are attached with double whipping, the first set placed 10 inches from the top and the second set 26 inches from the reel. The core of the independent, or detachable, butt is made of the same material as the rod, which makes the hand grip a bit more flexible and much better than a stiff and rigid butt.
Homemade Ball Catch for Cabinet Doors
To make a ball catch, procure a piece of brass, 1 in. long, 1/2 in. wide, and about 1/16 in. thick, and an old gas burner having a diameter of 3/8 in. As described by Work, London, the threaded part of the burner is cut off, which forms a contracted end that will hold a steel ball 5/16 in. in diameter and allow it to project 1/8 in. A hole is drilled in the center of the brass plate, and the barrel soldered in place. A piece of spiral spring is inserted behind the ball. The stiffness of the spring will depend on the use of the catch. The barrel is cut to length and plugged. Another plate of brass is fitted with screw holes and a hole in the center to receive the projecting ball part, for the strike.
To make a ball catch, get a piece of brass that’s 1 inch long, 1/2 inch wide, and about 1/16 inch thick, along with an old gas burner that has a diameter of 3/8 inch. As noted by Work, London, cut off the threaded part of the burner, creating a narrowed end that will hold a steel ball 5/16 inch in diameter and let it stick out 1/8 inch. Drill a hole in the center of the brass plate, and solder the barrel in place. Insert a piece of spiral spring behind the ball. The stiffness of the spring will depend on how the catch will be used. Cut the barrel to length and plug it. Fit another brass plate with screw holes and a hole in the center for the part of the ball that sticks out, meant for the strike.

Combination Needle and Thread Tray
When any attempt is made to keep sewing material, such as needles, spools, or buttons, separate, each of the articles is usually kept in some special drawer, or by itself, and when necessary to use one, the others must be found, frequently necessitating many extra steps or much lost time in hunting up the various articles. The illustrated combination tray avoids this difficulty. It consists of two round trays fastened together near one edge with a wood screw, which is loosely fitted in the lower tray but screwed into the upper to permit them being swung apart. Extra thickness and weight should be given the bottom piece so no tipping will result when the top is swung out to expose the buttons in the lower section. The thread spools are placed on pegs set in the upper tray, and the cushion in the center is provided for the pins and needles.—Contributed by J. Harger, Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands.
When you try to keep sewing supplies like needles, spools, or buttons organized separately, each item is usually stored in a specific drawer or on its own. When you need to grab one, you'll often have to search for the others, which leads to wasting time and making extra trips to find everything. The illustrated combination tray solves this problem. It features two round trays connected at one edge with a wood screw, which is loosely fitted in the lower tray and screwed into the upper one, allowing them to swing apart. The bottom piece should be thicker and heavier to prevent tipping when you swing the top out to access the buttons in the lower section. The thread spools fit onto pegs in the upper tray, and the center cushion is designed for pins and needles. —Contributed by J. Harger, Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands.

Repairing Worn Escapement Wheel of a Clock
When the ordinary clock has served its usefulness and is apparently worn out, the jeweler's price to overhaul it frequently amounts to almost as much as the original purchase price. One weak place in the clock is the escapement wheel. The points soon wear down, thereby producing a greater escapement and pendulum movement, resulting in an increased strain and wear of the clock. If the tips of the teeth on the wheel are bent up slightly with a pair of pliers, the swing of the pendulum will be reduced, thereby increasing the life of the clock. Many of the grandfather's clocks can be put in order in this manner so as to serve as a timepiece as well as a cherished ornament.—Contributed by C. F. Spaulding. Chicago, Ill.
When an ordinary clock has outlived its usefulness and seems worn out, the jeweler's fee for repairing it often ends up being nearly as much as what it originally cost. One vulnerable part of the clock is the escapement wheel. The points wear down quickly, which leads to greater escapement and pendulum movement, putting extra strain and causing more wear on the clock. If the tips of the teeth on the wheel are bent up slightly with pliers, the pendulum's swing will be reduced, which can extend the clock's lifespan. Many grandfather clocks can be fixed this way to function as both a timepiece and a beloved decoration.—Contributed by C. F. Spaulding. Chicago, Ill.
A piece of work should never be fingered while filing it in a lathe.
A workpiece should never be touched while it's being filed in a lathe.

If He would Take Full Advantage of Any Sport and Reap the Greatest Pleasure from a Day Spent in the Open, the Sportsman should Get Together a Good Outfit
If he wants to make the most of any sport and enjoy a day outdoors to the fullest, the sportsman should assemble a solid outfit.
Fishing-Rod Making and Angling
By Stillman Taylor
Part III—Trout Fishing with Fly and Bait
The art of angling is generally viewed as one of the world's greatest recreations, and while each and every phase of fishing may be said to possess certain charms of its own, fly fishing for trout is regarded by most well-informed sportsmen as the alpha and omega of the angler's art. This is so because the trout family are uncommonly wary and game fish, and the tackle used for their capture is of finer balance and less clumsy than any employed in angling for the coarser game fishes. If he would take full advantage of any sport and reap the greatest pleasure from a day spent in the open, it is really necessary for the sportsman to get together a good outfit. It is not essential to have a very expensive one, but it should be good of its kind, well proportioned for the purpose for which it is to be used. The beginner, who buys without good knowledge of the articles required, or fails to use careful discrimination, is almost certain to accumulate a varied assortment of junk, attractive enough in appearance, perhaps, but well-nigh useless when it is tested out on the stream. A good representative outfit, then, is of the first importance; it means making a good beginning by initiating the novice in the sport under the most favorable conditions. Let us then consider the selection of a good fishing kit, a well-balanced rod, the kind of a reel to use with it, the right sort of a line, flies, and the other few items found in the kit of the practical and experienced trout fisherman.
The art of fishing is generally seen as one of the greatest pastimes in the world, and while every aspect of fishing has its own unique appeal, fly fishing for trout is considered by most knowledgeable anglers to be the pinnacle of the sport. This is because trout are particularly cautious and challenging to catch, and the gear used to catch them is more finely tuned and less cumbersome than that used for larger fish. To truly enjoy the sport and have the best experience on a day outdoors, an angler really needs to assemble a good setup. It doesn't need to be overly expensive, but it should be good quality and well-suited for its intended purpose. Beginners who buy gear without proper knowledge or who don't choose wisely often end up with a collection of items that look good but are nearly useless when put to the test on the water. Having a solid fishing setup is crucial; it means starting off on the right foot and introducing new anglers to the sport under the best possible conditions. So, let's look at how to select a good fishing kit, a well-balanced rod, the right reel to pair with it, suitable line, flies, and other essentials found in the kit of a knowledgeable and skilled trout fisherman.
Selecting a Good Fly Rod
The ordinary fishing pole may be bought offhand at almost any hardware store, but a well-balanced rod for fly fishing should be well tested out beforehand. The requirements call for a rod of comparatively light weight, a rod that is elastic and resilient, and yet strong enough to prove durable under the continued strain of much [74] fishing. If the angler has made his own rod, as suggested in former chapters, he will have a good dependable fly rod, but the large majority of anglers who are about to purchase their first fishing kit should carefully consider the selection of the rod. At the outset it must be understood that good tackle is simply a matter of price, the finest rods and reels are necessarily high in price, and the same thing may be said of lines and flies. Providing the angler has no objection to paying $15, or more, for a rod, the choice will naturally fall upon the handmade split bamboo. For this amount of money a fair quality fly rod may be purchased, the finer split bamboos costing anywhere up to $50, but under $15 it is very doubtful whether the angler can procure a built-up rod that is in every way satisfactory. The question may arise, Is a split-bamboo rod necessary? The writer's own long experience says that it is not, and that a finely made solid-wood rod, of greenheart or dagame, is quite as satisfactory in the hands of the average angler as the most expensive split bamboo. A good rod of this sort may be had for $10, and with reasonable care ought to last a lifetime.
You can typically find an ordinary fishing pole at just about any hardware store, but a well-balanced fly rod should be tested thoroughly before buying. You need a rod that’s reasonably lightweight, elastic, and resilient, yet strong enough to handle the continual strain of frequent fishing. If the angler has built their own rod, as mentioned in earlier chapters, they'll have a reliable fly rod. However, most anglers looking to buy their first fishing kit should carefully think about choosing the right rod. First, it’s important to understand that good tackle comes with a price; the best rods and reels are usually expensive, and the same goes for lines and flies. If the angler is okay with spending $15 or more on a rod, they should naturally consider a handmade split bamboo one. For this amount, you can get a decent-quality fly rod, while high-end split bamboos can go up to $50. However, if you’re spending less than $15, it’s unlikely you’ll find a rod that meets all your expectations. You might wonder if a split-bamboo rod is really necessary. From my long experience, I can say it isn’t, and a well-made solid-wood rod, like greenheart or dagame, works just as well for the average angler as the most expensive split bamboo. You can get a good rod of this type for $10, and with some care, it should last a lifetime.
The points to look for in a fly rod, whether the material is split bamboo or solid wood, is an even taper from the butt to the tip; that is, the rod should register a uniform curve, or arc, the entire length. For general fly casting 9 ft. is a handy length, and a rod of 6-1/2 oz. weight will prove more durable than a lighter tool. A good elastic rod is wanted for fly casting, but a too willowy or whippy action had best be avoided. However, for small-brook fishing, where the overgrown banks prohibit long casts, a somewhat shorter and stiffer rod will be more useful. For casting in large northern streams, where the current is swift and the trout run to a larger size, a 9-1/2 or 10-ft. rod of 8 oz. weight is often preferred. Of course, the veteran angler can safely use a much lighter rod than the beginner, and one occasionally meets a man on the stream that uses a 5-oz. rod for pretty heavy fishing. To be on the safe side, the novice will make no mistake in choosing a rod of fair length and conservative weight.
The key points to consider in a fly rod, whether it’s made of split bamboo or solid wood, are that it should have a consistent taper from the butt to the tip; in other words, the rod should have a smooth, even curve along its entire length. For general fly casting, a length of 9 ft. is practical, and a rod weighing 6-1/2 oz. will be more durable than a lighter one. A good elastic rod is ideal for fly casting, but it’s best to avoid one that’s too soft or overly flexible. However, for small-brook fishing, where the thick banks make long casts difficult, a shorter and stiffer rod will be more effective. In larger northern streams, where the current is fast and the trout are bigger, a rod that’s 9-1/2 or 10 ft. long and weighs 8 oz. is often preferred. Naturally, experienced anglers can comfortably use a much lighter rod than beginners, and you might occasionally see someone using a 5-oz. rod for quite heavy fishing. To be safe, novices should stick to choosing a rod of moderate length and sensible weight.
When selecting a rod in the tackle shop, do not rest content with a mere examination of the appearance, but have the dealer affix a reel of the weight and size intended to be used with it. By reeling on a short length of line and reeving it through the guides and then fastening the end to a weight lying upon the floor, a very good idea of the rod's behavior may be gained, since by reeling in the line and putting tension on the rod its elasticity and curve may be seen and felt as well as in actual fishing. To give the utmost satisfaction, the rod should fit its owner, and several rods should be tried until one is found that most fully meets the angler's idea of what a rod should be. If one happens to have a good fly reel, by all means take it along and attach it to the rod while making the tests. It is practically impossible to gauge the balance of a rod without affixing the reel, and many a finely balanced tool will appear badly balanced until the proper-weight reel is affixed to it.
When choosing a rod in the tackle shop, don’t just settle for looking at its appearance; have the dealer attach a reel of the weight and size you plan to use with it. By reeling in a short length of line and threading it through the guides, then securing the end to a weight on the floor, you can get a good sense of how the rod performs. Reeling in the line and applying tension will show you the rod's flexibility and curve, just like when you’re actually fishing. For the best experience, the rod should feel right for you, and you should try out several rods until you find one that fits your idea of what a rod should be. If you own a good fly reel, definitely bring it along and attach it to the rod while testing. It’s almost impossible to assess a rod’s balance without the reel, and many well-balanced rods may seem off-balance until the right-weight reel is attached to them.
The Proper Kind of Reel
For fly fishing nothing is so good as the English style of click reel, which is made with a one-piece revolving side plate and with the handle affixed directly to it. Any kind of a balanced-handle reel is an out-and-out nuisance on the fly rod, because it has no advantage in quickly recovering the line, and the projecting handle is forever catching the line while casting. In fly casting, the length of cast is regulated by the amount of line taken from the reel before the cast is made, and it is while "pumping" this slack line through the guides, in making the actual cast, that the balanced or projecting handle is very apt to foul the line. A good reel that is smooth-running like a watch will cost about $10, but a very good one may be had for $5, and cheaper ones, while not so durable, may be [75] used with fair satisfaction. The heavier multiplying reels, so essential for bait casting from a free reel, are altogether unsuited for the fly rod, being too heavy when placed below the hand, which is the only proper position for the reel when fly casting. The single-action click reel, having a comparatively large diameter, but being quite narrow between the plates, is the one to use, and hard rubber, or vulcanite, is a good material for the side plates, while the trimmings may be of german silver or aluminum. The all-metal reel is of about equal merit, but whatever the material, the most useful size is one holding about 40 yd. of No. E size waterproof line. A reel of this capacity will measure about 3 in. in diameter and have a width of about 7/8 in. between plates. A narrow-spooled reel of this type enables the fisherman to reel in the line plenty fast enough. Owing to the fact that the reel is placed below the grip on fly rods, a rather light-weight instrument is needed to balance the rod. Of the two extremes, it is better to err on the side of lightness, because a heavy reel makes a butt-heavy rod and, throwing extra weight on the wrist and arm, makes casting increasingly difficult after an hour's fishing. An old hand at the game will appreciate this point better than the novice.
For fly fishing, nothing beats the English-style click reel, which features a one-piece revolving side plate with the handle attached directly to it. Any kind of balanced-handle reel is a major hassle on the fly rod since it doesn't offer any advantage for quickly retrieving the line, and the sticking-out handle often gets caught in the line while casting. In fly casting, the distance of the cast depends on how much line is pulled from the reel before starting the cast, and it's during the "pumping" of this slack line through the guides that the balanced or projecting handle is likely to tangle with the line. A good reel that runs as smoothly as a watch will cost around $10, but you can find a very good one for $5, and cheaper options, while not as durable, can be used with reasonable satisfaction. The heavier multiplying reels, which are essential for bait casting from a free reel, are totally unsuitable for the fly rod because they become too heavy when placed below the hand, which is the only proper position for the reel during fly casting. The single-action click reel, with a relatively large diameter but quite narrow between the plates, is the one to go for; hard rubber or vulcanite are good materials for the side plates, while the trimmings can be made of German silver or aluminum. All-metal reels have similar quality, but regardless of the material, the most practical size is one that holds about 40 yards of No. E size waterproof line. A reel of this size will have a diameter of about 3 inches and a width of approximately 7/8 inch between the plates. A narrow-spooled reel of this kind allows the fisherman to reel in the line quickly enough. Since the reel is positioned below the grip on fly rods, a lightweight device is needed to balance the rod. Between the two extremes, it's better to lean toward lightness because a heavy reel creates a butt-heavy rod and adds extra weight on the wrist and arm, making casting increasingly difficult after an hour of fishing. An experienced fisherman will understand this more than a beginner.

The English Pattern Is the Best Type of Reel for Trout Fishing, and a Gun-Metal, or Other Dark Finish, Is Better than Shiny Nickelplate
The English Pattern is the best type of reel for trout fishing, and a gun-metal or other dark finish is better than shiny nickel plate.

Fly Book with Clips for Holding Snelled Flies, So That the Gut is Kept Straight between Pads of Felt
Fly Book with Clips for Holding Snelled Flies, So That the Line is Kept Straight between Pads of Felt

Aluminum Box with Clips for Holding Flies Tied on Eyed Hooks, Each Clip Having Places for Seven Flies
Aluminum Box with Clips for Holding Flies Tied on Eyed Hooks, Each Clip Having Spaces for Seven Flies

A Folding-Handle Landing Net may be Left at Home, but Most Old Anglers Like to Have It Handy When Needed
A folding-handle landing net might be left at home, but most experienced anglers prefer to have it nearby when necessary.

Willow Creel, or Basket, Leather-Bound with a Metal Fastening, the Number Three Size being About Right
Willow Creel, or Basket, Leather-Bound with a Metal Fastening, the Number Three Size being About Right

Leader Box of Black-Finished Aluminum with Felt Pads to Keep the Leaders Moist and Pliable
Leader Box of Black-Finished Aluminum with Felt Pads to Keep the Leaders Moist and Pliable

A Three-Joint Fly Rod with Cork Hand Grasp and Extra Tip, and Rod Case Made of Aluminum Tubing
A three-joint fly rod with a cork handle, an extra tip, and a rod case made of aluminum tubing.
The Kind of Line to Use
The fly-casting line used by a veteran is generally of silk, enameled and having a double taper; that is, the line is thickest in the center and gradually tapers to a smaller diameter at each end. Single-tapered lines are likewise extensively used, and while they cost less, they are tapered at one end only and cannot be reversed to equalize the wear caused by casting. The level line, which has the same diameter throughout its entire length, is the line most generally used, but the cast [76] cannot be so delicately made with it. For the beginner, however, the level line in size No. E is a good choice. For small-brook fishing, No. F is plenty large enough. In choosing the size of line, there is a common-sense rule among fly casters to select a line proportioned to the weight of the rod. For a light rod a light line is the rule, and for the heavier rod a stouter line is the logical choice. If the rod is of a too stiff action, use a comparatively heavy line, and it will limber up considerably; if the rod is extremely "whippy," use the lightest line that can be purchased, and used with safety.
The fly-casting line used by an experienced angler is usually made of silk, coated in enamel, and features a double taper. This means the line is thickest in the center and gradually narrows to a smaller diameter at both ends. Single-tapered lines are also commonly used; while they are less expensive, they taper at only one end and can’t be reversed to balance out the wear from casting. The level line, which has a uniform diameter along its entire length, is the most widely used, but delicate casts can't be made with it. However, for beginners, the level line in size No. E is a solid option. For small-brook fishing, No. F is more than adequate. When choosing the line size, fly casters follow a simple guideline: select a line that matches the weight of the rod. For a light rod, a light line is recommended, while a heavier rod should use a sturdier line. If the rod is too stiff, opt for a comparatively heavy line to help it flex more; conversely, if the rod is extremely "whippy," choose the lightest line available that can be safely used.
A Fine Leader Marks the Expert Caster
The leader for trout is preferably of single gut, and as fine as the angler's skill will allow. The fly caster's rule is to use a leader whose breaking strain is less than the line, then, when the tackle parts, it is simply a question of putting on a new leader and the more expensive line is saved. Ready-made leaders may be purchased, or the angler can tie them up as desired. For length, a 3 or 3-1/2-ft. leader is about right for average fishing. Longer leaders are used, and while they sometimes are of advantage, the 3-ft. length is more useful. A longer leader is awkward to handle because the loop is apt to catch in the top of the rod when reeling in the line to bring the fish close to the landing net. Leaders may be had with a loop at each end, or with loops tied in, for using a cast of two or three flies. For all average casting, the two-fly cast is the best, but the expert angler uses the single-fly very often. For lake fishing, the single large fly is generally preferred. For using two flies, the leader is provided with three loops, one at the top, another at the bottom, and an extra loop tied in about 15 in. from the lower loop. In fly casting, the first, or upper, fly is known as the "dropper," and the lower one as the "tail" fly. For the single-fly cast but two loops are required.
The leader for trout should ideally be made of a single strand of gut and as fine as the angler’s skill allows. The rule for fly casters is to use a leader with a breaking strain that is less than the line, so if the tackle breaks, you just need to replace the leader, saving the more expensive line. You can buy ready-made leaders or tie your own as needed. For length, a 3 or 3.5-foot leader is about right for average fishing. While longer leaders can sometimes be beneficial, the 3-foot length is usually more practical. A longer leader can be tricky to manage since the loop might get caught at the tip of the rod when you're reeling in the line to get the fish closer to the landing net. Leaders can come with a loop at each end or with tied loops for using two or three flies. For general casting, using two flies is ideal, but experienced anglers often stick to a single fly. For lake fishing, a single large fly is typically preferred. If you're using two flies, the leader will have three loops—one at the top, another at the bottom, and an extra loop tied in about 15 inches from the lower loop. In fly casting, the top fly is called the "dropper," and the lower one is the "tail" fly. For the single-fly cast, only two loops are needed.
Gut used for leaders should be carefully selected, and only those lengths which are of uniform diameter and well rounded chosen, the lengths which show flat and rough spots being discarded. Dry gut that is very brittle should be handled very little, and previous to a day's fishing the leaders must be soaked in water over night to make them pliable, then coiled in between felt pads of the leader box to keep them in fishing shape. After use, put the frayed leaders aside and dry them out between the flannel leaves of the fly book.
Gut used for leaders should be carefully chosen, selecting only those lengths that are uniformly thick and well-rounded, while discarding any that have flat or rough spots. Dry gut that is very brittle should be handled minimally, and before fishing, the leaders must be soaked in water overnight to make them flexible, then coiled between felt pads in the leader box to keep them ready for fishing. After use, set aside any frayed leaders and dry them out between the flannel pages of the fly book.
Gut is the product of the silkworm, and the best quality is imported from Spain. It comes in bundles, or hanks, of 1,000 strands, 10 to 20 in. long and in different thicknesses, or strengths. The heaviest are known as "Royal" and "Imperial," for salmon; "Marana," for extra-heavy bass; "Padron," for bass; "Regular," for heavy trout; "Fina," for light trout, and "Refina," for extra-light trout. The grades "Fina" and "Refina" are well suited for all average fly fishing, while the heavier sizes are useful for heavy large fishing.
Gut is made from silkworms, and the highest quality is imported from Spain. It comes in bundles, or hanks, containing 1,000 strands that are 10 to 20 inches long and vary in thickness or strength. The heaviest types are called "Royal" and "Imperial," meant for salmon; "Marana," for extra-heavy bass; "Padron," for bass; "Regular," for heavy trout; "Fina," for light trout; and "Refina," for extra-light trout. The "Fina" and "Refina" grades are great for regular fly fishing, while the heavier sizes are suitable for large fishing.
To make the leaders, soak the strands of gut in warm water over night until they are soft and pliable. Select the strands for each leader of the desired thickness and length so that the finished leader will have a slight taper to one end only. By using the "Fina" gut for the upper length and tying in two lengths of "Refina" gut, a nicely tapered leader of light weight is obtained. Begin the leader by uniting the strands together to make it the correct length, three 12-in. strands being about right for average casting. The "single water knot" is the strongest and neatest to use. Make it by taking the thick end of the strand and doubling it back enough to tie in a common knot just large enough for the line to pass through and drawing it up tightly. Tie a single loose knot in the other end of the strand, about 1/8 in. in diameter and close to the end; take the next thickest strand of gut, thread the thicker end through the loose knot and tie a second square knot around the strand, as shown at A. By pulling on the two [77] long ends the loops can be drawn up tightly, and the two knots will slide together and make a neat and very strong knot. Repeat this operation until as many strands of gut are knotted together as required to make the leader of the desired length. For making the loop at the ends, a double-bighted knot, tied as shown at B, is used. If a dropper fly is desired, do not pull the water knot tightly, but first insert a short length of gut with a common knot at the end and a loop in the other, then draw the water knot up tightly, and a short snell will be made for attaching the fly as usually.
To create the leaders, soak the strands of gut in warm water overnight until they're soft and flexible. Choose strands for each leader based on the thickness and length you want so that the finished leader has a slight taper on just one end. By using "Fina" gut for the upper length and tying in two lengths of "Refina" gut, you can create a nicely tapered, lightweight leader. Start the leader by joining the strands together to get the right length; about three 12-inch strands is good for average casting. The "single water knot" is the strongest and neatest choice. Make it by taking the thick end of the strand and folding it back enough to tie a common knot that’s just big enough for the line to pass through, then pull it tightly. Tie a single loose knot at the other end of the strand, about 1/8 inch in diameter and close to the end; take the next thickest strand of gut, thread the thicker end through the loose knot, and tie a second square knot around the strand, as shown at A. By pulling on the two long ends, the loops can be tightened, and the two knots will slide together to form a neat and very strong knot. Repeat this process until you have tied together as many strands of gut as needed to create the leader of your desired length. For making the loop at the ends, use a double-bighted knot tied as shown at B. If you want to add a dropper fly, don’t pull the water knot tight right away. Instead, first insert a short length of gut with a common knot at one end and a loop at the other, then tighten the water knot, and this will create a short snell for attaching the fly as usual.

(A) The Single Water Knot Used in Tying Leaders; (B) a Good Knot for Making the Loop at the End of the Leaders; (C) an Angler's Knot Used for Attaching the Line to the Leader, and (D) a Jam Knot for Attaching Eyed Flies, or Hooks, to the Leader or Snell
(A) The Single Water Knot for Tying Leaders; (B) a Great Knot for Creating the Loop at the End of the Leaders; (C) an Angler's Knot for Connecting the Line to the Leader, and (D) a Jam Knot for Attaching Eyed Flies or Hooks to the Leader or Snell
Flies for Trout Fishing
The standard selection of artificial flies numbers about 60, but the average fisherman will find about 24 selected patterns to answer every need. For making up the most "killing" flies for the trout season, the following can be recommended: Use red ibis, stone fly, cinnamon, red spinner, and parchmenee belle, for April; turkey brown, yellow dun, iron blue, spinner, montreal and red fox, for May; spider, black gnat, silver doctor, gray drake, orange dun, and green drake, for June; July dun, grizzly king, pale evening dun, red ant, and brown palmer, for July; Seth green, coachman, shad, governor, August dun, and royal coachman, for August, and black palmer, willow, whirling dun, queen of the water, and blue bottle, for September.
The standard selection of artificial flies includes about 60 options, but the average angler will find around 24 selected patterns to meet their needs. For creating the most effective flies for the trout season, here are some recommendations: Use red ibis, stone fly, cinnamon, red spinner, and parchment belle for April; turkey brown, yellow dun, iron blue, spinner, Montreal, and red fox for May; spider, black gnat, silver doctor, gray drake, orange dun, and green drake for June; July dun, grizzly king, pale evening dun, red ant, and brown palmer for July; Seth green, coachman, shad, governor, August dun, and royal coachman for August; and black palmer, willow, whirling dun, queen of the water, and blue bottle for September.
To attach a line to the leader the well-known "angler's knot" is mostly used. This knot is shown at C. The snelled fly is attached by passing the loop over the loop of the leader and inserting the fly through the leader loop. When eyed flies are used they are often attached direct to the leader, or a looped snell may be used as in the ordinary American-tied fly. To attach the eyed fly direct to the leader, the common "jam knot," shown at D, is mostly used, and when the slipknot is drawn up tightly and the extra end cut off it makes a small, neat knot, not apt to slip.
To connect a line to the leader, the well-known "angler's knot" is usually used. This knot is shown at C. The snelled fly is attached by looping it over the leader's loop and passing the fly through the leader loop. When using eyed flies, they are often connected directly to the leader, or a looped snell might be used like in the typical American-tied fly. To attach the eyed fly directly to the leader, the common "jam knot," shown at D, is primarily used. When the slipknot is pulled tight and the excess end is cut off, it creates a small, neat knot that is unlikely to slip.
Catch to Hold Two Joining Doors Open
Where two open doors meet, a catch to keep them open can be made of a piece of wire, shaped as shown. The hooks at the ends of the wire are slipped over the shanks of the knobs.—Contributed by W. A. Saul, Lexington, Mass.
Where two open doors meet, you can create a catch to keep them open using a piece of wire shaped like this. The hooks at the ends of the wire fit over the handles of the knobs.—Contributed by W. A. Saul, Lexington, Mass.

Strips cut from wood dishes used by grocers for butter, thoroughly soaked in warm water, will make excellent repair pieces for market baskets.
Strips cut from wooden dishes used by grocery stores for butter, soaked completely in warm water, will make great repair pieces for market baskets.
Bicycle Oil Lamp Changed to Electric Light
The desire for an electric light for my bicycle caused me to change a fine oil lamp, too good to be thrown away, so that an electric globe could be used in it. The oil cup of the lamp was removed, and a wood push button fastened in its place with three screws. Before fastening the push button, a porcelain socket was attached to its bottom, and connections were made between socket and push button, ends being left protruding for connection to the battery. A small flash-light battery was fastened to the lamp bracket. A small rubber washer was placed between the head of the push button on the switch and the cap, so that in screwing the cap up, a permanent connection was made. The lamp can be used as a lantern when removed from the bicycle.—Contributed by Lee Baker, Chicago.
The desire for an electric light for my bike led me to modify a great oil lamp that was too good to throw away so I could use an electric bulb in it. I removed the oil cup from the lamp and attached a wooden push button in its place with three screws. Before securing the push button, I connected a porcelain socket to its bottom and wired it to the push button, leaving the ends sticking out for the battery connection. I secured a small flashlight battery to the lamp bracket. I placed a small rubber washer between the head of the push button and the cap, ensuring a permanent connection when I screwed the cap on. The lamp can also be used as a lantern when taken off the bike.—Contributed by Lee Baker, Chicago.

A Push Button with Socket and Miniature Globe Used in an Oil Lamp for Electric Light
A Push Button with Socket and Mini Globe Used in an Oil Lamp for Electric Light
Lifter for Removing Eggs from Hot Water
An improvement over the customary way of removing eggs from hot water with a tablespoon, is to use an old-fashioned coffee strainer. This brings up the eggs without carrying hot water with them.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York, N. Y.
A better way to take eggs out of hot water than using a tablespoon is to use an old-fashioned coffee strainer. This allows you to lift the eggs without bringing hot water along with them.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York, N. Y.
Genuine oxalic acid may be used for removing stains from all woods except mahogany.
Genuine oxalic acid can be used to remove stains from all types of wood except mahogany.
Double Top for a Table
The need of two tables in a kitchen where there was space for only one, was the cause of devising the arrangement shown in the illustration. An ordinary kitchen table was mounted on trunk casters or domes so that it could be moved easily, whereupon a zinc top was put on it with raised edges. The table was then placed against the wall where it was to be used, and an extra, plain top fitted to it and hinged to the wall.
The necessity for two tables in a kitchen that only had room for one led to the design shown in the illustration. A regular kitchen table was mounted on trunk casters or domes for easy movement, and then a zinc top with raised edges was placed on it. The table was positioned against the wall for use, and an extra, simple top was attached to it and hinged to the wall.

An Extra Top Covers the Table When It is Placed against the Wall
An extra table cover goes over the table when it's against the wall.
When it was desired to wash dishes on the zinc top, the table was pulled out without disturbing the articles on the hinged top. After drying the dishes, they are removed from the zinc top to the hinged part, and the table is pushed back against the wall.—Contributed by Louis Drummond, Philadelphia, Pa.
When it was time to wash the dishes on the zinc countertop, the table was pulled out without disturbing the items on the hinged top. After drying the dishes, they were moved from the zinc countertop to the hinged section, and then the table was pushed back against the wall.—Contributed by Louis Drummond, Philadelphia, Pa.

The Table When Drawn Out Uncovers the Zinc Tray, Fastened on Top
The table, when pulled out, reveals the zinc tray secured on top.

As a General Thing, the Veteran Fly Fisherman Prefers to Wade with the Current, and Fishes the Water in Front of Him by Making Diagonal Casts across the Stream
As a general rule, the experienced fly fisherman prefers to wade with the current and fish the water in front of him by making diagonal casts across the stream.
Fishing-Rod Making and Angling
By Stillman Taylor
Part IV—Trout Fishing with Fly and Bait
How to Cast the Fly
To be able to cast the artificial fly a distance of 50 ft., or more, and let the feathered lure alight upon the desired bit of water as lightly as a falling leaf is no small accomplishment, for fly casting is an art, and to become an expert, much practice is necessary. The personal assistance of a skillful caster is not often available, but if the angler will follow the suggestions outlined, a beginner will soon grasp the knack of handling the fly rod, and the casting will steadily improve with practice. As the knack of handling a gun is best gained—not in the field, shooting live game, but through shooting at targets—so may the art of fly casting be more quickly acquired by intelligent practice conducted away from the stream, in the back yard, or any other place roomy enough to swing the rod and a moderately long line. By practicing in this way, the angler's attention is focused upon the cast and is not partly occupied with the excitement of fishing. To make a good beginning, let the reel contain about 25 yd. of common, braided, linen line (size E is about right) and instead of a fly, or hook, affix a small split shot to the end of the line. It is well to begin with a cheap rod and save a good outfit, and if the angler learns how to make a fairly long and accurate cast with a common rod, he may feel assured that he can even do better with a first-rate outfit.
To be able to cast an artificial fly 50 feet or more and let the feathered lure land on the desired spot of water as lightly as a falling leaf is quite an achievement, as fly casting is an art that requires a lot of practice to master. Personal help from a skilled caster isn’t always available, but if the angler follows the outlined tips, a beginner will quickly learn how to handle the fly rod, and their casting will improve steadily with practice. Just like the best way to learn how to handle a gun is by shooting at targets instead of live game, the art of fly casting can be learned more quickly through focused practice away from the stream—in the backyard or any spacious area where you can swing the rod and let out a moderately long line. Practicing this way allows the angler to concentrate on the cast without being distracted by the excitement of fishing. To start off right, the reel should have about 25 yards of common, braided linen line (size E works well), and instead of a fly or hook, attach a small split shot to the end of the line. It’s wise to begin with an affordable rod and save a better outfit for later. If the angler learns to make a fairly long and accurate cast with an ordinary rod, they can be confident that they'll do even better with a high-quality setup.

Fig. 1—The Proper Way to Take Hold of the Handle with the Reel on the Under Side
Fig. 1—The Right Way to Grip the Handle with the Reel on the Bottom Side
The first point to observe in making the cast is to grip the rod correctly, and this is done by grasping the rod at the right point where it balances best. By shifting the hand about this point of balance is quickly found, for at no other point will the rod "hang" well in the hand. In casting, the reel is turned to the under side of the rod with the thumb extended along the top of the grip, as shown in Fig. 1. Taking up an easy casting position, with the left foot slightly advanced, pull from the reel about 25 yd. of line and let this slack line fall in coils upon the ground in front; bring the rod up slightly above the horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2, and with a quick snap of the wrist, avoiding shoulder or body movement, throw the tip upward, checking it sharply as [80] soon as the tip is carried over the shoulder about 25° beyond the vertical plane as in Fig. 3. This snappy upstroke of the rod makes the "back cast," by projecting the line high in the air, and carries it well behind the angler. Before the line has fully straightened out behind, and before it has an opportunity to fall much below the caster's shoulders, the rod is snapped forward with a quick wrist-and-forearm movement, which throws the line forward in front of the fisherman and in the direction he is facing, which finishes the cast with the rod in the position shown in Fig. 4.
The first thing to notice when casting is to hold the rod correctly, which means gripping it at the spot where it balances best. By adjusting your hand around this balance point, you'll quickly find it since the rod won’t "hang" well in your hand at any other spot. When casting, turn the reel to the underside of the rod, extending your thumb along the top of the grip, as shown in Fig. 1. Get into a comfortable casting position with your left foot slightly forward, pull about 25 yards of line from the reel, and let the slack lay in loops on the ground in front of you. Raise the rod just above horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2, and with a quick flick of your wrist—without moving your shoulder or body—throw the tip upward, stopping sharply as soon as the tip goes about 25° over your shoulder beyond the vertical plane, like in Fig. 3. This quick upward motion of the rod creates the "back cast," lifting the line high into the air and sending it well behind you. Before the line fully straightens out behind and has a chance to drop much below your shoulders, snap the rod forward with a quick wrist-and-forearm motion that sends the line ahead of you in the direction you’re facing. This completes the cast with the rod in the position shown in Fig. 4.

Fig. 2—Begin the Cast with the Rod in a Position Just above the Horizontal Plane
Fig. 2—Start the Cast with the Rod Slightly Above the Horizontal Plane
Long and accurate fly casting is much more a matter of skill than muscle, and while some fly fishermen cast directly from the shoulder and upper arm, and thus use a considerable amount of muscular force in making the cast, this cannot be regarded as the best method of casting. The great elasticity of the fly rod ought to be taken full advantage of by the caster, and if this is done, casting will be naturally accomplished by the wrist and forearm. To make strenuous efforts to hurl the fly through the air, using an arm or body movement, is extremely tiring after an hour or so of fishing, while if the cast is made from the wrist, aided by the forearm, the snap of the rod may be depended upon to project the fly to greater length of line and allow it to fall close to the desired spot, lightly and without splashing.
Long and accurate fly casting is much more about skill than muscle. While some fly fishermen cast primarily from their shoulder and upper arm, using a lot of muscular force, this isn't considered the best way to cast. The fly rod's great elasticity should be fully utilized by the caster, and when this is done, the casting will occur naturally through the wrist and forearm. Trying to forcefully throw the fly through the air with arm or body movements becomes really tiring after about an hour of fishing. However, if the cast comes from the wrist, supported by the forearm, the rod's snap can effectively send the fly out over a longer distance, allowing it to land near the desired spot gently and without splashing.
Timing the back cast is the most difficult detail of fly casting, because the line is behind the angler and the eye cannot aid the hand. The novice will soon acquire the knack of casting, however, if he will remember to keep the elbow close to the side, and to keep the line well up in the air when making the back cast, and to begin the forward movement before the line has fully straightened out behind him. After a little practice, the hand will feel the slight tension communicated to the rod as the line begins to straighten out, and this should be taken advantage of to correctly time the forward movement. Counting "one" for the upstroke, "two and" for the interval required for the line to straighten out in the rear, and "three" for the forward movement, is also a good way to time the cast.
Timing the back cast is the trickiest part of fly casting because the line is behind the angler, and you can’t rely on your eyes to help your hands. However, beginners will quickly get the hang of casting if they remember to keep their elbow close to their side, keep the line up in the air while making the back cast, and start the forward movement before the line is fully straightened out behind them. After some practice, your hand will feel the slight tension transferred to the rod as the line starts to straighten, and this should be used to time the forward movement correctly. Counting "one" for the upstroke, "two and" for the time needed for the line to straighten out behind, and "three" for the forward cast is also an effective way to time your cast.
At the beginning the caster should make no attempt to secure distance. Accuracy and delicacy in placing the fly on the water is of much more importance than length of cast in trout fishing, and to attain this end, it is a good plan to place a newspaper about 25 ft. distant and try to drop the end of the line on this mark. When the caster can drop the line on the target lightly and with reasonable accuracy, he may feel justified in lengthening his cast. Other casts than the overhead cast just described are occasionally used, as the Spey, switch, wind, and flip casts, but the overhead cast is mostly used, although it is much more difficult to master.
At the beginning, the caster shouldn't worry about how far they're casting. Accuracy and finesse in placing the fly on the water are way more important than the distance of the cast when fishing for trout. To achieve this, it's a good idea to set a newspaper about 25 ft away and aim to drop the end of the line on that mark. Once the caster can land the line on the target softly and with decent accuracy, they can start to extend their cast. There are other casts besides the overhead cast mentioned, like the Spey, switch, wind, and flip casts, but the overhead cast is the most commonly used, even though it's much tougher to master.
To make the Spey cast, the angler requires a rapid stream which will carry the line downstream until it is [81] straight and taut, the tip of the rod being held as long as possible to accomplish this end. The rod is then raised high in the air with a quick wrist movement, which lifts the line from the water to the extreme end, then without pausing the rod is carried upstream with just sufficient force to let the fly fall just above the angler. The line is now on the reverse, or upper, side of the fisherman, when with a sweep of the rod the line is projected over the water's surface—not along the surface—in the manner used in making the overhead cast.
To make the Spey cast, the angler needs a fast stream that will carry the line downstream until it is [81] straight and taut, while keeping the tip of the rod high for as long as possible to achieve this. The rod is then raised quickly in the air with a wrist movement, which lifts the line from the water to the very end. Without pausing, the rod is moved upstream with just enough force to let the fly fall just above the angler. The line is now on the reverse, or upper, side of the fisherman, and with a sweep of the rod, the line is cast over the water’s surface—not along the surface—like in an overhead cast.

Fig. 3—The Rod is Quickly Checked When It is Carried over the Shoulder About 25 Degrees
Fig. 3—The Rod is Quickly Checked When It is Carried over the Shoulder at About 25 Degrees
The switch cast is sometimes useful when trees or rocks are immediately back of the fisherman, thus preventing the line from extending far enough backward to make the overhead cast. In making this cast the line is not lifted from the water, but merely to the surface by raising the tip of the rod. The line is dragged through the water by carrying the tip in the direction one is standing until it is as far in the rear as the obstructions will permit. By a quick downward sweep of the rod the line is projected with sufficient force to roll it forward in a large coil or loop, much as a wheel rolls on a track.
The switch cast is sometimes helpful when there are trees or rocks right behind the fisherman, which stops the line from extending far enough backward for an overhead cast. When making this cast, the line isn’t lifted from the water, just brought to the surface by raising the tip of the rod. The line is pulled through the water by moving the tip in the direction you're standing until it's as far back as the obstacles allow. With a quick downward sweep of the rod, the line is launched with enough force to roll it forward in a big coil or loop, similar to how a wheel rolls on a track.
The wind cast is a modification of the switch cast, but easier to make. The caster brings his line almost to his feet, and with a quick downward motion of the rod the line is thrown in a long loop against the wind. The underhand and the flip casts are so simple that it seems almost unnecessary to describe them. Both are short casts and are only used when the angler is fishing in an overgrown stream. The underhand cast is really a side cast, inasmuch as the short line is lifted from the water in a loop and propelled in the desired direction by a side sweep of the rod. The flip cast is made by holding the fly between the thumb and finger and with a few coils of line in the right hand. Bend the rod like a bow, release the fly suddenly, and the snap of the rod will project it in the desired direction and allow it to drop lightly like a fly.
The wind cast is a variation of the switch cast, but it's easier to do. The angler brings the line close to their feet, and with a quick downward motion of the rod, throws the line in a long loop against the wind. The underhand and flip casts are so straightforward that it almost feels unnecessary to explain them. Both are short casts used only when fishing in a dense stream. The underhand cast is essentially a side cast since the short line is lifted from the water in a loop and sent in the desired direction with a side sweep of the rod. The flip cast is done by holding the fly between your thumb and finger, with a few loops of line in your right hand. Bend the rod like a bow, release the fly suddenly, and the snap of the rod will send it in the desired direction, allowing it to drop gently like a fly.
Handling the Flies in the Water
As a general thing the veteran fly fisherman prefers to wade with the current and fishes the water in front of him by making diagonal casts across the stream. A good fisherman will systematically cover every inch of good water and little will be left to chance. The novice is inclined to fish his flies in a contrary manner, he casts more or less at random, and is as likely to splash the flies recklessly about in the most impossible places as he is to drop them in a favorable riffle or pool. To be able to pick out fishable water, the angler should know something about the habits of the trout, their characteristics at the several seasons of the fishing [82] year, and their habits, which differ greatly in different streams. A fishing knowledge of the stream to be visited is of much value, but if the angler knows how to make a fair cast and possesses average skill in handling flies on water, there should be no question but that he will creel a fair number of trout even though he casts in strange waters.
In general, experienced fly fishermen prefer to wade with the current and fish the water in front of them by making diagonal casts across the stream. A good fisherman will systematically cover every inch of good water, leaving little to chance. The novice tends to fish in a different way; he casts more or less at random and is just as likely to splash the flies around haphazardly in the most unlikely spots as he is to drop them in a good riffle or pool. To be able to identify fishable water, the angler should know something about the habits of trout, their characteristics at different seasons of the fishing year, and their behaviors, which can vary greatly from one stream to another. Having a solid understanding of the stream being visited is very helpful, but if the angler knows how to make a decent cast and has average skill in managing flies on the water, there’s no doubt he will catch a reasonable number of trout even if he’s casting in unfamiliar waters.

Fig. 4—The Cast is Finished by Throwing the Line Forward with a Quick Wrist-and-Forearm Movement
Fig. 4—The Cast is Done by Flicking the Line Forward with a Quick Wrist-and-Forearm Motion
To imitate the action of the natural insect is the most successful manner of fishing the flies, and as the natural fly will struggle more or less when borne down with the current, the fisherman endeavors to duplicate this movement by making his artificial fly wriggle about. This motion must not be overdone, for if the flies are twitched and skipped about, or pulled against the current, the wary trout will refuse to fall for any such obvious deceit. A gentle motion of the wrist will cause the fly to move somewhat as the natural insect will struggle.
To mimic the behavior of real insects is the most effective way of fishing with flies. Since a natural fly will struggle to stay afloat when carried along by the current, the fisherman tries to replicate this movement by making his artificial fly wriggle. This motion shouldn't be exaggerated, since if the flies are jerked around or dragged against the current, the cautious trout will easily see through the trick. A gentle flick of the wrist will make the fly move in a way similar to how a natural insect would struggle.
In making the cast do not cast directly down or upstream, but across the current at an angle. Let the flies fall upon the water as lightly as possible, so that the water will carry them downstream over the likely places where the trout are hiding. Keep the line as taut as possible by drawing the slack in with the left hand. The flies should not be allowed to soak in the water, neither should they be retrieved in haste. The experienced fly caster will invariably fish with a wet line, that is to say, with a slightly submerged fly, and will let the flies drag over as much water as possible before making a second cast. Owing to the fact that trout lie with their noses pointing upstream awaiting their food carried down by the current, the caster will naturally take pains to float his flies downstream with the leader fairly taut. To neglect this detail and allow the leader to float in a wide loop near or before the flies is slovenly fishing, and few trout will strike a fly presented in this amateurish fashion.
When casting, don’t cast directly upstream or downstream, but at an angle across the current. Let the flies land on the water as gently as possible so that the current carries them downstream over the spots where the trout are hiding. Keep the line as tight as you can by pulling in the slack with your left hand. The flies shouldn’t sit in the water too long, but you shouldn’t rush to retrieve them either. An experienced fly fisherman will usually fish with a wet line, meaning a slightly submerged fly, and will let the flies drift over as much water as possible before casting again. Since trout lie with their noses pointing upstream, waiting for food to come down the current, the caster should aim to float the flies downstream with the leader kept fairly tight. If you neglect this detail and let the leader float in a big loop near or in front of the flies, you’re not fishing well, and you’ll find that few trout will bite a fly presented in this careless way.
Early in the fishing season, and when the stream is flooded and discolored after a heavy rain, it is a good plan to fish the flies below the surface. Fishing in this manner makes it more difficult to tell when to strike a fish, and some little practice is needed to determine the opportune moment by feeling the slight tension on the line. Many fish will be pricked to be sure, but some trout will be creeled, and fishing with the submerged fly is sometimes the only way trout can be taken.
Early in the fishing season, when the stream is flooded and muddy after heavy rain, it’s a good idea to fish with flies below the surface. This method makes it harder to know when to strike a fish, and it takes some practice to feel for the slight tension on the line to determine the right moment. Many fish will get hooked for sure, but some trout will make it to the net, and using submerged flies is sometimes the only way to catch trout.
On fair days and in smooth water, better luck may be expected when the fly is kept upon the surface, and this is easily managed by keeping the tip of the rod well in the air. Often the fisherman can take advantage of a bit of floating foam, and if the fly is cast upon it and allowed to float with it downstream, the ruse will often prove effective.
On nice days and in calm water, you're likely to have better luck if you keep the fly on the surface. This is easy to do by holding the tip of the rod up high. Often, a fisherman can use a bit of floating foam to their advantage, and if the fly is cast onto it and allowed to drift downstream with it, that trick will often work well.
The trout is a hard striker and it is not unusual to have a trout rush ahead of the fly in his attempt to mouth it. In rapid water the savage rush of the fish is sufficient to hook it securely, [83] but when casting in quiet pools, the hook is imbedded by a snap of the wrist. At what exact moment to strike, as well as the amount of force to use, depends upon circumstances. When fishing in small streams and brooks where the trout run small, much less force is necessary to hook the fish, but in quiet water and in larger streams where 2 or 3-lb. trout are not uncommon, the fish may be struck with a smart upward jerk of the forearm and wrist. So far as my experience goes, the matter of striking is governed by the temperament as well as the judgment of the angler. The deliberate thinking man is likely to strike too late, while the nervous individual, striking too early, is apt to prick the trout and roll him over.
The trout is a strong fighter, and it's common for a trout to dart ahead of the fly in its attempt to grab it. In fast-moving water, the fish's aggressive rush is enough to hook it securely, [83] but when casting in calm pools, the hook is set with a quick snap of the wrist. The exact moment to strike and the amount of force needed depend on the situation. When fishing in small streams and brooks where the trout are smaller, you need much less force to hook the fish. However, in calm waters and larger streams where 2 or 3-pound trout are common, you can hook the fish with a sharp upward jerk of the forearm and wrist. In my experience, the way you strike is influenced by both the temperament and judgment of the angler. A thoughtful person is likely to strike too late, while a more anxious person, striking too early, may just prick the trout and roll it over.
The best time to fish for trout is when they are feeding on the surface; and in the early days of spring, when there are few flies about, the warmer part of the day, say, from 10 in the morning to 5 in the afternoon, will prove to be the most successful time. Later on, when flies are numerous, good luck may be expected at an early hour in the morning, and in the hot summer months the cooler hours of the day may be chosen. Of course, there are many exceptions, since there are many cool days in summer, as well as exceptionally warm days in spring, and these changes of weather should be considered. However, extremes are not likely to make good fishing, and the trout will not rise as freely on cold, windy days, nor will they fight as gamely. On hot days, too, not so much luck can be expected during the hours of the greatest heat—12 to 4—but a good basket of trout may be creeled early in the morning or late in the afternoon of summer. A bright, clear day is usually the best for fly fishing, because the sun brings out more flies, but a warm rain, or even a fog, is also considered good fishing weather.
The best time to catch trout is when they're feeding on the surface; in early spring, when there aren't many flies around, the warmer parts of the day—like from 10 in the morning to 5 in the afternoon—are usually the most successful. Later on, when flies are more common, you might have good luck fishing early in the morning, and during hot summer months, the cooler parts of the day are best. Of course, there are plenty of exceptions since summer can have cool days and spring can have unusually warm days, so it’s important to keep an eye on the weather. However, extreme conditions generally don’t lead to good fishing, and trout aren’t likely to bite as freely on cold, windy days, nor will they fight as hard. On really hot days, there’s less chance for success during the peak heat—between 12 and 4—but you can still catch a good number of trout early in the morning or late in the afternoon in summer. A bright, clear day is usually best for fly fishing since the sun brings out more flies, but a warm rain or even fog can also be great fishing weather.
Among the live baits available for trout fishing are the minnow, white grub, cricket, grasshopper, and other insects, and last, but by no means least, the common angle or earthworm. The minnow is beyond a doubt the most enticing morsel that can be offered to a hungry trout, and a minnow may be reckoned to secure a rise when other baits fail. The inconvenience of transporting this bait is a great drawback, and as minnows are delicate fish, a minnow bucket is necessary for their preservation. This means a lot of trouble, as the water must be frequently changed or aerated, and this labor, together with the difficulty of carrying a bulky pail through the brush, makes this desirable bait almost impossible for stream and brook fishing. The salt-water minnow, known as a "shiner" or "mummychug," is a topnotch trout bait, and being much tougher than the fresh-water minnow, makes a bait often used by anglers residing near the seacoast.
Among the live baits for trout fishing are minnows, white grubs, crickets, grasshoppers, and other insects, and last but not least, the common angle or earthworm. The minnow is definitely the most tempting snack you can offer a hungry trout, and it’s likely to catch a fish when other baits fail. However, transporting this bait is a major downside, and since minnows are delicate fish, you need a minnow bucket to keep them alive. This adds a lot of hassle, as you have to frequently change or aerate the water, and this work, along with the challenge of carrying a bulky bucket through the brush, makes this desirable bait nearly impossible to use for stream and brook fishing. The saltwater minnow, known as a "shiner" or "mummychug," is a top-tier trout bait and, being much tougher than the freshwater minnow, is often used by anglers living near the coast.
The white grub, or larvae of the so-called May beetle, is a good bait available for early-season fishing, and may be obtained in the early spring months by spading up grass land. The grub is about 1 in. long, and of a creamy yellow color with a darker head. It may be kept a month, or more, by putting it in a box with a number of pieces of fresh turf.
The white grub, or larvae of the May beetle, is a great bait for early-season fishing and can be found in early spring by turning up grassy areas. The grub is about 1 inch long, creamy yellow in color with a darker head. You can keep it for a month or more by putting it in a box with some fresh turf.
Crickets, grasshoppers, and many other insects, make good baits, while the earthworm is a good all-around bait for trout. A supply dug some days before and kept by packing in fresh moss and slightly moistening with milk and water will prove more attractive in appearance and the worms will be tougher and cleaner to handle than when carried in earth.
Crickets, grasshoppers, and many other insects make great bait, while earthworms are a reliable all-purpose bait for trout. If you dig up a supply a few days ahead and store them by packing them in fresh moss and lightly moistening them with milk and water, they'll look more appealing and will be tougher and cleaner to handle than if you just brought them in dirt.
Other good baits include the fin of a trout, and if this is used in combination with the eye of the same fish, it forms an attractive lure. In using this bait, do not puncture the eyeball, but hook through the thin flexible skin surrounding the eye. A fat piece of salt pork, cut into pieces 1 in. long and 1/4 in. wide, makes a fairly good bait. Spoons and other spinning baits are presumably attractive, but few sportsmen use them when angling for so fine a fish as trout. [84]
Other effective baits include a trout's fin, and when used with the eye of the same fish, it creates an appealing lure. When using this bait, avoid puncturing the eyeball; instead, hook through the thin, flexible skin around the eye. A thick piece of salt pork, cut into 1 inch long and 1/4 inch wide pieces, also serves as a decent bait. Spoons and other spinning baits are likely attractive, but not many anglers choose them when fishing for a delicate fish like trout. [84]
Houses Made of Poles
By Lola A. Pinchon
[In this article descriptions are given of several shelters suitable for a resort, but the reader may select any one of them that answers his needs and build a camp house, or fit up a more substantial one to make living quarters for the whole year.—Editor.]
[In this article, we describe several types of shelters suitable for a resort, but the reader can choose any one that meets their needs and build a camp house, or set up a more permanent one to create living quarters for the entire year.—Editor.]
Being forced to take the open-air treatment to regain health, a person adopted the plan of building a pole house in the woods, and the scheme was so successful that it was decided to make a resort grounds, to attract crowds during holidays, by which an income could be realized for living expenses. All the pavilions, stands, furniture, and amusement devices were constructed of straight poles cut from young growth of timber with the bark remaining on them. Outside of boards for flooring and roofing material, the entire construction of the buildings and fences consisted of poles.
Being required to undergo open-air treatment to regain health, a person decided to build a pole house in the woods, and the plan was so successful that it was decided to create a resort area to attract visitors during holidays, which would generate income for living expenses. All the pavilions, stands, furniture, and entertainment equipment were made from straight poles cut from young trees with the bark still on them. Aside from boards for flooring and roofing, the entire structure of the buildings and fences was made up of poles.

The Frame Construction of the House Made Entirely of Rough Poles, the Verticals being Set in the Ground, Plumbed, and Sighted to Make a Perfect Rectangle of the Desired Proportions
The frame of the house was built entirely from rough poles, with the verticals set into the ground, aligned, and checked to ensure a perfect rectangle with the desired proportions.
A level spot was selected and a house built having three rooms. The location was in a grove of young timbers, most of it being straight, and 13 trees were easily found that would make posts 12 ft. long, required for the sides, and two poles 16 ft. long, for the center of the ends, so that they would reach to the ridge. The plot was laid out rectangular and marked for the poles, which were set in the ground for a depth of 4 ft., at distances of 6 ft. apart. This made the house 8 ft. high at the eaves with a square pitch roof; that is, the ridge was 3 ft. high in the center from the plate surfaces for this width of a house. The rule for finding this height is to take one-quarter of the width of [86] the house for the height in the center from the plate.
A flat area was chosen, and a house was built with three rooms. The site was in a grove of young trees, mostly straight, and 13 trees were easily found that could be cut into 12 ft. long posts needed for the sides, and two poles 16 ft. long for the center of the ends, reaching up to the ridge. The plot was laid out as a rectangle and marked for the poles, which were planted 4 ft. deep and spaced 6 ft. apart. This made the house 8 ft. high at the eaves with a gable roof; that is, the ridge was 3 ft. high in the center from the wall plates for this width of the house. The method for determining this height is to take one-quarter of the width of the house for the height in the center from the wall plate.

The Steps are Supported on Pairs of Vertical Poles Set in the Ground to Make Different Levels
The steps are held up by pairs of vertical poles anchored in the ground to create various levels.
The corner poles were carefully located to make the size 12 by 24 ft., with a lean-to 8 by 12 ft., and then plumbed to get them straight vertically. The plates for the sides, consisting of five poles, were selected as straight as possible and their ends and centers hewn down to about one-half their thickness, as shown at A and B, and nailed to the tops of the vertical poles, the connection for center poles being as shown at C.
The corner poles were precisely positioned to create a size of 12 by 24 ft., with a lean-to of 8 by 12 ft., and then made sure they were straight up and down. The side plates, made of five poles, were chosen to be as straight as possible, and their ends and centers were trimmed down to about half their thickness, as shown at A and B, and nailed to the tops of the vertical poles, with the connection for the center poles illustrated at C.
The next step was to secure the vertical poles with crosspieces between them which were used later for supporting the siding. These poles were cut about 6 ft. long, their ends being cut concave to fit the curve of the upright poles, as shown at D. These were spaced evenly, about 2 ft. apart from center to center, on the sides and ends, as shown in the sketch, and toenailed in place. The doors and window openings were cut in the horizontal poles wherever wanted, and casements set in and nailed. The first row of horizontal poles was placed close to the ground and used both as support for the lower ends of the siding and to nail the ends of the flooring boards to, which were fastened in the center to poles laid on stones, or, better still, placed on top of short blocks, 5 ft. long, set in the ground. These poles for the floor should be placed not over 2 ft. apart to make the flooring solid.
The next step was to secure the vertical poles with crosspieces between them, which would later support the siding. These poles were cut to about 6 ft. long, with their ends shaped concave to fit the curve of the upright poles, as shown at D. They were spaced evenly, about 2 ft. apart from center to center, on the sides and ends, as illustrated in the sketch, and were toenailed in place. The doors and window openings were cut into the horizontal poles wherever necessary, and casements were set in and nailed. The first row of horizontal poles was placed close to the ground and served both as support for the lower ends of the siding and as a nailing point for the ends of the flooring boards, which were fastened in the center to poles laid on stones, or better yet, placed on top of short blocks, 5 ft. long, set into the ground. These poles for the floor should not be more than 2 ft. apart to ensure the flooring is solid.

Gate Openings were Made in the Fence Where Necessary, and Gates of Poles Hung in the Ordinary Manner
Gate openings were created in the fence where needed, and gates made of poles were hung in the usual way.
A lean-to was built by setting three poles at a distance of 8 ft. from one side, beginning at the center and extending to the end of the main building. These poles were about 6 ft. long above the ground. The rafter poles for this part were about 9-1/2 ft. long, notched at both ends for the plates, the ends of the house rafters being sawed off even with the outside of the plate along this edge. The rafter poles for the house were 10 in all, 8 ft. long, and were laid off and cut to fit a ridge made of a board. These poles were notched about 15 in. from their lower ends to fit over the rounding edge of the plate pole, and were then placed directly over each vertical wall pole. They were nailed both to the plate and to the ridge, also further strengthened by a brace made of a piece of board or a small pole, placed under the ridge and nailed to both rafters. On top of the rafters boards were placed horizontally, spaced about 1 ft. apart, but this is [87] optional with the builder, as other roofing material can be used. In this instance metal roofing was used, and it only required fastening at intervals, and to prevent rusting out, it was well painted on the under side before laying it and coated on the outside when fastened in place. If a more substantial shelter is wanted, it is best to lay the roof solid with boards, then cover it with the regular prepared roofing material.
A lean-to was constructed by placing three poles 8 ft. apart on one side, starting from the center and extending to the end of the main building. These poles stood about 6 ft. above the ground. The rafter poles for this section were about 9-1/2 ft. long, with notches at both ends for the plates, and the ends of the house rafters were trimmed to align with the outside of the plate along this edge. There were 10 rafter poles for the house, each 8 ft. long, cut to fit a ridge made of a board. These poles were notched about 15 in. from the bottom to sit over the rounded edge of the plate pole and were placed directly above each vertical wall pole. They were nailed to both the plate and the ridge, and further supported by braces made from a piece of board or a small pole, placed under the ridge and nailed to both rafters. On top of the rafters, boards were laid horizontally, spaced about 1 ft. apart, but this is [87] optional for the builder, as other roofing materials can be used. In this case, metal roofing was utilized, which only required fastening at intervals. To prevent rust, it was well-painted on the underside before installation and coated on the outside once secured. If a sturdier shelter is desired, it’s best to lay the roof solid with boards and then cover it with standard prepared roofing material.
Some large trees were selected and felled, then cut into 4-ft. lengths and the bark removed, or if desired, the bark removed in 4-ft. lengths, and nailed on the outside of the poles, beginning at the bottom in the same manner as laying shingles, to form the siding of the house. If a more substantial house is wanted, boards can be nailed on the poles, then the bark fastened to the boards; also, the interior can be finished in wall board.
Some large trees were chosen and cut down, then cut into 4-foot lengths with the bark stripped off. Alternatively, the bark could be removed in 4-foot sections and nailed to the outside of the poles, starting from the bottom in the same way you would lay shingles, to create the house siding. If a sturdier house is desired, boards can be nailed onto the poles and then the bark attached to the boards; additionally, the interior can be finished with wallboard.
The same general construction is used for the porch, with horizontal poles latticed, as shown, to form the railing. It is very easy to make ornamental parts, such as shown, on the eave of the porch, by splitting sticks and nailing them on closely together to make a frieze. Floors are laid on the porch and in the house, and doors hung and window sash fitted in the same manner as in an ordinary house.
The same basic structure is used for the porch, with horizontal poles arranged in a lattice pattern to create the railing. It's quite simple to add decorative elements, like the ones shown, on the eaves of the porch, by splitting sticks and nailing them closely together to form a frieze. Floors are installed on both the porch and inside the house, and doors and window sashes are hung and fitted just like in a regular house.

All Furniture, Together with the Large Lawn Swings, Took on the General Appearance of the Woodland, and As the Pieces were Made Up of the Same Material As the Houses, the Cost Was Only the Labor and a Few Nails
All the furniture, along with the big lawn swings, blended in with the woodland look, and since the pieces were made from the same material as the houses, the only cost was for labor and a few nails.
A band stand was constructed on sloping ground, and after setting the poles, the floor horizontals were placed about 2 ft. above the ground, on the upper side, and 4 ft. on the lower side. The poles used were about 18 ft. long. Instead of having the horizontals 2 ft. apart, the first was placed 1 ft. above the floor, the next at about one-half the distance from the lower one to the plate at the top, and the space between was ornamented with cross poles, as shown. A balcony or bay was constructed at one end, and a fancy roof was made of poles whose ends rested on a curved pole attached to the vertical pieces. Steps were formed of several straight poles, hewn down on their ends to make a level place to rest on horizontal pieces [88] attached to stakes at the ends. A pair of stakes were used at each end of a step, and these were fastened to a slanting piece at the top, their lower ends being set into the ground. The manner of bracing and crossing with horizontals makes a rigid form of construction, and if choice poles are selected for the step pieces, they will be comparatively level and of sufficient strength to hold up all the load put on them. The roof of this building was made for a sun shade only and consisted of boards nailed closely together on the rafters.
A bandstand was built on a sloping area, and after setting the poles, the horizontal floor beams were positioned about 2 feet above the ground on the upper side and 4 feet on the lower side. The poles used were around 18 feet long. Instead of placing the horizontals 2 feet apart, the first one was positioned 1 foot above the floor, the next one was set at about half the distance from the lower one to the plate at the top, and the space in between was decorated with cross poles, as shown. A balcony was built at one end, and a decorative roof was created with poles whose ends rested on a curved pole connected to the vertical pieces. Steps were made from several straight poles, with the ends trimmed to create a flat surface to rest on horizontal pieces attached to stakes at either end. A pair of stakes was used at each end of a step, secured to a slanting piece at the top, with their lower ends embedded in the ground. The way the bracing and crossing with horizontals is designed creates a sturdy construction, and if quality poles are chosen for the step pieces, they will be relatively level and strong enough to support any weight placed on them. The roof of this structure was designed as a sunshade only and consisted of boards tightly nailed together on the rafters.

The Entrance to the Grounds was Given an Inviting Appearance with Large Posts and Swinging Gates
The entrance to the property was designed to be welcoming with big posts and swinging gates.
An ice-cream parlor was built on the same plan, but without any board floor; the ground, being level, was used instead. There were five vertical poles used for each end with a space left between the two poles at the center, on both sides, for an entrance. This building was covered with prepared roofing, so that the things kept for sale could be protected in case of a shower.
An ice cream shop was constructed using the same design, but without a wooden floor; the flat ground was used instead. There were five vertical poles at each end with a gap left between the two center poles on both sides for an entrance. This building was covered with prepared roofing to protect the items for sale in case of rain.
A peanut stand was also built without a floor, and to make it with nine sides, nine poles were set in the ground to form a perfect nonagon and joined at their tops with latticed horizontals. Then a rafter was run from the top of each post to the center, and boards were fitted on each pair of rafters over the V-shaped openings. The boards were then covered with prepared roofing. A railing was formed of horizontals set in notches, cut in the posts, and then ornamented in the same manner as for the other buildings.
A peanut stand was also built without a floor, and to shape it with nine sides, nine poles were set in the ground to create a perfect nonagon, joined at the tops with crossed horizontal pieces. Then, a rafter extended from the top of each post to the center, and boards were attached on each pair of rafters over the V-shaped openings. The boards were then covered with prepared roofing. A railing was made of horizontal pieces placed in notches cut into the posts, and then it was decorated in the same style as the other buildings.
Fences were constructed about the grounds, made of pole posts with horizontals on top, hewn down and fitted as the plates for the house; and the lower pieces were set in the same as for making the house railing. Gates were made of two vertical pieces, the height of the posts, and two horizontals, then braced with a piece running from the lower corner at the hinge side to the upper opposite corner, the other cross brace being joined to the sides of the former, whereupon two short horizontals were fitted in the center. A blacksmith formed some hinges of rods and strap iron, as shown, and these were fastened in holes bored in the post and the gate vertical. A latch was made by boring a hole through the gate vertical and into the end of the short piece. Then a slot was cut in the side to receive a pin inserted in a shaft made to fit the horizontal hole. A keeper was made in the post by boring a hole to receive the end of the latch.
Fences were built around the property, made of pole posts with horizontal beams on top, shaped and fitted like the plates for the house. The lower pieces were set up just like making the house railing. Gates were made with two vertical pieces, matching the height of the posts, and two horizontal pieces, then reinforced with a brace running from the lower corner on the hinge side to the upper opposite corner. The other cross brace was attached to the sides of the first one, and two short horizontal pieces were added in the center. A blacksmith crafted some hinges from rods and strap iron, as shown, and these were secured into holes drilled in the post and the gate. A latch was created by boring a hole through the gate post and into the end of the short piece. Then a slot was cut in the side to hold a pin inserted into a shaft designed to fit the horizontal hole. A keeper was made in the post by drilling a hole to hold the end of the latch.
Large posts were constructed at the entrance to the grounds, and on these double swing gates, made up in the same manner as the small one, were attached. These large posts were built up of four slender poles and were considerably higher than the fence poles. The poles were set in a perfect square, having sides about 18 in. long, and a square top put on by mitering the corners, whereupon four small rafters were fitted on top. The gates were swung on hinges made like those for the small gate.
Large posts were constructed at the entrance to the grounds, and on these, double swing gates, designed in the same way as the smaller one, were attached. These large posts were made from four slender poles and were much taller than the fence poles. The poles were arranged in a perfect square, with sides about 18 inches long, and a square top was added by mitering the corners, with four small rafters fitted on top. The gates were hung on hinges similar to those for the small gate.
[89] Among the best and most enjoyed amusement devices on the grounds were the swings. Several of these were built, with and without tables. Four poles, about 20 ft. long, were set in the ground at an angle, and each pair of side poles was joined with two horizontals, about 12 ft. long, spreaders being fastened between the two horizontals to keep the tops of the poles evenly spaced. The distance apart of the poles will depend on the size of the swing and the number of persons to be seated. Each pair of side poles are further strengthened with crossed poles, as shown. If no table is to be used in the swing, the poles may be set closer together, so that the top horizontals will be about 8 ft. long. The platform for the swinging part consists of two poles, 12 ft. long, which are swung on six vertical poles, about 14 ft. long. These poles are attached to the top horizontals with long bolts, or rods, running through both, the bottom being attached in the same manner. Poles are nailed across the platform horizontals at the bottom for a floor, and a table with seats at the ends is formed of poles. The construction is obvious.
[89] Among the most popular and enjoyed amusement devices on the grounds were the swings. Several of these were built, with and without tables. Four poles, about 20 ft. long, were set in the ground at an angle, and each pair of side poles was connected with two horizontal beams, about 12 ft. long, with spreaders fastened between the two horizontals to keep the tops of the poles evenly spaced. The distance between the poles depends on the size of the swing and the number of people to be seated. Each pair of side poles is further reinforced with crossed poles, as shown. If no table is to be used in the swing, the poles can be set closer together, so that the top horizontals will be about 8 ft. long. The platform for the swinging part consists of two poles, 12 ft. long, which are suspended on six vertical poles, about 14 ft. long. These poles are attached to the top horizontals with long bolts or rods running through both, with the bottom being secured in the same way. Poles are nailed across the platform horizontals at the bottom to create a floor, and a table with seats at the ends is formed from poles. The construction is straightforward.
A short space between two trees can be made into a seat by fastening two horizontals, one on each tree, with the ends supported by braces. Poles are nailed on the upper surface for a seat.
A small gap between two trees can be turned into a seat by attaching two horizontal beams, one on each tree, with braces supporting the ends. Poles are nailed on the top surface for a seat.
Other furniture for the house and grounds was made of poles in the manner illustrated. Tables were built for picnickers by setting four or six poles in the ground and making a top of poles or boards. Horizontals were placed across the legs with extending ends, on which seats were made for the tables. Chairs and settees were built in the same manner, poles being used for the entire construction.
Other furniture for the house and grounds was made from poles as shown. Tables for picnics were created by planting four or six poles in the ground and adding a top made of more poles or boards. Horizontal pieces were placed across the legs with extended ends, which served as seats for the tables. Chairs and benches were constructed in the same way, using poles for the entire design.
An Electric Water Heater
Procure the barrel and cap from a hand bicycle pump and prepare them as follows: Make a tube of paper, about double the thickness of a postal card, to fit snugly in the pump barrel and oil it slightly before slipping it into place. Procure some resistance wire of the proper length and size to heat quickly. The wire can be tested out by coiling it on some nonconducting material, such as an earthen jug or glazed tile, and connecting one end to the current supply and running the other wire of the supply over the coil until it heats properly. Cut the resistance at this point and temporarily coil it to fit into the bottom of the pump barrel, allowing one end to extend up through the space in the center with sufficient length to make a connection to supply wires.
Get the barrel and cap from a bicycle pump and prepare them like this: Make a tube from paper, about twice as thick as a postcard, so it fits snugly in the pump barrel, and lightly oil it before inserting it. Get some resistance wire of the right length and thickness to heat up quickly. You can test the wire by coiling it around something non-conductive, like an earthen jug or glazed tile, connecting one end to the power source and looping the other wire from the supply over the coil until it heats up properly. Cut the resistance wire at that point and temporarily coil it to fit into the bottom of the pump barrel, leaving one end extending up through the center space long enough to connect to the supply wires.
Mix some dental plaster to the consistency of thick cream and, while keeping the wire in the center of the pump barrel, pour in the mixture until it is filled to within 1-1/2 in. of the top. Allow the plaster to set for about a day, then remove it from the barrel and take off the paper roll. The coil of wire at the bottom is now straightened out and wound in a coil over the outside of the plaster core, allowing sufficient end for connecting to the supply wires.
Mix some dental plaster until it’s the consistency of thick cream. While keeping the wire in the center of the pump barrel, pour the mixture in until it’s filled to within 1.5 inches of the top. Let the plaster set for about a day, then remove it from the barrel and take off the paper roll. The coil of wire at the bottom is now straightened out and coiled around the outside of the plaster core, leaving enough wire at the end to connect to the supply wires.

An Electric Heating Coil Made of Resistance Wire Placed in a Bicycle-Pump Barrel for Boiling Water
An Electric Heating Coil Made of Resistance Wire Set in a Bicycle Pump Barrel for Boiling Water
Cut two or three disks of mica to fit snugly in the bottom of the pump barrel, also cut a mica sheet to make a covering tube over the coil on the plaster core and insert the whole into the barrel. The two terminals are connected to the ends of a flexible cord which has a plug attached to the opposite end. Be sure to insulate the ends of the wire where they connect to the flexible cord inside of the pump barrel under the cap. In winding the resistance wire on the core, be sure that one turn does not touch the other. The heater when connected to a current supply and placed in 1 qt. of water will bring it to a boil quickly.—Contributed by A. H. Waychoff, Lyons, Colo
Cut two or three disks of mica to fit snugly in the bottom of the pump barrel. Also, cut a mica sheet to create a covering tube over the coil on the plaster core and insert everything into the barrel. The two terminals are connected to the ends of a flexible cord, which has a plug attached to the opposite end. Make sure to insulate the ends of the wire where they connect to the flexible cord inside the pump barrel under the cap. When winding the resistance wire on the core, ensure that one turn doesn't touch another. The heater, when connected to a current supply and placed in 1 qt. of water, will quickly bring it to a boil. —Contributed by A. H. Waychoff, Lyons, Colo
Camps
By F. S. Charles
A good site, pure water in abundance, and a convenient fuel supply, are the features of a temporary camp that should be given first consideration when starting out to enjoy a vacation in the woods. The site should be high and dry, level enough for the tent and camp fire, and with surrounding ground sloping enough to insure proper drainage. A sufficient fuel supply is an important factor, and a spot should be chosen where great effort is not required to collect it and get it into proper shape for the fire.
A good campsite with plenty of clean water and an easy supply of firewood are the main things to consider when planning a vacation in the woods. The spot should be high and dry, flat enough for the tent and campfire, and the surrounding area should slope enough for proper drainage. Having enough firewood is crucial, so choose a location where you won’t have to work too hard to gather it and prepare it for the fire.

Wall Tent
Canvas Tent

Lean-To of Boughs
Bough Lean-To

Log Cabin
Log Cabin
When locating near streams of water be careful to select a spot above high water mark so the ground will not be overflowed by a sudden rise of the stream. Do not select the site of an old camp, as the surroundings are usually stripped of all fuel, and the grounds are unclean.
When setting up near streams of water, make sure to choose a spot above the high water mark so that the ground won’t get flooded by a sudden rise in the stream. Avoid picking the site of an old camp, since the area is often cleaned out of all fuel and the ground is usually dirty.
Division of Work
Clear the selected spot and lay out the lines for the tent, camp fire, etc. If the camping party consists of more than two persons, each one should do the part allotted to him, and the work will be speedily accomplished. Remember that discipline brings efficiency, and do not be slack about a camp just because it is pleasure. One of the party should attend to the camp fire and prepare the meals while another secures the fuel and water. The tent can be unpacked and the ground cleared by the other members of the party, and when ready, all should assist in raising the tent, especially if it is a large one.
Clear the chosen area and set up the lines for the tent, campfire, etc. If the camping group has more than two people, everyone should take on their assigned task, and the work will get done quickly. Keep in mind that organization leads to efficiency, and don’t be careless with a campsite just because it’s for fun. One person should manage the campfire and cook the meals while another gathers the fuel and water. The tent can be unpacked and the area cleared by the other members of the group, and when everything is ready, everyone should help set up the tent, especially if it’s a large one.
Tents
An ordinary A or wedge tent is sufficient for one or two campers. Where you do not wish to locate permanently, this tent can be set up and taken down quickly. It should have a ring fastened to the cloth in each peak through which to pass a rope or line to take the place of a ridge pole. Such a tent can be pitched [91] between two trees or saplings, and, after tying the rope to the trees, it can be tightened with a long forked stick, placed under one end of the rope. If two trees are not conveniently located, then two poles crossed and tied together will make supports for one or both ends, the ridge line running over them and staked to the ground.
An ordinary A-frame or wedge tent is good enough for one or two campers. If you don’t want to set up a permanent location, this tent can be quickly put up and taken down. It should have a ring secured to the fabric at each peak that allows you to run a rope or line instead of a ridge pole. You can pitch this tent [91] between two trees or saplings, and after tying the rope to the trees, you can tighten it using a long forked stick placed under one end of the rope. If two trees aren’t available, you can create supports for one or both ends with two crossed and tied poles, running the ridge line over them and staking it to the ground.

Fire between Two Logs
Fire between Two Logs

Fire Built against a Log
Fire Set Against a Log
On a chilly night, the A tent is quite advantageous. The stakes can be pulled on one side and the cloth doubled to make a lean-to, open on the side away from the wind. A fire can be built in front and the deflected heat on the sleeper will keep him comfortable and warm.
On a chilly night, the A tent is really useful. You can pull the stakes on one side and double the fabric to create a lean-to, open on the side away from the wind. A fire can be set up in front, and the redirected heat will keep the person sleeping inside comfortable and warm.
For larger parties, the wall tent with a fly is recommended. These tents can be purchased in various sizes. The fly is an extra covering stretched over the top to make an open air space between the two roofs. It keeps the interior of the tent delightfully cool in hot summer weather and provides a better protection from rain. The fly can be made extra long, to extend over the end of the tent, making a shady retreat which can be used for lounging or a dining place.
For larger gatherings, a wall tent with a fly is suggested. These tents come in different sizes. The fly is an additional cover stretched over the top to create an open space between the two roofs. It keeps the inside of the tent pleasantly cool during hot summer days and offers better protection from rain. The fly can be made longer to extend over the end of the tent, creating a shaded area that can be used for relaxing or dining.
Protection from Insects
Where mosquitoes and other insects are numerous, it is well to make a second tent of cheesecloth with binding tape along the top to tie it to the ridge pole of the regular tent. The sides should be made somewhat longer than the regular tent so that there will be plenty of cloth to weight it down at the bottom. This second tent should be made without any opening whatever. The occupant must crawl under the edge to enter. The cheesecloth tent is used inside of the ordinary tent, and when not in use it is pushed aside.
Where there are a lot of mosquitoes and other insects, it's a good idea to create a second tent using cheesecloth, securing it with binding tape along the top to attach it to the ridge pole of the main tent. The sides should be a bit longer than the main tent so there’s enough fabric to hold it down at the bottom. This second tent should have no openings at all. The person inside must crawl under the edge to get in. The cheesecloth tent is set up inside the regular tent, and when it's not needed, it can be pushed aside.

Forked Sticks Supporting Cooking Utensils
Forked Sticks for Cooking Tools
Two camps are illustrated showing the construction of a lean-to for a temporary one-season camp, and a log cabin which makes a permanent place from year to year. (A more elaborate and more expensive camp was described in the May issue of this magazine.) The construction of these camps are very simple. The first is made of poles cut in the woods. A ridge pole is placed between two trees or held in place with poles of sufficient length, set in the ground. Poles are placed on this at an angle of about 45 deg., forming a lean-to that will be [92] entirely open in front when finished. The poles are covered, beginning at the bottom, with pine boughs, laid in layers so as to make a roof that will shed water. A large fire, built a short distance from the open front will make a warm place to sleep, the heat being reflected down the same as described for the A tent.
Two camps are shown that demonstrate how to build a lean-to for a temporary one-season camp, and a log cabin that serves as a permanent place year after year. (A more detailed and costly camp was described in the May issue of this magazine.) Building these camps is pretty straightforward. The first camp is made from poles cut in the woods. A ridge pole is set between two trees or supported by sufficiently long poles anchored in the ground. Poles are arranged on this at about a 45-degree angle, creating a lean-to that will be entirely open in front when completed. The poles are covered, starting from the bottom, with pine boughs layered to create a roof that will keep out water. A large fire, built a short distance from the open front, will provide a warm place to sleep, with the heat reflecting down, just like described for the A tent.
A Permanent Camp
A good permanent camp is a log cabin. This can be constructed of materials found in the woods. Trees may be felled, cut to length, and notched to join the ends together at each corner so as to leave little or no space between the logs. The roof is constructed of long clapboards, split from blocks of wood. The builder can finish such a camp as elaborately as he chooses, and for this reason the site should be selected with great care.
A good permanent camp is a log cabin. This can be built using materials found in the woods. Trees can be chopped down, cut to size, and notched to fit together at each corner, leaving little or no space between the logs. The roof is made from long boards split from blocks of wood. The builder can finish the camp as elaborately as they wish, so it’s important to choose the site very carefully.
Camp Fires
There is no better way to make a camp fire than to have a large log or two against which to start a fire with small boughs. Larger sticks can be placed over the logs in such a way as to hold a pot of water or to set a frying pan. Forked sticks can be laid on the log and weighted on the lower end with a stone, using the upper end to hang a cooking vessel over the flames. Two logs placed parallel, with space enough between for the smaller sticks, make one of the best camp cooking arrangements. Two forked sticks, one at each end of the logs, may be set in the ground and a pole placed in the forks lengthwise of the fire. This makes a convenient place for hanging the cooking utensils with bent wires.
There's no better way to make a campfire than by using a large log or two to start the fire with small branches. Larger sticks can be placed over the logs to hold a pot of water or a frying pan. You can lay forked sticks on the log and weigh down the lower end with a stone, using the upper end to hang a cooking pot over the flames. Two logs placed parallel with enough space between them for smaller sticks create one of the best setups for camp cooking. Two forked sticks, one at each end of the logs, can be set in the ground with a pole placed in the forks lengthwise over the fire. This creates a convenient spot for hanging cooking utensils with bent wires.
Food Supplies
The conditions in various localities make a difference in the camper's appetite and in consequence no special list of food can be recommended, but the amount needed by the average person in a vacation camp for two weeks, is about as follows:
The conditions in different places affect the camper's appetite, so no specific list of food can be suggested. However, the amount needed by the average person in a vacation camp for two weeks is roughly as follows:
Bacon | 15 | lb. |
Ham | 5 | " |
Flour | 20 | " |
Corn Meal | 5 | " |
Rice | 5 | " |
Baking Powder | 1/2 | " |
Sugar | 5 | " |
Beans | 4 | " |
Salt | 2 | " |
Lard | 3 | " |
Coffee | 3 | " |
A number of small things must be added to this list, such as pepper, olive oil, sage, nutmeg and vinegar. If the weight is not to be considered, canned goods, preserves, jam and marmalade, also vegetables and dried fruits may be added. Do not forget soap and matches.
A number of small items need to be added to this list, like pepper, olive oil, sage, nutmeg, and vinegar. If weight isn’t an issue, canned goods, preserves, jam, and marmalade, along with vegetables and dried fruits, can also be included. Don’t forget soap and matches.
Food can be kept cool in a box or a box-like arrangement made of straight sticks over which burlap is hung and kept wet. This is accomplished by setting a pan on top of the box and fixing wicks of cloth over the edges. The wicks will siphon the water out evenly and keep the burlap wet.
Food can be kept cool in a box or a box-like setup made of straight sticks, with burlap draped over it and kept damp. This is done by placing a pan on top of the box and attaching cloth wicks over the edges. The wicks will draw the water out evenly and keep the burlap moist.
A Drinking Tube
When on a walking tour through the woods or country, it might be well to provide a way to procure water for drinking purposes. Take with you several feet of small rubber tubing and a few inches of hollow cane of the size to fit the tube.
When you're on a walking tour through the woods or countryside, it's a good idea to have a way to get water for drinking. Bring along several feet of small rubber tubing and a few inches of hollow cane that fits the tube.
In one end insert the cane for a mouthpiece, and allow the other end to reach into the water. Exhaust the air from the tube and the water will rush up to your lips.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
In one end, insert the cane for a mouthpiece, and let the other end reach into the water. Suck the air out of the tube, and the water will rush up to your lips. —Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
Washing Photographic Prints
The usual way of washing photographic prints is to place them in a shallow tray in which they will become stuck together in bunches, if they are not often separated. A French magazine suggests that a deep tank be used instead, and that each print be attached to a cork by means of a pin stuck through one corner, the cork thus becoming a float which keeps the print suspended vertically, and at the same time prevents contact with its nearest neighbor.
The normal method for washing photographic prints is to put them in a shallow tray where they tend to stick together in clumps if they aren't regularly separated. A French magazine recommends using a deep tank instead, attaching each print to a cork with a pin through one corner. This way, the cork acts as a float, keeping the print suspended vertically and avoiding contact with the print next to it.
Camp Furnishings
By Chelsea Curtis Fraser
When on a camping trip nothing should be carried but the necessities, and the furnishings should be made up from materials found in the woods. A good spring bed can be made up in the following manner: Cut two stringers from small, straight trees, about 4 in. in diameter, and make them about 6 ft. long. All branches are trimmed off smooth and a trench is dug in the ground for each piece, the trenches being 24 in. apart. Small saplings, about 1 in. in diameter, and as straight as can be found, are cut and trimmed of all branches, and nailed across the stringers for the springs. Knots, bulges, etc., should be turned downward as far as possible. The ends of each piece are flattened as shown at A, Fig. 1, to give it a good seat on the stringers.
When you're on a camping trip, you should only bring the essentials, and your furnishings should come from materials found in the woods. You can create a good spring bed like this: Cut two supports from small, straight trees, about 4 inches in diameter, and make them about 6 feet long. Trim off all branches so they're smooth, and dig a trench in the ground for each piece, with the trenches being 24 inches apart. Cut and trim small saplings, about 1 inch in diameter, making sure they're as straight as possible, and nail them across the supports for the springs. Make sure knots and bulges face downward as much as you can. Flatten the ends of each piece as shown at A, Fig. 1, to give it a stable seat on the supports.
A larger sapling is cut, flattened, and nailed at the head of the bed across the stringers, and to it a number of head-stay saplings, B, are nailed. These head-stay pieces are cut about 12 in. long, sharpened on one end and driven a little way into the ground, after which they are nailed to the head crosspiece.
A bigger sapling is cut down, flattened, and nailed at the head of the bed across the stringers. Several head-stay saplings, B, are then nailed to it. These head-stay pieces are around 12 inches long, sharpened at one end, and pushed a little into the ground, after which they are nailed to the head crosspiece.

A Camp Bed Made of Saplings with Several Layers of Boughs for the Mattress (Fig. 1)
A camp bed made of young tree branches with several layers of branches for the mattress (Fig. 1)
In the absence of an empty mattress tick and pillow cover which can be filled with straw, boughs of fir may be used. These boughs should not be larger than a match and crooked stems should be turned down. Begin at the head of the bed and lay a row of boughs with the stems pointing toward the foot. Over this row, and half-lapping it, place another row so that the tops of the boughs lie on the line C and their stems on the line D. This process is continued until the crosspiece springs are entirely covered, and then another layer is laid in the same manner on top of these, and so on, until a depth of 6 or 8 in. is obtained. This will make a good substitute for a mattress. A pillow can be made by filling a meal bag with boughs or leaves.
If you don't have a spare mattress tick and pillow cover that can be filled with straw, you can use fir boughs instead. These boughs shouldn't be bigger than a matchstick, and any crooked stems should be pointed down. Start at the head of the bed and lay down a row of boughs with the stems facing the foot of the bed. On top of this row, and slightly overlapping it, place another row so that the tops of the boughs line up with line C and their stems with line D. Keep going until the crosspiece springs are completely covered, then add another layer in the same way on top of that, and continue until you reach a depth of 6 to 8 inches. This will serve as a decent substitute for a mattress. You can make a pillow by filling a meal bag with boughs or leaves.

A Table Made of Packing-Box Material and a Wash Basin Stand of Three Stakes (Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A Table Made from Packing-Box Material and a Wash Basin Stand with Three Stakes (Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A good and serviceable table can be constructed from a few fence boards, or boards taken from a packing box. The table and chairs are made in one piece, the construction being clearly shown in Fig. 2. The height of the ends should be about 29 in., and the seats about 17 in. from the ground. The other dimensions will be governed by the material at hand and the number of campers.
A sturdy and functional table can be made from a few fence boards or boards from a packing box. The table and chairs are built as a single unit, as illustrated in Fig. 2. The ends should be around 29 inches high, and the seats should be about 17 inches off the ground. The other measurements will depend on the materials available and the number of campers.
A wash-basin support can be made of three stakes, cut from saplings and driven in the ground, as shown in Fig. 3. The basin is hung by its rim between the ends of the stakes.
A washbasin support can be made from three stakes, cut from young trees and pushed into the ground, as shown in Fig. 3. The basin is hung by its rim between the ends of the stakes.
Wherever a suitable tree is handy, a seat can be constructed as shown in Fig. 4. Bore two 1-in. holes, 8 in. apart, in the trunk, 15 in. above the ground, and drive two pins, about 12 in. long, cut from a sapling into them. The extending ends are supported on legs of the same material. The seat is made of a slab with the rounding side down.
Wherever there's a suitable tree nearby, you can build a seat like the one shown in Fig. 4. Drill two 1-inch holes, 8 inches apart, in the trunk, 15 inches above the ground, and drive two pins, about 12 inches long, cut from a sapling into them. The extending ends are supported by legs made from the same material. The seat is made from a flat piece of wood with the rounded side facing down.
A clothes hanger for the tent ridge [94] pole can be made as shown in Fig. 5. The hanger consists of a piece, 7 in. long, cut from a 2-in. sapling, nails being driven into its sides for hooks. The upper end is fitted with a rope which is tied over the ridge pole of the tent.
A clothes hanger for the tent ridge pole can be made as shown in Fig. 5. The hanger is made from a 7-inch piece cut from a 2-inch sapling, with nails driven into its sides to serve as hooks. The upper end is attached to a rope, which is tied over the ridge pole of the tent.

A Seat Against the Trunk of a Tree, and a Clothes Hanger for the Tent Ridge Pole (Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
A Seat Against the Trunk of a Tree, and a Clothes Hanger for the Tent Ridge Pole (Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
A Fruit Stemmer

In the berry season the stemmer shown in the sketch is a very handy article for the kitchen. It is made of spring steel and tempered, the length being about 2-1/2 in. The end used for removing the stem is ground from the outside edge after tempering. A ring large enough to admit the second finger is soldered at a convenient distance from the end on one leg.—Contributed by H. F. Reams, Nashville, Tennessee.
In the berry season, the stemmer shown in the sketch is a really useful tool for the kitchen. It's made of tempered spring steel and is about 2.5 inches long. The end used for removing the stems is ground from the outer edge after tempering. There's a ring, big enough to fit your second finger, soldered at a comfortable distance from the end on one leg.—Contributed by H. F. Reams, Nashville, Tennessee.
A Homemade Fountain Pen
A very serviceable fountain pen can be made from two 38-72 rifle cartridges and a steel pen. Clean out the cartridges, fit a plug tightly in the end of one shell, and cut it off smooth with the end of the metal. Drill a 3/16 in. hole in the center of the wood plug and fit another plug into this hole with sufficient end projecting to be shaped for the length of the steel pen to be used. The shank of the pen and the plug must enter the hole together. One side of the projecting end of the plug should be shaped to fit the inside surface of the pen and then cut off at a point a little farther out than the eye in the pen. On the surface that is to lie against the pen a groove is cut in the plug extending from near the point to the back end where it is to enter the hole in the first plug. The under side of the plug is shaped about as shown.
A very handy fountain pen can be made from two 38-72 rifle cartridges and a steel pen. Clean out the cartridges, insert a plug tightly in the end of one shell, and cut it off smoothly with the end of the metal. Drill a 3/16-inch hole in the center of the wood plug and fit another plug into this hole, leaving enough sticking out to be shaped for the length of the steel pen you plan to use. The shank of the pen and the plug must go into the hole together. One side of the projecting end of the plug should be shaped to fit the inside surface of the pen, then cut off a bit further out than the eye in the pen. On the side that will rest against the pen, cut a groove in the plug extending from near the point to the back end where it will enter the hole in the first plug. The underside of the plug is shaped roughly as shown.

One Cartridge Shell Makes the Fountain Part of the Pen, and the Other the Cap
One cartridge shell forms the fountain part of the pen, and the other is the cap.
The other cartridge is cut off at such a point that it will fit on the tapering end of the first one, and is used for a cap. The cartridge being filled with ink and the plug inserted, the ink will flow down the small groove in the feeder plug and supply the pen with ink. Care must be taken that the surface of the smaller plug fits the pen snugly and that the groove is not cut through to the point end. This will keep the ink from flooding, and only that which is used for writing will be able to get through or leak out.—Contributed by Edwin N. Harnish, Ceylon, Canada.
The other cartridge is cut off so that it can fit on the narrow end of the first one and is used as a cap. Once the cartridge is filled with ink and the plug is in place, the ink will flow down the small groove in the feeder plug to supply the pen with ink. It's important to ensure that the surface of the smaller plug fits the pen tightly and that the groove isn't cut all the way to the tip. This will prevent the ink from leaking out, allowing only the amount needed for writing to pass through.—Contributed by Edwin N. Harnish, Ceylon, Canada.
Destroying Caterpillars on Grapevines
The grapes in my back yard were being destroyed by caterpillars which could be found under all the large leaves. The vine was almost dead when I began to cut off all the large leaves and those eaten by the caterpillars, which allowed the sun's rays to reach the grapes. This destroyed all the caterpillars and the light and heat ripened the grapes.—Contributed by Wm. Singer, Rahway, N. J.
The grapes in my backyard were being ruined by caterpillars hiding under the big leaves. The vine was nearly dead when I started to trim all the large leaves and those that the caterpillars had eaten, which let the sunlight reach the grapes. This got rid of all the caterpillars, and the light and heat helped the grapes ripen. —Contributed by Wm. Singer, Rahway, N. J.
It will require 1 gal. of ordinary mixed calcimine to cover 270 sq. ft. of plastered surface, 180 sq. ft. of brickwork and 225 sq. ft. of average woodwork.
It will take 1 gallon of regular mixed calcimine to cover 270 square feet of plastered surface, 180 square feet of brickwork, and 225 square feet of typical woodwork.
A Camp Provision Box
While on a camping-and canoeing trip recently, I used a device which added a touch of completeness to our outfit and made camp life really enjoyable. This useful device is none other than a provision or "grub" box.
While on a camping and canoeing trip recently, I used a device that really enhanced our gear and made camp life much more enjoyable. This handy device is nothing other than a supply or "grub" box.

The Provision Box Ready for Use in Camp, the Cover Turned Back on the Brackets and the Legs Extended
The Supply Box Ready for Use in Camp, the Lid Pulled Back on the Brackets and the Legs Extended
From experience campers know that the first important factor in having a successful trip is compactness of outfit. When undertaking an outing of this kind it is most desirable to have as few bundles to carry as possible, especially if one is going to be on the move part of the time. This device eliminates an unnecessary amount of bundles, thus making the trip easier for the campers, and doubly so if they intend canoeing part of the time; and, apart from its usefulness as a provision container, it affords a general repository for the small articles which mean so much to the camper's welfare.
From experience, campers know that the most important factor for a successful trip is having a compact setup. When going on an outing like this, it’s best to carry as few bundles as possible, especially if you plan to be on the move part of the time. This method reduces the number of bundles, making the trip easier for campers, and even more so if they intend to do some canoeing. Besides being a handy container for supplies, it also provides a general place to store small items that are crucial to the camper’s well-being.
The box proper may be made of any convenient size, so long as it is not too cumbersome for two people to handle. The dimensions given are for a box I used on a canoe trip of several hundred miles; and from experience I know it to be of a suitable size for canoeists. If the camper is going to have a fixed camp and have his luggage hauled, a larger box is much to be preferred. A glance at the figures will show the general proportions of the box. It may be possible, in some cases, to secure a strong packing box near the required dimensions, thus doing away with the trouble of constructing it. The distinguishing features of this box are the hinged cover, the folding legs, and the folding brackets. The brackets, upon which the top rests when open, fold in against the back of the box when not in use. The same may be said of the legs. They fold up alongside the box and are held there by spring-brass clips.
The box can be any size that’s convenient, as long as it’s not too heavy for two people to carry. The dimensions I provided are for a box I used on a canoe trip that covered several hundred miles; from experience, I know it’s a good size for canoeists. If the camper plans to have a fixed campsite and have their luggage transported, a larger box is definitely better. A quick look at the numbers will show you the overall proportions of the box. In some cases, it might be possible to find a sturdy packing box that's close to the right dimensions, which would save you the hassle of building one. The key features of this box include the hinged lid, folding legs, and folding brackets. The brackets, which support the lid when it's open, fold against the back of the box when not in use. The same goes for the legs; they fold up alongside the box and are secured by spring-brass clips.

The Brackets for the Cover as Well as Each of the Four Legs Fold Against the Sides of the Box in Such a Manner as to be Out of the Way, Making the Box Easy to Carry and Store Away in a Small Space
The brackets for the cover and each of the four legs fold against the sides of the box so that they're out of the way, making the box easy to carry and store in a small space.
On our trips we carry an alcohol stove on which we do all of our cooking. The inner side of the top is covered with a sheet of asbestos, this side being uppermost when the hinged top is opened and resting on the folding brackets. The stove rested on this asbestos, thus making everything safe. The cover is large enough to do all the cooking on, and the box is so high that the cooking can be attended to without stooping over, which is much more pleasant than squatting before a camp fire getting the eyes full of smoke. The legs are hinged to the box in such a manner that all of the weight of the box [96] rests on the legs rather than on the hinges, and are kept from spreading apart by wire turnbuckles. These, being just bolts and wire, may be tucked inside the box when on the move. The top is fitted with unexposed hinges and with a lock to make it a safe place for storing valuables.
On our trips, we take an alcohol stove for all our cooking. The inside of the top is lined with a sheet of asbestos, which faces up when the hinged top is opened and rests on the folding brackets. The stove sits on this asbestos, making everything safe. The cover is large enough for all the cooking, and the box is tall enough that you can cook without bending over, which is much nicer than squatting by a campfire and getting smoke in your eyes. The legs are hinged to the box in a way that the entire weight of the box is supported by the legs instead of the hinges, and they're prevented from spreading apart by wire turnbuckles. These can be easily tucked inside the box when we're on the move since they're just bolts and wire. The top has hidden hinges and a lock, providing a secure place to store valuables.

Detail of the Turnbuckle, Button to Hold the Brackets, and the Spring Clip for Holding the Legs on the Side of the Box
Detail of the turnbuckle, button to secure the brackets, and the spring clip for keeping the legs on the side of the box.
In constructing the cover it is well to make it so that it covers the joints of the sides, thus making the box waterproof from the top, if rain should fall on it. A partition can be made in one end to hold odds and ends. A tray could be installed, like the tray in a trunk, to hold knives, forks, spoons, etc., while the perishable supplies are kept underneath the tray. Give the box two coats of lead paint, and shellac the inside.
When building the cover, it’s smart to design it so that it overlaps the sides, making the box waterproof from the top in case it rains. You can add a partition at one end to store miscellaneous items. A tray could be installed, similar to the one in a trunk, to hold knives, forks, spoons, and other small utensils while perishable supplies are kept underneath the tray. Apply two coats of lead paint to the box and use shellac on the inside.
The wire braces for the legs are made as follows. Procure four machine bolts, about 1/4 in. in diameter and 2 in. long—any thread will do—with wing nuts and washers to fit. Saw or file off the heads and drill a small hole in one end of each bolt, large enough to receive a No. 16 galvanized iron wire. Two inches from the bottom of each leg drill a hole to take the bolt loosely. Determine the exact distance between the outside edges of the legs when the box is resting on them. Make the wire braces 1 in. longer than this distance so that the bolts will protrude through the holes in the legs and allow for putting on the nuts and washers. Screwing up on the nuts draws the wire taut, thus holding the legs firm.
The wire braces for the legs are made like this. Get four machine bolts, about 1/4 inch in diameter and 2 inches long—any thread will work—along with wing nuts and washers that fit. Cut or file off the heads and drill a small hole in one end of each bolt, just big enough to fit a No. 16 galvanized iron wire. Two inches up from the bottom of each leg, drill a hole for the bolt to fit loosely. Measure the exact distance between the outer edges of the legs when the box is resting on them. Make the wire braces 1 inch longer than this distance so that the bolts stick out through the holes in the legs and you can put on the nuts and washers. Tightening the nuts pulls the wire tight, keeping the legs secure.
The size of the top determines the dimensions of the folding brackets which support it when open. These brackets may be solid blocks of wood, but a lighter and more serviceable bracket is constructed as follows. If the top is 20 in. wide and 30 in. long, make the brackets 10 by 13 in. Constructing the brackets so that their combined length is 4 in. shorter than the total length of the box, facilitates their folding against the back of the box when not in use. This point is clearly shown in the drawing. Our brackets were made of 1/2-in. oak, 1-1/2 in. wide, and the joints halved together. They are hinged to the back of the box as shown; and when folded are held in place by a simple catch. The weight of the lid is sufficient to hold the brackets in place when open, but to make sure they will not creep when in use insert a 1/4-in. dowel in the end of each so that it protrudes 1/4 in. Drill two holes in the top to the depth of 1/4 in., so that when the top rests on the brackets, these holes engage with the dowels. In hinging the brackets to the back see that they are high enough to support the lid at right angles to the box.
The size of the top determines the dimensions of the folding brackets that support it when open. These brackets can be solid blocks of wood, but a lighter and more practical bracket is made as follows. If the top is 20 inches wide and 30 inches long, make the brackets 10 by 13 inches. Constructing the brackets so that their combined length is 4 inches shorter than the total length of the box makes it easier for them to fold against the back of the box when not in use. This point is clearly shown in the drawing. Our brackets were made of 1/2-inch oak, 1-1/2 inches wide, and the joints were halved together. They are hinged to the back of the box as shown; and when folded, they are held in place by a simple catch. The weight of the lid is enough to keep the brackets in place when open, but to ensure they don't move during use, insert a 1/4-inch dowel in the end of each so that it sticks out 1/4 inch. Drill two holes in the top to a depth of 1/4 inch, so that when the top rests on the brackets, these holes engage with the dowels. When hinging the brackets to the back, make sure they are positioned high enough to support the lid at a right angle to the box.
The box here shown is made of 7/8 in. white pine throughout. The legs are 7/8 by 2-1/2 by 18 in. They are fastened to the box with ordinary strap hinges. When folded up against the box they do not come quite to the top so that the box should be at least 19 in. high for 18-in. legs. About 2 in. from the bottom of the legs drive in a brad so it protrudes 1/8 in. as shown. This brad engages in a hole in the spring-brass clip when folded up as shown in the illustration.
The box shown here is made of 7/8 in. white pine all around. The legs are 7/8 by 2-1/2 by 18 in. They are attached to the box with standard strap hinges. When folded against the box, they don't quite reach the top, so the box should be at least 19 in. high for 18-in. legs. About 2 in. from the bottom of the legs, drive in a brad so it sticks out 1/8 in. as shown. This brad fits into a hole in the spring-brass clip when folded up, as illustrated.
If in a fixed camp, it is a good idea to stand the legs in tomato cans partly full of water. This prevents ants from crawling up the legs into the box, but it necessitates placing the wire braces higher on the legs.
If you're in a permanent camp, it's wise to set the legs in tomato cans that are partially filled with water. This keeps ants from climbing up the legs into the box, but it means you'll need to position the wire braces higher on the legs.
Our box cost us nothing but the hardware, as we knocked some old packing boxes to pieces and planed up enough boards to make the sides. Of course, the builder need not adhere to these dimensions, for he can make the size to suit his requirements, while the finish is a matter of personal taste.
Our box cost us nothing except for the hardware, since we broke down some old packing boxes and planed enough boards to create the sides. Of course, the builder doesn’t have to stick to these dimensions, as they can make the size to fit their needs, and the finish is really a matter of personal preference.
A blue writing ink is easily made of 1 oz. Prussian blue, 1-1/2 oz. oxalic acid and 1 pt. of soft water. Shake and allow it to stand until dissolved.
A blue writing ink is easy to make with 1 oz. of Prussian blue, 1-1/2 oz. of oxalic acid, and 1 pt. of soft water. Mix it well and let it sit until fully dissolved.
Wall Pockets in a Tent
When camping I find a few wall pockets sewed to the tent walls at the back end provide a convenient means to hold the soap, mirror, razor and other small articles liable to be lost. The pockets can be made of the same material as the tent and sewed on as a patch pocket.—Contributed by A. M. Barnes, Atlanta, Ga.
When camping, I find that a few wall pockets sewn onto the back walls of the tent are a handy way to keep soap, a mirror, a razor, and other small items from getting lost. The pockets can be made of the same material as the tent and attached as patch pockets.—Contributed by A. M. Barnes, Atlanta, Ga.
Camp Stoves
The camp stoves illustrated are different forms of the same idea. Both can be taken apart and laid flat for packing. Iron rods, 1/2 in. in diameter, are used for the legs. They are sharpened at the lower end so that they may be easily driven into the ground. The rods of the one shown in the first illustration are bent in the form of a hook at the upper end, and two pieces of light tire iron, with holes in either end, are hung on these hooks. Across these supports are laid other pieces of the tire iron. In the other stove, the rods have a large head and are slipped through holes in the four corners of the piece of heavy sheet iron used for the top. A cotter is slipped through a hole in each rod just below the top, to hold the latter in place.—Contributed by Mrs. Lelia Munsell, Herington, Kansas.
The camp stoves shown are various versions of the same concept. Both can be disassembled and flattened for easy packing. Iron rods, ½ inch in diameter, serve as the legs. They are pointed at the bottom so they can be easily driven into the ground. The rods in the first illustration are curved into a hook shape at the top, with two pieces of lightweight tire iron, featuring holes at both ends, hanging from these hooks. Additional pieces of tire iron are laid across these supports. In the other stove, the rods have a larger head and go through holes in the four corners of a heavy sheet of iron used for the top. A cotter pin is inserted through a hole in each rod just below the top to keep it in place. —Contributed by Mrs. Lelia Munsell, Herington, Kansas.

Camp-Stove Top, Either Solid or Pieced, Supported on Rods at the Corners
Camp-stove top, whether solid or made of pieces, supported on rods at the corners.
Attractor for Game Fish
A piece of light wood, shaped as shown and with four small screweyes attached, makes a practical attractor for game fish, such as bass, etc., by its action when drawn through the water or carried by the flow of a stream. Hooks are attached to three of the screweyes and the fourth one, on the sloping surface, is used for the line.—Contributed by Arthur Vogel, Indianapolis, Ind.
A small piece of light wood, shaped like shown and with four small screw eyes attached, creates a practical lure for game fish like bass, thanks to its movement when pulled through the water or carried along by a stream. Hooks are connected to three of the screw eyes, and the fourth one, on the angled surface, is used for the fishing line.—Contributed by Arthur Vogel, Indianapolis, Ind.

A Device for Attracting Game Fish Which is Used in Place of Bait
A Device for Attracting Game Fish Which is Used Instead of Bait
Simple Photographic-Print Washer
The ordinary washbowl supplied with a faucet may be easily converted into a washing tray for photographic prints or film negatives. Procure a medicine dropper from a druggist, and attach it to the faucet end with a short piece of rubber tubing. Be sure to procure a dropper that has the point turned at right angles to the body.
The typical washbasin with a faucet can easily be transformed into a washing tray for photo prints or film negatives. Get a medicine dropper from a pharmacy and connect it to the faucet with a small piece of rubber tubing. Make sure to get a dropper that has the tip angled at a right angle to the body.

The Whirling Motion Set Up by the Forced Stream at an Angle Thoroughly Washes Prints
The Whirling Motion Set Up by the Forced Stream at an Angle Thoroughly Washes Prints
When the water is turned on it is forced through the small opening in the dropper in such a manner that the water in the bowl is kept in a constant whirling motion. This will keep the prints on the move, which is necessary for a thorough washing.
When the water is turned on, it is pushed through the small opening in the dropper in a way that keeps the water in the bowl constantly swirling. This keeps the prints moving, which is essential for a proper wash.
How to Make an Electric Fishing Signal
A unique electric fishing signal, which may be rigged up on a wharf or pier, and the electric circuit so arranged as to operate an electric bell or buzzer, located in the fisherman's cottage, or any other convenient place, may be constructed as follows: Obtain two pieces of 1/16-in. spring brass, one 6 in. long and 3/4 in. wide, and the other 7 in. long and 1/2 in. wide. Mount a 2-in. brass wood screw, A, in one end of the 6-in. piece as shown.
A unique electric fishing signal can be set up on a wharf or pier, and the electric circuit arranged to activate an electric bell or buzzer located in the fisherman’s cottage or another convenient spot. Here’s how to construct it: Get two pieces of 1/16-inch spring brass, one measuring 6 inches long and 3/4 inch wide, and the other measuring 7 inches long and 1/2 inch wide. Attach a 2-inch brass wood screw, A, to one end of the 6-inch piece as shown.

Construction of the Parts to Make the Contact Points and the Electric Connections
Construction of the Parts to Make the Contact Points and the Electric Connections
Place over the end of the 6-in. piece a thin sheet of insulating fiber, B, allowing it to extend down on each side about 1 in. Then bend a piece of 1/16-in. brass, C, over the insulating fiber, allowing it to extend down on each side the same distance as the insulating fiber. Drill a small hole through the lower ends of the U-shaped piece of brass, C, the insulation, B, and the 6-in. piece, while they are all in place. Remove the insulation and the U-shaped brass piece, and tap the holes in the brass for a machine screw, D. Enlarge the hole in the 6-in piece, and provide an insulating bushing for it with an opening of the same diameter as the brass machine screw. Mount a small binding post, E, on one side of the U-shaped piece of brass, and the parts may then be put together and held in place by means of the brass screw.
Place a thin sheet of insulating fiber, B, over the end of the 6-inch piece, allowing it to extend down about 1 inch on each side. Then bend a piece of 1/16-inch brass, C, over the insulating fiber, allowing it to extend down the same distance as the insulating fiber. Drill a small hole through the lower ends of the U-shaped piece of brass, C, the insulation, B, and the 6-inch piece while everything is in place. Remove the insulation and the U-shaped brass piece, and tap the holes in the brass for a machine screw, D. Enlarge the hole in the 6-inch piece, and provide an insulating bushing for it with an opening the same diameter as the brass machine screw. Mount a small binding post, E, on one side of the U-shaped brass piece, and then you can assemble the parts and hold them in place with the brass screw.
Drill two holes in the other end of the 6-in piece, also two holes in one end of the 7-in piece, and rivet them together with two small rivets. The 7-in. piece should project beyond the end of the 6-in. piece. A piece of thin spring brass should be made into the form of a spiral, F, and fastened to the upper end of the 7-in. piece. Provision should be made for attaching the fishline to the inside end of the brass spiral. A small binding post should be soldered to either the 6-in. or 7-in. piece, at the bottom.
Drill two holes at the other end of the 6-inch piece, as well as two holes at one end of the 7-inch piece, and rivet them together using two small rivets. The 7-inch piece should extend beyond the end of the 6-inch piece. A piece of thin spring brass should be shaped into a spiral, F, and attached to the upper end of the 7-inch piece. Make sure to include a way to attach the fishing line to the inside end of the brass spiral. A small binding post should be soldered to either the 6-inch or 7-inch piece at the bottom.
If the device is set up with the head of the brass adjusting screw in the top of the 6-in. piece, pointing in the direction the line to the fishing hook is to run, and if a fish pulls upon the line, the 7-in. piece is pulled over and touches the point of the adjusting screw. If a battery and bell, or buzzer, is connected as shown, the circuit will be completed when the 7-in. piece comes in contact with the adjusting screw, and the bell will ring.
If the device is set up with the head of the brass adjusting screw at the top of the 6-inch piece, facing the direction the line to the fishing hook will go, and if a fish tugs on the line, the 7-inch piece will move over and touch the tip of the adjusting screw. If a battery and bell or buzzer are connected as illustrated, the circuit will be completed when the 7-inch piece contacts the adjusting screw, and the bell will ring.
A Chair Swing
A comfortable porch or lawn swing can be easily and quickly made with a chair as a seat, as follows. Procure some rope of sufficient strength to bear the weight of the person, and fasten one end securely to one of the front legs of the chair and the other end to the same side of the back as shown [99] in the illustration, allowing enough slack to form a right angle. Another piece of rope, of the same length, is then attached to the other side of the chair. The supporting ropes are tied to these ropes and to the joist or holding piece overhead.—Contributed by Wm. A. Robinson, Waynesboro, Pa.
A cozy porch or lawn swing can be easily made using a chair as the seat, as follows. Get some strong rope that can support the weight of a person, and securely attach one end to one of the front legs of the chair and the other end to the same side of the back, as shown [99] in the illustration, allowing enough slack to create a right angle. Another piece of rope, of the same length, is then connected to the other side of the chair. The support ropes are tied to these ropes and to the beam or holding piece overhead.—Contributed by Wm. A. Robinson, Waynesboro, Pa.

The Ropes are Tied to the Chair so That It will be Held in a Reclining Position
The ropes are tied to the chair so that it will stay in a reclining position.
Another Broom Holder

Of the many homemade devices for holding a broom this is one of the simplest, and one that any handy boy can make.
Of all the DIY broom holders, this is one of the easiest, and it's something any resourceful kid can make.
It consists of a string, about 1 ft. long, with a knot at one end and the other tied to a nail or staple driven into the wall. To hang up the broom simply turn the string around the handle as shown, and the broom will be held securely, because its weight will pull the string taut and the knot at the end will prevent the string from running off the handle.—Contributed by Jef De Vries, Antwerp, Belgium.
It consists of a string, about 1 ft. long, with a knot at one end and the other end tied to a nail or staple driven into the wall. To hang up the broom, simply turn the string around the handle as shown, and the broom will be held securely because its weight will pull the string tight, and the knot at the end will stop the string from sliding off the handle. —Contributed by Jef De Vries, Antwerp, Belgium.
Squaring Wood Stock
The device shown in the sketch is a great help to the maker of mission furniture as a guide on short cuts. It consists of two pieces of wood, A and B, preferably of oak, fastened together at right angles by two large flat-head screws. The pieces should be placed exactly at right angles.
The device illustrated in the sketch is really useful for anyone making mission furniture as a guide for shortcuts. It consists of two pieces of wood, A and B, ideally made of oak, attached at right angles with two large flat-head screws. The pieces should be positioned precisely at right angles.

The Saw Teeth Edge can be Run through Both Pieces, the Stock being in the Corner
The saw teeth edge can be used on both pieces, with the stock positioned in the corner.
A cut is then made through both pieces. The cut on B should be exactly at right angles to the surface of piece A. This device can be either clamped on a board or merely held by hand, and will insure a true cut.—Contributed by F. W. Pumphrey, Owensboro, Ky.
A cut is then made through both pieces. The cut on B should be exactly at a right angle to the surface of piece A. This device can either be clamped to a board or simply held by hand, ensuring a straight cut.—Contributed by F. W. Pumphrey, Owensboro, Ky.
A Wind Vane
A novelty in wind vanes is shown in the accompanying sketch. The vane can be made of sheet metal or carved from light wood. The wings are so set on the body as to cause the dragon to rise when the wind strikes them. The dragon is pivoted on a shaft running through its center of gravity, so it will readily turn with the wind. The tail part may also be made to revolve as the propeller of an aeroplane.
A new design for wind vanes is illustrated in the sketch. The vane can be made from sheet metal or shaped out of lightweight wood. The wings are positioned on the body in a way that makes the dragon rise when the wind hits them. The dragon is mounted on a shaft that goes through its center of gravity, allowing it to easily turn with the wind. The tail can also rotate, similar to an airplane propeller.

The length and size of the shaft will depend on the dimensions of the dragon, and similarly, the location of the weights on the chains will be determined by its size and weight. Upon these circumstances and the varying velocities of the wind will depend how high the dragon will rise on its shaft, and the height reached by it will thus serve to indicate—in a relative manner only—the velocity of the wind, but it is also possible to arrange the weights at such distances apart that the dragon will rise to A in a 20-mile wind, to B in a 30-mile wind, to C in a 40-mile gale, and so on, with as many weights as desired. This can be done with the aid of an anemometer, if one can be borrowed for some time, or the device may be taken to the nearest weather bureau to be set.—Contributed by H. J. Holden, Ontario, Cal.
The length and size of the pole will depend on the dimensions of the dragon, and similarly, the placement of the weights on the chains will be determined by its size and weight. How high the dragon rises on its pole will depend on these factors and the varying wind speeds, and the height it reaches will indicate—in a relative way only—the wind speed. It’s also possible to arrange the weights at such distances that the dragon will rise to A in a 20-mile wind, to B in a 30-mile wind, to C in a 40-mile gale, and so on, with as many weights as needed. This can be done with the help of an anemometer, if one can be borrowed for a while, or the device can be taken to the nearest weather bureau to be set up. —Contributed by H. J. Holden, Ontario, Cal.
Never rock a file—push it straight on filing work.
Never rock a file—push it straight on filing work.
How to Make a Flutter Ring
The flutter ring is for inclosing in an envelope and to surprise the person opening it by the revolving of the ring. The main part is made of a piece of wire, A, bent so that the depth will be about 2 in. and the length 4 in. Procure or make a ring, 2 in. in diameter. The ring should be open like a key ring. Use two rubber bands, BB, in connecting the ring to the wire.
The flutter ring is meant to be enclosed in an envelope to surprise the person opening it with the movement of the ring. The main part is made from a piece of wire, A, bent so that the depth is about 2 in. and the length is 4 in. Obtain or make a ring that is 2 in. in diameter. The ring should be open like a key ring. Use two rubber bands, BB, to connect the ring to the wire.

The Shape of the Wire and Manner of Attaching the Rubber Bands to the Ring
The Shape of the Wire and How to Attach the Rubber Bands to the Ring
To use it, turn the ring over repeatedly, until the rubber bands are twisted tightly, then lay it flat in a paper folded like a letter. Hand it to someone in this shape or after first putting it into an envelope. When the paper is opened up, the ring will do the rest.—Contributed by D. Andrew McComb, Toledo, O.
To use it, flip the ring over several times until the rubber bands are tightly twisted. Then lay it flat in a piece of paper folded like a letter. Give it to someone in this shape or after placing it in an envelope. When the paper is opened, the ring will take care of the rest. —Contributed by D. Andrew McComb, Toledo, O.
A Kitchen Utensil Hanger
Every cook knows how troublesome it is to have several things hanging on one nail. When one of the articles is wanted it is usually at the back, and the others must be removed to secure it. A revolving rack for hanging a can opener, egg beater and cooking spoons, etc., takes up less space than several nails, and places every article within easy reach as well as providing individual hooks for all the pieces.
Every cook understands how annoying it is to have multiple things hanging on one hook. When you need one of the items, it’s usually at the back, meaning you have to take the others down to get it. A revolving rack for hanging a can opener, egg beater, cooking spoons, and more takes up less space than several hooks and keeps every item easily accessible, with individual hooks for each piece.

The Hook Support Revolves so as to Make Each One Readily Accessible for Hanging Utensils
The Hook Support rotates to make each one easy to access for hanging utensils.
The rack is easily made of a block of wood, 2-1/2 in. in diameter and 1 in. thick; an arm, 3/4 in. wide, 1/4 in. thick and 6 in. long, and a metal bracket. The arm is fastened to the bracket and the bracket to the wall. A screw is turned through a loose-fitting hole bored in the end of the arm and into the disk. Screw hooks are placed around the edge of the disk as hangers.—Contributed by A. R. Moore, Toronto, Can.
The rack is easy to make from a block of wood that is 2.5 inches in diameter and 1 inch thick; an arm that is 0.75 inches wide, 0.25 inches thick, and 6 inches long, along with a metal bracket. The arm is attached to the bracket, and the bracket is secured to the wall. A screw is inserted through a loose-fitting hole drilled in the end of the arm and into the disk. Screw hooks are positioned around the edge of the disk as hangers. —Contributed by A. R. Moore, Toronto, Can.
Homemade Hinges for Boxes
A very simple form of hinge can be made as shown in the sketch. It is merely a matter of cutting out two pieces of flat steel, A, punching holes in them for screws or nails, and fastening them to the box corners, one on each side. When the box is open, the lid swings back clear and is out of the way. A hinge of this kind is very strong. For a light box, the parts can be cut from tin.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Iowa.
A very simple hinge can be made as shown in the sketch. It's just a matter of cutting out two pieces of flat steel, A, punching holes in them for screws or nails, and attaching them to the corners of the box, one on each side. When the box is open, the lid swings back out of the way. This type of hinge is very strong. For a light box, the pieces can be made from tin.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Iowa.

Hinge Parts Made of Sheet Metal and Their Use on a Box Cover
Hinge Parts Made of Sheet Metal and Their Use on a Box Cover
To Remove Odors from Ice Boxes
An easy way to prevent odors in an ice box is to place a can of coke in the box. This will take up all gases and prevent milk from tasting of onions or vegetables which may be kept in the box.
A simple way to avoid smells in a fridge is to put a can of Coke inside. This will absorb any gases and stop milk from tasting like onions or vegetables stored in the fridge.
In factories where bad odors are apt to spoil the men's lunches put up in pails or baskets, a box can be constructed to hold these receptacles and a large pail of coke placed in it. Anything placed in this box will remain free from odors, and fresh.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
In factories where unpleasant smells are likely to ruin the guys' lunches packed in pails or baskets, you can build a box to hold these containers and put a large pail of coke inside it. Anything put in this box will stay odor-free and fresh. —Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Preventing Window Sash from Freezing to the Sill
When it is cold enough to cause the window sash to freeze fast in the bathroom and bedrooms not having double sash, much discomfort will be experienced and the health may even be menaced. I have discovered a simple method to overcome this difficulty. Lay on the outside sill, close up against the window frame, a thin, narrow strip of wood, on which the window can rest when down. This gives a continual current of fresh air between the sashes at the center, but no unpleasant draft below, and no amount of dripping and freezing will fasten the window sash upon it.—Contributed by Mary Murry, Amherst, Nova Scotia.
When it’s cold enough for the bathroom and bedroom windows to freeze shut because they don’t have double sashes, it can be really uncomfortable and even risky for your health. I’ve come up with a simple solution to this problem. Place a thin, narrow strip of wood on the outside sill, right up against the window frame, so the window can rest on it when closed. This creates a constant flow of fresh air between the sashes in the center, without letting any annoying drafts come in below, and no amount of dripping or freezing will cause the window sash to get stuck. —Contributed by Mary Murry, Amherst, Nova Scotia.
A Hanger for the Camp

A garment, or utensil, hanger can be easily made for the camp in the following manner: Procure a long strap, about 1-1/4 in. wide, and attach hooks made of wire to it. Each hook should be about 4 in. long and of about No. 9 gauge wire. Bend a ring on one end of the wire and stick the other end through a hole punched in the center of the belt. The ring will prevent the wire from passing through the leather, and it should be bent in such a manner that the hook end of the wire will hang downward when the width of the belt is vertical. These hooks are placed about 2 in. apart for the length of the belt, allowing sufficient ends for a buckle and holes. The strap can be buckled around a tree or tent pole.—Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
A hanger for clothes or utensils can be easily made for camping like this: Get a long strap, about 1-1/4 inches wide, and attach wire hooks to it. Each hook should be around 4 inches long and made of about No. 9 gauge wire. Bend a ring at one end of the wire and push the other end through a hole punched in the center of the strap. The ring will stop the wire from slipping through the leather, and it should be bent so that the hook part hangs down when the strap is vertical. Space the hooks about 2 inches apart along the length of the strap, leaving enough room for a buckle and holes. You can buckle the strap around a tree or tent pole. —Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
Never stand in a direct line of a swiftly revolving object, such as an emery wheel.
Never stand directly in line with a quickly spinning object, like a grinding wheel.
Locking Several Drawers with One Lock

A lock for a number of drawers in a bench or cabinet may be applied with a strip of wood hinged to the cabinet edge so that it will overlap the drawer fronts, as shown. A hasp and staple complete the arrangement for use with a padlock.—Contributed by H. W. Hahn, Chicago.
A lock for several drawers in a bench or cabinet can be added using a strip of wood that’s hinged to the edge of the cabinet, allowing it to overlap the drawer fronts, as shown. A hasp and staple finish off the setup for use with a padlock.—Contributed by H. W. Hahn, Chicago.
A Lightning-Calculation Trick
By means of a simple arrangement of numbers, a calculation can be made which will easily puzzle any unsuspecting person. If the two numbers 41,096 and 83 be written out in multiplication form, very few will endeavor to write down the answer directly without first going through the regular work. By placing the 3 in front of the 4 and the 8 back of the 6, the answer is obtained at once, thus: 41,096 × 83 = 3,410,968. A larger number which can be treated in the same way is the following: 4,109,589,041,096 × 83 = 341,095,890,410,968.
By using a simple arrangement of numbers, a calculation can be created that will easily confuse anyone who isn't paying attention. If you write the two numbers 41,096 and 83 in multiplication form, very few will try to write down the answer directly without first doing the usual calculations. By placing the 3 in front of the 4 and the 8 behind the 6, you can get the answer right away, like this: 41,096 × 83 = 3,410,968. A larger number that can be handled the same way is this one: 4,109,589,041,096 × 83 = 341,095,890,410,968.
An Adjustable Nutcracker

The advantage of the nutcracker shown in the illustration is that it can be adjusted to various-sized nuts. The handles are similar to those usually found on nutcrackers except that they are slotted at the cracking end to receive a special bar. This bar is 2 in. long, 1/2 in. wide, and 1/8 in. thick, with 1/8-in. holes drilled in it at intervals to allow for adjustment. Cotters are used in the holes as pins.
The advantage of the nutcracker shown in the illustration is that it can be adjusted for different-sized nuts. The handles are similar to those typically found on nutcrackers, except that they are slotted at the cracking end to hold a special bar. This bar is 2 inches long, 1/2 inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick, with 1/8-inch holes drilled in it at intervals for adjustments. Cotters are used in the holes as pins.
Substitute for a Rubber Stamp
A large number of coupons had to be marked, and having no suitable rubber stamp at hand, I selected a cork with a smooth end and cut the initials in it. I found that it worked as well, not to say better, than a rubber stamp. An ordinary rubber-stamp pad was used for inking. Angular letters will cut better than curved ones, as the cork quickly dulls the edge of any cutting tool.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A lot of coupons needed to be marked, and since I didn't have a suitable rubber stamp available, I grabbed a cork with a smooth end and carved the initials into it. I found it worked just as well, if not better, than a rubber stamp. I used a regular rubber-stamp pad for inking. Angular letters carve better than curved ones, since the cork quickly dulls the edge of any cutting tool.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

Initials Cut in a Cork Served the Purpose in the Absence of a Rubber Stamp
Initials carved into a cork worked just fine when a rubber stamp wasn’t available.
A Furniture Polish
A good pastelike furniture polish, which is very cheap and keeps indefinitely, can be made as follows: Mix 3 oz. of white wax, 2 oz. of pearlash, commonly known as potassium carbonate, and 6 oz. of water. Heat the mixture until it becomes dissolved, then add 4 oz. of boiled linseed oil and 5 oz. of turpentine. Stir well and pour into cans to cool. Apply with a cloth and rub to a polish. The paste is nonpoisonous.
A good paste-like furniture polish that's inexpensive and lasts indefinitely can be made like this: Mix 3 oz. of white wax, 2 oz. of pearlash (which is potassium carbonate), and 6 oz. of water. Heat the mixture until everything dissolves, then add 4 oz. of boiled linseed oil and 5 oz. of turpentine. Stir it well and pour it into cans to cool. Apply it with a cloth and rub until it shines. The paste is non-toxic.
A Hanging Vase

A very neat and attractive hanging corner vase can be made of a colored bottle. The bottom is broken out or cut off as desired and a wire hanger attached as shown. The opening in the neck of the bottle is well corked. Rectangular shaped bottles fitted with hangers can be used on walls.—Contributed by A. D. Tanaka, Jujiya, Kioto, Japan.
A nice and stylish hanging corner vase can be created using a colored bottle. The bottom can be broken or cut off as needed, and a wire hanger is attached as shown. The neck of the bottle is properly corked. Rectangular-shaped bottles with hangers can be used on walls.—Contributed by A. D. Tanaka, Jujiya, Kioto, Japan.
Filing Soft Metals
It is well known to mechanics that when lead, tin, soft solder or aluminum are filed, the file is soon filled with the metal and it will not cut. It cannot be cleaned like the wood rasp by dipping it into hot water or pouring boiling water over it, but if the file and the work are kept wet with water, there will be no trouble whatever. Both file and work must be kept thoroughly wet at all times.—Contributed by J. H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
It’s well known among mechanics that when you file lead, tin, soft solder, or aluminum, the file quickly fills up with metal and stops cutting. You can’t clean it like a wood rasp by dipping it in hot water or pouring boiling water over it, but if you keep both the file and the work wet with water, there won’t be any issues. Both the file and the work need to stay thoroughly wet at all times.—Contributed by J. H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
Locking Screws in Door Hinges
When screws once work loose in hinges of doors they will never again hold firmly in the same hole. This trouble can be avoided if the screws are securely locked when they are first put on the door. The sketch shows a very successful way to lock the screws. The hole in the hinge for the screw is filed to produce a notch, as shown at A, deep enough to receive a small wire nail or brad, which is driven through the slot in the screw head at one side, as shown at B.
When screws become loose in door hinges, they will never hold tightly in the same hole again. This issue can be prevented if the screws are securely fixed when first installed on the door. The illustration shows a very effective method to secure the screws. The hole in the hinge for the screw is filed to create a notch, as shown at A, which is deep enough to accommodate a small wire nail or brad that is driven through the slot in the screw head on one side, as shown at B.

The Screw is Permanently Locked with a Small Nail Driven into the Slot Prepared for It
The screw is permanently locked with a small nail driven into the slot made for it.
To Remove Grease from Clothing
Equal parts of ether, ammonia and alcohol make a solution that will readily remove grease from clothing. The solution must be kept away from fire, and should be contained in corked bottles as it evaporates quickly, but can be used without danger. It removes grease spots from the finest fabrics and is harmless to the texture.
Equal parts of ether, ammonia, and alcohol create a solution that easily removes grease from clothing. Keep the solution away from fire and store it in corked bottles since it evaporates quickly, but it's safe to use. It effectively removes grease stains from even the finest fabrics and won’t damage the texture.
Jeweler's rouge rubbed well into chamois skin is handy to polish gold and silver articles with.
Jeweler's rouge, worked well into chamois skin, is useful for polishing gold and silver items.

Stove Made of an Old Oilcan with Extending Sides and Weighted with Sand for Use on a Fishing Boat Holds the Cooking Vessel Safely in a Sea
Stove made from an old oil can with expandable sides and weighted with sand for use on a fishing boat securely holds the cooking pot in rough seas.
A Canoe Stove
By F. V. Williams
Limited space and the rocking motion of salmon-fishing boats in a heavy sea on the Pacific coast brought about the construction of the canoe stove shown in the illustration. It is made of a discarded kerosene can whose form is square. A draft hole is cut in one side of the can, 4 or 5 in. from the bottom, and a layer of sand placed on the bottom. Two holes are punched through opposite sides, parallel with the draft hole and about 3 in. from the top edge. Rods are run through these holes to provide a support for the cooking utensil. The smoke from the fire passes out at the corners around the vessel.
Limited space and the rocking motion of salmon-fishing boats in heavy seas on the Pacific coast led to the creation of the canoe stove shown in the illustration. It's made from a discarded square kerosene can. A draft hole is cut in one side of the can, 4 or 5 inches from the bottom, and a layer of sand is placed at the bottom. Two holes are punched through opposite sides, parallel to the draft hole and about 3 inches from the top edge. Rods are threaded through these holes to support the cooking pot. The smoke from the fire escapes at the corners around the vessel.

The main reason for making the stove in this manner is to hold the cooking vessel within the sides extending above the rods. No amount of rocking can cause the vessel to slide from the stove top, and as the stove is weighted with the sand, it cannot be easily moved from the place where it is set in the canoe.
The main reason for designing the stove this way is to keep the cooking pot securely within the sides that rise above the rods. No amount of rocking can make the pot slide off the stove top, and since the stove is weighted down with sand, it can't be easily moved from the spot where it's placed in the canoe.
The use of such a stove in a canoe has the advantage that the stove can be cleaned quickly, as the ashes and fire can be dumped into the water and the stove used for a storage box. The whole thing may be tossed overboard and a new one made for another trip.
Using a stove like this in a canoe has the benefit of being easy to clean, since the ashes and fire can be dumped into the water, and the stove can also serve as a storage box. You can easily toss the whole thing overboard and make a new one for the next trip.
To Prevent Washboard from Slipping in Tub
The modern stationary washtubs are box-shaped, with one side set at an outward angle or slope. The washboard, when used in these tubs, will slide up and down against the sloping part of the tub while the clothes are rubbed against them. This annoying trouble can be avoided by tacking, on the top edge of the board, strips of rubber cut from a discarded bicycle tire, placing the rubber side out. The friction of the rubber prevents any motion of the board.—Contributed by Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
The modern stationary wash tubs are box-shaped, with one side angled or sloped outward. When using a washboard in these tubs, it slides up and down against the sloped part while the clothes are rubbed against it. This frustrating issue can be solved by attaching strips of rubber cut from an old bicycle tire to the top edge of the board, with the rubber side facing out. The rubber's grip prevents any movement of the board.—Contributed by Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
To print on celluloid, use a good gloss ink and old rollers.
To print on celluloid, use quality glossy ink and old rollers.
Clips to Hold Magazine Pages Together

When a magazine is placed in a bookcase the outer pages are liable to turn back if it is inserted with the back on the outside. To overcome this difficulty I made clips for each magazine to hold the open pages together. Each clip was made of wire, about 8 in. long, shaped as shown. The width of the clip is made equal to the thickness of the magazine and the extending ends are [104] slightly pressed together so that they will spring and grip the pages.—Contributed by W. A. Saul, E. Lexington, Massachusetts.
When a magazine is put in a bookcase, the outer pages tend to curl back if it’s placed with the back facing out. To solve this issue, I made clips for each magazine to keep the pages together. Each clip is made of wire, about 8 inches long, shaped as shown. The width of the clip matches the thickness of the magazine, and the ends are [104] slightly pressed together so they can spring and grip the pages.—Contributed by W. A. Saul, E. Lexington, Massachusetts.
Slide-Opening Cover for a Plate Holder
The length of time required for the slide of a plate holder to be removed on a reflecting camera spoiled many of my plates, because strong light would enter the unprotected slot when the camera was in certain positions. To protect this slot so that the slide could be left out indefinitely, I made a cover of a piece of sheet metal having three slots, to admit screws turned into the camera. A knob was attached at the center. The illustration shows the application of this cover. In Fig. 1 the plate holder is shown slipped in with the cover back, and Fig. 2 shows the slide drawn and the cover over the slot opening.—Contributed by B. J. Weeber, New York City.
The time it took to remove the slide from a plate holder on a reflecting camera ruined many of my plates because strong light would get into the unprotected slot when the camera was in certain positions. To protect this slot so that the slide could be left out for as long as needed, I created a cover from a piece of sheet metal with three slots to allow screws to go into the camera. I attached a knob in the center. The illustration shows how this cover is used. In Fig. 1, the plate holder is shown inserted with the cover pulled back, and Fig. 2 shows the slide removed with the cover over the slot opening.—Contributed by B. J. Weeber, New York City.

The Two Positions Occupied by the Slide-Opening Cover as It is Used on a Camera (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The Two Positions Held by the Slide-Opening Cover When Used on a Camera (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Magnetic-Suspension Pendulum
When a pendulum is not periodically supplied with energy its amplitude grows smaller and finally the motion ceases, due to the resistance of the air and the friction at the point of suspension. Usually the suspension is in the form of a knife edge bearing against plates of agate; sometimes the pendulum rod is simply attached to a very slender and flexible spring without any bearings. But the minimum of friction is obtained by means of magnetic suspension, as the following experiment will prove.
When a pendulum isn’t regularly supplied with energy, its swing gets smaller until it eventually stops, due to air resistance and friction at the point where it hangs. Typically, the suspension is set up with a knife-edge resting on agate plates; sometimes, the pendulum rod is just attached to a very thin and flexible spring without any bearings. However, the least amount of friction is achieved through magnetic suspension, as the following experiment will demonstrate.
If the rod of a pendulum about 12 in. long, beating half seconds, is sharpened to a needle point and suspended from one of the poles of a magnet, it will be found that, if set into motion, it will continue to swing 15 times as long as the ordinary knife-edge suspended pendulum, and it will not stop until after about 16 hours, while one working on agate plates will stop in from 50 to 60 minutes. Similarly a top, provided with a fine-pointed axis of iron, will spin much longer when suspended from a magnet.
If you take a pendulum with a rod about 12 inches long that beats every half a second and sharpen it to a needle point, then hang it from one of the poles of a magnet, you'll find that when you set it in motion, it will keep swinging 15 times longer than a regular pendulum hanging from a knife-edge. It won’t stop for about 16 hours, while one using agate plates will stop in about 50 to 60 minutes. Similarly, a top with a finely pointed iron axis will spin for a much longer time when hung from a magnet.
Magnetic suspension is used in precision instruments; for example, the minute mirrors which are used in certain telegraph systems to register writing photographically at the receiving end.
Magnetic suspension is used in precision instruments; for example, the tiny mirrors that are used in some telegraph systems to capture writing photographically at the receiving end.
Use for Pencil Stubs

In mechanical drawings cast iron is indicated by a series of straight lines across the parts made of this material. These lines can be quickly made with the usually discarded pencil stubs, if these are saved and sharpened in the following manner: The point is filed flat, as shown at A; then a slot is filed in the center of the lead with a knife file, as shown at B, and the points sharpened as in C. In this way two lines are drawn at one stroke neatly and in half the time.—Contributed by J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
In mechanical drawings, cast iron is represented by a series of straight lines across the parts made from this material. These lines can be quickly created using the usually discarded pencil stubs, if you save and sharpen them like this: First, file the point flat, as shown at A; then, create a slot in the center of the lead with a knife file, as shown at B, and sharpen the points as depicted in C. This way, you can draw two lines in one stroke, neatly and in half the time.—Contributed by J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
To sharpen a carving knife draw the edge through and against the open edge of a pair of shears.
To sharpen a carving knife, slide the edge through and against the open edge of a pair of scissors.
How to Build a Paddle-Wheel Boat
By P. A. Baumeister
The paddle-wheel boat, illustrated herewith, was built in the spare time I had on rainy afternoons and Saturdays, and the enjoyment I derived from it at my summer camp more than repaid me for the time spent in the building. The materials used in its construction were:
The paddle-wheel boat shown here was built during my free time on rainy afternoons and Saturdays, and the fun I had with it at my summer camp more than made up for the time I spent building it. The materials used in its construction were:
2 | side boards, 14 ft. long, 10 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick. |
2 | side boards, 14 ft. long, 5 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick. |
1 | outside keel board, 14 ft. long, 8 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick. |
1 | inside keel board, 14 ft. long. 10 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick. |
120 | sq. ft. of tongue-and-groove boards, 3/4 in. thick, for bottom and wheel boxes. |
1 | piece, 2 in. square and 18 in. long. |
4 | washers. |
2 | iron cranks. |
10 | screweyes. |
30 | ft. of rope. |
Nails. |
The dimensions given in the drawing will be found satisfactory, but these may be altered to suit the conditions. The first step will be to cut and make the sides. Nail the two pieces forming each side together and then cut the end boards and nail them to the sides. Lay this framework, bottom side up, on a level surface and proceed to nail on the bottom boards across the sides. The ends of these boards are sawed off flush with the outside surface of the sides after they are nailed in place. The material list calls for tongue-and-groove boards for the bottom, but plain boards can be used, although it is then difficult to make the joint water-tight. When the tongue-and-groove boards are used a piece of string, well soaked in white lead or paint and placed in the groove of each board, will be sufficient to make a tight joint.
The dimensions in the drawing should work well, but you can change them as needed. Start by cutting and assembling the sides. Nail the two pieces that form each side together, then cut the end boards and nail them to the sides. Place this frame, bottom side up, on a flat surface and then nail the bottom boards across the sides. Cut the ends of these boards flush with the outer surface of the sides after they're in place. The material list specifies tongue-and-groove boards for the bottom, but you can use plain boards instead, although it will be harder to make the joint waterproof. If you use tongue-and-groove boards, a piece of string soaked in white lead or paint placed in the groove of each board will be enough to create a tight joint.
Having finished the sides and bottom, the next step will be to fasten on the bottom keel. Adjust the board to its position and nail it in the center part where it lies flat on the bottom boards, then work toward the ends, gradually drawing it down over the turn and nailing it down. If the keel board cannot be bent easily, it is best to soak it in hot water where the bend takes place and the wood can then be nailed down without the fibers breaking. The inside keel is put on in the same manner, but reversed.
Having completed the sides and bottom, the next step is to attach the bottom keel. Position the board correctly and nail it down in the center where it lies flat on the bottom boards, then work your way toward the ends, gradually pulling it down over the curve and nailing it in place. If the keel board doesn’t bend easily, it's best to soak it in hot water at the point of the bend, allowing it to be nailed down without breaking the fibers. The inner keel is installed the same way, but in reverse.

The Boat As It Appears without the Spring and Running Board and Used as a Pleasure Craft or for Carrying Freight, the Operator Facing in the Direction of the Boat's Travel
The Boat As It Appears without the Spring and Running Board and Used as a Pleasure Craft or for Carrying Freight, the Operator Facing in the Direction of the Boat's Travel
The next procedure is to make the paddle wheels. The hub for each [106] wheel is made of a 2-in. square piece of timber, 9 in. long. Trim off the corners to make 8 sides to the piece, then bore a 3/4-in. hole through its center. The 8 blades of each wheel, 16 in all, are 17 in. long, 6 in. wide and 3/4 in. thick. One end of each blade is nailed to one side of the hub, then it is braced as shown to strengthen the wheel.
The next step is to create the paddle wheels. The hub for each wheel is made from a 2-inch square piece of wood, 9 inches long. Cut off the corners to make it an 8-sided piece, then drill a 3/4-inch hole through the center. Each wheel has 8 blades, totaling 16, which are 17 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 3/4 inch thick. One end of each blade gets nailed to one side of the hub, and then it’s braced as shown to reinforce the wheel.

Detail Drawing of the Boat and One of the Paddle Wheels. All the Material Required for the Construction is Such That can be Cut and Shaped with Ordinary Tools Found in the Home Workshop
Detail Drawing of the Boat and One of the Paddle Wheels. All the materials needed for construction are ones that can be cut and shaped with regular tools found in a home workshop.
The cranks are made of round iron, 3/4 in. in diameter, and they are keyed to the wheels with large nails in the manner shown. I had a blacksmith shape the cranks for me, but if one has a forge, the work can be done at home without that expense. The bearings for the crankshafts consist of wood, although it is preferable to use for this purpose two large iron washers, having a hole slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft, and drill holes in their rims so that they can be screwed to the wheel-box upright as shown. The bearings thus made are lubricated with a little lard or grease.
The cranks are made of round iron, 3/4 inch in diameter, and they're attached to the wheels using large nails, as shown. I had a blacksmith shape the cranks for me, but if you have a forge, you can do the work at home without that expense. The bearings for the crankshafts are made of wood, but it's better to use two large iron washers for this purpose, with a hole slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft, and drill holes in their edges so they can be screwed to the wheel-box upright as shown. The bearings are lubricated with a little lard or grease.

Detail of Paddle-Wheel Fastening, the Springboard Construction and the Fastening for the Rudder Control
Detail of Paddle-Wheel Fastening, the Springboard Construction, and the Fastening for the Rudder Control
The paddle-wheel boxes are built over the wheels with the dimensions given in the drawing, to prevent the splashing of water on the occupants of the boat.
The paddle-wheel boxes are constructed over the wheels with the dimensions specified in the drawing to stop water from splashing on the people in the boat.
The trimmings for the boat consist of three seats, a running board and a springboard. The drawings show the location of the seats. The springboard is built up of 4 boards, 3/4 in. thick, as shown, only nailing them together at the back end. This construction allows the boards to slide over each other when a person's weight is on the outer end. The action of the boards is the same as of a spring on a vehicle.
The trim for the boat includes three seats, a running board, and a springboard. The drawings indicate where the seats are located. The springboard is made up of four boards, each 3/4 inch thick, as shown, and they are only nailed together at the back end. This design lets the boards slide over each other when someone is standing on the outer end. The movement of the boards works like a spring on a vehicle.
It is necessary to have a good brace across the boat for the back end of the springboard to catch on—a 2 by 4-in. timber being none too large. At the point where the springboard rests on the front seat there should be another good-sized crosspiece. The [107] board can be held in place by a cleat and a few short pieces of rope, the cleat being placed across the board back of the brace. A little diving platform is attached on the outer end of the springboard and a strip of old carpet or gunny sack placed on it to prevent slivers from running into the flesh. In making the spring and running board, it is advisable to make them removable so that the boat can be used for other purposes.
It’s important to have a solid brace across the boat for the back end of the springboard to attach to—a 2 by 4-inch wood piece is about the right size. Where the springboard rests on the front seat, there should be another strong crosspiece. The [107] board can be secured with a cleat and a few short pieces of rope, with the cleat placed across the board behind the brace. A small diving platform is attached to the outer end of the springboard, and a strip of old carpet or a gunny sack is placed on it to prevent splinters from getting into the skin. When making the spring and running board, it’s a good idea to make them removable so the boat can be used for other activities.
The boat is steered with a foot-operated lever, the construction of which is clearly shown. For the tiller-rope guides, large screweyes are used and also for the rudder hinges, the pin of the hinge being a large nail. The hull can be further strengthened by putting a few angle-iron braces either on the in or outside.
The boat is controlled with a foot pedal lever, which is clearly illustrated. Large screw eyes are used for the tiller-rope guides and for the rudder hinges, with a large nail serving as the hinge pin. You can reinforce the hull by adding some angle-iron braces either on the inside or outside.
To make the boat water-tight will require calking by filling the cracks with twine and white lead or thick paint. The necessary tools are a broad, dull chisel and a mallet. A couple of coats of good paint, well brushed into the cracks, will help to make it watertight as well as shipshape. The boat may leak a little when it is first put into the water, but after a few hours of soaking, the boards will swell and close the openings.
To make the boat water-tight, you'll need to caulk it by filling the cracks with twine and white lead or thick paint. The tools you'll need are a wide, dull chisel and a mallet. A couple of coats of good paint, thoroughly brushed into the cracks, will help make it watertight and looking sharp. The boat might leak a little when it’s first put in the water, but after a few hours of soaking, the boards will swell and close the gaps.
This boat was used for carrying trunks, firewood, rocks, sand, and for fishing, and last, but not least, for swimming. The boat is capable of carrying a load of three-quarters of a ton. It draws very little water, thereby allowing its use in shallow water. It has the further advantage that the operator faces in the direction the boat is going, furnishing the power with his hands and steering with his feet.
This boat was used to transport trunks, firewood, rocks, sand, and for fishing, and last but not least, for swimming. The boat can carry a load of three-quarters of a ton. It requires very little water, making it suitable for shallow areas. It also has the advantage that the operator faces forward, providing power with their hands and steering with their feet.
A Camp Loom

Loom Constructed of Sticks for Weaving Grass or Moss into a Camp Mattress
Loom Made of Sticks for Weaving Grass or Moss into a Camp Mattress
The camper who desires to "rough it" as much as possible and to carry only the necessities will find it quite a comfort to construct the bedding from grass or moss by weaving it in the manner of making a rag carpet, using heavy twine or small rope as the warp. Two stakes are set the width of the bed or mattress to be made, and a cross stick is attached to their tops. Several stakes are set parallel with the cross stick and at a distance to make the length of the mattress. The warp is tied between the tops of the stakes and the cross stick. An equal number of cords are then attached to the cross stick and to another loose cross stick which is used to move the cords up and down while the grass or moss is placed in for the woof. The ends of the warp are then tied to hold it together. When breaking up camp the cords can be removed and carried to the next camp.—Contributed by W. P. Shaw, Bloor West, Can.
The camper who wants to "rough it" as much as possible and only take the essentials will find it really helpful to make bedding from grass or moss by weaving it like a rag rug, using heavy twine or small rope as the warp. Two stakes are placed the width of the bed or mattress being made, and a cross stick is attached at the top of them. Several stakes are set up parallel to the cross stick and spaced apart to create the length of the mattress. The warp is tied between the tops of the stakes and the cross stick. An equal number of cords are then attached to the cross stick and to another loose cross stick, which is used to move the cords up and down while the grass or moss is added for the woof. The ends of the warp are then tied to hold everything together. When it's time to break camp, the cords can be removed and taken to the next campsite.—Contributed by W. P. Shaw, Bloor West, Can.
A Milk-Bottle Carrier
Carrying a milk bottle by the rim is tiresome work for the fingers, so I constructed a handle, as shown in the sketch, from a piece of wire. The carrier can be easily placed in the pocket.
Carrying a milk bottle by the rim is hard on the fingers, so I made a handle, as shown in the sketch, from a piece of wire. The carrier can easily fit in your pocket.

A Carrier Made of Wire to Quickly Attach on a Milk-Bottle Neck
A Wire Carrier Designed for Quick Attachment to a Milk Bottle Neck
The part fitting under the rim of the bottle neck is bent to form two semicircles, one hooking permanently at A, while the other is hooked at B after it is sprung around the neck of the bottle.—Contributed by Lawrence B. Robbins, Harwich, Mass.
The part that fits under the rim of the bottle neck is bent to create two semicircles, one permanently hooked at A, while the other is hooked at B after it is sprung around the neck of the bottle.—Contributed by Lawrence B. Robbins, Harwich, Mass.
How to Make a War Kite
By Park Snyder

The material required for the making of a war kite is three pine sticks, each 60 in. long, one stick 54 in. long, one stick 18 in. long, all 1/2 in. square; 4 yd. of cambric; a box of tacks; some linen thread, and 16 ft. of stout twine.
The materials needed to make a war kite are three pine sticks, each 60 inches long, one stick 54 inches long, one stick 18 inches long, all 1/2 inch square; 4 yards of cambric; a box of tacks; some linen thread, and 16 feet of strong twine.
Place two 60-in. sticks parallel with each other and 18 in. apart, then lay the 54-in. piece across at right angles to them 18 in. from the upper ends, as shown in Fig. 1, and fasten the joints with brads. At a point 21 in. below this crosspiece, attach the 18-in. crosspiece.
Place two 60-inch sticks parallel to each other and 18 inches apart, then lay the 54-inch piece across them at right angles, positioned 18 inches from the upper ends, as shown in Fig. 1, and secure the joints with brads. Attach the 18-inch crosspiece at a point 21 inches below this crosspiece.
The extending ends of all the three long pieces are notched, Fig. 2, and the line is stretched taut around them, as shown by the dotted lines.
The extended ends of all three long pieces are notched, Fig. 2, and the line is pulled tight around them, as indicated by the dotted lines.

The Line should be a Very Strong One, Then Banners can be Flown on It
The line should be really strong, then banners can be flown on it.
If the cambric is not of sufficient size to cover the frame, two pieces must be sewed together, then a piece cut out to the shape of the string, allowing 1 in. to project all around for a lap. The cambric is sewn fast to the string with the linen thread. Fasten the cloth to the frame part with the tacks, spacing them 1 in. apart. The space in the center, between the sticks, is cut out. Make two pieces of the remaining goods, one 36 in. by 18 in., and the other 36 in. by 21 in. The remaining 60-in. stick is fastened to these pieces of cambric, as shown in Fig. 3, and the whole is fastened to the main frame so as to make a V-shaped projection. The bridle strings, for giving the proper distribution of pull on the line to the kite, are fastened, one to the upper end of the long stick in the V-shaped piece attached to the kite, and the other to the lower end, as shown in Fig. 4. The inclination can be varied to suit the builder by changing the point of attachment of the kite line to the bridle. If it is desired to fly the kite directly overhead, attach the line above the regular point and for low flying make the connection below this point. The regular point is found by trial flights with the line fastened temporarily to the bridle, after which the fastening is made permanent.
If the cambric isn't big enough to cover the frame, you need to sew two pieces together, then cut out a shape that matches the string, leaving 1 inch to extend all around for a lap. The cambric is stitched securely to the string with linen thread. Attach the cloth to the frame with tacks, placing them 1 inch apart. Cut out the space in the center between the sticks. Create two pieces from the leftover material, one measuring 36 inches by 18 inches, and the other 36 inches by 21 inches. The leftover 60-inch stick is attached to these pieces of cambric, as shown in Fig. 3, and everything is secured to the main frame to form a V-shaped projection. The bridle strings, which help distribute the pull on the kite line properly, are secured—one to the top end of the long stick in the V-shaped piece connected to the kite, and the other to the bottom end, as shown in Fig. 4. You can adjust the angle to suit your preference by changing where the kite line attaches to the bridle. If you want to fly the kite directly overhead, attach the line above the usual point; for lower flying, connect it below this point. You find the usual point through trial flights with the line temporarily attached to the bridle, after which you make the attachment permanent.

The Sticks are Fastened Solidly with Brads, and the Cloth Sewed to the String around Their Ends (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
The sticks are securely fastened with brads, and the cloth is sewn to the string around their ends (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Paper Glider That Loops the Loop
By C. A. Thompson
The usual paper glider shaped as shown in Fig. 1 can be made to loop the loop and make corkscrew flights if prepared according to sketches herewith. It should be carefully made in the first place so that in its regular form it flies perfectly straight.
The standard paper glider shown in Fig. 1 can be made to loop and do corkscrew flights if you follow the sketches provided. It should be carefully constructed from the beginning so that when it's in its normal shape, it flies perfectly straight.

Ordinary Paper Glider and the Manner of Throwing It to Make the Different Flights (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7, Fig. 8)
Ordinary Paper Glider and How to Throw It for Different Flights (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7, Fig. 8)
To make the glider loop, the rear corners of the wings should be turned up at right angles, as in Fig. 2, and the glider launched with a great deal of force with the nose pointed slightly upward. This will require some practice, but one soon learns the trick. After looping once, as shown in Fig. 3, the glider descends in volplane. This form of glider will also right itself, if dropped from a height, nose downward, as shown in Fig. 4.
To make the glider loop, the back corners of the wings should be angled up at a right angle, as shown in Fig. 2. Launch the glider with a lot of force while keeping the nose pointed slightly upward. This will take some practice, but you'll quickly master it. After looping once, as illustrated in Fig. 3, the glider will descend in a glide. This design of the glider will also right itself if dropped from a height, nose down, as shown in Fig. 4.
For a corkscrew flight the glider is prepared as in Fig. 5; one rear corner being bent up and the other down. In this form it flies horizontally, or downward, while rapidly rotating around its longitudinal axis, as shown in Fig. 6.
For a corkscrew flight, the glider is set up as shown in Fig. 5; one rear corner is bent up and the other down. In this position, it flies horizontally or downward while quickly spinning around its long axis, as illustrated in Fig. 6.
To make a spiral descent, the rear corners of the wings are bent up as in Fig. 2, and, further, the rear corner of the keel is bent at right angles, Fig. 7, whereupon it is thrown in the ordinary manner. It then takes the course shown in Fig. 8.
To perform a spiral descent, bend the back corners of the wings upward as shown in Fig. 2, and additionally, bend the rear corner of the keel at right angles as illustrated in Fig. 7. After that, launch it in the usual way. It will then follow the path shown in Fig. 8.
A Water Filter
A cheap and very effective water filter can be made of a flower pot by plugging the hole in the bottom with a piece of sponge and fitting it as follows: Place powdered charcoal on top of the sponge to a depth of 1 in., then 1 in. of clean silver sand, and lastly 2 in. of small stones and gravel. It is hung with a bail at the top.
A cheap and effective water filter can be made from a flower pot by plugging the hole at the bottom with a piece of sponge and setting it up like this: Put powdered charcoal on top of the sponge to a depth of 1 inch, then add 1 inch of clean silver sand, and finally 2 inches of small stones and gravel. It should be hung with a handle at the top.
A Combination Electrically Operated Door Lock
The illustration shows a very useful application of an ordinary electric door lock in the construction of a combination lock and alarm to be operated from the outside of the building.
The illustration shows a very useful application of a standard electric door lock in creating a combination lock and alarm that can be operated from outside the building.

The Brass-Tack Heads Holding the Numerals in Place Constitute the Combination Points
The brass-tack heads that hold the numbers in place are the combination points.
The three numerals, 1, 2, and 4, or any other combination of numbers constituting the house number on a door, are made of some kind of insulating material and fastened in place on a base of insulating fiber, or wood, about 1/4 in. thick, by means of ordinary brass-headed tacks, as indicated by the black dots. The tacks will extend through the base a short distance so the electrical connections may be made by soldering wires to them, as shown by the diagram, alternate tacks being connected together with the exception of three; for instance, A, B, and C.
The three numbers, 1, 2, and 4, or any other combination that makes up the house number on a door, are made of some kind of insulating material and attached to a base of insulating fiber or wood that's about 1/4 in. thick, using regular brass tacks, indicated by the black dots. The tacks will stick out slightly from the base so that electrical connections can be made by soldering wires to them, as shown in the diagram, with alternate tacks connected together, except for three; for example, A, B, and C.
The terminals of the leads that are connected to alternate tacks are in turn connected to the terminals of a circuit composed of an ordinary vibrating bell, D, and battery, E. If any two adjacent tack heads be connected together, except tacks A, B, and C, the bell circuit will be completed and the bell ring, which will serve as an indication that some one is tampering with the circuit. The person knowing the combination, connects the tack heads A and B, and at the same time connects the tack head C with F or G, or any other tack head that is connected to the plus side of the battery, whereby a circuit will be completed through the lock H and the door is opened. Any metallic substance, such as a knife, key, or finger ring, may be used in making the above indicated connection, and there will be no need of carrying a key for this particular door so long as the combination is known.
The ends of the wires connected to alternate tacks are linked to a circuit that includes a regular vibrating bell, D, and a battery, E. If any two adjacent tack heads are connected together, except for tacks A, B, and C, the bell circuit will close, and the bell will ring, indicating that someone is messing with the circuit. The person who knows the combination connects tack heads A and B, and at the same time connects tack head C to F or G, or any other tack head that connects to the positive side of the battery, completing a circuit through the lock H, allowing the door to open. Any metal object, like a knife, key, or ring, can be used to make this connection, so there’s no need to carry a key for this door as long as the combination is known.
The base upon which the numbers are mounted and through which the points of the tacks protrude, should be mounted on a second base that has a recess cut in its surface to accommodate the wires and points of the tacks.
The base that holds the numbers and through which the points of the tacks stick out should be placed on a second base that has a groove cut into its surface to fit the wires and points of the tacks.
The combination may be made more or less complicated, as desired, by connecting the tacks in different ways, and by using a separate battery for the bell and lock. The circuit leading to the door lock, if there is one already installed, may be used and then no extra circuit is needed.
The combination can be made simpler or more complicated, depending on your preferences, by connecting the tacks in different ways and using a separate battery for the bell and lock. If there's already a circuit leading to the door lock, you can use that one, and no additional circuit is necessary.
Such a device has been used on a private-desk drawer with entire satisfaction. The battery was placed in the back end of the drawer, and if it happened to fail, a new one could be connected to the points B and J so that the drawer could be opened and a new battery put in.
Such a device has been used on a private desk drawer with complete satisfaction. The battery was located at the back of the drawer, and if it happened to fail, a new one could be connected to points B and J so that the drawer could be opened and a new battery replaced.
Lock for a Fancy Hairpin

The Bend in the Pin will Hold in the Hair and Prevent the Loss of the Pin
The bend in the pin will keep it in the hair and stop the pin from falling out.
To avoid losing a fancy hairpin, bend one leg of the pin as shown in the illustration. The hair caught in the notch formed by the bend will prevent the pin from dropping out.—Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
To avoid losing a decorative hairpin, bend one leg of the pin as shown in the illustration. The hair caught in the notch created by the bend will stop the pin from falling out.—Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
A metal surface polished with oil will keep clean longer than when polished dry.
A metal surface that’s polished with oil will stay clean longer than one that’s polished dry.
An Aeroplane Kite
By W. A. Reich
After building a number of kites from a recent description in Amateur Mechanics I branched out and constructed the aeroplane kite shown in the illustration, which has excited considerable comment in the neighborhood on account of its appearance and behavior in the air.
After making several kites based on a recent article in Amateur Mechanics, I expanded my skills and built the airplane kite shown in the illustration. It's generated a lot of buzz in the neighborhood because of how it looks and flies in the air.

The Kite Being Tailless Rides the Air Waves Like an Aeroplane in a Steady Breeze
The tailless kite soars through the air like an airplane in a steady breeze.
The main frame consists of a center-stick, A, 31 in. long, and two cross-sticks, of which one, B, is 31 in. long and the other, C, 15-1/2 in. long. The location of the crosspieces on the centerpiece A is shown in the sketch, the front piece B being 1-3/4 in. from the end, and the rear piece C, 2-1/4 in. from the other end. The ends of the sticks have small notches cut to receive a string, D, which is run around the outside to make the outline of the frame and to brace the parts. Two cross-strings are placed at E and F, 7 in. from either end of the centerpiece A, other brace strings being crossed, as shown at G, and then tied to the cross-string F on both sides, as at H.
The main frame consists of a center stick, A, which is 31 inches long, and two cross sticks—one, B, is 31 inches long and the other, C, is 15.5 inches long. The placement of the crosspieces on the center stick A is shown in the sketch, with the front piece B located 1.75 inches from one end, and the rear piece C, 2.25 inches from the other end. The ends of the sticks have small notches cut out to hold a string, D, which runs around the outside to outline the frame and support the parts. Two cross strings are placed at E and F, 7 inches from either end of the center stick A, with other brace strings crossed as shown at G, and then tied to the cross string F on both sides, as indicated at H.

General Plan and Outline of the Kite, Which may be Built in Any Size, If the Proportions are Kept, and Its Appearance in the Air on a Steady Breeze
General Plan and Outline of the Kite, Which Can Be Built in Any Size as Long as the Proportions are Maintained, and Its Look in the Air on a Steady Breeze
The long crosspiece B is curved upward to form a bow, the center of which should be 3-1/4 in. above the string by which its ends are tied together. The shorter crosspiece is bent and tied in the same manner to make the curve 2-1/2 in., and the centerpiece to curve 1-3/4 in., both upward. The front and rear parts, between the end and the cross-strings E and F, are covered with yellow tissue paper, which is pasted to the crosspieces and strings. The small wings L are purple tissue paper, 4 in. wide at M and tapering to a point at N.
The long crosspiece B is curved upward to create a bow, with the center needing to be 3-1/4 in. above the string that ties its ends together. The shorter crosspiece is bent and tied the same way to create a curve of 2-1/2 in., while the centerpiece curves upward at 1-3/4 in. The front and back sections, between the ends and the cross-strings E and F, are covered with yellow tissue paper, which is glued to the crosspieces and strings. The small wings L are made of purple tissue paper, 4 in. wide at M and tapering to a point at N.
The bridle string is attached on the centerpiece A at the junction of the crosspieces B and C, and must be adjusted for the size and weight of the kite. The kite is tailless and requires a steady breeze to make it float in the air currents like an aeroplane.
The bridle string is connected at centerpiece A where the crosspieces B and C meet, and it needs to be adjusted based on the size and weight of the kite. The kite doesn't have a tail and needs a steady breeze to stay afloat in the air currents like an airplane.
The bridle string and the bending of the sticks must be adjusted until the desired results are obtained. The [112] bridle string should be tied so that it will about center under the cross-stick B for the best results, but a slight change from this location may be necessary to make the kite ride the air currents properly. The center of gravity will not be the same in the construction of each kite and the string can be located only by trial, after which it is permanently fastened.
The bridle string and the bending of the sticks need to be adjusted until you get the results you want. The [112] bridle string should be tied so that it’s roughly centered under the cross-stick B for the best performance, but you might need to make a slight adjustment to this position to help the kite ride the air currents properly. The center of gravity will vary with each kite's construction, and the string can only be positioned through trial and error, after which it is securely fastened.

Distilling Apparatus for Water

Homemade Still for Removing the Impurities in Water That is Used in Mixing Chemicals
Homemade Still for Removing Impurities from Water Used for Mixing Chemicals
Pure water, free from all foreign substances, is frequently wanted for making up photographic solutions and many other purposes. An apparatus for distilling water can be very easily made from galvanized pipe fittings. The outer cooling jacket A is a piece of 1-in. pipe, 2 ft. long, threaded on both ends, and bored and tapped for 1/2-in. pipe at B and C. A hole is bored and tapped for 1/2-in. pipe in each of the two caps used on the ends of the pipe A, and a piece of 1/2-in. pipe, D, 2 ft. 8 in. long, is run through the holes as shown. The joints are soldered to make them water-tight. Two 1/2-in. nipples, 4 in. long, are screwed in at B and C. The retort, or boiler, E, in which the impure water is boiled may be made of any suitable vessel and heated with a Bunsen or gas burner. A beaker, or other vessel, F, is placed below the lower end of the small pipe. The cold water from the faucet, which flows into the outer jacket at C and out at B, condenses the steam in the small pipe D, turning it into water which falls into the beaker in large drops. The water is often distilled a second time to remove any impurities which it might still contain.—Contributed by O. E. Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
Pure water, free from any contaminants, is often needed for mixing photographic solutions and various other uses. You can easily create a water distillation setup using galvanized pipe fittings. The outer cooling jacket A consists of a 1-inch pipe that is 2 feet long, threaded at both ends, and drilled and tapped for 1/2-inch pipe at points B and C. Each of the two caps on the ends of pipe A has a hole that is drilled and tapped for a 1/2-inch pipe, with a 1/2-inch pipe, D, that is 2 feet 8 inches long running through the holes as shown. The joints are soldered to ensure they are water-tight. Two 1/2-inch nipples, 4 inches long, are screwed in at B and C. The retort or boiler, E, which heats the impure water, can be any appropriate vessel and is heated with a Bunsen or gas burner. A beaker or other container, F, is placed under the lower end of the small pipe. Cold water from the faucet flows into the outer jacket at C and out at B, condensing the steam in the small pipe D, turning it into water that drips into the beaker in large drops. The water is often distilled a second time to remove any remaining impurities. —Contributed by O. E. Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
Telephone Stand for a Sloping Desk
Having a sloping-top desk and being compelled to use the telephone quite frequently, I devised a support for the telephone so that it might stand level and not fall off. The sides of the stand were cut on the same slope as the desk top, and their under edges were provided with rubber strips to prevent slipping.—Contributed by J. M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Having a sloped desk and needing to use the phone often, I created a stand for the phone so it could sit level and not fall off. The sides of the stand were cut at the same angle as the desk, and I added rubber strips to the bottom edges to keep it from slipping. —Contributed by J. M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

Stand with a Level Surface for a Desk Telephone to be Used on a Sloping Desk Top
Stand with a Level Surface for a Desk Phone to be Used on a Sloping Desk Top
Tandem Monoplane Glider
By George F. Mace
The monoplane glider illustrated has better fore-and-aft stability than the biplane, is lighter in proportion to the supporting surface, simpler to build, and requires very little time to assemble or take apart. The material list is as follows:
The monoplane glider shown has better front-to-back stability than the biplane, is lighter relative to the supporting surface, is simpler to build, and needs very little time to put together or take apart. The material list is as follows:
FRAME
FRAME
4 | pieces of bamboo, 14 ft. long, tapering from 1-1/2 to 1 in. |
8 | pieces of spruce, 1/2 in. thick, 1 in. wide, and 3 ft. long. |
8 | pieces of spruce, 1/2 in. thick, 1 in. wide, and 2 ft. long. |
WINGS
WINGS
4 | main-wing bars, spruce, 3/4 in. thick, 1-1/4 in. wide, and 18 ft. long. |
8 | wing crosspieces, spruce, 3/4 in. square, and 4 ft. long. |
38 | wing ribs, poplar or spruce, 1/4 in. thick, 3/4 in. wide, and 64 in. long. |
The first thing to do is to make the main frame which is composed of the four bamboo poles. The poles take the corners of a 2-ft. square space and are supported with the pieces of spruce that are 2 ft. and 3 ft. long, the shorter lengths running horizontally and the longer upright, so that each upright piece extends 1 ft. above the two upper poles. All joints should be fastened with 3/16-in. stove bolts. The wire used to truss the glider is No. 16 gauge piano wire. The trussing is done in all directions, crossing the wires between the frame parts, except in the center or space between the four poles.
The first step is to create the main frame, which is made of four bamboo poles. The poles mark the corners of a 2-ft square area and are supported by pieces of spruce that are 2 ft and 3 ft long, with the shorter pieces running horizontally and the longer pieces standing upright, so that each upright piece extends 1 ft above the two upper poles. All joints should be secured with 3/16-in stove bolts. The wire used to brace the glider is No. 16 gauge piano wire. The bracing is done in all directions, crossing the wires between the frame parts, except in the center or space between the four poles.

The Start of the Glide should be Made from the Top of a Hill, Then a Little Run will Carry the Airman Several Hundred Feet through the Air
The start of the glide should be made from the top of a hill, then a short run will take the airman several hundred feet through the air.
The framework of the main wings is put together by bolting one of the crosspieces at each end of two wing bars, then another 4 ft. from each end, whereupon the wing bars are bolted to the main frame. The frame is then braced diagonally between these pieces. The ribs, spaced 1 ft. apart, are fastened to this frame with 1-in. brads. The ribs are so bent that the highest part will be 5 or 6 in. above the horizontal. The bending must be [114] uniform and is done when fastening them in place.
The main wings are assembled by bolting one crosspiece at each end of two wing bars, and then another 4 feet from each end. After that, the wing bars are attached to the main frame. The frame is then reinforced diagonally between these sections. The ribs, which are spaced 1 foot apart, are secured to this frame with 1-inch brads. The ribs are bent so that the highest point is 5 or 6 inches above horizontal. The bending needs to be uniform and is done while securing them in place.
The material used to cover the wings and rudders is strong muslin. The cloth is first tacked to the front wing bar, then to the ribs, and sewed to a wire which is fastened between the ends of the ribs. Large brass-head tacks should be used through a strip of tape to fasten the cloth to the ribs. The rear wings are constructed in a similar manner. After the cloth is in place it is coated with starch or varnish.
The material used to cover the wings and rudders is durable muslin. The cloth is first attached to the front wing bar, then to the ribs, and sewn to a wire that is secured between the ends of the ribs. Large brass-head tacks should be used through a strip of tape to secure the cloth to the ribs. The rear wings are built in a similar way. Once the cloth is in place, it is coated with starch or varnish.

Details of Tandem Monoplane Glider, Showing the Main Frame and Wing Construction, and the Manner of Placing the Crossed Bracing Wires Between the Parts and to the Wing Ends
Details of the Tandem Monoplane Glider, showing the main frame and wing construction, and how the crossed bracing wires are positioned between the parts and to the wing ends.
The two vertical rectangular spaces in the main frame, just under the rear wings, are covered with cloth to act as a rudder. The upper and lower bracing wires for the wings are attached with snaps and rings so that the glider can be easily taken apart.
The two vertical rectangular areas in the main frame, just below the rear wings, are covered with cloth to serve as a rudder. The upper and lower bracing wires for the wings are connected with snaps and rings, making it easy to disassemble the glider.
It is best not to use the glider in a wind greater than 30 miles an hour. It is started from the top of a hill in the usual manner. Glides can be made running from 60 to several hundred feet.
It’s best not to use the glider in winds over 30 miles per hour. It’s launched from the top of a hill as usual. Glides can be made ranging from 60 to several hundred feet.
Carrier for a Suitcase
Where it is necessary to carry a well filled and heavy suitcase the light truck shown in the sketch will be a great assistance. The truck is constructed on the folding plan, similar to a go-cart, and can be carried on the side of the case. The wheels are those used on a go-cart, with rubber tires and about 6 in. in diameter. These are fitted to standards carrying a hinged top piece, the upper ends of the standards being hinged in a like manner. The standards should be cut to the proper length for the person carrying the suitcase.—Contributed by Mrs. Harriet M. S. Kerbaugh, Allentown, Pa.
When you need to carry a fully packed and heavy suitcase, the light truck shown in the sketch will be very helpful. The truck is designed to fold up, similar to a go-cart, and can be carried alongside the suitcase. It has wheels like those found on a go-cart, featuring rubber tires and about 6 inches in diameter. These wheels are attached to supports that hold a hinged top piece, with the upper ends of the supports also hinged. The supports should be cut to the right length for the person carrying the suitcase. —Contributed by Mrs. Harriet M. S. Kerbaugh, Allentown, Pa.

The Small Truck will Greatly Assist the Carrying of a Heavily Loaded Suitcase
The Small Truck will Significantly Help with Carrying a Heavily Loaded Suitcase.
Light in a Keyhole
Remove the lock and cut the mortise deep enough to admit a 3-volt battery lamp with a suitable socket attached. The lamp is then connected to wires which are concealed and run to a battery of three dry cells in the basement or other convenient place. A small push button is attached in the line and placed near the knob on the door. A small recess must be cut in the mortise so that the light from the lamp will shine directly on the inside of the plate over the keyhole.—Contributed by Armand F. Lamarre, St. Remi, Can.
Remove the lock and cut the mortise deep enough to fit a 3-volt battery lamp with an appropriate socket attached. The lamp is then wired to be hidden and runs to a battery of three dry cells located in the basement or another convenient area. A small push button is connected in the circuit and placed near the doorknob. A small recess must be cut in the mortise so the light from the lamp will shine directly on the inside of the plate over the keyhole.—Contributed by Armand F. Lamarre, St. Remi, Can.
How to Make a Monoplane Glider
By William Grotzinger
A simple glider of the monoplane type can be easily constructed in a small workshop; the cost of materials is not great and the building does not require skilled workmen. Select the material with care and see that the wood is straight-grained and free from knots. The following list of spruce pieces is required:
A basic single-wing glider is easy to build in a small workshop. The materials aren't too expensive, and you don't need expert builders. Choose your materials carefully and make sure the wood is straight and free of knots. You'll need the following spruce pieces:
4 | main wing spars, 3/4 by 1-1/4 in. by 17 ft. |
2 | rudder spars, 3/4 by 1 in. by 8 ft. |
8 | wing crosspieces, 3/4 by 3/4 in. by 4 ft. |
4 | rudder crosspieces, 1/2 by 1/2 in. by 2 ft. |
1 | piece for main-frame crosspieces, 1/2 by 1 in. by 12 ft. |
2 | arm pieces, 1-1/2 by 2 in. by 3-1/2 ft. |
The following list of poplar pieces is required in making the supports for the cloth covering on the wings and rudders.
The following list of popular materials is needed to create the supports for the fabric covering on the wings and rudders.
34 | main-wing ribs, 1/4 by 3/4 by 64 in. |
8 | rudder ribs, 1/4 by 1/2 by 36 in. |
5 | rudder ribs, 1/4 by 3/4 by 48 in. |
The following list of oak pieces is needed:
The following list of oak items is needed:
1 | piece, 5/8 by 1-1/4 in. by 12 ft. | |
1 | piece, 5/8 by 1-1/4 in. by 6 ft. | |
1 | piece, 3/4 by 3/4 in. by 3-1/2 ft. | |
2 | pieces, 5/8 by 1-1/2 in. by 5 ft. | |
4 | pieces, 3/4 by 1 by 28 in. |
In addition to the lists given, four pieces of bamboo, 16 ft. long, tapering from 1 or 1-1/4 in. at the large end to 3/4 in. at the small end, are used for the main frame.
In addition to the provided lists, four pieces of bamboo, 16 ft. long, narrowing from 1 or 1-1/4 in. at the large end to 3/4 in. at the small end, are used for the main frame.
Construction
The first part to make is the main frame A which is constructed of the four bamboo poles. They are made into a rectangular frame with crossbars marked B cut to the right length from the 12-ft. piece of spruce, 1/2 in. by 1 in. The bars C and D are of oak [117] cut from the 6-ft. piece, 5/8 in. by 1-1/4 in. All of these crossbars are fastened together in rectangular form by means of stove bolts. The bamboo poles are then bolted to the inner corners of the frames with 3/16-in. bolts. Place the bolts through the bamboo close to a joint to prevent splitting. The frame is then rigidly trussed by diagonal wires marked E crossing all rectangles. The wire used for trussing all the parts throughout the glider is piano wire, 16 gauge. The arm pieces are bolted to the sides of the rectangular frames beneath the wings.
The first part to make is the main frame A, which is built from four bamboo poles. They form a rectangular frame with crossbars marked B, cut to the correct length from the 12-ft. piece of spruce, 1/2 in. by 1 in. The bars C and D are made of oak, cut from the 6-ft. piece, 5/8 in. by 1-1/4 in. All these crossbars are fastened together in a rectangular shape using stove bolts. The bamboo poles are then bolted to the inner corners of the frames with 3/16-in. bolts. Insert the bolts through the bamboo close to a joint to prevent splitting. The frame is then securely trussed with diagonal wires marked E crossing all rectangles. The wire used to truss all the parts throughout the glider is 16 gauge piano wire. The arm pieces are bolted to the sides of the rectangular frames below the wings.

Wing Bar
Wing Bar
The framework of the main wings or planes should be put together by bolting the cross struts F at regular intervals on the under side of the main spars G. Brace the frame diagonally with the piano wire. The ribs are nailed to the main spars by using 1-in. brads. The ribs are spaced 1 ft. apart, and curved so that the highest part will be 5 in. from the horizontal. Each rib extends 15 in. back of the rear spar. The rudder is made in the same manner.
The main wings or planes should be assembled by bolting the cross struts F at regular intervals underneath the main spars G. Diagonally brace the frame with piano wire. The ribs are attached to the main spars using 1-inch brads. The ribs are spaced 1 foot apart and are curved so that the highest point is 5 inches above the horizontal. Each rib extends 15 inches behind the rear spar. The rudder is constructed in the same way.
The vertical rudder is made to fold. A small pocket arrangement H is made from which the rigs of the vertical rudder diverge.
The vertical rudder is designed to fold. A small pocket arrangement H is created from which the rigs of the vertical rudder spread out.
The covering of the wings and rudders should be a good quality of muslin or some light aeronautical goods. The cloth should be tacked to the front spar, to the ribs, and then sewn to a wire which connects the ends of the ribs.
The covering for the wings and rudders should be made from good quality muslin or some lightweight aeronautical fabric. The cloth should be attached to the front spar and the ribs, then sewn to a wire that connects the ends of the ribs.
Construct the triangular arrangement marked J to which the wings are braced. The wing bar supports are shown in the illustration. The bottom wires are braced to the crossbar K shown in the front elevation.
Construct the triangular arrangement marked J to which the wings are braced. The wing bar supports are shown in the illustration. The bottom wires are braced to the crossbar K shown in the front elevation.
The bracing wires are all fastened to a snaphook which can be snapped into the rings at the places marked L. This method will allow one quickly to assemble or take apart the plane and store it in a small place. The vertical rudder should be braced from each rib to the front spar of the horizontal rudder and then braced by the wires M to hold the rudder from falling back. The rudder is then braced to the main frame and the main frame is braced by the wires N to the wings. This will hold the plane rigid. Use snaphooks and eyebolts wherever possible so that the plane can be quickly assembled.
The bracing wires are all connected to a snaphook that can be attached to the rings at the spots marked L. This method lets you quickly put the plane together or take it apart and store it in a small space. The vertical rudder should be supported from each rib to the front spar of the horizontal rudder, and then secured with the wires M to keep the rudder from falling back. The rudder is then secured to the main frame, and the main frame is supported by the wires N to the wings. This will keep the plane stable. Use snaphooks and eyebolts whenever possible so the plane can be quickly assembled.
Assembling
The triangular arrangement J is bolted to the wings and the top wires put in place. The wings are then put on the main frame and bolted to the bars marked C and D, after which the bottom wires are fixed in place.
The triangular setup J is fastened to the wings, and the top wires are secured. The wings are then attached to the main frame and bolted to the bars labeled C and D, after which the bottom wires are secured.
Gliding
Take the glider to the top of a hill, step into the center of the main frame just a little back of the center of the wings. Put your arms around the arm pieces, face the wind and run a few steps. You will be lifted off the ground and carried down the slope. The balancing is done by shifting the legs. The glides should be short at first, but by daily practice, and, as the operator gains skill, glides can be made up to a length of several hundred feet. Do not attempt to fly in a wind having a velocity of more than 15 miles an hour.
Take the glider to the top of a hill, step into the center of the main frame just a little behind the middle of the wings. Wrap your arms around the arm pieces, face into the wind, and take a few steps. You'll get lifted off the ground and glide down the slope. You balance by shifting your legs. The initial glides should be short, but with daily practice, as you get better, you can make glides that last several hundred feet. Avoid trying to fly in winds faster than 15 miles per hour.
Exerciser for a Chained Dog
The exerciser consists of a disk, 5 ft. in diameter, pivoted in the ground near the kennel. The disk revolves on a 5/8-in. pin set in a post made of a 4 by 4-in. piece of timber. The disk is made of common lumber fastened together with battens on the under side. Our dog seems to enjoy this kind of exercise.—Contributed by Hazel Duncan, Denver, Colo.
The exercise equipment is a disk that measures 5 ft in diameter, anchored to the ground near the doghouse. The disk rotates on a 5/8-inch pin mounted in a post made from a 4 by 4-inch piece of timber. The disk is constructed from regular wood, secured together with battens on the underside. Our dog appears to really enjoy this type of exercise.—Contributed by Hazel Duncan, Denver, Colo.

Revolving Disk Exerciser
Rotating Disk Exerciser
A Laboratory Gas Generator
The sketch illustrates a gas generator designed for laboratories where gases are needed in large quantities and frequently. The shelf holding the large inverted bottle is of thick wood, and to reinforce the whole apparatus, a 1-in. copper strip is placed around the bottle tightly and fastened with screws turned into the woodwork. The shelf above is attached last, and upon it rests the bottle of commercial acid required in the gas generation. The pump shown is for use in starting the siphon.
The sketch shows a gas generator made for labs that need large amounts of gas regularly. The shelf that holds the big inverted bottle is made of thick wood, and to strengthen the entire setup, a 1-inch copper strip wraps tightly around the bottle and is secured with screws into the wood. The shelf above is added last, and it holds the bottle of commercial acid needed for generating the gas. The pump displayed is used to start the siphon.

Gas Generator of Large Capacity That will Work Automatically as the Gas is Removed
Gas Generator with High Capacity That Operates Automatically as the Gas is Used Up
The large bottle used as a generator may be either a 3 or 5-gal. size, and after it is placed in the position shown, a sufficient amount of the solid reagent needed in gas generating is placed in the mouth before the exit tube, leading away below, is fixed in position. If sulphureted hydrogen is required, ferrous sulphide is used; if hydrogen is required, zinc is placed within; and to make a carbon dioxide, marble, or its equivalent, is inserted. Whatever gas is required, a sufficient quantity of the solid material is put in to last for some time in order not to disturb the fastenings.
The large bottle used as a generator can be either a 3-gallon or a 5-gallon size. Once it's positioned as shown, you add the right amount of solid reagent needed for gas generation into the mouth before securing the exit tube that leads away below. If you need hydrogen sulfide, use ferrous sulfide; if you need hydrogen, put in zinc; and to produce carbon dioxide, insert marble or a similar substance. For whatever gas is needed, add enough of the solid material to last for a while so you don't have to readjust the fittings.
When all is ready, the pump is used gently to start the acid over the siphon and into the generator from below. The gas generated by the action of the acid on the solid soon fills the bottle. The screw clamp on the exit tube is loosened and the gas passes into the bottle of water and charges it, in the case when sulphureted hydrogen is required. In the other cases, when sufficient gas has been generated, the screw clamp is tightened, and the gas soon attains considerable pressure which forces the acid back out of the generator and into the acid bottle above. The whole apparatus now comes to an equilibrium, and the gas in the generator is ready for another use.—Contributed by W. M. Mills, Bakersfield, Cal.
When everything is set up, the pump is gently used to start the acid flowing through the siphon and into the generator from below. The gas produced by the acid reacting with the solid quickly fills the bottle. The screw clamp on the exit tube is loosened, allowing the gas to pass into the water bottle, which charges it when hydrogen sulfide is needed. In other situations, once enough gas has been generated, the screw clamp is tightened, and the gas builds up significant pressure, forcing the acid back out of the generator and into the acid bottle above. The entire system now reaches equilibrium, and the gas in the generator is ready for another use.—Contributed by W. M. Mills, Bakersfield, Cal.
Holding Small Armatures for Winding
Procure a strip of sheet metal, 6 in. long, 1 in. wide, or as wide as the armature core is long, and 3/32 in. thick. Bend this into a U-shape, as shown, and file each end similar to the barb on a fishhook. Drill two holes for a bolt to pass through the sheet-metal ends. Fasten a screw or bolt in the center of the bend, to be used for gripping in a chuck or polishing head. Core segments can be quickly wound with this device.—Contributed by Geo. B. Schulz, Austin, Illinois.
Get a piece of sheet metal that is 6 inches long, 1 inch wide (or as wide as the armature core is long), and 3/32 inch thick. Bend it into a U-shape, as shown, and file each end to resemble the barb on a fishhook. Drill two holes so a bolt can go through the ends of the sheet metal. Secure a screw or bolt in the center of the bend, which will be used for gripping in a chuck or polishing head. You can quickly wind core segments with this tool.—Contributed by Geo. B. Schulz, Austin, Illinois.

Armature Cores are Easily Revolved to Fill the Core Openings with Insulated Wire
Armature cores can be easily rotated to fill the core openings with insulated wire.
Footstool for Cement Floors
A clerk finding the cement floor of the office uncomfortably cold to the feet, devised a footstool in the following manner: A shallow box was procured, and four small truck casters were fastened to the bottom. A piece of carpet was laid on the inside of the bottom and some old newspapers placed on top of it. When seated at the desk, he placed his feet inside the box on the papers. The casters elevated the box from the cement, just high enough to avoid dampness and cold, and permitted an easy change of position.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Gainesville, Ga.
A clerk, finding the cement floor of the office uncomfortably cold for his feet, created a footstool like this: He got a shallow box and attached four small truck casters to the bottom. He lined the inside of the bottom with a piece of carpet and put some old newspapers on top of it. When sitting at his desk, he would place his feet inside the box on the newspapers. The casters lifted the box off the cement just enough to keep it away from dampness and cold, allowing for an easy shift in position.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Gainesville, Ga.
Homemade Telegraph Sounder
The material required to construct a telegraph sounder, like the one shown in the sketch, consists of two binding posts, magnets, a piece of sheet metal, and a rubber band. These are arranged as shown, on a wood base or, better still, on a metal box. In using a metal-box base, be sure to insulate the connections at the magnet coils and binding posts.
The materials needed to build a telegraph sounder, like the one in the sketch, include two binding posts, magnets, a piece of sheet metal, and a rubber band. These should be set up as shown, on a wooden base or, even better, on a metal box. If you use a metal box as the base, make sure to insulate the connections at the magnet coils and binding posts.

An Inexpensive and Homemade Sounder for Use in Learning the Telegraph Codes
An Affordable, DIY Sounder for Learning Telegraph Codes
This instrument will be found by those studying the telegraph codes to give good results, equal to any of the expensive outfits sold for this purpose.—Contributed by Chas. J. La Prille, Flushing, N. Y.
This tool will be useful for anyone studying telegraph codes, providing reliable results on par with the pricier equipment sold for this purpose.—Contributed by Chas. J. La Prille, Flushing, N. Y.
Laboratory Force Filter
The sketch represents a force filter which is well adapted for use in small laboratories. The water is turned on at the faucet and draws the air through the side tube by suction, which in turn draws the air in a steady stream through the Wolff bottles. The tubes may be attached to a filter inserted in a filter bottle and filtering thus greatly facilitated. The connection to the faucet can be made, as shown in the detailed sketch, out of a long cork, by boring a hole large enough to fit the faucet through the cork and another slanting hole, joining the central hole, on the side for a pipe or tube. At the lower end of the cork a tube is also fitted, which may be drawn out to increase the suction. The inclined tube should be slightly bent at the lower end.—Contributed by W. M. Mills, Bakersfield, Cal.
The sketch shows a force filter that's great for use in small labs. You turn on the water at the faucet, and it creates suction that pulls air through the side tube, which then draws the air in a steady stream through the Wolff bottles. You can connect the tubes to a filter placed in a filter bottle, making the filtering process much easier. The connection to the faucet can be made, as shown in the detailed sketch, using a long cork by drilling a hole large enough for the faucet to fit through and another angled hole connecting to it on the side for a pipe or tube. At the bottom of the cork, a tube is also attached, which can be pulled out to increase the suction. The angled tube should be slightly bent at the lower end.—Contributed by W. M. Mills, Bakersfield, Cal.

A Slight Vacuum is Formed by the Water Flowing through the Cork, Which Forces the Filter
A slight vacuum is created by the water flowing through the cork, which pushes the filter.
Beginner's Helper for Roller Skating
One of the most amusing as well as useful devices for a beginner on roller skates is shown in the sketch. The device is made of 3/4-in. pipe and pipe fittings, with a strip of sheet metal 1 in. wide fastened about half way down on the legs. On the bottom of each leg is fastened an ordinary furniture caster which allows the machine to roll easily on the floor. The rear is left open to allow the beginner to enter, then by grasping the top rail he is able to move about on the floor at ease, without fear of falling.—Contributed by J. H. Harris, Berkeley, Cal.
One of the funniest and most helpful devices for a beginner on roller skates is shown in the sketch. The device is made from 3/4-inch pipe and pipe fittings, with a 1-inch wide strip of sheet metal attached around halfway down the legs. At the bottom of each leg, there’s an ordinary furniture caster that lets the machine roll easily on the floor. The back is left open so that the beginner can get in, and by holding onto the top rail, they can move around on the floor comfortably, without worrying about falling.—Contributed by J. H. Harris, Berkeley, Cal.

Beginner Cannot Fall
Beginner Can't Fall
Atmospheric Thermo-Engine
The device illustrated has for its object the production of power in small quantities with little attention and no expense. All that is needed to produce the power is common ordinary water, and the device will continue to operate until the amount of water placed in the receptacle has evaporated.
The device shown is designed to generate power in small amounts with minimal effort and cost. All you need to produce the power is regular tap water, and it will keep working until the water in the container has evaporated.
The device consists of a rectangular vessel provided with legs and a cover. Each end of the vessel is provided with an opening, A, adapted to receive and hold in place plaster-of-paris cups, B. The part extending into the tank is provided with a wick, C, which reaches to the bottom of the vessel. A glass tube, D, is provided with a bulb on each end and partly filled with alcohol, the remaining space being exhausted of air. The glass tube is secured to a hanger which is pivoted to the bottom of the vessel.
The device consists of a rectangular container with legs and a lid. Each end of the container has an opening, A, designed to hold and secure plaster-of-paris cups, B. The section that goes into the tank has a wick, C, that reaches the bottom of the container. A glass tube, D, has a bulb at each end and is partially filled with alcohol, with the rest of the space having the air removed. The glass tube is attached to a hanger that pivots at the bottom of the container.
After a quantity of water has been poured into the vessel and the device allowed to stand undisturbed for a few minutes, the tube will begin to move with an oscillating motion. Some of the water in the vessel has been conducted by means of the wicks C to the bent plaster cups, from the surface of which it evaporates, thus absorbing latent heat and producing a lower temperature in the cups than that of the surrounding atmosphere. The bulb in contact with the cup thus acquires a lower temperature than the one at the end D, which will result in condensation of the alcohol vapor within the former. The pressure of the vapor in the lower bulb will then force the alcohol up the inclined tube into the higher bulb, the evaporation in the lower bulb maintaining the pressure therein.
After a certain amount of water has been poured into the container and the device is left undisturbed for a few minutes, the tube will start to move back and forth. Some of the water in the container has been drawn through the wicks C to the curved plaster cups, where it evaporates from the surface, absorbing latent heat and creating a lower temperature in the cups than in the surrounding air. The bulb in contact with the cup thus gets cooler than the one at the end D, causing the alcohol vapor inside the former to condense. The pressure of the vapor in the lower bulb will then push the alcohol up the inclined tube into the higher bulb, with the evaporation in the lower bulb keeping the pressure there.
When a sufficient quantity of alcohol has been forced into the upper bulb, it will descend, and thus elevate the other bulb into its cup. The phenomena just described will be repeated in this bulb and the oscillation will [121] continue until the water in the vessel has been absorbed and evaporated.—Contributed by E. W. Davis, Chicago.
When enough alcohol has been pushed into the upper bulb, it will drop down, causing the other bulb to rise into its cup. The same process I just described will happen in this bulb, and the bouncing will [121] keep going until the water in the container has been absorbed and evaporated. —Contributed by E. W. Davis, Chicago.
A Mirror an Aid in Rowing a Boat
The young oarsman is apt to experience difficulty in keeping a straight course until he has had some practice. Rowing a boat in a narrow channel calls for considerable skill to hold a course in mid-stream. A variation of force in pulling the oars almost instantly results in the rowboat making a landfall on one or the other of the banks.
The young rower is likely to find it hard to keep a straight line until they get some practice. Rowing a boat in a narrow channel requires a lot of skill to stay in the middle of the stream. If there's a change in the force used to pull the oars, the rowboat quickly drifts towards one bank or the other.

The Mirror Attached to a Boat
The Mirror Attached to a Boat
The skilled oarsman does not need an appliance that the beginner might welcome. With the aid of a mirror conveniently supported at a suitable angle and height before the oarsman's face, the water, the shores and approaching boats may be seen with distinctness. The mirror may be set directly in front or a little distance to one side as shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Thaleon Blake, Sidney, O.
The experienced rower doesn't need a tool that a newbie might find helpful. By using a mirror positioned at the right angle and height in front of the rower's face, they can clearly see the water, the shores, and approaching boats. The mirror can be placed directly in front or slightly off to one side, as shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Thaleon Blake, Sidney, O.
Developing Tray Made of a Tin Can
Obtain a tomato or other can, 5 or 6 in. long and 4 in. in diameter, which should be secured before it has been opened, says Camera Craft. Cut both ends exactly half way around, keeping close to the edge, as shown in the first sketch, and slit it lengthwise to open the side. Trim off the end pieces to within 1 in. of the center and cut off the surplus tin of the sides of the can, leaving enough to bend over and form the ends of the tank as shown in the second sketch.
Get a tomato can or another can that's 5 or 6 inches long and 4 inches in diameter, and make sure it’s secure before you open it, says Camera Craft. Cut both ends exactly halfway around, staying close to the edge, as shown in the first sketch, and then make a lengthwise slit to open the side. Trim the end pieces to within 1 inch of the center and cut off the excess tin from the sides of the can, leaving enough to bend over and form the ends of the tank, as shown in the second sketch.

For Developing Roll Films
For Developing Film Rolls
The support, as shown in the last sketch, is made by screwing together three pieces of wood, the base piece being 6-1/2 in. square and thick enough to make the tank solid and heavy. Bend the sides of the can over the edges of the two uprights and tack them firmly to the sides, bending the tin so as to have a rounded surface that will not scratch the films. The ends of the can are bent over sharply to form the sides of the tank. Procure a round wood stick, the length of the tank, place in position, and fasten with a screw through the tin at both ends. Give the whole tank two coats of black asphaltum varnish to protect it from the action of the developer.
The support, as shown in the last sketch, is made by screwing together three pieces of wood, with the base piece being 6-1/2 inches square and thick enough to keep the tank stable and heavy. Bend the sides of the can over the edges of the two uprights and securely attach them to the sides, shaping the tin to create a rounded surface that won’t scratch the films. The ends of the can are sharply bent over to form the sides of the tank. Get a round wooden stick, the length of the tank, place it in position, and secure it with a screw through the tin at both ends. Apply two coats of black asphaltum varnish to the entire tank to protect it from the developer.
White Rubber on Croquet Arches

A white cloth is usually tied to croquet arches when the game is played late in the evening. A much better plan is to slip a piece of white rubber tubing about 1 ft. long on the arch. This tubing can be purchased at any local drug store. This makes the top part of the arch conspicuous so that it may be plainly seen in the dark, and, when the tubing becomes soiled it can be cleaned off with a damp cloth.—Contributed by John Blake, Franklyn, Mass.
A white cloth is usually tied to croquet arches when the game is played late in the evening. A much better idea is to slide a piece of white rubber tubing about 1 ft. long onto the arch. You can buy this tubing at any local drug store. This makes the top part of the arch stand out so that it can be easily seen in the dark, and when the tubing gets dirty, it can be wiped clean with a damp cloth.—Contributed by John Blake, Franklyn, Mass.
Illuminating an Outside Thermometer
During the season of furnace fires the thermometer outside the north window becomes of added interest and usefulness in helping one to judge the proper draft adjustments of the furnace for the night. A pocket electric flashlamp is convenient for examining the thermometer after dark, but it is not always at hand, matches are dangerous when lace curtains are at the window, and besides, the reflection from the glass of both matches and flashlamp on the inside makes it very difficult to read the thermometer.
During the heating season, the thermometer outside the north window becomes more interesting and useful for figuring out the right draft settings for the furnace at night. A pocket flashlight is handy for checking the thermometer after dark, but it's not always available. Matches can be risky when lace curtains are at the window, and the glare from both matches and the flashlight on the inside makes it really hard to read the thermometer.

To avoid these difficulties I attached to my thermometer the device shown herewith, which consists of a miniature battery lamp placed at the back of the translucent-glass thermometer and operated by a battery within the house, the light being turned on by an ordinary push button placed conveniently inside of the window.
To avoid these difficulties, I added a device to my thermometer that is shown here, which consists of a small battery lamp positioned at the back of the translucent glass thermometer and powered by a battery inside the house. The light is activated by a regular push button conveniently located inside the window.
A strip of brass, A, 3/8 in. wide by 1/16 in. thick, was riveted (soldering will do) to the lower support of the thermometer. The free end of this brass strip was bent around a disk of hardwood, B, and fastened to it by three or four small screws in such a manner that the disk made a circular platform just behind the thermometer scale. This disk was slightly larger than the mouth of a small, thin tumbler. On the upper surface of this disk was fastened with shellac and small nails close to the periphery, a disk of cork, 1/4 in. thick, this cork disk being a close fit for the mouth of the tumbler. A miniature porcelain electric-lamp socket was fastened with screws on the cork of the base. Wires were then run from the lamp socket through the cork and wood disks and the whole painted with melted paraffin to close all apertures and keep out moisture. Good rubber-covered electric-light wire will do nicely for the wiring outside the house, although, if it can be obtained, a piece of lead-covered paired wire is preferable. These wires must be only long enough to reach inside the house, where they may be joined to the ordinary sort of wire used in electric-bell work for connecting with push button and battery.
A strip of brass, A, 3/8 in. wide and 1/16 in. thick, was riveted (soldering works too) to the lower support of the thermometer. The free end of this brass strip was bent around a disk of hardwood, B, and secured to it with three or four small screws so that the disk formed a circular platform just behind the thermometer scale. This disk was slightly larger than the opening of a small, thin tumbler. On the upper surface of this disk, a disk of cork, 1/4 in. thick, was attached with shellac and small nails close to the edge; this cork disk fit snugly into the mouth of the tumbler. A miniature porcelain electric lamp socket was secured with screws on the cork at the base. Wires were then connected from the lamp socket through the cork and wood disks, and the entire assembly was painted with melted paraffin to seal all openings and prevent moisture from entering. Good rubber-covered electric light wire works well for the wiring outside the house; however, if available, a piece of lead-covered paired wire is preferable. These wires should be just long enough to reach inside the house, where they can be connected to standard wire used in electric bell systems for connecting with the push button and battery.
A 4-volt lamp of about 2 cp. will be sufficient to illuminate the thermometer and allow the scale and mercury column to be distinctly seen. It may be found necessary to make some adjustment by bending the brass strip in order to bring the lamp centrally behind the scale and at the proper height to give the best lighting on the range of from 10 to 40 deg. Over the lamp is placed the tumbler for protection from the weather, and, if desired, half of the tumbler may be painted as a reflector on the inside with white enamel paint, although, in practice, I have not found this necessary.
A 4-volt lamp with about 2 candlepower will be enough to light up the thermometer and make the scale and mercury column clearly visible. You might need to adjust the position by bending the brass strip to center the lamp behind the scale and at the right height for optimal lighting across a range of 10 to 40 degrees. A tumbler is placed over the lamp for weather protection, and if you want, you can paint half of the inside of the tumbler with white enamel paint as a reflector, although I haven't found that necessary in practice.
Within the house the push button should be placed at the window where it can be most conveniently reached when viewing the thermometer, and connections may be made to the battery regularly used for ringing the house bells, or to a separate battery of, say, 4 dry cells, placed in some location, as a closet, near the thermometer.—Contributed by C. F. A. Siedhof, Winchester, Mass.
Within the house, the push button should be positioned at the window where it can be easily accessed while checking the thermometer. Connections can either be made to the battery typically used for ringing the house bells, or to a separate battery of about 4 dry cells, placed in a convenient spot like a closet near the thermometer.—Contributed by C. F. A. Siedhof, Winchester, Mass.
How to Make an Automobile Robe
When driving an automobile in cold weather, it is impossible to have a robe come down over the feet without being in the way so that it is inconvenient in working the pedals. Procure a common heavy robe and cut two holes in it about 5 in. from the bottom just large enough for the toe of the shoes to slip through and bind the edges with cloth or fur. The 5 in. of robe below the holes should come back under the feet so that no wind can enter. Make the holes far enough apart [123] so that both outside pedals can be reached easily and you will have no trouble with your feet. This robe, with the use of overshoes, will insure comfort in driving a car.—Contributed by Earl R. Hastings, Corinth, Vt.
When driving a car in cold weather, it’s impossible to have a robe draped over your feet without it getting in the way and making it hard to work the pedals. Get a regular heavy robe and cut two holes in it about 5 inches from the bottom, just large enough for your toes to slip through. Bind the edges with cloth or fur. The 5 inches of robe below the holes should hang back under your feet to block the wind. Make sure the holes are far enough apart so you can easily reach both outside pedals, and you won’t have any issues with your feet. This robe, paired with overshoes, will keep you comfortable while driving a car.—Contributed by Earl R. Hastings, Corinth, Vt.
Locating a Droplight in the Dark
It is very hard to locate an electric-light globe in a dark room. Anyone trying to find one by striking the air in its vicinity with one hand, usually finds that the globe is not there, although the hand may have passed within 1/2 in. of the globe.
It’s really difficult to find a light bulb in a dark room. Anyone trying to locate one by waving their hand around nearby usually discovers that the bulb isn’t there, even though their hand might have come within half an inch of it.

Covering a Wide Range
Covers a Wide Range
The best way to locate a globe is to approach the proximity of the drop with thumbs touching and fingers extended as shown in the sketch, in which manner the hands will cover a radius of about 14 in. and offer a better chance of locating the light quickly than if one groped about with one hand extended.—Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas, Tex.
The easiest way to find a globe is to get close to the drop with your thumbs touching and fingers extended like in the sketch. This way, your hands will cover a radius of about 14 inches and give you a better chance of quickly locating the light than if you were to fumble around with just one hand outstretched.—Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas, Tex.
Lighting a Room for Making Photographs
When it becomes too cold for the amateur photographer to take pictures outdoors, he generally lays aside his camera and thinks no more about it until the coming of another spring or summer. While some winter scenes would make up an interesting part of anyone's collection, it is not always pleasant to go out to take them.
When it gets too cold for amateur photographers to shoot outside, they usually put their camera away and don’t think about it again until spring or summer rolls around. Although winter scenes could add some interesting pieces to anyone's collection, it’s not always enjoyable to head outside to capture them.
Some derive pleasure from making groups and portraits, but this is very difficult, if the room is not well lighted. Overhead light is the best for this work and few residences are constructed to furnish this kind of light.
Some people enjoy creating groups and portraits, but this can be really challenging if the room isn’t well lit. Overhead lighting is the best for this kind of work, and not many homes are designed to provide that type of light.

Light Reflected on Ceiling
Light Reflected on Ceiling
I find a very good way to get a light overhead is to take a large mirror—one from an ordinary dresser will do—and place it in the window in such a position that the reflection will strike the ceiling just above the subject. The result will be a soft but very strong light, almost equal to a north skylight. Splendid portraits can be made in this way.—Contributed by Chas. Piper, Kokomo, Ind.
I’ve discovered a great way to get nice overhead lighting. Just take a large mirror—an ordinary dresser mirror works perfectly—and position it in the window so that the reflection hits the ceiling right above your subject. This creates a soft but strong light, nearly as good as natural light from a north skylight. You can create amazing portraits this way. —Contributed by Chas. Piper, Kokomo, Ind.
Detachable Hinged Cover for Kettles
A kettle cover equipped with the hinge shown in Fig. 1 will not fall off when in place, and can be raised or removed entirely when desired.
A kettle cover with the hinge shown in Fig. 1 won't fall off when it's on, and can be lifted or taken off completely when needed.

Wire Clasps on Hinge (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Wire Clasps on Hinge (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
One wing of an ordinary hinge is soldered or riveted to the cover and wire clasps soldered to the other wing. It is slipped on the kettle as shown in Fig. 2. The cover is interchangeable and can be placed on almost any kettle.
One side of a regular hinge is soldered or riveted to the lid, and wire clasps are soldered to the other side. It gets attached to the kettle as shown in Fig. 2. The lid is interchangeable and can fit on almost any kettle.
A Use for Discarded Wafer Razor Blades
A paper trimmer and mat cutter can be made from a wafer razor blade. As a paper trimmer, place the blade C over the part A of the razor, as shown, with only two of the holes engaging in one post and the center screw. Then place the part B in position and clamp with the handle. This will allow about 1/2 in. of the blade to project at one end. If a part of the extending blade is cut or broken off, it will be more easily handled. The cutter is guided along the straightedge as shown in Fig. 1.
A paper trimmer and mat cutter can be made from a razor blade. To use it as a paper trimmer, place the blade C over part A of the razor, as shown, with only two of the holes connecting to one post and the center screw. Then, position part B and clamp it with the handle. This will leave about 1/2 in. of the blade sticking out at one end. If part of the extended blade is cut or broken off, it will be easier to handle. The cutter is guided along the straightedge as shown in Fig. 1.

(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 1)
If it is desired to make a more permanent form of instrument, or if no holder is at hand and only a castoff wafer blade, a handle, C, may be cut from a piece of wood and fitted with two or three binding-posts, A, taken from an old battery, to hold the blade B in place, as shown in Fig. 2.
If you want to create a more permanent tool, or if you don’t have a holder available and only have a discarded wafer blade, you can cut a handle, C, from a piece of wood. You can then attach two or three binding posts, A, from an old battery to secure the blade B in place, as shown in Fig. 2.

Blade Attached to Handle (Fig. 2)
Blade Attached to Handle (Fig. 2)
Armatures for Small Motors
Without the proper tools and material, the amateur electrician will find it quite difficult to construct a small armature for a battery motor that will run true, without vibration and have a neat appearance. Ordinary cast-iron gears or pinions, as shown in Fig. 1, make excellent cores for armatures on small motors. A gear of any number of teeth can be used for an armature with a smaller number of coils by cutting out a certain number of teeth. For example, a gear with 12 teeth will take 12 coils, but if every other tooth is cut out, it will take only 6 coils, etc. The teeth can be easily chipped out with a cold chisel.
Without the right tools and materials, an amateur electrician will struggle to build a small armature for a battery motor that runs smoothly, without vibration, and looks good. Standard cast-iron gears or pinions, like the one shown in Fig. 1, work great as cores for armatures in small motors. You can use a gear with any number of teeth for an armature by reducing the number of coils; simply cut out a certain number of teeth. For instance, a gear with 12 teeth can accommodate 12 coils, but if every other tooth is removed, it will only take 6 coils, and so on. The teeth can be easily chipped out with a cold chisel.

Gear Used as a Core (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Gear Used as a Core (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Larger armatures can be made from gears with spokes, the spokes being cut out, if a ring armature is desired. The gear, when wound, can be mounted on a hub made of empty thread spools. The spool can be turned at one end to insert it in the armature, and if too long, one end will serve for the core of the commutator, as shown in Fig. 2. This combination will make a neat, efficient little armature, which will run quite free from vibration. Only simple tools, such as a hammer, cold chisel, file, jackknife and a vise, are required.—Contributed by R. J. Nault, Hartford, Conn.
Larger armatures can be made from gears with spokes, which can be cut out if you want a ring armature. Once wound, the gear can be mounted on a hub made from empty thread spools. You can turn the spool at one end to fit it into the armature, and if it's too long, one end can serve as the core of the commutator, as shown in Fig. 2. This setup will create a compact, efficient armature that runs with minimal vibration. You only need basic tools like a hammer, cold chisel, file, jackknife, and a vise. —Contributed by R. J. Nault, Hartford, Conn.
Ice Creeper for Shoe Heels
Many persons, young and old, have falls every winter on the ice or snow which can be avoided if their shoes are fitted with ice creepers. A very efficient device of this kind, which any boy can make at home in a short time, is shown in the sketch. These ice creepers need not be removed from the shoes or boots until the winter is past, for they may be worn indoors without injuring the finest floor.
Many people, both young and old, fall every winter on ice or snow, which can be prevented if their shoes are equipped with ice creepers. A very effective version of this that any kid can make at home in a short time is shown in the sketch. These ice creepers don't need to be taken off the shoes or boots until winter is over, as they can be worn indoors without damaging even the finest floors.
The two plates A may be made from either iron or steel—preferably the latter. An all-steel scraper, or a piece of a saw blade, makes good [125] creepers. Draw the temper by heating the steel to a cherry red and then letting it cool slowly. It may then be sawn with a hacksaw, cut with a cold chisel, or filed into plates of the proper shape, as shown. The teeth are filed to points. The two L-shaped slots are made by drilling 3/16-in. holes through the plates, and then sawing, filing or chiseling out the metal between the holes. The projections at the ends are then bent out at right angles with heavy pliers or the claws of a hammer, and finally the plates bent to fit the curve of the heel.
The two plates A can be made from either iron or steel—preferably steel. An all-steel scraper, or a piece of a saw blade, works well for creepers. To draw the temper, heat the steel to a cherry red and then let it cool slowly. After that, you can saw it with a hacksaw, cut it with a cold chisel, or file it into the right shape, as shown. The teeth should be filed to a point. Create the two L-shaped slots by drilling 3/16-inch holes through the plates, and then saw, file, or chisel out the metal between the holes. Bend the projections at the ends out at right angles using heavy pliers or the claws of a hammer, and finally, bend the plates to fit the curve of the heel.

Creeper Attached to Heel
Creeper Stuck to Heel
The creepers are attached by means of round-head wood screws turned into the leather. In this operation place the teeth of the plates just below the bottom of the heel and turn the screws into the ends of the upright slots until the heads just bind. The plate as set when indoors or else not needed is shown at B. To place the plate so it will grip the ice, slide it to the right, which will bring the screws into the horizontal slots, as shown at C.—Contributed by Chelsea C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
The creepers are secured with round-head wood screws that are driven into the leather. In this process, position the teeth of the plates just below the bottom of the heel and screw them into the ends of the vertical slots until the heads are snug. The plate is set as shown indoors or if not needed at B. To adjust the plate for better ice grip, slide it to the right, which will place the screws in the horizontal slots, as illustrated at C.—Contributed by Chelsea C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
Opening Screw-Top Fruit Jars

Screw-top fruit jars may be easily opened in the following manner: Secure a strap with a buckle and place it around the top as if it were to be buckled, but instead draw the loose end back and hold it with the thumb as shown. Turn cover and strap while held in this position and it will easily turn from the jar.—Contributed by Chas. A. Bickert, Clinton, Iowa.
Screw-top fruit jars can be easily opened this way: Take a belt with a buckle and wrap it around the top as if you’re going to buckle it, but instead pull the loose end back and hold it with your thumb as shown. While maintaining this position, turn the cover and strap, and it will easily twist off the jar. —Contributed by Chas. A. Bickert, Clinton, Iowa.
Lamp-Chimney Cleaner
Lamp chimneys of various makes are very difficult to clean quickly and thoroughly. The simple device shown in the sketch makes the cleaning process a simple matter. The cleaner is made of a round rubber ball with slits cut in it as shown and then fastened to the end of a stick. When a cloth is placed over the ball it presses evenly against the curved surfaces of the glass. There is no danger of breaking a chimney with this cleaner.
Lamp chimneys from different brands are really tough to clean quickly and thoroughly. The simple tool illustrated in the sketch makes the cleaning process easy. The cleaner consists of a round rubber ball with slits cut into it, which is then attached to the end of a stick. When you place a cloth over the ball, it presses evenly against the curved surfaces of the glass. There’s no risk of breaking a chimney with this cleaner.

Rubber Ball on Stick
Rubber Ball on a Stick
A Pop-Corn Popper

The accompanying sketch shows the construction of a pop-corn popper for thoroughly flavoring the corn with the hot butter or lard, and at the same time mixing it with the necessary amount of salt. Procure a metal bucket that just fits the bottom of the frying pan. The stirring device is made of heavy wire bent as shown and provided with an empty spool for a handle. A brace is made of tin bent in the shape shown and riveted to the bottom of the bucket.—Contributed by F. A. Wirth, Farwell, Texas.
The sketch included shows how to build a popcorn popper that evenly coats the corn with hot butter or lard, while also mixing in the right amount of salt. Get a metal bucket that fits perfectly at the bottom of the frying pan. The stirring tool is made from thick wire shaped as shown and has an empty spool as a handle. A support is made from tin, bent into the shape depicted and attached to the bottom of the bucket.—Contributed by F. A. Wirth, Farwell, Texas.
A Homemade Floor Polisher
An efficient and cheap floor polisher may be readily constructed in the following manner: Make a box about 4 by 6 by 12 in., or the exact size may be determined by building it around [126] the household flatirons as these are used to give weight and pressure. The handle, which is attached as shown, should be at least 2-1/2 in wide at the hinged end and should be sandpapered where it is grasped by the hands. A half-strap hinge is preferable, with the strap part fastened to the handle. The bottom of the polisher is covered with a piece of Brussels carpet.
An effective and affordable floor polisher can be easily made like this: Create a box about 4 by 6 by 12 inches, or you can adjust the size based on the household flatirons that will be used for added weight and pressure. The handle, which is attached as shown, should be at least 2.5 inches wide at the hinged end and should be sanded where it's held. A half-strap hinge is recommended, with the strap part secured to the handle. The bottom of the polisher is covered with a piece of Brussels carpet.

Flatirons in the Box
Flatirons in the Box
In use, it is well to set the polisher on a soft piece of cotton or flannel cloth, which may be readily renewed when badly soiled.
In use, it's best to place the polisher on a soft piece of cotton or flannel cloth, which can be easily replaced when it gets too dirty.
A more sightly polisher may be made by filling the box with pieces of old iron or lead, tightly packed with paper to prevent rattling, and attaching a cover over the top. The handle may be hinged directly to this cover by means of a full-strap hinge.—Contributed by B. O. Longyear, Ft. Collins, Colo.
A nicer polisher can be made by filling the box with pieces of old iron or lead, tightly packed with paper to stop it from rattling, and adding a cover on top. The handle can be directly attached to this cover using a full-strap hinge.—Contributed by B. O. Longyear, Ft. Collins, Colo.
Simple Way to Mark Poison Bottles

A way to prevent any possible mistake of taking bottles containing poisons is to mark them as shown in the sketch. This method provides a way to designate a poison bottle in the dark.
A way to prevent any possible mistake of grabbing bottles with poisons is to label them like the sketch shows. This method makes it easier to identify a poison bottle in the dark.
The marker is made of a circle of heavy cardboard with a hole in the center so as to fit tightly over the neck of the bottle. No matter how dark it may be or how much of a hurry a person may be in, one cannot fail to note the character of the contents of the bottle as soon as the hand touches the cardboard marker.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
The marker is made of a circle of thick cardboard with a hole in the center so it fits tightly over the neck of the bottle. No matter how dark it is or how rushed someone might be, it's impossible not to notice the type of drink in the bottle as soon as your hand touches the cardboard marker. —Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
Removing Varnish
A good and easy way to remove varnish from old furniture is to wash the surface thoroughly with 95-per-cent alcohol. This dissolves the varnish and the wood can then be cleaned with a strong solution of soap, or weak lye. If lye is used, it should be washed off quickly and the wood dried with flannel cloth. When the wood is thoroughly dry it will take a fine finish.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A simple and effective way to remove varnish from old furniture is to clean the surface well with 95% alcohol. This breaks down the varnish, and then you can clean the wood with a strong soap solution or a weak lye solution. If you use lye, make sure to rinse it off quickly and dry the wood with a flannel cloth. Once the wood is completely dry, it will have a nice finish. —Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Curling-Iron Heater
The curling-iron holder shown in the sketch can be made of metal tubing having the size to fit both iron and gas jet. One-half of the tubing for a portion of its length is removed, as shown in Fig. 1. The remaining part is bent as in Fig. 2 and set on the burner of the gas jet.
The curling iron holder depicted in the sketch can be made from metal tubing that fits both the iron and the gas jet. Half of the tubing is removed along a portion of its length, as shown in Fig. 1. The remaining part is bent as shown in Fig. 2 and placed on the burner of the gas jet.

Heater on Gas Jet (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Heater on Gas Jet (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The tube prevents the curling iron from becoming black with soot. The position on the jet may be changed. The tube can be placed on the jet and removed with the curling iron.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
The tube keeps the curling iron from getting covered in soot. You can adjust the position on the jet. The tube can be attached to the jet and taken off with the curling iron. —Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
A whisk broom is the best cleaner for a gas stove. It will clean dirt from nickel parts as well as from the burner, grates, ovens and sheet-metal bottoms.
A whisk broom is the best tool for cleaning a gas stove. It effectively removes dirt from nickel parts as well as from the burner, grates, ovens, and metal bottoms.
Preserving Flowers in Color and Form
One of the most distressing sides of botanical study is the short life of the colors in flowers. Those who have found the usual method of preserving plants by pressure between paper unsatisfactory will be interested to learn of a treatment whereby many kinds of flowers may be dried so that they retain a great deal of their natural form and color.
One of the most frustrating aspects of studying plants is how quickly the colors in flowers fade. Those who have found the typical method of pressing plants between paper unsatisfying will be interested to hear about a technique that allows many types of flowers to be dried while preserving much of their natural shape and color.
The flowers should be gathered as soon as the blossoms have fully opened. It is important that they should be quite dry, and in order to free them of drops of rain or dew, they may be suspended with heads downward for a few hours in a warm place. It is well to begin with some simple form of flower.
The flowers should be picked as soon as they have fully bloomed. It's important that they are completely dry, and to remove any drops of rain or dew, they can be hung upside down for a few hours in a warm spot. It's a good idea to start with a simple type of flower.

Placing the Flowers on the Steel Pins...
Placing the Flowers on the Steel Pins...
A large, strongly made wooden box—one of tin is better—will be necessary, together with a sufficient amount of sand to fill it. If possible, the sand should be of the kind known as "silver sand," which is very fine. The best that can be procured will be found far from clean, and it must, therefore, be thoroughly washed. The sand should be poured into a bowl of clean water. Much of the dirt will float on the surface. This is skimmed off and thrown away, and clean water added. The sand should be washed in this manner at least a dozen times, or until nothing remains but pure white grains of sand. The clean sand is spread out to dry on a cloth in a thin layer. When thoroughly dry, it should be placed in a heavy earthenware vessel and further dried in a hot oven. Allow it to remain in the oven for some time until it is completely warmed through so that one can scarcely hold the bare hands in it.
A large, sturdy wooden box—although a tin one is better—will be needed, along with enough sand to fill it. If possible, the sand should be the type referred to as "silver sand," which is very fine. The best sand you can get will likely be quite dirty, so it needs to be thoroughly washed. Pour the sand into a bowl of clean water. Much of the dirt will float to the top. Skim this off and toss it away, then add more clean water. The sand should be washed this way at least twelve times, or until only pure white grains of sand remain. Spread the clean sand out to dry on a cloth in a thin layer. Once it’s completely dry, place it in a heavy earthenware container and dry it further in a hot oven. Let it stay in the oven for a while until it's warmed through to the point where you can barely hold it with your bare hands.

...and Pouring the Dry Sand around Them
...and pouring the dry sand around them
Obtain a piece of heavy cardboard and cut it to fit easily in the bottom of the box. Through the bottom of the cardboard insert a number of steel pins, one for each of the flowers to be preserved. Take the dry blossoms and press the stalk of each on a steel pin so that it is held in an upright position. When the cardboard is thus filled, place it in the box.
Get a piece of sturdy cardboard and cut it to fit easily in the bottom of the box. Through the bottom of the cardboard, insert several steel pins, one for each flower you want to preserve. Take the dried blossoms and press the stem of each onto a steel pin so that it's held upright. Once the cardboard is filled, place it in the box.

The Dried Flowers
Dried Flowers
The warm sand is put in a bag or some other receptacle from which it can be easily poured. Pour the sand into the box gently, allowing it to trickle slowly in so that it spreads [128] evenly. Keep on pouring sand until the heads of the flowers are reached, taking care that all of them stand in a vertical position. The utmost care must be taken, when the heads are reached, to see that all the petals are in their right order. Remember that any crumpled flowers will be pressed into any position they may assume by the weight of the sand. When the box is filled it should be covered and set aside in a dry place.
The warm sand is placed in a bag or some other container from which it can be easily poured. Gently pour the sand into the box, letting it trickle in slowly so that it spreads evenly. Keep pouring sand until you reach the heads of the flowers, making sure that all of them are standing straight up. Be very careful when you get to the heads to ensure that all the petals are in their proper order. Keep in mind that any crumpled flowers will be pressed into whatever position they take on due to the weight of the sand. Once the box is full, it should be covered and set aside in a dry place.
The box should be allowed to stand at least 48 hours. After the first day, if only a small amount of sand has been used, the material may have cooled off to some extent, and the box must be set in a moderately heated oven for a short time, but no great amount of warmth is advisable. After 48 hours the box may be uncovered and the sand carefully poured off. As the flowers are now in a very brittle condition, any rough handling will cause serious damage. When all the sand has been emptied, the cardboard should be removed from the box and each blossom taken from its pin. In the case of succulent specimens, the stems will have shrunk considerably, but the thinner petals will be in an almost natural condition. The colors will be bright and attractive. Some tints will have kept better than others, but most of the results will be surprisingly good. Whatever state the flowers are in when they are taken from the box, if the drying process has been thorough, they will keep almost indefinitely.
The box should be left alone for at least 48 hours. After the first day, if only a small amount of sand has been used, the material might have cooled down somewhat, so the box should be placed in a gently heated oven for a short time, but avoid excessive heat. After 48 hours, you can uncover the box and carefully pour off the sand. Since the flowers are now very fragile, any rough handling could cause serious damage. Once all the sand is removed, take the cardboard out of the box and gently pull each blossom from its pin. For succulents, the stems may have shrunk quite a bit, but the thinner petals should still look almost natural. The colors will be bright and appealing. Some shades will have preserved better than others, but most of the results will be surprisingly good. Regardless of their condition when taken from the box, if the drying process was done properly, they will last for almost forever.
Flowers preserved in this manner are admirable for the decoration of homes. If they are exposed to light, care should be taken to see that the direct sunshine does not strike them, as it will fade the colors. Sprigs with leaves attached may be dried in this way, but it has been found that much of the intensity of the green is lost in the process.
Flowers preserved this way are great for decorating homes. If they're exposed to light, make sure direct sunlight doesn't hit them, as it will fade the colors. Sprigs with leaves attached can be dried this way, but it's been found that a lot of the green intensity is lost in the process.
Reading Pulse Beats with the Sun's Rays
The pulse beats may be counted by this unusual method. On a clear day, when the sun is shining brightly, darken a room and select one window toward the sunlight, which should be prepared as follows: Draw the curtain part way down and cover the rest of the window with a heavy cardboard. Cut a small hole in the cardboard to admit a beam of light. Set a bowl of water on a table in the path of the beam so as to deflect it to the ceiling as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch.
The pulse can be counted using this unique method. On a clear day with bright sunlight, darken a room and choose one window that faces the sun. Prepare the window like this: pull the curtain down halfway and cover the rest of the window with a piece of heavy cardboard. Cut a small hole in the cardboard to let in a beam of light. Place a bowl of water on a table in the path of the beam to redirect it to the ceiling, as indicated by the dotted lines in the sketch.

Sun's Rays Deflected to the Ceiling
Sun's rays bounced off the ceiling.
It is now a simple matter to show the pulse beats. Place the wrist against the edge of the bowl as shown, and the beam of light directed to the ceiling will record every beat of the pulse by short, abrupt movements.
It’s now easy to show the pulse beats. Just place your wrist against the edge of the bowl as shown, and the beam of light directed at the ceiling will record each pulse beat with quick, sharp movements.
Artistic Wood Turning
Some very odd and beautiful effects can be obtained in lathe work by making up the stock from several pieces of various kinds of wood glued together. The pieces can be arranged in many pleasing combinations, and if good joints are made and a good quality of glue used, the built-up stock is just as durable as a solid piece.
Some really unique and beautiful effects can be achieved in lathe work by creating the stock from several pieces of different types of wood glued together. The pieces can be arranged in many attractive combinations, and if well-made joints and a good quality glue are used, the assembled stock is just as durable as a solid piece.
Candlesticks turned from built-up [129] stock are especially attractive, parts of the various light and dark woods appearing here and there in all manner of odd shapes and proportions. If the stock is placed off center in the lathe, a still greater variety of effects will be produced.
Candlesticks made from stacked wood are particularly appealing, showcasing pieces of different light and dark woods in various unusual shapes and sizes. If the wood is off-center on the lathe, it will create an even wider range of effects.
The application of a potassium-bichromate solution to the finished work turns each piece a different color. This solution can be made in any depth of color by varying the amounts of potassium salt and water. Maple or birch treated with this solution are colored to a rich Osage orange which cannot be surpassed in beauty. Mahogany is turned a deep reddish brown, and walnut is darkened a great deal. The solution is applied as evenly as possible with a camel's-hair brush while the wood is turning in the lathe. The grain of the wood is somewhat roughened by this process, but it can be dressed down again with very fine sandpaper.
The use of a potassium bichromate solution on the finished piece changes each item to a different color. This solution can create any shade by adjusting the amounts of potassium salt and water. Maple or birch treated with this solution gains a beautiful rich Osage orange that is hard to beat. Mahogany turns a deep reddish-brown, and walnut gets significantly darker. The solution is applied as evenly as possible with a camel's-hair brush while the wood is spinning on the lathe. This process roughens the wood grain a bit, but it can be smoothed again with very fine sandpaper.

Vase Made of Different Woods
Wooden Vase Made from Various Woods
In polishing the work, only the best shellac should be used, and several thin coats applied rather than one or two heavy ones. Each coat, with the exception of the last, should be sandpapered slightly. Powdered pumice stone on a cloth held in the palm of the hand can be used to apply a beautiful luster. Some suggestions as to the manner of combining various woods, and a simple candlestick of mahogany and maple are shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Wilmette, Ill.
When finishing the work, use only the best shellac, applying several thin coats instead of one or two thick ones. Each coat, except for the last, should be lightly sanded. You can use powdered pumice stone on a cloth held in your hand to add a nice shine. There are some tips on how to combine different woods, along with a simple design for a candlestick made of mahogany and maple shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Wilmette, Ill.
A Variable Condenser
A simple variable condenser for receiving in wireless, which will give good results, was made by a correspondent of Modern Electrics as follows: Each clip on the switch was made of ribbon brass or copper in the shape shown at A, the first one from the joint of the knife switch being the longest and each succeeding one shorter. The handle was taken from a single-pole switch. The case was made of oak and varnished and the condenser was made of tinfoil and thin sheets of mica, 2 by 3 in. in size. After placing the condenser in the case, hot paraffin was poured around it.
A simple variable condenser for receiving wireless signals, which produced good results, was created by a contributor to Modern Electrics as follows: Each clip on the switch was made from ribbon brass or copper in the shape shown at A, with the first one from the joint of the knife switch being the longest and each subsequent one shorter. The handle was taken from a single-pole switch. The case was made of oak and varnished, and the condenser was made from tinfoil and thin sheets of mica, measuring 2 by 3 inches. After placing the condenser in the case, hot paraffin was poured around it.

Lever and Clips
Lever and Clips
Adjustable Baking-Pan Shoes
At times bread, meat, or other food, placed in ordinary baking pans in the oven becomes burned on the bottom. If the detachable metal strips shown in the sketch are placed on the pan, this will not happen, as the pan does not come in direct contact with the oven floor.
At times, bread, meat, or other food placed in regular baking pans in the oven can get burned on the bottom. If you place the detachable metal strips shown in the sketch on the pan, this won't happen, as the pan doesn't touch the oven floor directly.

Shoe and How It is Attached to the Pan
Shoe and How It’s Attached to the Pan
The attachment can be placed on agate ware or sheet-iron pans of any length. The shoes are made from light V-shaped metal strips and in two parts, as shown, with the edges of one part lapped over so that the other strip will slide in it.
The attachment can be fitted onto agate ware or sheet-iron pans of any length. The shoes are made from lightweight V-shaped metal strips and come in two pieces, as shown, with the edges of one piece overlapping so that the other strip can slide into it.

Cars Lined Up Ready for the Start and the Course Patrolled by the Boy Scouts, All Traffic being Halted for the Race and the Roadway Made Clear for the Entire Half Mile of Track
Cars lined up, ready for the start, and the course patrolled by the Boy Scouts, with all traffic stopped for the race and the road clear for the entire half mile of track.
A Pushmobile Race
Pending the time set for a 500-mile international automobile race that was scheduled to take place several weeks later, a number of boys in the sixth and seventh grades of a public school were enthusiastic over the idea of building for themselves, in the school shops, pushmobiles and having a race meet similar to the large one advertised.
Pending the time set for a 500-mile international car race that was scheduled to happen a few weeks later, several boys in sixth and seventh grades at a public school were excited about the idea of building pushmobiles for themselves in the school workshops and having a race similar to the big one that was being promoted.



The Cars Winning the First, Second and Third Prizes Respectively, the "Hoosier" being Penalized 10 Yards at the Starting Tape for Having Larger and Better-Grade Wheels
The Cars Winning the First, Second and Third Prizes Respectively, the "Hoosier" being Penalized 10 Yards at the Starting Tape for Having Larger and Better-Grade Wheels
The pushmobiles were made and the race run as an opening feature of a field meet held in the city. The course was about a half mile long, and was chosen to give the contestants plenty of curves, a part of the run being over brick streets and the final quarter on the regular track where the field meet was held.
The pushmobiles were built, and the race took place as the opening event of a field meet in the city. The course was roughly half a mile long and was designed to provide the competitors with many turns, part of the route going over brick streets and the last quarter on the official track where the field meet occurred.
Interest was added to the event by petitioning the mayor of the city for a permit to run the race, and the Boy Scouts patrolled the route, while the city policemen cleared the streets, and during the race all traffic was halted.
Interest was added to the event by asking the mayor for a permit to hold the race, and the Boy Scouts monitored the route, while the city police cleared the streets, and during the race, all traffic was stopped.
Two of the requirements for entering the race were that the car had to be made in the school shops and that it must have a certain kind of a wheel, which in this case was one condemned by a local factory, thus making the wheels and wheel base of all cars alike. Two boys to a car constituted a racing team, and during the race they could exchange positions at their pleasure. The necessity of "nursing" their cars down the steep grades and around difficult corners developed into an important factor. All cars were named and numbered.
Two of the requirements for entering the race were that the car had to be built in the school shops and that it had to use a specific type of wheel, which in this case was one that had been rejected by a local factory, making the wheels and wheelbase of all cars the same. Two boys per car formed a racing team, and during the race, they could switch positions whenever they wanted. The need to "nurse" their cars down steep hills and around tricky turns became an important factor. All cars were named and numbered.
The car that finished first was disqualified for the reason that it took on a fresh pusher along the course.
The car that came in first was disqualified because it picked up a new pusher during the race.
[131] The cars were constructed under the supervision of the regular shop instructor, and a drawing was furnished each boy making a car. The design of the hood and the arrangement of the seat and steering gear was left for each boy to settle as he desired. The matter of expense was watched closely by each one. Most of the hoods and seats were constructed of empty dry-goods boxes.
[131] The cars were built under the guidance of the regular shop instructor, and each boy received a drawing for making a car. The design of the hood and the layout of the seat and steering gear were left for each boy to decide as he wished. Everyone kept a close eye on expenses. Most of the hoods and seats were made from empty dry-goods boxes.

The Entire Chassis was Made of Cypress Wood, All Cars of the Same Length and Width, the Hoods and Seats Being the Only Parts Optional in Size and Shape for the Builder
The whole chassis was made of cypress wood, with all cars being the same length and width, and the hoods and seats being the only parts that could be customized in size and shape by the builder.
With the aid of the sketch any boy can make a car as strong as the "Peugeot" that won the race. The side rails of the main frame were made of cypress, 58 in. long and 2 in. square. The location of the crossbars A and B is very important, as they give rigidity to the frame and reinforce the two bolsters C and D. The size of the hood and the location of the seat determine where they should be set into the rail, after which they are fastened with large wood screws. The three bolsters C, D, and E are cut from regular 2 by 4-in. stock. Be careful to get a uniform distance between the rails when they are framed together. If desired, the dimensions can be increased, but do not reduce them, as this will narrow the tread too much. The bolt connecting the bolsters C and E is a common carriage bolt, 5 in. long and 1/2 in. in diameter. A washer is placed between the pieces C and E, to make the turning easy.
With the help of the sketch, any boy can build a car as sturdy as the "Peugeot" that won the race. The side rails of the main frame are made of cypress, 58 inches long and 2 inches square. The placement of the crossbars A and B is very important, as they provide stability to the frame and reinforce the two bolsters C and D. The size of the hood and the position of the seat determine where they should be inserted into the rail, after which they are secured with large wood screws. The three bolsters C, D, and E are cut from standard 2 by 4-inch lumber. Be careful to maintain a uniform distance between the rails when framing them together. If desired, the dimensions can be increased, but do not decrease them, as this will make the tread too narrow. The bolt connecting bolsters C and E is a standard carriage bolt, 5 inches long and 1/2 inch in diameter. A washer is placed between pieces C and E to make turning easier.
Two pieces of 1/2-in. soft-steel rod were used for the axles, a hole being drilled near each end for a cotter, to hold the wheels in place, and also holes through the diameter between the wheels, for 1-1/2-in. screws to fasten the axles to the bolsters.
Two pieces of 1/2-inch soft steel rod were used for the axles, with a hole drilled near each end for a cotter pin to keep the wheels in place. There were also holes drilled through the diameter between the wheels for 1-1/2-inch screws to attach the axles to the bolsters.
The steering wheel is constructed of a broom handle with a small wheel fastened to its upper end, and the lower end supported by a crossbar, F, and the back end of the hood. Before fastening the crossbar F in place, adjust the steering wheel to the proper height for the seat; then it is fastened with nails driven through the sides of the hood.
The steering wheel is made from a broom handle with a small wheel attached to the top, and the bottom is supported by a crossbar, F, and the back of the hood. Before securing the crossbar F, adjust the steering wheel to the right height for the seat; then it is secured with nails driven through the sides of the hood.
The construction of the steering device is very simple. The crossarm G is a piece of timber, 7 in. long, 2 in. wide and 1 in. thick, rounded on the ends and provided with a large screw eye near each end on the under side to which are fastened the ends of two small-linked chains. The chains are then crossed and fastened to the bottom bolster in front and as near the wheels as practical. The connection is made with a screw eye similar to the one used in the crossarm. Another type of steering device may be made by building on the rod a 5-in. drum which takes the place of the steering arm. It is a more positive appliance, but is somewhat harder to make and adjust.
The steering device is really straightforward to build. The crossarm G is a piece of wood that's 7 inches long, 2 inches wide, and 1 inch thick, with rounded ends and large screw eyes on the underside near each end. The ends of two small linked chains are attached to these screw eyes. The chains are then crossed and secured to the bottom bolster in front, as close to the wheels as possible. The connection is made with a screw eye just like the one used in the crossarm. Another type of steering device can be created by adding a 5-inch drum to the rod, which replaces the steering arm. This version is more effective, but it's a bit trickier to make and adjust.
The making of the hood and the seat completes the car. Decide upon the shape and size of the hood, but, in any case and irrespective of the size, it will require a front and back end. These are made first and then secured at the [132] proper distance apart with two side rails. These two ends are nailed on the ends of the connecting rails. It is then well to fasten the hood skeleton to the car frame and cover it after the steering device is in place.
The hood and seat finish off the car. Choose the shape and size of the hood, but no matter the size, it will need a front and back end. These are made first and then secured at the proper distance apart with two side rails. These two ends are nailed onto the ends of the connecting rails. It's a good idea to attach the hood frame to the car frame and cover it once the steering mechanism is in place.
The seat bottom is cut the shape desired, and fastened to the rear bolster and crosspiece, first placing a piece of the proper thickness under the front edge, to give it the desired slant backward. The back curved part can be formed of a piece of sheet metal and lined on the inside with wood pieces, or with cloth or leather, padded to resemble the regular cushion.
The seat bottom is cut to the desired shape and attached to the back bolster and crosspiece, first placing a piece of the right thickness under the front edge to achieve the desired backward angle. The curved back can be made from a piece of sheet metal and lined on the inside with wood, or with cloth or leather, padded to look like a regular cushion.
Pencil Rack
The simple pencil rack shown in the sketch can be easily made from any suitable strip of metal, preferably brass of about No. 15 gauge. Mark off a number of rectangles corresponding to the number of pencil holders desired. With a sharp chisel, cut through the metal on three sides of each rectangle, leaving one of the short sides untouched. The loose laps can then be bent to a shape suited to hold a pencil. The rack can be fastened in place with nails or screws through holes pierced at each end.—Contributed by Mark Gluckman, Jersey City, N. J.
The simple pencil rack shown in the sketch can be easily made from any suitable strip of metal, preferably brass of about No. 15 gauge. Mark off a number of rectangles based on how many pencil holders you want. Using a sharp chisel, cut through the metal on three sides of each rectangle, leaving one of the short sides intact. The loose flaps can then be bent into a shape that holds a pencil. You can secure the rack in place with nails or screws through holes drilled at each end.—Contributed by Mark Gluckman, Jersey City, N. J.

A Strip of Sheet Metal Cut and Clips Formed to Make a Pencil Rack
A Piece of Sheet Metal Cut and Clips Shaped to Create a Pencil Holder
Indistinct but not entirely worn-off dates on coins may be read by heating slightly.
Indistinct but still somewhat visible dates on coins can be read by gently heating them.
Reducing Size of a Hat Sweatband
Very often a hat has been worn for some time and it becomes too loose on the head, then paper is used in the sweatband to reduce the size. A better, easier, and neater method, as well as one that will be cooler for the head, is to insert a flat lamp wick inside of the sweatband. Wicks of all thicknesses and widths are easily obtained.—Contributed by Maurice Bandier, New Orleans, La.
Very often, a hat gets worn for a while and becomes too loose on the head, so people use paper in the sweatband to make it fit better. A better, easier, and neater method, which is also cooler for the head, is to insert a flat lamp wick inside the sweatband. Wicks of all thicknesses and widths are easy to find. —Contributed by Maurice Bandier, New Orleans, La.
A Catapult
The catapult shown in the sketch is one I constructed some time ago and found to be amusing and very inexpensive. The catapult consists of a small piece of dowel or pine, whittled into the shape of a handle, a screweye, an elastic band and an arrow. It is surprising how a well-balanced arrow will fly into the sky until lost to sight when propelled through the eye of the screw with a medium-strong elastic. A number of forms of this simple gun were made, but the one shown is the simplest and most effective.—Contributed by C. A. Needham, New York, N. Y.
The catapult in the sketch is one I built a while ago and found to be fun and very affordable. The catapult is made from a small piece of dowel or pine, shaped into a handle, along with a screw-eye, an elastic band, and an arrow. It's surprising how a well-balanced arrow can soar into the sky and disappear from sight when launched through the screw-eye using a medium-strength elastic band. Several versions of this simple launcher were made, but the one shown is the simplest and most effective.—Contributed by C. A. Needham, New York, N. Y.

The Eye of the Screw Serves as a Guide for the Arrow
The Eye of the Screw Helps Direct the Arrow
Growing Clean Strawberries
A very good method of growing individual strawberry plants that will produce large clean berries is to provide a covering constructed from a board 10 in. square with a 3-in. hole bored in the center. This covering is placed over the plant, as shown in the sketch, to keep down weeds, retain moisture, and to make a base for the ripening berries. A shower cannot spatter dirt and sand on the growing fruit. The rays of the sun beating on the surface of the board will aid in the ripening.
A great way to grow individual strawberry plants that will produce large, clean berries is to use a cover made from a 10-inch square board with a 3-inch hole drilled in the center. This cover is placed over the plant, as shown in the sketch, to suppress weeds, retain moisture, and provide a base for the ripening berries. Rain won't splash dirt and sand onto the growing fruit. The sun shining on the surface of the board will help with ripening.

Growing Strawberries on the Surface of a Board Where They will Ripen Fast and Keep Clean
Growing Strawberries on a Board Where They Will Ripen Quickly and Stay Clean
If a log can be obtained, the boards can be made better and more quickly. Disks about 1 in. thick are sawed from the log and holes in their centers either cut with a chisel or bored, as desired. The grain of the wood will be vertical and no warping will take place—Contributed by Johnny Banholster, Gresham, Oregon
If you can get a log, the boards can be made more efficiently and with better quality. Disks about 1 inch thick are cut from the log, and holes in their centers are either chiseled or drilled, depending on what you prefer. The wood grain will be vertical, preventing any warping. —Contributed by Johnny Banholster, Gresham, Oregon
A Magic Change Card
Procure two cards, the "5" of diamonds and the "5" of spades, for example. Bend each exactly in the center, with the face of the cards in, and then paste any card on the back, with its face against the two ends of the bent cards. The two opposite ends will then have their backs together, and these are also pasted. The illustration clearly shows this arrangement.
Get two cards, like the "5" of diamonds and the "5" of spades. Fold each one perfectly in the middle, with the faces of the cards inside, and then glue another card on the back, with its face touching the two ends of the bent cards. The two ends will be stuck together back-to-back, and those are also glued. The image clearly demonstrates this setup.

A Card Having Two Faces, Either of Which can be Shown to the Audience Instantly
A card with two sides, either one of which can be shown to the audience instantly.
To perform the trick pick up this card, which is placed in the pack beforehand, and show to the audience both the front and back of the card, being sure to keep the center part flat against one end or the other, then pass the hand over the card, and in doing so catch the center part and turn it over. The card can be changed back again in the same manner.—Contributed by R. Bennett, Pittsburgh, Pa.
To perform the trick, pick up this card, which was placed in the pack beforehand, and show the audience both the front and back of the card, making sure to keep the center part flat against one end or the other. Then, pass your hand over the card, and while doing so, catch the center part and turn it over. You can change the card back in the same way.—Contributed by R. Bennett, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Cleaning Pearl Articles
A good way to clean pearl articles or ornaments is to moisten them with alcohol and then dry in magnesia powder or French chalk. These last two articles may be purchased at any drug store and the process of cleaning is absolutely harmless. It also polishes the pearl and will not bleach delicate colors.
A good way to clean pearl items or jewelry is to dampen them with alcohol and then dry them using magnesia powder or French chalk. You can buy these two items at any drugstore, and the cleaning process is completely safe. It also polishes the pearls and won't fade delicate colors.
Bed for a Camp
A quickly made bed for a camp is shown in the illustration. The corner posts consist of four forked stakes driven in the earth so that the crotches are on a level and about 1 ft. from the ground. Poles are laid in the crotches, lengthwise of the bed, and canvas covering double-lapped over [134] them. If desired, the canvas can be stitched along the inside of the poles.—Contributed by Thomas Simpson, Pawtucket, R. I.
A quick way to set up a camp bed is shown in the illustration. The corner posts are made from four forked stakes driven into the ground so that the forks are level and about 1 ft. off the ground. Poles are placed in the forks, running lengthwise of the bed, and a canvas cover is laid double over them. If you want, the canvas can be stitched along the inside of the poles.—Contributed by Thomas Simpson, Pawtucket, R. I.

Canvas Bed Made on Two Poles Laid in the Crotches of Forked Stakes
Canvas Bed Made on Two Poles Resting in the Forks of Split Stakes
Sail for a Boy's Wagon
Every boy, who loves a boat and has only a wagon, can make a combination affair in which he can sail even though there is no water for miles around. One boy accomplished this as shown in the illustration, and the only assistance he had was in making the sails.
Every boy who loves boats but only has a wagon can create a combo setup that lets him sail even if there's no water for miles. One boy did just that, as shown in the illustration, and the only help he got was in making the sails.

The Sail Wagon will Travel at a Good Speed in a Stiff Breeze
The Sail Wagon will move quickly in a strong wind.
The box of the wagon is removed and the boat deck bolted in its place. The deck is 14 in. wide and 5 ft. long. The mast consists of an old rake handle, 6 ft. long; the boom and gaff are broomsticks, and the tiller is connected with wire to the front axle, which gives perfect control of the steering. The sails are made of drilling.
The wagon's box is taken off, and the boat deck is bolted in its place. The deck is 14 inches wide and 5 feet long. The mast is made from an old rake handle that's 6 feet long; the boom and gaff are broomsticks, and the tiller is wired to the front axle, allowing for perfect steering control. The sails are made of drill fabric.
On a brick pavement the sail wagon can draw two other wagons with two boys in each, making in all five boys. Of course a good wind must be blowing. With two boys it has made a mile in five minutes on pavement.—Contributed by Arthur Carruthers, Oberlin, Ohio.
On a brick road, the sail wagon can pull two other wagons, each carrying two boys, totaling five boys altogether. Of course, there needs to be a good wind blowing. With two boys, it has covered a mile in five minutes on the pavement. —Contributed by Arthur Carruthers, Oberlin, Ohio.
Extracting a Broken Screw
A screw will often break off in a piece of work in such a manner that it is quite impossible to remove it by using a pair of pliers or a wrench. In this case the following method is very efficient and expedient.
A screw often breaks off in a way that makes it impossible to remove with pliers or a wrench. In this case, the following method is very effective and quick.
Drill a small hole in the screw as near the center as possible. Roughen the edges on the tang of a file with a cold chisel, and drive the tang into the hole with a mallet. The roughened edges of the tang exert enough friction on the metal to remove the screw by turning the file in the proper direction.
Drill a small hole in the screw as close to the center as you can. Rough up the edges on the tang of a file with a cold chisel, and then drive the tang into the hole using a mallet. The roughened edges of the tang create enough friction on the metal to loosen the screw by turning the file in the right direction.
Keeping Out Dampness
A good way to keep a bed from becoming damp, if left for any length of time, is to place a blanket on the top after it is made up. Take the blanket off before using and the bed covers will be quite dry, as the blanket absorbs the moisture.—Contributed by G. Nordyke, Lexington, Ore.
A great way to prevent a bed from getting damp if it’s left for a while is to put a blanket on top after making it. Just remove the blanket before using the bed, and the covers will be nice and dry since the blanket absorbs the moisture.—Contributed by G. Nordyke, Lexington, Ore.
A Double-Claw Hammer for Pulling Nails Straight
A nail pulled with an ordinary claw hammer will be bent in the operation, and for this reason the double claw is used to draw the nail straight out of the wood. An ordinary claw hammer can be easily converted into a double-claw by filing out one of the claws as shown. The notch is filed only large enough to slip under the head of an average-size nail. After drawing the nail a short distance in the usual manner the small notch is set under the head of the nail which is then pulled out straight.—Contributed by J. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
A nail pulled with a regular claw hammer will get bent in the process, which is why a double claw hammer is used to pull the nail straight out of the wood. You can easily modify a regular claw hammer into a double-claw by filing down one of the claws as shown. The notch should only be filed large enough to slide under the head of a standard-size nail. After pulling the nail partway out in the usual way, position the small notch under the head of the nail and pull it out straight. —Contributed by J. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.

The Small Notch on the End of the Claw Makes It Easy to Pull a Nail Straight
The small notch at the end of the claw makes it easy to pull a nail straight.
A Cyclemobile
By Frank Pfefferle
The cyclemobile is of the three-wheeled type and can be easily constructed in the home workshop with ordinary tools. The main frame is built up of two sidepieces, AA, Fig. 1, each 2 in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 7 ft. long, joined together at the front end with a crosspiece, B, of the same material, 17 in. long. The sides are placed slightly tapering so that the rear ends are 11 in. apart at the point where they are joined together with the blocks and rear-wheel attachments. A crosspiece, C, 13 in. long, is fastened in the center of the frame.
The cyclemobile is a three-wheeled type that can be easily built in your home workshop using regular tools. The main frame is made up of two side pieces, AA, Fig. 1, each 2 inches thick, 4 inches wide, and 7 feet long, connected at the front end with a crosspiece, B, of the same material, 17 inches long. The sides are slightly tapered so that the rear ends are 11 inches apart where they connect with the blocks and rear-wheel attachments. A crosspiece, C, 13 inches long, is secured in the center of the frame.

Three-Wheeled Cyclemobile Propelled Like a Bicycle and Steered as an Automobile
Three-Wheeled Cyclemobile Powered Like a Bicycle and Steered Like a Car
The place for the seat is cut out of each sidepiece, as shown by the notches at D, which are 2 ft. from the rear ends. Two strips of wood, E, 1/2 in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 22 in. long, are fastened with nails to the rear ends of the sides, as shown. The rear wheel is a bicycle wheel, which can be taken from an old bicycle, or a wheel may be purchased cheaply at a bicycle store. It is held in place with two pieces of strap iron, F, shaped similar to the rear forks on a bicycle, and each piece is bolted to a block of wood 3 in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 6 in. long, which is fastened to the sidepiece with the same bolts that hold the strap iron in place. The blocks are located 20 in. from the rear ends of the sidepieces.
The area for the seat is cut out of each side piece, as indicated by the notches at D, which are 2 ft. from the back ends. Two strips of wood, E, 1/2 in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 22 in. long, are attached with nails to the back ends of the sides, as shown. The rear wheel is a bicycle wheel, which you can take from an old bike, or you can find a wheel at a bike shop for a low price. It’s held in place with two pieces of strap iron, F, shaped like the rear forks on a bike, and each piece is bolted to a block of wood that measures 3 in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 6 in. long, which is attached to the side piece using the same bolts that secure the strap iron. The blocks are positioned 20 in. from the back ends of the side pieces.

Detail of the Parts for Constructing an Automobile-Type Foot-Power Car (Fig. 1)
Detail of the Parts for Building a Foot-Powered Car (Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
The pedal arrangement, Fig. 2, consists of an ordinary bicycle hanger, with cranks and sprocket wheel set into the end of a piece of wood, 2 in. thick, 4 in. wide and 33 in. long, at a point 4 in. from one end. The pieces GG are nailed on across the frame at the front end of the car, to hold the hanger piece in the center between the sidepieces, as shown in Fig. 1. A small pulley, H, is made to run loosely on a shaft fastened between the sidepieces. This is used as an idler to keep the upper part of the chain below the seat.
The pedal setup, Fig. 2, features a standard bicycle hanger, with cranks and a sprocket wheel attached to the end of a piece of wood that's 2 inches thick, 4 inches wide, and 33 inches long, positioned 4 inches from one end. The pieces GG are nailed across the frame at the front of the car to secure the hanger in the center between the sidepieces, as illustrated in Fig. 1. A small pulley, H, is designed to run loosely on a shaft attached between the sidepieces. This acts as an idler to keep the upper part of the chain below the seat.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
[136] The front axle is 30 in. long, pivoted as shown at J, Fig. 3, 6 in. from the front end of the main frame. Two small brass plates, KK, are fastened with screws on the under edge of each sidepiece, as shown, to provide a bearing for the axle. The front wheels are taken from a discarded baby carriage and are about 21 in. in diameter.
[136] The front axle is 30 inches long and pivots as indicated at J, Fig. 3, 6 inches from the front end of the main frame. Two small brass plates, KK, are attached with screws to the underside of each sidepiece to serve as a bearing for the axle. The front wheels come from an old baby carriage and are about 21 inches in diameter.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
A good imitation radiator can be made by cutting a board to the dimensions given in Fig. 4. A large-mesh screen is fastened to the rear side to imitate the water cells.
A good imitation radiator can be created by cutting a board to the dimensions shown in Fig. 4. A large-mesh screen is attached to the back to mimic the water cells.
The steering gear L, Fig. 5, is made of a broom handle, one end of which passes through the support M and fits into a hole bored into the lower part of the imitation radiator board. A steering wheel, N, is attached to the upper end of the broom handle. The center part of a rope, O, is given a few turns around the broom handle, and the ends are passed through the openings in screweyes, PP, turned into the inner surfaces of the sidepieces AA, and tied to the front axle.
The steering gear L, Fig. 5, is made from a broom handle, one end of which goes through the support M and fits into a hole drilled into the lower part of the fake radiator board. A steering wheel, N, is attached to the top of the broom handle. The center of a rope, O, is wrapped a few times around the broom handle, and the ends are threaded through the openings in the screw eyes, PP, installed on the inner surfaces of the side pieces AA, and tied to the front axle.
The seat is constructed of 1/2-in. lumber and is built in the notches cut in the main frame shown at D, Fig. 1. The body frame is made of lath, or other thin strips of wood, that can be bent in the shape of the radiator and nailed to the sidepieces, as shown in Fig. 6. These are braced at the top with a longitudinal strip. The frame is then covered with canvas and painted as desired.
The seat is made from 1/2-inch lumber and fits into the notches cut in the main frame shown at D, Fig. 1. The body frame is made of lath or other thin strips of wood that can be shaped to match the radiator and nailed to the side pieces, as shown in Fig. 6. These are supported at the top with a long strip. The frame is then covered with canvas and painted as needed.
How to Make a Humidor
The humidor is an ideal gift for any person who smokes. The wood for making one, as shown in the illustration, may be of Spanish cedar, mahogany, or quartered oak, as the builder desires. The box and cover are made and glued together in one piece, then the cover is sawed off to insure a perfect fit. A strong corner connection is shown at A. A piece of a strawberry box or peach basket makes a good key to glue in the grooves. Care must be taken to run the grain with the width and not with the length of the strip.
The humidor is a great gift for anyone who smokes. The wood used to make one, as shown in the illustration, can be Spanish cedar, mahogany, or quartered oak, depending on the builder's preference. The box and lid are made and glued together as one piece, then the lid is sawed off to ensure a perfect fit. A strong corner joint is shown at A. A piece from a strawberry box or a peach basket works well as a key to glue into the grooves. It's important to make sure the grain runs with the width, not the length of the strip.

The Amount of Moisture within the Box is Shown on the Dial in the Cover
The moisture level inside the box is displayed on the dial in the cover.
Finish the outside of the box with two coats of the desired stain, then cover with a coat of wax, shellac, or varnish. The inside should be finished with one coat of white lead and two or three coats of white enamel, to make the wood impervious to moisture.
Finish the outside of the box with two coats of your chosen stain, then apply a coat of wax, shellac, or varnish. The inside should be treated with one coat of white lead and two or three coats of white enamel to make the wood resistant to moisture.
In the center of the cover top is set a piece of glass and to the under side of the latter a hygrometer is attached with a little glue. This instrument tells the relative humidity, or the amount of moisture, in the air within. The moisture may be regulated by adding a few drops of water, as needed, to a piece of ordinary blotting paper placed on the inside.—Contributed by James T. Gaffney, Chicago.
In the center of the top cover, there’s a piece of glass, and on the underside, a hygrometer is attached with a bit of glue. This instrument measures the relative humidity, or the amount of moisture in the air inside. You can adjust the moisture by adding a few drops of water, as needed, to a piece of regular blotting paper placed on the inside.—Contributed by James T. Gaffney, Chicago.
Telephoto Attachment for a Hand Camera
It is not necessary to purchase an expensive telephoto lens for a box or hand camera if the owner has a pair of opera or field glasses. First focus the glasses on the distant object to be [137] photographed and then set the camera. One of the glasses is placed directly in line with and in front of the camera lens, as shown in the sketch. If the camera is of the focusing type, it is focused in the ordinary manner. Box and other cameras are set as usual.
It’s not necessary to buy an expensive telephoto lens for a box or handheld camera if you have a pair of binoculars. First, focus the binoculars on the distant object you want to photograph, and then set up the camera. One of the binoculars should be placed directly in line with and in front of the camera lens, as shown in the sketch. If the camera has a focusing feature, focus it in the usual way. Set box and other cameras up as normal.

A Field Glass Placed in Front of a Camera Lens will Increase the Diameter of the Photograph
A pair of binoculars placed in front of a camera lens will make the photograph wider.
The glasses should be well supported in front of the camera lens, as any slight move will be quite perceptible on the ground glass. As the light rays are largely reduced in passing through the field glass and camera lens, it is necessary to give a much longer exposure. This can only be determined by trying it out, as lenses have different speeds.—Contributed by Charles Leonard, St. John, Can.
The glasses need to be securely positioned in front of the camera lens, since any slight movement will be easily noticeable on the ground glass. Because the light rays are significantly diminished when passing through the field glass and camera lens, a much longer exposure time is required. This can only be figured out through experimentation, as lenses have varying speeds.—Contributed by Charles Leonard, St. John, Can.
A Turn Feeding Table for Birds
Never in the past has the public at large taken so great an interest in protecting and furthering the well-being of birds as at present. In addition to protective legislation, clubs everywhere are organizing to promote bird life and many citizens, old and young, are making bird houses and feeding tables.
Never before has the public been so invested in protecting and promoting the well-being of birds as they are now. Along with protective laws, clubs are forming everywhere to support bird life, and many people, both young and old, are building birdhouses and feeding stations.
One of the best forms of feeding tables which I have ever seen is shown in the sketch. It possesses a great advantage over the average table in being turned automatically, whirling about by the action of the winds and always keeping its open front on the lee or protected quarter. This is a good feature especially in the fall and winter, the very time when birds need and seek protection from storms and cold winds.
One of the best types of feeding tables I've ever seen is shown in the sketch. It has a big advantage over regular tables because it turns automatically, spinning around thanks to the wind and always keeping its open front facing away from the wind or on the sheltered side. This is especially useful in the fall and winter, the exact times when birds need and look for protection from storms and cold winds.
To make such a feed table almost any kind of boards can be utilized. The shelter may be of any shape or size to suit the tastes of the maker, but one constructed to the dimensions given will be found to work well in most localities. Along the center of the roof is attached a wing, A, which is an active aid in causing the wind to keep the open front turned away. The shelter turns upon a wood or iron rod which passes from the end of a post up through the central bottom and central roof of the structure. If wood is used for the rod, it should be about 1 in. in diameter and of hard stock. An iron rod may be somewhat smaller. Keep the holes well greased.
To create a feed table, you can use almost any type of board. The shelter can be any shape or size that the builder prefers, but one built to the specified dimensions will generally work well in most areas. A wing, marked as A, is attached along the center of the roof, which helps keep the open front facing away from the wind. The shelter pivots on a wooden or iron rod that goes from the end of a post, through the central bottom, and up through the central roof of the structure. If you're using wood for the rod, it should be about 1 inch in diameter and made from hardwood. An iron rod can be a bit smaller. Make sure to keep the holes well lubricated.

A Feeding Table for Birds That will Keep Its Open Side Protected from the Storms
A Bird Feeding Table That Keeps Its Open Side Shielded from Storms
The house should be given a couple of coats of white, red, or green paint, and the post painted to correspond. Feed and water are placed in shallow dishes on the floor and they should be blocked to keep them from sliding out.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
The house should be painted with a couple of coats of white, red, or green, and the post should match. Feed and water should be placed in shallow dishes on the floor, and they should be secured so they don’t slide out.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
A Sack Holder
An old granite kettle or tin pail with the bottom cut out and three 8-penny wire nails bent and fastened on with rivets, as shown at A, makes as good a sack holder as one could desire. A chain attached to the handle makes it conveniently adjustable to the proper height for the sack.
An old granite kettle or tin pail with the bottom removed and three 8-penny wire nails bent and secured with rivets, like shown at A, serves as an excellent sack holder. A chain attached to the handle allows for easy adjustment to the right height for the sack.

A Granite Kettle Forms a Holder That Makes It Easy to Fill the Sack
A granite kettle creates a holder that makes it easy to fill the bag.
Time Indicator for Medicine Bottles

The time to give a patient the next dose of medicine can be set on the indicator, as shown in the sketch, and retained without fear of its being changed until the dose is again given. The indicator consists of a strip of paper which will reach around the bottle neck and is divided into 24 equal parts representing hours and half hours. The paper is then pasted to the bottle neck. An ordinary pin is then pushed into the cork as shown. After a dose of medicine is given to the patient the cork is replaced so that the head of the pin will indicate the time for the next dose. By this method, an accidental shifting of the indicator is almost impossible.
The time to give a patient their next dose of medicine can be set on the indicator, as shown in the sketch, and remains fixed without worry of it being changed until the dose is given again. The indicator consists of a strip of paper that wraps around the bottle neck and is divided into 24 equal sections representing hours and half hours. The paper is then attached to the bottle neck. An ordinary pin is then pushed into the cork as shown. After a dose of medicine is given to the patient, the cork is replaced so that the head of the pin points to the time for the next dose. This method makes it nearly impossible for the indicator to shift accidentally.
A Washtub Stand
Usually two old chairs or an old box makes the stand for the washtub, and these are not always the right height. A stand, like that shown in the illustration and having the proper height for the one who does the washing, can be easily made of 2 by 4-in. material and a few boards. As it is shown, the wringer is fastened on top of the back and may remain there all the time, it being out of the way, always in its proper place, and held very firmly.
Usually, two old chairs or a box serve as the stand for the washtub, but they often aren’t the right height. A stand, like the one shown in the illustration, which is suitable for the height of the person doing the washing, can be easily made from 2 by 4-inch lumber and a few boards. As depicted, the wringer is attached to the top of the back and can stay there all the time since it’s out of the way, always in its proper place, and held securely.

Stand Provides a Place for the Washing Utensils and It is Always the Proper Height
Stand Provides a Place for the Washing Utensils and It is Always the Right Height
A light bracket, on which to set the clothes basket, can be made and fastened on the back of the stand, connected with two hinges and supported by a leg hinged to the bracket, the lower end of the leg resting on the floor back of the stand.
A light bracket for placing the clothes basket can be created and attached to the back of the stand, connected with two hinges and supported by a leg that hinges to the bracket, with the lower end of the leg resting on the floor behind the stand.
A small drawer may also be provided in the front, in which to put away the soap and brushes, and the wash boiler can be set underneath. When one is through washing, the bracket at the back is let down, the washstand set up against the wall out of the way, and everything is then in its place, ready for the next wash day.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Ia.
A small drawer can also be included at the front for storing soap and brushes, and the wash boiler can be placed underneath. When you're done washing, you lower the bracket at the back, push the washstand against the wall to clear the space, and everything is organized, ready for the next wash day.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Ia.
Pipe Used as a Leather Punch

The sketch shows how a very cheap and serviceable leather punch can be made of an old pipe nipple. Pieces of pipe of almost any size can be found around a shop, and it is, therefore, usually possible to quickly make a punch of the required size. The cutter end can be ground very thin to prevent an over-cut, while a small slot cut a little above it will allow the removal of the leather slugs. For its purpose, this homemade tool is all that can be desired in cheapness and utility.
The sketch illustrates how to create a simple and effective leather punch from an old pipe nipple. You can usually find pieces of pipe in various sizes around a workshop, making it easy to quickly create a punch that fits your needs. The cutting end can be sharpened down to a fine edge to avoid cutting too deep, and a small slot cut just above it will make it easy to remove the leather scraps. For its intended use, this DIY tool is ideal in terms of affordability and practicality.
To Prevent Oilcloth from Cracking
A good method to prevent oilcloth from cracking, when it is used on shop tables or counters, is to first cut a paper cover for the table on which to place the oilcloth and prepare it as follows: The paper should be well oiled with common machine oil and placed smoothly on the table to be covered. The oilcloth is then smoothed out on top of the paper and stretched tightly. The oiled paper tends to keep the under side of the cloth moist, which prevents cracking. The cloth wears much longer because the paper acts as a pad.
A great way to prevent oilcloth from cracking when it's used on tables or counters is to first cut a paper cover for the table before laying down the oilcloth. Here's how to do it: The paper should be thoroughly oiled with regular machine oil and laid out smoothly on the table. Then, the oilcloth is spread out over the paper and pulled tight. The oiled paper helps keep the underside of the cloth moist, which stops it from cracking. This method makes the cloth last much longer since the paper acts as a cushion.
How to Make a Flymobile
By Edward Sieja
The boy owning a pushmobile, or even a power-driven auto car, is often very much disappointed because motion soon stops when the power is not applied. The car illustrated is of a little different type, being equipped with a flywheel that will propel the car and carry the rider a considerable distance after stopping the pedaling. The flywheel also aids the operator, as it will steady the motion and help him over a rough place or a bump in the road.
The boy who has a pushmobile or even a powered car is often quite disappointed because it stops moving as soon as the power is cut off. The car shown here is a bit different; it's fitted with a flywheel that continues to move the car forward and carry the rider a good distance after they stop pedaling. The flywheel also helps the rider by smoothing out the motion and making it easier to get over bumps or rough patches in the road.

The Flymobile is a Miniature Automobile in Appearance and is Propelled by Foot Power
The Flymobile looks like a tiny car and is powered by foot.
The main frame of the flymobile is made up of a few pieces of 2 by 4-in. timbers. The pieces A are 6 ft. 4 in. long, and the end crosspieces B, 24 in. long. These are jointed, glued and screwed together, as shown in Fig. 1. The frame that supports the driving parts consists of a piece, C, 6 ft. 2 in. long, and a piece D, 2 ft. 11 in. long. These are fitted in the main frame and securely fastened to the end crosspieces B. Two other crosspieces, E and F, are used to strengthen the driving-parts frame.
The main frame of the flymobile is made up of a few pieces of 2 by 4-inch timber. The pieces A are 6 feet 4 inches long, and the end crosspieces B are 24 inches long. These are joined, glued, and screwed together, as shown in Fig. 1. The frame that supports the driving parts consists of a piece, C, that is 6 feet 2 inches long, and a piece D that is 2 feet 11 inches long. These are fitted into the main frame and securely attached to the end crosspieces B. Two other crosspieces, E and F, are used to reinforce the driving-parts frame.

Plan and Elevation of the Flymobile, Showing the Location of the Working Parts, to Which, with a Few Changes, a Motorcycle Engine can be Attached to Make It a Cyclecar; also Details of the Brakes, Belt Tightener and Coaster-Brake Hub (Fig. 1)
Plan and Elevation of the Flymobile, Showing the Location of the Working Parts, to Which, with a Few Changes, a Motorcycle Engine Can Be Attached to Make It a Cyclecar; Also Details of the Brakes, Belt Tightener, and Coaster-Brake Hub (Fig. 1)
The entire hanger G, with its bearings, cranks and pedals, can be procured from a discarded bicycle and fastened to the piece C; the barrel holding the bearings being snugly fitted into a hole bored in the piece with an expansive bit. The location will depend on the builder and should be marked as follows: Place the hanger on top of the piece C, then put a box or board on the frame where the seat is to be and set the hanger where it will be in a comfortable position for pedaling. Mark this location and bore the hole.
The entire hanger G, along with its bearings, cranks, and pedals, can be taken from an old bicycle and attached to piece C. The barrel holding the bearings should be securely fitted into a hole drilled into the piece with a large bit. The exact position will depend on the builder and should be marked as follows: Place the hanger on top of piece C, then put a box or board on the frame where the seat will go and position the hanger where it feels comfortable for pedaling. Mark this spot and drill the hole.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
The transmission H consists of a bicycle coaster-brake hub, shown in detail in Fig. 2. A split pulley, J, 6 in. in diameter, is bored out to fit over the center of the hub between the spoke flanges. The halves of the pulley are then clamped on the hub with two bolts, run through the holes in opposite directions. Their heads and nuts are let into countersunk holes so that no part will extend above the surface of the pulley. The supports for the hub axle consist of two pieces of bar iron, 4 in. long, drilled to admit the axle ends, and screws for fastening them to the frame pieces C and D. This construction is clearly shown in Fig. 2.
The transmission H consists of a bicycle coaster-brake hub, detailed in Fig. 2. A split pulley, J, with a diameter of 6 inches, is shaped to fit over the center of the hub between the spoke flanges. The two halves of the pulley are then clamped onto the hub with two bolts that go through the holes in opposite directions. Their heads and nuts are set into countersunk holes to ensure that nothing sticks up above the surface of the pulley. The supports for the hub axle are made of two pieces of bar iron, each 4 inches long, drilled to accommodate the ends of the axle, and secured with screws to frame pieces C and D. This setup is clearly illustrated in Fig. 2.
The arrangement of the coaster-brake hub produces the same effect as a coaster brake on a bicycle. The one propelling the flymobile may stop the foot-power work without interfering with the travel of the machine, and, besides, a little back pressure on the pedals will apply the brake in the same manner.
The setup of the coaster-brake hub creates the same effect as a coaster brake on a bicycle. The one that drives the flymobile can stop the pedal power without disrupting the movement of the machine, and also, a little backward pressure on the pedals will engage the brake in the same way.
The flywheel K should be about 18 in. in diameter with a 2-in. rim, or face. Such a wheel can be purchased cheaply from any junk dealer. The flywheel is set on a shaft, turning between the [140] pieces C and D and back of the coaster-brake wheel H. Two pulleys, L, about 3 in. in diameter, are fastened to turn with the flywheel on the shaft and are fitted with flanges to separate the belts. The ends of the shaft should run in good bearings, well oiled.
The flywheel K should be about 18 inches in diameter with a 2-inch rim or face. You can find such a wheel for a low price from any junk dealer. The flywheel is mounted on a shaft, rotating between the [140] pieces C and D and behind the coaster-brake wheel H. Two pulleys, L, that are about 3 inches in diameter, are attached to spin with the flywheel on the shaft and are designed with flanges to keep the belts separate. The ends of the shaft should be mounted in good bearings that are well oiled.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
Another pulley, M, 6 in. in diameter, is made of wood and fastened to the rear axle. An idler wheel, shown in Fig. 3, is constructed of a small pulley, or a large spool, attached to an L-shaped piece of metal, which in turn is fastened on the end of a shaft controlled by the lever N. The function of this idler is to tighten up the belt or release it, thus changing the speed in the same manner as on a motorcycle.
Another pulley, M, 6 inches in diameter, is made of wood and attached to the rear axle. An idler wheel, shown in Fig. 3, is built from a small pulley or a large spool attached to an L-shaped piece of metal, which is then secured to the end of a shaft controlled by lever N. The purpose of this idler is to tighten or loosen the belt, adjusting the speed similar to how it works on a motorcycle.
The elevation of the flymobile is given in Fig. 4, which shows the arrangement of the belting. The size of the pulleys on the flywheel shaft causes it to turn rapidly, and, for this reason, the weight of the wheel will run the car a considerable distance when the coaster hub is released.
The height of the flymobile is shown in Fig. 4, which illustrates how the belting is set up. The size of the pulleys on the flywheel shaft makes it spin quickly, and because of this, the weight of the wheel can propel the car a significant distance when the coaster hub is let go.
The rear axle revolves in bearings, half of which is recessed in the under edges of the pieces A while the other half is fastened to a block, screwed on over the axle. A simple brake is made as shown in Fig. 5. Two metal pieces, O, preferably brass, are shaped to fit over the shaft with extending ends for fastening them to the pieces P and Q, as shown. These pieces are hinged with strap iron, R, at one end, the other end of the piece P being fastened to the crosspiece F, Fig. 1, of the main frame. The lower piece Q is worked by the lever S and side bars, T. A small spring, U, keeps the ends of the pieces apart and allows the free turning of the axle until the brake lever is drawn. The lever S is connected by a long bar to the hand lever V.
The rear axle rotates in bearings, half of which are built into the underside of pieces A, while the other half is attached to a block that is screwed onto the axle. A simple brake is constructed as shown in Fig. 5. Two metal pieces, O, preferably brass, are shaped to fit over the shaft, with extended ends for securing them to pieces P and Q, as illustrated. These pieces are hinged with strap iron, R, at one end, with the other end of piece P attached to the crosspiece F, Fig. 1, of the main frame. The lower piece Q is operated by lever S and side bars, T. A small spring, U, keeps the ends of the pieces apart and allows the axle to turn freely until the brake lever is pulled. The lever S is linked by a long bar to the hand lever V.
The steering apparatus W, Figs. 1 and 4, is constructed of a piece of gas pipe, 3 ft. 4 in. long, with a wheel at one end and a cord, X, at the other. The center part of the cord is wound several times around the pipe and the ends are passed through screweyes in the main frame pieces A and attached to the front axle, which is pivoted in the center under the block Y. The lower end of the pipe turns in a hole bored slanting in the block. A turn of the steering wheel causes one end of the cord to wind and the other to unwind, which turns the axle on the center pivot.
The steering mechanism W, Figs. 1 and 4, is made from a piece of gas pipe that is 3 ft. 4 in. long, with a wheel on one end and a cord, X, on the other. The middle part of the cord is wrapped several times around the pipe, and the ends go through screw eyes in the main frame pieces A and are attached to the front axle, which pivots in the center beneath the block Y. The bottom end of the pipe rotates in a slanted hole drilled in the block. When you turn the steering wheel, one end of the cord winds up while the other unwinds, causing the axle to rotate around the central pivot.
The wheels are bicycle wheels, and the ends of the front axle are turned to receive the cones and nuts, instead of using the regular hub axles. The ends of the rear axle are turned to closely fit the hubs after the ball cups have been [141] removed. A large washer and nut clamp each wheel to the axle so that it will turn with it.
The wheels are bicycle wheels, and the ends of the front axle are shaped to hold the cones and nuts, instead of the usual hub axles. The ends of the rear axle are shaped to fit snugly into the hubs after the ball cups have been [141] removed. A large washer and nut secure each wheel to the axle so that it rotates with it.
The body can be made up as desired, from sheet metal, wood, or cloth stretched over ribs of wood, and painted in the manner of an automobile. A tank and tires can be placed on the back to add to the appearance. Fenders and a running board can be attached to the main frame.
The body can be created using whatever materials you like, such as sheet metal, wood, or cloth stretched over wooden ribs, and it can be painted like a car. A tank and tires can be added to the back for extra effect. Fenders and a running board can be attached to the main frame.
With the addition of some crosspieces in the main frame at the front and a motorcycle engine fastened to them so that the driving sprocket will be in line with the sprocket on the coaster hub, the builder will have a real cyclecar.
With the addition of some crosspieces in the main frame at the front and a motorcycle engine attached to them so that the driving sprocket lines up with the sprocket on the coaster hub, the builder will have a genuine cyclecar.
The Die-and-Box Trick
The die-and-box trick, so often performed on the stage, is a very interesting and mystifying one. The apparatus, however, is simple, consisting of a box, die, a piece of tin in the form of three adjacent sides of the die, and a hat. The die and box are constructed entirely of wood, 1/8 in. thick, and the piece of tin can be cut from any large coffee can. The box is closed by four doors, as shown in Fig. 1, two of which are 2-3/4 in. square, and the others, 3-1/8 in. by 3-1/4 in. The first two are the front doors and are preferably hinged with cloth to the two uprights A and B. Small pieces of tin are fastened on the doors at C and D, to provide a means to open them. The other doors are placed on top and are hinged to the back, as shown.
The die-and-box trick, frequently seen on stage, is quite fascinating and puzzling. The setup is simple, consisting of a box, a die, a piece of tin shaped like three adjacent sides of the die, and a hat. Both the die and box are made entirely of wood, 1/8 in. thick, and the piece of tin can be cut from any large coffee can. The box has four doors, as illustrated in Fig. 1, with two measuring 2-3/4 in. square and the others measuring 3-1/8 in. by 3-1/4 in. The first two are the front doors and are preferably attached with cloth hinges to the two uprights A and B. Small pieces of tin are attached to the doors at C and D to allow them to be opened. The other doors are positioned on top and are hinged to the back, as shown.

With the False Die in Place It Appears as If the Box Were Empty
With the Fake Die in Place, It Looks Like the Box Is Empty
The die is 3 in. square on all sides, and is constructed of two pieces, 3 in. square; two pieces, 2-3/4 in. by 3 in., and two pieces, 2-3/4 in. square. These are fastened together with 1/2-in. brads. The tin, forming the false die, is cut out as shown in Fig. 2, and is then bent on the dotted lines and soldered together on the joint formed by the two edges E and F. All parts should be painted a dull black with white spots on the die and false die.
The die measures 3 inches on all sides and is made of two pieces that are each 3 inches square, two pieces that measure 2-3/4 inches by 3 inches, and two pieces that are 2-3/4 inches square. These parts are secured together with 1/2-inch brads. The tin that forms the false die is cut out as shown in Fig. 2, then bent along the dotted lines and soldered at the joint where the two edges E and F meet. All parts should be painted a dull black with white spots on both the die and the false die.

The Box with Doors on One Side and the Top, (Fig. 1)
The Box with Doors on One Side and the Top, (Fig. 1)

...and the False-Die pattern (Fig. 2)
...and the False-Die pattern (Fig. 2)
The trick is performed as follows: Procure a hat from some one in the audience and place in it the die with the tin false die covering three sides of the block, at the same time telling the audience that the block will be caused to pass from the hat into the box, the latter being placed some distance away. Inform the audience that it would be more difficult for the die to pass from the box into the hat. Remove the tin piece from the hat and leave the die, holding the surfaces of the false die toward the audience. This will give the impression that the die has been removed. Set the hat on the table above the level of the eyes of the audience. With the back of the box toward the audience, open one top door and insert the tin piece in the right-hand compartment so that one side touches the back, another the side and the other the bottom of the box. Close the door and open the two doors of the opposite compartment which, when shown, will appear to be empty. Tilt the box to this side and open the doors of the side opposite to [142] the one just opened, which, of course, will be empty. This should be done several times until some one asks that all doors be opened at the same time. After a few more reversals and openings as given, open all doors and show it empty, then take the die from the hat.—Contributed by Harold L. Groesbeck, Salt Lake City, Utah.
The trick is done like this: Get a hat from someone in the audience and put the die inside it with the tin false die covering three sides of the block, while explaining to the audience that the block will be moved from the hat into the box, which is placed a short distance away. Let the audience know that moving the die from the box back into the hat would be more difficult. Remove the tin piece from the hat and leave the die, showing the side of the false die to the audience. This will make it seem like the die has been taken out. Put the hat on the table at eye level for the audience. With the back of the box facing the audience, open one top door and place the tin piece in the right compartment so that one side touches the back, another touches the side, and the other touches the bottom of the box. Close the door and open the two doors of the opposite compartment, which will appear to be empty when shown. Tilt the box to the side and open the doors of the compartment that hasn’t been opened yet, which will also be empty. Repeat this several times until someone asks to open all the doors at once. After a few more flips and openings as described, open all the doors and show that it is empty, then take the die from the hat. —Contributed by Harold L. Groesbeck, Salt Lake City, Utah.
Homemade Pantograph
The pantograph consists of four pieces of wood, the dimensions depending somewhat on the size of the work to be drawn. A convenient size for ordinary drawing and enlarging is constructed of four pieces of hardwood, preferably maple, 3/16 in. thick and 5/8 in. wide, two of them 20-3/4 in. in length and the other two, 18-3/4 in. long. These are planed and sandpapered and the ends cut round.
The pantograph is made up of four wooden pieces, with dimensions varying depending on the size of the work to be drawn. A practical size for regular drawing and enlarging is made from four pieces of hardwood, ideally maple, that are 3/16 in. thick and 5/8 in. wide. Two of the pieces should be 20-3/4 in. long, while the other two should be 18-3/4 in. long. These pieces are planed, sanded, and have rounded ends.

A Picture can be Enlarged or Reduced by Setting the Screweyes in the Holes Designated
A picture can be made bigger or smaller by adjusting the screw eyes in the designated holes.
All four pieces are laid flat on a level board or bench top with their edges together so that the edges of the two longer pieces make right angles with a line drawn tangent to their ends. One end of one short piece is placed flush with the lower ends of the two long pieces, and one end of the other short piece flush with the upper ends, as shown. They should be clamped down solidly to keep them from moving while laying off the divisions. Light lines are drawn across their faces as designated by the dimensions. On these lines and exactly in the center of the pieces make small marks with a pencil point. Through the pieces A and B holes are drilled to snugly receive the body of a small screweye. The other two pieces are drilled with a smaller drill so that the threads of the screweye will take hold in the wood.
All four pieces are laid flat on a level board or bench with their edges together, so the edges of the two longer pieces form right angles with a line drawn tangent to their ends. One end of one short piece is placed flush with the lower ends of the two long pieces, and one end of the other short piece is flush with the upper ends, as shown. They should be clamped down tightly to keep them from moving while marking the divisions. Light lines are drawn across their faces as specified by the dimensions. On these lines, and exactly in the center of the pieces, make small marks with a pencil point. Through pieces A and B, holes are drilled to snugly fit the body of a small screw eye. The other two pieces are drilled with a smaller bit so that the threads of the screw eye will grip the wood.
The end C of the piece A has a metal stand made of brass as shown at D. This is fastened to the end of the wood with a small bolt. The hole should be a snug fit over the body of the bolt. The lower ends of the brass are drilled to admit thumb tacks for holding it to the drawing board.
The end C of piece A has a brass metal stand as shown at D. This is attached to the end of the wood with a small bolt. The hole should fit snugly over the bolt's body. The lower ends of the brass are drilled to allow thumb tacks to hold it to the drawing board.
The joint at E is made of a suitable binding post that can be procured at an electrical shop, the shank below the two joined pieces to be the same length as the height of the metal stand D. The end should be filed round and polished so that it will slip over the board or paper easily.
The joint at E is made of a suitable binding post that you can find at an electrical store. The shank below the two joined pieces should be the same length as the height of the metal stand D. The end should be filed round and polished so that it can easily slide over the board or paper.
The stylus or tracing point F is made of another binding post, in the same manner, but instead of a rounding end a slightly blunt, pointed end is filed on it. The end of the piece G is strengthened by gluing a small block of the same material on both upper and under side. A hole is then made through them to receive a pencil rather tightly.
The stylus or tracing point F is made from another binding post, similar to before, but instead of a rounded end, a slightly blunt, pointed end is shaped on it. The end of the piece G is reinforced by gluing a small block of the same material on both the top and bottom sides. A hole is then drilled through them to fit a pencil snugly.
The holes, as will be seen, are numbered from 1 to 34. At the crossing of each pair, H and J, the screweyes must be set in the holes numbered alike on both pieces of each pair. This will insure the proper working of the parts. The other numbers designate how much the instrument will enlarge a picture or reduce it. On the pair [143] not numbered in the sketch the numbers run in the opposite direction.
The holes are numbered from 1 to 34. At the intersection of each pair, H and J, the screw eyes must be placed in the holes with the same number on both pieces of each pair. This will ensure that the parts function correctly. The other numbers indicate how much the instrument will enlarge or reduce an image. On the pair [143] that isn’t numbered in the sketch, the numbers go in the opposite direction.
The end C is fastened to the left side of the drawing board, the picture to be enlarged is placed under the stylus or tracer point, and the paper under the pencil point G. Move the tracing point over the general outline of the picture without making any line before starting, so as to make sure that the paper and picture are located right. It is then only necessary to take hold of the pencil and move it over the paper while watching the tracer point to keep it following the lines of the picture. To make a reduced picture, the original is placed under G, the tracer point changed to G and the pencil to F.
The end C is secured to the left side of the drawing board, and the picture to be enlarged is positioned under the stylus or tracer point, with the paper under the pencil point G. Move the tracing point over the general outline of the picture without drawing any lines at first, to ensure the paper and picture are properly aligned. Then, simply hold the pencil and move it across the paper while keeping an eye on the tracer point to follow the picture's lines. To create a smaller version of the picture, place the original under G, switch the tracer point to G, and change the pencil to F.
Trapping Mosquitoes

Mosquitoes that light on the ceiling may be easily destroyed with the instrument shown in the sketch. It consists of a cover, such as used on jelly glasses, nailed to the end of an old broom handle. A little kerosene oil is placed in the cover and the device is passed closely beneath the location of the mosquitoes. They will be overcome by the fumes and drop into the fluid as soon as it comes under them.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
Mosquitoes that land on the ceiling can be easily eliminated with the tool shown in the sketch. It consists of a lid, like the ones used on jelly jars, attached to the end of an old broom handle. A little kerosene oil is poured into the lid, and the device is moved just below where the mosquitoes are. The fumes will knock them out, and they'll drop into the liquid as soon as it’s beneath them.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
Pen Rack on an Ink Bottle

A piece of wire, about 1 ft. long, is bent into the shape shown and slipped over the neck of the ink bottle. The ends forming the loop around the neck should fit tightly. The upper part of the wire is shaped to hold the penholder.—Contributed by W. A. Saul, E. Lexington, Mass.
A piece of wire, about 1 ft. long, is bent into the shape shown and slipped over the neck of the ink bottle. The ends forming the loop around the neck should fit tightly. The upper part of the wire is shaped to hold the penholder. —Contributed by W. A. Saul, E. Lexington, Mass.
Substitute for a Broken Bench-Vise Nut

Two Pieces of Strap Iron Shaped to Fit the Square Thread Make a Good Substitute Nut
Two pieces of strap iron shaped to fit the square thread make a good substitute nut.
It is frequently the case that the nut on a bench-vise screw breaks from being subjected to a too violent strain. If one is working in a place where a new nut cannot be obtained, the broken part may be replaced by the substitute shown in the sketch. Any piece of strap iron may be used, and with a round file and a drill the two pieces can soon be made and attached to the bench with screws or bolts. A slight twist of the shaped ends is necessary to make them fit the angle of the thread.—Contributed by Oscar M. Waddell, Lamedeer, Mont.
It often happens that the nut on a bench vise screw breaks due to excessive pressure. If you're in a situation where you can't get a new nut, you can replace the broken part with the substitute shown in the sketch. Any piece of strap iron can work, and with a round file and a drill, you can easily create and attach the two pieces to the bench with screws or bolts. You'll need to give the shaped ends a slight twist to match the angle of the thread. —Contributed by Oscar M. Waddell, Lamedeer, Mont.
Scissors Sharpener

In Attempting to Cut the Hardened Steel Pin the Edge is Drawn Sharp
In Trying to Cut the Hardened Steel Pin, the Edge is Sharpened
Procure an ordinary wood clothespin and drill a 1/8-in. hole through its blades, then insert a piece of hardened 1/8-in. drill rod, which should be a driving fit. In using this device, take the scissors and attempt to cut the steel rod. Do this three or four times and a good cutting edge will be obtained.—Contributed by Wm. J. Tolson, Lyons, Iowa.
Get a regular wooden clothespin and drill a 1/8-inch hole through its arms. Then, insert a piece of hardened 1/8-inch drill rod that fits snugly. To use this tool, take some scissors and try to cut the steel rod. Do this three or four times, and you’ll have a nice cutting edge. —Contributed by Wm. J. Tolson, Lyons, Iowa.
An imitation-gold color may be made with flake white, ground in varnish and tinted with a touch of vermilion. When striping or lettering is done with this, it will have the appearance of real gilding work.
An imitation-gold color can be created using flake white mixed in varnish and adding a hint of vermilion. When you use this for striping or lettering, it will look like actual gilding.
Floor Push Button
An ordinary electric push button can be used for a floor push button by placing it on a bracket or shelf attached to a joist, as shown, and using a nail for the extension push. A 1/4-in. hole is bored through the floor, also through a small piece of wood fastened beneath the floor, at the right place to direct the nail so that it will strike directly upon the small black knob of the push button. The nail should be just long enough to rest lightly on the knob.—Contributed by Reginald R. Insole, Hamilton, Can.
An ordinary electric push button can be used for a floor push button by placing it on a bracket or shelf attached to a joist, as shown, and using a nail for the extension push. A 1/4-inch hole is drilled through the floor, also through a small piece of wood secured beneath the floor, at the right spot to direct the nail so that it will hit directly on the small black knob of the push button. The nail should be just long enough to rest lightly on the knob. —Contributed by Reginald R. Insole, Hamilton, Can.

Push Button on Joist
Press Button on Joist
A Wrist Brace
To strengthen a weak wrist, take a piece of leather, preferably white oak tanned, 2 in. wide and 14 in. long, and carefully shave it down with a sharp knife, until it is 1/16 in. thick. Then cut it as shown in Fig. 1, the wide part or body being 7 in. long, and the narrow part or neck, 6 in. long and 1 in. wide. Cut a semicircular hole, 1 in. from the extreme end of the body, 1/2 in. wide and 1-1/4 in. long, to allow the neck to slip through, then punch three holes in each end and lace with rawhide or shoestring, or, better still, if you happen to have a small buckle, sew it neatly to the body. It looks better and saves time in adjusting. When complete and on the wrist, it will appear as in Fig. 2.—Contributed by J. H. Harris, Berkeley, Cal.
To strengthen a weak wrist, take a piece of leather, ideally white oak tanned, 2 inches wide and 14 inches long, and carefully shave it down with a sharp knife until it's 1/16 inch thick. Then cut it as shown in Fig. 1, making the wide part or body 7 inches long and the narrow part or neck 6 inches long and 1 inch wide. Cut a semicircular hole, 1 inch from the very end of the body, 1/2 inch wide and 1-1/4 inches long, to let the neck slip through. Then punch three holes in each end and lace it with rawhide or shoelace. Even better, if you have a small buckle, sew it neatly to the body. It looks nicer and saves time adjusting. When it's finished and on your wrist, it will look like Fig. 2.—Contributed by J. H. Harris, Berkeley, Cal.

Brace Made of Leather
Leather Bracelet
Protecting a Kettle Handle from Heat

The wood handle of a kettle or cooking utensil when not in use usually comes in contact with the side of the vessel and it will absorb enough heat each time to finally char and crack the wood. The heat of the handle at times is so intense that it often results in a burned hand. The spiral metal handle provides a way for cooling by exposing a considerable surface to the air, yet the metal retains the heat so that many times it is too hot to handle. If a wood handle is provided with a coil of wire as shown in the accompanying sketch, the wood cannot come in contact with the side of the heated vessel and the air encircling the wood prevents it from getting too hot to handle. The spiral can be attached to a metal handle with solder.
The wooden handle of a kettle or cooking tool usually touches the side of the pot when not in use, absorbing enough heat each time to eventually char and crack the wood. Sometimes, the heat of the handle is so intense that it can lead to a burned hand. The spiral metal handle offers cooling by allowing a large surface area to be exposed to the air, but the metal also retains heat, making it too hot to handle at times. If a wooden handle is designed with a wire coil like the one in the sketch, it won't touch the side of the heated pot, and the air surrounding the wood keeps it from getting too hot to hold. The spiral can be attached to a metal handle with solder.
Tin Can Used for Watering Chickens

An ordinary discarded tomato can makes a good watering vessel for young chickens. Care must be taken in opening the can to cut the tin so the cover will hinge. Cut the tin about 1-1/2 in. from the bottom so that it will form a U-shaped piece as shown in the sketch and push the hanging portion in the can. Fill the can up to the opening with water, close the cover and set it in the coop.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
An ordinary discarded tomato can makes a great watering vessel for young chickens. Be careful when opening the can so you can create a hinge for the cover. Cut the tin about 1.5 inches from the bottom to create a U-shaped piece as shown in the sketch, and push the hanging part into the can. Fill the can up to the opening with water, close the cover, and place it in the coop.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
How to Make a Hurdle
The hurdle consists of two standards, a reach, and a swing. The swing is first made in the shape of a rectangle of four pieces of wood, about 7/8 in. thick and 1-1/2 in. wide, of which two are 36 in. and the others 18 in. long. These pieces are nailed together in the manner shown.
The hurdle is made up of two standards, a reach, and a swing. The swing is first constructed in a rectangular shape using four pieces of wood, approximately 7/8 in. thick and 1-1/2 in. wide. Two of the pieces are 36 in. long, and the other two are 18 in. long. These pieces are nailed together as shown.

The Swing of the Hurdle will Turn When Slightly Touched and Right Itself Again
The swing of the hurdle will turn when lightly touched and straighten itself out again.
Each standard is made of three pieces of wood, 7/8 in. thick, 3 in. wide, and 18 in. long. Nail the pieces firmly together, as shown, and connect their bases with another piece of the same material, 36 in. long. When this is finished, connect the swing to the standards with long nails, A, at the ends slightly off center. Before inserting the nails, make the holes in each standard to receive them large enough to permit the nails to turn freely without allowing the heads to pass through. Thus the frame will swing freely at the slightest touch of the jumper's foot, and right itself immediately.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
Each standard is made up of three pieces of wood, 7/8 in. thick, 3 in. wide, and 18 in. long. Nail the pieces together securely, as shown, and connect their bases with another piece of the same material, 36 in. long. Once that's done, attach the swing to the standards with long nails, A, at the ends slightly off center. Before inserting the nails, make the holes in each standard large enough to allow the nails to turn freely without letting the heads pass through. This way, the frame will swing easily at the lightest touch of the jumper's foot and will right itself immediately.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
Oil Burner for a Cook Stove
The parts of the burner consist of ordinary gas pipe and fittings. The pipe in which the kerosene oil is converted into gas is 1/2 in. in diameter and is connected to a supply tank of oil with 1/4-in. pipe. The burner part is also constructed of 1/4-in. pipe having three 1/16-in. holes drilled in each end for the gas to escape where it burns. These burners are located just beneath the large pipe so that the flames will heat it and convert the oil into gas. A needle valve, A, is used to control the flow of oil. The burner is placed in the fire box of the stove, and the pipes connected through a hole drilled in the stove door, at B.
The parts of the burner include standard gas pipe and fittings. The pipe that turns the kerosene oil into gas has a diameter of 1/2 inch and connects to an oil supply tank with a 1/4-inch pipe. The burner itself is made from 1/4-inch pipe with three 1/16-inch holes drilled into each end for the gas to escape and burn. These burners are positioned just under the large pipe so the flames can heat it and convert the oil into gas. A needle valve, A, is used to control the flow of oil. The burner is installed in the firebox of the stove, with the pipes connected through a hole drilled in the stove door at B.

A Very Cheap Grade of Kerosene Oil can be Used in This Burner with Success
A very inexpensive type of kerosene oil can be successfully used in this burner.
The tank may be rectangular or round and should be of sufficient strength to withstand 5 or 10 lb. of pressure. The top of the tank has a pet cock where a connecting hose from an air pump may be attached. The tank is filled about half full and just a little pressure of air is put on the oil. To start the burner, run a little oil in a pan or fire shovel and light it so that the flames will convert the oil into gas in the large pipe, then turn the valve A and regulate the flame.—Contributed by Robert Hays, Siloam Springs, Ark.
The tank can be rectangular or round and should be strong enough to handle 5 or 10 lbs of pressure. The top of the tank has a petcock where you can attach a hose from an air pump. Fill the tank about halfway and add just a bit of air pressure to the oil. To start the burner, pour some oil into a pan or fire shovel and light it so that the flames turn the oil into gas in the large pipe. Then, turn the valve A and adjust the flame. —Contributed by Robert Hays, Siloam Springs, Ark.
A Fish Stringer
The illustration shows a very simple and inexpensive device for the angler to string and carry fish. It is made of a pail handle through which is passed a piece of soft wire, having sufficient length for bends or loops at each end, and a piece of chain. A chain 18 in. long is sufficient. One end of the chain is fastened in the loop at one end of the handle, and the other has a piece of wire attached for pushing through the gills of the fish. The other end of the wire through the handle is arranged in a hook to catch into the links of the chain.—Contributed by G. O. Reed, Stratford, Canada.
The illustration shows a very simple and inexpensive device for anglers to string and carry fish. It's made from a pail handle with a piece of soft wire threaded through it, long enough to create bends or loops at each end, and a piece of chain. A chain that's 18 inches long is sufficient. One end of the chain is secured to the loop at one end of the handle, and the other end has a piece of wire attached for pushing through the fish's gills. The other end of the wire through the handle is shaped into a hook to catch onto the links of the chain. —Contributed by G. O. Reed, Stratford, Canada.

Inexpensive Stringer Made of a Pail Handle and Small Chain
Inexpensive Stringer Made from a Bucket Handle and Small Chain
Substitutes for Drawing Instruments
Three of the most used draftsman's instruments are the compass, ruler and square or triangle. When it is necessary to make a rough drawing and no instruments are at hand, common and easily obtainable things can be used as substitutes.
Three of the most commonly used drafting tools are the compass, ruler, and square or triangle. When you need to create a rough drawing and don’t have any tools available, you can use everyday items that are easy to find as substitutes.

A Compass, Ruler and Square Made of Ordinary Things at Hand
A Compass, Ruler, and Square Made from Common Items Nearby
A sheet of heavy paper folded as shown at A will serve as a ruler, and the same sheet given another fold will make the square B. If given another fold diagonally, a 45-deg. triangle is formed. A substitute compass is readily made of a short pencil and a pocket knife, as shown at C.—Contributed by Jas. J. Joyce, Olongopo, Philippine Islands.
A piece of thick paper folded like shown at A will act as a ruler, and another fold will create the square B. If you fold it diagonally again, a 45-degree triangle is made. You can easily make a makeshift compass using a short pencil and a pocket knife, as shown at C.—Contributed by Jas. J. Joyce, Olongopo, Philippine Islands.
How to Make an Aspirator
A simple aspirator that may be used for a number of different purposes, such as accelerating the process of filtering, emptying water from tubs, producing a partial vacuum in vessels in which coils are being boiled in paraffin, etc., may be constructed as follows: Obtain two pieces of brass tubing of the following dimensions: one 7 in. long and 3/4 in. outside diameter, and the other, 3 in. long and 1/4 in. outside diameter. Drill a hole in one side of the large tube, about 3 in. from one end, of such a diameter that the small brass tube will fit it very tightly. Take an ordinary hacksaw and cut a slot in the side of the large piece, as shown at A. This slot is sawed diagonally across the tube and extends from one side to the center. Obtain a piece of sheet brass that will fit into this slot tightly, and then solder it and the small tube into the large tube. The slot and hole for the small tube should be so located with respect to each other that the small tube will empty into the larger one directly against the piece of sheet brass soldered in the slot.
A simple aspirator that can be used for various purposes, like speeding up the filtering process, draining water from tubs, or creating a partial vacuum in containers with coils boiling in paraffin, can be made as follows: Get two pieces of brass tubing with these dimensions: one that is 7 inches long and has a 3/4 inch outside diameter, and another that is 3 inches long and has a 1/4 inch outside diameter. Drill a hole in one side of the larger tube, about 3 inches from one end, large enough for the small brass tube to fit tightly. Use a regular hacksaw to cut a slot in the side of the larger piece, as shown at A. This slot should be cut diagonally across the tube and extend from one side to the center. Get a piece of sheet brass that will fit snugly into this slot, and then solder it along with the small tube into the larger tube. The slot and the hole for the small tube should be positioned so that the small tube empties directly into the larger one against the sheet brass soldered in the slot.

Detail of the Aspirator and Its Connections to a Faucet, for Increasing the Speed of Filtration
Detail of the Aspirator and Its Connections to a Faucet, for Increasing the Speed of Filtration
The upper end of the large tube should be threaded inside to fit over the threads on the faucet, or an attachment soldered to it similar to those on the end of an ordinary garden hose. A rubber hose should be attached to the small tube and connected, as [147] shown, to a piece of glass tubing that is sealed in the cork in the top of the large bottle. The funnel holding the filter paper is also sealed into the cork. Melted paraffin may be used in sealing the glass tube, funnel and cork in place, the object being to make them airtight. The filter paper should be folded so that it sticks tightly against the sides of the funnel when the liquid is poured in, thus preventing any air from entering the bottle between the paper and the funnel. Turn on the faucet, and it will be found that the time required to filter any liquid will be greatly reduced. Be careful, however, not to turn on too much water, as the suction may then be too strong and the filter paper become punctured.
The top of the large tube should be threaded inside to fit over the threads on the faucet, or have an attachment soldered to it, similar to those found on the end of a regular garden hose. A rubber hose should be connected to the small tube and linked, as [147] shown, to a piece of glass tubing that is sealed in the cork at the top of the large bottle. The funnel holding the filter paper is also sealed into the cork. Melted paraffin can be used to seal the glass tube, funnel, and cork in place, aiming to make them airtight. The filter paper should be folded to fit snugly against the sides of the funnel when the liquid is poured in, preventing any air from getting into the bottle between the paper and the funnel. Turn on the faucet, and you’ll find that the time it takes to filter any liquid will be significantly reduced. However, be cautious not to turn on too much water, as the suction may then be too strong and could puncture the filter paper.
A Key-Holder Hook

A good hook for hanging keys, toothbrushes and other small articles can be made from ordinary wire staples, as shown at A. One leg of the staple is cut away as shown at B and the other leg driven into the board as shown at C. These will answer the purpose as well as screwhooks.—Contributed by W. C. Heidt, Chicago.
A simple hook for hanging keys, toothbrushes, and other small items can be made from regular wire staples, as shown at A. One leg of the staple is cut off as shown at B, and the other leg is pushed into the board as shown at C. These will work just as well as screw hooks. —Contributed by W. C. Heidt, Chicago.
A Hand Hoe
A hand hoe, especially adapted for weeding or cultivating small truck, particularly onions, can be made of a piece of hard wood, 7/8 by 1-3/4 in. by 4 ft. long, and a piece of old bucksaw blade. A blade, 18 in. long and 2 in. wide, bent into a loop is attached with bolts to the handle.—Contributed by Geo. H. Miller, Iowa City, Iowa.
A hand hoe, specially designed for weeding or cultivating small crops, particularly onions, can be made from a piece of hard wood measuring 7/8 by 1-3/4 inches and 4 feet long, along with an old bucksaw blade. An 18-inch long and 2-inch wide blade, bent into a loop, is attached with bolts to the handle.—Contributed by Geo. H. Miller, Iowa City, Iowa.

Bucksaw Blade Attached to a Hardwood Handle
Bucksaw Blade Attached to a Hardwood Handle
Seed Receptacle for Bird-Cages
A handy seed and water container for a bird-cage can be made of a common spice tin. The receptacle can be filled without removal by simply taking off the cover. Thus the seed will not be scattered.
A convenient seed and water container for a birdcage can be made from a regular spice tin. You can fill the container without taking it out by just removing the lid. This way, the seed won't get spilled.

Spice Tin Attached to the Wires of a Bird-Cage for a Water or Seed Receptacle
Spice Tin Connected to the Wires of a Birdcage for a Water or Seed Container
The tin is attached by cutting a hole in the back as shown, and bending the side edges to fit over the wires to hold it in place. The bottom strip is a support which rests on the floor of the cage and prevents the tin from slipping down on the wires.
The tin is attached by cutting a hole in the back as shown, and bending the side edges to fit over the wires to hold it in place. The bottom strip is a support that rests on the floor of the cage and keeps the tin from slipping down on the wires.
Kitchen-Utensil Scraper
A flexible utensil scraper is one of the most useful articles I have in my kitchen. It covers such a large surface in scraping pans, kettles, etc., that this most disagreeable part of the kitchen work is quickly and easily accomplished.
A flexible utensil scraper is one of the most useful items I have in my kitchen. It covers such a large surface when scraping pans, kettles, etc., that this usually unpleasant part of kitchen work is done quickly and easily.

The Blade is Flexible so It can Readily Shape Itself to the Curves of a Kettle
The blade is flexible, so it can easily adjust to the curves of a kettle.
The flexible blade is attached to the tin handles with small rivets. The blade should be thin and narrow enough to allow it to bend. When the handles are pressed together, the blade curves to the shape of the utensil's surface.—Contributed by Mrs. Della Schempp, Brodhead, Wis.
The flexible blade is connected to the tin handles with small rivets. The blade needs to be thin and narrow enough to bend. When you press the handles together, the blade curves to match the surface of the utensil.—Contributed by Mrs. Della Schempp, Brodhead, Wis.
Anchor Posts for a Lawn Swing
A very substantial and convenient base for a lawn swing can be made by using four anchor posts of cement, as shown in Fig. 1. The posts are made with a recess, A, to receive the legs of the swing, and of any suitable size. They may be placed with the upper face on a level with the lawn, or higher if desired.
A solid and practical base for a lawn swing can be created by using four concrete anchor posts, as shown in Fig. 1. The posts include a recess, A, to hold the swing's legs, and can be made in any appropriate size. They can be positioned so the top surface is level with the lawn, or higher if preferred.

Ar. Anchor Post of Cement and a Mold Box for Shaping Four Posts at a Time (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Ar. Anchor Post of Cement and a Mold Box for Shaping Four Posts at a Time (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A rough mold box, Fig. 2, lined with paper, will do for making the posts. The box does not require any top or bottom; it is simply placed on a board and lifted away when the blocks are thoroughly dried. If the blocks are leveled when placed in the earth, the swing may be taken down and erected again without the usual leveling and bracing.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A basic mold box, Fig. 2, lined with paper, is sufficient for making the posts. The box doesn’t need a top or bottom; it’s just placed on a board and removed once the blocks are completely dry. If the blocks are level when they’re set in the ground, the swing can be taken down and put up again without needing to level and brace it like usual. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Automatic Filter

This funnel-filling filter automatically prevents the solution from running over if the filtering is slow or the filter substance becomes clogged. The upper inverted bottle holds the solution to be filtered, the cork being fitted with a glass tube as shown, and when in use the cork is forced into the neck of the bottle so that no air can enter between it and the glass. The support for holding the bottles has two brackets, one to fit the neck of the upper bottle and the other used as a shelf for the receiving bottle. In operation, the solution runs from the upper bottle into the funnel, holding the filter paper, but it cannot fill the funnel completely, because the end of the glass tube is lower than the edge of the funnel, and as soon as the liquid in the funnel covers the end of the tube, all inflow of air into the upper bottle is stopped, and, thereby, further flow of the solution into the funnel prevented, until enough has filtered through to uncover the end of the tube and thus permit air to again enter the upper bottle.—Contributed by G. Simons, Chicago.
This funnel-filling filter automatically stops the solution from overflowing if the filtering is slow or if the filter material gets clogged. The upper inverted bottle holds the solution that needs to be filtered, with the cork fitted with a glass tube as shown. When in use, the cork is pressed into the neck of the bottle so that no air can enter between it and the glass. The stand for holding the bottles has two brackets: one for the neck of the upper bottle and the other serves as a shelf for the receiving bottle. In operation, the solution flows from the upper bottle into the funnel holding the filter paper, but it can’t fill the funnel completely because the end of the glass tube is lower than the edge of the funnel. As soon as the liquid in the funnel covers the end of the tube, all air inflow into the upper bottle is blocked, stopping further flow of the solution into the funnel until enough has filtered through to uncover the end of the tube, allowing air to re-enter the upper bottle.—Contributed by G. Simons, Chicago.
Grinding Scissors
Whether a pair of scissors be ground or filed, the marks or scratches left from the contact with the abrasive should all extend across the bevel in the direction of the line ED, Fig. 1, and never in the direction of the line GF. If the cutting edge be examined under a magnifying glass, the tool marks or scratches left by the sharpening process will be very plainly seen, and where these scratches intersect with the face HI, Fig. 2, of the blade, they will appear as teeth along the cutting edge IK.
Whether a pair of scissors is ground or filed, the marks or scratches left from contact with the abrasive should all extend across the bevel in the direction of line ED, Fig. 1, and never in the direction of line GF. If you examine the cutting edge under a magnifying glass, you will clearly see the tool marks or scratches left by the sharpening process, and where these scratches intersect with the face HI, Fig. 2, of the blade, they will look like teeth along the cutting edge IK.

The Direction of the Grinding Tool should be Slightly Sloping Toward the Handles
The grinding tool should be angled slightly toward the handles.
As a pair of scissors close, the natural tendency is to thrust the material to be cut out of the angle ABC, Fig. 1, but if these small teeth formed on the cutting edge point in the direction of the line ED, this slipping action is prevented or retarded because the fibrous material adheres to the fine teeth on the cutting edge of the blades.
As a pair of scissors closes, the natural tendency is to push the material to be cut out of the angle ABC, Fig. 1, but if the small teeth on the cutting edge point towards the line ED, this slipping action is stopped or slowed down because the fibrous material sticks to the fine teeth on the cutting edge of the blades.
Wet paper, silks, mohair cloths, etc., can be sheared with perfect ease and [149] dispatch, when scissors are sharpened in this manner. The same principle holds good for metal snips.
Wet paper, silks, mohair fabrics, etc., can be cut effortlessly and quickly when the scissors are sharpened this way. The same idea applies to metal snips.
The angle HIJ, Fig. 2, varies according to the material to be cut, and the type of shear. A greater angle is required on metal shears than on shears for domestic uses.—Contributed by A. Clifton, Chicago.
The angle HIJ, Fig. 2, changes depending on the material being cut and the type of shear. A larger angle is needed for metal shears compared to those used for household purposes.—Contributed by A. Clifton, Chicago.
To Repair a Leak in a Canoe
After striking some rocks with our canoe, it sprung three very bad leaks. These were effectively patched with pieces of cheesecloth, well soaked in liquid shellac, which were pasted on the outside of the leak. After allowing this to set for a few hours, it will be almost impossible to remove the patch. This is an inexpensive and almost invariably a sure remedy for leaks. When the cloth is dry, paint it over with the same color as the boat, and the repair can scarcely be seen.—Contributed by William B. Smith, New York City.
After hitting some rocks with our canoe, it ended up with three really bad leaks. We effectively fixed these with pieces of cheesecloth soaked in liquid shellac, which we glued to the outside of the leaks. After letting this set for a few hours, it becomes almost impossible to remove the patch. This is a cheap and almost always reliable fix for leaks. Once the cloth is dry, paint it over with the same color as the boat, and the repair will hardly be noticeable.—Contributed by William B. Smith, New York City.
Holder for Loose Window Glass

When the putty becomes loose and the glazing points work out on window glass, temporary repairs may be made by using a small piece of tin or sheet iron bent as shown in the sketch. The clip is inserted under the edge of the glass and hooked over the back of the sash parts. This will hold the glass firmly in place and also prevent rattling.
When the putty gets loose and the glazing points pop out on window glass, you can make temporary repairs by using a small piece of tin or sheet metal bent as shown in the sketch. The clip goes under the edge of the glass and hooks over the back of the sash parts. This will hold the glass securely in place and also stop it from rattling.
A Homemade Bench Vise
A form of a bench vise that can be easily made and attached to a workbench is shown in the illustration. This vise requires no screw, and the parts can be made from scrap material.
A type of bench vise that can be easily created and attached to a workbench is shown in the illustration. This vise doesn't need a screw, and the parts can be made from leftover materials.

The Vise Jaw as It is Attached to the Bench and the Substitute Screw Arrangement
The Vise Jaw as It Connects to the Bench and the Alternate Screw Setup
The substitute A for the screw is a rectangular piece of wood and is fastened with a tenon in a mortise cut in the vise jaw B. The clamping arrangement consists of a strap, C, attached to the piece A, then run over a pulley, D, and fastened to a foot pedal, E. The foot pedal is fulcrumed on a crosspiece of the bench and has a ratchet so as to hold it when the vise is set. The lower end of the vise is fitted with the usual form of device for parallel adjustment. A coil spring is located in the center for use in quickly opening the vise when the foot pedal is released.—Contributed by A. C. Westby, Porter, Minn.
The substitute A for the screw is a rectangular piece of wood that is secured with a tenon in a mortise cut in the vise jaw B. The clamping setup consists of a strap, C, attached to piece A, which then goes over a pulley, D, and connects to a foot pedal, E. The foot pedal is hinged on a crosspiece of the bench and features a ratchet to keep it in place when the vise is engaged. The lower end of the vise is equipped with a standard device for parallel adjustment. A coil spring is positioned in the center to quickly open the vise when the foot pedal is released.—Contributed by A. C. Westby, Porter, Minn.
A Cover Strainer
Quite frequently the cook or housewife wishes to pour the hot water or liquid from boiling vegetables or other foods without removing the solids from the kettle. This is easily accomplished, if small holes are drilled in the cover as shown in the sketch. The saucepan or kettle can be tilted and the liquid drains through the holes. Further, the steam from cooking food can readily escape through the holes, thus preventing the cover from vibrating, or the liquids from boiling over.
Often, the cook or homemaker wants to pour hot water or liquid from boiling vegetables or other foods without having to take out the solids from the pot. This can be easily done by drilling small holes in the lid, as shown in the sketch. The saucepan or pot can be tilted, allowing the liquid to drain through the holes. Additionally, the steam from cooking food can easily escape through the holes, preventing the lid from vibrating or the liquids from boiling over.

A Sufficient Number of Holes are Drilled in the Edge of the Cover to Make a Strainer
A sufficient number of holes are drilled around the edge of the cover to create a strainer.
Homemade Corn Sheller
Where there is but a small quantity of corn to be shelled a sheller can be made of a few scraps of wood usually found on a farm. A block of wood having a sloping notch cut from one end is mounted on three legs as shown. The notched part as well as the lever is thickly filled with spikes driven in so that their heads protrude about 1/2 in.
Where there’s only a small amount of corn to shell, you can make a sheller from some scrap wood that’s usually available on a farm. A block of wood with a sloping notch cut out of one end is supported on three legs as shown. The notched part, as well as the lever, is densely packed with spikes that are driven in so their heads stick out about 1/2 in.

The Projecting Nail Heads in the Block and Lever, as They Pass, Shell the Corn
The Projecting Nail Heads in the Block and Lever, as They Pass, Shell the Corn
The ear of corn is placed in the notched part and the lever pressed down. Two or three strokes of the lever will remove all the kernels from the cob. A box is provided and conveniently located on one leg to catch the shelled corn.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Ont.
The ear of corn is placed in the notched section, and the lever is pressed down. A couple of pulls on the lever will strip all the kernels off the cob. A box is provided and conveniently attached to one leg to catch the shelled corn.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Ont.
An Ornamental Metal Flatiron Holder
This antique iron holder or stand can be easily constructed by the amateur bent-iron worker. A strip of iron is bent over at the ends to form the side legs, and the front leg is formed of another piece, welded in the center.
This old iron holder or stand can be easily made by someone new to bending iron. A strip of iron is bent at the ends to create the side legs, and the front leg is made from another piece, welded in the middle.

Ornamental Stand Made of Either Strap Iron or Sheet Metal to Hold a Flatiron
Ornamental stand made of either strap iron or sheet metal to hold a flatiron.
Openings for the crosspieces are then cut, the legs bent into a scroll shape, and the crosspieces inserted and fastened by spreading or upsetting the ends.
Openings for the crosspieces are then cut, the legs bent into a scroll shape, and the crosspieces inserted and secured by spreading or bending the ends.
Instead of using strap iron, the stand can be cut from good sheet metal. This would save the trouble of welding on the front leg.
Instead of using strap iron, the stand can be made from quality sheet metal. This would eliminate the hassle of welding on the front leg.
How to Make a Watch Demagnetizer
A watch demagnetizer that will give excellent satisfaction may be made as follows:
A watch demagnetizer that will provide great satisfaction can be made like this:

Dimensioned Parts for the Construction of the Core over Which the Insulated Wire is Wound
Dimensioned Parts for Building the Core Where the Insulated Wire is Wrapped
Procure a sheet of 1/16 in. brass, 3-1/4 in. by 7 in. Bend this piece of brass around a piece of hard wood having a rectangular cross section of 2-1/2 in. by 1 in. The joint between the two ends should be made on one side, and the edges should lack about 1/8 in. of touching. Next obtain two pieces of 1/8 in. brass, 3-3/4 in. by 3 in., and cut an opening in each of these, 2-5/8 in. by 1-1/8 in., as shown in the sketch. Bend one edge of each of these pieces over at right angles to the main portion of the piece. Solder these two pieces on the ends of the rectangular tube of brass and cut a slot in each of them to correspond to the one in the rectangular tube. Place the rectangular piece of wood back in the tube and you are ready for the winding. Use No. 18 gauge single cotton-covered copper wire and fill the winding space. Several layers of paper should be placed on the brass tube and between the layers of wire, to serve as an insulation. Holes may be drilled in the projecting portions on the ends and the coil can then be mounted on a wooden base. Mount two binding posts on this base and connect the terminals of the winding to them.
Get a piece of 1/16 in. brass, measuring 3-1/4 in. by 7 in. Bend this brass around a piece of hard wood with a rectangular cross-section of 2-1/2 in. by 1 in. The joint between the two ends should be on one side, and the edges should be about 1/8 in. apart. Next, get two pieces of 1/8 in. brass, 3-3/4 in. by 3 in., and cut an opening in each one, 2-5/8 in. by 1-1/8 in., as shown in the sketch. Bend one edge of each piece at a right angle to the main part. Solder these two pieces onto the ends of the brass rectangular tube and cut a slot in each of them to match the one in the rectangular tube. Place the rectangular piece of wood back into the tube, and you’re ready to start winding. Use No. 18 gauge single cotton-covered copper wire to fill the winding space. Several layers of paper should be added on the brass tube and between the layers of wire for insulation. Holes can be drilled in the projecting parts at the ends, allowing the coil to be mounted on a wooden base. Mount two binding posts on this base and connect the terminals of the winding to them.
[151] To use the demagnetizer, connect it to a 110-volt alternating-current circuit with a rheostat in circuit of such a form that the current will not exceed three amperes and that it may be reduced to practically zero in value by increasing the resistance of the rheostat. The magnetic field inside the coil is rapidly changing in direction and will tend to destroy any permanent magnetism that may be possessed by an object placed inside of it. The full current of three amperes should be allowed to pass through the winding for a few minutes after the object to be demagnetized is inserted, and then gradually reduced, and the object removed.
[151] To use the demagnetizer, connect it to a 110-volt alternating current circuit with a rheostat that ensures the current doesn't exceed three amperes and can be lowered to almost zero by increasing the resistance of the rheostat. The magnetic field inside the coil rapidly changes direction and will likely eliminate any permanent magnetism in an object placed inside it. Allow the full current of three amperes to pass through the winding for a few minutes after inserting the object to be demagnetized, then gradually reduce it and remove the object.
Remodeling a Talking Machine
Having a talking machine of an old model with a tapered horn I decided to change it into a more modern type, and this was accomplished as follows: An auxiliary base was constructed of 1/2 in. wood on which to set the part which revolves the disks. The inside of this base is so constructed as to form a horn or sounding box. The two sides and sloping bottom of the horn-part are made of 1/4 in. wood. The form of this box is shown in Fig. 1. The dimensions should be determined according to the size of the talking machine.
I had an old talking machine with a tapered horn, and I decided to upgrade it to a more modern model. Here’s how I did it: I built an auxiliary base using 1/2 inch wood to support the part that spins the disks. The inside of this base is designed to create a horn or sounding box. The two sides and the sloping bottom of the horn are made from 1/4 inch wood. The shape of this box is shown in Fig. 1. The dimensions should be based on the size of the talking machine.

The Horn or Sounding Box Is Constructed in the Auxiliary Base... (Fig. 1)
The horn or sounding box is built in the auxiliary base... (Fig. 1)

...and the Part for Connecting the Sounding Tube to the Box Consists of Ordinary Gas Pipe Fastened with a Clip at the Back (Fig. 2)
...and the part for connecting the sounding tube to the box is made of regular gas pipe secured with a clip at the back (Fig. 2)
The connecting parts to the original horn were turned downward, as shown at A, Fig. 2, with the opening entering a piece of ordinary gas pipe of sufficient length to allow an elbow with a nipple to enter the auxiliary base. The pivot-holding device for connection A is shown at D. The parts are attached to the box with a clasp, E, and with three screws in the nipple C, the end view of which is shown at F. The talking machine is placed on the auxiliary base as shown in Fig. 3. This construction produces a talking machine on the order of a cabinet machine without the tapering horn.—Contributed by H. W. J. Lomglatz, Harrisburg, Pa.
The connecting parts to the original horn were angled downward, as shown at A, Fig. 2, with the opening fitting into a standard gas pipe of enough length to accommodate an elbow with a nipple leading into the auxiliary base. The device that holds the pivot for connection A is illustrated at D. The parts are secured to the box with a clasp, E, and with three screws in the nipple C, the end view of which is displayed at F. The talking machine is positioned on the auxiliary base as depicted in Fig. 3. This design creates a talking machine similar to a cabinet machine but without the tapered horn.—Contributed by H. W. J. Lomglatz, Harrisburg, Pa.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
Needle for Sewing Burlap
A needle for sewing burlap can be easily made of the ordinary opener that comes with sardine cans. All that is necessary to convert this tool into a needle is to grind the blunt end to a sharp point, as shown in the sketch.—Contributed by G. C. Beven, Sault Ste. Marie, Ont.
A sewing needle for burlap can be easily made from a regular sardine can opener. To transform this tool into a needle, just grind the blunt end to a sharp point, as illustrated in the sketch.—Contributed by G. C. Beven, Sault Ste. Marie, Ont.

The Can Opener is Provided with an Eye and to Make a Needle the End is Sharpened
The can opener comes with an eye, and to create a needle, the end is sharpened.
A Mysterious Revolving Wheel
The mystery of this wheel is that it seems to revolve automatically without any visible external power. It is at the same time an amusing trick and an instructive experiment. The apparatus required is very simple and can be made at home.
The mystery of this wheel is that it seems to spin on its own without any visible external power. It’s both an entertaining trick and an educational experiment. The setup needed is very simple and can be made at home.

The Wheel as It is Mounted on a Needle, and Lamp and Box Containing Magnet to Make It Turn
The wheel mounted on a needle, along with a lamp and a box holding a magnet to make it spin.
A glass bottle is half filled with sand and water, so that it will stand securely, and a cork placed in the neck. Into this cork a needle should be inserted so that it projects perpendicularly, which is most easily done by heating one end of the needle to a red heat and then pushing it into the cork as deeply as possible. Into a disk of cork of suitable thickness and at four points on its side, at equal distances apart, are inserted four pieces of copper wire of the same length, each bent at the outer end to form a hook—these copper wires thus forming the spokes of the wheel. The rim is made of a small iron wire bent in a circular shape and held in the hooks on the ends of the copper wires. The now completed wheel is balanced on the free point on the needle, so that it can turn easily.
A glass bottle is half filled with sand and water to keep it steady, and a cork is placed in the neck. A needle should be inserted into this cork so that it sticks out straight up, which is easiest to do by heating one end of the needle until it's red hot and then pushing it into the cork as far as it can go. A disk of cork, with a suitable thickness, has four pieces of copper wire of equal length inserted at four points around its edge, spaced evenly apart. Each wire is bent at the outer end to form a hook—these copper wires act as the spokes of the wheel. The rim is made of a small iron wire shaped into a circle and held in the hooks at the ends of the copper wires. The completed wheel is balanced on the end of the needle so that it can spin freely.
Place an alcohol lamp in such a position that when it is lighted the tip of the flame will just reach the rim of the wheel. (Any other flame that will not soot the rim may be used.) In the box A, placed with its bottom level with the wheel, put a horseshoe magnet so that the flame is opposite one of its poles. After the lamp has been lighted for a few seconds, the wheel will begin to revolve, seemingly without cause. Why does it do so? Because the magnet magnetizes or attracts the part of the ring nearest it while cold, but not when it is glowing. Instead, it will attract the cooler part of the ring nearest behind the flame and so on, the wheel thus spinning round, faster in the same proportion as the magnet is stronger and the iron rim smaller.
Place an alcohol lamp in a position so that when lit, the tip of the flame just reaches the rim of the wheel. (You can use any other flame that won’t soot the rim.) In box A, positioned so its bottom is level with the wheel, place a horseshoe magnet so that the flame is opposite one of its poles. After the lamp has been lit for a few seconds, the wheel will start to spin as if by magic. Why does this happen? Because the magnet magnetizes or attracts the part of the ring closest to it when it’s cool, but not when it’s hot. Instead, it attracts the cooler part of the ring nearest behind the flame, and so on, causing the wheel to spin faster in proportion to the strength of the magnet and the size of the iron rim.
If this experiment is shown before spectators as a trick, the performer may say to the audience that he alone can make the wheel spin around without touching it. Should some one accept his challenge, he may, in a careless way, move the box containing the magnet away or turn it around so that it will not influence the iron ring and then, of course, the wheel will remain immovable.
If this experiment is presented to an audience as a trick, the performer might tell them that he alone can make the wheel spin without touching it. If someone takes up his challenge, he could casually move the box containing the magnet away or turn it around so that it doesn’t affect the iron ring, and then, of course, the wheel will stay still.
How to Make a Rabbet Plane
A rabbet plane is very little used by mechanics, but when it is wanted for a piece of work, it is wanted badly. While doing an unusual piece of work I needed a rabbet plane, and having none, I made a plane as shown in the sketch in less time than it would have taken to go out and borrow one.
A rabbet plane isn't used much by mechanics, but when it's needed for a job, it's really essential. While working on an unusual task, I needed a rabbet plane and didn't have one, so I made a plane like the one in the sketch in less time than it would have taken to go out and borrow one.

A Plane Made of a Piece of 2 by 4-In. Pine, a Chisel and a Large Wood Screw
A Plane Made from a Piece of 2 by 4-In. Pine, a Chisel, and a Large Wood Screw
The body of the plane was made of a piece of 2 by 4-in. pine, 1 ft. long. A 1-in. chisel was used for the bit. A place was marked on one side of the wood to be cut out for the chisel, and a 1-in. hole bored through, the narrow way, so that one edge of the bit cut through the bottom, forming a slit for the edge of the chisel. After cutting a groove for the chisel blade and turning in a long wood screw as shown, [153] to hold the chisel in place, I had as good a rabbet plane as could be purchased.—Contributed by W. H. Young, Thompson, Ga.
The plane's body was made from a 1-foot-long piece of 2x4 pine. A 1-inch chisel was used as the bit. A spot was marked on one side of the wood to be cut out for the chisel, and a 1-inch hole was drilled through it, so that one edge of the bit cut through the bottom, creating a slit for the chisel's edge. After cutting a groove for the chisel blade and inserting a long wood screw as shown, [153] to secure the chisel in place, I ended up with a rabbet plane that was as good as any you could buy.—Contributed by W. H. Young, Thompson, Ga.
Eye Shield for a Microscope
The difficulty and discomfort amateurs experience in learning to use a microscope with both eyes open, or in trying to keep one eye shut, can be easily overcome by attaching a piece of cardboard, similar in shape to the one shown in the sketch, to the barrel of the microscope. The hole A should be of sufficient diameter to allow the cardboard to slide freely up and down on the barrel to the proper adjustment. This simple arrangement will relieve a great deal of the eye strain and will be of assistance to the most experienced users of microscopes.—Contributed by G. B. Fenton, Charleston, W. Virginia.
The difficulty and discomfort that beginners face when learning to use a microscope with both eyes open, or when trying to keep one eye closed, can be easily fixed by attaching a piece of cardboard, shaped like the one shown in the sketch, to the barrel of the microscope. The hole A should be large enough to let the cardboard slide up and down on the barrel for the right adjustment. This simple setup will help reduce a lot of the eye strain and will assist even the most experienced microscope users.—Contributed by G. B. Fenton, Charleston, W. Virginia.

Shield to Cover the Eye That is Not Used When Looking into a Microscope
Shield to Cover the Eye Not in Use When Looking Through a Microscope
Transferring Magazine Pictures
Select pictures from newly printed papers and magazines. Rub wax from a paraffin candle over a sheet of clean white paper, covering a space as large as the picture to be copied. Place the paper, waxed side down, on the picture and while holding it firmly with the fingers of one hand, rub the back thoroughly with some hard substance until all parts of the picture have been gone over. Remove the paper and a perfect copy of the picture will be found upon the waxed side.—Contributed by Kenneth G. Merlin, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Select images from freshly printed papers and magazines. Rub wax from a paraffin candle over a clean sheet of white paper, covering an area as large as the picture you want to copy. Place the paper, waxed side down, on the image and while holding it firmly with one hand, rub the back thoroughly with a hard object until every part of the image has been covered. Remove the paper, and you'll find a perfect copy of the image on the waxed side.—Contributed by Kenneth G. Merlin, Brooklyn, N. Y.
A Homemade Egg Separator
Secure some small wire and a very large can. Cut the wire into several pieces and bend them as shown at A, cut the can and bend the side down as shown and punch holes to receive the upper ends of the wires. Make the holes so that the wires will be about 5/16 in. apart.
Get some thin wire and a large can. Cut the wire into several pieces and bend them as shown at A. Cut the can and bend the side down as shown, then punch holes to fit the upper ends of the wires. Ensure the holes are spaced about 5/16 in. apart.

The Contents of the Egg is Placed on the Wires Which will Separate the Yolk from the White
The contents of the egg are placed on the wires that will separate the yolk from the white.
A Glue-Spreader Holder

The spreader that is supplied with bottles of liquid glue should not be placed on any surface, as it will soon stick to it. A holder that will keep the spreader in a safe place can be made of a piece of wire which is twisted about the neck of the bottle, as shown in the sketch, and the ends bent up to receive the spreader.
The applicator that comes with bottles of liquid glue should not be left on any surface because it will quickly stick to it. You can make a holder to keep the applicator in a safe spot using a piece of wire twisted around the neck of the bottle, like shown in the sketch, with the ends bent up to hold the applicator.
Stop on a Chair Rocker for a Baby
For a baby, too small to rock without tipping the chair over, a small willow or other suitable rocking chair may be made safe in the following manner:
For a baby who is too small to rock without tipping the chair over, a small willow or other suitable rocking chair can be made safe like this:

The Strip on the Rocker Prevents the Child Tipping the Chair Too Far Either Way
The strip on the rocker stops the child from tipping the chair too far in either direction.
A strip, A, is fastened on the outside [154] of the rocker with small screws so that it may be removed without injuring the chair. A rubber-covered tack driven in on the under side at each end of the strip modifies the shock and the baby can rock to its heart's content without danger of turning over.—Contributed by Mrs. G. W. Coplin, Bay City, Mich.
A strip, A, is attached to the outside [154] of the rocker with small screws so that it can be taken off without damaging the chair. A rubber-covered tack is driven in on the underside at each end of the strip to reduce the shock, allowing the baby to rock happily without the risk of tipping over.—Contributed by Mrs. G. W. Coplin, Bay City, Mich.
Homemade Countersink for Wood
A round or flat-head bolt can be made into a good rosebit or reamer for countersinking holes for screw heads. In the illustration, Fig. 1 shows a reamer made of a round-head bolt, and Fig. 2, one made of a square-head bolt. The round-head makes the best reamer as more cutters can be filed in the surface and less work is required to file it into shape.
A round or flat-head bolt can be turned into an effective rosebit or reamer for countersinking holes for screw heads. In the illustration, Fig. 1 shows a reamer made from a round-head bolt, and Fig. 2 shows one made from a square-head bolt. The round-head bolt works best as a reamer because you can file more cutters into the surface, and it takes less effort to shape it.

Round and Square Heads of Bolts Shaped and Notched to Make Countersinks (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Round and square heads of bolts shaped and notched to create countersinks (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
To Maintain a Constant Level of Liquids in Vessels
It is frequently desirable in laboratory experiments, and in practical work as well, to maintain a constant level in a tank without allowing it to become full. In many cases an outlet pipe at a certain height in the side of the tank is not desirable, and in laboratory experiments with beakers or crocks is, of course, impossible.
It’s often necessary in lab experiments and practical work to keep a constant water level in a tank without letting it overflow. In many situations, having an outlet pipe at a specific height on the side of the tank isn’t ideal, and in lab experiments with beakers or containers, it’s obviously not possible.

The diagram shows a simple but effective constant-level device. The outer end of the inverted U-tube is curved upward so that it never empties. If desired, the upward curve may be omitted and the straight end immersed in a small vessel of water. All that is necessary now for the successful working of the device is that the inner or tank end, A, of the tube be lower than the outer end—in other words, below the level of the end B—and the inner end below the level of the fluid. Of course, the U-tube must be first filled with liquid and will then act as an intermittent, never-breaking siphon. Should the tank fill above the end B, the siphon drains the fluid down to that level and no lower, even if the inner leg of the tube reach the bottom. To maintain this level against loss by evaporation some slight inflow is necessary.
The diagram shows a simple but effective constant-level device. The outer end of the inverted U-tube is curved upward so it never empties. If needed, the upward curve can be removed, and the straight end can be placed into a small container of water. All that's required for the device to work successfully is that the inner or tank end, A, of the tube is lower than the outer end—in other words, below the level of end B—and the inner end is below the level of the fluid. Of course, the U-tube must first be filled with liquid and will then function as an intermittent, non-breaking siphon. If the tank fills above end B, the siphon will drain the fluid down to that level and no lower, even if the inner leg of the tube reaches the bottom. To maintain this level against evaporation loss, a small inflow is necessary.
It will be noted that if the inner end of the siphon were above the outer end, the siphon would break as soon as the liquid in the tank fell to the inner mouth.—Contributed by Harry N. Holmes, Richmond, Ind.
It should be noted that if the inner end of the siphon is higher than the outer end, the siphon will stop working as soon as the liquid in the tank drops to the inner opening. —Contributed by Harry N. Holmes, Richmond, Ind.
Homemade Electric Bed Warmer
The heat developed by a carbon-filament lamp is sufficiently high to allow its use as a heating element of, for instance, a bed warmer. There are a number of other small heaters which can be easily made and for which lamps form very suitable heating elements, but the bed warmer is probably the best example. All that is required is a tin covering which can be made of an old can about 3-1/2 in. in diameter. The top is cut out and the edge filed smooth. The lamp-socket end of the flexible cord is inserted in the can and the shade holder gripped over the opening. A small lamp of about five candlepower will do the heating.
The heat generated by a carbon-filament lamp is high enough to be used as a heating element, like in a bed warmer. There are several other small heaters that can be easily made using lamps as heating elements, but the bed warmer is probably the best example. All that’s needed is a tin cover, which can be made from an old can that's about 3-1/2 inches in diameter. Cut the top out and file the edge smooth. Insert the lamp-socket end of the flexible cord into the can and secure the shade holder over the opening. A small lamp with around five candlepower will provide the heat.
A flannel bag, large enough to slip over the tin can and provided with a neck that can be drawn together by means of a cord, gives the heater a more finished appearance, as well as making it more pleasant to the touch.
A flannel bag, big enough to cover the tin can and with a neck that can be tightened with a cord, gives the heater a more polished look and makes it nicer to touch.
A Flash-Light Telegraph on a Kite Line

The Flash of the Light on the String may be Read as Far as It can be Seen
The Flash of the Light on the String can be Read as far as it can be Seen
An ordinary pocket flash lamp is prepared in the following manner: A brass spring, as shown in the sketch, is bound tightly to the flash lamp with a cord, and two wires, one at each end, are twisted around the lamp's body, forming two loops at the top. The kite string is run through the loops and over the spring. The lamp is then placed near the kite. The ordinary pull on the kite string does not close the spring, but a sharp jerk will pull the string in contact with the push button and its slight pressure causes an instant flash of the light. By this method words may be spelled out in the telegraph code.—Contributed by Joe V. Romig, Allentown, Pa.
An ordinary pocket flashlight is set up like this: A brass spring, as shown in the sketch, is tightly secured to the flashlight with a cord, and two wires, one at each end, are twisted around the flashlight's body, creating two loops at the top. The kite string is threaded through the loops and over the spring. The flashlight is then positioned near the kite. The usual pull on the kite string doesn’t close the spring, but a quick jerk will pull the string to trigger the push button, and its slight pressure causes an instant flash of light. This way, words can be spelled out in Morse code.—Contributed by Joe V. Romig, Allentown, Pa.
Hangers for Barn Tools
Means should be provided to have a place for all the tools used in and about a barn. The forks and shovels are usually stood up in a corner, but they can be more conveniently taken care of by making a hanger for them. The illustration shows how a hanger can be easily made and screwed to the wall of a barn. The hanger is cut from a piece of board and has a hole bored into it the size of the handle on the fork or shovel, then a notch is sawn into the hole to pass the handle through. The board may contain one or as many notches as there are forks and shovels to be hung on it. The implements are hung with the fork or shovel end upward.—Contributed by R. Snyder, Glidden, Ia.
There should be a designated spot for all the tools used around the barn. Instead of just leaning forks and shovels in a corner, they can be stored more conveniently by creating a hanger for them. The illustration shows how to easily make and attach a hanger to the barn wall. The hanger is cut from a piece of board with a hole drilled the size of the handle on the fork or shovel, and a notch is cut into the hole to let the handle pass through. The board can have as many notches as there are forks and shovels to hang. The tools should be hung with the fork or shovel end facing up.—Contributed by R. Snyder, Glidden, Ia.

A Notched Board Provides a Way to Hang All the Tools Used about a Barn
A notched board offers a way to hang all the tools used around a barn.
Guide Ropes on a Bobsled
The sketch shows the front end of a bobsled or double runner made of a plank bolted upon two sleds. The front sled is so pivoted on the bolt A that it may be turned to steer the bob, and to accomplish this result the steersman ordinarily sits with his feet braced against the projecting ends of the crosspiece and passes the steering ropes outside of his feet, with the ropes crossed as shown. The crossing [156] of the ropes is supposed to add leverage, but that is quite wrong.
The sketch shows the front end of a bobsled or double runner made from a plank attached to two sleds. The front sled is mounted on bolt A in such a way that it can be turned to steer the bobsled. To do this, the steersman usually sits with his feet braced against the extended ends of the crosspiece and passes the steering ropes outside his feet, with the ropes crossed as shown. The crossing of the ropes is thought to provide more leverage, but that's actually incorrect.

The Most Efficient Way of Attaching Ropes to the Guiding Runners of a Bobsled
The Best Way to Attach Ropes to the Guiding Runners of a Bobsled
The rope, running from B to C, has a lever arm from A to E. If the ropes were not crossed, the rope would lie along the dotted line BD, whose lever arm is the distance AF, which is always greater than AE, therefore the uncrossed ropes have more leverage.
The rope running from B to C has a lever arm from A to E. If the ropes weren't crossed, the rope would lie along the dotted line BD, and its lever arm would be the distance AF, which is always greater than AE. Therefore, the uncrossed ropes provide more leverage.
Observe what takes place when the sled is steered to the left: The distance AE decreases much more rapidly than AF, and when the crossed ropes have lost all their power, the uncrossed ropes are still useful. Many a spill has been caused by turning the sled to a position from which the crossed ropes were unable to restore it to a central position, and most of such spills would have been avoided if the ropes had not been crossed.—Contributed by R. R. Raymond, Wilmington, Del.
Observe what happens when the sled is turned left: The distance AE decreases much faster than AF, and when the crossed ropes lose all their strength, the uncrossed ropes are still effective. Many falls have happened because the sled was turned to a position where the crossed ropes couldn’t bring it back to the center, and most of those accidents could have been avoided if the ropes hadn’t been crossed.—Contributed by R. R. Raymond, Wilmington, Del.
Brush Hanger for a Dark Room

Necessity may be the mother of invention, but it is also the grandmother of application, and application is the practical side of invention. Both the amateur and the professional photographer have been bothered by spotting and unequal development of negatives and prints in tray development, due to various causes, and sometimes by the presence of dirt particles or the unequal or incomplete flowing of the developer over the surface of the sensitive emulsion.
Necessity might be the mother of invention, but it's also the grandmother of application, and application is the practical side of invention. Both amateur and professional photographers have struggled with spotting and uneven development of negatives and prints in tray development, caused by different factors, and sometimes by dirt particles or the inconsistent or incomplete flow of the developer over the surface of the sensitive emulsion.
Most professionals and many amateurs are familiar with the use of the camel's-hair brush to avoid failures of this character, and many of them use a brush for local development in certain cases where it is necessary or desirable. Usually the brush is kept in a small glass cup, somewhere close at hand, but it is often in the way when not wanted and misplaced when most needed. The brush can be kept within reach and handy for the operator by arranging a light counterweight and pulley with a string attached to the brush, so that, normally, the brush will hang from the ceiling directly over the developing tray and can be obtained for use when desired.
Most professionals and many amateurs know how to use a camel's-hair brush to avoid this kind of problem, and many use a brush for local development in situations where it's necessary or helpful. Typically, the brush is stored in a small glass cup nearby, but it can often get in the way when it's not needed and get lost when it's most needed. The brush can be kept within arm's reach and easily accessible for the operator by setting up a light counterweight and pulley with a string attached to the brush, so that the brush hangs from the ceiling directly above the developing tray and can be taken down for use when needed.
The detail of this brush-string and counterweight combination was deliberately appropriated from the old plan of suspending the piece of chalk over a billiard table, so that the players could easily reach it, when needed, while, when released, it would be pulled out of the way by the counterweight. The developing brush thus suspended is always ready, never misplaced, nor in the way for other operations. This arrangement is particularly convenient where a bathroom is used as a dark room, and the shelf space is limited.
The design of this brush-string and counterweight setup was intentionally based on the old method of hanging a piece of chalk above a billiard table, making it easy for players to access it when they needed it, while the counterweight would pull it out of the way when it wasn’t in use. The brush is always ready to use, never lost, and not in the way of other tasks. This setup is especially useful when a bathroom is used as a darkroom and shelf space is limited.
This same manner of counterweighting chalk on the billiard table may be applied to a stove-lid lifter, to keep it within easy reach and always cool enough to handle. The simplest and most inexpensive way of making this apparatus is to cut off a small piece of lead pipe for a counterweight, and, in the absence of a suitable pulley, use an ordinary screweye fastened in the ceiling. The latter is really better than a pulley because the string cannot run off the screweye. The arrangement is better understood by referring to the sketch.
The same method of balancing chalk on a billiard table can be used for a stove-lid lifter, keeping it within easy reach and always cool enough to grab. The easiest and cheapest way to create this setup is to cut a small piece of lead pipe to use as a counterweight, and if there isn’t a suitable pulley available, use a regular screweye fixed to the ceiling. This option is actually better than a pulley because the string can’t slip off the screweye. You can better understand the arrangement by looking at the sketch.
Lighting a Basement Light
There was no switch at the basement door and it was difficult to find the droplight in the dark. Instead of going to the expense of placing a switch, the contrivance illustrated and described was rigged up and proved equal to the requirements.
There was no switch at the basement door, and it was hard to find the drop light in the dark. Instead of spending money on a switch, the setup shown and explained was put together and worked well for what was needed.
A 7/8-in. piece of wood was cut about 6 in. long by 2 in. wide and a recess made at one end for the socket, as shown. A 1/8-in. hole was drilled in the center, about 2 in. from one end, and [157] another, large enough to receive the projection from a pull socket, about 2 in. from the other end, or the end to be used as the bottom of the block. A clamp made of spring brass, as shown, was screwed securely to the board, to clamp the socket firmly. A wire was passed through the small hole and stretched across the room from the door at a height to bring the light about 6 ft. from the floor. Then the socket was clamped to the strip with the chain passed through the hole cut for it. The cord attached to the chain was run to the door casing, passed through a screweye and weighted with a nut or some light object, to keep it taut. To light the lamp or put it out only a pull on the string was necessary.
A 7/8-inch piece of wood was cut to be about 6 inches long and 2 inches wide, with a recess made at one end for the socket, as shown. A 1/8-inch hole was drilled in the center, about 2 inches from one end, and another hole, large enough to fit the projection from a pull socket, was made about 2 inches from the other end, which would be used as the bottom of the block. A clamp made of spring brass, as shown, was securely screwed to the board to hold the socket in place. A wire was passed through the small hole and stretched across the room from the door at a height that would bring the light about 6 feet off the floor. The socket was then clamped to the strip with the chain passed through the hole made for it. The cord attached to the chain was run to the door casing, passed through a screw eye, and weighted with a nut or some light object to keep it taut. To turn the lamp on or off, all that was needed was to pull on the string.

Socket Attachment to Turn a Basement Light On or Off from a Distance
Socket Attachment to Turn a Basement Light On or Off from a Distance
The light can be slid along on the wire from one end of the room to the other, or can be detached from the strip when desired by unhooking the cord from the chain and taking the socket from the clamp. If more desirable, the block can be fastened permanently to some object instead of being on the wire.—Contributed by L. M. Eifel, Chicago.
The light can be moved along the wire from one end of the room to the other, or it can be removed from the strip when needed by unhooking the cord from the chain and taking the socket off the clamp. If preferred, the block can be permanently attached to an object instead of being on the wire.—Contributed by L. M. Eifel, Chicago.
Projecting Protractor Readings
A simple and efficient means of projecting protractor readings to a larger size is shown in Fig. 1. One point of the compass is placed at the center of the protractor and an elastic band is looped between the points. Then the points are spread to the radius desired, and the protractor is read where the elastic band crosses its scale. A light band should be used, and looped as shown in Fig. 2. In this way a circle of any size may be quickly divided, if a pencil mark is made each time the band comes over the proper figure.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.
A simple and efficient way to enlarge protractor readings is shown in Fig. 1. One point of the compass is placed at the center of the protractor, and an elastic band is looped between the points. Then, spread the points to the desired radius, and read the protractor where the elastic band crosses the scale. Use a lightweight band and loop it as shown in Fig. 2. This method allows you to quickly divide a circle of any size, marking a pencil line each time the band aligns with the correct figure.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.

The Extension Marks can be Easily Read on the Protractor under the Elastic Band (Fig. 1)
The extension marks are easy to read on the protractor under the elastic band (Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
Removing Grease from Paint
When removing grease from paint by using ordinary cleaners, the paint is liable to come off in the washing. A good and cheaply applied method is to rub the painted surface with a paste of ordinary whiting. This is allowed to dry and when it is rubbed off with a cloth the dirt and grease is taken away with it. The whiting is cheap and can be purchased at any drug store.
When you try to clean grease off paint with regular cleaners, the paint might come off during the cleaning process. A good and inexpensive method is to rub the painted surface with a paste made from ordinary whiting. Let it dry, and when you wipe it off with a cloth, it will remove the dirt and grease along with it. Whiting is affordable and can be found at any drugstore.
A Door Stop

A very good door stop can be easily made of a piece of metal as shown in the sketch. The metal is bent and fastened with screws to the wall against which the door swings. The extending end fits under the door knob and prevents it from striking the wall.—Contributed by C. R. Poole, Los Angeles, California.
A great doorstop can be easily made from a piece of metal like the one shown in the sketch. The metal is bent and secured with screws to the wall that the door swings against. The extended end goes under the doorknob and stops it from hitting the wall.—Contributed by C. R. Poole, Los Angeles, California.
Stretching a Curtain without a Frame
A good way to avoid using the ordinary four-pole curtain stretcher is to make use of the following method. Take the lace curtain and fold it once lengthwise; then pin it up on a tightly stretched line with a large number of clothespins, and slip a clean pole between the two sides to keep it taut. This method not only stretches the curtain satisfactorily, but saves considerable time otherwise required in pinning the curtain to the four-sided frame.—Contributed by H. Wynning, Chicago, Ill.
A great way to skip using the standard four-pole curtain stretcher is to try this method. Take the lace curtain and fold it in half lengthwise; then pin it up on a tightly stretched line with plenty of clothespins, and slide a clean pole between the two sides to keep it tight. This technique not only stretches the curtain well but also saves a lot of time that you'd otherwise spend pinning the curtain to the four-sided frame.—Contributed by H. Wynning, Chicago, Ill.

A Lace Curtain Hung Double on a Line with a Pole Inserted in the Fold
A lace curtain was draped double over a line with a pole tucked into the fold.
Welding Small Resistance-Wire Connections
In making connections, especially in electrical heating devices subject to high temperatures, it is out of the question to use solder, since the temperature reached in the device would cause the solder to melt and run out. A convenient arrangement for welding the connections of flatirons, or any other fine wires, is shown in the illustration. The ends of the wires to be welded are twisted together, and the weld is completed by forming an arc, one electrode of which is the twisted connection and the other a piece of carbon. The resistance of the heating unit in the iron is sufficient to limit the amount of the current flow so that a short circuit does not result.—Contributed by G. Irving Davis, Albany, N. Y.
When making connections, especially in electrical heating devices that reach high temperatures, using solder is not an option because the heat would cause the solder to melt and drip out. A practical method for welding the connections of flatirons or any other delicate wires is shown in the illustration. The ends of the wires to be joined are twisted together, and the weld is completed by creating an arc, with one electrode being the twisted connection and the other a piece of carbon. The resistance of the heating unit in the iron is enough to control the current flow, preventing any short circuit from occurring.—Contributed by G. Irving Davis, Albany, N. Y.

An Arc is Formed with a Piece of Carbon, to Weld the Twisted Ends of Wire Together
An arc is created with a piece of carbon to fuse the twisted ends of the wire together.
Bench with Folding Seats
To provide a bench with seats, or shelves, which cannot easily be taken away unless the table is brought along, hinged brackets are attached to stationary crosspieces, which are fastened on the extended end braces of the table. When in use, the brackets are turned down, thereby providing a rigid support for anything that may be put on them. If it is desirable to have the brackets out of the way, as when carrying the bench, it is only necessary to fold them up.—Contributed by J. M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
To create a bench with seats or shelves that can't be easily removed unless the table is moved too, hinged brackets are attached to stationary crosspieces secured on the extended end braces of the table. When in use, the brackets are flipped down, providing sturdy support for anything placed on them. If you want the brackets out of the way, like when transporting the bench, you just need to fold them up.—Contributed by J. M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

Bench, or Table, with a Seat on Each Side That can be Folded for Carrying Purposes
Bench or table with a seat on each side that can be folded for easy carrying.
Rim of Wire Wastebasket Wrapped with Felt
In offices where wire wastebaskets are used, the finish of the desks is often marred by the top rim of the baskets rubbing against them. This can be overcome by wrapping strips of felt around the rim to form a buffer.—Contributed by Miss F. D. Schweiger, Kansas City, Mo.
In offices that use wire wastebaskets, the finish on the desks is often damaged by the top edge of the baskets rubbing against them. This can be fixed by wrapping strips of felt around the rim to create a buffer.—Contributed by Miss F. D. Schweiger, Kansas City, Mo.
A Homemade Roller Coaster
By J. H. Sanford
The popular roller coaster that furnishes untold amusement for the multitudes that patronize amusement parks during the summer can be easily duplicated in a smaller way on a vacant lot or back yard for the children of the home; or the boys of a neighborhood could contribute to a fund and construct quite an elaborate affair, on the same lines as described, for the combined use of the owners. The one described was built with a track, 90 ft. long, 5 ft. high at one end and 3 ft. at the other, the track between being placed on the ground. In coasting from the high end to the low one, the coaster will run up on the incline, then drift back to within 24 ft. of the starting end. The car was built to seat four children or two adults. The cost of all the materials for building this roller coaster did not exceed $10.
The popular roller coaster that provides endless fun for the crowds that visit amusement parks during the summer can be easily recreated on a vacant lot or in a backyard for the kids. Local boys could pitch in to create a fund and build a fairly impressive version, similar to the one described, for everyone's use. The one mentioned was made with a 90 ft. track, standing 5 ft. high at one end and 3 ft. at the other, with the track itself resting on the ground. When going from the high end to the low end, the coaster climbs the incline, then rolls back to within 24 ft. of the starting point. The car was designed to seat four kids or two adults. The total cost for all the materials needed to build this roller coaster was under $10.

Inexpensive Back-Yard Roller Coaster, Suitable for the Enjoyment of the Young as Well as the Older Persons
Inexpensive Backyard Roller Coaster, Perfect for Enjoying by Both Kids and Adults
The track is of simple construction and requires but little description. It is necessary to have it straight and nailed firmly to the crossties on the ground and to the trestles where it is elevated. The ties and trestles are placed about 6 ft. apart. The two trestles for the starting platform should be set so that there is a slant to the track of about 6 in. for starting the car without [160] pushing it. The car can be carried back for starting by adults, but for children a small rope can be used over the platform to draw it back on the track, or a small windlass may be arranged for the purpose.
The track is simply built and doesn't need much explanation. It should be straight and securely fastened to the crossties on the ground and to the trestles where it's elevated. The ties and trestles are spaced about 6 ft apart. The two trestles for the starting platform should be positioned with a slope of about 6 in. for launching the car without needing to push it. Adults can carry the car back to start, but for kids, a small rope can be used over the platform to pull it back on the track, or a small winch can be set up for this purpose.

Detail of the Car, Wheels and the Trestle, Which is Attached to a Tie
Detail of the car, wheels, and the trestle, which is connected to a tie
The main frame of the car is 3 ft. long and about 13 in. wide, firmly fastened at the corners. The axles for the wheels are machine steel, 19 in. long, turned up on the ends and threaded in the manner of a bicycle axle to fit parts of bicycle hubs, attached to the main frame as shown at A. The wheels are solid, 4 in. in diameter and 1 in. thick, and are set on the bicycle cone of the ball cup, after they are properly adjusted, and securely fastened between washers with a nut on the end of the axle. Guide wheels, B, are placed on the sides in the manner shown. These wheels are ordinary truck casters, not the revolving kind, 2 in. in diameter.
The main frame of the car is 3 ft. long and about 13 in. wide, securely attached at the corners. The axles for the wheels are made of machine steel, 19 in. long, turned up at the ends and threaded like a bicycle axle to fit parts of bicycle hubs, connected to the main frame as shown at A. The wheels are solid, 4 in. in diameter and 1 in. thick, and are mounted on the bicycle cone of the ball cup after they are properly adjusted, and securely fastened between washers with a nut at the end of the axle. Guide wheels, B, are positioned on the sides as illustrated. These wheels are standard truck casters, not the rotating type, measuring 2 in. in diameter.
About 1/2-in. clearance should be provided between the guide wheels B and the guard rail C, on the track. When the car is made in this manner it runs close to the track and there is no place where a child can get a foot or hand injured under or at the sides of the car. The one described has been used by all the children, large and small, for a year without accident.
About 1/2-inch clearance should be provided between the guide wheels B and the guard rail C on the track. When the car is made this way, it runs closely along the track, leaving no gaps where a child could hurt their foot or hand under or beside the car. The one described has been used by kids of all ages for a year without any accidents.
Door-Bell Alarm
A simple door-bell alarm for informing one when the door of a shop or dwelling is opened is shown in the accompanying sketch. It consists of a piece of spring brass, A, bent into a circle in the center so that it may be clamped on the doorknob bar by means of a small bolt or screw. The two ends of this piece should be separated as shown and a second piece, B, mounted on the door so that its outwardly projecting end is between the ends of the piece A. One terminal of an ordinary vibrating bell circuit is then connected under the head of the clamp screw, and the other terminal under one of the screws holding the piece B in place on the door. It is now obvious that the bell circuit will be completed and the alarm sounded when the knob is turned. Make sure that the piece A is bent so that the circuit is completed before the latch has moved a sufficient amount to allow the door to open.
A simple doorbell alarm for notifying someone when the door of a shop or home is opened is shown in the accompanying sketch. It consists of a piece of spring brass, A, bent into a circle in the center so that it can be clamped onto the doorknob bar using a small bolt or screw. The two ends of this piece should be separated as shown, and a second piece, B, should be mounted on the door so that its projecting end is between the ends of piece A. One terminal of a standard vibrating bell circuit is then connected under the head of the clamp screw, and the other terminal under one of the screws holding piece B in place on the door. It’s clear that the bell circuit will be completed and the alarm will sound when the knob is turned. Ensure that piece A is bent so that the circuit is completed before the latch has moved enough to allow the door to open.

Wiring Diagram and Connections to an Electric Bell That Rings When a Door Knob is Turned
Wiring Diagram and Connections to an Electric Bell That Rings When a Door Knob is Turned
The circuit leading to and from the switch may be completed through the hinges of the door, but it would be better to use small coil springs as shown. There would then be no likelihood of the circuit being open at any time, which might occur if the hinges were used.
The circuit going to and from the switch can be completed through the door hinges, but it's better to use small coil springs as shown. This way, there's no chance of the circuit being interrupted at any time, which could happen if the hinges were used.
Discolored coffee and teapots may be restored to their original brightness by boiling them a few minutes in a solution of borax water.
Discolored coffee and teapots can be restored to their original brightness by boiling them for a few minutes in a borax water solution.
A Playground Ferris Wheel
The whole wheel is carried on two uprights, each 3 by 4 in., by 10 ft. long. In the upper ends of these pieces, A, a half circle is cut out to receive the main shaft B. The end of the uprights are sunk 3 ft. into the earth and about 4 ft. apart, then braced as shown. They are further braced by wires attached to rings which are secured with staples near the top. The bearings should each have a cap to keep the shaft in place. These can be made of blocks of wood with a semicircle cut out, the blocks being nailed over the shaft, while it is in place, the nails entering the ends of the uprights.
The entire wheel is supported by two vertical posts, each measuring 3 by 4 inches and 10 feet long. At the top of these posts, A, a half-circle is carved out to hold the main shaft B. The ends of the posts are buried 3 feet in the ground and spaced about 4 feet apart, then braced as shown. They are further supported by wires connected to rings secured with staples near the top. Each bearing should have a cap to keep the shaft in position. These can be made from blocks of wood with a semicircle cut out, which are nailed over the shaft while it’s in place, with the nails going into the ends of the posts.

Detail of the Uprights, Axle and Spokes, and the End and Side Elevations of the Completed Wheel, Showing Braces and Cars Attached
Detail of the Uprights, Axle, and Spokes, and the Front and Side Views of the Finished Wheel, Showing Braces and Cars Attached
The main shaft C is made of a 2-1/2-in. square piece of good material, 4 ft. long. The ends are made round to serve as bearings, and the square part is fitted with the spokes or car carriers. These consist of 4 pieces, each 1 in. thick, 4 in. wide and 13 ft. long. In the center of each piece cut a notch one-half the thickness so that when each pair of pieces is crossed they will fit together with the surfaces smooth, as shown at D. A square hole is cut through the pieces as shown to fit on the square part of the main axle. While it is not shown in the illustration, it is best to strengthen this joint with another piece of wood, cut to fit on the axle and securely attached to the spokes.
The main shaft C is a 2-1/2-inch square piece of quality material, 4 feet long. The ends are rounded to act as bearings, and the square section is fitted with the spokes or car carriers. These consist of 4 pieces, each 1 inch thick, 4 inches wide, and 13 feet long. In the center of each piece, cut a notch that’s half the thickness so that when each pair of pieces overlaps, they will connect smoothly at the surfaces, as shown at D. A square hole is cut through the pieces to fit on the square section of the main axle. Although it’s not shown in the illustration, it’s a good idea to reinforce this joint with another piece of wood, shaped to fit over the axle and securely attached to the spokes.
The cars or carriers are made of two sugar barrels cut in half. The hoops are then securely nailed, both inside and outside; a block of wood, E, securely attached to the half barrel on the outside, and another block on the inside opposite the outside block. Holes are bored 2-1/2 ft. from the ends of the spokes and a bolt run through them and through the blocks on the edges of the half barrels. The extending ends of the spokes are used to propel the wheel. Four children can ride in the wheel at one time.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
The cars or carriers are made from two sugar barrels cut in half. The hoops are then securely nailed both inside and outside; a block of wood, E, is firmly attached to the outside of the half barrel, with another block on the inside directly opposite the outside block. Holes are drilled 2-1/2 feet from the ends of the spokes, and a bolt is passed through them and through the blocks on the edges of the half barrels. The protruding ends of the spokes are used to drive the wheel. Four kids can ride in the wheel at the same time.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
A Merry-Go-Round Pole
An inexpensive merry-go-round can be made of a single pole set in the ground where there is sufficient vacant space for the turning of the ropes. The pole may be of gas pipe or wood, long enough to extend about 12 ft. above the ground. An iron wheel is attached on the upper end so that it will revolve easily on an axle, which may be an iron pin driven into the post. A few iron washers placed on the pin under the wheel will reduce the friction.
An affordable merry-go-round can be constructed using a single pole secured in the ground, where there is enough open space for the ropes to turn. The pole can be made from gas pipe or wood, and should be about 12 ft. tall above the ground. An iron wheel is fixed to the top so it can spin smoothly on an axle, which can be an iron pin driven into the post. A few iron washers placed on the pin under the wheel will help minimize friction.

The Ropes being Tied to the Wheel Rim will Easily Turn around the Pole
The ropes tied to the wheel rim will easily turn around the pole.
Ropes of varying lengths are tied to the rim of the wheel. The rider takes hold of a rope and runs around the pole to start the wheel in motion, then he swings clear of the ground. Streamers of different colors and flowers for special occasions may be attached to make a pretty display.—Contributed by J. Bert Mitchell, Wichita, Kans.
Ropes of different lengths are tied to the edge of the wheel. The rider grabs a rope and runs around the pole to get the wheel moving, then swings up off the ground. Colorful streamers and flowers for special occasions can be added to create a nice display.—Contributed by J. Bert Mitchell, Wichita, Kans.
A Theatrical Night Scene with the Appearance of Fireflies
Use small shining Christmas-tree balls, about the size of a hickory nut, strung on strong black linen threads. The thread is put loosely over a hook at the back of the stage among the evergreens that are used for the background. The ends of the threads are brought, like a pair of reins, to the front of the stage, diagonally, and there manipulated by some one in a wing near the front, standing high enough to prevent the threads from touching the heads of the actors. These bright little particles darting back and forth among the trees appear very lifelike, and with the addition of a crescent moon just peeping through the trees, the likeness to a summer night is quite striking.
Use small, shiny Christmas tree balls, about the size of a hickory nut, strung on strong black linen threads. The thread is loosely placed over a hook at the back of the stage among the evergreens that serve as the background. The ends of the threads are brought, like a pair of reins, to the front of the stage diagonally, where someone in the wing near the front manipulates them, standing high enough to keep the threads from touching the actors' heads. These bright little particles darting back and forth among the trees look very lifelike, and with a crescent moon just peeking through the trees, the resemblance to a summer night is quite striking.
The moon effect is made by using a piece of dark cardboard, about 2 ft. square, covered thickly with small green boughs, and by cutting a crescent-shaped opening in the center, covering it with yellow tissue paper. This cardboard is placed well back in the trees and a lantern hung behind it.—Contributed by Miss S. E. Jocelyn, New Haven, Conn.
The moon effect is created by taking a piece of dark cardboard, around 2 ft. square, and covering it with small green branches. Then cut a crescent-shaped opening in the middle and cover it with yellow tissue paper. This cardboard should be placed further back in the trees with a lantern hung behind it.—Contributed by Miss S. E. Jocelyn, New Haven, Conn.
Hulling Walnuts
Procure a barrel that is water-tight and mount it on a shaft so that it runs between standards like a barrel churn. Fill the barrel about half full of walnuts, cover them with water and throw in a small quantity of gravel as grinding material. Close the opening tightly and turn the barrel for about 20 minutes. The walnuts will come out clean and smooth as glass.—Contributed by Arthur Seufert, The Dalles, Oregon.
Get a water-tight barrel and put it on a shaft so it spins between supports like a barrel churn. Fill the barrel halfway with walnuts, cover them with water, and add a small amount of gravel as a grinding material. Seal the opening tightly and turn the barrel for about 20 minutes. The walnuts will come out clean and smooth as glass.—Contributed by Arthur Seufert, The Dalles, Oregon.
Stick for Lowering Top Sash of a Window
To make it easy to raise and lower the upper sash of a bathroom window which is behind the bathtub I devised the following: Procuring two screweyes I opened one sufficiently to slip it into the other as shown at A. Then [163] one was screwed into the top rail of the sash and the other into the end of a light stick a little longer than the length of upper sash.
To make it easier to raise and lower the upper sash of a bathroom window behind the bathtub, I came up with this idea: I got two screw eyes and opened one enough to slip it into the other, as shown at A. Then [163] one was screwed into the top rail of the sash, and the other was secured to the end of a light stick that was a bit longer than the upper sash.

The Stick is Fastened to the Window Sash with Screweyes and is Always Ready for Use
The stick is attached to the window frame with screw eyes and is always ready to use.
The device is left on the window permanently and affords a ready means of handling the sash without stepping into the bathtub, which would otherwise be necessary.—Contributed by W. E. Morey, Chicago.
The device stays on the window permanently and provides an easy way to operate the sash without having to step into the bathtub, which would be required otherwise.—Contributed by W. E. Morey, Chicago.
An Adjustable Hacksaw Frame
The frame is constructed of cold-rolled steel, 1/4 in. in diameter and 17-1/2 in. long, bent into the shape shown and then cut in two parts at A. Starting at a point about 5/16 in. from the ends made by the cut, drill 1/8-in. holes, then space three other holes 1 in. between centers and drill them 1/8 in. in diameter.
The frame is made from cold-rolled steel, 1/4 inch in diameter and 17-1/2 inches long, bent into the shape shown and then cut into two parts at A. Starting about 5/16 inch from the ends created by the cut, drill 1/8-inch holes, then space three additional holes 1 inch apart from center to center and drill them 1/8 inch in diameter.

The Frame is Shaped of Cold-Rolled Steel and Made Adjustable with a Piece of Steel Tubing
The frame is made of cold-rolled steel and can be adjusted with a piece of steel tubing.
A piece of steel tubing, 1/4 in. in inside diameter and 6-3/4 in. long, is notched on the ends to receive the pins B and C. Slots are cut in the ends D and E, to admit the blade of a saw, and half-round notches filed on the outside surface for holding pins used in the hole of the saw blade. The spring of the steel will be sufficient to keep the saw blade in place. The 1/8-in. holes in the frame will permit adjustment for different lengths of blades.—Contributed by Clarence B. Hanson, Fitchburg, Mass.
A piece of steel tubing, 1/4 inch in inside diameter and 6-3/4 inches long, is notched at the ends to hold the pins B and C. Slots are cut into the ends D and E to allow the blade of a saw to fit, and half-round notches are filed on the outside surface for holding pins that go into the hole of the saw blade. The spring of the steel will be strong enough to keep the saw blade in place. The 1/8-inch holes in the frame will allow adjustments for different blade lengths.—Contributed by Clarence B. Hanson, Fitchburg, Mass.
A Bedroom Cabinet
The cabinet shown in the illustration can be made an ornament with a little care in workmanship and a choice selection of materials. The cabinet may be either fastened to the head or foot of the bed, facing in either of two directions.
The cabinet shown in the illustration can be made into a beautiful piece with some attention to detail and a thoughtful selection of materials. You can attach the cabinet to either the head or foot of the bed, facing in one of two directions.

The Cabinet Makes a Handy Place to Keep Necessary Articles for a Sick Person
The cabinet is a convenient spot to store essential items for someone who is unwell.
The size of the cabinet will depend on the choice of the maker, and if the bed is brass, the wood can be finished natural and fitted with brass bands for brackets and holding clips.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
The size of the cabinet will depend on the maker's choice, and if the bed is made of brass, the wood can be left natural and outfitted with brass bands for brackets and holding clips.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
A Dull Black for Cameras
Such parts of a camera that are apt to reflect light must be covered with a dull black. A mixture for this purpose is made of lampblack, about a teaspoonful, and enough gold size to make a paste as thick as putty. Add about twice the volume of turpentine and apply to the parts with a camel's-hair brush.
Parts of a camera that might reflect light should be covered with a matte black finish. To make this mixture, use about a teaspoon of lampblack and enough gold size to create a paste that's as thick as putty. Then, add about twice the amount of turpentine and apply it to those parts using a camel's-hair brush.
As the turpentine fumes are detrimental to the sensitive plate, the camera should be left open until these fumes have entirely disappeared.
As the turpentine fumes can harm the sensitive plate, the camera should be left open until these fumes have completely gone.
A Door Fastener

Sometimes it is necessary to fasten a door in a manner to prevent children from opening it, yet so that it is easily opened from either side. This can be done by putting a screw or curtain hook on the inside of the door frame and using a piece of cord long enough to loop over both hooks. A person coming in or out can remove the loop from either side.—Contributed by John A. Cohalan, Philadelphia, Pa.
Sometimes you need to secure a door in a way that keeps children from opening it but still allows it to be easily opened from either side. You can achieve this by attaching a screw or a curtain hook on the inside of the door frame and using a piece of cord long enough to loop over both hooks. Anyone coming in or out can simply remove the loop from either side.—Contributed by John A. Cohalan, Philadelphia, Pa.
A floor wax can be made by melting 1 lb. of yellow beeswax in 1/2 pt. of hot, raw linseed oil; then adding 1 pt. of turpentine.
A floor wax can be made by melting 1 lb. of yellow beeswax in 1/2 pt. of hot, raw linseed oil, then adding 1 pt. of turpentine.
Umbrella Used as a Flower Trellis
Procure a discarded umbrella and remove the cloth, leaving only the steel frame. Join the ends of the ribs by running a fine wire through the tip of each rib and giving it one turn around to hold them at equal distances apart. The handle is then inserted in the ground and some climbing vine planted beneath it. The plant will climb all over the steel frame and make a very attractive lawn piece.—Contributed by John F. Campbell, N. Somerville, Massachusetts.
Get an old umbrella and take off the fabric, leaving just the metal frame. Connect the ends of the ribs by threading a thin wire through the tip of each rib and twisting it once to keep them evenly spaced. Then, stick the handle in the ground and plant a climbing vine underneath it. The plant will grow all over the metal frame and create a beautiful lawn decoration.—Contributed by John F. Campbell, N. Somerville, Massachusetts.

Frame Supporting a Vine
Vine Support Frame
Combined Shade and Awning
An ordinary window shade makes a good awning as well as a shade, if it is attached to the outside of the window with the device shown in the illustration. The shade and spring roller are put into a box for protection from the weather and the box is fastened in the window casing at the top. A narrow slit on the under side of the box permits the shade to be drawn out. The stick at the end is removed and a U-shaped wire inserted in the hem in its stead. The wire is bent so the ends may be inserted in holes in the window casing. As the shade is drawn out, it is extended outward by the wire in the position of an awning.—Contributed by Arthur Kesl, Chicago, Ill.
An ordinary window shade can also serve as a great awning if it's attached to the outside of the window using the device shown in the illustration. The shade and spring roller are housed in a box to protect them from the weather, and the box is secured at the top of the window frame. A narrow slit on the underside of the box allows the shade to be pulled out. The stick at the end is taken out and a U-shaped wire is inserted into the hem instead. The wire is bent so that the ends can be fitted into holes in the window frame. As the shade is pulled out, it extends outward like an awning.—Contributed by Arthur Kesl, Chicago, Ill.

Shade Attachments
Shade Attachments
Vaulting-Pole Attachments
Some means must be provided on vaulting-pole standards to allow for the free release of the pole should the vaulter strike it in going over. One of the simplest of the many devices that can be used for this purpose is shown in Fig. 1. It is made of heavy wire, bent and slipped over the standard as shown in Fig. 2. The projection on the inside of the link is used similar to the tongue of a buckle in adjusting the height of the pole on the standards.
Some way needs to be set up on vaulting-pole standards to allow the pole to be released easily if the vaulter hits it while going over. One of the simplest devices that can be used for this is shown in Fig. 1. It’s made of heavy wire, bent and slipped over the standard as shown in Fig. 2. The projection on the inside of the link is used like the tongue of a buckle to adjust the height of the pole on the standards.

Pole Adjuster on Standard (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Pole Adjuster on Standard (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Each standard has a series of holes on its front side. These holes may be numbered for convenience. The pole in place is shown in Fig. 3.—Contributed by John Dunlap, Craghead, Tollcross, England.
Each standard has a series of holes on its front. These holes may be numbered for convenience. The pole in place is shown in Fig. 3.—Contributed by John Dunlap, Craghead, Tollcross, England.
Separating Drinking Glasses
When two thin glasses are put one into the other they often become stuck and cannot be removed. To separate them with ease, set the lower glass in warm (not hot) water and pour cold water in the upper one. The expansion of the lower and the contraction of the upper will make release an easy matter.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
When two thin glasses are stacked inside each other, they can get stuck and won't come apart. To easily separate them, place the bottom glass in warm (not hot) water and pour cold water into the top one. The bottom glass will expand while the top one contracts, making it easy to pull them apart. —Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
Bronze striping, when thoroughly dry, should be covered with a thin coat of white shellac to keep it from tarnishing.
Bronze striping, when completely dry, should be coated with a thin layer of white shellac to prevent it from tarnishing.
A Magic String
Procure a few pieces of cotton string, each about 1-1/2 ft. long, and fill them well with soap. Prepare a brine by dissolving three tablespoonfuls of salt in a cup of water. Place the strings in the brine and allow them to soak for two hours, or longer. It is necessary that they be thoroughly saturated with the brine.
Get a few pieces of cotton string, each about 1.5 feet long, and soak them in soap. Make a brine by dissolving three tablespoons of salt in a cup of water. Put the strings in the brine and let them soak for two hours or longer. They need to be completely soaked in the brine.
When taken out of the brine and thoroughly dried, suspend one of them from a nail on a ledge, and hang a finger ring on its lower end. Apply a lighted match to the string and allow it to burn. The ring will not fall, but will hang by the ash.—Contributed by C. Frank Carber, Dorchester, Mass.
When you take one out of the brine and dry it off completely, hang it from a nail on a shelf and place a finger ring on its lower end. Light the string with a match and let it burn. The ring won’t fall; it will stay hanging by the ash. —Contributed by C. Frank Carber, Dorchester, Mass.
Edging Flower Beds
To improve the appearance of a flower bed, it must be edged evenly and quite often. As this became a tiresome task, I constructed an edger, as shown in the sketch. It consists of a wheel on a 4-ft. length of material, 2 by 4 in. in size, made tapering and having a cross handle, 18 in. long, attached to its end. The wheel is 8 in. in diameter, and the cutter is attached, as shown, across the center of the wheel axle, to make the edger turn easily on curves and corners. The cutter is 12 in. long and turned under 1-1/2 in. It is pushed along in the same manner as a garden cultivator.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Amherstburg, Can.
To make a flower bed look better, it needs to be edged evenly and frequently. Since this became a tiring job, I built an edger, as shown in the sketch. It has a wheel attached to a 4-ft. long piece of 2 by 4 material, shaped to taper, with a cross handle that is 18 in. long connected to one end. The wheel is 8 in. in diameter, and the cutter is fixed across the center of the wheel axle to help the edger turn smoothly around curves and corners. The cutter is 12 in. long and turned under 1-1/2 in. It is pushed along just like a garden cultivator. —Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Amherstburg, Can.

An Edger, Similar to a Garden Plow, for Quickly Trimming the Sod around a Flower Bed
An Edger, Like a Garden Plow, for Quickly Trimming the Grass around a Flower Bed
An Electric Stirring Machine
Desiring a stirring machine for mixing photographic chemicals, I set about to design the one shown in the illustration. The base and upright are made of pine, 1 in. thick, the former 8 in. wide and 10 in. long, the latter 8 in. wide and 16 in. long. A 3/8 in. slot, 12 in. long, is cut in the center of the upright, and two pieces of sheet metal or tin, 2 in. wide and 12 in. long, bent at right angles along the center of their length, are placed at equal distances, on each side of the slot, and fastened with screws. The distance between these pieces depends on the motor used, as its base should fit snugly between them.
Wanting a stirring machine for mixing photographic chemicals, I started designing the one shown in the illustration. The base and upright are made of pine, 1 inch thick, the former 8 inches wide and 10 inches long, the latter 8 inches wide and 16 inches long. A 3/8 inch slot, 12 inches long, is cut in the center of the upright, and two pieces of sheet metal or tin, 2 inches wide and 12 inches long, bent at right angles along the center of their length, are placed at equal distances on each side of the slot and secured with screws. The distance between these pieces depends on the motor used, as its base should fit snugly between them.

A Self-Contained Electric Stirring Machine for Use in Mixing Photographic Chemicals
A Standalone Electric Stirring Machine for Mixing Photographic Chemicals
A small battery motor is purchased, [166] and its shaft is removed and replaced with one measuring 10 in. in length. To the end of the shaft is soldered a piece of wire, bent as shown in the sketch. A bolt is attached to the center of the motor base, so that its threaded end will pass through the slot in the upright, where it is held with a wing nut. The battery cells may be placed on the back of the upright and a small switch mounted at the top and in front.—Contributed by Ray F. Yates, Niagara Falls, N. Y.
A small battery motor is bought, [166] and its shaft is taken out and replaced with one that’s 10 in. long. A piece of wire is soldered to the end of the shaft, bent as shown in the sketch. A bolt is attached to the center of the motor base so that its threaded end goes through the slot in the upright, where it's secured with a wing nut. The battery cells can be placed on the back of the upright, and a small switch can be mounted at the top and in front.—Contributed by Ray F. Yates, Niagara Falls, N. Y.
A Clothes Rack
The rack is constructed of hard wood throughout, and as each piece is made, it should be sandpapered and varnished or otherwise finished. The plan view is shown in Fig. 1; the construction of an arm, in Fig. 2; and the pin, in Fig. 3.
The rack is made entirely of hardwood, and each piece should be sanded and varnished or finished as it's made. The layout is shown in Fig. 1; the construction of an arm is in Fig. 2; and the pin is in Fig. 3.

Any Number of Arms Up to Its Limit may be Used at a Time (Fig. 1)
Any number of arms up to its limit can be used at one time (Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
The base is 7/8 in. thick and of the dimensions shown in Fig. 4. The projection on each side, measuring 6-1/2 in. long and 1 in. wide, is made separately and glued to the main part after dressing and beveling the edges.
The base is 7/8 in. thick and has the dimensions shown in Fig. 4. The projection on each side, which is 6-1/2 in. long and 1 in. wide, is made separately and glued to the main part after smoothing and beveling the edges.
The shelf consists of material 2 in. thick and made in a semicircular form on a radius of 5-3/4 in. On this arc, lay off chords, as shown in Fig. 1; the first ones on each side being one-half the length of the others. Carefully square up the edges for appearance. To lay off the post holes, scribe an arc of a circle on a 4-7/8-in. radius. Start at the edge on this arc and lay off eight chords of equal lengths, and bore 1/2-in. holes on the marks.
The shelf is made of material that is 2 inches thick and shaped in a semicircular form with a radius of 5-3/4 inches. On this arc, mark off chords as shown in Fig. 1; the first ones on each side should be half the length of the others. Make sure to square the edges for a neat appearance. To mark the post holes, draw an arc of a circle with a 4-7/8-inch radius. Starting at the edge of this arc, mark off eight chords of equal lengths, and drill 1/2-inch holes at the marks.
The posts are turned up, as shown by the detail, Fig. 3. This will require seven posts and two half posts. The half posts are secured to the base with small brads. The round part at the end is turned slightly tapering, so as to make a tight fit in the hole of the shelf. After stringing the posts on a piece of brass wire, 1/8 in. in diameter, and bending it in the proper shape, the posts are glued in the holes.
The posts are raised, as illustrated in Fig. 3. This will need seven full posts and two half posts. The half posts are attached to the base with small brads. The rounded end is slightly tapered to ensure a snug fit in the hole of the shelf. After threading the posts onto a piece of 1/8 in. diameter brass wire and shaping it accordingly, the posts are glued into the holes.
A T-shaped slot with a long top and a short leg is cut out with a scroll saw in one end of each arm. Make sure to have each slot exactly 1/2 in. from the upper side of each arm. All edges should be well rounded to prevent tearing of the clothes.
A T-shaped slot with a long top and a short leg is cut out with a scroll saw at one end of each arm. Make sure to position each slot exactly 1/2 in. from the upper side of each arm. All edges should be nicely rounded to avoid tearing the fabric.
Make a semicircular platform for the arms to bear upon when extended. This may be either half of a turned disk or built up in the three segments, each fastened with screws to the base. If the brass wire is exactly 1 in. from the shelf and the thickness of the wood between the T-slot and the upper edge of the arm 1/2 in., the thickness of the platform should be slightly under 1/2 in. to make the arms rest horizontally when they are extended.
Make a semicircular platform for the arms to rest on when extended. This can be either half of a turned disk or constructed in three segments, each secured with screws to the base. If the brass wire is exactly 1 inch from the shelf and the thickness of the wood between the T-slot and the upper edge of the arm is 1/2 inch, then the thickness of the platform should be just under 1/2 inch to ensure the arms rest horizontally when extended.
The shelf is fastened to the base with three or four 2-in. screws, and the ends of the brass wire are run through holes in the base and clinched on the back side. The rack may be fastened in place on the kitchen wall with two large wood screws, or, if the wall is brick, with expansion bolts. The fastening in either case must be secure to hold the heavy weight of wet clothes.—Contributed by D. A. Price, Wilmington, Del.
The shelf is attached to the base with three or four 2-inch screws, and the ends of the brass wire are threaded through holes in the base and secured on the back. The rack can be secured to the kitchen wall with two large wood screws, or, if the wall is brick, with expansion bolts. The fastening must be strong enough to support the heavy weight of wet clothes.—Contributed by D. A. Price, Wilmington, Del.
How to Make a Pair of Foot Boats
On ponds or small lakes not deep enough for a boat one can use the foot boats, as illustrated, for walking on the water. The boats are made of white wood, known as basswood, as this wood is easily bent when steamed, and [167] the curved part should be shaped neatly.
On ponds or small lakes that aren't deep enough for a boat, you can use foot boats, like the ones shown, for walking on the water. These boats are made of white wood called basswood, which can be easily bent when steamed, and the curved part should be shaped nicely. [167]

Foot Boats for Walking on Shallow Water Where a Boat cannot be Used
Foot Boats for Walking in Shallow Water Where a Boat Can't Be Used
Two sides are cut out, as shown, and the boards are nailed or, better still, screwed to them. Each straight part may consist of one piece, in which case there will be no joints to make waterproof, but if boards of sufficient size cannot be had, pieces can be used. In this instance the edges should be planed smooth, so that a good joint may be had, which can be made watertight with white lead.
Two sides are cut out, as shown, and the boards are nailed or, even better, screwed to them. Each straight part can be a single piece, which means there won’t be any joints to seal against water. However, if you can’t get boards that are big enough, you can use smaller pieces. In this case, the edges should be planed smooth to ensure a good joint, which can be sealed with white lead to make it watertight.
It is best to make the bottom of one piece if possible, at least for the length of the curve. The wood is thoroughly steamed, then fastened in place on the curved part.
It’s best to create the bottom as one continuous piece if you can, at least for the length of the curve. The wood is thoroughly steamed, then secured in place on the curved area.
A strap of suitable length is fastened on the top for the toe, so that the boats can be controlled with the feet.
A strap of the right length is attached on top for the toe, allowing the boats to be steered with the feet.
To propel the boats along easily, a web or wing should be attached to the under side, so that it will catch the water on the back thrust while it will fold up when the boat is slid forward.—Contributed by Waldo Saul, Lexington, Mass.
To help move the boats more easily, a web or wing should be fixed to the underside, so it can catch the water during the backward push, while folding up when the boat moves forward.—Contributed by Waldo Saul, Lexington, Mass.
A Green-Corn Holder
Neat and attractive green-corn holders for table use can be made of small-sized glass drawer knobs, having a bolt 1 in. in length. The bolt head is cut off with a hacksaw, and its body is filed to make four sides running to a taper, leaving enough threads to secure it in the knob. The threads are smeared with white lead, then it is screwed into the knob and sufficient time allowed for the lead to set before using it.
Neat and stylish green-corn holders for the table can be made from small glass drawer knobs, featuring a 1-inch long bolt. Cut off the bolt head with a hacksaw and file the body to create four tapered sides, leaving enough threads to secure it in the knob. Coat the threads with white lead, screw it into the knob, and let it sit for a while to allow the lead to set before using it.

The Glass Knobs Make a Clean and Sanitary Holder for the Ear of Corn
The glass knobs create a clean and sanitary holder for the ear of corn.
A pair of knobs are required for each ear of corn served. The square bolt end will hold the ear securely while the kernels are eaten from the cob.—Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas, Texas.
A pair of corn on the cob holders is needed for each ear of corn served. The square end will keep the ear steady while the kernels are eaten off the cob.—Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas, Texas.
Inflating Toy Balloons
The inflation of rubber balloons may be accomplished with manufactured gas by using the simple pipe arrangement shown in the sketch. The connection A is for the gas hose, which is similar to those used for a table lamp. The gas bag B is a football or punching bag connected to the pipe as shown. This receives the gas as it is let in by the valve A. The toy balloon C is connected to the pipe in the same manner and the valve D used to regulate the flow of gas. The gas is easily pressed out of the ball into the balloon.
Inflating rubber balloons can be done with manufactured gas using the simple pipe setup shown in the sketch. Connection A is for the gas hose, which is similar to those used for a table lamp. The gas bag B is a football or punching bag connected to the pipe as indicated. It receives the gas as it flows in through valve A. The toy balloon C is attached to the pipe in the same way, and valve D is used to control the gas flow. The gas can be easily forced out of the ball into the balloon.

Pipe Arrangement, Punching Bag and Valves to Admit Gas to a Toy Rubber Balloon
Pipe Arrangement, Punching Bag, and Valves to Let Gas into a Toy Rubber Balloon
As hydrogen gas is much better than the manufactured gas, it is best to use and can be put in the balloon in the same manner.
As hydrogen gas is much better than manufactured gas, it’s best to use it and can be used in the balloon in the same way.
Electric-Light Mystery
A novel attraction for a window display can be made of a piece of plate glass neatly mounted on a wood base, and an electric light which is placed on the top edge and may be lighted apparently without any wire connections.
A unique attraction for a window display can be created using a piece of glass nicely set on a wooden base, along with an electric light positioned at the top edge that appears to be lit without any visible wires.

Electric Light Mounted on Top of a Plate Glass with Hidden Connections on the Glass Edge
Electric light positioned on top of a glass plate with concealed connections along the edge.
The method of concealing the connections is to paint the edges of the glass green, then, before the paint is quite dry, lay on a thin strip of copper, making the connections at the base on both sides, and to the lamp in the same manner. Another coat of paint is applied to cover the strip. The color should be an imitation of the greenish tint of glass edges. Any desired lettering can be put on the glass.—Contributed by O. Simonson, Brooklyn, N. Y.
The way to hide the connections is to paint the edges of the glass green. Then, before the paint dries completely, apply a thin strip of copper, connecting it at the base on both sides and to the lamp in the same way. Another coat of paint is added to cover the strip. The color should mimic the greenish tint of the glass edges. Any lettering you want can be added to the glass.—Contributed by O. Simonson, Brooklyn, N. Y.
An Oar Holder
Persons rowing boats, particularly beginners, find that the oars will slip out of the oarlocks, turn or fall into the water. This may be avoided by turning a screweye of sufficient size to prevent binding on the lock into the oar and placing it over the lock as shown at A, so that the pull will be against the metal. The oars will never slip or jump out, will always be in the right position, and it is not necessary to pull them into the boat to prevent loss when not rowing. The locks will not wear the oars, as the pull is on the metal eye. Place the eye so it will have a horizontal position on the side of the oar when the blade is in its right position.
People rowing boats, especially beginners, often find that the oars can slip out of the oarlocks, rotate, or fall into the water. This can be avoided by installing a screw eye of a suitable size to prevent binding on the lock into the oar and positioning it over the lock as shown at A, so that the force will be against the metal. The oars will never slip or come out, will always be in the correct position, and there's no need to pull them into the boat to avoid losing them when not rowing. The locks won’t wear down the oars since the force is on the metal eye. Position the eye so it’s horizontal on the side of the oar when the blade is in the correct position.

The Screweye in Position on the Oar and over One Prong of the Oarlock
The screw eye is positioned on the oar and over one prong of the oarlock.
Cooking Food in Paper
A flat piece of paper is much more convenient to use than a paper sack in cooking, as it can be better fitted to the size of the article to be cooked. Wrap the article as a grocer wraps sugar, folding and refolding the two edges together until the package is of the proper size, then fasten with clips and proceed to close the ends in the same way. This avoids all pasted seams and makes the package airtight.—Contributed by J. J. A. Parker, Metamora, O.
A flat piece of paper is way easier to use than a paper bag when cooking because it can be shaped better to fit the item being cooked. Wrap the item like a grocer does with sugar, folding and refolding the two edges together until the package is the right size, then secure it with clips and close the ends the same way. This eliminates all pasted seams and makes the package airtight.—Contributed by J. J. A. Parker, Metamora, O.
Washing Photograph Prints
Photographic prints may be washed in a stationary washbowl with just as good results as if washed in a high-priced wash box, by cutting off the upper end of the rubber nipple on a bent glass medicine dropper and placing it on the faucet as shown in the illustration. This arrangement causes the water to whirl around in the bowl, which keeps the prints in constant motion, thus insuring a thorough washing.—Contributed by L. O. D. Sturgess, Arlington, Oregon.
Photographic prints can be washed in a regular washbowl just as effectively as in an expensive wash box. To do this, cut off the top of the rubber nipple on a bent glass medicine dropper and attach it to the faucet as shown in the illustration. This setup makes the water swirl around in the bowl, keeping the prints in constant motion and ensuring they get a thorough wash. —Contributed by L. O. D. Sturgess, Arlington, Oregon.

A Medicine Dropper on a Faucet Produces a Whirling Motion of the Water in the Bowl
A medicine dropper on a faucet creates a swirling movement of the water in the bowl.
Combination Lock for a Drawer
The principal parts of the combination lock are the five disks shown in Fig. 1. These are best made of sheet brass, about 1/16 in. thick and 1-1/2 in. in diameter. The pins for turning the disks are each made a driving fit for a hole drilled through the metal at a point 15/32 in. from the center. Notches are cut in the disks C, D and E, Fig. 1, to receive the latch end, and the disk B is made like a cam, its use being to raise the latch into its keeper when the handle is turned backward. The disk A is without a notch and has only a pin for turning the other disks.
The main parts of the combination lock are the five disks shown in Fig. 1. These are best made from sheet brass, about 1/16 in. thick and 1-1/2 in. in diameter. The pins for turning the disks are each a tight fit for a hole drilled through the metal at a point 15/32 in. from the center. Notches are cut in disks C, D, and E (Fig. 1) to accommodate the latch end, and disk B is designed like a cam, which is used to lift the latch into its keeper when the handle is turned backward. Disk A has no notch and only has a pin for turning the other disks.

The Parts as They are Attached to a Drawer Front to Make a Combination Lock (Fig. 1)
The Parts as They are Attached to a Drawer Front to Create a Combination Lock (Fig. 1)
The disks are mounted on the inside of the drawer front in a U-shaped piece of metal, F, Fig. 2, which carries a 1/4-in. pin, G, as their bearing. The disks are placed on this pin with rubber washers, H, J, K, L and M, between them. These serve the purpose of preventing the disks from turning too freely. The disk A is fastened tightly to the end of the rod N, which is 1/4 in. in diameter. The outer end of this rod is fitted with a handle or turning head as desired. That shown at O is made of two pieces of wood screwed together, with a pointer, P, placed between them. A washer, R, is placed between the drawer end and the handle to take up any looseness and to allow the free turning of the rod.
The disks are attached to the inside of the drawer front using a U-shaped piece of metal, F, Fig. 2, which has a 1/4-inch pin, G, serving as their bearing. The disks rest on this pin with rubber washers, H, J, K, L, and M, placed in between. These washers help keep the disks from spinning too freely. The disk A is securely fastened to the end of the rod N, which has a diameter of 1/4 inch. The outer end of this rod is fitted with a handle or turning head as needed. The one shown at O is made of two pieces of wood screwed together, with a pointer, P, placed in between. A washer, R, is positioned between the drawer end and the handle to eliminate any looseness and to allow the rod to turn freely.
A dial, S, is made of paper and the division marks and numbers placed upon it. The latch T is fitted in a U-shaped piece of metal, U, which is fastened to the inside of the drawer end where its heel will rest on the edges of the disks. When the right combination is made by turning the handle first one way and then the other, the latch will drop into the notches of the disks as they will be all in one place.
A dial, S, is made of paper with division marks and numbers on it. The latch T is attached to a U-shaped metal piece, U, which is secured to the inside of the drawer end where its heel rests on the edges of the disks. When the correct combination is achieved by turning the handle one way and then the other, the latch will drop into the notches of the disks when they align.
When the drawer is to be locked, turn the handle back from the last turn made for the combination and the latch will be driven upward into its keeper and the notches scattered so that the latch will not drop until the combination is again set.
When you need to lock the drawer, turn the handle back from the last turn of the combination, and the latch will move up into its keeper, scattering the notches so that the latch won't drop until the combination is set again.
The numbers for the combination can be found after the disks are in place and by turning the handle until the notch comes up to the place for the heel of the latch. The number beneath the pointer is noted; then the next turned up in a like manner, all being done while the drawer is open and the disks in plain sight. The combination can be changed only by changing the location of the pins in the disks.—Contributed by C. B. Hanson, Fitchburg, Massachusetts.
The numbers for the combination can be found after the disks are in position and by turning the handle until the notch aligns with the spot for the latch heel. Take note of the number below the pointer, then turn the next disk in the same way, all while the drawer is open and the disks are visible. The combination can only be changed by adjusting the position of the pins in the disks.—Contributed by C. B. Hanson, Fitchburg, Massachusetts.
How to Start Small Machine Screws

Small machine screws are sometimes very difficult to start, especially when used in parts of a machine that cannot be easily reached with the fingers. A good way to start them is by means of a piece of fine wire wound snugly around the screw under its head. They can be placed and started by means of the wire and when the first threads have caught the screw it can be held by the screwdriver while the wire is withdrawn.—Contributed by F. W. Bently, Huron, S. D.
Small machine screws can be really tricky to start, especially in parts of a machine that are hard to reach with your fingers. A great way to get them started is by using a piece of thin wire wrapped tightly around the screw beneath its head. You can place and start the screws by using the wire, and once the first threads catch, you can hold the screw with a screwdriver while you pull out the wire. —Contributed by F. W. Bently, Huron, S. D.
An Umbrella Holder for Display Purposes

A holder that is especially adapted for use in hanging umbrellas for display in a store can be easily made of a piece of wire wound in a coil, as shown in the sketch, to fit over the end on the umbrella stick. The coil at one end of the spring is formed into a hook so that the umbrellas may be hung in screweyes or on a line, as the case may be. The end of the umbrella is stuck into the spring, as shown, which grips it tightly.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
A holder designed for hanging umbrellas for display in a store can be easily made from a piece of wire twisted into a coil, as shown in the sketch, to fit over the end of the umbrella stick. The coil at one end of the spring is shaped into a hook so that the umbrellas can be hung on screw eyes or a line, depending on the situation. The end of the umbrella is inserted into the spring, as shown, which holds it securely. —Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
Holder for a Milk Card

It is the general practice of milkmen to furnish a monthly card on which the housewife marks the needs of the day and then hangs it outside of the door for the information of the driver. This card also serves as a record for checking the accounts of the milk delivered during the month, and therefore it is desirable to protect it from snow and sleet.
It’s common for milkmen to provide a monthly card where the housewife notes her daily needs and then hangs it outside the door for the driver’s reference. This card also acts as a record for tracking the milk delivered throughout the month, so it’s important to keep it safe from snow and sleet.
In order to furnish this protection and at the same time make it unnecessary for any one to go outside of the door to hang up the card on stormy days, one of our readers has submitted the following plan which he has used for some time.
To provide this protection and also make it unnecessary for anyone to step outside to hang up the card on stormy days, one of our readers has proposed the following plan that he has been using for some time.
On the outside of the kitchen door, where the milkman is to deliver his bottles, this man has fastened an ordinary picture frame with glass but no backing except the door. Through the door and just below the upper edge of the glass is cut a thin slot inclining downward and outward so that the milk card can be easily pushed through the slot and thus be displayed behind the glass in the frame. By this protection it is kept free from mud, snow and ice. It is not necessary to step outside to place the card in the frame.
On the outside of the kitchen door, where the milkman delivers his bottles, this guy has attached a regular picture frame with glass but no backing except for the door. Through the door and just below the upper edge of the glass, there's a thin slot cut at an angle that goes down and out, so the milk card can be easily slid through the slot and displayed behind the glass in the frame. This keeps it safe from mud, snow, and ice. There's no need to step outside to put the card in the frame.
Frame for Printing Post Cards from Negatives
As I desired to print only a portion of some of my 5 by 7-in. plates on post cards and the part wanted was near the edge of the plate, I cut out the printing frame, as shown at A in the sketch, to accommodate that part of the card I reserved for a margin. This permitted the card to be placed in the frame without making a bend.—Contributed by J. H. Maysilles, Rochelle, Ill.
As I wanted to print just a part of some of my 5 by 7-inch plates on postcards and the section I needed was close to the edge of the plate, I cut out the printing frame, as shown at A in the sketch, to fit the part of the card I kept for a margin. This allowed the card to be placed in the frame without bending. —Contributed by J. H. Maysilles, Rochelle, Ill.

Slots Cut in the Frame to Receive the Post Cards without Bending Them
Slots cut in the frame to hold the postcards without bending them.
Finger Protection on Laboratory Vessels
A simple way of protecting the fingers against being burned by laboratory vessels in which liquids are boiling or chemical reactions producing great heat are going on, is shown in the sketch. A rather thick cord or yarn is wrapped around the neck of the vessel in the manner shown, the [171] upper end being drawn through the loop at the top and cut off, and the lower end then pulled out and a knot tied in it close to the windings of the yarn.
A straightforward method to protect your fingers from getting burned by lab containers with boiling liquids or intense heat from chemical reactions is illustrated in the sketch. A thick cord or yarn is wrapped around the neck of the container as shown, with the [171] top end pulled through the loop at the top and cut off. The lower end is then pulled out, and a knot is tied near the wrapped yarn.

The Ends of the Cord are Held Tightly and the Winding Protects the Hands
The ends of the cord are held securely, and the winding protects your hands.
Inlaying Metals by Electroplating
Very pretty and artistic effects of silver or nickel inlay on bronze, copper, etc., or copper on dark oxidized metals, may be obtained by means of etching and electroplating.
Very beautiful and artistic effects of silver or nickel inlay on bronze, copper, etc., or copper on dark oxidized metals, can be achieved through etching and electroplating.
The metal on which the inlay is to be used is first covered with a thin coating of wax and the design scratched through to the metal with a sharp, hard point of some kind. The design is then etched in slowly with well diluted nitric acid, allowing the etching to penetrate quite deeply. The metal is then taken out and after a thorough rinsing in water is hung in the plating bath.
The metal that will be used for the inlay is first covered with a thin layer of wax, and the design is scratched into the metal using a sharp hard point. The design is then slowly etched in with diluted nitric acid, letting the etching go quite deep. Afterward, the metal is removed and thoroughly rinsed in water before being hung in the plating bath.
As the wax has been left on, the plating will fill the lines of the design only, and will not touch the covered surface. When the etched lines are filled, the object is taken out of the bath and the wax removed.—Contributed by S. V. Cooke, Hamilton, Can.
As the wax has been left on, the plating will only fill in the lines of the design and won't touch the covered surface. Once the etched lines are filled, the object is taken out of the bath and the wax is removed.—Contributed by S. V. Cooke, Hamilton, Can.
A Novel Show-Window Attraction
This moving show-window attraction can be simply and cheaply made. The things necessary are a small battery motor, a large horseshoe magnet and a large polished steel ball, perfectly true and round, such as used in bearings. The other materials usually can be found in any store. Procure some thick cardboard and cut two disks, 8 in. in diameter, and two disks, 7-1/2 in. in diameter. Glue these together to make the wheel A, the larger disks forming the flanges. Make a smaller wheel, B, the size of which will be governed by the speed of the motor used. The wheel A is mounted in a box to run with its surface close to the under side of the cover, which should be of a thin, stiff cardboard. The wheel B is mounted on an axle that runs in metal bearings. The magnet D is placed on the wheel A. The steel ball E is put on the thin cover of the box, and the magnet causes it to roll around as the wheel turns. The box inclosing the mechanical parts should be placed out of sight when used in a window.—Contributed by Clarence Guse, Spokane, Wash.
This amazing display can be made easily and cheaply. You just need a small battery motor, a large horseshoe magnet, and a large polished steel ball that’s perfectly round, like those used in bearings. You can usually find the other materials at any store. Get some thick cardboard and cut out two disks that are 8 inches in diameter, and two disks that are 7.5 inches in diameter. Glue these together to create wheel A, with the larger disks as the flanges. Make a smaller wheel, B, with the size determined by the speed of the motor you’re using. Wheel A is mounted in a box, positioned so that its surface is close to the underside of a cover made of thin, stiff cardboard. Wheel B is mounted on an axle that runs in metal bearings. Magnet D is positioned on wheel A. The steel ball E is placed on the thin cover of the box, and the magnet makes it roll around as the wheel spins. The box containing the mechanical parts should be hidden when displayed in a window.—Contributed by Clarence Guse, Spokane, Wash.

The Steel Ball is Caused to Roll Around on the Cover by the Moving Magnet
The steel ball rolls around on the cover because of the moving magnet.
How to Make a Mop Wringer
A mop wringer may be made and attached to an ordinary pail in the following manner: Two pieces of metal, A, are attached securely at opposite sides of the edge of the pail, holes being drilled in their upper ends to serve as bearings for the roller B. The piece of metal C, which is duplicated at the opposite side of the pail, is pivoted on a bolt. These pieces also carry a roller, E, at their upper ends, and have a crosspiece, F, at their lower ends. Discarded wringer rollers can be used for B and E. A coil spring is attached as shown, to keep the rollers separate and in a position to receive the mop. When the mop is placed [172] between the rollers they are brought together by a pressure of the foot on the crosspiece F.—Contributed by J. Dennis McKennon, New Britain, Conn.
A mop wringer can be made and attached to a regular bucket like this: Two metal pieces, A, are securely attached to opposite sides of the bucket's edge, with holes drilled in their upper ends to act as bearings for the roller B. The metal piece C, which is mirrored on the opposite side of the bucket, is pivoted on a bolt. These pieces also support a roller, E, at their upper ends and have a crosspiece, F, at their lower ends. You can use discarded wringer rollers for B and E. A coil spring is attached as shown to keep the rollers apart and positioned to hold the mop. When you place the mop [172] between the rollers, you can press down with your foot on the crosspiece F to bring them together.—Contributed by J. Dennis McKennon, New Britain, Conn.

The Parts may be Either Attached to a Metal or Wood Pail with Bolts or Screws
The parts can be attached to a metal or wood bucket with bolts or screws.
A Vise Used as a Caliper Gauge
Not infrequently it is desired to know the distance from one side to another of some part that cannot be directly measured with a rule, and when no calipers are at hand. But with a vise handy, the measurement can be made with ease and with sufficient accuracy for all practical purposes if the vise is not too worn. This trick is particularly adapted for calipering threaded parts, as threads cannot be measured readily with ordinary calipers. How this may be done is shown in the sketch, which illustrates the method as applied to a screw. The work is gripped between the jaws of the vise and the opening then measured with a rule.—Contributed by Donald A. Hampson, Middletown, New York.
Not infrequently, people want to know the distance from one side to another of a part that can't be measured directly with a ruler, especially when calipers aren't available. However, if you have a vise, you can easily take the measurement with good enough accuracy for most practical uses, as long as the vise isn’t too worn out. This technique is particularly useful for measuring threaded parts, since threads can’t be easily measured with regular calipers. The sketch shows how to do this technique with a screw. The workpiece is held between the vise jaws, and the opening is then measured with a ruler.—Contributed by Donald A. Hampson, Middletown, New York.

The Jaws of a Vise, If They Are True, Will Make a Caliper Gauge Giving a Perfect Measurement
The jaws of a vise, if they are aligned properly, will create a caliper gauge that provides an accurate measurement.
Homemade Tack Puller
A very handy tack puller can be made of a round-head bolt. On one side of the head file a V-shaped notch and screw a wood handle on the threads. This makes a very powerful puller that will remove large tacks from hardwood easily.
A really useful tack puller can be made from a round-head bolt. On one side of the head, file a V-shaped notch and screw on a wooden handle using the threads. This creates a strong puller that can easily remove large tacks from hardwood.

The Shape of the Head Permits a Leverage Action That Lifts the Tack Easily
The shape of the head allows for a leverage action that lifts the tack easily.
How to Make a Radium Photograph
The radium rays, like the X-rays, affect the photographic plate, as is well known, but it would naturally be supposed that the enormous cost of radium would prevent the making of such a photograph by the amateur.
The radium rays, similar to X-rays, impact the photographic plate, as is widely recognized, but it would be expected that the high cost of radium would keep amateurs from creating such a photograph.
It is a fact, however, that a radium photograph can be made at home at practically no cost at all, provided the amateur has patience enough to gather the necessary material, which is nothing else but broken incandescent gas mantles. These (especially Welsbach mantles) contain a salt of the rare metal thorium, which is slightly radioactive. The thing to do, then, is to collect a sufficient quantity of broken mantles to cover the bottom of a small cardboard box—a dryplate box, for instance—with a layer of powdered mantle substance. Upon this layer and pressed tightly against it is placed a piece of cardboard; then some metal objects, a button, hairpin, a buckle, or the like, are laid on the cardboard and covered with a sensitized paper. This is again covered with a piece of cardboard and the box filled with crumpled paper to the top. The cover is then put on, the box tied up with a piece of string and set in some place where it is sure to be left undisturbed.
It is a fact, however, that a radium photograph can be made at home for almost no cost, as long as the person has enough patience to gather the necessary materials, which are just broken incandescent gas mantles. These (especially Welsbach mantles) contain a salt of the rare metal thorium, which is slightly radioactive. The next step is to collect enough broken mantles to cover the bottom of a small cardboard box—like a dry plate box—with a layer of powdered mantle substance. On top of this layer, tightly press a piece of cardboard; then place some metal objects, like a button, hairpin, or buckle, on the cardboard and cover them with sensitized paper. This is then covered with another piece of cardboard, and the box is filled to the top with crumpled paper. The cover is then put on, the box is tied with a piece of string, and it should be placed somewhere that it won't be disturbed.
The radium rays from the powdered mantles readily penetrate the cardboard and paper, but not the metal articles. Being very weak, the rays must be given four weeks to accomplish their work. After that time, however, if the sensitive paper is taken out, pictures of the metal objects in white on a dark background will be found on it. These pictures will not be so sharp as ordinary photographs, because the rays are not focused, but they fairly represent the originals and the experiment is an interesting one.
The radium rays from the powdered mantles easily pass through cardboard and paper, but not through metal objects. Since the rays are quite weak, they need four weeks to do their job. However, after that time, if you take out the sensitive paper, you will see images of the metal objects in white against a dark background. These images won't be as clear as regular photographs because the rays aren't focused, but they do represent the originals fairly well, and the experiment is quite interesting.
A good imitation mahogany stain consists of 1 part Venetian red and 2 parts yellow lead, mixed with thin glue size, and is laid on with a woolen cloth.
A quality imitation mahogany stain is made of 1 part Venetian red and 2 parts yellow lead, combined with thin glue size, and applied using a wool cloth.
Fountain for an Ordinary Pen
Fill the hollow end of an ordinary penholder with cotton—not too tightly—and one dip of the pen will hold enough ink to write a full page. The cotton should be changed each day. A small piece of sponge will answer the same purpose. It is necessary to dip the pen deeply into the ink.—Contributed by J. E. Noble, London Junction, Ontario.
Fill the empty end of a regular pen holder with cotton—not too tightly—and one dip of the pen will hold enough ink to write a full page. The cotton should be replaced daily. A small piece of sponge will work just as well. It's important to dip the pen deeply into the ink. —Contributed by J. E. Noble, London Junction, Ontario.
Pulling Wire through Curved Electric Fixtures
To facilitate the running of electric wires through curved fixtures, nick a heavy shot, A, and fasten it on a cord, B, in the same manner as a fishline is weighted. The shot will roll through the fixture tube, carrying the cord with it. A cord strong enough to pull the wires through can be easily drawn through the opening in this manner. The shot should, of course, not be so large that it can possibly bind in the tube.
To help run electric wires through curved fixtures, attach a weight, A, to a cord, B, just like you would weight a fishing line. The weight will roll through the fixture tube, pulling the cord with it. You can easily pull a strong enough cord through the opening this way. Just make sure the weight isn’t too big to get stuck in the tube.

A Shot That will Pass through the Fixture Arm will Carry a Cord for Pulling in the Wires
A shot that goes through the fixture arm will have a cord for pulling in the wires.
An Automatically Closing Drawer
A very ingenious way to have a drawer close automatically is to attach a weight so that the rope or cord will pull on the rear end of the drawer. The sketch clearly shows the device which is an attachment similar to that used for closing gates. This can be applied to drawers that are frequently drawn out and in places where a person is liable to have the hands full.
A clever way to make a drawer close by itself is to attach a weight that pulls on the back of the drawer with a rope or cord. The illustration clearly shows the device, which is similar to what’s used for closing gates. This can be used for drawers that are often opened, especially in situations where a person might have their hands full.

The Rope and Weight Attached to the Back End of the Drawer Pulls It Closed
The rope and weight connected to the back of the drawer pull it shut.
A Cork Puller

The stopper of any ordinary bottle can be easily removed with a puller such as shown in the sketch. The puller is inserted between the stopper and the neck of the bottle until the hook end will pass under the bottom of the stopper, then given a quarter turn and pulled upward.
The stopper of any ordinary bottle can be easily removed with a tool like the one shown in the sketch. The tool is placed between the stopper and the neck of the bottle until the hook end goes under the bottom of the stopper, then it's given a quarter turn and pulled upward.
The construction of the puller vents the cork as it enters and thus no vacuum is created. The cork is pulled more easily than with an ordinary corkscrew, and there is no danger of tearing the cork to pieces.
The design of the puller lets air in as the cork is removed, so no vacuum forms. The cork comes out more easily compared to a regular corkscrew, and there's no risk of damaging the cork.
Uses for a Bamboo Pole
Select a good bamboo pole, about 18 ft. long, and cut it into three lengths as follows: A piece from the top, 2-1/2 ft. long; the next length, 5-1/2 ft. long, and the remaining end of the pole, about 10 ft. long. The 2-1/2-ft. length is equipped with a screw hook in the smaller end, as shown in Fig. 1. This stick is useful in lowering window shades that have a ring or screw eye attached to the lower part of the shade. When the stick is not in use, it is hung on the edge of the window casing.
Choose a good bamboo pole that's about 18 feet long and cut it into three pieces like this: the first piece from the top should be 2.5 feet long; the second piece should be 5.5 feet long; and the last piece will be about 10 feet long. The 2.5-foot piece should have a screw hook attached to the smaller end, as shown in Fig. 1. This stick is handy for lowering window shades that have a ring or screw eye at the bottom. When not in use, it can be hung on the edge of the window frame.

A Bamboo Pole Cut in Three Pieces Makes a Window-Shade Stick, Duster Holder and Clothesline Pole (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A Bamboo Pole Cut into Three Pieces Makes a Window Shade Stick, Duster Holder, and Clothesline Pole (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The 5-1/2-ft. length makes the long handle for a duster. Procure an old-style lamp-chimney cleaner, wind a cord around the wires a few inches below the point where they begin to [174] spread to keep them from coming apart, then cut or file the wires off 2 in. below the winding. This leaves a straight shank, over which a ferrule is slipped before it is inserted into the small end of the pole. Fill the remaining space in the pole end with plaster of Paris, and when it has set, slip the ferrule into place on the pole end. If a ferrule is not at hand, a fine wire can be wound around the end to prevent the pole from splitting. When using this pole to dust hardwood floors, tops of doors, window casings and picture frames, put a dusting cloth into the claws and slide the ring into place, as shown in Fig. 2.
The 5-1/2-ft. length creates a long handle for a duster. Get an old-style lamp-chimney cleaner, wrap a cord around the wires a few inches below where they start to spread to keep them from coming apart, then cut or file the wires off 2 in. below the winding. This leaves a straight shaft, onto which a ferrule is slid before it's inserted into the small end of the pole. Fill the leftover space in the pole end with plaster of Paris, and once it’s set, slide the ferrule into place on the pole end. If you don't have a ferrule, you can wrap fine wire around the end to prevent the pole from splitting. When using this pole to dust hardwood floors, the tops of doors, window casings, and picture frames, place a dusting cloth into the claws and slide the ring into position, as shown in Fig. 2.
The longer and larger end of the pole is used as a clothesline pole. One end of this pole is fitted with a yoke made of No. 6 gauge galvanized wire, as shown in Fig. 3. The wire for the yoke is 10 in. long, and after bending it in shape, the two upper ends should be 2 in. wide at the top and 2 in. deep. Insert the straight end of the wire into the smaller end of the pole and set it in firmly with plaster of Paris. The end of the pole should be securely wound with wire to keep the bamboo from splitting.—Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y.
The longer, thicker end of the pole is used as a clothesline pole. One end of this pole is fitted with a yoke made of No. 6 gauge galvanized wire, as shown in Fig. 3. The wire for the yoke is 10 inches long, and after bending it into shape, the two upper ends should be 2 inches wide at the top and 2 inches deep. Insert the straight end of the wire into the smaller end of the pole and secure it firmly with plaster of Paris. The end of the pole should be tightly wrapped with wire to prevent the bamboo from splitting.—Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y.
Making Common Lock Less Pickable
The ordinary lock can be readily changed so that it will be quite impossible to pick it with a common key. The way to do this is to cut off the small hollow portion of the key that fits over the pin. This part is placed on the pin of the lock and soldered, or fastened by any other means, so it cannot come out of the lock. This will prevent any ordinary key from entering the keyhole.—Contributed by A. J. Hamilton, Benton, Ark.
The regular lock can be easily modified so that a standard key cannot unlock it. To do this, simply remove the small hollow part of the key that fits over the pin. This section is placed on the pin of the lock and welded or secured in another way so it can't be removed from the lock. This will stop any regular key from fitting into the keyhole. —Contributed by A. J. Hamilton, Benton, Ark.

The Small End Cut from the Key is Fastened on the Pin of the Lock
The small end cut from the key is attached to the pin of the lock.
To Color Tan Leather Black
An inexpensive and effective way to blacken tan leather is as follows: The leather is first rubbed with a 10-per-cent solution of tannic acid, which may be purchased at any drug store. This treatment should be applied and the leather well dried. It should be rubbed with a cloth hard enough to produce a polish, then apply a 10-per-cent solution of iron sulphate. A chemical reaction takes place as the last solution is rubbed into the leather, making it black. After this is dry, the leather can be polished in the usual way.
A cheap and effective way to turn tan leather black is as follows: First, rub the leather with a 10-percent solution of tannic acid, which you can buy at any drug store. Apply this treatment and let the leather dry completely. Then, rub it with a cloth until it gets shiny, and afterward, apply a 10-percent solution of iron sulfate. A chemical reaction occurs when the last solution is worked into the leather, turning it black. Once this is dry, you can polish the leather as usual.
To Prevent Corks Sticking in Bottle Necks

Corks will always adhere to the necks of bottles containing glue or other sticky liquids, with the result that it becomes necessary to cut or dig the cork into small pieces in order to remove the contents from the bottle.
Corks will always stick to the necks of bottles that hold glue or other sticky liquids, which makes it necessary to cut or dig the cork into small pieces to get the contents out of the bottle.
A simple and effective way to prevent a cork from sticking is to place a small piece of waxed paper on the bottle opening so that when the cork is pressed in, the paper will be between the cork and glass, as shown.
A straightforward and useful way to stop a cork from getting stuck is to put a small piece of waxed paper over the bottle opening. This way, when you push the cork in, the paper will be between the cork and the glass, as shown.
To Remove Rust Stains from Clothing
Many times when working around machinery, the clothes will come in contact with iron and get rust stains. These may be removed by using a weak solution of oxalic acid which must be applied carefully as it is highly poisonous. Sometimes the stain can be removed by washing the spot in buttermilk, in which case rubbing is necessary.
Many times when working around machinery, clothes can come into contact with iron and get rust stains. These can be removed by using a weak solution of oxalic acid, which must be applied carefully since it is highly toxic. Sometimes, the stain can be removed by washing the spot with buttermilk, and in that case, some rubbing is necessary.
Small bits of onion placed in a room will absorb the disagreeable odors of paint and turpentine.
Small pieces of onion placed in a room will soak up the unpleasant smells of paint and turpentine.
Eraser Holder
Any small piece of steel with a point, similar to that shown in the sketch, will make a good eraser holder. The saving of erasers is nothing compared to the convenience of having a small eraser with a chisel edge or point when delicate erasing is required. It is not clumsy as the usual chunk of rubber with a blunt point, for the person erasing can see what he is doing. I use a leg of an old pair of dividers and cut my erasers in four parts in shapes similar to that shown in the sketch by the dotted lines, and can use them easily until they are about the size of a pea. The friction between the rubber and steel, after the point has been inserted into the rubber, holds the two together nicely.—Contributed by James F. Burke, Lakewood, O.
Any small piece of steel with a point, similar to what’s shown in the sketch, will make a good eraser holder. The effort spent saving erasers is nothing compared to the convenience of having a small eraser with a chisel edge or point for precise erasing. It’s not clumsy like the usual large chunk of rubber with a blunt end, because the person erasing can see what they’re doing. I use a leg from an old pair of dividers and cut my erasers into four pieces shaped like those shown in the sketch by the dotted lines, and I can use them easily until they’re about the size of a pea. The friction between the rubber and steel, once the point is inserted into the rubber, keeps them together nicely.—Contributed by James F. Burke, Lakewood, O.

A Very Small Eraser can be Held on the Point and Used for Delicate Erasures
A very small eraser can be held by the tip and used for delicate erasing.
Bleaching Ivory
A good method to bleach ivory ornaments is to rub on a solution made of a small quantity of unslaked lime, bran and water. The mixture should be wiped off after the ivory has become sufficiently bleached, and the surface then rubbed with sawdust or magnesia, which gives it a brilliant polish.
A great way to bleach ivory ornaments is to apply a solution made from a small amount of unslaked lime, bran, and water. After the ivory has been adequately bleached, wipe off the mixture, and then polish the surface with sawdust or magnesia to achieve a brilliant shine.
A Soap Shake

To utilize scraps of soap, make a soap shake of a medium-size baking-powder can, as shown in the sketch. Punch holes in the can with an ice pick or some other sharp-pointed instrument, and attach a large wire to the center, twisting the ends to form a handle.—Contributed by Elizabeth P. Grant, Winchester, Virginia.
To use leftover soap, create a soap shaker using a medium-sized baking powder can, as illustrated in the drawing. Punch holes in the can with an ice pick or another sharp tool, and attach a large wire to the center, twisting the ends to make a handle.—Contributed by Elizabeth P. Grant, Winchester, Virginia.
Ear Repair on a Bucket
A broken ear for a bail on a metal pail or bucket can be replaced with a window-shade fastener, such as shown at A in the sketch. The base of the fastener is turned down flat and attached with screw bolts or rivets, as shown at B.—Contributed by Harold Robinson, Suffern, N. Y.
A broken ear for a bail on a metal pail or bucket can be replaced with a window-shade fastener, like the one shown at A in the sketch. The base of the fastener is flattened and attached with screw bolts or rivets, as indicated at B.—Contributed by Harold Robinson, Suffern, N. Y.

Cleaning Dirt from Tufts in Upholstering

(Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
(Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A handy device for cleaning furniture upholstering and vehicle-seat tuftings may be easily made as follows: Take an ordinary round paintbrush and cut the handle off, leaving it about 1-1/2 in. long, then saw a V-shaped notch in it, as shown in Fig. 1. Attach the brush to the ratchet screwdriver, Fig. 2, by inserting the screwdriver blade in the notch of the brush handle, and secure it by wrapping a strong cord around the handle. Place the brush in the tuft and work the screwdriver handle, as in turning a screw. A few quick turns of the brush will throw out the dirt which is impossible to remove with a straight brush.
A convenient tool for cleaning furniture, upholstery, and vehicle seat tufting can be easily made as follows: Take a regular round paintbrush and cut the handle off, leaving it about 1.5 inches long. Then, saw a V-shaped notch in it, as shown in Fig. 1. Attach the brush to the ratchet screwdriver, Fig. 2, by inserting the screwdriver blade into the notch of the brush handle and secure it by wrapping a strong cord around the handle. Place the brush in the tuft and turn the screwdriver handle as if you were turning a screw. A few quick turns of the brush will remove the dirt that can't be cleaned with a straight brush.
Painting Lead Pipe
The paint applied to lead pipes will chip and peel off, and to prevent this I first cover the lead surface with a thin coat of varnish, then apply the paint on the varnish. A lead pipe painted in this way will retain its coating.—Contributed by F. Schumacher, Brooklyn, N. Y.
The paint used on lead pipes tends to chip and peel off, so to avoid this, I first cover the lead surface with a thin layer of varnish and then apply the paint over the varnish. A lead pipe painted this way will keep its coating. —Contributed by F. Schumacher, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Attaching a Vise Jaw to a Bench
Procure a toothed metal rail or rack, A, such as is used for small ladder tracks, and mount it on the lower edge of the guide rail for the lower end of the vise jaw. Provide a slot, B, in the leg of the bench, through which the rail can run with plenty of play room. A beveled plate, C, is attached to the face of the bench leg at the bottom of the slot, so that it will engage the teeth of the rack.
Get a toothed metal rail or rack, A, like the ones used for small ladder tracks, and attach it to the bottom edge of the guide rail for the lower end of the vise jaw. Create a slot, B, in the bench leg that allows the rail to move freely with enough space. A beveled plate, C, is fixed to the front of the bench leg at the bottom of the slot, so it can catch the teeth of the rack.

The Rack on the Lower Guide Rail Provides a Means to Keep the Vise Jaws Parallel
The rack on the lower guide rail keeps the vise jaws parallel.
In use, when opening the vise by means of the screw, the rack will drag along the plate, and stop and engage a notch when the opening operation ceases. When it is desired to reduce the opening, it is only necessary to lift the rail by means of the string D. A button is tied to the upper end of the string on top of the bench, to keep it handy for changing the jaw.—Contributed by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, District of Columbia.
In operation, when you turn the screw to open the vise, the rack will slide along the plate and will stop and catch in a notch when the opening stops. If you want to close the opening, you just need to pull up the rail using string D. A button is attached to the top end of the string on the bench to keep it accessible for adjusting the jaw.—Contributed by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, District of Columbia.
Removing Vegetable Stains
To remove stains of vegetables or fruits of any kind from cloth or wood, the following method is very good: The stained piece is first moistened with water and then placed in a jar or pail that can be covered. A lump of sulphur is ignited and dropped into the jar. Place the sulphur on a fire shovel when lighting it to avoid burns. The burning sulphur should be placed in the receptacle on the side where the stain will be exposed to the fumes. The sulphur burns slowly so that the articles will not be harmed.
To remove stains from vegetables or fruits on fabric or wood, this method works well: First, dampen the stained item with water and then put it in a jar or bucket that can be sealed. Ignite a piece of sulfur and drop it into the jar. Use a fire shovel to light the sulfur to prevent burns. Position the burning sulfur on the side of the container where the stain will be exposed to the fumes. The sulfur burns slowly, ensuring that the items won’t be damaged.
After the sulphur has burned away, the jar should be kept closed for a few minutes and when the articles are removed, the stains will be gone. This is harmless to try, and the cloth will not be injured if it is in a dry condition. The articles should be washed and dried as soon as they are taken out of the jar.
After the sulfur has burned away, the jar should be kept closed for a few minutes, and when you take the items out, the stains will be gone. This method is safe to try, and the cloth won't be damaged as long as it’s dry. The items should be washed and dried right after being taken out of the jar.
Picture-Frame Corner Joints
Very often the amateur craftsman comes across a picture which he would like to have framed, but the difficulty and insecurity of the ordinary miter joint for the corners discourage him from trying to make the frame. A very easy way to construct a rigid frame is shown in the illustration. The size of the frame must be determined by the picture to be framed. The width, A, of the pieces depends upon one's own taste.
Very often, the amateur craftsman comes across a picture he wants to frame, but the complexity and uncertainty of a standard miter joint for the corners discourage him from attempting to make the frame. A very simple way to create a sturdy frame is shown in the illustration. The size of the frame should be determined by the picture being framed. The width, A, of the pieces depends on personal preference.
Four pieces, the desired length and width and 1/2 in. thick, should be dressed out of the material intended for the frame. Four other pieces, 3/8 in. thick and 1/2 in. narrower than the first four pieces, are next made ready and fastened with glue and flat-head screws to the back of the first pieces, as shown. This allows 3/8 in. for glass, picture and backing, and 1/2 in. to lap over the front of the picture on all edges.
Four pieces should be cut to the desired length and width, each 1/2 inch thick, from the material intended for the frame. Next, prepare four additional pieces that are 3/8 inch thick and 1/2 inch narrower than the first four pieces. These should be attached with glue and flat-head screws to the back of the first pieces, as shown. This provides a 3/8 inch space for the glass, picture, and backing, plus 1/2 inch to overlap the front of the picture on all edges.

Square and Mitered Lap Joints for Making Rigid Picture Frames in Natural or Stained Woods (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Square and Mitered Lap Joints for Creating Sturdy Picture Frames in Natural or Stained Woods (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
By arranging the pieces as shown in Fig. 1, a strong corner lap is secured. A miter lap joint which is not so strong is shown in Fig. 2. The latter gives a mitered-joint effect. This method does away with the use of the rabbeting [177] plane and miter box, both of which are difficult to use with accuracy. Two screws should be used in each joint to reinforce the glue.—Contributed by James Gaffney, Chicago, Ill.
By arranging the pieces as shown in Fig. 1, a strong corner lap is secured. A miter lap joint, which is not as strong, is shown in Fig. 2. The latter creates a mitered-joint effect. This method eliminates the need for the rabbeting [177] plane and miter box, both of which can be challenging to use accurately. Two screws should be used in each joint to strengthen the glue. —Contributed by James Gaffney, Chicago, Ill.
Hunting-Knife Handles
Very artistic handles for hunting knives and carving sets can be made by using disks of horn. Procure some cowhorns from a slaughter house and split them with a saw, using only the large portion of the horn. The split horn is then heated by dry heat—an oven is best—then pressed between two cold plates to a flat piece. If well heated, it is surprising how easily this can be done. The piece is then cut into squares of suitable size which are marked and perforated in the center, the hole being a trifle smaller than the tang of the blade. The tang should be flat and a little longer than the desired handle, with the end made round and threaded for a nut.
Very artistic handles for hunting knives and carving sets can be created using disks of horn. Get some cowhorns from a slaughterhouse and cut them in half with a saw, making sure to use only the large part of the horn. The split horn is then heated with dry heat—an oven works best—then pressed between two cold plates to form a flat piece. If heated properly, it’s surprising how easily this can be done. The piece is then cut into squares of appropriate size, marked, and perforated in the center, with the hole being slightly smaller than the tang of the blade. The tang should be flat and a bit longer than the desired handle, with the end rounded and threaded for a nut.

The Finished Handle, If the Work is Well Done, is Easily Mistaken for Agate
The finished handle, if the work is done well, is easily mistaken for agate.
A suitable washer is placed on the tang, which is then heated sufficiently to burn its way through the pieces of horn as they are put on the metal. When a sufficient number of disks are on the tang a washer should be slipped on and followed by a round nut. Pressure is applied by turning the nut and repeated heatings of the disks will force them together to make perfect joints. Only a moderate pressure should be applied at a time.
A suitable washer is placed on the tang, which is then heated enough to melt its way through the pieces of horn as they are added to the metal. Once a sufficient number of disks are on the tang, a washer should be slipped on, followed by a round nut. Pressure is applied by turning the nut, and repeated heating of the disks will force them together to create perfect joints. Only moderate pressure should be applied at a time.
The handle is now to be finished to the shape desired. If black and colored pieces of horn are interspersed, the finished handle will have the appearance of agate. The blade and handle can be lacquered and the ferrules nickelplated.—Contributed by James H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
The handle should now be shaped to the desired design. If black and colored pieces of horn are mixed in, the finished handle will look like agate. The blade and handle can be coated with lacquer, and the ferrules can be nickel-plated.—Contributed by James H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
Holding Wood in a Sawbuck
Anyone who has used a sawbuck knows how inconvenient it is to have a stick roll or lift up as the saw blade is pulled back for the next cut. With the supplementary device, shown in the sketch, which can be easily attached to the sawbuck, these troubles will be eliminated. It consists of two crosspieces hinged to the back uprights of the sawbuck and a foot-pressure stirrup fastened to their front ends as shown. Spikes are driven through the crosspieces so that their protruding ends will gouge into the stick of wood being sawed. The stirrup is easily thrown back for laying a piece of wood in the crotch.
Anyone who has used a sawbuck knows how annoying it is when a log rolls or lifts up while pulling back the saw blade for the next cut. With the added device shown in the sketch, which can be easily attached to the sawbuck, these problems will be solved. It consists of two crosspieces hinged to the back supports of the sawbuck and a foot-pressure stirrup attached to their front ends, as shown. Spikes are driven through the crosspieces so that their ends dig into the piece

The Holding Attachment Easily Adjusts Itself to the Stick of Wood Placed in the Crotch
The holding attachment easily adjusts to the stick of wood placed in the fork.
A New Pail-Cover Handle
The handle of the cover, instead of being attached to the center, is placed near the edge and bail of the pail. On the bail and just above the handle of the cover there is formed a loop large enough to accommodate the thumb. With this arrangement, the cover may be removed with the use of but one hand.
The handle of the lid, instead of being attached to the center, is located near the edge and bail of the pail. On the bail, just above the handle of the lid, there’s a loop big enough to fit your thumb. With this setup, the lid can be taken off using just one hand.

The Bail Loop and the Handle Make It Easy to Remove the Cover with One Hand
The Bail Loop and the Handle Make It Simple to Take Off the Cover with One Hand
Drip-Pan Alarm
The trouble caused by overflowing of the drip pan for an ice box or refrigerator can be overcome by attaching a device that will sound an alarm when the water reaches a level safely below the overflow point. A device of this kind may be attached to the back of the refrigerator as shown in the sketch. A float, A, is attached to the lower end of a rod, B, which slides through staples CC. At the upper end of the rod, a V-shaped copper sheet, D, is soldered. This makes the contact points in the electric wiring. The battery E can be placed under or back of the refrigerator as desired. The method of wiring is clearly shown.
The problem of water overflowing from the drip pan of an icebox or refrigerator can be solved by attaching a device that will sound an alarm when the water level is safely below the overflow point. This kind of device can be fixed to the back of the refrigerator, as shown in the sketch. A float, A, is connected to the bottom end of a rod, B, which slides through staples CC. At the top of the rod, there is a V-shaped copper sheet, D, that is soldered in place. This creates the contact points for the electric wiring. The battery E can be placed under or behind the refrigerator as needed. The wiring method is clearly illustrated.

The Float in the Pan, and Contacts for Closing the Circuit to Ring the Bell
The Float in the Pan and Connections for Closing the Circuit to Ring the Bell
A Live-Bait Pail

Every fisherman knows that live bait will soon die if they do not receive sufficient air. I have succeeded in keeping bait alive and healthy by using a pail of my own construction, which is provided with a compressed-air space to force air to the surface of the water. The air space A takes up one-fifth of the interior at the bottom of the pail, and an ordinary hand bicycle pump is used to fill it through a bicycle-tire valve, B. The pipe C from the air space extends up along the side of the pail and the upper end is bent so that it just touches the surface of the water. The pipe contains a valve to regulate the flow of air.
Every fisherman knows that live bait will die quickly without enough oxygen. I've found a way to keep bait alive and healthy using a pail I've made myself. It has a compressed-air space to push air to the surface of the water. The air space A takes up one-fifth of the bottom interior of the pail, and I fill it using a regular bike pump through a bicycle tire valve, B. The pipe C from the air space runs up the side of the pail, with the top bent just to touch the water's surface. The pipe has a valve to control the airflow.
After the pail has been standing for an hour or more, the bait will rise to the top. The valve is then opened for a few minutes, and the minnows will soon swim around in the water as when this was fresh.—Contributed by T. Whelan, Paterson, N. J.
After the bucket has been sitting for an hour or more, the bait will float to the top. Then, the valve is opened for a few minutes, and the minnows will quickly start swimming around in the water as if it were fresh.—Contributed by T. Whelan, Paterson, N. J.
A Mouse Trap

After using various means to catch the mice in my pantry, I finally decided I could not catch them in the ordinary manner. Knowing that mice are not afraid of dishes but will run all over them, while they will stay away from other things, I took a dinner plate, a bowl that held about 1 qt., a thimble, filled with toasted cheese, and arranged the articles as shown in the sketch, balancing the bowl on the thimble. When the mouse nibbled the cheese, the bowl came down on it, making it a prisoner. The whole was then dropped in a pail of water. Scald the dish and bowl before using them again to remove all traces of the mouse.
After trying different ways to catch the mice in my pantry, I finally realized I couldn't catch them in a typical way. Knowing that mice aren't scared of dishes and will scurry all over them, while avoiding other things, I took a dinner plate, a bowl that held about 1 quart, and a thimble filled with toasted cheese, arranging them as shown in the sketch, with the bowl balanced on the thimble. When the mouse nibbled the cheese, the bowl tipped over and trapped it. I then dropped the whole setup into a bucket of water. Make sure to scald the dish and bowl before using them again to eliminate any signs of the mouse.
Quickly Made Rheostat
A short time ago I found it necessary to melt some silver, and in setting up an arc light to obtain the heat I made a rheostat by winding wire around a large earthenware jar. As the jar is a conductor and would not burn, it served the purpose perfectly. In winding the wire, be careful to keep the coils from touching each other.—Contributed by P. D. Merrill, Chicago, Ill.
A little while ago, I needed to melt some silver, so I set up an arc light to generate heat. I created a rheostat by wrapping wire around a large ceramic jar. Since the jar is a conductor and won’t catch fire, it worked perfectly for this. When winding the wire, make sure the coils don’t touch each other. —Contributed by P. D. Merrill, Chicago, Ill.
Sunlight Flasher for the Garden
By Claude L. Woolley
The following apparatus is likely to be novel, and certainly very striking when erected on country estates, particularly on high lands, hillsides, and along the seashore, where the flashes may be seen for many miles out at sea.
The following device is probably new and definitely very impressive when set up on rural properties, especially on elevated areas, hills, and along the coast, where the lights can be seen far out at sea.
It is not unusual in country gardens to see a large hollow glass globe silvered on the inside, mounted on a pedestal, brilliantly reflecting the sunlight. The apparatus described is an elaboration of the idea. The drawing shows in diagram the general construction, exact measurements not being given. However, a convenient height is 3-1/2 to 4 ft., and the circular frame, carrying the mirrors, may be 10 to 14 in. in diameter.
It’s common in country gardens to see a large hollow glass globe that’s silvered on the inside and mounted on a pedestal, brilliantly reflecting sunlight. The device described is a more complex version of this concept. The drawing provides a diagram of the general construction, though exact measurements aren’t specified. However, a convenient height is between 3.5 to 4 feet, and the circular frame that holds the mirrors can be 10 to 14 inches in diameter.

The Flasher as It Appears on the Stand and the Details of Its Construction
The Flasher as It Looks on the Stand and the Details of Its Build
The supporting frame, of galvanized sheet iron or sheet copper, may be either circular or hexagonal in shape. Mounted upon a vertical shaft is a skeleton circular frame, carrying a double row of small mirrors, or ordinary flat mirror glass, mounted in grooves provided for them; the upper row inclined slightly upward, and the lower row slightly downward. If a greater number of angles of reflection are desired, the mirrors may be smaller, and arranged in four circular rows instead of two, each row being inclined at a slightly different angle.
The supporting frame, made of galvanized sheet metal or sheet copper, can be either circular or hexagonal. On a vertical shaft, there's a skeletal circular frame that holds two rows of small mirrors or regular flat mirror glass, which are placed in grooves designed for them; the upper row tilts slightly upward, and the lower row tilts slightly downward. If more angles of reflection are needed, the mirrors can be smaller and arranged in four circular rows instead of two, with each row set at a slightly different angle.
The shaft is pointed at the lower end and rests in a bearing drilled with a V-shaped depression, the bearing being supported by soldering or riveting at each end to the inner sides of the pedestal shell. The upper portion of the shaft passes through a bearing which is also soldered or riveted at the ends, to the inner surfaces of the pedestal shell.
The shaft is tapered at the bottom and sits in a bearing with a V-shaped groove. The bearing is attached at both ends to the inner sides of the pedestal shell using soldering or riveting. The top part of the shaft goes through a bearing that's also soldered or riveted at the ends to the inner surfaces of the pedestal shell.
The mirrors, mounted on the shaft, thus are free to revolve vertically with very little friction. Upon the lower end of the shaft is fastened a light gear wheel of rather large diameter, and this in turn is geared to a smaller gear mounted on the end of the armature shaft of a small electric motor of the type that may be driven with a few dry cells; the relation of the sizes of the gears being such as will cause the mirrors to revolve slowly, when the motor is running at normal speed.
The mirrors, attached to the shaft, can easily rotate up and down with very little friction. At the bottom of the shaft, there’s a light gear wheel with a relatively large diameter, which is connected to a smaller gear on the end of the armature shaft of a small electric motor that can be powered by a few dry cells. The size relationship of the gears is designed so that the mirrors rotate slowly when the motor is operating at normal speed.
Connected to the motor are two or more dry, or other suitable batteries, a small door being provided on the side of the lower part of the pedestal to enable the batteries to be replaced, or turned off, and to give access to the motor. A circular shield is erected over the mirror carrier, surmounted by an ornamental ball, to protect from the weather and to provide a more finished appearance. A waterproof canvas cover may be slipped over the whole in rainy weather.
Connected to the motor are two or more dry or other suitable batteries, with a small door located on the side of the lower part of the pedestal to allow for battery replacement, turning them off, and accessing the motor. A circular shield is placed over the mirror carrier, topped with an ornamental ball, to protect against the weather and provide a more polished look. A waterproof canvas cover can be slipped over the entire unit during rainy weather.
[180] As new mirror faces at varying angles are constantly being presented to the sun, vivid flashes are constantly occurring when viewed from almost any angle or position on the side where the sun is shining. The circular shield on top is supported in position by four metal strips secured by soldering to the shield and the supporting pedestal.
[180] As new mirror faces at different angles are constantly being exposed to the sun, bright flashes keep happening when viewed from nearly any angle or position on the side that's getting sunlight. The circular shield on top is held in place by four metal strips that are soldered to both the shield and the supporting pedestal.
Such a device may be constructed without much expense, producing a most brilliant effect over miles of territory. The small driving motor may be replaced with a suitable spring or weight-driven clockwork; or four hollow hemispherical metal cups may be mounted on arms, or placed at right angles, and the arms in turn mounted upon a vertical shaft and arranged above the mirror carrier and geared in such manner that the mirrors will revolve slowly, while the cups are revolving with comparatively high speed by the force of the wind.
Such a device can be built without much cost, creating a stunning effect over large areas. The small driving motor can be swapped out for a suitable spring or a weight-driven clock mechanism; alternatively, four hollow hemispherical metal cups can be attached to arms, or positioned at right angles, with the arms then mounted on a vertical shaft. This setup is arranged above the mirror carrier and designed so that the mirrors rotate slowly, while the cups spin at a relatively high speed thanks to the wind.
The mounted revolving cups are similar in form to the apparatus used by the U. S. Weather Bureau for measuring the speed of the wind. They will respond to a good breeze from any point of the compass.
The mounted rotating cups are similar in shape to the equipment used by the U.S. Weather Bureau for measuring wind speed. They will react to a strong breeze coming from any direction.
An Automatic Blowpipe
A fine-pointed flame can be used to advantage for certain work, and the alcohol flame and blowpipe have become a necessity, but these may be improved upon so as to make the apparatus automatic in action and more efficient in its work. A bottle or receptacle, A, having a large bottom to provide a sufficient heating surface, is supplied with a cork and a tube, B, bent at right angles. The receptacle, A, is supported on a stand so that it may be heated with a small lamp, C. The light D may be a candle, alcohol lamp, or any flame set at the right distance from the end of the tube B.
A fine-point flame can be used effectively for certain tasks, and the alcohol flame and blowpipe have become essential, but these can be improved to make the device automatic in its operation and more efficient in its performance. A bottle or container, A, with a wide base to ensure adequate heating surface, is fitted with a cork and a tube, B, bent at a right angle. The container, A, is placed on a stand so it can be heated with a small lamp, C. The light D can be a candle, alcohol lamp, or any flame positioned at the correct distance from the end of tube B.

The receptacle A is partly filled with alcohol, and the heating lamp lit. The heat will turn the alcohol into gas and cause a pressure, driving it through the tube B, so that it is ignited by the flame from D. The flame will have a fine point with sufficient heat to melt glass.—Contributed by W. R. Sears, St. Paul, Minn.
The container A is partially filled with alcohol, and the heating lamp is turned on. The heat will convert the alcohol into gas and create pressure, pushing it through tube B, where it ignites from the flame at D. The flame will have a sharp point with enough heat to melt glass.—Contributed by W. R. Sears, St. Paul, Minn.
Homemade Steam-Turbine Engine
Select a tomato can, or any can in which vegetables or fruit is sold, and carefully unsolder the small cap on the end when removing the contents. When the can is empty, clean it well and solder the cap in place again. Procure a strip of brass, bend it as shown at A and solder it to the can top in the center. Cut a piece of about No. 14 gauge wire, the length equal to the opening between the uprights of the U-shaped piece of brass, with about 1/2 in. added for a small pulley wheel. The uprights are punched or drilled at their upper ends to admit the wire which is then adjusted in place.
Select a can of tomatoes or any can containing vegetables or fruit, and carefully remove the small cap at the end when emptying it. Once the can is empty, clean it thoroughly and solder the cap back on. Get a strip of brass, bend it as shown at A, and solder it to the center of the can's top. Cut a piece of about No. 14 gauge wire, making it the same length as the distance between the upright parts of the U-shaped brass piece, adding about 1/2 inch for a small pulley wheel. The uprights should have holes punched or drilled at their top ends to allow the wire to pass through, which can then be adjusted into place.

The Boiler is Made of a Fruit or Vegetable Can and the Turbine of Thin Metal Strips
The boiler is made from a fruit or vegetable can, and the turbine is made of thin metal strips.
Two strips of tin are cut to fit in between the standards and are notched in the center, as shown at B, and slightly bent to fit over the wire shaft. These are soldered to the wire between the [181] uprights. A small hole is punched on one side in the top of the can so that it will center the paddle of the wheel. On the opposite side of the top another larger hole is punched and tightly fitted with a wood plug. This is the opening for filling the boiler with water. The can should be filled about two-thirds full and set on a stove. The steam, coming under pressure from the small hole, strikes the paddles of the wheel with considerable force and causes it to revolve rapidly. Be careful not to set the boiler on too hot a fire.
Two strips of tin are cut to fit between the posts and have notches in the center, as shown at B, and are slightly bent to fit over the wire shaft. These are soldered to the wire between the [181] uprights. A small hole is punched on one side at the top of the can to center the paddle of the wheel. On the opposite side of the top, a larger hole is punched and tightly sealed with a wooden plug. This is the opening for filling the boiler with water. The can should be filled about two-thirds full and placed on a stove. The steam, coming under pressure from the small hole, strikes the paddles of the wheel with significant force and makes it spin rapidly. Be careful not to place the boiler on too hot a fire.
Electric Switch for Exposing Photographic Printing Papers
The proper time to expose a printing paper under a negative should be determined and the negative marked for future printing. When this time has been found some means should be provided for making the exposure exactly the same, then the prints will be perfect and of a good tone at all times. For this purpose the instrument shown in the illustration was designed and used with entire satisfaction.
The right amount of time to expose a printing paper under a negative should be established, and the negative should be marked for future printing. Once this time has been determined, a way should be implemented to ensure the exposure is consistently the same, resulting in perfect prints with a good tone every time. For this reason, the instrument shown in the illustration was created and used with complete satisfaction.

Time Switch for Operating an Electric Light in Printing Photographic Developing Papers
Time Switch for Operating an Electric Light in Printing Photographic Developing Papers
The device consists of an ordinary cheap watch, a standard, or support, for an adjusting screw, a small coil, a movable armature, a knife switch, and a trip arrangement. A neat box or case, about 5 in. square and 3 in. high, is first constructed. A round recess, 1/8 in. deep, is cut in the center of the top, to admit the watch. The standard A is made of brass, 1/8 in. thick and 1/2 in. wide, bent as shown, and a 3/16-in. hole is drilled in the end of the long arm where it will exactly center over the pivot holding the watch hands. A 3/16-in. rod, B, is closely fitted in the hole and supplied with a knurled wheel, C, on the upper end, and an L-shaped arm, D, is fastened to the lower end. The end of this arm should be filed to a point, or a very thin piece of brass soldered to it, so that the end will just touch the minute hand of the watch. The tip end of the point should be bent slightly from the perpendicular toward the direction in which the watch hands are moving, so that, when it is set, the moving hand will easily break the contact.
The device includes a regular cheap watch, a support for an adjusting screw, a small coil, a movable arm, a knife switch, and a trip mechanism. A tidy box or case, about 5 inches square and 3 inches high, is constructed first. A round recess, 1/8 inch deep, is cut in the center of the top to hold the watch. The support, A, is made of brass, 1/8 inch thick and 1/2 inch wide, bent as shown, with a 3/16-inch hole drilled in the end of the long arm to be centered over the pivot holding the watch hands. A 3/16-inch rod, B, fits closely in the hole, equipped with a knurled wheel, C, at the upper end, and an L-shaped arm, D, is attached to the lower end. The end of this arm should be filed to a point, or a very thin piece of brass soldered to it, ensuring that the end just touches the minute hand of the watch. The tip of the point should be bent slightly away from the perpendicular in the direction the watch hands are moving, so that, when set, the moving hand will easily break the contact.
The magnetic arrangement consists of a 3-ohm coil, E, mounted, as shown, to one side of the case, where it operates the trip levers. The armature parts consist of an L-shaped piece of brass, F, pivoted at G, to which a square piece of soft iron, H, is attached. Two small parts, K, are bent and attached as shown, to furnish a limit stop for the piece F and a support for a spiral spring which holds the armature H away from the coil.
The magnetic setup includes a 3-ohm coil, E, positioned on one side of the case, where it activates the trip levers. The armature components consist of an L-shaped piece of brass, F, hinged at G, to which a square piece of soft iron, H, is connected. Two small parts, K, are bent and attached as shown to provide a limit stop for piece F and support a spiral spring that keeps the armature H away from the coil.
The knife switch L is fastened to the bottom of the case so that the handle will project through a slot in one side of the box. A trip piece, M, and a small eye for attaching a spiral spring, N, are soldered to the knife switch. These two attachments for the switch are insulated from the other parts.
The knife switch L is secured to the bottom of the case so that the handle sticks out through a slot on one side of the box. A trip piece, M, and a small loop for attaching a spiral spring, N, are soldered to the knife switch. These two attachments for the switch are insulated from the other components.
Two binding posts are mounted on top, one being connected to one terminal of the coil E and the other to the watch case. The other terminal of the coil is connected to the standard A. The two binding posts are connected in series with one or two dry cells, and the switch L is connected in series with the lamp used for printing.
Two binding posts are mounted on top, one linked to one terminal of the coil E and the other to the watch case. The other terminal of the coil is connected to the standard A. The two binding posts are wired in series with one or two dry cells, and the switch L is connected in series with the lamp used for printing.
The operation is as follows: The arm D, being set for a certain time, the lever of the switch L is set and the light remains lit until the minute hand strikes the point on the arm D, when the battery circuit is closed causing the coil to draw the armature H and allowing the spring N to open the switch L. The lamp is then extinguished.—Contributed by James P. Lewis, Golden, Colorado.
The process works like this: The arm D is set for a specific time, the lever of the switch L is activated, and the light stays on until the minute hand hits the point on arm D. At that moment, the battery circuit closes, which pulls the armature H towards the coil and lets the spring N open the switch L. This turns off the lamp. —Contributed by James P. Lewis, Golden, Colorado.
How to Make a Wing Nut

Finding that I needed some wing nuts and not being able to purchase them in the size I wanted, I made them from the ordinary nuts. A hole was drilled through opposite corners of each nut and a staple made of wire riveted in the holes as shown in the sketch. The staple should be long enough to admit the end of the bolt.—Contributed by Clarence L. Orcutt, Buffalo, N. Y.
Finding that I needed some wing nuts and couldn't buy them in the size I wanted, I made them from regular nuts. I drilled a hole through opposite corners of each nut and riveted a staple made of wire into the holes, as shown in the sketch. The staple should be long enough to fit the end of the bolt.—Contributed by Clarence L. Orcutt, Buffalo, N. Y.
Cork-Covered Clothes Peg

When screws or nails are used to hang clothes or other articles on, run the nail or screw through a bottle cork as shown. The cork will prevent the nail or screw from tearing the article and also insure the cloth against rust marks, should the article be wet.
When you use screws or nails to hang clothes or other items, push the nail or screw through a bottle cork as shown. The cork will stop the nail or screw from damaging the item and also protect the fabric from rust marks if the item gets wet.
Shaping an Old Broom
A broom, having the straws bent and out of shape, yet not worn out, can be fixed up like new in the following manner: Slightly dampen the straw with water and wrap with heavy paper, then place a weight on it. After standing under pressure for several days the straw will be restored to the shape of a new broom. Paint brushes can be treated in the same manner, but in that case linseed oil should be used instead of water.
A broom with bent and misshapen straws, but still usable, can be restored to like-new condition by doing the following: Lightly dampen the straw with water and wrap it in heavy paper, then place a weight on it. After sitting under pressure for a few days, the straw will return to the shape of a new broom. Paintbrushes can be treated the same way, but you should use linseed oil instead of water.

Method of Straightening the Straws
How to Straighten Straws
How to Make a Bolster

The sketch shows a simple bed bolster which I have made and which can be constructed at very little cost. Three circular pieces of poplar or pine, 10-1/2 in. in diameter, are required. These may be made in one cut by nailing the pieces together. Then nail on ten 3/8 by 2-in. strips, 52 in. long, or as long as the width of the bed, leaving about 1/2 in. space between the strips. These strips will thus go about two-thirds of the way around the circle, leaving room to insert the pillows when the bed is not in use. Cover the bolster with building paper or any other suitable material, and it is ready for the pillow shams.—Contributed by C. Martin, Jr., Chicago.
The sketch shows a simple bed bolster that I've made, and it can be built for very little money. You need three circular pieces of poplar or pine, each 10-1/2 inches in diameter. You can cut them in one go by nailing the pieces together. Then, nail on ten strips that are 3/8 by 2 inches and 52 inches long, or as long as the width of the bed, leaving about a 1/2-inch gap between the strips. These strips will cover about two-thirds of the way around the circle, leaving space to insert the pillows when the bed isn't in use. Cover the bolster with building paper or another suitable material, and it will be ready for the pillow shams.—Contributed by C. Martin, Jr., Chicago.
A Fish-Scaling Knife
A useful fish-scaling and skinning knife can be made of an old broken hacksaw blade. This must be at least 6 in. long and will make a knife with a 3-in. blade. Grind the blade to the shape shown and make a handle for it by using two strips of maple, 1/4 in. thick and 4 in. long. These are riveted together with 3 in. of the blade between them.—Contributed by John L. Waite, Cambridge, Mass.
A handy fish-scaling and skinning knife can be made from an old broken hacksaw blade. It should be at least 6 inches long, resulting in a knife with a 3-inch blade. Shape the blade as shown and create a handle using two strips of maple, each 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches long. Rivet them together with 3 inches of the blade sandwiched between them.—Contributed by John L. Waite, Cambridge, Mass.

Scaling Knife
Scaling Knife
To Prevent Moles from Damaging Growing Seeds
The food most liked by the ground mole is the sprouts of peas and corn. A way to protect these growing seeds is to dip them in kerosene just before planting. The mole will not touch the oil-covered seed, and the seeds are not injured in the least.—Contributed by J. W. Bauholster, Gresham, O.
The ground mole's favorite foods are pea and corn sprouts. To protect these growing seeds, you can dip them in kerosene right before planting. The mole won’t go near the oil-covered seeds, and the seeds won’t be harmed at all.—Contributed by J. W. Bauholster, Gresham, O.

The Heliograph as It is Used by Neighboring Boys to Send Messages on a Clear Day by Flashing the Sun's Rays from One to the Other, Which can be Read as Far as the Eye can See the Light
The Heliograph as It is Used by Neighboring Boys to Send Messages on a Clear Day by Flashing the Sun's Rays from One to the Other, Which can be Read as Far as the Eye can See the Light
How to Make a Heliograph
By R. B. Huey
The heliograph which is used in the army provides a good method of sending messages by the reflection of the sun's rays. In the mountains there are stations from which messages are sent by the heliograph for great distances, and guides carry them for use in case of trouble or accident. The wireless telegraph delivers messages by electricity through the air, but the heliograph sends them by flashes of light.
The heliograph used by the army is an effective way to send messages by reflecting sunlight. In the mountains, there are stations that use the heliograph to send messages over long distances, and guides carry these messages to use in case of emergencies or accidents. The wireless telegraph transmits messages via electricity through the air, while the heliograph sends them using flashes of light.
The main part of the instrument is the mirror, which should be about 4 in. square, set in a wood frame and swung on trunnions made of two square-head bolts, each 1/4 in. in diameter, and 1 in. long, which are firmly held to the frame with brass strips, 1/2 in. wide, and 3 in. long. The strips are drilled centrally to admit the bolts, and then drilled at each end for a screw to fasten them to the frame. This construction is clearly shown in Fig. 1.
The main component of the instrument is the mirror, which should be about 4 inches square, placed in a wooden frame and mounted on trunnions made from two square-head bolts, each 1/4 inch in diameter and 1 inch long. These bolts are securely attached to the frame with brass strips that are 1/2 inch wide and 3 inches long. The strips are drilled in the center to accommodate the bolts and then drilled at each end for a screw to secure them to the frame. This construction is clearly shown in Fig. 1.

Detail of the Parts for Making the Mirror and Sight Rod Which are Placed on a Base Set on a Tripod Top, the Whole being Adjusted to Reflect the Sun's Rays in Any Direction Desired (Fig. 1)
Detail of the Parts for Making the Mirror and Sight Rod Which are Placed on a Base Set on a Tripod Top, the Whole being Adjusted to Reflect the Sun's Rays in Any Direction Desired (Fig. 1)
A hole is cut centrally through the backing of the frame and a small hole, not over 1/8 in. in diameter, is scratched through the silvering on the glass. If the trunnions are centered properly, the small hole should be exactly in line with them and in the center.
A hole is cut in the center of the backing of the frame, and a small hole, no more than 1/8 inch in diameter, is scratched through the silvering on the glass. If the trunnions are centered correctly, the small hole should be perfectly aligned with them and in the center.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
A U-shaped support is made of wood strips, 3/8 in. thick and 1 in. wide, the length of the uprights being 3-1/2 in. and the crosspiece connecting their [184] lower ends a trifle longer than the width of the frame. These are put together, as shown in Fig. 2, with small brackets at the corners. A slot, 1/2 in. deep and 1/4 in. wide, is cut into the upper end of each upright to receive the trunnions on the mirror frame. Nuts are turned on the bolt ends tightly, to clamp the standard tops against the brass strips on the mirror frame. The cross strip at the bottom is clamped to the base by means of a bolt, 1-1/2 in. long. The hole for this bolt should be exactly below the peephole in the mirror and run through one end of the baseboard, which is 3/4 in. thick, 2 in. wide and 10 in. long.
A U-shaped support is made from wood strips that are 3/8 inch thick and 1 inch wide. The uprights are 3-1/2 inches long, and the crosspiece connecting their lower ends is slightly longer than the width of the frame. These pieces are assembled as shown in Fig. 2 using small brackets at the corners. A slot that is 1/2 inch deep and 1/4 inch wide is cut into the top end of each upright to hold the trunnions on the mirror frame. Nuts are tightly screwed onto the ends of the bolts to secure the standard tops against the brass strips on the mirror frame. The cross strip at the bottom is attached to the base with a 1-1/2 inch long bolt. The hole for this bolt should be directly below the peephole in the mirror and go through one end of the baseboard, which is 3/4 inch thick, 2 inches wide, and 10 inches long.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
At the opposite end of the base, place a sighting rod, which is made as follows: The rod is 1/2 in. in diameter and 8 in. long. The upper end is fitted with a piece of thick, white cardboard, cut 1/4 in. in diameter and having a projecting shank 1 in. long, as shown in Fig. 3. The rod is placed in a 1/2-in. hole bored in the end of the baseboard, as shown in Fig. 2. To keep the rod from slipping through the hole a setscrew is made of a small bolt with the nut set in the edge of the baseboard, as shown in Fig. 4.
At the opposite end of the base, place a sighting rod, which is made like this: The rod is 1/2 in. in diameter and 8 in. long. The upper end has a piece of thick, white cardboard, cut to 1/4 in. in diameter with a 1 in. long projecting shank, as shown in Fig. 3. The rod fits into a 1/2-in. hole drilled in the end of the baseboard, as illustrated in Fig. 2. To prevent the rod from slipping through the hole, a setscrew is created using a small bolt with the nut set into the edge of the baseboard, as shown in Fig. 4.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)

The Parts in Detail for Making the Tripods... (Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
The Parts in Detail for Making the Tripods... (Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
The tripod head is formed of a wood disk, 5 in. in diameter, with a hole in the center, and three small blocks of wood, 1 in. square and 2 in. long, nailed to the under side, as shown in Fig. 5. The tripod legs are made of light strips of wood, 3/8 in. thick, 1 in. wide and 5 ft. long. Two of these strips, nailed securely together to within 20 in. of the top, constitute one leg. The upper unnailed ends are spread to slip over the blocks on the tripod top. These ends are bored to loosely fit over the headless nails driven part way into the block ends. One tripod leg is shown in Fig. 6.
The tripod head consists of a wooden disk that's 5 inches in diameter, with a hole in the center, and three small wooden blocks, each 1 inch square and 2 inches long, nailed to the underside, as shown in Fig. 5. The tripod legs are made from lightweight strips of wood that are 3/8 inch thick, 1 inch wide, and 5 feet long. Two of these strips, securely nailed together to within 20 inches of the top, make up one leg. The upper unnailed ends are spread apart to fit over the blocks on the top of the tripod. These ends are drilled to loosely fit over the headless nails that are driven partway into the ends of the blocks. One tripod leg is shown in Fig. 6.

...and the Shutter for Flashing the Light,... (Fig. 7, Fig. 8)
...and the Shutter for Flashing the Light,... (Fig. 7, Fig. 8)
The screen, or shutter, is mounted on a separate tripod and is shown in Fig. 7. Cut out two slats, 3/8 in. thick, 2-1/2 in. wide and 6 in. long, from hard wood, and taper both edges of these slats down to 3/16 in. Small nails are driven into the ends of the slats and the heads are filed off so that the projecting ends will form trunnions for the slats to turn on. Make a frame of wood pieces, 3/4 in. thick and 2-1/2 in. wide, the opening in the frame being 6 in. square. Before nailing the frame together bore holes in the side uprights for the trunnions of the slats to turn in. These holes are 1-3/4 in. apart. The frame is then nailed together and also nailed to the tripod top. The shutter is operated with a key very similar to a telegraph key. The construction of this key is shown in Fig. 7. A part of a spool is fastened to a stick that is pivoted on the opposite side of the frame. The key is connected to the slats in the frame with a bar and rod, to which a coil spring is attached, as shown in Fig. 8. Figure 9 shows the positions of the tripods when the instrument is set to flash the sunlight through the shutter. The regular telegraph code is used in flashing the light.
The screen, or shutter, is mounted on a separate tripod, as shown in Fig. 7. Cut out two slats that are 3/8 in. thick, 2-1/2 in. wide, and 6 in. long from hardwood, and taper both edges of these slats down to 3/16 in. Drive small nails into the ends of the slats and file off the heads so that the projecting ends will serve as trunnions for the slats to rotate on. Build a frame using wood pieces that are 3/4 in. thick and 2-1/2 in. wide, with an opening in the frame measuring 6 in. square. Before nailing the frame together, drill holes in the side uprights for the trunnions of the slats to rotate in, spaced 1-3/4 in. apart. Nail the frame together and attach it to the top of the tripod. The shutter is operated with a key that resembles a telegraph key. The construction of this key is shown in Fig. 7. A part of a spool is attached to a stick that pivots on the opposite side of the frame. The key connects to the slats in the frame using a bar and rod, with a coil spring attached, as shown in Fig. 8. Figure 9 illustrates the positions of the tripods when the instrument is set to flash sunlight through the shutter. The standard telegraph code is used for flashing the light.

...and Diagram Showing the Location of the Tripods to Direct the Light through the Shutter (Fig. 9)
...and Diagram Showing the Location of the Tripods to Direct the Light through the Shutter (Fig. 9)
To set the instrument, first turn the cardboard disk down to uncover the point of the sight rod, then sight through the hole in the mirror and [185] adjust the sight rod so that the tip end comes squarely in line with the receiving station. When the instrument is properly sighted, the shutter is set up directly in front of it and the cardboard disk is turned up to cover the end of the sight rod. The mirror is then turned so that it reflects a beam of light with a small shadow spot showing in the center made by the peephole in the mirror, which is directed to fall on the center of the cardboard sighting disk. It will be quite easy to direct this shadow spot to the disk by holding a sheet of paper 6 or 8 in. in front of the mirror and following the spot on the paper until it reaches the disk. The flashes are made by manipulating the key operating the shutter in the same manner as a telegraph key.
To set up the instrument, first turn the cardboard disk down to reveal the point of the sight rod. Then, look through the hole in the mirror and [185] adjust the sight rod so that its tip is perfectly aligned with the receiving station. Once the instrument is properly aligned, position the shutter directly in front of it and turn the cardboard disk up to cover the tip of the sight rod. Next, adjust the mirror so that it reflects a beam of light with a small shadow spot in the center, created by the peephole in the mirror, which should be aimed at the center of the cardboard sighting disk. You can easily direct this shadow spot to the disk by holding a sheet of paper 6 or 8 inches in front of the mirror and tracking the spot on the paper until it reaches the disk. The flashes are activated by using the key to operate the shutter, just like a telegraph key.
Twine Cutter for Use at a Wrapping Counter

A cutter for use at the wrapping counter in a drug or confectionery store may be easily made from a double-edged razor blade and a piece of thin board—a piece of cigar box will do. Cut the wood in the shape shown, with a protecting piece over the edge of the razor. Screws are turned through the holes in the blade and into a support on the paper holder or any other convenient place.—Contributed by T. F. Managhan, Philadelphia, Pa.
A cutter for use at the wrapping counter in a drug or candy store can be easily made from a double-edged razor blade and a piece of thin wood—a piece from a cigar box will work. Cut the wood into the shape shown, with a protective piece covering the edge of the razor. Screw through the holes in the blade into a support on the paper holder or any other convenient spot. —Contributed by T. F. Managhan, Philadelphia, Pa.
Frosting Brass
A very fine ornamental finish, resembling brushed work, may be applied to brass articles by boiling them in a caustic-potash solution, then rinsing in clear water, whereupon they are dipped into dilute nitric acid until the oxide is removed, then rinsed quickly and dried in sawdust. The surface should be lacquered while the metal is hot.
A nice decorative finish that looks like brushed work can be achieved on brass items by boiling them in a caustic potash solution, then rinsing them in clear water. After that, dip them in diluted nitric acid until the oxide is gone, then rinse them quickly and dry them in sawdust. The surface should be lacquered while the metal is still hot.
A Cupboard-Door Spice-Box Shelf
To keep the spice boxes in a handy place where they would be together and not behind larger articles on the cupboard shelves, I made a special spice-box shelf, as shown, to hang on the inside of the cupboard door. The shelf swings out with the door as it opens, and is made of two bracket ends to which a bottom board and front crosspiece is nailed. The size of the shelf and its capacity are only limited by the space on the door.—Contributed by Austin Miller, Santa Barbara, California.
To keep the spice containers in an easy-to-reach spot where they’re all together and not hidden behind bigger items on the cupboard shelves, I created a special spice-box shelf, as shown, to hang on the inside of the cupboard door. The shelf swings out with the door as it opens and is made of two bracket ends, with a bottom board and front crosspiece nailed on. The size of the shelf and how much it can hold is only limited by the space on the door.—Contributed by Austin Miller, Santa Barbara, California.

The Shelf will Hold All the Spice Boxes and Keep Them Handy
The shelf will hold all the spice containers and keep them easily accessible.
Starting a Siphon
It is often necessary in a laboratory to siphon acids and poisonous liquids. If a pump is used there is always danger of the liquid entering the pump and damaging it, and, besides, a pump is not handy for this purpose. To fill a siphon by suction from the mouth, great care must be taken to keep from drawing the liquid into the mouth. One of the best ways to fill a siphon is to procure a large dropper and having pressed all the air out of the bulb insert the end in the siphon. Releasing the pressure on the bulb will cause it to draw the liquid into the siphon.—Contributed by Bedell M. Neubert, Newtown, Conn.
It’s often necessary in a lab to siphon acids and toxic liquids. If you use a pump, there’s always a risk of the liquid getting into the pump and damaging it. Plus, a pump isn’t very convenient for this task. To fill a siphon by sucking it from your mouth, you must be extremely careful not to accidentally pull the liquid into your mouth. One of the best ways to fill a siphon is to get a large dropper, press all the air out of the bulb, and insert the end into the siphon. Releasing the pressure on the bulb will allow it to draw the liquid into the siphon.—Contributed by Bedell M. Neubert, Newtown, Conn.

A Window-Seat Sewing Box
The combined window seat and sewing box shown was made by using a shoe-packing box for the foundation. This was covered with matting and the edges and corners finished with wood strips, 1/2 in. thick and stained a dark red. Three trays were provided on the inside at the top part of the box, each of the two upper ones occupying one-fourth of the box opening and sliding on a pair of guides fastened to the sides of the box while the lower tray is one-half the length of the box and slides on guides placed far enough below the upper trays to allow it to pass beneath these. The three trays were used for keeping sewing materials, such as buttons, hooks and eyes, etc. When the trays are all moved to one end it gives access to the lower part of the box where the work or mending is kept out of sight.
The combined window seat and sewing box shown was made by using a shoe-packing box as the base. It was covered with matting, and the edges and corners were finished with 1/2-inch thick wood strips stained a dark red. Inside, at the top part of the box, there were three trays. The two upper trays each took up one-fourth of the box opening and slid on a pair of guides attached to the sides of the box, while the lower tray was half the length of the box and slid on guides positioned low enough to fit under the upper trays. The three trays were used to store sewing supplies like buttons, hooks, and eyes. When all the trays are moved to one end, the lower part of the box is accessible, which keeps the work or mending hidden from sight.

A Window-Seat Workbox for Sewing Materials, Made of an Ordinary Shoe-Packing Box
A Window-Seat Workbox for Sewing Supplies, Made from a Regular Shoe-Box
The inside of the cover is 1-1/2 in. deep and shelves are arranged for thread and silk spools on either side, the center space being used for the shears, thimbles and scissors. The little shelves are made of two pieces each half as wide as the depth of the box cover. The first half of the shelf is fastened in place, then a row of cotters attached with wood screws whereupon the other half of the shelf is put in place. The edges of the cover are rounded on the outside to make an attractive seat.
The inside of the cover is 1-1/2 inches deep, and the shelves are set up for thread and silk spools on both sides, with the middle space used for shears, thimbles, and scissors. The small shelves are made of two pieces, each half the width of the box cover’s depth. The first half of the shelf is secured in place, then a row of pegs is attached with wood screws, after which the other half of the shelf is put in place. The edges of the cover are rounded on the outside to create a nice-looking seat.

The Spindles for the Spools are Made of Cotters Fastened with Screws in the Shelves
The spindles for the spools are made of cotters secured with screws in the shelves.
While no dimensions are necessary, as the box can be of any size to suit the maker it may be mentioned that the one shown is 28 in. long, 12 in wide and 16 in. deep.—Contributed by R. B. Thomas, Lowell, Mass.
While no specific dimensions are required, since the box can be any size that works for the creator, it's worth noting that the one displayed is 28 in. long, 12 in. wide, and 16 in. deep.—Contributed by R. B. Thomas, Lowell, Mass.
Cutting a Glass Bottle

It is sometimes necessary to cut a heavy glass bottle or cylinder. Four methods are in use. A carborundum disk having a thin edge, if kept wet and rotated at a high speed, will cut heavy glass, but the cylinder must be fed against the wheel very gently. A better way is to make a file mark—clean, but not very deep—around the cylinder and heat it with a long slender flame while slowly rotating the cylinder all the time. It is very important that the gas flame should not spread over the surface of the glass, for it is only the file mark that should be heated. A mere glancing touch is sufficient. Usually the glass will crack off in a very clean cut.
Sometimes you need to cut a heavy glass bottle or cylinder. There are four methods to do this. A carborundum disk with a thin edge can cut heavy glass if it's kept wet and rotated at high speed, but you need to gently feed the cylinder against the wheel. A better method is to make a clean, but not too deep, file mark around the cylinder and use a long, slender flame to heat it while slowly rotating the cylinder continuously. It's crucial that the gas flame doesn't touch the surface of the glass; only the file mark should be heated. A light touch is enough. Usually, the glass will crack cleanly along the cut.
Sometimes a fine platinum wire is wound around in the file mark and heated by an electric current. Less common is the trick of wrapping a strand of yarn soaked in turpentine around the mark and burning it. The principle is the same in each case. The unequal heating of the glass causes it to break.—Contributed by Harry H. Holmes, Richmond, Ind.
Sometimes a thin platinum wire is wrapped around the mark on the file and heated with an electric current. Less commonly, a piece of yarn soaked in turpentine is wrapped around the mark and set on fire. The principle is the same in both methods. The uneven heating of the glass makes it break.—Contributed by Harry H. Holmes, Richmond, Ind.
To Clean Painted or Frescoed Walls
Use a paste made of vinegar and baking soda with a small amount of salt added. The ingredients should be mixed in a large dish and applied to the wall with a cloth. The grease and fly specks as well as the carbon deposits from kitchen smoke are quickly removed. The mixture is harmless. After the wall is thoroughly cleaned, it should be washed with warm water and soap, then dried with a cloth. The mixture works equally well on enameled baths and glass or white porcelain.
Use a paste made of vinegar and baking soda with a little bit of salt added. Mix the ingredients in a large dish and apply it to the wall with a cloth. The grease, fly specks, and carbon deposits from kitchen smoke are quickly removed. The mixture is safe to use. After the wall is thoroughly cleaned, wash it with warm water and soap, then dry it with a cloth. This mixture works just as well on enameled tubs and glass or white porcelain.
Securing Papers in a Mailing Tube
The illustrations show two methods of securing papers or photographs in a mailing tube. In Fig. 1 the mailing tube A is shown in cross section and the manner of running the string through the pasteboard walls illustrated. The ends of the string are drawn up and tied over or under the label. If the label is pasted over the string or string ends as they are tied, it makes a sealed package which is rated as first-class matter.
The illustrations demonstrate two ways to secure papers or photos in a mailing tube. In Fig. 1, the mailing tube A is shown in cross-section, and it illustrates how to run the string through the cardboard walls. The ends of the string are pulled tight and tied over or under the label. If the label covers the string or the ends of the string when they are tied, it creates a sealed package that is classified as first-class mail.

The String in Either Case Prevents the Papers from Slipping Out of the Mailing Tube (Fig. 1)
The string in either case keeps the papers from slipping out of the mailing tube (Fig. 1)
The second way is to run the cords in a cross form through holes near the ends, as in Fig. 2, then tie the knots as at BB. In each instance even if the papers fit the tube loosely, they will be held securely and can be easily extracted when the knots are untied.
The second method is to run the cords in a cross shape through holes near the ends, like in Fig. 2, and then tie the knots as shown at BB. In each case, even if the papers fit the tube loosely, they will be held securely and can be easily taken out when the knots are untied.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
Cooling Tube for a Laboratory Still
A simple and very effective device to replace the cumbersome cooling or condensation coil of a still for the amateur's laboratory can be easily made as follows:
A simple and very effective device to replace the bulky cooling or condensation coil of a still for the amateur's lab can be easily made like this:
Procure an ordinary straight glass tube of fairly large diameter and heat it in the flame of an alcohol lamp with the use of a blowpipe or in a Bunsen burner with a very reduced flame so that only a small spot of the tube is brought to a red heat at one time Then, with a previously pointed and charred stick of wood—a penholder for instance—produce a small recess in the wall by pushing the charred end gently into the glowing part of the tube. This procedure is repeated until the whole tube is thus provided with small recesses. The indentations should be made in spiral lines around the tube, thus increasing the surface that is in contact with the cooling water. The operation of making the recesses is shown in Fig. 1. The walls of the recesses should have a regular and uniform slant.
Get a regular straight glass tube that's fairly large in diameter and heat it in the flame of an alcohol lamp using a blowpipe, or in a Bunsen burner with a very low flame so that only a small area of the tube is heated to red-hot at one time. Then, take a pointed and charred stick of wood—a penholder, for example—and create a small recess in the wall by gently pushing the charred end into the glowing part of the tube. Repeat this process until the entire tube is covered with small recesses. The indentations should be made in spiral lines around the tube, increasing the surface area that comes in contact with the cooling water. The process of creating the recesses is illustrated in Fig. 1. The walls of the recesses should have a consistent and even slope.

Method of Indenting the Walls of the Glass Tube and Its Application as a Still (Fig. 1)
Method of Indenting the Walls of the Glass Tube and Its Use as a Still (Fig. 1)
The tube thus produced can either be used as a rectifier (Fig. 2) above a vessel, for fractional distillation because it will allow the most volatile parts to pass out first, or as a condenser (Fig. 3), the arrangement of which needs no explanation. The amateur will find it much easier to make this tube than to coil a very long one.
The tube created can be used as a rectifier (Fig. 2) placed over a container for fractional distillation, as it will let the most volatile components escape first, or as a condenser (Fig. 3), which is straightforward in its setup. A beginner will find it much simpler to make this tube than to coil a very long one.

(Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
(Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A Comb Cleaner
A good comb cleaner that does the work easily and quickly can be made from a worn-out varnish brush. The brush selected should not be over 2 in. wide; it should be thoroughly cleaned with benzine and the bristles cut to a bevel, as shown in the sketch. In use, brush across the comb parallel with the teeth, and the dirt between them will be easily removed.—Contributed by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
A good comb cleaner that works quickly and easily can be made from an old varnish brush. The brush you choose shouldn’t be wider than 2 inches; it should be thoroughly cleaned with benzine, and the bristles should be cut to a bevel, as shown in the sketch. When using it, brush across the comb parallel to the teeth, and the dirt between them will come off easily.—Contributed by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.

Scraping Off Surplus Water on a Grindstone
When using a grindstone, an ample flow of water is desirable in order to insure good cutting, and the objectionable spattering may be overcome by fastening a piece of leather to the grindstone frame so that its edge will bear lightly upon the stone just below the point where the work is held. This will scrape off all surplus water from the grinding surface and prevent spattering.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.
When using a grindstone, it’s important to have a steady flow of water to ensure effective cutting. To reduce unwanted splashing, you can attach a piece of leather to the grindstone frame so that its edge lightly touches the stone just below where the work is held. This will remove any excess water from the grinding surface and stop splattering.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.
A Paper Drinking Cup
The cup is readily made of a piece of paper 8 in. square. Lay the paper on a flat surface, turn the point A over to meet the point B and crease on the dotted line CD, Fig. 1, then turn the corner D up to meet the line BC, Fig. 2, making sure that the new edge DE is parallel with the lower edge and crease. Turn the corner C in the same manner, that is, fold it over to the point E and crease. Fold the two corners at B outward and down, and crease, and the cup is complete as shown in Fig. 3.—Contributed by W. Douglas Matthews, Chappaqua, New York.
The cup is easily made from a piece of paper that’s 8 inches square. Lay the paper on a flat surface, fold the point A over to meet point B, and crease along the dotted line CD, Fig. 1. Next, fold corner D up to meet line BC, Fig. 2, ensuring that the new edge DE is parallel with the bottom edge and crease. Fold corner C in the same way, folding it over to point E and creasing. Fold the two corners at B outward and down, and crease, and the cup is complete as shown in Fig. 3.—Contributed by W. Douglas Matthews, Chappaqua, New York.

Several Cups can be Nested Together and Carried in the Pocket or Hand Bag (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Several cups can be stacked together and carried in your pocket or handbag (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Homemade Brush for Cleaning Upholstered Furniture
A durable brush for cleaning upholstered furniture can be made in the following manner: Procure a piece of haircloth, which is made of horsehair woof and linen warp. Strips of haircloth, cut lengthwise and 1-3/4 in. wide, are laid out smooth on a table and a strip of wrapping paper, 1/2 in. wide, is firmly glued to one edge. When this has dried, take out the warp that is not covered by the paper. Brush the fringe of horsehair until it is straight and even, and before commencing to wind, measure 6 in. from one end and glue this portion to the side of a strip of soft wood, 6 in. long, 5/8 in. wide and 1/16 in. thick. When dry, wind the glued length of haircloth and paper around the wood strip, applying glue to each separate turn of winding. The turns should be kept flush on the side that has been glued and the fringed part brushed and straight.
A durable brush for cleaning upholstered furniture can be made like this: First, get a piece of haircloth, which is made of horsehair and linen. Cut strips of haircloth that are 1-3/4 inches wide and lay them out flat on a table. Then, take a strip of wrapping paper that is 1/2 inch wide and glue it firmly to one edge. Once the glue has dried, remove the warp that isn’t covered by the paper. Brush the horsehair fringe until it’s straight and even. Before you start winding, measure 6 inches from one end and glue this part to the side of a soft wood strip that is 6 inches long, 5/8 inch wide, and 1/16 inch thick. Once it’s dry, wrap the glued length of haircloth and paper around the wood strip, applying glue to each turn as you wind it. Keep the turns flush on the side that has been glued and make sure the fringed part is brushed and straight.

Brush Made of Strip of Upholsterers' Haircloth with the Warp Removed and Fastened to a Handle
Brush Made of a Strip of Upholsterers' Haircloth with the Warp Taken Off and Attached to a Handle
The part to be glued to the handle must be perfectly even in its windings and held firmly in place while the glue is hardening. The winding should be continued until the brush is 1-1/2 in. thick.
The part that will be glued to the handle must be completely even in its wraps and held securely while the glue dries. The wrapping should continue until the brush is 1-1/2 in. thick.
The handle is made of a piece of wood, 14 in. long, 1-3/4 in. wide and 1/2 in. thick. Wood that takes a cherry or mahogany stain is preferable. Shape it about as shown in the sketch and round off the edges. The part to [189] which the brush is to be attached must be given a light coat of glue. When that has dried, glue the back of the brush to it, and after the glue has hardened, glue a piece of gimp around the brush part, then drive upholsterers' tacks into the gimp and wood, 3/4 in. apart. Stain and varnish the handle. The back of the handle can be used as a beater, and the brush for removing the dust.—Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y.
The handle is made from a piece of wood, 14 inches long, 1¾ inches wide, and ½ inch thick. It's best to use wood that takes a cherry or mahogany stain. Shape it as shown in the sketch and round off the edges. The part where the brush will be attached should have a light coat of glue. Once that dries, glue the back of the brush to it, and after the glue hardens, wrap a piece of gimp around the brush area, then drive upholsterer's tacks into the gimp and wood, ¾ inch apart. Stain and varnish the handle. The back of the handle can be used as a beater, and the brush for removing dust. —Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y.
Removing Calcium Deposits on Glass
A good way to clean glass vessels in which hard water is boiled is to use the following mixture to remove not only the calcium deposits, but also rust or sulphur stains that may be present. The solution is a mixture of ammonia water and a few ounces of salt. This should be placed in the glass vessel and boiled until the deposits disappear. The ammonia water may be made of any strength by diluting if necessary.
A great way to clean glass containers that have had hard water boiled in them is to use the following mixture to get rid of not just calcium deposits, but also any rust or sulfur stains that might be there. The solution consists of ammonia water and a few ounces of salt. Pour this into the glass container and boil it until the deposits vanish. You can adjust the strength of the ammonia water by diluting it if needed.
A Cold-Chisel Guide
When making long cuts with a cold chisel, it is almost impossible to guide the chisel edge along a line made with a scriber or pencil and have a straight cut. I find that it is much easier to use a guide, as shown in the sketch. The guide is made of a piece of wood, about 1 ft. long and 1-1/2 in. wide. A slot is cut in the center, wide enough to receive the chisel edge snugly, and about 9 in. long. The guide is clamped to the work, and the cold chisel slipped along in the slot as it is successively hit with a hammer.—Contributed by G. H. Holter, Jasper, Minn.
When making long cuts with a cold chisel, it’s almost impossible to keep the chisel edge along a line drawn with a scriber or pencil while achieving a straight cut. I find it much easier to use a guide, as shown in the sketch. The guide is made from a piece of wood that's about 1 ft long and 1-1/2 in wide. A slot is cut in the center, wide enough to fit the chisel edge snugly and about 9 in long. The guide is clamped to the work, and the cold chisel slides along in the slot as it’s repeatedly struck with a hammer.—Contributed by G. H. Holter, Jasper, Minn.

The Guide Makes It Easy to Follow along a Straight Line When Cutting with a Cold Chisel
The Guide Makes It Easy to Follow a Straight Line When Cutting with a Cold Chisel
Care of Paintbrushes

When laying aside paintbrushes, the usual custom is to place them in water and then forget all about them until needed again, with the result that the water usually is found more or less evaporated and the brushes hardened. If a quantity of oil, A, is poured on the water B, it will prevent this evaporation and keep the brushes in good shape.
When you're done using paintbrushes, the typical practice is to put them in water and then forget about them until you need them again. This usually leads to the water evaporating, leaving the brushes stiff. If you pour some oil, A, on the water B, it will stop the evaporation and keep the brushes in good condition.
Filter in a Pump Spout

The sketch shows how to place an ordinary sponge in a pump spout, to filter out sand and dirt particles that may come up with the water as it is pumped. A wire is fastened in the sponge so that it can be easily taken out for washing. When washing the sponge give the pump handle a few strokes so that the dirt collected in the spout will be washed out. Do not press the sponge too tightly into the spout, as this will stop the flow of water.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Iowa.
The sketch shows how to place a regular sponge in a pump spout to filter out sand and dirt particles that might come up with the water while it's being pumped. A wire is attached to the sponge so it can be easily removed for cleaning. When cleaning the sponge, give the pump handle a few pumps to wash out the dirt collected in the spout. Don’t press the sponge too tightly into the spout, as that will block the flow of water. —Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Iowa.
Brown Stain for Wood
Bichromate of potassium gives a lustrous, rich, light to dark brown stain on woods. The crystals are first dissolved into a saturated solution, which is then diluted with water. The stained surface needs no rubbing, as the stain leaves the wood perfectly clear for any desired finish. The satinlike appearance of wood treated by this stain cannot be produced with any of the pigment stains.—Contributed by August Meyer.
Potassium bichromate creates a shiny, deep brown stain on wood that can range from light to dark. First, the crystals are dissolved in a saturated solution, which is then thinned down with water. The stained surface doesn’t require any buffing, as the stain allows the wood to remain completely clear for any finish you want. The smooth appearance of wood treated with this stain can't be achieved with any pigment stains. —Contributed by August Meyer.
An Egg Boiler
In boiling eggs the usual method of dropping the eggs from a spoon into the boiling water often results in a burn, as well as in cracking of the eggs by the fall. In removing the eggs from the hot water and taking one out at a time, no two will be cooked alike. To overcome these difficulties I constructed an egg boiler as illustrated.
In boiling eggs, the common way of lowering them from a spoon into the boiling water often leads to burns and cracks from the drop. When taking the eggs out of the hot water one by one, they won't all be cooked the same. To solve these problems, I created an egg boiler as shown.

The Eggs are Prevented from Becoming Cracked and All are Easily Handled in One Operation
The Eggs are Kept from Cracking and All are Easily Managed in One Go
A pan was procured—tin or aluminum as desired—about 1 in. deep and 5-1/2 in. in diameter, and holes were drilled in the bottom having dimensions as shown. A handle was attached to the center with washers and nuts. The small ends of the eggs are set in the 1-3/8-in. holes and the whole pan set in a vessel of boiling water. When the boiling is completed, the entire lot of eggs are removed at the same time. As the device with its load of cooked eggs is quite pleasing in appearance, it may be set on a plate and the eggs served from it on the table.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
A pan was obtained—tin or aluminum, depending on preference—about 1 inch deep and 5.5 inches in diameter, with holes drilled in the bottom as shown. A handle was attached to the center using washers and nuts. The small ends of the eggs are placed in the 1.375-inch holes, and the entire pan is set into a pot of boiling water. Once the boiling is done, all the eggs can be removed at once. Since the device with its batch of cooked eggs looks quite nice, it can be placed on a plate and the eggs served directly from it at the table.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
Removing Black Deposit an Bathtubs
A good way to remove the black deposit left on bathtubs by the water is to use a strong solution of sulphuric acid. The acid should be poured on the discolored enameled surface and washed around with a cloth. The acid should not touch the hands so it is best to use a stick to move the cloth. Neither should it be allowed to touch the metal parts, but if this happens, no harm will result if it is quickly rubbed off with a cloth and water then applied.
A good way to get rid of the black stains left on bathtubs by water is to use a strong solution of sulfuric acid. You should pour the acid onto the discolored enamel surface and wipe it around with a cloth. Make sure the acid doesn't touch your hands, so it's best to use a stick to move the cloth. It also shouldn’t come into contact with the metal parts, but if it does, it won’t cause any damage if you quickly wipe it off with a cloth and water afterwards.
In using this acid never pour water into the acid, but always pour the acid into the water.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
In using this acid, never pour water into the acid; always pour the acid into the water. —Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A Stocking-Stretcher Form
A simple as well as inexpensive device for preventing the shrinking of stockings, more particularly those of children, after they have been washed, thus saving great wear and tear on the fabrics and increasing their length of life, is shown in the illustration. The stretcher can be made by anyone, a knowledge of woodcraft or art being unnecessary. If used, the device will prove to effect quite a saving in money, labor and worry in the course of a year.
A simple and inexpensive device for stopping children's stockings from shrinking after they’ve been washed is shown in the illustration. This helps prevent wear and tear on the fabric and extends their lifespan. Anyone can make the stretcher—no special woodworking or artistic skills are needed. If used, this device can save you a lot of money, effort, and stress over a year.

The Spring of the Two Parts Tends to Hold the Yarn and Keep It from Shrinking
The Spring of the Two Parts Tends to Hold the Yarn and Keep It from Shrinking
Place a new and unused stocking, that properly fits the foot, flat on a heavy piece of cardboard or a wood board, if desired, and mark an outline of the stocking on the board with a pencil. Cut out the design with a penknife or heavy pair of scissors and smooth the edges. A design having the same shape and size as the stocking results. Duplicate boards can be easily made. Place a spool, such as used to hold the finest silk thread, near the upper end of the first form and on top of this place the second. Then drive a nail through the boards and spool and clinch it, or better still, use [191] a small bolt. When the stockings are washed and the dampness wrung out as well as possible, stretch them over the boards and hang them up to dry. They will retain their shape and are easily ironed.—Contributed by Wm. P. Kennedy, Washington, D. C.
Place a new and unused stocking that fits the foot well, flat on a sturdy piece of cardboard or a wooden board, if you prefer, and trace the outline of the stocking on the board with a pencil. Cut out the shape using a craft knife or a strong pair of scissors and smooth the edges. This will create a template that matches the size and shape of the stocking. It's easy to make duplicate boards. Place a spool, like the kind used for the finest silk thread, near the top of the first template and put the second one on top of it. Then drive a nail through the boards and spool and secure it, or even better, use [191] a small bolt. When the stockings are washed and the moisture is wrung out as much as possible, stretch them over the boards and hang them up to dry. They will keep their shape and can be easily ironed.—Contributed by Wm. P. Kennedy, Washington, D. C.
Stick Holder for a Chopping Block
Having a lot of branch wood, from 1/2 in. to 1 in. in diameter, to saw, and not wishing to bother with a sawbuck, I rigged up a chopping block, as shown in the sketch, by fastening a piece of board to one side of the block with small lag screws. The piece to be sawed was laid across the block in the notch. If the piece is held down on the block with one foot, the wood is very easily sawn.—Contributed by Wilfred B. Sylvester, Reading, Mass.
Having a lot of branch wood, ranging from 1/2 inch to 1 inch in diameter, to cut, and not wanting to deal with a sawbuck, I set up a chopping block, as shown in the sketch, by attaching a piece of board to one side of the block with small lag screws. The piece to be cut was rested across the block in the notch. If you press down on the piece with one foot, the wood can be easily sawed. —Contributed by Wilfred B. Sylvester, Reading, Mass.

The Notched Board Fastened to the Chopping Block Turns It into a Sawbuck
The notched board attached to the chopping block turns it into a sawbuck.
Cleaning Gold and Platinum
A good way to clean gold or platinum jewelry is to first brush with soapsuds, then dust magnesia powder over the article and allow it to dry. A few rubs with a cloth makes the article shine with great luster. As magnesia powder is highly inflammable, it must be kept away from fire.
A good way to clean gold or platinum jewelry is to first brush it with soapy water, then sprinkle magnesia powder over the piece and let it dry. A few wipes with a cloth will make the item shine beautifully. Since magnesia powder is highly flammable, it should be kept away from fire.
A Twine Spool
The pieces of twine used in tying parcels delivered to a residence are either thrown away or tied together and wound into a ball for future use. The method I use for keeping the pieces of twine is to wind them over a discarded photographic-film spool. The spool was slipped on a finishing nail driven into the wall. The crank for turning the spool was made of a piece of wire, bent as shown and slipped into the slot end of the spool. One end of the first piece of string was tied to the core and then wound around it, the next piece tied to the first and wound up, and so on, as the strings were taken from the packages from time to time. When a string is needed for any purpose I always know where to find it, and it is easier to take it from the spool than from a ball.—Contributed by W. Resseguie, Susquehanna, Pa.
The pieces of twine used to tie up packages delivered to a home are either tossed out or tied together and wound into a ball for later use. The method I use to store the twine is by winding it around an old photographic film spool. The spool is attached to a finishing nail that's been driven into the wall. The crank I use to turn the spool is made from a piece of wire, bent as shown, and inserted into the slot at the end of the spool. I tie one end of the first piece of string to the core and then wind it around, tying the next piece to the first and winding it up, and so on, as I take strings from the packages over time. When I need a string for anything, I always know where to find it, and it’s easier to grab it from the spool than from a ball.—Contributed by W. Resseguie, Susquehanna, Pa.

The Film Spool as It is Attached to a Wall, and the Crank for Turning It
The film spool attached to the wall and the crank for turning it
Reinforcing Chair Bottoms
Embossed-leather-board chair bottoms can be made as serviceable as leather in the following manner: Turn the chair upside down and fill the hollow beneath the seat with excelsior, soft rags or fine shavings, then nail a 1/4-in. wood bottom over the filling with brads. Make the wood bottom 1/2 or 3/4 in. larger than the opening. It will thus not be seen, and the seat will last as long as the chair.—Contributed by J. H. Sanford, Pasadena, California.
Embossed leather chair bottoms can be just as durable as leather if you do the following: Turn the chair upside down and fill the space under the seat with excelsior, soft rags, or fine shavings. Then, nail a 1/4-inch wood bottom over the filling with brads. The wood bottom should be 1/2 or 3/4 inch larger than the opening. This way, it won’t be visible, and the seat will last as long as the chair.—Contributed by J. H. Sanford, Pasadena, California.
A Novelty Chain
An inexpensive chain for hanging painted glass panels, transparencies or photographs can be made by joining paper clips together to form the links. A box of 100 clips will make a chain about 10 ft. long. Such a chain can be made in a few minutes and a length of 10 ft. will hold about 4 lb.
An affordable chain for hanging painted glass panels, transparencies, or photographs can be created by linking paper clips together. A box of 100 clips will produce a chain that’s about 10 ft. long. This chain can be put together in just a few minutes, and a length of 10 ft. can support around 4 lb.

The Paper-Clip Links may be Joined to Make a Chain of Any Desired Length
The paperclip links can be connected to create a chain of any length you want.
If the chain is to be used for holding photographs, each inner loop end is bent out slightly.
If the chain is going to be used for holding photos, each inner loop end is bent out a bit.
Closet Holders for Linen
A combination drawer and shelf for a linen closet is much better than a shelf or a drawer. It is constructed in the manner of a drawer with sides and a back, the front being open and the ends of the sides cut rounding. A clip is attached to the under side of the bottom, near the front edge, to provide a means for pulling out the holder.
A combination drawer and shelf for a linen closet is way better than just a shelf or just a drawer. It’s built like a drawer with sides and a back, but the front is open and the ends of the sides are rounded. There’s a clip attached to the underside of the bottom, near the front edge, to make it easier to pull out the holder.

The Holder can be Pulled Out Like a Drawer and is as Accessible as a Shelf
The holder can be pulled out like a drawer and is as easy to reach as a shelf
Sheets, towels, table cloths, napkins, etc., can be neatly piled on the holder and can be seen without digging down to the bottom. It has the advantage over the shelf that it can be pulled out without anything falling off, and the linen on the back part can be easily reached as well as that in front. The closet may contain as many holders as is necessary and should be provided with a door for keeping out dust.—Contributed by H. A. Sullwold, St. Paul, Minn.
Sheets, towels, tablecloths, napkins, etc., can be neatly stacked on the holder and are easily visible without having to dig to the bottom. It has the advantage over shelves because it can be pulled out without anything falling off, and you can easily reach the linen at the back as well as the front. The closet can have as many holders as needed and should have a door to keep out dust.—Contributed by H. A. Sullwold, St. Paul, Minn.
Preserving Dry Batteries
The life of dry batteries, which are to be used in wet or damp places, may be considerably lengthened by being treated in the following manner:
The lifespan of dry batteries that are meant for use in wet or damp environments can be significantly extended by treating them as follows:
The batteries are placed in glass jars a little wider and higher than themselves. A layer of dry sawdust is placed in the bottom, for the battery to rest on, and the sides are packed with sawdust to within 1/2 in. of the top. Waterproof wires are connected to the binding posts and melted paraffin poured over the battery to the top of the jar. The carbon and zinc terminals should be marked to avoid trouble when connecting several cells together. Batteries treated in this manner are waterproof and can be submerged in water if necessary.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
The batteries are put in glass jars that are slightly wider and taller than the batteries themselves. A layer of dry sawdust is placed at the bottom for the battery to rest on, and the sides are filled with sawdust up to about 1/2 inch from the top. Waterproof wires are connected to the binding posts, and melted paraffin is poured over the battery up to the top of the jar. The carbon and zinc terminals should be labeled to prevent issues when connecting multiple cells together. Batteries handled this way are waterproof and can be submerged in water if needed.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
A Cleaner for Brass
In some recent laboratory experiments the following solution was found to cleanse brass very quickly without harm to the hands or the metal. An ounce of alum was put into a pint of boiling water and the solution rubbed on the brass with a cloth. Stains as well as tarnish were quickly removed. The solution is inexpensive and easily prepared.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
In some recent lab experiments, the following solution was found to clean brass quickly without harming your hands or the metal. An ounce of alum was mixed into a pint of boiling water, and the solution was rubbed onto the brass with a cloth. Stains and tarnish were removed in no time. The solution is cheap and easy to make. —Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Homemade Graduate

If a certain quantity of liquid is to be frequently measured out, it is best to have a graduate marked for this amount without any other markings upon it. To make a graduate for this purpose, procure a pickle or olive bottle of the type shown in the drawing and file a vertical line, A, on each side. These lines should be at least 1/8 in. wide. Place the bottle on a level surface and pour in the amount desired to be measured. Mark on each vertical line with a lead pencil and connect this mark or marks with lines, filed as shown at BB.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
If you need to measure a specific amount of liquid often, it's best to have a graduated container marked for that amount without any other markings. To create a graduated container, get a pickle or olive bottle similar to the one in the drawing and file a vertical line, A, on each side. These lines should be at least 1/8 inch wide. Place the bottle on a flat surface and pour in the amount you want to measure. Mark on each vertical line with a pencil and connect these marks with lines, filed as shown at BB.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Mending a Break in Felt
A good way to mend partially broken felt or a felt hat is to hold a lighted match under the break and smooth out the crevice with the hand. The shellac in the felt is melted by the heat and runs together, mending the felt in such a way that the break is hardly noticeable. This method may also be used to mend felt articles in the laboratory.
A good way to fix partially broken felt or a felt hat is to hold a lit match underneath the break and smooth out the gap with your hand. The shellac in the felt melts from the heat and fuses together, repairing the felt so that the break is barely noticeable. This method can also be used to repair felt items in the lab.
Imitating Ebony on Oak
The wood is immersed for 48 hours in a warm solution of alum and sprinkled several times with the following mixture: One part of logwood of the best quality is boiled with 10 parts of water, then it is filtered through linen and the liquid evaporated at a low temperature until its volume is reduced by one-half. To every quart of this bath are added 10 to 15 drops of a saturate of soluble indigo entirely neutral in reaction.
The wood is soaked for 48 hours in a warm solution of alum and is sprinkled several times with the following mixture: One part of high-quality logwood is boiled with 10 parts of water, then it is filtered through linen and the liquid is evaporated at a low temperature until its volume is reduced by half. To every quart of this bath, 10 to 15 drops of a saturated solution of soluble indigo that is completely neutral in reaction are added.
Smaller pieces may be steeped for a time in this solution, then the wood is rubbed with a saturated and filtered solution of verdigris in warm, concentrated acetic acid, and this operation continued until a black color of the desired intensity is obtained. The oak wood dyed in this manner is very similar to real ebony.
Smaller pieces can be soaked for a while in this solution, then the wood is rubbed with a strong, filtered solution of verdigris mixed with warm, concentrated vinegar, and this process is repeated until the wood reaches the desired intensity of black color. Oak wood dyed this way closely resembles real ebony.
Tongue Holder for a Boy's Wagon
To prevent any mishap when coasting in a boy's play wagon fasten the tongue with a coil spring so that it will be kept in a vertical position. The tongue is always out of the way when it is not used for drawing the wagon. The spring is only strong enough to hold the tongue, so that when this is used for pulling there is little or no tendency of the spring to draw the tongue upward. The coil spring is fastened with one screweye in the tongue and one in the front axle.—Contributed by Wm. F. Benson, Brockton, Massachusetts.
To avoid any accidents when riding in a boy's toy wagon, attach the tongue with a coil spring so that it stays in a vertical position. The tongue is always out of the way when it's not being used to pull the wagon. The spring is just strong enough to hold the tongue, so when it's used for pulling, it won't pull the tongue upward. The coil spring is secured with one screw eye on the tongue and one on the front axle. —Contributed by Wm. F. Benson, Brockton, Massachusetts.

Holder for the Wagon Tongue to Keep It in a Vertical Position When Not in Use
Holder for the Wagon Tongue to Keep It Upright When Not in Use
Gluing Small Mitered Frames
The mechanic who attempts to fasten a mitered frame in the home workshop usually comes to grief. This is due to lack of proper facilities for holding the frame straight and out of wind, and for clamping or drawing the miter joint together after the glue has been applied. The little device shown in the sketch, if properly made and used, does away with the usual difficulties and annoyances. It consists of a triangular block of wood with raised strips on the two edges that make the right angle, and the clamping piece with the wood screw through the center on the long side. The raised strips are made somewhat thinner than the frame to be fastened, as the clamping piece should bear on the frame and not on the strips; the function of the strips being to hold the frame square. The triangular block should be large enough to take the corner of the frame and leave room enough for the wood screw that holds it in place on the block. Four of these blocks will be necessary and they should be used in conjunction with pinch dogs. These dogs come in different sizes and may be purchased at supply stores or made as shown. The outside of the legs should be straight and parallel and the inside tapered so as to draw the joint together.
The mechanic who tries to secure a mitered frame in the home workshop often ends up struggling. This happens because there aren't adequate tools to keep the frame straight and stable, and for clamping or tightening the miter joint after the glue has been applied. The small device shown in the sketch, if made and used correctly, eliminates the common challenges and frustrations. It consists of a triangular block of wood with raised strips along the two edges that form the right angle, and a clamping piece with a wood screw through the center on the long side. The raised strips are slightly thinner than the frame being fastened, so the clamping piece presses on the frame and not on the strips; the strips are meant to keep the frame squared. The triangular block should be large enough to accommodate the corner of the frame while allowing space for the wood screw that holds it in position on the block. You will need four of these blocks, and they should be used along with pinch dogs. These dogs come in various sizes and can be purchased at supply stores or made as illustrated. The outer sides of the legs should be straight and parallel, while the inner sides should be tapered to draw the joint together.

Clamp for Holding the Corner of a Frame While Gluing and Fastening the Mitered Joint
Clamp for Holding the Corner of a Frame While Gluing and Fastening the Mitered Joint
When a joint is ready to be glued, a piece of paper is placed on the block [194] under the joint to keep it from sticking. Apply the glue and push the two sides into the corner formed by the raised strips, the dog is then driven in lightly and the clamping piece screwed down tightly, and if the miter has been properly cut, a nice close-jointed and square corner will be the result.—Contributed by J. Shelly, Brooklyn, New York.
When a joint is ready to be glued, put a piece of paper on the block [194] under the joint to prevent it from sticking. Apply the glue and push the two sides into the corner created by the raised strips. Then, lightly drive in the dog and screw down the clamping piece tightly. If the miter has been cut correctly, you’ll end up with a nice, tight, square corner. —Contributed by J. Shelly, Brooklyn, New York.
Handle Attachment for a Sickle
For cutting around flower beds or bushes and in close places I find that an extension handle for a sickle is quite an assistance. The auxiliary handle is bound to the sickle handle with wire at the ends and is further fastened with a screw in the center. The arrows show the directions in which the hands should be moved in working the sickle.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
For trimming around flower beds or bushes and in tight spaces, I find that an extension handle for a sickle is really helpful. The extra handle is attached to the sickle handle with wire at the ends and is also secured with a screw in the middle. The arrows indicate the directions in which to move your hands while using the sickle. —Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.

The Extension Handle Makes It Much Easier to Control the Sickle in Cutting around Obstacles
The Extension Handle Makes It Much Easier to Control the Sickle in Cutting around Obstacles
A Clothesline for Small Goods
Handkerchiefs and small pieces included in the week's laundry are usually quite troublesome to hang with the larger pieces, and for this reason I constructed a special line for the small goods. A line was cut to fit between two porch posts and a hook made of galvanized wire tied to each end, staples being driven into the posts to receive them. Three or four wire grips were formed and attached to the line. It was only necessary to draw the corner of a handkerchief into the grip as it was wrung out, placing several in each grip. The line with its load was then carried out and attached between the porch posts. This made it unnecessary to look through the clothes for the small articles. It also prevented chilling the fingers and no pins were needed.—Contributed by R. D. Livingston, Hopkinton, Iowa.
Handkerchiefs and small items included in the week's laundry are usually pretty annoying to hang with the larger pieces, which is why I made a special line just for the small stuff. I cut a line to fit between two porch posts and tied a hook made of galvanized wire to each end, using staples driven into the posts to hold them. I formed three or four wire grips and attached them to the line. You just need to pull the corner of a handkerchief into the grip as you wring it out, putting several in each grip. Then, you carry the line with its load outside and attach it between the porch posts. This way, you don’t have to dig through the clothes for the small items. It also keeps your fingers from getting cold, and you don’t need any pins. —Contributed by R. D. Livingston, Hopkinton, Iowa.

Line and Holders are Always Together and can be Washed as the Clothes
Line and holders are always together and can be washed just like the clothes.
Automatically Controlled Ice-Box Lights
Often the ice box is placed in a dark closet or some out-of-the-way place, and it is almost impossible to locate articles already in the box or put others away without considerable inconvenience on account of the lack of proper light. This difficulty can be easily overcome by mounting a small electric lamp in each of the different compartments of the box, which will be automatically lighted when the lid of the box is raised or the door opened. The circuit through the lamp is controlled by a special switch mounted in such a way that its contacts are open when the doors and lid of the box are closed. A diagram of the circuit is given in Fig. 1, which shows three lamps, each controlled by a separate switch, connected in parallel to a battery of several dry cells. The lamps should be of low voltage and need not be very high in candlepower. The number of cells needed in the battery will depend upon the voltage of the [195] lamps. The voltage of the battery and the rated voltage of the lamps should be approximately the same.
Often, the icebox is put in a dark closet or some out-of-the-way spot, making it nearly impossible to find items already inside or to add new ones without a lot of hassle due to the lack of proper lighting. This problem can be easily solved by installing a small electric lamp in each of the different compartments of the box, which will automatically light up when the lid is raised or the door is opened. The lamp circuit is controlled by a special switch designed so that its contacts remain open when the doors and lid of the box are closed. A diagram of the circuit is shown in Fig. 1, which illustrates three lamps, each controlled by a separate switch, connected in parallel to a battery of several dry cells. The lamps should be low voltage and don’t need to be very bright. The number of cells required in the battery will depend on the voltage of the [195] lamps. The voltage of the battery and the rated voltage of the lamps should be about the same.

The Lamps will be Automatically Lighted When the Door of the Ice Box is Opened (Fig. 1)
The lights will turn on automatically when the door of the fridge is opened (Fig. 1)
A special switch that will serve the above purpose is shown in Fig. 2. It consists of two pieces of spring brass, A and B, about 3/8 in. wide, bent into the forms shown. These pieces are mounted in a recess cut in the jamb of the door or lid in such a way that the free end of the piece A is held away from the piece B when the door or lid is closed. When the lid of the box or the door is open the two springs come in contact and the lamp lights; upon closing the lid or door the contact is broken and the lamp goes out.
A special switch designed for this purpose is shown in Fig. 2. It consists of two pieces of spring brass, A and B, each about 3/8 in. wide, bent into the shapes displayed. These pieces are mounted in a recess cut into the door or lid frame so that the free end of piece A is held away from piece B when the door or lid is closed. When the box lid or door is open, the two springs touch and the lamp turns on; closing the lid or door breaks the contact, and the lamp turns off.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
A good quality of rubber-insulated copper wire should be used in making the connections, and all parts should be as well protected from moisture and the possibilities of mechanical abuse as possible. It would be best to tape the lamps in the sockets with a piece of friction tape so as to prevent moisture getting into the socket and, perhaps, shortening the lamp. A short piece of brass tubing can be mounted around the lamp to protect it mechanically. Be sure to place the batteries where they will be kept dry.
A good quality rubber-insulated copper wire should be used for making connections, and all parts should be as protected from moisture and potential mechanical damage as possible. It's best to tape the lamps in the sockets with a piece of friction tape to prevent moisture from getting into the socket and possibly shorting the lamp. A short piece of brass tubing can be mounted around the lamp for mechanical protection. Make sure to keep the batteries in a dry place.
A Bottle-Cap Lifter

To remove the crimped bottle cover so extensively used requires a special lifter, the corkscrew being of little use for this purpose. When a cap-cover remover is not at hand, prepare a pocketknife in the manner shown, and it makes an excellent substitute. It only requires a small notch filed in the heel of the blade, which does not interfere with the ordinary use of the knife in the least.—Contributed by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Indiana.
To remove the crimped bottle cover that is so commonly used, you need a special lifter, as a corkscrew isn't very effective for this job. When you don't have a cap-cover remover, you can use a pocketknife as shown, which works great as a substitute. Just file a small notch in the heel of the blade, and it won't affect the regular use of the knife at all. —Contributed by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Indiana.
Ants may be effectively destroyed by placing a coop with a chicken in it over the hill.
Ants can be effectively eliminated by putting a coop with a chicken in it on the hill.
A Mechanical Bicycle Horn
The body of the horn A is made of metal, about 3 in. in diameter, with a screw cover. The shaft B, to which is attached a driving pulley, C, and a ratchet wheel, D, is fitted in holes drilled through the diameter of the body. The diaphragm E is clamped, between the edge of the body and the cover, on a seat made of rubber rings, F, and carries a contact device, G, that is riveted to its center. The diaphragm should be set so that the contact will touch the ends of the ratchets.
The body of horn A is made of metal, about 3 inches in diameter, and has a screw cover. The shaft B, which has a driving pulley C and a ratchet wheel D attached to it, is fitted into holes drilled through the diameter of the body. The diaphragm E is secured between the edge of the body and the cover, resting on a seat made of rubber rings F, and has a contact device G that is riveted to its center. The diaphragm should be positioned so that the contact touches the ends of the ratchets.

The Horn is Sounded by Making Connections with the Moving Surface of the Tire
The horn is activated by connecting with the tire's moving surface
A metal cone is fastened in an opening cut in the center of the cover, over the diaphragm. The back of the body is fitted with a bracket for attaching it to the front fork on a bicycle. The lever H carries an idler pulley which is forced against the bicycle tire and the pulley C by means of a cord, J.
A metal cone is secured in a hole cut in the center of the cover, over the diaphragm. The back of the body has a bracket for attaching it to the front fork of a bicycle. The lever H holds an idler pulley that presses against the bicycle tire and the pulley C using a cord, J.
Adjusting the diaphragm contact on the ratchet wheel will change the tone of the horn.—Contributed by P. Mertz, Jamaica, L. I.
Adjusting the diaphragm contact on the ratchet wheel will change the tone of the horn.—Contributed by P. Mertz, Jamaica, L. I.
Retarder for Plaster of Paris
When it is desired to lengthen the time of setting after preparing plaster of Paris, dissolve 1 oz. of citric acid in water used for mixing 100 lb. of plaster, and it will retard the setting for about three hours.
When you want to extend the setting time after mixing plaster of Paris, dissolve 1 oz. of citric acid in the water used for mixing 100 lb. of plaster, and it will delay the setting time by about three hours.
An Inkwell Stopper

A good way to keep an inkwell of the type shown in the sketch clean is to place a marble over the opening. The marble keeps out flies and dust, is easily rolled aside and is no obstacle to the pen entering the well.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pennsylvania.
A great way to keep an inkwell like the one in the sketch clean is to put a marble over the opening. The marble keeps out flies and dust, can be easily rolled aside, and doesn't get in the way of the pen going into the well.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pennsylvania.
A Grass Rake
This adaptation of an ordinary iron rake for use on a lawn was the outcome of not having a lawn rake at hand. Two spools, each 1-1/2 in. in diameter, were procured and one forced on each end tooth of the rake. The spools were forced on the teeth just far enough to allow the rake to slide on the ground and prevent the other teeth from digging out the grass. The end of the spools may be rounded and smoothed so that they will slide easily on the ground.—Contributed by H. E. Gray, Montclair, N. J.
This adaptation of a regular iron rake for use on a lawn came about because there wasn’t a lawn rake available. Two spools, each 1-1/2 inches in diameter, were obtained, and one was pushed onto each end tooth of the rake. The spools were pushed onto the teeth just far enough to let the rake glide on the ground and keep the other teeth from uprooting the grass. The ends of the spools can be rounded and smoothed to make sure they slide easily on the ground.—Contributed by H. E. Gray, Montclair, N. J.

The Spools Prevent the Teeth from Injuring the Grass Roots as the Rake Passes over the Ground
The spools stop the teeth from damaging the grass roots as the rake moves over the ground.
A Staple Puller

A very simple way to pull a staple is to use the claws of an ordinary carpenter's hammer and a nail, as shown in the sketch. The staple can be removed quickly without being bent, and no damage to the material into which it was driven will result.
A straightforward way to remove a staple is by using the claws of a regular carpenter's hammer and a nail, as shown in the sketch. The staple can be taken out quickly without getting bent, and it won't damage the material it was set into.
To Remove Acid Stains from Cloth
Apply pearlash directly to the stain, allowing it to set a minute or two, then boil the article in soap water for several minutes. The method is harmless and inexpensive, and can be used by anyone.
Apply pearlash directly to the stain, let it sit for a minute or two, then boil the item in soapy water for several minutes. This method is safe and affordable, and anyone can use it.
Repairing Rocker on a Chair

The tenons on the posts of a rocking chair being broken off so close to the rocker that it was impossible to make the ordinary repairs, four window-shade-roller brackets were used in the following manner: The metal was straightened so that it would lie flat and two brackets were used on the end of each post. This made a neat and strong repair.—Contributed by Chas. Schmidt, Baltimore, Md.
The tenons on the posts of a rocking chair were broken off so close to the rocker that it was impossible to do the usual repairs. Four window-shade roller brackets were used like this: The metal was straightened so it would lie flat, and two brackets were attached to the end of each post. This created a neat and sturdy repair.—Contributed by Chas. Schmidt, Baltimore, Md.
Electric-Lamp Reflector for a Target

An ordinary 1-lb. coffee can may be quickly fashioned into a most effective reflector for an electric bulb. The light is projected upon the target while the marksman's eyes are shielded. Of course, this device can be used for other purposes.
An ordinary 1-lb. coffee can can be quickly turned into a highly effective reflector for an electric bulb. The light is aimed at the target while the marksman’s eyes are shielded. Of course, this device can be used for other purposes.
The can is shaped into a reflector by cutting it open along one side with a pair of snips, then following the circumference of the bottom halfway around on each side. Bend the flaps outward as far as desired and cut a hole in the bottom just large enough to insert the bulb, as shown.—Contributed by Burke Jenkins, Port Washington, L. I.
The can is shaped into a reflector by cutting it open along one side with a pair of snips, then following the curve of the bottom halfway around on each side. Bend the flaps outward as much as you want and cut a hole in the bottom just big enough to fit the bulb, as shown.—Contributed by Burke Jenkins, Port Washington, L. I.
Linoleum may be renewed by applying floor wax in liquid form.
Linoleum can be refreshed by applying liquid floor wax.
Making Small Taps
The owner of a private workshop has need for taps and occasionally wishes to make them, not because they are cheaper, but for the sake of experience or to get some special thread. In cutting the flutes, whether it be by hand or in a shaper, it is a good plan to give the flutes an angle, that is, to cut them, not parallel with the axis of the tap, but at an angle of 5 to 15 deg. with the center line. This makes the tap cut easier, giving it a wedge action instead of just simply pushing the metal off. The same method applies to counterbores and countersinks, which, when so made, take less power to drive.
The owner of a private workshop sometimes needs taps and occasionally wants to make them, not because it’s cheaper, but for the sake of skill or to get a specific thread. When cutting the flutes, whether by hand or using a shaper, it’s a good idea to give the flutes an angle—instead of cutting them parallel to the axis of the tap, cut them at an angle of 5 to 15 degrees to the center line. This design helps the tap cut more easily, creating a wedge action instead of just pushing the metal away. The same technique applies to counterbores and countersinks, which, when made this way, require less power to use.
Sink a Substitute for a Dishpan

On special occasions when company is entertained or in large families, it is almost impossible to wash all the dishes in an ordinary dishpan; in fact, the large platters will not go in at all, so I devised the following method as a substitute for a larger pan. A tin disk was cut from the top of a tomato can with a can opener so as to be as round as possible, then a piece of cheesecloth was folded into an even square, the disk placed in the center and all four corners of the cloth drawn over to the center of the disk. A nail was driven through the center of the disk, to make a hole, through which a string was drawn with the nail and tied to it to form a loop on the head. This is used to stop the sink drain.
On special occasions when you have guests over or in big families, it’s almost impossible to wash all the dishes in a regular dishpan; in fact, the large platters won't fit at all, so I came up with the following method as a substitute for a larger pan. I cut a tin disk from the top of a tomato can with a can opener to make it as round as possible, then I folded a piece of cheesecloth into an even square, placed the disk in the center, and pulled all four corners of the cloth over to the middle of the disk. I drove a nail through the center of the disk to make a hole, then threaded a string through the hole and tied it to create a loop on the top. This is used to plug the sink drain.
When this is put over the drain outlet the sink may be used as a dishpan. The same result could be obtained a little better with a piece of an old rubber boot or rubber coat, but usually this material is not at hand, and the cheesecloth will do almost as well.—Contributed by Hannah Jennings, Chicago.
When this is placed over the drain outlet, the sink can be used as a dishpan. You could get a similar result, maybe even slightly better, with a piece of an old rubber boot or rubber coat, but that material usually isn't available, and the cheesecloth will work just as well.—Contributed by Hannah Jennings, Chicago.
How to Make Small Coil Springs
Procure a nut, having a small thread that will admit the size of the wire to be used in making the spring. Cut a small notch to the depth of the thread where the thread starts, and procure a smooth rod that will pass snugly through the threads of the nut. Shape one end of the rod to fit a carpenter's brace, if there is no drill chuck at hand, and drill a hole in the other end to admit one end of the spring wire.
Get a nut with a small thread that will fit the size of the wire needed to make the spring. Cut a small notch to the depth of the thread where it begins, and get a smooth rod that fits snugly through the threads of the nut. Shape one end of the rod to fit a carpenter's brace if you don't have a drill chuck, and drill a hole in the other end to accommodate one end of the spring wire.

The Threads in the Nut Will Guide as Well as Coil the Spring Evenly
The threads in the nut will help guide as well as wind the spring evenly.
Bend the wire at right angles and insert the end in the hole. Place the end of the rod in the nut, which should be gripped in a vise, and turn the rod, at the same time seeing that the wire is guided into the notch cut at the start of the thread. The wire will follow the thread of the nut and make a perfect spring of an even opening throughout its length. Closed or open coils can be made by using a nut having the proper number of threads.—Contributed by A. Spencer, Kinston, N. C.
Bend the wire at a right angle and insert the end into the hole. Put the end of the rod into the nut, which should be secured in a vise, and turn the rod while making sure the wire is guided into the notch cut at the beginning of the thread. The wire will follow the thread of the nut and create a perfect spring with an even opening throughout its length. You can make closed or open coils by using a nut with the right number of threads.—Contributed by A. Spencer, Kinston, N. C.
A Pruning-Saw Guard
The double-edged pruning saw with coarse teeth on one side and fine on the other would be far more widely used, if it were not for the fact that the unused edge so often injures the bark of the trunk when the saw is being used. A very satisfactory guard may be quickly made of a brass curtain rod by prying it apart slightly at the seam and cutting a suitable length to fit over the edge, as shown in the sketch. This will cling to the saw blade by its own tension.—Contributed by James H. Brundage, Katonah, N. Y.
The double-edged pruning saw with rough teeth on one side and finer teeth on the other would be used much more often if the unused edge didn't frequently damage the bark of the trunk when the saw is in use. You can quickly make a very effective guard from a brass curtain rod by gently prying it apart at the seam and cutting a piece to fit over the edge, as shown in the sketch. This will hold onto the saw blade by its own tension.—Contributed by James H. Brundage, Katonah, N. Y.

The Teeth on the Unused Edge are Covered with a Piece of Brass Curtain Rod
The teeth on the unused edge are covered with a piece of brass curtain rod.
Home-Made Motion-Picture Camera and Projector
By Charles Frank
In Three Parts—Part I

(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 1)
Motion pictures are made and reproduced by means of a camera and projector, each having a similar mechanism that would seem entirely too complicated for the average person to construct at home, yet a correspondent of the Nickelodeon has devised a simple rotary cylinder shutter that can be substituted for the complicated parts. While this simple cylinder shutter is not claimed to be infringing on existing patents, yet, as it has no commercial value, there would be no objection on this score. The instruments described are nothing more than toys, and if the amateur photographer can secure a few dozen feet of animated photographs about the home that are dear to his heart, and reproduce them on a screen, it will have served its purpose. The camera and projector described uses standard film, 1-3/8 in. wide, with perforations every 3/16 in.
Movies are made and shown using a camera and projector, both employing similar mechanisms that seem way too complex for the average person to build at home. However, a writer for the Nickelodeon has created a simple rotary cylinder shutter that can replace the complicated components. While this simple cylinder shutter isn't claimed to violate any existing patents, it doesn't hold any commercial value, so there shouldn't be any objections on that front. The tools mentioned are just toys, and if amateur photographers can capture a few dozen feet of moving images from home that mean a lot to them and display them on a screen, it will have achieved its goal. The camera and projector described use standard film that is 1-3/8 inches wide, with perforations every 3/16 inches.
The Camera
The ordinary hand camera for making still pictures consists of a light-tight box with a lens at one end and a sensitized plate or film at the other. The motion-picture camera (Fig. 1) is nothing more than a hand camera with a mechanical device for stepping a long roll of film through a space in the focal plane of the lens at a speed of about 16 pictures a second, and stopping the film long enough to make the requisite exposure on each division. The first thing to consider is the lens. A lens having ordinary speed for a hand camera, and one with about 3 in. focal length will give satisfactory results. If one does not care to purchase a lens, a small 1-1/2 in. or 2 in. reading glass can be used, if it is stopped down, or a lens may be taken from a hand camera. The width of the camera from front to back (W, Fig. 2) must be determined by the focal length of the lens. The dimensions given in the drawing are only approximate, and they can be changed if the camera is to be used in making an extra long film negative.
The standard hand camera for taking still pictures is a light-tight box with a lens on one end and a sensitized plate or film on the other. The motion-picture camera (Fig. 1) is basically a hand camera with a mechanical device that moves a long roll of film through the area in the focal plane of the lens at a speed of about 16 frames per second, pausing the film long enough to expose each frame properly. The first thing to think about is the lens. A lens with average speed for a hand camera and about a 3-inch focal length will give good results. If you don't want to buy a lens, you can use a small 1½-inch or 2-inch reading glass, as long as you stop it down, or you can take a lens from a hand camera. The width of the camera from front to back (W, Fig. 2) must be determined by the focal length of the lens. The measurements shown in the drawing are just estimates and can be adjusted if the camera is intended for creating an extra long film negative.
The roll of unexposed film (A, Fig. 2) is placed on a small shaft between U-shaped bearings, made of sheet metal and screwed to the top board of the camera. The lens B is set in the front board at a point 4 in. below the top. If a large roll of film is to be used, this distance must be greater to allow room for the film roll in the top of the camera. The cylinder C, which acts as a shutter and intermittent movement, revolves directly behind and in the path of the light passing through the lens. Partitions, DD, are set in grooves cut [199] in the boards, forming the sides of the camera. These partitions are to keep the light, which may be diffused from the lens, from striking the film at either side of the shutter, and at the same time acting as guides for the film at the rear end of the camera. Their edges at the back are covered with black velvet. The back of the box is a hinged door, rabbeted on all edges, and opening at the side to allow the insertion and removal of the film, and also acting as a guide for the film when closed. A strip of black velvet, E, a little wider than the film, is pasted to the inside surface of the door, so that it bears lightly against the back edges of the partitions DD. The film passes between the edges of the partitions and the velvet on the door with some friction, which keeps it from moving except when pulled through with the roller shutter. A wire-staple guide, F, is fastened in the lower partition, through which the end of the film is passed before closing the door. The film as it is run through drops in folds in the bottom of the box.
The unexposed film roll (A, Fig. 2) is placed on a small shaft between U-shaped bearings made of sheet metal, which are screwed to the top of the camera. The lens B is installed in the front board, positioned 4 in. below the top. If a larger film roll is used, this distance needs to be increased to make space for the film roll at the top of the camera. The cylinder C, which functions as a shutter and provides intermittent movement, rotates directly behind and in the light path from the lens. The partitions, DD, are installed in grooves cut in the boards, creating the sides of the camera. These partitions prevent light, which might scatter from the lens, from hitting the film on either side of the shutter, while also serving as guides for the film at the back of the camera. The back edges of the partitions are lined with black velvet. The back of the box is a hinged door, rabbeted on all edges, that opens from the side for inserting and removing the film, and it also serves as a guide for the film when closed. A strip of black velvet, E, slightly wider than the film, is glued to the inside of the door so that it lightly presses against the back edges of the partitions DD. The film passes between the edges of the partitions and the velvet on the door with some friction, which prevents it from moving unless pulled through by the roller shutter. A wire-staple guide, F, is secured in the lower partition, through which the end of the film is threaded before closing the door. As the film is run through, it drops in folds at the bottom of the box.
The rotary cylinder shutter is the heart of the machine and should be made well and strictly according to the dimensions. The detail of this part is shown in Fig. 3. A rectangular opening is mortised through one of its diameters to admit light on the film when in certain positions. The cylinder is of wood with a 1/4 in. steel rod inserted in the center of each end for axles. A small grooved pulley (G, Fig. 2), about 1 in. in diameter, is fastened to the outer end of one of these rods. The cylinder is revolved by a round belt from a drive wheel, H, 3 or 3-1/2 in. in diameter and turned by the aid of a crankpin. Owing to the backward rotation of the cylinder, the belt must be crossed between the drive wheel H, and the pulley G. The projections or sprockets, Fig. 3, must be accurately set at a distance of 3/8 in. from the 90 deg. point, using the center of the mortised hole as a base. These projections can be pins or small staples, but they must not be over 1/16 in. in size. The base of the sprockets must fit the hole in the film snugly, but the points should be slightly rounding, so that they will easily enter the perforations. When the upper sprocket, which is approaching the film, engages a perforation, just below the upper partition, it will carry the film downward until the sprocket disengages from the perforation at the lower partition. The distance of travel must be exactly 3/4 in., as that is the height of each picture. The cylinder requires some adjustment to meet this condition; therefore the axles are made to revolve in holes bored in two strips of wood, JJ, which can be moved forward or backward to obtain the proper distance from the film. To allow for this movement, the axles pass through slots cut in the sides of the camera box instead of round holes. The strips JJ are fastened temporarily and when the correct position for the cylinder is found, they are permanently fastened to the box. Grooves, K, are cut through the black velvet and into the back of the door to allow a space for the sprockets to pass through freely. The inside of the box should be painted a dead black, and black paper pasted on all corners and joints. Black velvet [200] is pasted in the rabbet of the door to insure a light-tight joint when the door is closed. The cylinder shutter is also painted a dead black inside and out.
The rotary cylinder shutter is the core of the machine and should be well-made and strictly follow the specified dimensions. The details of this component are shown in Fig. 3. A rectangular opening is cut through one of its diameters to allow light onto the film in certain positions. The cylinder is made of wood with a 1/4 in. steel rod inserted in the center of each end to serve as axles. A small grooved pulley (G, Fig. 2), about 1 in. in diameter, is attached to the outer end of one of these rods. The cylinder is turned by a round belt from a drive wheel, H, which is 3 or 3-1/2 in. in diameter and powered by a crankpin. Because the cylinder rotates backward, the belt must cross between the drive wheel H and the pulley G. The projections or sprockets, Fig. 3, must be precisely set at a distance of 3/8 in. from the 90 deg. point, using the center of the mortised hole as a reference. These projections can be pins or small staples, but they shouldn’t exceed 1/16 in. in size. The base of the sprockets must fit snugly in the hole of the film, but the points should be slightly rounded so that they can easily enter the perforations. When the upper sprocket, which is approaching the film, engages a perforation just below the upper partition, it will pull the film downward until the sprocket disengages from the perforation at the lower partition. The travel distance must be exactly 3/4 in., which matches the height of each picture. The cylinder needs some adjustments to meet this requirement; therefore, the axles are designed to rotate in holes drilled into two strips of wood, JJ, which can be moved forward or backward to achieve the correct distance from the film. To facilitate this movement, the axles pass through slots cut into the sides of the camera box instead of round holes. The strips JJ are temporarily fastened, and once the correct position for the cylinder is determined, they are permanently secured to the box. Grooves, K, are cut through the black velvet and into the back of the door to create space for the sprockets to pass through easily. The inside of the box should be painted a matte black, and black paper should be glued on all corners and joints. Black velvet is glued in the rabbet of the door to ensure a light-tight seal when the door is closed. The cylinder shutter is also painted matte black on both the inside and outside.
The cylinder in revolving exposes the film immediately behind it through the mortised hole. The sprockets or cylinder does not touch the film while the exposure is being made, but as the hole turns toward a perpendicular position, the sprockets catch the perforations of the film and it moves down 3/4 in. Just as soon as the sprockets disengage the film, the shutter exposes the next section of film, and so on as rapidly as the cylinder is turned, but the average should be about 16 pictures per second. A view finder must be supplied so the field covered by the lens can be determined. Such a finder is made of two pieces of metal, L and M, bent L-shaped and fastened to the top of the camera box. One of the pieces (L) has a rectangular opening 1 in. wide and 3/4 in. high, and the other (M) is drilled with a 1/8 in. drill, the distance between the two pieces being the focal length of the lens. One eye applied to the 1/8 in. hole in the piece M will see through the rectangular hole in the piece L about the same field as covered by the lens. The pieces should be accurately placed and fastened on the box when the camera is set, so that the lens will throw the same portion of the picture on the space where the film passes as will be seen through the finder.
The rotating cylinder exposes the film right behind it through the cutout hole. The sprockets or cylinder don’t touch the film while the exposure happens, but as the hole turns to a vertical position, the sprockets catch the film’s perforations and move it down 3/4 inch. As soon as the sprockets release the film, the shutter exposes the next section of film, and this continues as quickly as the cylinder is rotated, averaging about 16 pictures per second. A viewfinder needs to be attached so the area covered by the lens can be identified. This finder consists of two metal pieces, L and M, bent into L-shapes and fixed to the top of the camera body. One piece (L) has a rectangular opening 1 inch wide and 3/4 inch high, while the other piece (M) has a 1/8 inch drilled hole. The distance between the two pieces is equal to the lens's focal length. Looking through the 1/8 inch hole in piece M will allow one eye to see through the rectangular opening in piece L, showing about the same area that the lens will cover. The pieces should be carefully positioned and secured on the body when the camera is set up so the lens captures the same section of the picture on the film as what is seen through the viewfinder.
A Swimming Raft
Swimming is learned only by experience and to get this experience one must not be afraid to trust himself in the water. This is sometimes accomplished by the use of a swimming raft or water wings. As the water wings need to be inflated frequently, I made a swimming raft instead, in the following manner: Two logs, about 6 or 7 ft. long and about 8 in. in diameter, were fastened together with large nails, as shown in the illustration, and a piece of burlap or other strong material was nailed across the center with slack enough for it to be partially submerged.
Swimming is something you learn through experience, and to gain that experience, you have to be willing to trust yourself in the water. Sometimes, this is done with a swimming raft or water wings. Since water wings need to be inflated often, I created a swimming raft instead, using the following method: I took two logs, about 6 or 7 feet long and about 8 inches in diameter, and fastened them together with large nails, as shown in the illustration. Then, I attached a piece of burlap or another strong material across the center, leaving enough slack so it could be partially submerged.

Plan of Raft
Raft Plan
The middle of the band, its depth, etc., can be adjusted to suit the user. Be sure to remove all the roughness of the logs and boards with a rasp and sandpaper.—Contributed by W. P. Johnston, Sumner, Ill.
The center of the band, its depth, etc., can be modified to fit the user's needs. Make sure to smooth out any rough edges on the logs and boards using a rasp and sandpaper.—Contributed by W. P. Johnston, Sumner, Ill.
Removing Finger Marks on Books
Dampen a piece of wash leather and use it to rub pumice on the spot to be cleaned. Brush off the pumice and rub again with a piece of dry wash leather.
Dampen a piece of soft leather and use it to rub pumice on the area you want to clean. Brush off the pumice and rub again with a piece of dry soft leather.
Tightening a Tennis Net
Anyone who has ever played tennis will readily see the advantage of the net-tightening device shown, in preference to the old method of pulling the net tight by hand. All that is necessary to make the device is 1 ft. of [201] ordinary gas or water pipe, 8 or 10 in. of 1/2-in. iron bar, and two twenty-penny nails. The posts generally used are 6 by 6 in. About 4 in. from the top of the post bore a 1-in. hole, parallel with the direction the rope is to run. On the inside surface of the post bore four 1/4-in. holes.
Anyone who has ever played tennis will easily recognize the benefit of the net-tightening device shown, compared to the old way of tightening the net by hand. To make the device, you just need 1 ft. of [201] regular gas or water pipe, 8 or 10 in. of 1/2-in. iron bar, and two twenty-penny nails. The posts typically used are 6 by 6 in. About 4 in. from the top of the post, drill a 1-in. hole parallel to the direction the rope will run. On the inside surface of the post, drill four 1/4-in. holes.

Tightener on Post
Tightener on Post
Drill a 1/2-in. hole 1 in. from one end of the pipe, and a 1/4-in. hole 1 in. from the other end. Put the iron bar in the 1/2-in. hole, tie the rope around the pipe and bar at A and wind. With the leverage of the iron bar one can readily pull the net to any desired tightness. After the net is drawn in position, put one of the nails through the 1/4-in. hole in the pipe and the other in one of the 1/4-in. holes in the post.—Contributed by Wm. S. Looper, Gainesville, Ga.
Drill a 1/2-inch hole 1 inch from one end of the pipe, and a 1/4-inch hole 1 inch from the other end. Insert the iron bar into the 1/2-inch hole, wrap the rope around the pipe and bar at A, and then twist. With the leverage of the iron bar, you can easily pull the net to the desired tightness. Once the net is in place, put one of the nails through the 1/4-inch hole in the pipe and the other into one of the 1/4-inch holes in the post.—Contributed by Wm. S. Looper, Gainesville, Ga.
Holding Fishing-Rod Joints Together
The addition of two or three screweyes properly placed in a jointed fishing rod of the ordinary type will prove decidedly worth while, as the joints will often pull out easily when they should not and stick tightly when they should pull apart.
The addition of two or three screw eyes properly placed on a jointed fishing rod of the regular type will definitely be worthwhile, as the joints often come apart easily when they shouldn’t and get stuck when they should separate.
Assemble the rod and bore small holes through the brass sockets into the joints as shown in Fig. 1 and place some screweyes into the holes. Mark the joints so that the holes in the joints and holes in the brass sockets will always be in the same position.
Assemble the rod and drill small holes through the brass sockets into the joints as shown in Fig. 1, and insert some screw eyes into the holes. Mark the joints so that the holes in the joints and the holes in the brass sockets are always aligned.

Screweye in Joint (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Screweye in Joint (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The screweyes prevent the joints from pulling out when an effort is made to free the line from some object in which it has become entangled. They also act as guides for the line. Should the joints fit too tightly, scrape the ends until they slip easily into the sockets, as the screweyes will hold them properly, even if they fit a little loose after the scraping.
The screw eyes stop the joints from coming apart when you try to free the line from something it got tangled in. They also help guide the line. If the joints are too tight, file the ends down until they slide easily into the sockets, since the screw eyes will keep them in place even if they fit a bit loose after filing.
Roller Skate on a Bicycle Wheel

When the front tire on a bicycle will not hold and needs to be taken to a repair shop, strap or tie a roller skate to the rim of the wheel, as shown, and no trouble will be experienced in wheeling or riding the bicycle to the shop.—Contributed by K. Chase Winslow, Elizabeth, N. J.
When the front tire on a bicycle won't hold air and needs to be taken to a repair shop, strap or tie a roller skate to the rim of the wheel, as shown, and you won’t have any trouble wheeling or riding the bicycle to the shop.—Contributed by K. Chase Winslow, Elizabeth, N. J.
Rope Oarlocks
Having considerable trouble because of breaking of oarlocks, I devised a successful way by which the difficulty was overcome. The device is extremely simple and is nothing more than a piece of rope fastened to the gunwale as shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Arthur L. Chetlain, Rogers Park, Illinois.
Having a lot of trouble due to broken oarlocks, I came up with a simple and effective solution to the problem. It’s really just a piece of rope attached to the side of the boat, as shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Arthur L. Chetlain, Rogers Park, Illinois.

Piece of Rope in Place
Rope Secured in Place
Home-Made Motion-Picture Camera and Projector In Three Parts—Part II
Developing
After having exposed the film in the camera, the next steps are to develop and make a positive film from the negative. The developing and exposing of the film for the positive are the same as in ordinary photography for making negatives and lantern slides, the only difference being in the apparatus for handling the long films. One of the simplest ways of developing a long film is to use a large tray in connection with a cross arm having upright pins around which the film is wrapped in a continuous spiral. A film 100 ft. long would require a tray 18 by 22 in., with pins set in the cross arm about 3/8 in. apart. This method of developing is shown in Fig. 4.
After exposing the film in the camera, the next steps are to develop it and create a positive image from the negative. The process of developing and exposing the film for the positive is similar to regular photography for creating negatives and lantern slides; the only difference is the equipment needed to manage the long films. One of the easiest ways to develop a long film is to use a large tray along with a cross arm that has upright pins around which the film is wrapped in a continuous spiral. A 100 ft. long film would require a tray that measures 18 by 22 inches, with pins set in the cross arm about 3/8 inch apart. This method of developing is shown in Fig. 4.

Fig. 4—Cross Arms with Pins
Fig. 4—Cross Arms with Pins
A long film can be developed in a small tray by using two flanged wheels or spools mounted on a frame (Fig. 5) that holds them directly above the liquid in the tray. The spools have a wood core or center with metal sides of sufficient diameter to take in the length of film to be developed. One end of the undeveloped film is attached to one spool and then wound upon it, then the other end is passed through the guides, gelatine side down, and fastened to the other spool. The film is first run slowly through a water bath until it is thoroughly saturated, then it is passed through the developing solution again and again until the proper density is secured. The trays can be easily removed and others substituted for fixing, washing, hardening and soaking, the film being passed through each solution in the same manner. Before developing either negative or positive film, small test strips should be run through the solution so that the proper timing and treating of the full-length strip will correspond to the test strip.
A long film can be developed in a small tray using two flanged wheels or spools mounted on a frame (Fig. 5) that holds them just above the liquid in the tray. The spools have a wooden core or center with metal sides that are wide enough to accommodate the length of film being developed. One end of the undeveloped film is attached to one spool and wound onto it, then the other end is threaded through the guides, gelatine side down, and secured to the other spool. The film is first slowly run through a water bath until it's fully saturated, then it's passed through the developing solution multiple times until the right density is achieved. The trays can be easily removed and swapped out for fixing, washing, hardening, and soaking, with the film being passed through each solution in the same way. Before developing either negative or positive film, small test strips should be run through the solution so that the timing and treatment of the full-length strip aligns with the test strip.

Fig. 5—Developing Long Films
Fig. 5—Making Long Movies
A reel should be prepared for drying the film. This can be made of small slats placed around two disks to form a drum (Fig. 6) about 1-1/2 ft. in diameter and 2-1/2 ft. long. After the film has been passed through the various solutions and is ready for drying, it is wound spirally around on the slats with the gelatine side out, and the whole hung up to dry.
A reel should be set up for drying the film. This can be made from small slats attached to two disks to create a drum (Fig. 6) that's about 1.5 feet in diameter and 2.5 feet long. Once the film has gone through the different solutions and is ready to dry, it is wrapped spirally around the slats with the gelatin side facing out, and the entire setup is hung up to dry.

Fig. 6—Drying Reel
Fig. 6—Drying Reel
Printing
The printing to make the transparency is accomplished by a very simple arrangement. The negative and positive films must be drawn through a space admitting light while their gelatine surfaces are in close contact. A box may be constructed in several ways, but the one shown in Fig. 7 illustrates the necessary parts and their relative positions.
The process of creating the transparency is quite straightforward. The negative and positive films need to be moved through a light-admitting space while their gelatine surfaces are pressed closely together. You can build a box in various ways, but the one shown in Fig. 7 demonstrates the essential components and how they should be positioned relative to each other.
The sprocket A is placed directly back of the opening B which may be regulated to admit the proper light. The sprocket can be purchased from a moving-picture stock house cheaply, but if the builder so desires, one can be made from wood turned up about 1 in. [203] in diameter, or so that the circumference will receive sprockets at points 3/16 in. apart. The sprockets are made of metal pins driven into the wood. Two rows of them are placed around the wood cylinder about 1-1/8 in. apart.
The sprocket A is located directly behind the opening B, which can be adjusted to let in the right amount of light. You can buy the sprocket cheaply from a film supply store, but if you prefer, you can make one from wood that's about 1 inch in diameter, or designed so the circumference has sprockets spaced 3/16 inch apart. The sprockets consist of metal pins inserted into the wood. Two rows of these pins are arranged around the wooden cylinder, spaced about 1-1/8 inches apart. [203]
The cylinder is provided with a small metal shaft at each end which turns in round holes or bearings in the sides of the box. One of the shafts should project through the side of the box and have a grooved wheel, C, attached. The sprocket cylinder is driven by a smaller grooved wheel or pulley, D, to which a crank is attached for turning. The relative sizes of these wheels are determined by the speed of the exposure and the kind of light used. A 3-in. or 4-in. wheel on the cylinder sprocket shaft, driven by a pulley about 1 in. in diameter, will be suitable under ordinary circumstances. The opening B may be adjusted by two metal slides which fit tightly in metal grooves fastened to the wood front. The metal grooves and slides can be made of tin and painted a dead black. The films after passing over the sprocket, fall into the bottom of the box, or, if very long films are to be made, the instrument can be used in the dark room and the light admitted only to the opening B, then the ends can be dropped into a basket or other receptacle at the bottom and the unprinted portions carried on reels above the box.
The cylinder has a small metal shaft at each end that spins in round holes or bearings on the sides of the box. One of the shafts should stick out through the side of the box and have a grooved wheel, C, attached to it. The sprocket cylinder is driven by a smaller grooved wheel or pulley, D, which has a crank attached for turning. The relative sizes of these wheels depend on the speed of the exposure and the type of light used. A 3-inch or 4-inch wheel on the cylinder sprocket shaft, driven by a pulley about 1 inch in diameter, will work well for most situations. The opening B can be adjusted using two metal slides that fit snugly in metal grooves attached to the wooden front. The metal grooves and slides can be made of tin and painted matte black. The films, after passing over the sprocket, fall into the bottom of the box, or if very long films are being created, the device can be used in a darkroom, allowing light only through opening B. The ends can then be dropped into a basket or another container at the bottom, while the unprinted parts are stored on reels above the box.
The speed of the exposure and the width of the opening B can be determined by making test strips. This can be done by setting the opening B to a certain width and turning the crank for 10 or 15 seconds and counting the number of revolutions. The proper exposure can be easily attained by this method.
The speed of the exposure and the width of the opening B can be figured out by creating test strips. You can do this by adjusting the opening B to a specific width and turning the crank for 10 or 15 seconds while counting the number of revolutions. This method makes it easy to get the right exposure.
An Emergency Clamp

While making an extra large guitar I did not have clamps large enough to hold the top and bottom onto the sides while gluing, so I fastened three pieces of wood together, each piece being about 1 by 2 in., as shown in the sketch. Then I bored holes in both top and bottom pieces and inserted a piece of soft wire in the form of a loop, which, when twisted, drew the ends of the clamp together.—Contributed by Geo. E. Walsh, Buffalo, N. Y.
While making an extra-large guitar, I didn't have clamps big enough to hold the top and bottom to the sides while gluing, so I connected three pieces of wood together, each about 1 by 2 in., as shown in the sketch. Then I drilled holes in both the top and bottom pieces and inserted a piece of soft wire in the shape of a loop, which, when twisted, pulled the ends of the clamp together.—Contributed by Geo. E. Walsh, Buffalo, N. Y.
While camping, remember a hot stone wrapped up makes an excellent substitute for a hot-water bag.
While camping, keep in mind that a hot stone wrapped up makes a great substitute for a hot-water bottle.
Home-Made Motion-Picture Camera and Projector In Three Parts—Part III
The Projector
The film positives are projected on a screen with the same kind of a lantern as is used for lantern slides, with the addition of the device for stepping the film through, one picture at a time, and flashing light on each picture as it remains stationary for an instant. The projector (Fig. 8) is composed of a lamp house, a condensing lens to make the beam of light converge upon the film for illuminating it evenly, a film-stepping device, and a projecting lens for throwing the enlarged picture of the illuminated film upon a screen.
The film positives are shown on a screen using a projector similar to what's used for lantern slides, but with added equipment that moves the film one frame at a time and flashes light on each frame while it stays still for a moment. The projector (Fig. 8) consists of a lamp housing, a condensing lens to focus the light beam on the film for even illumination, a film-stepping mechanism, and a projecting lens that displays the enlarged image of the illuminated film on the screen.
The lamp house is made of ordinary stovepipe metal and the dimensions given in the sketch are for a size suitable to use an acetylene or gas burner. The metal is laid out as shown by the pattern (Fig. 9) and bent on the dotted lines to form the sides and ends of the house. The joint may be riveted, or, if taken to a tinshop, lock-seamed. The cover is cut out as shown, the sides and ends having bent holes which are covered on the inside with perforated sheet metal, A. In order to deflect the light, a small angular strip, B, is riveted on so that its upper portion will cover the holes and allow a space for the heat to pass out. The cover may be hinged or set on like a cover on a can. The lamp house is attached to a sliding wood base for adjusting its position on the baseboard.
The lamp house is made of standard stovepipe metal, and the dimensions shown in the sketch are for a size suitable for using an acetylene or gas burner. The metal is laid out according to the pattern (Fig. 9) and bent along the dotted lines to create the sides and ends of the house. The joint can be riveted, or if taken to a tinshop, it can be lock-seamed. The cover is cut out as shown, with the sides and ends having bent holes covered on the inside with perforated sheet metal, A. To redirect the light, a small angled strip, B, is riveted on so that its upper portion covers the holes while allowing a space for heat to escape. The cover can be hinged or placed on like a lid on a can. The lamp house is attached to a sliding wooden base for adjusting its position on the baseboard.
The condensing lenses are fixed into a metal barrel having a tapering end. This can be made of the same material [205] as used in the lamp house. The parts can be rolled and a lock joint made at a local tinshop, or the pieces shaped over a wood form and riveted. Small L-shaped pieces are riveted to the inner surfaces to hold each lens in place. A rim is turned up on the back end of the metal tube for attaching the lens barrel to the lamp house.
The condensing lenses are secured in a metal barrel with a tapered end. This can be made from the same material as the lamp house. The parts can be rolled, and a lock joint made at a local tin shop, or the pieces shaped over a wooden form and riveted. Small L-shaped pieces are riveted to the inner surfaces to hold each lens in position. A rim is turned up on the back end of the metal tube to attach the lens barrel to the lamp house.

Fig. 10—Details of the Lamp, Stepping Device and Base
Fig. 10—Details of the Lamp, Stepping Device, and Base
An ordinary mantle or acetylene burner is attached to a gas pipe that has for its base a drop elbow fastened to a sliding board similar to the slide of the lamp house on the baseboard. A good reflector should be attached to a standard just back of the burner. The standard is also fastened to the sliding board. The proper distance of the light from the condensing lens can be easily set by this adjusting device. This arrangement is shown in Fig. 10 in the diagram entitled "lamp parts."
An ordinary mantle or acetylene burner is connected to a gas pipe, which has a drop elbow attached to a sliding board, similar to the lamp house slide on the baseboard. A good reflector should be mounted on a standard just behind the burner. The standard is also attached to the sliding board. You can easily adjust the distance of the light from the condensing lens using this adjusting device. This setup is displayed in Fig. 10 in the diagram titled "lamp parts."
The device for stepping the film is a duplicate of the one used in the camera as described in Part I, with the exception of the lens. The lens should be about 2 in. in diameter with such a focal length that will give a picture of the required size, or a lens of 12-in. focus enlarging a 1-in. film to about 6 ft. at a distance of 24 ft. A regular lens fitted in a metal tube can be purchased from a moving-picture stock house at a reasonable price. The box is made up similar to the camera box, but with a metal back instead of the wood. The intense heat from the light would quickly burn the wood and for this reason the light should be kept from the film while it is not in motion. The projecting lens barrel should be fitted snugly, yet loose enough for focusing.
The device for advancing the film is a copy of the one used in the camera as described in Part I, except for the lens. The lens should be about 2 inches in diameter, with a focal length that will produce a picture of the required size, or you can use a lens with a 12-inch focus to enlarge a 1-inch film to about 6 feet at a distance of 24 feet. A standard lens fitted in a metal tube can be purchased from a movie equipment supplier at a reasonable price. The box is constructed similarly to the camera box, but with a metal back instead of wood. The intense heat from the light could quickly burn the wood, so the light should be kept away from the film when it’s not moving. The projecting lens barrel should fit snugly but still allow enough play for focusing.
The baseboard is cut as shown and the film-stepping device is firmly attached to the small end. The sides extend over the baseboard and are fastened with screws and braced with metal brackets. The slot in the small end of the baseboard is for the film to pass through. The film should have a tension the same as in the camera with velvet placed on the edges of the partitions. It is well to have a guide below the roller shutter to keep the film from encircling the roller as it turns. [206]
The baseboard is cut as shown, and the film-stepping device is securely attached to the small end. The sides extend over the baseboard and are fastened with screws and supported with metal brackets. The slot in the small end of the baseboard is for the film to pass through. The film should have the same tension as it does in the camera, with velvet placed on the edges of the partitions. It's a good idea to have a guide below the roller shutter to prevent the film from wrapping around the roller as it turns. [206]
Homemade Graining Tools
Desiring to do some fancy graining and having no tools at hand, I hastily made two of them from pieces of garden hose, as shown in the sketch. Two pieces were cut from the hose, each 5 in. long, and the first one made as follows: A small hole, about 1/4 in. in diameter, was cut through the outside layer of rubber with a sharp knife at two points on opposite sides of the hose and exactly in the center for length. Around these holes rings of the rubber were cut out, or rather peeled off from the canvas part, the rings being 3/16 in. wide, and the grooves, or parts removed, also 3/16 in. wide. The hose will then appear as shown in the upper left-hand corner of the sketch.
Wanting to do some detailed graining and without any tools available, I quickly made two from pieces of garden hose, as illustrated in the sketch. Two segments were cut from the hose, each 5 inches long, and the first one was made like this: A small hole, about 1/4 inch in diameter, was cut through the outer layer of rubber with a sharp knife at two points on opposite sides of the hose and exactly in the center along its length. Around these holes, rings of rubber were cut out, or rather peeled off from the canvas part, with the rings being 3/16 inch wide, and the grooves, or parts removed, also 3/16 inch wide. The hose will then look like what’s shown in the upper left-hand corner of the sketch.

Tools Cut from Pieces of Garden Hose for Making Grains of Wood in Painted Surfaces
Tools Made from Sections of Garden Hose for Creating Wood Grain Patterns on Painted Surfaces
To use this grainer, first paint the ground color, using a buff tint for imitation light oak, and allow it to dry, then put on a light coat of raw sienna, and while wet, take the prepared hose and draw it slowly over the length of wood, at the same time revolving the grainer slowly.
To use this grainer, start by painting the base color with a buff tint to mimic light oak, and let it dry. Next, apply a thin layer of raw sienna, and while it's still wet, take the prepared hose and slide it slowly along the length of the wood, while also turning the grainer slowly.
The other piece of hose, at the other corner, is made to take the place of a steel graining comb. The rubber is cut away lengthwise, leaving four segments, about 4 in. wide, on four sides of the hose. These segments are then notched out, like threads on a tap, each segment having a different number to the inch. These are used in the same manner as steel combs.—Contributed by A. H. Waychoff, Koenig, Colo.
The other piece of hose, at the other corner, is designed to replace a steel graining comb. The rubber is sliced lengthwise, leaving four segments, about 4 inches wide, on each side of the hose. These segments are then notched out, like the threads on a tap, with each segment having a different number per inch. They are used in the same way as steel combs.—Contributed by A. H. Waychoff, Koenig, Colo.
Needle for Repairing Screens
In attaching patches to window or door screens, the work requires a continual shifting from one side to the other, or two persons, one on each side, must be present to pass the threaded needle back and forth. The operation can be easily simplified by using a bent needle, which has been heated and suitably shaped. The point of this needle can always be made to return to the side from which it entered, thereby avoiding the need of an assistant or the tiresome shifting back and forth.—Contributed by G. Jaques, Chicago, Ill.
When attaching patches to window or door screens, you need to keep shifting from one side to the other, or you need two people, one on each side, to pass the threaded needle back and forth. You can easily simplify this process by using a bent needle that has been heated and shaped appropriately. The point of this needle always returns to the side it entered from, eliminating the need for an assistant and the hassle of shifting back and forth. —Contributed by G. Jaques, Chicago, Ill.
An Emergency Tourniquet

A valuable addition to any shop medicine cabinet is the tourniquet. A device that will answer the purpose of the tourniquet can be made from an ordinary clothespin and a piece of binding tape, about 3/4 in. wide and 14 in. long. To stop the bleeding from a wound on a limb, pass the tape around the injured member between the wound and the blood supply. Pass the tape through the slot in the pin, wind the ends around the pin two or three times to prevent slipping, then turn the pin to draw up the tape tightly until the flow of blood is stopped.
A useful addition to any first aid kit is a tourniquet. You can make a device that serves the purpose of a tourniquet using a regular clothespin and a piece of binding tape that's about 3/4 inch wide and 14 inches long. To stop bleeding from a wound on a limb, wrap the tape around the injured area between the wound and the blood flow. Thread the tape through the slot in the pin, wrap the ends around the pin a couple of times to prevent slipping, and then turn the pin to tighten the tape until the bleeding stops.
Mechanical Aid to Singers
Procure a large cigar box, of the square variety, and three ordinary drinking glasses with very thin walls and of different sizes, and place them in the box, as follows: Space them evenly, and drive three brads close to the circumference of each glass bottom, [207] so that the glasses will have to be forced in between them. To prevent the glasses from touching the wood place a one-cent piece under each one.
Procure a large square cigar box and three regular drinking glasses with very thin walls in different sizes. Place them in the box as follows: Space them evenly and drive three small nails close to the edge of each glass bottom, [207] so that the glasses need to be forced in between them. To prevent the glasses from touching the wood, place a penny under each one.
A fourth glass is used, but from this the bottom must be removed. This can be done by saturating a string, or piece of yarn, in kerosene oil, wrapping it once around the glass near the bottom, then lighting it and allowing the string to burn out. The glass is then quickly dropped into cold water, which will remove the bottom.
A fourth glass is used, but you need to take off the bottom. You can do this by soaking a piece of string or yarn in kerosene, wrapping it around the glass near the bottom, lighting it, and letting the string burn out. Then, quickly drop the glass into cold water, and the bottom will come off.
A hole is cut in the cover of the box to receive the bottomless glass from the upper side, so that its lower edge will be flush with the under surface. Cut a slot, 3 in. long and 1/8 in. wide, in the cover near the back side.
A hole is cut in the cover of the box to fit the bottomless glass from the top, so that its lower edge is even with the underside. Cut a slot, 3 inches long and 1/8 inch wide, in the cover near the back side.
To use, close the cover and at a distance of about 1/2 in. from the glass in the cover, or mouthpiece, sing into it. The glasses will impart to the voice a peculiar tone delightful to hear.—Contributed by J. B. Murphy, Plainfield, New Jersey.
To use, close the cover and hold it about 1/2 inch away from the glass in the cover, or mouthpiece, and sing into it. The glasses will give your voice a unique tone that's lovely to hear. —Contributed by J. B. Murphy, Plainfield, New Jersey.
Model Boat with Aerial Propeller
Procure or make a small model boat, 12 or 18 in. long, and place in the hold one or two cells of dry battery. Make a small platform in the stern and mount on it a small battery motor with the shaft parallel with the length of the boat and in the center. Directly above and parallel with the motor shaft run a shaft—a hatpin will do—in bearings fastened to the deck. Attach a drive pulley directly over the pulley on the motor and belt it up with a cord or rubber band. Purchase or make a propeller blade and attach it to the rear end of the shaft. A switch can be located on the deck for controlling the motor.—Contributed by Geo. B. Riker, Ft. Wayne, Ind.
Get or create a small model boat, 12 or 18 inches long, and put one or two dry battery cells in the hold. Build a small platform at the back and install a small battery motor on it, with the shaft aligned with the length of the boat and positioned in the middle. Run a shaft directly above and parallel to the motor shaft— a hatpin works well—supported by bearings fixed to the deck. Attach a drive pulley right above the motor's pulley and connect them with a cord or rubber band. Buy or make a propeller blade and fix it to the back end of the shaft. You can place a switch on the deck to control the motor.—Contributed by Geo. B. Riker, Ft. Wayne, Ind.

The Aerial Propeller is Driven by a Small Battery Motor Placed in the Boat
The aerial propeller is powered by a small battery motor located in the boat.
Lantern-Slide Binding Machine
The machine shown in the illustration is very simple to make and when complete is one of the greatest time savers that a photographer can possess. The base is made of a piece of board, 9 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 7/8 in. thick. The uprights support a small bar upon which the roll of binding revolves. An old ink bottle filled with water and with some cotton stuffed in the neck serves as a moistener for the binding. The use of this machine insures a neat job in a very short space of time. The slide is always in the center of the binding. The end of the slide should run a little over the end of the base so that the binding may be fixed to the edge with the fingers, using a downward motion. The slide is then turned over on the other edge with a rolling motion and the operation repeated.—Contributed by Alvin G. Steier, Union Hill, N. Y.
The machine shown in the illustration is very easy to make and, when finished, is one of the greatest time savers a photographer can have. The base is made from a piece of wood that is 9 inches long, 2 inches wide, and 7/8 inch thick. The upright pieces hold a small bar on which the roll of binding turns. An old ink bottle filled with water and some cotton stuffed in the neck acts as a moistener for the binding. Using this machine ensures a clean job in a very short amount of time. The slide is always in the center of the binding. The end of the slide should extend slightly beyond the end of the base so that the binding can be held at the edge with your fingers, using a downward motion. The slide is then flipped over to the other edge with a rolling motion, and the process is repeated.—Contributed by Alvin G. Steier, Union Hill, N. Y.

A Machine That will Help to Bind Lantern Slides Quickly and Neatly
A machine that will help bind lantern slides quickly and neatly.
Adjustable Film-Developing Machine
The simple homemade developing machine, shown in the illustration, can be easily made with three film spools, some strong wire, and odd pieces of wood. It consists of an open frame, having two side pieces provided with slots down the center, sufficiently wide to allow an ordinary wood screw, of suitable size, to slide up or down freely. The two end-connecting pieces act as supports for the developing tray and should be made of sufficient length so the tray can pass freely between the sliding upright frame, made to fit in between the side pieces of the base. This frame can be adjusted to suit the length of film and is clamped in place at the desired position by wood screws, fitting in the long notches and screwed into the uprights. The two bottom rollers consist of film spools which are fastened in place by being slipped over a suitable wire, bent so the spool can enter the developing tray and the wire pass over the sides. Another bend at the outer end provides for the adjustment of the spools and for securing the wire in place by staples. The top spool is secured to a wire fitted with a crank at the outer end, so that in turning the wire, the spool will also turn, thereby driving the film. When placing the film on the machine, the sensitive side should face outward so it will not rub against the spools. The ends of the film may be connected with pins or ordinary paper fasteners.—Contributed by H. R. F. Richardson, Ottawa, Ont.
The simple homemade developing machine, shown in the illustration, can be easily made with three film spools, some strong wire, and leftover pieces of wood. It consists of an open frame with two side pieces that have slots down the center, wide enough to let a regular wood screw of the right size slide up or down freely. The two end pieces connect the base and act as supports for the developing tray, and they should be long enough to let the tray pass freely between the sliding upright frame, which is made to fit between the side pieces of the base. This frame can be adjusted to match the length of the film and is secured in place at the desired position by wood screws that fit into the long notches and screw into the uprights. The two bottom rollers are made from film spools that are held in place by sliding them over a suitable wire, bent so the spool can enter the developing tray while the wire goes over the sides. Another bend at the outer end allows for adjusting the spools and securing the wire in place with staples. The top spool is attached to a wire fitted with a crank at the outer end, so when you turn the wire, the spool will also turn, driving the film. When placing the film on the machine, the sensitive side should face outward so it won't rub against the spools. The ends of the film can be connected with pins or regular paper fasteners. —Contributed by H. R. F. Richardson, Ottawa, Ont.

Developing a Roll Film in a Tray with a Machine That Drives the Film around Rollers and through the Developing Liquid by Turning a Crank
Developing roll film in a tray with a machine that moves the film around rollers and through the developing liquid by turning a crank
Preventing Loss of Fish from Covered Baskets
In the cover of fish baskets an opening is frequently made permitting the fish to be put in without lifting the cover. In traveling over rough places, or when the basket is full, some of the fish are likely to be shaken out, or may wiggle out of the basket. To guard against this, a leather flap can be provided covering the hole on the inside. At one end of the flap, four holes should be punched. It can then be placed in position and securely laced to the cover. The flap acts as a valve, allowing fish to be put into the basket, but preventing their escape.—Contributed by A. W. Cook, Kamela, Ore.
In fish baskets, there's often a hole in the cover that lets you add fish without lifting it. When traveling over bumpy terrain or if the basket is full, some fish might fall out or wiggle free. To prevent this, you can add a leather flap that covers the hole from the inside. Punch four holes at one end of the flap, then position it and lace it securely to the cover. The flap works like a valve, letting you put fish in the basket while keeping them from escaping.—Contributed by A. W. Cook, Kamela, Ore.
Repair for a Broken Lock Keeper

Having broken the recess half of a common cupboard lock, or latch, which was used to fasten a hinged storm window, I used a round-head wood screw as shown. The screw was easily placed, and it serves the purpose as well as the regular keeper.—Contributed by R. F. Pohle, Lynn, Mass.
Having broken the recess half of a common cupboard lock, or latch, that was used to secure a hinged storm window, I used a round-head wood screw as shown. The screw was easy to install, and it works just as well as the regular keeper. —Contributed by R. F. Pohle, Lynn, Mass.
When using glue contained in screw-stoppered vessels it is advisable to smear a little vaseline on the thread to prevent the stopper from adhering to the container.
When using glue from bottles with screw tops, it's a good idea to put a bit of Vaseline on the threads to stop the cap from sticking to the bottle.

Throwing a Spot Light with the Lantern on Individuals of a Home Play, Which can be Given Brilliant Effects by the Use of the Tinted Celluloid in the Openings of the Revolving Wheel
Throwing a spotlight with the lantern on people in a home play, which can create brilliant effects by using tinted celluloid in the openings of the revolving wheel.
Lantern for Spot and Colored Lights
The school play in pantomime is not complete unless the different parts of the play are illuminated in different colors, especially if the performers are clad in glittering garments. A spot light is also a feature not to be forgotten in singling out the star player or the one singing a song. The cost of a light for this purpose is entirely out of the reach of the average schoolboy, but if he has any ingenuity and a little time, a lantern for throwing those colored lights can be made at home, and the necessary parts will not cost much.
The school play in pantomime isn't complete unless the different parts of the show are lit up in various colors, especially if the performers are dressed in sparkling outfits. A spotlight is also an essential feature for highlighting the lead actor or the person singing a song. The cost of a light for this purpose is definitely beyond the budget of the average student, but if they have some creativity and a bit of time, they can make a lantern to project those colored lights at home, and the materials won't be too expensive.

Pattern for Cutting the Metal to Form the Entire Lantern, or Lamp House, Also the Pattern for the Top and the Metal Bracket That Makes a Bearing for the Revolving Wheel, Having Openings Covered with Tinted Celluloid
Pattern for Cutting the Metal to Form the Entire Lantern, or Lamp House, Also the Pattern for the Top and the Metal Bracket That Supports the Revolving Wheel, Having Openings Covered with Tinted Celluloid
The metal necessary can be the ordinary stovepipe material, but if it is desired to have a fine-appearing lantern, procure what is called Russian iron. This metal has a gloss, and if used, it should be gone over from time to time with a rag soaked in oil, then wiped dry, to keep it from rusting. The pattern for the body of the [210] lantern, or lamp house, is shown with dimensions.
The metal you need can be regular stovepipe material, but if you want a nicer-looking lantern, get what’s called Russian iron. This metal has a shine, and if you use it, you should wipe it down every now and then with a rag soaked in oil, then wipe it dry to prevent rust. The pattern for the body of the [210] lantern, or lamp house, is shown with measurements.
If metal, long enough for the whole length, cannot be procured, then make it in two pieces, being sure to allow 1/2-in. end also on the second part, as shown on the first, for a riveted joint. The metal is bent on the dotted lines and cut out on the full ones. The distance between the lines A to be bent is equal to the radius B. The part A forms the sloping side of the top, and the 2-in. part at the top of the side extends vertically on the upper or vertical part, it being 1/2 in. narrower to provide an outlet for the heat.
If you can't get a piece of metal that's long enough, then use two pieces, making sure to leave a 1/2-inch end on the second piece, just like on the first, for a riveted joint. The metal is bent on the dotted lines and cut along the solid lines. The distance between the lines A to be bent should match the radius B. The part A makes up the sloping side of the top, and the 2-inch part on top of the side extends straight down on the upper or vertical section, being 1/2 inch narrower to create a space for the heat to escape.
An opening is cut in the rear end, as shown, also a hole, 5 in. in diameter, in the front end. The size of the round hole is optional, as it should be cut to suit the condensing lens provided. If a lens 5 1/2 in. in diameter is used, then a 5-in. hole should be cut. This is enough difference in size to hold the lens from dropping through, while clips riveted on the inside of the lamp-house end will hold it in place. The lens is set in the hole with the curved side outward from the inside of the lamp house.
An opening is made in the back end, as shown, along with a hole that's 5 inches in diameter in the front end. The size of the round hole is up to you, as it should be cut to fit the condensing lens you have. If you're using a lens that's 5 1/2 inches in diameter, then cut a 5-inch hole. This difference in size will prevent the lens from falling through, while clips attached to the inside of the lamp house will keep it secure. The lens should be placed in the hole with the curved side facing outward from the inside of the lamp house.
The top, or covering, is cut out of the same material as used in making the lamp house, the length being 12 in., and the sides are cut to extend 1/2 in. on each side of the ventilator. The edges, being turned down on the dotted lines, provide a covering to prevent any great amount of light from passing out through the 1/2-in. ventilating opening mentioned in connection with the side construction of the lantern. The 1-in. parts of the cover ends are turned down and riveted to the ends of the lamp house. The little extensions on the ends provide a means of riveting the side, to make a solid joint.
The top cover is made from the same material as the lamp house, measuring 12 inches in length, with sides extending 1/2 inch beyond each side of the ventilator. The edges are turned down along the dotted lines to create a covering that prevents excessive light from escaping through the 1/2-inch ventilating opening mentioned regarding the side construction of the lantern. The 1-inch sections at the ends of the cover are turned down and riveted to the ends of the lamp house. The small extensions on the ends allow for riveting the sides to create a solid joint.
The arm C is made of a piece of 1/8 or 3/16-in. metal, shaped as shown, to fit on the corner of the lamp house, where it is riveted. This provides a support and a place for an axis for the large revolving wheel holding the colored-celluloid disks.
The arm C is made from a piece of 1/8 or 3/16-inch metal, shaped as shown, to fit on the corner of the lamp house, where it’s riveted. This provides support and a place for an axis for the large revolving wheel that holds the colored celluloid disks.

The Base of the Lantern is Provided with a Sliding Part Carrying the Light for Adjustment
The base of the lantern has a sliding part that holds the light for adjustments.
The metal forming the lamp house is fastened on a baseboard, cut to snugly fit on the inside. The base has two cleats, nailed lengthwise to form a runway, 4 in. wide, into which another board is fitted to carry the burner. While the illustration shows an acetylene burner, any kind of light may be used so long as it is of a high candlepower. If manufactured gas is at hand, a gas burner with a mantle can be fitted, or a large tungsten electric light will give good results.
The metal that makes up the lamp housing is secured to a baseboard that's cut to fit snugly inside. The base has two cleats nailed down lengthwise to create a 4-inch wide runway, where another board is placed to hold the burner. While the illustration shows an acetylene burner, you can use any type of light as long as it has a high candlepower. If manufactured gas is available, a gas burner with a mantle can be installed, or a large tungsten electric light will work well.

Pattern for the Revolving Wheel in Which Six Holes are Cut and Covered with Tinted Celluloid
Pattern for the Revolving Wheel with Six Holes Cut and Covered with Colored Celluloid
The wheel, carrying the colored disks, is made of the same kind of metal as used for the lamp house. The edges should be trimmed smooth, or, better still, turned over and hammered down to prevent injury to the hands while turning it. A washer should be used between this wheel and the arm C on a bolt used for the shaft, to make [211] the wheel turn freely. The colored disks of celluloid are fastened to the outside of the wheel over the openings.
The wheel that holds the colored disks is made from the same type of metal used for the lamp housing. The edges need to be smoothed out, or even better, folded over and hammered down to avoid any injuries while turning it. A washer should be placed between this wheel and arm C on a bolt used for the shaft, to ensure that [211] the wheel spins freely. The colored celluloid disks are attached to the outer side of the wheel over the openings.
A yoke to support the lantern and provide a way for throwing the light in any direction, is made as shown. A line along which the lantern balances is determined by placing it on something round, as a broom stick, and the upper ends of the yoke are fastened on this line with loosely fitted bolts for pivots.
A yoke to hold the lantern and allow you to direct the light any way you want is made like this. To find the line along which the lantern balances, place it on something round, like a broomstick, and attach the upper ends of the yoke along this line with loosely fitted bolts to serve as pivots.

Yoke for Supporting the Lantern
Yoke for Supporting the Lantern
The lantern is set in front of the stage at the back of the room and the light is directed on the players, the colors being changed by turning the wheel. Sometimes good effects can be obtained by using the lantern in the wings, or for a fire dance, by placing it under the stage, throwing the light upward through grating or a heavy plate glass.
The lantern is placed in front of the stage at the back of the room, and the light shines on the actors, with the colors changing by turning the wheel. Sometimes, great effects can be achieved by using the lantern at the sides of the stage, or for a fire dance, by positioning it underneath the stage, shining the light upward through a grate or a thick plate glass.
Homemade Palette Knife
A corset steel makes a good substitute for a palette knife because of its flexibility. It gives better satisfaction if cut in the shape shown than if left straight. Should a handle be desired, one can be easily made by gluing two pieces of thin wood on the sides.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A corset steel makes a great substitute for a palette knife because of its flexibility. It works better if you cut it into the shape shown rather than leaving it straight. If you want a handle, you can easily make one by gluing two pieces of thin wood on the sides. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

A Palette Knife Made of a Corset Steel and a Wood Handle Attached
A palette knife made of corset steel with a wooden handle attached.
To remove a white mark on wood having a wax surface, rub it lightly with a rag moistened in alcohol; then rub with a little raw linseed oil.
To get rid of a white mark on wood with a wax finish, gently rub it with a cloth dampened with alcohol; then, wipe it with a bit of raw linseed oil.
Self-Closing Gate
This gate is suspended from a horizontal bar by chains, and swings freely about a 1-in. gas pipe, placed vertically in the center of the gate. The chains are of the same length, being fastened equidistant from the pipe, the upper ends farther out than the lower. The distance depends on the weight of the gate and the desired force with which it should close. Any of the numerous styles of latches can be used, if desired.—Contributed by Kenneth Osborn, Loveland, Colo.
This gate is hung from a horizontal bar by chains and swings freely around a 1-inch gas pipe positioned vertically at the center of the gate. The chains are all the same length, attached equidistant from the pipe, with the upper ends extending farther out than the lower ones. The distance depends on the weight of the gate and how forcefully you want it to close. You can use any of the many styles of latches if you want.—Contributed by Kenneth Osborn, Loveland, Colo.

The Gate will Swing in Either Direction and Come to a Rest Where It Closes the Opening
The gate can swing open in either direction and will come to a stop when it closes the opening.
A Poultry Shade
If a poultry yard is in an open space where the sun's rays will strike it squarely, a shade can be put up as follows: A piece of old carpet, rug, or canvas, fastened to the wire mesh with clothespins, will produce a shade at any place desired.—Contributed by Walter L. Kaufmann, Santa Ana, Cal.
If a chicken coop is in an open area where the sun hits it directly, you can create some shade like this: Attach a piece of old carpet, rug, or canvas to the wire mesh using clothespins to provide shade wherever needed.—Contributed by Walter L. Kaufmann, Santa Ana, Cal.
[212] Reflector for Viewing Scenery from a Car Window
[212] Reflector for Watching Scenery from a Car Window
Construct a box of pasteboard or thin wood, about 9 in. long, 3 in. wide and 2 in. thick, and fasten two pieces of mirror in the ends at an angle of 45 deg., both sloping in the same direction with their reflecting surfaces toward each other. An opening as large as the mirror is cut, facing it, in the box at the end A, and a small hole bored through at the end B so that it will center the mirror. Both of these apertures are covered with plain pieces of glass.
Make a box out of cardboard or thin wood, about 9 inches long, 3 inches wide, and 2 inches thick. Secure two pieces of mirror at a 45-degree angle in the ends, sloping in the same direction with their reflective surfaces facing each other. Cut an opening as large as the mirror in the box at end A, and drill a small hole through end B to center the mirror. Both of these openings are covered with plain pieces of glass.

The Reflecting Device as It is Used in a Car Window for Viewing the Scenery Ahead
The Reflecting Device as It is Used in a Car Window for Seeing the Scenery Ahead
In use, the end A is placed outside of the car window and the user places an eye to the small hole B. It is impossible to be struck in the eye with a cinder or flying object.—Contributed by Mildred E. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
In use, end A is positioned outside the car window, and the user places their eye to the small hole B. It's impossible to get hit in the eye by a cinder or flying object.—Contributed by Mildred E. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
A Muskrat Trap
It is difficult to catch muskrats in an ordinary steel trap, as a broken bone allows them to sever the flesh and escape. During the summer these rats build a shelter for the winter constructed of moss and sticks placed on the river or lake bed, the top extending above the water level and the entrance being through a hole in the bottom near one side, while the passage itself is under water. It, therefore, only remains for the trapper to make one of these houses over into a huge wire trap so that the animal may be caught alive.
It’s tough to catch muskrats in a regular steel trap, since a broken bone lets them chew through their flesh and get away. In the summer, these rats build a winter shelter made of moss and sticks on the river or lake bottom, with the top sticking out above the water and an entrance through a hole on one side near the bottom, while the passage itself is underwater. So, all that’s left for the trapper to do is to turn one of these homes into a large wire trap so that the animal can be caught alive.

A Trap for Catching Muskrats Alive in One of Their Mounds Built of Moss and Sticks
A trap for catching muskrats alive in one of their mounds made of moss and sticks
The house A is prepared by removing the top and building the trap from heavy mesh wire which can be easily shaped, the joints being held together by binding the edges with wire. The passage is then fitted with a double trapdoor, the first, B, provided with sharp points on the swinging end, while the other is a falling cover. These two doors are placed in an entrance way, C, made of wire mesh and fastened over the passageway.
The house A is set up by taking off the top and constructing the trap using heavy mesh wire that can be easily molded, with the joints secured by binding the edges with wire. The passage is then equipped with a double trapdoor; the first, B, has sharp points on the swinging end, while the other is a falling cover. These two doors are positioned in an entrance way, C, made of wire mesh and attached over the passageway.
The muskrat comes up through the passage, pushing a bunch of moss or sticks and does not notice passing the trapdoors. The upper door is to keep the animals caught from getting at the first door.—Contributed by Vance Garrison, Bemidji, Minn.
The muskrat comes up through the passage, pushing a bunch of moss or sticks and doesn’t notice passing the trapdoors. The upper door is there to keep the trapped animals from getting to the first door.—Contributed by Vance Garrison, Bemidji, Minn.
A Casein Glue
Casein glues are splendid in woodworking, making cardboard articles, and when the composition is varied somewhat, make excellent cements for china and metals. Casein is made from the curd of soured milk after removal of the fat, and is put on the market in the form of a dry powder.
Casein glues are great for woodworking, crafting cardboard items, and with a slight variation in the formula, they can also serve as strong adhesives for ceramics and metals. Casein is derived from the curd of fermented milk after the fat is removed, and it is available commercially as a dry powder.
To make the glue, soak the casein powder two hours in an equal weight of hot water. To this gummy mass add about one-seventh the weight of the casein in borax which has been dissolved in very little hot water. Stir until all is dissolved after mixing borax and casein. This can be thinned with water to suit and is a good glue, but it can be made more adhesive by the addition of a little sodium arsenate. Any alkali, such as soda or ammonia, could be substituted for the borax.
To make the glue, soak the casein powder for two hours in an equal weight of hot water. Add about one-seventh the weight of the casein in borax that has been dissolved in just a little bit of hot water to this sticky mixture. Stir until everything is fully dissolved after mixing the borax and casein. You can thin this with water to your preference; it’s a good glue, but you can make it stickier by adding a little sodium arsenate. Any alkaline substance, like soda or ammonia, can be used instead of borax.
To make a china cement, lime or water glass should be substituted for the borax. Addition of burnt magnesia increases the speed of hardening.
To make a china cement, use lime or water glass instead of borax. Adding burnt magnesia speeds up the hardening process.
The Mile-O-View Camera
By T. B. Lambert
Many have tried, but heretofore no one has succeeded in taking panoramic views from the side of fast-moving trains or street cars. Motion pictures are easily obtained from the front or rear of moving trains, but none with the camera lens pointing at right angles, or nearly so, to the track. A complete apparatus for taking continuous and perfect panoramic pictures of any desired length as one travels through a country is too complicated to be described in detail within the limits of this article, but a simple arrangement, invented and constructed by the writer, will enable anyone to perform the experiment at practically no cost except for the film.
Many have tried, but until now, no one has succeeded in capturing panoramic views from the side of fast-moving trains or streetcars. Motion pictures can be easily taken from the front or back of moving trains, but none with the camera lens facing sideways—or nearly so—to the track. A complete setup for taking continuous and perfect panoramic pictures of any length while traveling through a landscape is too complicated to explain in detail within the limits of this article, but a simple device, invented and built by the author, will allow anyone to conduct the experiment at almost no cost except for the film.

The Board Used Instead of a Tripod is Placed across the Backs of Two Car Seats
The board used instead of a tripod is placed across the backs of two car seats.
Some form of a roll-film camera is essential, and simply as a working basis, it will be assumed an ordinary camera is used, post-card camera in size, for which the following things will be required: A piece of thin black card, or hard rubber; a small board, and a piece of wire to be used as a crank.
Some type of roll-film camera is essential, and for our purposes, we’ll assume a standard-sized camera, about the size of a postcard, is being used. The following items will be needed: a piece of thin black card or hard rubber, a small board, and a piece of wire to serve as a crank.

These Two Articles Constitute the Only Parts Necessary to Change a Camera into a Mile-O-View
These two articles are the only things needed to turn a camera into a Mile-O-View.
Prepare the paper, or hard rubber, by cutting it to a size that will exactly cover the rear camera opening when the back of the camera is removed, which, in the case of a post-card size, is 6 in. long and 3-3/4 in. wide; then cut a narrow slot, about 3/64 in. wide crosswise through the center of the material. This slot should extend to within about 1/2 in. of each edge, and the edges must be perfectly smooth and straight. If paper is used, glue it to the opening in the camera. If hard rubber is used, it can be made up as shown and set in the camera opening. [214] This will bring the slot directly back of the lens center and at right angles to the direction in which the film moves when being rolled.
Prepare the paper or hard rubber by cutting it to a size that will perfectly cover the rear camera opening when the back of the camera is removed. For a postcard size, this means cutting it to 6 inches long and 3-3/4 inches wide. Then, cut a narrow slot, about 3/64 inches wide, across the center of the material. This slot should extend to within about 1/2 inch of each edge, and the edges must be perfectly smooth and straight. If you're using paper, glue it to the opening in the camera. If you're using hard rubber, shape it as shown and place it in the camera opening. [214] This will position the slot directly behind the center of the lens and at a right angle to the direction the film moves when being rolled.

The Two Parts as They are Applied to an Ordinary Roll-Film Camera
The Two Parts as They are Used in a Regular Roll-Film Camera
A board is prepared, about 4 ft. long, 10 in. wide and 3/4 in. thick. This is to take the place of a tripod, and it must have a small hole and suitable wing nut to attach the camera near the center. This length of board will reach from the back of one seat to another when it is placed to support the camera during the exposure.
A board is set up, about 4 ft long, 10 in wide, and 3/4 in thick. This will replace a tripod and needs a small hole and a suitable wing nut to attach the camera near the center. This length of board will extend from the back of one seat to another when it’s positioned to support the camera during the exposure.
A wire, about 1/8 in. in diameter, is bent, as shown, with a short hook on one end, and the other turned up at right angles, to serve as a handle. This wire, when hooked into the wing nut, will enable one to wind up the film at a fairly uniform speed. This completes all the necessary apparatus.
A wire, roughly 1/8 inch in diameter, is bent as shown, with a small hook on one end, and the other end turned up at a right angle to act as a handle. When this wire is hooked into the wing nut, it allows you to wind up the film at a pretty consistent speed. That wraps up all the necessary equipment.
To take pictures with this panoramic outfit, load the camera in the usual way, but do not wind it up to exposure No. 1; stop at a point where the beginning of the film will be nearly opposite the narrow slot in the black paper, or rubber. This would be to stop the turning at about the time the hand pointer appears in the small back window. Attach the camera firmly to the board and brace up the lens end so that it will not easily shake with the movement of the car. Place the board across the backs of two adjacent seats, so that the camera will point out of the window at exactly right angles to the car.
To take pictures with this panoramic setup, load the camera as usual, but don’t wind it up to exposure No. 1; stop when the beginning of the film is nearly in line with the narrow slot in the black paper or rubber. This means stopping the winding just before the hand pointer shows up in the small back window. Secure the camera tightly to the board and prop up the lens end so it won’t easily shake with the car’s movement. Position the board across the backs of two adjacent seats, so the camera points out of the window at a perfect right angle to the car.
When ready to expose, open the shutter wide, turn the crank that is hooked into the wing nut, and slowly wind up the film while the train is running. This will give a panoramic picture, continuous in character, and if the speed of turning is well judged, some very splendid views can be made.
When you’re ready to take the shot, open the shutter fully, turn the crank attached to the wing nut, and slowly wind up the film while the train is moving. This will create a panoramic image that flows seamlessly, and if you time the turning just right, you can capture some amazing views.
The speed of turning the crank will be governed by the focal length of the lens and the speed of the train. For an average lens, the crank should be given one turn per second when the car is traveling about 15 miles an hour, or the average speed of a street car, A train traveling 30 miles an hour will require two turns of the crank per second. A good method of trying this out is to use one film as a test and turn the crank a few times and note its speed by the second, then stop and begin again at another speed for a few turns and so on, until the entire film is exposed, always noting the turns and time for each change, also the speed of the train. When the film is developed the one that shows best will give the proper number of turns per second.
The speed at which you turn the crank will depend on the focal length of the lens and the speed of the train. For a standard lens, you should make one turn of the crank per second when the car is moving at about 15 miles per hour, which is the average speed of a streetcar. If a train is going 30 miles per hour, you'll need to turn the crank twice per second. A good way to test this is to use one film as a trial. Turn the crank a few times and note the speed per second, then stop and start again at a different speed for a few turns, and keep repeating this until the entire film has been exposed. Always record the number of turns and the time for each change, along with the train's speed. When the film is developed, the one with the best results will indicate the correct number of turns per second.
The following points must be considered: The track should not be rough, and the camera must be perfectly steady and not twisted out of position by turning the crank, otherwise the resulting picture will be wavy. If the slot in the back board is not smooth and true, the picture will be streaked. Turning the film too fast will make the picture elongated, and too slowly, condensed. Should the camera be pointed otherwise than at right angles the picture will be distorted. This arrangement cannot be used to take moving objects except under special conditions. A picture of a passing train of cars can be made if the camera is stationary, but the wheels and drive rods will appear twisted out of shape. It is best for the experimenter to confine himself to scenery at the beginning, avoiding architectural objects, because a variation in speed of turning the crank to wind the film naturally distorts the architecture, which variation is not so noticeable in a scenic view.
The following points must be considered: The track should not be rough, and the camera must be perfectly steady and not turned out of position by adjusting the crank; otherwise, the resulting picture will be wavy. If the slot in the back board isn't smooth and straight, the picture will be streaked. Turning the film too quickly will make the picture stretched, and turning it too slowly will make it compressed. If the camera isn’t pointed at right angles, the picture will be distorted. This setup can't be used to capture moving objects except in special conditions. A picture of a passing train can be taken if the camera is stationary, but the wheels and drive rods will appear twisted out of shape. It's best for the person experimenting to start with scenery, avoiding buildings, because variations in the speed of cranking to wind the film naturally distort architecture, which isn't as noticeable in a landscape view.
A Photographic Worktable for Small Quarters
By K. V. Reed
Flat dwellers have no space at their disposal for a person to work at photography, and the bathroom must take the place of a dark room. As this was very inconvenient in my case, I constructed a table, that from all appearances was nothing more than a large-size kitchen worktable, and such a table can be used in case the builder does not care to construct it.
People living in apartments don't have the space for a dedicated photography area, so the bathroom often ends up being used as a darkroom. Since this was quite inconvenient for me, I built a table that looked just like a large kitchen worktable, and this type of table can be made if the builder doesn't want to build a specialized one.
The table is turned upside down and the top removed by taking out the screws. The top is made of several pieces glued together and will remain in one piece. It is then hinged at one side to the top edge of the rail, so that it can be turned back like a trunk, or box, cover.
The table is flipped over and the top is detached by unscrewing it. The top consists of several pieces glued together and will stay intact. It's then hinged on one side to the top edge of the rail, allowing it to be flipped back like a trunk or box lid.
Boards are then nailed to the under edge of the rails. If a very neat job is required, these boards should be set inside on strips nailed to the inside surfaces of the rails, at the proper place to make the boards come flush with the under edges of the rails.
Boards are then nailed to the bottom edge of the rails. If a really neat job is needed, these boards should be placed on strips nailed to the inside surfaces of the rails, in the right position to make the boards flush with the bottom edges of the rails.
At the back side and in the center of the new bottom, a hole is cut, 6 or 7 in. square, and a box fastened beneath it, to form a bottom several inches below the main bottom. In this space bottles filled with solutions are kept. The main bottom should be painted with an acid-proof varnish.
At the back and in the center of the new bottom, there’s a hole cut out, about 6 or 7 inches square, with a box attached underneath to create a bottom that’s several inches lower than the main bottom. This space is used to store bottles filled with solutions. The main bottom should be coated with an acid-proof varnish.

An Ordinary Kitchen Worktable Fitted Up as a Handy Workshop for the Amateur Photographer Who Has a Limited Space in a Flat, and Where a Table can be Used to Advantage in a Room
An Everyday Kitchen Worktable Set Up as a Convenient Workshop for the Amateur Photographer with Limited Space in an Apartment, Where a Table Can Be Used Effectively in a Room
The space in the table is then divided, and partitions set up, which can be arranged to suit the builder.
The area on the table is then split, and dividers are put in place, which can be arranged according to the builder's needs.
Another attachment, which comes in exceedingly handy, is the ruby light. [216] This consists of a box, large enough to receive a printing frame at the bottom. Two holes are cut in the table top, at the right places to make a window for the light and a slit for the printing frame. When the table top is raised, the box with the light is fastened over the openings with hooks, the arrangement of which will depend on the size and shape of the box. In closing, the lamp box is removed, and pieces of board are set in the holes. This can be easily arranged, if the holes and blocks are cut on a slight slope, so that the latter when set in will not fall through the openings.
Another handy attachment is the ruby light. [216] This consists of a box that's big enough to hold a printing frame at the bottom. Two holes are cut into the table top, positioned just right to create a window for the light and a slot for the printing frame. When the table top is raised, the box with the light is secured over the openings with hooks, which will vary depending on the size and shape of the box. When closing up, the lamp box is taken out, and pieces of board are placed in the holes. This can be easily arranged if the holes and blocks are cut at a slight angle, so that the blocks can be securely set in without falling through the openings.
Back Thrust Prevented on Skis
To overcome the difficulty of skis slipping back when walking uphill either of the two devices shown is good, if the attachments are fastened to the rear end of the skis.
To deal with the problem of skis sliding backward while walking uphill, either of the two devices shown works well if the attachments are secured to the back of the skis.

Two Methods of Making an Attachment to Prevent the Backward Thrust of a Ski
Two Ways to Create an Attachment to Stop the Backward Push of a Ski
The first represents a piece of horse-hide, about 4 in. square, tacked on the ski and with the hair slanting backward. This will not interfere with going forward, but will retard any movement backward.
The first is a piece of horsehide, about 4 inches square, attached to the ski with the hair pointing backward. This won't hinder moving forward, but it will slow down any backward movement.
The other consists of a hinged portion that will enter the snow on a back thrust. As the ski end is thin, a block of wood must be attached to it on the upper side, and the projecting piece hinged to the block. The bevel at the end allows it to dig into the snow when the ski starts back. In going forward, it will swing out of the way freely.
The other part has a hinged section that will push into the snow. Since the end of the ski is thin, you need to attach a block of wood to the top, with the hinged piece connected to that block. The angled end helps it grip the snow when the ski moves backwards. When moving forward, it will swing out of the way easily.
Crystallization Shown on a Screen
The formation of chemical crystals can be shown in an interesting manner as follows: Spread a saturated solution of salt on a glass slide, or projection-lantern glass, and allow it to evaporate in the lantern's light or beneath a magnifying glass. The best substances to use are solutions of alum or sodium, alum being preferable. Ordinary table salt gives brilliant crystals which reflect the light to a marked degree. For regular formation, where the shape of the crystal is being studied, use a solution of hyposulphite of soda.
The formation of chemical crystals can be demonstrated in a fascinating way as follows: Spread a saturated solution of salt on a glass slide or a projection-lantern glass, and let it evaporate in the lantern's light or under a magnifying glass. The best substances to use are solutions of alum or sodium, with alum being the better choice. Regular table salt produces beautiful crystals that reflect the light significantly. For consistent formation, where the shape of the crystal is being examined, use a solution of hyposulphite of soda.
Many startling facts may be learned from the study of crystals in this manner, and watching them "grow" is great sport even to the chemist.—Contributed by L. T. Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Many surprising facts can be discovered from studying crystals this way, and observing them "grow" is an enjoyable experience even for chemists.—Contributed by L. T. Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Furniture Polish for Fine Woods
Boiled olive oil, to which a few drops of vinegar has been added, makes an excellent furniture polish for very fine woods. It will be found to work nicely on highly polished surfaces, and also for automobile bodies. It is applied in moderate quantities, and rubbed to a luster with a flannel cloth.
Boiled olive oil, with a few drops of vinegar added, makes a great furniture polish for fine woods. It works well on highly polished surfaces and even on car bodies. Use it in moderate amounts and buff it to a shine with a flannel cloth.
Enlarging Photographs
By A. E. Swoyer
When the photographer wishes to make an enlarged print from a small negative, he arranges a suitable light and condensers back of the negative and by means of a lens projects the resultant image upon a sheet of sensitive paper. Owing to the comparative weakness of the light, however, it is necessary either to use bromide paper or some of the faster brands of developing-out paper. If a more artistic medium is desired, a glass positive must first be made and enlarged to produce a negative from which the final prints will be made by contact. This process is somewhat clumsy and expensive, for if any retouching or doctoring is to be done, it must be upon a glass surface, either that of the two negatives or of the intermediate positive. As all of this work is done by transmitted light, there is the loss of fine detail common to all enlargements.
When a photographer wants to create a large print from a small negative, they set up a suitable light and condensers behind the negative and use a lens to project the resulting image onto a sheet of light-sensitive paper. Because the light is relatively weak, it’s necessary to use bromide paper or some faster brands of developing-out paper. If a more artistic medium is preferred, a glass positive must be made first and then enlarged to create a negative from which the final prints will be made by contact. This process can be somewhat awkward and costly, as any retouching or adjustments need to be done on a glass surface, either of the two negatives or the intermediate positive. Since all of this work is done using transmitted light, there's a loss of fine detail that’s typical with all enlargements.
The difficulties incident to this process may be done away with by the use of a modification of the popular post-card projector; the alteration consisting simply in the substitution of a better lens for the cheap plate glass with which such instruments are usually fitted.
The challenges involved in this process can be overcome by using a modified version of the common post-card projector; the change is simply replacing the low-quality plate glass usually found in these devices with a better lens.
A contact print, preferably on glossy paper, ferrotyped, is made from the original negative by contact in the usual way; this is then placed in the modified projector and the image thrown upon a sensitive plate of the desired size. After a brief exposure, development will show an enlarged negative having every quality of the original.
A contact print, preferably on glossy paper and ferrotyped, is created from the original negative by contact in the usual way; this is then placed in the modified projector and the image is projected onto a sensitive plate of the desired size. After a short exposure, development will reveal an enlarged negative that has all the qualities of the original.
The advantages of this process are obvious. In the first place, the comparative cheapness of the apparatus is a factor; in the second, the intermediate glass positive is eliminated, the print which is substituted for it providing a much better medium for retouching, faking or printing in. Transparent water colors in the less actinic shades may be used upon this print to control the final result, and if spoiled, it may be replaced at a negligible cost.
The benefits of this process are clear. First, the equipment is relatively inexpensive. Second, the intermediate glass positive is removed, and the print that takes its place offers a much better surface for retouching, manipulating, or printing. You can use transparent watercolors in the less intense colors on this print to adjust the final outcome, and if it gets ruined, you can replace it at a minimal cost.

An Ordinary Post-Card Projector Used Back of a Camera to Illuminate a Photograph Which is Enlarged on a Plate to Make a Negative Instead of a Print (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
An ordinary postcard projector used behind a camera to light up a photograph that is enlarged onto a plate to create a negative instead of a print (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
At first glance, it would appear as if [218] this method were simply a form of photographic copying; it is, in fact, the reverse. For in copying any object with a camera, the sensitive medium is behind the lens and the object to be copied is in front, and the size of the copy is therefore limited both by that of the camera and by its bellows draw. In the reflection process, the object to be copied is back of the lens and the sensitive medium is in front; as large a copy can be made with a small camera as with an eight by ten. It is really more convenient to work with a short-focus lens and a camera of limited bellows extension; the nearer the lens is to the back of the camera the larger will be the projected image.
At first glance, it might seem like [218] this method is just a way of photographic copying; however, it’s actually the opposite. When you copy any object with a camera, the sensitive material is located behind the lens while the object being copied is in front, which limits the size of the copy based on both the camera and its bellows extension. In the reflection process, the object to be copied is behind the lens and the sensitive medium is in front, allowing for a large copy to be made with a small camera just as easily as with an eight by ten. It’s actually more practical to use a short-focus lens and a camera with limited bellows extension; the closer the lens is to the back of the camera, the larger the projected image will be.
The diagram (Fig. 1) shows that the size of the object to be enlarged does not depend upon the focal length of the lens used, as in ordinary enlarging, but simply upon the size of the opening in the front of the projector. The dotted lines are drawn from the edges of the card to be projected through the lens. Figure 2 is a sketch of a projector with the lens tube removed, so that it may be used with a camera as shown in Fig. 3.
The diagram (Fig. 1) shows that the size of the object to be enlarged doesn't depend on the focal length of the lens used, like with regular enlarging, but rather on the size of the opening in the front of the projector. The dotted lines extend from the edges of the card to be projected through the lens. Figure 2 is a sketch of a projector with the lens tube taken off, allowing it to be used with a camera as shown in Fig. 3.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
Homemade Screen-Door Spring

A screen or storm-door spring can be easily made of spring-steel wire. The wire is bent to the shape shown in the sketch and two turns given to the coil as shown at A. The ends of the wire are fastened to the casing and door with staples. Two or three of these springs can be attached to one door where it is necessary to have more strength.—Contributed by Wm. Rosenberg, Watertown, Mass.
A screen or storm door spring can be easily made from spring-steel wire. The wire is bent into the shape shown in the sketch, and two turns are made in the coil as shown at A. The ends of the wire are secured to the casing and door with staples. Two or three of these springs can be attached to one door when more strength is needed. —Contributed by Wm. Rosenberg, Watertown, Mass.
A Surprise Water Bottle
The performer produces a bottle and gives it with a glass to anyone in the audience, asking the person selected to take a drink of a very delicious concoction. When the person attempts to pour out the solution it is found to be frozen.
The performer pulls out a bottle and hands it, along with a glass, to someone in the audience, inviting that person to take a sip of a really tasty drink. When the person tries to pour it out, they discover that the liquid is frozen.
To perform this trick, the fluid must be previously made with a saturated solution of sulphate of soda and hot water. Fill a clean white bottle with the solution, taking care to cork the bottle while the liquid is hot. The liquid remains in a fluid state as long as the bottle is corked. When the bottle is shown, it appears to contain a liquid, and in handing it to a person the performer must be careful to take out the cork in time to allow it to solidify. In order to gain the proper time, pretend to be looking for a glass, make some remark about a sudden chill or feel the hand holding the bottle and say it is very cold. In the meantime, the air acting upon the solution has caused it to become fixed and immovable, and when the person attempts to pour it out, he finds it is impossible.
To do this trick, you need to prepare a saturated solution of sodium sulfate and hot water in advance. Fill a clean white bottle with the solution, making sure to cork it while the liquid is still hot. The liquid will stay in a fluid state as long as the bottle is corked. When you show the bottle, it looks like it has a liquid inside, and when you hand it to someone, you need to be careful to remove the cork just in time for it to solidify. To get the timing right, you can pretend to look for a glass, comment on a sudden chill, or feel the bottle and say it’s really cold. Meanwhile, the air acting on the solution will cause it to harden and become solid, so when the person tries to pour it out, they’ll find it’s impossible.
A Graduate Holder
A simple and easily constructed graduate holder in the form of a bracket placed in the corner of a dark room is shown in the sketch. The bracket not only holds the graduates securely, but allows them to drain perfectly and prevents dust settling on the inside, as they are suspended by the base. Holes of different size are cut in the board to accommodate large, medium and small graduates.
A straightforward and easy-to-make graduate holder shaped like a bracket is illustrated in the sketch. The bracket not only supports the graduates securely but also lets them drain properly and keeps dust from settling inside since they are hung by the base. Different-sized holes are cut into the board to fit large, medium, and small graduates.

The Graduate Holder is Permanently Fastened in a Corner of the Dark Room
The graduate holder is permanently secured in a corner of the dark room.
Homemade Enlarging Camera
The ordinary hand camera of the focusing type can be used to enlarge pictures from negatives of its own make. The requirement is a device to hold the negative rigid in a position in front of the camera lens, and at such a distance that the rays of light passing through the negative and lens will enter a box of sufficient size for the desired enlargement and focus plainly on a sheet of sensitive paper attached to the end of the box.
The regular focusing hand camera can be used to enlarge pictures from negatives it creates. All you need is a device to securely hold the negative in front of the camera lens at a distance that allows light rays passing through the negative and lens to enter a sufficiently sized box for the desired enlargement and clearly focus on a sheet of sensitive paper attached to the end of the box.
The first thing to do is to find the distance that is required from the camera lens to the paper enlargement to make the proper size, and the distance from the lens to the negative. A correspondent of Camera Craft gives the following rule for finding these dimensions: To find the distance between the lens and paper enlargement, add 1 to the number of times the picture is to be enlarged and multiply the result by the focus of the lens in inches. The example given is for a 6-in. focus lens. An example: A 4 by 5-in. negative enlarged to 8 by 10 in. is a two-time enlargement (four times in area); 2+1 = 3, and 3×6 = 18, the distance in inches of the lens from the sensitive paper. To find the distance of the lens to the negative, divide the above result, 18 in., by the number of times desired to enlarge, 18×2 = 9, the distance in inches from the lens to the negative.
The first step is to find the distance required from the camera lens to the paper enlargement to get the right size, and also the distance from the lens to the negative. A contributor from Camera Craft gives this rule for determining those measurements: To find the distance between the lens and the paper enlargement, add 1 to the number of times you want to enlarge the picture, then multiply that total by the lens's focal length in inches. For example, with a 6-inch focal length lens: If you have a 4 by 5-inch negative that you want to enlarge to 8 by 10 inches, that's a two-time enlargement (which means four times the area); so, 2 + 1 = 3, and 3 × 6 = 18, which is the distance in inches from the lens to the sensitive paper. To determine the distance from the lens to the negative, take the 18 inches you found before and divide it by the number of times you want to enlarge: 18 ÷ 2 = 9, which is the distance in inches from the lens to the negative.
With these figures as a working basis, the box can be made in any size to use any focusing camera. The dimensions given in the drawing are for a 4 by 5-in. camera having a 6-in. focus lens, and to enlarge the pictures from a 4 by 5-in. negative to 8 by 10 in. In the first place make a box 8-1/2 in. wide, 10-1/2 in. deep and 14 in. long, inside measurement, using 3/4-in. material, as shown in the sectional drawing A. One end is left open and in the center of the other a hole is cut 5 in. square.
With these measurements as a starting point, the box can be built in any size to accommodate any focusing camera. The dimensions provided in the drawing are for a 4 by 5-inch camera with a 6-inch focus lens, and to enlarge pictures from a 4 by 5-inch negative to 8 by 10 inches. First, construct a box that measures 8.5 inches wide, 10.5 inches deep, and 14 inches long on the inside, using 3/4-inch material, as shown in the sectional drawing A. One end is left open, and a 5-inch square hole is cut in the center of the other end.
The back end of the camera is placed over this hole as shown at B and 1/4-in. strips nailed to the box end around the camera back to exclude all light. The camera must be centrally located.
The back of the camera is positioned over this hole as shown at B, and 1/4-inch strips are nailed to the box end around the camera back to block out all light. The camera needs to be centered.
The next to be made is the end board or easel, consisting of two pieces of 3/4-in. material, one 8-1/2 by 10-1/2 in., which should fit easily into the end of the box, and a larger one, 10 by 12 in., the outside dimensions of the box, as shown at C. Nail the smaller piece [220] to the center of the large one, crossing the grain of wood in so doing. The end board is the easel upon which the sensitive paper is fastened with push pins, and should be covered with a sheet of white paper, pasting it on the 8-1/2 by 10-1/2-in. board with a thin coat of glue. The slide D is a piece of wood 3/4 in. thick, 3-1/2 in. wide and 26 in. long. This is fastened to the under side of the box with four screws, placing it exactly in the center and parallel with the sides of the box. Be careful to have the slide parallel or the holder will not freely slide upon it.
The next step is to create the end board or easel, which consists of two pieces of 3/4-inch material: one piece measuring 8-1/2 by 10-1/2 inches, designed to fit easily into the end of the box, and a larger piece measuring 10 by 12 inches, which matches the outside dimensions of the box, as shown at C. Nail the smaller piece [220] to the center of the larger one, making sure to cross the grain of the wood. The end board serves as the easel that holds the sensitive paper in place with push pins, and it should be covered with a sheet of white paper, which you will glue onto the 8-1/2 by 10-1/2-inch board with a thin layer of glue. The slide D is a piece of wood that is 3/4 inch thick, 3-1/2 inches wide, and 26 inches long. This piece is attached to the underside of the box using four screws, positioned exactly in the center and parallel to the sides of the box. Make sure the slide is parallel; otherwise, the holder won't slide freely on it.
The negative holder E is made of a piece of 3/4-in. board, 8 in. wide and 10 in. long. A hole 5-1/2 by 7-1/2 in. is cut in its center, leaving a margin of 1-1/4 in. on all sides. This holder is set in a groove cut in a block of wood having a mortise cut 3/4 by 3-1/2 in. to fit on the slide easily. A thumb screw is fitted in the center of the bottom of the block of wood. This is used for fastening the negative holder rigidly to the slide when the focus is secured.
The negative holder E is made from a piece of 3/4-inch wood, 8 inches wide and 10 inches long. A hole measuring 5-1/2 by 7-1/2 inches is cut in its center, leaving a 1-1/4 inch margin on all sides. This holder is placed in a groove cut into a block of wood that has a mortise cut 3/4 by 3-1/2 inches to fit onto the slide easily. A thumb screw is installed in the center of the bottom of the wooden block. This is used to securely attach the negative holder to the slide once the focus is set.
A 1-in. hole is bored in the upper corner of the box end, as shown, to serve as a peephole for seeing the image on the end board or easel. This is covered before putting the sensitive paper in the box. The end board is held in position with two flat brass hooks. The camera is held in place with two buttons placed on blocks of wood the height of the camera back, as shown at F. Two pieces of clear glass, 6 by 8 in. in size, are held in place in the negative holder by means of buttons, the film negative being placed between them. All the joints in the box must be carefully puttied and the inside of the box blackened, which is done with a mixture of lampblack and alcohol, to which is added a small quantity of shellac to give it body.
A 1-inch hole is drilled in the upper corner of the box end, as shown, to act as a peephole for viewing the image on the end board or easel. This is covered before placing the sensitive paper in the box. The end board is secured with two flat brass hooks. The camera is held in position with two buttons placed on wooden blocks the same height as the camera back, as shown at F. Two pieces of clear glass, 6 by 8 inches in size, are held in place in the negative holder by means of buttons, with the film negative placed between them. All the joints in the box must be carefully puttied, and the inside of the box should be painted black, which is done with a mix of lampblack and alcohol, adding a small amount of shellac to give it some texture.
A darkroom is not essential, a bathroom with the window covered over with orange paper will do, or even a large room with the shades drawn and pinned close to the window casing. It is best to leave a space in one of the windows to be covered with orange paper, doing the developing about 10 ft. from the source of light.
A darkroom isn't necessary; a bathroom with the window covered with orange paper works just fine, or even a big room with the shades pulled down and pinned tightly to the window frame. It's ideal to leave a gap in one of the windows to cover with orange paper, doing the developing about 10 feet away from the light source.
To operate the camera place it on the enlarging box, hook the easel in place, put a negative in the holder with the film side toward the lens. Take the outfit to a shady place outdoors, point the holder end at an unobstructed portion of the sky and look through the peephole. Rack the lens in and out to focus the picture. The easel should have heavy black lines drawn upon it inclosing parallelograms from 5 by 7 in. to 8 by 10 in., so that one can readily see the size of the enlargement to be made. When the focus is obtained take the outfit into the darkroom, remove the easel and fasten the sensitive paper with push pins. Replace the easel and take the outfit outdoors again, point it toward the clear sky and make the exposure, which should be at least 5 seconds with a 16 stop. It is best to make a trial exposure on a small strip of paper to find the proper time. Directions for the use of bromide papers will be found in each package.
To use the camera, place it on the enlarging box, attach the easel, and insert a negative into the holder with the film side facing the lens. Take the setup to a shaded outdoor area, point the holder end at a clear section of the sky, and look through the peephole. Adjust the lens in and out to focus the image. The easel should have thick black lines drawn on it outlining rectangles from 5 by 7 inches to 8 by 10 inches, so you can easily see the size of the enlargement needed. Once you have the focus, bring the setup into the darkroom, take off the easel, and secure the sensitive paper with push pins. Put the easel back on and take the setup outside again, pointing it toward the clear sky to make the exposure, which should last at least 5 seconds with a 16 stop. It’s a good idea to do a test exposure on a small strip of paper to find the right time. Instructions for using bromide papers are included in each package.
An Easy Way to Make a Shelf
Procure an ordinary packing box and mark a line from corner to corner on both ends, as shown, from A to B in Fig. 1. Pull out all the nails from the corners that may cross the line. Nail the top to the box and saw it on the lines marked and two shelves will be formed which may be used as shown in Fig. 2. Boxes dovetailed at the corners will make excellent shelves and look neat if painted.
Get a regular packing box and draw a line from corner to corner on both ends, like shown from A to B in Fig. 1. Take out all the nails from the corners that might be in the way of the line. Attach the top to the box and cut along the marked lines, which will create two shelves you can use as illustrated in Fig. 2. Boxes with dovetail joints at the corners will make great shelves and look tidy if painted.

Two Shelves Made of One Box (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Two Shelves Made from One Box (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Multiplying Attachment for a Camera
By J. C. Moore
The hand camera suitable for this work is the kind commonly known as the reversible back, which is a detachable part that carries a ground glass for focusing and a place to insert the plate holders. When this part is removed, it will be seen that the back of the camera is mortised to prevent light from entering. Construct a frame to take the place of the back, but make it about 5/8 in. larger all around, and make one surface to fit the mortise of the camera box.
The hand camera suitable for this work is the type typically referred to as the reversible back, which is a detachable piece that holds a ground glass for focusing and a spot for inserting the plate holders. When this piece is removed, you’ll notice that the back of the camera is mortised to block light from getting in. Build a frame to replace the back, but make it about 5/8 in. larger all around, and ensure one side fits the mortise of the camera box.

The Attachment as It is Fitted to the Camera and the Reversible Back in the Frame
The Attachment as It Fits the Camera and the Reversible Back in the Frame
A back is now made and attached to the frame, to carry the ground-glass reversible back, so that it can be shifted over the center of focus for each small portion of the plate on which the picture is to be made. Measure the outside of the plate holder and, doubling the dimensions both ways, lay out a diagram on a piece of paper. Lay the plate holder on the paper and move it to the extreme left, then to the right, to see if the center of the plate will coincide with the center of the back. In the same manner locate the center in a vertical position. If the center lines do not coincide, increase the dimensions until this occurs. Mark, in the exact center, an opening the size of the plate and cut out the wood. It is best to use a three-ply wood for making the back, but if this cannot be obtained, procure a dry piece of wood and mortise and glue strips to the ends to keep the wood from warping. Glue the frame to this [222] back, over the opening, and make attachments to hold it to the camera in the same manner as the reversible back was attached.
A back is now created and attached to the frame to hold the ground-glass reversible back, allowing it to be moved over the center of focus for each small section of the plate where the picture will be taken. Measure the outside of the plate holder and, doubling the dimensions both ways, sketch a diagram on a piece of paper. Place the plate holder on the paper and shift it to the extreme left, then to the right, to see if the center of the plate aligns with the center of the back. Similarly, find the center vertically. If the center lines don’t match up, increase the dimensions until they do. Mark an opening in the exact center the size of the plate and cut out the wood. It’s best to use a three-ply wood for the back, but if that’s not available, get a dry piece of wood and mortise and glue strips to the ends to prevent warping. Glue the frame to this [222] back over the opening, and make attachments to secure it to the camera in the same way as the reversible back was attached.

Manner of Laying Out the Pattern for the Back and Locating the Exact Center
Manner of Laying Out the Pattern for the Back and Locating the Exact Center
If pictures of two or three different sizes are to be made, the opening in the new back should be fitted with as many new pieces as there are sizes of pictures, each to have an opening of corresponding size. For a 5 by 7-in. plate, 1-1/8 by 1-1/4-in. pictures is a good size, as there will be room for 24 pictures on the plate with a small margin left for notes. The piece to fill the opening should be made of the same material as the back so that a smooth joint will result. As a board cannot be made smooth enough for a perfectly light-tight joint, the surface on the new back, over which the reversible back travels, must be covered with cloth—a piece of black velvet is suitable—to exclude all light as the plate holder is shifted over the back.
If you're going to make pictures in two or three different sizes, the opening in the new back should be fitted with as many new pieces as there are sizes of pictures, each with an opening that matches its size. For a 5 by 7-inch plate, a picture size of 1-1/8 by 1-1/4 inches works well, allowing for 24 pictures on the plate with a little space left for notes. The piece that fills the opening should be made from the same material as the back so that the joint is smooth. Since a board can't be smooth enough for a perfectly light-tight joint, the surface on the new back, where the reversible back moves, must be covered with cloth—a piece of black velvet is ideal—to block any light when the plate holder moves over the back.
A frame is now made to carry the reversible back of the camera, the size of which will depend on the size of the other parts, as well as on the size of the camera to be used. This frame consists of two horizontal strips joined at the ends with grooved pieces, fitting the edge of the new back, so that it may be slid up and down in the grooves. The crosspieces are also rabbeted to receive the reversible back and allow it to be moved back and forth horizontally. The rabbet in the horizontal strips should not be so deep as to permit the extending edge to overlap the ground-glass frame, thus preventing it from moving back as the plate holder is inserted.
A frame is now designed to hold the reversible back of the camera, with its size depending on the dimensions of the other components and the camera being used. This frame is made up of two horizontal strips connected at the ends by grooved pieces that fit the edge of the new back, allowing it to slide up and down within the grooves. The crosspieces are also designed with a groove to accommodate the reversible back and let it move back and forth horizontally. The groove in the horizontal strips shouldn't be too deep, so the extending edge doesn't overlap the ground-glass frame, which would prevent it from sliding back when inserting the plate holder.
If the frame on the back and the reversible back fit tightly, they will remain in any position, but if they are loosely fitted, it will be necessary to provide some means to hold them. Small springs with pins may be fitted to the vertically moving frame to hold it in the position for the horizontal rows of pictures.
If the frame on the back and the reversible back fit snugly, they will stay in any position, but if they are loosely fitted, you'll need to find a way to keep them in place. Small springs with pins can be attached to the vertically moving frame to secure it when displaying the horizontal rows of pictures.
The ground glass should be marked for the size picture to be taken. The positions of the frame and plate carrier should also be marked so that the plate holder need not be taken out to find the location and focus for the next picture.
The ground glass should be marked for the size of the picture to be taken. The positions of the frame and plate carrier should also be marked so that the plate holder doesn’t need to be removed to find the location and focus for the next picture.
Connecting a Pipe to Sheet Metal
In the absence of a waste nut, an iron pipe can be easily fastened to sheet-metal work as shown in the sketch. The end of the pipe, Fig. 1, is slotted with a hacksaw to form four projections, which are turned outward and their ends rounded as shown in Fig. 2. The face of the projections are tinned and then riveted to the sheet-metal surface, as shown in Fig. 3. After soldering the joint, it will be as good or better than if a waste nut had been used.—Contributed by Lorin A. Brown, Washington, D. C.
Without a waste nut, you can easily attach an iron pipe to sheet-metal work as shown in the sketch. The end of the pipe, Fig. 1, is cut with a hacksaw to create four projections, which are bent outward and their ends rounded, as shown in Fig. 2. The surfaces of the projections are tinned and then riveted to the sheet-metal surface, as shown in Fig. 3. After soldering the joint, it will be as good as or better than if a waste nut had been used.—Contributed by Lorin A. Brown, Washington, D. C.

The End of the Pipe as It is Prepared to be Riveted on the Sheet Metal (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The End of the Pipe as It's Getting Ready to Be Riveted onto the Sheet Metal (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
An Acid Siphon
When siphoning off acids or other disagreeable or poisonous liquids, it is very important that none of it touch the flesh or mouth. It is almost impossible to do this when starting the ordinary siphon. A siphon that does away with this inconvenience and danger can be made as follows:
When siphoning off acids or other unpleasant or toxic liquids, it’s crucial that none of it comes into contact with skin or mouth. It’s nearly impossible to avoid this when using a regular siphon. A siphon that eliminates this problem and risk can be made as follows:
Procure a good Bunsen burner and two pieces of 1/4 in. glass tube, one 2 ft. and the other 18 in. long. Heat the 2 ft. length at a point 8 in. from one end in the flame until it can be [223] bent as shown at A. The other piece should be plugged at one end and then slowly and evenly heated at a point 10 in. from one end. When the glass is soft, blow slowly and steadily into the open end, at the same time turning the tube around in the flame. This will form a bulb, B. The ends of the glass tube are heated and bent as shown, at C and D, and then fused onto the piece A, as shown at E. This can be accomplished by heating the piece A at a point 4 in. from the unbent end. When the glass becomes soft, place one end of a short piece of tube in it and pull out into a thread. Break this off as close to the tube as possible, to make a hole in the tube. Heat the end of the tube D and also the glass around the hole, and when both become soft, they can be fused together.
Get a good Bunsen burner and two pieces of 1/4 in. glass tube, one 2 ft long and the other 18 in long. Heat the 2 ft piece at a point 8 in from one end in the flame until it can be [223] bent as shown at A. The other piece should be plugged at one end and then heated slowly and evenly at a point 10 in from one end. When the glass is soft, blow slowly and steadily into the open end while turning the tube in the flame. This will create a bulb, B. The ends of the glass tube are heated and bent as shown at C and D, and then fused onto piece A, as shown at E. You can do this by heating piece A at a point 4 in from the unbent end. When the glass is soft, place one end of a short piece of tube in it and pull out a thread. Break this off as close to the tube as possible to create a hole in the tube. Heat the end of tube D and the glass around the hole, and when both become soft, they can be fused together.

When Starting This Siphon It is Difficult for the Liquid to Touch the Mouth or Flesh
When starting this siphon, it's hard for the liquid to make contact with the mouth or skin.
In use, close the end not in the liquid and, placing the mouth at F, exhaust the tube, thus filling it with the liquid. When the closed end is opened, the siphon will flow. The liquid collects in the bulb, and if a little care is used, none of it can reach the mouth.—Contributed by O. F. Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
In use, seal the end not in the liquid and, placing your mouth at F, suck the air out of the tube to fill it with the liquid. When you open the sealed end, the siphon will start to flow. The liquid collects in the bulb, and with a little care, none of it should reach your mouth.—Contributed by O. F. Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
Bottle-Opening Trick
A local junk dealer, who was also known as the "strongest man in town," used to mystify the folks by opening a bottle, apparently with a stroke of his index finger. His audience saw his index finger strike the stopper, but did not see the knuckle of his second finger strike the eccentric at the point A, as shown in the sketch, causing it to fly up while his index finger B assisted the stopper out of the bottle mouth.
A local junk dealer, who was also known as the "strongest man in town," used to amaze people by opening a bottle with just a flick of his index finger. His audience saw his index finger hit the stopper, but they didn't notice that the knuckle of his middle finger tapped the eccentric at point A, as shown in the sketch, making it pop up while his index finger B helped pull the stopper out of the bottle.

In Striking the Bottle Cork, the Knuckle of the Second Finger Loosens the Wire Lock
In Striking the Bottle Cork, the knuckle of the second finger loosens the wire lock.
When trying the trick, it is best to select a bottle with a loose stopper, or else wear a glove, as the gentleman who demonstrated the trick had hands of the hard and horny type.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
When attempting the trick, it's best to choose a bottle with a loose cork, or you might want to wear a glove, since the guy who showed the trick had tough, callused hands.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Setting Colors in Fabrics
The colors of fabrics or other materials of any kind may be set by boiling the articles in the following solution: To 1 gal. of soft water add 1 oz. of ox gall. This solution should be boiling when the articles are dropped into it. A chemical reaction results and the colors are set or made nonfading. The process is harmless. Colors in wood may be treated in the same manner.
The colors of fabrics or other materials can be fixed by boiling the items in this solution: Add 1 oz. of ox gall to 1 gallon of soft water. This solution should be boiling when you put the items in. A chemical reaction occurs, and the colors become set or fade-resistant. The process is safe. You can treat colors in wood the same way.
Towel-Roller Brackets
Very serviceable brackets for a towel roller can be made by using ordinary wire clothes hooks, as shown in the illustration. The roller is made of wood and two nails with their heads cut off, one in each end, form bearings to turn in the ends of the hooks. When it is desired to remove the roller, the hooks are sprung apart enough to allow it to drop out.—Contributed by Hugh Carmichael, West Lorne, Ont.
Very useful brackets for a towel roller can be made using regular wire clothes hooks, as shown in the illustration. The roller is made of wood, and two nails with their heads cut off, one at each end, act as bearings to turn in the ends of the hooks. When you want to remove the roller, just spread the hooks apart enough to let it drop out.—Contributed by Hugh Carmichael, West Lorne, Ont.

The Roller Brackets are Easily Adjusted in Any Location and Serve the Purpose Admirably
The roller brackets can be easily adjusted anywhere and do their job perfectly.
A Developing-Tray Rocker
The tank method of photographic development is acknowledged as the best, yet there are many who, for various reasons, still use the old-style tray method. For those who use the tray, a splendid and simple method that combines the good qualities of both the tank and tray is the tray-rocking device shown in the illustration.
The tank method of photo development is recognized as the best, yet many people, for different reasons, still prefer the old-school tray method. For those who stick with the tray, a great and simple option that merges the advantages of both the tank and tray is the tray-rocking device shown in the illustration.

Developing-Tray Rocker to Keep the Liquid in Motion over the Plate Automatically
Developing-Tray Rocker to Automatically Keep the Liquid Moving over the Plate
The rocker consists of a wood box, 13 in. long, 9 in. wide and 1-1/2 in. deep, made of 3/8-in. material, together with a similar box 1-1/2 in. deep, that fits over the other as a light-proof cover. Both are given a coat of black paint.
The rocker is made of a wooden box that measures 13 inches long, 9 inches wide, and 1.5 inches deep, constructed from 3/8-inch material. There's also a similar box that is 1.5 inches deep, which fits on top of the other box as a light-proof cover. Both boxes are painted black.
At the center on the under side of the tray part, a right angle made of strap iron is fastened with screws. On the part projecting down, a hole is drilled to receive a sleeve made of a brass tube which is soldered in place. An ordinary shelf bracket is procured, one end of which is filed and fitted with a strip of metal having both ends turned up slightly. Small-pointed pins are fastened in holes drilled near the turned-up part. The points of the pins serve as a knife-edge for the rocker. The extending end of the strap iron is fitted with a pendulum rod having a weight at the bottom.
At the center on the underside of the tray part, a right angle made of strap iron is attached with screws. On the part that sticks down, a hole is drilled to hold a sleeve made of a brass tube, which is soldered in place. An ordinary shelf bracket is obtained, with one end filed and fitted with a strip of metal that has both ends turned up slightly. Small pointed pins are attached in holes drilled near the turned-up part. The tips of the pins act as a knife-edge for the rocker. The extending end of the strap iron is fitted with a pendulum rod that has a weight at the bottom.
The rocker is attached to the wall in a convenient place in the dark room. The tray with the developer and plate is placed in the box, which is light-tight, and the pendulum is started swinging.—Contributed by T. B. Lambert, Chicago.
The rocker is fixed to the wall in a convenient spot in the dark room. The tray with the developer and plate is set in the box, which is light-tight, and the pendulum is started swinging. —Contributed by T. B. Lambert, Chicago.
An Adjustable Bookholder
A very satisfactory adjustable holder for books or letters can be constructed of ordinary materials. A board is used for the base, and two pieces, C, cut from the grooved edges of flooring boards, are fastened on top as shown. A permanent end, A, is fastened to one end of the base. A good-size holder is 19 in. long, 6 in. wide, made of material 3/4 in. thick.
A very useful adjustable holder for books or letters can be made from common materials. You use a board for the base, and two pieces, C, cut from the grooved edges of flooring boards, are attached on top as shown. A permanent end, A, is secured to one end of the base. A good-sized holder measures 19 in. long, 6 in. wide, and is made from material that is 3/4 in. thick.

The Holder may be Used for Books or Letters and Papers as a File
The Holder can be used for books, letters, or papers as a file.
The movable slide B has two pieces attached to its under side, which are cut from the tongued edges of flooring boards. The piece D answers the double purpose of a handle and brace. A lock, E, is made of a bolt, having a long thread and a square head. A hole is bored from the under side through the brace, and a portion of the wood is cut out to admit the nut. A square place is cut out to admit the square bolt head in the bottom pieces. To lock the slide, simply screw the nut upward so that it will push the bolt head against the base.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
The movable slide B has two pieces attached to its underside, made from the edges of flooring boards. The piece D serves the dual purpose of a handle and a brace. A lock, E, is a bolt with a long thread and a square head. A hole is drilled from the underside through the brace, and a portion of the wood is removed to fit the nut. A square section is cut out to accommodate the square bolt head in the bottom pieces. To lock the slide, simply screw the nut upward until it pushes the bolt head against the base.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
An Old-Oak Stain
To make old oak of ash, elm, box alder, chestnut, maple, yew, and sycamore wood use a solution of copper acetate, or iron acetate. Either of these can be made by allowing a strong acid to come in contact with copper or iron. Acetic acid, or vinegar, will do for the acid. The chemical can be obtained from a local druggist if it is not desired to make the stain. By varying the strength of the solution, several shades may be obtained. A weak solution of iron acetate gives various brown hues. As the strength of the salt increases by concentration, the shades of brown darken.
To turn lighter woods like ash, elm, box, alder, chestnut, maple, yew, and sycamore into a darker oak finish, use a solution of copper acetate or iron acetate. You can create either of these by letting a strong acid react with copper or iron. Acetic acid, or vinegar, works well as the acid. If you'd rather not make the stain yourself, you can buy the chemical from a local pharmacy. By adjusting the strength of the solution, you can achieve different shades. A weak solution of iron acetate produces various brown tones. As you make the solution stronger through concentration, the brown shades become darker.
Tablespoon End Used as Lemon Squeezer
In an emergency, the ordinary tablespoon can be used as a lemon squeezer by turning the lemon around the end of the spoon. This produces the same result as obtained with the regular squeezers, which act on the principle of extracting the juice by turning and crushing the lemon over a rough projection which approximately matches the shape of a half lemon.—Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York, N. Y.
In an emergency, you can use a regular tablespoon as a lemon squeezer by rolling the lemon over the end of the spoon. This gives you the same result as traditional squeezers, which work by twisting and crushing the lemon against a rough surface that roughly resembles the shape of half a lemon. —Contributed by L. E. Turner, New York, N. Y.

The Shape of the Spoon Bowl Produces the Same Effect as the Lemon Squeezer
The shape of the spoon bowl creates the same effect as the lemon squeezer.
A Back Stop for a Workbench
In planing small pieces on a bench, they usually have a tendency to tip up or slide around. This difficulty can be easily overcome by providing the bench with an extra back stop. For this purpose a discarded plane iron will do very well. Its edge should be notched so that it will easily enter the wood. The edges of its central slot should be beveled off, if an ordinary wood screw is used to fasten it to the bench. A series of holes, several inches apart and in line with the regular back stop, should be bored in the bench so the screw and iron can be readily changed, to fit varying lengths.—Contributed by C. S. Rice, Washington, D. C.
When planing small pieces on a bench, they often tend to tip up or slide around. This issue can be easily fixed by adding an extra backstop to the bench. A discarded plane iron works great for this purpose. Its edge should be notched to make it easy to insert into the wood. The edges of its central slot should be beveled if you're using a standard wood screw to attach it to the bench. You should drill a series of holes, a few inches apart and aligned with the regular backstop, in the bench so the screw and iron can be easily changed to accommodate different lengths.—Contributed by C. S. Rice, Washington, D. C.

A Plane Bit Fastened to the Top of a Bench to Hold Blocks While Planing Them
A plane attached to the top of a bench to hold blocks while smoothing them out.
Croquet Mallets Protected by Metal Rings

Due to the severe service they are subjected to, croquet mallets very frequently split off at the ends, which spoils them for further use in accurate driving. To prevent this, metal bands may be placed around the ends of the mallets. Thin sheet iron, or tin, can be used for this purpose. One end is bent up at right angles, the opposite end is provided with a loop to fit over the upright portion of the first end, and then the loop is closed up and hammered down to draw the metal tightly around the mallet. The ring is secured in place with several tacks, or short nails, driven through the seam.—Contributed by H. E. Stratmeyer, Rockville, Md.
Due to the intense use they go through, croquet mallets frequently split at the ends, which makes them unusable for accurate driving. To prevent this, metal bands can be placed around the ends of the mallets. Thin sheet iron or tin works well for this purpose. One end is bent up at a right angle, the opposite end has a loop to fit over the upright part of the first end, and then the loop is closed and hammered down to secure the metal tightly around the mallet. The ring is held in place with several tacks or short nails driven through the seam.—Contributed by H. E. Stratmeyer, Rockville, Md.
Distance Marker for Printing Photographs
A convenient homemade printing device, or distance marker, for printing photographs by artificial light consists of a smooth board on which twelve 1-in. marks are drawn, as shown. A wall-base electric socket is attached on the first line and the others are numbered up to 12. A trial test of a negative marks the distance and time of exposure which should be recorded on the negative. Such a device makes uniform prints possible and provides a means of recording time on negative-storage envelopes.—Contributed by Harold Davis, Altoona, Pa.
A handy homemade printing device, or distance marker, for printing photos with artificial light consists of a smooth board with twelve 1-inch marks drawn on it, as shown. An electric wall socket is attached to the first line, and the others are numbered up to 12. A test of a negative helps determine the distance and time of exposure, which should be noted on the negative. This device allows for consistent prints and provides a way to record time on negative-storage envelopes. —Contributed by Harold Davis, Altoona, Pa.

The Same Distance with the Same Exposure will Always Produce Uniform Prints
The same distance with the same exposure will always produce consistent prints
Mantel Picture Frames Made in Plaster
Procure a small oval or rectangular frame of a suitable size and use it as a pattern in making a mold. If it is not necessary to select an expensive frame, one that is straight without any floral designs is the best to use. Ordinary molding made into a frame will do as well, or a pattern, whittled out of wood in oval shape, will produce good results.
Get a small oval or rectangular frame that's the right size and use it as a template to create a mold. If you don't need to pick an expensive frame, one that's simple and without any floral designs is the best choice. A regular molding shaped into a frame will work fine, or a pattern carved out of wood in an oval shape will yield good results.
Make a flask out of any small box, and fill it with clay instead of molding sand. Make an impression of the frame in the clay, and the mold is ready for the plaster.
Make a flask from any small box, and fill it with clay instead of using sand. Create an impression of the frame in the clay, and the mold is ready for the plaster.
Procure four 8-oz. bottles, fill them with water, and tint the water in three of them red, green, and blue, with dyes. When purchasing the plaster of paris—2 lb. will do—also get some brass filings from a machine shop, and mix it with the plaster while in a dry state; then divide the lot into four parts of 1/2 lb. each, or equal parts.
Get four 8-ounce bottles, fill them with water, and dye the water in three of them red, green, and blue using food coloring. When you buy the plaster of Paris—2 pounds should be enough—also pick up some brass filings from a machine shop, and mix them with the plaster while it's dry; then divide the mixture into four equal parts of 1/2 pound each.
Use the tinted water to mix the plaster and pour it into the mold. This will give the combinations red, green, blue, and white.
Use the colored water to mix the plaster and pour it into the mold. This will create the combinations of red, green, blue, and white.
Picture frames made in this manner will stand enough polishing to keep the brass filings on the surface bright and shining, which gives a pretty effect.—Contributed by J. B. Murphy, Plainfield, N. J.
Picture frames made this way will hold up to enough polishing to keep the brass filings on the surface bright and shiny, creating a nice effect.—Contributed by J. B. Murphy, Plainfield, N. J.
A Five-Pointed Star
There are many ways of making a five-pointed star, but the one illustrated is new and easy to apply. A long strip of paper, which should be transparent, is tied into a knot. When the ends A and B are drawn tightly, the paper strip takes the position shown in C. The end A is folded forward, or in front of the knot; then the whole is turned over and it will take [227] the position shown in D. Hold the paper to a good light and a perfect five-pointed star will be seen.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
There are many ways to make a five-pointed star, but the one shown here is new and easy to follow. A long strip of paper, which should be transparent, is tied into a knot. When you pull the ends A and B tightly, the paper strip takes the shape shown in C. Fold the end A forward, or in front of the knot; then flip the whole thing over and it will take the position shown in D. Hold the paper up to a good light, and you'll see a perfect five-pointed star.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.

Holding the Knot to the Light a Star will be Seen, Shown by the Dotted Lines
Holding the Knot to the Light, a Star will be Seen, Shown by the Dotted Lines
Fastening Portière Pole in a Doorway
A pole can be fastened between two supports, posts, or in a door casing neatly and without fixtures in the following manner: The pole is cut 1/8 in. shorter than the space between the casings, and a 5/16 in. hole is drilled in each end, one to a depth of 1-1/2 in. and the other 3/8 in. deep, a coil spring being placed in the deepest hole.
A pole can be secured between two supports, posts, or in a door frame neatly and without hardware in the following way: The pole is cut 1/8 inch shorter than the space between the casings, and a 5/16 inch hole is drilled into each end, one to a depth of 1-1/2 inches and the other 3/8 inch deep, with a coil spring placed in the deeper hole.
Screws are turned into the center of the location for the pole in the door jambs, allowing one screw head to project 1/8 in., and the other at least 1/4 inch.
Screws are inserted into the center of the spot for the pole in the door frames, allowing one screw head to stick out 1/8 inch and the other at least 1/4 inch.

No Fixtures That will Show are Required with This Fastening of a Portière Pole
No visible fixtures are needed to secure this portière pole.
To place the pole in position, put the end with the spring in the hole on the screw head projecting 1/4 in. and push the pole against the jamb, allowing the other end to pass over the other projecting screw head until it slips into the hole by pressure from the spring. The spring will keep the pole in position.—Contributed by Ernest F. Dexter, Hartford, Conn.
To position the pole, place the end with the spring into the hole over the screw head sticking out 1/4 inch, and push the pole against the frame, letting the other end move over the other screw head until it drops into the hole due to the pressure from the spring. The spring will hold the pole in place.—Contributed by Ernest F. Dexter, Hartford, Conn.
Trick with Knives and Glasses
An interesting trick may be performed with three tumblers and three table knives. Place the tumblers in an equilateral triangle on a table so the knife ends, when the knives are laid between them, as shown in the plan sketch, are about 1 in. away from the tumblers. The trick is to arrange the knives so that they are supported by the tops of the three tumblers and nothing else. Most observers will say that it is impossible; some will try it and in most cases fail. It can be done, and the illustration shows how simply it may be accomplished.—Contributed by R. Neland, Minneapolis, Minn.
An interesting trick can be done with three cups and three table knives. Set the cups in an equilateral triangle on a table so the knife ends, when the knives are placed between them, are about 1 inch away from the cups. The trick is to position the knives so that they rest on the tops of the three cups and nothing else. Most people will think it's impossible; some will attempt it and usually fail. It can be done, and the illustration shows how easily it can be achieved.—Contributed by R. Neland, Minneapolis, Minn.

Knives Placed in Such a Manner as to be Supported by the Three Glasses
Knives Arranged to be Supported by the Three Glasses
A Scraper Handle
In using the ordinary steel-plate scraper, much inconvenience and cramping of the hands is experienced unless some suitable handle is attached. If a piece of scrap wood is taken and cut to a convenient shape, with a groove tightly fitting the scraper steel, greater pressure can be exerted and more effective work produced, without cramping the hands or tiring out the operator as readily.—Contributed by A. P. Nevin, Hancock, Mich.
Using a standard steel-plate scraper can be really inconvenient and hard on the hands unless you attach a suitable handle. If you take a piece of scrap wood and shape it into a comfortable handle with a groove that snugly fits the scraper steel, you'll be able to apply more pressure and do more effective work without cramping your hands or wearing out the operator as quickly. —Contributed by A. P. Nevin, Hancock, Mich.

An Ordinary Piece of Board Shaped for a Handle and Notched for the Scraper Blade
An ordinary piece of wood shaped like a handle and notched for the scraper blade.
Photographic Tray-Rocking Stand
Films develop better if the tray holding the solution is kept in motion or rocked. This is inconvenient and tiresome where a great many films are to be developed. The trouble may be overcome by the use of the rocking device shown in the sketch. It may be made of any light wood, the right size to suit the photographer's needs.
Films develop better if the tray holding the solution is kept moving or rocked. This becomes inconvenient and tiring when a lot of films need to be developed. This issue can be solved by using the rocking device shown in the sketch. It can be made from any lightweight wood, sized appropriately for the photographer's needs.

Tray Rocked Automatically by a Weight
Tray Rocked Automatically by a Weight
The tray holder A is pivoted on the uprights C with pins EE. The uprights are fastened to a base, B. Two braces, D, one on each side of the upright C, limits the tip of the tray holder A. The weight F works as a pendulum, which automatically rocks the tray when set in motion.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, No. Dartmouth, Mass.
The tray holder A is attached to the vertical supports C with pins EE. The supports are secured to a base, B. Two braces, D, one on each side of the support C, restrict the tilt of the tray holder A. The weight F acts like a pendulum, which automatically rocks the tray when it starts moving.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, No. Dartmouth, Mass.
Kite-Line Traveler
The amusement of kite flying can be broadened by adding the kite-line traveler shown in the sketch. The frame of the traveler is made of poplar, spruce or soft pine, 1/4 in. square. The horizontal piece is 24 in. long and the piece to which the wings are fastened is 8 in. long. This piece is cut so it will have a slight slant. The brace is a mitered piece, 13 in. long. The frame is fastened together with small brads, giving it the appearance shown in Fig. 1.
The fun of flying a kite can be enhanced by adding the kite-line traveler shown in the sketch. The traveler’s frame is made of poplar, spruce, or soft pine, measuring 1/4 in. square. The horizontal piece is 24 in. long, and the piece where the wings are attached is 8 in. long. This piece is cut to have a slight angle. The brace is a mitered piece, 13 in. long. The frame is held together with small brads, resulting in the appearance shown in Fig. 1.
After the frame is finished, the traveler wheels are made and attached. They should be 1/4 in. thick, about 1-1/4 in. in diameter, and have a groove cut 3/16 in. into their faces. The pattern for cutting the bearings is shown in Fig. 4. These are bent at the places shown by the dotted lines and attached to the main frame stick as shown by BB in Fig. 3. The end view of the bearing is shown in Fig. 5. The metal is bent in as shown by AA, so that the wheel will rotate without much friction.
After the frame is done, the traveler wheels are made and attached. They should be 1/4 inch thick, about 1-1/4 inches in diameter, and have a groove cut 3/16 inch into their faces. The pattern for cutting the bearings is shown in Fig. 4. These are bent at the locations indicated by the dotted lines and attached to the main frame stick as shown by BB in Fig. 3. The end view of the bearing is shown in Fig. 5. The metal is bent in as shown by AA, so that the wheel will rotate with minimal friction.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
In Fig. 6 is shown the method of attaching the wings to the slanting frame part. The wings are made of light cardboard and each fastened with tacks to a wood arm, cut as shown. The large end of each arm is made to hinge in a piece of tin with brads AA.
In Fig. 6, you can see how to attach the wings to the slanted frame part. The wings are made of lightweight cardboard and each is secured with tacks to a wooden arm, cut as displayed. The larger end of each arm is designed to hinge on a piece of tin with brads AA.

(Fig. 6)
(Fig. 6)
Fasten a string to the ends of the arm pieces, as shown in Fig. 1, and attach a wire loop to the middle of the string, as shown in Fig. 3. The wire shown at L in Fig. 3 is bent and attached to the main frame so it will slide easily. The trip for dropping the wings, as shown in Fig. 2, is a small block of wood about 2 in. square and 1/4 in. thick with a 1/2-in. hole in the [229] center. Slip the kite line through the hole before tying it to the kite. Place the trip about 100 ft. from the kite and wedge it to the string with a small piece of wood. The eyelets SS are necessary, as they make it impossible for the pulley to run off the string.
Fasten a string to the ends of the arm pieces, as shown in Fig. 1, and attach a wire loop to the middle of the string, as shown in Fig. 3. The wire shown at L in Fig. 3 is bent and connected to the main frame so it will slide easily. The mechanism for dropping the wings, as shown in Fig. 2, is a small block of wood about 2 in. square and 1/4 in. thick with a 1/2-in. hole in the center. Slip the kite line through the hole before tying it to the kite. Place the trip about 100 ft. from the kite and secure it to the string with a small piece of wood. The eyelets SS are necessary, as they prevent the pulley from running off the string.
The traveler is first put on the kite string with the end having the loop L (Fig. 3) up, then, after letting out 100 ft. of string, the trip block is fastened in place and the kite tied to the end of the string. Hook the wire loop on the string attached to the ends of the wings in place in the wire catch of L, and it is ready for the flight. When the traveler reaches the trip, the loop L is pushed back, thus causing the end of the wire to slip out of wire loop and the wings to fall back as shown in Fig. 2, when the traveler descends ready to be set for another flight.—Contributed by Stanley C. Funk, Bellefontaine, Ohio.
The traveler is first attached to the kite string with the loop L (Fig. 3) facing up. Then, after letting out 100 ft. of string, the trip block is secured in place and the kite is tied to the end of the string. Hook the wire loop onto the string connected to the ends of the wings into the wire catch of L, and it's ready for flight. When the traveler reaches the trip, the loop L is pushed back, causing the end of the wire to slip out of the wire loop, and the wings fall back as shown in Fig. 2, allowing the traveler to descend and be prepared for another flight.—Contributed by Stanley C. Funk, Bellefontaine, Ohio.
A Mouse Trap

A simple mouse trap can be made of two lengths of steel wire. The spiral wire is 1/16 in. in diameter and the center wire is of larger size. The trap is set by pulling out the spring and catching the ends on the bends A and B. The bait is tied on at C. When the mouse puts his head through the coils and pulls the bait, the springs are released and his head is caught between the coils.
A basic mouse trap can be made using two pieces of steel wire. The spiral wire is 1/16 inch in diameter, and the center wire is thicker. The trap is set by pulling back the spring and securing the ends on the bends A and B. The bait is tied on at C. When the mouse pushes its head through the coils and tugs at the bait, the springs are released, trapping its head between the coils.
How to Make a Small Electric Furnace
The furnace consists of a large flower pot containing an ordinary clay crucible about 6 in. in height, the space between the two being packed with fireclay. Two 3/4-in. holes are bored through the sides of the crucible about half way between the top and the bottom. Holes corresponding to these holes are molded in the fireclay, which should extend several inches above the top of the flower pot. A smaller crucible is placed inside of the large one for use in melting such metals as copper, brass and aluminum. With metals that will melt at a low degree of heat, such as tin, lead or zinc, the large crucible can be used alone. Each crucible should be provided with a cover to confine the heat and keep out the air. The electrodes are ordinary arc-light carbons.
The furnace is made from a large flower pot that holds a regular clay crucible about 6 inches tall, with fireclay packed in the space between them. Two 3/4-inch holes are drilled through the sides of the crucible about halfway between the top and the bottom. Corresponding holes are shaped in the fireclay, which should rise several inches above the top of the flower pot. A smaller crucible is placed inside the larger one for melting metals like copper, brass, and aluminum. For metals that melt at lower temperatures, like tin, lead, or zinc, the large crucible can be used by itself. Each crucible should have a lid to keep the heat in and the air out. The electrodes are standard arc-light carbons.

Electric Connections to Furnace
Furnace Electrical Connections
The furnace is run on an ordinary 110-volt lighting circuit and it is necessary to have a rheostat connected in series with it. A water rheostat as shown in the sketch will serve to regulate the current for this furnace. Small quantities of brass or aluminum can be melted in about 10 minutes in the furnace.—Contributed by Leonard Stebbins, Denver, Colo.
The furnace operates on a standard 110-volt lighting circuit and requires a rheostat connected in series with it. A water rheostat, as illustrated in the sketch, will help control the current for this furnace. You can melt small amounts of brass or aluminum in about 10 minutes in the furnace.—Contributed by Leonard Stebbins, Denver, Colo.
Repairing a Broken Knife Handle
A piece was broken from the pearl handle of my knife and I repaired it in the following manner: After cleaning both the edges of the pearl and the brass beneath, I run in enough solder to fill the place of the piece of pearl broken out. The solder was then filed, sandpapered and polished. The broken part cannot be felt and it appears to be only an end decoration.—Contributed by W. A. Humphrey, Columbus, O.
A piece was chipped off the pearl handle of my knife, and I fixed it like this: After cleaning both the edges of the pearl and the brass underneath, I added enough solder to fill in where the piece of pearl was missing. I then filed, sanded, and polished the solder. The repair is seamless and looks like just a decorative end piece. —Contributed by W. A. Humphrey, Columbus, O.

Repairing with Solder (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Repairing with Solder (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Picture-Frame and Triangle Clamp
A picture frame or triangle is quite difficult to hold together when fitting the corners. It is still more difficult to hold them together while the glue dries. The clamp illustrated will be found quite satisfactory in solving this problem, and at the same time is very simple to construct and easy to manipulate. The material list for making the clamps and corner blocks is as follows:
A picture frame or triangle is pretty hard to keep together when fitting the corners. It’s even tougher to hold them in place while the glue dries. The clamp shown will work really well to solve this issue and is also super simple to build and easy to use. Here’s the list of materials needed to make the clamps and corner blocks:
-
Picture frame clamp:
- 4 pieces, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 15 in.
- 2 pieces, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 5 in.
-
Triangle clamp:
- 3 pieces, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 10 in.
- 1 piece, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 4 in.
-
Corner blocks:
- 4 pieces, 7/8 by 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 in.
- 8 pieces, 7/8 by 1 by 2 in.
-
The pieces mentioned are of oak, S-4-S.
- 1 piece 3/8-in. maple for dowels
-
Hardware:
- 10 bolts, 1/4 by 2 in.
- 4 bolts, 1/4 by 3 in.
- 2 bolts, 3/8 by 6 in.
The picture-frame clamp consists of the four arms A, B, C and D, Fig. 1. A 1/4-in. hole is bored in one end of each piece, 1/2 in. from the end. A series of 3/8-in. holes, 1 in. apart, are bored along the center in each piece. The two short pieces, E and F, have two 1/4-in. holes bored in their centers, 1/2 in. from each end. These pieces are bolted to the four arms with 1/4-in. bolts as shown in the sketch. A 3/8-in. hole is bored in the middle of each piece E and F for one of the 6-in. bolts K.
The picture-frame clamp consists of the four arms A, B, C, and D, as shown in Fig. 1. A 1/4-inch hole is drilled in one end of each piece, 1/2 inch from the end. A series of 3/8-inch holes, 1 inch apart, are drilled along the center of each piece. The two short pieces, E and F, have two 1/4-inch holes drilled in their centers, 1/2 inch from each end. These pieces are bolted to the four arms with 1/4-inch bolts, as shown in the sketch. A 3/8-inch hole is drilled in the middle of each piece E and F for one of the 6-inch bolts K.

The Corner Blocks on Both Picture Frame and Triangle Clamps are so Constructed That They Hold the Molding together While Fitting the Corners and also Hold Them Securely While the Glue is Hardening (Fig. 1)
The corner blocks on both the picture frame and triangle clamps are designed to hold the molding together while fitting the corners and securely hold them in place while the glue dries (Fig. 1)
The four corner blocks G, H, I and J, Fig. 1, have a 3/8-in. hole bored in the center of each and a dowel glued into it with the end projecting 1-1/4 in. on the under side and level with the surface on the upper side. Each of the corner blocks is fitted with two pieces like X, Fig. 2. Each of these pieces has one end round or a semicircle, and in its center a 1/4-in. hole is bored. The other end has a 3/8-in. hole bored 1/2 in. from the end.
The four corner blocks G, H, I, and J, Fig. 1, have a 3/8-inch hole drilled in the center of each, with a dowel glued into it that sticks out 1-1/4 inches on the underside and is flush with the surface on the top side. Each corner block is attached to two pieces like X, Fig. 2. Each of these pieces has one end rounded or in a semicircle, and a 1/4-inch hole drilled in the center. The other end has a 3/8-inch hole drilled 1/2 inch from the end.
After making the small pieces, take the four corner blocks G, H, I and J and draw a line on the upper side in the center, with the grain of the wood, and mark the angles as follows, so that one-half the angle will be on each side of the center line: On one end of the pieces G and H mark a 90-deg. angle, on the other end a 45-deg. angle, on the piece I mark a 90-deg. and 30-deg. angle and on J mark a 90-deg. and 60-deg. angle. Mark the number of degrees of each between the sides of the angle. Place two of the pieces marked X, Fig. 2, on each of the corner blocks, one piece on each side between the different angle lines, so their round ends will be toward the center and toward each other with a space of 1/4 in. between them. Clamp the pieces to the corner blocks and bore the 1/4-in. holes through them to secure perfect alinement. Put the bolts in and turn the pieces first to one angle and then the other, and while in the respective positions, bore the 3/8-in. holes 3/8 in. deep in the corner blocks. Glue a dowel in each 3/8-in. hole of the small [231] pieces, allowing it to project 1/4 in. on the under side so it will fit in the 3/8-in. hole in the corner block. Be sure to countersink the holes for the heads of the bolts. All bolts should be fitted with wing nuts. All that is necessary to change from one angle to another is to loosen the nuts and swing the small pieces around so the dowel pins will drop into the other holes, then tighten the nuts.
After making the small pieces, take the four corner blocks G, H, I, and J and draw a line on the upper side in the center, following the grain of the wood. Mark the angles as follows, ensuring that half the angle is on each side of the center line: On one end of the pieces G and H, mark a 90-degree angle, and on the other end, a 45-degree angle. On piece I, mark a 90-degree and a 30-degree angle, and on J, mark a 90-degree and a 60-degree angle. Indicate the number of degrees of each between the sides of the angle. Place two of the pieces marked X, Fig. 2, on each of the corner blocks, with one piece on each side between the different angle lines, so their rounded ends face the center and each other with a 1/4 inch space between them. Clamp the pieces to the corner blocks and drill the 1/4-inch holes through them to ensure perfect alignment. Insert the bolts and rotate the pieces first to one angle and then to the other. While in those positions, drill the 3/8-inch holes 3/8 inch deep in the corner blocks. Glue a dowel into each 3/8-inch hole of the small pieces, allowing it to project 1/4 inch on the underside so it fits into the 3/8-inch hole in the corner block. Be sure to countersink the holes for the heads of the bolts. All bolts should be fitted with wing nuts. To change from one angle to another, simply loosen the nuts and swing the small pieces around so the dowel pins drop into the other holes, then tighten the nuts.
The triangle clamp is made in the same manner as the picture-frame clamp, except that the arms L and M, Figs. 2 and 3, are half-lapped into the crosspiece P. The bolt O is 3/8 in. and the head is cut off. Drill a 1/8-in. hole in the bolt, 1/4 in. from the end, and bore a 3/8-in. hole in the end of the arm N. Insert the headless bolt O in this hole and drive a nail through the side of the arm N, so it will pass through the hole drilled in the bolt. This keys the bolt in the end of the arm N.
The triangle clamp is made just like the picture-frame clamp, except that the arms L and M, Figs. 2 and 3, are half-lapped into the crosspiece P. The bolt O is 3/8 in. with the head cut off. Drill a 1/8-in. hole in the bolt, 1/4 in. from the end, and create a 3/8-in. hole in the end of the arm N. Insert the headless bolt O into this hole and drive a nail through the side of the arm N, so it passes through the hole drilled in the bolt. This secures the bolt in the end of the arm N.
To clamp a picture frame, set the corner blocks G, H, I and J to the 90-deg. angles and adjust them on the arms A, B, C and D to accommodate the size frame to be made, as shown in Fig. 1. Tighten the thumbnut on the bolt K, and this will draw all four corners together with the same pressure. The corners can then be examined to see if they fit properly. If they do not, saw in the joints with a backsaw until they do fit.
To clamp a picture frame, position the corner blocks G, H, I, and J at 90-degree angles and adjust them on the arms A, B, C, and D to fit the size of the frame you're making, as illustrated in Fig. 1. Tighten the thumbnut on the bolt K, which will pull all four corners together with equal pressure. You can then check the corners to see if they fit correctly. If they don't, use a backsaw to trim the joints until they do fit.
The triangles are clamped in the same way. The corner blocks are set to take the proper angles. The ends of the bolts should be slightly burred over so that the thumbnuts cannot be turned off.—Contributed by Chas. A. Pettit, Baltimore, Md.
The triangles are secured in the same way. The corner blocks are adjusted to fit the right angles. The ends of the bolts should be slightly rounded so that the thumbnuts can’t be unscrewed. —Contributed by Chas. A. Pettit, Baltimore, Md.
Exterior Sliding Fly Screen
The method shown for fitting fly screens on the outside of the upper and lower sash permits the screen to be raised and held at different heights. Screweyes are turned into the outer strips, as shown in Fig. 1. The sides of the screen frame are grooved, Fig. 2, to allow it to slide up and down on the screweyes.
The method for installing fly screens on the outside of the upper and lower sash allows the screen to be moved and held at different heights. Screweyes are screwed into the outer strips, as shown in Fig. 1. The sides of the screen frame are grooved, as shown in Fig. 2, to enable it to slide up and down on the screweyes.

The Heads of the Screweyes in the Window-Frame Stop Slide in a Groove Cut in the Screen Frame (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The Heads of the Screweyes in the Window Frame Stop Slide in a Groove Cut in the Screen Frame (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The screen can be raised and two of the screweyes turned from the normal vertical position, A, Fig. 3, to a horizontal position, B, to hold the frame at that point. By the use of a greater number of screweyes more places can be provided to support the screen at different heights.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
The screen can be lifted, and two of the screweyes can be rotated from the usual vertical position, A, Fig. 3, to a horizontal position, B, to keep the frame in that spot. By adding more screweyes, you can create additional points to support the screen at various heights.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Bushing a Stovepipe in a Chimney Hole
When a stovepipe is too small for the hole in the chimney, a bushing can be made of the kind of metal tobacco boxes that are curved to fit in a pocket. Remove the tops and bottoms of the boxes and shove them in around the pipe. If such tobacco boxes are not at hand, tin cans of any kind can be used by melting off the tops and bottoms and bending the remaining cylindrical shells into proper shape.—Contributed by Elmer McConaughy, Dayton, O.
When a stovepipe is too small for the chimney hole, you can create a bushing using metal tobacco boxes that are curved to fit in a pocket. Just take off the tops and bottoms of the boxes and insert them around the pipe. If you don't have tobacco boxes, you can use any tin cans by melting off the tops and bottoms and shaping the remaining cylindrical shells as needed. —Contributed by Elmer McConaughy, Dayton, O.
A Screweye Driver

An ordinary wire nail, 3 in. long, bent as shown and with its head filed square, makes a good tool for turning in screweyes. The square head is readily held in the chuck on most braces. The screweye can be turned in with greater speed than by the ordinary method.—Contributed by Robert T. Johnston, Buffalo, New York.
An ordinary 3-inch wire nail, bent as shown and with its head filed square, makes a great tool for turning in screw eyes. The square head is easily held in the chuck on most braces. You can turn in the screw eye faster than with the usual method.—Contributed by Robert T. Johnston, Buffalo, New York.
Copying Stand for Photographic Enlarging and Reducing
A camera stand or table, which can be put to many uses, is easily made and, when made, will be of particular service, says Work, London, for enlarging, reducing, copying, and, with a slight modification, for making lantern slides by reduction.
A camera stand or table, which can be used in many ways, is easy to make and, when constructed, will be especially useful, says Work, London, for enlarging, reducing, copying, and, with a slight modification, for creating lantern slides by reduction.
Copying with a camera on a tripod is always a more or less complicated job, because of the ease with which a picture, being focused, may be thrown out of focus, and even out of the field of view, the camera not being attached to the same support as the picture. With the stand shown in the illustration, the picture is attached to the same support as the camera. This makes it possible to place the apparatus on a table, out in the open, or in any other suitable position, where the light may be best for the work. When used for enlarging with artificial light it will also be found convenient, as it may be placed in any position in a darkened room.
Copying with a camera on a tripod is always a somewhat complicated task because it's so easy for a focused picture to go out of focus or even out of view, especially since the camera isn't attached to the same support as the image. With the stand shown in the illustration, the picture is fixed to the same support as the camera. This allows you to set up the equipment on a table, outside, or any other suitable spot where the lighting is best for the job. When enlarging with artificial light, this setup is also handy, as it can be positioned anywhere in a darkened room.

Camera Stand for Use in Copying and Enlarging, as Well as for Making Lantern Slides (Fig. 1)
Camera Stand for Use in Copying and Enlarging, as Well as for Making Lantern Slides (Fig. 1)
The size of the stand will depend on the sizes of pictures to be made, but it is better to have it too large than too small, as a small camera can be used on a large stand while a small stand would be of only limited use. The general appearance of the stand is shown in Fig. 1. The material list is as follows:
The size of the stand will depend on the sizes of pictures being taken, but it’s better for it to be too large than too small, since a small camera can be used on a large stand, while a small stand would have limited usefulness. The overall look of the stand is shown in Fig. 1. The material list is as follows:
2 | Sides, 1/2 in. by 9-1/2 in. by 5 ft., S-2-S. |
4 | Crosspieces, 1/2 in. by 3 in. by 1 ft. 7 in., S-2-S. |
4 | Guides, 3/4 in. by 1-1/4 in. by 2 ft. 6 in., S-2-S. |
2 | Bottom Pieces, 1 in. by 9 in. by 2 ft. 6 in., S-2-S. |
1 | Easel, 3/4 in. by 1 ft. 6 in. by 2 ft., S-2-S. |
2 | Cleats, 1/2 in. by 1-1/2 in. by 1 ft. 4 in., S-2-S. |
Straight-grained soft pine or poplar is the best material to use. The side pieces should be narrowed at one end or to a point about halfway of their length. The extent of this narrowing will depend somewhat on circumstances. The guide pieces are then attached with screws, the two upper pieces so that they have their upper edges flush with the edges of the side boards.
Straight-grained soft pine or poplar is the best material to use. The side pieces should be tapered at one end or to a point about halfway along their length. How much you taper will depend somewhat on the situation. The guide pieces are then attached with screws, with the two upper pieces positioned so that their upper edges are flush with the edges of the side boards.

(Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
(Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The bottom piece, on which the camera is to be set, is made of the two pieces, cut as shown in Fig. 2, and joined with cleats, as in Fig. 3. The space left after part of one side of each board has been cut away, should be sufficient to make a slot which, when the boards are joined together, will admit the screw to hold the camera in place. A rod is run through holes bored in the sides, just below the two pairs of guides, and fitted with a wing nut for clamping the sliding bottom when a focus and the size of the picture is found.
The bottom piece, where the camera will be placed, is made of two sections, cut as shown in Fig. 2, and connected with cleats, as illustrated in Fig. 3. The gap left after cutting part of one side of each board should be enough to create a slot that will allow a screw to secure the camera in position when the boards are joined. A rod passes through holes drilled in the sides, just below the two pairs of guides, and is equipped with a wing nut to clamp the sliding bottom once the focus and picture size are determined.
In copying, the camera is attached to the bottom board and the picture is tacked to the easel. The camera is then focused roughly by means of the rack and pinion, the final, fine focusing being done by moving the sliding bottom board. For enlarging, the lantern is placed on the sliding bottom and the bromide paper tacked to the easel.
In copying, the camera is fixed to the bottom board and the picture is pinned to the easel. The camera is then roughly focused using the rack and pinion, with the final adjustments made by moving the sliding bottom board. For enlarging, the lantern is set on the sliding bottom and the bromide paper is pinned to the easel.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
For lantern-slide work, which is reducing, it is necessary to cut an aperture in the easel, after the manner shown in Fig. 4. The edges of the opening have a rabbet to receive first a ground glass and then the negative, both being held in place with turn buttons. It is not necessary to have two easels, as this opening can be fitted with a piece to make a level surface when the apparatus is used for copying or enlarging.
For lantern-slide work, which is becoming less common, you need to cut an opening in the easel, as shown in Fig. 4. The edges of the opening have a groove to hold first a ground glass and then the negative, both secured in place with turn buttons. You don’t need two easels since this opening can be fitted with a piece to create a flat surface when the equipment is used for copying or enlarging.
To Make Whitewash Stick to Surfaces Coated
In using whitewash much difficulty is experienced in making it stick to the substance covered. A good way to prevent the coating from cracking and peeling off is to add 2 oz. of pure sodium chloride to every 1 gal. of whitewash mixture. This is not expensive, but should be secured at a drug store because some salts of sodium are not pure and will darken the whitewash. The sodium chloride should be added after the whitewash solution is made up. When this mixture is used in buildings it will destroy all vermin which it touches.
When using whitewash, people often struggle to get it to adhere to the surface. A great way to stop the coating from cracking and peeling is to add 2 oz. of pure table salt to every 1 gallon of whitewash mixture. This isn’t expensive, but it should be purchased at a pharmacy because some sodium salts aren’t pure and can darken the whitewash. You should add the salt after preparing the whitewash solution. When this mixture is applied in buildings, it will eliminate any pests it contacts.
A Mechanical Camera

The young person who likes to draw will find the device illustrated of great assistance for outlining a portrait or a bit of scenery which can be filled in to make the picture. The camera consists of a box without a cover, about 12 in. long, 6 in. wide and 4 in. deep. An oblong hole is cut in one end, a small hole bored in the other, and a piece cut out of the lower edge so that one eye can be placed close to the hole. The oblong hole, shown by the dotted lines, is covered with a fine perforated cardboard, the kind used for working in mottoes with yarn. Supports are nailed in the corners of the box, their length being calculated to allow the operator to sit or stand, as desired.
The young person who enjoys drawing will find the illustrated device really helpful for sketching a portrait or a bit of scenery that can be filled in to create the picture. The camera is a box without a lid, about 12 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 4 inches deep. There’s a rectangular hole cut in one end, a small hole drilled in the other, and a piece taken out of the lower edge so one eye can get close to the hole. The rectangular hole, shown by the dotted lines, is covered with fine perforated cardboard, the kind used for making yarn mottoes. Supports are nailed in the corners of the box, and their length is designed to let the user sit or stand, as they prefer.

Outlining a Portrait on the Perforated Paper Placed over the Oblong Hole in the Camera
Outlining a Portrait on the Punctured Paper Set over the Rectangular Hole in the Camera
The camera is used in the manner illustrated. If a portrait is to be drawn, then the one sitting for it must be quiet until the outlines are completed. The operator, looking through the hole, traces the lines on the cardboard between the perforations. When the outlines are drawn in this manner, the cardboard is removed and placed on the paper or cardboard used for the picture. The outline is then transferred by marking with a sharp-pointed pencil through the perforations on the outlines as drawn. After separating the two pieces, the markings can be connected with a continuous line and an exact outline will be obtained which can be filled in as desired. The outline picture is a sample of work done with the camera.—Contributed by Florence Thomas, Gordon, Ont.
The camera is used as shown. If someone is getting their portrait done, they need to stay still until the outlines are finished. The operator, looking through the hole, traces the lines on the cardboard between the dots. Once the outlines are drawn this way, the cardboard is taken off and placed on the paper or cardboard meant for the picture. The outline is then transferred by marking with a sharp pencil through the dots on the outlines that were drawn. After separating the two pieces, the marks can be connected with a continuous line, resulting in an exact outline that can be filled in as desired. The outlined picture is an example of work done with the camera. —Contributed by Florence Thomas, Gordon, Ont.
Gauge Attachment for a Pocket Rule

The base of the gauge A is cut from a block of hard wood, about 2-1/2 in. long, 1 in. wide and 3/8 in. thick. A notch is cut in one side to admit the rule and the wedge B, which has a slot that slides on a pin in the base. A small metal clip keeps the wedge in place. The gauge can be readily set on the rule at any mark.
The base of the gauge A is made from a block of hard wood, about 2.5 inches long, 1 inch wide, and 0.375 inches thick. A notch is cut in one side to fit the rule and the wedge B, which has a slot that slides onto a pin in the base. A small metal clip secures the wedge in place. The gauge can be easily set on the rule at any mark.
Plate Hangers
In hanging old china plates for decorative purposes use three large white dress hooks, placed at equal distances apart on the edge of the plate. The hanging wire or cord is run through them from the back side and drawn up tightly. These hooks are much better than the ordinary plate hanger, as they are small and will not show much on the plate.
To hang old china plates for decoration, use three large white dress hooks, spaced evenly along the edge of the plate. Run the hanging wire or cord through them from the back and pull it tight. These hooks work better than standard plate hangers because they are small and won’t be very visible on the plate.
An Electrically Operated Camera Shutter

The Electromagnet Trips a Spring Plunger That Forces a Piston on the Camera Air Bulb
The electromagnet triggers a spring plunger that pushes a piston on the camera air bulb.
It is often quite desirable to operate the shutter of a camera from a distance, especially in photographing birds and animals. The device shown in the accompanying sketch serves the above purpose very nicely, and its construction and operation are exceedingly simple. In brief, the operation is as follows: The switch A is mounted on the limb of a tree, in such a manner that it is not conspicuous, and connected in series with a magnet, B, and a battery by means of a piece of flexible conductor, such as lamp cord. The magnet B is energized when the switch is closed and attracts the iron armature C, which is mounted on an arm, pivoted at D. The lower end of this arm is in the form of a latch, which supports the rod E when it is raised to its upper position. The rod E when it is raised compresses the coiled spring F, which is held between the gauge G and the washer H mounted on the rod. A small coil spring holds the armature C away from the core of the magnet B. The lower end of the rod E is in the form of a piston operating in a wooden cylinder J. The rubber bulb at the end of the tube leading to the camera shutter is located in the lower end of the cylinder J. When the rod E is released by the latch K, it moves downward in the cylinder J, due to the action of the spring F, and compresses the bulb L, causing the shutter of the camera to be operated. A small handle, M, may be mounted on the rod to be used in raising it to the upper position. The component parts of this device may be mounted on a small wooden base by means of brass straps, and the terminals of the electric circuit connected to the binding posts N and O, as shown. The switch A may be dispensed with and a push button used in its place, as the operator may station himself several hundred feet away. It may be necessary to use a battery of more than one cell in such cases.
It’s often really useful to operate a camera shutter from a distance, especially when photographing birds and animals. The device shown in the sketch does this job really well, and it's very simple to build and use. Here’s a quick rundown of how it works: The switch A is attached to a tree branch in a way that makes it hard to see, and it's connected in series with a magnet, B, and a battery using a flexible wire, like lamp cord. When the switch is closed, it activates the magnet B, which pulls the iron armature C that’s attached to a pivoted arm at D. The lower end of this arm acts as a latch that holds up the rod E when it’s raised. When rod E is raised, it compresses the coiled spring F that sits between gauge G and washer H on the rod. A small coil spring keeps the armature C away from the magnet B. The bottom of the rod E acts like a piston that moves in a wooden cylinder J. The rubber bulb at the end of the tube connected to the camera shutter is found in the lower end of cylinder J. When rod E is released by latch K, it drops down in cylinder J due to the spring F, compressing the bulb L, which triggers the camera shutter. A small handle, M, can be added to the rod to help lift it back up. The parts of this device can be mounted on a small wooden base using brass straps, and the electrical circuit can be connected to the binding posts N and O, as shown. The switch A can be replaced with a push button instead, since the operator can stand several hundred feet away. If that’s the case, you might need to use a battery with more than one cell.
Electroplating without a Tank
Electroplating without a plating tank is made possible with the following easily homemade apparatus described in a German scientific magazine. It consists of a rubber ball, A, fitted at one end with a glass tube, B, which carries at the opposite end a small sponge. A rod, D, passes through the rubber ball, which is tightly corked at both ends, into the glass tube B and carries at that end the anode E. A small glass tube, F, also connects the rubber ball with the larger tube B. The connections from the battery to the cathode, G, the object to be plated, and to the projecting end of the anode-carrying rod, D, are made as shown. The rubber ball is filled with the electrolyte, and is squeezed so as to force the fluid through the small tube F, into the larger tube, B, filling it and soaking the sponge C. The current is then turned on, and by moving the wet sponge over the cathode G, the latter will be plated. Not only is this an interesting accessory for the amateur's laboratory, but it can be used in the [235] industry where only parts of some object are to be plated, and where it is desired to remedy bad spots without putting the articles back into the bath.
Electroplating without a plating tank can be done with a simple homemade device described in a German scientific magazine. It consists of a rubber ball, A, that has a glass tube, B, attached to one end, which has a small sponge on the opposite end. A rod, D, goes through the rubber ball, which is tightly sealed at both ends, into the glass tube B and holds the anode E at that end. A small glass tube, F, also connects the rubber ball to the larger tube B. Connections from the battery to the cathode, G, which is the item being plated, and to the protruding end of the anode-carrying rod, D, are set up as shown. The rubber ball is filled with the electrolyte and squeezed to push the fluid through the small tube F into the larger tube B, filling it up and soaking the sponge C. The current is then turned on, and by moving the wet sponge over the cathode G, it will be plated. This not only serves as an interesting tool for the amateur's lab, but can also be used in the [235] industry where only certain parts of an object need plating, allowing for touch-ups without needing to put the items back in the bath.

A Hand Tool for Applying a Plate Electrically to the Surface of Metal
A Hand Tool for Electrically Applying a Plate to the Surface of Metal
A Milk-Bottle Tray
Bottled milk is difficult to deliver without knocking the bottles together when carrying them or while in a wagon. There are several kinds of wire baskets for carrying the bottles, but they all have the disadvantage of allowing the bottles to strike one another. A carrier not having this fault can be made very cheaply as follows: Procure a board 1 in. thick, 8 in. wide and 2 ft. long, plane and make it smooth, and use ordinary tin fruit or vegetable cans for the bottle holders. Cut each can off 2-1/2 in. from the bottom and smooth off the jagged edges with a file. Nail these in two rows on the board, starting 1 in. from each end. Attach a segment of a barrel hoop for a handle. The carrier can be painted as desired.—Contributed by G. H. Clemmons, Storm Lake, Iowa.
Bottled milk is hard to transport without the bottles banging against each other while you’re carrying them or when they’re in a wagon. There are various types of wire baskets for carrying the bottles, but they all have the drawback of letting the bottles hit one another. A carrier that avoids this issue can be made very easily like this: Get a board that’s 1 inch thick, 8 inches wide, and 2 feet long, plane it until it’s smooth, and use regular tin fruit or vegetable cans as the bottle holders. Cut each can about 2.5 inches from the bottom and smooth out the rough edges with a file. Nail these in two rows on the board, starting 1 inch in from each end. Attach a piece of a barrel hoop for a handle. You can paint the carrier however you like. —Contributed by G. H. Clemmons, Storm Lake, Iowa.

Parts of Tin Cans Fastened to a Board for Holding Milk Bottles
Parts of tin cans attached to a board for holding milk bottles
A Springboard
Select straight-grained hickory or ash for the springboards. These can be of any width to make up the board to 18 in. wide. The frame part may be of any material of the dimensions given in the sketch. The butt ends of the springboard should be well fastened to the crosspiece with screws, or, better still, small carriage bolts with the nuts on the under side.
Select straight-grained hickory or ash for the springboards. These can be any width to make the board 18 inches wide. The frame can be made from any material that fits the dimensions shown in the sketch. The butt ends of the springboard should be securely attached to the crosspiece with screws, or better yet, small carriage bolts with the nuts on the underside.

A Springboard for Use in Connection with a Vaulting Pole or for Turning Acts
A Springboard for Use with a Vaulting Pole or for Acrobatics
The crosspiece at the rear is cut on the angle of the springboard. The front crosspiece is mortised into the frame, and the one near the center is laid on top of the two side rails. The rear crosspiece is either fastened with large dowels or mortised into the sidepieces. This springboard will be of use in connection with a back-yard gymnasium for vaulting and doing turning acts.
The crosspiece at the back is cut at
Planing Rough-Grain Boards
The surface of a board having a grain that runs both ways is very hard to smooth with a plane. By sharpening the plane iron to a keen edge, then placing it in the plane with the cap reversed and set about 1/32 in. from the cutting edge, I find that with a light cut the plane will smooth regardless of the direction of the grain.—Contributed by William Rollins, Wichita, Kansas.
The surface of a board with a grain that runs in both directions is really tough to smooth with a plane. By sharpening the plane iron to a sharp edge, and then putting it in the plane with the cap reversed and set about 1/32 in. from the cutting edge, I've found that with a light cut, the plane will smooth out regardless of the grain direction.—Contributed by William Rollins, Wichita, Kansas.
Braces for Aeroplane Frames
In making model aeroplanes or gliders the brace shown will serve the purpose admirably. The size and strength of the metal used will depend on where it is to be used. The metal is bent into the shape shown with the use of a vise. The manner of attaching the braces is clearly shown.—Contributed by Francis Chetlain, Chicago.
In building model airplanes or gliders, the brace shown will work perfectly. The size and strength of the metal used will depend on its application. The metal is bent into the shape shown using a vise. The way the braces are attached is clearly illustrated.—Contributed by Francis Chetlain, Chicago.

The Braces are Cut from Stake Iron or Sheet Metal According to the Size Machine being Built
The braces are cut from steel or sheet metal based on the size of the machine being built.
A Puzzle Purse
The puzzle purse is made of four pieces of chamois, two of the pieces being merely flaps, one on each side at the upper edge. One of the pieces forming one side of the purse extends upward for about twice the height of the purse part. The part above the purse has a number of slits cut in it to make the width of each strip 1/8 in. These slits should be accurately cut in order that the purse may be opened easily. The other half is only the size of the purse proper. The upper edge of the latter piece and the flap on that side are stitched together to the flap on the opposite side, the threads of the stitches running between the strips of the long piece. These stitches are made on the line AB and around the edge.
The puzzle purse is made of four pieces of chamois, with two of the pieces being just flaps—one on each side at the top. One of the pieces that makes up one side of the purse extends upward about twice the height of the purse itself. The part above the purse has several slits cut into it, making each strip 1/8 inch wide. These slits need to be cut precisely for the purse to open easily. The other half is just the size of the purse itself. The top edge of that piece and the flap on that side are stitched together to the flap on the other side, with the thread of the stitches running between the strips of the long piece. These stitches are made along line AB and around the edge.

The Strips of Leather Sliding through the Stitches Make the Puzzle Part of the Purse
The strips of leather sliding through the stitches make the puzzle piece of the purse.
To open the purse, take hold of each side on the purse part and draw the pieces apart. In doing so, the strips are drawn through the stitches so that they may be separated and a coin taken from the purse. A pull on each end will close the purse.—Contributed by Chas. Motton, Toronto, Ont.
To open the purse, grab each side of the purse and pull them apart. This separates the strips from the stitches so you can take a coin from the purse. Pulling on each end will close the purse. —Contributed by Chas. Motton, Toronto, Ont.
An Emergency Sandpapering Machine
While doing some work I had several small pieces to be finished with sandpaper. They were so small and of such a shape that it was impossible to do the work by hand. Not having a sanding machine, I used a disk talking machine for the purpose. I placed a sheet of sandpaper over the disk and fastened it to the felt at the corners with pins. The machine was then set going at its highest rate of speed, and the articles were smoothed by holding them on the disk.—Contributed by Fred S. Barnard, Los Angeles, Cal.
While working on a project, I had several small pieces that needed finishing with sandpaper. They were so tiny and oddly shaped that it was impossible to do the work by hand. Not having a sanding machine, I improvised by using a disk record player for this purpose. I placed a sheet of sandpaper over the disk and secured it to the felt at the corners with pins. Then, I turned the machine on at its highest speed, and smoothed the pieces by holding them against the disk. —Contributed by Fred S. Barnard, Los Angeles, Cal.
A Developing Machine
The base of the developing machine consists of a wood tray with sloping ends and high sides, which is placed at the center and provides bearings for the wheel axle. The dimensions given in the sketch are for making a machine to develop a film about 29 in. long. The disk, or wheel, is cut from a board, 7/8 in. thick, and the attached crosspieces are cut from 1/4 in. dowels to make them 2-1/2 in. long. These are placed about 1 in. apart on the circumference of the disk.
The base of the developing machine consists of a wooden tray with sloping ends and high sides, which is positioned in the center and provides supports for the wheel axle. The dimensions shown in the sketch are for creating a machine to develop a film about 29 inches long. The disk, or wheel, is cut from a board that's 7/8 inch thick, and the attached crosspieces are cut from 1/4 inch dowels to make them 2-1/2 inches long. These are arranged about 1 inch apart along the circumference of the disk.
An axle, fastened solidly in the wheel and adjusted in the bearings, is kept from slipping sideways by bushings made of a spool. A crank is attached to one end of the axle. Hot paraffin is applied to the inside of the tank part, to make it liquid-tight. Two pins or hooks are attached to one of the crosspieces to catch into the film end. If the wheel is the correct size, the same pins can be used for fastening the other end of the film.
An axle, securely attached to the wheel and fitted in the bearings, is prevented from sliding sideways by bushings made from a spool. A crank is connected to one end of the axle. Hot paraffin is applied to the inside of the tank section to ensure it's liquid-tight. Two pins or hooks are fixed to one of the crosspieces to hold the end of the film in place. If the wheel is the right size, the same pins can be used to secure the other end of the film.

The Entire Length of Film is Placed on the Wheel Where It is Run through the Developer
The whole length of film is put on the wheel where it goes through the developer.
The film is first attached to the wheel; then, while turning slowly, the developer is poured into the tray. Keep on turning the wheel until full development is obtained, then pour out the liquid and turn in fresh, clear [237] water, and turn the wheel to wash out the developer. Remove the film and place it in the hypo bath.—Contributed by Raymond M. Bealer, Baltimore, Md.
The film is first placed on the wheel; then, while it turns slowly, pour the developer into the tray. Continue turning the wheel until the development is complete, then pour out the liquid and replace it with fresh, clear [237] water, and turn the wheel to rinse out the developer. Take the film out and put it in the hypo bath.—Contributed by Raymond M. Bealer, Baltimore, Md.
A Stove-Wood Carrier
A handy wood carrier, for bringing wood and kindling from the basement or yard to the wood box in the house, may be made from a grain sack, as shown in the sketch. Use a complete sack and make rope handles at each end. When used, place only sufficient wood or kindling in it to permit the handles to come together over the top of the load. This will make a comfortable grip and it is no harder to carry than a medium-weight suitcase. When the wood is removed the carrier can be taken to the back yard and shaken out, thus doing away with the dirt that usually results from other methods of filling wood boxes.—Contributed by Walter Nelson Kidston, Seattle, Wash.
A useful wood carrier for transporting wood and kindling from the basement or yard to the wood box inside the house can be made from a grain sack, as illustrated in the sketch. Use a full sack and create rope handles at each end. When you use it, only put in enough wood or kindling so that the handles can come together over the top of the load. This makes for a comfortable grip, and it's just as easy to carry as a medium-weight suitcase. Once the wood has been removed, the carrier can be taken to the backyard and shaken out, eliminating the dirt that typically comes from other ways of filling wood boxes. —Contributed by Walter Nelson Kidston, Seattle, Wash.

The Ropes at the Ends of the Sack Make a Handle to Carry It Like a Grip
The ropes at the ends of the sack create a handle to carry it like a bag.
A Pencil Sharpener
A pencil sharpened with the device shown will have a better point and one that will not break easily while being sharpened. The lower arm A is made from a strip of sheet steel, 1/16 in. thick. An extension, 1/4 in. wide, is cut and bent in a circle to form the lower finger hold. The upper arm B forms the cutter, which is made from a piece of hacksaw blade. The teeth are ground off and the temper is drawn from the extension that forms the upper circle. A portion of the arm A is bent over, as shown at C, to form a support for the pencil point to rest upon. A hole, large enough for a pencil to turn in, is bored through a stick of hardwood, D, and tapered so that the center of the hole meets the inner edge of C. It is fastened to the lower arm with screws. A sharp cutting edge is ground on the blade which is then attached to the arm A with a rivet loosely enough to swing freely.—Contributed by J. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
A pencil sharpened with the device shown will have a better point that won’t break easily while being sharpened. The lower arm A is made from a strip of sheet steel, 1/16 in. thick. An extension, 1/4 in. wide, is cut and bent in a circle to create the lower finger hold. The upper arm B acts as the cutter, made from a piece of hacksaw blade. The teeth are ground off, and the temper is removed from the extension that forms the upper circle. A part of arm A is bent over, as shown at C, to create a support for the pencil point to rest on. A hole, large enough for a pencil to turn in, is drilled through a stick of hardwood, D, and tapered so that the center of the hole meets the inner edge of C. It’s secured to the lower arm with screws. A sharp cutting edge is ground on the blade, which is then attached to arm A with a rivet loose enough to swing freely.—Contributed by J. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.

A Pencil Sharpener That will Make a Point without Breaking the Lead
A Pencil Sharpener That Will Make a Point Without Breaking the Lead
Cleaning an Oilstone
Use kerosene oil and a sprinkling of emery flour and proceed to sharpen tools. It is not necessary to clean a stone thus treated before placing the tool on it, as the emery and kerosene will make a good surface on the stone as well as assisting in producing a sharp edge on the tool.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Use kerosene oil and a sprinkle of emery flour to sharpen tools. There's no need to clean a stone treated this way before putting the tool on it, as the emery and kerosene will create a good surface on the stone and help produce a sharp edge on the tool.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Landing for Small Boats
Not having a landing for my small boat, I made a series of sectional platforms, rising 2 ft. above the bottom, which served the purpose well and were inexpensive. Each section is about 15 ft. long, 3 ft. wide, and 2 ft. high. The frame is made of material 2 in. thick and 4 in. wide, and on top is a floor made of boards, while the bottom consists of 2 by 4-in. crosspieces, nailed on 6 in. apart. Stones are laid on these crosspieces to moor it down in place. The whole landing is simple to make and it lasts a long time, as the sections can be drawn out and stored during the winter.—Contributed by Henry Briggs, Lexington, Massachusetts.
Not having a dock for my small boat, I built a series of platforms that rise 2 feet above the bottom. They work really well and were inexpensive. Each section is about 15 feet long, 3 feet wide, and 2 feet high. The frame is made of material that is 2 inches thick and 4 inches wide, and on top, there's a floor made of boards, while the bottom has 2 by 4-inch crosspieces nailed 6 inches apart. Stones are placed on these crosspieces to hold them in place. The entire landing is easy to make and lasts a long time, as the sections can be pulled out and stored during the winter. —Contributed by Henry Briggs, Lexington, Massachusetts.

The Series of Platforms Make a Good Small-Boat Landing on a Slanting Beach
The Series of Platforms Make a Good Small-Boat Landing on a Slanting Beach
Bearings for Model Work
For experimental work I use hangers or bearings made of sheet brass or copper, bent at right angles for strength and capped with a box. The main part of the bearing A is shaped as shown, and the box B consists of a small piece cut from a brass rod and drilled for the size of the shaft. The box is soldered to the top end of A and the base C to the bottom end. When a large metal base is used for a certain model, the part A is attached directly to that base and the part C need not be used.
For experimental work, I use hangers or bearings made of sheet brass or copper, bent at right angles for strength and capped with a box. The main part of the bearing A is shaped as shown, and the box B is a small piece cut from a brass rod and drilled to fit the size of the shaft. The box is soldered to the top end of A, and the base C is attached to the bottom end. When a large metal base is used for a specific model, part A is connected directly to that base, and part C is not needed.

Sheet-Copper Support with a Base and a Shaft Bearing Soldered to the Ends
Sheet copper support with a base and a shaft bearing soldered to the ends.
The bearings can be made in different heights, each of which will demand a corresponding size and thickness of the parts. Sheet brass or copper, 1/32 in. thick, is about right for a bearing 3 in. high.—Contributed by W. E. Day, Pittsfield, Mass.
The bearings can be made in different heights, and each height will require a specific size and thickness of the parts. Sheet brass or copper, 1/32 in. thick, works well for a bearing that's 3 in. high.—Contributed by W. E. Day, Pittsfield, Mass.
Holding the Tongue of a Shoe in Place
The tongue in a shoe will often slip down or over to one side or the other and expose the hose. To overcome this and have the tongue fit snugly in the right place, fasten a common lace clasp or hook near the top of the tongue, as shown in the illustration, so that in lacing the shoe the laces are passed under the hook to hold the tongue in place.
The tongue of a shoe often slips down or to one side, making the sock visible. To fix this and keep the tongue snug in the right spot, attach a regular lace clasp or hook near the top of the tongue, as shown in the illustration. This way, when you lace the shoe, the laces go under the hook to keep the tongue in place.

The Hook on the Tongue of the Shoe and Manner of Lacing to Hold the Tongue
The Hook on the Tongue of the Shoe and How to Lace It to Keep the Tongue in Place
A Photo Vignetter
Procure a piece of heavy wire, one that is fairly stiff, says Camera Craft, and a pair of pliers and bend the wire with the pliers as shown in the illustration. After the loop is made to fit around the lens barrel the wire is bent at right angles at a point 6 in. below the circle. At a distance of 8 in. on the extending part of the wire it is bent as shown to form a clip for holding a sheet of cardboard.
Get a piece of heavy wire that's pretty stiff, according to Camera Craft, and grab a pair of pliers. Bend the wire with the pliers as shown in the illustration. Once you've made the loop to fit around the lens barrel, bend the wire at right angles about 6 inches below the circle. Then, 8 inches along the extending part of the wire, bend it to create a clip that will hold a piece of cardboard.

The Arm for Holding the Vignette Cardboard is Made of a Heavy Piece of Wire
The arm for holding the vignette cardboard is made of a thick piece of wire.
The cardboard should be about 7 in. wide and of dark color, with one edge cut semicircular and notched. The size of the wire and the other measurements will depend upon the size and focal length of the lens. If a heavy vignetting card is required, it may be necessary to make the portion that encircles the lens double in length, bending it back upon itself to secure a firmer hold. This is a cheap and efficient vignetter that anyone can make in a few moments of spare time.
The cardboard should be around 7 inches wide and dark in color, with one edge cut in a semicircle and notched. The size of the wire and other measurements will vary based on the size and focal length of the lens. If a heavier vignetting card is needed, you might need to make the part that goes around the lens twice as long, folding it back on itself for a better grip. This is an affordable and effective vignetter that anyone can create in just a few moments of free time.
Pocket for the Inside of a Book Cover
Students or anyone wishing to retain notes on a subject will find it quite handy to have a large envelope pasted in the back of each textbook. Instead of having notes all through the book, they can be arranged in order and slipped into the envelope. If the book is accidentally dropped, the notes will not be lost.—Contributed by Harold Mynning, Chicago, Ill.
Students or anyone wanting to keep notes on a subject will find it very useful to have a large envelope glued in the back of each textbook. Instead of having notes all over the book, they can be organized and placed into the envelope. If the book is accidentally dropped, the notes won't get lost.—Contributed by Harold Mynning, Chicago, Ill.
Cleaning Steel of Grease and Stains
Grease and stains can be easily removed from steel with a mixture of unslaked lime and chalk powder, by rubbing it on the steel with a dry cloth. The best proportion for the mixture, which is easily prepared, is 1 part of lime to 1 part of chalk powder. The powder should be used dry. It is kept in cans for future use and can be used over and over again.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Grease and stains can be easily removed from steel with a mix of unslaked lime and chalk powder by rubbing it on the steel with a dry cloth. The best ratio for the mixture, which is simple to prepare, is 1 part lime to 1 part chalk powder. The powder should be used dry. It can be stored in cans for future use and can be reused multiple times. —Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
An Electrically Ignited Flash Light for Making Photographs
The results obtained in a great many cases in trying to take pictures by flash-light are exceedingly unsatisfactory, as the expression on the faces of the people in the picture usually is strained or unnatural, due to the suspense in waiting for the flash. The following simple device avoids this difficulty because the flash is set off by means of electricity, so that the operator can control the flash from a distant point and thus be able to take the picture quite unawares to his subjects.
The results from taking pictures with a flash light are often very disappointing because the expressions on people's faces usually look tense or unnatural from waiting for the flash. The following simple device solves this problem since the flash is triggered by electricity, allowing the photographer to control it from a distance and take the picture without the subjects being aware.
The construction of the device is as follows: Obtain a piece of rather heavy sheet iron, about 6 in. wide and 10 in. long. Bend this piece of iron into the form shown in the sketch, and fasten a wooden handle to it with a wood screw. Obtain a sheet of 1/8-in. sheet asbestos, the same size as the piece of sheet iron, and glue it to the inside surface of the curved piece of iron. It is best to fasten the four corners down by means of some small rivets with rather large washers under the heads next to the asbestos.
The construction of the device is as follows: Get a piece of heavy sheet iron, about 6 inches wide and 10 inches long. Bend this piece of iron into the shape shown in the sketch, and attach a wooden handle to it with a wood screw. Get a sheet of 1/8-inch sheet asbestos, the same size as the piece of sheet iron, and glue it to the inside surface of the curved piece of iron. It's best to secure the four corners using some small rivets with relatively large washers under the heads next to the asbestos.
Now mount two pieces of sheet copper, 1/2 in. wide and 6 in. long, parallel with each other on the surface of the asbestos and 1-1/2 in. apart, so that their ends are even with the end of the piece of asbestos. These pieces of copper should be insulated from the piece of sheet iron, and there should be a small screw in one end of each and a small binding post mounted on the other end.
Now attach two strips of copper, 1/2 inch wide and 6 inches long, parallel to each other on the surface of the asbestos, 1-1/2 inches apart, so that their ends are even with the end of the asbestos piece. These copper strips should be insulated from the sheet iron, and there should be a small screw at one end of each and a small binding post mounted at the other end.

The Asbestos-Lined Tray and the Wiring Connections for Attaching to the Electric-Light Wires
The Asbestos-Lined Tray and the Wiring Connections for Attaching to the Electric-Light Wires
Procure a piece of lamp cord, 15 or 20 ft. in length. Fasten an ordinary plug to one end of this cord and the other end to the two binding posts. Open one of the conductors in the cord at some point and introduce a single-pole switch, as shown in the sketch. Close the gap between the two pieces of copper by means of a piece of No. 32 gauge copper wire. Place the flash-light powder in position, but do not cover up the wire or have it in actual contact with the powder, and close the circuit. The operator may include himself in the picture by having a sufficiently long piece of lamp cord and the switch properly arranged.
Get a piece of lamp cord that’s 15 or 20 feet long. Attach a regular plug to one end of the cord and connect the other end to the two binding posts. Strip one of the wires in the cord at some point and add a single-pole switch, as shown in the diagram. Connect the two pieces of copper with a piece of No. 32 gauge copper wire. Position the flashlight powder, but make sure not to cover the wire or let it touch the powder, then close the circuit. The operator can be included in the picture by using a long enough piece of lamp cord and having the switch set up correctly.
A Simple Twine-Ball Holder

In looking for a place to put a twine ball I happened to see a tin funnel and it gave me the idea which I put into practice. I punched three holes at equal distances apart in its upper edge and attached three strings which were run to an apex and tied to a screweye in the ceiling. The end of the twine from the center of the ball was run through the funnel stem and allowed to hang as in an ordinary ball holder.—Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
While searching for a place to store a twine ball, I came across a tin funnel, which sparked an idea I decided to try out. I created three holes, evenly spaced, in the top edge and attached three strings that led to a point, tying them to a screw eye in the ceiling. The end of the twine from the center of the ball went through the funnel's stem and was left to hang like a typical ball holder. —Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
A filler for birch, red gum and beech can be made of 1 lb. of bleached shellac to each gallon of water.
A filler for birch, red gum, and beech can be made with 1 lb. of bleached shellac for each gallon of water.
A Toy Popgun
A toy popgun can be easily made of two blocks of hard wood, 1/2 in. thick; a joint of bamboo, about 7/8 in. in diameter and 6 in. long; a small hinge, a piece of spring steel, 1/2 in. wide and 1 in. long, and a piece of soft wood for the plunger.
A toy popgun can be easily made from two blocks of hard wood, 1/2 inch thick; a joint of bamboo, about 7/8 inch in diameter and 6 inches long; a small hinge; a piece of spring steel, 1/2 inch wide and 1 inch long; and a piece of soft wood for the plunger.
The plunger A is cut to fit snugly, yet so it will move easily in the piece of bamboo B. One of the blocks of hard wood, C, is bored to fit one end of the bamboo, the other block has a 1/4-in. hole bored, to center the hole in the first block. The two blocks are hinged and the spring latch attached as shown in the sketch. The spring has a hole drilled so it can be fastened with a screw to the outer block, and a slot cut in the other end to slip over a staple driven into the block C.
The plunger A is shaped to fit tightly, but it should still move easily within the bamboo piece B. One of the hard wood blocks, C, is drilled to fit one end of the bamboo, while the other block has a 1/4-inch hole drilled to align with the hole in the first block. The two blocks are hinged, and the spring latch is attached as shown in the sketch. The spring has a hole drilled so it can be secured with a screw to the outer block, and a slot is cut at the other end to slide over a staple driven into block C.

Detail of Popgun, Showing the Parts Assembled and Position of the Paper
Detail of Popgun, Showing the Assembled Parts and Position of the Paper
A piece of paper, D, is placed in between the blocks while the plunger A is out at the end of the bamboo. A quick pressure on the plunger A will cause the paper D to break out through the small opening with a loud pop.—Contributed by Paul H. Burkhart, Blue Island, Ill.
A piece of paper, D, is positioned between the blocks while the plunger A is extended out at the end of the bamboo. A quick push on the plunger A will cause the paper D to burst through the small opening with a loud pop.—Contributed by Paul H. Burkhart, Blue Island, Ill.
A Non-Rolling Thread Spool

A spool of thread may be kept from rolling by gluing squares of cardboard to the ends. The squares should be a little larger than the spool. This will save many a step and much bending over to pick up the spool. The spool, when it falls, will stop where it landed.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
A spool of thread can be prevented from rolling by gluing squares of cardboard to the ends. The squares should be slightly larger than the spool. This will save you a lot of steps and reduce the need to bend over to pick up the spool. When the spool falls, it will stop where it lands.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
Shoe-Shining Stand
To anyone who finds it tiresome to shine his shoes while putting the foot on the rim of a bathtub, on a cook-stove or chair with a newspaper on it, the stand here described will afford relief and at the same time he will always have the shining outfit ready for use.
To anyone who thinks it’s a hassle to shine their shoes while balancing a foot on the edge of a bathtub, a stove, or a chair with a newspaper on it, the stand described here will provide relief, and they’ll always have the shoe-shining kit ready to use.

Dimensioned Parts and Completed Stand Which has a Box to Hold the Shining Outfit
Dimensioned Parts and Completed Stand That Has a Box to Hold the Shiny Outfit
The whole is of pine, the foot rest being made of a piece 2 by 4 in.; the legs, of 1 by 2 in., and the bottom of the box, of 1/2 by 4-1/4 in. All other dimensions are given in the sketch. After the legs are attached and the bottom of the box in place, the sides are fitted and fastened with nails.—Contributed by Samuel Hughs, Berkeley, Cal.
The entire thing is made of pine, with the footrest made from a 2 by 4 inch piece; the legs are from 1 by 2 inch pieces, and the bottom of the box is from a 1/2 by 4-1/4 inch piece. All other dimensions are shown in the sketch. Once the legs are attached and the bottom of the box is secured, the sides are fitted and nailed in place.—Contributed by Samuel Hughs, Berkeley, Cal.
Cutter Made of a Wafer Razor Blade
A useful instrument for seamstresses and makers of paper patterns and stencils can be made of a piece of steel or iron and a wafer razor blade. The end of the metal is flattened and two holes drilled to match the holes of the razor blade. Small screw bolts are used to attach the blade to the handle. Place a cork on one edge as a protection for the hand of the user.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
A handy tool for seamstresses and creators of paper patterns and stencils can be made from a piece of steel or iron and a thin razor blade. The end of the metal is flattened, and two holes are drilled to fit the holes of the razor blade. Small screws are used to secure the blade to the handle. Add a cork to one edge to protect the user's hand. —Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.

The Wafer Blade Attached to the Handle, the Top Edge being Protected with a Cork
The wafer blade is attached to the handle, with the top edge protected by a cork.
To Hold a Negative in a Printing Frame
When printing postal cards and working fast, it always bothered me to hold the negative in the printing frame while removing the card. To overcome this trouble I decided to contrive some arrangement to hold the negative in the frame when the back was removed. The device I made consists of a thin, flat spring, about 1/8 in. wide and as long as the width of the frame opening. Two lugs are formed and soldered to the ends, as shown in Fig. 1, for holding the plate, and a central lug is soldered on to provide a means of fastening the spring in position. A groove, about 1/16 in. deep, was cut in the opposite end of the frame to receive one end of the negative.
When printing postcards and working quickly, it always annoyed me to hold the negative in the printing frame while taking out the card. To solve this problem, I decided to create a setup that would keep the negative in the frame when the back was removed. The device I made is made of a thin, flat spring, about 1/8 in. wide and the same length as the width of the frame opening. Two lugs are shaped and soldered to the ends, as shown in Fig. 1, to hold the plate, and a central lug is soldered on to secure the spring in place. A groove, about 1/16 in. deep, was cut into the opposite end of the frame to hold one end of the negative.

The Spring with Its Clips and Manner of Holding a Negative in a Printing Frame (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The Spring with Its Clips and How to Hold a Negative in a Printing Frame (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
In use, slide the plate into the frame and into the lugs on the spring, and push the spring upward until the plate can be slipped into the slot at the opposite end of the frame. The pressure of the spring, as shown in Fig. 2, will hold the plate securely. The frame can be handled quite roughly and as fast as desired without any danger of the plate falling out.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Montana.
In use, slide the plate into the frame and into the lugs on the spring, then push the spring upward until the plate can be slipped into the slot at the opposite end of the frame. The pressure from the spring, as shown in Fig. 2, will hold the plate securely. You can handle the frame pretty roughly and as quickly as you want without worrying about the plate falling out.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Montana.
A number of bright tin disks tied to the limbs of a fruit tree will prove an efficient means of driving away infesting birds.
A bunch of shiny tin disks attached to the branches of a fruit tree will be an effective way to scare away pesky birds.
How to Make an Electrolytic Interrupter

Obtain a glass jar or wide-mouth bottle about one-quart size. An ordinary round bottle will serve very nicely by having the top cut off, thus forming a glass jar. Make a top for the jar from a piece of 1/2-in. pine similar to the one shown in the illustration. The lower portion extends down inside the jar and serves to hold the top in place. Cut a slot in this top, 1/8 in. wide and 2 in. long. This slot should be cut at right angles to a diameter of the top and extend 1 in. on either side of the diameter. It should be about 1/2 in. from the center of the top. Directly opposite the center of the slot drill a 3/8-in hole, 1/2 in. from the center of the top. Drill a 1/4-in. hole in the center of the top to give ventilation to the jar. Boil the completed top in paraffin for a few minutes.
Get a glass jar or a wide-mouth bottle that's about one quart in size. A regular round bottle works well if you cut off the top to create a glass jar. Make a lid for the jar out of a piece of 1/2-inch pine wood, similar to the one shown in the illustration. The lower part should extend down into the jar to hold the lid in place. Cut a slot in this lid that’s 1/8 inch wide and 2 inches long. This slot should be perpendicular to a diameter of the lid and extend 1 inch on either side of the diameter. It should be about 1/2 inch from the center of the lid. Directly opposite the center of the slot, drill a 3/8-inch hole that's 1/2 inch from the center of the lid. Also, drill a 1/4-inch hole in the center of the lid to allow for ventilation. Boil the finished lid in paraffin for a few minutes.
Obtain a piece of 1/8-in. sheet lead, 2 in. wide and about 1/2 in. longer than the depth of the jar. Mount a small binding post on one end of this piece of lead and then support it in the slot in the wooden top by means of two metal pins. The lower end of the piece of lead should be at least 1/2 in. from the bottom of the jar. Next get a piece of 3/8-in. glass tube and fuse a piece of platinum wire into one end. [242] Make sure the inside end of the platinum wire is not covered with the glass, and that the outside end protrudes a short distance beyond the end of the glass tube. Now bend about 3/4 in. of the end of the glass tube which has the platinum in it over at right angles to the remainder of the tube. The tube should then be placed in the opening on the wooden top provided for it and a rubber band placed around it to prevent it dropping through the opening. The lower end of the tube should be a little higher than the lower end of the sheet of lead. A small quantity of mercury should be placed in the tube and a bare copper wire run down inside. The mercury affords a connection between the piece of platinum in the end of the tube and the copper wire. Connect the outside end of the copper wire under a binding post and the interrupter is complete with the exception of the solution.
Get a piece of 1/8-inch sheet lead, 2 inches wide and about 1/2 inch longer than the depth of the jar. Attach a small binding post to one end of this lead piece and support it in the slot of the wooden top using two metal pins. The lower end of the lead should be at least 1/2 inch above the bottom of the jar. Next, take a piece of 3/8-inch glass tube and fuse a piece of platinum wire into one end. [242] Ensure that the inside end of the platinum wire is not covered by the glass and that the outside end sticks out a little beyond the end of the glass tube. Now bend about 3/4 inch of the end of the glass tube with the platinum in it at a right angle to the rest of the tube. Place the tube into the opening on the wooden top designed for it and use a rubber band around it to keep it from falling through the opening. The lower end of the tube should be slightly higher than the lower end of the lead sheet. Add a small amount of mercury into the tube and insert a bare copper wire down inside. The mercury provides a connection between the platinum piece at the end of the tube and the copper wire. Connect the outside end of the copper wire under a binding post, and the interrupter is complete except for the solution.
The solution for the interrupter is dilute sulphuric acid made by mixing about four parts of water and one part of acid. In preparing this mixture, be sure to pour the acid into the water, not the water into the acid. The jar should be about two-thirds filled. At least 40 volts will be required for the satisfactory operation of the interrupter. The distance between the platinum point and the lead sheet may be adjusted by simply turning the glass tube.
The solution for the interrupter is diluted sulfuric acid made by mixing about four parts of water and one part of acid. When preparing this mixture, make sure to pour the acid into the water, not the water into the acid. The jar should be filled about two-thirds full. At least 40 volts will be needed for the interrupter to work properly. You can adjust the distance between the platinum point and the lead sheet by simply twisting the glass tube.
No condenser will be required in operating an inductor coil with an interrupter of this kind. The make-and-break interrupter, if there is one in circuit, should of course be made inoperative by screwing up the contact point against the spring.
No condenser will be needed when operating an inductor coil with this type of interrupter. If there's a make-and-break interrupter in the circuit, it should definitely be disabled by tightening the contact point against the spring.
A Homemade Hand Drill Press
The little use I had for a drill press did not make it advisable to purchase one, so I constructed a device for drilling iron and brass which answered all purposes. A broken carpenter's brace furnished the chuck, which was fastened to a 1/2-in. shaft having a detachable crank. The shaft turns in a brass tube which is fitted tightly in a hole bored in the upright. The sliding part or table is forced up against the drill with a 1/2-in. machine bolt. The bolt turns in a square nut fastened in the opposite post. The end of the screw bears on a plate fastened on the under side of the table to prevent wear. A crank could be attached to this bolt so that it may be turned more easily.
The little need I had for a drill press didn’t justify buying one, so I made a device for drilling iron and brass that met all my needs. A broken carpenter’s brace provided the chuck, which was attached to a 1/2-inch shaft with a detachable crank. The shaft spins inside a brass tube that fits snugly into a hole drilled in the upright. The sliding part or table is pushed up against the drill with a 1/2-inch machine bolt. The bolt turns in a square nut attached to the opposite post. The end of the screw presses against a plate fixed to the underside of the table to prevent wear. A crank can be attached to this bolt so it can be turned more easily.

A Very Inexpensive Drill Press Frame Which Answers the Purpose Admirably
A Very Affordable Drill Press Frame That Works Great
The sliding or table part is made of a post similar to the end posts, but with guides attached so as to keep it in place. The holes for the chuck shaft and bolt should be bored on a line and exactly in the center of the posts.—Contributed by L. R. Kelley, Philadelphia, Pa.
The sliding or table part is made of a post similar to the end posts, but with guides attached to keep it in place. The holes for the chuck shaft and bolt should be drilled in a straight line and exactly in the center of the posts.—Contributed by L. R. Kelley, Philadelphia, Pa.
A Hose Nozzle
The nozzle shown in the accompanying sketch was made from an empty tobacco can having an oval shape. I cut the can in two near the center and punched small holes in the bottom. I then cut a piece of 1/2-in. board to fit tightly in the end of the can and turned the edges of the tin down to hold it in place. A hole was bored in the center of the wood and a 1/2-in. hose coupling fitted in it. The water will swell the wood enough to make an absolutely watertight joint, but by using a [243] little care in fitting it, the joint will be watertight without the swelling.
The nozzle in the sketch was made from an empty tobacco can with an oval shape. I cut the can in half near the center and punched small holes in the bottom. Then, I cut a piece of 1/2-inch board to fit tightly in the end of the can and folded the edges of the tin down to hold it in place. I bored a hole in the center of the wood and fitted in a 1/2-inch hose coupling. The water will expand the wood enough to create an absolutely watertight seal, but with a little care in fitting it, the joint will be watertight without the swelling. [243]

The Oval Form of the Box Makes It Possible to Sprinkle Close Up to Walks
The oval shape of the box allows for easy sprinkling right up to the pathways.
The holes being punched in straight lines, the nozzle throws a rectangular section of fine streams, which makes it possible to sprinkle close up to walks without wetting them. The friction is much less than in the ordinary hose nozzle, and consequently this nozzle delivers more water and also materially reduces the strain on the hose.—Contributed by J. B. Downer, Seattle, Washington.
The holes are punched in straight lines, allowing the nozzle to produce a rectangular section of fine streams. This makes it easy to sprinkle close to paths without getting them wet. The friction is much lower than in a regular hose nozzle, so this nozzle delivers more water and significantly reduces the strain on the hose.—Contributed by J. B. Downer, Seattle, Washington.
An Electric Water Heater
A simple electric water heater may be made as follows: Procure two sheets of copper, each 4 by 6 in., and place pieces of wood or other insulating material at the corners to keep them about 3/4 in. apart. Bind them with cords, or, if the wood pieces are large enough, use screws so that there will be no contact between the plates. Attach wires to the plates with solder as shown, and make connections to a plug. Pour water in an earthenware jar, place the plates in it and turn the plug in a lamp socket. Do not use a metal vessel.—Contributed by G. Henry Jones, Sylacauga, Ala.
A simple electric water heater can be made like this: Get two sheets of copper, each measuring 4 by 6 inches, and place pieces of wood or another insulating material at the corners to keep them about 3/4 inch apart. Tie them together with cords, or if the wooden pieces are big enough, use screws to ensure that there is no contact between the plates. Solder wires to the plates as shown, and connect them to a plug. Fill an earthenware jar with water, place the plates inside it, and plug it into a lamp socket. Do not use a metal container. —Contributed by G. Henry Jones, Sylacauga, Ala.

An Inexpensive Electric Water Heater Made of Two Copper Plates
An Affordable Electric Water Heater Made of Two Copper Plates
Frosting Glass
Procure a piece of flat iron similar to an iron hoop, bend it, as shown in the sketch, to make a piece 3 in. long and 1-1/4 in. wide and file one edge smooth. Sprinkle some fine lake sand over the glass, dampen the sand and rub the smooth edge of the iron band over the glass. It requires only a short time of rubbing to produce a beautiful frosted surface on the glass.—Contributed by M. E. Duggan, Kenosha, Wis.
Get a piece of flat iron that looks like an iron hoop, bend it as shown in the sketch to create a piece that is 3 inches long and 1-1/4 inches wide, and file one edge smooth. Sprinkle some fine lake sand over the glass, moisten the sand, and rub the smooth edge of the iron band over the glass. It only takes a short time of rubbing to create a beautiful frosted surface on the glass.—Contributed by M. E. Duggan, Kenosha, Wis.

The Filed Edge on the Coiled Metal Retains the Sand Particles as It is Rubbed over the Glass Surface
The filed edge on the coiled metal holds onto the sand particles as it is rubbed against the glass surface.
Long Handle for a Dustpan

The dustpan is a rather unhandy utensil to use, especially for stout persons. One porter overcame this difficulty by attaching a long handle to the pan as shown in the illustration. The handle was taken from a discarded broom and a yoke of heavy wire was attached to it, the ends being bent to enter holes punched in the upturned edge of the pan. A stout cord, fastened to the handle and tied into the ring of the dustpan handle, keeps the pan from turning backward, and it is thus possible to push it or carry it with the long handle.
The dustpan is a pretty awkward tool to use, especially for larger people. One porter solved this issue by attaching a long handle to the pan, as shown in the illustration. The handle was taken from an old broom, and a sturdy piece of wire was used to connect it, with the ends bent to fit into holes punched in the raised edge of the pan. A strong cord, tied to the handle and connected to the ring of the dustpan handle, prevents the pan from tipping backward, making it easier to push or carry with the long handle.
To Fasten Chair Legs
Chair legs often become loose when chairs are handled roughly, so that the glue is broken up. A small device made from a piece of pointed metal, A, which is securely fastened to the end of the chair leg by means of a screw, will hold the legs more firmly than wire or glue. When the leg is driven into the hole, the points are pushed into the wood B as the metal flattens.
Chair legs often get loose when chairs are handled roughly, causing the glue to break apart. A small device made from a piece of pointed metal, A, which is securely attached to the end of the chair leg with a screw, will hold the legs more firmly than wire or glue. When the leg is driven into the hole, the points are pushed into the wood B as the metal flattens.

The Metal on the End of the Leg Fastens It Solidly in Place
The metal at the end of the leg secures it firmly in position.
Disk-Throwing Pistol
A pistol for throwing small disks of paper or metal balls, can be easily made at almost no expense as shown in the sketch. Two pieces of board, one of which is shaped to the form of a pistol, are hinged together and a fairly strong spiral spring is fastened at the front end of the movable piece and the middle of the other. A slot is sawed in the movable piece to hold the disk, or a small round depression may be formed in it to receive a bean, pea, or shot. The movable arm is folded back and held in position by means of a stirrup of wire fastened on the other part. When the movable part is disengaged by pulling the stirrup away with the finger, the disk will be thrown with considerable force, depending on the strength of the spring.
A simple device for launching small disks made of paper or metal balls can be constructed at little cost, as illustrated in the sketch. Two pieces of wood, one shaped like a pistol, are hinged together, and a fairly strong spiral spring is attached to the front end of the movable piece and the center of the other piece. A slot is cut into the movable piece to hold the disk, or a small round indent can be made to accommodate a bean, pea, or pellet. The movable arm is pulled back and held in place by a wire stirrup attached to the other part. When the movable part is released by pulling the stirrup away with your finger, the disk will be launched with significant force, depending on the strength of the spring.

Disks of Paper or Metal as Well as Shot may be Thrown with This Pistol
Disks made of paper or metal, as well as shot, can be fired with this pistol.
Displaying Dye Colors
A certain druggist utilized old electric bulbs for displaying dye colors. Water was colored with a dye and the end of a bulb dipped into the liquid. Then the tip end was broken off, and the bulb being a vacuum, the colored water was drawn into it, and filled the globe. The point was then sealed with paraffin.
A local pharmacist used old light bulbs to show off dye colors. He would dye water and dip the end of a bulb into it. Then, he broke off the tip, and since the bulb was a vacuum, the colored water got sucked in and filled the globe. The opening was then sealed with paraffin.

Globes Filled with Colored Water, Representing the Different Colors of Dyes Carried in Stock
Globes Filled with Colored Water, Representing the Different Colors of Dyes Available in Stock
A ring-shaped piece, 15 in. in diameter and 2-1/2 in. wide, was cut from a piece of board, and 1-in. holes bored, 2-1/2 in. apart, in one-half of the ring, The globes holding the colored water were set in these holes and a light with a round shade placed in the center. It proved to be an attractive display and a good method of showing the colors.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
A ring-shaped piece, 15 inches in diameter and 2.5 inches wide, was cut from a piece of board, and 1-inch holes bored, 2.5 inches apart, in one half of the ring. The globes holding the colored water were set in these holes, and a light with a round shade was placed in the center. It turned out to be an attractive display and a great way to show the colors. —Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
A Homemade Bench Vise
A serviceable and inexpensive bench vise can be made in the following manner: Procure a piece of hard wood, 1 in. thick, and shape it into an eccentric with an extending handle, as shown at A. The jaws B are made of material 2 in. thick, and the drawbar C is a 2 by 3-in. piece of hickory. The outer end of the bar is slotted to receive the eccentric handle, through which a bolt, D, passes to form a bearing. Holes are bored into the opposite end of the bar, 2 in. apart, into which a peg is inserted to come against the back side of the rear jaw. This provides an adjustment for a range of various thicknesses of material. Another bar is located at the bottom of the jaws to provide a means of keeping the jaws parallel. This bar is made in a similar manner to the bar C. The rear jaw can be fastened to the side of a bench, post, or any support that may be handy.—Contributed by Wm. S. Thompson, Columbia, Tenn.
A practical and affordable bench vise can be made like this: Get a piece of hardwood that is 1 inch thick and carve it into an eccentric shape with a handle that extends, as shown at A. The jaws B should be made from material that is 2 inches thick, and the drawbar C is a piece of hickory that measures 2 by 3 inches. The outer end of the bar has a slot to fit the eccentric handle, through which a bolt, D, passes to create a pivot. Holes are drilled into the opposite end of the bar, spaced 2 inches apart, where a peg is inserted to press against the back side of the rear jaw. This allows for adjustments to accommodate various material thicknesses. Another bar is placed at the bottom of the jaws to keep them parallel. This bar is made similarly to bar C. The rear jaw can be attached to the side of a bench, post, or any convenient support. —Contributed by Wm. S. Thompson, Columbia, Tenn.

A Vise That can be Quickly Constructed Where No Bench Vise is at Hand
A Vise That Can Be Quickly Built When There's No Bench Vise Available
Timing Photo Printing
Having hundreds of postals of a single subject to print, I made a perfect timing apparatus for exposing the prints from an old metronome and an old gong magnet. A disk, B, 20 in. in diameter, was made of heavy tin with two apertures, C C, each cut 7 in. in diameter, on a line with the center of the disk, and 2 in. from the edge. A large spool, F, was used to serve as a hub and also as a reel on which strong twine was wound, with a weight, E, attached to the free end.
Having hundreds of postcards of a single subject to print, I created a perfect timing device for exposing the prints using an old metronome and a gong magnet. I made a disk, B, that was 20 inches in diameter out of heavy tin, with two openings, C C, each cut to 7 inches in diameter, aligned with the center of the disk and 2 inches from the edge. A large spool, F, was used as a hub and also as a reel on which strong twine was wound, with a weight, E, attached to the free end.
The disk was bolted to the partition P of the darkroom, the partition having a hole, G, to coincide with the holes in the disk as it revolved. Four catch pins were fastened on the rim of the disk to engage a catch pin on the armature of the magnet. The gong and commutator were removed and the magnet placed in the position shown in the sketch. A strip of wood was fastened across the face of the metronome H, about 1 in. above the pendulum shaft or axle. On the inside of the center of the strip a small piece of wood was projected, with copper wire on one side only, to form a contact with a piece of flexible copper on the pendulum. Wiring was made as shown in the sketch and a switch used to stop the disk from revolving.
The disk was attached to the wall P of the darkroom, with a hole G aligned with the holes in the disk as it turned. Four catch pins were secured to the edge of the disk to interact with a catch pin on the magnet's armature. The gong and commutator were taken off, and the magnet was positioned as shown in the sketch. A wooden strip was mounted across the front of the metronome H, about 1 inch above the pendulum shaft or axle. A small piece of wood was extended from the center of the strip, with copper wire on only one side, to make contact with a flexible copper piece on the pendulum. Wiring was done as illustrated in the sketch and a switch was used to stop the disk from turning.
An ordinary postal-card printing frame, D, with a hinged back was used and placed on the shelf A, as shown. A hinge was made from heavy elastic bands to allow for two dozen cards in the frame at one time. As each card was printed it was taken out and dropped into the developer. The reel and metronome should be wound up after printing two dozen cards. The stops can be varied for any length of time by regulating the weight on the metronome. The disk and all woodwork must be painted a dull black. The circuit is completed on the return stroke of the pendulum, causing the magnet to attract the armature, which releases the catch, allowing a quarter turn of the disk.—Contributed by Frank W. Preston, Paterson, N. J.
An ordinary postcard printing frame, D, with a hinged back was used and placed on shelf A, as shown. A hinge was made from heavy elastic bands to allow for two dozen cards in the frame at once. After each card was printed, it was taken out and dropped into the developer. The reel and metronome should be wound up after printing two dozen cards. The stops can be adjusted for any length of time by changing the weight on the metronome. The disk and all wooden parts must be painted a dull black. The circuit is completed on the return stroke of the pendulum, causing the magnet to attract the armature, which releases the catch, allowing a quarter turn of the disk.—Contributed by Frank W. Preston, Paterson, N. J.
Pail Hook for a Pitcher Pump

When pumping water from the ordinary pitcher pump, the bucket must either be held to the spout or placed on the ground. The accompanying sketch shows how I arranged a hook, fastened over the collar of the pump, to take the bail of the bucket. The hook is made of 1/4-in. round iron.—Contributed by Laurence B. Robbins, Harwich, Mass.
When using a standard pitcher pump to draw water, the bucket needs to be either held at the spout or set on the ground. The sketch provided illustrates how I set up a hook, attached over the collar of the pump, to support the bucket's handle. The hook is made from 1/4-inch round iron.—Contributed by Laurence B. Robbins, Harwich, Mass.
Shade Roller Attached to Upper Window Sash
Free circulation of air cannot be obtained through a window when the shade is attached to the window casing, as it partly fills the opening caused by lowering the upper sash. If the shade roller is attached to the top of the upper sash, the shade can perform its function without obstructing the opening when the sash is lowered. It only requires a shorter roller and a narrower shade. The roller brackets are attached in the usual manner, but, in order to have the shade hang vertically, a block, as wide as the lower sash frame, must be fastened under each bracket.
Free airflow can't be achieved through a window when the shade is fixed to the window frame, since it partially blocks the opening created by lowering the upper sash. If the shade roller is mounted at the top of the upper sash, the shade can do its job without blocking the opening when the sash is lowered. It just needs a shorter roller and a narrower shade. The roller brackets are attached as usual, but to ensure the shade hangs vertically, a block, as wide as the lower sash frame, needs to be secured under each bracket.

When the Upper Sash is Lowered the Shade is Out of the Way of the Opening
When the upper sash is lowered, the shade is out of the way of the opening.
This arrangement also makes it much easier to put up a curtain, as the sash can be let down until the roller can be reached while standing on a chair.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
This setup also makes it a lot easier to hang a curtain, since the sash can be lowered until you can reach the roller while standing on a chair.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Flashing Hook

Having occasion to do a large amount of counter-flashing in a new wall where the mortar was soft and the joint too large to use an ordinary nail or the regular flashing hook, I made hooks from No. 24 gauge galvanized iron, having hooks of extra size and strength, as shown in the sketch. The size of the hook is 1-3/4 by 3-1/8 in. On each side edge, 1-1/8 in. from one end, I cut teeth, A A, and clipped the corners of the opposite end at an angle. The end at B was turned down at right angles and the points A A bent in the opposite direction. I placed the counter-flashing in the usual manner, with the projection B hanging down and the pointed end of the hook in the joint, and drove or pushed it in tightly. The points A A will catch on the under side of the brick and hold solidly.—Contributed by Ralph M. Chatham, Orleans, Indiana.
Having the opportunity to do a lot of counter-flashing in a new wall where the mortar was soft and the joint was too large to use a regular nail or the standard flashing hook, I made hooks from No. 24 gauge galvanized iron, using oversized and reinforced hooks, as shown in the sketch. The hook measures 1-3/4 by 3-1/8 inches. On each side edge, 1-1/8 inches from one end, I cut teeth, A A, and clipped the corners of the opposite end at an angle. The end at B was turned down at a right angle, and the points A A were bent in the opposite direction. I placed the counter-flashing in the usual way, with the projection B hanging down and the pointed end of the hook in the joint, and drove or pushed it in tightly. The points A A will catch on the underside of the brick and hold securely.—Contributed by Ralph M. Chatham, Orleans, Indiana.
A Homemade Dibble
A dibble made of a round and sharp-pointed stick is the usual tool for making holes when setting tomato and other plants. I found by experience that a dibble made of a flat board would work much better and leave a cleaner hole if worked into the earth with a horizontal swinging motion. The hole produced is just right for the plant. The illustration shows its construction.
A dibble made of a round, sharp stick is the common tool for making holes when planting tomatoes and other plants. From experience, I discovered that a dibble made from a flat board works much better and leaves a cleaner hole when pushed into the ground with a horizontal swinging motion. The hole it creates is perfect for the plant. The illustration shows how it's constructed.

A Dibble Used for Making Holes in the Soil to Transplant Tomato and Other Plants
A dibble used for making holes in the soil to transplant tomato and other plants.
Liquid Court-Plaster
A good liquid preparation for cuts and bruises that forms a covering like liquid court-plaster is made by mixing 3/4 oz. of flexible collodion with 1/4 oz. of ether. When this solution is applied to cuts it will not wash off. As the ether evaporates, add more to keep the mixture liquid.
A good liquid solution for cuts and bruises that creates a covering similar to liquid bandage is made by mixing 3/4 oz. of flexible collodion with 1/4 oz. of ether. When this solution is applied to cuts, it won’t wash off. As the ether evaporates, keep adding more to maintain the mixture's liquid consistency.
A Substitute for Candles
One evening our electric light was cut off by a storm, and having no gas, candles, or oil lamps, a very good light was made in the following manner: A tablespoonful of lard was melted and poured in the top of a baking-powder can, and four strands of ordinary white wrapping twine were put into it, allowing one end to stand up for about 1/2 in. above the edge of the can. The end was lighted the same as a candle.—Contributed by B. E. Cole, Eureka, California.
One evening, a storm cut off our electric light, and since we had no gas, candles, or oil lamps, we created a pretty good light using this method: We melted a tablespoon of lard and poured it into the top of a baking powder can, then inserted four strands of regular white wrapping twine into it, leaving one end about 1/2 inch above the edge of the can. We lit the end just like a candle. —Contributed by B. E. Cole, Eureka, California.
A Poultry Coop

A barrel makes a good protection for a hen with a brood of chicks, if it is arranged as shown in the sketch. Procure a good barrel with a bottom and cut off each alternate stave at both ends close up to the first hoop. The lower openings thus formed make entrances for the chickens and the upper ones admit air and light.—Contributed by Wm. R. Konnan, Neillsville, Wis.
A barrel is a great way to protect a hen with her chicks if it's set up like the image shows. Get a solid barrel with a bottom and cut off every other stave at both ends right up to the first hoop. The lower openings you create serve as entrances for the chicks, while the upper ones allow for air and light. —Contributed by Wm. R. Konnan, Neillsville, Wis.
Preventing Mildew on Canvas
To prevent mildew on canvas, soak it in bluestone water, or if the mildew is already present, coat the parts well with ordinary soap and rub on powdered chalk, or whiting. A solution of corrosive sublimate, well weakened with water, will also prevent mildew, but owing to its poisonous nature it is best to use the former method.—Contributed by A. Ashmund Kelly, Malvern, Pa.
To stop mildew on canvas, soak it in bluestone water, or if the mildew is already there, cover the affected areas with regular soap and rub on powdered chalk or whiting. A diluted solution of corrosive sublimate will also prevent mildew, but because it's poisonous, it's better to use the first method.—Contributed by A. Ashmund Kelly, Malvern, Pa.
When the steel point of a compass is lost, a phonograph needle makes a good substitute.
When the steel tip of a compass is lost, a phonograph needle serves as a good replacement.
Holder for Books in a Case
Very often it is found, after arranging the books in a case, that the rows are not complete and the books at the end are continually sliding down on the shelf. The sketch shows a very useful type of wire bracket to support the last book.
Very often, after organizing the books on a shelf, it's noticed that the rows aren't full and the books at the end keep sliding down. The illustration shows a very handy type of wire bracket to hold up the last book.

The Shape of the Wire Makes It Easily Applicable to Any Open Bookshelf
The shape of the wire makes it easy to use on any open bookshelf.
A brass wire, 26 in. long and about 1/8 in. in diameter, is bent, with the use of a vise or pliers, to the shape and dimensions shown at A. When the wire is placed on the bookshelf, as shown at B, it prevents the end book from falling. Its location can be changed as books are added to the shelf.—Contributed by John Y. Dunlop, Craighead, Scotland.
A brass wire, 26 inches long and about 1/8 inch in diameter, is bent using a vise or pliers into the shape and dimensions shown at A. When the wire is placed on the bookshelf, as shown at B, it keeps the end book from falling. Its position can be adjusted as more books are added to the shelf.—Contributed by John Y. Dunlop, Craighead, Scotland.
Laying Out a Dovetail Joint

With dividers and compass lay off the width of the board into twice as many parts as the dovetails wanted. Draw a light line, AB, across the board as far from the end as half the thickness of the board. On this line step off the divisions with the dividers, beginning with a half space or division. With the bevel square, set to a bevel of 1 in. in 3, draw lines through the division dots. This method will save much time and give accurate results.—Contributed by Joseph F. Parks, Wichita, Kan.
Using dividers and a compass, mark the width of the board into twice as many sections as the dovetails require. Draw a light line, AB, across the board, positioned from the end at half the thickness of the board. Along this line, use the dividers to mark the divisions, starting with a half space or division. Set the bevel square to a 1 in 3 angle and draw lines through the division points. This technique will save a lot of time and produce accurate results.—Contributed by Joseph F. Parks, Wichita, Kan.
Oiling Bright Parts of Machinery
It is my duty to go over the bright parts on the machinery in my father's shop and give them a coat of oil late in the afternoon to prevent any rust accumulating over night. As the work took considerable time from my playing I thought of a plan that not only reduced the amount of work but applied the grease much better than with a brush or rag. I procured a sprayer, as shown in the sketch, and sprayed the oil on the bright parts.—Contributed by Waller Kaufman, Santa Ana, California.
It’s my job to check the shiny parts on the machines in my dad’s shop and give them a coat of oil in the late afternoon to stop any rust from building up overnight. Since this task took a lot of time away from my playing, I came up with a plan that not only cut down on the work but also applied the grease way better than using a brush or rag. I got a sprayer, like the one in the sketch, and sprayed the oil on the shiny parts. —Contributed by Waller Kaufman, Santa Ana, California.

A Sprayer Filled with Oil Makes a Good Device for Coating the Bright Parts of Machinery
A spray bottle filled with oil is a great tool for coating the shiny parts of machinery.
Window Ventilator to Prevent Drafts
The ventilator consists of a piece of wood, about 8 in. wide, 3 in. thick and as long as the window is wide. Holes, 1-3/4 in. in diameter, are bored at regular intervals into one edge and these are connected with openings from one side as shown. The piece is set under the lower sash with the long openings toward the outside. This will direct the incoming air currents upward into the room.
The ventilator is made of a piece of wood that's about 8 inches wide, 3 inches thick, and as long as the window is wide. There are holes, 1.75 inches in diameter, bored at regular intervals into one edge, and these are connected with openings from one side as shown. The piece is placed under the lower sash with the long openings facing outward. This will direct the incoming air currents upward into the room.

The Ventilator Prevents the Air from Entering a Room in a Straight Line
The ventilator stops air from entering a room in a straight line.
A Chisel Rack
Turn two large screweyes into the under side of a shelf, as far apart as is necessary, and slip a rod into the eyes. The rod may be kept from slipping out by threading each end and turning on a nut after it is in place. Hooks are made from heavy wire, in the shape of the letter "S," and placed on the rod. A screweye is turned into the end of each chisel handle and used for hanging the tool on an S-hook. As many hooks are provided as there are tools in use. This method of hanging tools is especially adapted for the wood turner.—Contributed by Wallace E. Fisher, New York, N. Y.
Turn two large screw eyes into the underside of a shelf, spaced apart as needed, and slide a rod into the eyes. To prevent the rod from slipping out, thread each end and secure it with a nut once it’s in place. Hooks are made from heavy wire in the shape of the letter "S" and are placed on the rod. A screw eye is attached to the end of each chisel handle for hanging the tool on an S-hook. Provide as many hooks as there are tools being used. This method of hanging tools is particularly suited for the wood turner.—Contributed by Wallace E. Fisher, New York, N. Y.

The Chisels are Kept Close at Hand and the Right Tool may be Quickly Found
The chisels are kept nearby so you can quickly find the right tool.
Homemade Snap Hooks

Having had occasion to use several snap hooks of various sizes and being unable to find anything suitable for my purpose on the market, I procured several cotters of the desired sizes and by bending them over, as shown at A, and cutting them off, as at B, I had snap hooks which, besides answering my original purpose, have also found use as key rings and tool-chuck holders.—Contributed by Jos. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
Having used several snap hooks of different sizes and not being able to find anything suitable for my needs on the market, I got some cotters in the sizes I wanted. By bending them over, like shown at A, and cutting them off, like at B, I created snap hooks that not only served my original purpose but have also been useful as key rings and tool-chuck holders.—Contributed by Jos. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
A Dropper and Cork for Medicine Bottles

A convenient way to accurately drop medicine and liquids without any other appliance than the cork is the following: Simply burn or puncture a smooth hole in the cork as shown. Pull the cork out slightly when the liquid is to be dropped, and when this is done, push the cork in and the bottle is sealed.
A simple way to accurately dispense medicine and liquids using just the cork is as follows: Just burn or poke a smooth hole in the cork as shown. When you need to drop the liquid, pull the cork out a bit, and once you’re done, push the cork back in to seal the bottle.
Repairing a Broken Oilstone
A broken oilstone can be repaired and made as good as new in the following manner: Warm the pieces by heating them on the top of a stove or gas heater, with a piece of heavy sheet metal placed on it so as to protect the stone from the direct heat of the flame. The heating should be done somewhat slowly or the stone will crack.
A broken oilstone can be fixed and restored to like-new condition in the following way: Warm the pieces by placing them on top of a stove or gas heater, using a piece of heavy sheet metal to shield the stone from direct flame. Heat it slowly to avoid cracking the stone.
When the stone is warm wipe off the oil which the heat has driven out and apply a couple of coats of shellac to the broken ends. When the shellac is thoroughly dry, warm the stone again to melt the shellac, and clamp the pieces together. After cooling, the pieces will be found firmly stuck together.—Contributed by F. L. Sylvester, Reading, Mass.
When the stone is warm, wipe off the oil that the heat has released and apply a couple of coats of shellac to the broken ends. Once the shellac is completely dry, warm the stone again to melt the shellac and clamp the pieces together. After cooling, you’ll find the pieces are securely bonded together.—Contributed by F. L. Sylvester, Reading, Mass.
Homemade Towel Roller

The towel roller is made of a piece of broom handle, 16 in. long, squared on both ends and a nail driven in the center of each end. Procure two small pieces of tin—disks about 1 in. in diameter will do—and drive a hole through the center of each with a wire nail. Cut from one edge of the disk down to the hole taking out a narrow V-shaped section.
The towel roller is made from a 16-inch long broom handle, squared on both ends with a nail driven into the center of each end. Get two small pieces of tin—disks about 1 inch in diameter will work—and create a hole in the center of each using a wire nail. Cut from one edge of the disk down to the hole, removing a narrow V-shaped section.
Fasten each disk to a block and nail these to any convenient wall at such a distance apart that the nail heads in the broomstick will slip down in the slots and rest in the holes in the centers of the disks, which form the bearings for the nail heads resting beyond the tin and next to the block.
Fasten each disk to a block and nail these to any convenient wall at a distance that allows the nail heads in the broomstick to slide down into the slots and sit in the holes at the centers of the disks, which act as bearings for the nail heads resting beyond the tin and next to the block.
With a little care the tin can be made to bulge outwardly in the center making room for the nail heads.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
With a bit of care, the tin can be made to bulge outward in the center, creating space for the nail heads. —Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
Clothesline Reel
The usual method of reeling up a clothesline and taking it in is quite a task and many times the lines are left out in the open from one wash day to another, due to neglect or forgetfulness. I made the arrangement shown in the sketch to take care of the line without any effort to the user.
The typical way of winding up a clothesline and bringing it in is quite a job, and often the lines are left out in the open from one laundry day to the next, due to neglect or forgetfulness. I created the setup shown in the sketch to manage the line with no effort from the user.
All that is necessary with this arrangement is to take the end of the line and run it over the hooks or sheaves on the posts and make it secure around an awning fastener. When loosed, the weight in the basement will wind up the line.
All that's needed with this setup is to take the end of the line and run it over the hooks or pulleys on the posts, then secure it around an awning fastener. When it's loosened, the weight in the basement will rewind the line.
A knot can be tied in the line near the reel to catch at a hole in the sill, which will prevent the strain on the reel. If the reel is made to wind up 4 ft. of line to each revolution and the sash-cord shaft is 3/4 in. in diameter, about 100 ft. of line can be taken up in a basement 7 ft. high.—Contributed by A. E. Little, Akron, O.
A knot can be tied in the line near the reel to catch at a hole in the sill, which will prevent strain on the reel. If the reel winds up 4 ft. of line with each turn and the sash-cord shaft is 3/4 in. in diameter, you can take up about 100 ft. of line in a basement that’s 7 ft. high.—Contributed by A. E. Little, Akron, O.
Black-heart malleable iron derives its name from the fact that in annealing only the outer layers of carbon are oxidized, the carbon of the interior being simply changed to a black amorphous state.
Black-heart malleable iron gets its name because during the annealing process, only the surface layers of carbon are oxidized, while the carbon inside is just transformed into a black, shapeless form.
A Candle-Shade Holder
A holder for either round or square shades can be easily constructed from a piece of heavy copper wire to fit on a candlestick. One end of the wire is looped around the upper end of the candlestick, then bent so that the main part will be vertical. The top end is shaped into a circle 2 in. in diameter or a square having sides 2 in. long, as desired.—Contributed by Harry Slosower, Pittsburgh, Pa.
A holder for either round or square shades can be easily made from a piece of heavy copper wire to fit on a candlestick. One end of the wire is looped around the top of the candlestick, then bent so that the main part is vertical. The top end is shaped into a circle 2 inches in diameter or a square with sides 2 inches long, depending on what you prefer. —Contributed by Harry Slosower, Pittsburgh, Pa.

Two Forms of Shade Holder Made of Copper Wire for a Candlestick
Two Types of Shade Holder Made of Copper Wire for a Candlestick
Wire Mesh Used as a Shelf
In covering a window back of my lathe with wire mesh as a protection I also made a shelf for the tools between the window sill and the lathe bed of the same material. The mesh used was 1/4-in. The shelf is always clean, as the shavings and dirt fall through, and the tools may be readily picked up.—Contributed by J. H. Sanford, Pasadena, California.
While covering a window behind my lathe with wire mesh for protection, I also built a shelf for the tools using the same material, placing it between the window sill and the lathe bed. The mesh size is 1/4 inch. The shelf stays clean because shavings and dirt fall through, and it’s easy to grab the tools when I need them.—Contributed by J. H. Sanford, Pasadena, California.
Heel Plates
A good heel or toe plate can be made by driving ordinary thumb tacks into the leather of the shoe heel or sole. The shape can be varied by using tacks having different-sized heads.—Contributed by James T. Gaffney, Chicago, Ill.
A good heel or toe plate can be made by driving regular thumbtacks into the leather of the shoe heel or sole. The shape can be adjusted by using tacks with different-sized heads.—Contributed by James T. Gaffney, Chicago, Ill.

The Heads of the Tacks Form a Wearing Surface Equal to an Ordinary Heel Plate
The tops of the tacks create a surface that is as durable as a standard heel plate.
A Bright Dip for Metal
Articles of brass, copper and bronze may be given a bright luster by dipping them into a solution composed of 50 oz. of nitric acid, 25 oz. of sulphuric acid, liquid measure, and 1/2 oz. of soot and 1/2 oz. of salt, by weight. After the articles are dipped into the solution they are removed and thoroughly washed, then dried in sawdust to prevent streaks.
Articles made of brass, copper, and bronze can be given a shiny finish by soaking them in a solution made of 50 oz. of nitric acid, 25 oz. of sulfuric acid, and 1/2 oz. each of soot and salt by weight. Once the items are dipped in the solution, they should be taken out, washed thoroughly, and then dried in sawdust to avoid streaks.
An Interesting Vacuum Experiment

A very interesting experiment may be performed with two drinking glasses, a small candle end and a piece of blotting paper, says the Pathfinder. The glasses must be the same size and of the thin-glass kind. The candle end is lighted and set in one glass; the blotting paper is well dampened and placed on top of the glass, and the other glass inverted and its rim placed exactly over the lower one and pressed down tightly. The candle will burn up all the oxygen in the glass and go out.
A really interesting experiment can be done with two drinking glasses, a small candle stub, and a piece of blotting paper, says the Pathfinder. The glasses should be the same size and made of thin glass. Light the candle stub and put it in one glass; then, dampen the blotting paper and place it on top of the glass. Take the other glass, turn it upside down, and position its rim directly over the lower glass, pressing it down tightly. The candle will use up all the oxygen in the glass and extinguish.
The air in the glass being heated will expand and some of it will be forced out from under the moist paper, and then, as the portion remaining cools, it will contract and draw the upper glass on the paper and make an air-tight joint. The upper glass can then be taken up and the lower one will cling to it.
The air in the glass that's being heated will expand, and some of it will be pushed out from under the damp paper. Then, as the remaining air cools, it will contract and pull the upper glass down onto the paper, creating an airtight seal. After that, the upper glass can be lifted, and the lower one will stick to it.
A Sliver Extractor
If a clipper for the finger nails becomes dull do not throw it away, but keep it in the tool box in a handy place. It is very useful for extracting slivers from the flesh.—Contributed by G. Wokenfuss, McCook, Neb.
If a nail clipper gets dull, don't throw it away; just keep it in the toolbox somewhere accessible. It's really handy for removing splinters from your skin.—Contributed by G. Wokenfuss, McCook, Neb.
Night Croquet Playing
Croquet playing became so interesting to us that we could not find time to do all our playing during the day. So at night we attach a candle to each of the wickets and also use one at each corner of the grounds. These light the grounds so that the game can be played nicely. The candles may be attached by wiring them to the wickets or by using small pasteboard boxes, similar to a pill box of sufficient size, and running a wire through the center or down the sides, which is hooked over the top to hold them upright on top of the ground. The latter way is the better as the candles may be pulled up in the day time and taken out of the way.—Contributed by Geo. Goodbrod, Union, Ore.
Playing croquet became so enjoyable for us that we couldn’t find enough time to play during the day. So at night, we attach a candle to each of the wickets and also use one at each corner of the grounds. These lights illuminate the area so that we can play properly. The candles can be secured by wiring them to the wickets or by using small cardboard boxes, similar to pillboxes of adequate size, and running a wire through the center or down the sides, which is hooked over the top to keep them upright on the ground. The latter method is better since the candles can be pulled up during the day and removed from the area.—Contributed by Geo. Goodbrod, Union, Ore.
A Nursing-Bottle Holder
The ordinary nursing bottle with nipple necessitates holding the bottle in a certain position, and when the valve nipples are used, the bottle should be held far enough away to allow this valve free action. To accomplish this I constructed a very simple wire holder for the bottle as shown in the illustration. Ordinary telephone wire will hold any bottle. The wire is bent to hook on the side of the crib, cradle or cab.—Contributed by W. A. Humphrey, Columbus, O.
The regular baby bottle with a nipple needs to be held at a specific angle, and when using valve nipples, the bottle should be held a bit further away to let the valve work properly. To solve this problem, I made a simple wire holder for the bottle as shown in the illustration. Regular telephone wire can support any bottle. The wire is bent to hook onto the side of the crib, cradle, or cab.—Contributed by W. A. Humphrey, Columbus, O.

Nursing Bottle in Holder
Baby Bottle Holder
Milk-Ticket Holder
An ordinary spring mousetrap makes a good bread or milk-ticket holder. The wood part of the trap can be easily nailed or screwed to a door or window casing. The way the tickets are held is clearly shown in the sketch.
An everyday spring mousetrap works well as a holder for bread or milk tickets. The wooden part of the trap can be easily nailed or screwed to a door or window frame. The way the tickets are held is clearly illustrated in the sketch.

Trap Used as Ticket Holder
Trap Used as Ticket Holder
Joint for Cabinet Work
In making a cabinet containing 56 drawers of various sizes, I used the method shown in the sketch for making the frame. The horizontal strips A should be all fastened together when sawing the notches to fit over the uprights. The uprights B should be sawn in the same manner. It is best to round the front of the rear uprights slightly and also any other places where the drawers might strike when pushing them into place. The length of the runners C should be 1-1/2 in. less than the length of the drawer.—Contributed by J. H. Dickson, Polk, Pa.
In making a cabinet with 56 drawers of different sizes, I used the method shown in the sketch for building the frame. The horizontal strips A should be secured together when cutting the notches to fit over the vertical pieces. The vertical pieces B should be cut in the same way. It's a good idea to slightly round the front of the back vertical pieces and any other areas where the drawers might hit when being pushed into place. The length of the runners C should be 1-1/2 inches shorter than the length of the drawer.—Contributed by J. H. Dickson, Polk, Pa.
Do not expect accurate work unless you have accurate tools.
Don't expect precise results unless you have the right tools.
Starting a Saw Cut
A fine piece of woodwork is often spoiled by the amateur craftsman when starting a cut with a saw. As the first stroke of the saw on the edge of the board is made, the teeth often break a splinter from the edge or the saw jumps to one side of the line, thereby making a rough and uneven cut. This can be avoided in a very simple way.
A nice piece of woodwork is often ruined by an amateur when they start a cut with a saw. When the first stroke of the saw hits the edge of the board, the teeth can break off a splinter from the edge or the saw may slip to one side of the line, creating a rough and uneven cut. This can be easily avoided.

Starting a Saw on a Knife Cut will Prevent Roughing or Splintering the Edge
Starting a saw on a knife cut will prevent rough edges or splintering.
After marking the line, take a sharp knife and make a cut across the edge, as shown, and draw the knife down well over the corners of the board for about 1/8 in. Place the saw on the cut and start it slowly. The saw blade will follow the cut of the knife blade.
After marking the line, take a sharp knife and cut across the edge as shown. Then, run the knife down over the corners of the board for about 1/8 inch. Place the saw on the cut and start it slowly. The saw blade will follow the cut made by the knife.
A Substitute Penholder
One evening when my wife was using the only penholder in the house I desired to do some writing and being in a hurry, I hastily made a substitute holder of a pencil. Two cuts were made in the butt end, as shown; the pen was then slipped in, the outside wound with a rubber band, and my penholder was complete.—Contributed by H. A. Sullwold, St. Paul, Minn.
One evening, when my wife was using the only pen holder in the house, I wanted to write something quickly. In my rush, I quickly fashioned a makeshift holder out of a pencil. I made two cuts on the end, as shown; then I slid the pen in, wrapped the outside with a rubber band, and my pen holder was ready. —Contributed by H. A. Sullwold, St. Paul, Minn.

The End of the Pencil as It is Prepared to Receive the Pen
The End of the Pencil as It's Ready to Take the Pen
Protecting Binding Posts on Wet Batteries from Corrosion
When recharging the cells of a wet battery it is best to procure the best grade of sal ammoniac, the kind that is put up in boxes having a sufficient amount for one cell. Then, before putting the solution into the cell, melt some paraffin used for preserving purposes and dip the upper end of the carbons, zinc, and the glass jar in it. This will apply a coat of insulating wax that will prevent any white deposit from working up on the parts and corroding the binding posts, or terminals.
When recharging the cells of a wet battery, it's best to get high-quality sal ammoniac, packaged in boxes that have enough for one cell. Before adding the solution to the cell, melt some paraffin used for preservation and dip the upper ends of the carbons, zinc, and the glass jar in it. This will create a layer of insulating wax that prevents any white deposits from forming on the parts and corroding the binding posts or terminals.
The cells are then filled in the ordinary manner, after which the carbons and zincs are raised just far enough to admit a layer of common machine oil, about 3/8 in. thick. The oil not only prevents evaporation but aids greatly to keep the uncovered parts from corrosion.—Contributed by L. R. Kelley, Philadelphia, Pa.
The cells are then filled in the usual way, after which the carbons and zincs are lifted just enough to allow for a layer of regular machine oil, about 3/8 in. thick. The oil not only prevents evaporation but also helps to significantly protect the exposed parts from corrosion.—Contributed by L. R. Kelley, Philadelphia, Pa.
A Cork Puller

A very simple and easy way to remove a stopper from a bottle, when a cork puller is not at hand, is to press two nails into the cork, as shown in the sketch, and, taking a firm hold on both nails, draw the cork out. Brads may be used on smaller corks. Large and tightly fitted corks may be drawn by gripping the nails with a pair of pliers.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
A very simple and easy way to remove a stopper from a bottle when you don't have a cork puller is to press two nails into the cork, as shown in the sketch. Then, take a firm grip on both nails and pull the cork out. You can use brads for smaller corks. For larger and tightly fitted corks, you can grip the nails with a pair of pliers. —Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
Holder for a Garden-Hose Nozzle

When sprinkling a lawn with an automatic spraying device on a hose nozzle it is necessary to have some kind of an arrangement to tilt the end at the proper angle. I find that a holder made of a heavy piece of galvanized wire bent in the shape shown can be used to set the nozzle at any angle. The wire is easily pushed into the earth and does no harm to the lawn.—Contributed by T. J. Ingram, Jr., Lynchburg, Va.
When using an automatic spray nozzle on a hose to water a lawn, it's important to have a way to tilt the end at the right angle. I've found that a holder made from a sturdy piece of galvanized wire bent into the shape shown can be used to position the nozzle at any angle. The wire easily sticks into the ground and doesn't damage the lawn.—Contributed by T. J. Ingram, Jr., Lynchburg, Va.
Alarm to Designate a Filled Storage Battery
When a storage battery is recharged, the completion of the recharging is marked by the development of gas in the cell. This fact is the basis of a simple electrical device which will ring a bell when the battery is fully charged. A glass tube bent as shown and having a small bulb near its upper end is inserted in the top of the cell, a small quantity of mercury being first introduced in the bend below the bulb. Wires extend down the upper tubing to within a short distance of the mercury. These wires are connected with binding posts so mounted that they can rest on top of the tube, whereupon the bell circuit is completed as shown. Small quantities of gas may develop during the charging of the cell, but if a small hole is pierced in the tube between the mercury and the cell, this gas will not exert pressure enough on the mercury to push it up and connect it with the wires, which will take place first when the development of gas becomes very active at the completion of the recharging.
When a storage battery is recharged, you can tell it's fully charged by the gas that forms in the cell. This principle is used in a simple electrical device that rings a bell when the battery is completely charged. A glass tube, bent as shown and with a small bulb near its top, is placed in the cell's opening, and a small amount of mercury is put in the bend below the bulb. Wires run down the upper part of the tube to a point just above the mercury. These wires are connected to binding posts designed to sit on top of the tube, which completes the bell circuit. While small amounts of gas might form during the charging process, if a tiny hole is made in the tube between the mercury and the cell, this gas won’t create enough pressure to push the mercury up to connect with the wires. This connection only happens when the gas formation becomes very strong at the end of the recharging process.

The Gas Generated by a Filled Storage Battery will Make Electric Connections and Sound an Alarm
The gas produced by a charged storage battery will create electrical connections and trigger an alarm.
Stretching Poultry Fencing
The woven-wire poultry fencing is an unusually difficult thing to handle and fasten on posts so that it will be taut and evenly stretched. The best method I have ever seen for drawing this fencing and holding it for nailing to a post is the use of the device shown in the sketch. It consists of a board, as long as the fencing is wide, with screw hooks set far enough apart to catch into the meshes of the wire, and a crosspiece attached to the board by pieces of rope at the ends and provided with a pulling loop in the center.—Contributed by Joseph C. Laackman, Meadow Brook, Pa.
The woven-wire poultry fencing is pretty tricky to manage and secure to posts in a way that keeps it tight and evenly stretched. The best method I've come across for pulling this fencing and holding it in place for nailing to a post is the device shown in the sketch. It consists of a board the same length as the width of the fencing, with screw hooks spaced out enough to catch the wires, and a crosspiece attached to the board by ropes at either end, featuring a pulling loop in the center.—Contributed by Joseph C. Laackman, Meadow Brook, Pa.

Board Fitted with Screw Hooks and a Pulling Device for Stretching Poultry Fencing on Posts
Board Equipped with Screw Hooks and a Pulling Device for Stretching Poultry Fencing on Posts
A Centering Gauge
The centering gauge consists of a piece of celluloid on which several circles are drawn having different diameters, but all drawn from the same center. A small hole is made at the center to admit the point of a center punch. Two sets of circles may be drawn on one piece as shown, but the lines should be spaced far enough apart to allow the metal to be clearly seen through the celluloid. The sheet is placed on the end of a shaft and adjusted so that a ring will match the circumference of the shaft, then the center punch is set in the center hole and struck with a hammer. The center punch for marking is shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Harry Holst, San Francisco, Cal.
The centering gauge is a piece of celluloid with several circles drawn on it, each with different diameters but all sharing the same center. A small hole is made in the center for a center punch. Two sets of circles can be drawn on one piece, as shown, but the lines should be spaced far enough apart so that the metal underneath can be clearly seen through the celluloid. The sheet is placed at the end of a shaft and adjusted so that a ring matches the circumference of the shaft. Then, the center punch is placed in the center hole and struck with a hammer. The marking center punch is shown in the sketch.—Contributed by Harry Holst, San Francisco, Cal.

Circles Drawn on Celluloid to Adjust It on the End of a Shaft in Finding the Center
Circles Drawn on Celluloid to Adjust It on the End of a Shaft in Finding the Center
Homemade Letters for Marking Bags

An initial marker for bags can be made of a beet or potato. Cut off enough of the vegetable to provide a flat surface of sufficient size and then cut out the letter as shown in the sketch, and use shoe blacking as ink. In cutting, remember that most of the letters must be made reversed in order to print right. For example, in making a B, draw it out on paper and cut it out, then lay the face of the pattern on the flat surface of the vegetable and cut around it.
An initial marker for bags can be made from a beet or potato. Cut off enough of the vegetable to create a flat surface that's big enough, and then cut out the letter as shown in the sketch. Use shoe polish as ink. When cutting, keep in mind that most of the letters need to be made in reverse so they print correctly. For instance, to create a B, draw it out on paper and cut it out, then place the front of the pattern on the flat surface of the vegetable and cut around it.
To Keep a Crease in a Soft Hat
The crease in a soft hat can be kept in proper shape with the aid of a paper clip. The clip is slipped over the fold inside of the hat which forms the bottom part of the crease.—Contributed by Jas. M. Kane, Doylestown, Pennsylvania.
The crease in a soft hat can be maintained with the help of a paper clip. Just slide the clip over the fold inside the hat that creates the bottom part of the crease.—Contributed by Jas. M. Kane, Doylestown, Pennsylvania.

Paper Clip on the Fold, Holding It in the Right Shape for the Outside Crease
Paper clip on the fold, keeping it in the right shape for the outer crease.
A Shoe Scraper

A good boot and shoe scraper for a step can be made of a worn-out and discarded broom. Cut off the straws and strings as shown in the sketch, allowing one string to hold them together, and make the notch the width of the shoe. Tie the extending ends together, and mount the whole on a suitable block, or, if desired, a hole can be bored in the step to receive the handle, and the scraper thus securely attached.
A good boot and shoe scraper for a step can be made from an old, worn-out broom. Cut off the bristles and strings as shown in the sketch, leaving one string to hold everything together, and create a notch that's the width of the shoe. Tie the extended ends together, and attach the whole thing to a suitable block. Alternatively, you can drill a hole in the step to fit the handle, securing the scraper in place.
This makes an effective scraper for the bottom as well as the sides of shoes of almost any size.—Contributed by Jno. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
This creates a useful scraper for the bottom and the sides of shoes of nearly any size.—Contributed by Jno. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
A Vegetable Slicer

A tin bucket or can makes a good slicer for vegetables when no other slicer is at hand. A number of slots are cut across one side of the can, and the lower edge of each slot slightly turned out to form a cutting edge. The vegetable is placed against the top of the can and pushed down over the slots. Each slot will cut off a slice which falls inside of the can.
A tin bucket or can works well as a slicer for vegetables when you don't have any other slicer available. Several slots are cut across one side of the can, and the lower edge of each slot is slightly bent out to create a cutting edge. The vegetable is positioned against the top of the can and pushed down over the slots. Each slot will cut off a slice that falls inside the can.
Bench Stop for Planing Thin Boards

A bench stop for planing thin boards with a hand plane may be made in the following manner: Procure a piece of strap iron about 1/4 in. thick, 1-1/2 or 2 in. wide, and about 6 in. long. File or grind one edge sharp on top and drill a 1/4-in. hole through the center. Cut a slot in a board or in the workbench large enough to receive the stop A flat. Place enough strips of rubber or fit two coil springs, B, to raise the sharp edge out of the slot. Insert a screw in the hole of the stop and adjust it to the desired height by turning the screw up or down.
A bench stop for planing thin boards with a hand plane can be made like this: Get a piece of strap iron about 1/4 inch thick, 1-1/2 or 2 inches wide, and about 6 inches long. File or grind one edge sharp on top and drill a 1/4-inch hole through the center. Cut a slot in a board or in the workbench that's large enough to fit the stop. Add enough strips of rubber or use two coil springs, B, to lift the sharp edge above the slot. Insert a screw into the hole of the stop and adjust it to the desired height by turning the screw up or down.
In a case of emergency, lemon juice may be used as soldering flux.
In an emergency, lemon juice can be used as soldering flux.
A Jardinière Pedestal
The pedestal may be made of any close-grained wood, such as basswood or maple, if the stain is to be walnut or mahogany, but it can also be constructed of quarter-sawed oak and finished in a waxed mission or varnished surface. The material required is as follows:
The pedestal can be made from any smooth, dense wood, like basswood or maple, if the stain is walnut or mahogany. However, it can also be built from quarter-sawn oak and finished with a waxed mission or varnished surface. The materials needed are as follows:
1 | top, 12 by 12 by 7/8 in., S-2-S. |
2 | caps, 6 by 6 by 7/8 in., S-2-S. |
1 | upright, 18 by 4 by 4 in., S-4-S. |
1 | base, 8 by 8 by 7/8 in., S-2-S. |
The top is centered and a circle, 11-1/2 in. in diameter, is drawn upon it, and sawn out. The caps are also centered and circles drawn upon them, 5-1/2 in. and 3-1/2 in. in diameter. Saw them out on the larger circles and center them in a wood lathe and turn out the wood in the smaller circles to a depth of 1/2 in. The upright is then centered in the lathe and turned to 3-1/2 in. in diameter for its full length.
The top is centered, and a circle with a diameter of 11-1/2 inches is drawn on it and cut out. The caps are also centered, with circles drawn on them that are 5-1/2 inches and 3-1/2 inches in diameter. Cut out the larger circles, then center them in a wood lathe and turn the wood in the smaller circles to a depth of 1/2 inch. The upright is then centered in the lathe and turned to a diameter of 3-1/2 inches for its entire length.

The Pedestal can be Made of a Wood Suitable for Finishing to Match Other Furniture
The pedestal can be made from wood that can be finished to match other furniture.
The base and foot pieces are cut out as shown, fitted together and fastened with screws from the under side. One of the caps is mounted in the center on the base and the other cap in the center on the under side of the top. The upright is then placed in the turned-out parts of the caps and either glued or fastened with screws.
The base and foot pieces are cut out as shown, fitted together, and secured with screws from underneath. One of the caps is attached in the center on the base, and the other cap is centered on the underside of the top. The upright is then placed in the extended parts of the caps and either glued or secured with screws.
If light wood is used, the finish can be walnut or mahogany. A very pretty finish can be worked out in pyrography, if one is familiar with that work.—Contributed by Russell T. Westbrook, Dover, N. J.
If you use light wood, you can finish it with walnut or mahogany. A really nice finish can be achieved through pyrography, if you know how to do that work.—Contributed by Russell T. Westbrook, Dover, N. J.
A Lawn-Tennis Marker
The liquid receptacle is a metal biscuit box, about 9 in. square and mounted on a wheel with a handle, the whole being similar to a wheelbarrow. The wheel is 7 in. in diameter and 2-1/2 in. thick. The wheel and box are bolted between two pieces of strap iron in the manner shown, and the handle is attached back of the box. If the box is of very thin metal, boards should be placed within on the sides where it is fastened to the strap iron. A roller is pivoted in the box at the lower back corner and a canvas tape or band run over the roller and wheel in the manner of a belt. The tape should run through a slot cut in the front part of the box, about midway between the top and the bottom. The edges of the tin in the slot must be turned over and hammered down to make a smooth surface for the tape to run over.—Contributed by George N. Bertram, Toronto, Can.
The liquid container is a metal biscuit box, about 9 inches square and mounted on a wheel with a handle, resembling a wheelbarrow. The wheel is 7 inches in diameter and 2.5 inches thick. The wheel and box are bolted between two pieces of strap iron as shown, and the handle is attached at the back of the box. If the box is made of very thin metal, boards should be placed inside alongside where it is attached to the strap iron. A roller is pivoted in the box at the lower back corner, and a canvas tape or band runs over the roller and wheel like a belt. The tape should pass through a slot cut in the front part of the box, about halfway between the top and the bottom. The edges of the tin in the slot must be turned over and hammered down to create a smooth surface for the tape to move across.—Contributed by George N. Bertram, Toronto, Can.

A Marker That will Make a Clear, White Line on the Ground for a Tennis Court
A marker that will create a clear, white line on the ground for a tennis court.
Removing Tannin Stains from Teacups
A small portion of hyposulphite of soda mixed with vinegar will make a good cleaner for teacups having tannin stains. This process does not injure the finest china and is inexpensive. The same solution works quite well on clothes that are accidentally stained with tea. They should be washed out and dried quickly after its application in order to make this method most effective.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A small amount of sodium hyposulfite mixed with vinegar makes a great cleaner for teacups with tannin stains. This method doesn’t harm fine china and is affordable. The same solution also works well on clothes that accidentally get tea stains. They should be washed and dried quickly after using this method to make it most effective.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.

Weaving the Top of the Stool by Using a Wet Weaver of Reed
Weaving the Top of the Stool with a Wet Weaver of Reed
Woven-Top Stool
The material necessary for this stool is as follows:
The materials you need for this stool are as follows:
4 | legs, 1-3/4 by 1-3/4 by 16 in. |
4 | bottom rails, 7/8 by 1-3/4 by 16 in. |
4 | top rails, 7/8 by 2 by 16-1/2 in. |
4 | diagonal braces, 7/8 by 1-3/4 by 6 in. |

Construction of the Frame and Manner of Laying the Weavers for the Top
Construction of the Frame and How to Set Up the Weavers for the Top
The legs are mortised so the top rails come level. The upper rails are tenoned on the sides only and beveled at the ends. For the bottom rails, the mortises are made one above the other, the rails being tenoned on all sides. The braces are cut at 45 on each end and glued into place.
The legs are cut to fit so the top rails are level. The upper rails are shaped with tenons on the sides only and angled at the ends. For the bottom rails, the mortises are positioned one above the other, with tenons on all sides. The braces are cut at a 45-degree angle on each end and glued in place.
In weaving the top, proceed as follows: Use a wet weaver and wrap one layer over the entire top, the strips being placed close together and tightly wound. Start the second layer at right angles to the first by going under one strip, then over three strips, under three, and so on, by threes, until that strip is finished. Start the second by going under two strips, then over three, under three, and so on, as before. The third strip should start by going under three, then over and under three, etc. Start the fourth by going over one, then under three, and over three, as in the preceding; the fifth, start over two, then under and over three, repeatedly. The sixth, and last of the series, begin over three and then continue, by threes, as before. Having finished one series, the remainder of the top should be completed in similar order. Good white shellac makes the best finish for the seat; the stool itself may be finished to suit.—Contributed by Russel Dodsworth, Erie, Pa.
In making the top, follow these steps: Use a wet weaver and wrap one layer all around the top, placing the strips close together and tightly wound. Start the second layer at a right angle to the first by going under one strip, then over three strips, under three, and so on, in groups of three, until that strip is done. For the second strip, begin by going under two strips, then over three, under three, and continue the same way as before. For the third strip, start by going under three, then over and under three, etc. The fourth strip should start by going over one, then under three, and over three, as done previously; for the fifth, start over two, then under and over three repeatedly. For the sixth and last strip in the series, begin over three and then continue in groups of three, as before. Once one series is complete, finish the rest of the top in a similar manner. Good white shellac provides the best finish for the seat; the stool itself can be finished to your preference. —Contributed by Russel Dodsworth, Erie, Pa.
Preserving Shafting from Rust and Corrosion
In a laboratory it was very difficult to keep the line shaft and countershafts bright and free from rust, owing to the fumes and gases issuing from the several fume closets within the same room. The following method was tried, and proved very satisfactory. The shafting was covered with two coats of flat white paint and allowed to dry, after which a coat of white enamel was applied, giving it a clean, glossy, and sanitary appearance. This eliminated all the trouble of cleaning it with emery cloth, and it also made it appear in harmony with the other furnishings of the laboratory.—Contributed by Geo. F. Stark, Norwich, N. Y.
In a lab, it was really tough to keep the line shaft and countershafts shiny and rust-free due to the fumes and gases coming from several fume closets in the same room. We tried the following method, and it worked really well. The shafting was covered with two coats of flat white paint and left to dry, after which a coat of white enamel was applied, giving it a clean, glossy, and sanitary look. This got rid of all the hassle of cleaning it with emery cloth, and it also made it match the other furnishings in the lab.—Contributed by Geo. F. Stark, Norwich, N. Y.

Reed Furniture By Chas. M. Miller
Reed Furniture by Chas. M. Miller
Reed Furniture
By Chas. M. Miller
A Reed Basket
Inasmuch as there is a great demand for reed furniture and since good weavers are comparatively few in number, it would be well to learn the process of reed weaving. The weaving operations can be learned much better through the construction of some small article, such as a basket or jardinière cover. The center is the most difficult part of the basket making, and it is best to begin with wood bottoms, as the whole basket can be kept in a much better form due to the stiffness furnished by such a bottom. It is also an approach to the reed furniture which is woven on framework. The objectionable feature of the wood bottoms is the unfinished appearance of the wood edge showing through, but this can be overcome by the use of the roll shown in the illustration.
Since there’s a high demand for reed furniture and good weavers are relatively rare, it would be a good idea to learn how to weave with reeds. You can learn the weaving techniques more effectively by creating a small item, like a basket or jardinière cover. The center of the basket is the most challenging part to make, so it’s best to start with wooden bottoms, as they help keep the entire basket in a better shape due to the stiffness they provide. This method also introduces you to the reed furniture that is woven on a framework. The downside of using wooden bottoms is that the unfinished wood edge is visible, but this can be fixed by using the roll shown in the illustration.

While the wood bottoms have been used for this class of work for a number of years, the roll is new and is very popular with those who have seen and used it. The roll can be placed in many ways on different-shaped baskets, and other reed pieces, so that it is best to master this piece of work thoroughly before attempting the other, or larger, pieces that will be described later, in other articles.
While wooden bottoms have been used for this type of work for many years, the roll is new and has quickly gained popularity among those who have seen and used it. The roll can be positioned in various ways on differently shaped baskets and other reed pieces, so it's best to master this technique thoroughly before trying the other, larger projects that will be described later in other articles.
The description is for a basket 5 in. in diameter and 3 in. high, as shown in the illustration. A disk of wood, 1/4 in. thick and 5 in. in diameter, is required. Basswood makes the best bottom, but pine, or cedar, will do. Cut a board about 6 in. square, and draw diagonal lines on it intersecting at the center, then draw a circle, 5 in. in diameter, as shown in Fig. 1; also another circle, using the same center, 4-3/4 in. in diameter. Set compass points about 5/8 in. apart, and step off spaces on the inner [258] circle to make 24 points. This will have to be tried out more than once, to get the spaces to come out evenly and just have the right number of points. Holes are bored with a 1/8-in. bit, just inside of the inner circle, back of the places marked by the compass points, as shown in Fig. 2. Cut the board on the outside circle with a coping, or turn, saw, to make the circle, as in Fig. 3. Do not saw out the circle before boring the holes, as otherwise the disk might split out in places.
The description is for a basket 5 in. in diameter and 3 in. high, as shown in the illustration. You’ll need a piece of wood that is 1/4 in. thick and 5 in. in diameter. Basswood is the best choice for the bottom, but pine or cedar will also work. Cut a board that’s about 6 in. square, then draw diagonal lines intersecting at the center. Next, draw a circle that’s 5 in. in diameter, as shown in Fig. 1, and another circle with the same center that’s 4-3/4 in. in diameter. Set the compass points about 5/8 in. apart and mark off spaces on the inner circle to create 24 points. You may need to adjust this a few times to ensure the spaces are even and there’s the right number of points. Use a 1/8-in. bit to bore holes just inside the inner circle, behind the points marked by the compass, as shown in Fig. 2. Cut the board along the outer circle using a coping or scroll saw to form the circle, as in Fig. 3. Make sure you bore the holes before cutting out the circle to avoid splitting the disk.

The Bottom is Cut from a Piece of Wood to Give Strength and to Avoid the Most Difficult Part of the Weaving (Fig. 1)
The bottom is cut from a piece of wood to provide strength and to skip the most challenging part of the weaving (Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
The reeds placed vertically are called spokes, and the horizontal ones are the weavers. For the spokes, what is called a No. 4 reed is used. Do not wet the spokes before putting them through the wood. Allow the ends to project about 5-1/2 in. below the bottom, as shown in Fig. 4. Place the bottom, with the spokes, in water, and soak them thoroughly, especially the part below the bottom. About 15 minutes of soaking will be sufficient to make them pliable enough to bend over at right angles. It will not injure the wood bottom to soak it with the reeds. As shown at A, Figs. 4 and 5, each spoke below the wood bottom is bent, down and back of the two nearest spokes, B and C, then out between the third and fourth spokes, C and D, and so on. The last two spokes, Y and Z, Fig. 6, are forced under the spokes A and B, respectively. In this illustration the spoke Y is shown as it is being inserted under the spoke A. When this operation is completed, the bottom will have the appearance of a fireworks pinwheel.
The reeds that are placed vertically are called spokes, while the horizontal ones are known as the weavers. For the spokes, you'll use a No. 4 reed. Don't wet the spokes before putting them through the wood. Let the ends stick out about 5-1/2 inches below the bottom, as shown in Fig. 4. Place the bottom with the spokes in water and soak them completely, especially the part underneath the bottom. Soaking for about 15 minutes should be enough to make them flexible enough to bend at right angles. Soaking the wood bottom with the reeds won't damage it. As shown at A in Figs. 4 and 5, each spoke below the wood bottom is bent down and back of the two nearest spokes, B and C, then out between the third and fourth spokes, C and D, and so on. The last two spokes, Y and Z, in Fig. 6, are pushed under the spokes A and B, respectively. In this illustration, the spoke Y is shown being inserted under the spoke A. Once this task is done, the bottom will look like a fireworks pinwheel.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)

The Reeds are Attached to the Bottom and Their Lower Ends Bent as Shown (Fig. 5)
The Reeds are Connected at the Bottom and Their Lower Ends are Bent as Shown (Fig. 5)

(Fig. 6)
(Fig. 6)
Continue the bending of the spokes, in the same direction, up and across the thickness of the wood in front of three other spokes and behind the fourth, as shown in Fig. 7. This would not cover the edge of the wood entirely, and, for this reason, other short spokes must be inserted in front of each of the first ones before it is brought up [259] across the edge of the wood. These supplementary spokes should be about 4 in. long. The manner of inserting these spokes before making the bend is shown at G and T, Fig. 6. The double spokes must be pressed down flat, when brought up in place, without riding one on the other. If the ends are too long and interfere with the next pair, they can be cut off a little with a flat chisel, or knife, being careful not to make them too short, or the pieces will not stay in place. If there is still an open space, an extra, short spoke can be inserted to crowd the pieces together and fill up the space.
Continue bending the spokes in the same direction, up and across the thickness of the wood in front of three other spokes and behind the fourth, as shown in Fig. 7. This will not completely cover the edge of the wood, so you need to add other short spokes in front of each of the first ones before bringing it up [259] across the edge of the wood. These additional spokes should be about 4 inches long. The way to insert these spokes before bending is shown at G and T, Fig. 6. The double spokes must be pressed down flat when positioned, without stacking one on top of the other. If the ends are too long and get in the way of the next pair, you can trim them slightly with a flat chisel or knife, being careful not to make them too short, or the pieces will not stay in place. If there’s still an open space, you can add an extra short spoke to push the other pieces together and fill the gap.

The Lower Ends of the Spokes are Turned to Cover the Edge of the Bottom... (Fig. 7)
The lower ends of the spokes are turned to cover the edge of the bottom... (Fig. 7)

(Fig. 8)
(Fig. 8)

(Fig. 9)
(Fig. 9)
When the roll is completed, insert three weavers, of No. 3 reed that has been soaked about 15 minutes, placing them between the spokes A and B, B and C, and C and D, as shown in Fig. 8. Pass weaver L in front of the spokes B and C, then back of D and out between D and E. Weaver M is passed in front of C and D, back of E and out in front of E and F. These operations are clearly shown in Fig. 9. The weaver N is placed in front of D and E, back of F and then in front of G and H. At this point the weaver L is used again. The weaver farthest behind each time is brought in front of the two spokes nearest to it, then behind the third and out in front of the next two spokes. Do not try to use weavers longer than 8 ft., which is about half the length of a reed. When a weaver is used up, press it back to the side a little, push in a new reed about 1-1/2 in., and continue the weaving. This is clearly shown in Fig. 10. This weaving is known as the triple weave, which cinches down well and holds tightly. The first round should be carefully worked, so as to get the ends of the roll properly pressed down flat in place. Each throw of the weaver should be well pressed down.
When the roll is done, insert three weavers made of No. 3 reed that has been soaked for about 15 minutes, positioning them between spokes A and B, B and C, and C and D, as shown in Fig. 8. Pass weaver L in front of spokes B and C, then behind D and out between D and E. Weaver M goes in front of C and D, behind E, and out in front of E and F. These steps are clearly illustrated in Fig. 9. Place weaver N in front of D and E, behind F, and then in front of G and H. At this point, reuse weaver L. The weaver that is farthest back each time is brought in front of the two closest spokes, then goes behind the third and comes out in front of the next two spokes. Avoid using weavers longer than 8 ft., which is about half the length of a reed. When a weaver is used up, push it back a little to the side, insert a new reed about 1-1/2 in., and continue the weaving. This is clearly shown in Fig. 10. This weaving technique is called the triple weave, which tightens well and holds firmly. The first round should be done carefully to ensure the ends of the roll are pressed down flat in place. Each throw of the weaver should be pressed down well.

(Fig. 10)
(Fig. 10)

...Then the Reeds are Woven into the Upright Spokes to the Right Height, Where They are Broken Down and Woven into a Top Border (Fig. 11)
...Then the Reeds are Woven into the Upright Spokes to the Right Height, Where They are Broken Down and Woven into a Top Border (Fig. 11)

(Fig. 12)
(Fig. 12)
The break-down-tight border is used for the finish at the top. The first operation in making this border is shown in Fig. 11. The spoke A is bent over back of spoke B and out between spokes B and C. The spoke B is bent over back of the spoke C and out between C and D, and so on, until the spoke E is turned down. Then take the end of the spoke A, Fig. 12, and lay it over B, C, D, and E, in front of F, back of G, and out between G and H. The end of spoke F is then brought down, also between G and H, but back of the end of A. The end of B takes a similar leap, passes behind H and out between H and J; then G is brought down behind the end of B, in the same manner as F was brought down back of A. The last four or five spokes are the most difficult to handle, as they must be forced through the first ones to correspond with those already in place. It is best not to pull the ends of A, B, C, and D down too tightly at first, keeping in mind that the last ones [260] must be inserted under the first ones. The last standing spokes are represented by the full and shaded lines.
The break-down-tight border is used for the finish at the top. The first step in creating this border is shown in Fig. 11. Spoke A is bent back behind spoke B and out between spokes B and C. Spoke B is bent back behind spoke C and out between C and D, and so on, until spoke E is turned down. Then take the end of spoke A, Fig. 12, and lay it over B, C, D, and E, in front of F, behind G, and out between G and H. The end of spoke F is then brought down, also between G and H, but behind the end of A. The end of B takes a similar leap, passes behind H, and out between H and J; then G is brought down behind the end of B, just like F was brought down behind A. The last four or five spokes are the most challenging to manage, as they must be forced through the first ones to align with those already in place. It’s best not to pull the ends of A, B, C, and D down too tightly at first, keeping in mind that the last ones must be inserted under the first ones. The last standing spokes are represented by the full and shaded lines.
If the roll illustrated in Figs. 11 and 12 is too difficult, a simple break-down can be used, such as shown in Fig. 13. To make this finish, spoke A is turned back of spoke B, in front of spoke C and back of spoke D, but not out again. Spoke B is bent back of C, in front of D, and back of E. The others are turned down the same way. The manner in which the two last spokes are turned down and inserted is shown by the double dotted lines.
If the roll shown in Figs. 11 and 12 is too challenging, you can use a simple breakdown, like the one in Fig. 13. To achieve this finish, spoke A goes behind spoke B, in front of spoke C, and then behind spoke D, but doesn’t come out again. Spoke B is bent behind C, in front of D, and behind E. The others are turned down in the same manner. The way the last two spokes are turned down and placed is indicated by the double dotted lines.

A Simple Break-Down Roll for the Top... (Fig. 13, Fig. 14)
A Simple Break-Down Roll for the Top... (Fig. 13, Fig. 14)
The remainder of the illustrations show the method of forming a roll between the first and second spokes, where only three spokes are turned down before the throwing-across process begins. The first three spokes turned down are shown in Fig. 14, and the throwing over, in Fig. 15. The second beginning is shown in Fig. 16. The finishing of this top is shown in Figs. 17 and 18. The full, heavy lines represent the final insertions, and the reed must be in quite a sharp loop to make the end enter the right place. It is then drawn down and forced in front of the other reed that passes out between the same spokes.
The rest of the illustrations show how to create a roll between the first and second spokes, where only three spokes are bent down before the throwing-across process starts. The first three spokes that are bent down are shown in Fig. 14, and the throwing over is illustrated in Fig. 15. The second starting point is depicted in Fig. 16. The finishing of this top is shown in Figs. 17 and 18. The thick, dark lines indicate the final insertions, and the reed needs to be in a sharp loop to ensure the end goes into the correct spot. It is then pulled down and pushed in front of the other reed that passes out between the same spokes.

...Also a Method of Forming a Roll between the First and Second Spokes Where Only Three Spokes are Turned Down Before the Throwing-Across Process Begins (Fig. 15, Fig. 16, Fig. 17, Fig. 18)
...Also a Method of Creating a Roll between the First and Second Spokes Where Only Three Spokes are Bent Down Before the Throwing-Across Process Starts (Fig. 15, Fig. 16, Fig. 17, Fig. 18)
When the basket is dry, the long ends can be cut off close up with a knife, being careful not to cut a weaver. If there are hairy fibers sticking out they can be singed off over a gas, or other, flame that will not smut. If it requires bleaching, brush some chloride of lime, mixed in a little water, over the reeds and set in the sunlight for a short time. It is better to leave the finish a little dark rather than use too much bleaching, as the latter will give an objectionable whitish appearance that looks like a poor job of painting.
When the basket is dry, the long ends can be trimmed close with a knife, being careful not to cut a weaver. If there are fuzzy fibers sticking out, they can be burned off over a gas flame, or another flame that won't leave soot. If it needs bleaching, brush some chloride of lime mixed with a little water over the reeds and set it in the sunlight for a short while. It's better to leave the finish slightly dark rather than use too much bleach, as that will create an unwanted whitish look that resembles a bad paint job.
In working the reeds, do not leave them in the water longer than necessary, as this will turn them dark. A bleached reed will stand the water much longer than in the natural state. Dampen the reed frequently while weaving it, as the weavers pack down much closer when wet. The dampening process is also required to remedy the drying out caused by whisking the reeds through the air in weaving operations. A great variety of baskets can be made from this form, viz., low, tall, tapering vase forms, bowl shapes, etc., in plain or dark weaves.
When working with reeds, don’t leave them in the water longer than necessary, as this will cause them to darken. A bleached reed can stay in the water much longer than one that’s in its natural state. Remember to dampen the reed frequently while you’re weaving because the weavers pack it down much tighter when it's wet. Damping is also important to prevent the reeds from drying out when you whisk them through the air during weaving. You can make a wide variety of baskets from this technique, such as low and tall, tapered vase shapes, bowl shapes, etc., in either plain or dark weaves.
Wireless-Lighted Lamp Deception
Window displays of puzzling nature usually draw crowds. A lighted globe lying on its side in full view, yet apparently not connected to any source of electricity, could easily be arranged as a window display, deceiving the closest observer. A mirror, or window glass, backed with some opaque material, should be used for the foundation of the device. For the display lamp, it is [261] best to use a 25 or 40-watt tungsten, as these will lie flatter on the glass than the larger sizes, and the deception will not be as easily discovered. The place where the brass cap of the lamp touches the glass should be marked and a small hole drilled through to the wire connecting the tungsten filament to the plug on the top of the lamp. At any suitable place, a hole should be drilled in the glass plate, no larger than is necessary, to permit two small cotton-covered magnet wires to pass through. One of the wires should be looped, passed through the hole in the cap and hooked onto the bare wire connecting with the plug on top of lamp. The other wire should be fastened to the brass cap, near the drilled hole, after which the lamp may be placed in position and the two wires connected to a source of electricity. If proper care has been taken and no crosses occur, the lamp will light, and if the display is placed in the proper surroundings, it will prove very deceiving. To protect against a fuse blow-out from a short circuit, it is advisable to run another lamp in series with the display lamp, as shown.—Contributed by Clyde W. Epps, Mineola, Tex.
Window displays that are intriguing usually attract crowds. A lighted globe resting on its side in plain sight, yet seemingly not connected to any power source, can easily be set up as a window display, tricking even the closest observer. A mirror or window glass, backed with some opaque material, should serve as the base for the device. For the display lamp, it's best to use a 25 or 40-watt tungsten bulb, since these will sit flatter on the glass compared to larger sizes, making the trick harder to detect. The spot where the brass cap of the lamp meets the glass should be marked, and a small hole should be drilled through for the wire connecting the tungsten filament to the plug on top of the lamp. At any suitable spot, a hole should be drilled in the glass plate, no larger than necessary, to allow two small cotton-covered magnet wires to pass through. One wire should be looped, passed through the hole in the cap, and hooked onto the bare wire connecting to the plug on top of the lamp. The other wire should be attached to the brass cap, near the drilled hole, after which the lamp can be positioned, and the two wires connected to a power source. If everything is done correctly and no crosses occur, the lamp will light up, and if the display is set in the right surroundings, it will be very convincing. To protect against a fuse blow-out due to a short circuit, it’s advisable to run another lamp in series with the display lamp, as shown.—Contributed by Clyde W. Epps, Mineola, Tex.

An Electric Globe Lighted on a Piece of Glass Makes a Good Window Attraction
An electric globe lit up on a piece of glass makes for a great window display.
Live Bait Used in Fishing
With the simple device illustrated, no fisherman need worry over running short of bait or even regarding the usual repeated baiting of the hook. A small clear-glass bottle should be procured, and several hooks wired to it about the neck, or at each end, as desired or found best after several trials. After filling the bottle with water a live minnow is placed in it, and the bottle is sealed with a cork, which is notched around the edge to permit water to enter or leave the bottle without losing the bait. If live grasshoppers, or similar bait, is desired the cork can be used unnotched to form a watertight stopper. As illuminated bait for night fishing, several fireflies can be put in the bottle.—Contributed by L. Wahrer, Tiffin, Ohio.
With this simple device shown here, fishermen don’t have to worry about running out of bait or constantly re-baiting the hook. You’ll need a small clear glass bottle and some hooks attached to it around the neck or at each end, depending on what works best after a few tries. Fill the bottle with water and place a live minnow inside, then seal it with a cork that has notches around the edge to let water in and out without losing the bait. If you want to use live grasshoppers or similar bait, you can leave the cork unnotched to create a watertight seal. For night fishing, you can add a few fireflies to the bottle as illuminated bait.—Contributed by L. Wahrer, Tiffin, Ohio.

The Bait is Kept Alive and Unharmed in a Bottle Surrounded with Hooks
The bait is kept alive and unharmed in a bottle surrounded by hooks.
Bookrack
The material necessary for the illustrated bookrack is as follows:
The materials needed for the illustrated bookrack are as follows:
2 | end pieces, 5/8 by 5-1/4 by 6 in. |
1 | shelf 5/8 by 5-1/4 by 13 in. |
The shelf is cut rectangular, 5-1/4 in. wide by 14-1/2 in. long. Its two ends should then be provided with tenons 3/8 in. thick by 4-1/4 in. wide, and extending out 1/4 inch.
The shelf is cut into a rectangle, 5-1/4 in. wide by 14-1/2 in. long. Both ends should have tenons that are 3/8 in. thick by 4-1/4 in. wide, extending out 1/4 inch.

A Bookrack That can be Made in Any Wood to Match Other Furniture
A Bookrack That Can Be Made in Any Wood to Match Other Furniture
The end pieces, after being cut to the given dimensions, are marked off and cut out for mortises to fit the shelf tenons.
The end pieces, after being cut to the specified size, are marked and cut out for mortises to fit the shelf tenons.
In assembling the parts, they are [262] glued in place, and clamped with hand screws until the glue has set. Any of the good mission stains, properly applied, will give a finished appearance to the bookrack.
In putting the parts together, they are [262] glued in position and secured with hand screws until the glue dries. Any of the quality mission stains, applied correctly, will provide a polished look to the bookrack.
A Paper Gas Pipe
When one fits up an attic or a back room as a workshop, it is seldom that a gas connection is available on about the same level as the workbench so that a Bunsen burner and soldering apparatus may be operated. To install the standard gas pipe, it would be necessary either to alter the chandelier connection or to tear up some of the plaster, the former plan resulting in a rather conspicuous display of pipe and the latter in considerable expense. The following method permits the rolling of a pipe, about the size of a lead pencil, from paper that becomes so stiff that it is almost impossible to crush it between the thumb and fingers. This small inconspicuous pipe may be run directly from the side of the valve on the chandelier to the wall, as shown in the sketch, thence down some corner formed by a door jamb or window frame, which protects it and renders it almost unnoticeable.
When you set up an attic or a back room as a workshop, it's rare to find a gas connection at the same level as the workbench so you can use a Bunsen burner and soldering tools. Installing a standard gas pipe would either require modifying the chandelier connection or damaging some of the plaster, with the first option creating an obvious display of pipes and the second incurring significant costs. The following method allows you to roll a pipe about the size of a pencil from paper, making it stiff enough that you can hardly crush it with your fingers. This small, inconspicuous pipe can be run directly from the side of the valve on the chandelier to the wall, as illustrated in the sketch, then down a corner formed by a door jamb or window frame, which protects it and makes it almost unnoticeable.

The Tube is Run Out Horizontally from the Chandelier to the Wall Where the Drop is Connected
The tube runs horizontally from the chandelier to the wall where the drop is connected.
A good grade of tough Manila paper should be procured and cut into strips, about 18 in. long and wide enough to build up a tube at least 1/32 in. in diameter. This will require from 4 to 6 in., according to the thickness of the paper. A piece of 1/4-in. round iron or hard wood, 20 in. long, is procured and carefully oiled or greased. Apply a coat of strong fish glue to one of these pieces of paper, omitting a strip along one edge, about 1 in. wide. Using the outspread fingers of each hand, begin with the unglued edge and roll the paper around the wood. As it is impossible to get the paper uniformly tight with the fingers, select a smooth place on the table and then roll the newly formed tube forward by means of a piece of board, as shown in the illustration. On the return stroke lift the board. In this way it is possible to get a tight, smooth tube. Immediately withdraw the core, twisting it slightly in a reverse direction if it tends to stick. Before using the core again, make sure it is free from glue and regrease it. When a sufficient number of tubes have been made and hardened, neatly trim the ends off squarely, and then form an equal number of short tubes, about 2 in. long, by winding a strip of glued paper on a large wire nail until a diameter is reached that will fit snugly into the pipes already made. The joints may then be set up with strong glue and finally wrapped with two thicknesses of paper on the outside. The construction of these joints is shown in the cross section.
A good quality of tough Manila paper should be obtained and cut into strips about 18 inches long and wide enough to create a tube at least 1/32 inch in diameter. This will require 4 to 6 inches, depending on the thickness of the paper. Get a piece of 1/4-inch round iron or hardwood that's 20 inches long, and carefully oil or grease it. Apply a coat of strong fish glue to one of the pieces of paper, leaving a strip about 1 inch wide along one edge unglued. Using the fingers of both hands, start rolling the paper around the wood with the unglued edge. Since it’s hard to get the paper uniformly tight with just your fingers, find a smooth spot on the table and roll the new tube forward with a piece of board, as illustrated. On the return stroke, lift the board. This method helps create a tight, smooth tube. Pull out the core immediately, twisting it slightly in the opposite direction if it sticks. Before using the core again, make sure it’s free of glue and re-grease it. Once you’ve made and hardened enough tubes, trim the ends neatly so they’re square, then create an equal number of short tubes about 2 inches long by winding a strip of glued paper around a large wire nail until it reaches a diameter that snugly fits into the pipes you’ve already made. The joints can then be secured with strong glue and wrapped with two layers of paper on the outside. The construction of these joints is shown in the cross-section.
The connection with the chandelier can be made by means of a metal tube soldered in at a point where the regular valve will cut off all connection with the paper piping when it is not in use. This metal tube should be coated with thick shellac, and the paper tube slipped over it for 1 in. or more, after which the joint should be given several additional coats on the outside. A small regulating gas cock can be [263] attached to the lower end of the piping, and if this is rigidly fastened to the wall, or casing, the connecting and disconnecting of the rubber tubing will not disturb the piping in any way.—Contributed by John D. Adams.
The connection to the chandelier can be made using a metal tube that is soldered at a point where the regular valve will shut off all connections with the paper piping when it’s not in use. This metal tube should be covered with thick shellac, and the paper tube should be slipped over it for at least 1 inch or more, after which the joint should receive several more coats on the outside. A small regulating gas cock can be [263] attached to the lower end of the piping, and if this is securely fastened to the wall or casing, connecting and disconnecting the rubber tubing will not disturb the piping at all.—Contributed by John D. Adams.
Rubbing Slats for a Washing Board
In an emergency, and to substitute something for a broken glass rubbing plate on an ordinary washing board, I fitted a series of 3/8-in. dowels horizontally across the board, closely together. This proved to be better than glass or zinc, as fabrics adhered to the wood dowels and caused them to revolve, making a more desirable rubbing surface and accomplishing the work of loosening the dirt in the fabric with far less effort than that necessary on the metal or glass board.—Contributed by H. M. Spamer, Vineland, N. J.
In an emergency, when I needed a replacement for a broken glass rubbing plate on a regular washing board, I installed a series of 3/8-inch dowels horizontally across the board, placed closely together. This turned out to be better than glass or zinc, as fabrics stuck to the wooden dowels and caused them to turn, creating a more effective rubbing surface and making it easier to loosen dirt from the fabric compared to using a metal or glass board.—Contributed by H. M. Spamer, Vineland, N. J.
Catching Bugs Attracted by Light

Bugs, moths, and insects attracted by lights on summer evenings can be caught by means of sticky fly paper, suspended as shades around the lamps. Cuts in the shade allow the greater portion of the light to pass through and attract the bugs, which will surely be caught as they travel about the light onto the sticky paper. It is advisable to make two shades at the same time from a double sheet of the sticky paper, pasted, as when bought, with the sticky faces together so that the shades may be cut and handled easier.—Contributed by John J. Kolar, Maywood, Illinois.
Bugs, moths, and insects drawn to lights on summer evenings can be caught using sticky fly paper, hung as shades around the lamps. Cuts in the shade let most of the light pass through to attract the bugs, which will definitely get caught as they move toward the light and onto the sticky paper. It's a good idea to make two shades at the same time from a double sheet of sticky paper, stuck together like when you buy it, so that the shades can be cut and handled more easily.—Contributed by John J. Kolar, Maywood, Illinois.
Oilcans should be marked to indicate the kind of oil in them.
Oil cans should be labeled to show what type of oil is inside.
Needle Box for Talking Machines
An empty cigarette box can be easily changed to a useful container for talking-machine needles, as shown in the sketch. Take a fairly heavy card, trim it to the same length as the box, then bend and crease it, as shown at A, and glue the short, upright side to the inside of the box. Cut another card to the shape B, so that the depth C equals the inside depth of the box, and the side D is as long as its width. The side E should equal the inclined length of the card A, and is glued upon it when B is in position. The three compartments may be suitably labeled as indicated.—Contributed by V. A. Rettich, New York, N. Y.
An empty cigarette box can easily be turned into a useful container for talking-machine needles, as shown in the sketch. Take a fairly thick piece of cardboard, trim it to the same length as the box, then fold and crease it as shown at A, and glue the short, upright side to the inside of the box. Cut another piece of cardboard to the shape B, so that the depth C matches the inside depth of the box, and the side D is as long as its width. The side E should match the angled length of the card A and is glued onto it when B is in place. The three compartments can be labeled as indicated.—Contributed by V. A. Rettich, New York, N. Y.

Three Compartments are Provided with Sloping Bottoms in a Neat Box for the Needles
Three compartments are provided with sloped bottoms in a neat box for the needles.
Trick of Taking Dollar Bill from Apple
A rather pleasing, yet puzzling, deception is to pass a dollar bill into the interior of an examined lemon or apple. This can be accomplished in several ways, either mechanically or purely by sleight of hand. The mechanical [264] method, of course, is the easier and really just as effective. In performing, a plate with three apples is first exhibited, and the audience is given choice of any one for use in the experiment. The selected one is tossed out for examination and then returned to the performer, who places it in full view of the spectators while he makes the dollar bill vanish. Taking the knife he cuts the apple into two pieces, requesting the audience to select one of them. Squeezing this piece he extracts the dollar bill therefrom. The entire secret is in the unsuspected article—the table knife.
A pretty cool but tricky trick is to slip a dollar bill inside a checked lemon or apple. You can do this in a few ways, either using a mechanical method or just sleight of hand. The mechanical method is definitely easier and just as effective. To perform it, you show a plate with three apples and let the audience choose any one for the trick. The chosen apple is tossed out for inspection and then handed back to the performer, who keeps it visible to the audience while making the dollar bill disappear. Using a knife, the performer cuts the apple in half and asks the audience to pick one of the halves. When squeezing that half, the dollar bill is revealed. The whole secret lies in the unsuspecting item—the table knife.

The Dollar Bill is Hidden in the Knife Handle That Cuts the Apple
The dollar bill is hidden in the knife handle that cuts the apple.
The knife is prepared by boring out the wooden handle to make it hollow. Enough space must be made to hold a dollar bill. The knife lies on the plate with the fruit, the open end facing the performer. After the bill has been made to vanish and the examined apple returned to the entertainer, he takes it and cuts it in half. One of the halves is chosen, the performer impaling it on the end of the knife blade and holding it out to view. While still holding the knife he turns the blade downward and grasps the half apple and crushes it with a slight pass toward the knife-handle end where the bill is grasped along with the apple, which makes a perfect illusion of taking the bill out of the apple.
The knife is prepared by hollowing out the wooden handle. There needs to be enough space to hold a dollar bill. The knife rests on the plate with the fruit, the open end facing the performer. After the bill has been made to disappear and the examined apple is given back to the entertainer, he takes it and cuts it in half. One of the halves is selected, and the performer pierces it with the end of the knife blade and holds it up for everyone to see. While still holding the knife, he turns the blade downward and squeezes the half apple with a slight movement towards the handle of the knife, where he holds the bill along with the apple, creating a perfect illusion of pulling the bill out of the apple.
As to the disappearance of the dollar bill, there are many ways in which this may be accomplished. Perhaps the method requiring the least practice is to place the bill in the trousers pocket, and then show the audience that the latter is empty. This can be done by rolling the bill to small compass, and pushing it into the extreme upper corner of the pocket where it will remain undetected while the pocket is pulled out for inspection. Other combinations can be arranged with the use of the knife, which is simple to make and very inexpensive.
As for getting rid of the dollar bill, there are several ways to do it. One of the easiest methods is to put the bill in your pants pocket and then show the audience that the pocket is empty. You can roll up the bill tightly and push it into the far upper corner of the pocket, where it won't be seen when you pull the pocket out for inspection. Other tricks can be set up using a knife, which is easy to make and very affordable.
Guide for Making Buttonholes
It is almost impossible to make a perfect buttonhole in the ordinary manner by hand without a guide. The illustration shows a very simple guide that can be easily made by anyone. Procure two pieces of tin, or sheet brass, cut them as shown, and drill holes in them large enough for a needle, so that it will be easy to fasten them to the cloth with basting thread. Cut the buttonhole slot, then punch a hole at the end with an ordinary belt punch. Such a punch can be purchased from a local hardware dealer in any size. In making the buttonhole stitch, keep the needle close against the metal edge of the guide, as shown.—Contributed by A. L. Kerbaugh, Allentown, Pa.
It’s almost impossible to make a perfect buttonhole by hand in the usual way without a guide. The illustration shows a very simple guide that anyone can easily make. Get two pieces of tin or sheet brass, cut them as shown in the image, and drill holes big enough for a needle so that you can easily attach them to the fabric with basting thread. Cut the buttonhole slot, then punch a hole at the end using a standard belt punch. You can buy such a punch from a local hardware store in any size. When making the buttonhole stitch, keep the needle close against the metal edge of the guide, as shown. —Contributed by A. L. Kerbaugh, Allentown, Pa.

The Form of the Buttonhole is Cut in the Edges of the Two Pieces of Metal
The shape of the buttonhole is cut into the edges of the two pieces of metal.
An easy way to put varnish in the grooves of a tennis racket is to use a medicine dropper.
An easy way to apply varnish in the grooves of a tennis racket is to use a medicine dropper.
A Child's Playhouse
The child's playhouse is an expensive luxury, if it is purchased ready to set up, but by following the instructions given herewith a large and inexpensive one may be constructed.
The child's playhouse can be a pricey luxury if you buy it ready-made, but by following the instructions provided here, you can build a large and affordable one.

The Covered Framework can be Used In or Outdoors, as Desired, and When Set Up and the Wings Swung Back, It Presents the Appearance of a House
The Covered Framework can be used indoors or outdoors, as desired, and when set up with the wings swung back, it looks like a house.
Procure about 100 ft. of 1-3/4 by 1-1/2-in. boards, and saw out pieces, as shown. With the use of iron brackets instead of nails, it will be found much easier to construct than if the corners are mortised and nailed or glued. The frame will also be much stronger.
Get about 100 ft. of 1-3/4 by 1-1/2-in. boards and cut out pieces as shown. Using iron brackets instead of nails makes it much easier to build than if the corners are mortised, nailed, or glued. The frame will also be a lot stronger.

The Entire Framework is Held Together with Brackets, and is Hinged at the Joints, so That It can be Folded Up and Put into a Small Space, the Sections being Covered with Colored Burlap to Make Them Appear Solid... (Fig. 1)
The whole structure is held together with brackets and hinged at the joints so it can be folded up and stored in a small space, with sections covered in colored burlap to make them look solid... (Fig. 1)
When the frame is completed, burlap is tacked on to make the covering. The burlap can be purchased cheaply, and the best color to use is either green, red or brown. This material should be fastened on the different sections before they are hinged together. To prevent the burlap from unraveling, turn the edges under before tacking them down.
When the frame is done, burlap is attached to create the covering. The burlap is inexpensive, and the best colors to choose are either green, red, or brown. This material should be secured on the different sections before they are connected with hinges. To stop the burlap from fraying, fold the edges under before tacking them down.
[266] A piece of wire screen is used for the door. An old piece will do, if it is well coated with black or dark-green paint. It is then tacked on the inside of the door. Fasten the different parts together with the hinges. The hinges are fastened on the inside of the side wings, and on the outside of the two front pieces. With the hinges placed in this manner, the house can be folded into a small space.
[266] A piece of wire mesh is used for the door. An old piece works fine, as long as it's well coated with black or dark green paint. It's then attached to the inside of the door. Connect the different parts together with hinges. The hinges are attached to the inside of the side panels and on the outside of the two front pieces. With the hinges positioned this way, the house can be folded up into a compact size.
For the one built by the writer, green burlap was used, and by trimming the door and window frames along the edges with white paint a very pretty effect was produced.
For the one made by the writer, green burlap was used, and by trimming the door and window frames along the edges with white paint, a really nice effect was created.

...On the Right is Shown the Awning-Frame Construction (Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
...On the Right is Shown the Awning-Frame Construction (Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A small awning was made over the window, which improved the appearance very much. Roller shades on the door and window and an electric door bell completed a very neat and practical playhouse.
A small awning was put up over the window, which really enhanced its look. Roller shades on the door and window, along with an electric doorbell, made for a tidy and functional playhouse.
Removing Basketball from Closed-Bottom Receptacle
The closed-bottom basket used in the game of basketball is so high that it is difficult to remove the ball after a goal is made. Generally a long stick is used for this purpose, but I desired to have a better way, and the device shown in the illustration was the outcome. A light iron rod was hinged to the edge of the basket and bent to its inner shape, the lower end resting at about the center of the basket. A rope was attached to the lower end and run up and over a sheave pulley attached to the basket support, then down so it could be easily grasped. When a goal is made, it is only necessary to give a pull on the rope for throwing the ball out of the basket.—Contributed by Annie B. Currine, San Diego, Cal.
The closed-bottom basket used in basketball is so high that it's hard to retrieve the ball after a goal is scored. Typically, a long stick is used for this, but I wanted a better solution, and the device shown in the illustration is what I came up with. A lightweight iron rod is hinged to the edge of the basket and shaped to fit its interior, with the lower end resting near the center of the basket. A rope is attached to the lower end and runs up over a sheave pulley connected to the basket support, then down so it can be easily grabbed. When a goal is scored, you just need to pull on the rope to release the ball from the basket.—Contributed by Annie B. Currine, San Diego, Cal.

The Iron Rod in the Basket Throws the Ball Out When the Rope is Pulled
The Iron Rod in the Basket Throws the Ball Out When the Rope is Pulled
Testing Dry Batteries
For testing dry batteries or any low-voltage current, take an ordinary thermometer and wind around the mercury bulb enough wire to make about 10 ohms resistance. This will make a good tester. A dry cell of about 2 volts attached to the ends of the wire should generate enough heat to expand the mercury about four degrees in one-half minute.
For testing dry batteries or any low-voltage current, take a regular thermometer and wrap enough wire around the mercury bulb to create about 10 ohms of resistance. This will create a decent tester. A dry cell of about 2 volts connected to the ends of the wire should produce enough heat to raise the mercury by about four degrees in half a minute.
This tester is not as fast as a voltmeter, nor has it as wide a range, but it is reasonably accurate, and by using a battery of known voltage, the winding can be increased or diminished to allow the mercury to expand as many degrees as desired per volt.—Contributed by E. H. Kimbrough, Bartlett, Kan.
This tester isn’t as quick as a voltmeter, nor does it have as wide of a range, but it’s fairly accurate. By using a battery with a known voltage, the winding can be adjusted to let the mercury expand as much as needed for each volt. —Contributed by E. H. Kimbrough, Bartlett, Kan.
A Wall-Paper Cleaner
To 1 qt. of flour add about 2 oz. of 90-per-cent ammonia and enough lukewarm water to make a dough. Wipe the paper with this preparation while turning and kneading it as in making dough. This will take up the dirt and a clean side is always presented to the paper.—Contributed by F. C. Myer, Tacoma, Wash.
To 1 quart of flour, add about 2 ounces of 90% ammonia and enough lukewarm water to form a dough. Wipe the paper with this mixture while turning and kneading it like dough. This will lift the dirt, and a clean side is always presented to the paper.—Contributed by F. C. Myer, Tacoma, Wash.
A Trunk Mystery
Doubtless every person has seen the trunk mystery, the effect of which is as follows: A trunk, mounted upon four legs, is brought out on the stage and proven to be empty by turning it all the way around to show that there is nothing on the back, whereupon pieces of plate glass are placed along the back, sides, and front, the trunk is closed and given a swift turn and then opened, when to the amazement of all, a lady steps out appearing to come from nowhere. The secret of this trick is very simple, and the trunk can be made up very cheaply.
Surely everyone has seen the trunk trick, which works like this: A trunk, set on four legs, is brought onto the stage and shown to be empty by rotating it completely to prove there's nothing at the back. Then, pieces of plate glass are placed along the back, sides, and front. The trunk is closed, spun quickly, and then opened, when, to everyone's astonishment, a lady steps out as if she came from nowhere. The secret behind this trick is quite simple, and the trunk can be made quite cheaply.

A Shelf and Panel Set at Right Angles to Form a Place at the Back for the Assistant to Conceal Herself, No Matter Which Way the Trunk is Turned to Face the Audience
A shelf and panel set at right angles to create a space at the back for the assistant to hide, regardless of how the trunk faces the audience.
In the back of the trunk there is a movable panel with a shelf exactly the same size as the panel attached to its bottom, forming a right angle, the corner of which is hinged to the bottom of the trunk. The back panel can be turned in until it rests on the bottom of the trunk and, when this is done, the shelf part rises and takes its place, making the back of the trunk appear solid.
In the back of the trunk, there's a movable panel with a shelf that's the same size as the panel attached to the bottom, forming a right angle, with the corner hinged to the bottom of the trunk. The back panel can be flipped in until it lies flat on the bottom of the trunk, and when that happens, the shelf portion rises and takes its place, making the back of the trunk look solid.

When the trunk is brought out upon the stage, the assistant is crouching on the shelf. The trunk can then be shown empty. This is all very simple until the trunk is turned around when it takes skill not to give the trick away. As soon as the performer starts to turn the trunk around, the assistant shifts her weight on the panel, thus causing it to fall inward and bring the shelf up to make the back appear solid. The assistant is now in the trunk, and the back can be shown clear of any apparatus. When the trunk is turned to the front again, [268] the lady repeats the previous operation in the opposite direction, thus bringing her body to the back of the trunk again.
When the trunk is brought out on stage, the assistant is crouching on the shelf. The trunk can then be shown to be empty. This is all very straightforward until the trunk is turned around, at which point it takes skill to avoid revealing the trick. As soon as the performer starts to turn the trunk around, the assistant shifts her weight on the panel, causing it to fall inward and raise the shelf, making the back seem solid. The assistant is now inside the trunk, and the back can be shown free of any equipment. When the trunk is turned to face the front again, [268] the lady repeats the previous operation in reverse, bringing her body back to the back of the trunk again.
To make the trick appear more difficult, glass plates are made to insert in the ends, front and back of the trunk. In making the trunk, have the back the same size as the bottom. Fit the piece of glass for the back into a light frame, similar to a window frame. This frame is hinged to the bottom of the trunk and is 1/2 in. smaller all around than the back of the trunk, so that the two pieces of glass can be put in the ends and also allow the back frame and glass to fall flush in the bottom of the trunk. A few rubber bumpers are fastened in the bottom of the trunk to catch the glass without noise as it falls. The best way to work this is for the performer to let the frame down with his right hand while he is closing up the front with his left.
To make the trick seem harder, glass plates are inserted at the front and back ends of the trunk. When building the trunk, ensure the back is the same size as the bottom. Fit the piece of glass for the back into a light frame, like a window frame. This frame is hinged to the bottom of the trunk and is 1/2 inch smaller all around than the back of the trunk so that the two glass pieces can be placed at the ends and allow the back frame and glass to lie flat in the bottom of the trunk. A few rubber bumpers are attached to the bottom of the trunk to catch the glass silently as it falls. The best way to do this is for the performer to lower the frame with their right hand while closing up the front with their left.
As soon as the trunk is closed, the assistant again shifts her weight to cause the panel to fall in and then the trunk can be turned to show the back, or whirled around and turned to the front again, then opened up, whereupon the assistant steps out, bows to the audience, and leaves the stage.
As soon as the trunk is closed, the assistant shifts her weight again to make the panel fall in, and then the trunk can be turned to show the back, or spun around to the front again. Then it gets opened up, and the assistant steps out, bows to the audience, and leaves the stage.
How to Make a Candy-Floss Machine
Every person is familiar with candy floss, made at stands on fair grounds, or carnivals, in an expensive whirling machine. It is not necessary to wait for a fair or a carnival to have a bunch of candy floss, as it can be made at home much quicker than making taffy candy.
Every person knows about cotton candy, made at booths at fairs or carnivals using an expensive spinning machine. You don't have to wait for a fair or a carnival to enjoy some cotton candy, as it can be made at home much faster than making taffy.

The device for making the candy floss consists of ordinary things that can be had in any home, and usually a boy has a battery motor of some kind that will furnish the power.
The machine for making cotton candy is made up of regular items that anyone can find at home, and typically, a kid has some sort of battery-powered motor that can provide the energy.

The Disk is Driven by a Small Battery Motor and Melted Sugar is Spun Out into Floss
The disk is powered by a small battery motor, and melted sugar is spun out into cotton candy.
Procure a tin pan, the shape of an ordinary dish pan and of medium size; cut a hole about one-half the diameter of the pan in the bottom and solder in a conical-shaped piece similar to a cake pan, allowing it to extend up inside about half the height of the pan. Fasten supports to the pan so that a Bunsen burner can be set under it where the flame will pass through the conical center opening.
Get a medium-sized tin pan that's shaped like a standard dish pan. Cut a hole in the bottom that's about half the diameter of the pan and solder in a cone-shaped piece similar to a cake pan, making sure it extends up about half the height of the pan. Attach supports to the pan so you can place a Bunsen burner underneath it, allowing the flame to go through the conical opening in the center.
Mount a small battery motor with its shaft vertical, pulley end up, and centering the conical hole, on a base, which supports the pan. Procure a can cover, similar to that used on coffee cans, and fasten it with solder to the pulley on the motor shaft, being careful to locate it centrally so that it will run smoothly.
Mount a small battery motor with its shaft vertical, pulley end up, and centering the conical hole, on a base that supports the pan. Get a can lid, like the ones used on coffee cans, and securely attach it with solder to the pulley on the motor shaft, making sure to position it centrally so that it runs smoothly.
Close to the bottom and in the rim of the can cover, make a number of small holes with a prickpunch, or other sharp-pointed tool. Wire the motor to the battery, and the candy-floss machine is ready for use.
Near the bottom and on the edge of the can cover, create several small holes using a punch or another sharp tool. Connect the motor to the battery, and the cotton candy machine is ready to go.
Light the burner, start the motor, and pour a little granulated sugar in the revolving can cover. As the sugar is melted, it will be spun out in floss [269] form through the small holes into the pan receiver.—Contributed by Herbert Hahn, Chicago, Ill.
Light the burner, start the motor, and pour some granulated sugar into the revolving can cover. As the sugar melts, it will be spun out in floss form through the small holes into the pan receiver. [269] —Contributed by Herbert Hahn, Chicago, Ill.
Enlarging Pictures
A very simple and sufficiently accurate way of enlarging pictures by means of a pencil holder and elastic is shown in the illustration. The picture to be enlarged is fastened to a table top or drawing board, and the paper on which it is to be drawn is placed directly below it. A small brad or tack is driven into the board at A, the location depending on the desired size of the enlarged picture, and the elastic is attached to it. The pencil holder B is fastened to the other end of the elastic over the drawing paper. A pointer, or a knot, is placed in the elastic at C. The pencil holder consists of a stick of wood turned into a handle with a hole bored centrally for a pencil.
A really simple and quite accurate way to enlarge pictures using a pencil holder and elastic is shown in the illustration. The picture that needs to be enlarged is attached to a tabletop or drawing board, and the paper for the new drawing is placed directly underneath it. A small brad or tack is driven into the board at A, with its position depending on how large you want the enlarged picture to be, and the elastic is connected to it. The pencil holder B is secured to the other end of the elastic over the drawing paper. A pointer, or a knot, is placed in the elastic at C. The pencil holder is made from a piece of wood shaped into a handle with a hole drilled in the center for the pencil.

The Size of the Enlarged Picture Depends on the Length of the Elastic and the Spacing of Pencil and Pointer
The size of the enlarged picture depends on the length of the elastic and the spacing between the pencil and the pointer.
In use, the pencil is moved over the drawing paper while the knot or pointer is watched, to keep it following the lines of the original drawing. The stretch of the elastic is sufficient to enlarge the parts equally, as well vertically as horizontally.—Contributed by Wm. Weitzsacker, Buffalo, N. Y.
In use, the pencil is moved over the drawing paper while keeping an eye on the knot or pointer to ensure it follows the lines of the original drawing. The stretch of the elastic is enough to enlarge the parts equally, both vertically and horizontally.—Contributed by Wm. Weitzsacker, Buffalo, N. Y.
Distance Chart for Wireless Stations
The amateur wireless telegrapher may be troubled more or less regarding distances from other stations. The difficulty can be overcome by following a plan similar to that of a parcel-post map. A map should be selected covering the desired territory. With the home station as center, circles should be drawn to diameters corresponding in length to the scale used on the map. By measuring the distance other stations may be from any of these circles, their cross-country distance from the home station can be determined at a glance.—Contributed by E. L. Hartlett, Wausau, Wis.
The amateur radio operator might have some concerns about distances to other stations. This issue can be addressed by using a method similar to a parcel-post map. Choose a map that covers the area you’re interested in. With your home station at the center, draw circles with diameters that match the scale used on the map. By measuring how far other stations are from these circles, you can quickly figure out their distance from your home station. —Contributed by E. L. Hartlett, Wausau, Wis.

Circles on a Map the Same as for Parcel Post to Designate Wireless Distances
Circles on a map are the same as those used for parcel post to indicate wireless distances.
A Carrier for Fishhooks
Hooks that are attached to gut or short strings are difficult to carry and to keep in good shape for use on a line. I made a carrier that overcame this trouble, from a block of wood. The block is 1/2 in. in thickness with brads driven into one end, for engaging the loops on the gut or string, while the hook is caught on the opposite end, the block being just long enough for the short line. The hooks will be held securely, and the block can be carried in the pocket.—Contributed by Victor E. Carpenter, South Bend, Ind.
Hooks attached to gut or short strings are hard to carry and keep in good condition for use on a line. I made a carrier from a block of wood that solves this problem. The block is 1/2 inch thick with brads driven into one end to hold the loops on the gut or string, while the hook is secured on the other end, the block being just long enough for the short line. The hooks will be held securely, and the block can easily fit in your pocket.—Contributed by Victor E. Carpenter, South Bend, Ind.

The String is Drawn Taut over the Block, and the Hooks are Caught in the Block End
The string is pulled tight over the block, and the hooks are hooked onto the block end.
A Substitute for a Pen
Recently I was hard pressed for a pen, and as none could be found and the hour was late it was necessary to find a substitute. I fashioned a pen from a piece of boxwood, and was agreeably surprised at the excellent results obtained with it. The wood was sharpened like a lead pencil at one end, and a groove was cut out of the tapered part to hold the ink.—Contributed by Richard F. Pohle, Lynn, Massachusetts.
Recently, I was in need of a pen, and since I couldn't find one and it was getting late, I had to come up with a substitute. I made a pen out of a piece of boxwood, and I was pleasantly surprised by how well it worked. I sharpened one end like a lead pencil, and I carved a groove in the tapered part to hold the ink.—Contributed by Richard F. Pohle, Lynn, Massachusetts.

A Notch Cut in the Tapered Part of a Wood Stick Forms a Substitute Pen
A notch cut in the tapered part of a wooden stick creates a substitute pen.
A very convenient method of keeping shipping tags at hand is to slip them on a desk spindle.
A really handy way to keep shipping tags accessible is to slide them onto a desk spindle.
A Bucket-Ball Game
This is a new indoor game which follows out in principle the regular baseball play. It is an exciting and interesting pastime, and while a certain amount of skill is required to score runs, a person who cannot play the regular game can score as many runs, and as often, as the best players in the national leagues.
This is a new indoor game that basically follows the rules of regular baseball. It's an exciting and interesting activity, and while you need some skill to score runs, even someone who can't play the traditional game can score just as many runs, as frequently, as the top players in the national leagues.

The Frame is Made Up without a Back, to Hold the Buckets at an Angle That Makes It Difficult to Toss the Ball So That It will Stay in Any One of Them (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
The frame is designed without a back, to hold the buckets at an angle that makes it hard to throw the ball so it stays in any one of them (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Anyone that is just a little handy with tools can make the necessary parts for this game. The tools required are a hammer and a saw, and the materials consist of some finishing nails; three strips of wood, 6 ft. long, 2 in. wide, and 1 in. thick; two strips, 18 in. long, 4 in. wide, and 1 in. thick; four strips, 24 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 1 in. thick; two strips, 18 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 1 in. thick; two blocks, 4 in. square, and 1 in. thick, and four wood buckets.
Anyone who’s a bit handy with tools can create the necessary parts for this game. You’ll need a hammer and a saw, and the materials include some finishing nails, three strips of wood that are 6 ft long, 2 in wide, and 1 in thick; two strips that are 18 in long, 4 in wide, and 1 in thick; four strips that are 24 in long, 2 in wide, and 1 in thick; two strips that are 18 in long, 2 in wide, and 1 in thick; two blocks that are 4 in square and 1 in thick; and four wood buckets.
[271] A frame is built up as shown, 6 ft. long, 18 in. wide, and 24 in. high, without a back. One of the long pieces is fastened to the bottoms of the buckets as shown, spacing the latter equally on the length of the piece. This piece is then set in notches cut in the blocks of wood at an angle of 45. These blocks are fastened to the upper crosspieces at the ends of the frame. The upper part of the buckets rest on the upper front piece of the frame.
[271] A frame is constructed as shown, 6 ft. long, 18 in. wide, and 24 in. high, without a back. One of the long pieces is attached to the bottoms of the buckets as illustrated, spacing them equally along the length of the piece. This piece is then set into notches cut into the wood blocks at a 45-degree angle. These blocks are secured to the upper crosspieces at the ends of the frame. The upper part of the buckets rests on the upper front piece of the frame.

The Player must Throw the Ball So That It will Enter and Stay in One of the Buckets, Which Designates the Base Hits by the Number in Its Bottom
The player must throw the ball so that it will enter and stay in one of the buckets, which indicates the base hits by the number on its bottom.
The rules for playing the game are as follows: Three baseballs are used. The players stand about 10 ft. distant and in front of the buckets. Each player, or side, is only permitted to throw three balls an inning, irrespective of the number of runs scored. Any kind of delivery is permitted, but an underhand throw will be found most successful. The buckets are numbered from 1 to 4, and represent, respectively, one, two, and three-base hits, and home runs. The one in which the ball stays designates the run.
The rules for playing the game are as follows: Three baseballs are used. The players stand about 10 feet apart in front of the buckets. Each player or team can only throw three balls per inning, regardless of how many runs are scored. Any type of throw is allowed, but an underhand throw tends to be the most effective. The buckets are numbered 1 to 4 and represent one, two, and three-base hits, as well as home runs. The bucket where the ball lands indicates the run.
Plays are figured as in a regular ball game. For instance, if a ball should stay in bucket No. 2 and the next in bucket No. 3, the first man would be forced home, counting one run, and leaving one man on third base.
Plays are imagined like a regular ball game. For example, if a ball lands in bucket No. 2 and the next one in bucket No. 3, the first person would have to go home, scoring one run, and leaving one person on third base.
If the next ball stays in bucket No. 4, the man on third base is forced home, as well as the one who scored the home run, making three runs for that inning. The runs should be scored as made, to guard against confusion and argument.—Contributed by Walter Talley, Pottsville, Pa.
If the next ball lands in bucket No. 4, the guy on third base has to head home, along with the one who hit the home run, resulting in three runs for that inning. The runs should be recorded as they happen to avoid any confusion or disputes. —Contributed by Walter Talley, Pottsville, Pa.
A Staple Puller

With nothing but ordinary tools the removing of staples is tedious and difficult work. If a suitable-sized wire nail is bent like a fishhook and the hook part driven under the staple, the latter can be easily pulled out by grasping and pulling the nail with a hammer in the usual way.—Contributed by R. Neland, Minneapolis, Minn.
With just regular tools, getting rid of staples is slow and tough work. If you bend a wire nail to make it look like a fishhook and drive the hooked part under the staple, you can easily pull it out by grabbing the nail and using a hammer as you normally would.—Contributed by R. Neland, Minneapolis, Minn.
A Dissolving Coin Trick
This is a very simple and effective trick. The articles required to perform the trick are, a glass of water, a silver dollar, a handkerchief and a watch crystal, or round piece of glass, the size of a silver dollar. Conceal the crystal in the palm of the hand and show the audience the dollar. Hold the handkerchief in one hand and place the hand holding the silver dollar and crystal under it so that the crystal can be grasped by the hand holding the handkerchief. Remove the dollar by holding it in the palm of the hand and slip it, unobserved, into a pocket.
This is a really simple and effective trick. To perform it, you'll need a glass of water, a silver dollar, a handkerchief, and either a watch crystal or a round piece of glass that's the same size as a silver dollar. Hide the crystal in your palm and show the audience the dollar. Hold the handkerchief in one hand and position the hand with the silver dollar and crystal underneath it so that the crystal can be held by the hand with the handkerchief. Take the dollar by holding it in your palm and discreetly slip it into your pocket.
Ask some one in the audience to hold the handkerchief with the inclosed crystal and ask him to let it drop into the glass of water as the handkerchief covers both. The falling glass can be heard, but upon removing the handkerchief nothing can be seen of the dollar or watch crystal. The circular glass disk cannot be seen in the water.—Contributed by Albert Biery, Spokane, Wash.
Ask someone in the audience to hold the handkerchief with the enclosed crystal and ask them to let it drop into the glass of water while the handkerchief covers it. You can hear the glass fall, but when you remove the handkerchief, you won’t see the dollar or watch crystal. The circular glass disk won’t be visible in the water.—Contributed by Albert Biery, Spokane, Wash.
A Fruit-Jar Opener
The accompanying sketch shows a handy device for turning up and unscrewing the covers on glass fruit jars. The loop is slipped over the cover and the handle turned in the direction of the arrow. To unscrew the cover, the tool is turned over and the handle turned in the opposite direction.
The accompanying sketch shows a handy tool for tightening and loosening the lids on glass fruit jars. The loop goes over the lid, and you turn the handle in the direction of the arrow. To loosen the lid, flip the tool over and turn the handle in the opposite direction.

The Loop in the Leather Grips the Cap Tightly When the Handle is Turned as the Arrow Indicates
The loop in the leather holds the cap tightly when the handle is turned, as the arrow shows.
The loop should be just large enough to slip over the cover easily. It is made of leather and fastened to the wood handle with screws.—Contributed by J. B. Downer, Seattle, Wash.
The loop should be just big enough to slide over the cover easily. It's made of leather and attached to the wooden handle with screws. —Contributed by J. B. Downer, Seattle, Wash.
Anti-Tangle Safety Pin
A small disk of rubber or leather, placed on a safety pin as shown in Fig. 1, will prevent the fabric which is fastened by the pin from becoming tangled in the spring loop. The manner of using the pin is shown in Fig. 2.
A small disk made of rubber or leather, positioned on a safety pin as shown in Fig. 1, will stop the fabric that the pin secures from getting tangled in the spring loop. The way to use the pin is illustrated in Fig. 2.

The Small Disk on the Pin Prevents the Goods from Becoming Tangled in the Coil
The small disk on the pin keeps the goods from getting tangled in the coil.
How to Nickel or Silverplate Iron by Friction
The following methods of plating iron with nickel and silver appeared in a recent issue of a German paper. In nickelplating iron, a thin coating of copper is first produced on it by rubbing on a solution of 20 parts sulphate of copper, 5 parts sulphuric acid and 100 parts of water. After the copper plate has been formed rub over it, with a rag, a solution of 3 parts tin, 6 parts nickel and 1 part iron in 100 parts of hydrochloric acid and 3 parts of sulphuric acid. If finally the object is rubbed with a rag that has been dipped in finely pulverized zinc, a nickel deposit will be formed on the copper. The thickness of the deposit of nickel can be increased by repeating the two last operations.
The following methods for plating iron with nickel and silver were recently published in a German paper. For nickel plating iron, start by applying a thin layer of copper by rubbing a solution made of 20 parts copper sulfate, 5 parts sulfuric acid, and 100 parts water onto the iron. Once the copper layer is formed, use a rag to apply a solution of 3 parts tin, 6 parts nickel, and 1 part iron mixed in 100 parts hydrochloric acid and 3 parts sulfuric acid. Finally, if the object is rubbed with a rag dipped in finely powdered zinc, a nickel coating will form over the copper. The thickness of the nickel layer can be increased by repeating the last two steps.
According to a recent patent, a silver coating can be produced by dissolving freshly precipitated chloride of silver in a solution of hyposulphite of soda, 1.1 parts to 10 parts of water, and adding to this solution 180 parts spirits of sal ammoniac and then stirring in 800 parts of finely washed chalk. This mixture is applied and rubbed until it dries on the object being silvered, and the result is a brilliant deposit of pure silver.
According to a recent patent, you can create a silver coating by dissolving freshly made silver chloride in a solution of sodium hyposulfite, using 1.1 parts to 10 parts of water, and then adding 180 parts of ammonium chloride. After that, mix in 800 parts of finely washed chalk. This mixture is applied and rubbed onto the object being silvered until it dries, resulting in a brilliant layer of pure silver.
A good filling for cracks in old furniture is made of shellac, either melted by heat or dissolved in alcohol to make a thick paste.
A good filler for cracks in old furniture is made from shellac, either melted with heat or dissolved in alcohol to create a thick paste.
A Homemade Cradle
The cradle shown in the sketch can be made quickly and easily at home and will be found far more serviceable than, and possessing several advantages over, the ones purchased. It is made of a clothes basket, an iron rod and two ordinary chairs. It can be taken down and the parts used for other purposes. The upper portion of the rod prevents the chairs from slipping. A light cloth can be placed over the rod, in tent fashion, to keep flies out, while at the same time permitting air for ventilation.—Contributed by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.
The cradle shown in the sketch can be made quickly and easily at home and is much more practical than the ones you buy, offering several advantages. It's made from a clothes basket, an iron rod, and two regular chairs. You can take it apart and use the parts for other things. The upper part of the rod keeps the chairs from sliding. A light cloth can be draped over the rod like a tent to keep flies out while still allowing airflow for ventilation.—Contributed by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.

A Clothes Basket Supported with a Rod between Two Chairs Makes a Good Cradle
A laundry basket propped up with a rod between two chairs makes a good cradle.
A Removable Post

It is often desirable to have football and baseball grounds in public parks roped in during the game, but after the game the ropes and stakes must be removed. To drive in iron stakes and then remove them is hard work and requires considerable time. The sketch shows a much better way. A piece of 2-in. pipe, about 18 in. long, is sunk level with the ground in the right location for a post. The post is made of 1-1/2-in. pipe of the length desired. This will just fit inside of the 2-in. pipe. A wood plug is fitted in the upper end of the pipe in the ground to keep out dirt when the post is removed.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
It’s often useful to have football and baseball fields in public parks cordoned off during games, but after the games, the ropes and stakes need to be taken down. Hammering in iron stakes and then pulling them out is tough work and takes a lot of time. The sketch shows a much better solution. A piece of 2-inch pipe, about 18 inches long, is set level with the ground in the right spot for a post. The post is made from 1-1/2-inch pipe to the desired length. This will just fit inside the 2-inch pipe. A wooden plug is placed in the upper end of the underground pipe to keep dirt out when the post is removed.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
String-and-Ball Trick

The stopping of a ball on a string at any desired point is understood by almost every person, but to make one that can be worked only when the operator so desires is a mysterious trick. Procure a wooden ball, about 2 in. in diameter, and cut it into two equal parts. Insert a small peg in the flat surface of one half, a little to one side of the center, as shown, and allow the end to project about 3/16 in. The flat surface of the other half is cut out concave, as shown, to make it 1/2 in. deep. The two halves are then glued together, and a hole is drilled centrally on the division line for a string to pass through.
Stopping a ball on a string at any point is something most people can understand, but creating one that only works when the operator wants it to is a mysterious trick. Get a wooden ball about 2 inches in diameter and cut it in half. Insert a small peg into the flat surface of one half, slightly off-center, as shown, letting the end stick out about 3/16 of an inch. The flat surface of the other half should be cut out to be concave, as shown, to make it 1/2 inch deep. Then, glue the two halves together and drill a hole in the center along the dividing line for the string to go through.
To do the trick, hold an end of the string in each hand tightly and draw it taut with the ball at the top, then slacken the string enough to allow the ball to slide down the string. To stop the ball at any point, pull the string taut.
To do the trick, hold an end of the string in each hand tightly and pull it tight with the ball at the top, then loosen the string enough to let the ball slide down. To stop the ball at any point, pull the string tight.
Before handing the ball and string out for inspection, push the string from each side of the ball and turn it slightly to throw it off the peg. This will allow the string to pass freely through the ball, and it cannot be stopped at will. To replace the string reverse the operation.—Contributed by Wm. O. Swett, Chicago.
Before giving out the ball and string for inspection, push the string from each side of the ball and turn it slightly to detach it from the peg. This will let the string move freely through the ball, and it cannot be stopped at will. To put the string back, just reverse the process.—Contributed by Wm. O. Swett, Chicago.
Wall-Paper Cleaner
The following mixture I have used with the best results for years. Thoroughly mix together 3 pt. of wheat flour and 1 pt. of powdered whiting, then add sufficient water to make a dough. To clean a dirty papered wall, take a piece of the dough that can be easily grasped in the hand, press it [274] against the surface and make a long stroke downward. During the process of cleaning, keep kneading the dirt into the dough. The preparation can be mixed in any amount desired by using the proportions named.—Contributed by C. W. Bause, Jr., E. Troy, Wis.
The following mixture has given me the best results for years. Mix together 3 parts of wheat flour and 1 part of powdered chalk, then add enough water to form a dough. To clean a dirty wallpapered wall, take a piece of the dough that you can easily hold in your hand, press it against the surface, and make a long downward stroke. As you clean, keep kneading the dirt into the dough. You can mix this preparation in any amount you want by using the proportions mentioned. —Contributed by C. W. Bause, Jr., E. Troy, Wis.
Revolving Shaft without Power
The device illustrated seems paradoxical for it apparently works without any power being applied to it, making from two to three revolutions per hour, which, though slow, is nevertheless motion, requiring energy.
The device shown seems contradictory because it appears to operate without any power being supplied to it, making two to three revolutions per hour, which, although slow, still involves motion that requires energy.

The Expansion and Contraction of the Ropes Keep the Disk Up and to One Side of the Center
The expansion and contraction of the ropes keep the disk elevated and off to one side of the center.
The shaft A is supported on the edges, in the bearings B and C, of a tank, D. A disk, E, having a central hole larger in diameter than the shaft, is located at the middle of the latter. The disk is supported by 12 or more cotton ropes, F. The tank is filled to the level G with water. The lower ropes, being immersed in the water, shrink and lift the disk slightly above the center in the position of an eccentric, as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch. The center of gravity of the disk in this position, being higher and slightly to one side of the shaft, the disk has a tendency to turn around. The motion drives the next rope into the water where it becomes soaked and shrinkage takes place again, lifting the disk to a higher position, while the rope coming out of the water dries out. The ropes emerging from the water but not yet thoroughly dry cause the upper part of the disk to be in an eccentric position laterally with reference to the center of the shaft, thus causing the center of gravity to be not only above but also slightly to one side.—Contributed by Charles Roberts, Brooklyn, N. Y.
The shaft A is supported on the edges, in the bearings B and C, of a tank, D. A disk, E, with a central hole that’s wider in diameter than the shaft, is positioned in the middle of the shaft. The disk is held up by 12 or more cotton ropes, F. The tank is filled with water up to level G. The lower ropes, being submerged in the water, shrink and lift the disk slightly above center, making it eccentric, as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch. With the center of gravity of the disk in this position being higher and slightly off to one side of the shaft, the disk tends to rotate. This motion pulls the next rope into the water, where it gets soaked and shrinks again, raising the disk to a higher position while the rope coming out of the water dries. The ropes that come out of the water but aren’t completely dry cause the upper part of the disk to sit laterally eccentric in relation to the center of the shaft, resulting in the center of gravity being not only above but also slightly to one side.—Contributed by Charles Roberts, Brooklyn, N. Y.
A Paper-Bag Holder

A holder, to accommodate the different-sized bags used in a store, can be easily made of a board, 6 in. wide and 30 in. long. One edge of the board is cut with notches similar to the teeth of a ripsaw and their back-sloping edges are drilled to admit a nail point. A sufficient quantity of bags is placed in a pile and a nail is driven through the edge near their upper ends, and the projecting point of the nail is stuck into one of the holes. Proceed in the same manner with bags of other sizes. To remove a bag, take hold of the lower end of the outermost one and tear it from the nail. Be sure to drive the nails through the bags close to the top.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
A holder, to fit different-sized bags used in a store, can be easily made from a board that’s 6 inches wide and 30 inches long. One edge of the board is cut with notches like the teeth of a ripsaw, and their back-sloping edges are drilled to hold a nail point. A sufficient number of bags is stacked in a pile, and a nail is driven through the edge near their upper ends, with the protruding point of the nail inserted into one of the holes. Repeat this process with bags of various sizes. To remove a bag, grab the lower end of the outermost one and pull it off the nail. Make sure to drive the nails through the bags close to the top.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
Covering for Chalk Trays
The chalk trays fitted at the lower edge of blackboards soon collect considerable chalk dust and the chalk sticks dropped into it are, therefore, disagreeable to handle. A simple way of keeping the sticks clean is to cover the trays with wire mesh which is shaped like a tray but not so deep as the chalk tray. Thus the chalk dust will fall through this screen and be out of the way of the sticks.
The chalk trays at the bottom of blackboards quickly gather a lot of chalk dust, making the chalk sticks dropped in them unpleasant to use. A straightforward way to keep the sticks clean is to cover the trays with wire mesh designed like a tray but not as deep. This way, the chalk dust will fall through the mesh and stay away from the sticks.
A Curtain Hanger
A close-coiled spring, about 1/4 in. in diameter, makes a much better hanger for a short curtain than a small rod. The spring should be about 1 in. shorter than the width of the window and fastened with screwhooks. The spring is preferable not only because it is less apt to tear the fabric, as it will give some if the curtain is pulled, but also for the reason that it is much easier to put it through the hem than the rod.—Contributed by Walter Ramm, New York City.
A tightly wound spring, about 1/4 inch in diameter, works way better as a hanger for a short curtain than a small rod. The spring should be about 1 inch shorter than the width of the window and secured with screw hooks. The spring is better not only because it's less likely to rip the fabric, since it will stretch a bit if the curtain is yanked, but also because it's much easier to thread through the hem compared to a rod. —Contributed by Walter Ramm, New York City.
Joints for Model Aeroplane
In constructing model or toy aeroplanes the strips used are so slender that it is difficult to join them at the ends with brads without splitting them. If glue is used, there is danger of breaking two or more ribs, should it be necessary to remove a broken or defective rib.
In building model or toy airplanes, the strips used are so thin that it’s hard to connect them at the ends with brads without breaking them. If glue is used, there’s a risk of damaging two or more ribs if you need to replace a broken or faulty one.

Cartridge Shells Used for Joints (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Cartridge Shells Used for Joints (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
An empty 22-gauge long cartridge can be formed into an elbow that will connect the framework accurately, give more strength than glue or brads, and allow a broken section to be removed without spoiling the other part of the framework. File off the end A, Fig. 1, so that the shell will form a straight tube, and file as shown in Fig. 2 with a three-cornered file. Then bend the two sections into the form shown in Fig. 3 and solder the adjacent edges. File off the rough spots and drill small holes, as shown, for the insertion of pins to hold the wood strips. Much time in the building of model aeroplanes can be saved by keeping a supply of these elbows on hand.
An empty 22-gauge long cartridge can be shaped into an elbow that will connect the framework accurately, providing more strength than glue or brads, and allowing any broken section to be removed without damaging the other part of the framework. File off the end A, Fig. 1, so the shell becomes a straight tube, and file as illustrated in Fig. 2 using a three-cornered file. Then bend both sections into the shape shown in Fig. 3 and solder the edges together. Smooth out any rough spots and drill small holes, as shown, for inserting pins to secure the wood strips. Keeping a supply of these elbows on hand can save a lot of time when building model airplanes.
A deep rust on tools may be removed by soaking them in a strong, hot bath of potash and water for a half hour, then dipping them into a solution of 1 part muriatic acid in 2 parts cold water.
A deep rust on tools can be removed by soaking them in a strong, hot mixture of potash and water for thirty minutes, then dipping them into a solution of 1 part muriatic acid in 2 parts cold water.
An Indoor Baseball Game
An indoor game of baseball may be played on a board 5 ft. long and 3 ft. wide. A diamond is laid off at one end of the board and pins representing the hits are attached to the board so they will project above the surface. The locations of the players are designated by holes bored part way in the wood with an expansive bit. These holes should be large enough to receive the rings easily. The rings may be gaskets or they may be made of rope, and should have an inside diameter of about 3 in.
An indoor baseball game can be played on a board that is 5 feet long and 3 feet wide. A diamond shape is marked off at one end of the board, and pins representing hits are attached to the board so they stick up from the surface. The player positions are indicated by holes drilled partway into the wood with a wide bit. These holes should be big enough for the rings to fit easily. The rings can be made from gaskets or rope, and they should have an inside diameter of about 3 inches.
Only two persons can play at this game. The distance from the board to the thrower may be from 10 to 100 ft., according to the size of the room. This distance should be marked and each thrower stand at the same place.
Only two people can play this game. The distance from the board to the thrower can range from 10 to 100 ft., depending on the size of the room. This distance should be marked, and each thrower should stand in the same spot.
If the ring is thrown over one of the "base-hit" or "two-bagger" pegs, it shows the number of bases secured. Throwing a ring over one of the "home-run" pegs means a score, of course. The "infield hit" secures a base. If the ring slips into a hole, that counts one out. A player must throw until he has three outs. The score is kept [276] for the runs made.—Contributed by Francis P. Hobart, Willoughby, O.
If the ring is tossed over one of the "base hit" or "two-bagger" pegs, it indicates the number of bases earned. Throwing a ring over one of the "home run" pegs means a score, of course. The "infield hit" secures a base. If the ring falls into a hole, that counts as one out. A player must throw until they have three outs. The score is kept [276] for the runs made.—Contributed by Francis P. Hobart, Willoughby, O.
A Lantern for the Camp

A very desirable lantern for camp use is one that utilizes a candle instead of a lamp. Such a lantern can be made of an ordinary oil-lantern globe, a block of wood, some galvanized wire, a few nails, a metal collar, and a hood of zinc or tin. The block of wood is cut octagonally and the metal collar is fastened to it as shown. Four headless nails are driven into the center of the block, spaced so as to hold an ordinary candle securely. The wire is formed into a U-shape and the ends fastened into the block of wood outside of the candle socket, and within the globe circle. A conical piece of tin or zinc is formed to fit over the top of the globe as shown. As the candle does not require much draft there is no opening provided.—Contributed by Addison W. Baird, M. D., New York City.
A highly desirable lantern for camping is one that uses a candle instead of a lamp. This lantern can be made from a standard oil lantern globe, a block of wood, some galvanized wire, a few nails, a metal collar, and a hood made of zinc or tin. The block of wood is cut into an octagonal shape, and the metal collar is attached to it as shown. Four headless nails are driven into the center of the block, spaced out to hold a standard candle securely. The wire is bent into a U-shape, with the ends secured into the block of wood outside of the candle socket and within the globe circle. A conical piece of tin or zinc is shaped to fit over the top of the globe as shown. Since the candle doesn’t need much airflow, there’s no opening provided.—Contributed by Addison W. Baird, M. D., New York City.
Electric Lights Controlled from Two or More Switches
Many times it is quite an advantage to have a lamp or group of lamps so connected that the current may be turned on or off by any one of a number of different switches. For example, the lights in a long hall or passage-way can be lighted or extinguished by operating a switch at either end of the hall; the lights in the upper and lower halls of a residence, turned on or off by operating a switch upstairs or downstairs as the case might demand; the lights in the garage, controlled by switches at both the inside and outside door, etc.
Often, it’s really helpful to have a lamp or a set of lamps connected in such a way that you can turn them on or off with different switches. For instance, you can light up or turn off the lights in a long hallway by using a switch at either end. The lights in the upper and lower halls of a house can be controlled by switches located upstairs or downstairs, depending on what you need at the moment. The lights in the garage can also be managed with switches at both the inside and outside doors, and so on.

Lamps Controlled from Two Switches (Fig. 1)
Lamps Controlled by Two Switches (Fig. 1)
The method of connecting a number of lamps to a circuit so that they can be controlled from either of two switches is shown in Fig. 1. The switches, as illustrated in this drawing, are in such a position that the lamps will burn. If either of the switches be thrown to its other position (there are two positions for each switch), the circuit will be opened. The operation then of either switch will again close the circuit.
The way to connect multiple lamps to a circuit so that they can be controlled from two different switches is shown in Fig. 1. The switches, as shown in this diagram, are positioned so that the lamps are on. If either switch is flipped to the other position (each switch has two positions), the circuit will be broken. Then, activating either switch again will close the circuit.

Lamps Controlled by Any Number of Switches (Fig. 2)
Lamps Controlled by Multiple Switches (Fig. 2)
The method of connecting a number of lamps to a circuit so that they can be controlled by any number of switches is shown in Fig. 2. The switches are all in such a position that the lamps will burn. If any one of the switches be turned to its second position (all the switches have two positions), the circuit will be open. The dotted lines at switch C show the connections through switch C after it has been operated. Operating switch D then will again close the circuit, by using the dotted lines in switches C and D. The wiring for the control of lamps, as just indicated, must comply with the underwriters' requirements, and also city requirements, if the work be done in a place having city regulations for electric wiring.
The way to connect several lamps to a circuit so they can be controlled by multiple switches is shown in Fig. 2. All the switches are positioned so that the lamps will light up. If any one of the switches is flipped to its second position (all switches have two positions), the circuit will open. The dotted lines at switch C illustrate the connections through switch C once it has been activated. Then, operating switch D will close the circuit again, using the dotted lines in switches C and D. The wiring for controlling the lamps, as described, must meet the underwriters' requirements and also the city requirements if the work is done in an area with city regulations for electrical wiring.
Wire netting may be cut by laying it on the side edge of a spade and striking it with a hammer.
Wire netting can be cut by placing it on the edge of a spade and hitting it with a hammer.
Electric Score Board for Indoor Games
A very satisfactory electric score board, for use in scoring basketball and other games played indoors, is shown in the illustration. It is constructed entirely of wood, but should be lined with asbestos board or sheathing. The dimensions are a matter of choice, but one 4 ft. long, 2 ft. wide and 18 in. deep is a good size. The back of the box is provided with two cleats, each 2-1/2 ft. long, fastened at each end. This allows a projection of 3 in. at the top and bottom, for fastening the score board to the wall. The manner of construction is shown in Fig. 1, and a cross section of the box, in Fig. 2.
A very satisfactory electric scoreboard for use in scoring basketball and other indoor games is shown in the illustration. It's made entirely of wood but should be lined with asbestos board or sheathing. The dimensions are a matter of choice, but a size of 4 ft long, 2 ft wide, and 18 in deep is a good option. The back of the box has two cleats, each 2-1/2 ft long, attached at each end. This allows for a 3 in projection at the top and bottom, to secure the scoreboard to the wall. The construction method is shown in Fig. 1, and a cross-section of the box is in Fig. 2.

Electric Indoor Score Board, Showing Its Construction and Manner of Cutting Out the Letters and Numbers (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
Electric Indoor Scoreboard, Displaying Its Design and How the Letters and Numbers Are Cut Out (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
The front of the box should be fastened with screws so as to make its removal easy in case of repairs. This part of the box carries the frame for inserting the numbers and the words "Home Team" and "Visitors," as shown in Fig. 3. As the words are a permanent fixture, the cards carrying them are fastened to the front. At the end of these words a frame is constructed as shown in Fig. 4, in which the cards having the numbers are inserted in slides.
The front of the box should be secured with screws to make it easy to remove for repairs. This part of the box holds the frame for inserting the numbers and the words "Home Team" and "Visitors," as shown in Fig. 3. Since the words are a permanent part, the cards that display them are attached to the front. At the end of these words, there is a frame built as shown in Fig. 4, where the cards with the numbers are placed in slides.
Numerals and letters can be cut out of heavy cardboard or tin. The design of a letter having sharp angles and straight edges, as shown in Fig. 5, is very easily cut out with a chisel. The method of cutting is shown in Fig. 6.
Numerals and letters can be cut out of thick cardboard or metal. The design of a letter with sharp angles and straight edges, like the one shown in Fig. 5, can be easily cut out with a chisel. The cutting method is illustrated in Fig. 6.
As portions of the letters and numerals, such as the center in an O, would fall out if cut entirely around, some way must be provided to hold the parts in place. The way to prepare stencils is to leave a portion uncut, which is known as a tie, and the letter will appear as shown in Fig. 7.
As parts of the letters and numbers, like the center of an O, would fall out if cut all the way around, a way must be provided to keep the pieces in place. To create stencils, you should leave a section uncut, known as a tie, and the letter will look like what’s shown in Fig. 7.
The best method for making these letters and figures is to cut out the letter entirely, then to paste thin paper over the back and replace the parts removed by the cutting in their original position.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
The best way to create these letters and figures is to completely cut out the letter, then paste thin paper on the back and put the cut-out pieces back in their original spots.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A Mission Frame for an Alarm Clock
The old nickelplated alarm clock which usually adorns the kitchen mantel is, to say the least, not ornamental, and I improved the appearance of mine [278] without lessening its usefulness by making a small case in mission style for it.
The old nickel-plated alarm clock that usually sits on the kitchen mantel isn’t exactly decorative, but I enhanced the look of mine [278] without sacrificing its function by building a small mission-style case for it.

An Alarm Clock with a Wood Covering Ornamented and Finished in Mission Style
An Alarm Clock with a Wood Cover Decorated and Finished in Mission Style
The sketch shows a design which is neat and easily made. Accurate dimensions cannot be given as these will vary with the size of the clock. Quarter-sawed oak, 1/4 in. thick, is the best material to use. The front and back can be cut on a jigsaw, the opening for the clock face being cut slightly smaller than the metal of the clock so that only the face shows. An opening in the back piece should be cut a little smaller than the one in front, to provide a free opening for winding the clock. Fasten the parts together with small round-head brass brads or screws and finish to match the furniture. A small desk clock can be made in a similar manner, using a cheap watch instead of the alarm clock.—Contributed by C. E. Hamann, Somerville, Mass.
The sketch shows a design that's tidy and easy to make. Exact dimensions can’t be provided since these will change based on the size of the clock. Quarter-sawed oak, 1/4 in. thick, is the best material to use. You can cut the front and back with a jigsaw, with the opening for the clock face cut a bit smaller than the metal frame of the clock so that only the face is visible. The opening in the back piece should be slightly smaller than the one in front to allow for winding the clock. Secure the pieces together with small round-head brass brads or screws and finish it to match the furniture. A small desk clock can be made in a similar way, using an inexpensive watch instead of the alarm clock.—Contributed by C. E. Hamann, Somerville, Mass.
Mixing Sulphuric Acid
One of the first lessons given a student in chemistry is how to mix sulphuric acid with water. This would naturally be supposed to be very easy, yet, if it is not done right, it will surely result in injury to the person doing the mixing.
One of the first lessons taught to a chemistry student is how to mix sulfuric acid with water. This might seem very simple, but if it's not done properly, it can definitely cause harm to the person mixing it.
The specific gravity of sulphuric acid is 1.849 and, on account of its chemical attraction to water, great heat is set up or generated when the two are being mixed. If the acid is put into a jar and the water poured onto it, they will be temporarily separated, as the heavy acid will remain at the bottom, the chemical reaction taking place on the dividing line only. This soon generates heat which rapidly increases until steam is formed. Then the water boils over and finally becomes a bubbling volcano which readily ejects the contents of the jar. As the mixture at this moment is very hot, bad burns will be the result, which are aggravated by the biting of the acid; and clothing or anything that it comes in contact with will be ruined or badly damaged. Always remember this caution: add the acid to the water.
The specific gravity of sulfuric acid is 1.849, and because of its chemical attraction to water, a lot of heat is generated when they are mixed. If you pour water onto the acid in a jar, they will initially stay separate since the dense acid settles at the bottom, and the chemical reaction only occurs at the boundary. This quickly produces heat that rises rapidly until steam forms. Then the water boils over and creates a bubbling volcano effect that easily spills the contents of the jar. Since the mixture is extremely hot at this point, it can cause severe burns, worsened by the caustic nature of the acid; any clothing or material it touches will be ruined or severely damaged. Always keep this in mind: add the acid to the water.
The following is the proper way to proceed in mixing sulphuric acid as well as other acids of lighter weight. Place the water in a jar and pour the acid in, a little at a time, stirring the mixture with a wooden stick. The mixing process will always heat the solution, which in many instances, must be allowed to cool before using.
The following is the correct method for mixing sulfuric acid and other lighter acids. Start by putting water in a jar and then slowly add the acid, a little at a time, while stirring the mixture with a wooden stick. Mixing will always generate heat in the solution, so in many cases, it needs to cool down before you use it.
A Chinese Pagoda
Fold the end of a long and narrow strip of paper over several times as shown in Fig. 1 and roll the entire length over a stick, then remove the roll and crease, or make it flat, as shown in Fig. 2. Make two cuts with a sharp knife centrally so that they reach to the several folds first made [279] on the inner end of the paper, then cut the fold in the paper between the cuts as shown in Fig. 3, and bend the ends over to form the shape in Fig. 4. Insert the knife blade under the first fold and draw it out until the paper takes the form in Fig. 5.
Fold the end of a long, narrow strip of paper over several times, as shown in Fig. 1, and roll the whole length around a stick. Then take off the roll and crease it, or flatten it, as shown in Fig. 2. Make two cuts with a sharp knife down the center so they go through the folds made earlier on the inner end of the paper. Next, cut the fold in the paper between the cuts as shown in Fig. 3, and bend the ends over to create the shape in Fig. 4. Insert the knife blade under the first fold and pull it out until the paper takes the shape shown in Fig. 5.

Stages in Making the Strip of Paper into the Finished Pagoda (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
Stages in Creating the Strip of Paper into the Completed Pagoda (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
These pagodas can be made large or small, as desired, and also varied in several ways. Large ones can be formed and used as small tree ornaments. All that is necessary to make them high is to roll up one strip of paper on another in the rolling process.
These pagodas can be made big or small, depending on what you want, and they can also be customized in different ways. Large ones can be created and used as little tree decorations. All you need to do to make them tall is to roll one strip of paper around another during the rolling process.
In rolling up several strips, one on top of the other successively, various colored papers may be used and the appearance is greatly enhanced.—Contributed by Chas. C. Bradley, W. Toledo, O.
In stacking several strips, one on top of the other, you can use different colored papers, which really improves the look. —Contributed by Chas. C. Bradley, W. Toledo, O.
A Cuspidor Carrier

The task of handling cuspidors under all conditions is anything but pleasant, but the carrier shown in the sketch makes quite an improvement over ordinary methods. The carrier consists of an iron rod, 1/4 in. in diameter and 3 ft. long. One end is bent to fit around the neck of the cuspidor and the other is shaped into a handle.
The job of managing spittoons in any situation is far from enjoyable, but the carrier depicted in the sketch offers a noticeable upgrade over traditional methods. The carrier is made of a 1/4 inch diameter iron rod that is 3 feet long. One end is curved to fit around the neck of the spittoon, while the other end is shaped into a handle.
Guide for Grinding a Plane Iron
When a plane iron has been sharpened a number of times, it often becomes so out of square that the edge cannot be made parallel with the bottom of the plane block, even by using the lateral adjustment. Where this happens, the plane iron must be reground. If an emery wheel mounted in a polishing head or lathe is at hand, this can be easily accomplished. Loosen the plane-iron cap and screw it down at right angles to the plane iron, also reverse the tool rest as shown in the sketch. In this way the work can be done better and more quickly than by the usual method.—Contributed by L. S. Uphoff, Schenectady, N. Y.
When a plane iron has been sharpened several times, it often becomes so misaligned that the edge can't be made parallel to the bottom of the plane block, even with the lateral adjustment. When this happens, the plane iron needs to be reground. If you have an emery wheel mounted in a polishing head or lathe, this can be done easily. Loosen the plane-iron cap and adjust it so it’s at right angles to the plane iron, and also reverse the tool rest as shown in the sketch. This way, the work can be done more efficiently and quickly than using the usual method.—Contributed by L. S. Uphoff, Schenectady, N. Y.

The Plane-Iron Cap Turned at Right Angles, Provides a Guide to Grind the Edge Straight
The Plane-Iron Cap Turned at Right Angles, Gives a Guide to Sharpen the Edge Straight
To Prevent Torch Lights from Smoking
In the shop or factory oil torches are sometimes used and much trouble is experienced by the excessive smoking of the flame. This occurs because too much carbon remains unburned, and can be remedied by first soaking the wick in a weak solution of acetic acid. A 5-per-cent solution can be purchased for a few cents at any drug store and will soak a great number of wicks. The acid is not poisonous unless taken internally.
In the shop or factory, oil torches are sometimes used, and a lot of issues arise from the excessive smoke from the flame. This happens because too much carbon goes unburned, but it can be fixed by first soaking the wick in a weak solution of acetic acid. You can buy a 5% solution for just a few cents at any drug store, and it will soak a large number of wicks. The acid isn't toxic unless ingested.
A Lard and Fruit Presser
A very simple but handy device for pressing out lard, juices for jelly, or fruit for marmalade, is made from two boards, each 18 in. long, 3 in. wide and 1/2 in. thick, formed into the shape of paddles and hinged together. The hinge is made by running a wire through holes bored in one end of the paddles and twisting the ends together as shown. This presser will save the hands from stains and other effects of the juices.—Contributed by Julia A. White, Glenburg, Pa.
A very simple but useful tool for pressing out lard, juice for jelly, or fruit for marmalade is made from two boards, each 18 inches long, 3 inches wide, and 1/2 inch thick, shaped like paddles and hinged together. The hinge is created by threading a wire through holes drilled in one end of the paddles and twisting the ends together as shown. This presser will protect your hands from stains and other effects of the juices.—Contributed by Julia A. White, Glenburg, Pa.

Two Paddles Hinged Together with a Piece of Wire Make a Presser for Lard and Fruits
Two paddles connected by a piece of wire Create a press for lard and fruits
An Electric-Light Bulb as Barometer
To use a discarded electric bulb as a fairly reliable barometer the point is broken off with a pair of pliers while holding the bulb under water. As the bulb is a vacuum, it completely fills with water. If the bulb is now suspended from a wire or thread fastened at the socket end, the water will not run out of it in fair weather when the atmospheric pressure is normal or high, but if the pressure falls, as happens when bad weather is approaching, the water will begin to bulge out of the small opening and sometimes a small drop may even fall off. When, with returning fair weather, the atmospheric pressure increases, the water can no longer bulge or drop out of the bulb.
To use a discarded light bulb as a pretty reliable barometer, first break off the tip with a pair of pliers while holding the bulb underwater. Since the bulb is a vacuum, it will fill completely with water. If you hang the bulb from a wire or thread attached to the socket end, the water won't spill out in fair weather when the atmospheric pressure is normal or high. However, if the pressure drops, like when bad weather is on the way, the water will start to bulge out of the small opening, and sometimes a small drop might even fall off. When fair weather returns and the atmospheric pressure goes up, the water will no longer bulge or drip out of the bulb.
A Swinging-Pendulum Trick
To swing a pendulum, picked out from a number of them at random, without touching it is a very puzzling trick. The articles necessary are a medium-sized table and a number of pendulums, some of which are suspended from a rod with their lower weighted ends inside of water and wine glasses placed on the table, and others attached to corks so that they will hang inside of bottles.
To swing a pendulum chosen at random from several without touching it is a really puzzling trick. You need a medium-sized table and several pendulums, some of which are hung from a rod with their weighted ends resting in water and wine glasses on the table, while others are attached to corks so they hang inside bottles.
The spectators gather around the table which can be in full light. The performer sits at one side of the table with his hands flat on the top. A person may pick out any pendulum and ask him to swing it, which he will proceed to do without touching it, also making it strike the glass while it swings. Another pendulum may be pointed out and he will start that one apparently by looking at it, while the other one stops.
The audience gathers around the table that’s well-lit. The performer sits on one side, with his hands resting flat on the surface. Someone can choose any pendulum and request him to swing it, which he will do without touching it, also making it hit the glass as it swings. If another pendulum is indicated, he will seemingly start that one just by looking at it, while the first one stops.

Any One Pendulum can be Made to Swing at Will by Moving the Table Slightly
Any pendulum can be made to swing at will by slightly moving the table.
This may seem to be impossible, yet it is very easy. It will be seen that no two pendulums have the same length. A pendulum makes a certain number of swings in a given time, depending on its length. A long pendulum requires more time to complete its swing and will, therefore, make a less number of swings than a short one in the same time. It is only necessary to move the table slightly and watch the pendulum picked out until it begins to swing independently of the others, which soon happens. To make the longer pendulums swing, longer movements of the table top must be made. With a little practice anyone can become a skilled medium in pendulum swinging.—Contributed by James A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
This might seem impossible, but it’s actually quite simple. You'll notice that no two pendulums are the same length. A pendulum swings a certain number of times in a set period, depending on its length. A longer pendulum takes more time to complete its swing, so it will make fewer swings than a shorter one in the same time frame. You just need to move the table slightly and watch the chosen pendulum until it starts swinging on its own, which will happen quickly. To get the longer pendulums to swing, you’ll need to make larger movements with the table. With a little practice, anyone can become skilled at pendulum swinging.—Contributed by James A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
Applying a Strap Hinge
An ordinary strap hinge can be applied to a door or box cover in such a way that only one wing will show. Ordinarily the hinge opens as at A, and, on reversing it, the hinge will open to the limit as shown at B. If one wing is bent toward the other, as shown at C, the hinge may be applied, as shown at D. As this process reverses the hinge, the screw holes must be countersunk on the opposite side.
An ordinary strap hinge can be used on a door or box cover so that only one side is visible. Typically, the hinge opens like at A, and if you flip it, it will open fully as shown at B. If you bend one side towards the other, like in C, the hinge can be installed as shown in D. Since this process reverses the hinge, the screw holes need to be countersunk on the other side.

Reversing a Strap Hinge So That When It is Applied Only One Wing will Show
Reversing a Strap Hinge So That When It's Installed Only One Wing Is Visible
Tricks Performed with Thumbs Tied Together
To have one's thumbs securely tied together by any person in an audience and examined by the spectators, then have some one throw a hoop or bicycle rim on one of the performer's arms as if the thumbs were not tied, seems impossible, yet this trick can be done, and its simplicity is its own protection, even though performed close to a committee selected from the audience. A stick can be held perpendicularly by anyone with one hand at each end and the performer can thrust his arms at the stick which passes between them with the thumbs apparently tied tightly together. The same effect is produced on the arm of any person, while the hands are tightly clasped, and before and after each movement the tied thumbs are examined by the committee.
To have your thumbs securely tied together by someone in the audience and then shown to the spectators, followed by someone throwing a hoop or bicycle rim onto one of the performer’s arms as if the thumbs weren’t tied, seems impossible. However, this trick can be done, and its simplicity is its best defense, even when performed in front of a committee chosen from the audience. A stick can be held vertically by anyone with one hand on each end, and the performer can thrust their arms at the stick, which passes between them with the thumbs appearing tightly tied together. The same effect can be achieved on the arm of any person while their hands are firmly clasped, and before and after each movement, the tied thumbs are inspected by the committee.
The two cords used for the trick are made as follows: The first should be about 17 in. long, 1/4 in. in diameter at its center and tapering to points at the ends. The other cord is about 13 in. long, 1/8 in. in diameter in the center and also tapering at the ends. They are constructed of Chinese or Japanese paper, which is a soft, but very tough, fibrous texture. Cut the paper into strips, 1 in. wide, taking care that the grain, or rather the fiber, runs lengthwise. Beginning at one end, twist the paper on itself at an angle as in rolling the old-fashioned paper lamp lighter. Each turn should lap over the former about half of its width. When within 3 in. of the end of the first strip apply another by moistening the joining ends and continue the twisting. When the length given is reached, break off the strip and start back over the first in the opposite direction. Lay on enough layers to secure the diameter given. When finished, the cords should be strong enough to resist the pressure applied by the hands.
The two cords used for the trick are made like this: The first should be about 17 inches long, 1/4 inch in diameter at the center, and tapering to points at the ends. The other cord is about 13 inches long, 1/8 inch in diameter at the center and also tapering at the ends. They are made of Chinese or Japanese paper, which has a soft but very tough fibrous texture. Cut the paper into strips that are 1 inch wide, making sure that the grain, or fiber, runs lengthwise. Starting at one end, twist the paper on itself at an angle like you would when making an old-fashioned paper lamp lighter. Each turn should overlap the previous one by about half its width. When you’re about 3 inches from the end of the first strip, attach another by moistening the joining ends and continue twisting. Once you reach the desired length, break off the strip and start twisting back in the opposite direction. Add enough layers to achieve the required diameter. When you're done, the cords should be strong enough to withstand the pressure applied by your hands.

Manner of Crossing the Thumbs to Receive the Double Tie of the Cord
Manner of Crossing the Thumbs to Receive the Double Tie of the Cord
With all fingers pressed together spread both thumbs away from the hands, as shown at A. Lay the right thumb across the left, as at B, the large knuckle bone of one lying directly over that of the other. The largest cord is laid over the crossing and both ends brought down, crossed under the [282] thumbs, then up again, and tied in two knots on top of the right thumb, as at C. The trick in the tying is at this point. Just as the tie is being made pull the left thumb until the smallest-diameter joints reach the cord and pull down with the left hand. Push the right thumb so that the fleshy part enters as far as possible into the cords. Insist on the tie being made tightly.
With all fingers pressed together, spread both thumbs away from your hands, as shown at A. Lay the right thumb across the left, as at B, with the large knuckle bone of one directly over the other. The largest cord is laid over the crossing, and both ends are brought down, crossed under the [282] thumbs, then up again, and tied in two knots on top of the right thumb, as at C. The trick in the tying happens at this point. Just as the knot is being made, pull the left thumb until the smallest-diameter joints reach the cord and pull down with the left hand. Push the right thumb so that the fleshy part goes as far as possible into the cords. Make sure the knot is tied tightly.

The Cords as They are Placed around the Thumbs and Tied in a Double Knot
The cords as they're wrapped around the thumbs and tied in a double knot.
The second and smaller cord is laid below the right thumb as shown at D, and on top of the left against the first cord, crossed, brought back and tied twice. When this is being done reverse the pushing and pulling as described, pushing the left thumb and pulling out on the right. Secure all the slack on the left thumb, the right being pushed into the cords at its smallest diameter and the second cord being tied high up and as near the right thumb as possible, with knots tightly drawn. If this second knot is not tight it will give trouble in performing the trick.
The second and smaller cord is placed under the right thumb as shown at D, and laid on top of the left against the first cord, crossed, then brought back and tied twice. While doing this, reverse the pushing and pulling as described, pushing the left thumb and pulling out on the right. Secure all the slack on the left thumb, while the right is pushed into the cords at its smallest diameter, and the second cord is tied high up, as close to the right thumb as possible, with the knots pulled tight. If this second knot isn’t tight, it will cause problems when performing the trick.
The release is made by bringing the tips of the fingers together and placing the thumbs into the palms. If the ties have been carefully made there will be no trouble to withdraw the left thumb as it is masked by the hands. The peculiar nature of the paper cord causes the loop from which the thumb was removed to remain open and rigid as a wire loop, and if the last tie was tightly drawn, the second cord will not slip down to close the loop. In approaching the hoop, stick, or arm, touch the thing to be passed with the finger tips and withdraw them, swaying backward a few times and, in the last swing before making the pass, remove the thumb from the loop. After passing, replace the thumb in the loop. In passing the object, open the finger tips, then close them and open the palms, and push the left thumb back into the loop, close the palms and apply a strain on both thumbs, then show the tie. Be careful to press both thumbs closely into the palms in passing so that they will not strike the object.
The release is done by bringing the tips of your fingers together and placing your thumbs into your palms. If the ties are made carefully, there won’t be any issue pulling out the left thumb as it's hidden by the hands. The unique nature of the paper cord makes the loop from which the thumb was removed stay open and rigid like a wire loop, and if the last tie was pulled tight, the second cord won’t slip down to close the loop. When approaching the hoop, stick, or arm, touch the item to be passed with your fingertips and then withdraw them, swaying backward a few times. In the last swing before making the pass, remove the thumb from the loop. After passing, put the thumb back in the loop. When passing the object, open the fingertips, then close them and open the palms, and push the left thumb back into the loop, close the palms, and apply a strain on both thumbs, then show the tie. Be careful to press both thumbs closely into the palms while passing so that they won't hit the object.
Always exhibit the tie from the back of the hands with the palms spread out. If there is any difficulty in drawing out or replacing the thumb in the loop, it is because the ties have not been properly made or tied when the thumbs were in the right place. It requires some practice to do the trick quickly.—Fayette.
Always show the tie from the back of your hands with your palms open. If you have trouble pulling out or putting your thumb back in the loop, it’s because the ties weren't correctly made or tied when your thumbs were in the right position. It takes some practice to do the trick quickly.—Fayette.
A Way to Keep Home Accounts
An easy way to keep track of all the home expenses is by the popular card system. The index cards can be had at any stationery-supply house. Place the cards in a box on end and have a good supply of blanks back of them ready for use. Under, or back of, each letter place as many blanks as is necessary, and almost instantly any item of expense in the home may be found, such as the cost of coal for the year, drugs, meat, the cost of clothing for a child, and the account of the head of the family. The boy's account might read as follows under the letter J:
An easy way to keep track of all your home expenses is by using the popular card system. You can get index cards at any stationery store. Place the cards upright in a box, and keep a good supply of blank cards behind them, ready for use. Under or behind each letter, stack as many blanks as needed, so you can quickly find any expense item in the home, like the cost of coal for the year, medications, meat, the cost of clothing for a child, and the account of the head of the family. The boy's account might look like this under the letter J:
Johnnie
Johnnie
Jan. | 3 | Shoes | $3.50 |
Jan. | 15 | Book | .45 |
Jan. | 29 | Hair cut | .25 |
Feb. | 1 | Stockings | .75 |
and so on through the year. The mother can see at a glance just when the last shoes were bought, and how much it cost for books and paper.
and so on throughout the year. The mother can easily see when the last pair of shoes was bought and how much was spent on books and paper.
Everything pertaining to the home keeping can be so recorded and each year compared. Once given a trial no other bookkeeping will be required in the home where time counts. Children can be taught to keep account of their expenses in this way, and thus thrift and good business methods are encouraged.—Contributed by Harriette I. Lockwood, Philadelphia, Pa.
Everything related to managing the home can be recorded this way, and each year can be compared. Once you give it a try, no other bookkeeping will be needed in the home where time matters. Kids can learn to track their expenses like this, promoting thriftiness and good business practices. —Contributed by Harriette I. Lockwood, Philadelphia, Pa.
How to Make a Blowgun
Either a 12-in. length of a small curtain-rod tubing or a straight piece of small bamboo pole, cut off between the joints, can be used for the gun part of this simple device. If bamboo is used, see that it is cleaned out smoothly on the inside.
Either a 12-inch length of small curtain-rod tubing or a straight piece of small bamboo pole, cut between the joints, can be used for the gun part of this simple device. If you use bamboo, make sure it's cleaned out smoothly on the inside.
The dart used in the gun is shown [283] at A in the illustration. It is made by threading the eye of a darning needle full of yarn, clipping all the strands off to a uniform length of about 3/4 in., and then picking out the fibers into a brushlike mass above the needle's eye. Another needle or pin can be used for fuzzing the threads. The point to observe is that the brush is of somewhat larger diameter than the bore of the gun, so that when the needle is pushed into the mouth end the brush will be compressed and make an air-tight plug.
The dart used in the gun is shown [283] at A in the illustration. It's made by threading the eye of a darning needle with yarn, cutting all the strands to a uniform length of about 3/4 in., and then separating the fibers into a brush-like mass above the needle's eye. You can use another needle or pin to fluff the threads. The key point is that the brush is slightly larger in diameter than the bore of the gun, so when the needle is pushed into the mouth end, the brush gets compressed and creates an air-tight seal.

The Blowgun is Made of a Piece of Tubing, and the Dart of a Darning Needle
The blowgun is made from a piece of tubing, and the dart is a darning needle.
After thus inserting the dart, hold it as shown and give a quick, sharp blast of the breath into the gun. The dart will travel with great speed and accuracy for 20 ft. or more, and stick wherever it strikes. The point being so small, it can be used in the house for shooting at a paper target pinned to the wall without injury to the plaster or woodwork.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
After inserting the dart like this, hold it as shown and take a quick, strong breath into the gun. The dart will fly at high speed and accuracy for 20 feet or more and will stick wherever it hits. Because the tip is so small, you can use it indoors to shoot at a paper target pinned to the wall without damaging the plaster or woodwork.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
A Brush for Applying Soldering Acid
A good brush for applying acid to articles for soldering can be made of a piece of small copper pipe for the handle, and fine copper wire for the brush. To make the brush part, take a piece of cardboard, about 1-1/4 in. wide, and wind several turns of No. 28 gauge copper wire around it, then remove the coil, insert about 1/2 in. of it in the pipe, and flatten the latter to hold the wire. Clip the ends of the wire, and a brush will be had that ordinary acids will not affect. If only a short piece of pipe is available, it can be used as a ferrule and a handle made of wire or wood.—Contributed by A. R. Cunning, W. New Brighton, N. Y.
A good brush for applying acid to items for soldering can be made from a small piece of copper pipe for the handle and fine copper wire for the brush. To create the brush part, take a piece of cardboard, about 1-1/4 inches wide, and wrap several turns of No. 28 gauge copper wire around it. Then, take off the coil, insert about 1/2 inch of it into the pipe, and flatten the pipe to secure the wire. Trim the ends of the wire, and you'll have a brush that ordinary acids won't damage. If you only have a short piece of pipe, you can use it as a ferrule, and make a handle from wire or wood.—Contributed by A. R. Cunning, W. New Brighton, N. Y.
Inkwell and Penholder

An empty paste pot with a water well in the center makes an excellent inkwell and penholder. Fill the exterior well A with cement or plaster of paris, push the number of penholders to be held into the cement before it sets, moving them about occasionally to prevent the cement from sticking to them and to make the hole a little larger than the holder. The part B is for the ink.—Contributed by R. F. Pinkney, Lazareto del Mariel, Cuba.
An empty paste pot with a water well in the center works great as an inkwell and pen holder. Fill the outer well A with cement or plaster of Paris, then push the number of pen holders you want to hold into the cement before it dries. Move them around occasionally to stop the cement from sticking to them and to make the hole a bit bigger than the holder. Section B is for the ink.—Contributed by R. F. Pinkney, Lazareto del Mariel, Cuba.
A Homemade Loose-Leaf Pocket Memorandum
The little memorandum illustrated herewith is very handy to carry in the coat or vest pocket for taking notes, etc. Loose leaves may be supplied with very little trouble. It consists of a fold of paper, cut as shown and pasted at the ends. The pocket thus formed will easily hold 2 doz. sheets and the slits cut on the outside will admit 8 sheets.—Contributed by C. B. Hanson, Fitchburg, Mass.
The small memo shown here is really convenient to keep in your coat or vest pocket for jotting down notes, etc. You can easily add loose sheets without much hassle. It’s made from a folded piece of paper, cut as demonstrated and glued at the ends. The pocket created can easily hold 24 sheets, and the slits cut on the outside can hold 8 sheets.—Contributed by C. B. Hanson, Fitchburg, Mass.

The Holder is Made of Heavy Manila Paper and will Stand Considerable Wear
The holder is made of sturdy Manila paper and can withstand significant wear.
An ideal cleaner for kid gloves is carbon tetrachloride.
An ideal cleaner for kid gloves is carbon tetrachloride.
Rubber-Band-Change Trick
The trick of changing a rubber band from the first and second fingers to the third and fourth, if done quickly, can be performed without detection by any one. The band on the first two fingers is shown to the spectator as in Fig. 1, with the back of the hand up. The hand is then turned over and the band drawn out quickly, as shown in Fig. 2, in a manner as to give the impression that the band is whole and on the two fingers. While doing this, quickly fold all the fingers so that their ends enter the band, and turn the hand over and let go the band, then show the back with the fingers doubled up. In reality the fingers will be in the band, as in Fig. 3, and the back will still show the band on the first two fingers. Quickly straighten out all the fingers, and the band will snap over the last two fingers, as shown in Fig. 4.—Contributed by E. K. Marshall, Oak Park, Ill.
The trick of shifting a rubber band from your first and second fingers to your third and fourth can be done quickly and without anyone noticing. The band is positioned on the first two fingers like in Fig. 1, with the back of the hand facing up. Then, flip the hand over and quickly pull the band out, as shown in Fig. 2, making it look like the band is still on the two fingers. While doing this, quickly fold all your fingers so that their tips go into the band, then flip your hand over and release the band, showing the back with your fingers curled up. In reality, your fingers will be inside the band, as seen in Fig. 3, while the back will still appear to have the band on the first two fingers. Quickly straighten all your fingers, and the band will snap onto the last two fingers, as shown in Fig. 4.—Contributed by E. K. Marshall, Oak Park, Ill.

Transferring Rubber Band from the First Two Fingers to the Last Pair, Like Magic (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Transferring the Rubber Band from the First Two Fingers to the Last Pair, Like Magic (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
A Swinging Electric-Light Bracket
The light bracket shown is both ornamental and useful and can be swung from one side of the room to the other in an instant, a feature that is of great value in a dimly lighted kitchen. It can be made of either brass or soft iron, but, for the sake of convenience, the description will be for one made of brass.
The light bracket shown is both decorative and practical and can be swung from one side of the room to the other in an instant, which is really useful in a dimly lit kitchen. It can be made of either brass or soft iron, but for convenience, this description will focus on one made of brass.
Procure four pieces of brass, 1 in wide, 1/8 in. thick and 7 in. long, and bend them to the shape shown at A. These are to form the ceiling bracket. A 3/16-in. hole is drilled in the end of each piece to be against the ceiling. The other end is bent slightly concave and soldered to a brass collar, B, which is threaded on the inside. This collar must be of such a size that it will screw on the end of a brass pipe, C, 1 in. in outside diameter. The length of this pipe should be 18 or 20 inches.
Get four pieces of brass, 1 inch wide, 1/8 inch thick, and 7 inches long, and bend them into the shape shown at A. These will create the ceiling bracket. Drill a 3/16-inch hole at the end of each piece that will be against the ceiling. The other end should be bent slightly concave and soldered to a brass collar, B, which has internal threading. This collar needs to be sized so that it can screw onto the end of a brass pipe, C, which has an outside diameter of 1 inch. The length of this pipe should be 18 or 20 inches.
The base D of the bracket is made of a brass bar, 1/8 in. thick, 1/2 in. wide and 45 in. long, a scroll being turned on 6 in. of its length at the globe end, and 3 in. of the other end turned up at right angles and soldered to a ring made of 1/16-in. brass that acts as a bearing around the pipe.
The base D of the bracket is made of a brass bar that is 1/8 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide, and 45 inches long. A scroll is shaped on 6 inches of its length at the globe end, and 3 inches of the other end is bent up at a right angle and soldered to a ring made of 1/16-inch brass, which serves as a bearing around the pipe.

A Bracket Forming a Pendant and Swinging Arm to Change the Location of the Electric Light
A bracket that acts as a pendant and swinging arm to adjust the position of the electric light.
The upper brace E is made of 1/16-in. brass, the same width as the base piece and about 48 in. in length. Each end is turned into a scroll and then riveted or soldered to the base D and to the upper brass ring. The space between the base D, the brace E, and the pipe C is filled with any style of scroll or other brace that may suit the taste of the maker, but the base D must be at right angles to the pipe C before the scroll is fastened in place.
The upper brace E is made of 1/16-inch brass, the same width as the base piece and about 48 inches long. Each end is turned into a scroll and then riveted or soldered to the base D and to the upper brass ring. The space between the base D, the brace E, and the pipe C can be filled with any style of scroll or other brace that fits the maker's preferences, but the base D must be at right angles to the pipe C before the scroll is secured in place.
A cap, F, is screwed to the lower end of the pipe, to keep the bracket in place. Ordinary flexible light cord is [285] used to connect to the light which is swung to the scroll end of the base.—Contributed by F. L. Matter, Portland, Oregon.
A cap, F, is screwed to the bottom of the pipe to hold the bracket in position. Regular flexible light cord is [285] used to link to the light, which is hung at the scroll end of the base.—Contributed by F. L. Matter, Portland, Oregon.
Match Safe to Deliver One Match at a Time
A match safe that will deliver only one match at a time is constructed of two parts, the box or holder and the base, with slider. The box is diamond-shaped and of the size shown by the dimensions. The base, with slider, consists of two pieces, the baseboard and a standard which runs through the box diagonally on the longest dimension in a vertical position. A thumbtack is inserted in the standard near the top to prevent the box from being lifted entirely from the base.
A match safe that dispenses only one match at a time is made of two parts: the box or holder and the base with a slider. The box is diamond-shaped and measures according to the given dimensions. The base with the slider is made up of two pieces—the baseboard and a standard that runs diagonally through the box on the longest dimension in a vertical position. A thumbtack is placed in the standard near the top to stop the box from being completely lifted off the base.

The Box Delivers Only One Match When It is Raised and Lowered on the Standard
The box only delivers a single match when it’s raised and lowered on the standard.
The matches are filled into the box on both sides of the standard. When a match is wanted, lift the box up and let it down again, and one match will be caught in the notch and raised out of the box. To prevent the box from tipping sideways when it is raised up, small pieces can be glued to the box ends on the inside and on both sides of the standard.—Contributed by A. S. Barrows, New Britain, Conn.
The matches are packed into the box on both sides of the standard. When you need a match, lift the box and then let it drop back down, and one match will get caught in the notch and lift out of the box. To stop the box from tipping over when you lift it, you can glue small pieces inside the box ends and on both sides of the standard.—Contributed by A. S. Barrows, New Britain, Conn.
Cartridge Shells Used for Electrical Contacts
In making small switchboards, rheostats, and other electrical devices, I found a good use for old center-fire cartridge shells as shown in the sketch. A hole a little smaller than the diameter of the shell is made in the board and the shell is forced in. The proper wires are then soldered to the metal on the inside, or the wire may be placed inside of the shell and held in contact by driving a wood plug in as indicated.—Contributed by W. O. Nettleton, Washington, D. C.
In making small switchboards, rheostats, and other electrical devices, I found a great use for old center-fire cartridge shells as shown in the sketch. A hole slightly smaller than the diameter of the shell is drilled in the board, and the shell is pushed in. The appropriate wires are then soldered to the metal inside, or the wire can be placed inside the shell and held in contact by inserting a wooden plug as indicated.—Contributed by W. O. Nettleton, Washington, D. C.

The Heads of the Cartridge Shells Make Good Contacts for a Switch Lever
The tops of the cartridge shells make great contacts for a switch lever.
A Dowel-Turning Tool
The owner of a wood or metal lathe can easily construct a tool that will turn dowels of any size quickly. This tool, as described by a correspondent of Work, London, consists of a block of wood, shaped as shown at A, and a plane bit, B, attached with a wood screw. The hole in the collet C must be of such size that it will admit the rough stock freely but also prevent it from wabbling as the stick turns. The stock is chucked in the ordinary manner and the tool is run on the outer end.
The owner of a wood or metal lathe can easily make a tool that will turn dowels of any size quickly. This tool, as described by a correspondent of Work, London, consists of a block of wood, shaped as shown at A, and a plane bit, B, attached with a wood screw. The hole in the collet C must be sized to allow the rough stock to fit freely, while also keeping it steady as the stick turns. The stock is clamped in the usual way, and the tool is operated on the outer end.

The Tool is Very Similar to a Plane and is Used with a Lathe for Turning Dowels
The tool is very similar to a plane and is used with a lathe for turning dowels.
To Tie a Hammock

A method not generally known to quickly and securely hitch up a hammock between two trees, in camp or elsewhere, is shown in the sketch. Each end rope is given one or more turns around a tree trunk and then tucked under, as shown. The pull on the rope will draw it tightly against the rough bark on the tree. The harder the pull, the tighter the rope binds against the tree trunk. In this manner a hammock can be put up in a few moments and it is as readily taken down.—Contributed by Bert Morehouse, Des Moines, Iowa.
A method that's not widely known for quickly and securely setting up a hammock between two trees, whether at camp or elsewhere, is illustrated in the sketch. Each end of the rope is wrapped one or more times around a tree trunk and then tucked under, as shown. Pulling on the rope will tighten it against the rough bark of the tree. The harder you pull, the tighter the rope grips the tree trunk. This way, you can set up a hammock in just a few moments, and it's just as easy to take down. —Contributed by Bert Morehouse, Des Moines, Iowa.
An Inexpensive File
Envelopes make a very inexpensive as well as a neat file for papers and letters if they are arranged and fastened together so that they can be kept in one packet. In making such a file procure as many envelopes as there will be headings in the file, also a number of strips of gummed tape, about 1-1/2 in. long. There must be twice as many of these strips as there are envelopes.
Envelopes create a cheap and tidy way to organize papers and letters if you arrange and secure them so they can be kept in one bundle. To make this file, get as many envelopes as there are headings in your file, plus several strips of gummed tape, each about 1.5 inches long. You’ll need twice as many strips as there are envelopes.

The File is Built Up of Envelopes Joined Together with Small Strips of Tape
The file is made up of envelopes attached with small strips of tape.
Bind the backs of two envelopes, A and B, together leaving a space of 1/8 in. between the envelopes. Bind a third envelope, C, to B, and so on. The strips of tape from A to B and from B to C are on opposite sides of the envelope B. Continue binding until the required number of envelopes have been joined together. Assign a heading to each of the envelopes, and the file is ready for use. When completed it should appear as shown in D.—Contributed by Alfred Rice, Syracuse, N. Y.
Bind the backs of two envelopes, A and B, together, leaving a space of 1/8 inch between them. Then, attach a third envelope, C, to B, and continue this pattern. The strips of tape connecting A to B and B to C should be on opposite sides of envelope B. Keep binding until you’ve joined the desired number of envelopes. Label each envelope with a heading, and the file will be ready to use. When finished, it should look like what is shown in D.—Contributed by Alfred Rice, Syracuse, N. Y.
Window-Shade Guides
The annoyance of a shade that will not run true on the roller and flops in the wind coming through an open window can be overcome by using guide wires as follows:
The frustration of a shade that won't roll up properly and flaps in the wind from an open window can be solved by using guide wires like this:

Two Parallel Guide Wires Hold the Stick of the Shade in Its Proper Place
Two parallel guide wires keep the stick of the shade in the right position.
The stick in the hem on the lower edge of the shade is supplied with a screweye, A, at each end. A wire is run through the screweye and fastened in a vertical position on the casing with screweyes as shown by B, B. A second wire is similarly attached on the other side of the shade, taking care to have both wires parallel and true with the ends of the roller.—Contributed by George Lue, San Francisco, California.
The stick in the hem at the bottom edge of the shade comes with a screweye, A, on each end. A wire runs through the screweye and is secured in a vertical position on the casing with screweyes as indicated by B, B. A second wire is attached the same way on the other side of the shade, making sure both wires are parallel and aligned with the ends of the roller.—Contributed by George Lue, San Francisco, California.
Watering Plants at the Roots
An effective way to water rose bushes, shrubs or plants is to place an old cowhorn in the earth so that the small end will be near the roots of the plant and the large end level with the surface of the ground, and fill the horn with water. The small end of the horn should be cut off at such a point that the hole will be about the size of a lead pencil.—Contributed by Chas. L. Richards, Philadelphia, Pa.
A great way to water rose bushes, shrubs, or plants is to bury an old cowhorn in the ground so that the small end is close to the roots and the large end is level with the surface. Then, fill the horn with water. The small end of the horn should be cut so that the opening is about the size of a pencil.—Contributed by Chas. L. Richards, Philadelphia, Pa.
How to Clean Jewelry
To cleanse articles of silver, gold, bronze and brass use a saturated solution of cyanide of potassium. To clean small articles, dip each one into the solution and rinse immediately in hot water; then dry and polish with a linen cloth. Larger articles are cleaned by rubbing the surface with a small tuft of cotton saturated in the solution. As cyanide of potassium is a deadly poison, care must be taken not to have it touch any sore spot on the flesh.—Contributed by G. A. Koerbis, U. S. S. "Vermont."
To clean silver, gold, bronze, and brass items, use a saturated solution of potassium cyanide. For small items, dip each one in the solution and rinse it immediately in hot water; then dry and polish with a linen cloth. For larger items, rub the surface with a small cotton ball soaked in the solution. Since potassium cyanide is a deadly poison, be careful not to let it touch any open wounds on your skin.—Contributed by G. A. Koerbis, U. S. S. "Vermont."
Runner for a Go-Cart
As the wheels of a go-cart do not push through the snow very easily and the cart, therefore, does not run in a straight direction, and as I did not care to purchase a sled, I instead fitted the go-cart wheels with runners as shown in the sketch. I purchased a piece of machine steel of a diameter to fit the grooves in the wheels after the rubber tires were removed. This I cut and bent to the shape shown at A, making two runners, and applied one to each pair of wheels, front and rear, as shown at B. The runners kept the wheels immovable and caused the cart to glide over the snow as a sleigh. This runner will not interfere with the folding of a collapsible cart.—Contributed by Roy B. Hanaford, Detroit, Mich.
As go-cart wheels don't grip the snow very well, the cart has trouble going straight. Since I didn’t want to buy a sled, I decided to attach runners to the go-cart wheels, as illustrated in the sketch. I got a piece of machine steel that fit the grooves in the wheels once I took off the rubber tires. I cut and bent it into the shape shown at A, creating two runners, and attached one to each set of wheels, front and back, as shown at B. The runners kept the wheels stationary and allowed the cart to slide over the snow like a sleigh. This runner won’t interfere with folding a collapsible cart.—Contributed by Roy B. Hanaford, Detroit, Mich.

The Runners are Easily Applied to the Wheels of a Go-Cart and Hold Them Solidly
The runners can be easily attached to the wheels of a go-kart and hold them securely.
A Ring-Throwing Game
The board for this game is made of a cover from an old candy or lard pail, washed and painted black. When the paint is dry, place 50 pegs on the surface as shown and number them with white paint or by fastening numbers cut from paper below them. The numbering of the pegs is not consecutive, but low and high numbers distributed with the object in view of making it difficult to secure a high score.
The game board is made from the lid of an old candy or lard container, which should be cleaned and painted black. Once the paint is dry, put 50 pegs on the surface as shown and number them with white paint or by attaching numbers cut from paper below them. The pegs are not numbered in order; instead, there are both low and high numbers mixed together to make it harder to achieve a high score.
Each player has a set of five rings, which are nothing else but rubber fruit-jar rings. These can be purchased at a grocery store. The board is hung on a wall or post, and the player stands about 5 or 6 ft. away and throws the rings, one at a time, trying to ring pegs having the highest numbers. The sum of the numbers corresponding to the pegs ringed counts toward the final score. Turns are taken by each player, and each time five rings are thrown. The score can be set at any amount, 500 being about right.—Contributed by Francis P. Hobart, Willoughby, O.
Each player has a set of five rings, which are basically rubber fruit jar rings. You can buy these at a grocery store. The board is mounted on a wall or post, and the player stands about 5 or 6 feet away, throwing the rings one at a time, aiming to land them on the pegs with the highest numbers. The total of the numbers on the successfully ringed pegs contributes to the final score. Players take turns, and each time, five rings are thrown. The score can be set to any amount, with 500 being a good target.—Contributed by Francis P. Hobart, Willoughby, O.

The Candy-Pail Cover with Pegs Numbered and a Set of Rings for Each Player
The Candy-Pail Cover with Numbered Pegs and a Set of Rings for Each Player
A Pen and Brush Holder
A sheet of corrugated paper is a handy thing to have on the writing desk, for the purpose of placing wet pens or brushes in its grooves. The paper absorbs the liquid, and the corrugations hold the pens or brushes in handy positions. A sheet of this paper is almost as useful a desk accessory as a blotter.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A sheet of corrugated paper is a useful item to have on your writing desk for placing wet pens or brushes in its grooves. The paper soaks up the liquid, and the corrugations keep the pens or brushes in convenient positions. A sheet of this paper is nearly as practical as a blotter. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

The Depressions in the Paper Hold the Pens or Brushes and Also Absorb the Excess Fluid
The depressions in the paper hold the pens or brushes and also soak up the extra fluid.
Supporter for a Double Clothesline

A double clothesline of any length should have a supporter in the center to keep the line from sagging when the clothes are hung on the lower one. The supporter shown in the sketch saves the wear from the strain on the lines. It also keeps the clothes in a higher current of air so that they dry quicker.
A double clothesline of any length should have a support in the center to prevent the line from sagging when clothes are hung on the lower one. The support shown in the sketch reduces wear from the strain on the lines. It also keeps the clothes in a higher airflow, so they dry faster.
The supporter is made of two nickelplated rings measuring 2 in. in diameter. They are bound together as shown. The rings being nickelplated, the supporter will not rust the clothes. The clothes should be arranged on the lower line so that the supporter will rest in the center.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, New York.
The supporter consists of two nickel-plated rings that are 2 inches in diameter. They're connected as shown. Since the rings are nickel-plated, the supporter won't rust your clothes. The clothes should be placed on the lower line to ensure the supporter rests in the center.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, New York.
Pincushion for the Arm
Those that have trouble in keeping the pincushion within reach while sewing, can remedy the trouble by making one to fit the wrist or arm. An ordinary pincushion is attached to a piece of cardboard and an elastic sewed to the cardboard edges so that it will fit on the arm. The pincushion is not in the way and is readily worn so that the pins are easier to reach than if pinned to the dress.—Contributed by Frank Sterrett, Portland, O.
Those who have difficulty keeping the pincushion within reach while sewing can solve this issue by creating one that fits on their wrist or arm. An average pincushion can be attached to a piece of cardboard, with an elastic band sewn to the edges of the cardboard so it will fit comfortably on the arm. The pincushion won’t get in the way and can be easily worn, making it simpler to access the pins than if they were attached to the dress.—Contributed by Frank Sterrett, Portland, O.
Electric Test for Fixtures
A very useful device for testing out fixtures before they are connected up can be easily made as follows: Two wires are run from a plug, A, one to a socket, B, and the other to terminate at C. The line from the other side of the socket B terminates at D.
A handy tool for testing fixtures before they are hooked up can be easily made like this: Run two wires from a plug, A, with one going to a socket, B, and the other ending at C. The wire from the other side of socket B ends at D.
In testing a fixture, the plug A is turned into a socket of some source of current, and a lamp is turned into the socket B. The terminal C is held to the metal covering of the fixture, while the end D is held to one of the wires. If there is a leak of current, the lamp at B and those of the fixture will light up.—Contributed by Fred Schumacher, Brooklyn, N. Y.
In testing a fixture, plug A is inserted into a socket connected to a power source, and a lamp is plugged into socket B. Terminal C is connected to the metal casing of the fixture, while end D is attached to one of the wires. If there's a current leak, the lamp in B and those in the fixture will light up.—Contributed by Fred Schumacher, Brooklyn, N. Y.

One Line of the Two Connecting Wires is Broken and the Ends Used as Terminals on the Fixture
One of the two connecting wires is broken, and the ends are used as terminals on the fixture.
Opening for Steam in a Utensil Cover
When cooking certain foods the ordinary cover on a vessel confines too much steam, while if no cover at all is used, too much will escape, hence a cover which is provided with a vent is very desirable. The cover attachment shown in the illustration is evidently well adapted for service on such occasions and can be easily made as follows:
When cooking certain foods, a regular lid on a pot holds in too much steam, while using no lid at all lets too much escape. Therefore, a lid with a vent is really useful. The lid design shown in the illustration is clearly suited for this purpose and can be easily made as follows:

The Small Triangular Surface Provided with Holes for Releasing Surplus Steam is Covered with a Cap
The small triangular surface with holes for releasing excess steam is covered with a cap.
Lay out a small triangle on some level part of the cover and punch several holes inside of the lines. Cut a cap, A, from a piece of tin to cover the holes. A small projection on the edge of the cap serves to swing it one way or the other, as needed, and it is fastened loosely to the cover with a soft-copper rivet, so that it may be easily opened.
Lay out a small triangle on a flat part of the cover and punch several holes inside the lines. Cut a cap, A, from a piece of tin to cover the holes. A small projection on the edge of the cap allows it to swing in either direction as needed, and it is attached loosely to the cover with a soft-copper rivet, so that it can be easily opened.
Drying Seeds
A good way to dry tomato, cantaloupe, and other seeds is to put them on blotters. They will quickly dry in this manner and will not become moldy, as the blotter soaks up the moisture.—Contributed by Theodore Becker, Kansas City, Mo.
A great way to dry tomato, cantaloupe, and other seeds is to place them on blotters. They will dry quickly this way and won't get moldy, since the blotter absorbs the moisture. —Contributed by Theodore Becker, Kansas City, Mo.
Cleaning Clothes by Boiling Them
When cleaning clothes by boiling them in a boiler over a fire, fit in a false bottom to keep the clothes from touching the bottom. The false bottom should be perforated with holes, 3/8-in. in diameter and 1 in. apart, over the entire piece. Fasten four legs, each about 2 in. long, to the under side to make a space between the bottoms. In washing, all that is necessary is to place the clothes in the boiler and boil them. The dirt will come loose and settle through the holes and on the boiler bottom.
When cleaning clothes by boiling them in a boiler over a fire, add a false bottom to prevent the clothes from touching the bottom. This false bottom should have holes, 3/8 inches in diameter and spaced 1 inch apart, across the entire surface. Attach four legs, each about 2 inches long, to the underside to create space between the bottoms. When washing, all you need to do is put the clothes in the boiler and boil them. The dirt will loosen and drop through the holes to settle on the bottom of the boiler.
An Emergency Tack Puller
One day I had to pull some tacks but had no tack puller at hand. An idea came to me to use the kitchen spoon, and I found that it worked even better than a regular tack puller. The ordinary kitchen spoon usually has an edge sharp enough to get under any tack.—Contributed by H. D. Harkins, St. Louis, Mo.
One day I needed to remove some tacks but didn’t have a tack puller available. I had the idea to use a kitchen spoon, and it actually worked even better than a regular tack puller. A typical kitchen spoon usually has an edge sharp enough to get under any tack.—Contributed by H. D. Harkins, St. Louis, Mo.

The Point of a Spoon will Easily Pull a Tack from Soft Wood
The tip of a spoon will easily remove a tack from soft wood.
A Puzzle with Figures
This puzzle is to arrange all the figures or digits, from 1 to 9 inclusively, in two rows, each containing all the digits, so that the sum in addition as well as the remainder in subtraction will have nine figures, in which all the digits are represented. There are several solutions to the puzzle, and the following is one of them:
This puzzle involves arranging all the numbers from 1 to 9 in two rows, each containing all the digits, so that both the sum and the difference show all nine digits. There are multiple solutions to the puzzle, and here's one of them:
371294568 216397845
371294568 216397845
The sum of the foregoing numbers and the remainder, when the lower row is subtracted from the upper, will both have nine figures and include all the digits from 1 to 9.—Contributed by Walter Bennett, Detroit, Mich.
The total of the numbers mentioned above and the leftover, when the bottom row is taken away from the top, will both have nine digits and include all the numbers from 1 to 9.—Contributed by Walter Bennett, Detroit, Mich.
To Fasten Loose Table Legs
When legs of an ordinary table become loose and unsteady they may be easily repaired as shown in the sketch. Nails do not hold well in such places and glue will not stand much washing.
When the legs of a regular table become loose and wobbly, they can be easily fixed as shown in the sketch. Nails don't stay in well in those spots, and glue won't hold up to much washing.

A Piece of Wire Bent around the Leg of a Table will Make It Rigid
A piece of wire wrapped around the leg of a table will make it sturdy.
The method of making the repair is to drill 1/8-in. holes through the rails on each side of the leg and insert pieces of galvanized wire of a size to fit the holes. After the wire is inserted, the ends are bent over. The illustration clearly shows the repair.—Contributed by Edwin C. Wright, Newport, Ky.
The way to fix it is to drill 1/8-inch holes through the rails on both sides of the leg and insert pieces of galvanized wire that fit the holes. Once the wire is in place, bend the ends over. The illustration clearly shows the repair.—Contributed by Edwin C. Wright, Newport, Ky.
Washbasin Holder

A piece of wire formed into the shape shown in the sketch makes a handy hook to hold a washbasin when it is not in use. This keeps it out of the way and out of the dirty water which might be thrown into the kitchen sink.—Contributed by F. C. Althen, Anamosa, Iowa.
A piece of wire shaped like the one in the sketch creates a convenient hook to hold a washbasin when it’s not in use. This keeps it out of the way and away from any dirty water that might be thrown into the kitchen sink.—Contributed by F. C. Althen, Anamosa, Iowa.
A Cleaner for Canvas Shoes
One of the most economical cleansers for canvas shoes is oxide of zinc. Mix a small quantity of the powder with water, to the consistency of thin paste, and apply it to the canvas with an old toothbrush, rubbing it in thoroughly. Then set the shoes aside to dry before wearing them.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
One of the most cost-effective cleaners for canvas shoes is zinc oxide. Mix a small amount of the powder with water until it reaches a thin paste consistency, and apply it to the canvas using an old toothbrush, making sure to rub it in well. After that, let the shoes dry completely before wearing them. —Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
A good substitute currycomb can be made of corncobs tied together tightly.
A good alternative to a currycomb can be made by tightly tying corncobs together.
Ruling Blank Books
A special ruling for a blank book can be drawn by using a thin piece of sheet metal or cardboard, cut as shown in Fig. 1, for a template. The pencil is drawn along one edge of the cutout so that it will make lines as shown in Fig. 2.
A special template for a blank book can be made using a thin piece of sheet metal or cardboard, cut as shown in Fig. 1. The pencil is run along one edge of the cutout to create the lines as shown in Fig. 2.

A Template Having Slots Cut for Drawing Special Vertical and Horizontal Lines on Pages (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A template with slots designed for drawing specific vertical and horizontal lines on pages (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
If horizontal lines are required, cut notches on the edge for the location of each line as shown. When the vertical lines are drawn, these notches will mark the places for the horizontal lines.
If you need to create horizontal lines, cut notches on the edge to indicate where each line should go, as shown. When you draw the vertical lines, these notches will indicate the spots for the horizontal lines.
How to Demagnetize a Watch
Quite often the attendants or a visitor to an electric-light plant discovers after a few days that his watch is losing a half hour or more a day by having become magnetized by the dynamos. In stations where the old types of machines are still in use there is a great deal more danger from what is called "stray" magnetic fields than in those where modern machines are installed.
Often, people working at or visiting an electric-light plant find that their watch starts losing half an hour or more each day because it's become magnetized by the dynamos. In stations that still use older types of machines, there's a much greater risk from what's known as "stray" magnetic fields compared to places where modern machines are in use.
The jeweler demagnetizes a watch in the following way: He has a piece of soft iron with an opening cut in its center of such shape and size as to receive the watch, and with a fine wire wound about it. After the watch has been placed in position, an alternating current, that is, one whose direction is changing at regular intervals, is sent through the winding, and thus a magnetic field is produced that also changes in direction as the current reverses. The current is gradually reduced in value and the magnetism originally possessed by the watch is removed. When an alternating current is not available, a direct current may be used, its direction being rapidly reversed by what is known as a "polarity changer."
The jeweler demagnetizes a watch like this: He uses a piece of soft iron with an opening cut in the center, shaped and sized to fit the watch, and wraps a fine wire around it. Once the watch is in place, an alternating current, which is a current that changes direction at regular intervals, is sent through the wire, creating a magnetic field that also shifts direction as the current reverses. The current is gradually reduced in strength, and the magnetism that the watch originally had is removed. If an alternating current isn’t available, a direct current can be used, with its direction quickly switched by a device known as a "polarity changer."
Anyone can demagnetize his own watch, however, with very little trouble and no expense by a much simpler method. Procure a piece of heavy linen thread about 3 ft. long, attach one end of it to the ring of the watch, hold the other end and turn the watch around until the thread is twisted at least one hundred times. Now allow the thread to unwind, and as the watch revolves, pass it back and forth near a powerful electromagnet. The field magnet of a good-sized generator or motor will answer. The machine should be in operation, or at least there should be a current in the windings about the fields, when you attempt to demagnetize the watch. While the thread is unwinding, and the watch moved in the magnetic field, gradually withdraw from the magnet so that when the watch ceases to revolve, it is just outside of the field.
Anyone can easily demagnetize their watch without spending anything by using a much simpler method. Get a piece of heavy linen thread about 3 feet long, attach one end to the watch's ring, hold the other end, and turn the watch around until the thread is twisted at least a hundred times. Now let the thread unwind, and as the watch rotates, move it back and forth near a strong electromagnet. A good-sized generator or motor will work fine. The machine should be running, or at least there should be current flowing through the windings around the fields when you try to demagnetize the watch. While the thread unwinds and the watch moves in the magnetic field, gradually pull away from the magnet so that when the watch stops moving, it's just outside the field.
Always be sure to keep the watch revolving while it is in the magnetic field, otherwise the results will be very unsatisfactory, and more harm than good may result.
Always make sure to keep the watch moving while it's in the magnetic field; otherwise, the results will be very unsatisfactory, and it may do more harm than good.
A Pencil Holder
Procure a piece of paper, 7 in. long and 4 in. wide, and roll it one time around a lead pencil, then coat the remaining surface of the paper with glue. Roll this around the pencil and a tube is formed, which will hold a pencil or even pieces of pencil down to 1/2 in. in length.—Contributed by W. D. Brooks, Paterson, N. J.
Get a piece of paper that’s 7 inches long and 4 inches wide, and roll it once around a pencil. Then, cover the rest of the paper with glue. Roll it around the pencil again, and you’ll create a tube that can hold a pencil or even pieces of a pencil down to 1/2 inch long.—Contributed by W. D. Brooks, Paterson, N. J.

A Stub of a Pencil can be Easily Held in the Tube for Writing
A stub of a pencil can be easily held in the tube for writing.
A Poultry-Food Chopper
The illustration shows a handy device for cutting roots for food, and for chopping and mixing stale bread, potatoes, peelings, refuse fruit, etc., for poultry. Any blacksmith can make the chopper at little cost. For the cutting blades use two pieces of steel a little heavier than oil-barrel hoops, each 1-1/2 in. wide and 8 in. long. Procure a 1/2-in. iron rod, about 3 ft. long, bend one end in the shape of a spade handle and split the other end for a distance of about 2-1/2 in.
The illustration shows a useful tool for cutting roots for food and for chopping and mixing stale bread, potatoes, peels, leftover fruit, etc., for poultry. Any blacksmith can make the chopper for a low cost. For the cutting blades, use two pieces of steel that are a bit heavier than oil-barrel hoops, each 1.5 inches wide and 8 inches long. Get a 0.5-inch iron rod, about 3 feet long, bend one end to look like a spade handle and split the other end for about 2.5 inches.

The Chopper Consists of a Rod Handle to Which Blades are Attached by Riveting or Welding
The chopper has a rod handle that blades are attached to either by riveting or welding.
Sharpen one edge of each blade and curve the metal slightly. Lay the two blades together with the convex sides touching in the center and insert them in the slit in the handle end. They are riveted or welded in place. Heat and bend the blades at right angles.
Sharpen one edge of each blade and curve the metal slightly. Position the two blades together with the curved sides touching in the center and insert them into the slit at the end of the handle. They are riveted or welded in place. Heat and bend the blades at right angles.
Many of the materials mentioned for poultry foods may be chopped in an ordinary pail having a strong bottom, but it is best to make a box, about 1-1/2 ft. square and with a plank bottom, for use with the chopper.
Many of the materials mentioned for poultry feed can be chopped in a regular sturdy bucket, but it's better to make a box that's about 1.5 feet square with a wooden bottom for use with the chopper.
A Small Spring Hinge
Box covers or small doors that are seldom used can be supplied with a small spring hinge as shown in the illustration. The hinge is made of a piece of spring wire which is formed similar to a staple with a coil or complete turn given to the wire in the center. It is attached by driving the points, one into the door and the other into the casing.
Box covers or small doors that aren't used much can be fitted with a small spring hinge like the one shown in the illustration. This hinge is made from a piece of spring wire shaped like a staple, with a coil or full turn in the center. It's attached by driving one point into the door and the other into the casing.

The Shape of the Hinge, and the Manner of Attaching It to a Cover or Door
The Shape of the Hinge and How to Attach It to a Cover or Door
Shoestring End
When the tips slip from shoelaces, new ones may be readily made of fine wire. The wire is run through the end of the lace, Fig. 1, and the two ends are twisted tightly together as shown in Fig. 2. This covers the end of the lace and makes, a tip that is easily passed through the eyelets.
When the tips come off shoelaces, you can easily make new ones from fine wire. Just thread the wire through the end of the lace, as shown in Fig. 1, and twist the two ends tightly together, like in Fig. 2. This covers the end of the lace and creates a tip that fits easily through the eyelets.

The Wire Prevents the Lace from Raveling and Makes a Tip for Easily Entering the Eyelets (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The wire stops the lace from unraveling and creates a tip for easily threading through the eyelets (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Threads on Wood Shafts
In model making it is quite necessary at times to have threads on a wood shaft. These can be made quite satisfactorily by coiling a wire around the shaft where the threads are wanted, and driving the ends into the wood.
In model making, it's often necessary to have threads on a wooden shaft. You can easily create these by wrapping wire around the shaft where you need the threads and then driving the ends into the wood.

The Wire Forms a Thread That in Many Instances is Quite Serviceable for Model Making
The wire creates a connection that is often very useful for making models.
A Glass Breaker
After cutting glass, and especially where a small strip is to be removed, the part must be broken away in small pieces. The accompanying sketch shows a very useful tool for this purpose. The tool is made of a piece of metal having a bolt fastened to it at one end whose nut can be adjusted to the thickness of the glass.
After cutting glass, especially when a small strip needs to be removed, the piece must be broken off in small sections. The accompanying sketch shows a very handy tool for this job. The tool is made from a piece of metal with a bolt attached at one end, and its nut can be adjusted to the thickness of the glass.

The Nut is Set to the Thickness of the Glass and Used to Break Pieces Away
The nut is adjusted to the thickness of the glass and is used to chip pieces off.
Old discarded blueprints can be made white and used for sketching by dipping them in a solution of soda and water, in the proportions of 4 oz. of soda to each gallon of water.
Old discarded blueprints can be turned white and used for sketching by dipping them in a solution of soda and water, with the proportions of 4 oz. of soda to each gallon of water.
Wood Postal Cards
The card consists of three pieces, or three-ply, veneer. The grain of the outside veneer runs lengthwise, while that of the inside piece runs crosswise. This makes the card straight and keeps it from breaking. For the inner section, walnut, which may be had as thin as 1/64 in., or any thin straight-grained veneer may be used. Two pieces of veneer, about 3-3/4 in. wide and 6 in. long; one piece, 6 in. wide and 3-3/4 in. long,—the length being with the grain of the wood—and two blocks of wood, known as cauls, of the same size or a little larger, and about 7/8 in. thick, are required.
The card is made of three layers, or three-ply veneer. The grain of the outer veneer runs lengthwise, while the grain of the inner piece runs crosswise. This design keeps the card straight and prevents it from breaking. For the inner section, you can use walnut, which can be found as thin as 1/64 in., or any other thin straight-grained veneer. You will need two pieces of veneer, each about 3-3/4 in. wide and 6 in. long; one piece that is 6 in. wide and 3-3/4 in. long—where the length goes with the grain of the wood—and two wooden blocks, called cauls, of the same size or slightly larger, and about 7/8 in. thick.
The veneer is laid flat on a board and cut with a sharp knife or fine saw along the edge of a ruler. The three pieces are glued together in the following manner. Use ordinary hot glue, not too thin, but thin enough to run freely from the brush. The glue is applied evenly on both sides of the inner piece only, and this is then stood on edge until the glue chills. Then the cauls are heated. This is best done on a stove, or on stove lids over a gas fire. While the blocks are being heated, put one veneer on either side of the middle piece, and a piece of thin paper on each side to keep the glue from the cauls. A hand screw or vise should be opened to almost the distance required. One of the cauls is now laid flat, the veneers upon it and the other caul on top. This should be done quickly. Then clamp the whole firmly together. While the full pressure is only needed for about two hours, the pieces should be allowed to dry between the cauls for, say, a day or two, so that they will keep straight. The size of the finished card is 3-3/8 in. by 5-1/2 in. It is cut and planed to size while lying flat on a board, the plane being pushed along on its side on the bench top. To dress or clean, clamp one side to the bench. While a scraper blade may be used to advantage, it is not essential, as a block of wood and sandpaper will do. The thinner it is dressed the better. The sharp edges should be removed with sandpaper. The writing on a wood card is not done in the ordinary manner, as the ink would run. The surface must be prepared, which also gives a finish to the wood. Melt some wax or paraffin in a suitable vessel and cover the surface of the wood, using a brush or rag. The lines for the address on one side are then drawn, and the writing is done with a hard lead pencil. When through writing on one side, cover it with some strong aniline stain. (Aniline, dissolved in hot water, commonly known as water stain and used especially to stain mahogany, is the right kind.) Do not remove the wax that was raised by the pencil point. Brush the stain over until the whole side is covered. When dry, repeat on the other side. In about an hour the wax may be scraped off with a dull scraper or some other dull instrument. After every particle of wax has been removed, the card is given a good rubbing with a clean, soft rag. It is well to protect the hands as well as the table during the process.—Contributed by Chas. Schapmeier, Baltimore, Md.
The veneer is laid flat on a board and cut with a sharp knife or fine saw along the edge of a ruler. The three pieces are glued together in the following way. Use regular hot glue, not too thin, but thin enough to flow freely from the brush. The glue is applied evenly on both sides of the inner piece only, and this is then stood on edge until the glue cools. Then the cauls are heated. This is best done on a stove, or on stove lids over a gas flame. While the blocks are being heated, place one veneer on either side of the middle piece, and a piece of thin paper on each side to keep the glue off the cauls. A hand screw or vice should be opened to almost the distance required. One of the cauls is now laid flat, the veneers placed on it, and the other caul on top. This should be done quickly. Then clamp the whole setup firmly together. While full pressure is only needed for about two hours, the pieces should be allowed to dry between the cauls for a day or two to ensure they stay straight. The size of the finished card is 3-3/8 in. by 5-1/2 in. It is cut and planed to size while lying flat on a board, with the plane being pushed along on its side on the workbench. To finish or clean, clamp one side to the bench. While a scraper blade can be used effectively, it’s not essential, as a block of wood and sandpaper will suffice. The thinner it is dressed, the better. The sharp edges should be smoothed down with sandpaper. Writing on a wood card is not done in the usual way, as the ink would run. The surface needs to be prepared, which also gives a finish to the wood. Melt some wax or paraffin in a suitable container and cover the surface of the wood with a brush or rag. The lines for the address on one side are then drawn, and the writing is done with a hard lead pencil. After finishing writing on one side, cover it with a strong aniline stain. (Aniline, dissolved in hot water, commonly known as water stain and especially used to stain mahogany, is the right type.) Do not remove the wax that was raised by the pencil point. Brush the stain over until the entire side is covered. When dry, repeat on the other side. In about an hour, the wax can be scraped off with a dull scraper or another blunt tool. After all the wax has been removed, the card is given a good rub with a clean, soft rag. It's a good idea to protect your hands as well as the table during the process. —Contributed by Chas. Schapmeier, Baltimore, Md.
Fastening Screws in Tile and Brick Walls
A simple way to fasten screws in tile or brick walls is to drill holes, not too large, for the screws, then tear up some paper, wet it and make a pulp. Pack this pulp tightly in the hole and turn in the screws. The screws will stand a great deal of strain.—Contributed by John Thomas, Brantford, Ont.
A simple way to screw into tile or brick walls is to drill holes that aren’t too big for the screws, then tear up some paper, wet it, and make a pulp. Pack this pulp tightly into the hole and screw in the screws. They’ll hold up against a lot of pressure. —Contributed by John Thomas, Brantford, Ont.
Shoe Pull Made of an Eyelet
The pulling-on strap at the back of a shoe often comes loose, or pulls out, and even if it does not, the trousers will sometimes catch on it if the strap is not tucked inside of the shoe. A very simple way to overcome these troubles is to remove the straps and substitute eyelets. A buttonhook will then serve admirably in pulling the shoe onto the foot.
The pull strap at the back of a shoe often comes loose or pulls out, and even if it doesn't, the pants can sometimes catch on it if the strap isn't tucked inside the shoe. A very simple way to avoid these problems is to take off the straps and replace them with eyelets. A buttonhook will then work perfectly for putting the shoe on the foot.
Holder for a Set of Sadirons
A very attractive holder for a set of sadirons and their handle can be made as shown in the illustration, although the design may be changed if desired. The holder consists of a shield-shaped back, which is fastened to the wall in a convenient place and has a shelf with openings for the irons attached to it. The shelf is made in two pieces, the bottom part being covered with a heavy piece of tin while the upper is cut out to receive the irons.
A stylish holder for a set of sadirons and their handle can be created as shown in the illustration, though you can change the design if you'd like. The holder features a shield-shaped back that is mounted on the wall in a convenient spot, with a shelf that has openings for the irons. The shelf is made up of two parts, with the bottom covered by a sturdy piece of tin, while the top is cut out to hold the irons.
The irons are placed on the upper piece in such positions that they will be attractively displayed and evenly located, and then a lead-pencil mark is drawn around their base. Openings are cut in the wood on these marks and the board fastened on top of the tin-covered shelf. An ordinary brass bracket is used in the center beneath the shelf, to keep it from sagging.
The irons are positioned on the upper piece so that they look nice and are evenly spaced, and then a pencil mark is drawn around their base. Openings are cut in the wood following these marks, and the board is attached on top of the tin-covered shelf. A regular brass bracket is used in the center underneath the shelf to prevent it from sagging.

An Ornamented Bracket Shelf for Holding a Complete Set of Sadirons and Their Handle
An Ornate Bracket Shelf for Displaying a Full Set of Sad Irons and Their Handle
The shield is fastened to the wall with two screws, over which two brushed-brass, diamond-shaped pieces are fastened with large brass tacks, to cover the screw heads. The corners of the shield may be ornamented with brushed-brass designs, and the wood finished as desired. The irons can be set in the holder while hot without fear of burning any part, and they will present a very neat appearance.—Contributed by G. E. Martin, Hastings, Nebraska.
The shield is attached to the wall with two screws, which are covered by two brushed-brass, diamond-shaped pieces secured with large brass tacks to hide the screw heads. The corners of the shield can have brushed-brass designs, and the wood can be finished however you like. The irons can be placed in the holder while hot without worrying about burning anything, and they will look very neat.—Contributed by G. E. Martin, Hastings, Nebraska.
A Garden Roller
A garden roller for digging the earth and crushing clods is easily made of the following material: One round piece of wood, 10 in. in diameter and 18 in. long; two pieces of wood, each 56 in. long, 2-1/2 in. wide and 1-1/4 in. thick; one piece, 21 in. long, 2 in. wide and 1 in. thick; two 1/2-in. lag screws, 6 in. long, and a quantity of 8-penny nails.
A garden roller for breaking up soil and flattening clumps is easy to make with the following materials: One round piece of wood, 10 inches in diameter and 18 inches long; two pieces of wood, each 56 inches long, 2.5 inches wide, and 1.25 inches thick; one piece, 21 inches long, 2 inches wide, and 1 inch thick; two 1/2-inch lag screws, 6 inches long, and some 8-penny nails.

A Roller for Crushing Clods and Digging the Earth in Garden Making
A Roller for Breaking Up Clods and Tilling the Soil in Gardening
The short piece of wood is fitted between the two long pieces with tenon-and-mortise joints to serve as a handle at one end and the roller is fastened between the side pieces at the opposite end to revolve on the lag screws. The nails are driven into the roller so that they project about 1 in.
The short piece of wood is placed between the two long pieces using tenon-and-mortise joints to act as a handle at one end, while the roller is secured between the side pieces at the opposite end to spin on the lag screws. The nails are hammered into the roller so that they stick out about 1 inch.
A Substitute for Glaziers' Points
Ordinary small staples make good substitutes for glaziers' tacks. The points of the staples should be drawn apart slightly, as shown at A, to give them a greater holding area and at the same time make them easier to drive. These points seem to hold the glass better than the regular glaziers' points, consequently the putty will not crack and loosen, and renewing is avoided.—Contributed by Edward Sieja, Chicago.
Ordinary small staples work well as substitutes for glaziers' tacks. The points of the staples should be spread apart slightly, as shown at A, to increase their holding area while also making them easier to drive in. These points seem to grip the glass better than the standard glaziers' points, so the putty won't crack or come loose, which means you won’t need to replace it.—Contributed by Edward Sieja, Chicago.

Double-Pointed Tacks, or Staples, with the Points Spread, Used as Substitutes for Glaziers' Points
Double-Pointed Tacks, or Staples, with the Points Spread, Used as Substitutes for Glaziers' Points
Water-Heating Coil in a Furnace Pipe

The accompanying sketch shows a plan I adopted for conserving the waste heat from my furnace. I found that I was able to put a coil into the smoke pipe, which was about 8 in. in diameter, and thus heat water for domestic purposes. It will be seen that the coil is spiral in shape rather than cylindrical, as the latter would leave a free passage up the center and therefore would not bring enough gases into contact with the coil.
The sketch below shows a plan I came up with to save the waste heat from my furnace. I realized that I could install a coil in the smoke pipe, which is about 8 inches in diameter, to heat water for home use. You’ll notice that the coil is spiral instead of cylindrical, since a cylindrical design would leave an open space in the center and wouldn’t bring enough gases into contact with the coil.
In addition to this coil I have a gas heater near the tank which is used only in case the demand for hot water exceeds the capacity of the coil, which is naturally not as efficient per unit of length as one directly within the firepot would be. It has the advantage of not absorbing heat which should go to make steam, but only that which would otherwise be wasted. The heating surface of the coil is much greater than would be possible within the firepot, which in a measure compensates for its lower efficiency.—Contributed by W. E. Morey, Chicago.
Along with this coil, I have a gas heater near the tank that’s only used if the demand for hot water is greater than what the coil can provide. Naturally, it's not as efficient per unit of length as one that’s directly in the firepot. However, it has the benefit of not absorbing heat that should be used for making steam, only the heat that would otherwise go to waste. The heating surface of the coil is much larger than what would be feasible inside the firepot, which somewhat makes up for its lower efficiency. —Contributed by W. E. Morey, Chicago.
A Homemade Marking Gauge

A 3/8-in. bushing is turned into the side outlet of a 3/8-in. tee. The bushing is then tapped to receive a 7/16-in. wing bolt. A tight-fitting wood plug is driven into the throughway of the tee and the ends ground off flush on the emery wheel. A slot, 5/16-in. square, is then cut through the wood plug just under the bushing. Two pieces of flat steel, each 1/4 in. wide by 1/8 in. thick and 1/8 in. longer than the tee, are fitted in the slot cut in the plug as shown in the sketch. The outer end of each piece is bent at right angles and sharpened. After the points have been drawn out to the right distance, the wing bolt is turned to hold them in that position.—Contributed by C. Molloy, Philadelphia, Pa.
A 3/8-inch bushing is screwed into the side outlet of a 3/8-inch tee. The bushing is then tapped to accept a 7/16-inch wing bolt. A snug wood plug is hammered into the passage of the tee, and the ends are ground flush on an emery wheel. A 5/16-inch square slot is then cut through the wood plug just below the bushing. Two pieces of flat steel, each 1/4 inch wide, 1/8 inch thick, and 1/8 inch longer than the tee, are placed in the slot cut in the plug as shown in the sketch. The outer end of each piece is bent at a right angle and sharpened. After the points have been extended to the correct distance, the wing bolt is turned to secure them in that position.—Contributed by C. Molloy, Philadelphia, Pa.
Protecting Brush Handles from Paint
A very efficient method to prevent paint from running down on a paintbrush handle and on the hand is to cut a hollow rubber ball in half, Fig. 1, make a hole in the center to fit the brush handle and attach it as shown in Fig. 2. One ball will fit up two brushes. The cup shape catches the paint and prevents it from getting on the handle.—Contributed by O. H. Meyer, Churdon, Iowa.
A really effective way to stop paint from dripping onto your paintbrush handle and your hand is to cut a hollow rubber ball in half, Fig. 1. Make a hole in the center to fit the brush handle and attach it as demonstrated in Fig. 2. One ball can fit up to two brushes. The cup shape catches the paint and keeps it off the handle.—Contributed by O. H. Meyer, Churdon, Iowa.

The Shape of the Ball Forms a Cup to Catch the Paint from the Brush (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The shape of the ball creates a cup to catch the paint from the brush (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A Tie-Pin Holder

Having lost several tie pins by theft or by their falling out I made a little device to securely hold the pin in the tie. This device makes it almost impossible to pull the pin out and it cannot be lost accidentally. The device is made of a small safety pin, bent as shown, with one arm, A, longer than the other, B. The arm A is put on the pin first or upward, and attached as shown at C. When pulling on the tie pin the arms of the holder tend to draw together and clamp it on the pin.—Contributed by Robert C. Knox, Colorado Springs, Colo.
Having lost several tie pins to theft or simply because they fell out, I came up with a little device to securely hold the pin in the tie. This device makes it almost impossible to pull the pin out, and it can't be lost by accident. The device is made from a small safety pin, bent as shown, with one arm, A, longer than the other, B. The longer arm A goes on the pin first or upward, and is attached as shown at C. When you pull on the tie pin, the arms of the holder tend to draw together and clamp it onto the pin.—Contributed by Robert C. Knox, Colorado Springs, Colo.
Hulling Walnuts
When gathering my winter supply of walnuts, I found that they could not be hulled readily by hand. Not knowing of any machine designed for the purpose, I tried running them through a corn sheller and found it to do the work nicely. The sheller not only hulled them, but separated the nuts from the hulls, the nuts being carried out through the cob opening and the hulls dropping through the grain spout.—Contributed by Irl R. Hicks, Hallsville, Mo.
When I was collecting my winter stash of walnuts, I realized that I couldn’t easily hull them by hand. Not knowing of any machine made for that, I decided to try using a corn sheller, and it worked really well. The sheller not only hulled the walnuts but also separated the nuts from the hulls, with the nuts coming out through the cob opening and the hulls falling through the grain spout.—Contributed by Irl R. Hicks, Hallsville, Mo.
How to Make a Small Vise Screw
Procure an ordinary lag screw, as shown in Fig. 1, cut off the pointed end and file the threads into the shape shown in Fig. 2. A hole is drilled through the head and a handle put in, as shown in Fig. 3. This makes a good substitute screw when the original screw for a small vise is broken.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown. Pa.
Get a regular lag screw, like the one in Fig. 1, cut off the pointed end, and file the threads into the shape shown in Fig. 2. Drill a hole through the head and attach a handle, as shown in Fig. 3. This creates a good replacement screw when the original screw for a small vise is broken.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, PA.

A Vise Screw Formed of an Ordinary Lag Screw, the Threads being Made Square and a Handle Attached (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A vise screw made from a regular lag screw, with square threads and a handle attached (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A Medicine-Spoon Holder
When a dropper is not at hand it is difficult to drop medicine in a spoon while holding it, and the shape of the spoon will not permit its being set down. A shoe horn used as shown in the sketch will hold the spoon right side up and in a position to hold the liquid.—Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
When you don’t have a dropper, it’s tough to drop medicine into a spoon while holding it, and the shape of the spoon makes it impossible to set it down. A shoehorn used as shown in the sketch can keep the spoon upright and in a position to hold the liquid. —Contributed by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.

A Shoe Horn is the Right Shape to Hold the Spoon Right Side Up and Level
A shoe horn is the perfect shape to keep the spoon upright and level.
Knife Holder on a Frying Pan
Instead of laying a knife on the stove or carrying it to a table or elsewhere while frying anything in a pan, make a clip to fit the edge of the pan for holding the knife when it is not in use. The clip is easily made of brass wire and when attached to a frying pan it will save many steps.—Contributed by John C. Harlacker, Jr., Cumberland, B. C.
Instead of placing a knife on the stove or carrying it to a table or somewhere else while frying something in a pan, create a clip that fits the edge of the pan to hold the knife when it's not in use. The clip can be easily made from brass wire, and when attached to a frying pan, it will save you a lot of unnecessary steps.—Contributed by John C. Harlacker, Jr., Cumberland, B. C.

The Shape of the Clip and Manner of Attaching It to a Frying Pan
The Design of the Clip and How to Attach It to a Frying Pan
A Broom for Sweeping Out Corners in Steps

Sweeping the corners of steps is one of the greatest difficulties of the housewife, or others who have a number of stairs to sweep. I have made this task easy in a very simple manner. I secured a used broom, the longer and newer the better, and cut the straws off diagonally across the sweeping edge. The pointed part will easily clean out the corners in steps or in a room.—Contributed by W. A. Stamaman, Berlin, Ontario.
Sweeping the corners of steps is one of the biggest challenges for a housewife or anyone who has a lot of stairs to clean. I've found a really simple way to make this task easier. I grabbed an old broom—the longer and newer, the better—and cut the bristles diagonally across the sweeping edge. The pointed part makes it really easy to clean out the corners on stairs or in a room.—Contributed by W. A. Stamaman, Berlin, Ontario.
Removing a Cork from a Bottle
A cork that has been pushed into a bottle accidentally or otherwise can be easily removed in the following manner: Tie several knots in one end of a string to form a large cluster and drop it into the bottle, holding on to the other end of the string. Turn the bottle over so that the cork will fall to the opening in the neck, then pull on the string. The cluster formed by the knots at the end of the string will easily draw out the cork.—Contributed by Frank Hart, Chicago, Ill.
A cork that accidentally gets pushed into a bottle can be easily removed like this: Tie several knots in one end of a string to create a large cluster and drop it into the bottle, holding onto the other end of the string. Turn the bottle upside down so the cork falls to the opening in the neck, then pull on the string. The knot cluster at the end of the string will easily pull out the cork.—Contributed by Frank Hart, Chicago, Ill.
Filing Flat Surfaces
Anyone who has used a file knows what skill is required to produce flat surfaces. A fixture which is nothing more than a mirror properly placed enables the operator to sight along the file and see at all times just how the file is running.—Contributed by A. F. Stearns, Madison, Wis.
Anyone who has used a file knows how much skill it takes to create flat surfaces. A fixture, which is simply a properly positioned mirror, allows the operator to look along the file and constantly see how the file is working. —Contributed by A. F. Stearns, Madison, Wis.

The File can be Seen in the Mirror and Its Direction Controlled for Filing Flat Surfaces
The file can be seen in the mirror, and its direction is controlled for filing flat surfaces.
Tacking a Screen on a Frame

Screen wire is very difficult material to fasten on a frame so that it becomes taut. To make it taut and even drive the tacks as follows: First tack the screen on one side of the frame, taking care to leave no slack between the tacks, which should be about 1 ft. apart. Fasten the opposite side by stretching the screen with one hand and with the other place the tack through the meshes and push the point as far as possible toward the outer edge of the screen frame as shown in the sketch. Drive the tack so that it will enter the wood straight, which will draw the screen taut. After having thus fastened the screen to two opposite sides of the frame with tacks 1 ft. apart, other tacks are driven in midway between the first ones, stretching the screen and driving the tacks as before described, until a sufficient number of tacks are driven into either side. Then both ends are attached in the same manner.—Contributed by Bertram S. Barnes, Santa Barbara, Cal.
Screen wire is a tough material to attach to a frame so that it becomes tight. To make it tight and even, drive the tacks like this: First, tack the screen on one side of the frame, making sure to leave no slack between the tacks, which should be about 1 ft. apart. Secure the opposite side by stretching the screen with one hand while using the other hand to place the tack through the mesh and push the point as far toward the outer edge of the screen frame as possible, as shown in the sketch. Drive the tack in straight so it pulls the screen tight. After fastening the screen to two opposite sides of the frame with tacks 1 ft. apart, drive more tacks midway between the first ones, stretching the screen and securing the tacks as described before, until a sufficient number are hammered into either side. Then attach both ends in the same way.—Contributed by Bertram S. Barnes, Santa Barbara, Cal.
Safety Tips on Chair Rockers
Some rocking chairs are so constructed that when the person occupying it gives a hard tilt backward, the chair tips over or dangerously near it. A rubber-tipped screw turned into the under side of each rocker, near the rear end, will prevent the chair from tipping too far back.
Some rocking chairs are made in a way that when the person sitting in it leans back too hard, the chair can tip over or almost does. A rubber-tipped screw inserted into the underside of each rocker, close to the back end, will help stop the chair from tipping too far back.
Portable and Folding Bookcase or Closet
Two packing boxes hinged as shown and fitted with casters make a very convenient portable closet. It can be folded flat against a wall or fitted into a corner. If furnished with shelves, it can be used as a bookcase or tool closet, and when fully opened, it makes a handy workbench.
Two packing boxes connected with hinges as shown and equipped with wheels make a very convenient portable closet. It can be folded flat against a wall or placed in a corner. If it has shelves, it can be used as a bookcase or tool closet, and when fully opened, it serves as a handy workbench.
Two projecting strips are fitted on the inside of one box so as to fit tightly against the inner top and bottom surfaces of the other box, to increase the rigidity of the box when closed. The addition of casters makes the opening, closing and pushing about very easy. An ornamental hasp or lock can be fitted if desired.
Two projecting strips are installed inside one box to fit snugly against the inner top and bottom surfaces of the other box, enhancing the box's rigidity when closed. Adding casters makes it easy to open, close, and move around. An ornamental hasp or lock can be added if desired.

The Two Boxes are Joined on One Edge with Hinges and with a Hasp, if Desired, on the Other
The two boxes are connected on one edge with hinges and can have a hasp on the other side if needed.
A Curtain Stop
A small screweye turned into the bottom part or wood strip inclosed in the lower end of the curtain will prevent this end from winding over the top roller when the curtain is quickly released and rolls to the top.—Contributed by D. O. C. Kersten, Detroit, Michigan.
A small screw eye inserted into the bottom part of the wood strip at the lower end of the curtain will stop this end from winding over the top roller when the curtain is quickly released and rolls up. —Contributed by D. O. C. Kersten, Detroit, Michigan.
An Alarm for a Sleepwalker
A little girl in our family would walk in her sleep and it caused us no little worry lest she might leave the house without our knowing it. I therefore rigged up an alarm device to ring a bell should she leave the room. The device consisted of a bell and battery in a circuit, and a switch which was attached to one door casing. A string was stretched across the doorway and attached to the switch lever in such a manner as to pull it closed when the string was pushed through the doorway opening.—Contributed by J. Woodburn, Toronto, Canada.
A little girl in our family would sleepwalk, and it made us quite anxious that she might leave the house without us knowing. So, I set up an alarm system to ring a bell if she left her room. The system consisted of a bell and a battery in a circuit, along with a switch attached to one of the door frames. A string was stretched across the doorway and connected to the switch lever in such a way that pushing the string through the doorway would pull the lever closed. —Contributed by J. Woodburn, Toronto, Canada.
A Kraut and Root Grinder
The grinder is intended mainly for chopping cabbage when making sauerkraut, but it is also of much service in grinding vegetables and roots to be cooked for poultry.
The grinder is mainly for chopping cabbage when making sauerkraut, but it’s also very useful for grinding vegetables and roots that will be cooked for poultry.

The Grinder will Easily Reduce Cabbage Heads to Bits Suitable for Sauerkraut
The grinder will easily chop cabbage heads into bits that are perfect for sauerkraut.
The base A is made of a plank, at least 1 ft. wide and 4 ft. long, with a 9-1/4 by 9-1/2-in. hole cut in the center. The grinding part, or cylinder, is made of wood, 3 in. in diameter and 9 in. long, with 8-penny nails, spaced 3/16 in. apart, driven partly into it and then cut off so as to leave 1/4 in. projecting. The cylinder is turned by means of a crank attached to the end of the shaft.
The base A is made from a plank that’s at least 1 ft wide and 4 ft long, with a 9-1/4 by 9-1/2 in hole cut in the center. The grinding part, or cylinder, is made of wood, 3 in in diameter and 9 in long, with 8-penny nails spaced 3/16 in apart, driven partway into it and then cut off to leave 1/4 in sticking out. The cylinder is turned using a crank attached to the end of the shaft.
A hopper, B, is constructed, 4 by 9-1/2 in. inside measurement at the bottom, and as large as necessary at the top. A space is provided at the bottom as shown to receive the concave C, which consists of a 1-in. board, 3 to 4 in. wide and 9 in. long, with nails driven in and cut off as described for the cylinder.
A hopper, B, is built with inside dimensions of 4 by 9-1/2 inches at the bottom, and as wide as needed at the top. There’s a space at the bottom as shown to hold the concave C, which is made up of a 1-inch board, 3 to 4 inches wide and 9 inches long, with nails hammered in and trimmed off, just like for the cylinder.
The hopper is securely fastened on top of the baseboard and over the cylinder. The concave is slipped into place and held with wedges or by driving two nails in just far enough to fasten it temporarily. The concave can be adjusted for grinding the different vegetable products, or replaced at any time with a new one.
The hopper is securely attached on top of the baseboard and over the cylinder. The concave is placed into position and secured with wedges or by tapping in two nails just enough to hold it temporarily. The concave can be adjusted for grinding various vegetable products, or it can be swapped out for a new one at any time.
The ends of the base are supported on boxes, or legs may be provided if desired. When grinding cabbage, cut the heads into quarters and remove the hearts. Press the cabbage on the cylinder and turn the crank. Fine bits of cabbage, suitable for sauerkraut, will be the result.—Contributed by J. G. Allshouse, Avonmore, Pa.
The ends of the base are supported on boxes, or you can use legs if you prefer. To grind cabbage, cut the heads into quarters and remove the cores. Press the cabbage onto the cylinder and turn the crank. You’ll get fine pieces of cabbage, perfect for making sauerkraut.—Contributed by J. G. Allshouse, Avonmore, Pa.
Opening for Air at the Top of a Shade
Procure an extra long shade and cut two openings in the end to be used at the top. The openings may be cut square or ornamental as desired, leaving a strip at each side and one in the center. These strips are reinforced by gluing on some of the same material as the shade or pieces of tape.
Get an extra long shade and cut two openings at the top. You can make the openings square or decorative as you like, leaving a strip on each side and one in the center. Reinforce these strips by gluing on some of the same material as the shade or using pieces of tape.

When the Shade is Pulled Down the Openings Coincide with the Opening over the Upper Sash
When the shade is pulled down, the openings align with the gap above the upper sash.
A shade made in this manner permits the air to enter the room unhindered when the top sash is lowered and at the same time obstructs the view of passers-by.—Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
A shade made this way allows air to flow into the room freely when the top sash is lowered while also blocking the view of people passing by.—Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
Hose Attachment for Watering Window Plants
The window garden of the house has its watering difficulties which one owner overcame in a neat and handy manner. A hose on a weighted reel was attached to the joists in the basement under the floor near the window flower pots. The weight on the reel kept the hose wound on it and the nozzle end which projects through the floor is large enough to hold it from passing through the hole bored for the hose. A long stem valve was provided with the wheel attached above the floor for turning the water on and off.
The window garden of the house has its watering challenges, which one owner solved in a clever and convenient way. A hose on a weighted reel was attached to the joists in the basement, under the floor near the window flower pots. The weight on the reel kept the hose neatly wound, and the nozzle end, which sticks through the floor, is big enough to stop it from slipping through the hole made for the hose. A long stem valve was installed with the wheel above the floor for turning the water on and off.

The Hose is Automatically Run on a Reel by a Weight beneath the Floor
The hose automatically winds up on a reel operated by a weight under the floor.
When the plants need a shower all that is necessary is to draw the hose nozzle up and turn on the water. The hole for the hose and the valve wheel can be located close to the wall under the flower tray where they will scarcely be seen.
When the plants need a shower, all you have to do is lift the hose nozzle and turn on the water. The hole for the hose and the valve wheel can be found near the wall underneath the flower tray, where they will barely be visible.
Removing Paint from Glass
Paint may be easily cleaned from glass by using a 50-per-cent solution of acetic acid. The acid should be heated and applied with a cloth. The hot acid will not hurt the hands or fabrics, nor the glass, but should be kept from children who might drink of it. The solution is made of commercial acetic acid and heated by adding hot water. The acid is inexpensive and can be purchased at any local drug store.
Paint can be easily removed from glass by using a 50% solution of acetic acid. The acid should be heated and applied with a cloth. The hot acid won't harm your hands, fabrics, or the glass, but it should be kept away from children who might drink it. The solution is made from commercial acetic acid, which can be heated by adding hot water. The acid is cheap and can be found at any local drugstore.
To Prevent Baking Ovens from Scorching
A good method to prevent baking ovens from scorching or burning pastry is to sprinkle a mixture of sand and salt on the bottom where the pans are placed. This affords a way of radiating the heat evenly. The mixture also absorbs fruit juices, which may be spilled in the course of cooking. The covering is easily changed, which keeps the oven clean. The best proportion is half salt and half sand.
A simple way to stop baking ovens from scorching or burning pastries is to sprinkle a mix of sand and salt on the bottom where the pans go. This helps distribute the heat evenly. The mix also soaks up any fruit juices that might spill during cooking. It's easy to replace the covering, keeping the oven clean. The ideal ratio is half salt and half sand.
Horn Candle Sconce
The person who cares for things unusual will find the candle sconce made of a cowhorn a suitable fixture for the den. A well shaped and not too large cowhorn is selected, and prepared by first partly filling it with paper, packed in tightly, then filling it to the top with plaster of Paris, in which a candle socket is formed.
The person who appreciates unique items will find the candle holder made from a cow horn to be a great addition for the living room. Choose a well-shaped, not too large cow horn, and start by partially filling it with tightly packed paper, then fill it to the top with plaster of Paris, creating a space for a candle socket.
The bracket is made of strips of metal, formed as shown and riveted together where they touch each other, the back piece being fastened with screws to a wall board. The metal may be brass or copper and finished in nickel, antique, bronze, or given a brush finish. The wooden wall piece can be finished in any style desired.
The bracket is made of metal strips, shaped as shown and riveted together where they meet, with the back piece attached to a wall board using screws. The metal can be brass or copper and finished in nickel, antique, bronze, or given a brushed finish. The wooden wall piece can be finished in any style you want.

The Cowhorn with Bracket and Wall Board, Making an Unusual Candle Sconce for the Den
The Cowhorn with Bracket and Wall Board, Creating a Unique Candle Sconce for the Den
White spots on furniture can be removed by rubbing the wood with ammonia.
White spots on furniture can be removed by rubbing the wood with ammonia.
How to Make a Copper Stencil for Marking Laundry
A stencil suitable for marking laundry may be easily made as follows:
A stencil for marking laundry can be easily made like this:
First procure a small sheet of "stencil sheet copper," about 1 in. wide and 4 in. long. Dip this sheet of copper in a vessel containing some melted beeswax, so that both sides will be evenly covered with a thin coat of the wax when it cools. The design—name, monogram or figure—that is wanted in the stencil should now be drawn upon a piece of thin white paper, the reverse side of the paper blackened with graphite, and then laid on the stencil plate with the design in the center of the plate, whereupon the design is lightly traced with a blunt point on the thin wax coating. After the paper is removed, trace the design on the wax surface with a pointed instrument, but not completely, the lines being broken at more or less regular intervals, to form "holders" so that, after etching, the design cannot fall out.
First, get a small piece of "stencil sheet copper," about 1 inch wide and 4 inches long. Dip this piece of copper in a container with melted beeswax, ensuring both sides are evenly covered with a thin layer of wax when it cools. The design—whether it's a name, monogram, or figure—that you want in the stencil should now be drawn on a piece of thin white paper. Blacken the reverse side of the paper with graphite, then place it on the stencil plate with the design centered. Next, lightly trace the design with a blunt point on the thin layer of wax. After removing the paper, trace the design on the wax surface with a pointed tool, but don't complete the lines; leave them broken at regular intervals to create "holders," so that after etching, the design won't fall out.
Next lay the stencil in a small shallow dish and pour a small quantity of fresh nitric acid over it. Keep the air bubbles removed from the surface by means of a piece of soft feather. The design will be eaten away in a very short time, where the wax has been removed, and this may be readily observed by holding the stencil plate up to the light. The acid should then be rinsed off with water, and the wax removed by heating and wiping it off with a cloth. The stencil may be given a final cleaning in a dish of benzine or gasoline, which will remove any remaining wax.
Next, place the stencil in a small shallow dish and pour a small amount of fresh nitric acid over it. Use a soft feather to keep air bubbles away from the surface. The design will be etched away very quickly in the areas where the wax has been removed, and you can easily see this by holding the stencil plate up to the light. Then, rinse the acid off with water, and remove the wax by heating it and wiping it off with a cloth. Finally, you can clean the stencil in a dish of benzine or gasoline, which will get rid of any remaining wax.
A Brass Pin Tray
A novelty pin tray can be easily made of a piece of No. 24 gauge sheet brass or copper, 5 in. in diameter. The metal is annealed and polished with fine emery cloth, which is given a circular motion to produce a frosted effect. The necessary tools are a 1-in. hardwood board with a 2-1/2-in. hole bored in it, and a round piece of hard wood, 1-7/8 or 2 in. in diameter, with the ends sawn off square.
A novelty pin tray can be easily made from a piece of 24-gauge brass or copper, 5 inches in diameter. The metal is softened and polished with fine sandpaper, using a circular motion to create a frosted effect. The necessary tools are a 1-inch hardwood board with a 2.5-inch hole drilled in it, and a round piece of hardwood, 1.875 or 2 inches in diameter, with both ends cut off square.

The Former and Method of Using It to Produce a Wrinkled Edge on the Tray
The Former and How to Use It to Create a Wrinkled Edge on the Tray
Place the sheet metal centrally over the hole in the board and set one end of the round stick in the center of the metal. Drive the stick with a hammer until a recess about 1 in. deep is made in the center. The edge of the metal will wrinkle up as shown in the sketch. It is scarcely possible to make two trays alike, as the edge almost invariably will buckle in a different manner.—Contributed by F. Van Eps, Plainfield, N. J.
Place the sheet metal over the hole in the board so it’s centered, and set one end of the round stick in the middle of the metal. Use a hammer to drive the stick until there’s a recess about 1 inch deep in the center. The edge of the metal will crinkle up as shown in the sketch. It’s nearly impossible to make two trays the same, since the edge almost always bends in a unique way.—Contributed by F. Van Eps, Plainfield, N. J.
A Homemade Exerciser
A weight machine for exercising the muscles of the arms is easily constructed by using two screw hooks, 5 in. long, and two small pulleys, 2-1/2 in. in diameter. An awning pulley can be used for this purpose. The hole at the top of the hanger will allow the pulley to freely turn at almost any angle. A paving brick or a piece of metal can be used as a weight for each rope.—Contributed by Sterling R. Speirs, St. Louis, Mo.
A simple weight machine for working out your arm muscles can be made using two 5-inch screw hooks and two small pulleys that are 2.5 inches in diameter. You can use an awning pulley for this. The hole at the top of the hanger lets the pulley spin around at almost any angle. A paving brick or a piece of metal can serve as a weight for each rope. —Contributed by Sterling R. Speirs, St. Louis, Mo.

The Yoke of the Pulley is so Arranged as to Make It Move in All Positions on the Hook
The pulley system is designed so that it can move in all directions on the hook.
A Book Covering
New books can be quickly and neatly covered to keep them clean by cutting a paper large enough to cover the back and sides when the book is closed, allowing 1 in. extra at each end to be turned over the front and back edges, then pasting on corners cut from used envelopes. The paper jacket can be slipped on or off easily when the book is opened, and it will keep a new cover clean while the book is being handled.—Contributed by Dr. John A. Cohalan, Philadelphia.
New books can be quickly and neatly covered to keep them clean by cutting a piece of paper large enough to cover the back and sides when the book is closed, leaving an extra inch at each end to fold over the front and back edges, then gluing on corners cut from old envelopes. The paper jacket can be easily slipped on or off when the book is opened, and it will protect a new cover while the book is being handled.—Contributed by Dr. John A. Cohalan, Philadelphia.

Paper Covering Kept in Place with Corners Cut from Old Envelopes and Pasted on the Paper
Paper covering held in place with corners cut from old envelopes and glued onto the paper.
A Tilting Inkstand
An ink-bottle stand, that can be tilted or adjusted so that the pen will always be filled with a sufficient quantity of ink even when little of it remains in the bottle, as shown in the sketch, can be easily made by the amateur. The base may consist of a square piece of sheet brass, which has soldered or riveted to its center two pieces of spring brass, placed crosswise and bent upward so as to form clips to hold the bottle firmly. The legs are made of two lengths of wire, of sufficient stiffness, and are shaped to form holders for lead pencils and penholders. One pair of the legs may be soldered to the brass plate and the opposite side of the latter rolled over the other pair so as to allow them either to stand upright or be depressed in order to tilt the stand, when the ink supply in the bottle gets low.
An ink bottle stand that you can tilt or adjust to ensure the pen is always filled with enough ink, even when there's only a little left in the bottle, can be easily made by a beginner. The base can be a square piece of sheet brass, with two pieces of spring brass soldered or riveted in the center, placed crosswise and bent upward to create clips that hold the bottle securely. The legs are made of two sturdy wire lengths, shaped to hold lead pencils and penholders. One pair of legs can be soldered to the brass plate, while the opposite side of the plate is rolled over the other pair, allowing them to either stand upright or be pressed down to tilt the stand when the ink supply in the bottle is low.

Tilting Stand for an Ordinary Ink Bottle to Give Access for a Small Supply of Ink
Tilting Stand for a Regular Ink Bottle to Provide Access for a Small Amount of Ink
A Ring Trick
The trick to be described is one of the simplest and at the same time one of the most effective, and but little "make-ready" is required to perform it. The magician, while sitting in a chair, allows his hands to be tied together behind the back of the chair. A ring is placed between his lips which he claims to be able to slip on his finger without untying his hands. This, to the audience, seems practically impossible, but it is easily accomplished.
The trick we’re about to explain is one of the simplest yet most effective, requiring very little preparation. The magician, while sitting in a chair, lets someone tie his hands together behind the chair. A ring is placed between his lips, and he claims he can slide it onto his finger without untying his hands. To the audience, this looks nearly impossible, but it's actually quite easy to do.
A screen is placed in front of the performer before the trick is started, so that the audience will not see how it is done. As soon as he is hidden from view, he tilts his head forward and drops the ring in his lap. He then allows the ring to drop to the seat of the chair between his legs. The chair is tilted backward slightly, and he raises himself to allow the ring to slip to the back part of the chair seat, where he catches it in his hands and slips it on the finger. Any one finger may be mentioned, as he can slip the ring as readily on one as on another. Use a leather-bottom chair, if possible, as the least noise will then be made when the ring is dropped.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Massachusetts.
A screen is set up in front of the performer before the trick begins, so the audience can't see how it's done. Once he's out of sight, he leans forward and drops the ring into his lap. Then he lets the ring fall onto the seat of the chair between his legs. The chair is tilted back slightly, and he raises himself up to let the ring slide to the back part of the chair seat, where he catches it in his hands and slips it onto his finger. He can use any finger since he can easily slide the ring on any of them. Try to use a leather-bottom chair if possible, as it makes the least noise when the ring is dropped.—Contributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Massachusetts.
Removing Old Putty
A very effective way to remove old putty from window panes or other articles is to apply a red-hot iron, as follows: The iron should be made of a broken file or cold chisel and the point heated quite hot. This is run over the surface of the putty, which will crack and fall off. Be careful not to let the hot iron touch the glass, as the heat may cause the latter to break.
A really effective way to remove old putty from window panes or other items is to use a red-hot iron like this: The iron should be made from a broken file or cold chisel, and the tip should be heated until it’s very hot. This is then passed over the surface of the putty, which will crack and come off. Be careful not to let the hot iron touch the glass, as the heat may cause it to break.
How to Make a Water Wheel
The materials used in the construction of this water wheel are such as the average amateur mechanic may pick up or secure from a junk pile. The drawings in Fig. 1 clearly show the way the wheel is built. The nozzle, Fig. 2, is made of pipe and fittings and is adjustable to concentrate the stream so as to get the full efficiency of the weight and velocity of the water. The cap on the end of the nipple is drilled to receive the pin point filed on the end of the 1/4-in. rod. The parts of this nozzle are a 1/2-in. tee, connected to the source of water supply; a plug, drilled to snugly fit the 1/4-in. rod, and fitted into one end of the straight part of the tee; and a 1/2-in. nipple of sufficient length to make the dimension shown in the sketch. The nipple has a long thread to receive two 1/2-in. locknuts, which clamp the nozzle to the sheet-metal covering, as shown in Fig. 1.
The materials used to build this water wheel are items that the average hobbyist can find or salvage from a junk pile. The drawings in Fig. 1 clearly illustrate how the wheel is constructed. The nozzle, shown in Fig. 2, is made from pipe and fittings and can be adjusted to focus the stream to maximize the weight and speed of the water. The cap at the end of the nipple is drilled to fit the pin point filed at the end of the 1/4-inch rod. The components of this nozzle include a 1/2-inch tee, which connects to the water supply, a plug drilled to fit the 1/4-inch rod snugly, and placed into one end of the straight part of the tee, and a 1/2-inch nipple long enough to match the dimensions shown in the sketch. The nipple has a long thread that accommodates two 1/2-inch locknuts, which secure the nozzle to the sheet-metal cover as shown in Fig. 1.
The buckets, Fig. 3, are formed of some easily melted, but not too soft metal alloy which can be cast in plaster molds. They are attached with rivets to the circumference of 1/16-in. thick sheet-metal disk of the diameter given in Fig. 1. This disk is fastened to a 1/4-in. shaft, 6 in. long, with two collars, one on each side of the disk, both being riveted to the disk and pinned to the shaft. The bearings AA are made of 3/4-in. pipe, each 2-1/4 in. long. Long threads are cut on these to turn through the two 3/4-in. waste nuts BB, which provides a way to adjust the buckets centrally with the stream of water, and to take up any side motion. The pipe is babbitted and drilled for oil holes. The runner or wheel must be well balanced, as the speed will be from 2,000 to 2,500 revolutions per minute with ordinary city pressure. In balancing the wheel, instead of adding an extra weight, a part of the disk is filed out on one edge. The inclosing sides are made of wood—cypress preferred—having the dimensions given, and two 7/8 by 1-1/2-in. pieces are attached to the bottom outside surfaces for mounting the wheel. The curved part is covered with galvanized sheet metal.
The buckets, Fig. 3, are made from a metal alloy that easily melts but isn’t too soft, allowing them to be cast in plaster molds. They are attached with rivets to the edge of a 1/16-inch thick sheet metal disk with the diameter shown in Fig. 1. This disk is secured to a 1/4-inch shaft that is 6 inches long, using two collars, one on each side of the disk, both riveted to the disk and pinned to the shaft. The bearings AA are constructed from 3/4-inch pipe, each 2-1/4 inches long. Long threads are cut into these pipes to fit through the two 3/4-inch waste nuts BB, allowing for central adjustment of the buckets with the water stream and accommodating any side movement. The pipe is babbitted and drilled for oil holes. The runner or wheel needs to be well balanced, as it will spin at speeds ranging from 2,000 to 2,500 revolutions per minute under normal city pressure. To balance the wheel, instead of adding extra weight, part of the disk is filed down on one edge. The enclosing sides are made of wood—cypress is preferred—following the given dimensions, and two 7/8 by 1-1/2-inch pieces are attached to the outer bottom surfaces for mounting the wheel. The curved section is covered with galvanized sheet metal.

(Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
(Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The drawing shows a wheel of [302] small diameter, but having considerable power. Greater power may be obtained by increasing the size of the jet and the diameter of the wheel, but the use of too many buckets results in decrease of power. One bucket should be just entering the stream of water, when the working bucket is at a point at right angles to the stream. The water should divide equally exactly on the center of the bucket and get out of the way as soon as possible. Any stagnant water in the case, or dead water in the bucket, is detrimental to the power. A free exit for the water is made at the bottom of the case, as shown.
The drawing shows a wheel with a [302] small diameter, but it has substantial power. You can get more power by increasing the size of the jet and the diameter of the wheel, but using too many buckets can reduce power. One bucket should just be entering the water stream when the working bucket is at a right angle to the stream. The water should split evenly right at the center of the bucket and move out of the way as quickly as possible. Any stagnant water in the case, or trapped water in the bucket, harms the power. A clear exit for the water is provided at the bottom of the case, as shown.
The construction of the case may be varied and, instead of wood, metal sides and frame may be used. Where the builder cares to make a more substantial wheel and has access to a foundry, the metal parts can be made as shown in Fig. 4. The parts are in this instance fastened together with machine screws. Patterns are made and taken to a foundry for the castings, which are then machined to have close fitting joints.—Contributed by R. H. Franklin, Unnatosa, Wis.
The construction of the case can be different, and instead of using wood, metal sides and a frame can be used. If the builder wants to create a more durable wheel and has access to a foundry, the metal parts can be made as shown in Fig. 4. In this case, the parts are held together with machine screws. Patterns are made and sent to a foundry for casting, which are then machined to ensure tight-fitting joints.—Contributed by R. H. Franklin, Unnatosa, Wis.
An Interesting Experiment
Take an ordinary board, 2 or 3 ft. long, such as a bread board, and place it on the table so that about one-third of its length will project over the edge. Unfold a newspaper and lay it on the table over the board as shown in the sketch. Anyone not familiar with the experiment would suppose the board could be knocked off by hitting it on the outer end. It would appear to be easy to do, but try it. Unless you are prepared to break the board you will probably not be able to knock the board off.
Take a regular board, 2 or 3 feet long, like a cutting board, and set it on the table so that about a third of its length hangs over the edge. Open a newspaper and lay it on the table over the board as illustrated in the sketch. Anyone who isn't familiar with the experiment might think the board could be easily knocked off by hitting it on the outer end. It might seem simple, but give it a try. Unless you're ready to break the board, you probably won't be able to knock it off.

Striking the Board
Hitting the Board
The reason is that when the board is struck it forces the other end up and the newspaper along with it. This causes a momentary vacuum to be formed under the paper, and the pressure of the air above, which is about 15 lb. to the square inch, prevents the board from coming up. This is an entertaining trick to play at an evening party, and also makes a simple and interesting school experiment.
The reason is that when you hit the board, it pushes the other end up along with the newspaper. This creates a temporary vacuum under the paper, and the air pressure above it, which is about 15 lbs. per square inch, keeps the board from rising. This is a fun trick to do at a party and also makes a simple and interesting school experiment.
Ironing-Board Holder
An ironing board that had been used on two chairs was cut off square on one end and a piece of heavy sheet metal cut and bent into the shape shown in Fig. 1. The square end of the board was fitted into the socket formed by the sheet metal. After attaching the socket to the wall with screws the board was easily put in place as shown in Fig. 2. The brace is hinged to the under side of the board.—Contributed by L. G. Swett, Rochester, N. Y.
An ironing board that had been used on two chairs was trimmed square on one end, and a piece of heavy sheet metal was cut and bent into the shape shown in Fig. 1. The square end of the board was fitted into the holder created by the sheet metal. After securing the holder to the wall with screws, the board was easily positioned as shown in Fig. 2. The brace is hinged to the underside of the board. —Contributed by L. G. Swett, Rochester, N. Y.

Socket and Manner of Holding Board (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Socket and Way of Holding the Board (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
How to Make a Water Motor
By Edward Silja
After making several different styles of water motors I found the one illustrated to be the most powerful as well as the simplest and most inexpensive to make. It can be constructed in the following manner: A disk, as shown in Fig. 1, cut from sheet iron or brass, 1/16 in. thick and 9-3/4 in. in diameter, constitutes the main part of the wheel. The circumference is divided into 24 equal parts, and a depth line marked which is 8-1/4 in. in diameter. Notches are cut to the depth line, similar to the teeth of a rip saw, one edge being on a line with the center of the wheel and the other running from the top of one tooth to the base of the preceding tooth.
After trying out several different styles of water motors, I found the one shown to be the most powerful as well as the simplest and cheapest to make. It can be constructed as follows: A disk, like the one in Fig. 1, cut from sheet iron or brass, 1/16 in. thick and 9-3/4 in. in diameter, serves as the main part of the wheel. The circumference is divided into 24 equal parts, and a depth line is marked at 8-1/4 in. in diameter. Notches are cut down to the depth line, similar to the teeth of a rip saw, with one edge aligned with the center of the wheel and the other running from the top of one tooth to the base of the previous tooth.

Metal Disk with a Saw-Tooth Circumference That Constitutes the Main Body of the Wheel (Fig. 1)
Metal Disk with a Saw-Tooth Edge That Makes Up the Main Part of the Wheel (Fig. 1)
A 1/4-in. hole is drilled in the center of the disk and the metal strengthened with a flange, placed on each side of the disk and fastened with screws or rivets. A 1/4-in. steel rod is used for the shaft.
A 1/4-inch hole is drilled in the center of the disk, and the metal is reinforced with a flange on each side of the disk, secured with screws or rivets. A 1/4-inch steel rod is used for the shaft.
The cups, or buckets, are shaped in a die which can be cast or built up of two pieces, as desired. Both of these dies are shown in Fig. 2. The one at A is made of two pieces riveted together.
The cups, or buckets, are formed in a mold that can be cast or assembled from two parts, as needed. Both of these molds are shown in Fig. 2. The one at A is made of two pieces fastened together with rivets.

Two Ways of Making the Dies to Shape the Sheet-Metal Water Cups (Fig. 2)
Two Ways to Make the Dies for Shaping Sheet Metal Water Cups (Fig. 2)
If a foundry is near, a pattern can be made for a casting, as shown at B. The die is used in the manner shown in Fig. 3. A strip of galvanized metal is placed over the depressions in the die and a ball-peen hammer used to drive the metal into the die. Cups, or buckets, are thus formed which are soldered to the edge of the teeth on a line with the center of the disk, as shown in Fig. 4. As there are 24 notches in the disk, 24 cups will be necessary to fill them.
If there's a foundry nearby, you can create a pattern for casting like the one shown at B. The die is used as illustrated in Fig. 3. A strip of galvanized metal is placed over the indentations in the die, and a ball-peen hammer is used to press the metal into the die. This creates cups or buckets that are then soldered to the edge of the teeth, aligned with the center of the disk, as shown in Fig. 4. Since there are 24 notches in the disk, you'll need 24 cups to fill them.

The Sheet Metal is Placed on the Die and Then Hammered into Shape (Fig. 3)
The sheet metal is placed on the die and then hammered into shape (Fig. 3)
The cups are made in pairs or in two sections, which is a better construction than the single cup. The water from the nozzle first strikes the center between the cups, then divides and produces a double force.
The cups are made in pairs or in two sections, which is a better design than a single cup. The water from the nozzle first hits the center between the cups, then splits and creates a double force.

The Water Cups are Fastened to the Teeth on the Metal Disk with Solder (Fig. 4)
The water cups are attached to the teeth on the metal disk with solder (Fig. 4)
When this part of the work is finished it is well to balance the wheel, which can be done by filing off some of the metal on the heavy side or adding a little solder to the light side. This will be necessary to provide an easy-running wheel that will not cause any unnecessary wear on the bearings.
When this part of the work is done, it's a good idea to balance the wheel. You can do this by filing off some of the metal on the heavy side or adding a bit of solder to the light side. This is important to ensure the wheel runs smoothly and doesn't cause any extra wear on the bearings.
The housing for the wheel consists of two wood pieces, about 3/4-in. thick and cut to the shape shown in Fig. 5. Grooves are cut in one surface of each piece, to receive the edges of a strip of galvanized metal, as shown at A. The grooves are cut with a specially [304] constructed saw, shown in Fig. 6. It consists of a piece of wood, 6 in. long, 1-1/2 in. wide and 1/2 in. thick, the end being cut on an arc of a circle whose diameter is 10 in. A piece of a broken hacksaw blade is fastened with screws to the curved end. A nail is used as a center pivot, forming a 5-in. and a 5-3/4-in. radius to swing the saw on in cutting the groove. After inserting the strip of galvanized metal, A, Fig. 5, the sides are clamped together with bolts about 3-1/4 in. long.
The housing for the wheel is made of two pieces of wood, about 3/4 inch thick, shaped as shown in Fig. 5. Grooves are cut into one surface of each piece to hold the edges of a strip of galvanized metal, as indicated at A. The grooves are created with a specially designed saw, shown in Fig. 6. This saw is a piece of wood, 6 inches long, 1-1/2 inches wide, and 1/2 inch thick, with the end shaped in an arc of a circle with a 10-inch diameter. A piece of a broken hacksaw blade is attached with screws to the curved end. A nail serves as a center pivot, creating a 5-inch and a 5-3/4-inch radius for swinging the saw to cut the groove. After inserting the strip of galvanized metal, A, Fig. 5, the sides are clamped together with bolts about 3-1/4 inches long.

The Housing for the Wheel with a Connection to Attach the Motor on an Ordinary Faucet (Fig. 5)
The housing for the wheel with a connection to attach the motor to a standard faucet (Fig. 5)

Construction of the Saw for Making the Groove to Receive the Metal Strip in the Sides (Fig. 6)
Construction of the Saw for Creating the Groove to Fit the Metal Strip in the Sides (Fig. 6)
A piece of pipe, B, Fig. 5, having an opening 3/8-in. in diameter, is soldered onto the metal strip A. An ordinary garden-hose coupling, C, is soldered to the end of the pipe.
A piece of pipe, B, Fig. 5, with an opening of 3/8-inch in diameter, is soldered onto the metal strip A. An ordinary garden hose coupling, C, is soldered to the end of the pipe.
A bearing, D, shaped as shown, is fastened to one of the wood sides with screws, the wheel shaft is run into it, and the parts assembled. A wheel, either grooved or flat, 2-1/2 or 3 in. in diameter, is placed on the shaft. The hose coupling makes it easy to connect the motor directly to the water faucet.
A bearing, D, shaped as shown, is attached to one of the wooden sides with screws, the wheel shaft is inserted into it, and the parts are assembled. A wheel, either grooved or flat, 2-1/2 or 3 inches in diameter, is placed on the shaft. The hose coupling allows for an easy connection of the motor directly to the water faucet.
An Application for Small Wounds
Pure wintergreen oil makes a good local application for all small wounds, bites, scratches, abrasions, etc. There is no germ or microbe, animal or vegetable, dead or living, that can withstand this oil, and at the same time it is not injurious to living tissues. A few drops gently rubbed in where there is apt to be any infection is sufficient.
Pure wintergreen oil is a great local treatment for small wounds, bites, scratches, abrasions, and more. There’s no germ or microbe, whether animal or plant, dead or alive, that can resist this oil, and at the same time, it doesn't harm living tissues. Just a few drops gently rubbed in where there might be an infection is enough.
An infection always follows the wound of a bullet or the scratch of a brass pin, with irritation extending up the limb or part threatening tetanus or lockjaw. These symptoms are manifested by spasmodic pains which shoot upward, but are quickly subdued, if the oil is applied along the track of the pain or infection. This oil is equally effective when locally applied to tendons or ligaments which have been unduly strained.
An infection always occurs after a bullet wound or a scratch from a brass pin, with irritation spreading up the limb or area, putting it at risk for tetanus or lockjaw. These symptoms show up as shooting pains that move upward but can be quickly eased if oil is applied along the path of the pain or infection. This oil works just as well when applied directly to tendons or ligaments that have been overstressed.
An ounce of the pure oil does not cost much, and it should be kept in every shop and household. If 5 or 10 per cent of olive oil is added to it, the oil will have more body and will last longer.—Contributed by Dr. E. R. Ellis, Detroit, Mich.
An ounce of pure oil doesn't cost much, and it should be kept in every store and home. If you add 5 or 10 percent olive oil to it, the oil will be thicker and will last longer.—Contributed by Dr. E. R. Ellis, Detroit, Mich.
Cores for Use in Babbitt Metal
It is often necessary in making things of babbitt metal to core out some of the parts. A very good core is made of common salt and glue. Mix just enough of the glue into the salt to make a stiff paste, which is then formed into the desired shape or molded in a core box and allowed to harden. This kind of a core can be removed from the casting by soaking it in warm water, which will dissolve the salt and leave the desired hole.—Contributed by H. F. Hopkins, N. Girard, Pa.
It’s often necessary to core out some parts when making things out of babbitt metal. A great core can be made from regular salt and glue. Just mix enough glue into the salt to create a stiff paste, which can then be shaped or molded in a core box and allowed to harden. You can remove this type of core from the casting by soaking it in warm water, which will dissolve the salt and leave the desired hole.—Contributed by H. F. Hopkins, N. Girard, Pa.
How to Build a Wind Vane with an Electric Indicator
Quite often it is practically impossible to ascertain the direction of the wind by observing an ordinary wind vane on account of the necessity of locating the vane at such a height that it may give a true indication. By means of the device shown in Fig. 2, the position of the vane may be determined without actually looking at the vane itself and the indicating device may be located almost anywhere and independently of the position of the wind vane.
It's often nearly impossible to figure out the direction of the wind by looking at a standard wind vane because it needs to be placed at a height where it can provide an accurate reading. With the device shown in Fig. 2, you can determine the position of the vane without directly looking at it, and the indicating device can be located almost anywhere, regardless of where the wind vane is positioned.

Fig. 1—The Diagram of a Wheatstone Bridge Which Shows the Points of Contact So Placed That a Balance is Obtained
Fig. 1—The Diagram of a Wheatstone Bridge Which Shows the Contact Points Arranged to Achieve Balance
The principle upon which the device operates is that of the Wheatstone bridge. The position of the moving contact A, Fig. 1, is controlled by the wind vane. This contact is made to move over a specially constructed resistance R, Fig. 2. A second movable contact, B, is controlled by the observer and moves over a second resistance, identical with that over which the contact A moves. These two resistances are connected so as to form the two main branches of a Wheatstone bridge; the points A and B are connected to the current-detecting device, which may be a galvanometer or telephone receiver, and current is supplied by a number of dry cells.
The device works based on the Wheatstone bridge principle. The position of the moving contact A, Fig. 1, is controlled by the wind vane. This contact moves across a specially designed resistance R, Fig. 2. A second movable contact, B, is controlled by the observer and moves over a second resistance that is identical to the one A moves over. These two resistances are arranged to create the two main branches of a Wheatstone bridge; points A and B are connected to a current-detecting device, which can be a galvanometer or a telephone receiver, with power supplied by several dry cells.

Fig. 2—The Weather Vane with Resistance Coil, and Diagram of Indicator Which is Identical with That of the Vane
Fig. 2—The Weather Vane with Resistance Coil, and Diagram of Indicator Which is Identical with That of the Vane
In order to obtain a balance—that is, no current through the receiver—the points A and B must occupy corresponding positions on their respective resistances. If the two resistances over which the points A and B move are mounted in the same position with respect to the cardinal points of the compass, then the points themselves will always be in the same position with respect to the cardinal points when a balance is obtained. The arrow head on the wind vane and the point A are made to occupy corresponding positions, and hence the position of the point B, when no current passes through the receiver, is an indication of the direction in which the wind vane is pointing.
To achieve a balance—meaning no current flows through the receiver—the points A and B need to be in corresponding positions on their respective resistances. If the two resistances that points A and B move across are aligned in the same way with respect to the cardinal points of the compass, then both points will always be positioned the same way relative to the cardinal points when balance is achieved. The arrow on the wind vane and point A are aligned, which means that the position of point B, when there's no current flowing through the receiver, shows the direction the wind vane is pointing.
The principal parts in the construction of the device are shown in the illustration, and the following description of their construction may be of interest to those who contemplate building the indicator.
The main components involved in creating the device are displayed in the illustration, and the following description of how they are constructed may be helpful for those considering building the indicator.
Procure two pieces of 1/16-in. hard rubber, 1-1/2 in. wide by 24 in. long. Clamp these, side by side, between two boards and smooth down their edges and ends, and then file small slots in the edges with the edge of a three-cornered file. These slots should all be equally spaced about 3/32 in. apart. Have the pieces clamped together while filing the slots and mark one edge top and one end right so that the pieces may be mounted alike. Now procure a small quantity of No. 20 gauge bare manganin wire. Fasten one end of this wire to one end of the pieces of rubber by winding it in and out through three or four small holes and then wind it around the piece, placing the various turns in the small slots that were filed in the edges. After completing the winding, fasten the end just as the starting end was attached. Wind the second piece of rubber in a similar manner and make sure to have the length of the free ends in each case the same. Obtain a cylinder of some kind, about 8 in. in diameter, warm the pieces of rubber by dipping them in hot water, bend them around the cylinder and allow them to cool.
Get two pieces of 1/16-inch hard rubber, each 1.5 inches wide and 24 inches long. Clamp these together, side by side, between two boards and smooth the edges and ends. Then, file small slots in the edges using the edge of a three-cornered file. These slots should be evenly spaced about 3/32 inch apart. Keep the pieces clamped together while filing the slots, and mark one edge as "top" and one end as "right" so the pieces can be mounted the same way. Now, get a small amount of No. 20 gauge bare manganin wire. Attach one end of this wire to one end of the rubber pieces by weaving it in and out through three or four small holes and then wrapping it around the piece, placing the various turns in the small slots that were filed in the edges. After you've finished winding, secure the end just like the starting end was attached. Wind the second piece of rubber the same way and make sure the lengths of the free ends are the same for both. Get a cylinder of some sort, about 8 inches in diameter, warm the rubber pieces by dipping them in hot water, bend them around the cylinder, and let them cool.
A containing case, similar to that shown in cross section in the upper portion of Fig. 2 should now be constructed from a good quality of tin or copper. The inside diameter of [306] this case should be about 1 in. more than the outside diameter of the resistance ring R, and it should be about 3 in. deep. The top C may be made curved as shown in the illustration, and should be fastened to the case proper by a number of small machine screws. The base of this case may be made so that the whole device can be mounted on the top of a pole.
A container case, similar to the one shown in the upper portion of Fig. 2, should now be built from good quality tin or copper. The inside diameter of [306] this case should be about 1 inch larger than the outside diameter of the resistance ring R, and it should be about 3 inches deep. The top C can be curved as shown in the illustration and should be attached to the main part of the case with several small machine screws. The base of this case can be designed so that the entire device can be mounted on top of a pole.
Mount a piece of 1/4-in. steel rod, about 1/2 in. long, with a conical hole in one end, in the center of the bottom of the case as shown by M. A number of supports, similar to the one shown, should be made from some 1/4-in. hard rubber and fastened to the sides of the case, to support the resistance ring. The dimensions of these supports should be such that the ends of the piece of rubber, forming the ring, are against each other when it is in place. The upper edge of the ring should be about 2 in. above the bottom of the case.
Mount a piece of 1/4-inch steel rod, approximately 1/2 inch long, with a conical hole on one end, in the center of the bottom of the case as shown by M. A number of supports, similar to the one shown, should be made from 1/4-inch hard rubber and attached to the sides of the case to hold the resistance ring. The dimensions of these supports should ensure that the ends of the rubber piece forming the ring are touching when it is in place. The top edge of the ring should be about 2 inches above the bottom of the case.
Next, mount a piece of brass tube, D, in the exact center of the top and perpendicular to it. A washer, E, may also be soldered to the top so as to aid in holding the tube. Procure a piece of steel rod, F, that will fit in the tube D and turn freely. Sharpen one end of this rod and mount a brass wind vane on the other end. A small metal cup, G, may be soldered to a washer, H, and the whole mounted on the steel rod F in an inverted position as shown, which will prevent water from getting down inside the case along the rod. The cup G may be soldered directly to the rod. Make a small arm, J, of brass, and fasten a piece of light spring, K, to one side of it, near the outer end, then mount the arm on the steel rod so that it is parallel to the vane and its outer end points in the same direction as the arrow on the vane. The free end of the light spring on the arm J should be broad enough to bridge the gap between adjacent turns of wire on the resistance ring. Four bindings should then be mounted on the inside of the case and all insulated from it with the exception of number 1. Numbers 2 and 3 are connected to the ends of the winding and number 4 is connected to number 3.
Next, attach a brass tube, D, right in the center of the top and make sure it's perpendicular to it. You can also solder a washer, E, to the top to help hold the tube in place. Get a piece of steel rod, F, that fits inside tube D and can turn freely. Sharpen one end of this rod and add a brass wind vane to the other end. You can solder a small metal cup, G, to a washer, H, and mount the whole assembly on steel rod F upside down, as shown, to stop water from getting down inside the case along the rod. The cup G can be soldered directly to the rod. Create a small brass arm, J, and attach a piece of light spring, K, to one side of it, near the end. Then mount the arm on the steel rod so that it runs parallel to the vane with its outer end pointing in the same direction as the arrow on the vane. The free end of the light spring on arm J should be wide enough to span the gap between adjacent turns of wire on the resistance ring. Next, four bindings should be installed inside the case and insulated from it, except for number 1. Connect numbers 2 and 3 to the ends of the winding, and connect number 4 to number 3.
A second outfit should now be constructed, identical with the one just described except that it should have a flat top with a circular scale mounted on it, and the arm L should be controlled by a small handle in the center of the scale. The position of the contact B may be indicated on the scale by a slender pointer, attached to the handle controlling the arm L.
A second outfit should now be built, identical to the one just described except it should have a flat top with a circular scale on it, and the arm L should be operated by a small handle in the center of the scale. The position of the contact B can be shown on the scale by a thin pointer attached to the handle that controls the arm L.
Four leads of equal resistance should be used in connecting the two devices and the connections made as shown. An ordinary buzzer placed in the battery circuit will produce an interrupted current through the bridge circuit and a balance will be obtained by adjusting the contact point B until a minimum hum is heard in the telephone receiver.
Four leads of the same resistance should be used to connect the two devices, following the connections shown. An ordinary buzzer placed in the battery circuit will create an interrupted current through the bridge circuit, and balance can be achieved by adjusting the contact point B until a minimal hum is heard in the telephone receiver.
Planting Seeds in Egg Shells
When growing flower plants from seeds, start them in halves of shells from hard-boiled eggs. When the time comes to transplant them, they can be easily removed by allowing the dirt in the shell to become hard and then breaking off the shell, whereupon the plant is placed in the ground.
When growing flower plants from seeds, start them in halves of hard-boiled egg shells. When it's time to transplant them, you can easily take them out by letting the dirt in the shell harden, then breaking off the shell, and placing the plant in the ground.
A pasteboard box provided with holes large enough to support the egg shells can be used to hold them, unless egg crates are at hand. Two large seeds such as nasturtiums and sweet peas can be planted in one shell, and four seeds of the smaller varieties.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
A cardboard box with holes big enough to hold the eggshells can be used to store them if egg crates aren’t available. You can plant two large seeds, like nasturtiums and sweet peas, in one shell, and up to four seeds of smaller varieties. —Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
Locating Drip Pan under a Refrigerator
In replacing the drip pan of an ice box or refrigerator it is often necessary to bend over in locating it under the drip pipe. This trouble may be done away with by fastening two strips of wood in a V-shape to the floor beneath the refrigerator. When the pan is shoved under, it will strike one strip and slide along until it strikes the other. Then the pan is sure to be under the drip pipe.—Contributed by Lloyd A. Phelan, Beachmont, Mass.
When replacing the drip pan of an icebox or refrigerator, you often have to bend over to find it under the drip pipe. This hassle can be avoided by attaching two strips of wood in a V-shape to the floor beneath the refrigerator. When you slide the pan underneath, it will hit one strip and then move along until it hits the other. That way, the pan will be perfectly positioned under the drip pipe.—Contributed by Lloyd A. Phelan, Beachmont, Mass.

Strips on Floor under Refrigerator
Strips on floor under fridge
Windmill for Light Power
The windmill shown in the sketch is one that will always face the wind, and it never requires adjustment. It consists of a vertical shaft, A, provided with a number of arms, B, on which are hinged square sails, C. These sails are preferably made of wood frames covered with canvas. They are provided with hinges, D, attached to the ends of the arms in such a way that they offer resistance to the wind on one side of the wheel, while they move edgewise against the wind on the other side, as shown. The shaft of the mill can either be run in bearings set on an upright post, the lower end of the shaft turning on a conical bearing, or collars may be used on the bearings to [308] keep it in position. The power can be transmitted with gears or by a flat belt over a pulley.
The windmill illustrated in the sketch always faces the wind and never needs adjustment. It has a vertical shaft, A, with several arms, B, that hold square sails, C. These sails are ideally made from wooden frames covered with canvas. They have hinges, D, attached to the ends of the arms so they resist the wind on one side of the wheel while moving edgewise against the wind on the other side, as shown. The mill's shaft can either rotate in bearings mounted on an upright post, with the lower end of the shaft turning on a conical bearing, or collars can be used on the bearings to keep it in position. The power can be transferred using gears or by a flat belt over a pulley.
A wheel of this kind is not adapted for high speed, but direct-connected to a pump or other slow-working machinery will prove very efficient.—Contributed by Edward Hanson, Kane, Pennsylvania.
A wheel like this isn’t designed for high speeds, but when it's directly connected to a pump or other slow machinery, it can be very efficient.—Contributed by Edward Hanson, Kane, Pennsylvania.
A Small Bunsen Burner

An excellent bunsen burner for small work can be made as follows: Draw a glass tube to the shape shown, to produce a fine hollow point. Mark carefully with a file and break at A and then at B. Bore or burn a hole in a cork to fit the tube. Cut a V-shaped notch in the side of the cork extending to the hole. Bend the lower tube at right angles and insert it in a wood block, previously slotted with a saw to make a snug fit. A little glue will hold the glass tubes, cork and base together. The air mixture can be adjusted by sliding the upper tube before the glue sets.
An excellent Bunsen burner for small projects can be made like this: Draw a glass tube into the shape shown to create a fine hollow point. Mark carefully with a file and break it at A and then at B. Bore or burn a hole in a cork to fit the tube. Cut a V-shaped notch on the side of the cork that extends to the hole. Bend the lower tube at a right angle and insert it into a wooden block that has been slotted with a saw for a snug fit. A little glue will hold the glass tubes, cork, and base together. You can adjust the air mixture by sliding the upper tube before the glue dries.
The burner is especially adapted to continuous work, such as sealing packages, etc. The flame will not discolor the wax.—Contributed by E. P. Fert, Spokane, Wash.
The burner is designed for continuous use, like sealing packages, etc. The flame won't discolor the wax.—Contributed by E. P. Fert, Spokane, Wash.
The Hindoo Sand Trick
This is one of the many tricks for which the Hindoos are famous, and was long kept a secret by them. It consists of placing ordinary sand in a basin full of water, stirring the water and taking out the sand in handfuls perfectly dry. It need scarcely be said that without previous preparation, it is impossible to do so.
This is one of the many tricks that the Hindus are known for, and it was kept a secret by them for a long time. It involves putting regular sand into a basin filled with water, stirring the water, and then taking out the sand by the handfuls completely dry. It goes without saying that it's impossible to do this without prior preparation.
Take 2 lb. of fine silver sand, place it in a frying pan and heat well over a clear fire. When the sand is thoroughly heated, place a small piece of grease or wax—the composition of a paraffin candle preferred—in the sand, stirring it well to get it thoroughly mixed, then allow the sand to cool. When this sand is placed in a basin of water, it will be apparently dry when taken out. It is very important that only a small portion of the adherent be used so that it cannot be detected when the sand is examined by the audience. The explanation is that the grease or wax coating on each sand particle repels the water.—Contributed by Mighty Oaks, Oshkosh, Wis.
Take 2 lb. of fine silver sand, put it in a frying pan, and heat it well over a clear flame. Once the sand is completely heated, add a small piece of grease or wax—preferably from a paraffin candle—to the sand, stirring it well to mix it thoroughly, then let the sand cool. When you put this sand in a basin of water, it will seem dry when taken out. It's very important to use only a small amount of the coated sand so that it can’t be noticed when the audience examines it. The reason is that the grease or wax coating on each sand particle repels the water. —Contributed by Mighty Oaks, Oshkosh, Wis.
A Kite-Line Cutaway for Toy Parachutes
The cutaway is made of a small piece of board, a cigar-box lid, an old yardstick or a piece of lath, which should be about 6 in. long. Common carpet wire staples are used to hold it on the string. The under side has a wire bent into such a shape as to form a loop at the forward end over the kite string, then running back through the two staples at the one side and through two staples at the other side.
The cutaway is made from a small piece of board, a cigar box lid, an old yardstick, or a piece of lath, which should be about 6 inches long. Standard carpet wire staples are used to attach it to the string. The underside has a wire bent into a shape that forms a loop at the front end over the kite string, then runs back through two staples on one side and two staples on the other side.
The parachute should have a small wire ring fastened at the weight end so as to fasten in the carrier, and should be put between the two staples that are closest together on the under side of the carrier. A small nail or button—anything larger than the loop in the wire—should be attached to the kite string a few feet from the kite. When the parachute is carried up the kite string, the knob on the string will [309] strike the loop of the wire on the carrier, which releases the parachute and allows it to drop. The carrier will return of its own weight to the lower end of the string.—Contributed by I. O. Lansing, Lincoln, Neb.
The parachute should have a small wire ring attached at the weight end to secure it in the carrier and should be placed between the two closest staples on the underside of the carrier. A small nail or button—anything larger than the wire loop—should be fixed to the kite string a few feet from the kite. When the parachute is lifted up the kite string, the knob on the string will [309] hit the wire loop on the carrier, which releases the parachute and lets it drop. The carrier will slide back down to the lower end of the string due to its own weight. —Contributed by I. O. Lansing, Lincoln, Neb.
A Cherry Pitter
Procure an ordinary quill feather and cut the tip off to form a small hole. Do not remove so much of the end that the cherry stone can stick in it. The hole must be slightly smaller than the cherry stone. Push the quill through the center of the cherry and the stone will come out easily.—Contributed by Harold Wynning, Chicago, Ill.
Get a regular quill feather and trim the tip to create a small hole. Don't cut off too much of the end, or the cherry stone won't fit. The hole should be just a bit smaller than the cherry stone. Push the quill through the center of the cherry, and the stone will pop out easily. —Contributed by Harold Wynning, Chicago, Ill.
To Hold a Fish while Removing the Scales
Insert a screwdriver or ice pick in a fish as shown, and the scales can be removed much better and quicker than in any other way. The handle of the screwdriver affords an efficient grip so that the fish can be held firmly on the board and every scale can be removed.
Insert a screwdriver or ice pick into a fish as shown, and you can remove the scales much better and faster than any other method. The handle of the screwdriver provides a solid grip, allowing you to hold the fish securely on the board and remove every scale.

Holding Fish for Scaling
Holding Fish for Scaling
Carrying Stone Jars
The handholds on stone jars are usually not large enough to carry the jars safely when they are full. If the handles of an old galvanized tub are riveted to a leather strap long enough to reach under the bottom and almost to the top on each side, the jar can be handled without danger of being dropped. The fingers are placed in the handles to carry the weight, while the thumbs are used to keep the jar from tipping. By placing a buckle near one end, the strap may be used for carrying a jar of any size.—Contributed by C. H. Floyd, Elwood, Ind.
The handles on stone jars are usually not big enough to carry the jars safely when they're full. If the handles of an old galvanized tub are fastened to a leather strap that’s long enough to reach under the bottom and almost to the top on each side, the jar can be carried without the risk of dropping it. You place your fingers in the handles to lift the weight, while your thumbs help keep the jar from tipping over. By putting a buckle near one end, the strap can be used to carry a jar of any size.—Contributed by C. H. Floyd, Elwood, Ind.
Vibrator for a Spark Coil
If you do not have the time to make a vibrator or electrolytic interrupter for a spark coil, a common electric door-bell makes a good substitute. Connect one of the primary wires to the binding-post of the bell that is not insulated from the frame, and the other primary wire to the adjusting screw on the make-and-break contact of the bell, as shown in the sketch. The connections are made from the batteries to the bell in the usual manner.—Contributed by Ralph Tarshis, Brooklyn, N. Y.
If you don't have the time to create a vibrator or an electrolytic interrupter for a spark coil, a regular electric doorbell works well as a substitute. Connect one of the primary wires to the binding post of the bell that isn't insulated from the frame, and attach the other primary wire to the adjusting screw on the make-and-break contact of the bell, as illustrated in the sketch. Make the connections from the batteries to the bell in the usual way.—Contributed by Ralph Tarshis, Brooklyn, N. Y.

Bell Used as Vibrator
Bell Used as a Vibrator
Head Rest for a Chair
While seated in a chair a person very often desires to lay the head back in resting. A support for the head is lacking in the low-back rockers and ordinary chairs. A detachable, padded support can be easily made at home for placing on any low-back chair and used as a head rest.
While sitting in a chair, a person often wants to lean their head back to relax. There's usually no head support in low-back rockers and regular chairs. You can easily make a detachable, padded support at home to put on any low-back chair and use it as a headrest.

Rest on Chair Back
Lean on chair back
The support standards can be made of wood or metal as desired. If metal is used, the rest will have some springiness, which combined with the pad will insure much greater comfort than [310] the hard rigid back. A cloth or paper is placed over the back of the chair to prevent marring of the varnish or wood.
The support standards can be made from wood or metal, depending on your preference. If metal is chosen, it will have some flexibility, which, along with the pad, will provide significantly more comfort than [310] a hard, rigid back. A cloth or paper is placed over the back of the chair to avoid scratching the varnish or wood.
Lighting a Lawn Mower for Use at Night

Those who desire to do so, or must, for lack of time during the day, may use their lawn mower at night and light the front of their machine with an ordinary bicycle lamp. The arm to hold the lamp can be attached with screws to the handle as shown in the sketch. It is easily made from a piece of hoop or bar iron.—Contributed by Samuel F. Reid, Minneapolis, Minn.
Those who want to do this or have to because they don't have time during the day can use their lawnmower at night and light the front of their machine with a regular bicycle lamp. The arm to hold the lamp can be screwed onto the handle as shown in the sketch. It's easy to make from a piece of hoop or bar iron.—Contributed by Samuel F. Reid, Minneapolis, Minn.
Tying a Rosette in a Couch-Cover Corner
In the accompanying illustration is shown a very simple method of tying a rosette in the corner of a couch cover. The use of the average couch cover as a throw-over leaves a large corner which drags upon the floor. To dispose of this extra length and at the same time make an artistic corner, the Upholsterer suggests the following method:
In the illustration provided, you can see a straightforward way to tie a rosette in the corner of a couch cover. When using a standard couch cover as a throw, it often leaves a long corner that drags on the floor. To manage this extra length while creating an attractive corner, the Upholsterer recommends the following method:

Different Stages in Tying the Rosette (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Different Stages in Tying the Rosette (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Spread the couch cover on the couch so that the surplus is evenly divided between the sides and ends, and pass a pin through the cover to show each corner as in Fig. 1. Measure the distance from each corner of the couch to the floor, Fig. 2, and measuring from the point of the corner, mark the same distance by the insertion of another pin, repeating in all four corners. The distance between the two pins at each corner now defines the amount of surplus that is to be taken up. Chalk a circle to include the portion between these two pins, as shown in Fig. 3, and with a circular needle and stout stitching twine run a shirring thread around the circle, and when this is drawn tightly and tied, the surplus is formed into a rosette, while the corner may be draped into an artistic cascade, as shown in Fig. 4.
Lay the couch cover on the couch so that the extra fabric is evenly distributed on both sides and at the ends. Use a pin to mark each corner, as shown in Fig. 1. Measure the distance from each corner of the couch to the floor, as depicted in Fig. 2, and from the corner point, mark the same distance by inserting another pin, repeating this for all four corners. The distance between the two pins at each corner now indicates how much extra fabric needs to be gathered. Draw a circle that includes the area between these two pins, as shown in Fig. 3. Using a circular needle and strong sewing thread, run a gathering stitch around the circle, and when this is pulled tight and secured, the excess fabric will form a rosette, while the corner can be draped into a stylish cascade, as illustrated in Fig. 4.

(Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
(Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Driving Screws

A wood screw having the threads hammered flat on two sides can be easily driven in with the flattened sides parallel to the grain of the wood. When the screw is turned a quarter turn the remaining threads cross the grain and hold as well as if they had been turned in all the way. This is an especial advantage where something is wanted which is easily inserted and will hold better than a nail.—Contributed by P. D. Merrill, Chicago.
A wood screw with the threads flattened on two sides can be easily driven in with the flat sides parallel to the grain of the wood. When the screw is turned a quarter turn, the remaining threads cross the grain and hold just as well as if they had been fully screwed in. This is especially helpful when you need something that's easy to insert and will hold better than a nail.—Contributed by P. D. Merrill, Chicago.
A Power Windmill
The windmill shown is somewhat different from the ordinary kind. It is not a toy, nor does it approach in size the ordinary farm windmill, but is a compromise between the two, and in a good strong wind, will supply power enough to run a washing machine, a small dynamo, an emery wheel, or any other device used in the home workshop. The wheel is about 5 ft. in diameter, with eight blades. The over-all length is about 6 feet.
The windmill shown is a bit different from the regular kind. It’s not a toy, nor is it as big as a typical farm windmill; instead, it’s a middle ground between the two. In a strong wind, it can generate enough power to run a washing machine, a small generator, an emery wheel, or any other tool used in a home workshop. The wheel is about 5 feet in diameter and has eight blades. The overall length is about 6 feet.
The windmill is easily made and the cost is within the means of the average boy. There is not a part used in its construction that cannot be found about an ordinary manual-training shop. The most difficult parts of the construction will be described in detail. Symmetry and smoothness of design should be preserved and the parts made as light as possible consistent with strength and durability.
The windmill is easy to build, and the cost is affordable for the average kid. Every part used in its construction can be found in a typical manual-training shop. The most challenging parts of the construction will be explained in detail. It's important to maintain symmetry and smooth design, and the parts should be made as lightweight as possible while still ensuring strength and durability.

The Hub Consists of Two Parts, Each Having Four Arms for Holding the Blades (Fig. 1)
The hub has two sections, each with four arms to hold the blades (Fig. 1)
The Wheel
As shown in the drawings, the wheel has eight blades. Ordinarily the use of eight blades makes it difficult to construct a hub of sufficient strength to carry them. Where so many blades radiate from a common center it is almost impossible to provide an anchorage for each blade. To provide a maximum of strength coupled with simplicity of design, the plan of using two hubs of four arms each was adopted in the construction of this mill. The ordinary hub of four arms is simple to make and quite strong. Four pieces of straight-grained oak, each 16 in. long and 1-7/8 in. square, are used in constructing the hubs. The manner of notching each pair of pieces together is shown in Fig. 1. The slope for the blades is made to run in opposite directions on the ends of each crosspiece. The slope is formed [312] by cutting out a triangular piece, as shown.
As shown in the drawings, the wheel has eight blades. Typically, using eight blades makes it challenging to build a hub strong enough to support them. With so many blades extending from a central point, it's nearly impossible to anchor each blade properly. To achieve maximum strength while keeping the design simple, we decided to use two hubs, each with four arms, in building this mill. A standard four-arm hub is easy to create and quite sturdy. To construct the hubs, we use four pieces of straight-grained oak, each measuring 16 in. long and 1-7/8 in. square. The way to notch each pair of pieces together is illustrated in Fig. 1. The slope for the blades is designed to run in opposite directions at the ends of each crosspiece. The slope is created by cutting out a triangular piece, as depicted. [312]

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
The two hubs, thus formed, are mounted on the shaft, one behind the other, in such positions that the arms will be evenly divided for space in the wheel circle. These details are shown in Fig. 2. The blades, Fig. 3, are made of thin basswood or hard maple, and each is fastened in its place by means of two 3/8-in. bolts, in addition to which a few brads are driven in to prevent the thin blades from warping.
The two hubs created are attached to the shaft, one behind the other, positioned so that the arms are evenly spaced around the wheel's circumference. These details are shown in Fig. 2. The blades, shown in Fig. 3, are made of thin basswood or hard maple, and each one is secured in place with two 3/8-inch bolts. Additionally, a few brads are driven in to keep the thin blades from warping.
The Gears
This windmill was designed to transmit power by means of shafts and gear wheels, rather than with cranks and reciprocating pump rods, such as are used on ordinary farm mills. To obtain this result, an old sewing machine head was used. Such a part can be obtained from a junk dealer or a sewing-machine agent. The head is stripped of its base plate with the shuttle gearing; likewise the needle rod, presser foot, etc., are taken from the front end of the head along with the faceplate. The horizontal shaft and gear wheel are taken out and the bearings reamed out for a 1/2-in. shaft, which is substituted. The shaft should be 2 ft. in length, and 8 or 10 in. of its outer end threaded for the clamping nuts which hold the two hubs in place, as shown at A and B, Fig. 2. The gear wheel is also bored out and remounted on the new shaft.
This windmill was designed to transmit power using shafts and gears instead of cranks and reciprocating pump rods like those found on regular farm mills. To achieve this, an old sewing machine head was repurposed. You can find such a part at a junkyard or through a sewing machine dealer. The head is detached from its base plate along with the shuttle gearing; similarly, the needle rod, presser foot, and other components are removed from the front end of the head along with the faceplate. The horizontal shaft and gear wheel are taken out, and the bearings are reamed to fit a 1/2-inch shaft, which replaces the original. The shaft should be 2 feet long, with 8 or 10 inches of its outer end threaded for the clamping nuts that secure the two hubs in place, as indicated at A and B in Fig. 2. The gear wheel is also bored out and remounted on the new shaft.

The Supporting Standard Holds the Machine Head with the Wheel and the Vane on an Axis (Fig. 4)
The Supporting Standard Holds the Machine Head with the Wheel and the Vane on an Axis (Fig. 4)
The supporting standard is constructed of oak, with mortise-and-tenon joints, as shown in Fig. 4. The width of the pieces will depend on the kind of sewing-machine head used. It may be necessary also to slightly change the dimensions. The machine head is fastened on the support with bolts. A sleeve and thrust spring are mounted on the shaft, as shown. The sleeve is made of brass tubing, of a size to fit snugly on the shaft. A cotter will keep it in place. The sleeve serves as a collar for the thrust spring, which is placed between the sleeve and the standard. This arrangement acts as a buffer to take up the end thrust on the shaft caused by the varying pressure of the wind on the wheel.
The support standard is made from oak, using mortise-and-tenon joints, as illustrated in Fig. 4. The width of the pieces will vary based on the type of sewing machine head being used. It may also be necessary to slightly adjust the dimensions. The machine head is secured to the support with bolts. A sleeve and thrust spring are attached to the shaft, as shown. The sleeve is crafted from brass tubing that fits snugly on the shaft. A cotter pin will hold it in place. The sleeve acts as a collar for the thrust spring, which is positioned between the sleeve and the standard. This setup serves as a buffer to absorb the end thrust on the shaft caused by the changing pressure of the wind on the wheel.
The Vane
To keep the wheel facing the wind at all times, a vane must be provided. It is made of basswood or hard maple, as shown in Fig. 5. It is not built up solid, air spaces being left between the slats to reduce the wind resistance. Unless built in this manner, the vane is liable to twist off in a gale. The horizontal slats are 1/4 in. thick, and the upright and cross braces 3/8 in. thick, while the long arm connecting the vane to the supporting standard is 1/2 in. thick.
To ensure the wheel is always facing the wind, a vane must be installed. It's made from basswood or hard maple, as shown in Fig. 5. It isn't completely solid, with air spaces left between the slats to minimize wind resistance. If it's not constructed this way, the vane could break off in strong winds. The horizontal slats are 1/4 in. thick, while the upright and cross braces are 3/8 in. thick, and the long arm connecting the vane to the supporting standard is 1/2 in. thick.
The supporting standard, carrying the wheel and the vane, must revolve about a vertical axis with the changes in the wind, and this vertical axis is supplied in the form of a piece of gas pipe which runs through the supporting standard at the points marked C and D, Fig. 4. Ordinary pipe fittings, called flanges, are bolted to the frame at these points. The coupling in the gas pipe beneath the supporting standard serves as a stationary collar to support the weight of the whole mill. The vane should be placed correctly to balance the weight of the wheel.
The supporting structure, which holds the wheel and the vane, needs to rotate around a vertical axis as the wind shifts. This vertical axis is created using a piece of gas pipe that runs through the supporting structure at the points marked C and D, Fig. 4. Standard pipe fittings, known as flanges, are bolted to the frame at these locations. The coupling in the gas pipe below the supporting structure acts as a stable collar to bear the weight of the entire mill. The vane should be positioned properly to balance the weight of the wheel.
The shaft passes through the framework of the mill on the inside of the pipe, as shown at E. A 3/8-in. soft-steel or wrought-iron rod is satisfactory for the shaft, as no weight is supported by it and only a twisting force is transmitted. The use of a larger rod makes the mill cumbersome and unwieldy. The upper end of the shaft is fastened to the shaft that projects from the under side of the machine head by means of a sleeve made of a piece of 3/8-in. pipe. Two cotters hold the shafts and sleeve together.
The shaft goes through the frame of the mill inside the pipe, as shown at E. A 3/8-inch soft steel or wrought iron rod works well for the shaft since it doesn’t support any weight and only transmits a twisting force. Using a larger rod makes the mill heavy and difficult to handle. The upper end of the shaft is connected to the shaft that sticks out from the underside of the machine head using a sleeve made from a piece of 3/8-inch pipe. Two cotters secure the shafts and sleeve together.

The Lower End of the Shaft has a Horizontal Shaft Geared to It for the Drive Pulleys (Fig. 6)
The bottom of the shaft has a horizontal shaft connected to it for driving the pulleys (Fig. 6)
At the lower end of the shaft, inside the workshop, the device shown in Fig. 6 is installed. The purpose of this appliance is to provide a horizontal shaft upon which pulleys or driving gears may be mounted. The device is constructed of another sewing-machine head similar to the one already described. The head is cut in two and the separate parts mounted [313] on suitable supports. The gap between the sawed portions permits a pulley to be fastened on the shaft to serve as the main drive. The wheel propelled by the treadle of the sewing machine will make a good drive wheel. The small handwheel, originally mounted on the machine-head shaft, is left intact. This arrangement gives two sizes of drive wheels. Heavy sewing-machine belts will serve to transmit the power.
At the bottom of the shaft, inside the workshop, the device shown in Fig. 6 is installed. The purpose of this appliance is to provide a horizontal shaft where pulleys or driving gears can be attached. The device is made from another sewing machine head similar to the one already described. The head is cut in two, and the separate parts are mounted on suitable supports. The gap between the cut sections allows a pulley to be attached to the shaft to act as the main drive. The wheel powered by the treadle of the sewing machine will make a good drive wheel. The small handwheel, originally attached to the machine head shaft, remains intact. This setup provides two sizes of drive wheels. Heavy sewing machine belts will be used to transmit the power.
The Tower
The tower can be built up in any manner to suit the conditions. Ordinarily sticks, 2 in. square, are suitable. These are well braced with wire and fastened securely to the roof of the shop. The arrangement of the tower with the mill is shown in Fig. 7.
The tower can be constructed in any way that fits the situation. Usually, sticks that are 2 inches square work well. These are securely braced with wire and fastened firmly to the roof of the shop. The layout of the tower with the mill is shown in Fig. 7.

the Manner of Building the Tower on Which the Supporting Standard Revolves (Fig. 7)
the Way of Constructing the Tower that the Supporting Standard Rotates On (Fig. 7)
Telegraph Code on Typewriter Keys
A very simple and practical method of transcribing wireless time and other messages on the typewriter without having such perfect knowledge of the Morse system as to be able to immediately translate it into the common alphabet is the following: The characters of the Morse system are inscribed on small slips of paper—thus, three dots (...), for the letter S; two dashes (—), for the letter M, etc.—and these slips are pasted on the corresponding keys of the typewriter. The operator puts on his receiver, and the proper key is struck as he hears the corresponding Morse letter. As there are no capitals, spacing between words, or even punctuation, the manipulation of the typewriter is much simplified, and it is easily learned to record the signals as fast as they are heard.
A straightforward and practical method for typing out wireless time and other messages on a typewriter—without needing to fully understand the Morse system to instantly translate it into the regular alphabet—is as follows: Write the Morse characters on small slips of paper—like three dots (...) for the letter S, two dashes (—) for the letter M, and so on—and stick these slips on the corresponding keys of the typewriter. The operator puts on their receiver, and they press the appropriate key as they hear the matching Morse letter. Since there are no capital letters, spacing between words, or even punctuation, using the typewriter becomes much easier, and it's simple to learn how to record the signals as quickly as they are received.
An Aid in Sketching Profiles
The means usually employed by most beginners to obtain the correct outline of an object, such as tracing or a pantograph, make them dependent on mechanical help rather than train the eye to form and proportion a drawing correctly. The device shown not only greatly assists the beginner, but actually trains him toward a point where he can dispense with any such device and correctly sketch by free hand. It also has the effect of encouraging the beginner, because his first efforts will not be complete failures, as is usually the case.
The methods most beginners typically use to get the right shape of an object, like tracing or using a pantograph, make them rely on tools instead of developing their eye for proportion and form in drawing. The device shown not only helps beginners a lot, but also trains them to the point where they can sketch accurately by hand without needing any tools. It also boosts their confidence because their initial attempts won’t end up being complete failures, which often happens.

The Fine Wire is Bent as Near as Possible to the Outline of the Object
The fine wire is bent as close as possible to the shape of the object.
The device consists of a rather fine wire bent in the shape of a human profile and supported on a stand or base. The stand may be dispensed with, however, and the wire held in the hand. In use, it is placed near the model or person whose profile is to be drawn; then, after closing one eye, it is set at a position where it will correspond to the features of the model. This enables one to note the variations between the wire and the model's features. For instance, the forehead may recede from the wire at the top, or the nose may have a different slant or shape.
The device is made of a fine wire shaped like a human profile and is held up by a stand or base. However, the stand isn't necessary; you can just hold the wire in your hand. When using it, you place it near the model or person whose profile you want to draw; then, after closing one eye, you adjust it to match the features of the model. This allows you to see the differences between the wire and the model's features. For example, the forehead might stick out from the wire at the top, or the nose might have a different angle or shape.
The paper on which the drawing is to be made should have a faint outline drawn by laying the wire upon it and marking around it with a soft pencil. Having noted the variations between the wire and the features, proceed to draw the profile, observing the same variations, and when the sketch is completed, erase the faint outlines. Then compare the drawing with the model without using the wire, and make final corrections. The dotted line indicates the outline to be erased.
The paper for the drawing should have a light outline created by placing the wire on it and tracing around it with a soft pencil. After noting the differences between the wire and the features, draw the profile while paying attention to those differences, and once the sketch is done, erase the light outlines. Then, compare the drawing with the model without the wire and make any final corrections. The dotted line shows the outline that should be erased.
The drawing may be made larger or smaller than the bent wire, but the outline on the paper must be kept in exactly the same proportion. It is not necessary that the wire be bent so that it represents perfect features. With the use of this device one forms a habit of comparing and proportioning, which applies to the correct sketching of all objects.—Contributed by Will L. Burner, Columbus, Ohio.
The drawing can be made larger or smaller than the bent wire, but the outline on the paper must stay in exactly the same proportion. It’s not necessary for the wire to be bent in a way that shows perfect features. Using this method helps develop the habit of comparing and proportioning, which is essential for accurately sketching all objects.—Contributed by Will L. Burner, Columbus, Ohio.
A Small Hydroelectric-Power Plant
Wherever a water pressure of over 30 lb. is available a small hydroelectric-power plant will produce sufficient electric current for any light work, such as charging storage batteries, operating sewing and washing machines, toys, etc. The design is for a 6-in. hydraulic motor of the Pelton type, which will operate well on almost all city-water pressures, and at [315] 80 lb. will drive a 100-watt generator to its full output.
Wherever there's a water pressure of over 30 lb., a small hydroelectric power plant can generate enough electricity for light activities like charging batteries, running sewing and washing machines, and powering toys, among others. The design features a 6-inch Pelton-type hydraulic motor that works efficiently with almost all city water pressures, and at 80 lb., it can fully power a 100-watt generator.
The castings may be procured from any foundry cheaply, so that these parts need not trouble the builder. The patterns can be constructed easily and are not so complicated that they will tear the molds when being removed. They are made from well seasoned white pine, 1/4 in. thick. Fill in all sharp corners with small fillets. All the patterns should taper slightly from the parting line.
The castings can be sourced affordably from any foundry, so these components won't be an issue for the builder. The patterns can be easily made and are simple enough that they won't damage the molds when taken out. They are constructed from well-seasoned white pine, 1/4 in. thick. Fill in all sharp corners with small fillets. All the patterns should slightly taper from the parting line.

Layout for the Casing, Cover and Wheel for the Construction of a Hydraulic Motor That will Drive a Small Dynamo, to Produce Current for Experimental Purposes, to Charge Storage Cells or to Run Electric Toys (Fig. 1)
Layout for the casing, cover, and wheel for constructing a hydraulic motor that will power a small dynamo to generate current for experimental purposes, to charge storage cells, or to run electric toys (Fig. 1)
The motor casing is shown in Fig. 1. It is made with a wide flange so that the cover plate can be bolted to it. The lug A is to give additional strength and thickness to the side so that it may be drilled and tapped for the nozzle. The legs B and C are for bolting the case to a base or support. The outlet pipe is of lead, 1-3/4 in. outside diameter, and the hole for it in the case can be either drilled or cored. Solder the pipe flush with the inside of the casing. Drill and tap the holes around the flange for 8,32 bolts. The shaft hole must be drilled very carefully. Drill 1/4-in. holes in the feet. The oil holes are 1/8 in. in diameter. File the surface of the flange smooth and also the inside shoulder of the bearing lug. Drill and tap the nozzle hole for a 3/4-in. pipe thread.
The motor casing is shown in Fig. 1. It's designed with a wide flange so that the cover plate can be bolted to it. The lug A adds extra strength and thickness to the side, so it can be drilled and tapped for the nozzle. The legs B and C are for bolting the case to a base or support. The outlet pipe is made of lead, with an outside diameter of 1-3/4 in., and the hole for it in the case can be either drilled or cored. Solder the pipe flush with the inside of the casing. Drill and tap the holes around the flange for 8-32 bolts. The shaft hole needs to be drilled very carefully. Drill 1/4-in. holes in the feet. The oil holes are 1/8 in. in diameter. File the surface of the flange smooth and also smooth the inside shoulder of the bearing lug. Drill and tap the nozzle hole for a 3/4-in. pipe thread.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
The cover plate is shown in Fig. 2, This is bolted to the casing with 8,32 brass bolts, 1/2 in. long. The holes for them are drilled 3/16 in. in diameter. A shallow hole, for the end of the shaft to fit in, is drilled in the lug, as shown. It does not pass all the way through the plate. File the inside face of the lug smooth and also the edge of the plate where it joins the casing.
The cover plate is shown in Fig. 2. This is attached to the casing with eight 32 brass bolts, each 1/2 inch long. The holes for them are drilled 3/16 inch in diameter. A shallow hole, for the end of the shaft to fit into, is drilled in the lug, as shown. It does not go all the way through the plate. Smooth the inside face of the lug and the edge of the plate where it meets the casing.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
The wheel, with brackets attached, is shown in Fig. 3. This style of wheel need not be followed out closely. Bore the hub centrally for a 1/4-in. shaft and fit in two setscrews. Drill and tap the rim for the buckets with a 1/4-in. standard tap. The buckets must be evenly spaced and bolted on to make the wheel balance.
The wheel, with brackets attached, is shown in Fig. 3. This style of wheel doesn't have to be followed exactly. Make a centered hole in the hub for a 1/4-in. shaft and install two setscrews. Drill and tap the rim for the buckets using a 1/4-in. standard tap. The buckets must be evenly spaced and bolted on to ensure the wheel is balanced.

The Best Shape of the Buckets to Take Up the Force of the Water (Fig. 4)
The Best Shape of the Buckets to Handle the Force of the Water (Fig. 4)
The buckets are shown in Fig. 4. They may be cast from iron or babbitt. The sharp ridge in the center provides for a deviation of the water jet as it flows on the bucket. The ridge divides the bucket into two equal lobes which turn each division of the jet through almost 180 deg., using all the kinetic energy in the jet. This is shown at D. The dividing ridge must lie in the plane of the revolution, so that each bucket will enter the center of the jet. The buckets being evenly spaced on the periphery of the wheel, only one at a time receives the force of the jet, the one in front and the one behind clearing the jet.
The buckets are shown in Fig. 4. They can be made from iron or babbitt. The sharp ridge in the center helps redirect the water jet as it flows over the bucket. This ridge splits the bucket into two equal lobes, allowing each section of the jet to turn almost 180 degrees, utilizing all the kinetic energy in the jet. This is illustrated at D. The dividing ridge needs to be in line with the axis of rotation, so that each bucket can align with the center of the jet. Since the buckets are evenly spaced around the edge of the wheel, only one bucket at a time takes the force of the jet, while the bucket ahead and the one behind are out of the jet's path.

(Fig. 5)
(Fig. 5)
The nozzle is shown in Fig. 5. It can be made of iron or brass. The inside gradually tapers from 3/4 to 3/16 in. It has a 3/4-in. pipe thread and is screwed into the hole in the case from the inside and is secured with a lock nut. Enough additional threaded portion is left protruding to allow the supply pipe to be connected.
The nozzle is shown in Fig. 5. It can be made of iron or brass. The inside gradually narrows from 3/4 to 3/16 in. It has a 3/4-in. pipe thread and is screwed into the hole in the case from the inside and is secured with a lock nut. A sufficient amount of additional threaded portion is left sticking out to allow for the connection of the supply pipe.
When assembling the motor, fasten the wheel to the shaft with the two setscrews, and place a metal washer, E, on each side of the wheel. Place the wheel in the casing and screw the [316] cover plate in place. A thin rubber gasket should be placed between the cover and the casing to provide a water-tight joint.
When putting together the motor, secure the wheel to the shaft using the two setscrews, and put a metal washer, E, on each side of the wheel. Insert the wheel into the casing and screw the [316] cover plate into position. A thin rubber gasket should be placed between the cover and the casing to create a water-tight seal.

The Motor as It is Coupled to Drive the Dynamo, and the Water Connections (Fig. 6)
The Motor as It Connects to Drive the Dynamo, and the Water Connections (Fig. 6)
The general arrangement of the plant is shown in Fig. 6. The motor and dynamo are mounted on a heavy wood base, which in turn is firmly bolted to a concrete foundation. Level up the two machines by the use of thin washers on the bolts between the base and machine. A heavy sleeve and setscrews are used to connect the two shafts. The connection to the water supply is made with 3/4-in. pipe, with a globe valve in it to regulate the flow of water. Any dynamo of about 100-watt output can be used.
The overall layout of the plant is shown in Fig. 6. The motor and generator are mounted on a sturdy wooden base, which is securely fastened to a concrete foundation. Use thin washers on the bolts between the base and the machine to level the two machines. A heavy sleeve and set screws connect the two shafts. The connection to the water supply is made with 3/4-inch pipe, including a globe valve to control the water flow. Any generator with an output of around 100 watts can be used.
Paper Shades for Electric-Light Globes
The appearance of an electric-light globe can be very prettily improved by making a shade of crêpe paper of any desired color for each one. Canary-colored crêpe produces a soft, mellow effect. Pale blue, yellow, red and, in fact, all the colors can be used, making a very pleasing variety.
The look of an electric light bulb can be really enhanced by making a shade out of crêpe paper in any color you like. Canary yellow crêpe gives a warm, soft glow. Light blue, yellow, red, and really any color can be used, creating a lovely variety.

Two Pieces of Crêpe Paper Stitched Together and Ruffled, to Make a Fancy Electric-Light Shade
Two pieces of crepe paper stitched together and ruffled to create a fancy lampshade.
The body of the shade is made of a piece of paper about 5-1/2 in. wide and 3-1/2 ft. long. The width will vary with the length of the globe to be covered, and it is best to have it full, as the edge can be trimmed even with the lower end of the globe afterward. Another piece of the same color is cut 2-1/2 in. wide and of the same length. This piece makes the ruffle.
The body of the shade is made from a piece of paper that's about 5.5 inches wide and 3.5 feet long. The width may change depending on how long the globe is that needs to be covered, and it's best to keep it full, as the edge can be trimmed to match the bottom of the globe later. Another piece in the same color is cut to be 2.5 inches wide and the same length. This piece is used for the ruffle.
The smaller piece is placed on the larger centrally, and both are stitched together with a running stitch, using a needle and cotton thread. A plain running stitch is also made 1/4 in. from one edge of the larger strip. The material is gathered along both threads. This operation makes the material shrink in length. Wrap it around the globe, pulling the threads taut so that the ends of the paper will just meet. Tie the threads and clip off the extending ends. If the paper extends beyond the end of the globe, trim it off with the shears. Ruffle the two edges of the narrow strip and the lower edge of the larger one. This operation is simply stretching the edge of the crêpe to cause it to stand out.—Contributed by Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
The smaller piece is placed on the larger one in the center, and both are stitched together with a running stitch using a needle and cotton thread. A plain running stitch is also made 1/4 in. from one edge of the larger strip. The fabric is gathered along both threads, which causes it to shrink in length. Wrap it around the globe, pulling the threads tight so that the ends of the paper just meet. Tie the threads and cut off the excess ends. If the paper extends beyond the edge of the globe, trim it with scissors. Ruffle the two edges of the narrow strip and the lower edge of the larger one. This step involves stretching the edge of the crêpe to make it stand out.—Contributed by Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
Renewing the Markings on Graduates
Graduates that have been in use a long time, especially for measuring alkalies, become unreadable. The graduations are easily restored in the following manner: Moisten a small piece of absorbent cotton with a solution of white shellac, cut in alcohol. Rub this well into all the etched parts and allow to dry for about two minutes, then rub in a fine whiting or litharge with an old toothbrush. If red is desired, use rouge; if black is preferred, use lampblack or powdered graphite. When dry, wipe off the excess pigment with a cloth moistened in alcohol.—Contributed by A. C. Norris, Rockford, Ill.
Graduates that have been used for a long time, especially for measuring alkalies, become hard to read. You can easily restore the graduations like this: Soak a small piece of absorbent cotton in a white shellac solution mixed with alcohol. Rub this well into all the etched areas and let it dry for about two minutes. Then, scrub in fine whiting or litharge using an old toothbrush. If you want red, use rouge; if you’d prefer black, use lampblack or powdered graphite. Once it’s dry, wipe off the extra pigment with a cloth dampened with alcohol.—Contributed by A. C. Norris, Rockford, Ill.
Repairing a Broken Ball-Clasp Purse

Having occasion to repair a purse of the ordinary ball-clasp kind where one of the stems was broken off and lost, I first had some trouble in finding a way to repair it. I started to take off the remaining stem in an attempt to replace the locking device with another kind, and in bending it down toward the opposite side, I [317] happened to close the purse and found that it locked just as well as if there had been two balls on it. I have since repaired two other purses in the same manner and found that they worked well.
After having to fix a regular ball-clasp purse where one of the stems was broken off and missing, I initially struggled to find a way to repair it. I began trying to remove the remaining stem to replace the locking mechanism with a different kind. While bending it down toward the opposite side, I [317] accidentally closed the purse and discovered that it locked just as securely as if there were two balls on it. Since then, I've repaired two other purses the same way and found that they worked well.
The idea is to bend the remaining clasp over until it is low enough to come in contact with and to spring over the other side, thus giving the same snap and holding qualities as before.—Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
The idea is to bend the remaining clasp down until it's low enough to touch and spring over to the other side, giving it the same snap and holding qualities as before.—Contributed by W. C. Loy, Rochester, Ind.
Automatic Valve for a Funnel

Where liquid is run through a funnel into an opaque bottle or earthen jug, the filling cannot be watched, and if not watched constantly, the vessel will overflow. This can be obviated by applying the automatic valve to the funnel stem, as shown. A washer support is soldered or otherwise fastened in the upper end of the stem, or at the base of the sloping part, and a crossbar is fastened to its upper surface across the hole. The crossbar is centrally drilled to receive a small rod or wire, to which is attached a valve that will cover the hole in the washer. A cork is stuck on the lower end of the rod. The location of the cork on the rod should be at a point a little below the level to which the bottle or vessel is to be filled.—Contributed by H. W. Hilton, Hopington, B. C.
Where liquid is poured through a funnel into an opaque bottle or clay jug, you can’t see the filling, and if you don’t keep an eye on it, the vessel will overflow. You can avoid this by using an automatic valve on the funnel stem, as shown. A washer support is soldered or otherwise attached at the top end of the stem or at the base of the sloped section, and a crossbar is secured to its upper surface across the hole. The crossbar has a central drilled hole to hold a small rod or wire, to which a valve is attached to cover the hole in the washer. A cork is placed at the lower end of the rod. The cork should be positioned on the rod just below the level to which the bottle or vessel should be filled.—Contributed by H. W. Hilton, Hopington, B. C.
Chisel Holder for Whetting
To obtain the proper slope and apply a fine cutting edge, the plane iron or chisel must be held at the proper slope while grinding, and especially so when whetting. The illustration shows a holder to keep the iron or chisel at the proper slope. It consists of a block of wood with a sloping cut at the right angle to make two pieces. One of these pieces is permanently fastened to the strip at the back, while the other is held with a bolt passing through a notch in the strip for adjusting or clamping. The rear end of the back piece is fitted with a large screw hook or L-hook to provide a slide to keep the rear end of the holder at the right height. The iron or chisel is inserted between the sloping edges of the blocks and clamped in place, then the L-screw is adjusted for height to secure the proper angle on the stone. It is then only necessary to move the block and tool back and forth over the stone.
To get the right angle and create a sharp cutting edge, the plane iron or chisel needs to be held at the correct slope while grinding, especially when sharpening. The illustration shows a holder designed to keep the iron or chisel at the right angle. It consists of a wooden block with a sloped cut at the right angle, making two pieces. One piece is permanently attached to the back strip, while the other is secured with a bolt that goes through a notch in the strip for adjusting or clamping. The back end of the rear piece has a large screw hook or L-hook that allows for height adjustment to keep the back end of the holder at the correct height. The iron or chisel is placed between the sloping edges of the blocks and clamped in position, then the L-screw is adjusted for height to ensure the right angle on the stone. After that, you just need to move the block and tool back and forth over the stone.

The Tool Edge is Kept at the Proper Angle While It is Run over the Stone
The tool's edge is held at the right angle while it’s run over the stone.
A Large Hole in a Small Piece of Paper
It would seem impossible to cut a hole in a piece of paper, 2 in. wide and 3 in. long, large enough to allow a person's body to pass through it, but if carefully cut as shown by the lines in the sketch, one will find with surprise that the paper can be extended so that the feat is easily accomplished. Make the cuts about 1/8 in. apart and these will allow the paper to expand several times its size.—Contributed by H. Martine Warner, E. Orange, N. J.
It might seem impossible to cut a hole in a piece of paper that's 2 inches wide and 3 inches long, big enough for a person to fit through, but if you cut it carefully as illustrated in the sketch, you'll be surprised to find that the paper can be stretched to easily make this possible. Make the cuts about 1/8 inch apart, and this will let the paper expand several times its size. —Contributed by H. Martine Warner, E. Orange, N. J.

The Slits Cut in the Paper Allow It to Expand Several Times the Size of the Original
The slits cut in the paper let it expand several times its original size.
Homemade Bunsen Burner
The amateur craftsman, at some time or other, needs a hot flame for certain kinds of work, and a Bunsen or alcohol flame is brought into service. The gasoline and alcohol flames have their drawbacks, one of which is the starting of the burner and the waiting for the heat. They are also unhandy in directing the flame on parts of the work. As I desired a burner for quick work and one whose flame I could direct at any angle, for repoussé and chasing on copper and silversmith's work, I made the one shown in the sketch to attach to a hose and connected it with the gas pipe of the illuminating system in the house. It consists of a hose connection into which a piece of pipe, 5 in. long, is fitted. The hose connection is also fitted with a small nozzle, A, for the gas, and the pipe has an opening through it at the end of the nozzle.—Contributed by John Koestner, Brooklyn, N. Y.
The amateur craftsman sometimes needs a hot flame for specific tasks, so a Bunsen burner or an alcohol flame is used. Gasoline and alcohol flames have their downsides, one of which is the difficulty in starting the burner and waiting for it to heat up. They’re also not very convenient for directing the flame onto parts of the work. Since I wanted a burner for quick tasks and one whose flame I could direct at any angle for repoussé and chasing on copper and silversmithing projects, I made the one shown in the sketch to attach to a hose and connected it to the gas line of the home’s lighting system. It has a hose connection where a 5-inch piece of pipe is fitted. The hose connection also includes a small nozzle, A, for the gas, and the pipe has an opening at the end of the nozzle. —Contributed by John Koestner, Brooklyn, N. Y.

Bunsen-Burner Attachment for Use with Illuminating Gas Taken from the House Mains
Bunsen-Burner Attachment for Use with Natural Gas From the Home Supply
Cane-Seat Cleaner
A rapid and practical method of removing stains and discolorations from the cane seats of chairs, wickerwork, etc., is to use oxalic acid and powdered pumice.
A quick and effective way to get rid of stains and discoloration from cane seats of chairs, wickerwork, and similar items is to use oxalic acid and powdered pumice.
Dissolve oxalic-acid crystals in hot water and saturate a small stiff brush in it, then dip the brush in the powdered pumice and rub the discolored cane briskly with the brush.—Contributed by W. F. Jaquythe, Richmond, California.
Dissolve oxalic-acid crystals in hot water and soak a small stiff brush in it, then dip the brush in the powdered pumice and scrub the discolored cane vigorously with the brush.—Contributed by W. F. Jaquythe, Richmond, California.
Shade-Roller and Curtain-Pole Bracket
The main advantage of this shade bracket is that a person can lower it for adjusting the shade or in changing curtains while standing on the floor, thus eliminating the use of a step ladder and the danger possibly attending such use.
The main advantage of this shade bracket is that you can lower it to adjust the shade or change the curtains while standing on the floor, eliminating the need for a step ladder and the risks that come with using one.

The Brackets as They are Attached to a Window Casing for Lowering the Curtain Pole (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The Brackets as They are Attached to a Window Casing for Lowering the Curtain Pole (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The front elevation of a window with bracket attachment in position is shown in Fig. 1, and a cross section in Fig. 2. The position of the curtain pole when the brackets are lowered is shown by the dotted lines. A detail sketch of the support end is given in Fig. 3 and one bracket is shown in Fig. 4.
The front view of a window with the bracket attached is shown in Fig. 1, and a cross-section is in Fig. 2. The location of the curtain rod when the brackets are lowered is indicated by the dotted lines. A detailed sketch of the support end is provided in Fig. 3, and one bracket is shown in Fig. 4.

The Attachments, Supports and Brackets for Holding both Curtain Pole and Shade Roller (Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
The Attachments, Supports, and Brackets for Holding both Curtain Rod and Shade Roller (Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
The curtain pole A is fastened to the brackets B with 1/4-in. dowel pins, C. [319] These pins and the pole keep the brackets from spreading at the top, so that a shade roller, D, may have its attachments fastened to the inner sides of the brackets. A small pulley, E, is attached to the window casing above the right bracket and a double pulley is located above the left, cords being passed through them, down along the casing to a point within easy reach, and fastened in any manner desired.
The curtain pole A is secured to the brackets B using 1/4-inch dowel pins, C. [319] These pins and the pole prevent the brackets from spreading at the top, allowing a shade roller, D, to have its attachments connected to the inner sides of the brackets. A small pulley, E, is mounted on the window casing above the right bracket, and a double pulley is placed above the left. Cords are threaded through these pulleys, running down along the casing to a point that's easy to reach and can be secured in any way desired.
All that is necessary to change the curtains or fix a shade is to loosen the cord and allow the brackets to drop down until they may be easily reached.—Contributed by James F. Napier, Montreal, Can.
All you need to do to change the curtains or fix a shade is to loosen the cord and let the brackets drop down until you can easily reach them.—Contributed by James F. Napier, Montreal, Can.
Planing Arrow Sticks
While making some bows one day I discovered I had no suitable dowel sticks for the arrows, so I started to make them out of 1/4-in. square stock. I found it rather difficult to plane these pieces until I hit upon the scheme shown in the sketch. I procured a piece of ordinary tongue-and-groove flooring and clamped it in the bench vise, then drove a nail in the groove to act as a stop, and in no time I had the sticks planed into arrows.—Contributed by J. F. Culverwell, Washington, District of Columbia.
While making some bows one day, I realized I didn't have any suitable dowel sticks for the arrows, so I started making them out of 1/4-inch square stock. I found it pretty difficult to plane these pieces until I came up with the method shown in the sketch. I got a piece of regular tongue-and-groove flooring and clamped it in the bench vise, then drove a nail into the groove to act as a stop, and before long, I had the sticks planed into arrows. —Contributed by J. F. Culverwell, Washington, District of Columbia.

Planing the Corners from Square Stock by Placing Them in the Groove of a Flooring Board
Planing the Corners from Square Stock by Placing Them in the Groove of a Flooring Board
To Clean Shellac from a Brush
Put the brush in a strong, warm solution of borax and water, and then wash in clean, warm water. If the bristles have become hard, allow the brush to remain in the solution until soft, keeping the solution warm in the meantime; then wash it out in warm water.—Contributed by N. J. Shattuck, Woburn, Mass.
Put the brush in a strong, warm mixture of borax and water, and then rinse it in clean, warm water. If the bristles have hardened, let the brush soak in the solution until it softens, keeping the solution warm in the meantime; then rinse it out in warm water.—Contributed by N. J. Shattuck, Woburn, Mass.
Lathe Dogs
In the absence of a full equipment of lathe dogs the amateur can make them cheaply from pieces of iron pipe. One of these is shown in the sketch. A section of pipe, 1-1/2 in. to 3 in. long, is partly cut away, as shown, leaving a projection of metal 1 in. wide. One or more setscrews are fitted in the round part, and the dog is complete.
In the absence of a full set of lathe dogs, the amateur can make them cheaply from pieces of iron pipe. One of these is shown in the sketch. A section of pipe, 1.5 to 3 inches long, is partly cut away, leaving a metal projection 1 inch wide. One or more setscrews are fitted in the round part, and the dog is complete.

Two Forms of Lathe Dogs That are Quickly and Cheaply Constructed
Two Types of Lathe Dogs That are Easily and Inexpensively Made
A dog, or driver, may also be made of two U-clamps and two bolts as shown. This is especially useful for large work, where the cost of a dog would be prohibitive. After these two clamps are bolted on the work to be turned a bolt is attached in the faceplate that bears against the clamp, thus turning the work.
A dog, or driver, can also be made from two U-clamps and two bolts as shown. This is especially handy for larger projects, where buying a dog would be too expensive. Once these two clamps are bolted onto the workpiece that needs to be turned, a bolt is attached in the faceplate that presses against the clamp, allowing the work to be turned.
To Remove a Splinter from the Flesh
Quite frequently small particles of steel, splinters, or thorns are run into the flesh and cannot be removed with the fingers. These can be readily removed in the following manner: Press the eye of an ordinary needle over the protruding end, then turn the needle until the edges bind or clinch. While in this position, raise the needle and out comes the splinter.
Often, small bits of steel, splinters, or thorns get lodged in the skin and can’t be taken out with your fingers. You can easily remove them this way: Press the eye of a regular needle over the exposed end, then twist the needle until it grabs or clinches. While it's in this position, lift the needle, and the splinter should come out.

The Eye of a Needle Slipped over a Thorn for Removing It from the Flesh
The Eye of a Needle Slipped over a Thorn for Taking It out of the Flesh
A fine luster can be given to zinc by rubbing it with kerosene or a weak solution of sulphuric acid.
A nice shine can be achieved on zinc by rubbing it with kerosene or a mild solution of sulfuric acid.
Holders for Displaying Magazines

Papers and magazines often are sold in drug stores where the display space usually is limited, especially in the window. The method used by one druggist gave space for the magazines in the window without interfering with the other goods.
Papers and magazines are often sold in drug stores where the display space is usually limited, especially in the window. One druggist's method created space for the magazines in the window without blocking the other products.
The back of the window was arranged with rows of hooks, three hooks for each magazine, two at the top edges and one in the center at the bottom. The magazine is easily slipped into these holders, and the whole presents a tidy appearance. The hooks are the ordinary screwhooks that can be obtained from a hardware or furniture store.—Contributed by T. F. Monaghan, Philadelphia, Pa.
The back of the window was set up with rows of hooks, three hooks for each magazine: two at the top edges and one in the center at the bottom. The magazine easily slides into these holders, creating a neat look. The hooks are the standard screw hooks that you can find at a hardware or furniture store.—Contributed by T. F. Monaghan, Philadelphia, Pa.
Waste-Paper Basket

The covering of a broken demijohn was used in the manner shown as a waste-paper basket. The glass was broken out and the covering soaked in water, after which the splints were turned down and tied with a cord. This I found to make a first-class waste-paper basket.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Canada.
The cover of a broken demijohn was repurposed as a waste-paper basket. The glass was removed, and the cover was soaked in water; then, the splints were bent down and tied with a cord. I found this to be a great waste-paper basket. —Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Canada.
Lettering Photographs
Amateur photographers often write, or print, the names of the subjects on the mounts, or in the albums, with white ink or scratch it on the negative so that it will print in the picture.
Amateur photographers often write or print the names of the subjects on the mounts or in the albums using white ink, or they scratch it onto the negative so it shows up in the picture.
A very good method is to take ordinary black ink and do the lettering on the sensitive paper before it is printed under the negative, being careful not to scratch the paper. After printing the paper to the proper shade the toning and fixing baths will wash away the ink and leave the lettering in white.
A great technique is to use regular black ink to do the lettering on the sensitive paper before it's printed under the negative, making sure not to scratch the paper. After printing the paper to the right shade, the toning and fixing baths will wash away the ink and leave the lettering in white.
The lettering is easily accomplished and a post card can be sent with any message desired on any negative, the inscription being printed on the paper so that the negative is unharmed for other printing.—Contributed by Henry J. Marion, Pontiac, Mich.
The lettering is easy to do, and you can send a postcard with any message you want on any negative, with the inscription printed on the paper so that the negative remains intact for other prints. —Contributed by Henry J. Marion, Pontiac, Mich.
A Stamp Moistener

A handy stamp moistener and envelope sealer can be made by procuring a small medicine bottle or glass vial and inserting a piece of felt or other wicking material in the place of the stopper, and filling it with water.
A useful stamp moistener and envelope sealer can be created by getting a small medicine bottle or glass vial, putting a piece of felt or another wicking material where the stopper goes, and filling it with water.
This moistener will be found handy for a small office where the mail is quite heavy, but not big enough to warrant the purchasing of a sealing machine. This moistener is sanitary and replaces the wet sponge.—Contributed by Theo. J. Becker, Kansas City, Mo.
This moistener will be useful for a small office where the mail volume is high, but not large enough to justify buying a sealing machine. This moistener is hygienic and takes the place of a wet sponge.—Contributed by Theo J. Becker, Kansas City, Mo.
A Window Lock

A very neat window lock can be made of sheet steel, 1/2 in. wide. One piece, shaped like a saw tooth, is fastened to the sash, and the other, which is bent to form a catch over the tooth projection and ends in a curved top for a finger hold, is attached to the window casing. The illustration clearly shows how the lock is attached.—Contributed by Lee B. Green, Cleveland, O.
A tidy window lock can be made from 1/2 inch wide sheet steel. One piece, shaped like a saw tooth, is attached to the sash, while the other, bent to create a catch over the tooth projection and ending in a curved top for a finger hold, is fixed to the window casing. The illustration clearly shows how the lock is attached.—Contributed by Lee B. Green, Cleveland, O.
Georgia pine should be filled with white shellac.
Georgia pine should be coated with white shellac.
Varnished Candles Burn Longer
The heated tallow or wax of a candle runs down the sides and this results in a considerable waste. This waste can be stopped by coating the new candles with white varnish and laying them aside for a few days to harden. The varnish will keep the melted tallow or wax from running away and it is used in the wick.
The hot tallow or wax from a candle drips down the sides, leading to a lot of waste. This waste can be prevented by applying white varnish to new candles and letting them sit for a few days to harden. The varnish will stop the melted tallow or wax from dripping away, and it is also used in the wick.
Guides for a Mill File
Having a large number of wires to file true on the end I devised a way to do this with the use of some old worn-out and discarded files that had good cutting edges. A piece of sheet copper, about the same length as the files, was bent to fit over one edge and both sides of the file, allowing both edges to project about 1/4 in. This made a guide that prevented the edge of the file from slipping off the end of the wire. The guide was held in place on the file by cutting a slit in the projecting edges, about 1/4 in. from the end, and turning these separated parts back on the file.
Having a lot of wires to work with, I came up with a method to manage them using some old, worn-out files that still had good cutting edges. I took a piece of sheet copper, about the same length as the files, and bent it to fit over one edge and both sides of the file, letting both edges stick out about 1/4 inch. This created a guide that kept the end of the file from slipping off the wire. I secured the guide on the file by cutting a slit in the protruding edges, about 1/4 inch from the end, and folding these separated parts back onto the file.

Guide for Using the Edge of Worn-Out Files on Small Round or Square Stock
Guide for Using the Sharp Edge of Worn-Out Files on Small Round or Square Materials
If such a guide is fitted tightly on a file, the edges of worn-out files can be used for such work, and the file cannot slip off and mar the sides of the work.—Contributed by A. R. Drury, Hampton, Ill.
If a guide is securely attached to a file, the edges of worn files can be used for this purpose, and the file won't slip off and damage the sides of the work. —Contributed by A. R. Drury, Hampton, Ill.
A Simple Motion-Picture Machine
The drum A is a piece of wood, 1-3/4 in. long and 1-3/16 in. in diameter, supported on the end of a round stick, B, which can be made in one piece with the drum, if a wood lathe is at hand, but a piece cut from a curtain pole and a lead pencil inserted in a hole bored in the end will answer the purpose. Be sure to have the diameter of the drum 1-3/16 inches.
The drum A is a piece of wood, 1-3/4 inches long and 1-3/16 inches in diameter, attached to the end of a round stick, B. This stick can be made from one piece with the drum if you have access to a wood lathe, but you can also use a piece of a curtain pole with a lead pencil inserted into a hole drilled in the end. Make sure the drum's diameter is 1-3/16 inches.

The Parts for Making the Revolving Drum for Holding the Strip of Pictures
The Parts for Making the Revolving Drum for Holding the Strip of Pictures
Provide a base piece, C, 1/2 in. thick and 2 in. square, and fasten a piece of cardboard having a slit E, as shown. The cardboard should be 2 in. wide and 2-1/2 in. high, the slit being cut 1/2 in. in width, 1/4 in. from the top and 3/4 in. from the bottom. A hole is bored in the center of the block to admit the standard B easily.
Provide a base piece, C, 1/2 inch thick and 2 inches square, and attach a piece of cardboard with a slit E, as shown. The cardboard should be 2 inches wide and 2-1/2 inches high, with a slit cut 1/2 inch wide, 1/4 inch from the top and 3/4 inch from the bottom. Make a hole in the center of the block to allow the standard B to fit easily.
The next step is to provide the picture and attach it to the drum. A picture of a boy pounding cobblestones is shown in the sketch, at F, which should be made on a strip of paper 4-3/8 in. long. This is glued or attached with rubber bands to the drum. The drawing can be enlarged in pen and ink, or can be reproduced as it is, if a hand camera is at hand, and a print used on the drum.
The next step is to provide the image and attach it to the drum. An image of a boy pounding cobblestones is shown in the sketch at F, which should be created on a strip of paper 4-3/8 in. long. This is glued or secured with rubber bands to the drum. The drawing can be enlarged with pen and ink or can be reproduced as is if a camera is available, and a print can be used on the drum.

The Different Positions of the Picture will Appear in Action When Turning with the Drum
The different positions of the picture will show in action when turning with the drum.
It is only necessary to put the parts together, grasp the base in one hand and turn the support B with the other, when, looking through the slot E, the boy is seen pounding the stones. Various pictures can be made and the strips changed.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
It’s only necessary to assemble the parts, hold the base in one hand and rotate the support B with the other. Then, looking through the slot E, you can see the boy smashing the stones. You can create different pictures and swap out the strips. —Contributed by C. C. Fraser, Saginaw, Mich.
Substitute for Cleats on Boards
The necessity for using more than one cleat for fastening two boards together may be done away with by using the device shown in the sketch. The center cleat prevents the boards from buckling while the sides are tightly held by these simple flat fasteners. The fasteners are made of tin cut as indicated, slipped between the edges of the boards and the parts bent over and tacked. Where the strain is not too great the holders may be used without a cleat, making an effective flat fastening.—Contributed by W. O. Nettleton, Washington, D. C.
The need to use more than one cleat to hold two boards together can be eliminated by using the device shown in the sketch. The center cleat stops the boards from warping while the sides are securely held by these simple flat fasteners. The fasteners are made of tin cut as shown, slipped between the edges of the boards, and the parts are bent over and tacked. When the strain isn’t too much, the fasteners can be used without a cleat, providing an effective flat fastening.—Contributed by W. O. Nettleton, Washington, D. C.

The Metal Clips Hold the Edges of the Boards Together Closely and Quite Rigidly
The metal clips keep the edges of the boards tightly and firmly together.
Attaching Door Knobs to Locks
When putting a lock on a door it is often difficult to press the two knobs together tightly enough to prevent them from rattling and still be able to insert the screw into the shank. By using a piece of board, 1 in. thick, 6 in. wide and 1 ft. or more in length, with a V-shaped piece cut out of one side, the knobs can be easily forced and held together while the screw is inserted.—Contributed by H. Musgrave, Sidney, British Columbia.
When you put a lock on a door, it can be tough to press the two knobs together tightly enough to stop them from rattling while still getting the screw into the shank. By using a piece of board that’s 1 inch thick, 6 inches wide, and at least 1 foot long, with a V-shaped notch cut out of one side, you can easily push and hold the knobs together while you insert the screw.—Contributed by H. Musgrave, Sidney, British Columbia.

The Sloping Edges in the Notch Forces the Knobs Together and Holds Them While Inserting the Screws
The sloping edges in the notch push the knobs together and hold them in place while you insert the screws.
A Finger-Nail Buffer
The flywheel on a sewing machine is usually turned with a semicircular face and this makes a good base on which to apply a piece of chamois skin for use in buffing nails. A strip of the chamois is cut the length of the wheel's circumference and small holes pierced in its edges, through which strings are run to hold it to the rim of the wheel. The chamois can then be removed or left on the wheel as desired. Run the machine and hold the nail on the buffer. When there is a free wheel on the machine this makes an excellent buffing device.
The flywheel on a sewing machine usually has a semicircular shape, which makes it a great base for applying a piece of chamois skin to buff your nails. Cut a strip of chamois to match the circumference of the wheel and make small holes in the edges. Run strings through these holes to secure the chamois to the rim of the wheel. You can choose to remove the chamois or leave it on the wheel as you wish. Start the machine and hold your nail against the buffer. When the wheel is free to spin, it becomes an excellent buffing tool.

A Strip of Chamois Skin Attached to the Flywheel of a Sewing Machine for a Buffer
A strip of chamois leather attached to the flywheel of a sewing machine as a buffer.
Grinding Chisel Edges

A cold chisel ground with a rounding edge, as shown, will last twice as long and do better work than one that is ground straight, because it will not wedge, and the cutting edge, having a better support, will not chip off.—Contributed by F. G. Marbach, Cleveland, O.
A cold chisel with a rounded edge, like the one shown, will last twice as long and work better than one that's ground straight. This is because it won't get stuck, and the cutting edge will be better supported, so it won't chip off.—Contributed by F. G. Marbach, Cleveland, O.
Reducing Amperage of a Fuse Wire
It is sometimes necessary to use an electrical fuse of smaller amperage than those at hand, and for experimental work this is often the case. A smaller amperage may be readily made from a larger-size wire by making a nick in it with the cutting edge of pliers, or with a knife. The illustration shows how to reduce the size of a 10-ampere fuse to make it five amperes.—Contributed by Louis Litsky, Brooklyn, N. Y.
It’s sometimes necessary to use a fuse with a lower amperage than what you have available, especially for experimental work. You can easily create a lower amperage from a larger wire by making a small cut in it with the cutting edge of pliers or a knife. The illustration shows how to reduce a 10-ampere fuse to make it 5 amperes.—Contributed by Louis Litsky, Brooklyn, N. Y.

The Amperes of a Fuse Reduced by Making a Nick in the Lead Wire
The Amperes of a Fuse Reduced by Making a Nick in the Lead Wire
[323]
Dip-Plating Process
The various ways of doing dip plating are practically the same method, the coating fluid consisting of essentially the same materials.
The different methods of dip plating are basically the same, with the coating liquid made up of essentially the same materials.
The tank or crucible, as it may be called, consists of a piece of 3-in. gas pipe, 9 in. long, threaded at both ends, one end being fitted with a screw cap and the other with a pipe flange. This part is shown in Fig. 1. A piece of sheet metal is cut in the shape shown in Fig. 2 and bent to form a cone, so that the smaller end will fit snugly around the pipe and the base be 9 in. in diameter. The joined edges are riveted together. The assembled parts will appear as shown in Fig. 3.
The tank or crucible, as it can be called, is made from a piece of 3-inch gas pipe that is 9 inches long and threaded at both ends. One end is fitted with a screw cap, and the other has a pipe flange. This part is shown in Fig. 1. A piece of sheet metal is cut into the shape shown in Fig. 2 and bent to form a cone so that the smaller end fits snugly around the pipe while the base measures 9 inches in diameter. The joined edges are riveted together. The assembled parts will look like what is shown in Fig. 3.
The metal used for plating consists of bismuth, 4 oz.; antimony, 4 oz., and pure block tin, 10 lb. Place the antimony in the crucible and melt it, then add the tin and bismuth. A flame from an ordinary gasoline burner will be sufficient to heat the crucible.
The metal for plating is made up of 4 oz. of bismuth, 4 oz. of antimony, and 10 lb. of pure block tin. Put the antimony in the crucible and melt it, then add the tin and bismuth. A flame from a regular gasoline burner will be enough to heat the crucible.
Clean the article to be coated by rinsing it in strong caustic potash, which will remove all grime and grease, then dip it in a strong solution of sal ammoniac and water. Dry it and then dip it in the melted metal, allowing it to remain there about 1 minute, then remove and plunge it in a bath made of 1 lb. of sal ammoniac and 1 gal. of water. The article is then dried in sawdust.
Clean the item to be coated by rinsing it in a strong caustic potash solution, which will take off all dirt and grease. Then dip it in a strong mixture of sal ammoniac and water. Dry it off and then dip it in the melted metal, letting it sit there for about 1 minute. After that, remove it and place it in a bath made of 1 lb. of sal ammoniac and 1 gal. of water. Finally, dry the item in sawdust.

The Parts to Make the Crucible Consist of Pipe and Fittings and a Piece of Sheet Metal (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The parts needed to make the crucible include pipes, fittings, and a piece of sheet metal (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The coating put on in this manner is a nice, shiny plate that will stand a lot of wear. No polishing or grinding is necessary.—Contributed by A. H. Waychoff, Lyons, Colo.
The coating applied like this creates a smooth, shiny surface that can endure a lot of use. There's no need for polishing or grinding. —Contributed by A. H. Waychoff, Lyons, Colo.
A Model Steam-Turbine Boat
A piece of thin board, or shingle, is cut to the shape of a boat and two standards are fastened to it. The standards have notches cut in them to hold an ordinary baking-powder can which is used for the boiler. The lid of the can is soldered on, and a small hole punched in one side with an awl. Two candles are used to heat the water.
A thin piece of wood, or shingle, is shaped like a boat, and two supports are attached to it. The supports have notches to hold a regular baking powder can, which serves as the boiler. The can's lid is soldered on, and a small hole is punched in one side with an awl. Two candles are used to heat the water.

Model Turbine Boat Using a Baking-Powder Can for a Boiler with Candles as Fuel
Model Turbine Boat Using a Baking-Powder Can for a Boiler with Candles as Fuel
The turbine is constructed on an axle made of a hatpin which runs through the top of the standards for bearings. The paddles are made of cardboard, or better still, pieces of thin sheet tin, cut and bent as shown at A, and three of these are attached to a three-cornered block of wood fastened to the shaft, as shown at B. The manner of attaching the shaft for the propeller is shown at C. The propeller consists of a piece of tin, slightly twisted and attached to the shaft with solder. The pulleys are located as shown and connected with a string band. The hole made in the can should be pointed to one side of the turbine shaft so that the escaping steam will strike one side of the paddles on the turbine.—Contributed by McKinley Wood, Ava, N. Y.
The turbine is built on an axle made from a hatpin that runs through the top of the standards for bearings. The paddles are made of cardboard, or ideally, thin pieces of sheet tin, cut and shaped as shown at A, with three of these attached to a triangular block of wood secured to the shaft, as shown at B. The method for attaching the shaft for the propeller is illustrated at C. The propeller is a piece of tin, slightly twisted, and attached to the shaft with solder. The pulleys are positioned as shown and linked with a string band. The hole in the can should be angled to one side of the turbine shaft so that the escaping steam hits one side of the paddles on the turbine.—Contributed by McKinley Wood, Ava, N. Y.
Plant Shelf for a Window
An ingenious and simple method of putting up window shelves for winter plants so that the window casing and facing are not marred is shown in the sketch. The materials required are one shelf, about 8 in. wide, 1-1/2 yd. of picture wire, two screweyes, two fence staples, and two strips of wood, to raise the shelf slightly from the window sill. The board for the shelf is cut to fit the window frame and casing. The picture wire, screweyes and staples are attached as shown. When cleaning the window the shelf can be drawn out of the way.—Contributed by H. C. Dixon, Johnstown, Pa.
An easy and clever way to install window shelves for winter plants without damaging the window frame is illustrated in the sketch. You'll need one shelf, about 8 inches wide, 1.5 yards of picture wire, two screw eyes, two fence staples, and two strips of wood to elevate the shelf slightly above the window sill. The shelf should be cut to fit the window frame and casing. Attach the picture wire, screw eyes, and staples as shown. You can easily pull the shelf out of the way when cleaning the window. —Contributed by H. C. Dixon, Johnstown, Pa.

The Shelf is Hung on Wires Attached to Screweyes Placed in the Facing Edge
The shelf is hung on wires attached to screw eyes placed in the front edge.
A Camera Support
A device which, in many instances, will take the place of a tripod, can be made of a brass wood screw and can be carried in the pocket as easily as a pencil. The screw should be 3 or 4 in. long and 1/4 in. in diameter. Cut off the head and thread the end about 1/2 in. to fit the socket in the camera. Drill a 1/8-in. hole through the metal just below the threaded part and insert a short piece of 1/8-in. wire. Slip a washer over the end, down to the wire, and fasten it with solder.
A device that can often replace a tripod can be made from a brass wood screw and is small enough to fit in your pocket like a pencil. The screw should be 3 or 4 inches long and 1/4 inch in diameter. Cut off the head and thread the end for about 1/2 inch to fit the camera socket. Drill a 1/8-inch hole through the metal just below the threaded part, and insert a short piece of 1/8-inch wire. Slide a washer over the end down to the wire and secure it with solder.

Substitute for a Camera Tripod That can be Carried in the Pocket Like a Pencil
Substitute for a Camera Tripod That Can Be Carried in Your Pocket Like a Pencil
The device can be turned into a tree, post or a stick thrust into the ground, and the camera screwed onto it and adjusted to any angle.—Contributed by O. D. Turner, Seattle, Wash.
The device can be transformed into a tree, post, or a stick placed into the ground, with the camera attached to it and adjusted to any angle.—Contributed by O. D. Turner, Seattle, Wash.
Combination Tool for Amateur Draftsmen
A common 6-in. mill file can be converted into a very useful tool for an amateur draftsman. Grind the end of the file as shown in the sketch and use it for prying out thumbtacks that are driven in too tightly. Grind the base of the tang into a knife blade for sharpening pencils, shaving chalk, opening envelopes, etc. Shape, by careful grinding, the part A for cutting and trimming sheets. Grind one edge of the file round and polish it for smoothing and burnishing purposes. Grind a sharp point on the tang for perforating sheets. A piece of rubber stuck on the tang end answers the double purpose of a protector and eraser. The file part is used for finishing points on pencils.
A standard 6-inch mill file can be transformed into a handy tool for a beginner draftsman. Grind the end of the file as shown in the sketch and use it to pry out thumbtacks that are driven in too tightly. Grind the base of the tang into a knife blade for sharpening pencils, shaving chalk, opening envelopes, and so on. Carefully grind part A into a shape for cutting and trimming sheets. Round one edge of the file and polish it for smoothing and burnishing. Grind a sharp point on the tang for perforating sheets. Attaching a piece of rubber to the end of the tang serves as both a protector and an eraser. The file part can be used to finish points on pencils.

A Tool Made of a File Combining Several Tools Which are Used by a Draftsman
A Tool Made from a File that Combines Several Tools Used by a Draftsman
Varnishing Bases for Electric Apparatus
It is quite difficult to keep from making finger marks on freshly varnished boards used as bases on electric devices. It is easily avoided, however, by procuring a large spool and fastening it to the bottom of the base with a wood screw. The spool will serve as a handle while the varnish is applied, and also makes a stand for the board while the varnish dries.—Contributed by Jacob Laudan, Louisville, Ky.
It's really hard to avoid leaving fingerprints on freshly varnished boards used as bases for electric devices. However, this can be easily avoided by getting a large spool and attaching it to the bottom of the base with a wood screw. The spool will act as a handle while the varnish is applied and also serve as a stand for the board while the varnish dries.—Contributed by Jacob Laudan, Louisville, Ky.
Waterproof Shoe Dressing
Melt some tallow and, while it is hot, put in some scraps of rubber from old rubber shoes or boots. Be careful to select rubber that is free from cloth. Put in as much of the rubber as the tallow will absorb. Stir freely while it is melting, and keep it away from any flames. Allow it to cool and set away for future use. Take enough for immediate use and warm it sufficiently so that it may be applied with a brush.—Contributed by F. S. Cummings, Detroit, Mich.
Melt some tallow and, while it's hot, add in some scraps of rubber from old rubber shoes or boots. Make sure to choose rubber that's free from cloth. Add as much rubber as the tallow can absorb. Stir it well while it melts, and keep it away from any flames. Let it cool and set it aside for future use. Take enough for immediate use and warm it up so that you can apply it with a brush.—Contributed by F. S. Cummings, Detroit, Mich.
An Adjustable Bench Stop
A simple adjustable bench stop for light work may be made from a piece of 1-in. broom handle and a piece of piano wire. Plane a flat surface on the broom stick and drill two 1/16-in. holes, about 1/4 in. deep, 1/4 in. from each end. Bend the ends of the wire to enter the holes and have the wire of such length as to give it a slight curve between the ends when it is in place on the stick.
A straightforward adjustable bench stop for light tasks can be made from a 1-inch broom handle and some piano wire. First, plane a flat surface on the broom handle and drill two 1/16-inch holes, about 1/4 inch deep, 1/4 inch from each end. Bend the ends of the wire to fit into the holes, ensuring the wire is long enough to create a slight curve between the ends when it's positioned on the handle.

The Spring Wire will Hold the Stop at Any Desired Position for Height
The spring wire will keep the stop in place at any height you want.
Bore a 1-in. hole through the bench top where it is desired to use the stop and cut several grooves, as shown, in the walls of the hole with a compass saw. The spring wire will slide into a groove and hold the stick wherever it is set. The position of the face can be changed by inserting the stick so that the wire will enter the right groove.—Contributed by Alan H. Andrews, Fall River, Mass.
Drill a 1-inch hole through the top of the bench where you want to use the stop and cut several grooves, as shown, in the walls of the hole with a compass saw. The spring wire will slide into a groove and keep the stick in place wherever you set it. You can change the position of the face by inserting the stick so that the wire enters the correct groove.—Contributed by Alan H. Andrews, Fall River, Mass.
A Crochet Hook
In making some kinds of lace work different-sized hooks must be used as the work proceeds. Considerable time will be lost in changing from one hook to another, if they are separate. The best way is to mount all the hooks necessary on one handle, as shown in the sketch. The handle part is made of a large wire or small rod, bent to the shape shown and with holes drilled through the ends for a small rivet. The ends of the hooks are drilled or bent to fit on the rivet. A small tin ferrule is made to slip over the handle and the hooks not in use. All hooks but the one in use are turned back into the handle and the ferrule slipped into place.—Contributed by Miss Nita S. Ingle, W. Toledo, O.
When making certain types of lace, you'll need to use different-sized hooks as you go. Switching between separate hooks can waste a lot of time. The best solution is to attach all the hooks you need to one handle, as illustrated in the sketch. The handle is made from a thick wire or a small rod, shaped as shown, with holes drilled at the ends for a small rivet. The ends of the hooks are either drilled or bent to fit onto the rivet. A small tin ferrule is designed to slide over the handle and the hooks that are not in use. You can turn all hooks except the one you're using back into the handle and then slide the ferrule into place.—Contributed by Miss Nita S. Ingle, W. Toledo, O.

A Crochet-Hook Handle for Holding Several Hooks That are Required for Some Lace Work
A Handle for Holding Multiple Crochet Hooks Needed for Lace Work
Writing Board for Children
A writing desk for a child can be easily made as shown in the sketch. The materials necessary are a board of suitable size, two screwhooks, four screweyes and a pair of rods for braces. The hooks are screwed into the back of a chair and the screweyes into the board, as shown. This desk is instantly attached or taken down when desired. If the chair is light and apt to tip over, make the rods long-enough to reach to the floor.—Contributed by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
A writing desk for a child can be easily made as shown in the sketch. The materials you need are a board of suitable size, two screw hooks, four screw eyes, and a pair of rods for support. The hooks are screwed into the back of a chair, and the screw eyes into the board, as shown. This desk can be quickly set up or taken down when needed. If the chair is light and likely to tip over, make the rods long enough to reach the floor. —Contributed by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.

The Writing Board is Easily Attached to, or Detached from, an Ordinary Chair Back
The Writing Board can be easily attached to or removed from a regular chair back.
[326]
Geometric Principle in Line Division
When sketching a plan, if any one of the first few lines drawn is found to be the proper length, then this line can be made into a scale by the geometric rule for dividing a given line into equal parts.
When creating a plan, if any of the first few lines drawn is found to be the right length, then this line can be turned into a scale by using the geometric rule for dividing a given line into equal parts.

A Scale can be Made for Use on Any Sized Sketch or Drawing
A scale can be made for use on any sized sketch or drawing.
Suppose, for example, the line AB, which is to represent 12 ft., is found to be 1 ft. long. Draw a line, AC, at any angle from the point A and step off on it 12 equal parts, beginning at A. The last point, or the one at C, is connected to the end B, then eleven other lines are drawn parallel with CB. Thus AB will make a scale of 1 in. to each 1 ft.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Suppose, for example, the line AB, which is meant to represent 12 ft., is actually just 1 ft. long. Draw a line, AC, at any angle from point A and mark off 12 equal sections on it, starting from A. Connect the last point, C, to the end point B. Then, draw eleven other lines parallel to CB. This way, AB will create a scale of 1 in. for every 1 ft.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Repairing a Broken Whip
Procure a piece of thin tin—the metal taken from a discarded fruit can will do—and cut it about 2-1/2 in. long and wide enough to encircle the break. Notch the ends like saw teeth and remove any sharp edges with a file. Place the tin on the break and tie temporarily. Wind the whole from end to end with a waxed linen thread, such as used by harness makers. The threads lying alternately on the whip and on metal at the notched ends eliminate any possibility of the parts working loose. A break near the small and flexible end of a whip is repaired in the same manner, using a quill instead of the tin. In either case, do not let the edges of the splicing material meet, and it will clamp tightly on the whip.—Contributed by W. S. Kingsley, W. Gouldsboro, Me.
Get a piece of thin tin—the kind you can find from an old fruit can will work—and cut it to about 2.5 inches long, wide enough to wrap around the break. Notch the ends like saw teeth and smooth out any sharp edges with a file. Place the tin over the break and tie it temporarily. Wrap the whole thing from end to end with a waxed linen thread, like what harness makers use. The threads should alternate between the whip and the metal at the notched ends to prevent the parts from loosening. For a break near the smaller, more flexible end of a whip, repair it the same way, but use a quill instead of the tin. In both cases, make sure the edges of the splicing material don't meet, so it clamps down tightly on the whip. —Contributed by W. S. Kingsley, W. Gouldsboro, Me.

The Repair on a Whip Made with a Notched Ferrule and a Waxed Thread
The Fix on a Whip Made with a Notched Ferrule and a Waxed Thread
Repairing a Worn Thimble
Silver thimbles are easily worn through at the end, and they can be quickly repaired by soldering from the inside. A very neat repair can be made with an alcohol lamp and a blowpipe by using a little silver solder. Borax or resin is used as a flux.
Silver thimbles wear down easily at the tip, and you can quickly fix them by soldering from the inside. A really clean repair can be done with an alcohol lamp and a blowpipe by using a bit of silver solder. Borax or resin serves as a flux.
A Small Torch
A small torch, that will give a very fine and hot smokeless flame, can be made from a piece of glass tube, about 4 in. long, and 4 ft. of rubber tubing. The glass tube is heated in the center until it is red, then the ends drawn apart so that the tube will have a small diameter. After the glass has cooled, make a small scratch with a file on the thin part and break it. One of the pointed ends is connected to a straight piece of glass tube with a short piece of the rubber tube, as shown in the sketch. A small hole is cut in the side of the piece of rubber to admit air to the gas. The torch is connected to an ordinary gas jet.—Contributed by E. K. Marshall, Oak Park, Ill.
A small torch that produces a fine, hot, smokeless flame can be made from a piece of glass tube about 4 inches long and 4 feet of rubber tubing. The glass tube is heated in the center until it’s red, then the ends are pulled apart to create a thinner diameter. Once the glass cools, make a small scratch with a file on the thin part and break it. One of the pointed ends is attached to a straight piece of glass tube using a short piece of rubber tubing, as shown in the sketch. A small hole is cut into the side of the rubber piece to let air into the gas. The torch connects to a standard gas jet.—Contributed by E. K. Marshall, Oak Park, Ill.

A Torch Made of Glass and Rubber Tubing, to be Used on an Ordinary Gas Jet
A Torch Made of Glass and Rubber Tubing, to be Used on a Regular Gas Jet
Fountain Attachment for an Ordinary Pen
A quite efficient fountain pen may be quickly made by bending an ordinary pen, as shown at A, and inserting it in the holder opposite to the regular pen, as shown at B. For best results, the point of the auxiliary pen should just touch the regular pen.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.
A pretty efficient fountain pen can be quickly made by bending a regular pen, as shown at A, and inserting it in the holder opposite the regular pen, as shown at B. For optimal results, the tip of the auxiliary pen should just touch the regular pen.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.

The Space between the Pens Forms the Fountain, Which is Sufficient for Considerable Writing
The space between the pens creates the fountain, which is enough for significant writing.
A little water added to oil paint will make a flat or lusterless finish and will do no harm to the paint, as the water evaporates in time.
A little water mixed with oil paint will create a dull or matte finish and won't damage the paint since the water evaporates over time.
Homemade Cut Press
The person who has a little ability in making wood cuts with a knife will find it very interesting to make the press shown in the sketch. A fair job of printing can be done with the press, using printer's ink spread on a piece of glass with a hand ink roller, such as can be purchased cheaply of any dealer in printing supplies.
The person with some skill in making woodcuts with a knife will find it quite interesting to create the press shown in the sketch. You can achieve decent printing results with the press by using printer's ink spread on a piece of glass with a hand ink roller, which can be easily purchased from any dealer in printing supplies.

A Hand Press for Printing from Cuts Made of Wood, Using Ordinary Printer's Ink
A Hand Press for Printing from Wood Cuts, Using Regular Printer's Ink
The press may have a base, A, of any size to suit, but one 1-1/2 in. thick, 6 in. wide, and 12 in. long will be found to serve best for most purposes. It must be smooth and level. Hard wood, such as maple, beech, or birch, is best for all parts. The post B is 1-1/4 in. thick, 2 in. wide, and 5 in. long. Before setting it, slot the upper end for the end of the lever. This is done by making a saw cut, 1-3/4 in. deep, 5/8 in. from either side and cutting out the core to make a slot 3/4 in. wide. A 1/4-in. hole is then bored through the prongs to receive a stove bolt that connects them with the lever. The post is fastened with screws and glue in a notch cut in the center of the base end.
The press can have a base, A, of any size you need, but a dimension of 1-1/2 in. thick, 6 in. wide, and 12 in. long works best for most purposes. It should be smooth and level. Hardwoods like maple, beech, or birch are ideal for all parts. The post B measures 1-1/4 in. thick, 2 in. wide, and 5 in. long. Before attaching it, create a slot at the upper end for the lever. You do this by making a saw cut that’s 1-3/4 in. deep and 5/8 in. from each side, then removing the core to make a slot that is 3/4 in. wide. Next, drill a 1/4-in. hole through the prongs to fit a stove bolt that will connect them to the lever. The post is secured with screws and glue in a notch cut at the center of the base end.
The lever C is made of a piece of wood 1/4 in. square and 10 in. long. At the forward end the sides are pared away to form a tongue, or tenon, that will pass between the prongs of the upright, and a hole is bored through it to match those in the prongs. The entire upper surface of the lever is rounded and the under surface is rounded, beginning 6 in. from the tenon end. Glue to the under side of the lever a block, D, at the end of the under, flat surface. The block should be about 1-1/4 in. square by 1-1/2 in. long. If the under side of the base is crowning, either level it with a plane or nail cleats across the ends for feet. A washer is used with the stove bolt in connecting the lever and post.
The lever C is made from a piece of wood that's 1/4 inch square and 10 inches long. At the front end, the sides are trimmed down to create a tongue, or tenon, which fits between the prongs of the upright, and a hole is drilled through it to align with the holes in the prongs. The entire top surface of the lever is rounded, and the bottom surface starts rounding 6 inches from the tenon end. Glue a block, D, to the underside of the lever at the end of the flat surface. The block should be about 1-1/4 inches square and 1-1/2 inches long. If the underside of the base is uneven, either level it with a plane or nail cleats across the ends for feet. A washer is used with the stove bolt to connect the lever and post.
The cuts are made of small blocks of wood, about 3/4 in. thick and of a size to take the characters desired. These blocks must be level and the printing side made smooth with very fine sandpaper, or a scraper, before the characters are laid out. Boxwood is best for cuts, but pearwood, applewood, birch, or maple will do very well. Mark out the characters backward, using the pencil very lightly. Then, with the small blade of a knife, made as sharp as possible, cut around the outlines, holding the knife slanting, and remove the adjacent wood by cutting in at a reverse angle to meet the boundary cut. Gradually deepen the cuts around the characters until they stand in relief about 1/8 in., then score V-shaped grooves, checkerboard fashion, across the remaining high surface that is not a part of the design, and chip out the resulting small blocks to bring the entire secondary [328] surface of the block to a uniform level with the portions adjoining the characters.
The cuts are made from small blocks of wood, about 3/4 inch thick and sized to fit the desired characters. These blocks need to be level, and the printing side should be smoothed with very fine sandpaper or a scraper before laying out the characters. Boxwood is the best choice for cuts, but pearwood, applewood, birch, or maple will work just as well. Trace the characters backward, using the pencil very lightly. Then, with a sharp small knife blade, cut around the outlines while holding the knife at an angle, and remove the surrounding wood by cutting at a reverse angle to meet the boundary cut. Gradually deepen the cuts around the characters until they stand out about 1/8 inch, then score V-shaped grooves in a checkerboard pattern across the remaining high surface that isn’t part of the design, and chip out the resulting small blocks to level the entire secondary surface of the block with the areas next to the characters.
A touch of glue to the back of the cut will set it securely enough to the bottom of the block D for printing, and allow its removal without injury when desired. To get a uniform impression in printing, place paper on the base, as at E, to the thickness required. For controlling the printing position on the stock paper, pins or tacks can be stuck into the base and each sheet to be printed laid against these guides.—Contributed by Chelsea Curtis Frazier, Saginaw, Mich.
A little glue on the back of the cut will hold it securely to the bottom of the block D for printing, and it can be removed without damage when needed. To achieve a uniform impression while printing, place paper on the base, like at E, to the required thickness. To control the printing position on the stock paper, you can stick pins or tacks into the base, and lay each sheet to be printed against these guides. —Contributed by Chelsea Curtis Frazier, Saginaw, Mich.
An Electrical Testing Instrument for Experimenters
The amateur having an ordinary flash light can make an instrument that will serve for a variety of purposes. It is only necessary to solder a piece of lamp cord to the spring of the battery which comes in contact with the lamp, and pass the end through a hole drilled in the top of the case. The end can be fitted with a cord tip.
The amateur with a regular flashlight can create a device that will serve multiple purposes. You just need to solder a piece of lamp cord to the spring of the battery that connects with the bulb, and thread the end through a hole drilled in the top of the case. The end can be equipped with a cord tip.

An Instrument Made of an Electrical Pocket Flash Light for Testing Circuits and Instruments
An Instrument Made of an Electrical Pocket Flashlight for Testing Circuits and Devices
To test batteries, take the flash light in the right hand and press the button, lighting the lamp, then place the bottom of the flash light on one binding post and the cord on the other. If the light burns brilliantly, the battery is dead, but if it burns dimly or goes out the battery is good.
To test batteries, hold the flashlight in your right hand and press the button to turn on the lamp. Then, place the bottom of the flashlight on one terminal and the wire on the other. If the light shines brightly, the battery is dead; if it shines dimly or goes out, the battery is good.
It may happen that the experimenter's telegraph line is out of order and the trouble cannot be found. The sounder may be tested out by disconnecting the wires from the instrument and placing the bottom of the flash light on one binding post and the cord on the other. If the light goes out, the trouble does not lie in the sounder, but in some other part of the line. The line may be tested in a similar manner if one end is short-circuited and the flash light connected to the other.
It’s possible that the experimenter’s telegraph line is malfunctioning and the issue can’t be located. You can test the sounder by disconnecting the wires from the instrument and placing the bottom of the flashlight on one binding post and the cord on the other. If the light goes out, the problem isn’t with the sounder, but with another part of the line. You can check the line in a similar way by short-circuiting one end and connecting the flashlight to the other.
A tester of this kind cannot be used on long lines, or on instruments of much resistance, as their resistance will overcome that of the light. Keep in mind the fact that the lamp will always burn on an open circuit and go out on a closed circuit.
A tester like this can't be used on long lines or on instruments with high resistance, because their resistance will overpower that of the light. Remember that the lamp will always stay lit on an open circuit and turn off on a closed circuit.
Softening the Tone of a Talking Machine

An effective mute, for use on any disk talking machine, can be made by clamping an ordinary wood clothespin on the head of the setscrew that holds the needle. Thus the tone will be softened a great deal more than by the use of a wood needle. The record of a stringed instrument, such as a violin, will be almost exactly reproduced. It will also eliminate almost all the scratching sound caused by a steel needle.—Contributed by C. M. Reeves, Los Angeles, Cal.
An effective mute, for use on any disk talking machine, can be created by clamping a regular wooden clothespin onto the head of the setscrew that holds the needle. This way, the tone is softened much more than it would be with a wooden needle. The recording of a stringed instrument, like a violin, will be nearly perfectly reproduced. It will also get rid of almost all the scratching sounds made by a steel needle.—Contributed by C. M. Reeves, Los Angeles, Cal.
An antenna should be made of wire larger than No. 14 gauge.
An antenna should be made of wire thicker than No. 14 gauge.
A Musical Doorbell
By H. Marcelle
In the construction of this doorbell it is best to purchase a small instrument known as the "tubaphone." It consists of a rack with several pieces of brass tubing cut to different lengths to give the proper tones as they are struck. Such an instrument with eight tubes will play almost any tune, and can be purchased from 50 cents up, depending on the size. Brass tubes can be purchased, cut, and toned, but the time taken in doing this is worth more than the price of the instrument, and no changes are necessary in it to make the doorbell.
In building this doorbell, it's best to buy a small instrument called a "tubaphone." It consists of a rack with several pieces of brass tubing cut to different lengths to produce the right tones when struck. An instrument with eight tubes can play almost any tune and can be bought for as little as 50 cents, depending on the size. Brass tubes can be bought, cut, and tuned, but the time spent doing this is worth more than the cost of the instrument, and no modifications are needed to make the doorbell.

Detail of the Parts for the Construction of a Musical Doorbell That will Play the Music on Brass Tubes with One Touch of a Push Button
Detail of the Parts for the Construction of a Musical Doorbell That Plays Music on Brass Tubes with One Touch of a Push Button
Several strips of pine, 2 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick, are procured for the framework. The tubes are placed on a table top, 1 in. apart and with their lower ends on a line at right angles to their length. Allow a space of 1 in. outside the first and last tube, and cut a piece of the wood to this length, allowing sufficient additional material to fasten on the ends of two uprights, which are cut long enough to admit the longest tube and allow sufficient room for a large roller and space at the top to swing the tubes.
Several strips of pine, 2 inches wide and 7/8 inch thick, are gathered for the framework. The tubes are placed on a tabletop, 1 inch apart, with their lower ends aligned perpendicularly to their length. Leave a 1-inch gap outside the first and last tube, and cut a piece of wood to this length, adding enough extra material to attach the ends of two uprights, which are cut long enough to fit the longest tube and provide enough space for a large roller and room at the top to swing the tubes.
A base is cut from a board, 7/8 in. thick and of sufficient size to admit the roller and tube rack, together with a small battery motor. The tube rack is fastened to the back of this base by making a tenon on the lower end of each upright, and a mortise in the baseboard to receive it.
A base is cut from a board that's 7/8 in. thick and big enough to fit the roller and tube rack, along with a small battery motor. The tube rack is attached to the back of this base by creating a tenon on the lower end of each upright and a mortise in the baseboard to hold it.
A roller is turned from a piece of soft pine, large enough to provide room on its surface for a number of horizontal lines equal to the number of notes in the composition to be played. These lines should not be too close together. Supposing the music it is desired to play has 15 notes in its composition, then 15 horizontal [330] lines must be spaced evenly on the surface of the roller. The length of the roller should be a free-working fit between the uprights. A 1/4-in. steel rod is run through its center for a shaft, allowing sufficient ends for the bearings, and, in addition, at one end sufficient length for a pulley.
A roller is made from a piece of soft pine, large enough to have enough space on its surface for a number of horizontal lines equal to the number of notes in the composition to be played. These lines shouldn't be spaced too closely together. If the music you want to play has 15 notes, then 15 horizontal [330] lines need to be evenly spaced on the surface of the roller. The length of the roller should fit freely between the uprights. A 1/4-inch steel rod is threaded through its center as a shaft, leaving enough length on both ends for the bearings, and additionally, at one end, enough length for a pulley.
The motor is lined up on the base, so that its pulley wheel will run a belt on the large wheel of the roller. The current is turned on after making belt and wiring connections, a lead pencil is held directly centering the place where each tube hangs, and a line is drawn on the circumference of the roller.
The motor is positioned on the base so that its pulley wheel can drive a belt on the large wheel of the roller. The power is switched on after connecting the belt and wiring; a pencil is held directly at the center point of where each tube hangs, and a line is drawn around the edge of the roller.
A 1/8-in. hole is drilled through each tube, near one end, and a piece of catgut string run into it to make a hanger. A piece of board, long enough to fit between the uprights when placed on the slope formed by the upper ends of the tubes after their lower ends are set straight on a line at right angles to their length, and wide enough to swing the tubes clear of the frame, is fastened in place, as shown. Small screw eyes are turned into the under side of this board, at even spacings of 1 in., and used to swing the tubes by the catgut strings. Another piece of board, the same width as the former, is placed, perfectly horizontal, between the uprights a short distance above the lower ends of the hanging tubes. Evenly spaced holes are bored in this crosspiece to admit the ends of the tubes. The holes should be of such size that when they are lined with a piece of felt, the tubes will have a little play without touching the sides at any point.
A 1/8-inch hole is drilled through each tube, near one end, and a piece of catgut string is threaded through it to create a hanger. A piece of board, long enough to fit between the vertical supports when positioned on the slope formed by the upper ends of the tubes after their lower ends are aligned straight at a right angle to their length, and wide enough to allow the tubes to swing clear of the frame, is secured in place, as shown. Small screw eyes are attached to the underside of this board, spaced evenly at 1 inch apart, and are used to hang the tubes with the catgut strings. Another piece of board, the same width as the first, is placed perfectly horizontal between the uprights, just above the lower ends of the hanging tubes. Evenly spaced holes are drilled in this crosspiece to fit the ends of the tubes. The holes should be sized so that when they are lined with a piece of felt, the tubes have a bit of movement without touching the sides at any point.
The hammers are each made of a strip of sheet brass, having a length that will extend from the base to a short distance above the lower ends of the tubes. A hole is drilled in each end of the strip, the lower one being of a size to fasten it to the base crosspiece with a round-head wood screw. The hole in the upper end is used to fasten a small block of wood with a screw, for the hammer head. A small strip of felt is glued to the striking side of the block. Another piece of brass, used for a trip, is fastened to the center part of each long piece with rivets, so that its upper end will be near the center of the roller for height, and strike the end of a small peg driven into the roller. The length of these pieces, in fact, of all pieces, will depend on the length of the tubes in the tubaphone and the size roller required for the music.
The hammers are each made from a piece of sheet brass that's long enough to reach from the base to a short distance above the lower ends of the tubes. A hole is drilled at each end of the strip, with the lower one sized to attach it to the base crosspiece using a round-head wood screw. The hole at the upper end is for securing a small block of wood with a screw, which serves as the hammer head. A small strip of felt is glued to the striking side of the block. Another piece of brass, used for a trip mechanism, is attached to the center of each long piece with rivets, so that its upper end will be close to the center of the roller for height, and strike the end of a small peg driven into the roller. The lengths of these pieces, indeed all pieces, will depend on the length of the tubes in the tubaphone and the size of the roller needed for the music.
The setting of the pegs in the roller requires some patience in order to get the tune correct, but one mistake will be of more value than an hour's description. The pegs can be procured from a shoemaker. If the roller is of pine, they can be driven into the wood of the roller with a hammer.
The placement of the pegs in the roller takes some patience to get the tune right, but one mistake is more useful than an hour of explanation. You can get the pegs from a shoemaker. If the roller is made of pine, they can be hammered into the wood of the roller.

The Appearance of the Doorbell Is That of a Mission Clock on a Mantel
The doorbell looks like a mission-style clock on a mantel.
With ordinary connections to the push button and motor, the mechanism will only run while the push button is being pressed. A device that will cause the piece of music to be played through to the finish after the push button is pushed for a short time, consists of a turned piece of wood fastened to the outside surface of the driving wheel on the roller. This piece of wood should be carefully set, so that its outside surface will be true as it revolves. Three brushes, made of copper strips, are fastened to the base. The length of these brushes will depend on the size of the roller and height of the block of wood. They should be evenly spaced and fastened, so that they will be insulated from each other. One strip of brass, or copper, is fastened around the turned piece of wood. This strip must be as wide as two brushes, [331] except for a short distance to make a break in the electrical circuit. The notch in the strip, to make this break, should be on the outside edge where it will disconnect the center brush, and its location on the turned piece of wood should be on a line with the end and the beginning of the pegs for the music. Another short strip is fastened to the turned piece of wood, where it will make a contact with the first brush when the second or middle brush is in the notch, or disconnected, and is connected to the other notched strip with a piece of wire run beneath the wood.
With regular connections to the push button and motor, the mechanism will only operate while the push button is being pressed. A device that allows the piece of music to play all the way through after the push button is pressed for a brief moment consists of a turned piece of wood attached to the outer surface of the driving wheel on the roller. This piece of wood should be carefully adjusted so that its outer surface is smooth as it spins. Three brushes, made of copper strips, are attached to the base. The length of these brushes will depend on the size of the roller and the height of the wooden block. They should be evenly spaced and secured so that they remain insulated from each other. A strip of brass or copper is attached around the turned piece of wood. This strip must be as wide as two brushes, [331] except for a short distance to create a break in the electrical circuit. The notch in the strip, to create this break, should be on the outer edge where it will disconnect the center brush, and its position on the turned piece of wood should align with the start and end of the pegs for the music. Another short strip is attached to the turned piece of wood, where it will make contact with the first brush when the second or middle brush is in the notch, or disconnected, and is connected to the other notched strip with a wire running beneath the wood.
The wiring shown will make it possible to start the motor with the push button which will turn the roll far enough to connect the center brush; then the roller will turn until the music is played, at which point it will stop and remain in rest until the push button again makes the contact.
The wiring shown will allow you to start the motor with the push button, which will turn the roll enough to connect the center brush. The roller will then turn until the music plays, at which point it will stop and stay still until the push button is pressed again.
The entire mechanism can be made to set on the mantel or shelf, incased like a mission clock, and the wires running to it may be concealed.
The whole setup can be placed on the mantel or shelf, enclosed like a mission clock, with the wires hidden away.
Replacing Buckle Tongues

Having several buckles without tongues I tried to repair them with pieces of wire, but could not get them to bend short enough to fasten around the buckle frame. Some cotters were at hand and seeing them gave me the idea of using one leg, with the eye part, as a tongue. By using the proper-sized cotter, a substantial and quickly made repair will be the result.—Contributed by Everett Hoar, Bowmanville, Ont.
Having several buckles without tongues, I tried to fix them with pieces of wire, but I couldn't get them to bend short enough to wrap around the buckle frame. I noticed some cotter pins nearby, and they gave me the idea to use one leg, with the eye part, as a tongue. By using the right-sized cotter pin, I was able to make a solid and quick repair. —Contributed by Everett Hoar, Bowmanville, Ont.
Bread crumbs thoroughly rubbed over a pencil drawing will remove most of the dirt and without disturbing the pencil lines.
Bread crumbs rubbed over a pencil drawing will clean off most of the dirt without smudging the pencil lines.
Drying Towels in Photographer's Dark Room
In doing a large amount of photographic work the towel becomes wet, and to dry the hands on it is impossible. To obviate this annoyance, I made a galvanized-iron pipe, about 2 ft. long and 8 in. in diameter, with a disk, or circular piece, of metal about 10 in. in diameter soldered on each end to form flanges. One flange was fastened to the wall of the dark room in a convenient place to support the device. On the inside of the spool, or towel support, an ordinary incandescent electric globe was placed. The heat of the lamp would easily dry 12 in. of the towel, and when the dry part was pulled down for use another wet portion was brought into position for drying.
When doing a lot of photography work, the towel gets wet, making it impossible to dry your hands on it. To solve this problem, I made a galvanized iron pipe that’s about 2 feet long and 8 inches in diameter, with a circular metal disk about 10 inches across soldered to each end to create flanges. One flange was attached to the wall of the dark room in a convenient spot to hold the device. Inside the towel support, I put an ordinary incandescent light bulb. The heat from the lamp would easily dry 12 inches of the towel, so when the dry part was used, another wet section could be brought into the drying position.

An Electric Globe Makes Heat in the Spool for Drying a Portion of the Towel
An electric coil generates heat in the roll for drying part of the towel.
Those who have tried to handle gelatin dry plates with moist hands will readily appreciate the value of this simple contrivance. The lamp in the spool is connected on the switch with the ruby light, so that it is not forgotten, when leaving the room, to turn it out.—Contributed by T. B. Lambert, Chicago.
Those who have tried to handle gelatin dry plates with wet hands will quickly see the usefulness of this simple device. The lamp in the spool is linked to the switch with the ruby light, so it’s not forgotten when leaving the room to turn it off.—Contributed by T. B. Lambert, Chicago.
An Electric Chime Clock
By John E. Mahlmeister

The Alarm Clock in Its Case and the Location of the Contact Pins and Contact Lever (Fig. 1)
The Alarm Clock in Its Case and the Position of the Contact Pins and Contact Lever (Fig. 1)
In the construction of this clock one perfectly good and accurate alarm clock and the works of an old or discarded one are used. The clock for the accurate time is set into a frame, or casing, made of thin boards which have a circular opening cut in them to fit snugly on the outside casing of the clock. The back of the clock and casing are shown in Fig. 1. A circular line is drawn on the casing, about 1 in. larger in diameter than the clock, and brass machine screws with two nuts clamping on the wood back, as shown at A, are set at intervals so as to be opposite, or just back of, the hour marks 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11, and 12. A contact spring, B, is shaped as shown and soldered to the knurled knob on the back of the clock used for setting the hands in a position where it will travel or be parallel with the minute hand. The end of the contact spring should be shaped so that it will slide over the points of the screws easily, but in good contact. The ends of the screws should be filed to a slightly rounding point. The wiring diagram for this part of the apparatus is clearly shown, and the terminals are connected to binding posts C and D. The binding post E is connected to the metal part of the clock.
In making this clock, you use a perfectly good and accurate alarm clock along with the parts from an old or discarded one. The clock that keeps the accurate time is placed in a frame or casing made of thin boards with a circular opening cut out to fit snugly around the outer casing of the clock. The back of the clock and casing are shown in Fig. 1. A circular line is drawn on the casing, about 1 in. larger in diameter than the clock, and brass machine screws with two nuts clamping onto the wooden back, as shown at A, are set at intervals to be positioned opposite or just behind the hour marks 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11, and 12. A contact spring, B, is shaped as illustrated and soldered to the knurled knob on the back of the clock used for setting the hands in a position that will run parallel with the minute hand. The end of the contact spring should be shaped so that it can slide easily over the tips of the screws while maintaining good contact. The ends of the screws should be filed to a slightly rounded point. The wiring diagram for this part of the setup is clearly shown, and the terminals are connected to binding posts C and D. Binding post E is connected to the metal part of the clock.

Location of the Clock Works, Magnets, Binding Posts, Gongs and Strikers on the Baseboard (Fig. 2)
Location of the Clock Works, Magnets, Binding Posts, Gongs, and Strikers on the Baseboard (Fig. 2)
The chime part is made entirely separate and can be located at any reasonable distance from the clock. It is propelled by the works from an old clock, as shown at F, Fig. 2. The old clock is prepared for use by removing the hands, balance wheel and escapement so that the wheels will turn freely. To prevent the works from running too fast, a piece of sheet brass, G, is soldered to the shaft running at the highest speed. The brass should be as large as the space will admit. It forms a fan to catch the air and retard the speed, and also provides a means of stopping the works by the electric mechanism.
The chime component is made entirely separately and can be placed at a reasonable distance from the clock. It's powered by the mechanism of an old clock, as illustrated at F, Fig. 2. To prepare the old clock for use, the hands, balance wheel, and escapement are removed so the gears can turn freely. To slow down the mechanism, a piece of sheet brass, G, is attached to the shaft that spins the fastest. The brass should be as large as the available space allows. It acts like a fan to catch the air and reduce the speed, and it also provides a way to stop the mechanism using the electric system.
The parts for the gongs and electrical apparatus are supported on a baseboard, 3/4 in. thick, 6 in. wide, and 18 in. long. The automatic switch is located at one end of the base, and consists of two sets of magnets, H and J, with an armature, K, to which is attached a stiff contact wire, L. This wire is to make contact with the spring M when the armature is drawn by the magnets J, and with N when drawn by the magnets H. The springs M and N are made of thin sheet brass, bent as shown, and mounted on the base.
The parts for the gongs and electrical equipment are mounted on a baseboard that is 3/4 inch thick, 6 inches wide, and 18 inches long. The automatic switch is located at one end of the base and has two sets of magnets, H and J, along with an armature, K, which has a rigid contact wire, L, attached to it. This wire makes contact with spring M when the armature is pulled by magnets J and with spring N when pulled by magnets H. The springs M and N are made of thin sheet brass, shaped as shown, and are installed on the base.
A piece of wood, O, on which to mount the works of the old clock is mortised into the base. Another standard, P, of the same height as O, is also mortised into the base to provide a bearing for the end of the shaft which carries the wood disk Q, the opposite end of the shaft being connected by means of a ferrule and soldered to the end of the minute-hand shaft. The shaft should be well lined up, so that it will turn freely. The wood disk is 1/4 in. thick and about 6 in. in diameter.
A wooden piece, O, is secured into the base to hold the mechanisms of the old clock. Another post, P, the same height as O, is also fixed into the base to support the end of the shaft that carries the wooden disc Q. The other end of the shaft is attached with a ferrule and soldered to the end of the minute-hand shaft. The shaft needs to be properly aligned to ensure it turns smoothly. The wooden disc is 1/4 in. thick and approximately 6 in. in diameter.

The Pins are Accurately Set in Four Circular Lines and on Radial Lines (Fig. 3)
The pins are precisely arranged in four circular lines and along radial lines (Fig. 3)
Mark four circles on the face of the disk, near the outside edge and 1/4 in. apart. Step off the outside circle into 150 parts and draw a radial line from each mark across the four circular lines with the straight edge on the center of the disk. An arc of the disk is shown in Fig. 3, where trip pins are driven in for making the electric contacts. This part of the arc shows the method of locating the pins for the hour from 3 to 4 o'clock, with the intermediate pins for the quarter, half, and three-quarter-hour contacts. The intermediate pins are arranged in the same manner for all hours, but the hour pins, on the second circle, run from 1 pin to 12 pins consecutively. Ordinary pins, with the heads cut off, are used and should be driven in accurately on the division lines to secure proper results.
Mark four circles on the face of the disk, close to the outer edge and 1/4 inch apart. Divide the outer circle into 150 parts and draw a straight line from each mark across the four circular lines using a straightedge from the center of the disk. An arc of the disk is illustrated in Fig. 3, where trip pins are inserted to create the electric contacts. This section of the arc demonstrates how to position the pins for the hour between 3 and 4 o'clock, along with the intermediate pins for the quarter, half, and three-quarter-hour contacts. The intermediate pins are arranged the same way for all hours, but the hour pins on the second circle go from 1 pin to 12 pins in order. Regular pins with the heads removed are used and should be accurately placed on the division lines to ensure correct results.
The arrangement of the springs is shown in Fig. 4. These springs, when pressed together, will close the circuit for ringing the gongs. They are made of thin sheet brass, bent as shown at R, and fastened to a piece, or block, of hard wood with screws, as shown at S. The springs numbered 3, 5, 7, and 9 are the ones made as shown at R for sliding over the pins in the disk Q, and their ends should clear the face of the disk about 1/8 in. The springs 1, 2, 4, 6, and 8 are about 1/2 in. shorter and have their ends bent up at right angles so that they will almost touch the long ones. The spring 1 should be a little shorter than 2. When fastening the springs to the block of wood, be sure that no two springs touch and that each one is separated from the other to form no contact until the pins in the wheel force them together. The block is then fastened to the base under and parallel with the shaft carrying the disk Q, as shown.
The setup of the springs is shown in Fig. 4. These springs, when pressed together, will complete the circuit to ring the gongs. They are made from thin sheet brass, bent as shown at R, and attached to a piece of hard wood with screws, as shown at S. The springs numbered 3, 5, 7, and 9 are designed like the ones at R to slide over the pins in the disk Q, and their ends should be about 1/8 in. away from the disk's surface. The springs 1, 2, 4, 6, and 8 are about 1/2 in. shorter and have their ends bent upwards at right angles so they almost touch the longer ones. Spring 1 should be slightly shorter than 2. When attaching the springs to the block of wood, ensure that no two springs come into contact and that each one is spaced apart to avoid contact until the pins in the wheel push them together. The block is then secured to the base beneath and parallel to the shaft carrying the disk Q, as shown.
The starting and stopping of the clockwork F is accomplished by means of a set of bell magnets, arranged, as shown at T, Fig. 2, with the wire attached to the armature bent to touch the brass wing of the fan G. The armature must not vibrate, but stay against the magnet cores while the current is flowing through them, thus allowing the clock wheels to turn, and as soon as the current is cut off, the armature will spring back and stop the wheels.
The starting and stopping of the clockwork F is done using a set of bell magnets, set up as shown at T, Fig. 2, with the wire connected to the armature bent to touch the brass wing of the fan G. The armature needs to stay still against the magnet cores while the current flows through them, which lets the clock wheels turn. As soon as the current is turned off, the armature will snap back and stop the wheels.

The Parts Constructing the Chime are Placed in the Clock Frame below the Works
The parts that make up the chime are positioned in the clock frame beneath the mechanisms.
Arrange four gongs, U, V, W, and X, as shown in Fig. 2, and also three bell magnets with clappers 1, 2 and 3. These gongs should be selected for tone as in a chime clock. The connections to the bell magnets 1, 2, and 3 should be direct to the binding posts so that the armature will not vibrate, [334] but give one stroke. For instance, bell magnet 1 should produce one stroke on the gong U when the current is on, and one stroke on the gong V when the current breaks. The magnets 2 should cause the clapper to strike once on the gong V when the current is on, and to make one stroke on the gong W when the current is broken. The magnets 3 produce only one stroke on the gong X at a time, which is used to sound the hours.
Arrange four gongs, U, V, W, and X, as shown in Fig. 2, along with three bell magnets with clappers 1, 2, and 3. Select these gongs for tone, similar to those in a chime clock. The connections to bell magnets 1, 2, and 3 should be direct to the binding posts so that the armature doesn’t vibrate, but instead gives a single stroke. For example, bell magnet 1 should strike gong U once when the current is on, and gong V once when the current breaks. Bell magnet 2 should make the clapper hit gong V once when the current is on, and gong W once when the current is off. Bell magnet 3 produces only one stroke on gong X at a time, which is used to mark the hours.

The Contact Springs are Operated by the Pins on the Disk Wheel (Fig. 4)
The contact springs are controlled by the pins on the disk wheel (Fig. 4)
The parts are connected up electrically as shown in Fig. 5. The lines between the clock, Fig. 1, and the bell-ringing part, Fig. 2, are connected from C to C, D to D, and E, Fig. 1, to the zinc of a battery and from the carbon to E, Fig. 2. Two dry cells will be sufficient for the current.
The components are wired together as shown in Fig. 5. The connections between the clock in Fig. 1 and the bell-ringing part in Fig. 2 go from C to C, D to D, and from E in Fig. 1 to the zinc of a battery, and from the carbon to E in Fig. 2. Two dry cells will provide enough current.

The Wiring Diagram for the Location of the Wires on the Under Side of the Base (Fig. 5)
The Wiring Diagram for the Placement of the Wires on the Bottom Side of the Base (Fig. 5)
The working of the mechanism is as follows: Suppose the time is 6 minutes of 3 o'clock and the contact spring on the back is near the 11 pin. As soon as it touches the pin, the armature K of the switch will be drawn in contact with the spring N, then when the contact spring touches the 12 pin, the current will flow into the magnets T and release the wheels of the clockwork F, which turns the disk Q, and the three pins in the second row will pass over the spring 5 and press it in contact with the spring 4 three times, causing the gong X to toll out 3 o'clock. As the contact spring B will be on the contact pin 12 for about 1 minute, the wheels of the clockwork F would continue to turn and the bells ring, if it were not for the stop pin located on the outside, or first, circle of the disk Q, which pin is set in line with the last pin in the set of pins for the hour, or, in this instance, in line with the third pin. When the stop pin has passed the spring, the connection through the magnets T is broken and the clockwork F stops instantly. When the spring B strikes the 2 o'clock pin, or 10 minutes after 3 o'clock, the armature K is drawn over to N, and at the 3 pin, or 15 minutes after 3 o'clock, the bells U, V, and W will ring and then the stop pin will break the current, and so on, at every 15 minutes of the 12 hours.
Here's how the mechanism works: Imagine it's 6 minutes until 3 o'clock and the contact spring on the back is close to the 11 pin. As soon as it touches the pin, the armature K of the switch will be pulled into contact with the spring N. Then, when the contact spring touches the 12 pin, current will flow into the magnets T and release the wheels of the clockwork F, which turns the disk Q. The three pins in the second row will pass over the spring 5 and press it against the spring 4 three times, causing the gong X to sound for 3 o'clock. Since the contact spring B will stay on the contact pin 12 for about 1 minute, the wheels of the clockwork F would keep turning and the bells would continue to ring, if it weren't for the stop pin on the outer rim of the disk Q, which is aligned with the last pin in the set of pins for the hour, or in this case, with the third pin. When the stop pin passes the spring, the connection through the magnets T is interrupted and the clockwork F stops immediately. When the spring B hits the 2 o'clock pin, or 10 minutes after 3 o'clock, the armature K is pulled to N, and at the 3 pin, or 15 minutes after 3 o'clock, the bells U, V, and W will ring, and then the stop pin will break the current, and this continues every 15 minutes for the 12 hours.
Hinges Used to Substitute Night Bolt
One of the safest devices for bolting, or locking, a door against intruders is to use two sets of hinges. The extra set is fastened to the door and frame in the same way but directly opposite the regular hinges. It may be necessary to file the extra hinges and pins in order to separate and bring the parts together easily. The usual door lock need not be used with this arrangement, as the hinges are exposed only on the inside of the room and cannot be tampered with from without.
One of the most secure ways to bolt or lock a door against intruders is to use two sets of hinges. The extra set is attached to the door and frame just like the regular hinges, but positioned directly opposite them. You may need to file the extra hinges and pins to make it easier to fit the parts together. The typical door lock isn’t necessary with this setup, since the hinges are only exposed on the inside of the room and can’t be tampered with from the outside.
Propellers for a Hand Sled
Desiring to propel my hand sled with power transmitted by cranks and wheels, I set about to procure the necessary materials. Two medium-sized buggy wheels were found in the back yard of a blacksmith shop, which were procured for a nominal price. The fellies of these wheels were removed, the tenons cut from the spokes and nails substituted, which were driven in their ends so that about 1/2 in. of the body with the head projected. The heads were then removed and the nail ends sharpened.
Wanting to push my hand sled using power from cranks and wheels, I started gathering the materials I needed. I found two medium-sized buggy wheels in the back yard of a blacksmith shop, which I bought for a small price. I took off the rims of these wheels, cut the tenons from the spokes, and replaced them with nails, which were driven into the ends so that about 1/2 in. of the body with the head stuck out. I then took off the heads and sharpened the ends of the nails.
The hubs were plugged with pieces [335] of wood, whittled to tightly fit the holes. A hole was then bored exactly central through each plug for a 1/2-in. rod. This size rod was procured and bent to form a crank, the bearing end being threaded for a distance equal to the length of the hub.
The hubs were filled with pieces [335] of wood, shaped to fit snugly in the holes. A hole was then drilled right in the center of each plug for a 1/2-in. rod. This size rod was obtained and bent to create a crank, with the bearing end being threaded for a length equal to the length of the hub.

Sled Propelled by Revolving Wheels Turned by Cranks, the Pointed Nails Doing the Pushing
Sled Powered by Spinning Wheels Turned by Cranks, the Sharp Nails Doing the Pushing
Two pieces or blocks of wood, 2 in. square and 4 in. long, were used as bearings. These were bored centrally through the long way, to receive the 1/2-in. rod just loose enough to make a good bearing. These bearings were supported by a pair of braces made of strap iron, about 1/4 in. thick and 3/4 in. wide. The length of the iron will depend on the size of the wheels and the height of the sled runner. The braces were shaped as shown. The center of the bearing hole must be as high from the surface of the ground as the distance the spoke ends are from the center of the hub hole.
Two pieces or blocks of wood, 2 inches square and 4 inches long, were used as bearings. They were drilled through the center along the longer side to fit a 1/2-inch rod just loose enough to create a good bearing. These bearings were held up by a pair of braces made from strap iron, about 1/4 inch thick and 3/4 inch wide. The length of the iron will depend on the size of the wheels and the height of the sled runner. The braces were shaped as shown. The center of the bearing hole must be as high from the ground as the distance from the ends of the spokes to the center of the hub hole.
The crank is then run through the bearing hole and a nut run on the threads and a washer placed against the nut. The wheel is then slipped on the axle, and another washer and nut run on tightly. Both wheels, bearings, cranks, and brackets are made alike. The brackets are fastened with small bolts to the sled top.—Contributed by Justin Stewart, Wallingford, Conn.
The crank is then inserted through the bearing hole, and a nut is screwed onto the threads with a washer placed against the nut. The wheel is then slid onto the axle, followed by another washer and a tightly screwed nut. Both wheels, bearings, cranks, and brackets are identical. The brackets are secured with small bolts to the top of the sled.—Contributed by Justin Stewart, Wallingford, Conn.
A Self-Feeding Match Box
With the addition of the simple device here illustrated, any match box can be converted into one of the self-feeding type. A piece of tin, or cardboard, is cut, as shown at A, the exact size depending on the match box used. The piece cut out is folded on the dotted lines, the cover on the match box is removed, and the part B pushed into the end of the box beneath the matches. The part B is twice as long as the depth of the box, therefore it enters the box as far as the line C. The flaps D rest against the outside of the box, and are held in place by the box cover. The matches feed into the box formed of the tin or cardboard as fast as used, while the burnt ones can be placed in the upper part E.
With the addition of the simple device shown here, any matchbox can be turned into a self-feeding type. A piece of tin or cardboard is cut, as illustrated at A, with the exact size depending on the matchbox used. The cut piece is folded along the dotted lines, the cover of the matchbox is removed, and part B is pushed into the end of the box beneath the matches. Part B is twice as long as the depth of the box, so it fits into the box up to line C. The flaps D rest against the outside of the box and are held in place by the box cover. The matches feed into the box made of tin or cardboard as quickly as they are used, while the burnt ones can be placed in the upper part E.

The Attachment Consists of a Receptacle Fitting into the End of a Match Box
The attachment is a receptacle that fits into the end of a matchbox.
Corks-in-a-Box Trick
Procure a pill box and a clean cork. Cut two disks from the cork to fit in the box, and fasten one of the pieces centrally to the inside bottom of the pill box with glue.
Get a pill box and a clean cork. Cut two circles from the cork to fit in the box, and glue one of the pieces securely in the center of the inside bottom of the pill box.
To perform the trick, put the loose disk in with the one that is fast, and then open the box to show both corks. Close the box and in doing so turn it over, then open and only one cork will be seen. Be careful not to show the inside of the other part of the box with the cork that is fastened.—Contributed by Fred B. Spoolstra, Yonkers, N. Y.
To do the trick, place the loose disk in with the one that's secured, and then open the box to reveal both corks. Close the box and while doing so, turn it upside down; when you open it again, only one cork will be visible. Make sure not to reveal the inside of the other section of the box with the secured cork. —Contributed by Fred B. Spoolstra, Yonkers, N. Y.
A Disk-Armature Motor
One of the simplest motors to make is the disk motor, its construction requiring a wood base, a brass disk, a 3-in. horseshoe magnet, and some mercury.
One of the easiest motors to make is the disk motor. Its construction needs a wooden base, a brass disk, a 3-inch horseshoe magnet, and some mercury.

The base is made of hard wood, in the proportions shown in the sketch. The leading-in wires are connected to the binding posts A and B, and from these connections are made, on the bottom of the base, from A to the groove C cut in the upper surface of the base for the mercury, and from B to one screw, D, of one bearing. The end of the former wire must be clean and project into the end of the groove, where it will be surrounded with mercury.
The base is made of hardwood, following the proportions shown in the sketch. The input wires are connected to the terminals A and B, and from these connections, wires run along the bottom of the base, from A to the groove C cut into the upper surface of the base for the mercury, and from B to one screw, D, of one bearing. The end of the first wire must be clean and extend into the end of the groove, where it will be surrounded by mercury.

Parts of the Disk Motor Shown in Detail, Also the Location of the Horseshoe Magnet on the Base, Ends of the Poles being Directly under the Center of the Shaft
Parts of the Disk Motor Shown in Detail, Also the Location of the Horseshoe Magnet on the Base, Ends of the Poles being Directly under the Center of the Shaft
The bearings consist of thin sheet brass, cut to the dimensions shown, the bearing part being made with a well-pointed center punch, as at E. The disk wheel is made of sheet brass, 2 in. in diameter, and a needle, with the eye broken off and pointed, is used for the shaft. The needle shaft can be placed in position by springing the bearings apart at the top.
The bearings are made of thin sheet brass, cut to the specified dimensions, with the bearing part created using a sharp center punch, as shown at E. The disk wheel is made of sheet brass, 2 inches in diameter, and a needle with the eye broken off and sharpened is used for the shaft. The needle shaft can be positioned by gently pulling the bearings apart at the top.
When the current is applied, the disk will revolve in a direction relative to the position of the poles on the magnet. The reverse can be made by turning the magnet over.—Contributed by Joseph H. Redshaw, Homestead, Pa.
When the current is applied, the disk will spin in a direction based on the position of the poles on the magnet. You can reverse this by flipping the magnet over.—Contributed by Joseph H. Redshaw, Homestead, Pa.
Repairing Marble
With a little practice any mechanic can repair holes, cracks or chipped places on marble slabs, so that the patched place cannot be detected from the natural marble. Use the following mixture as a base for the filler: Water glass, 10 parts; calcined magnesite, 2 parts, and powdered marble, 4 parts. These should be mixed thoroughly to a semifluid paste. Fill the crack or hole and smooth off level, then with a camel's-hair brush and colors, made of aniline in alcohol, work out the veins, body colors, etc., as near to the natural marble as possible. It will depend on the application of the colors whether the repair can be seen or not. Artificial-marble slabs can be formed from this mixture.—Contributed by A. E. Soderlund, New York City.
With a bit of practice, any mechanic can fix holes, cracks, or chips in marble slabs so that the repaired area blends in seamlessly with the natural marble. Use the following mixture as a base for the filler: 10 parts water glass, 2 parts calcined magnesite, and 4 parts powdered marble. Mix these thoroughly into a semifluid paste. Fill in the crack or hole and smooth it out, then use a camel's-hair brush and aniline colors in alcohol to replicate the veins and color patterns as closely as possible to the natural marble. The visibility of the repair will depend on how well the colors are applied. This mixture can also be used to create artificial marble slabs. —Contributed by A. E. Soderlund, New York City.
The Construction of a Simple Wireless Telephone Set
By A. E. Andrews
In Two Parts—Part I
Among the various methods for the transmission of speech electrically, without wire, from one point to another, the so-called "inductivity" system, which utilizes the principles of electromagnetic induction, is perhaps the simplest, because it requires no special apparatus. Since this system is so simple in construction, and its operation can be easily understood by one whose knowledge of electricity is limited, a description will be given of how to construct and connect the necessary apparatus required at a station for both transmitting and receiving a message.
Among the different ways to transmit speech electronically without wires from one point to another, the "inductivity" system, which uses the principles of electromagnetic induction, is probably the simplest since it doesn’t need any special equipment. Because this system is straightforward to build and easy to understand for someone with limited knowledge of electricity, I will describe how to construct and connect the necessary setup at a station for both sending and receiving a message.

Fig. 1—Wire Connected to Galvanometer
Fig. 1—Wire Connected to Meter
Before taking up the actual construction and proper connection of the various pieces of apparatus, it will be well to explain the electrical operation of the system. If a conductor be moved in a magnetic field in any direction other than parallel to the field, there will be an electrical pressure induced in the conductor, and this induced electrical pressure will produce a current in an electrical circuit of which the conductor is a part, provided the circuit be complete, or closed, just as the electrical pressure produced in the battery due to the chemical action in the battery will produce a current in a circuit connected to the terminals of the battery. A simple experiment to illustrate the fact that there is an induced electrical pressure set up in a conductor when it is moved in a magnetic field may be performed as follows: Take a wire, AB, as shown in Fig. 1, and connect its terminals to a galvanometer, G, as shown. If no galvanometer can be obtained, a simple one can be made by supporting a small compass needle inside a coil composed of about 100 turns of small wire. The terminals of the winding on the coil of the galvanometer should be connected to the terminals of the conductor AB, as shown in Fig. 1. If now the conductor AB be moved up and down past the end of the magnet N, there will be an electrical pressure induced in the conductor, and this electrical pressure will produce a current in the winding of the galvanometer G, which will cause the magnetic needle suspended in the center of the coil to be acted upon by a magnetic force tending to move it from its initial position, or position of rest. It will be found that this induced electrical pressure will exist only as long as the conductor AB is moving with respect to the magnetic field of the magnet N, as there will be no deflection of the galvanometer needle when the motion of the conductor ceases, indicating there is no current in the galvanometer winding, and hence no induced electrical pressure. It will also be found that the direction in which the magnetic needle of the galvanometer is deflected changes as the direction of motion of the conductor changes with respect to the magnet, indicating that there is a change in the direction of the current in the winding of the galvanometer, and since the direction of this current is dependent upon the direction in which the induced electrical pressure acts, there must have been a change in the direction of this pressure due to a change in the direction of motion of the conductor. The same results can be obtained by moving the magnet, allowing the conductor AB to remain stationary, the only requirement being a relative movement of the [338] conductor and the magnetic field created by the magnet.
Before starting the actual construction and proper connection of the various pieces of equipment, it's important to explain how the electrical system works. When a conductor is moved in a magnetic field in any direction other than parallel to the field, an electrical pressure is created within the conductor. This induced electrical pressure generates a current in an electrical circuit, as long as the circuit is complete or closed, similar to how the electrical pressure generated in a battery from chemical reactions will cause a current in a circuit linked to the battery terminals. To demonstrate that moving a conductor in a magnetic field creates an induced electrical pressure, you can perform a simple experiment as follows: Take a wire, AB, as shown in Fig. 1, and connect its ends to a galvanometer, G, as indicated. If you can't get a galvanometer, you can make a simple one by placing a small compass needle inside a coil made of about 100 turns of thin wire. Connect the terminals of the coil to the ends of the conductor AB, as shown in Fig. 1. Now, if you move the conductor AB up and down near the end of the magnet N, an electrical pressure will be induced in the conductor, producing a current in the wiring of the galvanometer G. This will cause the magnetic needle suspended in the center of the coil to react, moving it from its resting position. You’ll notice that this induced electrical pressure is only present as long as the conductor AB is moving in relation to the magnetic field of the magnet N. When the motion of the conductor stops, there will be no movement of the galvanometer needle, indicating that there's no current in the galvanometer wiring and hence no induced electrical pressure. You'll also observe that the direction in which the magnetic needle of the galvanometer moves changes when the conductor's motion changes in relation to the magnet. This indicates that there's a change in the direction of the current in the galvanometer wiring, and because the direction of the current depends on the direction of the induced electrical pressure, a change in the conductor's motion must have altered the pressure's direction. The same results can be obtained by moving the magnet while keeping the conductor AB stationary; the only requirement is a relative motion between the conductor and the magnetic field generated by the magnet.

Fig. 2—Compass Needle Test
Fig. 2—Compass Needle Test
It is not necessary that the magnetic field be created by a permanent magnet. It can be produced by a current in a conductor. The fact that there is a magnetic field surrounding a conductor in which there is a current can be shown by a simple experiment, as illustrated in Fig. 2. If a wire be placed above a compass needle and parallel to the direction of the compass needle and a current be sent through the wire in the direction indicated by the arrow I, there will be a force acting on the compass needle tending to turn the needle at right angles to the wire. The amount the needle is turned will depend upon the value of the current in the wire. There is a definite relation between the direction of the current in the wire and the direction of the magnetic field surrounding the wire, because a reversal of current in the conductor will result in a reversal in the direction in which the compass needle is deflected. Remembering that the direction of a magnetic field can be determined by placing a magnetic needle in the field and noting the direction in which the N-pole of the needle points, this being taken as the positive direction, if one looks along a conductor in which there is a current and the current be from the observer, the direction of the magnetic field about the conductor will be clockwise. Imagine a conductor carrying a current and that you are looking at a cross-section of this conductor (see Fig. 3), and the direction of the current in the conductor is from you (this being indicated in the figure by the cross inside the circle), then the lines of force of the magnetic field will be concentric circles about the conductor, they being nearer together near the conductor, indicating the strength of the field is greatest near the conductor. A compass needle placed above the conductor would place itself in such a position that the N-pole would point toward the right and the S-pole toward the left. If the needle be placed below the conductor, the N-pole would point to the left and the S-pole to the right, indicating that the direction of the magnetic field above the conductor is just the reverse of what it is below the conductor.
It isn’t necessary for the magnetic field to come from a permanent magnet. It can also be created by an electric current in a wire. You can demonstrate that there’s a magnetic field around a current-carrying conductor with a simple experiment, as shown in Fig. 2. If you place a wire above a compass needle and parallel to it, and send a current through the wire in the direction indicated by arrow I, a force will act on the compass needle, trying to turn it at a right angle to the wire. The angle to which the needle turns will depend on the current in the wire. There’s a clear relationship between the direction of the current in the wire and the direction of the magnetic field around it; reversing the current will also reverse the direction in which the compass needle is deflected. The direction of a magnetic field can be determined by placing a magnetic needle in the field and observing which way the N-pole points, which is considered the positive direction. If you look along a wire carrying current and the current is coming toward you, the direction of the magnetic field around the wire will be clockwise. Picture a conductor with current and that you’re looking at a cross-section of it (see Fig. 3), where the current in the conductor is coming toward you (indicated in the figure by a cross inside a circle). The magnetic field lines will form concentric circles around the conductor, getting closer together as they get nearer to it, showing that the field strength is greatest near the conductor. A compass needle placed above the conductor would orient itself so that the N-pole points to the right and the S-pole points to the left. If the needle is placed below the conductor, the N-pole will point to the left and the S-pole to the right, indicating that the magnetic field direction above the conductor is exactly the opposite of what it is below the conductor.

Fig. 3—Lines of Force
Fig. 3—Force Lines

Fig. 4—Reversed Lines of Force
Fig. 4—Inverted Lines of Force
The strength of the magnetic field produced by a current in a conductor can be greatly increased by forming the conductor into a coil. Figure 4 shows the cross-section of a coil composed of a single turn of wire. The current in the upper cross-section is just the reverse of what it is in the lower cross-section, as indicated by the cross and dash inside the two circles. As a result of the direction of current in the two cross-sections being different, the direction of the magnetic field about these two cross-sections will be different, one being clockwise, and the [339] other counter-clockwise. It will be observed, however, that all the lines of force pass through the center of the coil in the same direction, or the magnetic field inside the coil is due to the combined action of the various parts of the conductor forming the complete turn. This magnetic field can be increased in value, without increasing the current in the conductor, by adding more turns to the coil.
The strength of the magnetic field created by a current in a conductor can be significantly increased by winding the conductor into a coil. Figure 4 shows a cross-section of a coil made from a single loop of wire. The current in the upper cross-section flows in the opposite direction of the current in the lower cross-section, as indicated by the cross and dash inside the two circles. Because the direction of current in the two cross-sections is different, the direction of the magnetic field around these two sections will also differ, with one being clockwise and the other counter-clockwise. However, it's important to note that all the lines of force pass through the center of the coil in the same direction, indicating that the magnetic field inside the coil results from the combined effect of the different parts of the conductor that make up the complete turn. This magnetic field can be strengthened without increasing the current in the conductor by adding more loops to the coil.

Fig. 5—Magnetic Lines Passing through Center
Fig. 5—Magnetic Lines Passing through Center
A cross-section through a coil composed of eight turns placed side by side is shown in Fig. 5. The greater part of the magnetic lines created by each turn pass through the remaining turns as shown in the figure, instead of passing around the conductor in which the current exists that creates them. This results in the total number of lines passing through the coil per unit of cross-sectional area being greater than it was for a single turn, although the value of the current in the conductor has remained constant, the only change being an increase in the number of turns forming the coil.
A cross-section of a coil made up of eight turns placed side by side is shown in Fig. 5. Most of the magnetic lines produced by each turn pass through the other turns as illustrated in the figure, instead of surrounding the conductor where the current that creates them flows. This means that the total number of lines passing through the coil per unit of cross-sectional area is higher than it was for a single turn, even though the current value in the conductor has stayed the same; the only difference is the increase in the number of turns that make up the coil.
If a conductor be moved by the end of a coil similar to that shown in Fig. 5, when there is a current in the winding of the coil, there will be an electrical pressure induced in the conductor, just the same as though it were moved by the end of a permanent magnet. The polarity of the coil is marked in Fig. 5. The magnetic lines pass from the S-pole to the N-pole through the coil and from the N-pole to the S-pole outside the coil, just as they do in a permanent magnet.
If a conductor is moved by the end of a coil like the one shown in Fig. 5, while there’s a current flowing through the coil, an electrical pressure will be induced in the conductor, just like it would if it were moved by the end of a permanent magnet. The polarity of the coil is indicated in Fig. 5. The magnetic lines travel from the S-pole to the N-pole through the coil and from the N-pole to the S-pole outside the coil, just as they do in a permanent magnet.
How to Lock a Tenoned Joint
A tenon placed in a blind mortise can be permanently fastened, when putting the joints together, by two wedges driven in the end grain of the wood. In some cases, where the wood to be used is very dry and brittle, it is advisable to dip the tenon in warm water before applying the glue. The glue must be applied immediately after the tenon is removed from the water, and then inserted in the mortise. The sketch shows the application of the wedges. The bottom of the mortise drives the wedges as the tenon is forced in place.
A tenon placed in a blind mortise can be securely fastened when assembling the joints by driving in two wedges at the end of the wood grain. In some cases, if the wood being used is very dry and fragile, it's a good idea to soak the tenon in warm water before applying the glue. The glue should be applied right after the tenon is taken out of the water, and then it should be inserted into the mortise. The sketch illustrates how to apply the wedges. The bottom of the mortise drives the wedges in as the tenon is pushed into place.

Wedges in Tenon
Wedges in Joint
Fitting a Large Cork in a Small Bottle
When necessary, a large cork may be made to fit a small bottle, if treated as shown in the sketch. Two wedge-shaped sections are cut from the cork, at right angles to each other, as shown in Fig. 1. The points are then squeezed together (Fig. 2) and the end inserted in the bottle (Fig. 3). Wet the cork slightly and the operation will be easier.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
When needed, you can adjust a large cork to fit a small bottle by following the steps in the sketch. Cut two wedge-shaped sections from the cork at right angles to each other, as illustrated in Fig. 1. Then, squeeze the points together (Fig. 2) and insert the end into the bottle (Fig. 3). Slightly wetting the cork will make the process easier.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

Reducing Size of Cork (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Reducing Size of Cork (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
A Homemade Wet Battery

Procure a large water bottle and have a glass cutter cut the top off so that the lower portion will form a jar about 8-1/2 in. high. Next obtain two pieces of carbon, about 8 in. long, 4 in. wide and 1/4 in. thick. Melt up some old scrap zinc and mold a piece having the same dimensions as the pieces of carbon. The mold for casting the zinc may be made by nailing some 1/4-in. strips of wood on a piece of dry board, forming a shallow box, 4 in. wide and 8 in. long. Remove all the impurities from the surface of the zinc when it is melted, with a metal spoon or piece of tin. Before filling the mold with the metal, place a piece of No. 14 gauge bare copper wire through a small hole in one of the end pieces forming the mold, and allow it to project several inches inside, and make sure the mold is perfectly level. The zinc will run around the end of the wire, which is to afford a means of connecting the zinc plate to one of the binding posts forming the terminals of the cell.
Get a large water bottle and have a glass cutter take the top off so that the lower part becomes a jar about 8-1/2 inches high. Next, get two pieces of carbon, each about 8 inches long, 4 inches wide, and 1/4 inch thick. Melt some old scrap zinc and shape a piece to match the dimensions of the carbon pieces. You can create the mold for casting the zinc by nailing some 1/4-inch strips of wood on a piece of dry board to form a shallow box, 4 inches wide and 8 inches long. Remove any impurities from the surface of the melted zinc using a metal spoon or a piece of tin. Before pouring the metal into the mold, insert a piece of No. 14 gauge bare copper wire through a small hole in one of the end pieces of the mold, allowing it to extend several inches inside, and make sure the mold is completely level. The zinc will flow around the end of the wire, which will create a way to connect the zinc plate to one of the binding posts for the cell terminals.
Cut from some hard wood four pieces a little longer than the outside diameter of the glass jar, two of them 1/2 by 1/2 in., and two, 1/2 by 5/8 in. Drill a 1/8-in. hole in each end of all four pieces, the holes being perpendicular to the 1/2-in. dimension in each case, and about 3/8 in. from the end. Boil all the pieces for several minutes in paraffin and stand them up on end to drain. Procure two 1/8-in. brass bolts, 3-1/2 in. long, which are to be used in clamping the elements of the cell together. The two smaller pieces of wood should be placed on each side of one end of the zinc, then the carbon pieces and the larger pieces of wood outside the carbon pieces. The carbon plates should be connected together and then connected to a binding post which forms the positive terminal of the cell. If unable to obtain pieces of carbon of the required dimensions, a number of ordinary electric-light carbons may be used. Get about ten 1/2-in. carbons, without the copper coating, if possible; if not, file all the copper off. Cut these carbons off, forming 8-in. lengths. File the top ends of the carbons flat and so that they all become equal in thickness, and clamp them in place by means of the brass bolts. If rods are used, they should all be connected together by means of a piece of copper wire and then to a binding post.
Cut four pieces from a sturdy wood that are slightly longer than the outer diameter of the glass jar. Two pieces should measure 1/2 by 1/2 inches, and the other two should be 1/2 by 5/8 inches. Drill a 1/8-inch hole at each end of all four pieces, ensuring the holes are perpendicular to the 1/2-inch side and about 3/8 inch from the end. Boil all the pieces in paraffin for several minutes and then stand them upright to drain. Obtain two 1/8-inch brass bolts that are 3-1/2 inches long to clamp the components of the cell together. Place the two smaller wood pieces on each side of one end of the zinc, then add the carbon pieces and the larger wood pieces outside the carbon. Connect the carbon plates together and then link them to a binding post, which will serve as the positive terminal of the cell. If you can't find carbon pieces of the right size, you can use regular electric light carbons. Try to get about ten 1/2-inch carbons without the copper coating; if that's not possible, file off all the copper. Cut the carbons down to 8-inch lengths. File the top ends of the carbons flat so they’re all the same thickness, and then clamp them in place using the brass bolts. If you’re using rods, connect them all together with a piece of copper wire and then to a binding post.
The plates may now be hung in the jar, the wooden pieces resting on the top of the jar and acting as a support. The solution for this cell is made by dissolving 1/2 lb. of potassium bichromate in 1/2 gal. of water, and then adding very slowly 1/2 lb. of strong sulphuric acid. More or less solution may be made by using the proper proportion of each ingredient.
The plates can now be hung in the jar, with the wooden pieces resting on top of the jar to serve as support. The solution for this cell is prepared by dissolving 1/2 lb. of potassium bichromate in 1/2 gal. of water, and then slowly adding 1/2 lb. of strong sulfuric acid. You can create more or less solution by adjusting the amounts of each ingredient appropriately.
This cell will have a voltage of two volts, a rather low internal resistance, and will be capable of delivering a large current. If it should begin to show signs of exhaustion, a little more acid may be added.
This cell will have a voltage of two volts, a fairly low internal resistance, and will be able to deliver a large current. If it starts to show signs of wear, a bit more acid can be added.
A chemical action goes on in this cell regardless of whether it supplies current to an external circuit or not, and for this reason the elements should be removed from the solution and hung directly over the jar when the cell is not in use. A simple device for this purpose may be constructed as shown. A cord may be passed through the opening in the crossbar at the top and its lower end attached to the elements. When the elements are drawn out of the solution, the upper end of the cord may be fastened in some manner. This frame can, of course, be made longer, so it will accommodate a number of cells.
A chemical reaction occurs in this cell whether it supplies current to an external circuit or not. For this reason, the elements should be taken out of the solution and hung directly over the jar when the cell isn't in use. You can easily create a device for this purpose, as shown. A cord can be threaded through the opening in the crossbar at the top, with the lower end attached to the elements. When the elements are lifted out of the solution, the upper end of the cord can be secured in some way. This frame can also be made longer to hold multiple cells.
The Construction of a Simple Wireless Telephone Set
By A. E. Andrews
In Two Parts—Part II
If two coils of wire be placed parallel to each other as shown in Fig. 6, and a current be passed through the winding of one of them, say A, a part of the magnetic lines of force created by this current will pass through the other coil B. These lines of magnetic force must cut across the turns of wire of the coil in which there is no current as the magnetic field is being created, and as a result there will be an electrical pressure produced in the winding of the coil carrying no current. When the current in coil A is discontinued, the magnetic field created by this current is destroyed or it contracts to zero, and the magnetic lines again cut the various turns composing the winding of coil B. The direction in which the magnetic lines of force and the winding of coil B move with respect to each other is just the reverse, when the current in the winding of coil A is increasing, to what it is when the current in the winding of the coil A is decreasing. Any change in the value of the current in the winding of coil A will result in a change in the number of magnetic lines of force linked with the winding of the coil B, and as a result of this change in the number of lines linked with the winding of coil B there will be an induced electrical pressure set up in coil B. The direction of this induced electrical pressure will depend upon whether the current in the winding of coil A is increasing or decreasing in value. When the current in the winding of coil A is increasing in value, the electrical pressure induced in the winding of coil B will be in such a direction that the current produced by this induced electrical pressure will pass around the winding of coil B in the opposite direction to that in which the current passes around the winding of coil A. Or the current produced by the induced electrical pressure tends to produce a magnetic field opposite in direction to the one created by the current in the winding of coil A. When the current in the winding of A is decreasing in value, the induced pressure in the winding of the coil B is just the reverse of what it was in the previous case and the current produced by this induced pressure passes around the winding of the coil B in the same direction as the current passes around the winding of coil A. The current produced by the induced electrical pressure aids the current in the winding of coil A in producing a magnetic field. In general the current resulting from the induced pressure always passes around the circuit in such a direction as to produce a magnetic effect which will oppose a change in the value of the magnetic field causing the induced electrical pressure.
If two coils of wire are placed parallel to each other as shown in Fig. 6, and a current is passed through one of them, say A, some of the magnetic lines of force created by this current will pass through the other coil B. These magnetic force lines must cross the wire turns of the coil with no current while the magnetic field is being generated, creating an electrical pressure in the winding of the coil that has no current. When the current in coil A is stopped, the magnetic field created by this current disappears or shrinks to zero, and the magnetic lines again cut through the different turns of coil B. The direction in which the magnetic lines of force and the winding of coil B move relative to each other is exactly the opposite when the current in coil A is increasing compared to when the current in coil A is decreasing. Any change in the current in coil A will lead to a change in the number of magnetic lines of force associated with coil B, resulting in an induced electrical pressure in coil B. The direction of this induced electrical pressure will depend on whether the current in coil A is increasing or decreasing. When the current in coil A is increasing, the electrical pressure induced in coil B will go in a direction that causes the current produced by this induced electrical pressure to flow around coil B in the opposite direction to the current in coil A. In other words, the current produced by the induced electrical pressure aims to create a magnetic field that opposes the one generated by coil A's current. When the current in coil A is decreasing, the induced pressure in coil B reverses what it was before, and the current generated by this induced pressure flows around coil B in the same direction as the current in coil A. The current produced by the induced electrical pressure supports the current in coil A in generating a magnetic field. Generally, the current resulting from the induced pressure always flows around the circuit in a direction that produces a magnetic effect which opposes any change in the magnetic field that causes the induced electrical pressure.

Fig. 6
Fig. 6
There will be an induced pressure in the winding of coil B, due to a change in the value of the current in the winding of coil A, as long as the coil B remains in the magnetic field of the coil A and its plane is not parallel to magnetic lines; or, in other words, coil B must always be in such a position that some of the magnetic lines created by the current in coil A will pass through the winding of coil B.
There will be pressure created in coil B because of a change in the current flowing through coil A, as long as coil B stays within the magnetic field of coil A and is not aligned parallel to the magnetic lines. In other words, coil B has to be positioned in such a way that some of the magnetic lines generated by the current in coil A pass through the winding of coil B.
If a telephone transmitter and a battery be connected in series with the winding of coil A, a fluctuating or varying current can be made to pass through the winding by causing the [342] diaphragm of the transmitter to vibrate by speaking into the mouthpiece of the transmitter. This varying current will set up a varying magnetic field and there will be an induced electrical pressure set up in coil B, if it be properly placed with respect to coil A. A receiver connected in series with the winding of coil B will be subjected to the action of a varying current due to the induced electrical pressure in the winding of coil B and as a result, the diaphragm of the receiver will vibrate in unison with that of the transmitter, and speech can thus be transmitted. The connection just described should be somewhat modified and a little more equipment used in order to give the best results.
If you connect a phone transmitter and a battery in series with the winding of coil A, you can create a fluctuating or varying current through the winding by making the diaphragm of the transmitter vibrate when you speak into its mouthpiece. This varying current will produce a changing magnetic field, which will induce an electrical pressure in coil B, provided it’s positioned correctly in relation to coil A. A receiver connected in series with the winding of coil B will experience a varying current due to the induced electrical pressure in coil B's winding, causing the diaphragm of the receiver to vibrate in sync with the one in the transmitter, allowing speech to be transmitted. The connection described should be slightly modified and use a bit more equipment to achieve the best results.
Figure 7 shows the complete sending and receiving equipment, a complete outfit of this kind being required for each station. The transmitter T and the receiver R may be an ordinary local battery transmitter and receiver, although a high-resistance receiver will give better results. The induction coil with the windings, marked P and S, may be any commercial type of induction coil as used in a magneto telephone instrument, but a coil with a high-wound secondary will give better results. The push button K is to be used in closing the transmitter circuit when the set is being used for transmitting, the key being depressed, and for shorting out the high resistance secondary winding when the set is used in receiving, the key being in the normal position. Ten dry cells should be connected in series and used to supply current to the transmitter circuit, as shown by B in the figure. The receiver R, secondary winding of the induction coil S, and the winding of coil A used in transmitting and receiving the magnetic effects, are all connected in series. The winding of the coil A consists of two parts, D and E, as shown in the figure, with two of their ends connected together by means of a condenser, C, having a capacity of about 2 micro-farads. Each of these parts should consist of about 200 turns of No. 22 gauge silk-covered copper wire, wound on an ordinary bicycle rim. The inside end of one winding should be connected to the outside of the other by means of the condenser, the two coils being wound in the same direction. The condenser C can be procured at a small cost from almost any telephone company.
Figure 7 shows the complete sending and receiving equipment; a full setup like this is necessary for each station. The transmitter T and receiver R can be a standard local battery transmitter and receiver, although using a high-resistance receiver will provide better results. The induction coil with the windings, labeled P and S, can be any commercial type of induction coil like those found in a magneto telephone, but a coil with a high-wound secondary will yield better results. The push button K is used to close the transmitter circuit when the set is in use for transmitting; the key is pressed down, and for shorting out the high-resistance secondary winding when receiving, the key remains in its normal position. Ten dry cells should be connected in series and used to supply current to the transmitter circuit, as indicated by B in the figure. The receiver R, the secondary winding of the induction coil S, and the winding of coil A used for transmitting and receiving magnetic effects are all connected in series. The winding of coil A consists of two parts, D and E, as shown in the figure, with two of their ends linked by a condenser, C, that has a capacity of about 2 microfarads. Each of these parts should have around 200 turns of No. 22 gauge silk-covered copper wire, wound on a standard bicycle rim. The inside end of one winding should connect to the outside of the other using the condenser, with both coils wound in the same direction. The condenser C can be obtained at a low cost from nearly any telephone company.
To talk, two of the instruments are placed 25 or 30 ft. apart, and they may be placed in different rooms as walls and other ordinary obstructions that do not interfere with the production of the magnetic field about the transmitting coil, have no effect upon the operation. Pressing the button K at the transmitting station, closes the transmitter circuit and removes the shunt from about the secondary winding of the induction. Any vibration of the transmitter will cause a varying current to pass through the primary winding P, which in turn induces an electrical pressure in the secondary winding S, and this pressure causes a varying current to pass through the coil A. The varying current in the winding of the coil A produces a varying magnetic field which acts upon the receiving coil, inducing an electrical pressure in it and producing a current through the receiver at the receiving station.
To communicate, two of the devices are set up 25 or 30 feet apart, and they can be located in different rooms since walls and other usual obstacles that don’t interfere with the magnetic field around the transmitting coil won’t affect the operation. By pressing the button K at the transmitting station, the transmitter circuit closes, removing the shunt from the secondary winding of the induction. Any vibration of the transmitter will create a varying current that flows through the primary winding P, which then induces an electrical pressure in the secondary winding S, causing a varying current to flow through the coil A. The changing current in the coil A generates a varying magnetic field that influences the receiving coil, inducing electrical pressure in it and producing a current through the receiver at the receiving station.
A filing coherer, adapted to close a local relay circuit and ring an ordinary bell, may be used with the sets just described for signaling between stations.
A filing coherer, designed to close a local relay circuit and ring a regular bell, can be used with the sets mentioned earlier for signaling between stations.
An Electric Incubator
Where electric current is available, it can be used to heat an incubator much better and cleanlier than the kerosene lamp. The materials are inexpensive and the cost should be no more than for the ordinary kind of heater.
Where electric current is available, it can be used to heat an incubator much better and cleaner than a kerosene lamp. The materials are inexpensive, and the cost should be no more than that of a standard heater.
First of all the box part must be made of very dry wood, 1/2 in. thick. The material should be matched, as the cost of the operation depends upon the construction of the box. The proper size for an 80-egg incubator is 2 ft. square and 1 ft. high. If a larger one is desired, the dimensions may be varied to suit, but it is not necessary to make it any higher for a larger one. If it is desired to have a window in the door, care must be taken to make it a good fit. The top, as shown in the sketch, is made without hinges so that it can be readily set on and removed. This makes it handy in case of repairing the heater and cleaning the box. The inside of the box, with the exception of the bottom, should be covered with asbestos paper.
First of all, the box should be made from very dry wood that is 1/2 inch thick. The materials need to match, as the cost of the project depends on how the box is built. The ideal size for an 80-egg incubator is 2 feet square and 1 foot high. If you want a larger one, the dimensions can be adjusted as needed, but it doesn’t need to be any taller for a bigger one. If you want a window in the door, be sure to ensure a good fit. The top, as shown in the sketch, is made without hinges so that it can be easily placed on and taken off. This makes it convenient for making repairs to the heater and cleaning the box. The inside of the box, except for the bottom, should be lined with asbestos paper.
After the box is finished, fit it with a tray, 1-1/2 ft. by 1 ft. 10-3/4 in. A tray having these dimensions will slide easily in the box. This is an essential feature of the hatching. The frame of the tray D, Fig. 1, consists of wood, 3/4 by 3/4 in., with a bottom made of wire mesh. The mesh should be firmly attached, so that it will not give away when full of eggs. Runners for the tray are placed 4-1/2 in. from the bottom of the box. When the tray is put in place, it will not touch the back. This small space is left for the chicks to fall into the nursery below. About 4 in. below the tray four holes are bored, AA, 1/8 in. in diameter, one on each side of the box. These holes admit fresh air to the eggs.
After the box is complete, add a tray measuring 1.5 ft by 1 ft 10.75 in. A tray with these dimensions will slide easily inside the box. This is a crucial part of the hatching process. The frame of the tray D, Fig. 1, is made of wood, measuring 0.75 by 0.75 in., with a bottom constructed from wire mesh. The mesh should be securely attached so it won't collapse under the weight of the eggs. Runners for the tray are positioned 4.5 in. from the bottom of the box. When the tray is in place, it won't touch the back. This small gap is left for the chicks to fall into the nursery below. About 4 in. below the tray, four holes are drilled, AA, each 1/8 in. in diameter, with one on each side of the box. These holes allow fresh air to reach the eggs.

Fig. 2—Heater Details
Fig. 2—Heater Info
The electric heater is just large enough to allow a space about 1/2 in. on all edges. This makes it 23 in. square. A piece of 1/4-in. asbestos of the above size should be secured, on which to place the heating wire. The amount of wire depends on the size and kind. As it is not necessary to heat the wire very hot, iron or steel wire may be used. The length of wire may be determined by the following method:
The electric heater is just big enough to leave about 1/2 inch of space on all sides. This makes it 23 inches square. A piece of 1/4-inch asbestos of that size should be secured to place the heating wire on. The amount of wire needed depends on the size and type. Since it’s not necessary to heat the wire very hot, you can use iron or steel wire. You can figure out the length of wire using the following method:
Wind the wire on a long stick, making sure that no one coil touches its neighbor. Connect one wire of the current supply at one end of the coil and run the other end of the current [344] supply along the coils, starting at the extreme opposite end and drawing toward the center until the iron wire gets too hot to hold with the bare hand. This will be the right length of wire to use. The length being known, a number of tacks are placed in the asbestos board to hold the wire, as shown in Fig. 2. Cover the wire with a sheet of asbestos and attach binding-posts, E and F, at each end.
Wind the wire around a long stick, making sure that no coil touches the one next to it. Connect one wire from the power supply to one end of the coil and run the other end of the power supply along the coils, starting from the opposite end and moving toward the center until the iron wire gets too hot to touch with your bare hand. This will determine the correct length of wire to use. Once you know the length, place several tacks in the asbestos board to secure the wire, as shown in Fig. 2. Cover the wire with a sheet of asbestos and connect binding posts, E and F, at each end.
The asbestos inclosing the heating wires is covered with a thin piece of sheet iron, which is made to fit tightly over the bottom and sides. This will spread the heat evenly. Be careful to have the binding-posts insulated from the sheet metal. In the cross section of the heater, Fig. 2, A represents the 1/4-in. asbestos board; B, the heater wire; C, the asbestos paper, and D the sheet-metal covering.
The asbestos around the heating wires is covered with a thin piece of sheet metal that fits snugly over the bottom and sides. This helps distribute the heat evenly. Make sure the binding posts are insulated from the sheet metal. In the cross section of the heater, Fig. 2, A represents the 1/4-in. asbestos board; B is the heater wire; C is the asbestos paper, and D is the sheet-metal covering.
The most important part of the incubator is the thermostat which regulates the current to maintain a steady heat. It is not advisable to make this instrument, as a good one can be purchased for less than $1. Place the thermostat in the end of the box at B, Fig. 1. A small door, E, is made in the box for easy adjustment of the thumbscrews.
The most important part of the incubator is the thermostat, which controls the current to keep a consistent heat. It's not a good idea to make this device yourself, as you can buy a quality one for under $1. Position the thermostat at the end of the box at B, Fig. 1. There is a small door, E, on the box for easy adjustment of the thumbscrews.
Suspend the heater from the cover of the box with bolts 2-3/4 in. long, as shown in Fig. 1. A base receptacle, G, and a snap switch, H, are fastened on top of the cover and connected up to the thermostat B, the condenser C, the heater F, and lamp I, as shown. Another snap switch, J, is used on the light only. The condenser C is to prevent sparking, thus saving the platinum points on the screws. Do not use more than a 2-cp. lamp for lighting purposes, as a brighter light blinds the young chicks.
Suspend the heater from the cover of the box using 2-3/4 inch long bolts, as shown in Fig. 1. A base receptacle, G, and a snap switch, H, are attached on top of the cover and connected to the thermostat B, the condenser C, the heater F, and lamp I, as illustrated. Another snap switch, J, is used for the light only. The condenser C is meant to prevent sparking, which helps protect the platinum points on the screws. Do not use a lamp brighter than 2-cp. for lighting, as a stronger light can blind the young chicks.
The incubator should be run for a day or two so that the current may be well regulated before placing the eggs in the tray. The incubator is operated the same as with lamp heat.—Contributed by M. Miller, Lansing, Mich.
The incubator should be running for a day or two to ensure that the temperature is stable before putting the eggs in the tray. The incubator is used in the same way as with lamp heat.—Contributed by M. Miller, Lansing, Mich.
A Cover for Magazines
As soon as Popular Mechanics, or any other magazine of similar size, arrives and before any member of the family looks through it, strip off the front cover and carefully remove the narrow strip on the back as shown in Fig. 1. Strengthen the back with a piece of bookbinding tissue, A, Fig. 2, and then paste a piece of heavy manila paper, B, over the covers and back. Over this paste a piece of dark blue cambric, Fig. 3, carefully turning the edges even with the book. The picture from the cover and the date added to [345] the left corner of the picture are neatly pasted on, Fig. 4, and the narrow strip is glued to the back.
As soon as Popular Mechanics, or any other magazine of similar size, arrives and before anyone in the family starts looking through it, take off the front cover and carefully remove the narrow strip on the back as shown in Fig. 1. Reinforce the back with a piece of bookbinding tissue, A, Fig. 2, and then attach a piece of heavy manila paper, B, over the covers and back. On top of this, paste a piece of dark blue cambric, Fig. 3, making sure to fold the edges even with the book. The picture from the cover along with the date added to the left corner of the picture are neatly attached, Fig. 4, and the narrow strip is glued to the back.

Removing the Cover, and Binding with Heavy Paper (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Removing the Cover and Binding with Thick Paper (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The book is put under a heavy weight for several hours. Thus a neat, strong cover, which looks well in a bookcase, is secured at very little expense. The eager handling by every member of the family cannot soil or deface the cover.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
The book is pressed under a heavy weight for several hours. This ensures a neat, sturdy cover that looks great on a shelf without costing much. The enthusiastic use by every family member won't dirty or damage the cover.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.

Cloth Cover and Paper Cover Attached (Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
Cloth Cover and Paper Cover Attached (Fig. 3, Fig. 4)
An Optical Illusion
A very deceiving illusion can be contrived with a bit of wire, a rubber band and a toothpick. An ordinary straight hairpin will serve instead of the wire. The hairpin or wire is bent as shown in the illustration, and the rubber band then placed on the inverted U-shaped part. A toothpick is inserted through the rubber band and a few turns taken by slipping the toothpick back and forth so it will pass the wire.
A really misleading illusion can be created with a bit of wire, a rubber band, and a toothpick. A regular straight hairpin can be used instead of the wire. The hairpin or wire is bent as shown in the illustration, and the rubber band is then placed on the inverted U-shaped part. A toothpick is inserted through the rubber band and a few turns are made by sliding the toothpick back and forth so it goes past the wire.

Toothpick in Rubber Band (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Toothpick in Rubber Band (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Hold the wire straight in front of the eyes, and, using the forefinger of the right hand, turn the end of the toothpick A, Fig. 1, down until it almost reaches the opposite point A, Fig. 2, and let the finger slip off. It will appear as if the toothpick passed through the wire.—Contributed by H. H. Windsor, Jr.
Hold the wire straight in front of your eyes, and with your right hand's forefinger, turn the end of toothpick A, Fig. 1, down until it nearly touches the opposite point A, Fig. 2, and then let your finger slip off. It will look like the toothpick went through the wire.—Contributed by H. H. Windsor, Jr.
Temperature Alarm
The falling temperature of a room during the night may result in a very bad cold for the occupant. This may be prevented by the use of an alarm to awaken the sleeper and warn him to close the window. An alarm can be made as follows: Take a glass tube about 4 in. long and 1/4 in. in diameter and close one end, used for the bottom, with sealing wax, in which the bare end of a No. 20 gauge magnet wire is inserted. The tube is almost filled with mercury. On the mercury a float of wax is placed in which a bare piece of the same magnet wire is inserted and bent as shown in the sketch. The tube of mercury is fastened to a base with two clips of metal. At the upper end of this base the adjustable lever A is attached. The electric connections are made as shown in the sketch.
The dropping temperature of a room at night can lead to a serious cold for the person inside. This can be avoided by using an alarm to wake the sleeper and remind them to close the window. You can make an alarm like this: Take a glass tube about 4 inches long and 1/4 inch in diameter and seal one end with sealing wax, inserting the bare end of a No. 20 gauge magnet wire into it. Fill the tube almost completely with mercury. Place a wax float on the mercury with a bare piece of the same magnet wire inserted and bent as illustrated in the sketch. Secure the mercury tube to a base using two metal clips. Attach the adjustable lever A at the upper end of this base. The electrical connections are shown in the sketch.

The Alarm and Wiring Diagram
The Alarm and Wiring Diagram
Should the temperature fall during the night, the mercury will contract, the float descend and the circuit close, so that the bell will ring. The adjustable lever allows setting the alarm for various differences of temperature.—Contributed by Klyce Fuzzelle, Rogers, Ark.
Should the temperature drop at night, the mercury will contract, the float will lower, and the circuit will close, causing the bell to ring. The adjustable lever lets you set the alarm for different temperature changes.—Contributed by Klyce Fuzzelle, Rogers, Ark.
Paper Smoother and Penwiper

A convenient paper smoother and penwiper can be easily made as follows: Procure a common celluloid harness ring, A, about 1-1/2 in. in diameter and fasten a penwiper, B, to it. The wiper is made of arts-crafts leather, doubled and filled with pieces of chamois. They are held in place [346] with a ribbon or cord tied as shown. The roughened paper caused by erasing can be easily smoothed with the ring.—Contributed by G. H. Holter, Jasper, Minn.
A simple paper smoother and pen wiper can be made easily as follows: Get a regular celluloid harness ring, A, about 1.5 inches in diameter and attach a pen wiper, B, to it. The wiper is made from arts-and-crafts leather, doubled and filled with pieces of chamois. They are secured in place with a ribbon or cord tied as shown. The rough paper caused by erasing can be easily smoothed out with the ring.—Contributed by G. H. Holter, Jasper, Minn.
Stereoscopic Pictures with an Ordinary Camera
Make a small table as wide as the camera is long and 3 in. longer than the camera is wide. Sink a screw nut in the center of the under side to engage the regular tripod screw. Fasten a double or two-way spirit level on the front left-hand corner. Nail strips on both ends and on the rear side, to form a shallow box with three sides. The illustration shows the construction quite plainly. This device was used by a correspondent of Camera Craft as follows: The table was fastened to the tripod and carefully leveled. The camera is placed at one side, bringing the back snugly into the corner on that side. Make the exposure, change the film, slide the camera over to the other side and make another exposure. The table being 3 in. longer than the camera is wide, the lens will be moved exactly 3 in. when the camera is moved over to the other side. Three inches is the separation of the lenses in stereoscopic cameras and the negatives made as above will be the same.
Make a small table that’s as wide as the camera is long and 3 inches longer than the camera is wide. Sink a screw nut in the center of the underside to fit the regular tripod screw. Attach a double or two-way spirit level on the front left corner. Nail strips on both ends and the back side to create a shallow box with three sides. The illustration shows the construction clearly. This device was used by a correspondent of Camera Craft as follows: The table was attached to the tripod and carefully leveled. The camera is placed on one side, snugly bringing the back into the corner on that side. Make the exposure, change the film, slide the camera over to the other side, and make another exposure. Since the table is 3 inches longer than the camera is wide, the lens will shift exactly 3 inches when the camera is moved to the other side. Three inches is the separation of the lenses in stereoscopic cameras, and the negatives created in this way will be the same.

Table on Tripod for Camera
Tripod Table for Camera
As the negatives must be sized, it is necessary to use films. A camera using films 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 in. will make negatives that can be trimmed 1/4 in. on each side to make prints 3 by 3-1/4 in. Each two negatives making a pair are fastened together, properly transposed, by folding a narrow strip of black paper like a long, V-shaped trough, pasting it, and putting one on the bottom of the two negatives, as they lie side by side, and one at the top; saddle fashion. This can be done still easier by using strips of passe-partout binding, or strips used for binding lantern slides. If so desired, the use of black paper can be carried farther by cutting the top strip of binding paper in such a way that it gives the round corners to the top of the prints. A narrow strip through the center and a binding of black paper along the two end edges make a mask unnecessary in printing.
Since negatives need to be resized, it's important to use film. A camera that takes film sized
How to Make a Paper Drinking Cup
Every person should understand the simple method of making a paper drinking cup. It may be necessary at times to make quick use of medicine and with no cup or spoon convenient, the pyramid-shaped cup shown in the sketch is a useful emergency utensil.
Every person should know how to quickly make a paper drinking cup. Sometimes, when you need to take medicine and don’t have a cup or spoon handy, the pyramid-shaped cup shown in the sketch is a helpful emergency tool.

Folds in the Paper (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
Folds in the Paper (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
The paper cup is made as follows: Cut the paper into a square and crease [347] it on the dotted lines, A G, F B, and C D E, as shown in Fig. 1. Fold the paper in half through the line C D E to form a rectangle, Fig. 2. Fold points C and E inward until they meet inside the triangle to form the shape shown in Fig. 3. This makes four distinct corners, F, G, A and B. Fold the paper over on the dotted line and bring the points A and B together as in Fig. 4. The extreme edges meet in the central line indicated. Reverse the paper and fold the points G and F in like manner. Turn the points A B and F G inward and fold on the dotted line, and you will have a perfect pyramid-shaped cup as shown in Fig. 5.—Contributed by Miss Margaret S. Humphreville, Mt. Pleasant, O.
The paper cup is made as follows: Cut the paper into a square and crease it on the dotted lines, A G, F B, and C D E, as shown in Fig. 1. Fold the paper in half along the line C D E to create a rectangle, Fig. 2. Fold points C and E inward until they meet inside the triangle to create the shape shown in Fig. 3. This will create four distinct corners, F, G, A, and B. Fold the paper over on the dotted line and bring points A and B together as shown in Fig. 4. The outer edges should meet along the central line indicated. Flip the paper over and fold points G and F in the same way. Turn points A B and F G inward and fold along the dotted line, and you will have a perfect pyramid-shaped cup as shown in Fig. 5.—Contributed by Miss Margaret S. Humphreville, Mt. Pleasant, O.
A Hand Corn Sheller
A very handy device for shelling corn, and especially popcorn, can be made of a 1-in. board on which is fastened a piece of metal lath. The edges of the metal lath are bound with a strip of wood nailed to the board.—Contributed by Ulysses Flacy, Long Beach, California.
A super useful tool for shelling corn, especially popcorn, can be made from a 1-inch board with a piece of metal lath attached to it. The edges of the metal lath are covered with a strip of wood nailed to the board.—Contributed by Ulysses Flacy, Long Beach, California.

Metal Lath on a Board
Metal Lath on a Board
A Shaft Coupling
In connecting a small 1/8-hp. motor to a small air pump where both shafts were 3/8 in. in diameter, I quickly made a coupling that would save the wear on the machines, as follows. The coupling was made of a piece of 3/4-in. brass rod with a 3/8-in. hole drilled through its center. One end of the hole was enlarged to 7-16 in. for about 7/8 in. The end of the coupling having the small hole was slipped on the pump shaft and fastened with two setscrews. The other end was drilled to take a pin loosely, the pin fitting tightly in a hole drilled in the motor shaft. The pin was bent at one end so as to keep it from falling out and the other end fitted with two nuts. The motor shaft being a little loose in the coupling, gave it a chance to work free without binding.—Contributed by Leo J. Werner, New York City.
While connecting a small 1/8-hp motor to a small air pump with both shafts measuring 3/8 in. in diameter, I quickly created a coupling to reduce wear on the machines. The coupling was made from a 3/4-in. brass rod with a 3/8-in. hole drilled through the center. One end of the hole was widened to 7/16 in. for about 7/8 in. The end of the coupling with the smaller hole was fitted onto the pump shaft and secured with two setscrews. The other end was drilled to accommodate a pin loosely, with the pin fitting snugly in a hole drilled in the motor shaft. The pin was bent at one end to prevent it from falling out, and the other end was fitted with two nuts. The motor shaft, being slightly loose in the coupling, allowed it to move freely without binding. —Contributed by Leo J. Werner, New York City.

Coupling on the Shafts
Coupling on the Shafts
Reading the Date of a Worn Coin
The date and denomination of a coin worn smooth can be determined in the following manner: Take an ordinary coal shovel, or a piece of sheet metal, and place it in a hot fire. Allow it to become red hot, then remove, and place the coin on the hot surface of the metal. Any figures or letters can be readily seen when heated in this manner. This test seldom fails even when the inscriptions have been worn so smooth that they are invisible to the naked eye.
The date and denomination of a coin worn smooth can be determined like this: Take an ordinary coal shovel or a piece of sheet metal and put it in a hot fire. Allow it to get red hot, then take it out and place the coin on the hot surface of the metal. Any figures or letters will be clearly visible when heated this way. This test rarely fails, even when the inscriptions are so worn down that they can't be seen by the naked eye.
Making a Knife an Easy Opener
The large blade of my knife being so hard to open placed me in constant risk of breaking my thumbnail. To overcome this difficulty, I ground a notch in the handle as shown in the sketch. After smoothing it up with a round file and fine sandpaper, I had just as good a job as if the knife had been made that way, and it is very easy to open it, as it can be done with the thumb and forefinger. Anyone can improve his knife in this way, but be careful not to cut the notch back of the point of the small blade.—Contributed by C. M. Mahood, Warren, Pa.
The large blade of my knife was really hard to open, which put me at constant risk of breaking my thumbnail. To fix this problem, I carved a notch in the handle as shown in the sketch. After smoothing it out with a round file and fine sandpaper, it turned out just as good as if the knife had come that way. Now it’s really easy to open—just use your thumb and forefinger. Anyone can upgrade their knife this way, but be careful not to cut the notch too close to the point of the small blade.—Contributed by C. M. Mahood, Warren, Pa.

Notch in the Handle
Notch on the Handle
Construction of a Small Bell-Ringing Transformer
By A. E. Andrews
Part I—Fundamental Principles
The transformer in its simplest form consists of two separate and electrically independent coils of wire, usually wound upon an iron core.
The transformer, at its most basic level, includes two distinct and electrically independent wire coils, typically wrapped around an iron core.

Fig. 1—Two Coils on an Iron Ring
Fig. 1—Two Coils on an Iron Ring
Figure 1 shows two coils, P and S, placed upon an iron ring, R. One of these coils is connected to some source of energy, such as an alternating-current generator, or an alternating-current lighting circuit, receiving its energy therefrom. The other coil is connected to a load to which it delivers alternating current. The coil of the transformer that is connected to the source of energy is called the primary coil, and the one that is connected to the load, the secondary coil.
Figure 1 shows two coils, P and S, placed on an iron ring, R. One of these coils is connected to a power source, like an alternating current generator or an alternating current lighting circuit, drawing its power from there. The other coil is connected to a load that it supplies with alternating current. The coil of the transformer connected to the power source is called the primary coil, while the one connected to the load is called the secondary coil.
The electrical pressure (voltage) at which current is supplied by the secondary bears a definite relation to the electrical pressure at which current is supplied to the primary. This relation, as will be explained later, is practically the same as the relation between the number of turns in the secondary and primary coils. If there are a smaller number of turns in the secondary coil than there are in the primary, the secondary voltage is less than the primary, and the transformer is called a step-down transformer. If, on the other hand, there are a larger number of secondary turns than of primary, the secondary voltage is greater than the primary voltage, and the transformer is called a step-up transformer.
The voltage at which current is supplied by the secondary is directly related to the voltage at which current is supplied to the primary. This relationship, which will be explained later, is essentially the same as the relationship between the number of turns in the secondary and primary coils. If the secondary coil has fewer turns than the primary, the secondary voltage is lower than the primary voltage, and this type of transformer is known as a step-down transformer. Conversely, if the secondary coil has more turns than the primary, the secondary voltage is higher than the primary voltage, and this transformer is referred to as a step-up transformer.
The transfer of electrical energy from the primary coil to the secondary coil of a transformer is based upon the fundamental principles of electromagnetism and electromagnetic induction, and it will be necessary to investigate these principles before we can understand the operation of the transformer.
The transfer of electrical energy from the primary coil to the secondary coil of a transformer relies on the basic principles of electromagnetism and electromagnetic induction. We need to explore these principles to understand how the transformer works.
A magnet is a body, which, when freely suspended, assumes approximately a north and south position. The end of the magnet that points north is called the north pole, while the end that points south is called the south pole. The region surrounding a magnet is called a magnetic field. In this field the magnetism is supposed to flow along a large number of imaginary lines, called lines of force, and these lines are all supposed to emanate from the north pole of the magnet, pass through the medium surrounding the magnet and enter the south pole. The magnetic field surrounding a bar magnet is shown in Fig. 2. The strength of any magnetic field depends upon the number of these lines of force per unit area (square centimeter), the area being taken perpendicular to the direction of the lines.
A magnet is an object that, when freely hanging, roughly aligns itself in a north-south direction. The end of the magnet that points north is known as the north pole, while the end that points south is referred to as the south pole. The area around a magnet is called a magnetic field. In this field, magnetism is believed to flow along many imaginary lines, known as lines of force, which are thought to originate from the north pole of the magnet, travel through the space around it, and enter the south pole. The magnetic field surrounding a bar magnet is illustrated in Fig. 2. The strength of any magnetic field depends on the number of these lines of force per unit area (square centimeter), with the area measured perpendicular to the direction of the lines.

Fig. 2—Magnetic Field
Fig. 2—Magnetic Field
In 1812, Oersted discovered that a compass needle, which is nothing but a permanent magnet freely suspended or supported, when placed near a conductor in which there was a direct current, was acted upon by a force that tended to bring the needle into a position at right angles to the conductor. This simple experiment proved to [349] Oersted that there was a magnetic field produced by the current in the conductor. He also found that there was a definite relation between the direction of the current in the conductor, and the direction in which the north pole of the compass needle pointed. If the compass needle is allowed to come to rest in the earth's magnetic field, and a conductor is placed above it, the conductor being parallel to the needle, and a current then sent through the conductor, the needle will be deflected from its position of rest. Reversing the current in the conductor, reverses the direction in which the needle is deflected. If the needle be allowed to come to rest while there is a current in the conductor, and this current is then increased, it will be found that the deflection of the needle will be increased, but not in direct proportion to the increase in the current. Hence the strength of this magnetic field surrounding the conductor depends upon the value of the current in the conductor, and the direction of the field depends upon the direction of the current.
In 1812, Oersted discovered that a compass needle, which is just a permanent magnet that can move freely, was affected by a force when it was placed near a conductor carrying a direct current. This force caused the needle to align at a right angle to the conductor. This simple experiment showed Oersted that a magnetic field is produced by the current in the conductor. He also found a clear relationship between the direction of the current in the conductor and the direction in which the north pole of the compass needle pointed. If the compass needle is allowed to settle in the Earth's magnetic field and a conductor is placed parallel to it above, and then a current flows through the conductor, the needle will move from its original position. Reversing the current in the conductor will reverse the direction in which the needle moves. If the needle is allowed to settle while there is current flowing in the conductor, and then the current is increased, the deflection of the needle will also increase, but not in direct proportion to the increase in current. Therefore, the strength of the magnetic field around the conductor depends on the amount of current in it, and the direction of the field depends on the direction of the current.

Fig. 3—Magnetic Field around Conductor
Fig. 3—Magnetic Field around Wire
If a conductor be passed through a piece of cardboard, as shown in Fig. 3, and a current sent through it in the direction indicated by the arrow A, a compass needle, moved about the conductor in the path indicated by the dotted line, will always assume such a position that the north pole points around the conductor in a clockwise direction as you look down on the cardboard. If the current be reversed, the direction assumed by the compass needle will be reversed. Looking along a conductor in the direction of the current, the magnetic field will consist of magnetic lines encircling the conductor. These lines will be concentric circles, as a general rule, except when they are distorted by the presence of other magnets or magnetic materials, and their direction will be clockwise.
If a wire is passed through a piece of cardboard, as shown in Fig. 3, and a current flows through it in the direction indicated by the arrow A, a compass needle moved around the wire along the path shown by the dotted line will always position itself so that the north pole points around the wire in a clockwise direction when you look down at the cardboard. If the current is reversed, the direction of the compass needle will also reverse. When you look along the wire in the same direction as the current, the magnetic field will consist of magnetic lines wrapping around the wire. These lines will generally form concentric circles, except when they are affected by other magnets or magnetic materials, and their direction will be clockwise.

Fig. 4—Magnetic Field Surrounding a Conductor
Fig. 4—Magnetic Field Around a Conductor

Fig. 5—Magnetic Field about a Coil
Fig. 5—Magnetic Field around a Coil

Fig. 6—A Coil about a Magnetic Circuit through Iron and Air
Fig. 6—A Coil around a Magnetic Circuit through Iron and Air
The strength of the magnetic field at any point near this conductor will depend upon the value of the current in the conductor, and the distance the point is from the conductor. The magnetic field surrounding a conductor is shown in Fig. 4. The plus sign indicates that the direction of the current is from you. The strength of a magnetic field due to a current in a conductor can be greatly increased by forming a coil of the conductor. Each turn of the coil then produces a certain number of lines, and the greater part of these lines pass through the center of the coil, as shown in Fig. 5. The field strength inside such a coil is dependent upon the number of turns in the coil, and the value of the current in these turns. Increasing the number of turns in the coil increases the number of magnetic lines passing through [350] the center of the coil, as shown in Fig. 6. If the current be decreased in value, the field strength is decreased, and if the current be reversed in direction, the magnetic field is reversed in direction. The number of magnetic lines passing through the solenoid depends also upon the kind of material composing the core of the solenoid, in addition to the number of turns and the value of the current in these turns. The number of lines per unit area inside a solenoid with an air core can be multiplied several times by introducing a soft-iron core. If this core be extended as shown in Fig. 7, the magnetic circuit (the path through which the magnetic lines pass) may be completed through it. The larger part of the total number of lines will pass through the iron, as it is a much better conductor of magnetism than air.
The strength of the magnetic field at any point near this conductor depends on the current flowing through the conductor and the distance from the conductor to that point. The magnetic field around a conductor is illustrated in Fig. 4. The plus sign indicates that the current is flowing toward you. You can significantly increase the strength of the magnetic field produced by a current in a conductor by shaping the conductor into a coil. Each turn of the coil generates a certain number of magnetic lines, and most of these lines pass through the center of the coil, as shown in Fig. 5. The strength of the field inside such a coil depends on the number of turns in the coil and the current running through those turns. When you increase the number of turns in the coil, you increase the number of magnetic lines passing through [350] the center of the coil, as shown in Fig. 6. If the current is reduced, the field strength decreases; if the current is reversed, the direction of the magnetic field also reverses. The number of magnetic lines passing through the solenoid also depends on the type of material making up the core of the solenoid, in addition to the number of turns and the amount of current. The number of lines per unit area inside a solenoid with an air core can be significantly increased by adding a soft-iron core. If this core is extended as shown in Fig. 7, the magnetic circuit (the path through which the magnetic lines travel) can be completed through it. The majority of the total number of lines will pass through the iron, as it conducts magnetism far better than air.

Fig. 7—A Coil about a Magnetic Circuit through Iron
Fig. 7—A Coil around a Magnetic Circuit through Iron
In 1831, Michael Faraday discovered that there was an electrical pressure induced in an electrical conductor when it was moved in a magnetic field so that it cut some of the lines forming the field. If this conductor be made to form part of a closed electrical circuit, there will be a current produced in the circuit as a result of the induceds electrical pressure. The value of this induced electrical pressure depends upon the number of magnetic lines of force that the conductor cuts in one second. If 100,000,000 lines are cut in one second, an electrical pressure of one volt is produced. The direction of the induced pressure depends upon the direction of the movement of the conductor and the direction of the lines of force in the magnetic field; reversing either the direction of the magnetic field or the motion of the conductor, reverses the direction of the induced pressure. If both the direction of the magnetic field, and the direction of the motion of the conductor be reversed, there is no change in the direction of the induced pressure, for there is then no change in the relative directions of the two. The same results can be obtained by moving the magnetic field with respect to the conductor in such a way that the lines of force of the field cut the conductor.
In 1831, Michael Faraday discovered that when an electrical conductor moves through a magnetic field and intersects some of the lines that form the field, it generates electrical pressure. If this conductor is part of a closed electrical circuit, a current will flow in the circuit due to the induced electrical pressure. The amount of this induced electrical pressure depends on how many magnetic lines of force the conductor cuts through in one second. If 100,000,000 lines are cut in one second, it produces an electrical pressure of one volt. The direction of the induced pressure depends on both the direction the conductor moves and the direction of the lines of force in the magnetic field; reversing either the direction of the magnetic field or the movement of the conductor reverses the direction of the induced pressure. Reversing both the direction of the magnetic field and the movement of the conductor will not change the direction of the induced pressure because the relative directions of the two remain the same. The same results can be achieved by moving the magnetic field relative to the conductor in a way that the lines of force of the field cut the conductor.

Fig.8—Two Coils about a Magnetic Circuit through Iron
Fig.8—Two Coils around a Magnetic Circuit through Iron
If a permanent magnet be thrust into a coil of wire, there will be an electrical pressure set up in the coil so long as the turns of wire forming the coil are cutting the lines of force that are produced by the magnet. When the magnet is withdrawn, the induced electrical pressure will be reversed in direction, since the direction of cutting is reversed. A magnetic field may be produced through a coil of wire by winding it on the magnetic circuit shown in Fig. 8. Now any change of current in the coil P will cause a change in the number of magnetic lines passing through S and hence there will be an induced electrical pressure set up in S so long as the number of lines passing through it is changing. The pressure induced in each of the turns comprising the coil S depends upon the change in the number of magnetic lines through it.
If you push a permanent magnet into a coil of wire, it will create electrical pressure in the coil as long as the wire is cutting through the magnetic lines created by the magnet. When you pull the magnet out, the induced electrical pressure will reverse direction because the cutting direction is reversed. You can create a magnetic field through a coil of wire by winding it around the magnetic circuit shown in Fig. 8. Now, any change in current in the coil P will lead to a change in the number of magnetic lines passing through S, which will induce electrical pressure in S as long as the number of lines passing through it is changing. The induced pressure in each turn of the coil S depends on how much the number of magnetic lines through it changes.
Let us now consider a condition of operation when there is no current in [351] the secondary coil and the primary coil is connected to some source of electrical energy. When this is the case the current in the primary coil is not determined by Ohm's law, which states that the current is equal to the electrical pressure divided by the resistance, but is considerably less in value, for the following reason. The magnetic lines of force produced by the current in the primary induces an electrical pressure in the primary winding itself, the direction of which is always opposite to the impressed pressure, or the one producing the current. As a result of this induced pressure being set up in the primary, the effective pressure acting in the circuit is decreased. At the same time there is an electrical pressure induced in the secondary winding in the same direction as that induced in the primary.
Let’s now look at a situation where there is no current in the [351] secondary coil, and the primary coil is connected to a source of electrical energy. In this case, the current in the primary coil isn’t determined by Ohm's law, which states that current is equal to the electrical pressure divided by resistance. Instead, it’s significantly lower for the following reason. The magnetic lines of force created by the current in the primary induce an electrical pressure in the primary winding itself, which always acts in the opposite direction to the applied pressure that creates the current. Because of the induced pressure in the primary, the effective pressure in the circuit is reduced. At the same time, there’s an electrical pressure induced in the secondary winding, going in the same direction as the one induced in the primary.
If the secondary circuit be connected to a load, there will be a current in the secondary winding, which will pass around the magnetic circuit in the opposite direction to the primary current, and as a result will decrease the number of lines passing through the primary coil. This will in turn decrease the electrical pressure induced in the primary coil, and a larger current will exist in the primary winding than there was before any current was taken from the secondary coil. The decrease in induced pressure is small, but it is always ample to allow the required increase in primary current. There is, at the same time, a small decrease in the secondary pressure.
If the secondary circuit is connected to a load, there will be a current flowing in the secondary winding. This current will circulate around the magnetic circuit in the opposite direction to the primary current, which will reduce the number of magnetic lines passing through the primary coil. This, in turn, will lower the electrical pressure generated in the primary coil, causing a larger current to flow in the primary winding than there was before any current was drawn from the secondary coil. The reduction in induced pressure is small, but it's always enough to allow for the necessary increase in primary current. At the same time, there is a slight decrease in the secondary pressure.
When the transformer is operating on no load, with no current in the secondary coil, the induced pressure in the primary coil is practically equal to the impressed pressure and hence a very small current will be taken from the source of energy. It is apparent now that if the primary and secondary coils have the same number of turns, the induced electrical pressure in each of these coils will be the same, assuming, of course, that all the magnetic lines that pass through the primary also pass through the secondary coil, and vice versa, or the secondary pressure is practically the same as the pressure impressed on the primary. If the number of turns in the secondary coil is greater or less than the number of turns in the primary, the magnetic lines will be cut a greater or less number of times by the secondary coil, and hence the induced pressure will be greater or less, depending upon the relation of the number of turns in the two coils.
When the transformer is running without a load, meaning there’s no current in the secondary coil, the voltage in the primary coil is almost equal to the applied voltage, so only a tiny current is drawn from the energy source. It’s clear now that if the primary and secondary coils have the same number of turns, the electrical voltage induced in each of these coils will be the same, assuming all the magnetic lines that pass through the primary also go through the secondary coil, and vice versa; or that the secondary voltage is nearly the same as the voltage applied to the primary. If the number of turns in the secondary coil is more or less than in the primary, the magnetic lines will be cut a different number of times by the secondary coil, which means the induced voltage will be higher or lower, depending on the ratio of turns in the two coils.
Spirit Photographs
Print some photographs in the usual way on printing-out paper, then fix them in a solution of 1 oz. hyposulphite of soda and 8 oz. of water, and wash them thoroughly. While the prints are still wet, immerse them in a saturated solution of bichloride of mercury. Be very careful to wash the hands and trays after using the mercury solution, as it is poisonous. When the print is placed in the mercury solution, the picture vanishes completely. Leave the prints in this bath just long enough for the image to disappear, and then wash and dry them thoroughly. Soak some clean blotting paper in the hyposulphite-of-soda solution and allow it to dry. You are now ready to perform the magic-photograph trick.
Print some photos in the usual way on printing paper, then fix them in a solution of 1 oz. hyposulphite of soda and 8 oz. of water, and wash them thoroughly. While the prints are still wet, dip them in a saturated solution of bichloride of mercury. Be very careful to wash your hands and the trays after using the mercury solution, as it is toxic. When you place the print in the mercury solution, the image completely disappears. Leave the prints in this bath just long enough for the image to vanish, and then wash and dry them thoroughly. Soak some clean blotting paper in the hyposulphite-of-soda solution and let it dry. You are now ready to perform the magic photo trick.
To cause the spirit photograph to appear, cut a piece of blotting paper the same size as the prepared print and moisten it, then hold the apparently blank piece of paper in contact with it. The picture will come out clear and plain, and if thoroughly washed out it will remain permanently.
To make the spirit photograph show up, cut a piece of blotting paper the same size as the prepared print and dampen it, then press the seemingly blank piece of paper against it. The image will appear clear and distinct, and if it's properly washed out, it will last permanently.
Saturate a small piece of cotton batting in glue and wrap it around a nail, then place it in a hole previously made in a plaster wall. When the glue dries, the nail will remain permanently.
Saturate a small piece of cotton batting in glue and wrap it around a nail, then put it in a hole you made earlier in a plaster wall. Once the glue dries, the nail will stay put permanently.
Construction of a Small Bell-Ringing Transformer
By A. E. Andrews
Part II—Construction
Transformers may be divided into two main groups, the classification being made according to the relation between the magnetic circuit of the transformer and the primary and secondary windings. When the two windings surround the magnetic circuit of a transformer, as indicated in Fig. 9, the transformer is said to be of core type. If the magnetic circuit surrounds the windings, as indicated in Fig. 10, the transformer is said to be of the shell type. The following instructions are for a shell-type transformer.
Transformers can be categorized into two main groups based on the relationship between the magnetic circuit of the transformer and the primary and secondary windings. When both windings encircle the magnetic circuit of a transformer, as shown in Fig. 9, it is referred to as a core type. If the magnetic circuit encases the windings, as demonstrated in Fig. 10, it is called a shell type. The following instructions are for a shell-type transformer.

Fig. 9—Core-Type Transformer
Fig. 9—Core Transformer
Any mass of magnetic material, such as a piece of soft iron, when placed in a magnetic field that is produced by an alternating current, will be rapidly magnetized and demagnetized, the rapidity of the change depending upon the frequency of the current producing the field. When a piece of iron is magnetized and demagnetized, as just stated, there will be a certain amount of heat generated in it and this heat represents energy that must come from the electrical circuit producing the magnetic field in which the iron is placed.
Any mass of magnetic material, like a piece of soft iron, when put in a magnetic field created by an alternating current, will quickly become magnetized and demagnetized. How fast this happens depends on the frequency of the current generating the field. When a piece of iron is magnetized and demagnetized, as mentioned, it generates some heat, and this heat represents energy that must come from the electrical circuit that creates the magnetic field in which the iron is placed.

Fig. 10—Shell-Type Transformer
Fig. 10—Shell Transformer
The heat that is generated in the iron is due to two causes: First, the hysteresis loss which is due to a property of the iron that causes the magnetism in the iron to lag behind the magnetizing influence, or the changes that are constantly taking place in the field strength due to the alternating current. This loss cannot be entirely eliminated, but it may be reduced to a very low value by using a soft grade of iron, or one having what is called a low hysteretic constant. Second, the eddy-current loss which is due to the circulation of currents through the mass of metal. These currents are due to unequal electromotive forces set up in the different parts of the piece of metal when there is a change in the strength of the field in which the metal is placed. This loss cannot be entirely eliminated, but it can be greatly reduced by breaking the mass of metal up into parts and insulating these parts from each other, which results in the paths in which the eddy currents originally circulated being destroyed to a certain extent.
The heat generated in the iron comes from two main sources: First, there's the hysteresis loss, which happens because the iron's magnetism lags behind the magnetizing effect and the constant changes in field strength caused by the alternating current. While this loss can't be completely eliminated, it can be minimized by using a softer grade of iron or one that has a low hysteretic constant. Second, there's the eddy-current loss, which is caused by currents circulating through the metal. These currents arise from unequal electromotive forces created in different parts of the metal piece when there's a change in the strength of the magnetic field around it. This loss also can't be fully eliminated, but it can be significantly reduced by breaking the metal into smaller parts and insulating these parts from each other, effectively disrupting the paths that the eddy currents originally flowed through.
The breaking up of the metal is usually made in such a way that the joints between the various parts are parallel to the direction of the magnetic field. When the joints are made in this way, they offer less opposition to the magnetizing force. This is one of the principal reasons why induction-coil cores are made up of a bundle of wires instead of a solid piece. These wires are annealed or softened to reduce the hysteresis loss that would occur. The combined hysteresis and eddy-current losses, which are spoken of as the iron losses, will of course be very small in the transformer you are going to construct, but the above discussion is given to show why the magnetic circuits of transformers are built up from sheets of soft iron, called laminations. The core is said to be laminated.
The breaking up of the metal is usually done in a way that the joints between the different parts are aligned with the direction of the magnetic field. When the joints are arranged like this, they create less resistance to the magnetizing force. This is one of the main reasons why induction-coil cores are made from a bundle of wires instead of a solid piece. These wires are heated or softened to minimize the hysteresis loss that would happen. The combined hysteresis and eddy-current losses, known as the iron losses, will be very small in the transformer you are going to build, but this explanation is provided to illustrate why the magnetic circuits of transformers are constructed from sheets of soft iron, called laminations. The core is referred to as laminated.
The dimensions of the complete magnetic circuit, of the transformer you are going to construct, are given in [353] Fig. 11. The primary and secondary windings are both to be placed about the center portion C, and it is apparent that the winding of these coils would be very tedious if the wire had to be passed back and forth through the openings A and B. This procedure in winding can be prevented by first forming the part of the magnetic circuit upon which the windings are placed; then wind on the coils and, after they are completed, finish building up the magnetic circuit with pieces cut to the proper size and shape.
The sizes of the complete magnetic circuit for the transformer you’re about to build are shown in [353] Fig. 11. Both the primary and secondary windings should be positioned around the center section C, and it's clear that winding these coils would be very time-consuming if the wire had to be threaded back and forth through the openings A and B. This winding method can be streamlined by first assembling the section of the magnetic circuit where the windings will go; then, you can wind the coils, and once they’re finished, complete the magnetic circuit with pieces cut to the correct size and shape.

Fig. 11—Complete Magnetic Circuit
Fig. 11—Full Magnetic Circuit
Procure a small quantity of soft, thin sheet iron and cut out a sufficient number of rectangular pieces, 3 in. by 4-1/4 in., to make a pile 3/4 in. in height when firmly pressed together. Now cut a rectangular notch in each of these pieces, 2 in. wide and 3-5/8 in. long. The sides of this notch can be cut with a pair of tinner's shears, and the end can be cut with a sharp cold-chisel. Be careful not to bend either piece any more than you can help. The outside piece, or the one in which the notch is cut, should have dimensions corresponding to those given in Fig. 12. When all of these pieces have been cut, as indicated above, the rectangular pieces, 2 in. by 3-5/8 in., that were cut out to form the notch in the larger pieces, should have two of their corners cut away, so as to form pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in Fig. 13. These last pieces are to form the core and part of the end of the transformer. Now make sure that all the edges of the pieces are perfectly smooth and that they are all of the same size; then give each one a coat of very thin shellac.
Get a small amount of soft, thin sheet metal and cut out enough rectangular pieces that are 3 inches by 4.25 inches to make a stack that's 0.75 inches high when pressed together. Next, cut a rectangular notch in each of these pieces that's 2 inches wide and 3.625 inches long. You can use tinner's shears to cut the sides of the notch and a sharp cold chisel for the end. Be careful not to bend any of the pieces more than necessary. The outer piece, or the one with the notch, should have dimensions that match those in Fig. 12. Once all these pieces are cut as described, take the rectangular pieces that were removed to create the notch, which are 2 inches by 3.625 inches, and cut off two corners to make pieces that match the dimensions in Fig. 13. These final pieces will form the core and part of the end of the transformer. Now ensure that all the edges of the pieces are perfectly smooth and that they are all the same size; then apply a thin coat of shellac to each one.

Fig. 12—Outer Portion of the Magnetic Circuit
Fig. 12—Outer Part of the Magnetic Circuit

Fig. 13—Inner Portion of the Magnetic Circuit
Fig. 13—Inner Part of the Magnetic Circuit
Now cut from a piece of insulating fiber, that is about 1/16 in. thick, two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in Fig. 14. When these pieces are completed, the core of the transformer can be assembled as follows: Place the T-shaped pieces, whose dimensions correspond to those given in Fig. 13, through the openings in the pieces of insulation, alternate pieces being put through the openings from opposite sides. The distance from outside to outside of the pieces of insulation should be exactly the same as the length of the vertical portion of the T-shaped pieces forming the core, or 3 in.
Now, cut two pieces from a piece of insulating fiber that is about 1/16 in. thick, with dimensions matching those in Fig. 14. Once these pieces are ready, you can assemble the core of the transformer like this: Insert the T-shaped pieces, whose dimensions match those in Fig. 13, through the openings in the insulating pieces, alternating the pieces going through the openings from opposite sides. The distance from the outside of the insulating pieces should be exactly the same as the length of the vertical part of the T-shaped pieces that form the core, which is 3 in.

Fig. 14—Insulating Washer
Insulating Washer
Cut from some soft wood four pieces having cross sections whose dimensions correspond to those given in Fig. 15, and of such a length that they will just slip down between the two pieces of insulation. These pieces should now be placed on the four sides of the iron core and covered with several layers of heavy insulating cloth. Each layer of the cloth should be shellacked as it is put on, which will increase the insulation and at the same time help in holding the wooden pieces in place. You are now ready to start winding the transformer.
Cut four pieces from some soft wood with cross sections that match the dimensions shown in Fig. 15, and make them long enough to fit snugly between the two pieces of insulation. Place these pieces on the four sides of the iron core and cover them with several layers of heavy insulating cloth. Each layer of cloth should be coated with shellac as you apply it, which will enhance the insulation and also help keep the wooden pieces in place. You're now ready to begin winding the transformer.

Fig. 15—Wood Filler
Fig. 15—Wood Filler
The secondary, which is the low-voltage side in this case, as you are using the transformer to reduce or step down the voltage, will have the smaller number of turns, and larger wire should be used in winding it than in the primary, as it will carry a larger current. On account of the secondary being of larger wire, it will be placed on the core first. For this winding you will need a small quantity of No. 26 B. & S. gauge, single cotton-covered wire. [354] Drill a small hole through one of the insulating washers, down close to the cloth covering the core, being careful at the same time to keep the hole as far from the metal part of the core as possible. Pass the end of a short piece of No. 18 or 20 B. & S. gauge, double cotton-covered wire through this opening and solder it to the end of the No. 26 wire. Insulate the joint with a piece of paraffin paper or cloth, and bind the piece of heavy wire to the core of the transformer with a piece of linen thread.
The secondary, which is the low-voltage side in this case, because you're using the transformer to lower the voltage, will have fewer turns and require larger wire for winding than the primary, as it will handle a higher current. Since the secondary uses larger wire, it will be wound on the core first. For this winding, you'll need a small amount of No. 26 B. & S. gauge, single cotton-covered wire. [354] Drill a small hole through one of the insulating washers, close to the cloth covering the core, being careful to keep the hole as far from the metal part of the core as possible. Pass the end of a short piece of No. 18 or 20 B. & S. gauge, double cotton-covered wire through this opening and solder it to the end of the No. 26 wire. Insulate the joint with a piece of paraffin paper or cloth, and secure the heavier wire to the core of the transformer with a piece of linen thread.
Now wind the No. 26 wire on the core as evenly as possible, to within about 1/8 in. of the end of the spool. Place over the first layer two layers of paraffin paper and wind on a second layer of wire. Three layers should give you the required number of turns in the secondary winding and a resistance of approximately 3-1/2 ohms. The end of the secondary winding should be terminated in the same way as the winding was started. Outside of the completed secondary winding place at least six layers of paraffin paper, or several layers of insulating cloth. The paraffin paper used should be approximately five mills in thickness. You can make your own paraffin paper by taking a good quality of writing paper about two mills thick and dipping it into some hot paraffin, then hanging it up by one edge to drain.
Now wrap the No. 26 wire around the core as evenly as you can, leaving about 1/8 inch from the end of the spool. On top of the first layer, add two layers of paraffin paper and then wrap on a second layer of wire. Three layers should give you the necessary number of turns in the secondary winding and a resistance of about 3.5 ohms. The end of the secondary winding should be finished in the same way as the beginning. On the outside of the completed secondary winding, place at least six layers of paraffin paper or several layers of insulating cloth. The paraffin paper used should be about five mils thick. You can make your own paraffin paper by taking good quality writing paper that is about two mils thick and dipping it in hot paraffin, then hanging it by one edge to drain.
The primary winding is to be made from No. 34 B. & S. gauge, single silk-covered copper wire. The inside end of this winding should be started in the same way as the secondary, but at the end opposite to the one where the secondary terminated. Wind about 240 turns on each layer and place one layer of paraffin paper between each layer of wire. The primary winding should have at least 12 layers, and the outside end should be terminated as the inside end. Outside of the completed windings, place several layers of insulating cloth to serve as an insulation, and at the same time provide a mechanical protection for the windings.
The primary winding should be made from No. 34 B. & S. gauge, single silk-covered copper wire. Start the inside end of this winding the same way as the secondary, but at the end opposite where the secondary finished. Wind about 240 turns for each layer and put one layer of paraffin paper between each layer of wire. The primary winding should have at least 12 layers, and the outside end should be finished like the inside end. On the outside of the completed windings, add several layers of insulating cloth for insulation and also to provide mechanical protection for the windings.

Fig. 16.—Upper Clamping Pieces
Fig. 16.—Top Clamping Pieces
The outside part of the magnetic circuit can now be put in place. When the U-shaped pieces are all in place, the magnetic circuit will have the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 11. A clamp should now be made for each end of the transformer, to hold the pieces forming the magnetic circuit together, and at the same time give an easy means of mounting the transformer. Cut from a piece of sheet iron, about 1/16 in. in thickness, two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in Fig. 16, and two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in Fig. 17. Drill the holes in these pieces as indicated, and bend the larger ones into the form shown in Fig. 18. These pieces can now be clamped across the ends of the transformer with small bolts, as shown in Fig. 19.
The outer part of the magnetic circuit can now be installed. Once all the U-shaped pieces are in place, the magnetic circuit will take on the shape and size shown in Fig. 11. You should now create a clamp for each end of the transformer to hold the pieces of the magnetic circuit together and also provide an easy way to mount the transformer. Cut two pieces from a sheet of iron that's about 1/16 in. thick, with dimensions that match those in Fig. 16, and two pieces that match the dimensions in Fig. 17. Drill the holes in these pieces as indicated and bend the larger ones into the shape shown in Fig. 18. These pieces can now be clamped across the ends of the transformer with small bolts, as illustrated in Fig. 19.

Fig. 17—Lower Clamping Pieces and Mounting Supports
Fig. 17—Lower Clamping Pieces and Mounting Supports
A box should now be made from sheet iron to hold the transformer. The box should be of such dimensions that it will be at least 1/8 in. from the transformer at all points. This box should be provided with a cover that can be easily removed.
A box should now be created from sheet metal to hold the transformer. The box should be sized so that it is at least 1/8 inch away from the transformer at all points. This box should have a lid that can be easily removed.

Fig. 18—Shape of Support
Fig. 18—Support Shape
Now mount the transformer in the box by means of small bolts, that pass through the holes in the supports and holes in the bottom of the box. Two binding-posts can now be mounted on one end of the box, and insulated from it, to serve as terminals for the secondary winding. Two pieces of stranded No. 14 B. & S. gauge, rubber-covered copper wire should now be soldered to the terminals of the primary circuit and passed out through insulating bushings mounted in holes cut in the end of the box opposite to the one upon which the binding-posts were mounted. These heavy wires should be firmly fastened to the iron [355] part of the transformer inside the box, so that any outside strain placed upon them will not, in time, break them loose from the smaller wires. Be sure to insulate all joints and wires well inside the box.
Now attach the transformer in the box using small bolts that go through the holes in the supports and the holes in the bottom of the box. You can now install two binding posts on one end of the box, ensuring they are insulated from it, to act as terminals for the secondary winding. Solder two pieces of stranded No. 14 B. & S. gauge, rubber-covered copper wire to the terminals of the primary circuit and run them through insulating bushings installed in holes cut in the end of the box opposite the side where the binding posts are mounted. These heavy wires should be securely attached to the iron part of the transformer inside the box, so that any external strain on them won't eventually pull them loose from the smaller wires. Make sure to insulate all joints and wires thoroughly inside the box.

Fig. 19—Method of Clamping Transformer Together
Fig. 19—How to Clamp a Transformer Together
A circuit can now be run from a 110-volt lighting or power circuit, observing the same rules as though you were wiring for lights, and connected to the heavy wires, or primary circuit. The binding-posts, or secondary winding should be connected to the bell circuit and the transformer is complete and ready to operate. You may have to change the adjustment of the bells, but after a little adjustment they will operate quite satisfactorily.
A circuit can now be run from a 110-volt lighting or power circuit, following the same rules as if you were wiring for lights, and connected to the heavy wires, or primary circuit. The binding posts, or secondary winding, should be connected to the bell circuit, and the transformer is complete and ready to operate. You might need to adjust the bells, but after a little tweaking, they will work quite well.
Mirror Hinged to Window Casing

A shaving mirror is usually placed on a window sash to avoid shadows as much as possible. This is very inconvenient and many times the mirror is broken by a fall. A good way to avoid shadows and have the mirror handy is to hinge it to the window casing. This can be done with screweyes, A, and screwhooks, B. The screweyes are turned into the frame of the mirror and the screwhooks into the window casing. Two screwhooks can also be turned into the casing on the opposite side of the window, if desired, so that the mirror can be used on either side.—Contributed by James D. McKenna, New Britain, Conn.
A shaving mirror is typically placed on a window sill to minimize shadows as much as possible. This can be very inconvenient, and often the mirror ends up getting broken from a fall. A great way to avoid shadows and keep the mirror accessible is to attach it to the window frame with hinges. This can be done using screw eyes, A, and screw hooks, B. The screw eyes are screwed into the frame of the mirror, while the screw hooks are attached to the window frame. If desired, two screw hooks can also be installed on the opposite side of the window so that the mirror can be used from either side.—Contributed by James D. McKenna, New Britain, Conn.
A Cleaning Bath for Silverware
A good way to clean silverware of all coloring by eggs or other substances is to place the silver articles in a kettle of boiling water containing a few pieces of zinc. An electrolytic action is produced by the zinc, water and silver which decomposes the sulphides on the silver and leaves it well cleaned. No silver is taken away by this method.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A great way to clean silverware from any stains caused by eggs or other substances is to put the silver items in a pot of boiling water with a few pieces of zinc. The zinc creates an electrolytic reaction with the water and silver, breaking down the sulfides on the silver and leaving it nicely cleaned. No silver is lost in this process.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
To Prevent Poultry Water from Freezing
The method shown in the sketch is used by me in cold weather to keep the drinking water for the poultry from freezing. The device consists of a part of a barrel inverted and set over the fountain, and a tubular lantern. A small opening is cut in one side of the barrel through which the fowl can reach the water.—Contributed by P. C. Fish, Kansas City, Mo.
The method illustrated in the sketch is what I use in cold weather to prevent the poultry's drinking water from freezing. The device is made from an upside-down section of a barrel placed over the water fountain, along with a tubular lantern. There's a small opening cut into one side of the barrel that allows the birds to reach the water. —Contributed by P. C. Fish, Kansas City, Mo.

Lantern and Fountain in Half Barrel
Lantern and Fountain in Half Barrel
How to Make a Letter Scale

A reliable letter scale that can be easily made is shown in the sketch. It consists of a wide-neck bottle filled with water into which the weighing device is inserted. This latter part is made of a light piece of wood weighted on the lower end, to keep it in a stable, upright position, and a piece of cardboard is tacked to the other. The wood is placed in the water, and known weights are used on the cardboard while calibrating.
A simple and dependable letter scale is shown in the sketch. It consists of a wide-neck bottle filled with water, into which the weighing device is inserted. This weighing device is made of a lightweight piece of wood that is weighted at the bottom to keep it stable and upright, and a piece of cardboard is attached to the other end. The wood is submerged in the water, and known weights are placed on the cardboard for calibration.
The first line is marked at the water level when there is no weight on the cardboard, and then a known weight placed on the top and another mark made at the water level, and so on, until a sufficient number of 1/2-oz. and ounce-divisions have been marked. The wood should be well coated with shellac varnish before it is placed in the water.—Contributed by Francis Chetlain, Chicago.
The first line is marked at the water level when there’s no weight on the cardboard, and then a known weight is placed on top, and another mark is made at the water level, and so on, until enough 1/2-ounce and ounce divisions have been marked. The wood should be well coated with shellac varnish before it's placed in the water.—Contributed by Francis Chetlain, Chicago.
Summer Dish Washing
A labor-saving method in dish washing for a summer day is as follows: Construct a substantial wood frame and cover it with galvanized wire mesh. Attach legs and put it in a convenient place on the back porch. Wash the dishes on one end, and wipe the silverware dry. At the outer end spread a towel over the wire and place the dishes turned down upon it to dry, and cover them with another towel.—Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Tifton, Ga.
A time-saving way to wash dishes on a summer day is as follows: Build a sturdy wooden frame and cover it with galvanized wire mesh. Attach legs and set it up in a convenient spot on the back porch. Wash the dishes on one end and dry the silverware. At the other end, spread a towel over the wire and place the dishes upside down on it to dry, then cover them with another towel. —Contributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Tifton, Ga.
Nozzle Angle for Lawn Sprinkling

Where there is no prop or water sprinkler at hand for tilting the nozzle of a hose, start to tie a knot in the hose, as shown in the sketch, but do not draw it up tightly. The hose nozzle can be tilted to any angle in this manner.—Contributed by S. J. Eddy, Portland, Oregon.
Where there’s no stand or water sprinkler available to hold the hose nozzle at an angle, begin tying a knot in the hose, as illustrated in the sketch, but don’t pull it too tight. This way, the hose nozzle can be tilted to any angle. —Contributed by S. J. Eddy, Portland, Oregon.
Simple Methods of Connecting Call Bells

Wiring Diagrams for a Single Bell (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Wiring Diagrams for a Single Bell (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The following diagrams will indicate a few of the various methods that may be employed in connecting up electric bells for different purposes, A, B and C representing the push buttons; D, the bells; E, the batteries, and G, the ground. The simplest possible connection is shown in Fig. 1, the bell D, battery E, and push button A, are all connected in series. The operation of the bell is independent of the order in which the bell, battery, and push button are placed, so long as there is a complete circuit when the push button is pressed. One of the wires in this circuit may be done away with by completing the circuit through the ground, as shown in Fig. 2. Connecting a bell as shown in this diagram often results in quite a saving of wire. The proper connections for operating one bell from either of two push [357] buttons, A or B, is shown in Fig. 3. Two bells, D, operated from a single push button, C, are connected as shown in Fig. 4. The two bells, D, are shown connected in parallel, which requires more wire than if they were connected in series. If they be connected in series, one or the other should have its make-and-break contact closed. The bell whose circuit remains unchanged will intercept the current for the other bell in series with it. The operating of the bells is more satisfactory, however, when they are in parallel, and each taking current from the battery independent of the other.
The following diagrams will show a few different ways to connect electric bells for various purposes, with A, B, and C representing the push buttons; D representing the bells; E representing the batteries; and G representing the ground. The simplest connection is illustrated in Fig. 1, where bell D, battery E, and push button A are all connected in series. The operation of the bell doesn't depend on the order of the bell, battery, and push button, as long as there is a complete circuit when the push button is pressed. One wire in this circuit can be removed by completing the circuit through the ground, as shown in Fig. 2. Connecting a bell as illustrated in this diagram often saves a lot of wire. The correct connections for operating one bell from either of two push buttons, A or B, are shown in Fig. 3. Two bells, D, operated from a single push button, C, are connected as shown in Fig. 4. The two bells, D, are connected in parallel, which requires more wire than if they were connected in series. If they are connected in series, one or the other should have its make-and-break contact closed. The bell whose circuit stays the same will receive the current for the other bell in series with it. However, the operation of the bells is more efficient when they are wired in parallel, each drawing power from the battery independently of the other.

Wiring Diagram for Two or More Bells (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
Wiring Diagram for Two or More Bells (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
The diagram, Fig. 5, shows the proper connections for operating two bells from two independent push buttons, each push button operating a particular bell. Any number of bells operated from any number of push buttons, all of the bells being rung from any one of the push buttons, are connected as shown in Fig. 6. Such a circuit can be used as a fire alarm or time call in a factory, the operation of the circuit being controlled from any one of a number of different points.
The diagram, Fig. 5, illustrates the correct connections for operating two bells with two separate push buttons, each button activating a specific bell. You can connect any number of bells to any number of push buttons, allowing all bells to ring from any one of the buttons, as shown in Fig. 6. This type of circuit can be used for a fire alarm or a time signal in a factory, with the circuit being controlled from multiple different locations.

Wiring Diagrams for Return-Call Bells (Fig. 7, Fig. 8, Fig. 9)
Wiring Diagrams for Return-Call Bells (Fig. 7, Fig. 8, Fig. 9)
The proper connections for what is called a return-call circuit is shown in Fig. 7. The circuit is so arranged that the bell at one end is controlled by the push button at the other end. Such a circuit can be used in transmitting signals in either direction. A ground return-call circuit is shown in Fig. 8. In the circuits shown in Figs. 7 and 8, only one battery is needed.
The correct connections for what's known as a return-call circuit are shown in Fig. 7. The circuit is set up so that the bell at one end is operated by the push button at the other end. This type of circuit can be used to send signals in both directions. A ground return-call circuit is illustrated in Fig. 8. In the circuits depicted in Figs. 7 and 8, only one battery is required.
The connections of a two-wire metallic return-call circuit are shown in Fig. 9. A special push button must be used in this circuit, and in this case two batteries are used instead of one, as in Figs. 7 and 8. This circuit may be changed to a ground return-call circuit by using the earth as a conductor instead of either wire. There are, of course, numerous other methods that may be used in connecting call bells, but the connections shown in the diagrams are perhaps the most common.
The connections of a two-wire metal return-call circuit are shown in Fig. 9. A special push button must be used in this circuit, and in this case, two batteries are used instead of one, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8. This circuit can be changed to a ground return-call circuit by using the earth as a conductor instead of either wire. There are, of course, many other ways to connect call bells, but the connections shown in the diagrams are probably the most common.
Refrigerator for Dry and Warm Climates
Set a bowl containing butter, cream or fruit in a saucer and cover the bowl with a moistened napkin, allowing the edges to hang in a larger saucer filled with water, and place the whole in the air out of the sun's rays. The article to be kept cool may also be placed in a pan with an earthenware crock turned over it and covered with a small towel or cloth, the edges of which extend into another outer pan partly filled with water.
Set a bowl with butter, cream, or fruit in a saucer and cover the bowl with a damp napkin, letting the edges hang into a larger saucer filled with water. Place the whole setup in a shaded area away from direct sunlight. Alternatively, you can put the item you want to keep cool in a pan with an earthenware crock upside down over it, then cover it with a small towel or cloth, allowing the edges to hang down into another outer pan that is partially filled with water.
The method can be applied on a larger scale by using a shallow galvanized pan which will contain many articles and more water. This manner of cooling is especially adapted to [358] camping parties and will prevent sloppy butter, sour milk and spoiling fruit. The articles are also kept free from ants and flies.—Contributed by C. B. Hosford, Swansea, Ariz.
The method can be used on a larger scale by using a shallow galvanized pan that can hold many items and more water. This way of cooling is especially suited for [358] camping trips and will stop butter from getting mushy, milk from turning sour, and fruit from spoiling. It also keeps the items safe from ants and flies. —Contributed by C. B. Hosford, Swansea, Ariz.
Pencil-Sharpening Guide

The sketch shows how a guide for making a true point on a lead pencil may be made of a block of wood. The hole, which should be large enough to allow the pencil to be turned easily, is bored at the proper angle to form the desired point on the pencil. The long side of the block serves as a guide for the knife blade, while the projection at the bottom acts as a stop. The guide insures an even point and is easily manipulated. It is held in the palm of the left hand and the pencil is turned with the thumb and forefinger, while the knife is held against the face of the block, cutting edge downward, and worked up and down with the right hand.
The sketch demonstrates how to create a guide for shaping a sharp point on a lead pencil using a block of wood. The hole should be large enough to allow easy movement of the pencil and is drilled at the correct angle to achieve the desired point. The long side of the block acts as a guide for the knife blade, while the extension at the bottom serves as a stop. The guide ensures a consistent point and is simple to use. It's held in the palm of the left hand while the pencil is rotated with the thumb and forefinger. The knife is pressed against the block's surface, with the cutting edge facing downward, and it is moved up and down with the right hand.
Homemade Hinges

When making a chicken house recently I had forgotten to procure hinges. When searching the "junk" box I found some little metal brackets such as used for holding spring roller shades. Attaching these as shown, I made a good substitute hinge. A pair of the brackets having no slots were selected. A 2-1/2-in. wire nail with a washer was placed in the hole and driven into the top of the door, 1 in, from its back edge. The other bracket was placed on the bottom of the door in a similar manner. The door was placed in an open position and the prongs of the brackets were nailed to the door post. The bottom bracket may also be nailed to the floor and the top one to the lintel.—Contributed by Robert Smith, E. Burnaby, B. C.
When building a chicken house recently, I forgot to get hinges. While looking through the "junk" box, I found some small metal brackets that are used for holding spring roller shades. By attaching these as shown, I created a good substitute for a hinge. I picked a pair of the brackets that didn’t have slots. I used a 2-1/2-inch wire nail with a washer, placed it in the hole, and drove it into the top of the door, 1 inch from the back edge. The other bracket was positioned on the bottom of the door in a similar way. I then held the door open and nailed the prongs of the brackets to the door post. The bottom bracket can also be nailed to the floor and the top one to the lintel. —Contributed by Robert Smith, E. Burnaby, B. C.
Skimmer for Bottled Milk
The cream that rises on the milk in an ordinary milk bottle cannot be removed easily. Where a small family desires to use the cream for coffee, the skimmer shown in the sketch is very handy.
The cream that forms on top of milk in a regular milk bottle isn’t easy to remove. If a small family wants to use the cream for coffee, the skimmer shown in the sketch is really useful.

The cone is made of metal—tin, brass or copper—which can be nickelplated, the seam being soldered. The cone is 2 in. deep with a diameter at the top of 1-3/8 in. A handle can be made of a discarded sugar or teaspoon, which is soldered to the cone. Insert the cone in the bottle far enough for the cream to flow into it and then withdraw. Cream will gather about 3 in. deep on rich milk. The milk can be used for cooking. A piece of wire can be used for a handle instead of the spoon.—Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas, Texas.
The cone is made of metal—tin, brass, or copper—which can be nickel-plated, with the seam soldered. The cone is 2 inches deep, with a diameter of 1-3/8 inches at the top. A handle can be made from a discarded sugar or teaspoon, which is soldered to the cone. Insert the cone into the bottle enough for the cream to flow in, then pull it out. Cream will accumulate about 3 inches deep on rich milk. The milk can be used for cooking. You can also use a piece of wire for a handle instead of the spoon. —Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas, Texas.
How to Preserve Putty
Having some putty left over after a job of glazing and wishing to keep it without its becoming dried up, I tried wrapping it in paraffin paper such as used to wrap butter. I found this method to be a decided success, the oil being prevented from drying out.—Contributed by Levi R. Markwood, Fairview, Pa.
Having some putty left over after a glazing job and wanting to keep it from drying out, I tried wrapping it in paraffin paper like the kind used to wrap butter. I found this method to be a definite success, as it kept the oil from drying out.—Contributed by Levi R. Markwood, Fairview, Pa.
How to Build a Simple Electric Motor
By A. G. McClure
An exceedingly simple and inexpensive motor that may be used in operating small toys can be constructed as follows: First procure a good permanent magnet, about 5 in. long and about 1-1/2 in. between the inside edges at the open end. This magnet should be at least 1/2 in. thick, and if it cannot be had in one piece, two or more may be placed side by side, like poles being placed together. The writer was unable to procure ready-made magnets, so one was formed and magnetized. Obtain a piece of tungsten or some other good-grade steel, 1/2 in. by 1/2 in., and about 11 in. long. Bend this piece into the form of a U, with the inner edges 1-3/4 in. apart. Square off both ends and drill two small holes in the outside surface of each end, at AA, about 3/8 in. from the end. Tap these holes for small machine screws. Drill the hole B with a small drill, about 1/16 in., in the center of the lower portion of the U and ream it out. The piece should now be clamped with a good pair of blacksmith's tongs,—a block of iron being placed between the ends to keep the pressure of the tongs from drawing them together—heated to a cherry red and then plunged into a bath of oil. It can then be magnetized by placing it in contact with a permanent magnet.
A very simple and inexpensive motor that can be used to power small toys can be made like this: First, get a good permanent magnet that’s about 5 inches long and around 1.5 inches wide at the open end. This magnet should be at least 0.5 inches thick, and if you can’t find one in one piece, you can use two or more magnets placed next to each other, with like poles facing each other. The author couldn't find ready-made magnets, so one was made and magnetized. Take a piece of tungsten or another high-quality steel that measures 0.5 inches by 0.5 inches and is about 11 inches long. Bend this piece into a U-shape, with the inner edges 1.75 inches apart. Square off both ends and drill two small holes on the outside of each end, at points AA, about 0.375 inches from the end. Tap these holes for small machine screws. Drill hole B with a small drill bit, around 0.0625 inches, in the center of the lower part of the U and ream it out. Now, clamp the piece with a good pair of blacksmith's tongs, placing a block of iron between the ends to prevent the pressure of the tongs from bringing them together—heat it to a cherry red and then plunge it into a bath of oil. It can then be magnetized by making contact with a permanent magnet.

Detail of Armature Laminations, and Completed Parts Assembled, but without Armature Windings
Detail of Armature Laminations and Completed Parts Assembled, but without Armature Windings
Next obtain a piece of 1/8-in. brass, about 1/2 in. wide and 5-1/2 in. long. Drill two holes in each end of the piece to match those drilled in the ends of the magnet, also one in the center, and tap it for a 1/8-in. machine screw. Now bend this piece into the form shown. Provide a machine screw, S, for the hole C and drill a small tapered hole in the end of the screw.
Next, get a piece of 1/8-inch brass, about 1/2 inch wide and 5-1/2 inches long. Drill two holes at each end of the piece to match those drilled in the ends of the magnet, as well as one in the center, and tap it for a 1/8-inch machine screw. Now bend this piece into the shape shown. Provide a machine screw, S, for the hole C and drill a small tapered hole in the end of the screw.
Obtain a small quantity of soft sheet iron and cut a sufficient number of pieces similar to that shown at D to make a pile 1/2 in high. Cut two pieces of the same size from some thin sheet brass. Now place all of these pieces in a pile, the brass pieces being on the outside, and clamp them securely, then drill the two small holes, E and F. Place two small copper rivets in these holes and rivet the heads down before removing the clamp. Drill a 1/8-in. hole, G, through this piece, the armature, for the shaft to pass through. Procure a piece of 1/8-in. steel rod, about 6 in. long. Sharpen one end so that it will enter the hole B, then cut the other end off and sharpen it so that it will enter the opening made in the end of the screw S. The armature may now be soldered to this shaft, its left-hand surface being flush with the ends of the magnet.
Get a small piece of soft sheet iron and cut enough pieces like the one shown at D to create a stack that's 1/2 inch high. Cut two pieces of the same size from thin sheet brass. Stack all these pieces together, with the brass pieces on the outside, and clamp them securely. Then, drill the two small holes, E and F. Insert two small copper rivets into these holes and rivet their heads down before removing the clamp. Drill a 1/8-inch hole, G, through the armature so that the shaft can pass through. Get a piece of 1/8-inch steel rod, about 6 inches long. Sharpen one end so it fits into hole B, then cut the other end and sharpen it to fit the opening at the end of the screw S. Now, the armature can be soldered to this shaft, with its left side flush with the ends of the magnet.
A small commutator, H, should now be made as follows: Obtain a piece of thin brass tubing about 5/8 in. in diameter. [360] Turn down a piece of hard rubber so that the tube will fit tightly on it. Drill a hole in this piece of rubber of such a size that it will have to be forced on the steel shaft. Saw two longitudinal slots in the brass tube diametrically opposite each other and then bind these two pieces in place on the piece of rubber with some heavy linen thread wrapped around each end. The armature is now ready to wind. Get a small quantity of No. 22 gauge cotton-covered wire, solder one end to one of the segments of the commutator, then wind one end of the armature full and cross over and wind the other end full, soldering the end of the wire to the second commutator segment. Make sure to wind both ends of the armature in the same direction so the current in both parts of the winding produces magnetizing effects in the same direction. Insulate the winding from the core and the different layers from each other with a good quality of thin writing paper.
A small commutator, H, should now be made as follows: Get a piece of thin brass tubing about 5/8 in. in diameter. [360] Shape a piece of hard rubber so that the tube fits tightly on it. Drill a hole in this rubber piece so that it has to be pressed onto the steel shaft. Cut two long slots in the brass tube directly opposite each other and then secure these two pieces onto the rubber with heavy linen thread wrapped around each end. The armature is now ready to wind. Obtain a small amount of No. 22 gauge cotton-covered wire, solder one end to one of the segments of the commutator, then wind one end of the armature completely and cross over to wind the other end completely, soldering the end of the wire to the second commutator segment. Ensure that both ends of the armature are wound in the same direction so that the current in both parts of the winding creates magnetizing effects in the same direction. Insulate the winding from the core and each layer from one another using a high-quality thin writing paper.
Two small brushes should now be made from some thin spring brass and mounted on the brass piece as shown. These brushes should be insulated from the piece of brass and two small binding posts should be provided for making connections to them. The position of the commutator and brushes should be such that the brushes move from one segment to the other when the ends of the armature are directly in line with the ends of the permanent magnet.
Two small brushes should now be made from thin spring brass and mounted on the brass piece as shown. These brushes should be insulated from the brass piece, and two small binding posts should be added for making connections to them. The position of the commutator and brushes should be such that the brushes move from one segment to the other when the ends of the armature are directly in line with the ends of the permanent magnet.
A small pulley should be mounted upon the shaft to be used in transmitting the power. The whole device may be mounted in a horizontal position on a wooden base as shown, and the motor is complete.
A small pulley should be attached to the shaft for power transmission. The entire setup can be placed horizontally on a wooden base as illustrated, and the motor is ready to go.
How to Make a Humidity Indicator
A simple weather indicator that may be used in determining the condition of the atmosphere may be made as follows: Dress a small figure, in the form of a doll, with a piece of cloth, previously dipped in the following solution: Chloride of cobalt, 30 parts by weight; sodium chloride, 15 parts; gum arabic, 7-1/2 parts; calcium chloride, 4-1/2 parts, and water, 400 parts. This cloth will change color as the amount of moisture in the atmosphere changes, the change being due to the cobalt salt, which, in dry air, is lavender blue. As the moisture in the atmosphere increases, the color changes first to bluish red, then light red and finally pink, according to the amount of moisture. With a decrease in moisture, the colors change in the reverse order to that given above, and the blue color returns when the air becomes dry.
A simple weather indicator that can be used to determine atmospheric conditions can be made like this: Dress a small figure, like a doll, with a piece of cloth that has been dipped in the following solution: 30 parts by weight of cobalt chloride, 15 parts of sodium chloride, 7.5 parts of gum arabic, 4.5 parts of calcium chloride, and 400 parts of water. This cloth will change color as the moisture content in the air changes; the change is due to the cobalt salt, which is lavender blue in dry air. As the moisture in the atmosphere increases, the color first changes to bluish red, then light red, and finally pink, depending on the amount of moisture. When the moisture decreases, the colors change in the reverse order mentioned above, and the blue color returns when the air becomes dry.
The "Q" Trick
Lay out the form of the capital letter Q with coins on a table and ask someone in the audience to select a number and then ask that person to count up from one until the number is reached, beginning at A and stopping on the circle, for instance at B, then counting back again beginning with one, but, instead of counting on the tail, pass it and go around the circle, say, to C. The performer gives these instructions to the person doing the counting. The one selecting the number must not tell the performer what the number is, and the latter is to leave the room while the counting proceeds. The performer, before leaving the room, is to tell which coin will be the last one counted.
Arrange the capital letter Q using coins on a table and ask someone from the audience to choose a number. Then, instruct that person to start counting up from one until they reach the selected number, starting at A and stopping at the circle, like at B. After that, they should count back down, starting at one, but instead of counting along the tail, skip it and go around the circle, for example, to C. The performer provides these instructions to the counter. The person choosing the number must keep it a secret from the performer, who will leave the room while the counting takes place. Before exiting, the performer should state which coin will be the last one counted.

Take, for example, the number 7. Counting from A to B there are just 7 coins and counting back the last number or 7 will be at C. Try 9 for the number and the last one counted will also be C. The number of coins in the tail represents the number of coins in the circle from the intersection [361] of the tail and circle to the last number counted. For instance, the sketch shows 4 coins in the tail, therefore the last coin counted in the circle will be at C or the fourth coin from the intersection of the tail and circle.
Take, for example, the number 7. Counting from A to B, there are just 7 coins, and counting back, the last number or 7 will be at C. Try 9 for the number, and the last one counted will also be C. The number of coins in the tail represents the number of coins in the circle from the intersection [361] of the tail and circle to the last number counted. For instance, the sketch shows 4 coins in the tail, so the last coin counted in the circle will be at C or the fourth coin from the intersection of the tail and circle.
By slipping another coin in the tail the location of the last coin counted is changed, thereby eliminating any chance of exposing the trick by locating the same coin in the circle every time. This can be done secretly without being noticed.
By putting in another coin at the end, the spot of the last counted coin is shifted, which removes any chance of revealing the trick by finding the same coin in the circle each time. This can be done discreetly without anyone noticing.
To Keep Ants Away From Food
Suspend a shelf, breadbox or rack with wire around which is tied a piece of cotton cloth, saturated with a mineral oil. The ants will not cross the oil-soaked cloth.
Suspend a shelf, breadbox, or rack with wire that has a piece of cotton cloth tied around it, soaked in mineral oil. The ants won't cross the cloth soaked in oil.
Some strong wire hooks attached to the rack or shelf answer well to hang small articles on, such as bacon, bags of sugar, syrup cans, etc.—Contributed by C. B. Hosford, Swansea, Ariz.
Some sturdy wire hooks fixed to the rack or shelf work perfectly for hanging small things like bacon, bags of sugar, syrup cans, etc.—Contributed by C. B. Hosford, Swansea, Ariz.
Vaulting-Pole Holder
An adjusting device for a vaulting pole that can be easily fixed at any point on a round pole by using a wedge and ring, is shown in the sketch. The wedge carries a pin on which to place the cross pole. The manner of using this device as well as its construction is clearly indicated.—Contributed by Sterling R. Speirs, St. Louis, Mo.
An adjustable device for a vaulting pole that can be easily secured at any point on a round pole using a wedge and ring is shown in the sketch. The wedge has a pin for placing the cross pole. The way to use this device and its construction is clearly illustrated.—Contributed by Sterling R. Speirs, St. Louis, Mo.

The Ring on the Upright, Held in Position by the Wedge, Which in Turn Carries the Pole on the Pin
The ring on the upright, held in place by the wedge, which in turn supports the pole on the pin.
Flying Model Aeroplane for a Display
A novelty for a window display is made of a model aeroplane flying by its own power. To control the direction and make the model fly in a circle it is fastened to a long stick or beam which is pivoted in the center. The one shown was pivoted to a roller-skate wheel which in turn was fastened to a metal standard. The beam was attached to the skate wheel with two small bolts which were insulated and carried two brushes as commutator contacts.
A new feature in a window display is a model airplane flying under its own power. To steer it and make the model fly in a circle, it is attached to a long stick or beam that pivots in the center. The one shown is attached to a roller skate wheel, which is secured to a metal stand. The beam is connected to the skate wheel with two insulated bolts that also hold two brushes as commutator contacts.

Detail of Parts Showing Wire Connections and Model in Flight around the Central Axis
Detail of Parts Showing Wire Connections and Model in Flight around the Central Axis
The commutator rings were made of heavy brass strips, fastened to a round piece of wood which was attached to the metal standard. The wires from the current supply were connected to the commutator rings. From the brushes connecting wires were carried along the beam to the aeroplane motor which was a small battery motor with propeller.
The commutator rings were made of heavy brass strips, attached to a round piece of wood that was connected to the metal standard. The wires from the power supply were linked to the commutator rings. From the brushes, connecting wires ran along the beam to the airplane motor, which was a small battery motor with a propeller.
The opposite end of the beam was weighted to balance it. The first sketch shows the parts and the manner of making the connections. The aeroplane is driven in a circular path by its own power in a realistic manner.
The other end of the beam was weighted to keep it balanced. The first sketch illustrates the components and how to make the connections. The airplane is moved in a circular path by its own power in a realistic way.
An Electric Time Light
Although the modern alarm clock is a wonderfully effective piece of mechanism, it is, to say the least, very abrupt in its manner. It seldom confines its efforts to the chamber of its owner, but spreads its disturbance all over the building. It is very easy for a person to arise early in the summer and no greater difficulty should be experienced in winter, if the bedroom is brightly lighted at the proper hour. To do this simply and automatically became the problem.
Although today's alarm clock is a highly effective device, it can be quite jarring in how it works. It rarely limits its noise to just the owner's room but instead disrupts the entire building. It's quite easy for someone to wake up early in the summer, and waking up in winter shouldn't be any harder if the bedroom is well-lit at the right time. The challenge is to make this happen easily and automatically.

The first thought was to obtain one of those clock-actuated electric-light switches, such as the stores use, but this would not do, because it meant some unsightly wiring around the room. It was then remembered how, in the course of some experiments, an ordinary incandescent light was operated through a piece of No. 36 gauge wire without any sign of heating. If, then, a wire only 1/200 in. in diameter were of ample carrying capacity, surely a dollar watch would be sufficient to make the connection. Such being the case, the whole mechanism could readily be attached to the drop cord of a lamp directly above the socket, thus obviating any additional wiring. This all proved to be true, and the whole was made and attached in the course of a couple of hours.
The first idea was to get one of those clock-controlled electric light switches like the ones used in stores, but that wouldn't work because it would mean some messy wiring around the room. Then someone remembered how, during some experiments, an ordinary incandescent light was powered through a piece of No. 36 gauge wire without showing any signs of overheating. If a wire that's only 1/200 in. in diameter could handle the load, then a dollar watch would definitely be enough to complete the connection. So, the entire setup could easily be attached to the drop cord of a lamp directly above the socket, avoiding any extra wiring. It all turned out to be true, and the whole thing was built and attached in just a couple of hours.
While one might feel enthusiastic about this small and easily contrived affair, it is scarcely to be presumed that it would operate so effectively on one who had spent the larger part of the night tripping the "light fantastic," or in undue conviviality. An ordinary 16-cp. globe has thus far operated perfectly, and a 40-watt tungsten lamp would, if not too far away, surely awaken the hardest sleeper of sober habits.
While someone might feel excited about this small and easy-to-manage situation, it’s hard to believe it would work so well on someone who had spent most of the night dancing or partying too much. A typical 16-cp. bulb has worked perfectly so far, and a 40-watt tungsten lamp would definitely wake up even the heaviest sleeper who keeps sober, as long as it’s not too far away.
The base of the mechanism is a small piece of 1/4-in. hard wood, upon which is fastened a small brass bracket, A, bent so as to hold the watch from slipping down. A small clip, B, was then arranged so as to grip the neck of the watch after its lower edge had been placed against A, and a small brad at either side prevented lateral movement. In this way the watch was held firmly, yet in a manner that would permit its being taken out instantly when necessary. The glass and minute hand were removed. The brass bolt from an exhausted dry cell was placed at C, so as to clamp a small copper washer to which was soldered a narrow strip of copper, D, about 1/16 in. wide and cut from a leaf of an old dynamo brush. This strip is arranged so as to wipe the hour hand as it travels past, but being so thin, it has no appreciable effect on the time keeping. As illustrated, the device is set for six o'clock, but by loosening the nut C an hour's adjustment either way may be had. It is a very simple matter, however, to arrange the device so it will operate at any hour. In connecting up, one end of the drop cord is removed from the socket and attached to A, which throws the current through the watch, thence along the hand and down D to C, from where it is carried by a short piece of wire to the socket again. As there are so many circuits through the watch, the small current required for one light does not affect it in any way. Thus far, no trouble has been experienced in making this delicate connection with 110 volts, but if any should develop, the contacts may be tipped with the small pieces of platinum taken from a burned-out globe.
The base of the mechanism is a small piece of 1/4-in. hardwood, to which a small brass bracket, A, is attached, bent to keep the watch from slipping down. A small clip, B, is then arranged to grip the neck of the watch after its lower edge is placed against A, and a small brad on either side prevents side-to-side movement. This way, the watch is held securely but can be taken out quickly when needed. The glass and minute hand were removed. A brass bolt from an exhausted dry cell is placed at C to clamp a small copper washer, to which a narrow strip of copper, D, about 1/16 in. wide and cut from an old dynamo brush, is soldered. This strip is positioned to wipe the hour hand as it moves past, but since it is so thin, it doesn't significantly affect timekeeping. As shown, the device is set for six o'clock, but by loosening nut C, you can adjust it an hour in either direction. It’s quite simple to set the device to operate at any hour. When connecting, one end of the drop cord is removed from the socket and attached to A, which sends the current through the watch, then along the hand and down D to C, from where it goes through a short piece of wire back to the socket. Since there are so many circuits through the watch, the small current needed for one light does not impact it at all. So far, there have been no issues making this delicate connection with 110 volts, but if problems arise, the contacts can be tipped with small pieces of platinum taken from a burnt-out bulb.
The meat of a white English walnut may be easily removed by heating the nut in an oven or on top of a stove, then using a knife to pry the shell open.
The meat of a white English walnut can be easily removed by heating the nut in an oven or on a stovetop, then using a knife to pry the shell open.
A Small Shocking Machine

The Shocking Coil as It is Used for Amusement, or in the Manner a Current is Given a Patient
The Shocking Coil as It's Used for Fun, or How a Current is Administered to a Patient
An amusing as well as instructive shocking machine, usually called a medical coil, can be easily constructed from a discarded buzzer or electric bell, four binding posts, some pieces of insulated wire, two carbon rods, and a rheostat.
An entertaining and educational shocking device, commonly referred to as a medical coil, can be easily assembled using an old buzzer or electric bell, four binding posts, some insulated wire, two carbon rods, and a rheostat.

The Base upon Which the Buzzer and Rheostat are Fastened, and the Electrical Connections (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The base where the buzzer and rheostat are attached, and the electrical connections (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)

The Rheostat That is Used to Regulate the Flow of Current in the Carbon Hand Pieces (Fig. 3)
The Rheostat That is Used to Control the Current Flow in the Carbon Hand Pieces (Fig. 3)
A base for attaching the parts is made of a piece of poplar, 10 in. long, 5 in. wide, and 1/2 in. thick, which can be finished as desired, but a good method is to shape the edge like molding and give it a mahogany stain, and when dry apply a coat of white shellac, which should be allowed to dry a day, whereupon the surface is rubbed with prepared wax. When the base is ready, mount the buzzer at one end. This can be easily done by making an L-shaped piece of metal, A, which is fastened to the base with a screw, and to the yoke of the magnet coil with a small bolt. If the armature and its connections are also used from the buzzer, the height of the coils must be taken in consideration. These parts are fastened in position as shown, using an L-shaped piece of metal, B, for the spring end. The screw holding the armature spring to the base, as well as the vibrator screw, should be of such a length that it will [364] enter the base far enough to permit a connection for a wire in a countersunk hole bored in the base from the under side. Binding posts are placed in the corners of the base in holes countersunk from the under side for the screw heads.
A base for attaching the parts is made from a piece of poplar that is 10 inches long, 5 inches wide, and 1/2 inch thick. You can finish it however you like, but a good approach is to shape the edge like molding and stain it with mahogany. Once dry, apply a coat of white shellac, allowing it to dry for a day. After that, rub the surface with prepared wax. When the base is ready, mount the buzzer at one end. This can be done easily by making an L-shaped piece of metal, A, which is secured to the base with a screw, and to the yoke of the magnet coil with a small bolt. If the armature and its connections from the buzzer are also used, the height of the coils needs to be taken into account. These parts are secured in place as shown, using an L-shaped piece of metal, B, for the spring end. The screw holding the armature spring to the base, as well as the vibrator screw, should be long enough to enter the base sufficiently to allow for a wire connection in a countersunk hole drilled in the base from underneath. Binding posts are placed in the corners of the base in holes countersunk from the underside for the screw heads.
The rheostat is of the miniature-battery type, which has a round base and a coil of resistance wire with a lever passing over the coil. Such a rheostat can be purchased from an electrical store, but if the person constructing the shocking machine desires to make one, it is not difficult if a lathe is at hand.
The rheostat is a small battery-powered type, featuring a round base and a coil of resistance wire with a lever running over the coil. You can buy this kind of rheostat at an electrical store, but if someone building the shocking machine wants to make one, it's pretty easy to do if you have a lathe available.
To make the rheostat, turn up a disk, about 3 in. in diameter, from a piece of hard wood, such as oak, maple, or walnut, and form a circular groove in the upper surface, about 3/8 in. inside of the circumference. The groove is to admit a circular coil of resistance wire, and in making it, be sure to have it the proper size to take the coil snugly. The coil can be of any size, and to make it, resistance wire is wound around a piece of wire used as a mandrel. If the coil is 1/4 in., or a trifle smaller, in diameter, it will make a good size. Be sure that the depth of the groove is such that it will allow a part of the coils of the resistance wire to project above the surface of the wood disk. The coil of wire should be just long enough to fit in the groove and allow a 1-in. space between the ends, one of which is anchored to the base, at C, the other being attached to the binding post D. Drill a hole through the center of the disk and fasten a lever, taken from a switch, or one made of a piece of sheet brass, that will extend from the center to the outside of the disk, or over the resistance-wire coil. A small handle is attached to the outer end. A connection is made from the center support of the lever to the binding post E.
To create the rheostat, first, carve a disk about 3 inches in diameter from a piece of hardwood, like oak, maple, or walnut. Then, make a circular groove in the top surface, about 3/8 inch in from the edge. This groove will hold a circular coil of resistance wire, so make sure it fits the coil snugly. The coil can be any size; you can make it by winding resistance wire around a piece of wire used as a mandrel. A diameter of about 1/4 inch or slightly smaller works well. Ensure the groove's depth allows some of the resistance wire coils to stick up above the wooden disk's surface. The coil of wire should be just long enough to fit in the groove, leaving a 1-inch gap between the ends. One end should be anchored to the base at point C, and the other attached to binding post D. Drill a hole in the center of the disk and attach a lever from a switch or one made from a piece of sheet brass, extending from the center to the edge of the disk or over the resistance wire coil. Attach a small handle to the outer end. Finally, connect the center support of the lever to binding post E.
The connections for the buzzer and rheostat are made on the under side of the base, where grooves are cut to run the wires in, so that they will be below the surface of the wood. In the diagram, the binding post F is connected to the binding post D of the rheostat, which in turn is connected to the screw of the make-and-break point G. The other binding post H is connected to the bracket B supporting the armature spring. The binding post E of the rheostat is connected to the base binding post J. The magnet coils are connected, as shown, from K to L, and from M to B.
The connections for the buzzer and rheostat are made on the underside of the base, where grooves are cut to run the wires in, so they stay below the surface of the wood. In the diagram, binding post F is connected to binding post D of the rheostat, which is then connected to the screw of the make-and-break point G. The other binding post H is connected to the bracket B that supports the armature spring. Binding post E of the rheostat is connected to base binding post J. The magnet coils are connected as shown, from K to L, and from M to B.
The two pieces of carbon, which are used for the hand pieces, are connected with silk-insulated wire. These connections are made to the binding posts F and H. The other two binding posts, J and L, are connected to a battery. The carbons used may be purchased, or taken from an old battery. Two or more dry cells are used for the current. The rheostat controls the amount of current passing through the hand pieces.—Contributed by Gilbert Crossley, Erie, Pa.
The two pieces of carbon used for the hand pieces are connected with silk-insulated wire. These connections lead to the binding posts F and H. The other two binding posts, J and L, are connected to a battery. You can buy the carbon pieces or take them from an old battery. Two or more dry cells are used for the current. The rheostat controls how much current flows through the hand pieces.—Contributed by Gilbert Crossley, Erie, Pa.
Secret Compartment in Ordinary Table Drawer
It is frequently desired to have some handy place for storing valuables where there is but little chance of discovering them. Secret drawers in tables usually require special and expensive changes, but with only a few simple changes on a regular drawer of any ordinary table, a secret compartment can be made which is as secure as can ordinarily be figured on, outside of a steel safe. Having chosen the desired table, a partition should be placed across the entire back part of the drawer, allowing for necessary space in the secret compartment. This partition should resemble the real back of the drawer as closely as it is [365] possible to make it. The compartment must not be too wide, for the resulting small width of the front part of the drawer might then arouse suspicion. On the lower side of the secret compartment a strip of wood, A, should be attached with a screw, as shown in Fig. 1, allowing sufficient looseness so the strip may be turned end for end when necessary. With the strip set as shown, it will strike the front side B of the table when the drawer is pulled out, leaving the secret compartment still hidden. In order to expose this, it will be necessary to turn the strip, as shown in Fig. 2, when the drawer can be pulled out to its full length.
It’s often useful to have a convenient place to store valuables where they’re unlikely to be found. Secret drawers in tables typically need special and costly modifications, but with just a few simple adjustments to a regular drawer in any common table, a secret compartment can be created that is as secure as anything outside of a steel safe. After selecting the desired table, a divider should be placed across the entire back of the drawer, leaving enough space for the secret compartment. This divider should closely resemble the actual back of the drawer as much as possible. The compartment shouldn't be too wide, as that could make the front part of the drawer appear suspiciously small. On the underside of the secret compartment, a strip of wood, labeled A, should be attached with a screw, as illustrated in Fig. 1, allowing enough slack so it can be flipped around when needed. With the strip positioned as shown, it will hit the front side B of the table when the drawer is pulled out, keeping the secret compartment hidden. To reveal this compartment, you'll need to flip the strip, as shown in Fig. 2, allowing the drawer to be pulled out fully.

Two Positions of the Strip for Holding, or Giving Access to, the Secret Part, and a Hinged Strip (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Two Positions of the Strip for Holding or Giving Access to the Secret Part, and a Hinged Strip (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
It being necessary that the strip A be as long as the secret compartment is wide, to fully expose this, there may be cases where the drawer is not wide enough to allow the strip A to turn around. In that case the strip can be hinged to the back of the drawer as shown in Fig. 3. When it is hanging down, as shown by the dotted outline, the drawer may be pulled out to its full extent. When it is desired to lock the secret compartment, the hinged strip must be swung up in position, and fastened. An ordinary thumbscrew or eye can be used which, by a turn or two, will either release it or fasten it in place.—Contributed by Paul Durst, Detroit, Mich.
It’s essential that strip A is as long as the width of the secret compartment to fully reveal it. However, there may be situations where the drawer isn't wide enough for strip A to rotate. In this case, the strip can be attached to the back of the drawer as shown in Fig. 3. When it hangs down, as shown by the dotted outline, the drawer can be pulled out completely. To lock the secret compartment, the hinged strip must be lifted into position and secured. You can use a regular thumbscrew or eye that will either lock it in place or release it with a turn or two.—Contributed by Paul Durst, Detroit, Mich.
Inflating Handballs
When handballs become "dead," or no longer bounce freely, they may frequently be restored by inflating them with air. This can be done by means of a bulb attached to a hypodermic needle. The needle must be inserted through the soft plug which every inflated ball has, and which can be discovered by pressure. After the ball is inflated and the needle extracted, the soft rubber closes around the fine hole, preventing the escape of the air. If a leak is found, which allows the air to escape too rapidly, a repair can be made with a single-tube tire outfit.—Contributed by A. B. Wegener, Camden. N. J.
When handballs go "dead," meaning they no longer bounce properly, you can often bring them back to life by inflating them with air. This is done using a bulb attached to a hypodermic needle. You need to insert the needle through the soft plug that every inflated ball has, which you can find by applying pressure. Once the ball is inflated and you pull the needle out, the soft rubber seals up around the tiny hole, keeping the air from escaping. If there is a leak that lets air escape too quickly, you can fix it with a standard tire repair kit. —Contributed by A. B. Wegener, Camden, N. J.
A Garden-Bed Scarecrow
A very neat and successful scarecrow for garden beds can be made as follows: A number of corks are procured, and a feather is stuck in each end of them, as shown. These are tied to a string, spacing them from 1 to 2 ft. apart, and the string is hung over the beds. The slightest breeze will keep them fluttering, and no bird will come to rest on the beds.—Contributed by M. T. Canary, Chicago.
A neat and effective scarecrow for garden beds can be made like this: First, get several corks and attach a feather to each end, as shown. Tie these to a string, spacing them 1 to 2 ft apart, and hang the string over the beds. Even the slightest breeze will make them flutter, which will keep birds from landing on the beds.—Contributed by M. T. Canary, Chicago.

The Fluttering Feathers Attached to the String with Corks Scare the Birds Away
The fluttering feathers tied to the string with corks scare the birds away.
Measuring the Length of Wire Wound on a Spool
When winding magnet spools on a lathe, the exact amount of wire used can be easily determined by means of the device shown in the illustration. The large reel from which the wire is obtained is conveniently placed on a [366] loose mandrel, or rod, near the lathe, and in line with the spool which is to be wound. A grooved idler wheel, the exact diameter of which is known, is supported between the spool and wire reel so it may freely revolve; the number of its revolutions should be obtained, automatically, by a revolution counter. When using the device, the wire from the reel is placed once around the idler to insure the necessary grip to prevent it from sliding; then it is led to the spool. The exact diameter of the idler being known and the number of revolutions indicated, the true length of the wire wound on the spools can be easily determined by the following formula: Length of wire on spool in feet equals circumference of idler in feet times number of revolutions of idler.—Contributed by C. Swayne, St. Louis, Mo.
When winding magnet spools on a lathe, you can easily figure out the exact amount of wire used with the device shown in the illustration. The large reel from which the wire is taken is conveniently placed on a [366] loose mandrel or rod, positioned near the lathe and in line with the spool being wound. A grooved idler wheel, whose exact diameter is known, is set up between the spool and the wire reel so that it can spin freely; a revolution counter should automatically keep track of its revolutions. To use the device, the wire from the reel is wrapped once around the idler to ensure it grips properly and doesn't slip; then it is directed to the spool. Since the exact diameter of the idler is known and the number of revolutions is recorded, you can easily calculate the actual length of wire wound on the spools using this formula: Length of wire on spool in feet equals circumference of idler in feet times number of revolutions of the idler.—Contributed by C. Swayne, St. Louis, Mo.

Measuring the Length of Wire on a Spool with the Use of an Idler and Counter
Measuring the Length of Wire on a Spool Using an Idler and Counter
Homemade Lawn Sprinkler
With a short length of old hose, a serviceable lawn sprinkler can be quickly and easily made. One end is provided with a regular coupling for connecting it to the line of good hose. The other end is turned up for several inches, and securely wired to the main part, thereby shutting off any flow through it. Several cuts are made into it, about halfway across and 6 in. apart. If the water is forced in, the only means of escape will be through the slots, which will produce fine sprays, giving as good service as a manufactured sprinkler.—Contributed by A. B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.
With a short piece of old hose, you can quickly and easily make a usable lawn sprinkler. One end has a standard coupling to connect it to a good hose line. The other end is turned up a few inches and securely wired to the main part, which stops any flow through it. Several cuts are made into it, about halfway across and 6 inches apart. When water is pushed in, the only way out will be through the slots, creating fine sprays that work just as well as a store-bought sprinkler.—Contributed by A. B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth, Mass.

The Slots Cut in the Hose will Produce a Very Fine Spray of Water
The slots cut in the hose will create a very fine spray of water.
Homemade Toy Bank
The little bank illustrated is not exactly burglar-proof, but once put together it cannot be opened except by the destruction of one of the units of which it is composed. It requires but little skill to make, and would be a good problem for manual training, as it offers an excellent opportunity for teaching certain rudiments of woodworking by the application method.
The small bank shown isn’t completely theft-proof, but once assembled, it can only be opened by damaging one of its parts. It doesn’t take much skill to make, and it would be a great project for manual training, as it provides an excellent chance to teach some basic woodworking skills through hands-on experience.

Six Pieces of Wood as They are Put Together to Form a Toy Bank
Six Pieces of Wood As They Are Assembled to Create a Toy Bank
In its construction, six pieces of hard wood, of the dimensions shown in the sketch, are required. White wood will do if there is no hard wood at hand. The coin slot is 1/8 in. wide by 1-1/4 in. long, and is cut in only one piece.
In its construction, you need six pieces of hardwood, sized as shown in the sketch. White wood can be used if hardwood isn't available. The coin slot measures 1/8 inch wide by 1-1/4 inches long and is cut out of just one piece.
No difficulty will be experienced in putting the first five pieces together, but the sixth, or top, piece, shown in the sketch, will not go in, because the bottom edge of the raised side will strike the inside of the piece to the right. By beveling this edge with a chisel from top to bottom between the dadoes, or grooves, it can be forced down quite a distance and sprung in place by placing a block of wood on the high side and striking it a sharp blow with a heavy hammer.—Contributed by J. A. Shelly, Brooklyn, New York.
You won't have any trouble putting the first five pieces together, but the sixth piece, or the top piece shown in the sketch, won't fit because the bottom edge of the raised side will hit the inside of the piece to the right. By beveling this edge with a chisel from top to bottom between the dadoes, or grooves, you can force it down quite a bit and spring it into place by putting a block of wood on the high side and hitting it hard with a heavy hammer.—Contributed by J. A. Shelly, Brooklyn, New York.
An Electric Anemometer
By Wm. H. Dettman
The construction of this instrument is so simple that any amateur can make one and if accurate calibrations are desired, these can be marked by comparison with a standard anemometer, while both are placed in the wind.
The design of this instrument is so straightforward that anyone can create one, and if precise measurements are needed, these can be set by comparing it with a standard anemometer, while both are exposed to the wind.
The Indicator
The case of the indicator is built of thin wood—the material of an old cigar box will do—9 in. long, 6 in. wide and 1-1/2 in. deep. If cigar-box material is used, it must first be soaked in warm water to remove the paper. If a cover is to be used on the box, a slot, on an arc of a circle, must be cut through it to show the scale beneath. The arc is determined by the length of the needle from a center over the axis on which the needle swings. When the box is completed, smooth up the outside surface with fine sandpaper and give it a coat of stain.
The case for the indicator is made from thin wood—an old cigar box will work just fine—9 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 1.5 inches deep. If you’re using cigar box material, be sure to soak it in warm water first to remove the paper. If you want to put a cover on the box, you’ll need to cut a slot in it, shaped like an arc, so the scale underneath is visible. The arc is based on the length of the needle from the center over the axis where the needle swings. Once the box is finished, smooth the outside with fine sandpaper and apply a coat of stain.
The core of the magnet is made by winding several layers of bond paper around a pencil of sufficient size to make an inside diameter of slightly over 1/4 in., and a tube 2 in. long. Each layer of the paper is glued to the preceding layer.
The magnet's core is created by wrapping several layers of bond paper around a pencil that’s thick enough to achieve an inner diameter of just over 1/4 inch, and a tube that’s 2 inches long. Each layer of paper is glued to the layer beneath it.
Two flanges or disks are attached to the tube to form a spool for the wire. The disks are cut from thin wood, 1-1/4 in. square, and a hole bored through their centers so that each will fit on the tube tightly. One of them is glued to one end of the tube and the other fastened at a point 1/2 in. from the opposite end. The space between the disks is filled with seven layers of No. 22 gauge insulated magnet wire, allowing sufficient ends of the wire to project for connections. The finished coil is located in the box, as shown at A, Fig. 1.
Two flanges or disks are attached to the tube to create a spool for the wire. The disks are cut from thin wood, measuring 1-1/4 inches square, with a hole drilled through their centers so that each fits tightly on the tube. One disk is glued to one end of the tube, and the other is secured about 1/2 inch from the opposite end. The space between the disks is filled with seven layers of No. 22 gauge insulated magnet wire, leaving enough wire ends sticking out for connections. The finished coil is placed in the box, as shown at A, Fig. 1.

The Indicator Box with Coil, Needle and Scale, as It is Used in Connection with the Anemometer (Fig. 1)
The Indicator Box with Coil, Needle, and Scale, as It's Used with the Anemometer (Fig. 1)
The core for the coil is cut from a piece of 1/4-in. iron rod, 1-1/4 in. long, and a slot is cut in each end, 1/4 in. deep, into which brass strips are inserted and soldered, or otherwise fastened. The strips of brass are 3/16 in. wide, one 1-1/2 in. long and the other 3/4 in. Two 1/16 in. holes are drilled in the end of the long piece, and one 1/16 in. hole in the end of the short piece. The complete core with the brass ends is shown in Fig. 2.
The core for the coil is cut from a piece of 1/4-inch iron rod, 1-1/4 inches long, with a slot cut 1/4 inch deep in each end, where brass strips are inserted and soldered or otherwise secured. The brass strips are 3/16 inch wide, one measuring 1-1/2 inches long and the other 3/4 inch long. Two 1/16-inch holes are drilled at the end of the longer piece, and one 1/16-inch hole is drilled at the end of the shorter piece. The complete core with the brass ends is shown in Fig. 2.

The Metal Core for the Coil... (Fig. 2)
The Metal Core for the Coil... (Fig. 2)

...and the Bearing Block for the Axis of the Needle (Fig. 3)
...and the Bearing Block for the Needle's Axis (Fig. 3)
The needle B, Fig. 1, is made of a copper or brass wire, about 6 in. long, and is mounted on an axis at C. The detail of the bearing for the axis is shown in Fig. 3. The axis D is a piece of wood fitted in the U-shaped piece of brass and made to turn on brads as bearings, the center being pierced to receive the end of the needle. After locating the bearing for the axis C, Fig. 1, it is fastened in place so that the upper end or pointer of the needle will travel over the scale. The needle is then attached to the bearing after having been passed through the inner [368] hole of the longer brass strip of the core, and the coil is fitted with the core in the manner shown at D. A light brass coil spring is attached to each end of the core, as shown at E and F, the latter being held with a string, G, whose end is tied to a brad on the outside of the box, for adjustment. A better device could be substituted by attaching the end of the spring F to a nut and using a knurled-head bolt passed through the box side. One of the wires from the coil is attached to a push button, H, to be used when a reading of the instrument is made. The connections for the instrument consist of one binding post and a push button.
The needle B, Fig. 1, is made of copper or brass wire, about 6 in. long, and is mounted on an axis at C. The detail of the bearing for the axis is shown in Fig. 3. The axis D is a piece of wood fitted into the U-shaped piece of brass and is designed to rotate on brads acting as bearings, with the center drilled to hold the end of the needle. After positioning the bearing for the axis C, Fig. 1, it’s secured in place so that the upper end or pointer of the needle will move along the scale. The needle is then connected to the bearing after being inserted through the inner [368] hole of the longer brass strip of the core, and the coil is set with the core as shown at D. A lightweight brass coil spring is attached to each end of the core, as indicated at E and F, with the latter secured using a string, G, that’s tied to a brad on the outside of the box for adjustment. A better setup could involve connecting the end of the spring F to a nut and using a knurled-head bolt through the side of the box. One of the wires from the coil connects to a push button, H, which is used to take a reading from the instrument. The instrument’s connections include one binding post and a push button.

The Anemometer as It is Mounted on a Standard Similar to a Small Windmill Weather Vane (Fig. 4)
The Anemometer as It is Mounted on a Standard Similar to a Small Windmill Weather Vane (Fig. 4)
The Anemometer
The anemometer resembles a miniature windmill and is mounted on top of a building or support where it is fully exposed to the air currents. It differs from the windmill in that the revolving wheel is replaced by a cupped disk, A, Fig. 4, fitted with a sliding metal shaft, B, which is supported on crosspieces, CC, between the main frame pieces DD. The latter pieces carry a vane at the opposite end. The frame pieces are 1/2 in. thick, 2-1/4 in. wide and 36 in. long, and the crosspieces have the same width and thickness and are 4 in. long.
The anemometer looks like a small windmill and is placed on top of a building or pole where it can catch the air currents. Unlike a windmill, it uses a cupped disk, A, Fig. 4, instead of a spinning wheel, along with a sliding metal shaft, B, supported by crosspieces, CC, between the main frame pieces, DD. The frame pieces have a thickness of 1/2 in., a width of 2-1/4 in., and a length of 36 in., while the crosspieces have the same width and thickness and are 4 in. long.

(Fig. 5)
(Fig. 5)
A variable-resistance coil, E, is made as follows and fastened in the main frame. The core of this coil is a piece of wood, 2 in. square and 4 in. long, and wound with No. 18 gauge single-wound cotton-covered german-silver wire. The winding should begin 1/4 in. from one end of the core and finish 1/4 in. from the other, making the length of the coil 3-1/2 in. The ends of the wire are secured by winding them around the heads of brads driven into the core. A small portion of the insulation is removed from the wire on one side of the coil. This may be done with a piece of emery cloth or sandpaper. A sliding spring contact, F, is attached to the sliding shaft B, the end of which is pressed firmly on the bared portion of the wire coil. One end of a coil spring, which is slipped on the shaft between the pieces CC, is attached to the end crosspiece, and the other end is fastened to the sliding shaft so as to keep the shaft and disk out, and the flange H against the second crosspiece, when there is no air current applied to the disk A. The insulation of the standard upon which the anemometer turns is shown in Fig. 5. The standard J is made of a piece of 1/2-in. pipe, suitably and rigidly attached to the building or support, and the upper end, around which the anemometer revolves to keep in the direction of the air currents, is fitted with a plug of wood to insulate the 1/4-in. brass rod K. A bearing and electric-wire connection plate, L, is made of brass, 1/8 in. thick, 2 in. wide and 4 in. long. The bearing and connection plate M are made in a similar manner. The surface of the holes in these plates, bearing against the pipe J and the brass rod K, make the two connections for the wires from the variable-resistance coil E, Fig. 4, located on the main frame, to the wire connections between the two instruments. These wires should be weather-proof, insulated, attached as shown, and running to and connecting [369] the indicator with the anemometer at NN, Fig. 1.
A variable-resistance coil, E, is constructed as follows and secured in the main frame. The core of this coil is a piece of wood, 2 inches square and 4 inches long, wound with No. 18 gauge single-wound cotton-covered german-silver wire. The winding should start 1/4 inch from one end of the core and finish 1/4 inch from the other, making the length of the coil 3-1/2 inches. The ends of the wire are secured by wrapping them around the heads of brads that are driven into the core. A small section of the insulation is removed from the wire on one side of the coil. This can be done with a piece of emery cloth or sandpaper. A sliding spring contact, F, is attached to the sliding shaft B, the end of which presses firmly on the exposed portion of the wire coil. One end of a coil spring, which is slipped onto the shaft between the pieces CC, is attached to the end crosspiece, and the other end is secured to the sliding shaft to keep the shaft and disk out, and the flange H against the second crosspiece when there is no airflow on the disk A. The insulation of the standard that the anemometer rotates on is shown in Fig. 5. The standard J is made of a piece of 1/2-inch pipe, properly and securely attached to the building or support, and the upper end, around which the anemometer turns to align with the airflow, is fitted with a wooden plug to insulate the 1/4-inch brass rod K. A bearing and electrical wire connection plate, L, is made of brass, 1/8 inch thick, 2 inches wide, and 4 inches long. The bearing and connection plate M are made in a similar way. The surfaces of the holes in these plates, which come in contact with the pipe J and the brass rod K, create the two connections for the wires from the variable-resistance coil E, Fig. 4, located on the main frame, to the wire connections between the two instruments. These wires should be weatherproof, insulated, attached as shown, and running to and connecting the indicator with the anemometer at NN, Fig. 1.
Two or more dry cells must be connected in the line, and when a reading is desired, the button H, Fig. 1, is pushed, which causes the current to flow through the lines and draw the magnet core D in the coil, in proportion to the magnetic force induced by the amount of current passing through the resistance in the coils on E, Fig. 4, from the contact into which the spring F is brought by the wind pressure on the disk A.
Two or more dry cells need to be connected in the circuit, and when you want to take a reading, press the button H, Fig. 1. This will activate the current flow through the lines and draw the magnet core D in the coil, proportional to the magnetic force created by the amount of current going through the resistance in the coils on E, Fig. 4, from the contact that the spring F is moved to by the wind pressure on the disk A.
How to Make Stick Shellac
It is often desired to use shellac in solid or stick form, and to get it into this shape by melting and molding requires considerable time. A much quicker method is to place the shellac in a shallow box, spread it out in a thin layer and play the flame from a Bunsen burner upon it until the mass is melted and run together. Allow it to stand a few seconds, then, with moistened fingers, fold it over and over and shape it with the fingers. It is possible to make a stick 8 or 10 in. long and 5/8 in. in diameter in about 5 minutes.—Contributed by J. H. Beeber, Rochester, N. Y.
It’s often preferred to use shellac in solid or stick form, and turning it into this shape by melting and molding takes a lot of time. A much faster method is to put the shellac in a shallow box, spread it out in a thin layer, and apply a flame from a Bunsen burner until the mass melts and combines. Let it sit for a few seconds, then, using damp fingers, fold it over and over to shape it. You can make a stick that’s 8 to 10 inches long and 5/8 inch in diameter in about 5 minutes.—Contributed by J. H. Beeber, Rochester, N. Y.
Substitute for a Hose Reel
Not having the room to spare for the ordinary hose reel, I used as a substitute a piece of wire bent into the shape of a letter S and with its aid coiled the hose in a manner to expel the water and leave it in shape for storing.
Not having extra space for a regular hose reel, I used a piece of wire bent into an S shape instead, and with it, I coiled the hose in a way that got rid of the water and kept it organized for storage.

A Hook for Coiling a Hose Instead of Turning It on a Reel
A Hook for Coiling a Hose Instead of Winding It on a Reel
The hook A is sprung around the hose about 5 ft. from the connection joint and remains there permanently. The end of the hose with the connection C is then brought around in a circle and forced into the hook B. This forms the start for the coil and the hose is easily rolled up to the nozzle, the water being expelled during the operation.—Contributed by F. H. Aldrich, Toledo, Ohio.
The hook A is secured around the hose about 5 ft. from the connection joint and stays there permanently. The end of the hose with the connection C is then brought around in a circle and pushed into the hook B. This creates the beginning of the coil, and the hose is easily rolled up to the nozzle, with the water being expelled during the process.—Contributed by F. H. Aldrich, Toledo, Ohio.
Addressing a Roll of Papers
When addressing rolled-up papers it is difficult to write on the curved surface. The papers also have a tendency to roll away. By placing the roll in the hollow on the front edge of a large book, as shown in the sketch, it will be found easy to write on the wrapper.—Contributed by W. P. Shaw, Toronto, Canada.
When trying to write on rolled-up papers, it's tough because of the curved surface. The papers also tend to roll away. By placing the roll in the indentation on the front edge of a large book, as shown in the sketch, you’ll find it easier to write on the wrapper.—Contributed by W. P. Shaw, Toronto, Canada.

The Roll of Paper is Placed in the Curved Edge of a Book for Addressing
The roll of paper is placed along the curved edge of a book for addressing.
Repairing the Bruised Sides of a Motorboat
When the sides of a boat become scored or bruised scrape the parts clean and fill the depressions with wood cement. The wood cement or stick cement, as it is called, can be procured from a paint store. Heat the cement with a blowtorch and apply it to the bruised parts. Use a heated putty knife to smooth the cement and make the surface level. After sandpapering the fills and applying a coat of paint the boat sides will look as good as new. The cement will not chip or fall out.—Contributed by Henry Beck, Bronx, New York.
When the sides of a boat get scratched or damaged, clean the areas and fill the dents with wood cement. You can get wood cement, also known as stick cement, from a paint store. Heat the cement with a blowtorch and apply it to the damaged areas. Use a heated putty knife to smooth out the cement and level the surface. After sanding the fills and applying a coat of paint, the sides of the boat will look brand new. The cement won’t chip or fall out.—Contributed by Henry Beck, Bronx, New York.
How to Make an Electric Lamp Flasher
Procure two pieces of metal, one of brass and the other of sheet iron, 5 in. long, 1/2 in. wide, and 1/32 in., or just a little more, in thickness. Bend the brass strip into the form shown in Fig. 1, then place the brass piece on top of the iron and drill the holes A and B indicated in Fig. 2. After the brass piece has been bent, as shown in Fig. 1, it will of course be shorter than the iron strip and the iron strip must be cut off, or a brass strip a little longer than 5 in. can be secured and cut the same length as the iron strip after it is bent. The holes A and B should be 3/32 in. in diameter. The next thing to do will be to wind a heating coil about the brass strip. Wrap a very thin layer of sheet asbestos about the brass strip, and wind on the strip 18 ft. of No. 34 gauge bare superior resistance wire. Use a thread about .006 in. in diameter to separate the various turns. This thread can be removed after the winding is completed and the ends have been fastened. Rivet the iron and brass pieces together with a small brass rivet in the hole A, Fig. 2. After the two pieces are riveted together bend them into the form shown in Fig. 4 and then drill the two 1/8-in. holes C and D, as shown in Fig. 2. Tap the hole B, Fig. 2, to take a small machine screw.
Get two pieces of metal, one made of brass and the other from sheet iron, each 5 inches long, 1/2 inch wide, and just over 1/32 inch thick. Bend the brass strip into the shape shown in Fig. 1, then place the brass piece on top of the iron and drill the holes A and B as indicated in Fig. 2. After bending the brass piece as shown in Fig. 1, it will be shorter than the iron strip, so the iron strip needs to be cut down, or you can get a brass strip slightly longer than 5 inches and cut it to the same length as the iron strip after bending. The holes A and B should have a diameter of 3/32 inch. Next, wind a heating coil around the brass strip. Wrap a very thin layer of sheet asbestos around the brass strip, and then wind 18 feet of No. 34 gauge bare superior resistance wire onto the strip. Use a thread about 0.006 inches in diameter to separate the different turns. This thread can be removed after you finish winding and secure the ends. Rivet the iron and brass pieces together using a small brass rivet in hole A, Fig. 2. Once the two pieces are riveted together, bend them into the shape shown in Fig. 4 and then drill the two 1/8-inch holes C and D, as shown in Fig. 2. Tap hole B, Fig. 2, to fit a small machine screw.

Dimensions of the Brass Strip and Mounting Base, Showing the Location of the Holes and the Shape of the Brass Strip to Receive the Coil of Wire (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
Dimensions of the Brass Strip and Mounting Base, Showing the Location of the Holes and the Shape of the Brass Strip to Hold the Coil of Wire (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The base is constructed as follows: Procure a piece of slate, 5-3/8 in. long, 1-1/2 in. wide, and 1/2 in. in thickness. Drill the holes indicated in Fig. 3. The four corner holes are for mounting the flasher in its containing case, and should be about 1/8 in. in diameter. The holes E, F, G, and H should be 1/8 in. in diameter and countersunk with a 3/8-in. square-ended drill, on the under side, to a depth of 3/16 or 1/4 in. Cut from some 1/16-in. sheet brass a piece 1-3/8 in. long, and 1/2 in. wide. Drill two 1/8-in. holes in this piece, 7/8 in. apart and equally spaced from the ends. Procure four 1/8-in. brass bolts, two 1/2 in. in length, and two 1 in. in length. Secure four small washers and two additional nuts. Mount the combined iron and brass strip on the slate base, using a long and short bolt as shown in Fig. 4. One terminal of the winding should be placed under the head of the bolt J. Place a washer, K, between the head of the bolt and the wire. The brass strip L can now be mounted in a similar manner, as shown in Fig. 4. Place the other end of the winding under the head of the bolt M.
The base is made like this: Get a piece of slate that's 5-3/8 in. long, 1-1/2 in. wide, and 1/2 in. thick. Drill the holes shown in Fig. 3. The four corner holes are for attaching the flasher in its case and should be about 1/8 in. in diameter. The holes E, F, G, and H should also be 1/8 in. in diameter and countersunk on the underside with a 3/8-in. square-ended drill to a depth of 3/16 or 1/4 in. Cut a piece of 1/16-in. sheet brass that's 1-3/8 in. long and 1/2 in. wide. Drill two 1/8-in. holes in this piece, 7/8 in. apart and evenly spaced from the ends. Acquire four 1/8-in. brass bolts: two that are 1/2 in. long and two that are 1 in. long. Get four small washers and two extra nuts. Attach the combined iron and brass strip to the slate base using a long and a short bolt as shown in Fig. 4. One terminal of the winding should go under the head of bolt J. Place a washer, K, between the bolt head and the wire. The brass strip L can then be attached in a similar way, as shown in Fig. 4. Place the other end of the winding under the head of bolt M.

The Assembled Parts Showing the Complete Flasher and Electric Connections with Adjusting Screw (Fig. 4)
The Assembled Parts Showing the Complete Flasher and Electric Connections with Adjusting Screw (Fig. 4)
Obtain a small screw, N, Fig. 4, of such a length that its point will reach the brass strip L when the screw is placed in the hole B, Fig. 2. A lock nut, O, should be provided for this screw so that it will remain in adjustment. The point of the screw and the point on the brass plate where the screw touches should be of platinum, as the brass will not withstand the high temperature of the arc formed when the circuit is broken.
Obtain a small screw, N, Fig. 4, that is long enough for its tip to reach the brass strip L when the screw is inserted into the hole B, Fig. 2. A lock nut, O, should be used for this screw to keep it securely adjusted. The tip of the screw and the spot on the brass plate where the screw makes contact should be made of platinum, since brass cannot handle the high temperature of the arc created when the circuit is interrupted.
A metal box should now be provided to serve as a containing case and the flasher is complete. This box should be of such design and construction that it will comply with the requirements of the electrical inspection department having jurisdiction over the locality where the flasher is to be used.
A metal box should now be provided to serve as a case, and the flasher is complete. This box should be designed and built to meet the requirements of the electrical inspection department for the area where the flasher will be used.
The flasher should be connected in series with the lamp, the wires being fastened under the nuts on the bolts P and R, Fig. 4, and the screw N adjusted so that it lacks a small fraction of an inch of making contact with the [371] brass plate when there is no current in the winding. When the switch is turned on there will be a current through the lamp and winding in series. The brass strip will be heated more than the iron and it will expand more, thus forcing the point of the screw N down upon the brass plate, which will result in the winding about the brass strip being shorted and the full voltage will be impressed upon the lamp, and it will burn at normal candlepower. When the coil is shorted there will of course be no current in its winding and the brass strip will cool down, the screw N will finally be drawn away from contact with the brass plate, and the winding again connected in series with the lamp. The lamp will apparently go out when the winding is in series with it, as the total resistance of the lamp and winding combined will not permit sufficient current to pass through the lamp to make its filament glow. The time the lamp is on and off may be varied to a certain extent by adjusting the screw N.
The flasher should be connected in series with the lamp, with the wires secured under the nuts on bolts P and R, Fig. 4. The screw N should be adjusted so that it is just a tiny bit away from touching the [371] brass plate when there is no current in the winding. When the switch is turned on, a current will flow through the lamp and the winding in series. The brass strip will heat up more than the iron, causing it to expand more, which will push the point of screw N down onto the brass plate. This will short the winding around the brass strip, applying full voltage to the lamp, allowing it to burn at normal brightness. When the coil is shorted, there will be no current in its winding, and the brass strip will cool down, eventually pulling screw N away from contact with the brass plate, reconnecting the winding in series with the lamp. The lamp will seem to go out when the winding is in series with it since the combined total resistance of the lamp and winding won't allow enough current to flow through the lamp to light up its filament. You can adjust how long the lamp stays on and off to some degree by tweaking screw N.
Timing Photograph Prints
An amateur photographer insists that a timing clock in the darkroom is a needless luxury. In order to time printing exposures, which he does with a pendant tungsten light under a reflecting shade, he simply fastens the electric-light cord so that the lamp and shade will act like a pendulum bob which beats the seconds. Of course he makes no effort to be exact, but if the distance between the lamp and the point of suspension of the cord be about 39 or 40 in., the beats will be very nearly seconds. When the light is turned on, it is started swinging, and the operator can thus easily count seconds with sufficient accuracy, and, besides, it readily furnishes a guide for duplicating printing results.
An amateur photographer argues that a timer in the darkroom is an unnecessary luxury. To time his printing exposures, which he does with a hanging tungsten light under a reflecting shade, he just ties the electric cord so that the lamp and shade swing like a pendulum, marking the seconds. He doesn’t try to be precise, but if the distance between the lamp and where the cord is suspended is about 39 or 40 inches, the swings will closely match seconds. When the light is turned on, it starts swinging, allowing the photographer to easily count seconds with enough accuracy, and it also serves as a useful guide for replicating printing results.
The same principle can be applied to camera exposures, if so desired, by the following plan. Select some suitable place on the under side of the tripod plate, as, for instance, the screw head, and fasten a small string, having a weight attached to it about 39 in. from the point of support. Like the swinging lamp, this device too, will beat seconds. For convenience, one of the tripod legs may be marked to indicate the length of string needed, so that the operator at any time can quickly fasten a string, measure off the right length on the tripod leg, attach a bunch of keys, a knife, or any other convenient weight, even a small stone, and have a second-beating pendulum for time exposures.—Contributed by F. B. Lambert, Chicago.
The same principle can be used for camera exposures if you want by following this plan. Choose a suitable spot on the underside of the tripod plate, like the screw head, and attach a small string with a weight that hangs about 39 inches from the support point. Similar to a swinging lamp, this setup will also keep time in seconds. For convenience, one of the tripod legs can be marked to show the required string length, so the operator can easily attach the string, measure the right length on the tripod leg, and add a bunch of keys, a knife, or any handy weight, even a small stone, to create a second-beating pendulum for time exposures.—Contributed by F. B. Lambert, Chicago.
Supports for Camp-Fire Utensils
The sketch shows how to make a standard or support to hold cooking utensils over a camp fire. The main part or stake is made of a piece of gas pipe, on one end of which is turned an ordinary coupling, Fig. 1. This is used to furnish a strong head when the stake is driven into the ground. The rings and supports for the utensils are made of heavy wire bent into the shape required to hold the respective vessels. The sketch, Fig. 2, shows the manner of shaping the wires.
The sketch demonstrates how to create a standard or support for holding cooking utensils over a campfire. The main part, or stake, is made from a piece of gas pipe, with an ordinary coupling turned on one end, as shown in Fig. 1. This provides a sturdy head when the stake is driven into the ground. The rings and supports for the utensils are made from heavy wire bent into the necessary shapes to hold the different vessels. The sketch in Fig. 2 illustrates how to shape the wires.

A Piece of Gas Pipe Constitutes the Standard with Wires Attached for Holding the Utensils (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A piece of gas pipe serves as the standard with wires attached for holding the utensils (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A Rotary Tuning Coil
The rotary tuner shown in the sketch was designed by a correspondent of Modern Electrics. The circle is cut from 3/4-in. stock, 1 in. wide and well covered with insulating material. It is then wound with No. 24 single cotton-covered copper wire so that the coils will lie flat. All the arms are of 1/4-in. square brass. The supports are smaller in section. Sliders are mounted on the ends of the long arms and are kept in place by setscrews.
The rotary tuner illustrated in the sketch was created by a contributor to Modern Electrics. The circle is shaped from 3/4-inch thick stock, 1 inch wide, and is well insulated. It is then wrapped with No. 24 single cotton-covered copper wire so that the coils lay flat. All the arms are made of 1/4-inch square brass, with the supports being smaller in size. Sliders are attached to the ends of the long arms and are secured with setscrews.

Tuning Coil... (Fig. 1)
Tuning Coil... (Fig. 1)

...and Wiring Diagram (Fig. 2)
...and Wiring Diagram (Fig. 2)
The insulation on the wire is removed with a small piece of sandpaper pasted on a block of wood. This should be temporarily fastened to the revolving lever at the point where the contact is wanted, then the lever is turned until the insulation is removed. The wiring diagram shows the location of the tuning coil in the line.
The insulation on the wire is stripped with a small piece of sandpaper glued to a block of wood. This should be temporarily attached to the rotating lever at the spot where you want the contact, then the lever is turned until the insulation is removed. The wiring diagram indicates the position of the tuning coil in the line.
Preparing Sheet Music for Turning
Each page on sheet music having three or more pages should be cut 1/4 in. shorter than the preceding page, as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch. This will enable the player to quickly turn the pages one at a time.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Ia.
Each page of sheet music that has three or more pages should be cut 1/4 inch shorter than the previous page, as indicated by the dotted lines in the sketch. This will help the player quickly turn the pages one at a time.—Contributed by Chas. Homewood, Waterloo, Ia.

Leaves Cut for Turning
Leaves Cut for Turning
Toy Parachute Cut-Away for Kite Lines
An interesting pastime while flying kites is to attach large toy parachutes to the lines and have some device to drop them when they are at a great height. In Fig. 1 is shown how the parachute is dropped by the burning of a piece of punk.
An enjoyable activity while flying kites is to attach large toy parachutes to the lines and have a mechanism to drop them from a high altitude. In Fig. 1, you can see how the parachute is released by burning a piece of punk.
Another method is shown in Fig. 2. It is only necessary to send a piece of paper or cardboard along the line and when it strikes the wire coil A (Fig. 2) the part B slides out of the loops C, the end D will then fall and disengage the loop G on the end of the parachute string. The wires E and F are twisted around the kite string.—Contributed by Thos. De Loof, Grand Rapids, Michigan.
Another method is shown in Fig. 2. You just need to send a piece of paper or cardboard along the line, and when it hits the wire coil A (Fig. 2), part B will slide out of the loops C. The end D will then drop and release loop G at the end of the parachute string. The wires E and F are twisted around the kite string.—Contributed by Thos. De Loof, Grand Rapids, Michigan.
How to Make an Electric Furnace

The Furnace Consists of a Flowerpot in Which a Crucible is Set, and on Either Side the Carbon Holders are Fastened to the Base (Fig. 5)
The furnace is made up of a flowerpot that holds a crucible, and on either side, the carbon holders are attached to the base (Fig. 5).
A small electric furnace that will be very serviceable in a laboratory may be made as follows:
A small electric furnace that will be very useful in a laboratory can be made like this:
First procure a small clay flowerpot, about 4 in. in diameter at the bottom, and also a small clay crucible, about 2 in. in diameter at the bottom and at least 1 in. less in height than the flowerpot, and having as nearly as possible the same slope to its sides as the pot. Now obtain a small quantity of asbestos compound and pack it around the small crucible inside the flowerpot. Make sure the crucible is in the exact center of the flowerpot and that their tops are even with each other. Assuming that ordinary electric-light carbons are to be used, which are about 1/2 in. in diameter, drill two 5/8-in. holes, exactly opposite each other, through the walls of the flowerpot and asbestos compound so that they enter the crucible about 3/4 in. above its bottom on the inside. A suitable lid for the furnace may be made from 1/4-in. sheet asbestos and should be large enough to cover the top of the flowerpot.
First, get a small clay flowerpot that’s about 4 inches in diameter at the bottom, and also a small clay crucible that’s about 2 inches in diameter at the bottom and at least 1 inch shorter than the flowerpot, making sure it has sides that slope similarly to the pot. Now, take a small amount of asbestos compound and pack it around the small crucible inside the flowerpot. Ensure the crucible is centered perfectly in the flowerpot and that their tops are even. Assuming you’re using standard electric light carbon rods, which are about ½ inch in diameter, drill two 5/8-inch holes directly opposite each other through the walls of the flowerpot and asbestos compound so they enter the crucible about ¾ inch above its bottom on the inside. A suitable lid for the furnace can be made from ¼-inch sheet asbestos and should be large enough to cover the top of the flowerpot.

Details of the Base, Rod and Handle for Each Carbon Feed, Which is Attached to the Large Base on One Side of the Furnace (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Details of the base, rod, and handle for each carbon feed, which is connected to the large base on one side of the furnace (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
The feeds and supports for the carbon electrodes are constructed as follows: Procure two pieces of 1/8-in. brass, 1 in. wide and 9 in. long. Cut a 1/8-in. groove lengthwise in the center of these pieces to within 1-1/2 in. of each end, as shown in Fig. 1. Drill four 1/8-in. holes, AA, in each piece, a 3/8-in. hole, B, in one end and a 3/16-in. hole, C, in the other end. Now bend the ends up at right angles to the remainder of the piece along the dotted lines shown at D and E. Next obtain two 3/8-in. rods, 10-3/16 in. long. Turn one end of each down to a 3/16-in. diameter for a distance of 3/8 in. From that point thread the same end of the rods for a distance of 6 in. Drill a 1/16-in. hole in each end of the rods a little less than 1/4 in. from the ends. The dimensions of the rods are given in Fig. 2. Two small rubber or wooden handles, similar to the one shown in Fig. 3, should now be made and fastened to the large ends of the rods by means of 1/16-in. steel pins. Obtain two pieces of brass of approximately the following dimensions: 1 in. by 1 in. by 3 in. Drill four holes in each of these pieces as shown in Fig. 4. The hole H should be just large enough to allow the carbon to enter, or about 1/2 in. in diameter. The hole G should be tapped to take a 1/4-in. machine screw, the hole F should be threaded so that the threaded rods will enter, and a small binding post should be mounted on a lug fastened in the hole J. Cut away one end of this piece as shown in Fig. 4 until it is a little less than 1/8 in. in thickness, or so it will enter the grooves cut in the brass strips.
The feeds and supports for the carbon electrodes are made as follows: Get two pieces of 1/8-in. brass, 1 in. wide and 9 in. long. Cut a 1/8-in. groove lengthwise in the center of these pieces, stopping 1-1/2 in. from each end, as shown in Fig. 1. Drill four 1/8-in. holes, labeled AA, in each piece, a 3/8-in. hole, labeled B, at one end, and a 3/16-in. hole, labeled C, at the other end. Next, bend the ends up at right angles to the rest of the piece along the dotted lines marked D and E. Then, get two 3/8-in. rods that are 10-3/16 in. long. Reduce one end of each rod to a 3/16-in. diameter for 3/8 in. From that point, thread the same end of the rods for 6 in. Drill a 1/16-in. hole in each end of the rods, slightly less than 1/4 in. from the ends. The dimensions of the rods are shown in Fig. 2. Two small rubber or wooden handles, similar to the one in Fig. 3, should be made and attached to the large ends of the rods using 1/16-in. steel pins. Obtain two pieces of brass with dimensions approximately 1 in. by 1 in. by 3 in. Drill four holes in each piece as indicated in Fig. 4. The hole labeled H should be just big enough for the carbon to fit through, around 1/2 in. in diameter. The hole labeled G should be tapped for a 1/4-in. machine screw, the hole labeled F should be threaded to allow the threaded rods to enter, and a small binding post should be mounted on a lug attached in hole J. Cut away one end of this piece as shown in Fig. 4 until it is slightly less than 1/8 in. thick, so it can fit into the grooves cut in the brass strips.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
The parts of the furnace are now ready to assemble, which may be done as follows: Procure a piece of well seasoned board, hard wood if possible, about 1 in. thick, 8 in. wide and perhaps 20 in. long. Cover one side of this board and the edges with some 1/8-in. sheet asbestos. Now place the flowerpot in the exact center and then mount the grooved brass strips one on either side of it with the longest dimension parallel to the longest dimension [374] of the board and the inside end about 1 in. from the side of the pot. The end with the 3/16-in. holes should be next to the pot. Assemble the parts of the carbon feeds and then cut out some circular disks of asbestos to place under the flowerpot so as to raise it to such a position that the holes in its sides will be on a line with the carbon rods. Three long screws should now be placed in the board, forming the base, in such a position as to hold the flowerpot always in place. This completes the furnace proper, which is shown in Fig. 5.
The parts of the furnace are now ready to be assembled, which can be done as follows: Get a piece of well-seasoned wood, preferably hardwood, about 1 inch thick, 8 inches wide, and around 20 inches long. Cover one side of this board and the edges with some 1/8-inch sheet asbestos. Place the flowerpot in the exact center, then attach the grooved brass strips on either side of it with the longest dimension aligned with the longest dimension [374] of the board, keeping the inside end about 1 inch from the side of the pot. The end with the 3/16-inch holes should be next to the pot. Assemble the parts of the carbon feeds, then cut out some circular disks of asbestos to place under the flowerpot to elevate it so that the holes in its sides line up with the carbon rods. Three long screws should be placed into the board to hold the flowerpot securely in place. This completes the furnace, which is shown in Fig. 5.
The furnace can now be put into operation provided there is a suitable current rheostat to connect in series with the carbon arc to prevent an excessive current being taken from the line. If such a rheostat is not available, a serviceable one may be made as follows:
The furnace can now be put into operation as long as there is a suitable current rheostat to connect in series with the carbon arc to prevent excessive current from being drawn from the line. If such a rheostat isn't available, a usable one can be made as follows:
Obtain two pieces of 1/16-in. sheet iron, 6 by 6 in., that are to form the end plates. Cut off the corners of one piece so as to form an octagon and drill a number of 1/8-in. and 1/4-in. holes in it, as shown in Fig. 6. Bend the corners of the other piece down along the dotted lines marked L, Fig. 7, and then make a second bend in each corner along the dotted lines K, so that the outermost portion of the corner is parallel to the main portion of the piece. Drill a number of 1/8-in. holes in this piece as indicated. A 3-in. opening should be cut in the center of this piece to give access to the interior of the completed rheostat. Now obtain eight 3/8-in. iron rods, 10 in. long. Drill and tap each end of these rods to accommodate a 1/8-in. machine screw. Wrap several layers of thin sheet asbestos around each rod and tie it in place with some thread. These rods should now be fastened between the end plates by means of a number of iron machine screws. Mount four back-connected binding posts on the plate shown in Fig. 6, making sure they are insulated from the plate by means of suitable bushings and washers.
Get two pieces of 1/16-in. sheet iron, each measuring 6 by 6 in., which will serve as the end plates. Trim the corners of one piece to create an octagon shape and drill several 1/8-in. and 1/4-in. holes in it, as shown in Fig. 6. Bend the corners of the other piece down along the dotted lines marked L in Fig. 7, then make a second bend in each corner along the dotted lines K so that the outer edge of the corner is parallel to the main part of the piece. Drill a number of 1/8-in. holes in this piece as indicated. Cut a 3-in. opening in the center of this piece to allow access to the interior of the finished rheostat. Next, get eight 3/8-in. iron rods that are 10 in. long. Drill and tap each end of these rods to fit a 1/8-in. machine screw. Wrap several layers of thin sheet asbestos around each rod and secure it with some thread. These rods should now be attached between the end plates using several iron machine screws. Attach four back-connected binding posts to the plate shown in Fig. 6, ensuring they are insulated from the plate with appropriate bushings and washers.

Detail of the Upper and Lower End Plates That are Used in Making a Rheostat (Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
Detail of the Upper and Lower End Plates Used to Make a Rheostat (Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
Procure a small quantity of No. 14 gauge iron wire. Fasten one end of the wire under the head of the screw holding one of the binding posts in place and then wind it around the rods about 20 times, making the distance between the turns equal to the diameter of the wire. After winding on the 20 turns, attach a short piece of wire to the main wire and fasten the free end of the short piece to one of the other binding posts. Wind on 20 more turns, and make another connection to the third binding post, then complete the [375] winding and attach the end to the remaining binding post. Different amounts of this resistance can now be connected in series with the arc by changing the connections from one binding post to another. The rheostat may be located on a bracket fastened to the wall, but care must be taken not to place it in such a position that it will come into contact with inflammable material. As an extra precaution, the circuit should be properly fused.
Get a small piece of No. 14 gauge iron wire. Attach one end of the wire under the head of the screw holding one of the binding posts in place, then wrap it around the rods about 20 times, keeping the space between the wraps equal to the wire’s diameter. Once you've made the 20 turns, connect a short piece of wire to the main wire and secure the free end of the short piece to one of the other binding posts. Wrap on 20 more turns, make another connection to the third binding post, and then finish the winding and connect the end to the last binding post. You can now connect different amounts of this resistance in series with the arc by changing the connections from one binding post to another. The rheostat can be mounted on a bracket attached to the wall, but be careful not to position it where it could touch flammable materials. As an added precaution, the circuit should be properly fused.
Cleaning Brass Articles
Embossed or undercut brass work may be easily cleaned by boiling the pieces in a strong solution of caustic soda or lye, and then immersing them in a mixture of hydrochloric acid, 6 parts; water, 2 parts, and nitric acid, 1 part, until they become covered with a dark deposit. Take them from the solution and remove the black substance with a fine scratch brush. After cleaned in this manner, rinse in hot water and dry in hot sawdust.
Embossed or undercut brass work can be easily cleaned by boiling the pieces in a strong solution of caustic soda or lye, and then soaking them in a mixture of hydrochloric acid (6 parts), water (2 parts), and nitric acid (1 part) until they get covered with a dark residue. Remove them from the solution and use a fine scratch brush to wipe away the black substance. After cleaning this way, rinse in hot water and dry in hot sawdust.
A fine orange-yellow tinge may be given to the brass by substituting an equivalent weight of powdered alum for the nitric acid in the solution.—Contributed by Mrs. Richard F. Pohle, E. Lynn, Mass.
A nice orange-yellow tint can be added to the brass by replacing an equivalent amount of powdered alum for the nitric acid in the solution.—Contributed by Mrs. Richard F. Pohle, E. Lynn, Mass.
A Whetting Block
A handy tool gauge for sharpening the various tools about the household is made of a block of wood with the sides of one end cut sloping in different degrees so that each will serve to secure the proper slant of the cutting edge on a certain tool.
A useful tool gauge for sharpening the different tools around the house is made from a piece of wood, with the sides of one end cut at different angles. Each angle helps to ensure the correct slant of the cutting edge on a specific tool.
The block of wood with the corners cut is shown in Fig. 1, and the manner of whetting a chisel is shown in Fig. 2.—Contributed by Will Parker, Wibaux, Mont.
The block of wood with the corners cut is shown in Fig. 1, and the way to sharpen a chisel is shown in Fig. 2.—Contributed by Will Parker, Wibaux, Mont.

The Sloping Edges on the Block of Wood and the Manner of Whetting a Chisel (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The Sloping Edges on the Block of Wood and the Way to Sharpen a Chisel (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A cardboard cut the same size as a page and fastened with paper clips in the center of a magazine will prevent the pages from folding over when the magazine is placed in a bookcase.
A piece of cardboard the same size as a page, secured with paper clips in the center of a magazine, will keep the pages from bending when the magazine is stored on a bookshelf.
Submarine Photographs
A photographer at a seashore resort, wishing to increase his sales of souvenir postal cards, rigged up a device for producing negatives to make "submarine" pictures. The device consisted of an aquarium, about 40 in. long, 18 in. high and 6 in. wide. The aquarium was designed to stand on edge or the narrow way, and was equipped with rocks, living sea moss, kelp, and some fish, and the bottom was covered with sand and shells.
A photographer at a beach resort, hoping to boost his sales of souvenir postcards, set up a device to create "underwater" photos. The device was an aquarium, about 40 inches long, 18 inches high, and 6 inches wide. The aquarium was made to stand on its side and was filled with rocks, live sea moss, kelp, and some fish, while the bottom was covered with sand and shells.

The Camera Set in Front of the Aquarium Ready to Make a Submarine Picture
The camera is set up in front of the aquarium, ready to take an underwater photo.
A canvas was hung back of the aquarium and the camera set in front at such a distance as to make a negative of only the water and the prepared sea bottom. Very fine views that will give the appearance of being made at the bottom of the sea can be produced.
A canvas was hung behind the aquarium and the camera was placed in front at just the right distance to capture only the water and the arranged ocean floor. This setup can produce stunning images that look like they were taken from the bottom of the sea.
Mending Paper-Pulp Utensils
Pails, washtubs, and other receptacles made of paper pulp, when cut and worn, may be easily mended with adhesive tape. After this is applied to the place to be mended, give the mended part a coating of paint, and when the paint has dried, the surface is given another coat to match the color of the article mended. Leaks may be entirely stopped in this way at a very reasonable cost.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
Buckets, washbasins, and other containers made of paper pulp, when they become damaged and worn, can be easily fixed with adhesive tape. After applying the tape to the damaged area, paint over the repaired part, and once the paint is dry, apply another coat to match the color of the item you’ve mended. This method can completely stop leaks at a very reasonable cost.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
A Homemade Mailing Tube
A photograph or manuscript may be sent through the mail unmounted without the danger of being broken by placing it in a tube made as follows: For an 8 by 10-in. photograph procure a piece of cardboard 6 by 10 in., plain mounting board preferred, and cut halfway through the card in three places as shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 1. Then fold it in a triangular shape as shown in Fig. 2. It is easy to make such a tube to fit any photograph or manuscript to be mailed.—Contributed by A. H. Schaefer, Buffalo, N. Y.
A photograph or manuscript can be mailed unmounted without the risk of damage by putting it in a tube made like this: For an 8 by 10-inch photograph, get a piece of cardboard that’s 6 by 10 inches, preferably plain mounting board, and cut halfway through the card in three spots as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 1. Then, fold it into a triangle like shown in Fig. 2. It’s easy to create a tube to fit any photograph or manuscript that needs to be sent by mail.—Contributed by A. H. Schaefer, Buffalo, N. Y.

The Bends in the Cardboard are Made on Lines Equal Distances Apart to Form a Triangle (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The bends in the cardboard are made on lines that are equally spaced apart to create a triangle (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Cutter for Lace Leather

Lace leather may be easily cut with an ordinary pocket knife having a U-shaped block fitted on the edge of the blade. The width of the opening should be exactly the same as the thickness of the leather and the width of the lace is determined by the distance between the blade and the depth of the notch. Several places can be provided for the blade to cut different widths of lacing.—Contributed by A. K. Runkle, Kinsman, O.
Lace leather can be easily cut with a regular pocket knife that has a U-shaped block attached to the edge of the blade. The opening should match the thickness of the leather exactly, and the width of the lace is determined by the space between the blade and the depth of the notch. You can set up multiple positions for the blade to cut various widths of lacing. —Contributed by A. K. Runkle, Kinsman, O.
Refinishing Chairs
When refinishing chairs, a good way to get at the bottom part is to turn the chair upside down and place its seat on the seat of another chair. The legs and rungs can thus be easily cleaned and varnished.—Contributed by A. Mandeville, Ware, Mass.
When refinishing chairs, a good way to access the bottom part is to turn the chair upside down and place its seat on the seat of another chair. This makes it easy to clean and varnish the legs and rungs. —Contributed by A. Mandeville, Ware, Mass.
An Electric Gas Lighter
A very simple and inexpensive electric gas-lighting device is shown in the accompanying illustration. The gas is ignited by means of an electric spark which is produced between the two parts A and B of an electric circuit. This circuit is composed of a source of electrical energy, such as a number of dry cells, a kick coil, the connecting leads, and a special operating switch for opening and closing the circuit to produce the spark. The circuit is normally open, but as the lever controlling the gas valve is moved from one position to the other, by pulling the chains, the lever C is caused to move through a certain arc. Now, as this lever C moves, its upper end passes the projecting point B, which is attached to the upper portion of the burner, and the electric circuit will be completed and broken. Just as the point A leaves contact with the point B an arc will be produced. This arc is greatly intensified by the kick coil, which acts as a sort of reservoir in which energy is stored while the circuit is closed, and upon opening the circuit this stored energy is given out by the kick coil and increases the size of the arc.
A very simple and affordable electric gas-lighting device is shown in the accompanying illustration. The gas is ignited by an electric spark created between the two parts A and B of an electric circuit. This circuit consists of a power source, like a set of dry cells, a kick coil, connecting wires, and a special switch to open and close the circuit to create the spark. The circuit is usually open, but when the lever that controls the gas valve is moved from one position to another by pulling the chains, lever C moves through a specific arc. As this lever C moves, its upper end passes the projecting point B, which is attached to the top of the burner, completing and breaking the electric circuit. Just as point A loses contact with point B, an arc is produced. This arc is greatly enhanced by the kick coil, which acts like a reservoir where energy is stored while the circuit is closed, and when the circuit is opened, this stored energy is released by the kick coil, increasing the size of the arc.

The Igniting Points as They are Attached to a Gas Burner to Work Automatically
The Igniting Points as They are Attached to a Gas Burner to Work Automatically
The points A and B should both be made of platinum, as other metals will not withstand the extremely high temperature of the arc. Pieces of platinum that will serve very nicely for the purpose may be obtained from an old incandescent lamp. The piece B is mounted on a brass collar, D, by means of a small screw, E. The brass collar D is held in place by the screw F, which draws the two ends together. This collar must be insulated from the stem or fixture by some thin sheets of mica. The upper end of the piece of platinum B should be just high enough to come within the lower edge of the gas flame.
The points A and B should both be made of platinum, as other metals won’t withstand the extremely high temperature of the arc. You can get pieces of platinum that will work perfectly for this from an old incandescent lamp. Piece B is mounted on a brass collar, D, using a small screw, E. The brass collar D is secured by the screw F, which pulls the two ends together. This collar needs to be insulated from the stem or fixture with thin sheets of mica. The top end of the platinum piece B should be just high enough to come within the lower edge of the gas flame.
Now mount an arm, C, on the valve stem so that it stands in a vertical position when the lever to which the chains are attached is in a horizontal position. Bend this arm into the form [377] shown in the figure and cut its upper end off so that it is about 1/2 in. below the outwardly projecting end of the piece of platinum B. Drill a small hole in the upper end of C, and insert a piece of platinum and run some solder around it.
Now attach an arm, C, to the valve stem so that it stands vertically when the lever with the chains is horizontal. Shape this arm into the form [377] shown in the figure and trim its upper end so that it is about 1/2 inch below the outwardly extending end of the platinum piece B. Drill a small hole in the upper end of C, insert a piece of platinum, and apply some solder around it.
Then the complete burner and valve are mounted on the gas fixture, and from the collar D an insulated wire is run to the point where the battery and kick coil are to be located. The gas fixture itself is to form one side of the electric circuit, and one terminal of the battery should be connected to the gas pipe as shown in the figure.
Then the complete burner and valve are attached to the gas fixture, and an insulated wire is run from the collar D to the location where the battery and kick coil will be placed. The gas fixture will serve as one side of the electric circuit, and one terminal of the battery should be connected to the gas pipe as illustrated in the figure.
A kick coil may be made as follows: Procure a small quantity of rather small soft-iron wire and cut a sufficient number of 8-in. lengths to make a bundle about 7/8 in. in diameter. From some good writing paper make a tube, 8 in. long and 7/8 in. in outside diameter. Use at least six layers of paper and glue the various layers together in forming this paper tube. After the tube has dried thoroughly, fill it with the pieces of iron wire until it is perfectly hard. Cut from some 1/2-in. hard wood, two pieces, 3 in. square, and drill a 7/8-in. hole in the center of each of these to a depth of 3/8 in. Now glue these pieces to the completed core and the winding can begin as soon as the glue is dry. Wind on this spool six layers of double cotton-covered No. 18 gauge wire, insulating the various layers from each other with several thicknesses of good writing paper. This coil is then mounted on a wooden base and suitable terminals provided.
A kick coil can be made like this: Get a small amount of thin soft-iron wire and cut enough pieces to make a bundle about 7/8 inch in diameter, each 8 inches long. Take some good writing paper and create a tube that's 8 inches long and 7/8 inch in outside diameter. Use at least six layers of paper and glue them together to form the tube. Once the tube is completely dry, fill it with the pieces of iron wire until it feels solid. Cut two pieces from 1/2-inch hardwood, each 3 inches square, and drill a 7/8-inch hole in the center of each to a depth of 3/8 inch. Glue these pieces to the completed core, and once the glue is dry, you can start winding. Wind six layers of double cotton-covered No. 18 gauge wire onto this spool, making sure to insulate each layer with several thicknesses of good writing paper. Finally, mount this coil on a wooden base and add appropriate terminals.
At least four dry cells will be required to give satisfactory results. Bear in mind that the gas must be escaping from the burner when the arc is formed. The adjustment of the arm A, as given above, may result in the gas valve being closed when the arc is formed, and the device will then fail to operate. If this is the case, the arm C should be loosened and moved back so that the circuit is broken at a later time while the valve is being moved from the "off" to "on" position. The circuit should be closed for some little time before it is opened so that some energy may be stored in the kick coil. If the wire A is made long enough to project a short distance above B, it will result in the circuit being closed for a longer time than it would if they just touched.
At least four dry cells will be needed to achieve good results. Remember that the gas must be escaping from the burner when the arc forms. Adjusting arm A as mentioned earlier might cause the gas valve to close when the arc is created, and the device will then not work. If that happens, you should loosen arm C and move it back so that the circuit breaks later while the valve is switched from "off" to "on." The circuit should be closed for a little while before it opens again to allow some energy to be stored in the kick coil. If wire A is long enough to extend a bit above B, it will keep the circuit closed longer than if they just touched.
Stretching Tight-Fitting Shoes
A tight-fitting shoe can be stretched by filling it tightly with oats dampened in water and packing some old paper in the top. The grain will quickly swell and, as the leather will get softened by the dampness, the shoe will be rapidly stretched. Allow time for the oats to dry out before removing them.—Contributed by Fred L. King, Islip, New York.
A tight shoe can be stretched by filling it tightly with oats that have been soaked in water and packing some old paper in the top. The oats will quickly swell, and as the leather gets softened by the moisture, the shoe will stretch. Make sure to let the oats dry out before taking them out.—Contributed by Fred L. King, Islip, New York.
Pad for a Percolator

To prevent heating the bowl of a percolator and burning the handle, as often happens when it is placed on a stove, use an ordinary asbestos pad with a hole cut in the center as shown, just large enough to admit the foot of the percolator.—Contributed by Mrs. G. W. Coplin, Bay City, Mich.
To avoid overheating the bowl of a percolator and damaging the handle, which often happens when it's on a stove, use a regular asbestos pad with a hole cut in the center, just big enough to fit the foot of the percolator.—Contributed by Mrs. G. W. Coplin, Bay City, Mich.
If a motorcycle engine is raced while on the stand, the cylinder will heat, often with the result that it is ruined.
If you rev a motorcycle engine while it's on the stand, the cylinder will heat up, and it can often end up getting damaged.
[378]
Compass Time Chart
A very instructive little instrument can be easily made for telling the time of any location on the globe. Its construction is extremely simple. Draw a circle, about 1-1/2 in. in diameter, on a piece of paper and then draw a larger circle, about 4 in. in diameter, around the first one. Divide the circles into 36 equal parts and draw lines from one circle to the other like the spokes in a wheel. These divisions will be 10 deg., or 40 minutes of time, apart. They should be numbered around the outside, commencing at a point marked 0 and marking the numbers by tens each way until they meet at 180 deg.
A very handy little tool can be easily made to tell the time for any location on Earth. Its construction is super simple. Draw a circle about 1.5 inches in diameter on a piece of paper, then draw a larger circle about 4 inches in diameter around the first one. Split the circles into 36 equal parts and draw lines from one circle to the other like the spokes of a wheel. These divisions will be 10 degrees, or 40 minutes of time, apart. They should be numbered around the outside, starting at a point marked 0 and marking the numbers by tens in both directions until they meet at 180 degrees.

A Time Chart for Telling the Hour of the Day at Any Place on the Globe
A Time Chart for Telling the Time of Day at Any Location on the Globe
Using a map of the eastern and western hemispheres, write the names of the different cities on the globe in their respective degrees of longitude. The center, or inside, of the smaller circle is divided into 24 divisions representing the hours of the day and night, and these are marked from 1 to 12, the left side being forenoon, and the right, afternoon. The noon mark must be set on the line nearest to the location in which the instrument is to be used. For instance, if the instrument is to be used in Chicago, it is set as shown in the sketch.
Using a map of the eastern and western hemispheres, label the names of different cities on the globe at their respective degrees of longitude. The center, or inside, of the smaller circle is split into 24 sections that represent the hours of the day and night, marked from 1 to 12, with the left side for morning and the right side for afternoon. The noon mark should be placed on the line closest to where the instrument will be used. For example, if the instrument is to be used in Chicago, it should be set as shown in the sketch.
The disk is mounted on a thin piece of board and a pin is driven through the center from the back side so as to make a projecting point on the upper side on which to place the magnetized needle of a compass. The needle may be taken from any cheap compass.
The disk is attached to a thin piece of board, and a pin is inserted through the center from the back, creating a point that sticks out on the top where the magnetized needle of a compass can be placed. You can use the needle from any inexpensive compass.
All that is necessary to do, to tell what time it is in any other city or country, is to turn the instrument so that the name of that place points toward the sun, when the north end of the compass needle will point on the disk to the time it is in that city or locality.—Contributed by Henry J. Marion, Pontiac, Mich.
All you need to do to find out what time it is in any other city or country is turn the device so that the name of that place points toward the sun. The north end of the compass needle will then indicate the time in that city or area.—Contributed by Henry J. Marion, Pontiac, Mich.
Reversing Switch for Small Motors
A reversing switch made as follows will be found very serviceable in reversing the direction of the rotation of small motors, changing the polarity of electromagnets, etc.
A reversing switch made like this will be very useful for changing the direction of rotation of small motors, altering the polarity of electromagnets, and more.

Diagram of the Wiring to a Small Motor and the Details of the Switch
Diagram of the Wiring to a Small Motor and the Details of the Switch
A diagram of the connections to the switch and on the switch base is given in the sketch, and in this particular case the switch is shown connected to a small toy motor. The field of the motor is represented by A, the armature by B; and C, D, E, and F are four binding posts mounted on the base of the switch; G, H, and I are three contacts; J and K are terminals of the switch blades, and L a single-pole switch. The two blades of the reversing switch have their lower ends fastened to the terminals J and K, and their upper ends, which are indicated by arrow heads, may be moved over the contacts G, H, and I. For the position of the reversing switch shown by the full lines, J is connected to G and K to H. When the switch is thrown to the right-hand position, as shown by the dotted lines, J is connected to H and K to I. It is obvious that the direction of the current through the armature B will be reversed when the reversing switch is thrown from one position to the other. The direction in which the armature rotates will change, due to the reversal in direction of the current through it. The same results could be obtained by reversing the current in the field winding A. But it must always be borne in [379] mind that in order to reverse the direction of rotation, the current must be reversed in the armature only or in the field only, not in both.
A diagram showing the connections to the switch and on the switch base is provided in the sketch. In this case, the switch is connected to a small toy motor. The motor's field is labeled as A, the armature as B; and C, D, E, and F are four binding posts mounted on the switch base. G, H, and I are three contacts; J and K are terminals of the switch blades, and L is a single-pole switch. The two blades of the reversing switch are secured at their lower ends to terminals J and K, and their upper ends, shown by arrowheads, can move over the contacts G, H, and I. In the position of the reversing switch represented by solid lines, J connects to G and K connects to H. When the switch is flipped to the right-hand position, indicated by the dotted lines, J connects to H and K connects to I. It's clear that the current's direction through the armature B will change when the reversing switch is flipped from one position to another. The rotation direction of the armature will also change due to the current's reversal. The same outcome could be achieved by reversing the current in the field winding A. However, it’s important to remember that to reverse the rotation direction, the current must be reversed in either the armature only or the field only, not both. [379]
The above switch may be constructed as follows: First, procure a piece of well-seasoned hard wood, say maple, 1/2 in. thick, 2-1/2 in. wide and 4 in. long. Round off the corners and the edges of this piece on one side and drill the holes indicated in the sketch. The four corner holes should be of such a size as to accommodate the screws used in mounting four small back-connected binding posts. The remaining holes should be 1/8 in. All these holes should be countersunk with a 3/8-in. bit to a depth of 1/4 in. on the under side.
The above switch can be made like this: First, get a piece of well-seasoned hardwood, like maple, that is 1/2 inch thick, 2 1/2 inches wide, and 4 inches long. Round off the corners and edges on one side and drill the holes shown in the sketch. The four corner holes should be sized to fit the screws for four small back-connected binding posts. The other holes should be 1/8 inch. All of these holes should be countersunk with a 3/8-inch bit to a depth of 1/4 inch on the underside.
Cut from some 1/16-in. sheet brass two pieces, 2-3/4 in. long, 1/2 in. wide at one end and 1/4 in. at the other, and round their ends. Drill a 1/8-in. hole through the larger end of each of these pieces, 1/4 in. from the end, and also a hole through each, 1-1/4 in. from the narrow end. The last two holes should be threaded for 1/8-in. machine screws. Obtain five 1/8-in. brass bolts, 1/2 in. long. File the heads of three of these bolts down to a thickness of approximately 1/16 in. and mount them in the holes G, H and I. Before mounting anything on the base the grooves indicated by the heavy dotted lines should be cut in the under side so that the various points may be properly connected by conductors placed in the grooves. Now mount the two pieces of sheet brass upon the base by means of the remaining two bolts, which should pass through the holes J and K. A 1/16-in. washer should be placed between the pieces of brass and the wooden base.
Cut two pieces from 1/16-inch sheet brass, each 2-3/4 inches long, 1/2 inch wide at one end and 1/4 inch at the other, and round off their ends. Drill a 1/8-inch hole through the larger end of each piece, 1/4 inch from the end, and also drill another hole through each piece, 1-1/4 inches from the narrow end. The last two holes should be threaded for 1/8-inch machine screws. Get five 1/8-inch brass bolts, each 1/2 inch long. File down the heads of three of these bolts to a thickness of about 1/16 inch and mount them in holes G, H, and I. Before attaching anything to the base, cut the grooves as indicated by the heavy dotted lines on the underside, so that the various points can be properly connected by conductors placed in the grooves. Now mount the two pieces of sheet brass onto the base using the remaining two bolts, which should go through holes J and K. A 1/16-inch washer should be placed between the brass pieces and the wooden base.
Procure a piece of 1/8-in. fiber, 1-1/4 in. long and 3/8 in. broad. Drill two 1/8-in. holes in this piece, one in each end, so that they are 1 in. apart. Drill a third 1/8-in. hole in the center and fasten a small handle to the piece of fiber. Now mount this piece upon the two pieces of brass that form the blades of the switch by means of two small 1/8-in. brass machine screws.
Get a piece of 1/8-inch fiber that is 1-1/4 inches long and 3/8 inch wide. Drill two 1/8-inch holes in this piece, one at each end, making sure they are 1 inch apart. Drill a third 1/8-inch hole in the center and attach a small handle to the fiber piece. Now, mount this piece onto the two brass parts that make up the blades of the switch using two small 1/8-inch brass machine screws.
Two small brads should be driven into the wooden base so as to prevent the possibility of the switch blades moving beyond their proper position. Two pieces of 1/16-in. fiber should be placed between the heads of the screws G and H, and H and I, to prevent the ends of the switch blades from dropping down on the wooden base.
Two small brads should be hammered into the wooden base to stop the switch blades from moving out of place. Two pieces of 1/16-in. fiber should be put between the heads of screws G and H, and H and I, to keep the ends of the switch blades from dropping down onto the wooden base.
Adjustable Rod for Potted Plants
Procure a brass sash-curtain rod of the telescoping kind and stick the solid part into the soil close to the plant and tie it to the rod. As the plant grows move the tubular part of the rod upward to correspond with the height of the plant. This makes a good support and is not so unsightly as a stick.—Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y.
Get a telescoping brass curtain rod and insert the solid part into the ground near the plant, then tie the plant to the rod. As the plant grows, slide the tubular part of the rod up to match the height of the plant. This provides good support and looks better than a stick.—Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y.
Wrench for Different-Size Nuts
A very handy wrench can be made from a piece of square bar, shaped as shown and fitted with a handle. The joint at A may be halved and riveted or a weld made as desired. The size of the bar and the space between the parts will depend on the size of nuts to be turned.
A very useful wrench can be made from a piece of square bar, shaped as shown and fitted with a handle. The joint at A can either be halved and riveted or welded as needed. The size of the bar and the gap between the parts will depend on the size of the nuts to be turned.

The Sloping Notch in the Wrench Permits Its Use on Nuts of Various Size
The sloped notch in the wrench allows it to be used on nuts of different sizes.
[380]
A Simple Sextant
A sextant for measuring the latitude of any place can be easily constructed as follows: While a board, 1 in. thick, 6 in. wide, and 12 in. long is about right for the instrument, any dimensions can be used, providing the line AB is at perfect right angles to the level of the sights C and D. The sights are better to use, although the upper edge of the board, if it is perfectly straight, will do as well. If it is desired to use sights, a slight groove is cut in the upper edge; a V-shaped piece, cut from tin, is fastened at one end, and a small pointed nail is driven in at the other. In doing this, be sure to level the bottom of the V-notch and nail point so that in drawing the line AB it will be at perfect right angles to a line between the sights. A tack is driven into the side of the board at the upper edge, a line fastened to it and a weight tied to the lower end which should swing below the lower edge of the board.
A sextant for measuring the latitude of any location can be easily made as follows: A board that is 1 inch thick, 6 inches wide, and 12 inches long is about right for the instrument, but any dimensions can work as long as line AB is at a perfect right angle to the level of sights C and D. Using sights is preferable, although the upper edge of the board will also work if it is perfectly straight. If you want to use sights, cut a slight groove in the upper edge; attach a V-shaped piece cut from tin at one end, and drive a small pointed nail into the other end. Make sure to level the bottom of the V-notch and the nail point so that when drawing line AB, it is at a perfect right angle to the line between the sights. Drive a tack into the side of the board at the upper edge, attach a line to it, and tie a weight to the lower end, which should hang below the lower edge of the board.

The Main Part of the Instrument Consists of a Board with a Plumb Attached
The main part of the instrument consists of a board with a plumb bob attached.
The instrument is placed in such a manner that the North Star is sighted, as shown, and the point on the lower edge of the board is marked where the line E comes to rest. A line is then drawn from A to the point marked and the angle F is measured with a protractor. The number of degrees in this angle will be approximately equal to the number of degrees in the latitude of that place.
The instrument is positioned so that the North Star is in view, as shown, and the point on the lower edge of the board is marked where the line E stops. A line is then drawn from A to the marked point, and the angle F is measured with a protractor. The number of degrees in this angle will be roughly equal to the latitude of that location.

The Two Stars at the End of the Great Dipper are Pointers to the North Star
The two stars at the end of the Great Dipper point to the North Star.
The North Star is easily located by reason of its position relative to the Great Dipper, as shown by the diagram.—Contributed by Carlos Harrison, Anderson, Ind.
The North Star is easy to find because of where it is positioned in relation to the Great Dipper, as illustrated in the diagram.—Contributed by Carlos Harrison, Anderson, Ind.
How to Make a Taper Ferrule
Having occasion to make a taper ferrule of irregular form, a pattern from which to cut the material was made as follows: A mandrel of the desired shape was made, a piece of writing paper, soaked in water, wrapped around the mandrel, and a piece of twine wound over it, coil after coil like the thread on a spool. This was allowed to dry thoroughly, using a little heat. The string was then removed and a longitudinal cut made in the paper while on the mandrel. When opened this paper formed the pattern.
To create a tapered ferrule with an irregular shape, a pattern to cut the material was made like this: First, a mandrel of the desired shape was crafted. Then, a piece of writing paper soaked in water was wrapped around the mandrel, and a piece of twine was coiled around it, layer by layer, like thread on a spool. This was left to dry completely with a bit of heat. After it dried, the string was removed, and a longitudinal cut was made in the paper while it was still on the mandrel. When opened, this paper served as the pattern.
A piece of metal was cut from the pattern and the edges were brought together and brazed with spelter. The point of the mandrel was driven through a piece of block tin, about 1/2 in. thick. The mandrel was then removed, the ferrule was placed on it, and both then started in the hole made in the tin and driven through it. As the mandrel with the ferrule passed through the tin, the metal was shaped exactly to the mandrel. It is best to oil the hole in the tin slightly. Tin is preferable as it is harder.—Contributed by James H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
A piece of metal was cut from the pattern, and the edges were brought together and brazed with spelter. The tip of the mandrel was pushed through a piece of block tin, about 1/2 in. thick. The mandrel was then taken out, the ferrule was placed on it, and both were started in the hole made in the tin and driven through it. As the mandrel with the ferrule went through the tin, the metal was shaped perfectly to the mandrel. It’s best to lightly oil the hole in the tin. Tin is preferred because it’s harder.—Contributed by James H. Beebee, Rochester, N. Y.
How to Make a Continuously Ringing Bell
The bell shown in the accompanying diagram is known as the continuously ringing type, and has quite a field of usefulness in connection with burglar alarms, door-bell signals, telephone signals, etc. The operation of the bell proper is identical with that of the ordinary vibrating bell and, in addition, there is a circuit controlled by the armature of the bell, which is normally open, but becomes closed as soon as the armature is drawn over. The closing of this circuit by the operation of the armature amounts to keeping the push button in the bell circuit depressed, and the bell will continue to ring until the latch A is restored by pulling the cord B.
The bell shown in the accompanying diagram is called a continuously ringing type, and it has a variety of uses, including burglar alarms, doorbell signals, telephone signals, and more. The way the bell works is the same as an ordinary vibrating bell. In addition, there’s a circuit controlled by the bell's armature, which is normally open but closes as soon as the armature moves. Closing this circuit due to the armature's movement is like keeping the push button in the bell circuit pressed down, meaning the bell will keep ringing until the latch A is reset by pulling the cord B.

An Ordinary Vibrating Bell Used as a Continuously Ringing Bell, and the Wiring Diagram
An Ordinary Vibrating Bell Used as a Continuous Ringing Bell, and the Wiring Diagram
Any ordinary vibrating bell may be converted into a continuously ringing bell as follows: In the armature, C, mount a short metal pin, D, and round off its under side slightly. A latch, A, should now be constructed similar to the one shown in the sketch and mounted in such a position that its left end will rest on the outer end of the pin D when the armature, C, of the bell is in its extreme outer position. The length of the latch should be such that its left end will drop off the end of the pin D, due to the action of the spring E, when the armature C is drawn over by the electromagnets F, thus allowing it to come into contact with a spring G, which is electrically connected to the terminal of the bell marked H. The latch A is connected to one side of the line, as shown in the sketch, so as to include the bell winding and battery in a local circuit that is formed by the latch coming in contact with the spring G. The end of the latch should not interfere with the free operation of the armature when it is resting on the spring G. A cord, B, attached to the outer end of the latch, is used in restoring it, and at the same time stopping the bell from ringing. The tension in the spring E should be so adjusted that the operation of the latch is sure and firm, yet not too stiff.
Any standard vibrating bell can be turned into a continuously ringing bell like this: First, attach a short metal pin to the armature, C, and slightly round off its underside. Then, create a latch, A, similar to the one in the sketch and position it so that its left end rests on the outer end of pin D when the armature, C, is fully extended. The latch should be long enough that its left end will fall off pin D because of the action of spring E when the electromagnets F pull the armature C in, allowing it to touch spring G, which is electrically connected to terminal H of the bell. The latch A is connected to one side of the circuit, as shown in the sketch, to include the bell winding and battery in a local circuit formed when the latch touches spring G. The end of the latch should not obstruct the free movement of the armature when it’s resting on spring G. A cord, B, attached to the outer end of the latch is used to reset it and simultaneously stop the bell from ringing. The tension in spring E should be adjusted so the latch works smoothly and securely, but not too tightly.
A Mission-Style Inkstand
Having a couple of good-sized ink bottles of the ordinary type lying around, I fashioned a mission-style stand for them out of a piece of yellow pine, 2 in. wide and 3 in. long, set on another piece of pine large enough to project all around on all four sides of the block, for a base. The wells were cut out with a wood chisel, and the parts fastened together with screws. The supports were four brass-head or upholsterer's tacks. The finish was flat black.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
I had a couple of decent-sized ink bottles lying around, so I made a mission-style stand for them from a piece of yellow pine, 2 inches wide and 3 inches long, set on another piece of pine large enough to extend around all four sides of the block as a base. I cut out the wells using a wood chisel and fastened the pieces together with screws. The supports were four brass-head tacks. I finished it in flat black.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

Two Pieces of Pine Shaped to Receive the Inkwells and Finished in Mission Style
Two pieces of pine shaped to hold the inkwells and finished in a mission style.
Raising Dents in Wood
The imprint of a hammer on finely finished wood caused by a glancing blow, or otherwise, may be removed in the following manner: Pour enough wood alcohol on the dented spot to cover it, then light the alcohol and allow it to burn out. The heat will expand the wood and raise it enough so that the spot can be planed and smoothed in the usual manner.—Contributed by W. F. Elwell, Waltham, Massachusetts.
The mark of a hammer on nicely finished wood from a slight hit, or in any other way, can be fixed like this: Pour enough wood alcohol on the dented area to cover it, then light the alcohol and let it burn out. The heat will make the wood expand and lift it enough so that you can plane and smooth it out like usual. —Contributed by W. F. Elwell, Waltham, Massachusetts.
Carrying Two Pails in One Hand
When it is necessary to carry two small filled pails in one hand and a package in the other it will be found a very difficult job, if the contents are liquid. Procure a stick of sufficient size to carry the weight of the pails and cut a small notch in each end to admit the bail. Place a pail on each end of the stick and take hold in the center, or, if the pails are not equally filled, a little to one side of the center.
When you need to carry two small filled buckets in one hand and a package in the other, it can be really challenging, especially if the contents are liquid. Grab a sturdy stick that can hold the weight of the buckets and cut a small notch at each end to fit the handles. Place a bucket on each end of the stick and hold it in the center, or if the buckets aren’t filled equally, a bit to one side of the center.

Two Filled Pails can be Readily Carried by Placing the Bails on the Ends of a Stick
Two filled pails can be easily carried by placing the handles on the ends of a stick.
Preserving Paint in Open Cans
To keep paint from drying out in an open can it is necessary to exclude the air from the oil. This can be done by procuring an air-tight paper sack, which is tested by blowing into it. Set the can into the sack and tie it tightly with a cord. Mixed paint will be kept in a working state in this manner.
To prevent paint from drying out in an open can, you need to keep the air away from the oil. You can do this by getting an air-tight paper bag, which you can test by blowing into it. Place the can inside the bag and tightly tie it shut with a cord. This way, mixed paint will stay usable.
Jelly-Straining Stand

Procure a board, 7/8 in. thick and 18 in. square, and cut a hole, about 1 ft. diameter, in the center. Fasten posts, 4 ft. long, to each corner. Screw hooks are located around the edge of the hole to catch into the cloth used for holding the fruit. The stand is high enough to be convenient and admit a vessel beneath to catch the juice.
Get a board that is 7/8 in. thick and 18 in. square, and cut a hole about 1 ft. in diameter in the center. Attach 4 ft. long posts to each corner. Screw hooks are placed around the edge of the hole to hold the cloth used for collecting the fruit. The stand is tall enough to be practical and allow a container underneath to collect the juice.
Renewing Dry Batteries
It is a well-known fact that dry cells commence to deteriorate from the time they are manufactured, and it is a matter of considerable uncertainty in purchasing cells to know whether they will continue to be efficient for their supposed natural life under the existing conditions of service, or for only a small part of this period. When the voltage of a dry cell falls below a certain value it is usually discarded and replaced by a new one, which often means quite an expense. The following simple suggestion will enable one to renew the prematurely exhausted cell with very little trouble and slight expense, so that its period of usefulness will be extended for a length of time, at least equal to that for which it could be used if put into service immediately after its manufacture.
It’s a well-known fact that dry cells start to break down from the moment they’re made, and it can be quite uncertain when buying cells to know if they’ll remain effective for their expected lifespan or just a short time. When the voltage of a dry cell drops below a certain level, it’s usually thrown away and replaced with a new one, which can be a significant cost. The following simple suggestion will help you to revive a prematurely exhausted cell with very little effort and minimal cost, allowing it to be useful for at least as long as it could have been if used right after it was made.

The procedure in renewing the cell is as follows: A casing is placed outside of the zinc-containing case, having inside dimensions a little greater than the zinc cup. The space between the zinc cup and case is filled with a dry electrolyte, which, upon the addition of moisture, sets up a chemical action with the exterior surface of the zinc, and the latter having been perforated, causes electrical action to be again produced.
The procedure for renewing the cell is as follows: A casing is placed around the zinc-containing cup, with inside dimensions slightly larger than the zinc cup. The space between the zinc cup and the casing is filled with a dry electrolyte, which, when moisture is added, creates a chemical reaction with the outer surface of the zinc. Once the zinc has been perforated, this leads to electrical activity being generated again.
The casing, or cup, to be used outside the zinc cup should be made of a waterproof material. The electrolyte instead of being placed between this cup and the zinc in a powdered form, as might be expected, should be held by several layers of blotting paper, formed into a cylinder of the proper diameter to fit snugly on the outside of the zinc cup. This porous cup should be impregnated with a solution containing the following materials in the approximate [383] amounts given: Muriate of ammonia, 10 parts; bichromate of potash, 4 parts, and chloride of sodium, 4 parts. After the porous cup has thoroughly soaked in the above solution it should be dried by passing a roller over its external surface when it is mounted on a wooden cylinder of proper diameter. The moisture-proof cup may be formed outside the porous cup by covering the latter with several coats of waterproofing paste and winding on several thicknesses of common manila paper, each layer of paper being treated with the paste. A disk of cardboard, properly treated, should be placed in the end of the cylinder to form the bottom, and the edge of the manila paper folded in over it and pasted in place.
The casing, or cup, used outside the zinc cup should be made from a waterproof material. Instead of placing the electrolyte in powdered form between this cup and the zinc, it should be contained within several layers of blotting paper, rolled into a cylinder that fits snugly around the outside of the zinc cup. This porous cup should be soaked in a solution made up of the following ingredients in the approximate amounts given: Muriate of ammonia, 10 parts; bichromate of potash, 4 parts; and chloride of sodium, 4 parts. Once the porous cup has thoroughly absorbed this solution, it should be dried by rolling a cylinder over its outer surface while it’s mounted on a wooden cylinder of the right diameter. The moisture-proof cup can be made by applying several coats of waterproofing paste to the outside of the porous cup and wrapping it with layers of common manila paper, treating each layer of paper with the paste. A disk of cardboard, properly treated, should be placed at the end of the cylinder to serve as the bottom, with the edge of the manila paper folded over it and glued in place.
The pasteboard covering surrounding the zinc cup of the cell should be removed and the surface of the zinc thoroughly cleaned. The coal tar in the top of the zinc cup should be removed by tapping around the edge with a hammer, and a large number of small holes should be made in the walls of the cup with a sharp instrument. Then put the cell within the porous cup and fill the top with clear water, preferably rain water. A chemical reaction will immediately take place between the outer surface of the zinc and the chemicals contained in the material forming the porous cup, and the terminal voltage of the cell will be practically the same as it was when the cell was new. The water, of course, must be replenished from time to time on account of evaporation, and the useful life of the cell can be prolonged for a considerable time. A part cross section of a cell treated as described above is shown in the accompanying sketch.
The cardboard cover around the zinc cup of the cell should be taken off, and the surface of the zinc should be cleaned thoroughly. The coal tar at the top of the zinc cup should be removed by tapping around the edge with a hammer, and a number of small holes should be made in the walls of the cup with a sharp tool. Then place the cell inside the porous cup and fill the top with clear water, preferably rainwater. A chemical reaction will happen right away between the outer surface of the zinc and the chemicals in the material that makes up the porous cup, and the terminal voltage of the cell will be nearly the same as when the cell was new. The water will need to be topped up periodically due to evaporation, and the useful life of the cell can be extended for a significant amount of time. A partial cross section of a cell treated as described above is shown in the accompanying sketch.
Workbench Equipment for a Table Top
The average home mechanic with a few tools seldom has a place to work and is usually without a workbench. As this was my case, I constructed a bench equipment that I could easily clamp to the kitchen or other table and thus have the necessary tools at hand for work. A plank, 2 in. thick, 10 in. wide and 18 in. long, was planed and smoothed up on all sides, and a vise and a bench pin were fastened on one edge.
The average home mechanic with a few tools often lacks a workspace and usually doesn’t have a workbench. Since that was my situation, I built a bench setup that I could easily clamp to the kitchen or any table, allowing me to have the necessary tools right at hand for work. I prepared a plank that was 2 inches thick, 10 inches wide, and 18 inches long, making sure it was planed and smoothed on all sides, and I attached a vise and a bench pin on one edge.

The Bench Top can be Quickly Attached to Any Table Top without Harming It
The Bench Top can be quickly attached to any tabletop without damaging it.
To the under side of the same edge two blocks were securely fastened, as shown, and to these blocks two other pieces were fastened with hinges. With a bolt, running through from the top, and a thumb nut used underneath, these pieces are used as clamps for holding the bench to the table top. The top can be removed and set away in a closet when not in use.—Contributed by Wm. H. Hathaway, Nutley, N. J.
To the underside of the same edge, two blocks were securely attached, as shown, and to these blocks, two other pieces were connected with hinges. A bolt runs through from the top, and a thumb nut is used underneath; these pieces act as clamps to hold the bench to the tabletop. The top can be removed and stored away in a closet when it's not in use.—Contributed by Wm. H. Hathaway, Nutley, N. J.
A Nonsticking Drawer Guide

The guide shown is nonbinding and has been found thoroughly practical after several years' use on furniture. The guide A consists of a piece of wood, about 1-1/8 in. square, with a concave cut in its upper edge, the width being about 3/4 in. and the depth such as not to cut through the extending end projecting over the crossbar B. The drawer sides have a half-round edge on the bottom edge to run in the groove in the guide. The difference in width between the groove in the guide and the rounding edge on the drawer side causes the drawer always to ride snugly without binding as the wood expands or contracts with changes in the weather.—Contributed by Herman Hermann, Portland, Ind.
The guide shown is nonbinding and has proven to be very practical after several years of use on furniture. The guide A consists of a piece of wood about 1-1/8 in. square, with a concave cut in its upper edge that is about 3/4 in. wide and deep enough not to cut through the extending end that projects over the crossbar B. The sides of the drawer have a half-round edge on the bottom to fit into the groove in the guide. The difference in width between the groove in the guide and the rounded edge on the drawer side ensures that the drawer always slides smoothly without sticking as the wood expands or contracts with changes in the weather.—Contributed by Herman Hermann, Portland, Ind.
A Milk Stool
The stool is made of three pieces of board and a piece of round, or stake, iron. The appearance and manner of construction are clearly shown in the illustration. The seat board is sawed out to fit the circumference of the bucket to be used, and the iron is also bent to this curve and fastened to the board as shown. The little shelf on the front support holds the bucket at the right height, and keeps it clean and out of the way of the cow's foot while milking.
The stool is made from three pieces of wood and a piece of round iron. You can see how it looks and how it's built in the illustration. The seat board is cut to fit the shape of the bucket it will hold, and the iron is bent to match that curve and attached to the board as shown. The small shelf on the front support holds the bucket at the right height and keeps it clean and safe from the cow's foot while milking.

A Milk Stool Having a Place to Keep the Bucket Clean and at the Right Height
A Milk Stool with a Spot to Keep the Bucket Clean and at the Right Height
Sounder for Wireless-Telegraph Messages
The owner of an amateur wireless outfit often has reason to regret that he cannot let some of his friends listen to a message at the same time as he himself. The magnifier described in the following permits all those present in the room to hear the message, provided, of course, they are able to interpret the Morse alphabet by sound.
The owner of a hobbyist radio setup often wishes he could let some of his friends listen to a message at the same time he does. The amplifier described below allows everyone in the room to hear the message, as long as they can understand the Morse code by sound.

The Phonograph Horn as It is Connected to a Detector for Transmitting the Messages
The Phonograph Horn as It's Connected to a Detector for Sending the Messages
A very simple means, making the message audible at a distance of about 10 ft., is to attach a phonograph horn, or a horn of cardboard or metal, to the telephone receiver, but a much better arrangement can be made as shown in the diagram, in which A represents the antenna or aerial; B, the detector, and C, the receiver. Procure a small microphone, D, placing its mouthpiece closely against the receiver—for the sake of clearness the two are separated in the diagram—and connect the former with a battery, F, of two or three dry cells, in series with the microphone of an ordinary telephone transmitter provided with a large horn. The effect obtained by this simple means will be surprising.
A very simple way to make the message loud enough to hear from about 10 ft. away is to attach a phonograph horn or a cardboard or metal horn to the telephone receiver. However, a much better setup can be made as shown in the diagram, where A represents the antenna or aerial; B is the detector, and C is the receiver. Get a small microphone, D, and place its mouthpiece close to the receiver—it's shown separated in the diagram for clarity—and connect it to a battery, F, made up of two or three dry cells in series with the microphone of a regular telephone transmitter that has a large horn. The results from this simple method will be surprising.
Joint for Mission Furniture
The mortise for this joint is made in the usual manner, the only requirements being that the mortise is run through the piece, and the tenon is cut 1/8 in. shorter than the depth of the mortise or the width of the piece it is entering. The end of the tenon and the mortise is then covered with a piece of metal, fastened with screws as shown. The metal can be of any desired material and beveled on the edges. This makes a very good knock-down joint for mission furniture.—Contributed by H. R. Allen, Cheyenne, Wyoming.
The mortise for this joint is created in the usual way, with the only requirements being that the mortise goes all the way through the piece, and the tenon is cut 1/8 inch shorter than the depth of the mortise or the width of the piece it's fitting into. The end of the tenon and the mortise are then covered with a piece of metal, secured with screws as shown. The metal can be made from any material you want and can have beveled edges. This creates a very effective knock-down joint for mission furniture.—Contributed by H. R. Allen, Cheyenne, Wyoming.

Metal Covering and Holder for a Tenon and Mortise Joint on Mission Furniture
Metal Cover and Holder for a Tenon and Mortise Joint on Mission Furniture
A Towel Roller
A substantial, convenient and nonrusting towel roller can be made from 8 or 9 of the familiar wood handles on bundle carriers and a length of brass curtain rod. The bracket ends can be shaped from any piece of wood of suitable dimensions. The rollers and ends can be finished as desired.—Contributed by F. E. S., E. Lynn, Mass.
A solid, handy, and rust-resistant towel roller can be made using 8 or 9 of the familiar wooden handles from bundle carriers and a length of brass curtain rod. The bracket ends can be shaped from any piece of wood that fits the dimensions. The rollers and ends can be finished however you like.—Contributed by F. E. S., E. Lynn, Mass.
An Electric Shaving Mug
The general use of electricity in the home has opened up a new field in the way of heating and cooking utensils. While these utensils are sold by electric-supply houses, some of them can be easily made at home and answer the purpose just as nicely. One of these is the electric shaving mug.
The common use of electricity in homes has created a new area for heating and cooking tools. While these tools are available at electric supply stores, some can be easily made at home and work just as well. One example is the electric shaving mug.

Detail of the Parts for the Construction of an Electric Shaving Mug. The Heating of Sufficient Water for a Shave can be Accomplished at a Nominal Cost (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
Detail of the Parts for Building an Electric Shaving Mug. Heating enough water for a shave can be done at a low cost (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
A mug that will stand heat is the first thing required, and an aluminum cup of standard shape and design, which can be bought in almost every town, will do perfectly well. These cups are spun from a flat sheet and have no seams to open and leak, and it is necessary that no holes be drilled in the cup as it is impossible to make such a hole watertight. The heating element must be fastened to the mug with a clamp. The clamp will also allow the heating coil to be removed for repairs without injury to the mug. The bottoms of these mugs have a flange which makes a recessed part and in this the heating element is placed.
A heat-resistant mug is the first thing you need, and a standard aluminum cup that you can find in almost any town will work perfectly. These cups are made from a flat sheet and have no seams to open and leak, and it’s important that no holes are drilled in the cup since it’s impossible to make such a hole watertight. The heating element needs to be secured to the mug with a clamp. The clamp also lets you remove the heating coil for repairs without damaging the mug. The bottoms of these mugs have a flange that creates a recessed area where the heating element is placed.
The legs of the mug are made of sheet brass as shown in Fig. 1, one of the three having an enlargement near its center with a hole for an insulating button (Fig. 2), of "transite" or some other material, to hold the supply cord in place.
The legs of the mug are made of sheet brass as shown in Fig. 1, with one of the three legs having an enlargement near its center that includes a hole for an insulating button (Fig. 2), made of "transite" or another material, to keep the supply cord secure.
The clamp for holding the heating coil in place is shown in Fig. 3. This clamp has a screw in the center to tighten it in place. The legs and clamp may be nickelplated if desired.
The clamp for holding the heating coil in place is shown in Fig. 3. This clamp has a screw in the center to tighten it securely. The legs and clamp can be nickel-plated if preferred.
The heating coil is shown in Fig. 4 which is a coil of flat "Nichrome" wire, or ribbon as it is called, 12 ft. long, 1/16 in. wide and 3/1000 in. thick. This is equal in cross section to a No. 26 gauge wire. To wind this coil, procure a block of wood, 7/8 in. thick and about 4 in. square, with a 1/2-in. hole in the center for an axis or pivot. Clamp a 1/2-in. rod in a vise so that the block can be rotated about it. Begin at the center and fasten one end of the ribbon to the block, leaving about 2 in. projecting for a connection, then proceed to wind the ribbon in a spiral coil, separating each turn from the preceding one with a strand of asbestos cord. A small section of the coil is shown in Fig. 5, in which A, or the light part, represents the asbestos insulation, and B, or the black lines, the heating element. The insulation may be obtained by untwisting some 1/8-in. round asbestos packing and using one of the strands. This cord insulates each turn of the ribbon from the other and the current must travel through the whole coil without jumping across from one turn to the other. The whole coil must be closely wound to get it into the limited space at the bottom of the mug.
The heating coil is shown in Fig. 4, which is a coil of flat "Nichrome" wire, or ribbon as it's called, 12 ft. long, 1/16 in. wide, and 3/1000 in. thick. This is equal in cross section to a No. 26 gauge wire. To wind this coil, get a block of wood that is 7/8 in. thick and about 4 in. square, with a 1/2-in. hole in the center for an axis or pivot. Clamp a 1/2-in. rod in a vise so that the block can rotate around it. Start at the center and attach one end of the ribbon to the block, leaving about 2 in. sticking out for a connection, then wind the ribbon in a spiral coil, separating each turn from the previous one with a strand of asbestos cord. A small section of the coil is shown in Fig. 5, where A, the light part, represents the asbestos insulation and B, the black lines, represent the heating element. You can obtain the insulation by untwisting some 1/8-in. round asbestos packing and using one of the strands. This cord insulates each turn of the ribbon from the others, and the current must travel through the entire coil without jumping from one turn to another. The whole coil needs to be tightly wound to fit into the limited space at the bottom of the mug.
[386] Before taking the coil from the block, rub into its surface a little asbestos retort cement, or a cement composed of a mixture of silicate of soda and silica, or glass sand. This mixture, when dry, will tend to hold the coil together and the current may be passed through the coil to test it as well as to bake it in its coiled shape.
[386] Before removing the coil from the block, apply a bit of asbestos retort cement, or a cement made from a mix of soda silicate and silica, or glass sand, to its surface. Once dry, this mixture will help keep the coil together, allowing the current to pass through it for testing, as well as to set it in its coiled shape.

(Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
(Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
The support for the heating coil is made of a piece of 5/16-in. asbestos wood or transite. Cut it to fit into the recessed bottom of the mug, then with a chisel remove the material in the top to form a depression 1/16 in. deep to receive the coil with its top flush. The leads of the coil are run through the disk. The surface of the coil is then plastered evenly with retort cement. The legs are fastened to a second piece of insulating material with round-head brass machine screws, 1/2 in. long, with nuts. The heads of these screws are shown in Fig. 6, the nuts being above the brass and between the two insulating pieces.
The support for the heating coil is made from a piece of 5/16-inch asbestos wood or transite. Cut it to fit into the recessed bottom of the mug, then use a chisel to carve out a depression 1/16 inch deep to hold the coil with its top flush. The leads of the coil should be passed through the disk. The surface of the coil is then evenly covered with retort cement. The legs are attached to a second piece of insulating material using round-head brass machine screws that are 1/2 inch long, secured with nuts. The heads of these screws are shown in Fig. 6, with the nuts positioned above the brass and between the two insulating pieces.
The ends of the heating ribbon are brought through the lower insulating disk and attached to binding posts as shown. The leads may be covered with tape to prevent any short circuit.
The ends of the heating ribbon are pulled through the lower insulating disk and connected to the binding posts as shown. The leads can be covered with tape to avoid any short circuits.
The mug uses 3-1/2 amperes at 110 volts, either direct or alternating current, and it will cost about 3 cents an hour to operate it. Care should be taken to use a separable attachment for connecting, as an ordinary lamp socket may be burned out by turning off the current, it being adapted only to a small capacity.
The mug uses 3.5 amps at 110 volts, whether it's direct or alternating current, and it will cost around 3 cents per hour to run. Be cautious to use a removable attachment for connecting it, as a regular lamp socket may burn out when you turn off the current, since it's only meant for a small capacity.
In assembling the parts, several pieces of mica should be placed between the coil and the metal of the mug to insulate the coil from the mug.
In putting the parts together, a few pieces of mica should be positioned between the coil and the metal of the mug to keep the coil insulated from the mug.
A Handbag Lock

The pickpocket finds it easy to unsnap a handbag and remove some of the contents, especially in crowded places. To make it less easy for the pickpocket, I fixed my mother's handbag as shown in the sketch. I used a chain which had served its day holding a small coin purse—any small chain will do—by passing it through the links that hold the handle and winding it once or twice around the snap fasteners to hold them securely closed.
The pickpocket finds it easy to unsnap a handbag and take some of the contents, especially in crowded places. To make it harder for the pickpocket, I fixed my mother’s handbag as shown in the sketch. I used a chain that had previously held a small coin purse—any small chain will work—by passing it through the links that hold the handle and winding it once or twice around the snap fasteners to keep them securely closed.
The chain may be either shortened enough to make it convenient to hold with the handle of the handbag, or may be left long and used over the shoulder under the coat, thus making it possible to have both hands free for shopping while the handbag hangs by the side. This leaves a person free from the worry of taking care that the bag is not laid down somewhere and lost. The bag may be easily opened by unwinding the chain after loosening it by raising the bag slightly.—Contributed by Wm. Waterhouse, Aurora, Ill.
The chain can be shortened enough to comfortably hold it with the handbag's handle, or it can be left long and worn over the shoulder under the coat, allowing both hands to be free for shopping while the handbag hangs at the side. This way, a person doesn’t have to worry about accidentally leaving the bag somewhere and losing it. The bag can be easily opened by unwinding the chain after loosening it by lifting the bag slightly.—Contributed by Wm. Waterhouse, Aurora, Ill.
An Emery-Cloth Holder
Emery cloth in sheets is very easily spoiled around a workbench. Oil or other fluids used on work are apt to drop on it and when wet for a short time the abrasive is useless. The illustration shows a tin holder, A, that can be placed on the under side of the bench where space is not required for drawer room.
Emery cloth sheets can get damaged easily around a workbench. Oil or other fluids used during work tend to drip on it, and when it gets wet for even a little while, the abrasive becomes useless. The illustration shows a tin holder, A, that can be attached to the underside of the bench where it doesn’t take up space needed for drawer storage.

A Receptacle for Emery Cloth Made of Sheet Metal or Tin and Fastened to a Bench
A Holder for Emery Cloth Made of Sheet Metal or Tin and Attached to a Workbench
The portion cut out of the bottom [387] of the holder B is to enable the workman to easily grasp the sheets of emery cloth. As the holder is on the under side of the bench, there is little danger of any liquid or other substance spoiling the sheets. The sheets are also within easy reach.—Contributed by F. W. Bently, Huron, S. D.
The cut-out section at the bottom [387] of holder B allows the worker to easily grab the sheets of emery cloth. Since the holder is underneath the bench, there’s minimal risk of any liquid or other substances ruining the sheets. The sheets are also within easy reach.—Contributed by F. W. Bently, Huron, S. D.
The Operation of the Compass
After trying to tell a few small boys what a compass is, they wanted a practical illustration—something they could see. Not having a compass or knowing where to locate one handily, I used a piece of cork with needles and a needle for a pivot and found it very satisfactory. The method used is shown in the sketch.
After trying to explain to a few little boys what a compass is, they wanted a practical example—something they could actually see. Since I didn’t have a compass and didn’t know where to find one easily, I used a piece of cork with some needles and a needle as a pivot, and it worked out really well. The method I used is shown in the sketch.
It is best not to magnetize both needles unless care is exercised in maintaining pole relationship, or they will oppose each other and not point to the north. The extreme ends or the heads of the needles must be opposites, the head of one negative and the head of the other positive.
It’s best not to magnetize both needles unless you’re careful about keeping their pole relationships straight, or they’ll repel each other and won’t point north. The tips or heads of the needles need to be opposites, with one head being negative and the other positive.

Two Large Needles in a Cork Balanced on a Central Needle to Make Them Revolve Easily
Two large needles balanced on a central needle by resting in a cork, allowing them to revolve easily.
If a good compass is brought carelessly in contact with a magnet, the poles may become reversed and the north end will no longer point to the north but to the south until the current has been reversed again by bringing the opposite pole of the magnet in contact with the compass.—Contributed by W. H. Albright, Bellevue, O.
If a good compass is carelessly brought near a magnet, the poles can get flipped, and the north end will point south instead of north until the situation is fixed by bringing the opposite pole of the magnet close to the compass.—Contributed by W. H. Albright, Bellevue, O.
Thawing Out Frozen Pipes
When the water pipes connecting a range boiler become frozen, get a plumber and avoid an explosion of the water back. If, however, the frozen pipe is a cold-water pipe in no way connected with the hot-water boiler, it can be thawed out as follows:
When the water pipes connecting a range boiler freeze, call a plumber to prevent a backup and potential explosion. However, if the frozen pipe is a cold-water pipe that isn't connected to the hot-water boiler, you can thaw it out like this:

The Faucet is Turned Upwards and Opened and Alcohol Poured In on the Ice
The faucet is turned up and opened, and alcohol is poured over the ice.
Procure some grain alcohol—not denatured or wood alcohol—and after turning the spigot upward or upside down, as shown, open it and pour in the alcohol. When the water begins to flow turn it to its proper position.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Get some grain alcohol—not denatured or wood alcohol—and after positioning the spigot up or down, as shown, open it and pour in the alcohol. When the water starts to flow, turn it to the right position. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
A Wire Clothespin

The pin is made of galvanized wire, A, 8 or 10 in. long, wound spirally, B, on a round surface, such as a broom handle, to make the holding part. The ends are fastened together as shown. The space between the spiral turns makes the cloth-holding part.—Contributed by Wesley H. Freeman, Palestine, Tex.
The pin is made of galvanized wire, A, 8 or 10 in. long, wound spirally, B, on a round surface, like a broom handle, to create the holding part. The ends are secured together as shown. The gap between the spiral turns forms the cloth-holding part.—Contributed by Wesley H. Freeman, Palestine, Tex.
Vent for Pouring Heavy Liquids
A tube placed in a jug or bottle as shown in the sketch will assist greatly in removing molasses or heavy liquids. The tube can be placed in the receptacle without getting the liquid inside by holding a finger over the outer end. The air can easily enter without disturbing the flow of the liquid.—Contributed by Homer Payear, Owensboro, Ky.
A tube placed in a jug or bottle like in the sketch will really help with getting molasses or other thick liquids out. You can put the tube in the container without getting any liquid inside by covering the outer end with your finger. Air can enter easily without interrupting the flow of the liquid. —Contributed by Homer Payear, Owensboro, Ky.

The Vacuum Caused by the Flow of Heavy Liquids is Easily Overcome by the Air Tube
The vacuum created by the movement of heavy liquids is easily countered by the air tube.
[388]
A Hat Hanger

Procure a piece of 1/8-in. wire, about 3 ft. long, bend it into the shape shown in the sketch, and sharpen the projecting end. Drive this into the wall above a coat hanger. This provides a better hat hanger than the ordinary hook.—Contributed by John D. Watt, Roxbury, Mass.
Get a piece of 1/8-inch wire, about 3 feet long, bend it into the shape shown in the sketch, and sharpen the end that sticks out. Insert this into the wall above a coat hanger. This makes a better hat hanger than a regular hook.—Contributed by John D. Watt, Roxbury, Mass.
Repairing a Broken Tenon on a Chair Post

Instead of cutting off the four posts to make new tenons where one tenon was broken I used a metal piece made from a short length of bicycle tubing, as shown. The tube was slotted two ways to make four parts which were turned out and flattened. The remaining end of the tube was slipped over the broken post and the four parts were fastened with screws to the under side of the chair seat.—Contributed by Chas. H. Roberts, Calumet, Mich.
Instead of cutting the four posts to create new tenons where one was broken, I used a metal piece made from a short length of bicycle tubing, as shown. The tube was slotted in two ways to create four parts, which were then bent and flattened. The remaining end of the tube was slid over the broken post, and the four parts were secured with screws to the underside of the chair seat.—Contributed by Chas. H. Roberts, Calumet, Mich.
Substitute for an Iron-Holder Knob

The wood knob on the holder for my irons became charred from the heat and finally broke away from the pin. The pin would get so hot in continued use that it could not be moved without burning my fingers. I remedied the difficulty by attaching a short string to the handle and the pin. A pull on the string with the forefinger readily released the iron. I have found this better than the knob, as it is handier to use.—Contributed by Mrs. H. C. Dixon, Johnstown, Pa.
The wooden knob on the holder for my irons got burnt from the heat and eventually broke off from the pin. The pin would get so hot during use that I couldn't move it without burning my fingers. I solved the problem by tying a short string to the handle and the pin. A quick pull on the string with my forefinger easily released the iron. I've found this method better than using the knob since it's more convenient.—Contributed by Mrs. H. C. Dixon, Johnstown, Pa.
An Egg-Frying Pan
The frying of eggs in an ordinary frying pan is accompanied with some difficulty in removing them when they are cooked without breaking the yolk. Then, sometimes, the pan is too hot and the egg sticks to the pan and the top remains uncooked. A much better way is to shape a piece of sheet metal or tin as shown in the sketch to place the egg in and use it in the ordinary pan. It will not burn the egg, and the egg can be lifted out of the pan and easily slipped on a plate or toast when it is cooked.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, San Diego, Cal.
Cooking eggs in a regular frying pan can be tricky when it comes to removing them without breaking the yolk. Sometimes, the pan gets too hot, causing the egg to stick and leaving the top uncooked. A much better method is to shape a piece of sheet metal or tin as shown in the sketch to hold the egg while using it in the standard pan. It won’t burn the egg, and you can easily lift it out and slide it onto a plate or toast once it’s done.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, San Diego, Cal.

A Metal Plate for Use in an Ordinary Frying Pan to Cook Eggs without Scorching Them
A Metal Plate for Use in a Regular Frying Pan to Cook Eggs without Burning Them
A Sander Mandrel for the Lathe
A cylindrical sander for use in the lathe can be easily made of two pieces of wood, turned to a diameter that will take the stock size of sandpaper, and clamped together with pinch dogs at the ends. One edge of the sandpaper is clamped between the pieces and then it is wrapped around the wood, the opposite edge being glued to the starting edge, as shown at A. The dimensions given are for a 9 by 12-in. sheet of sandpaper. The sander is easily placed in the lathe centers when needed, and the sandpaper may be replaced at any time.—Contributed by James T. Gaffney, Chicago.
A cylindrical sander for use on a lathe can be easily made from two pieces of wood, shaped to a diameter that will fit the size of sandpaper, and clamped together with pinch dogs at the ends. One edge of the sandpaper is clamped between the pieces, and then it is wrapped around the wood, with the opposite edge glued to the starting edge, as shown at A. The dimensions provided are for a 9 by 12-inch sheet of sandpaper. The sander can be easily positioned in the lathe centers when needed, and the sandpaper can be replaced at any time. —Contributed by James T. Gaffney, Chicago.

A Wood Mandrel for Attaching Regular Sheets of Sandpaper to Make a Lathe Sander
A wood mandrel for attaching standard sheets of sandpaper to create a lathe sander
How to Construct a Simple Galvanometer
A galvanometer is an instrument used to detect the presence of an electrical current in a circuit or to measure the value of the current in amperes. The operation of practically all galvanometers is based upon the same principle, and they differ chiefly in mechanical construction and the relative arrangement of their different parts.
A galvanometer is a device used to detect the presence of electrical current in a circuit or to measure the current in amperes. Most galvanometers operate on the same principle, and they mainly differ in their mechanical design and the arrangement of their various components.
A very simple galvanometer, that will give quite satisfactory results, under favorable conditions, may be constructed as follows: Turn from a piece of hard wood a ring having dimensions corresponding to those given in the cross section, Fig. 1. Fill the groove in this ring to within 1/8 in. of the top with No. 18 gauge double-cotton-covered copper wire, insulating the different layers from each other by means of a layer of good bond paper. The winding may be started by drilling a small hole through the side of the groove, as close to the bottom as possible, and allowing about 6 in. of the wire to protrude through it. The outside end may be terminated in a similar manner, and the two ends should be on the same side of the ring, or as near each other as possible. A protecting covering of bookbinder's paper is placed over the winding and the completed ring given a coat of shellac. The electric current to be detected or measured is to pass around the winding of this coil and produce an effect upon a compass needle mounted in its center. In order that the current may produce a maximum effect upon the needle, the coil should be mounted in a vertical position.
You can build a simple galvanometer that will yield satisfactory results under the right conditions like this: Start with a piece of hardwood and turn it into a ring that matches the dimensions shown in the cross section, Fig. 1. Fill the groove in the ring up to 1/8 in. from the top with No. 18 gauge double-cotton-covered copper wire, using a layer of good bond paper to insulate the different layers from each other. You can begin winding by drilling a small hole through the side of the groove, as close to the bottom as possible, and letting about 6 in. of wire stick out. You can finish off the outside end similarly, ensuring that both ends are on the same side of the ring or as close together as you can manage. Put a protective layer of bookbinder's paper over the winding, then coat the completed ring with shellac. The electric current that needs to be detected or measured will flow around the coil’s winding, affecting a compass needle positioned at its center. To ensure that the current creates the strongest effect on the needle, the coil should be set up vertically.

The Wood Ring for the Coil and Its Holding Stirrup (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The Wood Ring for the Coil and Its Holding Stirrup (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
The base upon which the ring is to be mounted may be cut from some 1/2-in. hard wood. It should be circular in form and about 5 in. in diameter, and have its upper edge rounded off and shellacked to improve its appearance. The ring is mounted in a vertical position on this base, which may be done as follows: Cut a flat surface on each of the flanges of the ring so that it will stand in a vertical position and the terminals of the winding will be as near as possible to the surface upon which the ring rests. Then form a stirrup from some thin sheet brass, similar to that shown in Fig. 2, so that it will fit tightly over the ring and its outwardly projecting ends will rest upon the base of the instrument. Small wood screws are used in fastening the stirrup to the base. The fastening may be made more secure by cutting a groove across the inside of the ring for the stirrup to fit in, Fig. 3, thus preventing the possibility of the ring moving through the stirrup. Two holes should be drilled in the base for the terminals of the winding to pass through, and it would be best to cut two grooves in the side of the ring for these wires so as to prevent their coming into contact with the metal stirrup. Two back-connected binding posts, A and B, Fig. 3, are mounted on the base and the ends of the winding attached to them. The wires should be placed in grooves cut in the under side of the base, and the screws used in fastening the binding posts should be countersunk.
The base for the ring should be cut from some 1/2-inch hardwood. It needs to be circular, about 5 inches in diameter, with its upper edge rounded and shellacked for a better look. The ring is installed in a vertical position on this base, which can be done as follows: Cut a flat surface on each flange of the ring so it stands upright, keeping the winding terminals as close to the surface of the base as possible. Then, create a stirrup from thin sheet brass, similar to the one shown in Fig. 2, so it fits snugly over the ring and its outward ends rest on the base of the instrument. Use small wood screws to secure the stirrup to the base. You can make the fastening more secure by cutting a groove inside the ring for the stirrup to fit into, as shown in Fig. 3, which prevents the ring from moving through the stirrup. Drill two holes in the base for the winding terminals to pass through, and it’s best to cut two grooves in the side of the ring for these wires to avoid contact with the metal stirrup. Two back-connected binding posts, A and B, shown in Fig. 3, are mounted on the base, and the winding ends are attached to them. The wires should be placed in grooves cut in the underside of the base, and the screws used to secure the binding posts should be countersunk.

Galvanometer as It is Used to Detect the Presence of an Electrical Current (Fig. 3)
Galvanometer as It is Used to Detect the Presence of an Electrical Current (Fig. 3)
A short compass needle is then mounted on a suitable supporting pivot in the center of the coil. This compass needle will always come to rest in an approximate north and south position when it is acted upon by the earth's magnetic field alone. If now the plane of the coil be placed in such a position that it is parallel to the [390] direction of the compass needle (no current in the coil), the magnetic field that will be produced when a current is sent through the winding will be perpendicular to the magnetic field of the earth and there will be a force, due to this particular current, tending to turn the compass needle around perpendicularly to its original position. There will be a deflection of the needle for all values of current in the coil, and this deflection will vary in value as the current in the coil varies. The mere fact that the compass needle is deflected due to a current in the coil gives a means of detecting a current in any circuit of which the coil is a part, and the degree of this deflection affords a means of measuring the current, the value of the different deflections in terms of the current in the coil having been experimentally determined by sending a known current through the coil and noting the positions of the compass needle for each value of current used.
A short compass needle is then mounted on a suitable support pivot in the center of the coil. This compass needle will always point approximately north and south when only influenced by the Earth's magnetic field. If the plane of the coil is positioned parallel to the [390] direction of the compass needle (with no current flowing through the coil), the magnetic field generated by sending a current through the winding will be perpendicular to the Earth's magnetic field. As a result, the current will exert a force on the compass needle, causing it to turn perpendicular to its original position. The needle will deflect for any amount of current in the coil, and this deflection will change as the current varies. The fact that the compass needle is deflected due to the current in the coil provides a way to detect current in any circuit the coil is part of, and the extent of this deflection allows us to measure the current. The different deflections corresponding to various current levels in the coil have been experimentally determined by passing a known current through the coil and observing the positions of the compass needle for each current value used.
In order to determine the deflection of the needle, a scale, C, Fig. 3, must be mounted directly under the compass needle and a pointer, D, attached to the compass needle so that any movement of the needle results in an equal angular displacement of the pointer. The compass needle, E, should be short and quite heavy, say, 5/8 in. in length, 1/16 in. in thickness and 1/4 in. in width at its center, and tapering to a point at its ends. It should be made of a good grade of steel, tempered and then magnetized by means of a powerful electromagnet. The reason for making the compass needle short is that it will then operate in practically a uniform magnetic field, which exists only at the center of the coil. On account of the needle being so short and in view of the fact that it comes to rest parallel to the coil for its zero position, it is best to use a pointer attached to the needle to determine its deflection, as this pointer can be made much longer than the needle, and any movement of the needle may be more easily detected, as the end of the pointer moves through a much larger distance than the end of the needle, and since it may be attached to the needle, at right angles to the needle's axis, the end of the pointer will be off to one side of the coil and its movement may be easily observed. The pointer should be made of some nonmagnetic material, such as aluminum or brass, and it should be as long as it may be conveniently made. A suitable box with a glass cover may be provided in which the needle, pointer and scale may be housed. The construction of this box will be left entirely to the ingenuity of the one making the instrument.
To figure out the deflection of the needle, a scale, C, Fig. 3, needs to be placed directly under the compass needle, and a pointer, D, should be attached to the needle so that any movement of the needle causes the pointer to move an equal distance. The compass needle, E, should be short and quite heavy, around 5/8 in. long, 1/16 in. thick, and 1/4 in. wide at its center, tapering to a point at both ends. It should be made from a high-quality steel, tempered and then magnetized with a strong electromagnet. The compass needle is designed to be short so it operates in a nearly uniform magnetic field, which is found only at the center of the coil. Because the needle is short and comes to rest parallel to the coil for its zero position, it's best to use a pointer attached to the needle to measure its deflection. This pointer can be much longer than the needle, making it easier to notice any movement since the end of the pointer moves a greater distance than the end of the needle. Since the pointer can be attached to the needle at a right angle to its axis, the pointer's end will be off to one side of the coil, allowing for easy observation of its movement. The pointer should be made from non-magnetic materials like aluminum or brass and be as long as is practical. A suitable box with a glass cover can be built to house the needle, pointer, and scale. The design of this box will be left completely up to the creativity of the person making the instrument.

The Electric Circuit, Showing Connections for Finding the Value of a Current in Calibrating (Fig. 4)
The Electric Circuit, Showing Connections for Determining the Value of a Current in Calibration (Fig. 4)
In order to use this instrument as an ammeter, it will be necessary to calibrate it, which consists in determining the position of the pointer for various values of current through the coil. It will be necessary to obtain the use of a direct-current ammeter for this purpose. The winding of the galvanometer, ammeter, battery and a variable resistance of some kind should [391] all be connected in series as shown in the diagram, Fig. 4. Allow the compass needle to come to rest under the influence of the earth's magnetic field and then turn the coil into such a position that it is as nearly parallel with the needle as possible. This corresponds to the zero position, and the instrument must always be in this position when it is used. The position of the ends of the pointer is now marked on the scale for different values of current, first with the current in one direction and then in the opposite direction. The deflection of the needle will, of course, reverse when the current is reversed.
To use this instrument as an ammeter, you'll need to calibrate it, which means figuring out the pointer's position for different current values flowing through the coil. You'll need a direct-current ammeter for this purpose. Connect the winding of the galvanometer, ammeter, battery, and a variable resistor in series, as shown in the diagram, Fig. 4. Let the compass needle settle under the Earth's magnetic field, then position the coil to align as closely as possible with the needle. This is the zero position, and the instrument must be in this position when used. Mark the pointer's positions on the scale for different current values, first with the current flowing one way, then the opposite way. The needle's deflection will, of course, switch directions when the current is reversed.
The effect produced by any current upon the compass needle can be changed by changing the number of turns in the coil. In measuring a large current, a few turns of large wire would be required, and in measuring a small current, a large number of turns of small wire could be used. In other words, the size of the wire will depend upon the current it is to carry and the number of turns in the coil will depend upon the magnetic effect the current is to produce, which is proportional to the product of the number of turns and the current, called the ampere-turns.
The effect of any current on the compass needle can be adjusted by changing the number of turns in the coil. To measure a large current, you'd need a few turns of thick wire, while for a small current, you could use many turns of thin wire. In other words, the wire's thickness will depend on the current it's carrying, and the number of turns in the coil will be based on the magnetic effect the current is meant to create, which is proportional to the product of the number of turns and the current, referred to as ampere-turns.
Experiments with Camphor
Place a few scrapings from gum camphor in a tumbler of water and watch the phenomenon. The scrapings will go through all kinds of rapid motions as if they were alive. A drop of turpentine, or any oil, will stop their maneuvers. This experiment will show how quickly oil spreads over the surface of water.
Put a few shavings of gum camphor in a glass of water and watch what happens. The shavings will move around rapidly as if they were alive. A drop of turpentine or any oil will stop their movement. This experiment demonstrates how fast oil spreads on the surface of water.
Boiling Cracked Eggs
Eggs with the shells cracked can be boiled in the ordinary manner without danger of the white boiling out, if they are first wrapped in tissue paper. As soon as the paper becomes wet it will cling so tightly to the shell that the cracks are effectively closed.
Eggs with cracked shells can be boiled like usual without the risk of the whites spilling out, as long as they are wrapped in tissue paper first. Once the paper gets wet, it will stick tightly to the shell, effectively sealing the cracks.
A Trousers Hanger
A very serviceable hanger can be easily made of two clothespins of the clip type and about 2 ft. of large wire.
A practical hanger can be easily made using two clip-style clothespins and about 2 ft. of thick wire.

Clothesline Clips Joined Together with a Wire and Used as a Trousers Hanger
Clothesline Clips Connected by a Wire and Used as a Pants Hanger
The wire should be bent into the shape shown at A with a loop about 1 in. in diameter as a hanger. The ends of the wire are slipped under the hooks on the sides of the clothespins, which are fastened to the trousers as shown in B.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
The wire should be bent into the shape shown at A with a loop about 1 in. in diameter to serve as a hanger. The ends of the wire are slid under the hooks on the sides of the clothespins, which are attached to the trousers as shown in B.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
Removing Tight-Fitting Can Covers

Tight-fitting covers on lard and similar pails can be readily removed by tying a stout cord loosely below the cover, then placing an ordinary nail under the cord and twisting it. This will tighten the cord around the can evenly, which will loosen the cover.
Tight-fitting covers on lard and similar pails can be easily removed by tying a strong cord loosely below the cover, then placing a regular nail under the cord and twisting it. This will tighten the cord around the can evenly, which will loosen the cover.
A Skimming Spoon
A handy skimming spoon can be made very quickly of an ordinary spoon of any size desired. Slits are sawn across the bowl in the manner shown, using a hacksaw. The illustration is self-explanatory.—Contributed by G. H. Holter, Jasper, Minn.
A practical skimming spoon can be made quickly from a regular spoon of any size you want. Cut slits across the bowl as shown, using a hacksaw. The illustration explains everything. —Contributed by G. H. Holter, Jasper, Minn.

The Straight Cuts Sawn Across the Bottom of the Bowl Provide Openings to Drain Out the Liquid
The straight cuts made across the bottom of the bowl create openings to let the liquid drain out.
[392]
How to Make Falling Blocks
Procure a thin board large enough to cut six blocks, 2 in. wide and 3 in. long; also 2 yd. of cotton tape, 1/4 in. wide, and some very small tacks. Cut the board into pieces of the size mentioned, and number two of them on both surfaces, 1, 2, 3, and 4. Cut off three pieces of tape, 4-3/4 in. long, and on the side of block 1 tack one piece of tape in the center at one end, and the other two pieces at each edge on the opposite end, all being on one side of the block as shown. Take the other block and lay the side numbered 4 up, then draw the two strips of tape on the edges of block 1 under it and back to the end of the surface on block 4, and tack them on this surface at the edges as shown. The center tape is passed under block 4 and turned over the opposite end and tacked. This is clearly shown in the sketch. Thus the second block will hang from either end of block 1 by simply folding them together and separating the ends.
Get a thin board that's big enough to cut six blocks, each 2 inches wide and 3 inches long. You'll also need 2 yards of cotton tape that's 1/4 inch wide and some really small tacks. Cut the board into pieces of the specified size and label two of them on both sides with the numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4. Cut three pieces of tape, each 4-3/4 inches long. For block 1, tack one piece of tape in the center at one end, and then tack the other two pieces at each edge on the opposite end, all on one side of the block as illustrated. Take the other block (block 4) and lay the side with the number 4 facing up. Then, pull the two strips of tape from the edges of block 1 underneath it and back to the end of the surface on block 4, and tack them down at the edges as shown. The center tape should go under block 4, then flip it over the other end and tack it down. This is clearly depicted in the sketch. This way, the second block will hang from either end of block 1 simply by folding them together and separating the ends.

Set of Blocks Joined with Tape So That They Appear to Fall from the Top
Set of Blocks Stuck Together with Tape So That They Look Like They're Falling from the Top
Mark the sides of the third block 5 and 6, and place it with the two others so that the sides numbered 2, 3, and 5 will be up. Cut off three more pieces of tape, 4-3/4 in. long, and tack them on as shown, being careful not to tack through any of the first three pieces. Put on the fourth block in the same manner as the third block was attached to the second, and so on, until all the blocks are attached.
Mark the sides of the third block 5 and 6, and place it with the two others so that the sides numbered 2, 3, and 5 are facing up. Cut off three more pieces of tape, each 4-3/4 in. long, and attach them as shown, making sure not to attach them through any of the first three pieces. Attach the fourth block in the same way the third block was attached to the second, and continue this process until all the blocks are attached.
Take hold of the first block on the edges and tip it as shown by the arrow. The second block will then fall as shown by the second arrow, and the third block falls away in the same manner, and so on, down to the end.—Contributed by Wayne Nutting, Minneapolis, Minn.
Grab the first block on the edges and tilt it as indicated by the arrow. The second block will then drop as shown by the second arrow, and the third block will fall off in the same way, and so on, until you reach the end.—Contributed by Wayne Nutting, Minneapolis, Minn.
Writing Name Reversed on Paper Placed on Forehead
The following is an entertaining experiment in a party of young people. One of those present is asked if he can write his name, and will, of course, answer "yes." He is then subjected to the following test: He is asked to sit down in a chair, a paper, folded several times, is placed on his forehead, a lead pencil is handed him and he is asked to write his name on the paper. As little time as possible to reflect should be left him; if he hesitates, he should be told to just go ahead, and in most cases it will be found that he starts writing his name at the left temple and, to the amusement of the others present, writes it in the way of many left-handed persons, that is, so that it is legible only when held in front of a mirror, unless one is practiced in reading reversed writing.
The following is a fun experiment with a group of young people. One person is asked if they can write their name, and they will, of course, say "yes." They are then put to the test: they have to sit in a chair with a piece of paper folded several times placed on their forehead, and are handed a pencil to write their name on the paper. They should have as little time as possible to think; if they hesitate, they should be encouraged to just go for it. In most cases, they will start writing their name at the left side of their forehead, and to the amusement of everyone else, they will write it in a way similar to many left-handed people, meaning it will only be readable when held in front of a mirror, unless someone is skilled at reading reversed writing.
Use for an Old Table
An old table of the extension type, that may have a post broken, can be used against the wall in a kitchen as a work table. If there is a damaged part, that side is removed by sawing the crosspieces of the table in two and attaching it to the wall against the leaf which is turned in a reverse position.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
An old extension table that might have a broken leg can be placed against the wall in a kitchen as a work table. If there's any damaged part, you can cut the crosspieces of the table in half and attach it to the wall, with the damaged side facing the wall and the tabletop flipped upside down. —Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.

One Half of the Table is Removed and the Remaining Part Fastened to the Wall
One half of the table is taken away and the remaining part is secured to the wall.
[393]
How to Make a Small Rheostat
In operating small motors there is as a rule no means provided for regulating their speed, and this often is quite a disadvantage, especially in the case of toy motors such as used on miniature electric locomotives. The speed, of course, can be regulated by changing the number of cells of battery by means of a special switch, but then all the cells are not used the same amount and some of them may be completely exhausted before the others show any appreciable depreciation. If a small transformer is used with a number of taps taken off the secondary winding, the voltage impressed upon the motor, and consequently the speed, can be changed by varying the amount of the secondary winding across which the motor is connected.
When using small motors, there typically isn't a way to adjust their speed, which can be a real drawback, especially for toy motors like those in miniature electric trains. You can control the speed by changing the number of battery cells with a special switch, but this means not all cells get used equally, and some might run out before others show any significant drop in power. If you use a small transformer with several taps from the secondary winding, you can change the voltage going to the motor—and therefore its speed—by adjusting the section of the secondary winding the motor is connected to.

Diagram Showing the Connections for a Small Motor Where a Rheostat Is in the Line (Fig. 1)
Diagram Showing the Connections for a Small Motor Where a Rheostat Is in the Line (Fig. 1)
But in both these cases there is no means of varying the speed gradually. This can, however, be accomplished by means of a small rheostat placed in series with the motor. The rheostat acts in an electrical circuit in just the same way a valve does in a hydraulic circuit. It consists of a resistance, which can be easily varied in value, placed in the circuit connecting the motor with the source of electrical energy. A diagram of the rheostat is shown in Fig. 1, in which A represents the armature of the motor; B, the field; C, the rheostat, and D, the source of electrical energy. When the handle E is in such a position that the maximum amount of resistance is in circuit there will be a minimum current through the field and armature of the motor, and its speed will be a minimum. As the resistance of the rheostat is decreased, the current increases and the motor speeds up, reaching a maximum value when the resistance of the rheostat has been reduced to zero value. Such a rheostat may be used in combination with a special switch F., as shown in. Fig. 2. The switch gives a means of varying the voltage and the rheostat takes care of the desired changes in speed occurring between those produced by the variations in voltage.
But in both these cases, there's no way to gradually change the speed. However, this can be done with a small rheostat connected in series with the motor. The rheostat functions in an electrical circuit much like a valve does in a hydraulic circuit. It consists of a resistance that can easily be adjusted, placed in the circuit connecting the motor to the power source. A diagram of the rheostat is shown in Fig. 1, where A represents the motor's armature; B, the field; C, the rheostat; and D, the electrical energy source. When the handle E is positioned to have the maximum resistance in the circuit, there will be a minimal current passing through the motor's field and armature, resulting in the lowest speed. As the resistance of the rheostat decreases, the current increases, and the motor speeds up, reaching a maximum speed when the resistance of the rheostat is reduced to zero. This type of rheostat can be used along with a special switch F, as shown in Fig. 2. The switch allows for varying the voltage, while the rheostat manages the desired speed changes that occur between the adjustments in voltage.

Diagram of a Small Motor Where a Rheostat and Switch Are in the Line (Fig. 2)
Diagram of a Small Motor with a Rheostat and Switch in the Circuit (Fig. 2)
A very simple and inexpensive rheostat may be constructed as follows: Procure a piece of thin fiber, about 1/16 in. thick, 1/2 in. wide and approximately 10 in. long. Wind on this piece of fiber, after the edges have all been smoothed down, a piece of No. 22 gauge cotton-covered resistance wire, starting about 1/4 in. from one end and winding the various turns fairly close together to within 1/4 in. of the other end. The ends of the wire may be secured by passing them through several small holes drilled in the piece of fiber, and should protrude 3 or 4 in. for connecting to binding posts that will be mounted upon the base of the rheostat.
A very simple and inexpensive rheostat can be made like this: Get a piece of thin fiber, about 1/16 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide, and around 10 inches long. After smoothing down the edges, wind a piece of No. 22 gauge cotton-covered resistance wire around this fiber, starting about 1/4 inch from one end and keeping the turns fairly close together until within 1/4 inch of the other end. You can secure the wire ends by threading them through several small holes drilled in the fiber, leaving about 3 or 4 inches sticking out for connecting to binding posts that will be mounted on the base of the rheostat.
Now form this piece of fiber into a complete ring by bending it around some round object, the flat side being toward the object. Determine as accurately as possible the diameter of the ring thus formed and also its thickness. Obtain a piece of well seasoned hard wood, 1/2 in. thick and 4-1/2 in. square. Round off the corners and upper edges of this block and mark out on it two circles whose diameters correspond to the inside and outside diameters of the fiber ring. The centers of these circles should be in the [394] center of the block. Carefully saw out the two circles so that the space between the inside and outside portions will just accommodate the fiber ring. Obtain a second piece of hard wood, 1/4 in. thick and 4-3/4 in. square, round off its corners and upper edges and mount the other pieces upon it by means of several small wood screws, which should pass up from the under side and be well countersunk. Place the fiber ring in the groove, but, before doing so, drill a hole in the base proper for one end of the wire to pass through. Two small back-connected binding posts should be mounted in the corners. One of these should be connected to the end of the winding and the other to a small bolt in the center of the base that serves to hold the handle or movable arm of the rheostat in place. These connecting leads should all be placed in grooves cut in the under side of the base.
Now shape this piece of fiber into a complete ring by bending it around a round object, with the flat side facing the object. Measure the diameter of the ring as accurately as possible, and also measure its thickness. Get a piece of well-seasoned hardwood that is 1/2 inch thick and 4-1/2 inches square. Round off the corners and upper edges of this block, and mark out two circles on it with diameters that match the inside and outside diameters of the fiber ring. The centers of these circles should be in the [394] center of the block. Carefully saw out the two circles so that the space between the inside and outside portions will perfectly fit the fiber ring. Get a second piece of hardwood that is 1/4 inch thick and 4-3/4 inches square, round off its corners and upper edges, and attach the other pieces to it using several small wood screws that should go in from the underside and be countersunk. Place the fiber ring in the groove, but before doing this, drill a hole in the base for one end of the wire to pass through. Two small back-connected binding posts should be mounted in the corners. One of these should connect to the end of the winding, and the other should connect to a small bolt in the center of the base that holds the handle or movable arm of the rheostat in place. All these connecting leads should be placed in grooves cut into the underside of the base.

A Cross Section of the Rheostat, Showing the Connections through the Resistance (Fig. 3)
A cross-section of the rheostat, displaying the connections through the resistance (Fig. 3)
The movable arm of the rheostat may be made from a piece of 1/16-in. sheet brass, and should have the following approximate dimensions: length, 2 in.; breadth 1/2 in. at one end, and 1/4 in. at the other. Obtain a 1/8-in. brass bolt, about 1 in. long, also several washers. Drill a hole in the larger end of the piece of brass to accommodate the bolt and also in the center of the wooden base. Countersink the hole in the base on the under side with a 1/2-in. bit to a depth of 1/4 in. On the under side of the piece of brass, and near its narrow end, solder a piece of thin spring brass so that its free end will rest upon the upper edge of the fiber ring. A small handle may be mounted upon the upper side of the movable arm. Now mount the arm on the base by means of the bolt, placing several washers between it and the upper surface of the base, so that its outer end will be raised above the edge of the fiber ring. Solder a short piece of thin brass to the nut that is to be placed on the lower end of the bolt, and cut a recess in the countersunk portion of the hole in the base to accommodate it. When the bolt has been screwed down sufficiently tight a locknut may be put on, or the first nut soldered to the end of the bolt. If possible, it would be best to use a spring washer, or two, between the arm and base.
The movable arm of the rheostat can be made from a piece of 1/16-in. sheet brass and should have the following approximate dimensions: length, 2 in.; width 1/2 in. at one end and 1/4 in. at the other. Get a 1/8-in. brass bolt, about 1 in. long, and several washers. Drill a hole in the larger end of the brass piece for the bolt and also in the center of the wooden base. Countersink the hole in the base from the underside with a 1/2-in. bit to a depth of 1/4 in. On the underside of the brass piece, near its narrow end, solder a piece of thin spring brass so that its free end rests on the upper edge of the fiber ring. You can mount a small handle on the upper side of the movable arm. Now attach the arm to the base using the bolt, placing several washers between it and the upper surface of the base so that the outer end is raised above the edge of the fiber ring. Solder a short piece of thin brass to the nut that goes on the lower end of the bolt, and cut a recess in the countersunk hole in the base to fit it. Once the bolt is tightened enough, you can put on a locknut or solder the first nut to the end of the bolt. If possible, it’s best to use a spring washer or two between the arm and the base.
The insulation should now be removed from the wire on the upper edge of the fiber ring with a piece of fine sandpaper, so that the spring on the under side of the movable arm may make contact with the winding. The rheostat is now complete with the exception of a coat of shellac. A cross-sectional view of the completed rheostat is shown in Fig. 3.
The insulation should now be stripped off the wire at the top edge of the fiber ring using a piece of fine sandpaper, so that the spring underneath the movable arm can connect with the winding. The rheostat is now finished except for a coat of shellac. A cross-sectional view of the finished rheostat is shown in Fig. 3.
Folding Arms for Clothesline Posts
The inconvenience of using a number of clothesline posts and the limited space available resulted in the making of a clothesline post as shown in the sketch. The entire line is supported on two posts, which should be about 6 in. square and are set in concrete. The upper ends of the posts are equipped with two arms, hinged to the sides of the posts in such a manner that the inside ends of the arms will meet on top of the post when they are in a horizontal position. Each arm is provided with three wood pins, equally spaced for the line. The arms are supported in a horizontal position by two bars of metal at the center, as shown. [395] Holes are bored into the sides of the posts to receive the pins when the arms are at rest.
The hassle of using multiple clothesline posts and the limited space available led to the creation of a clothesline post like the one in the sketch. The whole line is supported by two posts, which should be about 6 inches square and set in concrete. The top ends of the posts have two arms that are hinged to the sides of the posts so that the inside ends of the arms meet on top of the post when they are horizontal. Each arm has three wooden pins that are evenly spaced for the line. The arms are held in a horizontal position by two metal bars in the center, as shown. [395] Holes are drilled into the sides of the posts to hold the pins when the arms are not in use.

A Post That Provides a Way to Hold Six Lines Taut without the Use of Props
A Post That Enables You to Keep Six Lines Tight Without Using Props
A small box is fastened to one post, to provide a place for the clothesline and the clothespins. The line, when put up, gives space for an entire washing without the use of a prop, as the line can be drawn taut enough to hold the garments.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
A small box is attached to one post to hold the clothesline and clothespins. When the line is set up, it creates enough space for an entire load of laundry without needing a prop, as the line can be pulled tight enough to support the clothes.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Evanston, Ill.
A Folding Bookrack
Having need of a bookrack which I could pack away in my trunk and still have room for my clothes, I made one as follows: I procured a piece of pine, 5/8 in. thick, 6 in. wide and 18 in. long, and laid out the plan on one side. Holes were drilled in the edges, 3/4 in. from the ends, to receive 1-1/2-in. round-head brass screws. The design for the ends was sawn out with a scroll saw and the edges smoothed up with fine sandpaper, whereupon the surfaces were stained and given a coat of wax. The screws were put in place to make the ends turn on them as on a bearing. In use the ends were turned up.—Contributed by Spencer Hall, Baltimore, Maryland.
I needed a bookrack that I could pack in my trunk and still have space for my clothes, so I made one like this: I got a piece of pine that was 5/8 in. thick, 6 in. wide, and 18 in. long, and I laid out the plan on one side. I drilled holes in the edges, 3/4 in. from the ends, to fit 1-1/2-in. round-head brass screws. I cut the design for the ends with a scroll saw and smoothed the edges with fine sandpaper, then stained the surfaces and applied a coat of wax. The screws were inserted to allow the ends to pivot on them like a bearing. When in use, the ends were turned up. —Contributed by Spencer Hall, Baltimore, Maryland.

The Ends of the Rack Turn Down, Making a Straight Board
The Ends of the Rack Turn Down, Making a Straight Board
A Simple Balance
Having use for a balance in a laboratory and being unable to procure any scales at the time, I hastily rigged up a device that served the purpose as well, as the work did not require very great precision. An elastic band and a short piece of string was procured and the band cut open. The string was then fastened around the beaker as shown, and the whole suspended from a shelf.
Needing a balance in a lab and not able to get any scales at the moment, I quickly put together a setup that worked just fine since the task didn’t need to be super precise. I got an elastic band and a short piece of string and cut the band open. Then, I tied the string around the beaker as shown, and hung the whole thing from a shelf.

A Graduate Scale Used in Connection with an Elastic Band to Make a Simple Balance
A Graduate Scale Used with an Elastic Band to Create a Simple Balance
Into the beaker was then poured 100 cubic centimeters of water and the stretch of the elastic band noted by the displacement of a knot in the string in respect to the scale on a graduate, placed beside the beaker. The length of the elastic was then changed until the knot was exactly opposite the 100-division mark on the graduate scale. Then, since the elongation of the elastic band follows Hook's law, the extension of the band to the amount of one scale division means an added weight of one gram in the beaker.—Contributed by L. Horle, Newark, New Jersey.
Into the beaker, 100 cubic centimeters of water were poured, and the stretch of the elastic band was noted by the movement of a knot in the string in relation to the scale on a graduated cylinder placed beside the beaker. The length of the elastic was then adjusted until the knot was directly opposite the 100-division mark on the graduated scale. Since the stretching of the elastic band follows Hook's law, extending the band by one scale division indicates an additional weight of one gram in the beaker.—Contributed by L. Horle, Newark, New Jersey.
An Ink Eraser
A good knife eraser for ink can be made from a discarded or broken ruling pen. One of the parts, or nibs, is cut off close to the handle and the remaining one sharpened on both edges at the point. This instrument is better than a knife or the regular scratcher, because the cutting edge will shave the surface of the paper or tracing cloth and not roughen or cut it. Erasing done with this knife will readily take ink without further preparation of the surface.—Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
A good ink eraser made from a knife can be created using a discarded or broken ruling pen. One of the nibs is cut off close to the handle, and the remaining one is sharpened on both edges at the tip. This tool is better than a knife or regular scratcher because the cutting edge will shave the surface of the paper or tracing cloth without roughening or cutting it. Erasing with this knife will easily remove ink without needing any additional surface preparation. —Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.

One of the Nibs on the Ruling Pen Sharpened and Used as an Eraser
One of the nibs on the ruling pen sharpened and used as an eraser.
[396]
Gate Fasteners

Buttons on gates or small doors are apt to become loose and then drop down, thereby allowing the gate or door to become unfastened. The ordinary button is shown at A where it is loose and turned by its own weight. If the button is cut as shown at B, it will remain fastened, even if it is loose on the screw or nail.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Amherstburg, Ont.
Buttons on gates or small doors can get loose and fall off, which lets the gate or door come unlatched. The regular button is shown at A where it is loose and turns due to its own weight. If the button is cut as shown at B, it will stay fastened, even if it is loose on the screw or nail.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Amherstburg, Ont.
A Compensating Siphon
The homemade siphon shown in the sketch consists of two rubber corks and a glass tube with a rubber hose connected to it. The cork A is used as a bearing and support on the edge of the tank. The position of the cork B on the tube determines the distance that the mouth of the tube will be under the surface of the liquid, also to some extent the sensitiveness of the apparatus. However, the principle of the device is the buoyant effect of the water and the lever action of the rubber tube which is attached.
The homemade siphon in the sketch is made up of two rubber corks and a glass tube connected to a rubber hose. Cork A acts as a support on the edge of the tank. The placement of cork B on the tube decides how far the mouth of the tube will be below the liquid's surface, which also affects the sensitivity of the device to some extent. The basic principle of the setup relies on the buoyancy of the water and the lever action of the attached rubber tube.

The End of the Pipe is Kept Just under the Surface of the Liquid at all Times
The end of the pipe is always kept just beneath the surface of the liquid.
The one that I made had a tube 14 in. long, and the cork B was 1-3/4 in. in diameter, 1 in. thick, and weighed about 1/10 of a pound. The practical application of this siphon will be found in sieve tests where it is necessary to collect the residue on the bottom of the tank while drawing off the liquid at the surface, also in oil-storage tanks where it is not wished to disturb the dirt or other residue which collects on the bottom of the tank.—Contributed by James Hemphill, Jr., Duquesne, Pennsylvania.
The one I made had a tube that was 14 inches long, and the cork B was 1 and 3/4 inches in diameter, 1 inch thick, and weighed about 1/10 of a pound. This siphon is practically useful in sieve tests where you need to collect the residue at the bottom of the tank while draining off the liquid from the top. It's also useful in oil storage tanks where you want to avoid disturbing the dirt or other residue that collects at the bottom of the tank. —Contributed by James Hemphill, Jr., Duquesne, Pennsylvania.
A Polarity Indicator
Lines in a cable or the ends of connections at a distance from the battery must be tested to determine the polarity. Where a large amount of this work is to be done, as in automobile and motorboat repairing, it is necessary to have an indicator to save time. A cheap indicator for this purpose can be made of a 6-in. test tube having its ends sealed and inclosing a saturated solution of ammonium chloride (sal ammoniac) and water. The sealed ends are made by inserting a piece of wire through a cork and, after forcing this tightly into the end of the test tube, covering it with sealing wax.
Lines in a cable or the ends of connections far from the battery need to be tested to check the polarity. When a lot of this work needs to be done, like in car and boat repairs, it's essential to have an indicator to save time. A simple indicator for this can be made using a 6-inch test tube sealed at both ends, containing a saturated solution of ammonium chloride (sal ammoniac) and water. The sealed ends can be created by inserting a piece of wire through a cork and, after securely pushing this into the end of the test tube, covering it with sealing wax.

A Simple Pocket Indicator for Finding the Negative Wire in Battery Cable Lines
A Simple Pocket Tool for Locating the Negative Wire in Battery Cables
To use, connect the terminals to the battery lines, and the end of the wire in the solution giving off bubbles is the negative wire.—Contributed by H. S. Parker, Brooklyn, N. Y.
To use, connect the terminals to the battery lines, and the end of the wire in the solution that’s bubbling is the negative wire.—Contributed by H. S. Parker, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Small Steam-Engine Cylinders Made from Seamless Brass Tubing
In making a small steam engine it was desired to use seamless brass tubing for the cylinders. To have them exactly alike a piece of tubing of the right size and of sufficient length for both cylinders was fitted on a wood mandrel, A, and the ends trued up in a lathe. As these cylinders were to fit into holes bored in a steel bedplate, it was necessary to have a flange at one end. A groove was turned in the tubing B in the center, and as a final operation a parting tool was used on the line CD. This resulted in a pair of cylinders flanged to fit the bedplate.—Contributed by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, D. C.
In making a small steam engine, we wanted to use seamless brass tubing for the cylinders. To ensure they were exactly the same, a piece of tubing of the right size and long enough for both cylinders was placed on a wooden mandrel, A, and the ends were smoothed out in a lathe. Since these cylinders had to fit into holes drilled in a steel bedplate, we needed a flange on one end. A groove was cut into the tubing B in the center, and as the final step, a parting tool was used along the line CD. This created a pair of cylinders with flanges to fit the bedplate.—Contributed by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, D. C.

A Wood Mandrel Used to Face the Ends and Turn Flanges on Tubing for Cylinders
A Wood Mandrel Used to Shape the Ends and Turn Flanges on Tubing for Cylinders
A Pocket Direct-Current Voltmeter
The assembled drawings of a very simple voltmeter are shown in Fig. 1, and its operation is as follows: The moving portion consists of a pointer, or needle, A; a small permanent magnet, or armature, B, and a counterweight, C, mounted upon a small steel shaft, D. The ends of this steel shaft are pointed and rest in bearings provided in the U-shaped piece of brass E, which is rigidly fastened to the fiber base F, by means of two screws. The permanent magnet B, carried on the shaft D, is at all times under the magnetic influence of the permanent horseshoe magnet, G, which is fastened, by means of thin brass straps, H H, and small screws, to the base F, so that the ends of the armature B are directly above the poles of the horseshoe magnet. The armature B will assume the position shown in the sketch when it is acted upon by the permanent magnet G alone and the moving system is perfectly balanced. A solenoid, J, is mounted in the position shown. When there is a current in its winding its soft-iron core will become magnetized and the magnetic pole produced at the lower end will produce a magnetic force upon the armature B, with the result that the armature will be rotated either in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction, depending upon its polarity and the polarity of the end of the core adjacent to it. Thus, if the left end of the armature has north polarity, the right end south polarity, and the lower end of the core is magnetized to a south polarity the armature will be rotated clockwise, for the left end, or north pole, will be attracted by the lower end of the iron core, which is a south pole, and the right end will be repelled. This is in accordance with one of the fundamental laws of magnetism which states that magnetic poles of unlike polarity attract each other and those of like polarity repel each other. The amount the armature B is rotated will depend upon the relative effects of the pole of the solenoid and the permanent magnet G. The strength of the pole of the solenoid will depend upon the current in its winding and the number of times the current passes around the core, or the number of turns in the winding. In other words, the strength of the pole of the solenoid varies as the product of the current and the number of turns, which is called the ampere-turns. The same magnetic effect can be produced by a large current passing through a few turns or a small current passing through a relatively large number of turns. This simple relation of current and turns gives a means of adjusting the current capacity of the instrument so that a full-scale deflection of the needle will correspond to any desired maximum current. The instrument may be used as either a voltmeter or as an ammeter, and its operation will be identical in each case. The resistance of the voltmeter, however, will be many times the resistance of the ammeter, as it will be connected directly across the line, while the ammeter will always be in series in the circuit in which it is desired to measure the current. The following description and suggestion as to how to proceed in the construction of this instrument may be useful to those who undertake to build one. All the minor details and some of the dimensions will be omitted in the description, but these can be easily supplied.
The assembled drawings of a very simple voltmeter are shown in Fig. 1, and its operation is as follows: The moving part includes a pointer, or needle, A; a small permanent magnet, or armature, B; and a counterweight, C, mounted on a small steel shaft, D. The ends of this steel shaft are pointed and rest in bearings provided in the U-shaped piece of brass E, which is securely attached to the fiber base F with two screws. The permanent magnet B on the shaft D is always influenced by the fixed horseshoe magnet, G, which is attached to the base F using thin brass straps, H H, and small screws, so that the ends of the armature B are positioned directly above the poles of the horseshoe magnet. The armature B will take the position shown in the diagram when it is influenced only by the permanent magnet G and the moving system is completely balanced. A solenoid, J, is placed as indicated. When current flows through its winding, its soft-iron core becomes magnetized, and the magnetic pole produced at the lower end generates a magnetic force on the armature B, causing it to rotate either clockwise or counter-clockwise depending on its polarity and the polarity of the nearby core end. So, if the left end of the armature has a north polarity, the right end has a south polarity, and the lower end of the core is magnetized to south polarity, the armature will rotate clockwise. This occurs because the left end, or north pole, is attracted to the lower end of the iron core, which is a south pole, while the right end is repelled. This aligns with a fundamental law of magnetism stating that magnetic poles of opposite polarity attract each other, while like poles repel. The extent to which armature B rotates depends on the relative strengths of the solenoid's pole and the permanent magnet G. The strength of the solenoid's pole will depend on the current through its winding and how many times the current loops around the core, or the number of turns in the winding. In simple terms, the strength of the solenoid’s pole changes based on the product of the current and the number of turns, referred to as ampere-turns. The same magnetic effect can be achieved with a high current passing through a few turns, or a low current through a larger number of turns. This straightforward relationship between current and turns allows for adjusting the instrument's current capacity so that a full-scale deflection of the needle corresponds to any desired maximum current. The instrument can function as either a voltmeter or an ammeter, and its operation remains the same in both cases. However, the resistance of the voltmeter will be significantly higher than that of the ammeter, since it connects directly across the line, while the ammeter is always in series within the circuit where current measurement is desired. The following description and suggestions on constructing this instrument may be helpful for those who decide to build one. All minor details and some dimensions will be omitted from the description, but these can be easily added.

The Parts as They are Assembled to Make a Pocket Voltmeter for Direct Currents (Fig. 1)
The Parts as They are Assembled to Make a Pocket Voltmeter for Direct Currents (Fig. 1)
Procure a piece of hard rubber or fiber, about 1/4 in. in thickness and of sufficient size to cut from it a disk, 2-1/2 [398] in. in diameter. Make a small horseshoe magnet from a piece of the very best steel obtainable, and magnetize it to as high a strength as possible. This magnet is made of a piece of steel, 1/8 in. thick, about 3/8 in. in breadth, and of such length that the overall lengthwise dimension of the completed magnet will be about 1-7/8 in. and the distance between the inside edges of the ends a little greater than 1/2 in. Fasten the completed magnet to the base F by means of two or three straps, made from some thin brass, and small machine or wood screws.
Get a piece of hard rubber or fiber, about 1/4 inch thick, and large enough to cut out a disk that’s 2-1/2 inches in diameter. Create a small horseshoe magnet from the best steel you can find, and magnetize it to the highest strength possible. This magnet should be made from a piece of steel that is 1/8 inch thick, about 3/8 inch wide, and long enough so that the total length of the finished magnet is about 1-7/8 inches, with the distance between the inner edges of the ends slightly greater than 1/2 inch. Attach the finished magnet to the base F using two or three straps made from thin brass and small machine or wood screws.
Then cut from some 1/16-in. sheet brass a piece having the general appearance and dimensions shown at A, Fig. 2. Bend the ends of this piece over at right angles to the center portion along the dotted lines. Drill the hole at the upper end and thread it for a 1/16-in. machine screw. By means of a pointed drill, make a small recess at the lower end directly opposite the first hole. This small recess is to form the lower bearing for the shaft supporting the moving system, while a small recess cut centrally in the end of a screw, mounted in the upper hole, will form the upper bearing. The screw placed in the upper hole need be only about 3/16 in. long. The holes in the two wings are for mounting this piece upon the fiber base, as shown in Fig. 1.
Then cut a piece from a 1/16-inch sheet of brass that looks like and has the dimensions shown at A, Fig. 2. Bend the ends of this piece at right angles to the center part along the dotted lines. Drill a hole at the upper end and thread it for a 1/16-inch machine screw. Using a pointed drill, create a small recess at the lower end directly across from the first hole. This small recess will serve as the lower bearing for the shaft that supports the moving system, while a small recess cut at the center of the end of a screw, mounted in the upper hole, will function as the upper bearing. The screw placed in the upper hole only needs to be about 3/16 inch long. The holes in the two wings are for attaching this piece to the fiber base, as shown in Fig. 1.
The shaft for supporting the moving system is made of a piece of a hatpin. It is about 13/16 in. long and its ends are pointed so that they will turn freely in the bearings provided for them.
The shaft that supports the moving system is made from a piece of a hatpin. It's about 13/16 in. long, and its ends are pointed so they can rotate freely in the bearings designed for them.
The armature is cut from a piece of 1/16-in. sheet steel. It is made about 3/4 in. long, 5/16 in. wide at the center, tapering to 1/8 in. at the ends. A hole is drilled in its center so that it may be forced onto the shaft. It is mounted so that its lower surface comes about 1/4 in. from the lower end of the shaft.
The armature is cut from a piece of 1/16-inch sheet steel. It's made to be about 3/4 inch long and 5/16 inch wide at the center, tapering down to 1/8 inch at the ends. A hole is drilled in its center so it can be placed onto the shaft. It's mounted so that the bottom surface is about 1/4 inch from the lower end of the shaft.
Then cut from some very thin brass a piece, that is to form the needle, 1/4 in. wide at one end and tapered to a point at the other, the total length being about 3 in. Drill a hole in the large end of this piece, the same size as the shaft and 1/2 in. from the end. This piece is not fastened to the shaft until some of the other parts are completed.
Then cut a piece from some very thin brass that will become the needle, 1/4 inch wide at one end and tapered to a point at the other, with a total length of about 3 inches. Drill a hole in the large end of this piece, the same size as the shaft and 1/2 inch from the end. This piece is not attached to the shaft until some of the other parts are finished.

Details of the Supports for the Coil and for the Needle, or Pointer, Shaft (Fig. 2)
Details of the Supports for the Coil and for the Needle, or Pointer, Shaft (Fig. 2)
The spool upon which the winding is to be placed is made as follows: Procure a piece of very soft wrought iron, 1-1/4 in. long and 1/4 in. in diameter, to form the core. The ends of the spool are made of thin brass and are dimensioned as shown in Fig. 2, at B and C. The piece shown at B is to form the lower end of the spool, and is bent at right angles along the dotted line. The two holes at the lower edge are for attaching the end of the spool to the fiber base. The piece shown at C forms the upper end of the spool and at the same time a back upon which the scale of the instrument is mounted. The holes in the lower edge are threaded for small machine screws, as it will be necessary to fasten this piece to the base by means of screws that pass through the base from the under side, as shown in Fig. 1. Bend the upper and lower portion of the piece over at right angles to the center portion along the dotted lines. Make sure that the large hole in the center of each end piece is of such size that it will fit very tight on the end of the wrought-iron core. Force the end pieces onto the ends of the core a short distance, say, 1/16 in., and hammer down the edges of the core so that the end pieces cannot be easily removed. In fastening the ends to the core be sure that the parts that are to rest upon the base are parallel with each other and extend in opposite directions; also that the ends are at right angles to the core. Then insulate the inner portions of the completed spool with several thicknesses of onion-skin paper, or any good-quality, thin writing paper, and shellac. The winding will be described later.
The spool that the winding will be placed on is made as follows: Get a piece of very soft wrought iron, 1-1/4 inches long and 1/4 inch in diameter, to serve as the core. The ends of the spool are made of thin brass and are sized as shown in Fig. 2, at B and C. The piece at B forms the lower end of the spool and is bent at right angles along the dotted line. The two holes at the lower edge are for attaching the end of the spool to the fiber base. The piece at C forms the upper end of the spool and also serves as a back for mounting the scale of the instrument. The holes in the lower edge are threaded for small machine screws since it is necessary to secure this piece to the base using screws that go through the base from underneath, as shown in Fig. 1. Bend the upper and lower parts of the piece at right angles to the center part along the dotted lines. Make sure the large hole in the center of each end piece is big enough to fit tightly on the end of the wrought-iron core. Push the end pieces onto the ends of the core a short distance, about 1/16 inch, and hammer down the edges of the core so that the end pieces can’t be easily removed. When attaching the ends to the core, ensure that the parts resting on the base are parallel with each other and extend in opposite directions, and that the ends are at right angles to the core. Then insulate the inner parts of the completed spool with several layers of onion-skin paper or any good-quality, thin writing paper, and shellac. The winding will be explained later.
Mount the spool and support for the bearings upon the base so that they occupy the positions, relative to each other, indicated in Fig. 1. A paper scale is then mounted upon the brass base provided for it by means of some thin shellac. The upper and lower lines for the scale can now be drawn upon [399] the paper, using the center of the screw at the lower end of the needle as a center. These lines are best placed about 1/8 in. apart and not nearer the edge of the base than 1/4 inches.
Mount the spool and support for the bearings onto the base so that they are positioned relative to each other as shown in Fig. 1. A paper scale is then attached to the brass base using some thin shellac. The upper and lower lines for the scale can now be drawn on [399] the paper, using the center of the screw at the bottom of the needle as a reference point. These lines should be about 1/8 inch apart and no closer to the edge of the base than 1/4 inch.
The needle is bent over at right angles 5/16 in. from the center of the shaft. Another right-angle bend in the needle is then made so that the pointed end will be about 1/16 in. above the surface of the scale when the large end of the needle is fastened to the shaft 3/8 in. from the upper end of the latter. Turn the needle on the shaft so that the pointer is at the left end of the scale when the moving system is at rest. The shaft must be exactly vertical when this adjustment is made. Cut the end of the needle down until its end is midway between the two scale lines. Solder the needle to the shaft, and then place a sufficient quantity of solder on the broad end to balance the system perfectly and allow it to come to rest in any position when the armature B is not influenced by any magnetic field.
The needle is bent at a right angle 5/16 in. from the center of the shaft. Another right-angle bend is then made so that the pointed end is about 1/16 in. above the surface of the scale when the large end of the needle is attached to the shaft 3/8 in. from the upper end. Rotate the needle on the shaft so that the pointer is at the left end of the scale while the moving system is at rest. The shaft must be perfectly vertical during this adjustment. Trim the end of the needle until it sits halfway between the two scale lines. Solder the needle to the shaft, and then apply enough solder to the broad end to perfectly balance the system, allowing it to come to rest in any position when the armature B is not affected by any magnetic field.
A containing case for the instrument may be made as follows: Make a cylinder from some thin sheet brass, having exactly the same inside diameter as the base, and a height a little greater than the vertical distance from the lower surface of the base to the upper surface of the needle. Also a disk from some thin sheet brass, having a diameter 1/8 in. greater than the outside diameter of the cylinder. Round off the edges of this disk and cut a curved slot in it directly over the scale, about 3/8 in. wide and of the same length and form as the scale. Solder the disk to one end of the cylinder, placing the solder all on the inside. To prevent moisture from entering the case, fasten a piece of thin glass on the under side of the slot in the disk by means of some shellac and several pieces of brass soldered to the disk and bent down onto the glass. The case can now be fastened to the base by means of several screws, passing through its lower end into the edge of the base. Two small binding posts are mounted on the outside of the case, about 90 deg. apart and well insulated from each other and from the case, to serve as terminals for the instrument.
A protective case for the instrument can be made like this: Create a cylinder from thin sheet brass that has the same inside diameter as the base, with a height slightly greater than the vertical distance from the base's lower surface to the needle's upper surface. Also, make a disk from thin sheet brass that has a diameter 1/8 inch larger than the cylinder's outside diameter. Round off the edges of this disk and cut a curved slot in it directly over the scale, about 3/8 inch wide and the same length and shape as the scale. Solder the disk to one end of the cylinder, applying the solder only on the inside. To keep moisture out of the case, attach a piece of thin glass to the underside of the slot in the disk using shellac and several pieces of brass that are soldered to the disk and bent down onto the glass. The case can now be secured to the base with several screws that go through its lower end into the edge of the base. Two small binding posts are mounted on the outside of the case, positioned about 90 degrees apart and properly insulated from each other and the case, to function as terminals for the instrument.
The instrument is now complete with the exception of the winding. Since this is to be a voltmeter and it is always desirable that a voltmeter take as small a current as possible, the winding must consist of a relatively large number of turns of small wire, each turn carrying a small current. The difference in the construction of different instruments necessitates that their winding contain a different number of turns in order that a given voltage may produce a full-scale deflection. A little experimenting with different windings is the easiest means of determining the proper size of wire and number of turns to meet individual requirements. After adjusting the winding so that the maximum voltage it is desired to measure produces a full-scale deflection, the scale is calibrated by marking the positions of the needle in accordance with those of the needle of a standard instrument connected in parallel with it. In marking the scale of an ammeter, connect the instruments in series. Remember that if the instrument is to be used as an ammeter, it must have as low a resistance as possible and that to prevent undue heating, the wire must have ample cross section.
The instrument is now complete except for the winding. Since this will be a voltmeter and it's always best for a voltmeter to draw as little current as possible, the winding needs to have a relatively large number of turns of thin wire, with each turn carrying a small current. The different designs of various instruments require their windings to have a different number of turns so that a specific voltage can produce a full-scale deflection. A bit of experimenting with different windings is the easiest way to find the right wire size and number of turns to meet specific needs. Once you've adjusted the winding so that the maximum voltage you want to measure gives a full-scale deflection, you can calibrate the scale by marking the needle's positions based on those of a standard instrument connected in parallel. When marking the scale of an ammeter, connect the instruments in series. Keep in mind that if the instrument is going to be used as an ammeter, it needs to have as low a resistance as possible, and to avoid overheating, the wire must have a sufficient cross-section.
If difficulty is experienced due to the continuous vibration of the needle, although the current be practically constant, this trouble can be greatly reduced by mounting a paper wind vane on the moving system, which will tend to dampen its movement.
If you're having trouble because the needle keeps vibrating, even if the current is nearly constant, you can significantly lessen this issue by attaching a paper wind vane to the moving system, which will help stabilize its movement.
Falling Leaves in a Nature Scene
Use an ordinary pasteboard box, a shoe box or larger, and cut out one end. Fasten the box to the ceiling by means of pasteboard strips. One end of these strips is pasted on the bottom of the box and the other ends tacked to the ceiling. Fit a piece of board, 1/2 in. thick, into the open end of the box so that it will slide easily back and forth on the inside. Place this slide in the back of the box, attach a string to it and run this through double tacks placed in the ceiling and to the side wings.
Use a regular cardboard box, like a shoebox or something bigger, and cut out one end. Secure the box to the ceiling using strips of cardboard. One end of these strips is glued to the bottom of the box, while the other ends are nailed to the ceiling. Insert a piece of board that’s 1/2 inch thick into the open end of the box so that it can slide easily back and forth inside. Position this slide at the back of the box, attach a string to it, and thread it through double tacks fixed in the ceiling and to the side wings.

The Box as It is Prepared to Fasten on the Ceiling for Dropping the Leaves
The Box as It's Ready to Attach to the Ceiling for Dropping the Leaves
Have the box almost full of autumn leaves, and when the slide is pulled slowly by the operator, they will be pushed, one or two at a time, out of the open end, and will drift down to the stage as naturally as if falling from trees, making quite a realistic scene.—Contributed by Miss S. E. Jocelyn, New Haven, Conn.
Have the box nearly filled with autumn leaves, and when the operator slowly pulls the slide, the leaves will be pushed out one or two at a time from the open end, drifting down to the stage as naturally as if they were falling from trees, creating a very realistic scene.—Contributed by Miss S. E. Jocelyn, New Haven, Conn.
Home or Traveling Utility Bed Pocket
The pocket is made of cretonne with wire hooks attached on the upper edge. The compartments are arranged as needs may require. It can be hooked on the head, foot or side rail of the bed or used, as shown, in a sleeping car. It provides a place to keep the slippers, gown and other necessities, and can be rolled up and put in a bag.—Contributed by Harriette I. Lockwood, Philadelphia, Pa.
The pocket is made of cretonne with wire hooks fixed along the top edge. The compartments are set up to suit various needs. It can be hooked onto the head, foot, or side rail of the bed, or used, as shown, in a sleeping car. It offers a spot to keep slippers, a gown, and other essentials, and can be rolled up and stored in a bag.—Contributed by Harriette I. Lockwood, Philadelphia, Pa.

Various Pockets for the Change Garments for Use at Home or in Traveling
Various Pockets for Change of Clothes for Use at Home or While Traveling
A Paper Perforator
In an emergency an ordinary hacksaw blade may be made to serve very acceptably as a paper perforator. The toothed edge is applied to the paper and the reverse edge tapped with a mallet or hammer. A considerable number of sheets may be perforated at one time, depending of course on the thickness and softness of the paper.
In an emergency, a regular hacksaw blade can be used effectively as a paper perforator. The serrated edge is pressed against the paper while the flat edge is tapped with a mallet or hammer. You can perforate a significant number of sheets at once, depending on the thickness and softness of the paper.
Turning Brass Rings

Occasionally an amateur has need of brass rings of round cross section, and if their construction is not understood, the task is a difficult one. If a piece of brass tubing, an old bushing or a cored piece is at hand, a part of the work is already done. If not, a piece of stock with large enough outside diameter should be chucked in the lathe and drilled out with the right size of drill. A tin or pasteboard template should be prepared the size of the ring section—a half circle is best, and it is easiest made by drilling a hole in the tin and cutting it in two. An inside boring tool and a turning tool are necessary. It is preferable to shape the inside first, cutting it out roughly and checking up with the template. The amount of inside cutting is shown in the drawing. A hard scraper and emery cloth may be used for smoothing and polishing.
Sometimes, someone who's not a professional needs brass rings with a round cross-section, and if they don't understand how to make them, it can be quite challenging. If you have a piece of brass tubing, an old bushing, or a cored piece, you're already partway there. If not, you should find a piece of stock with a large enough outside diameter, mount it in the lathe, and drill it out with the appropriate drill size. Create a template from tin or pasteboard that matches the size of the ring section—a half-circle shape works best, and you can easily make it by drilling a hole in the tin and cutting it in half. You'll need an inside boring tool and a turning tool. It's best to shape the inside first, cutting it out roughly and then checking it against the template. The drawing shows how much to cut inside. A hard scraper and emery cloth can be used for smoothing and polishing.
Turn and polish the outside and finally turn as far down on the inner quarter as can be done without cutting off the finish, then polish and cut it off. It only requires a little filing to smooth up the rim of rough metal left.
Turn and polish the outside, and finally turn down on the inner quarter as much as possible without cutting off the finish, then polish and cut it off. It only takes a bit of filing to smooth out the rough metal left on the rim.

The Electric Globes, as They Light beneath the Spray, Illuminate the Top, and the Light Follows the Streams of Water So That They Appear Like Streams of Light
The electric lights, shining under the spray, brighten the top, and the light traces the flow of water, making it look like beams of light.
An Electric Fountain
By Walter P. Butler
To make the grounds as attractive as possible for a lawn party given one night, I constructed an electric fountain which at first appeared to be an expensive proposition, but when completed the desired effect was produced without any expense whatever, as I had the things used in its construction on hand.
To make the grounds as appealing as possible for a lawn party one night, I built an electric fountain, which initially seemed like a costly project. However, when it was finished, it achieved the desired effect with no expense at all since I had all the materials needed for its construction on hand.

Details of the Different Parts to Construct the Electric Fountain (Fig. 1)
Details of the Various Components to Build the Electric Fountain (Fig. 1)
A light frame, 9 in. square, was made, of 3/4-in. material, as shown in Fig. 1, and a grooved pulley was attached exactly in the center on the under side of the crosspiece. A turned stick, A, 2 in. in diameter and 2-1/2 in. long, was fastened to the face of the pulley so that it turned true as the pulley and frame revolved. A hole was then bored centrally through the three parts, the frame crosspiece, the pulley, and the turned stick, of a size to fit a spindle about 3/8 in. in diameter.
A light frame, 9 inches square, was made from 3/4-inch material, as shown in Fig. 1, and a grooved pulley was attached right in the center on the underside of the crosspiece. A turned stick, A, 2 inches in diameter and 2.5 inches long, was secured to the face of the pulley so that it rotated accurately as the pulley and frame turned. A hole was then drilled centrally through the three parts—the frame crosspiece, the pulley, and the turned stick—with a size that would fit a spindle about 3/8 inch in diameter.
A box was procured, large enough for the frame to turn in freely, and a block of wood was fastened centrally in its bottom, which had a 3/8-in. pin set in a hole bored in the center. The pin may be of hard wood, but it is better to use metal. A bolt, or piece of rod, will answer the purpose of a pin very well.
A box was obtained, big enough for the frame to rotate freely, and a block of wood was secured in the middle of its bottom, which had a 3/8-inch pin placed in a hole drilled in the center. The pin can be made of hard wood, but it's better to use metal. A bolt or a piece of rod will work just as well as a pin.
A small battery motor—I had one on hand and did not need to purchase one—was fastened to one side of the box so that its pulley was in line with the pulley on the lower surface of the frame. The batteries to run the motor were placed in the corner of the box, where the revolving frame would not touch them. The motor may be of larger current capacity, however, and run direct on the current used for the lamps.
A small battery motor—I had one available and didn't need to buy one—was attached to one side of the box so that its pulley aligned with the pulley on the bottom surface of the frame. The batteries to power the motor were positioned in the corner of the box, where the rotating frame wouldn’t touch them. The motor can also have a higher current capacity and run directly on the current used for the lamps.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
About 1/2 in. from the lower end of the turned piece A, a brass strip was fastened around it. This work should be neatly done, and the joint soldered and smoothed, so that the outer surface will not catch on the brush used to make the contact. This ring can be better made by cutting the width from a piece of brass tubing of a size to fit on the turned stick A. About 1-1/2 in. from the lower end four segments of a circle were fastened so as to make a space of about 1/4 in. between their ends. This construction is clearly shown in Fig. 2. A cross section, showing the wire connections from the brass ring and segments to the lamps and where they lead out on top, is shown at B. The contact brushes [402] consist of brass strips fastened with bolts to an upright, C, made of wood and attached to one edge of the block in the bottom of the box. Two nuts are used on each bolt, between which are fastened the lead wires from a source of current.
About 1/2 inch from the lower end of the turned piece A, a brass strip was attached around it. This work should be done neatly, and the joint should be soldered and smoothed so that the outer surface won't snag on the brush used to make contact. This ring can be made more easily by cutting the width from a piece of brass tubing that fits onto the turned stick A. About 1-1/2 inches from the lower end, four circular segments were attached to create a gap of about 1/4 inch between their ends. This construction is clearly shown in Fig. 2. A cross-section, illustrating the wire connections from the brass ring and segments to the lamps and where they lead out on top, is shown at B. The contact brushes consist of brass strips secured with bolts to an upright, C, made of wood and attached to one edge of the block at the bottom of the box. Two nuts are used on each bolt, with the lead wires from a power source fastened between them.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
The wiring diagram is shown in Fig. 3. The wire D from the ring is run to the brass base of each lamp, of which there are four. The wires E, from each segment, are connected with solder to each screw ferrule of the lamps, and the ends are left bare and open, as shown, between the lamps.
The wiring diagram is shown in Fig. 3. The wire D from the ring connects to the brass base of each of the four lamps. The wires E from each segment are soldered to each lamp’s screw ferrule, and the ends are left exposed, as shown, between the lamps.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
A lamp is fastened to each corner of the frame on top, as shown in Fig. 4, with a piece of wire wrapped once around the screw ferrule and the extending ends held with staples. The wire used should be heavily insulated or, if it is of iron, a rubber tube slipped over it. A piece of tin, or bright metal, is placed beneath each globe for a reflector.
A lamp is attached to each corner of the frame on top, as shown in Fig. 4, with a piece of wire wrapped once around the screw ferrule, and the ends secured with staples. The wire used should be heavily insulated or, if it's made of iron, a rubber tube should be slipped over it. A piece of tin or shiny metal is placed beneath each globe to act as a reflector.

(Fig. 5)
(Fig. 5)
A glass plate was used to cover the box, and a lawn spray of the fountain type was placed on the glass. The globes, as they light beneath the spray, illuminate the top and the light follows the streams of water so that they appear like streams of light. Each light is turned on in succession as the frame revolves within the box, and by using globes of different colors, an exceedingly beautiful effect is obtained. If the bared ends of the wires are twisted together between the globes, these will all glow at once.
A glass plate was put on top of the box, and a fountain-type lawn spray was set on the glass. The globes, lighting up under the spray, brighten the surface, with the light moving along the water streams, making them look like beams of light. Each light turns on one after the other as the frame spins inside the box, and by using different colored globes, a stunning effect is created. If the exposed ends of the wires are twisted together between the globes, they will all light up at the same time.
A Mystery Coin Box
The effect of this trick is as follows: A small metal box, just large enough to hold a half dollar and about 1/2 in. high, with a cover that fits snugly over the top, is passed out to be examined, and when handed back to the performer he places it on the finger ends of his left hand, and a half dollar is dropped into it and the cover put on. The box is then shaken to prove that the coin is still there. The performer then taps the box with his fingers and picks it up with the other hand and the coin will appear to have fallen through the bottom. Both the coin and box are then handed out for examination.
The effect of this trick is as follows: A small metal box, just big enough to hold a half dollar and about 1/2 in. high, with a cover that fits snugly over the top, is passed around for inspection. When it's returned to the performer, he places it on the tips of his left fingers, drops a half dollar into it, and then puts the cover on. The box is then shaken to show that the coin is still inside. The performer then taps the box with his fingers, picks it up with the other hand, and the coin seems to fall through the bottom. Both the coin and box are then handed out for further inspection.
This seemingly impossible effect is made when the performer places the cover on the box. The box is resting on the fingers of the left hand and the cover is held between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, but just before placing the cover on, the box is turned over with the right thumb, and the cover is placed on the bottom instead of the top.
This seemingly impossible effect happens when the performer puts the cover on the box. The box is balanced on the fingers of the left hand while the cover is held between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand. Just before putting the cover on, the performer flips the box over with the right thumb, and the cover is placed on the bottom instead of the top.
The trick can be done within a foot of the spectators without their seeing the deception. It is a good plan to hide the box with the right hand when placing the cover, although this is not necessary.
The trick can be performed within a foot of the audience without them noticing the trickery. It's a good idea to conceal the box with your right hand while putting on the cover, though this isn't essential.
How to Make a Small Series Motor
The motor here described has been constructed and found to give very good results. It is simple to build and the materials required can be easily obtained. The armature core and field, or frame, are made of laminated iron, instead of being cast as is often done by the manufacturers, which is a decided advantage, as certain losses are thereby reduced, and its operation will be improved by this type of construction especially if used on an alternating-current circuit.
The motor described here has been built and proven to work really well. It's easy to assemble, and the materials needed can be easily found. The armature core and field, or frame, are made from laminated iron instead of being cast, which is how many manufacturers do it. This is a clear advantage, as it reduces certain losses, and the motor's performance is enhanced with this design, especially when used on an alternating-current circuit.
The machine will be divided into three main parts, the construction of each of which will be taken up in turn and the method of procedure discussed in detail. These parts are the completed armature, the field and bearings, and the brushes together with suitable terminals and connections.
The machine will be divided into three main parts, each of which will be discussed one at a time, with the procedure explained in detail. These parts are the finished armature, the field and bearings, and the brushes along with appropriate terminals and connections.
The armature core is constructed from a number of pieces, having dimensions that correspond to those given in A, Fig. 1. These pieces are cut from thin annealed sheet iron, in sufficient number to make a pile, 3/4 in. high, when placed on top of each other and firmly clamped. It would, no doubt, be best to first lay out one of these pieces very carefully and then cut it out and mark out the other pieces with the first one as a pattern, being careful to file off all the rough edges on each piece.
The armature core is made up of several pieces that match the dimensions shown in A, Fig. 1. These pieces are cut from thin annealed sheet iron, in enough quantity to create a stack that is 3/4 in. high when stacked and firmly clamped together. It’s definitely a good idea to carefully lay out one of these pieces first, then cut it out and use it as a pattern to mark the other pieces, making sure to file down any rough edges on each one.

Details of the Armature Laminations and the Commutator Segments, and the Method of Mounting Armature Core and Commutator (Fig. 1)
Details of the Armature Laminations and the Commutator Segments, and the Method of Mounting Armature Core and Commutator (Fig. 1)
Now obtain a piece of 1/4-in. iron or brass rod, 3-1/4 in. long, that is to serve as a shaft upon which to mount the armature and commutator. This rod is threaded for a distance of 7/8 in. on one end and 1-7/8 in. on the other. Procure five brass nuts, 1/8 in. thickness, to fit the threads on the rod. If possible have the ends of the rod centered before the threads are cut, for reasons to be given later. Place one of the nuts on that end of the shaft that is threaded for 7/8 in., and in such a position that its inner surface is 3/4 in. from the end of the rod. Solder this nut to the rod when it is in the proper place and remove all extra solder. Drill a 1/4-in. hole in each of the armature stampings and place them on the shaft, clamping them together with three small clamps, one on each extension or pole. Then place a second nut on the shaft and draw it up tight against the last stamping placed in position, and solder it to the shaft. Next wind two or three layers of good strong tape around each of the rectangular portions of the armature and then remove the clamps. Make sure that all the edges of the different laminations are perfectly even before applying the tape.
Now get a piece of 1/4-inch iron or brass rod, 3-1/4 inches long, which will serve as a shaft to mount the armature and commutator. This rod has threads for 7/8 inch on one end and 1-7/8 inches on the other. Get five brass nuts, each 1/8 inch thick, to fit the threads on the rod. If you can, have the ends of the rod centered before cutting the threads, for reasons that will be explained later. Place one of the nuts on the end of the shaft that has the 7/8-inch threads, positioning it so that its inner surface is 3/4 inch from the end of the rod. Solder this nut to the rod when it's in the correct position and remove any extra solder. Drill a 1/4-inch hole in each of the armature stampings and slide them onto the shaft, securing them together with three small clamps, one on each extension or pole. Then place a second nut on the shaft and tighten it against the last stamping, and solder it to the shaft. Next, wrap two or three layers of strong tape around each of the rectangular parts of the armature, and then take off the clamps. Ensure that all the edges of the different laminations are perfectly even before applying the tape.
The shaft is then placed between two centers to determine whether the core is approximately balanced and runs true. If the armature core is unbalanced or not true, the trouble should be corrected before proceeding with the remainder of the armature construction. The armature winding is not to be put on the core until the commutator has been constructed and mounted on the shaft.
The shaft is then positioned between two centers to check if the core is roughly balanced and runs smoothly. If the armature core is unbalanced or doesn't run true, the issue needs to be fixed before continuing with the rest of the armature construction. The armature winding shouldn't be added to the core until the commutator has been built and attached to the shaft.
The commutator consists of three pieces of thin sheet brass similar to that shown at B, Fig. 1, mounted on the surface of a cylinder of insulating material, 3/8 in. long and 7/8 in. in diameter. A 1/4-in. hole is drilled lengthwise through the cylinder of insulating material. Bend the pieces of brass around the outside of the cylinder, and turn all the lugs, except the center one, marked C, over at right angles and put a small nail or screw through the holes in the ends of the [404] lugs into the cylinder. These pieces of brass are equally spaced around the cylinder so that all the lugs, not turned down, project in the same direction. Now place a nut on the end of the shaft that extends the greatest distance through the armature, so that its outside surface is 1/2 in. from the surface of the end of the armature core next to it, and solder the nut to the shaft. Place the commutator on the shaft so that the projections on the pieces of brass are toward the armature core and the spaces between the ends of the pieces occupy the position relative to the cores, shown at A, Fig. 2. Another nut is then placed on the shaft and drawn up tight against the cylinder. The proper spacing of the various parts on the shaft of the machine is shown at D, Fig. 1. Another small nut is placed on the end of the shaft, away from the commutator, so that its outside surface is 1/2 in. from the surface of the end of the armature core.
The commutator is made up of three pieces of thin sheet brass like the one shown at B, Fig. 1, attached to the surface of a cylinder made of insulating material, measuring 3/8 in. in length and 7/8 in. in diameter. A 1/4-in. hole is drilled lengthwise through the insulating cylinder. Bend the brass pieces around the outside of the cylinder, and turn all the lugs, except for the center one marked C, at right angles, then insert a small nail or screw through the holes at the ends of the [404] lugs into the cylinder. These brass pieces should be evenly spaced around the cylinder so that all the lugs that aren't bent down extend in the same direction. Next, place a nut on the end of the shaft that extends the farthest through the armature, ensuring its outer surface is 1/2 in. from the end of the armature core closest to it, and solder the nut to the shaft. Position the commutator on the shaft so that the projections on the brass pieces face the armature core, and the gaps between the ends of the pieces are aligned as shown in position A, Fig. 2. Then, place another nut on the shaft and tighten it against the cylinder. The correct spacing of the various components on the machine's shaft is illustrated at D, Fig. 1. Finally, add a small nut on the end of the shaft, away from the commutator, so that its outer surface is 1/2 in. from the end of the armature core.

Diagram of the Winding on the Armature and Detail of the Field Laminations (Fig. 2)
Diagram of the Winding on the Armature and Detail of the Field Laminations (Fig. 2)
The threads on that part of the shaft extending beyond the last nut on each end are now filed off, which can be easily done by placing the shaft between the centers of a lathe and revolving it quite rapidly, the file being applied to the parts that are to be cut down.
The threads on that section of the shaft extending past the last nut on each end are now filed off, which can be easily done by placing the shaft between the centers of a lathe and spinning it quickly, while applying the file to the areas that need to be cut down.
Obtain a small quantity of No. 22 gauge single-cotton-covered copper wire and wind four layers on each of the three legs, or poles, of the armature core, insulating the layers from each other and the entire winding from the core by means of paper and shellac. The three coils are wound in the same direction about their respective cores and each winding is started at the center of the armature with 2 or 3 in. of wire extending out toward the commutator. The outside end of each winding will terminate at the end of the coil toward the center of the armature, if an even number of layers is wound on, and is securely fastened by means of two or three turns of heavy thread. The inside end of one coil is then connected to the outside end of the next one, and so on. These connections can be easily made, and at the same time the proper connections made to the commutator, by cutting the inside end of one coil and the outside end of the next so that they will reach the lug on the nearest segment of the commutator, with about 1/4 in. to spare, then removing the insulation from each for about 1/8 in. and soldering them both to the same lug. The arrangement of the winding is shown at A, Fig. 2. Connect all of the coils and segments in this manner, and the armature of the motor is complete.
Get a small amount of No. 22 gauge single-cotton-covered copper wire and wind four layers around each of the three legs, or poles, of the armature core, making sure to insulate the layers from each other and the entire winding from the core using paper and shellac. The three coils should be wound in the same direction around their respective cores, and each winding should start at the center of the armature with 2 or 3 inches of wire extending toward the commutator. The outer end of each winding will finish at the end of the coil nearest the center of the armature if an even number of layers are wound on, and it should be securely fastened with two or three turns of heavy thread. The inner end of one coil is then connected to the outer end of the next one, and so forth. These connections can be easily made while also connecting to the commutator. Cut the inner end of one coil and the outer end of the next so that they will reach the lug on the nearest segment of the commutator, leaving about 1/4 inch to spare. Then, remove the insulation from each end for about 1/8 inch and solder them both to the same lug. The arrangement of the winding is shown at A, Fig. 2. Connect all of the coils and segments this way, and the armature of the motor is complete.
The field or frame of the machine is made from a number of laminations whose dimensions correspond to those given in B, Fig. 2. As many laminations are used in the construction of the frame as the number of pieces in the armature, if iron of the same thickness is used. Four of the laminations have extensions at their lower corners to correspond to the parts shown by the dotted lines in B, Fig. 2. Place all of these laminations in a pile and clamp them rigidly together, then drill the four holes, indicated by the letters C, D, E and F, with a 3/16-in. drill. Two of the pieces with the extensions on them are placed in the bottom of the pile and the other two on top.
The machine's frame is made up of several laminations that match the dimensions shown in B, Fig. 2. The number of laminations used for the frame equals the number of pieces in the armature if the same thickness of iron is used. Four of the laminations have extensions at their lower corners to align with the parts indicated by the dotted lines in B, Fig. 2. Stack all these laminations together and clamp them securely, then drill the four holes marked C, D, E, and F using a 3/16-inch drill. Two of the pieces with extensions go at the bottom of the stack and the other two on top.
Place a 3/16-in. bolt through each of the lower holes and draw up the nuts on them tight. Procure two pieces of 3/16-in. rod, 1-1/2 in. long, and thread each end for a distance of 1/2 in. Get 8 nuts for these rods, about 1/8 in. thick and 5/8 in. across the face, if possible. Both sides of these nuts are filed down flat. Put the threaded rods through the two [405] upper holes in the field frame and place a nut on each end and draw them tight, leaving an equal length of rod protruding from each side.
Place a 3/16-inch bolt through each of the lower holes and tighten the nuts on them securely. Get two pieces of 3/16-inch rod, 1-1/2 inches long, and thread each end for 1/2 inch. Obtain 8 nuts for these rods, about 1/8 inch thick and 5/8 inch wide across the face, if possible. Both sides of these nuts should be filed down flat. Insert the threaded rods through the two [405] upper holes in the field frame and put a nut on each end, tightening them while keeping an equal length of rod sticking out from each side.
Obtain two pieces of 1/8-in. brass, 5/8 in. wide, one 4-3/4 in. long and the other 5-3/4 in. long. Bend these pieces into the forms shown at A, Fig. 3. Drill a 3/16-in. hole in each end of both pieces so that they may be mounted upon the ends of the rods protruding from the field frame. The exact center of the space the armature is to occupy is then marked on each of these pieces, and a hole is drilled in each, having the same diameter as the ends of the armature shaft.
Obtain two pieces of 1/8-inch brass, 5/8 inch wide, one 4-3/4 inches long and the other 5-3/4 inches long. Bend these pieces into the shapes shown at A, Fig. 3. Drill a 3/16-inch hole in each end of both pieces so they can be mounted on the ends of the rods sticking out from the field frame. Then, mark the exact center of the space the armature will occupy on each of these pieces, and drill a hole in each, with the same diameter as the ends of the armature shaft.

Detail of the Armature Supports and the Brushes, and the Manner of Mounting the Brushes (Fig. 3)
Detail of the Armature Supports and the Brushes, and How to Mount the Brushes (Fig. 3)
The extensions on the outside laminations are bent over at right angles to the main portion of the frame, thus forming a base upon which the motor may rest. Holes may be drilled in the extensions after they are bent over to be used in mounting the frame upon a wooden base.
The extensions on the outer laminations are bent at right angles to the main part of the frame, creating a base for the motor to sit on. Holes can be drilled into the extensions after they're bent to help mount the frame on a wooden base.
Procure about 1/2 lb. of No. 18 gauge single-cotton-covered copper wire and wind it on the lower center portion of the frame until the depth of the winding is about 1/2 in. Be careful to insulate the winding well and, to insure mechanical protection, place a layer of adhesive tape outside. About 4 or 5 in. of wire is allowed at each end for making connections. It is best to have these ends terminate on the commutator side of the frame.
Get about 1/2 lb. of No. 18 gauge single-cotton-covered copper wire and wrap it around the lower center part of the frame until the winding is about 1/2 in. deep. Make sure to insulate the winding properly, and to provide mechanical protection, add a layer of adhesive tape on the outside. Leave about 4 or 5 inches of wire at each end for connections. It's best if these ends are on the commutator side of the frame.
The brushes for the machine are made from some thin sheet copper or brass, and are shaped and dimensioned approximately as shown at B, Fig. 3. Two pieces of hard rubber, or fiber, 1/2 in. square and 7/8 in. long, serve as mountings for the brushes. These pieces of insulation are mounted in the corners of the armature support, at the commutator end, by means of two small screws in each. Mount the brushes on these pieces so that their free ends bear on the commutator exactly opposite each other. One brush is mounted on the upper end of its support and the other brush on the lower end of its support. This is shown at C, Fig. 3. Two small binding posts are mounted at the same time as the brushes, and are electrically connected to the brushes, thus affording an easy means of making a connection to the armature. The brushes are so mounted as to bear firmly upon the commutator.
The brushes for the machine are made from thin sheets of copper or brass and are shaped and sized approximately as shown at B, Fig. 3. Two pieces of hard rubber or fiber, measuring 1/2 in. square and 7/8 in. long, act as mounts for the brushes. These insulation pieces are attached in the corners of the armature support at the commutator end using two small screws in each. Attach the brushes to these mounts so that their free ends press against the commutator directly across from each other. One brush is positioned at the top of its mount, and the other brush is at the bottom of its mount. This is illustrated at C, Fig. 3. Two small binding posts are installed simultaneously with the brushes and are electrically connected to them, providing an easy way to connect to the armature. The brushes are mounted to press firmly against the commutator.
To operate the motor, connect the armature and field windings in series, and the combination to a source of electromotive force of several volts. If it is desired to reverse the direction of rotation, reverse the connections of either the armature or field windings, but not both. The motor may be mounted on a neat wooden base and the connections all brought down to a reversing switch, which may also be mounted on the same base as the motor. The speed can be varied by changing the impressed voltage, or by connecting a variable resistance in the armature circuit, such as a wire rheostat.
To run the motor, connect the armature and field windings in series, and then connect that combination to a power source of a few volts. If you want to change the direction of rotation, reverse the connections of either the armature or field windings, but not both. The motor can be mounted on a tidy wooden base, with all the connections routed down to a reversing switch, which can also be mounted on the same base as the motor. You can adjust the speed by changing the input voltage or by adding a variable resistor to the armature circuit, like a wire rheostat.
A small pulley may be made and attached to the armature shaft so that the motor may be used in driving various kinds of toys.
A small pulley can be created and attached to the armature shaft so that the motor can be used to power different types of toys.
Cooler for Milk and Butter

An earthen jar or crock, with a cover, set in a box containing moist sand will keep butter and milk in hot weather better than a refrigerator. The sand must be kept moist at all times.—Edwin J. Bachman, Jr., Fullerton, Pa.
An earthen jar or crock with a lid, placed in a box with moist sand, will keep butter and milk fresher in hot weather than a refrigerator. The sand needs to stay moist at all times.—Edwin J. Bachman, Jr., Fullerton, Pa.
Rubber Bumper on a Water Faucet
Sometimes a dish is broken by striking it on the faucet. This is easily remedied by cutting a rubber washer from a rubber-boot heel with a sharp chisel and a hammer. The washer is pushed into place on the end of the faucet, and the dishes may strike the rubber without being broken.—Contributed by Harriette I. Lockwood, Philadelphia, Pa.
Sometimes a dish gets chipped when it hits the faucet. This can be easily fixed by cutting a rubber washer from a rubber-boot heel using a sharp chisel and a hammer. The washer is then pushed onto the end of the faucet, allowing the dishes to hit the rubber without breaking.—Contributed by Harriette I. Lockwood, Philadelphia, Pa.
Boring a Clean-Edged Hole

When boring a hole in wood, withdraw the bit as soon as the worm shows, then start the worm in the hole on the opposite side and finish boring the hole. It will then have clean edges on both sides of the wood. Often the bit pushes splinters of wood ahead of it, when passing through, but by using the method described this is avoided.
When drilling a hole in wood, pull the bit out as soon as the worm appears, then begin the worm on the other side and complete the hole. This way, both sides of the wood will have clean edges. Often, the bit pushes splinters of wood ahead of it while going through, but this technique helps avoid that.
Drilling Thin Metal

In drilling very thin stock the drill, if not properly ground, will tear the metal and leave a ragged edge. To cut a hole through neatly the drill should be ground as illustrated. The center A should extend about 1/64 in. beyond the points B. The point A locates the center and the sharp points B cut out the disk of metal. Holes have been neatly and quickly made with this drill grinding in metal measuring .002 in. thickness.—Contributed by Joseph J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
In drilling very thin material, if the drill isn't properly sharpened, it will damage the metal and create a rough edge. To cut a hole cleanly, the drill should be sharpened as shown. The center A should extend about 1/64 in. beyond the points B. Point A marks the center, and the sharp points B remove the disk of metal. Holes have been made quickly and neatly with this drill setup on metal that is .002 in. thick.—Contributed by Joseph J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
A pencil may be kept from falling out of the pocket by wrapping a couple of turns of tape around it or by wrapping it with a small rubber band.
A pencil can be prevented from falling out of your pocket by wrapping a few turns of tape around it or by using a small rubber band to secure it.
Flexible-Cord Adjuster for an Electrical Flatiron

When using an electrical flatiron the flexible cord frequently gets under the iron, causing much trouble for the user, and mussing up the clothing. The cord can be kept out of the way by fastening a pulley to the ironing board and attaching a coil spring to the electric cord between the pulley and the electric-fixture socket. A coil spring that will draw out about 3 ft. should be used.—Contributed by Herbert Blandford, Elmira, N. Y.
When using an electric iron, the flexible cord often gets caught under the iron, causing headaches for the user and wrinkling the clothes. You can keep the cord out of the way by attaching a pulley to the ironing board and connecting a coil spring to the electric cord between the pulley and the power outlet. A coil spring that extends about 3 ft. should be used.—Contributed by Herbert Blandford, Elmira, N. Y.
A Wood Clothes Peg

If clothes that are slightly damp are hung on a nail or metal peg, a rust stain that is almost impossible to remove will be the result. To prevent this, drive a nail with the head removed into the wall or cleat, and place a wood peg over it. The peg may be turned up or whittled out with a pocket knife and the hole bored with a hand drill.—Contributed by Wm. A. Robinson, Waynesboro, Pa.
If you hang slightly damp clothes on a nail or metal hook, it will leave a rust stain that’s really hard to get rid of. To avoid this, hammer a nail with the head removed into the wall or a cleat, then put a wooden peg over it. You can turn the peg up or shape it with a pocket knife and use a hand drill to make the hole.—Contributed by Wm. A. Robinson, Waynesboro, Pa.
To Make Scratch Pads of Old Labels

Labels and blank paper of uniform size, that would otherwise be cast aside, can be turned into handy scratch pads by placing them between blocks of wood, secured by a wood clamp, and applying paste on two edges, then pressing a strip of paper on the pasted portions. The edges to be pasted should project a trifle beyond the edges of the blocks.
Labels and blank paper of the same size, which would otherwise be thrown away, can be transformed into useful scratch pads by placing them between blocks of wood, securing it all with a wood clamp, and applying glue to two edges, then pressing a strip of paper onto the glued parts. The edges that need glue should extend slightly beyond the edges of the blocks.
How to Make an Electric Heater
The electric heater described in this article is very simple to construct, its operation exceedingly satisfactory, and the necessary material easily procured at a small cost at most electrical-supply stores. The few tools needed are usually found about every home, and the heater may be constructed by any ingenious person.
The electric heater outlined in this article is straightforward to build, functions very well, and the materials required can be easily obtained at a low cost from most electrical supply stores. The few tools needed are typically found in every home, and anyone with a bit of creativity can assemble the heater.
Procure 6 porcelain tubes, 20 in. long and approximately 13/16 in. in diameter. On each of these tubes wind 25 ft. of bare No. 26 gauge "Climax" resistance wire. The various turns should be uniformly distributed along the tubes and not allowed to come into contact with each other, which can be prevented by placing a thin, narrow coat of plaster of Paris along the side of each of the tubes immediately after the winding has been put on. Several inches of free wire should be allowed at each end, for making connections, and the first and last turns on each tube should be securely fastened to the tube by several turns of binding wire. It would be best not to extend the winding nearer the ends of the tubes than 3/4 in.
Get 6 porcelain tubes, 20 inches long and about 13/16 inch in diameter. Wrap 25 feet of bare No. 26 gauge "Climax" resistance wire around each tube. Make sure the wire turns are evenly spaced along the tubes and don’t touch each other. You can avoid this by applying a thin, narrow layer of plaster of Paris along the side of each tube right after you finish winding. Leave several inches of loose wire at each end for making connections, and securely fasten the first and last turns on each tube with a few turns of binding wire. It's best not to wind the wire closer than 3/4 inch to the ends of the tubes.
Cut from some heavy tin, or other thin sheet metal, two disks, 6 in. in diameter, and punch six 5/16-in. holes in each of the disks at equal distances and within 3/4 in. of the outer edge. Punch two 1/8-in. holes in one of these disks, to be used in mounting a porcelain socket, and also one 1/2-in. hole through which the wires may be led to the socket, as shown in Fig. 1. In the other disk punch four 1/8-in. holes, for mounting two porcelain single-pole snap switches, and two 1/2-in. holes, for leading the wires through to the switches, as shown in Fig. 2.
Cut out two disks from some heavy tin or thin sheet metal, each with a diameter of 6 inches. Punch six 5/16-inch holes in each disk evenly spaced and within 3/4 inch from the outer edge. In one of these disks, punch two 1/8-inch holes for mounting a porcelain socket, and also one 1/2-inch hole to run the wires to the socket, as shown in Fig. 1. In the other disk, punch four 1/8-inch holes for mounting two porcelain single-pole snap switches, and two 1/2-inch holes to lead the wires to the switches, as shown in Fig. 2.

Detail of the Two Ends on the Heater Giving Dimensions and the Location of Parts (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Detail of the Two Ends on the Heater Showing Dimensions and the Placement of Components (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Cut off six lengths of 5/16-in. iron rod, 22 in. long, and thread both ends of each piece for a length of 1-1/4 in. Fasten the porcelain tubes between the metal disks, by placing one of the rods through each of the tubes and allowing the ends to extend through the 5/16-in. holes in the outer edge of the disks. A nut should be placed on each end of all the rods and drawn up so that the length of rod protruding at each end is the same. Obtain two single-pole snap switches and a porcelain socket, and mount them on the ends by means of some small stove bolts.
Cut six pieces of 5/16-inch iron rod, each 22 inches long, and thread both ends of each piece for about 1-1/4 inches. Secure the porcelain tubes between the metal disks by inserting one rod through each tube, letting the ends stick out through the 5/16-inch holes in the outer edge of the disks. Place a nut on each end of all the rods and tighten them so that the length of rod sticking out at each end is the same. Get two single-pole snap switches and a porcelain socket, and attach them to the ends using some small stove bolts.
The windings on the porcelain tubes should be connected as follows: Let the windings be designated by the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F, and their position be that indicated in Figs. 1 and 2. The primes indicate the ends of the windings at the socket end, and the letters without the primes indicate the ends of the windings at the switch end of the heater. The ends A and D should be connected directly together. The ends B and C to the clips of the right-band snap switch, and E and F, to the clips of the left-hand snap switch. The ends F, A, and B should be connected to one terminal of the socket, and C, D, and E to the other terminal of the socket. Electrical connection is made to the winding by means of a plug and piece of lamp cord. It is obvious that the windings A and D will be connected as soon as the plug is screwed into the socket, if the circuit is closed at all other points, and the windings B and C, and E and F are controlled by the right and left-hand snap switches, respectively. Make sure all the connections are properly insulated, and that there is little chance of a short circuit occurring.
The connections on the porcelain tubes should be set up like this: Label the windings as A, B, C, D, E, and F, and arrange them as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The primes indicate the ends of the windings at the socket end, while the letters without primes indicate the ends at the switch end of the heater. Connect ends A and D directly together. Ends B and C should go to the clips of the right-hand snap switch, and E and F should go to the clips of the left-hand snap switch. Connect ends F, A, and B to one terminal of the socket, and C, D, and E to the other terminal. The electrical connection to the winding is made using a plug and a piece of lamp cord. It’s clear that windings A and D will connect as soon as the plug is inserted into the socket, provided the circuit is complete at all other points, and windings B and C, along with E and F, are controlled by the right and left-hand snap switches, respectively. Ensure that all connections are properly insulated and that there is minimal risk of a short circuit.
After the socket and snap switches have been connected to the windings, two more thin disks, the same diameter as the first, may be fitted over the ends and held in place by two units on the end of each rod, a nut being placed on [408] each side of the disks. A better way of mounting these disks would be by small machine screws that enter threaded holes in the ends of the rods. These last disks are not absolutely necessary, but they will add some to the appearance of the completed heater. Four small ears, about 5/8 in. square, should be cut on the outer edge of the outside or inside disks and bent over at right angles to the main portion, to be used in mounting the outside case of the heater.
After connecting the socket and snap switches to the windings, you can fit two more thin disks, the same diameter as the first ones, over the ends and hold them in place with two units at the end of each rod, placing a nut on [408] each side of the disks. A better option for mounting these disks would be to use small machine screws that go into threaded holes at the ends of the rods. While these additional disks aren’t absolutely necessary, they will enhance the look of the finished heater. Cut four small tabs, about 5/8 in. square, along the outer edge of the outer or inner disks, and bend them over at right angles to the main part, so they can be used to mount the outer casing of the heater.
Cut from a sheet of 1/8-in. asbestos a piece just long enough to fit between the inside disks and wide enough to cover the three lower windings C, D, and E. The object of this piece of asbestos is to protect the surface upon which the heater will stand from excessive heat, since it is to rest in a horizontal position.
Cut a piece of 1/8-inch asbestos from a sheet that is just long enough to fit between the inner disks and wide enough to cover the three lower windings C, D, and E. The purpose of this asbestos piece is to protect the surface where the heater will stand from excessive heat, as it will be placed in a horizontal position.
Obtain a piece of perforated, thin sheet metal, 19-1/2 in. wide and long enough to reach from one outside disk to the other. Bend this into a cylinder and fasten it to the lugs on the disks by means of small screws or bolts.
Get a piece of thin, perforated sheet metal that's 19.5 inches wide and long enough to connect one outside disk to the other. Shape it into a cylinder and attach it to the lugs on the disks using small screws or bolts.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
The legs may be made of 1/8-in. strap iron, 5/8 in. wide, bent into the form shown in Fig. 3. These pieces may be attached to the perforated cylinder, before it is mounted on the heater proper, by means of several small bolts. The piece of asbestos should be wired to the cylinder after the heater is all assembled, so that it will always remain in the lower part of the cylinder and serve the purpose for which it is intended.
The legs can be made of 1/8-in. strap iron, 5/8 in. wide, bent into the shape shown in Fig. 3. You can attach these pieces to the perforated cylinder before mounting it on the heater itself using several small bolts. The piece of asbestos should be wired to the cylinder after the heater is fully assembled, so it stays in the lower part of the cylinder and serves its intended purpose.
The heater, as described above, is constructed for a 110-volt circuit, which is the voltage commonly used in electric lighting. The total consumption of the heater will be approximately 600 watts, each part consuming about 1/3 of the total, or 200 watts. If it is desired to wind the heater for a 220-volt circuit, 25 ft. of No. 29 gauge "Climax" resistance wire should be used on each tube.
The heater, as mentioned earlier, is designed for a 110-volt circuit, which is the standard voltage used in electric lighting. The heater's total consumption will be around 600 watts, with each part using about 1/3 of the total, or 200 watts. If you want to make the heater for a 220-volt circuit, you should use 25 ft. of No. 29 gauge "Climax" resistance wire on each tube.
A Molding-Sawing Block Used on a Bench
Having occasion to saw some short pieces of molding, I experienced considerable trouble in holding them without a vise until I made a block, as shown in the sketch. This answered the purpose as well as a vise. The block is not fastened in any manner, but is simply pushed against the edge of the bench or table and held with the hand. It should be about 9 in. wide and 1 ft. long, with strips 2 in. thick at each edge.—Contributed by W. F. Brodnax, Jr., Bethlehem, Pa.
Having the chance to saw short pieces of molding, I had quite a bit of trouble holding them without a vise until I made a block, as shown in the sketch. This worked just as well as a vise. The block isn’t attached in any way; it’s just pushed against the edge of the bench or table and held in place by hand. It should be about 9 inches wide and 1 foot long, with strips that are 2 inches thick on each edge.—Contributed by W. F. Brodnax, Jr., Bethlehem, Pa.

A Block for Holding Molding, or Strips of Wood, While Sawing Small Pieces from Them
A Block for Holding Molding, or Strips of Wood, While Cutting Small Pieces from Them
Pipe Caps Used as Castings for Engine Pistons
Desiring to make a small piston for a model engine and not caring to make a pattern and send it away to have a casting made, I thought of using ordinary pipe caps, these being both inexpensive and of a quality adapted to machining.
Wanting to make a small piston for a model engine and not wanting to create a pattern to have a casting made, I considered using regular pipe caps, which are both cheap and suitable for machining.
The cylinder bore was 1-1/2 in. in diameter, so I secured a standard pipe cap for 1-1/4-in. pipe which gave an outside diameter of about 1-5/8 in. The cap, not having sufficient depth for holding in a chuck, was screwed on a short piece of pipe and then trued in the lathe chuck. The outside surface was turned to a diameter of 1-1/2 in., then removed from the pipe, reversed and chucked again, and the threads bored out to reduce the walls to 1/8 in. This made an excellent piston for a single-acting engine.—Contributed by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, D. C.
The cylinder bore was 1-1/2 inches in diameter, so I attached a standard pipe cap for 1-1/4-inch pipe, which had an outside diameter of about 1-5/8 inches. The cap, not having enough depth to hold securely in a chuck, was screwed onto a short piece of pipe and then aligned in the lathe chuck. The outside surface was turned down to a diameter of 1-1/2 inches, then taken off the pipe, flipped around, and chucked again, and the threads were bored out to reduce the walls to 1/8 inch. This created a great piston for a single-acting engine.—Contributed by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, D. C.
An Electric Horn
A simple electric horn for use on a bicycle, automobile, or for other purposes, can be constructed as shown in Fig. 1. The size will of course depend somewhat on the use for which it is intended, but one with the diaphragm 1-3/4 in. in diameter and the horn 5 in. long and 4 in. in diameter, at the large end, will be sufficient for most purposes. This will make the instrument 7-1/2 or 8 in. in over-all length.
A basic electric horn for use on a bicycle, car, or other applications can be made as illustrated in Fig. 1. The size will vary depending on its intended use, but one with a diaphragm 1-3/4 in. in diameter and a horn that is 5 in. long and 4 in. in diameter at the larger end will be adequate for most needs. This brings the overall length of the device to 7-1/2 or 8 in.

An Electric Horn Operated in a Manner Similar to an Electric Bell on a Battery Circuit (Fig. 1)
An electric horn works similarly to an electric bell on a battery circuit (Fig. 1)
The horn proper, A, Fig. 1, is constructed first. This can be formed from sheet brass. To lay out the metal to the desired size draw a cross section, as ABCD, Fig. 2, then project the lines AC and BD until they meet at E. Strike two arcs of circles on the brass sheet, using EC as radius for the inner one and EA for the outer. Measure off FG and HJ equal to 3-1/4 times DC and AB, respectively, and cut out FGJH. Roll and lap 1/4 in. at the edges and solder the joint neatly.
The main horn, A, Fig. 1, is made first. You can shape it from sheet brass. To lay out the metal to the right size, draw a cross-section like ABCD, Fig. 2, then extend the lines AC and BD until they meet at E. Use EC as the radius for the inner arc and EA for the outer arc to strike two circular arcs on the brass sheet. Measure off FG and HJ to be 3-1/4 times the lengths of DC and AB, respectively, and cut out FGJH. Roll and overlap 1/4 inch at the edges and solder the joint neatly.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
After smoothing the edges on the ends, solder a very thin disk of ferrotype metal, B, Fig. 1, to the small end of the horn. This is used for the diaphragm. Cut out a ring, C, from 1/4-in. hard fiber and bevel it on the inside edge to fit the horn. Also make a disk of fiber, D, having the same outside diameter as the ring C. These parts form the ends for a brass cylinder E, which is made in two parts or halves joined on the lines shown in Fig. 3. Fasten one of the halves, F, Fig. 3, to the fiber ring C and disk D, Fig. 1, with small screws, the other half to be put in place after the instrument is completed and adjusted.
After smoothing the edges on the ends, solder a very thin disk of ferrotype metal, B, Fig. 1, to the small end of the horn. This will serve as the diaphragm. Cut out a ring, C, from 1/4-in. hard fiber and bevel it on the inside edge to fit the horn. Also make a disk of fiber, D, with the same outside diameter as ring C. These parts create the ends for a brass cylinder E, which is made in two parts or halves joined along the lines shown in Fig. 3. Attach one of the halves, F, Fig. 3, to the fiber ring C and disk D, Fig. 1, using small screws; the other half will be put in place after the instrument is completed and adjusted.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
A small support, G, is cut from fiber and fastened in as shown. A pair of magnets of about 50 ohms are mounted on this support. The parts from an old bell or buzzer may be used, which consist of a soft-iron armature, H, Fig. 1, having a strap of spring brass, J, attached by soldering and pivoted at K, with an adjusting screw, L, to set the tension. Another U-shaped spring-brass strip, M, constitutes the current breaker, which has an adjusting screw, N. The points of contact on the current breaker should be tipped with platinum. A piece of brass wire, O, is soldered to the diaphragm disk B and the soft-iron armature H, to connect them solidly. The tone of the horn can be adjusted with the screws L and N. The faster the armature vibrates, the higher the tone, and vice versa. The connections are the same as for an electric bell.—Contributed by James P. Lewis, Golden, Colo.
A small support, G, is cut from fiber and attached as shown. A pair of magnets of about 50 ohms is mounted on this support. You can use parts from an old bell or buzzer, which include a soft-iron armature, H, Fig. 1, with a strap of spring brass, J, soldered on and pivoted at K, along with an adjusting screw, L, to set the tension. Another U-shaped spring-brass strip, M, acts as the current breaker, which also has an adjusting screw, N. The contact points on the current breaker should be tipped with platinum. A piece of brass wire, O, is soldered to the diaphragm disk B and the soft-iron armature H to connect them securely. The tone of the horn can be adjusted using screws L and N. The faster the armature vibrates, the higher the tone, and vice versa. The connections are the same as for an electric bell.—Contributed by James P. Lewis, Golden, Colo.
Combination Meat Saw and Knife
A very handy combination knife and meat saw can be made of an old discarded saw blade. The blade is cut on a line parallel with the toothed edge, allowing enough material to make a good-sized blade, then the straight part is ground to a knife edge and a wood handle attached at one end. The handle is made in halves, placed one on each side of the blade, and riveted together, then the projecting metal is ground off to the shape of the handle.—Contributed by A. C. Westby, Porter, Minn.
A very useful combination knife and meat saw can be made from an old discarded saw blade. The blade is cut along a line parallel to the toothed edge, leaving enough material to create a good-sized blade. Then, the straight part is sharpened to a knife edge, and a wooden handle is attached at one end. The handle is made in two halves, positioned on each side of the blade, and riveted together. The excess metal is then ground down to shape the handle. —Contributed by A. C. Westby, Porter, Minn.

The Blade of the Knife is Cut from the Toothed Side of a Discarded Saw Blade
The Knife's Blade is Made from the Saw Blade's Toothed Edge that was Thrown Away
[410]
Clamp Used as a Vise
A carpenter's wood clamp fastened to the edge of a bench, as shown in the sketch, makes a good substitute for a vise for many kinds of light work. If the clamp is located over or in front of the bench post, holes must be bored in the latter to admit the ends of the clamp screws. A hole is bored through the shoulder screw and a handle attached as shown.—Contributed by H. W. J. Langletz, Harrisburg, Pa.
A carpenter's wood clamp attached to the edge of a bench, as illustrated in the sketch, serves as a good alternative to a vise for many types of light work. If the clamp is positioned over or in front of the bench post, holes need to be drilled in the post to allow for the ends of the clamp screws. A hole is drilled through the shoulder screw, and a handle is attached as shown.—Contributed by H. W. J. Langletz, Harrisburg, Pa.

The Clamp Attached to a Bench Top will Serve the Purpose of a Vise in Many Instances
The clamp attached to a workbench will serve as a vice in many situations.
Wire Expansion Meter
When there is a current of electricity in an electrical conductor a certain amount of heat is generated due to the opposition or resistance of the conductor to the free passage of the electricity through it. The heat thus generated causes a change in the temperature of the conductor and as a result there will be a change in its length, it contracting with a decrease in temperature and expanding with an increase in temperature. The temperature of the conductor will change when the current in it changes, and hence its length will change, and it will reach a constant temperature or a constant length when the current in it is constant in value and the rate at which it is giving off heat is exactly equal to the rate at which heat is being generated in it.
When there's an electric current flowing through a conductor, it generates heat because the conductor resists the smooth flow of electricity. This heat raises the temperature of the conductor, leading to changes in its length—it contracts when it cools down and expands when it heats up. The temperature of the conductor will shift as the current changes, which means its length will also change. It will stabilize at a constant temperature or length when the current remains steady, as the amount of heat it loses matches the amount of heat being produced.
The fact that there is an actual change in the length of the conductor due to a change in current in it constitutes the fundamental principle of the following simple instrument.
The fact that the length of the conductor actually changes due to a change in current flowing through it forms the basic principle of the following simple instrument.

Meter for Measuring the Expansion of Metal Wires Which are Heated by Electricity
Meter for Measuring the Expansion of Metal Wires Which are Heated by Electricity
The parts needed in its construction are as follows: An old safety-razor blade; one 8-in. hatpin; two medium-size nails; a short piece of German-silver wire; a small piece of sealing wax; a 1/2-in. board for the base, approximately 3-1/2 in. by 10 in., and a small piece of thin sheet brass. Remove the head from the hatpin and fasten the blunt end in the center of the safety-razor blade A with a piece of sealing wax so that the pin B is perpendicular to the blade as shown. Now drive the two nails into the board C, so that they are about 1/4 in. from the edges and 1-1/2 in. from the end. Fasten the piece of German-silver wire D to these nails as shown. The size of this wire will depend upon the value of the current to be measured. Make a small hook, E, from a short piece of rather stiff wire and fasten it to the hatpin about 1 in. from the razor blade. The length of this hook should be such that the pointed end of the hatpin will be at the top of the scale F when there is no current in the wire, D. The scale F is made by bending the piece of sheet brass so as to form a right angle and fastening it to the base. A piece of thin cardboard can be mounted upon the surface of the vertical portion of the piece of brass and a suitable scale inked upon it. The instrument is now complete with the exception of two binding posts, not shown in the sketch, that may be mounted at convenient points on the base and connected to the ends of the German-silver wire, thus serving as terminals for the instrument.
The parts needed for building it are as follows: an old safety razor blade; one 8-inch hatpin; two medium-sized nails; a short piece of German-silver wire; a small piece of sealing wax; a 1/2-inch board for the base, approximately 3.5 inches by 10 inches; and a small piece of thin sheet brass. Remove the head from the hatpin and attach the blunt end in the center of the safety razor blade A with a piece of sealing wax, so the pin B is perpendicular to the blade, as shown. Now, drive the two nails into the board C, about 1/4 inch from the edges and 1.5 inches from the end. Attach the piece of German-silver wire D to these nails as shown. The size of this wire will depend on the current you need to measure. Make a small hook, E, from a short piece of stiff wire and attach it to the hatpin about 1 inch from the razor blade. The length of this hook should be such that the pointed end of the hatpin will be at the top of the scale F when there’s no current in the wire D. The scale F is made by bending the piece of sheet brass to form a right angle and securing it to the base. A piece of thin cardboard can be mounted on the surface of the vertical part of the brass, and a suitable scale can be drawn on it. The instrument is now complete, except for two binding posts, which are not shown in the sketch but can be mounted at convenient points on the base and connected to the ends of the German-silver wire, serving as terminals for the instrument.
The completed instrument can be calibrated by connecting it in series with another instrument whose calibration is known and marking the position of the pointer on the scale for different values of current.
The finished instrument can be calibrated by connecting it in series with another instrument that has a known calibration and noting the position of the pointer on the scale for different current values.
How to Make a Fire and Burglar Alarm
A very serviceable fire and burglar alarm may be installed by anyone who can work with carpenters' tools and who has an elementary knowledge of electricity. Fire and burglar alarms are divided into two general types, called "open circuit" and "closed circuit," respectively.
A useful fire and burglar alarm can be installed by anyone who can handle carpentry tools and has a basic understanding of electricity. Fire and burglar alarms are generally categorized into two types, known as "open circuit" and "closed circuit," respectively.
In the open-circuit type of alarm all the windows, doors, and places to be protected are equipped with electrical alarm springs which are in circuit with an ordinary vibrating bell and battery, and these alarm springs are all normally open. When a window or door is disturbed or moved more than a predetermined amount, the bell circuit is closed and the alarm sounded. The arrangement of such an alarm is shown in Fig. 1. A switch, A, is placed in circuit so that the alarm may be disconnected during the day and the opening and closing of doors and windows will not operate the bell. It is best not to place a switch in the fire-alarm circuit as this circuit should be in an operating condition at all times.
In an open-circuit alarm system, all the windows, doors, and other areas that need protection are fitted with electrical alarm springs connected to a standard vibrating bell and battery, and these alarm springs are usually in an open state. When a window or door is disturbed or moved beyond a certain limit, the bell circuit is closed, and the alarm goes off. The setup for this type of alarm is illustrated in Fig. 1. A switch, A, is included in the circuit so that the alarm can be turned off during the day, preventing the bell from ringing when doors and windows are opened and closed. It's recommended not to place a switch in the fire-alarm circuit since this circuit should always be operational.

Connections and Wiring Diagram Showing an Open-Circuit Fire and Burglar Alarm (Fig. 1)
Connections and Wiring Diagram Showing an Open-Circuit Fire and Burglar Alarm (Fig. 1)
The alarm switch controlled by the window consists of a narrow metal plate, B, and a spring, C, mounted in a recess cut in the side of the window frame. The spring C is bent into such a form that its upper end is forced into contact with the plate B, when the window is raised past the outwardly projecting part of the spring C, and the bell circuit is thus closed. The position of the alarm switch can be adjusted so that the window may be opened a sufficient distance to permit the necessary ventilation but not allow a burglar to enter.
The alarm switch by the window consists of a slim metal plate, B, and a spring, C, placed in a recess on the side of the window frame. The spring C is shaped so that its upper end makes contact with the plate B when the window is lifted past the part of the spring that sticks out, closing the bell circuit. The alarm switch's position can be adjusted so that the window can be opened enough for ventilation while preventing a burglar from getting in.
The alarm switch controlled by the door is arranged in a different manner. In this case the free end of the spring D is held away from contact with the spring E by the edge of the door, which forces the spring D back into the recess cut in the door jamb. When the door is opened the spring E is permitted to move out and come into contact with the spring or plate E, and the alarm circuit is thus closed. The form of the spring D can be so adjusted that the door may be opened some distance, but not enough to allow a person to enter, before the alarm is sounded.
The alarm switch by the door is set up differently. In this case, the free end of spring D is kept from touching spring E by the edge of the door, which forces spring D back into the cut-out area in the door frame. When the door opens, spring E can move out and touch plate E, closing the alarm circuit. The design of spring D can be adjusted so that the door can open a bit without letting someone in before the alarm goes off.
An alarm switch, identical with that just described for the door, should be mounted in the upper part of the window frame to take care of the upper sash. This alarm switch may be located low enough to permit the window to be lowered for the purpose of ventilation without sounding the alarm.
An alarm switch, the same as the one described for the door, should be installed in the upper part of the window frame to monitor the upper sash. This alarm switch can be positioned low enough to allow the window to be opened for ventilation without triggering the alarm.
The wires for these various alarm switches should be run as near completely concealed as possible to prevent them being tampered with by curious parties, who may unintentionally break one of the conductors and thus make some part of the system inoperative. It might be best to test the system occasionally, to make sure all switches are in operating condition.
The wires for these different alarm switches should be installed so that they are mostly hidden to prevent tampering by curious individuals who might accidentally damage one of the wires and cause part of the system to stop working. It's a good idea to test the system from time to time to ensure that all switches are functioning properly.
The fire-alarm switch consists of two springs that are held from contact with each other by means of a thin cord. This switch is placed in the location to be protected, or wherever a fire is most likely to break out, such as over the furnace, in the coal bin, etc. When the cord is destroyed the springs make contact and the alarm is sounded. A metal having a very low melting temperature may be used instead of the cord, and the alarm will [412] be sounded when the temperature exceeds a certain amount and the actual occurrence of a fire thus prevented. In some cases, the fire-alarm switch may be completely destroyed and the alarm circuit will then be opened and the bell will cease ringing. To prevent this trouble a small electric drop may be placed in the circuit, the arrangement being similar to that shown in Fig. 2. When the shutter of the drop falls, due to the closing of the alarm circuit, there is a second circuit closed, and this second circuit remains closed until the shutter is restored to its vertical or normal position, or the switch, A, is thrown to the open point. The addition of the drop in the burglar-alarm circuit may prove to be an advantage, as a burglar cannot stop the alarm, after he has once closed any of the alarm switches and operated the drop, by simply restoring the window or door to its original position.
The fire-alarm switch has two springs that are kept apart from each other by a thin cord. This switch is installed in areas that need protection, or where a fire is likely to start, like above the furnace, in the coal bin, etc. When the cord is broken, the springs touch and trigger the alarm. Instead of the cord, a metal with a very low melting point can be used, and the alarm will go off when the temperature exceeds a certain level, preventing an actual fire. In some cases, the fire-alarm switch might be completely damaged, causing the alarm circuit to open and the bell to stop ringing. To avoid this issue, a small electric drop can be added to the circuit, arranged like that shown in Fig. 2. When the drop's shutter falls due to the alarm circuit closing, a second circuit is activated, and it stays closed until the shutter is put back to its upright or normal position, or the switch, A, is turned off. Adding the drop to the burglar-alarm circuit can be beneficial, since a burglar can't silence the alarm after closing any of the alarm switches and triggering the drop, simply by restoring the window or door to its original position.

Circuit Equipped with Drop to Ring the Bell in Case the Switch is Destroyed (Fig. 2)
Circuit Equipped with a Drop to Ring the Bell if the Switch is Destroyed (Fig. 2)
In the closed-circuit type, the alarm switches are all normally closed and the alarm is sounded by opening the circuit at some point. The arrangement of such an alarm is shown in Fig. 3. The alarm switches are all connected in series in this case and in circuit with a closed-circuit battery and relay or drop. The drop or relay controls a local circuit composed of an open-circuit battery and an ordinary vibrating bell.
In the closed-circuit system, the alarm switches are all normally closed, and the alarm goes off when the circuit is opened at any point. This type of alarm is illustrated in Fig. 3. Here, the alarm switches are connected in series with a closed-circuit battery and a relay or drop. The drop or relay manages a local circuit that includes an open-circuit battery and a standard vibrating bell.

Wiring Diagram Showing Connections for a Closed-Circuit Burglar and Fire Alarm (Fig. 3)
Wiring Diagram Showing Connections for a Closed-Circuit Burglar and Fire Alarm (Fig. 3)
The operation of a drop on a closed circuit is a little different from its operation on a normally open circuit. The drop for the closed circuit must be so constructed that its latch holds the shutter in a vertical position when there is a current in the drop winding, but allows it to fall as soon as the drop circuit is opened.
The operation of a drop on a closed circuit is a bit different from its operation on a normally open circuit. The drop for the closed circuit needs to be designed so that its latch keeps the shutter in a vertical position when there’s current flowing through the drop winding, but lets it fall as soon as the drop circuit is opened.
An ordinary telegraph relay may be used in connection with the closed-circuit alarm. The connections to the relay are such that the bell circuit is normally open and remains so until the armature of the relay is released, which does not occur until the circuit of which its winding is a part is opened at one of the alarm springs. A special switch, A, and resistance, B, are shown connected in circuit in Fig. 3, the object of which is as follows: When it is desired to disconnect the alarm springs or make them inoperative they must be replaced by another circuit which will permit a sufficient current to pass through the relay winding at all times, to prevent its armature from being released and sounding the alarm. The switch A is so constructed that either the alarm switches or the resistance B is in series with the battery and relay winding at all times, there being no open-circuit position for the switch.
An ordinary telegraph relay can be used with the closed-circuit alarm. The connections to the relay are set up so that the bell circuit is normally open and stays that way until the relay's armature is released, which only happens when the circuit that its winding is part of is opened at one of the alarm springs. A special switch, A, and a resistor, B, are shown connected in the circuit in Fig. 3, and their purpose is as follows: When you want to disconnect the alarm springs or make them inactive, they must be replaced by another circuit that allows enough current to flow through the relay winding at all times, preventing the armature from being released and the alarm from sounding. The switch A is designed so that either the alarm switches or the resistor B is always in series with the battery and relay winding, with no open-circuit position for the switch.
The fire-alarm switch for this type of signal may be made from a narrow piece of tin foil, or some metal having a low melting temperature, mounted between two insulated clips that are connected in the alarm circuit.
The fire-alarm switch for this type of signal can be made from a narrow piece of tin foil or a metal with a low melting point, mounted between two insulated clips that are connected in the alarm circuit.
Strips of gold or silver foil may be placed on windows and connected in the alarm circuit, which will give a protection from theft by breaking the glass.
Strips of gold or silver foil can be placed on windows and linked to the alarm system, providing protection against theft by breaking the glass.
Two or three gravity cells will serve very nicely for the closed-circuit battery, while several dry cells will do for the open-circuit or bell battery.
Two or three gravity cells will work well for the closed-circuit battery, while several dry cells will be sufficient for the open-circuit or bell battery.
All types of alarm switches can be [413] purchased at any up-to-date electrical supply house, but their construction and operation is so simple that they may be easily made by almost anyone. A detailed description of the construction of the various parts of the above circuits will not be given here, but such details can be safely left to the ingenuity of the person installing the system.
All kinds of alarm switches can be [413] bought at any modern electrical supply store, but their design and function are so straightforward that almost anyone can easily make them. A detailed description of how the different parts of these circuits are built won't be provided here, but those specifics can be trusted to the creativity of the person setting up the system.
It is easily seen from the above description that a burglar who might discover that a house was wired for alarm would be greatly perplexed to know what to do, for the very thing that would prevent one kind of alarm from ringing would cause the other to ring.
It’s clear from the description above that a burglar who finds out a house has an alarm system would be really confused about what to do, because what stops one type of alarm from going off would set the other one off.
Removing a Rear Bicycle Sprocket
If a bicycle rider desires to remove the rear sprocket for changing the gear, or for any other reason, and there is no large pipe wrench at hand, a piece of tube or pipe, as shown in the sketch, can be used as a lever. Fasten one end of the chain in one end of the pipe with a wedge and place the other end of the pipe on a sprocket. The chain is then placed over the sprockets and a leverage equal to any pipe wrench is secured.—Contributed by Jno. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
If a cyclist wants to take off the rear sprocket to change the gear or for any other reason, and there isn't a large pipe wrench available, they can use a piece of tube or pipe, as shown in the sketch, as a lever. Secure one end of the chain to one end of the pipe with a wedge and position the other end of the pipe on the sprocket. Then, place the chain over the sprockets, providing leverage equal to any pipe wrench. —Contributed by Jno. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.

The Piece of Pipe Gives a Leverage Equal to That of a Large Pipe Wrench
The Pipe Section Provides a Leverage Equivalent to That of a Large Pipe Wrench
Hand Propeller-Wheel Attachment for a Rowboat
The rear fork of an old bicycle frame, with the crank hanger attached, and the rear hub constitute the main parts of the propelling device. One of the cranks is cut from the hanger and a bracket attached to the frame, as shown, for making it fast to the stern of the boat. Two propeller blades are bolted to the rear hub. A rudder is fastened to the rear tube of the frame with hooks and eyes so that it can be turned with a handle at the top, or with ropes run to a wheel. The illustration shows the connection of the device to a boat.—Contributed by Berge Lion, Fresno, Cal.
The back fork of an old bicycle frame, along with the crank hanger and the rear hub, are the main components of the propulsion system. One of the cranks is cut from the hanger, and a bracket is attached to the frame, as shown, to securely fasten it to the back of the boat. Two propeller blades are bolted to the rear hub. A rudder is attached to the back tube of the frame with hooks and eyes so that it can be turned using a handle at the top or with ropes leading to a wheel. The illustration shows how the device connects to a boat.—Contributed by Berge Lion, Fresno, Cal.

The Rear Fork of a Bicycle with Its Parts Constitutes the Main Propeller Attachment
The rear fork of a bicycle with its parts is the main attachment for the propeller.
An Attached Back for a Photographic Printing Frame
In using the ordinary photographic printing frame with a spring-pressure back, the back must be entirely removed from the frame to put in the paper, and as this operation is carried on in a dim light, the back is often mislaid, causing no little inconvenience and delay. To do away with this annoyance, I placed at one end of the frame, as shown in the sketch, a second hinge made of cloth or any pliable material. When the pressure springs are released, the back swings down on this auxiliary hinge, and after changing the papers, it is instantly closed by a slight movement of the hand, making it very rapid and easy to use.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.
When using a standard photographic printing frame with a spring-pressure back, you have to take the back completely off the frame to insert the paper. Since this is usually done in low light, the back often gets misplaced, leading to some annoyance and delays. To eliminate this hassle, I added a second hinge made of cloth or any flexible material at one end of the frame, as shown in the sketch. When you release the pressure springs, the back swings down on this extra hinge, and after changing the papers, it can be quickly closed with a simple hand movement, making it very fast and easy to use.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, Wibaux, Mont.

The Back, being Hinged to the Frame, Prevents It from being Mislaid
The back, which is attached to the frame, prevents it from getting lost.
[414]
Repairing a Worn Stop Cock
The plug of a worn stop cock, or one that has been reground, of the type shown in the illustration will project beyond the bottom so that the ring, or washer, and screw will not draw it tightly into place.
The plug of a worn stopcock, or one that has been reground, like the one shown in the illustration, will stick out past the bottom so that the ring, or washer, and screw won't pull it tightly into place.

Removing a Portion of the Plug and Shortening the Screw Allows the Parts to be Drawn Tightly Together
Removing part of the plug and shortening the screw allows the pieces to be pulled tightly together.
To remedy this trouble, file off a portion of the plug on the line AA and also file off a sufficient amount of the screw on the line BB. When the plug is replaced and the washer and screw drawn up, the stop cock will be as good as a new one.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
To fix this problem, shave off a bit of the plug on line AA and also reduce the screw on line BB. Once you put the plug back and tighten the washer and screw, the stopcock will be as good as new. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Tool Holders Made of Brass Clips
Hangers to grip tool handles can be easily formed of sheet metal in any desired material. The clips are shaped as shown at A in the sketch. Any number of the clips may be fastened with screws to a wood crosspiece or a wall in such a manner as to make openings into which the handles of the tools are pressed. Before fastening the clips they should be spaced for the widths of the handles.—Contributed by F. H. Tillotson, Sycamore, Ill.
Hangers for gripping tool handles can be easily made from sheet metal in any material you want. The clips are shaped like the one shown at A in the sketch. You can attach as many clips as needed with screws to a wooden crosspiece or a wall, creating openings where the tool handles can be inserted. Before attaching the clips, make sure to space them according to the widths of the handles.—Contributed by F. H. Tillotson, Sycamore, Ill.

The Clips can be Set So That They will Grip Any Size Tool Handle
The clips can be adjusted to securely hold any size tool handle.
Removing Perspiration Stains from Delicate Cloth
Lay the stain in the cloth over some blotting paper, and sponge the cloth with a grain-alcohol and ether solution, which should be made by mixing equal portions of each. The sponging should be quite vigorous and kept up until the cloth is dry, then the spot should be touched lightly with ammonia water, which can be purchased at any drug store. This will leave a slight blur, which can be removed by rubbing with French chalk on the wrong side. The chalk is cheap and can be procured with the ammonia water. Do not forget the blotting paper, as it keeps the solution from forming a ring around the spot.
Lay the stained part of the cloth over some blotting paper, and sponge the cloth with a solution of grain alcohol and ether, which should be mixed in equal parts. The sponging should be quite vigorous and continue until the cloth is dry. Then, lightly touch the spot with ammonia water, which you can buy at any drugstore. This will leave a slight blur that can be removed by rubbing with French chalk on the back side. The chalk is inexpensive and can be purchased along with the ammonia water. Don’t forget the blotting paper; it prevents the solution from creating a ring around the spot.
Buttonhole Cutter
If the buttonhole scissors are mislaid or there are none at hand, the holes may be cut in the manner shown in the sketch. Place a piece of wood, having a width equal to the length of the buttonhole, on the table and lay the cloth over it in the line where the holes are required, then draw a sharp knife across the cloth on the wood where the holes are marked. This will cut the cloth neatly and accurately.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
If the buttonhole scissors are lost or not available, you can cut the holes as shown in the sketch. Place a piece of wood, with a width equal to the length of the buttonhole, on the table and lay the cloth over it where the holes are needed, then use a sharp knife to cut through the cloth on the wood where the holes are marked. This will cut the cloth cleanly and accurately.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.

Sharp Knife Drawn across the Cloth Laid over a Piece of Wood Cuts the Holes
Sharp knife drawn across the cloth laid over a piece of wood cuts the holes.
Filing Small Rods in a Lathe
Reducing the diameter of a small rod by filing while it is turning in a lathe is a difficult thing to do, as the pressure of the file on one side bends the rod. The filing may be easily accomplished by using two files, as shown in the sketch. In this manner almost any amount of pressure can be applied by squeezing the files together without danger of bending the rod.—Contributed by J.F. Tholl, Detroit, Mich.
Reducing the diameter of a small rod by filing it while it’s spinning on a lathe is challenging because the pressure from the file on one side can bend the rod. However, you can easily file it using two files, as shown in the sketch. This way, you can apply almost any amount of pressure by squeezing the files together without risking bending the rod.—Contributed by J.F. Tholl, Detroit, Mich.

The Pressure of One File Against the Other Prevents the Rod from Bending
The pressure of one file against the other keeps the rod from bending.
Young sleepwalkers may be cured if watched and given a good switching until they are wide awake.
Young sleepwalkers might be helped if they are monitored and given a good spanking until they are fully awake.
A D'Arsonval Galvanometer
A galvanometer in which the moving part of the instrument is a permanent magnet controlled by the action of the earth's magnetic field and the magnetic effect of a current in a coil of wire, that usually surrounds the magnet, has the great disadvantage of having its indications changed, although the current itself may remain constant, due to a change in the strength of the magnetic field in which the instrument operates. The operation of instruments of the above type is satisfactory only in localities where there is a practically constant magnetic field for them to operate in, which it is almost impossible to have, due to the presence of permanent and electric magnets and magnetic materials such as iron and steel.
A galvanometer where the moving part is a permanent magnet that is influenced by the Earth's magnetic field and the magnetic effect from a current flowing through a wire coil surrounding the magnet has a significant downside: its readings can change even if the current remains constant, because of variations in the strength of the magnetic field it operates in. These instruments work well only in areas with a nearly constant magnetic field, which is nearly impossible to achieve due to the presence of permanent and electric magnets and magnetic materials like iron and steel.
An instrument constructed as follows will not have the above disadvantage and its operation will be a great deal more satisfactory, as its indications will be practically independent of outside disturbances. In this instrument, the moving part is the coil carrying the current, and it moves in a permanent magnetic field so strong that other disturbing magnetic effects can be neglected. The coil is hung by means of a fine wire and the twist in this wire is the only force acting to bring the coil back to its zero position, after it has been deflected, and maintain it there.
An instrument built this way won’t have the issues mentioned above, and it will work much better since its readings will rely very little on outside disruptions. In this instrument, the coil that carries the current is the moving part, and it operates within a strong permanent magnetic field, allowing any other interfering magnetic effects to be ignored. The coil is suspended by a thin wire, and the twist in this wire is the only force that brings the coil back to its zero position after it’s been moved and keeps it there.

The Permanent Magnet and Its Brass Support, and Their Position on the Base (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The Permanent Magnet and Its Brass Support, and Their Position on the Base (Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3)
The construction of the magnet and containing case for the instrument will be taken up first. Obtain a piece of Norway iron, 1/2 in. square and about 9 in. long. Bend this piece into the form shown in Fig. 1, and file off the inner edges until they are parallel and about 7/8 in. apart. Drill four 1/8-in. holes in the ends of this piece, two in each end, as indicated. This piece of iron is first tempered and then magnetized by placing it in contact with a powerful electromagnet. Cut a second piece from some soft iron with dimensions corresponding to those given in Fig. 2. Drill two 1/8-in. holes, A and B, in this piece as shown in the sketch. This second piece is mounted between the poles of the magnet, as follows: Cut from some 1/32-in. sheet brass a piece similar to the one shown in Fig. 3. Drill the holes indicated and thread those designated by A, B, C, D, E, and F to take a 1/8-in. machine screw. Bend the upper end of the piece over at the point indicated by the dotted line until it is perpendicular to the lower part. The center of the hole in the projecting part K, when it is bent over, should be about 1/4 in. from the outer surface of the main part of the piece. The small piece of iron is then fastened to the piece of brass with two round-headed screws that pass through the two holes in it and into the holes A and B in the brass piece. The magnet is mounted, also with small brass screws, so that the main part of the magnet and the piece of brass extend in opposite directions, as shown in Fig. 1. The assembled parts are then mounted on a wooden board, whose dimensions are given in Fig. 1, with three brass screws that pass through the holes G, H, and J, as shown.
The construction of the magnet and its housing for the instrument will be addressed first. Get a piece of Norway iron, 1/2 inch square and about 9 inches long. Bend this piece into the shape shown in Fig. 1, and file the inner edges until they are parallel and about 7/8 inch apart. Drill four 1/8-inch holes at the ends of this piece, two in each end, as indicated. This iron piece is first tempered and then magnetized by placing it in contact with a strong electromagnet. Cut a second piece from some soft iron with dimensions matching those in Fig. 2. Drill two 1/8-inch holes, A and B, in this piece as shown in the sketch. This second piece is mounted between the magnet's poles as follows: Cut a piece from 1/32-inch sheet brass that resembles the one shown in Fig. 3. Drill the indicated holes and thread those marked A, B, C, D, E, and F to fit a 1/8-inch machine screw. Bend the upper end of the piece over at the point marked by the dotted line until it is vertical to the lower part. The center of the hole in the projecting part K, once bent over, should be about 1/4 inch from the outer surface of the main part. The small iron piece is then attached to the brass piece with two round-headed screws that go through its holes and into the holes A and B in the brass piece. The magnet is also mounted with small brass screws, ensuring that the main part of the magnet and the brass piece extend in opposite directions, as shown in Fig. 1. The assembled parts are then secured on a wooden board, whose dimensions are shown in Fig. 1, using three brass screws that go through the holes G, H, and J, as illustrated.

Upper and Lower Connections to the Coil and Supports, and the Supports for Suspension (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
Upper and Lower Connections to the Coil and Supports, and the Supports for Suspension (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7)
The moving coil of the galvanometer is constructed as follows: Cut from some 1/8-in. pine a piece 1-1/8 in. long and 5/8 in. wide. Cut two other pieces whose dimensions, except their thickness, are 1/4 in. larger than the first piece. Then fasten these two pieces to the sides of the first, with three or four small screws through each of them, thus forming a small spool. Saw about 16 slots with a very fine saw in the edges of the projecting pieces and a short way into the edge of the center piece. Wind on this spool about 300 turns of No. 38 gauge silk-covered copper wire. Start with the terminal of the wire in the center of one end of the spool, with a few inches of free wire for making connections, and end up with the terminal in the center of the opposite end of the spool. A small thread is then passed through the slots under the coil and tied, thus serving to hold the various turns of wire together when the coil is removed from the form. The coil should be given a coat of shellac as soon as it is removed from the form.
The moving coil of the galvanometer is made like this: Cut a piece of 1/8-inch pine that is 1-1/8 inches long and 5/8 inch wide. Then cut two more pieces that are 1/4 inch larger in dimension (except for thickness) than the first piece. Attach these two pieces to the sides of the first one using three or four small screws in each, creating a small spool. Using a very fine saw, make about 16 slots in the edges of the two projecting pieces and a short distance into the edge of the center piece. Wind approximately 300 turns of No. 38 gauge silk-covered copper wire around this spool. Start with the wire terminal in the center of one end of the spool, leaving a few inches of free wire for connections, and finish with the terminal in the center of the other end of the spool. Next, pass a small thread through the slots under the coil and tie it, which helps to hold the wire turns together when the coil is removed from the form. After removing it from the form, the coil should be coated with shellac right away.
Two pieces must now be attached to the top and bottom of the coil to be used in making electrical connections and suspending the coil. Cut from some very thin sheet brass two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in Figs. 4 and 5. Drill a small hole in the center of each of these pieces. Bend the lower part of each piece over at the dotted lines L until it is perpendicular to the main portion of the piece. The bent-over portions of these two pieces are then fastened to the ends of the coil with some fine thread, making sure that they are in the center of the ends before they are fastened. The terminals of the coil are now soldered to these pieces. It would be best to place a sheet or two of thin paper between the brass pieces and the coil, to prevent any part of the coil, except the ends, from coming into contact with the brass pieces. Obtain a small piece of thin mirror and mount it with some glue, as shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 4.
Two pieces need to be attached to the top and bottom of the coil for making electrical connections and suspending the coil. Cut two pieces from a very thin sheet of brass that match the dimensions shown in Figs. 4 and 5. Drill a small hole in the center of each piece. Bend the lower part of each piece over along the dotted lines L until it's perpendicular to the main part of the piece. The bent-over parts of these two pieces are then secured to the ends of the coil with some fine thread, ensuring they are centered on the ends before fastening. The terminals of the coil are now soldered to these pieces. It's best to place one or two sheets of thin paper between the brass pieces and the coil to prevent any part of the coil, except the ends, from touching the brass. Get a small piece of thin mirror and mount it with some glue, as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 4.
The upper support for the suspension is shown in Fig. 6 and consists of a 1/8-in. threaded screw, A, that passes through the hole in the part K, Fig. 3, and is provided with two lock nuts, B. The lower end of this screw should be slotted a short distance, and a small screw put through it, perpendicular to the slot, so that a wire can be easily clamped in the slot by turning up the screw. Next, take a piece of 1/32-in. brass, as shown in Fig. 7, and bend it at the dotted line A until it forms a right angle. The hole B should be threaded to take a 1/8-in. screw. The holes C and D are for mounting the piece on the back of the instrument. Slot the end of a 1/8-in. screw, about 1/2 in. long, and put a screw through the end as for the upper support for the suspension. This piece is mounted below the position the coil is to occupy, as shown by M, Fig. 1.
The upper support for the suspension is shown in Fig. 6 and consists of a 1/8-inch threaded screw, A, that goes through the hole in part K, Fig. 3, and has two lock nuts, B. The lower end of this screw should be slotted a short distance, and a small screw should be inserted through it, perpendicular to the slot, so that a wire can be easily clamped in the slot by tightening the screw. Next, take a piece of 1/32-inch brass, as shown in Fig. 7, and bend it at the dotted line A until it forms a right angle. The hole B should be threaded to fit a 1/8-inch screw. The holes C and D are for mounting the piece on the back of the instrument. Slot the end of a 1/8-inch screw, about 1/2 inch long, and insert a screw through the end as you did for the upper support of the suspension. This piece is mounted below where the coil will be positioned, as shown by M, Fig. 1.

(Fig. 8)
(Fig. 8)
A case should be made for the galvanometer whose inside dimensions correspond to those of the piece N, Fig. 1, and whose depth is about 3/4 in. more than the thickness of that piece. Four pieces of wood can be fastened in the corners that will allow the case to slip just far enough on the piece N to make the edge of the case and the back surface of the piece N flush. Cut an opening in the front of this case, about 2 in. long and 1 in. wide, in such a place that the center of the opening [417] is about level with the ends of the magnet. Fasten, back of this opening, a piece of thin glass with four small screws whose heads rest upon the edge of the glass. The interior of this case and all the parts should be given a coat of lampblack mixed with a little vinegar. Two small binding posts, O and P, are mounted on the upper end of the piece N and connected to the upper and lower supports for the suspension of the coil.
A case should be designed for the galvanometer with inside dimensions that match those of piece N, Fig. 1, and with a depth that's about 3/4 in. more than the thickness of that piece. Four pieces of wood can be attached in the corners, allowing the case to slide just enough on piece N to make the edge of the case flush with the back surface of piece N. Cut an opening in the front of this case, about 2 in. long and 1 in. wide, positioned such that the center of the opening [417] is roughly aligned with the ends of the magnet. Secure a piece of thin glass behind this opening using four small screws with heads resting on the edge of the glass. The inside of this case and all components should be coated with lampblack mixed with a bit of vinegar. Two small binding posts, O and P, are mounted at the upper end of piece N and connected to the upper and lower supports for the coil's suspension.
This galvanometer will work best, of course, when it is in an exactly vertical position and the following simple device, when attached to it, will allow it to assume this position independent of the level of the surface its base may rest upon. Cut from some 1-1/8-in. brass two pieces, 1/2 in. wide and 2-1/2 in. long. Drill a 1/8-in. hole in the center of each end of them, 1/4 in. from the end, and a 1/4-in. hole through the center of each. Bend these pieces to a 3/4-in. radius. Cut from some 1/2-in. hard wood a block, 1-1/4 in. square. Fasten the two pieces of brass to the wooden block with 1/8-in. screws, as shown in Fig. 8. One of these pieces is fastened to the upper end of the piece N, Fig. 1, so that the galvanometer will hang vertically. The other piece is fastened to a bracket from which the galvanometer is suspended. A suitable bracket for this purpose can be easily made. When the galvanometer is hung in this way, two binding posts are mounted on the bracket, and connected to the two on the galvanometer. In this way the galvanometer will not be disturbed when making connections.
This galvanometer works best, of course, when it’s positioned exactly vertically, and the following simple device, when attached, will allow it to achieve this position regardless of the surface level it sits on. Cut two pieces of 1-1/8 in. brass, each 1/2 in. wide and 2-1/2 in. long. Drill a 1/8 in. hole at the center of each end, 1/4 in. from the ends, and a 1/4 in. hole through the center of each. Bend these pieces to a 3/4 in. radius. Cut a 1-1/4 in. square block from some 1/2 in. hardwood. Attach the two brass pieces to the wooden block with 1/8 in. screws, as shown in Fig. 8. One of these pieces is attached to the upper end of piece N, Fig. 1, so the galvanometer will hang vertically. The other piece is secured to a bracket from which the galvanometer is suspended. You can easily make a suitable bracket for this purpose. When the galvanometer is hung this way, two binding posts are installed on the bracket and connected to the two on the galvanometer, ensuring the galvanometer remains stable while making connections.
The suspension is made as follows: Take a piece of small copper wire and roll it out flat. Solder one end of a piece of this wire in the hole in the piece of brass, with the mirror mounted on it. Fasten a piece of the same wire to the lower brass piece, attached to the coil. The upper piece of wire is then clamped in the end of the screw A, Fig. 6, so that the coil hangs perfectly free about the iron core. The lower piece of wire is bent around a small rod several times and its end fastened in the slot in the lower screw.
The suspension is assembled as follows: Take a small piece of copper wire and flatten it out. Solder one end of this wire into the hole in the brass piece that has the mirror attached. Secure a piece of the same wire to the lower brass piece, which is connected to the coil. The upper wire is then clamped into the end of screw A, Fig. 6, so that the coil hangs freely around the iron core. The lower wire is bent around a small rod several times, and its end is secured in the slot of the lower screw.
The deflection of the instrument is read by causing a beam of light from a lamp or candle to be reflected from the mirror to a scale located in front of the instrument. If the light from the lamp is allowed to shine through a small slit in a piece of dark paper, there will be a streak of light reflected upon the scale, instead of a spot.
The instrument's deflection is measured by directing a beam of light from a lamp or candle to be reflected off a mirror onto a scale in front of the instrument. When the light from the lamp shines through a small slit in a dark piece of paper, it creates a streak of light on the scale instead of just a spot.
To use this instrument in measuring larger currents than it will safely carry, connect it in parallel with another resistance which will carry the larger part of the total current. The galvanometer can be calibrated with this resistance, which is known as a shunt.
To use this instrument for measuring larger currents than it can safely handle, connect it in parallel with another resistor that will carry most of the total current. The galvanometer can be calibrated with this resistor, which is called a shunt.
How to Make Advertising Lantern Slides
Procure some old discarded photographic films and remove the gelatin coating by soaking them in hot water. When dry, write the desired words on the thin celluloid and place it between two pieces of glass, lantern-slide size, and bind them as in making a lantern slide.
Get some old, discarded photographic films and take off the gelatin coating by soaking them in hot water. Once they're dry, write the desired words on the thin celluloid and place it between two pieces of glass, sized for a lantern slide, and bind them together like you would when making a lantern slide.
With the use of a carbon paper a very nice slide can be made by writing the words on a typewriter, and it will serve the purpose of an expensive announcement slide.—Contributed by F. P. Dickover, Atkinson, Neb.
Using carbon paper, you can create a really nice slide by typing the words on a typewriter, and it will work just like an expensive announcement slide.—Contributed by F. P. Dickover, Atkinson, Neb.
Utilizing Old Brush Handles

The handle cut from an old dusting brush, fitted with the brass end of a shotgun shell, makes a first-class tool handle. The handle is cut off at A and the wood cut down to fit tightly into the brass shell.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
The handle made from an old dusting brush, attached to the brass end of a shotgun shell, creates an excellent tool handle. The handle is trimmed at A, and the wood is shaped to fit snugly into the brass shell. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
Tincture-of-iodine stains may be removed from clothing or the skin by using strong ammonia water.
Tincture-of-iodine stains can be removed from clothing or skin by using strong ammonia water.
Preserving Paints and Pastes
White lead, thick shellac, and pastes that are used occasionally may be preserved by laying a piece of leather over the exposed surface. When these materials are kept in cans, cut a piece of leather from the upper of a heavy boot of such a size that it will drop freely into the container. Form a handle on the leather disk by driving a nail through its center from the under side. Press the disk down smoothly over the surface of the contents and a thin film of oil will soon form over the disk, effectually excluding the air. A loose cover is placed over the container, to keep out dust.—Contributed by Luther McKnight, Colorado City, Col.
White lead, thick shellac, and pastes that are used from time to time can be preserved by placing a piece of leather over the exposed surface. When storing these materials in cans, cut a piece of leather from the upper part of a heavy boot to fit down into the container. Create a handle on the leather disk by driving a nail through its center from the underside. Press the disk down smoothly over the contents, and a thin layer of oil will soon form on the disk, effectively keeping out the air. A loose cover is then placed over the container to prevent dust from getting in. —Contributed by Luther McKnight, Colorado City, Col.
A Burner for Soldering Small Work

As it was necessary for me to solder the joints of fine wires on electrical instruments, and other small work, I found myself in need of a blowpipe that gave a small but very hot and easily directed flame, was automatic in its operation and required no blast. I tried an ordinary acetylene burner on coal or city gas, and found it gave an intensely hot, nonluminous flame, due to the forced draft of air through the small holes. This flame will melt silver, copper and, also, silver solder. Its great advantage lies in the fact that it may be used for sweating together small articles rapidly and with great neatness. I always keep this blowpipe burning, as the gas it consumes is very small, and the burner is kept within easy reach by using a hanger, as shown in the illustration.
As I needed to solder the connections of thin wires on electronic gadgets and do other small tasks, I realized I needed a blowtorch that could produce a small, very hot, and easily controlled flame, was automatic in its function, and didn’t require a blast of air. I experimented with a regular acetylene burner using coal or city gas, and found it produced an intensely hot, non-luminous flame because of the forced airflow through the tiny holes. This flame can melt silver, copper, and silver solder. Its main benefit is that it allows for quickly and neatly joining small items. I always keep this blowtorch lit since it uses very little gas, and I keep the burner within easy reach by hanging it up, as shown in the illustration.
A single jet of flame is obtained by stopping up one of the tips, which is very useful in many ways. This flame may contain a small luminous spot on some city gas, but it does not interfere with the heat.—Contributed by Arthur Worischek, New York City.
A single flame can be produced by blocking one of the tips, which is very useful in various ways. This flame might have a small bright spot when using certain city gas, but it doesn't affect the heat. —Contributed by Arthur Worischek, New York City.
A Safety-Match-Box Holder
A holder, as well as a tray, for safety matches can be made from any ordinary tobacco can. The metal on one side is cut as shown and the pieces bent up to form standards for holding the match box in an upright position. The openings left where the metal was raised are used for dropping the burned matches into the box. The hinged cover is used for emptying the tray.—Contributed by David B. Lutz, E. St. Louis, Ill.
A holder and tray for safety matches can be made from an ordinary tobacco can. One side of the metal is cut as shown, and the pieces are bent up to create supports for holding the matchbox upright. The openings left where the metal was raised are used for dropping the burned matches into the box. The hinged cover is for emptying the tray. —Contributed by David B. Lutz, E. St. Louis, Ill.

The Match Box is Held Upright between Standards Formed from the Tin of the Tobacco Box
The matchbox is held upright between standards made from the tin of the tobacco tin.
Removing Ink Stains from Book Leaves
When the leaves of a book are accidentally stained with ink it can be removed quite readily by the following process: After removing as much of the ink as possible with a camel's-hair brush dipped in water, soak the stained parts in a solution of oxalate of potash, or better still, oxalic acid. This will remove all the ink. Treat again with water, as before, so that when it dries out no salt will appear on the paper. This process does not affect printer's ink.—Contributed by S. G. Thompson, Owensboro, Ky.
When the pages of a book accidentally get ink stains, you can easily fix it using this method: First, use a camel's-hair brush dipped in water to remove as much ink as possible. Then, soak the stained areas in a solution of potassium oxalate, or even better, oxalic acid. This will take away all the ink. Rinse with water again, just like before, so when it dries, no salt will be left on the paper. This method won't harm printer's ink. —Contributed by S. G. Thompson, Owensboro, Ky.
A Needle-Spray Nozzle

To make a needle-spray nozzle, either insert a 22-caliber cartridge in a small tube, or place a 45-caliber shell over the end of the tube and solder it in place. The end is perforated to make one or more small holes, as desired.
To create a needle-spray nozzle, either insert a .22 caliber cartridge into a small tube, or place a .45 caliber shell over the end of the tube and solder it in place. The end is perforated to create one or more small holes, as needed.
How to Make an Electrotype Stamp
The method described in the following produces a very good metal stamp for any name, initial, drawing, etc.
The method described below creates a really good metal stamp for any name, initial, drawing, etc.
Procure a smooth and perfectly level sheet of brass about 1/16 in. thick and about 3 by 4 in. in size. Nickelplate the brass so that the copper deposit will not stick to it. If a small plating outfit is not at hand the piece may be plated at a local plating works for a nominal price. Dip the plate in melted paraffin until the coating is about 1/16 in. thick and see that no metal is exposed. Drill a hole in one corner and attach a wire.
Get a smooth, perfectly flat sheet of brass that's about 1/16 inch thick and roughly 3 by 4 inches in size. Nickel plate the brass so that the copper won't stick to it. If you don't have a small plating setup available, you can have the piece plated at a local plating shop for a small fee. Dip the plate in melted paraffin until the coating is about 1/16 inch thick, ensuring that no metal is visible. Drill a hole in one corner and attach a wire.
Draw the letters or sketch desired, using a metal stylus having a sharp point, taking care to make the lines scratched in the wax clean and open to the surface of the metal (Fig. 1).
Draw the letters or sketch what you want, using a metal stylus with a sharp point. Make sure the lines scratched into the wax are clean and clearly visible on the metal surface (Fig. 1).

Making the Copper Shell (Fig. 1)
Making the Copper Shell (Fig. 1)
A large open-mouthed bottle or glass tank will be required for the plating solution, which is made by dissolving copper sulphate in water until the solution is saturated with the sulphate and then adding a few drops of sulphuric acid. Immerse the plate in the solution as shown in Fig. 2 and connect with the zinc pole of the battery. Put a piece of pure copper in on the opposite side of the jar and connect with the carbon pole of the battery, using care in each case to keep the connection of the wire and the upper part of the plate above the surface. One or two dry cells will be sufficient. If the current is right, the deposit on the waxed plate will be a flesh pink; if too strong, it will be a dirty brick color and the plate will have to be washed and the current reduced. When the desired thickness of metal is deposited, remove the plate and pour boiling water on the back. This will remove the thin copper shell and the nickeled plate may be laid away for future use.
A large, wide-mouthed bottle or glass tank is needed for the plating solution, which is created by dissolving copper sulfate in water until the solution is fully saturated with the sulfate, then adding a few drops of sulfuric acid. Immerse the plate in the solution as shown in Fig. 2 and connect it to the zinc terminal of the battery. Place a piece of pure copper on the opposite side of the jar and connect it to the carbon terminal of the battery, making sure to keep the wire connections and the upper part of the plate above the surface. One or two dry cells will be enough. If the current is set correctly, the deposit on the waxed plate will be a light pink; if it's too strong, it will be a dull brick color, and the plate will need to be washed and the current reduced. Once the desired thickness of metal is deposited, remove the plate and pour boiling water on the back. This will strip off the thin copper shell, and the nickeled plate can be stored for future use.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
Procure a flat pan and after placing the shell in it, face down, sprinkle a little resin or soldering flux on the back. Lay three or four sheets of the lead from tea packages on the back of the shell and heat it over a spirit lamp or on the stove until the lead melts and runs into the crevices on the back of the copper, thus making it solid and suitable for mounting. Mount as shown in Fig. 3 with small brass screws and after polishing the surface to remove dirt, etc., the stamp is ready for use.
Get a flat pan and place the shell in it, face down. Sprinkle a bit of resin or soldering flux on the back. Lay three or four sheets of lead from tea packages on the back of the shell and heat it over a spirit lamp or on the stove until the lead melts and fills the gaps on the back of the copper, making it solid and ready for mounting. Mount as shown in Fig. 3 with small brass screws, and after polishing the surface to remove any dirt, the stamp is ready to use.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
An ordinary stamp pad will do for inking, but the best ink to use is printer's slightly thinned, as the ordinary rubber stamp ink is not suitable for a metal stamp.—Contributed by S. V. Cooke, Hamilton, Ont.
An ordinary stamp pad works for inking, but the best ink to use is slightly thinned printer's ink, since regular rubber stamp ink isn't suitable for a metal stamp.—Contributed by S. V. Cooke, Hamilton, Ont.
A Cover for a Bottle
If a glass medicine bottle is to be carried constantly in the pocket, it is best to cover it with leather or rubber. The sketch shows how to cut the pattern so that it will fit a square bottle. The bottle is placed on the leather, or a piece of paper as a pattern, and the outlines marked upon it. The leather or paper is then folded over four times and cut out as shown. This cover will prevent the glass from being scattered in the pocket should the bottle be accidentally broken. It always provides a means of distinguishing it from other bottles of the same type and size.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
If you need to carry a glass medicine bottle in your pocket all the time, it's best to cover it with leather or rubber. The sketch shows how to cut the pattern to fit a square bottle. Place the bottle on the leather or a piece of paper as a pattern, and mark the outlines on it. Then, fold the leather or paper over four times and cut it out as shown. This cover will keep the glass from breaking and scattering in your pocket if the bottle accidentally breaks. It also helps you easily identify it among other bottles of the same type and size.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

Pattern for Making a Bottle Cover of Leather or Rubber for Bottles Carried in the Pocket
Pattern for Making a Bottle Cover out of Leather or Rubber for Bottles Carried in Your Pocket
Boring a Long Hole

The usual method of boring a hole through a piece of wood longer than the bit is to bore from each end. To make the hole straight by this method, split the wood or saw it in halves, then make a knife kerf in both pieces on a center line of the hole and glue the pieces together. The spur of the bit will follow the kerf from either end, and the result will be a meeting of the holes, almost perfectly in the center.—Contributed by Ernest J. Dickert, Niagara Falls, N. Y.
The usual way to drill a hole through a piece of wood that’s longer than the drill bit is to drill from both ends. To keep the hole straight using this method, split the wood or cut it in half, then make a knife cut (kerf) on the center line of the hole in both pieces and glue them back together. The point of the drill bit will follow the kerf from either end, resulting in the holes meeting almost perfectly in the center.—Contributed by Ernest J. Dickert, Niagara Falls, N. Y.
Covering for a Gas-Stove Top
While frying or cooking on a gas stove the grease will spatter over the top and make the cleaning rather difficult, especially where there are many crevices. A simple method of avoiding this trouble is to place a paper over the top of the stove, with round holes cut out for each burner a little larger than the pots and pans used in the cooking. This will keep the stove very clean with a minimum of bother. A paper cut to fit the under pan will keep that part clean.—Contributed by S. F. Warner, East Orange, N. J.
While frying or cooking on a gas stove, grease tends to splatter everywhere, making cleanup pretty tough, especially in those hard-to-reach spots. An easy way to avoid this mess is to place a paper over the stove, with round holes cut out for each burner, slightly larger than the pots and pans you're using. This method will keep your stove clean with minimal effort. A paper cut to fit the bottom pan will also keep that area clean.—Contributed by S. F. Warner, East Orange, N. J.
Homemade Skis
Not having a bent board suitable for a pair of skis, I proceeded to make the skis in the following manner: A cheese box was procured and two pieces cut out of the side, each 15 in. long and 3 in. wide. These were used for the upturned ends and two boards, 6 ft. long and 3 in. wide, served as the runners. A notch, 4 in. long and 1/8 in. deep, was cut in one end of each board to receive one end of the thin curved pieces cut from the cheese box, which were fastened with screws. The upper end of each thin piece was cut to a point.
Not having a board that was right for making skis, I decided to create the skis like this: I got a cheese box and cut out two pieces from the side, each 15 inches long and 3 inches wide. These became the upturned ends, and I used two boards that were 6 feet long and 3 inches wide for the runners. I made a 4-inch long and 1/8-inch deep notch at one end of each board to fit one end of the thin curved pieces cut from the cheese box, which I secured with screws. The top end of each thin piece was trimmed to a point.

The Curved Part of the Runner is Made from Pieces Cut Out of a Round Cheese Box
The curved part of the runner is made from pieces cut out of a round cheese box.
A piece for the foot, 10 in. long and 3 in. wide, with a notch 1 in. wide and 1/4 in. deep, was fastened in the center of the runner. A strap is run through the notch for holding the ski to the foot—Contributed by Henry Meuse, Reading, Mass.
A piece for the foot, 10 inches long and 3 inches wide, with a notch 1 inch wide and 1/4 inch deep, was attached in the center of the runner. A strap goes through the notch to secure the ski to the foot—Contributed by Henry Meuse, Reading, Mass.
To remove iron rust or ink stains from cloth, use a warm solution of oxalic acid with a few crystals of citric acid added. Repeat the washings until the stain is removed.
To get rid of iron rust or ink stains from fabric, use a warm solution of oxalic acid with a few crystals of citric acid mixed in. Keep washing until the stain is gone.
How to Make a Dry Cell
The containing vessel for the cell should be made from sheet zinc. It should be cylindrical in form, approximately 2-1/2 in. in diameter and 6 in. long. This vessel is to form the negative terminal of the cell and a suitable connecting device, similar to the one shown in the sketch, should be provided and securely fastened to the upper edge of the vessel. The vessel should be lined with some heavy blotting paper, both sides and bottom.
The container for the cell should be made from sheet zinc. It should be cylindrical, about 2.5 inches in diameter and 6 inches long. This container will be the negative terminal of the cell, and a suitable connector, like the one shown in the sketch, should be attached securely to the top edge of the container. The inside of the container should be lined with heavy blotting paper on both sides and the bottom.

Cross Section through the Cell, Showing the Construction and Location of the Parts
Cross Section of the Cell, Showing the Structure and Placement of the Parts
Place into a glass jar a small quantity of chloride-of-zinc crystals, and pour over them 1/2 pt. of distilled water. Allow the crystals to dissolve at least one-half hour. If the crystals all dissolve, add more until some remain in the bottom of the jar, or until the liquid is saturated. Pour off the solution and dilute it by adding an equal part of distilled water. Add to this solution sal ammoniac, in the proportion of 1 lb. of sal ammoniac to every 2 qt. of liquid. Fill the dry-cell vessel with this solution and allow it to remain until the blotting paper is completely saturated.
Place a small amount of zinc chloride crystals in a glass jar and pour 1/2 pint of distilled water over them. Let the crystals dissolve for at least half an hour. If all the crystals dissolve, add more until some are left at the bottom of the jar, or until the liquid is saturated. Pour off the solution and dilute it by adding an equal amount of distilled water. To this solution, add ammonium chloride at a ratio of 1 pound of ammonium chloride for every 2 quarts of liquid. Fill the dry-cell container with this solution and let it sit until the blotting paper is completely saturated.
Obtain a good size electric-light carbon, about 5/8 in. in diameter, and file one end down as shown. Drill a hole through the carbon and mount a terminal.
Get a properly sized electric light carbon, about 5/8 inch in diameter, and file one end down as shown. Drill a hole through the carbon and attach a terminal.
Make a mixture of equal parts of finely powdered carbon and manganese dioxide of sufficient amount to almost fill the vessel. Add to this mixture some of the solution and thoroughly mix them. Continue adding solution until a thick paste is formed.
Make a mix of equal parts of finely powdered carbon and manganese dioxide, enough to nearly fill the container. Add some of the solution to this mix and blend them well. Keep adding solution until a thick paste forms.
Pour the solution out of the vessel and allow the latter to drain for a few minutes in an inverted position. Place the carbon rod in the center of the vessel and pack the paste down around it, being careful not to move the carbon rod from its central position. The vessel should be filled with the paste to within about 5/8 in. of the top. The lower end of the carbon rod should not be nearer the bottom of the vessel than 1/2 in. Over the top of the paste place a mixture of equal parts sand and fine sawdust and then, over this, a layer of pitch, which acts as a seal for the cell. A layer of blotting paper should be placed between the sand-sawdust mixture and the carbon-manganese mixture. The side lining of the vessel should be turned in before the sand-sawdust mixture is placed in the top of the cell. The outside of the cell should be covered with some heavy pasteboard, which will serve to insulate the negative terminal from the surface upon which the cell rests.
Pour the solution out of the container and let it drain for a few minutes upside down. Place the carbon rod in the center of the container and pack the paste around it, being careful not to shift the carbon rod from its central position. The container should be filled with the paste to about 5/8 in. from the top. The bottom end of the carbon rod should be at least 1/2 in. above the bottom of the container. On top of the paste, add a mixture of equal parts sand and fine sawdust, followed by a layer of pitch, which will seal the cell. Place a layer of blotting paper between the sand-sawdust mixture and the carbon-manganese mixture. The side lining of the container should be folded in before the sand-sawdust mixture is added to the top of the cell. The outside of the cell should be covered with heavy pasteboard to insulate the negative terminal from the surface where the cell sits.
A Hose-Nozzle Handle
A handle for a garden-hose nozzle is easily made of a piece of wire and the wooden part of a package carrier. The wire is bent to receive the hose at A, and, after the handle is slipped on, the other end is formed to fit tightly over the brass nozzle at B. The hose nozzle can be easily carried with the handle, which will keep the hand dry.—Contributed by F. G. Marbach, Cleveland, O.
A handle for a garden hose nozzle is simple to make using a piece of wire and the wooden part of a package carrier. The wire is bent to hold the hose at A, and once the handle is on, the other end is shaped to fit snugly over the brass nozzle at B. You can easily carry the hose nozzle with the handle, which will keep your hand dry.—Contributed by F. G. Marbach, Cleveland, O.

The Handle Is Made of a Piece of Wire and a Package Grip
The handle is made of a piece of wire and a package grip.
[422]
Guide for Cutting Mortises

After spending considerable time in cutting one mortise in a piece to make the settee described in a recent issue of Popular Mechanics Magazine, I devised the plan shown in the sketch which enabled me to cut all the mortises required in the time that I cut one in the ordinary manner. Two metal plates, one of which is shown in the sketch, having a perfectly straight edge, are clamped on the piece with the straight edge on the line of the mortise. A hacksaw is applied through holes bored at the ends and a cut sawed along against the metal edges.—Contributed by George Gluck, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
After spending quite a bit of time cutting one mortise in a piece to make the settee described in a recent issue of Popular Mechanics Magazine, I came up with the plan shown in the sketch that allowed me to cut all the mortises I needed in the same time it took to cut one the usual way. Two metal plates, one of which is shown in the sketch, have a perfectly straight edge and are clamped onto the piece with the straight edge aligned on the line of the mortise. A hacksaw is used through holes drilled at the ends, and a cut is made along the metal edges. —Contributed by George Gluck, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
Insect-Proof Poultry Roost

To protect the poultry from mites and other insects while roosting, I constructed a roost hanger, as shown, with oil cups made of empty shoe-polish cans. The cover of the box was nailed to the roost and the bottom, for holding the oil, on top of the roost support. A large nail was driven through the support from the under side and through the center of the can bottom, so that about 1-1/4 in. projected above the latter.
To keep the poultry safe from mites and other insects while they roost, I built a roost hanger, like the one shown, using empty shoe-polish cans for oil cups. The box's cover was nailed to the roost, and the bottom, where the oil goes, was placed on top of the roost support. A large nail was driven through the support from underneath and through the center of the can's bottom, so about 1-1/4 inches stuck up above it.
The can cover was perforated in the center and a hole, about 1/2 in. deep, was drilled in the roost so that the end of the nail would easily slip into it. The bottom of the can was filled with a mixture of kerosene, vaseline and carbolic acid and the roost set in place. Both ends of each roost are fixed in the same way. This makes it impossible for any insects to get on the roost.—Contributed by Rudolph Netzeband, St. Louis, Mo.
The can cover had a hole drilled in the center, and a 1/2 inch deep hole was made in the roost so the nail could easily fit into it. The bottom of the can was filled with a mix of kerosene, Vaseline, and carbolic acid, and the roost was secured in place. Both ends of each roost are attached the same way. This setup prevents any insects from getting on the roost. —Contributed by Rudolph Netzeband, St. Louis, Mo.
To Prevent Shade Rollers from Unwinding
Obtain a stick for the hem on the lower end of the shade that is 2 in. longer than the shade is wide. Place two small wood screws in the window casing below the shade roller in such a position that they will catch the ends of the stick when the shade is raised to the top.—Contributed by Harry E. Kay, Ossining, N. Y.
Get a stick for the hem on the bottom of the shade that is 2 inches longer than the shade is wide. Place two small wood screws in the window frame below the shade roller so that they will catch the ends of the stick when the shade is pulled up to the top. —Contributed by Harry E. Kay, Ossining, N. Y.
A Screen and Storm-Door Cushion

A good cushion that will prevent a spring door from slamming can be made out of material cut from an old rubber boot or, better still, from an old hollow rubber ball. Three strips of heavy rubber, 1-1/4 in. long and 3/8 in. wide, are cut and each fastened with two tacks so that the center will make a hump, as shown in the sketch. One cushion is fastened near the top, one near the bottom, and one in the center, in the rabbet of the door frame.—Contributed by D. Andrew McComb, Toledo, O.
A good cushion to stop a spring door from slamming can be made from material cut from an old rubber boot or, even better, from an old hollow rubber ball. Cut three strips of heavy rubber, each 1-1/4 inches long and 3/8 inch wide, and attach them with two tacks so that the center creates a hump, as shown in the sketch. Place one cushion near the top, one near the bottom, and one in the center, in the groove of the door frame.—Contributed by D. Andrew McComb, Toledo, O.
Repairing a Coaster Brake

Anyone having a bicycle coaster brake that is apparently useless because it will not brake, can easily repair it in the following manner: Remove the inner hub by unscrewing the cones and insert a piece of clock spring, about the same width as the brake shell and almost as long as [423] its inside periphery. Replace the parts and the repair will render the brake quite as efficient as a new one. The spring serves as a braking surface for the expanding steel shoes of the brake.—Contributed by Heber H. Clewett, Pomona, Cal.
Anyone with a bicycle coaster brake that seems to be useless because it won’t stop can easily fix it like this: Remove the inner hub by unscrewing the cones and insert a piece of clock spring, about the same width as the brake shell and nearly as long as [423] its inside edge. Put the parts back together, and the fix will make the brake just as effective as a new one. The spring acts as a braking surface for the expanding steel shoes of the brake. —Contributed by Heber H. Clewett, Pomona, Cal.
Flypaper Holder
The ordinary method of using sticky flypaper is quite annoying, as it cannot be easily removed from anything that may come in contact with its sticky surface. The best way to avoid this trouble is to make a holder for the paper, and one can be constructed of a piece of wire and a metal cover taken from a jelly glass. The wire is threaded at one end on which the cover is clamped between two nuts. The upper end of the wire is shaped into a hook for hanging it wherever desired. The paper is rolled with the sticky side out and tied with strings, then slipped over the wire and set into the inverted cover. The cover prevents any of the sticky substance from dripping onto the floor and the wire holds it from being blown about the room.—Contributed by Percy de Romtra, Cape May Point, N. J.
The usual way of using sticky flypaper can be really frustrating because it’s hard to remove from anything that touches its sticky surface. The best way to avoid this issue is to create a holder for the paper, which can be made from a piece of wire and a metal lid from a jelly jar. You thread one end of the wire, clamping the lid between two nuts. The top end of the wire is shaped into a hook so you can hang it wherever you want. The paper is rolled up with the sticky side facing out and tied with strings, then slipped over the wire and placed into the inverted lid. The lid keeps any of the sticky stuff from dripping onto the floor, and the wire prevents it from blowing around the room.—Contributed by Percy de Romtra, Cape May Point, N. J.

The Paper, Held in an Upright Position, will Catch More Flies Than If Placed Flat
The paper, held up, will attract more flies than if it's laid flat.
A Fish Rake
The fish rake can be made in any size, for minnows or salmon, but it is especially adapted for fish that run in schools, like smelt, herring and minnows. Procure a piece of wood, 7 ft. long, 4 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick, and make a handle 3 ft. long on one end. Dress the other end to an edge, rip off a 1-in. strip and drill holes to receive nails or pieces of wire from the back, through the edge, and projecting about 4 in. The strip is then replaced and fastened with screws. The handle can be cut from the blade and jointed by using tubing. This makes it handy to take apart and pack.—Contributed by L. W. Pedrose, Seattle, Wash.
The fish rake can be made in any size, for minnows or salmon, but it's especially suited for fish that swim in schools, like smelt, herring, and minnows. Get a piece of wood that's 7 ft long, 4 in wide, and 7/8 in thick, and make a handle that's 3 ft long on one end. Shape the other end into an edge, cut off a 1-in strip, and drill holes to fit nails or pieces of wire from the back, going through the edge and sticking out about 4 in. Then put the strip back and secure it with screws. The handle can be cut from the blade and connected using tubing. This way, it's easy to take apart and pack.—Contributed by L. W. Pedrose, Seattle, Wash.

The Rake is so Constructed That It can be Taken Apart for Packing
The rake is designed so it can be disassembled for packing.
To Harden Small Blocks of Wood
Small blocks of wood can be hardened so that they will not split so easily when small screws are inserted by boiling them in olive oil for about 10 minutes. The olive oil can be kept for future use. If it is desired to waterproof the blocks after hardening them, they should be placed in melted paraffin and allowed to cool in the solution. This gives the block of wood a good appearance and makes it nonabrasive and waterproof.
Small blocks of wood can be toughened so they won't split easily when small screws are put in by boiling them in olive oil for about 10 minutes. The olive oil can be saved for later use. If you want to waterproof the blocks after hardening, you should dip them in melted paraffin and let them cool in that solution. This gives the wood a nice look and makes it smooth and waterproof.
Homemade Clothesline Reel

It is much better to make a small reel, like the one shown, for a clothesline than to wind the line on the arm, the usual method of getting it into shape for putting away.
It’s much better to make a small reel, like the one shown, for a clothesline than to wind the line around your arm, which is the usual way of getting it ready to store.
The reel consists of two strips of wood, 16 in. long, 3 in. wide and 7/8 in. thick. These are joined together with two pieces of broom handle, allowing a space of 9 in. between the sides and an extending handle of 5 in. on opposite sides, as shown.—Contributed by Bert Longabaugh, Davenport, Iowa.
The reel is made up of two strips of wood, 16 inches long, 3 inches wide, and 7/8 inches thick. They're connected by two pieces of broom handle, which creates a 9-inch space between the sides and a 5-inch extending handle on each end, as shown.—Contributed by Bert Longabaugh, Davenport, Iowa.
Gear-Cutting Machine
Perhaps the last thing that would be thought within range of the amateur who lacks a full equipment of machinery is the cutting of gear wheels. The device shown in the sketch is very practical, and, with the most ordinary assortment of iron-working tools, will serve to turn out an accurate gear.
Perhaps the last thing that would come to mind for an amateur who doesn't have a complete set of machinery is cutting gear wheels. The device shown in the sketch is very practical, and with just a basic set of metalworking tools, it can produce an accurate gear.

Details of Gear-Cutting Machine (Fig. 1)
Details of the Gear-Cutting Machine (Fig. 1)
No system of supports is shown, as they are easily supplied. A flat, square board, B, as large as can be obtained—2 ft. on a side being the safest minimum—is used for a dial. A sheet of paper is pasted over the entire board and a large circle drawn on it. This circle is divided into as many parts as there are to be teeth in the gear. A depression is made with a prick punch at each division. A shaft, C, is run through the center, to which an arm, A, is firmly attached. A nail, N, is placed at the end of the arm so that the point can enter each of the punch marks on the periphery or circumference of the circle. A blank wheel, W, is attached to the shaft C, in the position shown, and resting on the iron plate or strap F. A cutting tool, D, works up and down in a slot in F. This cutter is held away from the blank wheel by the spring S, and moved up to it by the screw G, acting through the sliding member H. A stove bolt may be used for G, with the nut firmly fastened to the strap F. The cutter is actuated with a handle E, whose motion is limited by the pegs as shown. In Fig. 2 is shown a top view of the strap E, with a cross section of the cutter and the slot in which it works.
No support system is shown, as they can be easily provided. A flat, square board, B, as large as possible—at least 2 ft. on each side being a safe minimum—is used as a dial. A sheet of paper is attached to the entire board, and a large circle is drawn on it. This circle is divided into as many sections as there are teeth in the gear. A depression is made with a prick punch at each division. A shaft, C, is inserted through the center, to which an arm, A, is securely attached. A nail, N, is placed at the end of the arm so that its point can enter each of the punch marks on the outer edge of the circle. A blank wheel, W, is attached to shaft C, in the position shown, resting on the iron plate or strap F. A cutting tool, D, moves up and down in a slot in F. This cutter is kept away from the blank wheel by the spring S and is moved towards it by the screw G, acting through the sliding member H. A stove bolt can be used for G, with the nut fastened to the strap F. The cutter is operated with a handle E, which has limited motion due to the pegs as shown. Figure 2 shows a top view of strap E, along with a cross-section of the cutter and the slot in which it operates.
The operation of the mechanism is as follows: With the blank wheel in place set the nail N in one of the punch marks and move the handle E downward. This will make a slight cut on the wheel. Then give the screw G a turn or two, which will make the cutter take a deeper bite, and push the handle down again. This operation is repeated, screwing G constantly deeper, until it is stopped by the locknut J, which regulates the depth of the cut. Move the nail N to the next punch mark and repeat. The operations are very quickly performed and the circle will be closed almost before you know it.
The mechanism works like this: With the blank wheel in place, set the nail N in one of the punch marks and move the handle E down. This will make a slight cut on the wheel. Then, turn the screw G a turn or two, which will make the cutter go deeper, and push the handle down again. Repeat this process, turning G deeper each time, until it’s stopped by the locknut J, which controls the depth of the cut. Move the nail N to the next punch mark and repeat. The operations are performed very quickly, and you'll close the circle almost before you realize it.
There are several points to be observed. The accuracy depends upon three things. First, the slot through which the cutter passes must be tight-fitting, even at the expense of working hard. Second, the shaft C must fit tightly in the holes made for it through B and F, also the arm A must be firmly attached, the shaft being filed flat at the point of attachment. The blank wheel should be keyed on the shaft or securely fastened with a setscrew. Third, the nail N must enter the punch marks accurately. As the grinding circle is so much larger than the blank, any error here is greatly reduced in the finished wheel. Once in a punch mark the nail must not be allowed to slip until the tooth has been cut.
There are several important points to consider. The accuracy depends on three things. First, the slot where the cutter goes through must be tight-fitting, even if it means putting in extra effort. Second, the shaft C must fit snugly in the holes made for it through B and F, and the arm A must be securely attached, with the shaft filed flat at the point of attachment. The blank wheel should be keyed onto the shaft or securely fastened with a setscrew. Third, the nail N must fit into the punch marks precisely. Since the grinding circle is much larger than the blank, any mistake here is significantly minimized in the finished wheel. Once in a punch mark, the nail must not be allowed to slip until the tooth has been cut.
In practice, it will be found better, after each stroke of the handle, to give a quarter turn outward to the screw G, thus avoiding the scraping of the tool on the up stroke. The cutter can be made of any suitable steel with the cutting point ground to give whatever [425] shape is desired for the tooth. The best shape for any particular purpose can be found by reference to a book on gears.
In practice, it’s better to give a quarter turn outward to the screw G after each handle stroke. This prevents the tool from scraping during the upward motion. The cutter can be made of any suitable steel, with the cutting point shaped to create the desired tooth shape. The best shape for any specific purpose can be found in a book on gears.
This cutter is adapted, of course, only to the softer metals. For experimental purposes a blank cast in type metal is excellent and will last as long probably as required. The mechanism here described will cut brass perfectly well and a gear made of this more durable metal will answer for a finished construction. Type-metal blanks commend themselves because they are so easily cast, any flame which will melt solder being sufficient, and the molds, of wood, plaster of Paris or any easily worked material, being quickly constructed.—Contributed by C. W. Nieman, New York City.
This cutter is designed, of course, only for softer metals. For experimentation, a blank made from type metal is excellent and will likely last as long as needed. The mechanism described here will cut brass perfectly well, and a gear made from this more durable metal will work for a finished product. Type-metal blanks are preferred because they are easy to cast; any flame capable of melting solder is sufficient, and the molds, made from wood, plaster of Paris, or any other easily worked material, can be quickly made. —Contributed by C. W. Nieman, New York City.
A Potato Peeler
The guard is made of a piece of wire about 1 in. shorter than the blade of an ordinary table knife. The ends of the wire are turned into a coil to resemble a coil spring with coils close together. Allow enough wire to project on one end to be flattened and pointed for an eye extractor.
The guard is made from a piece of wire about 1 inch shorter than the blade of a standard table knife. The ends of the wire are twisted into a coil that looks like a tightly wound coil spring. Leave enough wire on one end to be flattened and sharpened into a point for an eye extractor.

Guard Made of Wire
Wire Guard
When this device is placed on the knife, the contrivance works on the same principle as a spokeshave. The first setting peels the potato without any appreciable waste, the other setting may be as desired for cutting slices.—Contributed by H. W. Ravens, Seattle, Washington.
When this device is placed on the knife, it operates on the same principle as a spokeshave. The first setting peels the potato with minimal waste, and the other setting can be adjusted for slicing as needed.—Contributed by H. W. Ravens, Seattle, Washington.
An Easy Way to Develop Roll Film
This is simply a different motion to the tiresome seesaw one usually employs when films are being developed. In wetting them down previous to immersion in the developer, do not keep them in the water long enough to become limp, but remove them after a few quick dips, says Camera Craft, They will then retain some of their curling tendency, so that by taking one end in one hand and gradually lowering the film into the dish of developer and then raising it out of the dish, it will be found that the film will roll and unroll quite readily, much as one would let out or wind in a reel. This method will result in quicker development, because the roll is nearly always immersed in developer. The method necessitates using only one hand, making it possible to develop a second strip at the same time with the other. The illustration shows quite clearly just how the film will behave.
This is just a different technique from the boring back-and-forth method usually used when developing films. When you wet the film before putting it in the developer, don't leave it in the water long enough to get soggy; just give it a few quick dips, says Camera Craft. This way, the film will keep some of its curl, so when you hold one end in one hand and gradually lower the film into the developer dish and then lift it out, you'll see that the film will roll and unroll easily, similar to letting out or winding in a reel. This approach leads to faster development because the roll is almost always submerged in the developer. It only requires one hand, which allows you to develop a second strip simultaneously with the other hand. The illustration clearly shows how the film will behave.

Developing Film
Developing Photos
A Shoe Hanger
An inexpensive shoe hanger can be made of a strip of tin, about 1/2 in. wide and as long as the space will permit. Cut notches along one edge and bend the tin and tack or screw it on a strip of board or to the inside of the closet door. The shoes are hung up by the heels with the toes down.—Contributed by C. R. Poole, Los Angeles, Cal.
An affordable shoe hanger can be made from a strip of tin, about 1/2 inch wide and as long as the space allows. Cut notches along one edge and bend the tin, then attach it with tacks or screws to a board or the inside of the closet door. Hang the shoes by their heels with the toes facing down.—Contributed by C. R. Poole, Los Angeles, CA.

Notched Metal Hanger
Notched Metal Hook
[426]
How to Make a Small Vertical Drill

A small hand drill with a three-jaw chuck that will take the smallest drill can be purchased very reasonably. For ordinary work these drills do very well, but for comparatively deep holes, or when using long, slender drills, some sort of a stand should be made, if for no other reason, to avoid breaking the drills, which is almost invariably due to the side motion of the hand. There are other reasons, however, for making such a stand, and these lie in the fact that it is impossible to drill by hand at right angles with the surface of the metal, or to hold such a drill sufficiently steady to avoid widening the hole around the top.
A small hand drill with a three-jaw chuck that can accommodate the smallest drill bits is available at a very reasonable price. For regular tasks, these drills work quite well, but for deeper holes or when using long, thin drill bits, some kind of stand should be made, if only to avoid breaking the bits, which usually happens because of sideways movement of the hand. There are other reasons for creating such a stand, as it's nearly impossible to drill by hand at a right angle to the surface of the metal or to keep the drill steady enough to prevent enlarging the hole around the top.
As each make of hand drill will require a somewhat different form of stand, no detailed description need be given of the one illustrated. The principal point is to have the base and standard securely set at right angles to each other, and then provide a smoothly sliding piece to which the hand drill may be clamped. The edges on this slide and the corresponding guides should be planed off to an angle of 45 deg. One of the guides should be adjustable, which may be arranged by elongating the screw holes and placing small washers under the heads of the screws that hold this guide to the main standard.
Since each type of hand drill needs a slightly different kind of stand, there’s no need to give a detailed description of the one shown. The main thing is to ensure that the base and the standard are securely set at right angles to each other, and then provide a smoothly sliding piece where the hand drill can be clamped. The edges on this slide and the matching guides should be beveled at a 45-degree angle. One of the guides should be adjustable, which can be achieved by elongating the screw holes and using small washers under the heads of the screws that attach this guide to the main standard.
A neat little hand drill, arranged in this manner and firmly secured to the bench, may also be used for finishing the ends of small shafts, either flat or pointed, for polishing screw heads, etc., to all of which it gives that workmanlike appearance that can only be had when things are polished with a true rotary motion.—Contributed by John D. Adams, Phoenix, Ariz.
A tidy little hand drill, set up this way and securely attached to the workbench, can also be used to finish the ends of small shafts, whether they are flat or pointed, for polishing screw heads, etc. It provides that professional look that you can only achieve when items are polished with a true rotary motion.—Contributed by John D. Adams, Phoenix, Ariz.
Decorating Candles
Candles can be easily decorated by the following method: The designs can be selected from paper prints which are tightly wrapped around the candle with the design in contact with the wax. Strike a match and play the flame over the back of the paper. Allow time enough for the melted wax to harden and then remove the paper. The print will be transferred to the wax.
Candles can be easily decorated using this method: Choose designs from paper prints, then tightly wrap them around the candle with the design facing the wax. Light a match and hold the flame against the back of the paper. Give it enough time for the melted wax to harden, then peel off the paper. The print will be transferred to the wax.
Select designs that are not larger than the circumference of the candle. A good impression of ink on thin paper works best.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
Choose designs that aren't larger than the candle's circumference. A solid impression of ink on thin paper works best.—Contributed by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, Ill.
Homemade Hacksaw Frame
A home workshop not having a complete set of tools may be supplied in many ways with tools made by the owner. The hacksaw frame illustrated is one of these. The frame is made of hard wood. The saw end is inserted in a slot sawed in the handle end, and a screw or small bolt holds it in place. The other end is equipped with a bolt having a sheet-metal head, as shown at A. The blade is kept from turning by a projection of the sheet metal which fits in a saw cut made in the frame.—Contributed by W. A. Henry, Galesburg, Ill.
A home workshop that doesn’t have a complete set of tools can be supplied in various ways with tools made by the owner. The hacksaw frame shown is one of these. The frame is made of hardwood. The saw end is inserted into a slot carved in the handle end, and a screw or small bolt keeps it in place. The other end has a bolt with a sheet-metal head, as shown at A. The blade is prevented from turning by a projection of the sheet metal that fits into a saw cut made in the frame. — Contributed by W. A. Henry, Galesburg, Ill.

Hacksaw Frame, Cut from Hard Wood, with Fittings Attached to Draw the Blade Taut
Hacksaw frame made from durable hardwood, with fittings included to keep the blade tight.
Drill Press on an Ordinary Brace
As the greater part of the energy required for drilling metal by hand is used for feeding the drill, I made what I term a drill box in which the brace is held perfectly true and pressure is applied by a weight. The feed can be changed for the different metals and sizes of drills, also for drilling the hard outside of castings and relieving the drill for the softer body. The constant feed will cause the drill to turn out a long chip, and a number of holes may be drilled to a uniform depth by using the same feed and counting the turns of the brace handle.
Since most of the energy needed to drill metal by hand goes into feeding the drill, I created what I call a drill box. In this setup, the brace is held perfectly straight and pressure is applied with a weight. The feed can be adjusted for different metals and drill sizes, as well as for drilling the harder exterior of castings and easing the drill when working with the softer interior. The consistent feed will produce a long chip, and multiple holes can be drilled to the same depth by using the same feed and counting the turns of the brace handle.

The Weights Apply a Constant Pressure to the Drill, Which can be Easily Turned (Fig. 1)
The weights apply consistent pressure to the drill, which can be easily adjusted (Fig. 1)
To build the box, first find the dimensions of the brace, as shown in Fig. 1: the diameter of the head A, the clearance B from the top of the head to 1/4 in. above the top of the handle C, and the over-all length D when the longest drill is in the brace. Make a box having an inside length equal to the dimension D, plus whatever additional height may be necessary for the work. Make the inside width twice the distance C, plus 6 in. for clearance; and the inside depth the length C, plus one-half of the dimension A, plus 3 in. Use material 7/8 in. thick and nail the parts together to form a rectangular frame. Cut a piece of broomstick as long as the dimension B, and two pieces of wood as long as the inside width of the box and as wide as the dimension B. Cut two pieces 1/16 in. longer than the dimension A and as wide as the length B. Nail these latter pieces together as shown in Fig. 2, leaving a square space in the center. This frame is to be nailed inside of the top of the box flush with the front, but before doing so lay it on top of the box to determine where the center of the square space will come, and bore a hole, large enough for the round stick cut from the broom handle to slip through easily, then nail the frame on the under side of the top piece.
To build the box, start by measuring the brace's dimensions as shown in Fig. 1: the diameter of the head A, the clearance B from the top of the head to 1/4 in. above the top of the handle C, and the overall length D when the longest drill is in the brace. Create a box with an inside length equal to dimension D, plus any extra height needed for the job. The inside width should be twice the distance C, plus 6 in. for clearance; and the inside depth should be dimension C, plus half of dimension A, plus 3 in. Use material that is 7/8 in. thick and nail the pieces together to form a rectangular frame. Cut a broomstick to the length of dimension B, and cut two pieces of wood to the length of the inside width of the box and the width of dimension B. Cut two pieces that are 1/16 in. longer than dimension A and as wide as dimension B. Nail these pieces together as shown in Fig. 2, leaving a square space in the middle. This frame should be nailed inside the top of the box, flush with the front. Before doing this, place it on top of the box to find out where the center of the square space will be. Then bore a hole large enough for the round stick cut from the broom handle to slip through easily, and nail the frame to the underside of the top piece.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
Procure a tough piece of wood, 1-1/2 in. square and long enough to project 2 in. over the right and 10 in. over the left side of the box top, and when in this position, locate the hole bored for the round stick and bore a hole in the square stick, 1/8 in. deep, to coincide with it. Place the head of the brace in the guide and push it up until it touches the top of the box and block it up in this position, then drop the round stick through the hole and rest it on the head of the brace. Place the socket in the lever over the top of the round stick. Make a loop, 8 in. long, of heavy wire and hang it over the right end of the lever and mark the box at the lower end of the loop. Turn in a large screw 1/2 in. below this mark [428] allowing it to project enough to hook the loop under it. Remove the round stick and put a screw at the point the bottom of the loop reaches when the lever is flat on the top of the box. Another screw turned in between these two will be sufficient to hold the lever in position. Different-sized weights, of from 5 to 10 lb., are used on the lever, but for small drills the weight of the brace alone is sufficient.—Contributed by Maurice Coleman, W. Roxbury, Mass.
Get a sturdy piece of wood, 1-1/2 in. square and long enough to extend 2 in. over the right side and 10 in. over the left side of the box top. In this position, find the hole drilled for the round stick and drill a hole in the square stick, 1/8 in. deep, to line up with it. Place the head of the brace in the guide and push it up until it touches the top of the box, then secure it in this position. Next, drop the round stick through the hole and rest it on the head of the brace. Position the socket in the lever over the top of the round stick. Create an 8-in. loop of heavy wire and hang it over the right end of the lever, marking the box at the lower end of the loop. Insert a large screw 1/2 in. below this mark, allowing it to stick out enough to hook the loop under it. Take out the round stick and place a screw where the bottom of the loop reaches when the lever is flat on the top of the box. Another screw placed between these two will be enough to keep the lever in place. Different weights, ranging from 5 to 10 lb., can be used on the lever, but for small drills, the weight of the brace alone is enough. —Contributed by Maurice Coleman, W. Roxbury, Mass.
Homemade Picture-Frame Miter Box
Any person wishing to make a picture frame, or to cut down an old one, requires a miter box for that purpose, so that the molding may be properly held while sawing it, and also for nailing the corners together. I made a miter box, as shown, and found it to be just the thing for this purpose. It is built on a base similar to an overturned box, the saw guides being held on the ends of a piece, constructed as shown at A. Holes are cut in the top, as shown at B, for one of the guides and for the two wedges. Two pieces, C, are fastened with their outer edges at perfectly right angles on the top.
Any person who wants to make a picture frame or to resize an old one needs a miter box for that purpose, so the molding can be held securely while sawing and for nailing the corners together. I made a miter box, as shown, and found it to be perfect for this task. It’s built on a base that looks like an upside-down box, with the saw guides attached to the ends of a piece, constructed as shown at A. Holes are cut into the top, as shown at B, for one of the guides and the two wedges. Two pieces, C, are attached with their outer edges at perfect right angles on the top.

Homemade Miter Box for Sawing Frame Molding and to Hold the Parts for Fastening Together
Homemade Miter Box for Cutting Frame Molding and to Hold the Pieces for Assembly Together
The frame parts are clamped against the pieces on top with the wedges driven in between the frame parts and the brackets DD. After cutting the frame parts they are tightly held in place while fastening them, in any manner desired.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Amherstburg, Can.
The frame parts are secured against the pieces on top with wedges placed between the frame parts and the brackets DD. After cutting the frame parts, they are firmly held in position while being fastened in any preferred way.—Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Amherstburg, Can.
Tank-Development Methods Used in Tray Development
If there are a number of plates to be developed, place a rubber band, about 1/8 in. wide, around the ends of each plate and put them together in a tray. The bands keep the plates apart. The developer is made up as for a tank and poured over the plates, then another tray, or dark covering, is placed over the top. Allow this to stand, rocking the tray from time to time, the same length of time as is required for tank development.—Contributed by Earl R. Hastings, Corinth, Vermont.
If you have several plates to develop, wrap a rubber band about 1/8 inch wide around the ends of each plate and stack them in a tray. The bands keep the plates separated. Prepare the developer like you would for a tank and pour it over the plates, then cover the top with another tray or a dark covering. Let this sit, gently rocking the tray from time to time, for the same amount of time needed for tank development.—Contributed by Earl R. Hastings, Corinth, Vermont.
A Pushmobile Racer for Ice
The pushmobile shown in the illustration takes the place of the one with rollers that is now so popular with the boys. The materials required, usually found about any home, consist of a foot board, 1 in. thick, 2-1/2 in. wide and 2 ft. long; two pieces of wood, each 3/4 in. thick, 2-1/2 in. wide and 9 in. long; one steering post, 1 in. thick, 1-1/2 in. wide and 30 in. long; one handle, 6 in. long; one small hinge; one carriage bolt, 1/2 in. in diameter and 2-1/2 in. long; two 1/2-in. washers; a few screws, and a pair of discarded ice skates.
The pushmobile shown in the illustration replaces the one with rollers that is currently so popular with the boys. The materials needed, which are usually found around any home, include a footboard that is 1 inch thick, 2.5 inches wide, and 2 feet long; two pieces of wood, each 0.75 inches thick, 2.5 inches wide, and 9 inches long; one steering post that is 1 inch thick, 1.5 inches wide, and 30 inches long; one handle that is 6 inches long; one small hinge; one carriage bolt that is 0.5 inches in diameter and 2.5 inches long; two 0.5-inch washers; a few screws; and a pair of discarded ice skates.

Homemade Pushmobile, Constructed the Same as the Wheeled Kind, with Runners for Snow and Ice
Homemade Pushmobile, Built Just Like the Wheeled Version, with Runners for Snow and Ice
One of the 3/4-in. thick pieces is fastened solidly to one end of the foot board with the ends flush. The other piece is swiveled with the bolt at the opposite or front end of the foot board so that at least one-half of the piece projects beyond the end. The steering post is hinged to the projecting end. The skates are fastened to the 3/4-in. pieces for runners. The manner of propelling the racer is the same as for the pushmobile.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
One of the 3/4-inch thick pieces is securely attached to one end of the footboard, with the ends flush. The other piece is attached with a bolt at the opposite end of the footboard, allowing at least half of it to extend beyond the end. The steering post is hinged to the projecting end. The skates are attached to the 3/4-inch pieces to serve as runners. The way to propel the racer is the same as for the pushmobile.—Contributed by W. E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
Homemade Ellipsograph
By Chelsea Curtis Fraser
An efficient ellipsograph is the only device that will make true ellipses of various sizes quickly, and such a machine is in demand on some classes of work in a drafting room. Its cost, however, is prohibitive where only few ellipses are to be drawn, but a person handy with tools can make an apparatus that will do the work as well as the most expensive instrument.
An efficient ellipsograph is the only tool that can quickly create accurate ellipses of different sizes, and there's a need for this type of machine in certain drafting tasks. However, its price is too high if you only need to draw a few ellipses. But someone skilled with tools can build a device that works just as well as the expensive models.

Practically Any Size or Proportion of Ellipse, from 1-1/2 to 16 In. Maximum Diameter, can be Drawn with an Instrument of This Size, and Larger Instruments will Work Equally Well (Fig. 1)
Practically any size or proportion of ellipse, ranging from 1.5 to 16 inches in maximum diameter, can be drawn with a tool of this size, and larger tools will work just as well (Fig. 1)
The completed ellipsograph, herein described, will appear as shown in Fig. 1. It consists of two main parts, the base and the arm. The former is a hardwood piece, A, Fig. 2, to the side center of which is attached another hardwood piece, B. This latter piece may be dovetailed into A, but an ordinary butt joint will suffice, as a one-piece base, C, also of hard wood, is glued to the bottom surfaces of the pieces A and B, thus securely holding them together. Before gluing, however, care must be taken to see that the piece B is exactly at right angles with the piece A. This can be done with a try-square. Dimensions are given in Fig. 2. The same letters are used throughout for the same parts.
The finished ellipsograph, described here, will look like what’s shown in Fig. 1. It has two main parts: the base and the arm. The base is made from a hardwood piece, A, in which another hardwood piece, B, is attached to the center side. Piece B can be dovetailed into A, but a simple butt joint will work fine since a one-piece base, C, also made of hardwood, is glued to the bottom surfaces of pieces A and B, securely holding them together. However, before gluing, it's important to ensure that piece B is exactly perpendicular to piece A. This can be checked using a try-square. Dimensions are provided in Fig. 2. The same letters are used throughout for the same parts.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
A 1/16-in. groove, H, is cut out at the juncture of A and B, to admit the flange of the minor-axis swivel head. Another groove, J, is made along the longitudinal center of the piece B, to receive the spine of the major-axis swivel head. Sheet brass plates, D and E, are cut from 1/16-in. stock and attached to the top of the piece A with screws. The plates F and G are of the same material and fastened in a like manner to the upper surface of the piece B. All plates project slightly where they touch the groove borders, as shown. This is to provide a bearing for the projections on the sliding parts against metal instead of wood. A piece of thin celluloid or brass plate, K, is inserted in the bottom side of the base C so that the point will be exactly in line with the center groove J, and extend outward 1/8 in. This point indicates the center of all ellipses to be drawn. In the bottom of the base C, at each end, drive an ordinary pin and cut it off so that a part of it will project beyond the surface of the wood. These extending ends are pointed with a file, and serve to keep the instrument from slipping when in use.
A 1/16-inch groove, H, is cut out at the intersection of A and B to fit the flange of the minor-axis swivel head. Another groove, J, is made along the centerline of piece B to hold the spine of the major-axis swivel head. Sheet brass plates, D and E, are cut from 1/16-inch stock and attached to the top of piece A with screws. Plates F and G are made from the same material and secured in the same way to the upper surface of piece B. All plates stick out slightly where they meet the groove edges, as shown. This is to provide a bearing for the projections on the sliding parts against metal instead of wood. A thin piece of celluloid or brass plate, K, is inserted on the underside of the base C so that the point will align perfectly with the center groove J and extend out 1/8 inch. This point marks the center of all ellipses to be drawn. At each end of the bottom of base C, drive in an ordinary pin and cut it off so that part of it sticks out beyond the surface of the wood. These projecting ends are sharpened with a file and help keep the instrument from slipping when in use.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
The arm L is shown in Fig. 3. It is made of either maple or birch. Follow the dimensions given, cutting a slot through it longitudinally, as shown at M, narrower on the upper side than on the lower, the upper being 1/4 in. wide. An octagon-shaped piece of wood, N, 1/2 in. thick, is glued to the end, to give a good seating for the sleeve O, which is a piece of 1/2-in. solid-brass rod, 2 in. long, drilled to receive closely the [430] pencil sheath. The latter, P, can be made from a section of brass tubing such as is used in a bicycle-pump valve. The upper end is notched to receive a rubber band, and an ordinary pencil can be cut down to fit closely into the other end. The piece O fits tightly in a hole bored through N and L.
The arm L is shown in Fig. 3. It's made from either maple or birch. Follow the given dimensions, cutting a slot through it lengthwise, as shown at M, which is narrower on the top side than on the bottom, the top being 1/4 in. wide. An octagon-shaped piece of wood, N, that is 1/2 in. thick, is glued to the end to provide a solid fit for the sleeve O, which is a piece of 1/2-in. solid brass rod, 2 in. long, drilled to closely fit the pencil sheath [430]. The sheath, P, can be made from a section of brass tubing, like what’s used in a bicycle-pump valve. The top end is notched to hold a rubber band, and an ordinary pencil can be trimmed to fit snugly into the other end. The piece O fits tightly into a hole drilled through N and L.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)
The detail of the minor-axis swivel head is shown in Fig. 4. This swivel head consists of two pieces of brass, one, marked Q, being 3/8 in. square by 3/4 in. long and the other, R, 7/8 in. square by 1/2 in. long, with a notch cut out as shown. These parts, as well as the somewhat similar ones for the major-axis swivel head, can be cast cheaply, or block brass may be cut with a hacksaw and filed to the right shape. A shortened dry-cell screw, S, with washer, to fit a tapped hole drilled in the piece Q, serves to bind the head where desired on the arm. The flange T is a piece of 1/16-in. brass driven into a slot cut in the piece R. The piece R is pivoted to the piece Q, as shown, by means of a piece of wire nail which engages Q, by friction, the lower end being fitted with a washer and riveted loosely so that the parts will turn freely.
The detail of the minor-axis swivel head is shown in Fig. 4. This swivel head is made up of two brass pieces: one, labeled Q, measures 3/8 in. square by 3/4 in. long, and the other, R, is 7/8 in. square by 1/2 in. long, with a notch cut out as depicted. These parts, along with the somewhat similar components for the major-axis swivel head, can be cast inexpensively, or you can use a block of brass, cutting it with a hacksaw and filing it into the right shape. A shortened dry-cell screw, S, with a washer, is used to fit into a tapped hole drilled in piece Q, securing the head in the desired position on the arm. The flange T is a piece of 1/16-in. brass that is inserted into a slot cut in piece R. Piece R is pivoted to piece Q, as shown, using a wire nail that engages Q through friction, with the lower end fitted with a washer and loosely riveted so that the parts can rotate freely.

Fig. 5
Fig. 5
The major-axis swivel-head detail is shown in Fig. 5. The piece U is the same size as Q, Fig. 4, with its screw set a little farther forward to make room for the pivot V, which loosely joins U and W together. The pivot is made of a wire nail, riveted on both ends. The piece W is of brass, 1/2 in. thick, 3/4 in. wide and 7/8 in. long. The spine X is made just thick enough to pass freely in the groove J, Fig. 2. A screw taken from a discarded dry-battery cell is used to bind the head to the arm.
The major-axis swivel-head detail is shown in Fig. 5. The piece U is the same size as Q, Fig. 4, with its screw moved a bit forward to make room for the pivot V, which loosely connects U and W. The pivot is made from a wire nail, riveted at both ends. The piece W is brass, 1/2 in. thick, 3/4 in. wide, and 7/8 in. long. The spine X is just thick enough to move freely in the groove J, Fig. 2. A screw taken from a discarded dry-battery cell is used to secure the head to the arm.
To operate the ellipsograph, draw a line, Y, Fig. 1, on the paper, which is to mark the major axis of the ellipse. About midway of its length make a point to represent the center. On the latter set the point K, Fig. 2, and adjust the bottom forward edge of the base C parallel with the line Y. Set the minor-axis swivel head at such a point on the arm L that, when the latter is directly on top of the piece B, the pencil will touch the paper at a distance from the center, marked by K, equal to half the minor axis of the proposed ellipse. To secure the major axis swing the arm until it is parallel with the piece A, leaving the major-axis swivel head unset, and set it when the pencil point has been adjusted to the proper major radius.
To use the ellipsograph, draw a line, Y, in Fig. 1, on the paper to indicate the major axis of the ellipse. About halfway along the line, make a point to represent the center. Place point K, as shown in Fig. 2, at the center and adjust the bottom forward edge of the base C to be parallel with line Y. Position the minor-axis swivel head at a point on the arm L so that when the arm is directly above piece B, the pencil touches the paper at a distance from the center, marked by K, equal to half the minor axis of the ellipse you want to create. To set the major axis, swing the arm until it’s parallel with piece A, leaving the major-axis swivel head unset, and adjust it once the pencil point is correctly set to the major radius.
Grasp the arm with the right hand between the swivel heads and bearing down, swing the pencil end from right to left. The rubber band will keep it constantly on the paper with even pressure. When half of the ellipse is completed detach the rubber band and reverse the instrument to the opposite side of the longitudinal line Y and draw the other half in the same manner.
Grasp the arm with your right hand between the swivel heads, and while applying pressure, swing the pencil end from right to left. The rubber band will hold it steady on the paper with even pressure. Once you've completed half of the ellipse, remove the rubber band and flip the instrument to the other side of the longitudinal line Y, then draw the other half in the same way.
Protector Cap for a Chisel Handle

The ordinary chisel handle will soon split and break under the continuous blows of a mallet. A very good and inexpensive method of preventing this is to procure an ordinary patent bottle cap and place it on the end of the handle. It is advisable to shape the end of the handle like a bottle top in order to firmly hold the cap in place.—Contributed by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.
The regular chisel handle will quickly split and break from the constant hits of a mallet. A simple and affordable way to prevent this is to get a standard bottle cap and put it on the end of the handle. It's a good idea to shape the end of the handle like a bottle top to securely hold the cap in place.—Contributed by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.
Sweeping Compound
A good sweeping compound may be made as follows: Mix 1/2 pt. of warm paraffin oil with 2 oz. of melted paraffin wax and add 2 oz. of artificial oil of sassafras. Then pour the mixture into 10 lb. of sawdust and work the whole thoroughly together. Add to this mixture 4 lb. of clean sand and 1/2 lb. of coarse salt. Each article mentioned is comparatively cheap, and the compound can be kept in an open container.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A good sweeping compound can be made like this: Mix 1/2 pint of warm paraffin oil with 2 ounces of melted paraffin wax, and then add 2 ounces of artificial sassafras oil. Pour the mixture into 10 pounds of sawdust and mix everything together well. Next, add 4 pounds of clean sand and 1/2 pound of coarse salt. Each item listed is relatively inexpensive, and the compound can be stored in an open container.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Freezing a Basin to a Chair
Fill a basin or pot half full of snow, and secretly put a handful of table salt in it and place the vessel on a chair or table, wetting the space where it is to be set. After holding the basin in place for about two minutes, continually stirring the contents, it will freeze to the chair so solidly that when the basin is lifted the chair will come along with it.
Fill a basin or pot halfway with snow, secretly add a handful of table salt, and place the vessel on a chair or table, making sure to wet the surface where it will sit. After holding the basin in place for about two minutes and stirring the contents constantly, it will freeze to the chair so solidly that when you lift the basin, the chair will come with it.
This experiment is quite interesting to an audience and can be performed at any assemblage with success. If the instructions are carried out closely, the trick will always succeed and the audience will consider it magic. Even if performed in a warm room, the combination of snow and salt will reduce the temperature below the freezing point where the bottom of the vessel comes in contact with the chair seat.—Contributed by Harry Slosower, Pittsburgh, Pa.
This experiment is really interesting to an audience and can be done successfully at any gathering. If the instructions are followed carefully, the trick will always work, and the audience will see it as magic. Even if it's done in a warm room, the mix of snow and salt will lower the temperature below freezing at the bottom of the container where it touches the chair seat. —Contributed by Harry Slosower, Pittsburgh, Pa.
An Envelope and Stamp Moistener

A moistener for postage stamps or envelopes can be easily made from a screw-top jar. A strip of felt cut as wide as the jar is deep and made into a roll large enough to fit the neck of the jar serves as a wick. The metal top is perforated, and, after filling the jar with water, it is screwed into place. This makes a very inexpensive moistener for the library desk.
A moistener for postage stamps or envelopes can be easily made from a screw-top jar. A strip of felt cut to the same width as the jar is deep and rolled up to fit the neck of the jar serves as a wick. The metal top is perforated, and after filling the jar with water, it’s screwed into place. This creates a very inexpensive moistener for the library desk.
A Homemade Drill Press
An ordinary breast drill is used in the construction of this drill press, it being rigidly secured to a piece of oak, A, 2 in. square and 18 in. long, which is a sliding member on the pipe B. In attaching the breast drill to the wood, a bolt, having a hook on the head end, was used at the top, at C, and a stud at the bottom D. Pipe clips, EE, were attached on one side of the block to fit loosely over the pipe B. The vertical part of the pipe is supported by two horizontal pieces, FF, which are fastened to a post. A feed lever, G, is pivoted at the top of the vertical piece of oak A and fulcrumed on the post with a bolt through a slot, the extending end carrying a weight as a counterbalance. The illustration clearly shows the construction of this very useful drill press.—Contributed by W. A. Ready, Boston, Mass.
An ordinary breast drill is used to build this drill press, which is securely attached to a piece of oak, A, that is 2 inches square and 18 inches long. This oak piece acts as a sliding component on the pipe B. When attaching the breast drill to the wood, a bolt with a hook on the head was used at the top, at C, and a stud was used at the bottom, D. Pipe clips, EE, were attached on one side of the block to fit loosely over the pipe B. The vertical section of the pipe is supported by two horizontal pieces, FF, which are secured to a post. A feed lever, G, is pivoted at the top of the vertical oak piece A and is fulcrumed on the post with a bolt going through a slot, with the extending end carrying a weight as a counterbalance. The illustration clearly shows how this very useful drill press is constructed.—Contributed by W. A. Ready, Boston, Mass.

The Breast Drill as It is Attached to an Upright, to Make a Drill Press
The Breast Drill as It is Attached to an Upright, to Create a Drill Press
A pair of bicycle trousers guards makes excellent sleeve bands when the cuffs are turned back and rolled above the elbows.
A pair of bike shorts makes great sleeve bands when the cuffs are turned back and rolled above the elbows.
Arts-Crafts Leather Work
By Mary C. Scovel
Part I
Leather work is one of the most interesting of the crafts, first, because the material is so pliable that anyone can work it, and secondly, because any ordinary article can be made by simply following the directions carefully, although each of the various kinds of leather demands a different process.
Leather work is one of the most fascinating crafts. First, because the material is so flexible that anyone can work with it, and second, because any everyday item can be made by just following the instructions carefully, even though each type of leather requires a different process.
The equipment necessary is simple, consisting of two special tools costing 50 cents each, one with a narrow edge for lining patterns, and one with broad ends for tooling; and a piece of tin, plate glass, or very smooth hard wood, which should not be smaller than 9 by 12 in. A soft sponge, a triangle, a rule, tracing paper and a hard pencil are also needed.
The required equipment is straightforward, including two special tools priced at 50 cents each—one with a narrow edge for lining patterns and one with broad ends for tooling. You'll also need a piece of tin, plate glass, or very smooth hardwood, which should be at least 9 by 12 inches. Additionally, you'll need a soft sponge, a triangle, a ruler, tracing paper, and a hard pencil.
The first attempt should be made on a piece of Russian calfskin. This may be purchased at any leather store or craft shop and costs about 50 cents a square foot, if cut to measure. Whole skins contain from 8 to 12 sq. ft. and cost about 35 cents a square foot. Calfskin may be had in almost any color.
The first attempt should be made on a piece of Russian calfskin. This can be purchased at any leather store or craft shop and costs about 50 cents per square foot if cut to measure. Whole skins range from 8 to 12 sq. ft. and cost about 35 cents per square foot. Calfskin is available in almost any color.

Coin Purse—Back
Coin Purse - Back

Coin Purse—Front
Coin Purse - Front
The coin purse will be the first article described. The size, pattern and design must first be determined. It consists of three parts, the front, back and flap, as shown in the sketch. This purse will require a piece of leather 4 by 8 in., in order to allow an extra 1/4 in. outside of the pattern to pin the leather on the board while transferring the design. The upper flap C folds over the front of the purse D. The design must be divided, the part belonging to C placed on the flap, and the part belonging to the front D, on the lower part of the front.
The coin purse will be the first item described. We need to decide on the size, pattern, and design first. It consists of three main parts: the front, back, and flap, as shown in the sketch. This purse will need a piece of leather measuring 4 by 8 inches, allowing for an extra 1/4 inch beyond the pattern to pin the leather onto the board while transferring the design. The upper flap C folds over the front of the purse D. The design should be divided, with the part for C placed on the flap and the part for D on the lower section of the front.
Take a piece of paper and fold it in accordance with the desired proportions of the purse, taking care that the design for the front D is on the same side of the paper as that of the flap C. The space F under the flap is without any design. The design for the front D is on the lower part of the upper division of the pattern. Fold the part F behind H, and then the part C behind H and F. Turn the pattern over for the proper position of the purse. Draw the entire design on tracing or tough tissue paper. Wet the leather on the wrong or unfinished side with a soft sponge. Pat the leather and endeavor to moisten, but not soak it, with water. On some leather the water, if it comes through, leaves a stain. When the leather is too wet it is very hard to tool, as the tool sticks and makes an uneven background.
Take a piece of paper and fold it according to the desired size of the purse, making sure that the design for the front D is on the same side of the paper as the flap C. The space F under the flap should remain blank. The design for the front D is on the lower part of the upper section of the pattern. Fold part F behind H, and then fold part C behind both H and F. Flip the pattern over to position the purse correctly. Trace the entire design onto tracing paper or sturdy tissue paper. Dampen the leather on the unfinished side with a soft sponge. Gently pat the leather and try to moisten it, but don’t soak it with water. With some types of leather, if water seeps through, it can leave a stain. If the leather gets too wet, it becomes difficult to tool, as the tools stick and leave an uneven surface.
Pin the design firmly down against the leather and fasten the leather with thumb tacks on the outer margin. [433] With a hard pencil go over every line of the design with a firm, even pressure. If the leather is properly moistened, this will leave a clear outline of the design when the tracing paper is removed. Then with a lining tool—the tool with the narrow edge—go over the lines on the leather with a strong, firm stroke. Should a line design only be desired, this operation finishes the decoration.
Pin the design securely onto the leather and use thumbtacks to attach the leather along the outer edge. [433] Using a hard pencil, trace over every line of the design with consistent, even pressure. If the leather is adequately dampened, this will create a clear outline of the design once you remove the tracing paper. Then, using a lining tool—the one with the narrow edge—trace over the lines on the leather with a strong, firm stroke. If you only want a line design, this step completes the decoration.

Stamp-Case Pattern
Stamp Case Design
Two other methods may be used: tooling or stamping. The design shown does not go to the edge of the pattern. A margin of at least 1/8 in. between the edge of the pattern and design must be left for tooling and stamping. For tooling, after lining the pattern, use the broad end of the tool and make even, long strokes to press down the background. If the background is not easily pressed down, the leather is too dry. Take it off the board and moisten the back again, move the tool back and forth and around until the background is comparatively smooth. Keep the edges very sharp between parts pressed down and those that remain raised. The depth of pressing down the background is a matter of taste, but it should be tooled down enough to make the design stand out plainly. Fold the parts together and line with silk to match the leather and then stitch up the front and back parts of the purse close to the edge. This can be done on any sewing machine, or by a shoemaker. The circle M in the pattern is the catch or button which can be furnished and put on by a shoemaker, or at a trunk store.
Two other methods can be used: tooling or stamping. The design shown doesn’t reach the edge of the pattern. You need to leave a margin of at least 1/8 in. between the edge of the pattern and the design for tooling and stamping. For tooling, after aligning the pattern, use the broad end of the tool to make even, long strokes to press down the background. If the background isn’t pressing down easily, the leather might be too dry. Take it off the board and moisten the back again, moving the tool back and forth and around until the background feels relatively smooth. Keep the edges very sharp between the pressed-down areas and the raised parts. The depth of pressing down the background is a matter of personal preference, but it should be pressed enough so the design stands out clearly. Fold the parts together, line them with silk to match the leather, and then stitch up the front and back parts of the purse close to the edge. This can be done on any sewing machine or by a shoemaker. The circle M in the pattern is the catch or button, which can be provided and attached by a shoemaker, or found at a trunk store.
Any ordinary article of leather can be stitched on a sewing machine in the home. To do this successfully the stitch must be long and the needle of a large rather than a small size. Try the stitch on a scrap of leather before sewing the article. If the foot or feed of the machine mars the leather, place tissue paper or a plain piece of paper over the leather and stitch through both. After making the stitch the paper can be pulled away. Use as heavy a silk as the needle will take. The card case, coin purse, stamp case and bags can all be stitched on an ordinary machine, if the above directions are followed. In stitching any soft leather, such as ooze cow or ooze calf, if paper is not put between the leather and the machine, the stitching will stretch the leather. In making bags, instead of stitching on a machine one can punch holes close together with a small punch, and then with strips of leather sew the sides together over and over, or in any manner desired. If no machine is at hand, nor a shoemaker's shop nearby, a large pin or awl may be used to prick holes in the leather, and then the parts sewed together with needle and silk. Use a [434] running or over-and-over stitch. An over-and-over stitch from one end of the seam to the other and back to the beginning of the seam, makes an X-shaped stitch which gives a very good finish.
Any regular leather item can be sewn on a home sewing machine. To do this successfully, the stitch should be long and you need a larger needle instead of a small one. Test the stitch on a scrap piece of leather before working on the actual item. If the foot or feed of the machine damages the leather, place tissue paper or a plain piece of paper over it and stitch through both layers. After stitching, you can easily remove the paper. Use the heaviest silk that the needle can accommodate. Items like card cases, coin purses, stamp cases, and bags can all be stitched on a standard machine if you follow these tips. When stitching any soft leather, like oiled cow or calf leather, if you don’t use paper between the leather and the machine, the stitching will stretch the leather. For making bags, instead of using a machine, you can punch holes closely together with a small punch and then sew the sides together repeatedly with strips of leather in any style you like. If you don’t have a machine or a shoemaker nearby, you can use a large pin or awl to poke holes in the leather, then sew the pieces together with needle and silk. Use a [434] running or back-and-forth stitch. A back-and-forth stitch from one end of the seam to the other and then back creates an X-shaped stitch that looks really nice.
The second method after tooling is stamping. Line the pattern as described. Purchase a common carpenter's nail set, with the head not too large. The smaller sets fit the patterns better and make smaller circles. Moisten the leather as described. Use a wooden mallet to strike the tool in stamping the background. This may be done either along circular lines or in a more irregular manner, but avoid striking the tool too hard, as too much pressure cuts through the leather. Other stamping tools of good patterns may be purchased at hardware stores or crafts shops.
The second method after tooling is stamping. Align the pattern as described. Get a standard carpenter's nail set, making sure the head isn't too large. The smaller sets fit the patterns better and create smaller circles. Moisten the leather as described. Use a wooden mallet to strike the tool when stamping the background. You can do this along circular lines or in a more random way, but be careful not to hit the tool too hard, as too much pressure can cut through the leather. You can also buy other stamping tools with good patterns at hardware stores or craft shops.
A needle book or stamp case is another handy article to make in leather. The sketch shows the design. A piece of Russian calf, 6-1/4 by 3-3/4 in., is necessary. This allows 1/4 in. on each side and end for pinning down the pattern. Fold a piece of paper into three parts as A, B and C, the front being A; the back, B, which is folded underneath the part A. The flap C folds up with B and then over A toward the front. When the pattern is open, the design for all parts must be on the same side of the paper. The design for the back B is put on the leather upside down. When the pattern is folded this makes the design upright. The parts A, B and C are equal in length and width. The part C may be cut in any shape desired, but keep the tongue D long and narrow. Make two horizontal cuts in the front A about 3/16 in. apart.
A needle book or stamp case is another useful item to make from leather. The sketch shows the design. You need a piece of Russian calf, 6-1/4 by 3-3/4 in. This allows for 1/4 in. on each side and end for pinning down the pattern. Fold a piece of paper into three parts labeled A, B, and C, with the front as A; the back, B, which folds underneath A. The flap C folds up with B and then over A towards the front. When the pattern is open, all parts must be on the same side of the paper. The design for the back B is placed on the leather upside down. When the pattern is folded, this makes the design upright. The parts A, B, and C are equal in length and width. The part C can be cut into any shape you want, but keep the tongue D long and narrow. Make two horizontal cuts in the front A about 3/16 in. apart.
These cuts must be at the same distance from the bottom of the front as the narrowest part of the tongue is from the end. The tongue will then fit the cuts. Make the horizontal cuts a little wider than the tongue. The design is put on the leather in the same manner. It can be worked out in line, tooling or stamping. The parts A and B are sewed together.
These cuts need to be the same distance from the bottom of the front as the narrowest part of the tongue is from the end. The tongue will then fit into the cuts. Make the horizontal cuts a bit wider than the tongue. The design is applied to the leather in the same way. It can be done with lines, tooling, or stamping. The parts A and B are sewn together.

A Mat
A Rug
The mat illustrated is another useful article and easy to make. Any size may be used, and the method of lining or tooling the design, or both, gives a very beautiful effect.
The mat shown here is another handy item that's easy to make. You can use any size, and the way you line or tool the design, or both, creates a really beautiful effect.
How to Make a Wood Lathe
A strong, substantial lathe in which wood and light metal articles may be turned can be made by carefully following the description below and the detailed drawings of the parts.
A sturdy, reliable lathe for shaping wood and lightweight metal items can be built by carefully following the instructions below and the detailed illustrations of the components.

Detail of Wood Lathe (Fig. 1)
Detail of Wood Lathe (Fig. 1)
The bed is made of two pieces of straight-grained, smooth, 2 by 4-in. hard wood, 5 ft. long. They are held apart at each end by blocks of wood 2 in. wide. The bed can, of course, be made longer or shorter if desired, but the above dimensions are very satisfactory. The frame of the headstock, Figs. 1 and 2, is made of hard wood. The two end pieces have the dimensions and shape shown. These are fastened with screws to the base.
The bed is made of two pieces of straight-grained, smooth, 2 by 4-inch hardwood, each 5 feet long. They are separated at both ends by 2-inch-wide wooden blocks. The bed can be adjusted to be longer or shorter if needed, but the dimensions given work very well. The frame of the headstock, Figs. 1 and 2, is made of hardwood. The two end pieces have the dimensions and shape shown. These are attached to the base with screws.

(Fig. 2)
(Fig. 2)
The base has a slider, a strip of wood 1 in. thick and 10 in. long, wide enough to slide smoothly between the bed pieces, nailed to its bottom, 2 in. from the rear end. Two 1/2-in. holes are bored through the baseboard and slide. Two 1/2-in. bolts are run through these holes and through another slide and board which runs on the under side of the bed.
The base has a slider, a piece of wood that is 1 inch thick and 10 inches long, wide enough to slide easily between the bed pieces, nailed to its bottom, 2 inches from the rear end. Two 1/2-inch holes are drilled through the baseboard and the slider. Two 1/2-inch bolts go through these holes and another slider and board that run underneath the bed.
When the nuts on these bolts are tightened, the headstock is firmly clamped to the bed. A half-round, wedge-shaped piece is fastened with screws in the frame against the front end, to serve as a brace against any strain, and will also add to its appearance. The spindle is of tool steel or steel tubing, 3/4 in. in diameter and 14 in. long. Threads are cut on one end.
When the nuts on these bolts are tightened, the headstock is securely clamped to the bed. A half-round, wedge-shaped piece is attached with screws to the frame at the front end to act as a brace against any stress, while also enhancing its appearance. The spindle is made of tool steel or steel tubing, 3/4 inch in diameter and 14 inches long. Threads are cut on one end.
A hardened steel collar, 1/4 by 1-1/2 in., is riveted on the spindle so it may turn against another collar of the same size on the headstock. Another collar is fastened with screws to the rear end [436] piece, and a collar with a removable pin is fixed on the spindle. These should be fitted so as to revolve easily against each other and yet have no end play. The bearings are of brass tubing drilled for a spindle. These are inserted and wedged in the headstock, 6 in. from the bed.
A hardened steel collar, 1/4 by 1-1/2 in., is riveted onto the spindle so it can rotate against another collar of the same size on the headstock. Another collar is secured with screws to the rear end piece, and a collar with a removable pin is attached to the spindle. These should be adjusted to rotate smoothly against each other while having no end play. The bearings are made of brass tubing drilled for a spindle. These are inserted and wedged into the headstock, 6 in. from the bed. [436]
Care should be taken to see that they are in line. Small holes are drilled from the top for oil. The pulleys are 2 in. wide with the diameters given in the drawing. They are fastened to the spindle with a removable pin.
Care should be taken to make sure they are aligned. Small holes are drilled from the top for oil. The pulleys are 2 inches wide with the diameters shown in the drawing. They are attached to the spindle with a removable pin.

(Fig. 3)
(Fig. 3)
A good chuck for this lathe is made, as shown in Fig. 3, of a piece of shafting 1-1/2 in. in diameter and 2-1/2 in. long. A 1/2-in. hole is drilled through its center and one end reamed out and threaded to fit the threads on the end of the spindle. A setscrew is fitted over the 1/2-in. hole. A center for turning wood is also shown. Many centers, drills, etc., can be made of 1/2-in. tool steel.
A good chuck for this lathe is made, as shown in Fig. 3, from a piece of shafting that is 1.5 inches in diameter and 2.5 inches long. A 0.5-inch hole is drilled through its center, and one end is reamed out and threaded to fit the threads on the end of the spindle. A setscrew is placed over the 0.5-inch hole. A center for turning wood is also shown. Many centers, drills, etc., can be made from 0.5-inch tool steel.

(Fig. 4)
(Fig. 4)

(Fig. 5)
(Fig. 5)
The tailstock, Figs. 4 and 5, is built up of three pieces of hard wood, 2 in. thick, and one piece, 1 in. thick, shaped as shown. These are held together with four bolts, 7-1/2 in. long. It has sliders and is clamped to the bed in the same manner as the headstock, but only one bolt is used. A handle is welded to the nut. This will make the clamping easy.
The tailstock, Figs. 4 and 5, is made up of three pieces of hardwood, 2 in. thick, and one piece, 1 in. thick, shaped as shown. These are secured together with four bolts, each 7-1/2 in. long. It has sliders and is attached to the bed in the same way as the headstock, but only one bolt is needed. A handle is welded to the nut, making the clamping easy.

SECTION THROUGH Fig. 4 (Fig. 6)
SECTION THROUGH Fig. 4 (Fig. 6)
A piece of tubing, 2 in. long, is drilled for a 1/2-in. dead center and inserted for 1-1/2 in. between the two upper pieces, as shown in Fig. 6. A hole for a 1/2-in. bolt is bored through the sections so as to allow the bolt to slide freely in the tubing. The top section is taken off and a place chiseled out just back of the tube for a 1/2-in. nut. A bolt, 7 in. long and threaded for 2 in. of its length, is turned into the nut and tubing. A handle or wheel is riveted on the end of the bolt. The center is made of tool steel, 1/2 in. in diameter, with a tapering point. Other centers can be made of 1/2-in, tool steel.
A 2-inch long piece of tubing is drilled for a 1/2-inch dead center and inserted 1-1/2 inches between the two upper pieces, as shown in Fig. 6. A hole for a 1/2-inch bolt is drilled through the sections to allow the bolt to slide freely in the tubing. The top section is removed, and a space is chiseled out just behind the tube for a 1/2-inch nut. A 7-inch long bolt, threaded for 2 inches of its length, is screwed into the nut and tubing. A handle or wheel is attached to the end of the bolt. The center is made of 1/2-inch diameter tool steel with a tapered point. Other centers can also be made from 1/2-inch tool steel.

(Fig. 7)
(Fig. 7)
The tool rest, Figs. 7, 8 and 9, has a slide, 3/4 by 3 by 13 in., with a slot 1/2 by 6 in. The base of the rest is bolted on this slide so it can be adjusted. The rest is fastened on this base with screws. The height of the rest can be varied. It can be raised or lowered by inserting wedges between the slide and the rest base. The tool rest is clamped to the base the same as the tailstock.
The tool rest, Figs. 7, 8, and 9, features a slide measuring 3/4 by 3 by 13 inches, with a slot of 1/2 by 6 inches. The base of the rest is bolted to this slide for easy adjustment. The rest is secured to the base with screws. You can change the height of the rest by raising or lowering it using wedges inserted between the slide and the rest base. The tool rest is clamped to the base just like the tailstock.

(Fig. 8)
(Fig. 8)
The power for this lathe can be supplied by means of a countershaft, although a foot-power arrangement may be attached.—Contributed by E. E. Hulgan, Marion, Ind.
The power for this lathe can be supplied using a countershaft, although a foot-powered setup can also be attached.—Contributed by E. E. Hulgan, Marion, Ind.

(Fig. 9)
(Fig. 9)
To Reduce the Gasoline Consumption of an Automobile
Quite recently I tried out a method of reducing the consumption of gasoline in my automobile, and, as a result, have higher efficiency without resorting to any of the numerous and exceedingly costly devices on the market.
Recently, I tried a method to reduce the amount of gasoline my car uses, and as a result, I have better efficiency without having to buy any of the various expensive devices available.
I procured a piece of wire screen, cut it in the shape of the gasket between the carburetor and the intake manifold, but leaving it blind, that is, with the screen across the inlet. I put this between two gaskets and fastened the whole back in place. The result was an increase of 3 miles per gallon of fuel.—Contributed by W. J. Weber, New York City.
I got a piece of wire mesh, cut it to match the shape of the gasket between the carburetor and the intake manifold, but I left it blind, meaning there was mesh across the inlet. I placed this between two gaskets and secured everything back in place. The result was an increase of 3 miles per gallon of fuel.—Contributed by W. J. Weber, New York City.
Cutting a Tin Ball from a Child's Finger
A three-year-old child found a globe of tin with a hole cut through the center, and—it is hardly necessary to state—immediately thrust his finger into the hole. But he could not get it out again, and the mother, accompanied by several other small children, brought the screaming child to my office. I found the hole had been punched, which caused three harpoon-like fragments to be carried into the center of the globe.
A three-year-old kid found a tin globe with a hole cut in the middle, and—it's hardly surprising—immediately stuck his finger in it. But he couldn't get it out again, and his mother, along with a few other small kids, brought the screaming child to my office. I discovered that the hole had been punched, causing three harpoon-like pieces to be pushed into the center of the globe.
The mother in her attempt to remove it had caused the sharp points to enter the flesh of the finger in two or three places. Any attempt to pull [437] the ball off, drove the points of the harpoons deeper into the finger, and it was therefore a question of cutting the tin or the finger. But what kind of an instrument could I use on this tin globe?
The mother, trying to take it off, had made the sharp points dig into the flesh of her finger in two or three spots. Any effort to pull the ball off pushed the harpoon points deeper into her finger, so it came down to cutting either the tin or her finger. But what kind of tool could I use on this tin globe?
I had nothing in my case that would cut it. My 35 years of medical experience gave me no help. The tin was as hard and smooth as a glass marble. Yet, it would have been ridiculous to be thus conquered by a tin whistle, so after some meditation I called to mind that I had a pair of heavy tinner's snips in the basement. By using the utmost care I succeeded in cutting a small incision in the round ball, and then with the points of the shears I cut the metal away from the finger.
I had nothing in my toolbox that would do the trick. My 35 years of medical experience didn't help. The tin was as hard and smooth as a glass marble. Still, it would have been silly to let a tin whistle defeat me, so after some thought, I remembered that I had a pair of heavy tin snips in the basement. With great care, I managed to make a small incision in the round ball, and then with the tips of the shears, I cut the metal away from my finger.
Such an accident may come under the observation of any parent, and if so, he can use the same method to relieve the child where medical assistance is not near at hand.—Contributed by R. W. Battles, M. D., Erie, Pa.
Such an accident could happen in front of any parent, and if it does, they can use the same technique to help the child when medical help is not easily available.—Contributed by R. W. Battles, M. D., Erie, Pa.
Child's Seat for Theaters
As children must hold tickets for theaters the same as adults, but the ordinary chair is too low to permit a child to see the performance, an auxiliary seat such as shown in the sketch would sometimes be desirable as it elevates the child so its head will be on a level with those of other spectators. The seat is made of a strip of canvas with eyelets for wire hooks that fit over the arms of the ordinary theater chair. It is necessary to have extra eyelets at one end of the canvas to adjust it to varying widths of seats.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.
As kids need tickets for theaters just like adults do, but the regular chair is too low for a child to see the show, an extra seat like the one shown in the sketch can be useful because it raises the child so their head is level with the other viewers. The seat is made from a strip of canvas with eyelets for wire hooks that fit over the arms of a regular theater chair. It’s important to have additional eyelets at one end of the canvas to adjust for different seat widths.—Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal.

Seat in a Theater Chair
Seat in a theater seat
Holding Spoon on a Hot Dish
After repeatedly burning my fingers in the attempt to prevent the spoon from sliding into the hot dish, I decided to do a little inventing on my own hook. Taking a clean, straight hairpin I bent it to the shape shown in Fig. 1, and after hooking it over the edge of the dish, I placed the spoon in it as shown in Fig. 2, and my troubles were at an end.—Contributed by Miss Genevieve Warner, Kalamazoo, Mich.
After burning my fingers multiple times trying to keep the spoon from sliding into the hot dish, I decided to come up with my own solution. I took a clean, straight hairpin and bent it into the shape shown in Fig. 1. Then, I hooked it over the edge of the dish and placed the spoon in it as shown in Fig. 2, and my problems were solved.—Contributed by Miss Genevieve Warner, Kalamazoo, Mich.

Spoon Holder on a Dish (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Spoon Holder on a Plate (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Locating Gas and Electric Fixtures in the Dark
A gas or electric fixture in the center of a room is quite hard to locate in the dark; more so if it is a single-light pendant. The location may be easily found if the fixture is marked as follows: Coat small pieces of cardboard on both sides with phosphorus and suspend them from the fixtures with small wires. No matter how dark the room may be, the phosphorus on the cardboard can be readily seen. The phosphorus is the same as used on matches and can be obtained from any druggist. The phosphorus, being poisonous, should be handled as little as possible, and, after using, should be returned to the water-filled jar in which it was received when bought. If left in the open, it may cause fire.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
A gas or electric light fixture in the middle of a room is pretty hard to find in the dark, especially if it’s a single-light pendant. You can easily find the location if you mark the fixture like this: Coat small pieces of cardboard on both sides with phosphorus and hang them from the fixture with small wires. No matter how dark it gets, the phosphorus on the cardboard will be easy to see. The phosphorus is the same stuff used on matches and can be bought from any pharmacy. Since phosphorus is toxic, it should be handled as little as possible, and after you're done, it should go back into the water-filled jar it came in when purchased. If left out in the open, it could cause a fire.—Contributed by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, N. Y.
A Pea-Shooting Gun
The gun consists of only two parts. The barrel may be either a piece of bamboo fishing pole or a section of sweet alder. The spring is a piece of corset steel, such as can be usually found about the home.
The gun is made up of just two parts. The barrel can be a length of bamboo fishing pole or a section of sweet alder. The spring is made from a piece of corset steel, which is something you can usually find around the house.

A Pea-Shooting Gun Made of a Piece of Alder and a Corset String
A Pea Shooter Made from a Piece of Alder and a Corset String
Sweet alder can be found in the summer growing along the fences in the country almost anywhere. Find a stalk, about 1 in. in diameter, which is good and straight, and cut it off to a length of 6 or 7 in. Make a ram rod of wood and use it to punch out the pith of the alder, rendering the bore as smooth as possible. An old bamboo pole of like dimensions may be used instead.
Sweet alder can be found in the summer growing along fences in the countryside pretty much everywhere. Look for a stalk around 1 inch in diameter that is nice and straight, and cut it to a length of 6 or 7 inches. Make a ram rod out of wood and use it to push out the pith of the alder, making the inside as smooth as you can. You can also use an old bamboo pole of similar size instead.
Cut out a section of the wood, 2-1/2 in. long, beginning 1-1/2 in. from one end of the tube. The depth of this cut should be almost halfway through the piece. The corset steel is then inserted into the short end of the tube and bent over so that its other end will touch the bottom of the open part of the bore. A nick is made with a knife across the bottom of the bore at this point, to let the spring catch a little. The ammunition is placed before the caught end of the spring, as shown, and discharged by hooking the forefinger over the spring at the point A and pulling backward as when pulling the trigger of a gun.
Cut out a section of the wood, 2.5 inches long, starting 1.5 inches from one end of the tube. The depth of this cut should be almost halfway through the piece. The corset steel is then inserted into the short end of the tube and bent over so that the other end touches the bottom of the open part of the bore. A notch is made with a knife across the bottom of the bore at this point, to allow the spring to catch a little. The ammunition is placed in front of the caught end of the spring, as shown, and fired by hooking the forefinger over the spring at point A and pulling backward like pulling the trigger of a gun.
It is necessary to keep the muzzle elevated a little after the ammunition is placed in position, otherwise the pea will roll out before the spring has a chance to strike it.
It’s important to keep the muzzle pointed up a bit after the ammo is loaded, or else the pellet will roll out before the spring has a chance to hit it.
Coloring Electric-Light Globes
Often it is desired to produce certain effects in lighting which demand a different-colored light than that given by the modern tungsten lamp. As an example, a soft, mellow light is sometimes desired similar to that given by the old carbon-filament lamp. In such cases it is a great mistake to install the carbon lamps on account of their exceedingly poor efficiency.
Often, people want to create specific lighting effects that require a different color of light than what modern tungsten bulbs provide. For example, a soft, warm light is sometimes preferred, similar to that produced by the old carbon-filament bulbs. In these situations, it’s a huge mistake to use carbon lamps due to their extremely low efficiency.
The ordinary tungsten lamp has an average efficiency of about 1.2 watts per candlepower, while the carbon-filament lamp requires about 3 watts per candlepower. Therefore, it is much more economical to color the globe of the tungsten lamp so as to produce the required color than to use the carbon lamp. Of course, both lamps must be colored when any color other than a soft, yellow light is desired.
The standard tungsten lamp usually has an efficiency of around 1.2 watts per candlepower, while the carbon-filament lamp needs about 3 watts per candlepower. So, it’s way more cost-effective to color the globe of the tungsten lamp to get the desired color instead of using the carbon lamp. Naturally, both lamps need to be colored if any color other than a soft yellow light is wanted.
A cheap coloring solution may be made as follows: Soak a small amount of gelatin in cold water for several hours, then boil it and strain it through a piece of fine cloth. While the solution is still hot, add a small quantity of aniline dye of the desired color that has been previously mixed in a small quantity of cold water. The lamps are dipped in the solution and then allowed to cool in a vertical position so that the coating will be more uniform.
A budget-friendly coloring solution can be made like this: Soak a small amount of gelatin in cold water for a few hours, then boil it and strain it through a piece of fine cloth. While the solution is still hot, add a small amount of aniline dye in your chosen color that you've already mixed with a little cold water. Dip the lamps into the solution and let them cool in a vertical position for a more even coating.
A more satisfactory coloring solution may be made from celluloid. Obtain quite a number of old photographic films and remove all the gelatin by washing them in hot water. Then dissolve them in a solution of equal parts of ether and alcohol. Add the coloring solution and dip the lamps. The coating produced by this method is impervious to water.
A better coloring solution can be made from celluloid. Get a good number of old photographic films and wash them in hot water to remove all the gelatin. Then, dissolve them in a mixture of equal parts ether and alcohol. Add the coloring solution and dip the lamps. The coating made by this method is waterproof.
Support for an Open Book

When a book is laid on a table for reading the pages at the beginning or end, it will not stay open flat on account of the difference in the thickness of the open parts. One person, doing a great deal of reading, uses a small card, with the corner cut out, which is placed under the side of the book having the smallest number of leaves, as shown.
When a book is placed on a table for reading, the pages at the beginning or end won’t stay open flat due to the difference in thickness of those sections. A person who reads a lot uses a small card with a corner cut out, which is positioned under the side of the book that has the fewest pages, as illustrated.
Arts-Crafts Leather Work
By Mary C. Scovel
Part II
When laying out designs for leather work, avoid making them too small and intricate. Bold, simple designs are the best. The relation between the shapes of the background and of the design should be well balanced. The design should not be so small that the large background shapes overbalance it. One good way is to let the design partly follow or repeat the contour of the object. If the article be rectangular in shape, let some of the lines of the design follow rectangular lines; and if circular, follow the curves of the circle.
When creating designs for leather work, steer clear of making them too small and complicated. Bold, simple designs work best. The relationship between the background shapes and the design should be well-balanced. The design shouldn't be so tiny that the large background shapes overpower it. A good approach is to have the design partially follow or repeat the contour of the object. If the item is rectangular, let some of the design lines follow rectangular shapes; and if it's circular, follow the curves of the circle.
The first piece of leather work considered, will be an artistic cardcase. The foundation of a cardcase is a rectangle. Take a piece of paper 10 by 4-3/4 in. and fold it in the middle, making each side 5 in., then fold in 2 in. on each outside edge toward the center. This last fold makes the pocket of the case. If a deeper pocket is desired, a longer piece of paper must be used, and the fold more than 2 in. Cut out the leather according to the paper pattern and allow at least 1/4 in. for the margin. This gives enough extra material for fastening the leather on a board outside of the pattern. Moisten the leather on the rough or unfinished side. Remember that, as previously stated, Russian calfskin is the best for tooling. Place the folded paper on the right side of the leather, then with a ruler, triangle and lining tool draw the vertical lines where the paper is folded. If the leather is moistened enough, the tool will make a deep line. Make these lines where the leather is to be folded in the center, and for each pocket. Line all around the pattern on four sides to indicate the outside border of the pattern. Note that there are four vertical panels or rectangles, two wide ones and two narrow ones, as the leather lies flat on the board. Select either of the wider rectangles for the front of the cardcase. Transfer the design onto this side. Place the paper on the moistened leather and go over all the lines of the design with a hard pencil. When this is done, take the paper away and deepen the lines of the design with the lining tool. If tooling is desired, use the broad-end tool and [440] press down the background with firm even strokes. Keep the background and edges of the design sharp. If stamping is desired, make rows of small circles, regular or irregular, by using the nail set and a wood mallet. The inside or lining is made of skiver leather or silk. The two center rectangles are the only parts lined. Cut out the piece of silk or leather about 1/16 in. less at the top and bottom of the rectangles and 1/4 in. wider on each side. If leather is used, apply library paste on its back, then place carefully on the inside, smooth it down firmly and put it under a heavy weight to dry. If silk is used, apply the paste around the edges for a width of about 1/4 in., and put it under the weight. The case is then folded and sewed at top and bottom. Cut off the surplus leather about 1/8 in. from the stitches.
The first leather project we'll look at is an artistic cardcase. The base of a cardcase is a rectangle. Take a piece of paper that measures 10 by 4-3/4 inches and fold it in half, making each side 5 inches. Then, fold in 2 inches on each outer edge towards the center. This last fold creates the pocket of the case. If you want a deeper pocket, you'll need to use a longer piece of paper and fold more than 2 inches. Cut the leather according to the paper pattern and leave at least 1/4 inch for the margin. This extra allowance gives you enough material to attach the leather to a board outside of the pattern. Moisten the leather on the rough or unfinished side. Remember, as mentioned before, that Russian calfskin is the best for tooling. Place the folded paper on the right side of the leather, and then use a ruler, triangle, and lining tool to draw vertical lines where the paper is folded. If the leather is sufficiently moistened, the tool will leave a deep line. Create these lines where the leather will be folded in the center and for each pocket. Trace all around the pattern on four sides to mark the outside border of the pattern. There are four vertical panels or rectangles, two wide ones and two narrow ones, while the leather lies flat on the board. Choose one of the wider rectangles for the front of the cardcase. Transfer the design onto this side. Place the paper on the moistened leather and trace over all the lines of the design with a hard pencil. Once this is done, remove the paper and deepen the lines of the design with the lining tool. If you want to do tooling, use the broad-end tool and press down the background with firm, even strokes. Keep the background and edges of the design sharp. If stamping is preferred, make rows of small circles, either regular or irregular, using the nail set and a wood mallet. The inside or lining is made of skiver leather or silk. Only the two center rectangles are lined. Cut out the piece of silk or leather to be about 1/16 inch smaller at the top and bottom of the rectangles and 1/4 inch wider on each side. If you’re using leather, apply library paste on the back, then carefully place it on the inside, smooth it down firmly, and put it under a heavy weight to dry. If using silk, apply the paste around the edges for about 1/4 inch in width and place it under the weight. The case is then folded and sewn at the top and bottom. Cut off the excess leather about 1/8 inch from the stitches.
The next article is the useful magazine cover, which anyone should delight in making. It requires a piece of leather 11 by 15 in. Allow enough margin to fasten it to the board. Fold the narrow edges together. The design can be placed on either side. A border design bounded by rectangular lines is very suitable. The margin allowed around the design shown in the illustration is 1 in. from the front edge, 1-1/2 in. from the top edge, and 2-1/4 in. from the bottom edge. The design is 5-1/4 in. wide. It is placed on the moistened leather and lined, tooled or stamped as described for the cardcase. The inside of this cover is lined with heavy silk. Allow a 1/4-in. margin to turn in on all four sides. Two strips made of the lining material, 2-1/2 in. wide and 11 in. long, are placed 1-1/2 in. from each side, over the lining on the inside. The lining, strips and the leather are stitched together about 1/8 in. from the edge on all four sides. The strips are to hold the magazine in place as the cover of the book is slipped between the cover and the strip.
The next article is about making a useful magazine cover, which anyone should enjoy creating. You'll need a piece of leather that measures 11 by 15 inches. Make sure to leave enough margin to attach it to the board. Fold the narrow edges together. You can place the design on either side. A border design framed by rectangular lines works really well. The margin around the design shown in the illustration is 1 inch from the front edge, 1.5 inches from the top edge, and 2.25 inches from the bottom edge. The design itself is 5.25 inches wide. Position it on the dampened leather and then line, tool, or stamp it as you would for the card case. The inside of this cover is lined with heavy silk. Leave a 1/4-inch margin to fold in on all four sides. Two strips made of the lining material, each 2.5 inches wide and 11 inches long, are placed 1.5 inches from each side, over the lining on the inside. Stitch the lining, strips, and leather together about 1/8 inch from the edge on all four sides. The strips are meant to hold the magazine in place when the cover of the book is slipped between the cover and the strip.

Stampcase
Stamp holder
Other kinds of leather, such as ooze cow and ooze calf, may be used, but these only allow the method of cutting out the design, as shown in the [441] bag and stampcase. The design is traced on the wrong or smooth side of the leather. Do not moisten the ooze leather. Fasten the leather firmly on the board and cut out the design with a sharp knife. A soft silk is best for the lining. Apply the paste on the leather near the edge of the design and after laying the silk in place, put it under a weight to dry.
Other types of leather, like ooze cow and ooze calf, can be used, but they only allow for the method of cutting out the design, as shown in the [441] bag and stamp case. The design is traced on the backside or smooth side of the leather. Do not wet the ooze leather. Secure the leather tightly on the board and cut out the design with a sharp knife. A soft silk is ideal for the lining. Apply the paste on the leather near the edge of the design, and after placing the silk in position, put it under a weight to dry.
The stampcase and handbags are laid out, and the designs made in the same manner as for the cardcase and magazine cover, but instead of stitching the edges on the handbags, they are joined with thongs run through holes cut in the edges of the leather. The stampcase edges are sewed together. Bear in mind that Russian calf is used for tooling and stamping, and ooze cow or calf for perforated designs.
The stampcase and handbags are arranged, and the designs created just like for the cardcase and magazine cover, but instead of stitching the edges on the handbags, they are connected with thongs threaded through holes cut in the leather edges. The edges of the stampcase are sewn together. Keep in mind that Russian calf is used for tooling and stamping, and ooze cow or calf is used for perforated designs.
Furnace Electrodes of Lead Pencils
Furnace electrodes frequently consist of carbon rods, and if there is a short gap between them, forming a break in the circuit, the current jumps across that gap, forming an "arc." The intense heat of the arc is used in fusing and melting metals. As large electrodes are necessary for use in furnaces where great masses of metal are melted, so small electrodes are adapted to finer or more delicate work, says Popular Electricity.
Furnace electrodes usually consist of carbon rods, and if there's a small gap between them, creating a break in the circuit, the current jumps across that gap, creating an "arc." The intense heat of the arc is used to fuse and melt metals. Large electrodes are needed in furnaces where large amounts of metal are melted, while smaller electrodes are suitable for more precise or delicate work, according to Popular Electricity.

Pencil Electrodes Which Furnish Intense Heat
Pencil Electrodes That Provide Intense Heat
As the lead or graphite in a lead pencil is a form of carbon, it will make an excellent electrode for small work. Two ordinary lead pencils, costing only one cent each, may be used. They are first sharpened as if they were to be used for the usual purpose of writing. Then a small notch is cut in one side of each pencil, laying the lead [442] bare at a point about 2 in. from the sharpened end.
As the core of a lead pencil is made of carbon, it works well as an electrode for small tasks. You can use two regular lead pencils, which only cost a cent each. First, sharpen them as you would for writing. Then, cut a small notch on one side of each pencil, exposing the graphite at a point approximately 2 inches from the sharpened end. [442]
A small copper wire is wound around the pencil and into this notch, thereby making contact with the exposed lead or graphite. By means of these small wires the pencils are connected to larger wires, which in turn are connected to a switchboard or source of electric-current supply.
A small copper wire is wrapped around the pencil and into this notch, making contact with the exposed lead or graphite. These small wires connect the pencils to larger wires, which are then connected to a switchboard or source of electric current.
At some place in the circuit there should be a resistance to prevent short-circuiting and also to control the strength of the current. As the wood sheath on the pencils offers sufficient insulation, they may be picked up, one in either hand, and no electrical effect will be felt by the person so doing. If the pointed tips are touched together, a fine little arc, not much larger than the tips of the pencils, will be formed. The temperature of this arc, however, is such that fine wires or small quantities of metal may be melted readily.
At some point in the circuit, there should be a resistor to prevent short circuits and also to control the current strength. Since the wooden casing on the pencils provides enough insulation, you can hold one in each hand without feeling any electrical effects. If the pointed tips touch, a small arc will form, not much bigger than the tips of the pencils. However, the temperature of this arc is high enough to easily melt fine wires or small amounts of metal.
These little lead-pencil arcs may be used to fuse very small gold or silver wires, or platinum thermometers, or wires for tungsten or tantalum lamps. The bead or globule of molten metal formed on the end of a fine wire need be no longer than a small-sized grain of sand.
These small arcs from a lead pencil can be used to join tiny gold or silver wires, platinum thermometers, or wires for tungsten or tantalum lamps. The bead or drop of melted metal that forms on the end of a thin wire should be no bigger than a small grain of sand.
Coat and Trousers Hangers
The hanger is simple in construction and can be easily made by following the dimensions given in the drawing, and the directions given below.
The hanger is easy to construct and can be quickly made by following the dimensions in the drawing and the instructions provided below.
The back is first marked off on a soft-pine board and cut out. The curved edge should be rounded off so as to prevent injury to the coat. The two end pieces are then made, and fastened to the back with screws as shown. The wedge is ripped diagonally from stock and the smaller edge made slightly round. The wedge slides in between the two end pieces, and after the trousers have been put in place, is pushed down until it holds them securely. The hanger is a screw hook turned into the wood, or it may be made of a piece of heavy wire run through a hole in the back and bent over on the bottom edge. The wood may be stained any desired color and then given two coats of shellac.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Wilmette, Illinois.
First, mark off the back on a soft-pine board and cut it out. The curved edge should be rounded to avoid damaging the coat. Next, create the two end pieces and attach them to the back with screws as shown. The wedge is cut diagonally from the stock, and the smaller edge is slightly rounded. The wedge fits between the two end pieces and, after the trousers are placed in position, is pushed down to hold them securely. The hanger can be a screw hook screwed into the wood, or it can be made from a piece of heavy wire passed through a hole in the back and bent over the bottom edge. The wood can be stained any color you like and then coated with two layers of shellac.—Contributed by Olaf Tronnes, Wilmette, Illinois.
Mending Broken Fountain-Pen Barrels
Broken fountain-pen barrels may be mended by the use of melted shellac. This can be done by heating some dry shellac and applying it to the fracture. Do not scrape off the surplus shellac, but shape it with a heated iron. A pen with such a repair has been in use for two years.—Contributed by G. D. Whitney, Pittsburg, Pa.
Broken fountain pen barrels can be repaired using melted shellac. You can do this by heating some dry shellac and applying it to the crack. Don't scrape off the excess shellac; instead, shape it with a heated iron. A pen with this kind of repair has been in use for two years.—Contributed by G. D. Whitney, Pittsburg, Pa.
Jig-Saw Blades
The ordinary form of jig-saw blade has a tendency to pull the fiber of the wood in one direction, thereby producing a jagged cut. To overcome this I made several blades with teeth as shown in the sketch. After the downstroke is completed, the teeth A will cut on the upstroke, the teeth B cutting on the downstroke, etc. The upstroke teeth should be a trifle longer than the others and from 4 to 6 in number.—Contributed by Phillip Caflish, Buffalo, N. Y.
The standard jig-saw blade tends to pull the wood fiber in one direction, resulting in a jagged cut. To fix this, I created several blades with teeth as illustrated in the sketch. After the downward stroke is done, the teeth A will cut on the upward stroke, while the teeth B will cut on the downward stroke, and so on. The upward stroke teeth should be slightly longer than the others and should number between 4 to 6. —Contributed by Phillip Caflish, Buffalo, N. Y.

Teeth Cut in Opposite Direction
Teeth Cut in Opposite Way
Leaded-Glass Panels for Furniture
Certain kinds of furniture may be greatly improved in appearance by the use of simple glazed panels in the door frames. It would be inappropriate to have anything elaborate in a small cabinet for the reception of china as it distracts the attention from the contents, but a simple leaded diapering or pattern of small design, such as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, would be quite in place and have a good effect. For other purposes more elaborate effects can be worked out in deep shades, says Work, London.
Certain types of furniture can look much better with the addition of simple glass panels in the door frames. It wouldn’t be suitable to have anything ornate in a small cabinet intended for china, as it takes attention away from the items inside. However, a simple leaded pattern or a small design, like those shown in Figs. 1 and 2, would fit perfectly and create a nice effect. For other uses, you can create more elaborate looks with deeper colors, according to Work, London.

Simple Leaded Diapering of Small Design for a Small China Closet or Cabinet (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Simple Leaded Diapering of Small Design for a Small China Closet or Cabinet (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A hanging cabinet with leaded panels is shown in Fig. 3. These panels for the doors are in the design shown in Fig. 2. Panels of this design can be used either for furniture or for small windows. The process of making these panels is not difficult and the ordinary workman can form them, the only difficult part being the soldering of the joints.
A hanging cabinet with leaded panels is shown in Fig. 3. The designs for the doors are in the style shown in Fig. 2. Panels like this can be used for furniture or small windows. Creating these panels isn't hard, and an average worker can make them; the only challenging part is soldering the joints.

A Small Hanging Cabinet with Doors Having the Leaded-Glass Design Shown in Fig. 2 (Fig. 3)
A small hanging cabinet with doors featuring the leaded-glass design shown in Fig. 2 (Fig. 3)
The beginner should confine himself to plain glazing, the design being formed by piecing together glass of different shades. The method of procedure is to first make a small sketch in color to a scale of about 1 in. to the foot, carefully arranging the parts and colors. A full-sized panel can be drawn from this sketch. The effect of plain glazing depends entirely on the arrangement of the lead lines and the art glass. In the full-sized drawing the shapes are arranged so that they may be easily cut, all long forms being either avoided in the design, or divided by a cross-lead to guard against breakage in the cutting.
The beginner should stick to basic glazing, creating the design by combining glass in different colors. Start by making a small colored sketch at a scale of about 1 inch to the foot, carefully planning out the parts and colors. From this sketch, you can create a full-sized panel. The impact of basic glazing relies entirely on how the lead lines and art glass are arranged. In the full-sized drawing, make sure the shapes are arranged for easy cutting, avoiding long forms in the design or dividing them with a cross-lead to prevent breakage during cutting.

Only a Part of the Top of Each Window is Highly Decorated so That the Maximum Light may Gain Access (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
Only the upper portion of each window is heavily decorated to allow the most light to come in (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
Two simple forms of glazing are shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The one shown in Fig. 4 is somewhat different, the top of the panel being decorated with simple curves. This general design is considerably elaborated in Figs. 5, 6 and 7. It is desirable to decorate only a part of a window so that the maximum of light may gain access.
Two basic types of glazing are shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The one shown in Fig. 4 is a bit different, with the top of the panel decorated with simple curves. This overall design is expanded on in Figs. 5, 6, and 7. It's preferable to decorate only part of a window to allow the most light to enter.

Two Windows Placed Together May Have Their Tops Leaded to Produce a Combined Effect (Fig. 7)
Two windows positioned together can have their tops leaded to create a combined effect (Fig. 7)
Two simple treatments of a sailing craft are shown in Figs. 8 and 9. The effect of the introduction of this design in one of the panels of a small cabinet is shown in Fig. 1.
Two simple treatments of a sailing craft are shown in Figs. 8 and 9. The effect of introducing this design in one of the panels of a small cabinet is shown in Fig. 1.

Two Designs for the Tops of Windows, Showing Treatments of Sailing Craft (Fig. 8, Fig. 9)
Two Designs for the Tops of Windows, Showing Treatments of Sailing Craft (Fig. 8, Fig. 9)
An example of plain glazing is shown in Fig. 10. This is a piece of [444] simple leading and yet very effective, involving no difficulty of construction.
An example of plain glazing is shown in Fig. 10. This is a piece of [444] simple leading and very effective, with no construction difficulties.

Example of Plain Glazing with Cross Section of Glass and Lead Strip, also Showing Joint (Fig. 10)
Example of Clear Glass with a Cross-Section of Glass and Lead Strip, also Showing the Joint (Fig. 10)
For this lead glazing a quantity of strip lead, the section of which is shown in Fig. 11, will be required. This can be purchased from dealers in art-glass supplies. The lead is sold on spools and it must be straightened before it can be worked. This is most easily done by fastening one end and pulling on the other. The glass for this work must be reasonably thin as no advantage is gained by the use of thick material, and it is difficult to cut. A piece of art glass has a right and a wrong side, the side on which the spots and streaks appear is the right side, and it is cut on this side. The tools required are a glass cutter, a heavy knife and soldering appliances.
For this lead glazing, you will need a quantity of strip lead, the dimensions of which are shown in Fig. 11. You can buy this from suppliers of art glass. The lead comes on spools and must be straightened before you can work with it. The easiest way to do this is to secure one end and pull on the other. The glass you use should be reasonably thin because there’s no advantage to using thick material, and it’s harder to cut. A piece of art glass has a right side and a wrong side; the side with the spots and streaks is the right side, and you should cut it on this side. The tools you’ll need are a glass cutter, a heavy knife, and soldering equipment.

(Fig. 11)
(Fig. 11)
Sketch out the lines of the design full size on paper, drawing in only one side of a symmetrical pattern and tracing the other. After the design has been prepared, the next step is to make a cutting pattern. To do this, take a piece of tracing cloth and lay it on the drawing. Trace the lines and go over them with a brush dipped in black, making the lines exactly the same thickness as the core of the lead, or the thickness of the distance the glasses are separated from one another, as shown in Fig. 11. Each division is marked for the color it is to be and the paper is then cut into sections on each side of the broad line. These pieces form the patterns for cutting similar shapes from heavy cardboard which serve as templates for cutting the glass.
Sketch out the design lines full size on paper, drawing just one side of a symmetrical pattern and tracing the other. Once the design is ready, the next step is to create a cutting pattern. For this, take a piece of tracing cloth and place it over the drawing. Trace the lines and go over them with a brush dipped in black, ensuring the lines are exactly the same thickness as the core of the lead or the distance between the glasses, as shown in Fig. 11. Each section is labeled with its intended color, and then the paper is cut into sections on each side of the thick line. These pieces form the patterns for cutting similar shapes from heavy cardboard, which will be used as templates for cutting the glass.
Proceed to cut the glass by laying a pattern on the right side and scoring around with the cutter guided by the pattern. Little difficulty will be experienced in this work if the general design does not have very irregular shapes.
Proceed to cut the glass by placing a pattern on the right side and scoring around it with the cutter guided by the pattern. You shouldn’t have much trouble with this task as long as the overall design doesn't have very irregular shapes.

(Fig. 12)
(Fig. 12)
When the various pieces of glass [445] have been successfully cut and are ready for leading up, arrange them in position on the preliminary sketch, and then measure the outside leads and cut one piece for each side, the lead being cut to fit against the core of the other at the joint, as shown in Figs. 12 and 13. Proceed to cut the lead for the long curves obtaining the length by bending the strips along the lines of the design. As each is cut it will be found convenient to tack it in position on the working table by means of small brads, so as to simplify the measuring and cutting of the other parts. Continue until the panel is complete, when, after truing up, it is ready for soldering. This is done in the usual way but requires extraordinary care to avoid the possibility of melting the lead. The overlapping parts of the leads are pressed well against the glass in each division to keep it from rattling.
When all the pieces of glass [445] have been cut and are ready to be led up, arrange them according to the preliminary sketch, and then measure the outside leads and cut one piece for each side, ensuring the lead fits against the core of the other at the joint, as shown in Figs. 12 and 13. Next, cut the lead for the long curves, taking the length by bending the strips along the lines of the design. As you cut each piece, it helps to tack it in place on the working table with small brads to make measuring and cutting the other parts easier. Keep going until the panel is complete, then, after straightening it up, it's ready for soldering. This is done in the usual way, but you need to be very careful to avoid melting the lead. The overlapping parts of the leads should be pressed firmly against the glass in each section to prevent any rattling.

The Lead Frame is First Made, the Long Lines are Put in and Then the Short, Horizontal Ones (Fig. 13)
The lead frame is first created, then the long lines are added, followed by the short horizontal ones (Fig. 13)
In making up the squares and rectangles such as appear in Figs. 2, 4, 5, 6 and 7, lead the long lines first, adding the shorter, horizontal pieces last. The sketch, Fig. 14, will clearly illustrate this part of the work. The sketch shows the starting of the panel, Fig. 5.
In creating the squares and rectangles like those shown in Figs. 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7, start by drawing the long lines first, then add the shorter, horizontal pieces at the end. The sketch in Fig. 14 will clearly demonstrate this part of the process. The sketch illustrates the beginning of the panel in Fig. 5.

(Fig. 14)
(Fig. 14)
Raising Cucumbers on a Trellis
A novelty in cucumber culture, tried recently with great success, is as follows: As soon as the vines are about 18 in. long, stretch wire mesh 24 in. wide on poles alongside the row of plants and train the vines on the wire. The cucumbers will grow larger and the plants will require less care than when they are on the ground.
A new method in cucumber growing, recently tested with great success, is the following: Once the vines reach about 18 inches long, set up 24-inch wide wire mesh on poles next to the row of plants and train the vines to climb on the wire. The cucumbers will grow bigger, and the plants will need less maintenance than if they were growing on the ground.
A Barrel Boat
A boat that any handy boy can easily make is constructed of a barrel which is kept with the opening cut in one side up by two 4 by 6-in. timbers and two tie pieces, 2 by 4 in. The lengths of these pieces will depend on the size of the barrel.
A boat that any handy kid can easily make is built from a barrel that is positioned with the opening cut in one side facing up, supported by two 4 by 6-inch timber pieces and two tie pieces that are 2 by 4 inches. The lengths of these pieces will depend on the size of the barrel.
A good watertight barrel should be selected and an opening cut in the center between the hoops, of such a size as to allow the body of the occupant room for handling an oar. The timbers are attached to the barrel with iron straps—pieces of old hoops will do. The two tie pieces are put across the timbers at the ends of the barrel and spiked in place.
A sturdy watertight barrel should be chosen, and a hole should be cut in the center between the hoops, large enough to give the occupant space to handle an oar. The timbers are secured to the barrel with iron straps—pieces of old hoops work fine. Two crosspieces are placed across the timbers at the ends of the barrel and nailed in place.

Boat Made of a Barrel Which is Kept from Capsizing by Timbers Attached
Boat Made of a Barrel That Stays Afloat by Timber Supports
The boat is to be propelled with a single, double-end paddle. There is no danger of the boat capsizing or the water splashing into the barrel.
The boat will be moved using a single, double-ended paddle. There’s no risk of the boat tipping over or water splashing into the barrel.
Homemade Wing Nuts
A handle taken from a worn-out faucet, drilled out and threaded for a bolt, makes a good wing nut. A discarded gas-bracket key, cut off on the line AA and with the part within the dotted lines filed out, then drilled and threaded, also makes a good wing nut.
A handle from a worn-out faucet, drilled and threaded for a bolt, works well as a wing nut. A discarded gas-bracket key, cut off on the line AA and with the area inside the dotted lines filed down, then drilled and threaded, also makes a good wing nut.

Wing Nuts Made of Discarded Parts Taken from a Faucet or a Gas Bracket
Wing Nuts Made from Recycled Parts Taken from a Faucet or a Gas Bracket
A Spool-and-Ball Puzzle
Procure an empty basting-thread spool and make a hole in its side, at A, just large enough to receive a 1/4-in. steel ball. A piece of celluloid, B, is wrapped around the flanges, as shown, and fastened with small brads. An old negative film, well cleaned, is suitable for the celluloid. Be sure to put the steel ball in before fastening the celluloid in place.
Procure an empty basting-thread spool and make a hole in its side, at A, just large enough to fit a 1/4-in. steel ball. Wrap a piece of celluloid, B, around the flanges as shown, and secure it with small brads. A cleaned old negative film works well for the celluloid. Make sure to insert the steel ball before securing the celluloid in place.
The difficulty of the puzzle is to get the ball into the hole.—Contributed by R. C. Knox, Waycross, Ga.
The challenge of the puzzle is to get the ball into the hole.—Contributed by R. C. Knox, Waycross, Ga.

The Steel Ball is Not So Easily Run Into the Hole as It Appears
The steel ball isn't as easy to roll into the hole as it looks.
To Start the Ink Flowing from a Drawing Pen
In order to keep the ink flowing readily from a drawing pen it must be kept clean and not allowed to stand with the ink in the nibs. A good plan is to have a small piece of velvet fastened to the drawing board or upon a small block, conveniently located where the pen may be drawn across it as in making a line. The tuft of the velvet will clean out the partly dried ink between the nibs.—Contributed by H. L. Woodward, Washington, D. C.
To keep the ink flowing smoothly from a drawing pen, it needs to be kept clean and shouldn’t sit with ink in the nibs. A good idea is to attach a small piece of velvet to the drawing board or a small block, placed conveniently so you can drag the pen across it like making a line. The tuft of velvet will clean out the partially dried ink between the nibs.—Contributed by H. L. Woodward, Washington, D. C.
A Pencil-Sharpener Stick
Do not discard the sandpaper stick or pencil sharpener used by a draftsman just because all the abrasive sheets have been removed. Make use of it indefinitely by fitting a wedge in one edge, as shown in the illustration, to hold fresh sheets of sand or emery paper. The wedge should fit tightly so that the ends of the abrasive sheet, when wound around the block, will be held tightly. Worn sheets can thus be removed and new ones applied when necessary.—Contributed by Chas. J. La Prelle, Flushing, L. I.
Do not throw away the sandpaper stick or the pencil sharpener used by a draftsman just because all the abrasive sheets have been taken off. You can keep using it by fitting a wedge on one edge, as shown in the illustration, to hold new sheets of sand or emery paper. The wedge should fit snugly so that the ends of the abrasive sheet, when wrapped around the block, will be held securely. Worn sheets can be removed and new ones added when needed.—Contributed by Chas. J. La Prelle, Flushing, L. I.

A Wedge Attachment for a Pencil-Sharpener Stick for Changing the Sheets of Abrasive
A Wedge Attachment for a Pencil Sharpener Stick for Changing the Abrasive Sheets
Splice for Round Belts
Sash cords or round belts are easily spliced with a coil spring, and for belts this joint will run smooth and noiseless. The coil should be a close fit on the belt, and after turning one end halfway into the spring, the belt itself is twisted in the reverse direction as many times as there are coils remaining in the spring, before the other end is turned into it to meet the first.—Contributed by F. S. Cummings, Detroit, Michigan.
Sash cords or round belts are easy to connect using a coil spring, and this joint will operate smoothly and quietly. The coil should fit snugly on the belt, and after inserting one end halfway into the spring, the belt itself should be twisted in the opposite direction as many times as there are coils left in the spring, before inserting the other end to connect with the first one. —Contributed by F. S. Cummings, Detroit, Michigan.

A Coil Spring Used for Splicing Sash Cords or Small Round Belts
A Coil Spring for Joining Sash Cords or Small Round Belts
When painting wireless instruments use black asphaltum, as it has high insulating qualities.
When painting wireless instruments, use black asphaltum because it has excellent insulating properties.

The Main Ambition of a Boy Mechanic is to Own a Lathe
The main goal of a young mechanic is to own a lathe.
Amateur Mechanic's Combination Lathe
By Joe V. Romig
The thing most desired by a young mechanic is a lathe, but the cost of these machines is usually too high to be considered by the average boy, and consequently he is hampered in executing more difficult work. The combination lathe shown in the illustration comes as near filling the wants of most boy mechanics as could be wished, the attachments making it more than a lathe so that various kinds of work other than turning may be accomplished. The materials necessary are few, and, outside of a few parts, it can be constructed by the average boy at home with ordinary tools.
The thing that a young mechanic wants most is a lathe, but the price of these machines is usually too high for the average kid to afford, which makes it difficult for them to tackle more advanced projects. The combination lathe shown in the illustration meets the needs of most young mechanics quite well, as the attachments make it more than just a lathe, allowing for various types of work beyond turning. The materials needed are minimal, and, aside from a few parts, it can be built by an average kid at home with basic tools.
The material used for the construction of the frame consists of either well seasoned oak or maple, 2-3/4 in. wide and 1-1/2 in. thick. These timbers can be purchased surfaced on all sides, and they must be straight and true to size. The lengths to cut the pieces are given on the general drawing. The end standard at the headstock is cut to the full length so that the upper end is used as a bearing for the headstock spindle. A vise jaw, about 2-1/2 ft. long and of the same kind and dimension material as the frame, is attached with screws made of bolts on the standard, at the tailstock end of the lathe. The feet are made of two boards for each standard, and are of the same material as the frame and 7/8 in. thick. After cutting the pieces to the right length, making sure that the ends are square, and boring the holes to receive the bolts snugly, they are put together, the horizontal pieces for the ways and feet at perfect right angles to the uprights. This will insure the parts running freely in the finished machine. All bolts should be supplied with a washer under both head and nut, and the nuts drawn up tightly.
The material used to build the frame is either well-seasoned oak or maple, 2-3/4 in. wide and 1-1/2 in. thick. You can buy these timbers with all sides finished, and they need to be straight and true to size. The lengths for cutting the pieces are provided in the general drawing. The end standard at the headstock is cut to the full length so that the upper end serves as a support for the headstock spindle. A vise jaw, about 2-1/2 ft. long and made from the same type and size of material as the frame, is attached with screws or bolts on the standard at the tailstock end of the lathe. The feet consist of two boards for each standard, made from the same material as the frame, and are 7/8 in. thick. After cutting the pieces to the correct length, ensuring that the ends are square and drilling the holes to fit the bolts snugly, they are assembled with the horizontal pieces for the ways and feet at perfect right angles to the uprights. This will ensure that the parts move smoothly in the finished machine. All bolts should have a washer under both the head and nut, and the nuts should be tightened securely.
The headstock extends 7 in. above the upper surface of the ways, thus making a swing of 12 in. One of the standards of the headstock is the extension of the lathe standard, as previously mentioned; the other standard being cut 9-3/4 in. long and attached with bolts between the ways in the same manner as the lathe standards are fastened. A block, 3 in. long, is fastened between these standards to aid in holding them rigid. The bearings for the spindle, which is a piece of steel, 3/4 in. in diameter and about 9 in. long, are made in the upper ends of the standards in the following manner:
The headstock extends 7 inches above the upper surface of the ways, giving it a swing of 12 inches. One of the headstock's standards is an extension of the lathe standard, as mentioned earlier; the other standard is cut to 9-3/4 inches long and is bolted between the ways in the same way the lathe standards are secured. A 3-inch long block is attached between these standards to help keep them stable. The bearings for the spindle, which is a piece of steel that is 3/4 inch in diameter and about 9 inches long, are made in the upper ends of the standards as follows:
A 1-1/4 in. square is laid out on the upper end of each standard, with its center exactly over the center for the shaft, and the wood is cut out to make a square hole, which should be slightly tapering one way or the other toward the center of the standard, to hold the babbitt metal used for the bearing. A 3/8-in. hole is bored, vertically down from the upper end of each standard [448] and in the center, to meet the square hole. This is used as a gate for pouring the melted metal in and later to make an oil hole. Prepare 8 pieces of cardboard to hold the melted metal in the square holes while it cools, by cutting them about 2 in. square and making a hole in the center of each, 3/4 in. in diameter. Two of these pieces are held between the two standards while the shaft is run through them and the square holes. Paint the parts of the shaft used in the bearing with thick white lead, or wrap it with one thickness of writing paper, then line it up perfectly parallel with the ways in both directions and tack the cardboard pieces to the standards. Place the remaining two cardboard disks on the ends of the shaft and tack them to the standards also. Place putty over all the edges and pour melted babbitt metal into the hole at the top. When the metal is cool, remove the cardboard disks and turn the shaft, first in one direction and then in the other, until it can be taken from the bearings. A 1/8-in. hole is then drilled through the metal in the top for an oil hole. The ends of the shaft should be threaded by a machinist, and nuts fitted to it and faced up true. The threads should be cut just long enough to allow the back of each nut to turn freely against a washer placed on the shaft against the standard. A split or solid pulley may be used, as desired, on the shaft between the standards. If a solid pulley is used, it must be slipped on the shaft as the latter is run into the bearings.
A 1-1/4 in. square is marked out at the upper end of each standard, with its center positioned directly over the center of the shaft. The wood is cut away to create a square hole, which should be slightly tapered toward the center of the standard to hold the babbitt metal used for the bearing. A 3/8-in. hole is drilled vertically down from the upper end of each standard [448] and at the center to connect with the square hole. This serves as a gate for pouring the melted metal and later as an oil hole. Prepare 8 pieces of cardboard to hold the melted metal in the square holes as it cools by cutting them to about 2 in. square and making a hole in the center of each, 3/4 in. in diameter. Two of these pieces are placed between the two standards while the shaft is threaded through them and the square holes. Paint the parts of the shaft that will be used in the bearing with thick white lead, or wrap them with one layer of writing paper. Then line it up perfectly parallel with the ways in both directions and attach the cardboard pieces to the standards. Place the remaining two cardboard disks on the ends of the shaft and attach them to the standards as well. Apply putty over all the edges and pour melted babbitt metal into the hole at the top. Once the metal cools, remove the cardboard disks and turn the shaft first in one direction and then the other until it can be removed from the bearings. A 1/8-in. hole is then drilled through the metal at the top for an oil hole. The ends of the shaft should be threaded by a machinist, and nuts should be fitted to it and faced up true. The threads should be cut just long enough to allow the back of each nut to turn freely against a washer placed on the shaft against the standard. A split or solid pulley can be used on the shaft between the standards as desired. If a solid pulley is used, it must be slid onto the shaft as it is run into the bearings.

Detail of the Plain Lathe, Showing the Construction of the Clamp Devices for the Tailstock and Rest Slide, and the Manner of Attaching a Vise Jaw on the End of the Lathe Bed
Detail of the Plain Lathe, Showing the Construction of the Clamp Devices for the Tailstock and Rest Slide, and How to Attach a Vise Jaw at the End of the Lathe Bed
The pulley is fastened to the shaft with a pin run through a hole drilled in them. If a small flywheel is attached to the outer end of the spindle it will aid in keeping a steady motion.
The pulley is attached to the shaft with a pin that goes through a hole drilled in both. If a small flywheel is added to the outer end of the spindle, it will help maintain a smooth motion.
The same procedure is carried out in the construction of the tailstock bearings. The standards for this part are about 8 in. long and are bolted at right angles to and between two pieces that rest on top of the ways. The shaft is threaded full length, which should be done in a lathe by a machinist to get a true thread, and the melted metal run on it to make an internal thread in the bearing. A nut is run on the threads of the shaft between the standards, and provided with a small handle for use in locking the shaft when it is set on work between centers. A small handwheel is attached to the back end of the shaft, into the rim of which a handle is set to make the turning easy.
The same process is used to build the tailstock bearings. The standards for this part are about 8 inches long and are bolted at right angles to two pieces that sit on top of the ways. The shaft is fully threaded, which should be done on a lathe by a machinist to ensure a precise thread, and molten metal is poured onto it to create an internal thread in the bearing. A nut is placed on the threads of the shaft between the standards, and it has a small handle for locking the shaft when it's positioned on work between centers. A small handwheel is attached to the back end of the shaft, with a handle set into the rim to make turning easier.
The faceplate consists of a disk of metal, 6 in. in diameter and 1/4 in. thick, attached with 3/16-in. machine screws to a 3/4-in. nut. The disk is drilled in various places to receive ordinary wood screws. The faceplate should be made by a machinist so that the surface [449] of the face can be turned true. The spur center is made of a 3/4-in. nut, drilled in opposite corners for 1/4-in. pins, 1-1/4 in. long.
The faceplate is a metal disk, 6 inches in diameter and 1/4 inch thick, attached with 3/16-inch machine screws to a 3/4-inch nut. The disk has various holes drilled in it to take regular wood screws. A machinist should make the faceplate to ensure the surface of the face is perfectly flat. The spur center consists of a 3/4-inch nut, drilled in opposite corners for 1/4-inch pins that are 1-1/4 inches long.

Detail of the Various Attachments for Use in Connection with the Lathe for Sawing, Planing and Sanding, and the Shape of the Tools Used in Turning, Together with the Faceplate and Spur Construction
Detail of the Different Attachments for Use with the Lathe for Cutting, Shaping, and Smoothing, and the Design of the Tools Used for Turning, Along with the Faceplate and Spur Design
The drive wheel for this lathe was taken from an old discarded washing machine. Such a wheel is a very common part of various kinds of machinery [450] and usually one that will answer the purpose can be found in a junk pile. One from 20 to 24 in. in diameter will be about right. A 1/2-in. bolt is used for the shaft, which is run through the standard at the headstock end of the lathe from the outside, the threads being previously cut long enough to introduce a nut between the wheel and the standard for clamping the bolt in place. The extending threaded end of the bolt is then supplied with two nuts, one on each side of the wheel hub, and a short piece of pipe is slipped on, to make a bearing over the threads. One of the spokes is drilled and a pin inserted and fastened to receive the upper end of the pitman from the treadle. The wheel is adjusted on the shaft with the nuts on each side of the hub so that its face runs true with the pulley on the headstock. The wheels are connected with a 1-in. leather belt.
The drive wheel for this lathe was taken from an old discarded washing machine. Such a wheel is a very common part of various types of machinery [450] and you can usually find one that will work in a junk pile. A wheel that's about 20 to 24 inches in diameter will be the right size. A 1/2-inch bolt is used for the shaft, which goes through the standard at the headstock end of the lathe from the outside, with the threads cut long enough to fit a nut between the wheel and the standard to secure the bolt in place. The threaded end of the bolt is then fitted with two nuts, one on each side of the wheel hub, and a short piece of pipe is slipped on to create a bearing over the threads. One of the spokes is drilled, and a pin is inserted and secured to hold the upper end of the pitman from the treadle. The wheel is adjusted on the shaft with the nuts on each side of the hub so that its face aligns properly with the pulley on the headstock. The wheels are connected with a 1-inch leather belt.
The treadle consists of a frame built up of boards and swung in the centers at both ends on 3/8-in. steel rods, for bearing pins, the bearings being made of wood standards with 3/8-in. holes bored in them to receive the pins. The pitman is made of wood, its length being determined by measurement of the distance between the crank pin and the treadle-arm end when both are at their lowest point.
The treadle is made of a frame constructed from boards and is hinged in the middle at both ends on 3/8-inch steel rods, which serve as bearing pins. The bearings are made from wooden supports with 3/8-inch holes drilled in them to hold the pins. The pitman is made of wood, and its length is based on measuring the distance between the crank pin and the treadle arm's end when both are at their lowest position.
The slide for the rest consists of a 1-in. square steel bar, about 10 in. long, having a hole drilled in one end and threads cut with a 1/2-in. tap. The rest used in this hole is made of a 1/2-in. rod, threaded on one end and bent at right angles on the other. The clamping device for the slide is made of two bars, 1 in. by 3/16 in., fastened to the square bar and extending down between the ways with sufficient ends beneath to attach a wooden clamp block and cam with a handle. This construction is clearly shown in the drawing. If only a lathe is required, the machine would be complete as now described, but the other attachments illustrated will greatly add to its usefulness and the owner will be well repaid by making them.
The slide for the rest consists of a 1-inch square steel bar, about 10 inches long, with a hole drilled in one end and threads cut with a 1/2-inch tap. The rest used in this hole is made from a 1/2-inch rod, threaded on one end and bent at right angles on the other. The clamping device for the slide is made of two bars, 1 inch by 3/16 inch, attached to the square bar and extending down between the ways with enough length beneath to connect a wooden clamp block and cam with a handle. This design is clearly shown in the drawing. If only a lathe is needed, the machine would be complete as described, but the additional attachments illustrated will greatly enhance its usefulness, and the owner will benefit significantly from making them.
Attachments
One table is used for the circular saw, planer head, sander, and jig saw, and it is attached on top of the headstock and tailstock standards with bolts, run through the back edge of the board and the ends of two brackets which are screwed to the back edge of the inner standards. Thumb nuts are used on the bolts to aid in making the change quickly. More than one hole is provided in the back edge of the board, so that the tailstock bracket can occupy the right position for the sander or planer head, as the case may be. The holes in the bracket ends should be somewhat larger than the bolt, to allow tilting of the table. An adjusting screw is substituted for the rest, so that the table can be raised or lowered to suit the work in hand.
One table is used for the circular saw, planer head, sander, and jig saw, and it's attached to the top of the headstock and tailstock standards with bolts that go through the back edge of the board and the ends of two brackets, which are screwed to the back edge of the inner standards. Thumb nuts are used on the bolts to make quick changes easier. There are multiple holes in the back edge of the board, so the tailstock bracket can be positioned correctly for the sander or planer head, depending on the situation. The holes in the bracket ends should be slightly larger than the bolt to allow the table to tilt. An adjusting screw replaces the rest so that the table can be raised or lowered to fit the task at hand.
The circular saw is 5 in. in diameter and should have fine teeth. It is placed on the spindle threads against the nut, and held there with another nut and washer on the end of the spindle. The table is attached over the saw, and the spindle is driven at a high speed.
The circular saw is 5 inches in diameter and should have fine teeth. It is positioned on the spindle threads against the nut and secured with another nut and washer at the end of the spindle. The table is attached above the saw, and the spindle is driven at high speed.
The planer head is made of a wood block, 9 in. long and 2-3/4 in. square. A 3/8-in. hole is bored through one way near each end, as shown in the drawing, and two steel knives, with 1/2-in. holes coinciding with the 3/8-in. holes in the wood, are made and attached with their edges opposite or projecting diagonally from the corners. The holes in the knives being larger than the bolts, makes the knives adjustable for setting the cutting edges. These knives may be made from an old saw blade, ground to size and one edge beveled and sharpened. A brass plate, with holes to fit the spur center, is fastened in the center of the block, on one end, and the other is centered for the cup of the tailstock screw. The adjusting screw for the table is used to regulate the cut.
The planer head is made from a wood block that is 9 inches long and 2-3/4 inches square. A 3/8-inch hole is drilled through it near each end, as shown in the drawing, and two steel knives, featuring 1/2-inch holes that align with the 3/8-inch holes in the wood, are created and attached with their edges facing opposite directions or extending diagonally from the corners. The holes in the knives are larger than the bolts, allowing for adjustable positioning of the cutting edges. These knives can be made from an old saw blade, ground to size with one edge beveled and sharpened. A brass plate with holes to fit the spur center is mounted in the center of one end of the block, while the other end is shaped to accommodate the cup of the tailstock screw. The adjusting screw for the table is used to control the cut.
The sander is constructed of a wood piece, 9 in. long and 3-3/8 in. in diameter. A groove is cut in one side of the rounding surface to admit the ends of the abrasive which may be fastened there with tacks.
The sander is made from a piece of wood, 9 inches long and 3-3/8 inches in diameter. A groove is cut into one side of the rounded surface to allow the ends of the abrasive to be secured there with tacks.
[451] An emery wheel can be used on the spindle in the same manner as the circular saw. Procure a wheel, 5 in. in diameter with a 1/2-in. face and having a lead center. The hole should be bored out and tapped to fit the threads on the lathe spindle, and to have the grinding surface run true, this work should be done in a lathe by a machinist.
[451] An emery wheel can be mounted on the spindle just like a circular saw. Get a wheel that's 5 inches in diameter with a 1/2-inch face and a lead center. The hole should be drilled out and threaded to match the lathe spindle, and to ensure the grinding surface is accurate, this should be done by a machinist using a lathe.
The drawings show the construction of the jig-saw attachment. The standard on which the arms are pivoted is made of a 1/2-in. bolt, threaded for its entire length and with a groove cut in the head and nut to receive the arm pivots. A locknut is used beneath the notched nut to hold the adjustment. Two nuts and washers are used near the center of the bolt for clamping the attachment to the table. The pivots are made of sheet metal, bent and drilled as shown. The small projection at each end of the edge is raised slightly by hammering the corner of the metal. These projections prevent the arms from sliding sideways. The clamps for holding the ends of the saw blades are easily made of thin sheet steel, or brass, with a 3/16-in. bolt and washer at the end for the clamp. The tension of the blade is secured by a piece of wire, an eyebolt and a thumb nut, connecting the rear ends of the arms as shown. The frame is driven by the spur center. The pins are removed from the center and a 1/4-in. pin is inserted in one of the holes so that it will project 5/8 in. The pin runs in a slot cut in a brass plate that is attached to the lower arm.
The drawings illustrate how to build the jigsaw attachment. The standard that the arms pivot on uses a 1/2-inch bolt, which is fully threaded and has a groove cut in the head and nut to accommodate the arm pivots. A locknut is placed beneath the notched nut to maintain the adjustment. Two nuts and washers are positioned near the center of the bolt to secure the attachment to the table. The pivots are crafted from sheet metal, bent, and drilled as shown. Each end of the edge has a small projection that is slightly raised by hammering the corner of the metal. These projections stop the arms from slipping sideways. The clamps for securing the ends of the saw blades can easily be made from thin sheet steel or brass, using a 3/16-inch bolt and washer at the end for the clamp. The tension of the blade is maintained by a piece of wire, an eyebolt, and a thumb nut that connect the rear ends of the arms as shown. The frame is powered by the spur center. The pins are taken out from the center, and a 1/4-inch pin is inserted into one of the holes to extend 5/8 inch. The pin operates in a slot cut into a brass plate that’s attached to the lower arm.
Very serviceable tools can be made of discarded files by grinding them to shape on the emery wheel. Always use a fine whetstone to finish the edge on a woodworking tool.
You can create really useful tools from old files by shaping them on the emery wheel. Always use a fine whetstone to sharpen the edge on a woodworking tool.
Hanging a Clothesline Taut
The line is equipped with rings, one at each end, used for convenience in quickly hanging the line, which is then drawn taut with a lever. A screwhook is fastened in one end post and at the other end a screwhook is attached to a lever which is pivoted to the post. The lever should be about 3 ft. long, 1 in. thick, 3 in. wide at one end, and 1-1/2 in. wide at the other, or handle, end. A large wood screw is used to attach it to the post. A pin is placed in the post to hold the lever when the line is drawn taut.—Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, Ohio.
The line has rings on both ends for easy hanging, which allows it to be pulled tight with a lever. A screw hook is attached to one end post, while another screw hook is connected to a lever that pivots on the post. The lever should be about 3 feet long, 1 inch thick, 3 inches wide on one end, and 1.5 inches wide on the other, where the handle is. A large wood screw secures it to the post. A pin is placed in the post to keep the lever in place when the line is pulled tight. —Contributed by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, Ohio.

A Lever Attached on One End Post Makes It Easy to Draw the Line Taut
A lever fixed at one end makes it easy to pull the line tight.
A Double Latch for a Door

This latch is suitable for outbuildings, small shops and sheds, as it can be opened from both sides of the door and is easily applied. It consists of a rod of suitable size which is bent in the shape shown in the sketch after the rod is inserted through a hole bored near the edge of the door. The spring of the metal will hold the catch in place.
This latch is perfect for outbuildings, small shops, and sheds because it can be opened from both sides of the door and is easy to install. It includes a rod of the right size that is bent into the shape shown in the sketch after being inserted through a hole drilled near the edge of the door. The metal spring will keep the catch secure.
Maulstick Used as a Ruler
Procure a cork having the same diameter as the knob on the maulstick and make a hole in the center so that it will slide on the stick. This is very handy for using the stick as a ruler, as it forms a sliding rest.
Get a cork that has the same diameter as the knob on the maulstick and make a hole in the center so it can slide onto the stick. This is really useful for using the stick as a ruler since it acts as a sliding rest.

The Sliding Cork and Knob Raises the Stick so that It may be Used as a Ruler
The Sliding Cork and Knob Lift the Stick so it can be Used as a Ruler
[452]
Hinge with a Wide Swing
In constructing a box I needed a hinge that would carry the cover farther away from the top than the ordinary double-leaf hinge. I found that two pieces of 1/4 by 5/8-in. wrought iron, attached in the manner shown, answered the purpose. By using round-head screws it was unnecessary to countersink the metal.—Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
In building a box, I needed a hinge that would hold the cover further away from the top than a standard double-leaf hinge. I discovered that two pieces of 1/4 by 5/8-inch wrought iron, attached as shown, did the trick. Using round-head screws eliminated the need to countersink the metal. —Contributed by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.

The Two Bars Provide a Way to Carry the Cover Away from the Box
The two bars offer a method to lift the cover off the box.
A Detachable Clamp for Stairway Handrails
The sketch shows a handrail clamp, or holding device, which is detachable, for use on stone stairways in the winter when there is ice or snow on the steps. The clamps are made of 3/16-in strap iron, of any desired width, conforming to the shape of the balustrade and provided with a hook at either end. To the inside end of the band an upright is riveted and to this upright is riveted an ordinary handrail holder to take the handrail. A heavy thumb screw allows the clamp to be fastened firmly to the balustrade at the outside. This is a simple and inexpensive device which affords protection against falls.—Contributed by John De La Mater, Chicago, Ill.
The sketch shows a detachable handrail clamp or holder designed for use on stone stairways during winter when there’s ice or snow on the steps. The clamps are made of 3/16-inch strap iron, with any desired width, shaped to fit the balustrade and equipped with a hook on each end. An upright is riveted to the inside end of the band, and an ordinary handrail holder is riveted to this upright to support the handrail. A heavy thumbscrew secures the clamp firmly to the outside of the balustrade. This simple and affordable device provides protection against falls.—Contributed by John De La Mater, Chicago, Ill.

A Detachable Handrail for Use on Stone or Concrete Stairways during Winter
A Removable Handrail for Use on Stone or Concrete Stairs in Winter
A Homemade Leather Punch
An empty bottle-neck rifle cartridge can be easily made into a leather punch by grinding the edge of the opening sharp and cutting a hole near the top in one side. The hole is for removing the leather slugs and should be just a little larger in diameter than the inside diameter of the shell. The cartridges can be had in various sizes and almost any size of punch can be made.—Contributed by Merhyle F. Spotts, Shelby, Ohio.
An empty bottle-neck rifle cartridge can easily be turned into a leather punch by sharpening the edge of the opening and cutting a hole near the top on one side. This hole is for removing the leather slugs and should be slightly larger in diameter than the inside diameter of the shell. Cartridges come in various sizes, and you can make a punch in almost any size. —Contributed by Merhyle F. Spotts, Shelby, Ohio.
A Wood-Scraper Handle
In using a plain scraper on the surface of wood the task grew exceedingly tiresome and I lightened the tedious work to some extent by making a handle for the scraper. The handle consisted of a piece of wood, 1 in. thick, 3 in. wide, and 6 in. long. A cut was made in the edge of the wood the width of the scraper blade and about 3 in. deep, and a bolt run through a hole bored centrally in the side, about 2-1/2 in. from the lower edge. The blade was clamped in place with the bolt.—Contributed by J. D. Keiley, Yonkers, New York.
Using a simple scraper on the surface of the wood became really tiring, so I made it a bit easier by creating a handle for the scraper. The handle was made from a piece of wood that was 1 inch thick, 3 inches wide, and 6 inches long. I cut a groove in the edge of the wood that matched the width of the scraper blade and was about 3 inches deep. Then, I put a bolt through a hole I drilled in the side, which was about 2.5 inches from the bottom edge. The blade was held in place with the bolt.—Contributed by J. D. Keiley, Yonkers, New York.

A Handle Attached to a Plain Scraper Blade Makes the Work Much Easier
A Handle Connected to a Simple Scraper Blade Makes the Job Much Easier
Polishing Gunstocks
The fine polish applied to gunstocks and wood parts of tools will not wear well, and if one cares for a fine finish, a much better and more durable polish can be applied as follows: Soak the wood in linseed oil for a week and then rub the surface with an oil-soaked cloth for a short time every day, for a couple of weeks.
The nice finish on gunstocks and wooden tool parts doesn't hold up well, and if you want a quality finish, you can achieve a much better and longer-lasting polish by doing this: Soak the wood in linseed oil for a week, then rub the surface with an oil-soaked cloth for a little bit every day for a couple of weeks.
A Prick-Punch Center Gauge
A simple instrument for finding and marking the center of shafting, etc., can be easily made of three pieces of sheet brass and a small prick punch.
A simple tool for locating and marking the center of shafts, etc., can be easily made from three pieces of sheet brass and a small prick punch.

The Point of the Punch is Quickly Adjusted to the Center of the Work
The aim of the punch is quickly adjusted to the center of the work.
Take two pieces of stiff sheet brass, 2-1/2 by 3 in. in size, and cut two corners, 1/2 in. square, out at one end of each piece as shown in the sketch. Bend the metal on the dotted line A, until it stands at an angle of 45 deg. The part B should be bent up in the same direction, but at right angles to the plate, while the part C should be bent out only slightly. A hole should be drilled near each corner for rivets. Be sure that the two plates are bent in opposite directions, then rivet them firmly together.
Take two pieces of stiff brass sheets, sized 2.5 by 3 inches, and cut out two corners, 0.5 inch square, at one end of each piece as shown in the sketch. Bend the metal along the dotted line A until it stands at a 45-degree angle. The part B should be bent up in the same direction, but at a right angle to the plate, while the part C should be bent out only slightly. Drill a hole near each corner for rivets. Make sure the two plates are bent in opposite directions, then rivet them together securely.
Roll one end of a strip of sheet brass, 7/16 in. wide and 2-3/4 in. long, into a tube large enough to firmly hold a small steel prick punch. Place the opposite end of the brass strip in between the two ends C. These ends should spring together slightly in order to hold the punch D at any height it may be placed. If accurately made, the point of the punch will be exactly in the center of the V-shaped trough.
Roll one end of a strip of sheet brass, 7/16 inch wide and 2-3/4 inches long, into a tube large enough to securely hold a small steel prick punch. Place the other end of the brass strip between the two ends C. These ends should spring together slightly to hold the punch D at any height you place it. If made correctly, the point of the punch will be exactly in the center of the V-shaped trough.
In use, to find and mark the center of a round bar, it is placed in the trough with the end just touching the point of the punch. The brass holding the punch is raised between the parts C until the point of the punch is brought as near to the center of the shaft as can be judged. Press the point of the punch against the end of the shaft and turn the latter in the trough. If the punch marks a circle the center has not been found. This is corrected by slowly moving the punch up or down until the point ceases to make a circle, then the punch is tapped with a hammer to mark the exact center.
To find and mark the center of a round bar, place it in the trough with one end just touching the point of the punch. Lift the brass holding the punch between the parts C until the punch point is as close to the center of the shaft as possible. Press the punch point against the end of the shaft and rotate the shaft in the trough. If the punch makes a circle, the center hasn't been located yet. Adjust the punch slowly up or down until it stops making a circle, then tap the punch with a hammer to mark the exact center.
A Whirligig Clapper
A good noise maker for Halloween or any other occasion, can be made by carefully following the directions here given. The box is the first thing to make. It is constructed of wood pieces, 1/2 in. thick, and consists of two ends and two sides. The ends are each 1-1/2 in. square and the sides 1-1/2 in. wide and 6 in. long. These parts are nailed together with the ends lapping the sides.
A great noisemaker for Halloween or any other occasion can be created by closely following the instructions provided here. The first step is to build the box. It’s made from wooden pieces that are 1/2 inch thick and consists of two ends and two sides. Each end measures 1-1/2 inches square, while the sides are 1-1/2 inches wide and 6 inches long. These parts are nailed together with the ends overlapping the sides.
The ratchet wheel A is a disk of hard wood, 1-1/2 in. in diameter. Its rim is divided into eight equal parts, and notched with a knife as shown. It is placed in the forward end of the box on a wood axle of 3/8-in. diameter to which it is glued. One end of this axle is squared and projects 1 in. beyond the side of the box. The squared end passes through a square hole in the end of the crank C, which is a piece of wood 3/4 in. thick, 1 in. wide and 4 in. long, and is fastened with brads and glue. At the other end of the crank, a similar hole connects with a handle whittled to the shape shown at B.
The ratchet wheel A is a disk made of hard wood, 1.5 inches in diameter. Its rim is divided into eight equal sections and notched with a knife as illustrated. It is positioned at the front end of the box on a wooden axle that is 3/8 inch in diameter, to which it is glued. One end of this axle is squared and extends 1 inch beyond the side of the box. The squared end fits through a square hole at the end of the crank C, which is a piece of wood that is 3/4 inch thick, 1 inch wide, and 4 inches long. It is secured with brads and glue. At the other end of the crank, a similar hole connects to a handle shaped as shown at B.

Detail of the Parts and How They are Assembled to Make the Clapper
Detail of the Parts and How They are Assembled to Make the Clapper
A flat piece of steel spring, 1/2 in. wide and long enough to reach from the rear end of the box to the teeth of the ratchet wheel, is shaped as shown at D. The spring may be made from a stiff piece of corset steel or bicycle trousers guard. The spring is fastened with a nail through the end and box sides and a second nail passes through the sides over the spring, about 2 in. forward from the first nail. This is to give the spring tension on the teeth.
A flat piece of steel spring, 1/2 inch wide and long enough to extend from the back of the box to the teeth of the ratchet wheel, is shaped as shown at D. The spring can be made from a stiff piece of corset steel or a bicycle mudguard. The spring is secured with a nail through the end and the sides of the box, and a second nail goes through the sides over the spring, about 2 inches ahead of the first nail. This is to provide tension on the teeth of the spring.
To operate the clapper, it is allowed [454] to hang straight down, while the right hand grasps the handle and whirls the box in a circle around to the left.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser.
To use the clapper, you should let it hang straight down, while your right hand holds the handle and rotates the box in a circle to the left.—Contributed by C. C. Fraser.
Box Partitions
As I needed a box with a number of narrow partitions and it was impossible to cut grooves for the sections without removing the bottom, I spaced off the places for the partitions with pieces of thin wood and fastened these in place with small nails clinched on the outside of the box. This method was much more rapid and satisfactory than sawing the grooves and cutting them out with a wood chisel.—Contributed by James M. Kane.
As I needed a box with several narrow compartments and couldn't cut grooves for the sections without taking off the bottom, I marked off the spots for the partitions with pieces of thin wood and secured them in place with small nails bent on the outside of the box. This method was much quicker and more effective than sawing the grooves and cutting them out with a wood chisel.—Contributed by James M. Kane.

Grooves for the Partitions Made with the Use of Small, Thin Strips of Wood
Grooves for the Partitions Created Using Small, Thin Wood Strips
Safety Catch for a Flour Bin
A flour bin, counterbalanced to swing closed at all times, is liable to catch the arm of the one taking out flour. To make it safe, I applied the device shown in the sketch. The bin, at rest, is shown in Fig. 1. The safety catch consists of a stick of wood, A, notched at one end, and is pivoted at B on a small bolt. Two stops, C and D, are located on the side of the box to prevent the catch from being thrown out of position when the bin is quickly pulled out. These stops are nails driven into the box side. When the bin is pulled out the catch takes the position shown in Fig. 2. The catch stick should be a little shorter than the distance the bin is pulled out, so that it may be raised to release the bin for its return.—Contributed by O. F. Fouche, Erie, Pa.
A flour bin that swings shut automatically can easily hit the arm of someone trying to get flour. To make it safer, I implemented the device shown in the sketch. The bin at rest is depicted in Fig. 1. The safety catch is made from a piece of wood, A, notched at one end, and is pivoted at B on a small bolt. Two stops, C and D, are positioned on the side of the box to keep the catch from being knocked out of place when the bin is pulled out quickly. These stops are nails driven into the side of the box. When the bin is pulled out, the catch moves to the position shown in Fig. 2. The catch stick should be slightly shorter than the distance the bin is pulled out so that it can be lifted to release the bin for it to return. —Contributed by O. F. Fouche, Erie, Pa.

Automatically Operated Catch to Hold a Flour Bin Out While Taking Flour from It (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
Automatically Operated Catch to Keep a Flour Bin Open While Scooping Flour From It (Fig. 1, Fig. 2)
A Homemade Whistle
Procure two empty No. 30 gauge brass cartridge shells. Cut one shell 3/8 in. shorter than the other, then flatten and bend them as shown in the sketch. The mouthpiece should be at an angle of 60 deg. File a slot, 3/16 in. in width, about 1/2 in. from the end. File off the flange on the shorter shell so that it will fit snugly against the side of the other and solder them together. A ring may be soldered on the end of the long shell to fasten it on a chain or string. To give the whistle a shrill sound place a large shot in each shell before flattening them.—Contributed by Peter Veneman, Paterson, New Jersey.
Procure two empty No. 30 gauge brass cartridge shells. Cut one shell 3/8 in. shorter than the other, then flatten and bend them as shown in the sketch. The mouthpiece should be at a 60 degree angle. File a slot 3/16 in. wide, about 1/2 in. from the end. File off the flange on the shorter shell so that it fits snugly against the side of the other and solder them together. A ring can be soldered on the end of the longer shell to attach it to a chain or string. To give the whistle a sharp sound, place a large shot in each shell before flattening them.—Contributed by Peter Veneman, Paterson, New Jersey.

The Tapering End of a Cartridge Shell is Flattened and Bent to Make a Whistle
The tapered end of a cartridge shell is flattened and bent to create a whistle.
How to Emboss Stationery
A person's monogram or any special lettering embossed on stationery is quite expensive. The engraving of the dies by experts commanding high salaries, and the subsequent presswork necessary to give relief to the design upon the paper cause an expense which the economical person hesitates to accept, much as the refinement and individuality of the embossed work [455] may be admired. But there is a way by which almost anyone may emboss stationery at home with one's own design at no expense whatever. The work is easy and the results pleasing, and monograms or lettering thus done will compare very favorably with the printer's work, especially if there is a good design to follow and the work is done with care. A little artistic ability will, of course, aid one in preparing a design, but is not essential, for the letters required may be cut from printed matter and used as a guide for tracing. There is no limit to the varieties of work possible by this process. Single letters, monograms, words or designs are suitable for reproduction in raised characters.
A person's monogram or any special lettering embossed on stationery is quite pricey. The engraving done by skilled professionals who charge high fees, along with the additional presswork needed to create the design on the paper, leads to costs that a budget-conscious person may hesitate to face, even though the sophistication and uniqueness of the embossed work [455] can be appreciated. However, there's a way for almost anyone to emboss stationery at home using their own design for no cost at all. The process is simple and the results are satisfying, and monograms or lettering done this way can match the quality of professional printing, especially if a good design is followed and the work is done carefully. Some artistic skill can help in creating a design, but it’s not necessary, as the required letters can be cut from printed materials and used as a guide for tracing. There’s no limit to the variety of work you can create using this method. Single letters, monograms, words, or designs can all be reproduced in raised characters.
All the materials required for embossing the stationery are the envelope or paper on which the design is to appear, a stylus and a blotter. The paper should be of fair quality. If it is too thin the stylus point is likely to push through it. The linen-finished papers of medium weight and tough texture give excellent results, although almost any grade of good writing paper can be used successfully. As embossing by this process can be done well only through one thickness of paper, in working on envelopes it is best to put the design on the central portion of the flap, or turn it up and make the design in the left-hand corner of the envelope.
All the materials needed for embossing the stationery are the envelope or paper where the design will go, a stylus, and a blotter. The paper should be of decent quality. If it's too thin, the stylus point might poke through it. Linen-finished papers that are medium weight and have a tough texture work really well, although almost any good writing paper can be used successfully. Since embossing can only be done effectively through one layer of paper, when working with envelopes, it’s best to place the design in the center of the flap or turn it up and create the design in the left-hand corner of the envelope.
The stylus may be any kind of a pencil-like instrument, easy to grip between the fingers, with a hard, smooth point, rounded slightly so that it will not cut the paper. The ordinary bone stiletto, used in embroidering, makes an ideal tool for this purpose. If this is not to be had, a substitute is easily whittled from a piece of hard wood. Even a wire nail, with its point smoothed with a file, may be used, the upper portion being wound with string to afford a better grip.
The stylus can be any kind of pencil-like tool that’s easy to hold between your fingers, with a hard, smooth tip that’s slightly rounded so it won’t tear the paper. A regular bone stiletto used for embroidery is perfect for this. If you don’t have that, you can easily carve a substitute from a piece of hard wood. Even a wire nail can work; just smooth the point with a file and wrap the upper part with string for a better grip.
The blotter should be white, perfectly clean, and of good weight. A thin, hard blotter will not produce a good raised letter as a softer one will. When the surface of a blotter has become covered with creases from repeated use, it should be discarded and a new one substituted.
The blotter should be white, completely clean, and of good quality. A thin, hard blotter won't create a good raised letter like a softer one will. If the surface of a blotter has become covered with creases from repeated use, it should be thrown away and replaced with a new one.

Manner of Holding the Stylus When Tracing the Design on the Back Side of the Paper
Manner of Holding the Stylus When Tracing the Design on the Back Side of the Paper
As it is best to adopt a distinctive form of monogram or design for stationery and to use it without deviation, it should be selected or worked up with care until something is outlined that will suit. With the design settled upon and drawn on a piece of paper, go over it with a soft pencil to deposit sufficient graphite for an impression. Lay the pattern, face down, upon the back of the paper to be embossed, and directly opposite the spot on the other side where the raised characters are to appear. With the handle of a knife or scissors rub over the back of the pattern till the graphite has left the tracing of the design reversed on the writing paper.
It’s best to create a unique monogram or design for your stationery and to use it consistently. Choose or create it carefully until you find something that works. Once you have the design finalized and drawn on a piece of paper, go over it with a soft pencil to leave enough graphite for an impression. Place the pattern face down on the back of the paper you want to emboss, directly opposite where the raised characters will appear on the other side. Using the handle of a knife or scissors, rub over the back of the pattern until the graphite has traced the design onto the writing paper in reverse.
The pattern is now laid aside until required for transferring the design to another sheet of writing paper. Lay the blotter on some smooth, hard surface, such as a desk leaf or table top and lay the writing paper on the blotter, reversed design uppermost. Hold the stylus firmly at an angle as shown in the illustration and keep the blotter and paper from moving with the other hand. Carefully trace the design, using considerable pressure to insure a good relief upon the opposite side of the paper. A soft eraser should be used to remove the guide marks on the back of the sheet when the relief is finished.
The pattern is now set aside until you need it to transfer the design to another sheet of writing paper. Place the blotter on a smooth, hard surface, like a desk or table, and set the writing paper on the blotter with the design facing up. Hold the stylus firmly at an angle as shown in the illustration, and use your other hand to keep the blotter and paper from moving. Carefully trace the design, applying enough pressure to create a clear impression on the other side of the paper. Use a soft eraser to remove any guide marks on the back of the sheet once you've finished the impression.
After a little practice with a certain design, if it is not too intricate, the operator will find that it can be reproduced quite faithfully freehand, without the use of the pattern, but, of course, the use of the pattern will be the only guarantee of exact duplicates.
After some practice with a specific design, if it's not too complicated, the operator will notice that they can replicate it fairly accurately freehand, without using the pattern. However, using the pattern is the only way to ensure exact duplicates.
A Homemade Hydrometer

The hydrometer is an instrument used in determining the specific gravity of a liquid, such as acids, etc. The specific gravity of any material is the ratio of the weights of equal volumes of the material and water. Thus if a pint of acid weighs 1.2 times a pint of water, its specific gravity is said to be 1.2.
The hydrometer is a tool used to measure the specific gravity of a liquid, like acids, and so on. The specific gravity of any substance is the ratio of the weights of equal volumes of that substance and water. So, if a pint of acid weighs 1.2 times as much as a pint of water, its specific gravity is considered to be 1.2.
A very simple and inexpensive hydrometer, similar to the one shown in the sketch, may be easily constructed, and will give quite satisfactory results, if the scale on the instrument is carefully marked when it is calibrated.
A straightforward and affordable hydrometer, like the one illustrated in the sketch, can be easily built, and it will provide fairly reliable results if the scale on the instrument is accurately marked during calibration.
Purchase from the local druggist or doctor two test tubes, one large enough to contain the other, as shown. The smaller tube is to form the hydrometer proper, while the larger one is to serve as a containing vessel in which the liquid to be tested is placed. The large tube should be mounted in a vertical position, by placing it in a hole bored in a small block of wood, or a suitable metal or wooden frame may be made that will accommodate one or more tubes.
Buy two test tubes from a local pharmacy or doctor, one large enough to hold the other. The smaller tube will be the actual hydrometer, while the larger one will be the container for the liquid being tested. The large tube should be set up vertically by putting it in a hole drilled into a small block of wood, or you can create a suitable metal or wooden frame that can hold one or more tubes.
The small tube is loaded at the lower end with a quantity of shot, or other heavy metal, in such a way that it will stand in a vertical position when it is placed in a vessel of water. The amount of the loading will depend upon whether the hydrometer is to be used in determining the specific gravity of liquids heavier or lighter than water. If the liquids are heavier than water, the loading should be such that the tube is almost entirely immersed when placed in water; if lighter, only sufficient loading should be used to make the tube stand upright in water. After the amount of loading has been determined it should be fastened in place by means of a small quantity of calcined plaster. A small cork should now be placed in the open end of the tube, and the tube sealed by coating the end with shellac, or melting a small quantity of resin or sealing wax over the top of the cork with a hot soldering iron.
The small tube is filled at the bottom with some shot or other heavy metal so that it can stand vertically when placed in a container of water. The amount of weight needed will depend on whether the hydrometer is used to measure the specific gravity of liquids that are heavier or lighter than water. If the liquids are heavier than water, the weight should be enough to make the tube almost completely submerged in the water; if the liquids are lighter, only enough weight should be used to keep the tube upright in the water. Once the right amount of weight is determined, it should be secured in place with a little calcined plaster. Next, a small cork should be inserted into the open end of the tube, and the top of the tube should be sealed by covering it with shellac, or by melting a small piece of resin or sealing wax over the cork using a hot soldering iron.
Now place in the large tube a quantity of as pure water as can be obtained—fresh rain water will answer very well and distilled water still better. Immerse the small tube in the water in the large tube and allow it to come to rest. Make a small mark on the small tube with a file, level with the surface of the water in the large tube. If the hydrometer is placed in a liquid lighter than water and allowed to float, the mark made on the tube will always be below the surface of the liquid in which the instrument is placed, and the mark will be above the surface of the liquid when the liquid is heavier than water.
Now place a quantity of as pure water as possible in the large tube—fresh rainwater works well, and distilled water is even better. Immerse the small tube in the water in the large tube and let it settle. Make a small mark on the small tube with a file, even with the surface of the water in the large tube. If the hydrometer is placed in a liquid that is lighter than water and allowed to float, the mark on the tube will always be below the surface of the liquid it’s in, and the mark will be above the surface when the liquid is heavier than water.
The hydrometer may be calibrated by making use of a hydrometer borrowed from the druggist or doctor. The two hydrometers should be immersed in the same liquid and the tube of the newly made instrument marked to correspond with the markings on the borrowed instrument. If the liquid is heavier than water to start with, its specific gravity can be reduced by adding water, and as the water is added the hydrometers will both rise.
The hydrometer can be calibrated by using one borrowed from a pharmacist or a doctor. Both hydrometers should be placed in the same liquid, and the tube of the new instrument should be marked to match the markings on the borrowed one. If the liquid is denser than water at the beginning, you can decrease its specific gravity by adding water, and as you add water, both hydrometers will rise.
A Stirring Stick
The stirring, or mixing, stick shown in the sketch deserves its name, as it will stir evenly all the way around. It consists of two flat sticks, one two-thirds the width of the other, which are nailed together as shown. The narrow one is only long enough to enter the depth of the liquid.—Contributed by Frank J. Rempe, Oakland, California.
The stirring stick shown in the sketch lives up to its name, as it stirs evenly all around. It consists of two flat sticks, one two-thirds the width of the other, which are nailed together as shown. The narrower stick is only long enough to reach the bottom of the liquid. —Contributed by Frank J. Rempe, Oakland, California.

A Flat Surface Strikes the Liquid No Matter Which Way the Stick is Moved
A flat surface hits the liquid no matter how the stick is moved.
A Telescoping Support for a Hinged Shelf

When the Shelf is Lowered the Support Telescopes and is Out of the Way
When the shelf is lowered, the support telescopes are out of the way.
The supporting arm of the hinged shelf is constructed of a piece of gas pipe and a length of iron rod which slides snugly into the pipe. A spring catch is set in the pipe at the proper height to engage the end of the iron rod when the shelf is up. This spring must be of good size, as it holds the entire weight of the shelf. A large clock spring is suitable. One end of the spring is bent outward and upward to form a releasing handle. The other end is drilled for the two machine screws which hold it to the pipe. The spring works in a rectangular slot, cut lengthwise of the pipe. The pipe must extend 8 or 10 in. beyond the spring. The ends of the rod and of the pipe are pivoted with screws or rivets on angle pieces screwed to the shelf and wall.—Contributed by Donald A. Price, Wilmington, Del.
The supporting arm of the hinged shelf is made from a piece of gas pipe and a length of iron rod that fits snugly into the pipe. A spring catch is placed in the pipe at the right height to engage the end of the iron rod when the shelf is raised. This spring needs to be robust since it supports the entire weight of the shelf. A large clock spring works well. One end of the spring is bent outward and upward to create a releasing handle. The other end is drilled for the two machine screws that secure it to the pipe. The spring operates in a rectangular slot cut lengthwise along the pipe. The pipe should extend 8 or 10 inches beyond the spring. The ends of the rod and the pipe are attached with screws or rivets to angle pieces that are fixed to the shelf and wall.—Contributed by Donald A. Price, Wilmington, Del.
A Bug Powder
To secure a nonpoisonous roach and bug powder mix dry 3 lb. plaster of Paris with 2 lb. of sugar, then add 1 oz. of pulverized aniseed. The addition of a little corn meal will help to draw the pests.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
To make a non-toxic roach and bug powder, mix 3 lb. of plaster of Paris with 2 lb. of sugar, then add 1 oz. of ground aniseed. Adding a bit of cornmeal will help attract the pests.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
How the Capacity of an Incubator may be Doubled
About 10 days after setting the incubator one may easily start another hatch by placing more eggs on top of the incubator in the following manner: Make a pad about 1 in. thick of any cotton material and place it on top of the incubator. Cut four pieces of boards, 1 by 4 in., and fit them around the top of the incubator. Nail them together as in making the sides and ends of a box. Pad the inside of this frame about 1 in. thick and tack it on top of the incubator, being careful that none of the material comes too close to the lamp. Place the eggs inside of this tray and cover them with a pad about 3 in. thick. Turn the eggs the same as those on the inside. When the first hatch comes out, place the eggs kept on top in the incubator after having cleaned it with a solution of carbolic acid.—Contributed by Hattie J. Day.
About 10 days after starting the incubator, you can easily begin another hatch by placing more eggs on top of the incubator like this: Make a pad about 1 inch thick from any cotton material and put it on top of the incubator. Cut four pieces of wood, 1 by 4 inches, and fit them around the top of the incubator. Nail them together just like you would for the sides and ends of a box. Pad the inside of this frame about 1 inch thick and attach it on top of the incubator, making sure none of the material is too close to the lamp. Place the eggs inside this tray and cover them with a pad about 3 inches thick. Turn the eggs just like you do for those inside. When the first hatch comes out, put the eggs you kept on top into the incubator after cleaning it with a solution of carbolic acid.—Contributed by Hattie J. Day.
Homemade Rivet Set
Desiring to rivet some pieces of leather together and having no rivet set, I hastily made one from a strip of heavy sheet tin, 3/4 in. wide. This was rolled at one end, as shown in the sketch, and the other end notched to fit over the rivet end. The rolled end formed the part for setting the washer and the slotted end held the washer down while the first blows of the hammer were struck.
Wanting to fasten some leather pieces together and not having a rivet set, I quickly made one from a strip of heavy sheet tin, 3/4 inch wide. I rolled one end, as shown in the sketch, and notched the other end to fit over the rivet end. The rolled end created the part for setting the washer, and the slotted end kept the washer in place while I took the first few hits with the hammer.

A Strip of Tin Shaped to Take the Place of a Rivet Set
A strip of tin designed to replace a rivet.
[458]
Wash Bottle for Laboratory Use

A large-mouth bottle neck is provided with a stopper, having three brass or glass tubes as shown, the tube A being fitted with a thick piece of rubber tubing, B, stoppered at its lower end. A slit is cut at C, and allows the air blown in through the tube A to pass into the bottle, but will close automatically and hold the pressure within the bottle.
A wide-neck bottle is equipped with a stopper that has three brass or glass tubes as shown. Tube A has a thick piece of rubber tubing, B, sealed at its lower end. There's a slit cut at C, which lets the air blown through tube A enter the bottle, but it will automatically close and maintain the pressure inside the bottle.
If the relief tube D is closed with the thumb the water is forced out in a steady stream through the nozzle E. The water will continue to run for some time after the lips are removed from the air tube, but the removal of the thumb from the tube D will stop the flow of water instantly.—Contributed by W. Schilling, San Francisco, Cal.
If you close the relief tube D with your thumb, the water shoots out in a steady stream through the nozzle E. The water will keep running for a bit after you take your lips off the air tube, but as soon as you lift your thumb off tube D, the water will stop flowing immediately.—Contributed by W. Schilling, San Francisco, Cal.
Typewriting on Card Stock
Anyone having tried to typewrite on cards or heavy stock has doubtless experienced much trouble in getting the card to feed properly. If at all heavy, it will resist the curving so strongly that it will not be carried around the platen, and the edge of the card is very apt to catch on the pressure rolls and cause the platen to slip.
Anyone who has tried to type on cards or thick paper has probably faced a lot of trouble getting the card to feed correctly. If it’s too heavy, it will resist bending so much that it won’t go around the platen, and the edge of the card is likely to catch on the pressure rolls and make the platen slip.
The remedy is very simple and consists in running a sheet of paper through ahead of the card until an edge of about 1/2 in. remains, then inserting the edge of the card inside of the projecting edge of the paper and turning the platen. The paper overlapping the card prevents the edge of the latter from catching on the pressure rolls and keeps it in close contact with the platen so that it will pass through without trouble.—Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, St. Paul, Minn.
The solution is really straightforward. Just run a sheet of paper ahead of the card until about a 1/2 inch edge is left, then insert the edge of the card into the exposed edge of the paper and turn the platen. The paper overlapping the card stops the edge of the card from getting caught on the pressure rolls and ensures it stays close to the platen, allowing it to go through smoothly. —Contributed by Thos. L. Parker, St. Paul, Minn.
A Furniture Polish
A homemade furniture polish that will compare with any known polish, is composed of the following chemicals and oils. Mix 3 oz. of turpentine very gradually with 6 oz. of linseed oil, then add 3 oz. of grain alcohol, 3 oz. of 5-per-cent acetic acid, and 1/2 oz. of butter of antimony. Apply with a cloth and use a good friction. As the substance might prove harmful to children if taken internally, see that it is kept out of their reach.—Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
A homemade furniture polish that can compete with any commercial polish is made from the following ingredients. Gradually mix 3 oz. of turpentine with 6 oz. of linseed oil, then add 3 oz. of grain alcohol, 3 oz. of 5% acetic acid, and 1/2 oz. of butter of antimony. Apply it with a cloth and use a good amount of friction. Since this substance could be harmful to children if ingested, make sure to keep it out of their reach. —Contributed by Loren Ward, Des Moines, Iowa.
Pointed End on a Hoe

The rounding end on the ordinary hoe is useless in many instances for getting under growing plants, to cut out the weeds and to loosen up the earth. I find that shaping the hoe ends as shown in the sketch is very effective in getting up close to a plant and under spreading vines.—Contributed by R. F. Pohle, E Lynn, Mass.
The rounded end of a regular hoe is often useless for getting under growing plants to cut out weeds and loosen the soil. I’ve found that shaping the hoe ends as shown in the sketch is really effective for getting close to a plant and underneath spreading vines. —Contributed by R. F. Pohle, E Lynn, Mass.
Starting a Siphon

Roll up a soft rubber hose tightly so that it will be flattened to force out all the air and drop one end into the liquid, then let the coil unwind as it falls down on the outside. The uncoiling causes a slight vacuum in the hose and the liquid follows it up and starts the flow instantly.—Contributed by L. J. Monahan, Oshkosh, Wis.
Roll up a soft rubber hose tightly so it flattens to push out all the air, then drop one end into the liquid. Let the coil unwind as it falls down on the outside. The uncoiling creates a slight vacuum in the hose, and the liquid follows it up and starts flowing immediately.—Contributed by L. J. Monahan, Oshkosh, Wis.
Paint spots on window glass can be readily removed with a penny.
Paint spots on window glass can be easily removed with a penny.
A Homemade Blowtorch

The torch shown in the sketch requires no air pump. Instead of forcing a small stream of gasoline into a heated burner it converts the gasoline into gas in the chamber and blows a small jet of it through a very small hole into the combustion chamber.
The torch shown in the sketch doesn't need an air pump. Instead of pushing a small stream of gasoline into a heated burner, it turns the gasoline into gas in the chamber and blows a small jet of it through a tiny hole into the combustion chamber.
A medium-sized and strong oilcan is used for the reservoir, the spout being cut off close to the screw part and a steel or brass tube, about 5/16 in. in diameter, soldered to the stub end. The tube is bent as shown. A piece of wicking is drawn into the tube so that the upper end is within 1/4 in. of the tube end. The end of the tube is then fitted with a piece of brass rod with a very small hole in the center. The hole is made in the following manner: Before the piece is cut from the rod, it is held in a vise and the sharp end of a scriber is carefully driven into the center. A little oil placed on the scriber point will keep it from sticking in the metal. Measure the depth of the hole and cut the rod off just above the point. File the end of the piece cut off with a fine file until the point of the hole is reached. This hole must be so small that light can be barely seen through it.
A medium-sized, sturdy oil can is used for the reservoir, with the spout cut off close to the screw part and a steel or brass tube, about 5/16 in. in diameter, soldered to the stub end. The tube is bent as shown. A piece of wicking is pulled into the tube so that the upper end is within 1/4 in. of the tube end. The end of the tube is then fitted with a piece of brass rod that has a very small hole in the center. The hole is made as follows: before the piece is cut from the rod, it is held in a vise, and the sharp end of a scriber is carefully driven into the center. A little oil on the scriber point will prevent it from sticking in the metal. Measure the depth of the hole and cut the rod off just above the point. File the end of the piece that was cut off with a fine file until you reach the point of the hole. This hole must be so small that light can barely be seen through it.
The combustion chamber is made of a piece of brass tubing driven over the end of the smaller tube on the spout. About 1/2 in. from the back end of the larger tube four or more holes are drilled to admit air to the gas.
The combustion chamber is made from a piece of brass tubing fitted over the end of the smaller tube on the spout. About 1/2 inch from the back end of the larger tube, four or more holes are drilled to allow air to mix with the gas.
Fill the can about three-fourths full of gasoline and allow time for the wick to become saturated to the upper end. Hold a lighted match to the rear of the burner, and the heat will convert the gasoline into gas which will then burn with a nice white flame about 1 in. long. The success of the torch depends altogether on the fineness of the hole in the end of the tube and the tight soldering of all the joints.
Fill the can about three-fourths full of gasoline and give it time for the wick to soak up fuel up to the top. Hold a lit match to the back of the burner, and the heat will turn the gasoline into gas, which will then burn with a nice white flame about 1 inch long. The success of the torch relies entirely on how fine the hole is at the end of the tube and how well all the joints are sealed.
A Rule Gauge
The method of using the thumb as a gauge on a rule in scribing long boards is not always satisfactory, especially if the board has a rough edge. It is always best to have a regular gauge, but in the absence of one, an attachment for an ordinary carpenter's rule can be quickly made from a piece of tin, although one made of sheet brass is better, in appearance as well as for service. Cut out the metal, as shown by the dimensions, and roll the two sides up, stopping at the dotted lines. The ends A and B are turned out slightly so that they will slide easily along the edge of the board. The gauge will snap on a rule easily and will stay where it is placed.—Contributed by H. J. Blacklidge, San Rafael, Cal.
The method of using your thumb as a guide on a ruler when marking long boards isn't always reliable, especially if the board has a rough edge. It's best to use a proper gauge, but if you don’t have one, you can quickly make an attachment for a regular carpenter's ruler from a piece of tin, although one made from sheet brass looks better and works better too. Cut the metal to the specified dimensions and roll up the two sides, stopping at the dotted lines. Bend the ends A and B out a bit so they can slide easily along the edge of the board. The gauge will fit onto a ruler easily and will stay in place once you set it. —Contributed by H. J. Blacklidge, San Rafael, Cal.

Gauge Made of Sheet Metal Which will Easily Snap on a Carpenter's Rule
Gauge Made of Sheet Metal That Will Easily Snap onto a Carpenter's Rule
A Match Holder

The holder consists of a small box, the same size as a match box, with a sloping spring bottom and spring wires covering the lower part of the front side. One end of the match box is removed and the contents dumped into the holder. The matches fall to the lower sloping edge, where one match at a time can be easily removed.—Contributed by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.
The holder is a small box, about the size of a matchbox, that has a sloped spring bottom and spring wires covering the lower part of the front. One end of the matchbox is open, allowing the contents to be dumped into the holder. The matches slide to the lower sloping edge, where you can easily take out one match at a time.—Contributed by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.
Trick Bottles and Glasses
By George W. Catlin

Under Each Cover Used Is a Bottle and Glass, and by Pinching the Cover the Bottle is Made to Rise with It, Thus Leaving the Glass in View
Under each cover used is a bottle and glass, and by pinching the cover, the bottle rises with it, leaving the glass visible.
The performer presents to his audience two pasteboard covers, one bottle and one glass. Saying that he wishes to secure the safety of the bottle and glass, he places covers over them, cautioning the audience to note carefully which cover incloses the glass and which the bottle. Then he says that, to prevent any misunderstanding as to their positions, it is desired the audience designate which cover holds the glass. The response will be unanimous, "the left" or "the right" as the case may be, but on raising that cover the bottle is exposed. Covering the bottle again, and asking the audience if they were quite sure that their eyes did not deceive them, he states that the glass is really under the cover just lifted and returned to its place. To prove it, the cover is lifted again, to show the glass this time. The changing can be done as often as desired, or will amuse the crowd.
The performer shows his audience two cardboard covers, one bottle, and one glass. He explains that he wants to keep the bottle and glass safe, so he places the covers over them and asks the audience to pay close attention to which cover is over the glass and which is over the bottle. Then he asks the audience to indicate which cover is holding the glass to avoid any confusion. The response will be unanimous—either "the left" or "the right," depending on the situation—but when that cover is lifted, the bottle is revealed. He covers the bottle again and asks the audience if they're sure their eyes aren't deceiving them, claiming that the glass is actually under the cover that was just lifted and then returned to its place. To prove it, he lifts the cover again, showing the glass this time. The switch can be done as often as desired, keeping the audience entertained.
The secret of the trick consists in the use of two covers, two bottles and two glasses, and the manner of performing it is as follows: The bottles are bottomless and of such size as to admit the glass without sticking. A round hole is cut in one side of each bottle, about 2-1/2 in. above the bottom. This can be accomplished in a drill press by using a round copper tube, with fine emery applied to its end, as a drill. The hole should be so placed that a finger will strike the top of the glass when both bottle and glass are set on the same surface. If dark-colored bottles are used, a false bottom can be made and fitted in each bottle above the upper edge of the glass. This bottom can be cemented in place and made liquid-tight, so that some wine may be placed in the bottle and poured into the opposite glass to show that it holds liquid. In doing this part of the trick, make no more changes with the wine in one glass.
The secret of the trick lies in using two covers, two bottles, and two glasses. Here’s how to perform it: The bottles are bottomless and sized to allow the glass to fit without getting stuck. A round hole is cut into one side of each bottle, about 2.5 inches above the bottom. This can be done using a drill press with a round copper tube, applying fine emery to the end as a drill. The hole should be positioned so that a finger touches the top of the glass when both the bottle and glass are placed on the same surface. If you use dark-colored bottles, you can create a false bottom to fit inside each bottle above the upper edge of the glass. This bottom can be glued in place and made liquid-tight, so you can pour some wine into the bottle and then into the opposite glass to show it contains liquid. While doing this part of the trick, avoid making any more changes with the wine in one glass.
Under each cover is a bottle and tumbler, and by pinching the cover, the bottle is made to rise with it, thus leaving the tumbler in view. When it is necessary to show the bottle, just raise the cover, and the bottle covers the glass. When the bottle is lifted from the table, the thumb is inserted in the hole to press the tumbler against the opposite side, where it is held and raised with the bottle. Be sure to keep the side of the bottles with the hole back and away from the audience.
Under each cover is a bottle and a glass, and by pinching the cover, the bottle rises with it, leaving the glass in view. When you need to show the bottle, just lift the cover, and the bottle conceals the glass. When you lift the bottle off the table, put your thumb in the hole to press the glass against the opposite side, where it's held and raised with the bottle. Make sure to keep the side of the bottles with the hole facing away from the audience.
It will be seen that it matters not which cover is mentioned; the performer can show just the article he desires.
It doesn't matter which cover is mentioned; the performer can display exactly what they want.
CONTENTS
- Accounts, Home, Way to Keep, 282
- Acid Siphon, 222
- Acid Stains, Removing from Cloth, 196
- Addressing a Roll of Papers, 369
- Advertising Lantern Slides, How to Make, 417
- Aerial Propeller, Model Boat with, 207
- Aeroplane, Flying Model, for Display, 361
- Aeroplane Frames, Braces for, 235
- Aeroplane Kite, 111
- Aeroplane, Model, Joints for, 275
- Air Pencil to Make Embossed Letters, 29
- Air Pressure, Relieving, When Closing Record Boxes, 57
- Alarm Clock, Mission Frame for, 277
- Alarm,
- Amateur Mechanic's Combination Lathe, 447
- Amperage of Fuse Wire, Reducing, 322
- Anchor Posts for Lawn Swing, 148
- Anemometer, Electric, 367
- Angling, 59, 69, 73, 79
- Anti-Tangle Safety Pin, 272
- Ants, To Keep Away from Food, 361
- Application for Small Wounds, 304
- Arbor, Grape, Built of Poles, 12
- Arm, Pincushion for, 288
- Armatures for Small Motors, 124
- Armatures, Small, Holding for Winding, 118
- Arrow Sticks, Planing, 319
- Arts-Crafts Leather Work:
- Aspirator, How to Make, 146
- Atmospheric Thermo Engine, 120
- Attractor for Game Fish, 97
- Automatic Valve for Funnel, 317
- Automobile, Gasoline Consumption of, To Reduce, 436
- Automobile Robe, How to Make, 122
- Awning, Combined Shade and, 164
- Babbitt Metal, Cores for Use in, 304
- Back, Attached, for Photographic Printing Frame, 413
- Back Stop for Workbench, 225
- Back Thrust Prevented on Skis, 216
- Bag, Clothespin, 42
- Bait,
- Baking Bread in Hot Sand, 53
- Baking Ovens, To Prevent from Scorching, 298
- Baking-Pan Shoes, Adjustable, 129
- Balance, Simple, 395
- Ball Catch for Cabinet Doors, Homemade, 72
- Ball-Clasp Purse, Repairing Broken, 316
- Balloons, Toy, Inflating, 167
- Bamboo Pole, Uses for, 173
- Bank, Homemade Toy, 366
- Barn Tools, Hangers for, 155
- Barometer, Electric-Light Bulb as, 280
- Barrel Boat, 445
- Baseball Game, Indoor, 275
- Basement Light, Lighting, 156
- Bases for Electric Apparatus, Varnishing, 324
- Basin, Freezing to Chair, 431
- Basket,
- Basketball, Removing from Closed-Bottom Receptacle, 266
- Bathroom Light, To Operate Automatically, 56
- Bathtubs, Removing Black Deposit on, 190
- Batteries,
- Battery, Homemade Wet, 340
- Bearings for Model Work, 238
- Bed for a Camp, 133
- Bed Pocket, Utility Home or Traveling, 400
- Bed Warmer, Homemade Electric, 154
- Bed-Cover Fasteners, 55
- Bedroom Cabinet, 163
- Bell, Continuously Ringing, How to Make, 381
- Bell-Ringing Transformer, Small, Construction of, 348, 352
- Bells, Call, Simple Methods of Connecting, 356
- Belt, Cartridge, How to Make, 55
- Belts, Round, Splice for, 446
- Bench,
- Bench Stop,
- Bench Vise, Homemade, 149, 244
- Bench with Folding Seats, 158
- Bench-Vise Nut, Broken, Substitute for, 143
- Bicycle Horn, Mechanical, 195
- Bicycle Oil Lamp Changed to Electric Light, 78
- Bicycle Sprocket, Rear, Removing, 413
- Bicycle Wheel, Roller Skate on, 201
- Binding Machine, Lantern-Slide, 207
- Binding Magazines, 50
- Binding Posts on Wet Batteries, Protecting from Corrosion, 252
- Bird Cages, Seed Receptacle for, 147
- Birds, Turn Feeding Table for, 137
- Black Deposit on Bathtubs, Removing, 190
- Black, Dull, for Cameras, 163
- Blackboard for Children, 51
- Blades,
- Blank Books, Ruling, 290
- Bleaching Ivory, 175
- Block, Whetting, 375
- Blocks, Falling, How to Make, 392
- Blocks of Wood, Small, To Harden, 423
- Blowgun, How to Make, 282
- Blowpipe, Automatic, 180
- Blowtorch, Homemade, 459
- Board, Writing, for Children, 325
- Boards, Planing Rough-Grain, 235
- Boat,
- Boats
- A Canoe Stove, 103
- An Oar Holder, 168
- Foot, How to Make, 166
- Hand Propeller-Wheel Attachment for Rowboat, 413
- Holder for Dory Rudder, 68
- How to Build a Paddle-Wheel Boat, 105
- How to Build a Skiff, 18
- Ice Boat and Catamaran, 27
- Mirror an Aid in Rowing a Boat, 121
- Rope Oarlocks, 201
- Small, Landing for, 237
- To Repair a Leak in a Canoe, 149
- Bobsled,
- Boiling Cracked Eggs, 391
- Bolster, How to Make, 182
- Bolt, Night, Hinges Used to Substitute, 334
- Book Cover, Pocket for Inside of, 238
- Book Covering, 300
- Book Leaves, Removing Ink Stains from, 418
- Book, Support for Open, 438
- Bookcase or Closet, Portable and Folding, 296
- Bookholder, Adjustable, 224
- Bookrack, 261
- Folding, 395
- Books in Case, Holder for, 247
- Books, Removing Finger Marks from, 200
- Boring a Clean-Edged Hole, 406
- Boring a Long Hole, 420
- Bottle,
- Bottle Necks, To Prevent Corks Sticking in, 174
- Bottle-Cap Lifter, 195
- Bottle-Opening Trick, 223
- Bottles,
- Bottles and Glasses, Trick, 460
- Box, Camp Provision, 95
- Box Partitions, 454
- Boxes, Homemade Hinges for, 100
- Boy Surveyor:
- Brace,
- Braces for Aeroplane Frames, 235
- Bracket, Shade-Roller and Curtain-Pole, 318
- Bracket, Swinging Electric-Light, 284
- Brackets, Towel-Roller, 223
- Brake, Prony, for Testing Small Motors, 32
- Brass,
- Brass Articles, Cleaning, 375
- Brass Clips, Tool Holders Made of, 414
- Brass Rings, Turning, 400
- Brass Tubing, Seamless, Small Steam-Engine Cylinders Made from, 396
- Bread, Baking in Hot Sand, 53
- Bread, Toasting Over an Open Fire, 11
- Breaker, Glass, 291
- Broom for Sweeping Out Corners in Steps, 295
- Broom Holder, Another, 99
- Broom, Old, Shaping, 182
- Brown Stain for Wood, 189
- Brush for Applying Soldering Acid, 283
- Brush Handles,
- Brush Hanger for Dark Room, 156
- Brush,
- Buckle Tongues, Replacing, 331
- Bucket, Ear Repair on, 175
- Bucket-Ball Game, 270
- Buffer, Finger-Nail, 322
- Bug Powder, 457
- Bugs Attracted by Light, Catching, 263
- Bumper, Rubber, on Water Faucet, 406
- Bunsen Burner,
- Burglar Alarm, Fire and, How to Make, 411
- Burlap, Needle for Sewing, 151
- Burner
- Bushing a Stovepipe in a Chimney Hole, 231
- Buttonhole Cutter, 414
- Buttonholes, Guide for Making, 264
- Cabinet, Bedroom, 163
- Cabinet Doors, Homemade Ball Catch for, 72
- Cabinet, Shaving, Mounted on Adjustable Pedestal, 23
- Cabinet Work, Joint for, 251
- Calcium Deposits on Glass, Removing, 189
- Calculation Trick, Lightning, 101
- Caliper Gauge, Vise Used as, 172
- Camera,
- Camera Shutter, Electrically Operated, 234
- Camera Support, 324
- Camera Survey, Plotting a, 13
- Camera Surveying, 7
- Cameras,
- Camp,
- Camp Furnishings, 93
- Camp Loom, 107
- Camp Provision Box, 95
- Camp Stoves, 97
- Camp-Fire Utensils, Supports for, 371
- Camphor, Experiments with, 391
- Camps, 90
- Cams, Small, How to Make, 53
- Can Covers, Tight-Fitting, Removing, 391
- Candle Sconce, Horn, 298
- Candle-Shade Holder, 250
- Candle, To Automatically Extinguish, 67
- Candles,
- Candy-Floss Machine, How to Make, 268
- Cane-Seat Cleaner, 318
- Canned Foods, Heated, Relieving Pressure for Opening, 42
- Canoe Stove, 103
- Canoe, To Repair Leak In, 149
- Canvas, Preventing Mildew on, 247
- Canvas Shoes, Cleaner for, 289
- Carbon Paper, Renewing, 34
- Card,
- Card Stock, Typewriting on, 458
- Card-and-Coin Trick, 41
- Cards, Mind-Reading Effect with, 29
- Carrier,
- Carrying Stone Jars, 309
- Carrying Two Pails in One Hand, 382
- Cartridge Belt, How to Make, 55
- Cartridge Shells Used for Electrical Contacts, 285
- Case, Holder for Books in, 247
- Casein Glue, 212
- Casting Rod, One-Piece, 59
- Castings for Engine Pistons, Pipe Caps Used as, 408
- Catamaran, Ice Boat and, 27
- Catapult, 132
- Catch,
- Caterpillars on Grapevines, Destroying, 94
- Cellar-Door Holder, 34
- Cement Floors, Footstool for, 119
- Cement, Shellac, 50
- Center Gauge, Prick-Punch, 453
- Centering Gauge, 253
- Chain, Novelty, 191
- Chair,
- Chair Swing, 98
- Chairs, Refinishing, 376
- Chalk Trays, Covering for, 274
- Chart, Compass Time, 378
- Cherry Pitter, 309
- Chickens, Tin Can Used for Watering, 144
- Child's Finger, Cutting Tin Ball from, 436
- Child's Playhouse, 265
- Child's Seat for Theaters, 437
- Chime Clock, Electric, 332
- Chinese Pagoda, 278
- Chisel Edges, Grinding, 322
- Chisel Handle, Protector Cap for, 430
- Chisel Holder for Whetting, 317
- Chisel Rack, 248
- Chopper, Poultry-Food, 291
- Chopping Block, Stick Holder for, 191
- Clamp,
- Clapper, Whirligig, 453
- Clean Jewelry, How to, 287
- Cleaner,
- Cleaning
- Cleaning Bath for Silverware, 355
- Cleats on Boards, Substitute for, 322
- Clips to Hold Magazine Pages Together, 103
- Clock,
- Closet, Bookcase or, Portable and Folding, 296
- Closet Holders for Linen, 192
- Cloth,
- Clothes, Cleaning by Boiling, 289
- Clothes Peg,
- Clothes Rack, 166
- Clothesline,
- Clothesline Posts, Folding Arms for, 394
- Clothesline Reel, 249
- Clothesline Reel, Homemade, 423
- [463]Clothespin Bag, 42
- Clothespin, Wire, 387
- Clothing,
- Coaster Brake, Repairing, 422
- Coaster, Homemade Roller, 159
- Coasting Bobsled, Four-Passenger, 24
- Coat and Trousers Hangers, 442
- Coil Springs, Small, How to Make, 197
- Coil, Water-Heating, in Furnace Pipe, 294
- Coils, Induction, Testing Out, 19
- Coin Box, Mystery, 402
- Coin, Worn, Reading Date of, 347
- Coins, Display Holder for, 53
- Cold-Chisel Guide, 189
- Collar Fasteners, 56
- Collar Holder, Combination Tie Rack and, 30
- Coloring Electric-Light Globes, 438
- Colors, Setting, in Fabrics, 223
- Comb Cleaner, 188
- Compass,
- Compass Time Chart, 378
- Condenser, Variable, 129
- Connecting Call Bells, Simple Methods of, 356
- Construction of Simple Wireless Telephone Set:
- Construction of Small Bell-Ringing Transformer:
- Cooking Food in Paper, 168
- Cooler for Milk and Butter, 405
- Cooling Tube for Laboratory Still, 187
- Coop, Poultry, 247
- Copying Stand for Photographic Enlarging and Reducing, 232
- Cord, Flexible, Adjuster for Electric Flatiron, 406
- Cores for Use in Babbitt Metal, 304
- Cork,
- Cork Puller, 173, 252
- Cork-Covered Clothes Peg, 182
- Corks-in-a-Box Trick, 335
- Corks, To Prevent Sticking in Bottle Necks, 174
- Corn Sheller,
- Corner Cleaner Attached to Scrubbing Brush, 12
- Corner Joints, Picture-Frame, 176
- Corners in Steps, Broom for Sweeping Out, 295
- Corrosion, Protecting Binding Posts on Wet Batteries from, 252
- Costumer, How to Make, 42
- Couch-Cover Corner, Tying Rosette in, 310
- Countersink for Wood, Homemade, 154
- Coupling, Shaft, 347
- Court-Plaster, Liquid, 246
- Cover,
- Cover Strainer, 149
- Covering for Chalk Trays, 274
- Covering for Gas-Stove Top, 420
- Cradle,
- Crease in Soft Hat, To Keep, 254
- Crochet Hook, 325
- Croquet Arches, White Rubber on, 121
- Croquet Mallets Protected by Metal Rings, 225
- Croquet Playing, Night, 251
- Crystallization Shown on Screen, 216
- Cucumbers, Raising on Trellis, 445
- Cup,
- Curling-Iron Heater, 126
- Curtain Hanger, 274
- Curtain Stop, 296
- Curtain, Stretching, without Frame, 158
- Cushion, Screen and Storm-Door, 422
- Cuspidor Carrier, 279
- Cut Press, Homemade, 327
- Cut, Starting Saw, 252
- Cutter, Buttonhole, 414
- Cutter for Lace Leather, 376
- Cutter Made of Wafer Razor Blade, 240
- Cyclemobile, 135
- Cylinders, Small Steam-Engine, Made from Seamless Brass Tubing, 396
- Dampness, Keeping Out, 134
- Dark, Locating Droplight in, 123
- Dark Room,
- D'Arsonval Galvanometer, 415
- Date of Worn Coin, Reading, 347
- Decorating Candles, 426
- Decoration, Forcing Fruit Blossoms for, 12
- Decorative Wood Panels, 58
- Demagnetize a Watch, How to, 290
- Demagnetizer, Watch, How to Make, 150
- Dents in Wood, Raising, 381
- Desk, Sloping, Telephone Stand for, 112
- Develop Roll Film, Easy Way to, 425
- Developing Machine, 236
- Developing Tray Made of Tin Can, 121
- Developing-Tray Rocker, 224
- Dibble, Homemade, 246
- Die-and-Box Trick, 141
- Dip, Bright, for Metal, 250
- Dip-Plating Process, 323
- Dish or Floor Mop, Endless, 29
- Dish Washing, Summer, 356
- Dishpan, Sink a Substitute for, 197
- Disk-Armature Motor, 336
- Disk-Throwing Pistol, 244
- Display, Flying Model Aeroplane for, 361
- Display Holder for Coins, 53
- Displaying Dye Colors, 244
- Displaying Magazines, Holders for, 320
- Dissolving Coin Trick, 272
- Distance Chart for Wireless Stations, 269
- Distance Marker for Printing Photographs, 226
- Distilling Apparatus for Water, 112
- Dog, Chained, Exerciser for, 117
- Dogs, Lathe, 319
- Door, Double Latch for, 451
- Door Fastener, 163
- Door Hinges, Locking Screws in, 102
- Door Knobs, Attaching to Locks, 322
- Door Stop, 157
- Doorbell Alarm, 160
- Doorbell, Musical, 329
- Doors, Two Joining, Catch to Hold Open, 77
- Doorway, Fastening Portière Pole in, 227
- Dory Rudder, Holder for, 68
- Dovetail Joint, Laying Out, 247
- Dowel-Turning Tool, 285
- Drafts, Window Ventilator to Prevent, 248
- Draftsmen, Amateur, Combination Tool for, 324
- Drawer,
- Drawer Guide, Nonsticking, 383
- Drawers, Several, Locking with One Lock, 101
- Drawing Instruments, Substitutes for, 146
- Drawing Pen, To Start Ink Flowing from, 446
- Dressing, Shoe, Waterproof, 325
- Drill Press,
- Drill,
- Drilling Thin Metal, 406
- Drinking Cup,
- Drinking Glasses, Separating, 164
- Drinking Tube, 92
- Drip-Pan Alarm, 178
- Drip Pan, Locating Under Refrigerator, 307
- Driver, Screweye, 231
- Driving Screws, 310
- Droplight, Locating in Dark, 123
- Dropper and Cork for Medicine Bottles, 248
- Dry and Warm Climates, Refrigerator for, 357
- Dry Batteries,
- Dry Cell, How to Make, 421
- Drying Seeds, 288
- Drying Small Laundered Articles, 58
- Drying Towels in Photographer's Dark Room, 331
- Dustpan, Long Handle for, 243
- Dye Colors, Displaying, 244
- Ear Repair on a Bucket, 175
- Ebony, Imitating on Oak, 193
- Edging Flower Beds, 165
- Egg Boiler, 190
- Egg-Frying Pan, 388
- [464]Egg Separator, Homemade, 153
- Eggs,
- Electric Anemometer, 367
- Electric Apparatus, Varnishing Bases for, 324
- Electric Bed Warmer, Homemade, 154
- Electric Chime Clock, 332
- Electric Display for Show Window, 52
- Electric Fishing Signal, How to Make, 98
- Electric Fixtures, Curved, Pulling Wire through, 173
- Electric Flatiron, Flexible-Cord Adjuster for, 406
- Electric Fountain, 401
- Electric Furnace,
- Electric Gas Lighter, 376
- Electric Heater, How to Make, 407
- Electric Horn, 409
- Electric Incubator, 343
- Electric Indicator, Wind Vane with, How to Build, 305
- Electric Lamp Flasher, How to Make, 370
- Electric Lamp Reflector for Target, 196
- Electric Light, Bicycle Oil Lamp Changed to, 78
- Electric Light Bracket, Swinging, 284
- Electric Light Bulb as Barometer, 280
- Electric Light Globes, Coloring, 438
- Electric Light Globes, Paper Shades for, 316
- Electric Light Mystery, 168
- Electric Lights Controlled from Two or More Switches, 276
- Electric Motor, Simple, How to Build, 359
- Electric Score Board for Indoor Games, 277
- Electric Shaving Mug, 385
- Electric Stirring-Machine, 165
- Electric Switch for Exposing Photographic Printing-Papers, 181
- Electric Test for Fixtures, 288
- Electric Time Light, 362
- Electric Water Heater, 89, 243
- Electrical Apparatus—
- Alarm to Designate Filled Storage Battery, 253
- Armatures for Small Motors, 124
- Bed Warmer, Homemade, 154
- Bell, Continuously Ringing, How to Make, 381
- Bell-Ringing Transformer, Construction of Small, 348, 352
- Disk-Armature Motor, 336
- Doorbell Alarm, 160
- Door Lock, Combination Electrically Operated, 110
- Dry Cell, How to Make a, 421
- Electric Display for Show Window, 52
- Electric Fishing Signal, 98
- Electric Stirring Machine, 165
- Electric Water Heater, 89
- Electrotype Stamp, How to Make an, 419
- Galvanometer, D'Arsonval, 415
- Galvanometer, Simple, How to Construct a, 389
- Fire and Burglar Alarm, How to Make a, 411
- Holding Small Armatures for Winding, 118
- Musical Doorbell, 329
- Pocket Direct-Current Voltmeter, 397
- Quickly Made Rheostat, 178
- Reversing Switch for Small Motors, 378
- Rheostat, How to Make a Small, 393
- Rotary Tuning Coil, 372
- Series Motor, How to Make a Small, 403
- Simple Methods of Connecting Call Bells, 356
- Small Shocking Machine, 363
- Telegraph Sounder, Homemade, 119
- Temperature Alarm, 345
- Variable Condenser, 129
- Vibrator for Spark Coil, 309
- Wet Battery, Homemade, 340
- Wire Expansion Meter, 410
- Wireless Telephone Set, Construction of Simple, 337, 341
- Electrical Contacts, Cartridge Shells Used for, 285
- Electrical Testing Instrument for Experimenters, 328
- Electrically Ignited Flash Light for Making Photographs, 239
- Electrically Operated Camera Shutter, 234
- Electrically Operated Door Lock, Combination, 110
- Electrodes, Furnace, of Lead Pencils, 441
- Electrolytic Interrupter, How to Make, 241
- Electroplating, Inlaying-Metals by, 171
- Electroplating without a Tank, 234
- Electrotype Stamp, How to Make, 419
- Ellipsograph, Homemade, 429
- Emboss Stationery, How to, 454
- Embossed Letters, Air Pencil to Make, 29
- Emery-Cloth Holder, 386
- Engine, Homemade Steam-Turbine, 180
- Engine Pistons, Pipe Caps Used as Castings for, 408
- Engine, Thermo, Atmospheric, 120
- Enlarging Camera, Homemade, 219
- Enlarging Photographs, 217
- Enlarging Pictures, 269
- Envelope and Stamp Moistener, 431
- Envelope, Special, To Make, 67
- Eraser Holder, 175
- Eraser, Ink, 395
- Escapement Wheel of Clock, Repairing Worn, 72
- Exerciser for a Chained Dog, 117
- Exerciser, Homemade, 299
- Expansion Meter, Wire, 410
- Experiment,
- Experimenters, Electrical Testing Instrument for, 328
- Experiments with Camphor, 391
- Exterior Sliding Fly Screen, 231
- Extracting a Broken Screw, 134
- Extractor, Sliver, 250
- Eye Shield for Microscope, 153
- Fabrics, Setting Colors in, 223
- Falling-Blocks, How to Make, 392
- Fastener,
- Fastening Loose Table Legs, 289
- Fastening Screws in Tile and Brick Walls, 292
- Faucet, Water, Rubber Bumper on, 406
- Feeding-Table, Turn, for Birds, 137
- Felt, Mending Break in, 192
- Fencing, Poultry, Stretching, 253
- Ferris Wheel, Playground, 161
- Ferrule, Taper, How to Make, 380
- Figures, Puzzle with, 289
- File, Inexpensive, 286
- Filing Flat Surfaces, 296
- Filing Soft Metals, 102
- Film-Developing Machine, Adjustable, 208
- Film, Roll, Easy Way to Develop, 425
- Filter,
- Finder for Cameras, Homemade Direct-View, 54
- Finger Marks, Removing from Books, 200
- Finger Nail Buffer, 322
- Finger Protection on Laboratory Vessels, 170
- Finger-Ring Trick, 56
- Fire and Burglar Alarm, How to Make, 411
- Fireflies, Theatrical Night Scene with Appearance of, 162
- Fish,
- Fish Rake, 423
- Fish-Scaling Knife, 182
- Fish Stringer, 146
- Fishhooks,
- Fishing, Live Bait Used in, 261
- [465]Fishing-Rod Joints, Holding Together, 201
- Fishing-Rod Making and Angling:
- Fishing Signal, Electric, How to Make, 98
- Fishing, Trout, with Fly and Bait, 73, 79
- Fitting Large Cork in Small Bottle, 339
- Five-Pointed Star, 226
- Fixtures,
- Flash Light, Electrically Ignited, for Making Photographs, 239
- Flash Light Telegraph on Kite Line, 155
- Flasher,
- Flashing Hook, 246
- Flat Surfaces, Filing, 296
- Flatiron, Electric, Flexible-Cord Adjuster for, 406
- Flatiron Holder, Ornamental Metal, 150
- Floor or Dish Mop, Endless, 29
- Floor Polisher, Homemade, 125
- Floor Push Button, 144
- Flour Bin, Safety Catch for, 454
- Flower Beds, Edging, 165
- Flower Trellis, Umbrella Used as, 164
- Flowers, Preserving, in Color and Form, 127
- Flutter Ring, How to Make, 100
- Flying Model Aeroplane for Display, 361
- Flymobile, How to Make, 139
- Flypaper Holder, 423
- Folding Arms for Clothesline Posts, 394
- Folding Bookrack, 395
- Food, Cooking, in Paper, 168
- Food, To Keep Ants Away from, 361
- Foot Boats, How to Make, 166
- Footstool for Cement Floors, 119
- Form, Stocking-Stretcher, 190
- Fortune Teller, Mystic, 32
- Fountain Attachment for Ordinary Pen, 326
- Fountain, Electric, 401
- Fountain for Ordinary Pen, 173
- Fountain-Pen Barrels, Mending Broken, 442
- Fountain Pen, Homemade, 94
- Frame for Printing Post Cards from Negatives, 170
- Frames, Small Mitered, Gluing, 193
- Freezing Basin to Chair, 431
- Freezing, To Prevent Poultry Water from, 355
- Frosting Brass, 185
- Frosting Glass, 243
- Fruit Blossoms for Decoration, Forcing, 12
- Fruit-Jar Opener, 272
- Fruit Jars, Screw-Top, Opening, 125
- Fruit Presser, 279
- Fruit Stemmer, 94
- Funnel, Automatic Valve for, 317
- Furnace, Electric, How to Make, 373
- Furnace Electrodes of Lead Pencils, 441
- Furnace Pipe, Water-Heating Coil in, 294
- Furnace, Small Electric, How to Make, 229
- Furnishings, Camp, 93
- Furniture—
- Bedroom Cabinet, 163
- Bookrack, 261
- Chair Swing, 98
- Combination Settee Rocker and Cradle, 46
- Costumer, How to Make, 42
- Double Top for Table, 78
- Folding Bookrack, 395
- Footstool for Cement Floors, 119
- Jardinière Pedestal, 255
- Leaded-Glass Panels for, 443
- Mission, Joint for, 384
- Reed—A Reed Basket, 257
- Shaving Cabinet, 23
- Woven-Top Stool, 256
- Furniture Polish, 102, 458
- Furniture Polish for Fine Woods, 216
- Fuse Wire, Reducing Amperage of, 322
- Galvanometer,
- Game,
- Garden-Bed Scarecrow, 365
- Garden Roller, 293
- Garden, Sunlight Flasher for, 179
- Gas and Electric Fixtures, Locating in Dark, 437
- Gas Generator, Laboratory, 118
- Gas Lighter, Electric, 376
- Gas Pipe, Paper, 262
- Gas Stove Top, Covering for, 420
- Gasoline Consumption of Automobile, To Reduce, 436
- Gate, Double-Swing, with Common Hinge, 19
- Gate Fasteners, 396
- Gate, Self-Closing, 211
- Gauge,
- Gear-Cutting Machine, 424
- Generator, Gas, Laboratory, 118
- Geometric Principle In Line Division, 326
- Glass Bottle, Cutting, 186
- Glass Breaker, 291
- Glass,
- Glasses,
- Glaziers' Points, Substitute for, 293
- Glider,
- Glue, Casein, 212
- Glue-Spreader Holder, 153
- Gluing Small Mitered Frames, 193
- Go-Cart, Runner for, 287
- Gold and Platinum, Cleaning, 191
- Graduate Holder, 218
- Graduate, Homemade, 192
- Graduates, Renewing Markings on, 316
- Graining Tools, Homemade, 206
- Grape Arbor Built of Poles, 12
- Grapevines, Destroying Caterpillars on, 94
- Grass Rake, 196
- Grease,
- Green-Corn Holder, 167
- Grinder, Kraut and Root, 297
- Grinding a Plane Iron, Guide for, 279
- Grinding Chisel Edges, 322
- Grinding Scissors, 148
- Grindstone, Scraping Surplus Water Off on, 188
- Guard, Pruning-Saw, 197
- Guide,
- Guide Ropes on Bobsled, 155
- Guides, Window-Shade, 286
- Gun, Pea-Shooting, 438
- Gunstocks, Polishing, 452
- Hacksaw Frame,
- Hairpin, Fancy, Lock for, 110
- Hammer, Double-Claw, for Pulling Nails Straight, 134
- Hammock, To Tie, 286
- Hand Drill Press, Homemade, 242
- Hand Hoe, 147
- Handbag Lock, 386
- Handballs, Inflating, 365
- Handle,
- Handrails, Stairway, Detachable Clamp for, 452
- Hanger,
- Hangers,
- Hanging Vase, 102
- Hat Hanger, 388
- Hat Sweatband, Reducing Size of, 132
- Head Rest for Chair, 309
- Heater, Curling Iron, 126
- Heater, Electric, How to Make, 407
- Heater, Electric Water, 89
- Heel Plates, 250
- Heliograph, How to Make, 183
- Hindoo Sand Trick, 308
- Hinge,
- [466]Hinges, Door, Locking Screws in, 102
- Hinges,
- Hoe,
- Holder,
- Broom, Another, 99
- Candle-Shade, 250
- Cellar-Door, 34
- for Books in a Case, 247
- for Garden-Hose Nozzle, 252
- for Loose Window Glass, 149
- for Milk Card, 170
- for Set of Sadirons, 293
- for Skates while Sharpening, 54
- Green-Corn, 167
- Milk-Ticket, 251
- Nursing-Bottle, 251
- Paper-Bag, 274
- Pen and Brush, 287
- Pencil, 290
- Umbrella, for Display Purposes, 170
- Washbasin, 289
- Holders for Displaying Magazines, 320
- Hole,
- Home Accounts, Way to Keep, 282
- Hook,
- Hooks, Homemade Snap, 248
- Horn Candle Sconce, 298
- Horn,
- Hose Attachment for Watering Window Plants, 298
- Hose Nozzle, 242
- Hose-Nozzle Handle, 421
- Hose Reel, Substitute for, 369
- Hot Dish, Holding Spoon on, 437
- Houses Made of Poles, 85
- Hulling Walnuts, 162, 295
- Humidity Indicator, How to Make, 360
- Humidor, How to Make, 136
- Hunting-Knife Handles, 177
- Hurdle, How to Make, 145
- Hydroelectric-Power Plant, Small, 314
- Hydrometer, Homemade, 456
- Ice Boat and Catamaran, 27
- Ice-Box Lights, Automatically Controlled, 194
- Ice Boxes, To Remove Odors from, 100
- Ice,
- Illuminating-an Outside Thermometer, 122
- Illusion, Optical, 345
- Imitating Ebony on Oak, 193
- Incubator,
- Indicator,
- Indoor Games,
- Induction Coils, Testing Out, 19
- Inexpensive File, 286
- Inflating Handballs, 365
- Inflating Toy Balloons, 167
- Ink Bottle, Pen Rack on, 143
- Ink Eraser, 395
- Ink Stains, Removing from Book Leaves, 418
- Ink, To Start Flowing from Drawing-Pen, 446
- Inkstand,
- Inkwell and Penholder, 283
- Inkwell Stopper, 196
- Inlaying Metals by Electroplating, 171
- Insect-Proof Poultry Roost, 422
- Iodine Stains, Removing, 55
- Iron Holder Knob, Substitute for, 388
- Iron, How to Nickel or Silverplate by Friction, 272
- Ironing-Board Holder, 302
- Ivory, Bleaching, 175
- Jardinière Pedestal, 255
- Jelly-Straining Stand, 382
- Jewelry, How to Clean, 287
- Jig-Saw Blades, 442
- Joints,
- Kettle-Handle Support, 49
- Kettle Handle, To Protect from Heat, 144
- Kettles, Detachable Hinged Cover for, 123
- Key-Holder Hook, 147
- Keyhole, Light in, 114
- Kitchen Utensil—
- Baking-Pan Shoes, Adjustable, 129
- Bottle-Cap Lifter, 195
- Broom Holder, 99
- Cherry Pitter, 309
- Cork Puller, 173, 252
- Cover for a Bottle, 420
- Cover Strainer, 149
- Egg Boiler, 190
- Egg-Frying Pan, 388
- Egg Separator, Homemade, 153
- Fish-Scaling Knife, 182
- Fruit Jar Opener, 272
- Fruit Stemmer, 94
- Grinder, Kraut and Root, 297
- Hanger for, 100
- Kettle Handle, Protecting from Heat, 144
- Kettle-Handle Support, 49
- Kettles, Detachable Hinged Cover for, 123
- Knife Holder on Frying Pan, 295
- Lamp-Chimney Cleaner, 125
- Lard and Fruit Presser, 279
- Lifter for Removing Eggs from Hot Water, 78
- Nutcracker, Adjustable, 101
- Opening Screw-Top Fruit Jars, 125
- Pail-Cover Handle, New, 177
- Potato Peeler, 425
- Scraper for, 147
- Scrubbing Brush, Corner Cleaner Attached to, 12
- Skimmer for Bottled Milk, 358
- Skimming-Spoon, 391
- Soap Shake, 175
- Steam, Opening for, in Utensil Cover, 288
- Strainer for Milk Pail, 53
- Tablespoon End Used as Lemon Squeezer, 225
- Vegetable Slicer, 254
- Kite, Aeroplane, 111
- Kite Line,
- Kite, War, How to Make, 108
- Knife, Fish-Scaling, 182
- Knife Handle, Broken, Repairing, 229
- Knife Holder on a Frying Pan, 295
- Knife, Homemade Palette, 211
- Knife, To Make Open Easily, 347
- Knives and Glasses, Trick with, 227
- Kraut and Root Grinder, 297
- Labels, Old, To Make Scratch Pads of, 406
- Laboratory Force Filter, 119
- Laboratory Gas Generator, 118
- Laboratory Still, Cooling Tube for, 187
- Laboratory Vessels, Finger Protection on, 170
- Laboratory, Wash Bottle for Use in, 458
- Lamp, Bicycle Oil, Changed to Electric Light, 78
- Lamp Chimney Cleaner, 125
- Lamp Deception, Wireless-Lighted, 260
- Lamp Flasher, Electric, How to Make, 370
- Lantern for Camp, 276
- Landing for Small Boats, 237
- Lantern for Spot and Colored Lights, 209
- Lantern Slide Binding Machine, 207
- Lantern Slides, Advertising, How to Make, 417
- Lard and Fruit Presser, 279
- Large Hole in Small Piece of Paper, 317
- Latch, Double, for Door, 451
- Lathe,
- Laundered Articles, Drying Small, 58
- Laundry, How to Make Copper Stencil for Marking, 299
- Lawn Mower, Lighting, for Use at Night, 310
- [467]Lawn Sprinkler, Homemade, 366
- Lawn Sprinkling, Nozzle Angle for, 356
- Lawn Swing, Anchor Posts for, 148
- Lawn-Tennis Marker, 255
- Laying Out a Dovetail Joint, 247
- Lead Pencils, Furnace Electrodes of, 441
- Lead Pipe, Painting, 175
- Leaded-Glass Panels for Furniture, 443
- Leak in a Canoe, To Repair, 149
- Leather, Lace, Cutter for, 376
- Leather Punch, Homemade, 452
- Leather Punch, Pipe Used as, 138
- Leather, Tan, To Color Black, 174
- Leather Work, Arts-Crafts, 432, 439
- Leaves, Falling, in Nature Scene, 400
- Lemon Squeezer, Tablespoon End Used as, 225
- Letter Scale, How to Make, 356
- Lettering Photographs, 320
- Letters, Embossed, Air Pencil to Make, 29
- Letters for Marking Bags, Homemade, 254
- Level of Liquids, in Vessels, To Maintain Constant, 154
- Lifter for Removing Eggs from Hot Water, 78
- Light,
- Lighting a Basement Light, 156
- Lighting a Lawn Mower for Use at Night, 310
- Lighting a Room for Making Photographs, 123
- Line Division, Geometric Principle in, 326
- Linen, Closet Holders for, 192
- Liquid Court-Plaster, 246
- Liquids, Heavy, Vent for Pouring, 387
- Liquids in Vessels, To Maintain Constant Level of, 154
- Lock,
- Lock Keeper, Broken, Repair for, 208
- Locking Extension Table, Window Catch Used for, 42
- Locking Screws in Door Hinges, 102
- Locking Several Drawers with One Lock, 101
- Locks, Attaching Door Knobs to, 322
- Loom, Camp, 107
- Loose-Leaf Pocket Memorandum, Homemade, 283
- Loss of Fish from Covered Baskets, Preventing, 208
- Machine for Sketching Pictures, 6
- Machine Screws, Small, How to Start, 169
- Machinery, Oiling Bright Parts of, 248
- Magazine Pages, Clips for Holding Together, 103
- Magazines,
- Magic Change Card, 133
- Magic String, 165
- Magnetic-Suspension Pendulum, 104
- Mailing Tube,
- Mandrel, Sander, for Lathe, 388
- Mantel Picture Frames Made in Plaster, 226
- Marble, Repairing, 336
- Marker, Lawn-Tennis, 255
- Marking Bags, Homemade Letters for, 254
- Marking Gauge, Homemade, 294
- Markings on Graduates, Renewing, 316
- Marks from Basting Threads on Wool, Preventing, 56
- Match-Box Holder, Safety, 418
- Match Box, Self-Feeding, 335
- Match Holder, 459
- Match Safe to Deliver One Match at a Time, 285
- Maulstick Used as Ruler, 451
- Measuring Length of Wire Wound on Spool, 365
- Meat Saw and Knife, Combination, 409
- Mechanical Aid to Singers, 206
- Mechanical Bicycle Horn, 195
- Mechanical Camera, 233
- Medicine Bottles,
- Medicine-Spoon Holder, 295
- Mending a Break in Felt, 192
- Merry-Go-Round Pole, 162
- Merry-Go-Round, Skating, 57
- Metal, Bright Dip for, 250
- Metal Polish, 68
- Metal Rings, Croquet Mallets Protected by, 225
- Metal, Thin, Drilling, 406
- Metals, Inlaying, by Electroplating, 171
- Metals, Soft, Filing, 102
- Meter, Water, Homemade, 48
- Meter, Wire Expansion, 410
- Microscope, Eye Shield for, 153
- Mildew on Canvas, Preventing, 247
- Mile-O-View Camera, 213
- Milk and Butter, Cooler for, 405
- Milk-Bottle Carrier, 107
- Milk-Bottle Tray, 235
- Milk, Bottled, Skimmer for, 358
- Milk Card, Holder for, 170
- Milk Pail, Strainer for, 53
- Milk Stool, 384
- Milk-Ticket Holder, 251
- Mill File, Guides for, 321
- Mind-Reading Effect with Cards, 29
- Mirror an Aid in Rowing a Boat, 121
- Mirror Hinged to Window Casing, 355
- Mission Frame for an Alarm Clock, 277
- Mission Furniture, Joint for, 384
- Mission-Style Inkstand, 381
- Miter Box, Picture-Frame, Homemade, 428
- Mixing Sulphuric Acid, 278
- Model Aeroplane,
- Model Boat,
- Model Work, Bearings for, 238
- Moistener, Envelope and Stamp, 431
- Moistener, Stamp, 320
- Molding-Sawing Block Used on Bench, 408
- Moles, To Prevent from Damaging Growing Seeds, 182
- Monorail Sled, How to Make, 50
- Mop, Endless Dish or Floor, 29
- Mop Wringer, How to Make, 171
- Mortises, Guide for Cutting, 422
- Mosquitoes, Trapping, 143
- Motion-Picture, Camera, and, Projector, Homemade:
- Motion-Picture Machine, Simple, 321
- Motor,
- Motorboat, Repairing Bruised Sides of, 369
- Motors,
- Mouse Trap, 178, 229
- Multiplying Attachment for Camera, 221
- Musical Doorbell, 329
- Muskrat Trap, 212
- Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, etc.—
- Bottle-Opening Trick, 223
- Card and Coin Trick, 41
- Changing Pip on a Card, 67
- Corks-in-a-Box Trick, 335
- Die-and-Box Trick, 141
- Dissolving-Coin Trick, 272
- Electric-Light Mystery, 168
- Finger-Ring Trick, 56
- Flutter Ring, 100
- Hindoo Sand Trick, 308
- Lightning-Calculation Trick, 101
- Magic-Change Card, 133
- Magic String, 165
- Mysterious Revolving Wheel, 152
- Mystic Fortune Teller, 32
- Optical Illusion, 345
- "Q" Trick, 360
- [468]Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, etc.—Ring Trick, 300
- Rubber-Band-Change Trick, 284
- String-and-Ball Trick, 273
- Surprise Water Bottle, 218
- Swinging-Pendulum Trick, 280
- Trick Bottles and Glasses, 460
- Trick of Taking Dollar Bill from Apple, 263
- Trick with Knives and Glasses, 227
- Tricks Performed with Thumbs Tied Together, 281
- Mystery Coin Box, 402
- Mystery, Trunk, 267
- Mystic Fortune Teller, 32
- Nail, Finishing, To Clinch, 34
- Name, Writing Reversed on Paper Placed on Forehead, 392
- Nature Scene, Falling Leaves in, 400
- Needle and Thread Tray, Combination, 72
- Needle Box for Talking Machines, 263
- Needle for Repairing Screens, 206
- Needle for Sewing Burlap, 151
- Needle-Spray Nozzle, 418
- Negative, To Hold in Printing Frame, 241
- Newspaper Holder, Clothespin, 68
- Nickel or Silverplate Iron by Friction, How to, 272
- Night Bolt, Hinges Used to Substitute, 334
- Night Croquet Playing, 251
- Nonsticking Drawer Guide, 383
- Nozzle Angle for Lawn Sprinkling, 356
- Nozzle,
- Novelty Chain, 191
- Nursing-Bottle Holder, 251
- Nutcracker, Adjustable, 101
- Nuts,
- Oak, Imitating Ebony on, 193
- Oar Holder, 168
- Oarlocks, Rope, 201
- Odors, To Remove from Ice Boxes, 100
- Oil Burner for Cook Stove, 145
- Oilcloth, To Prevent from Cracking, 138
- Oiling Bright Parts of Machinery, 248
- Oilstone,
- Old-Oak Stain, 225
- Opener, Fruit-Jar, 272
- Opening for Air at Top of Shade, 297
- Opening for Steam in Utensil Cover, 288
- Operation of Compass, 387
- Optical Illusion, 345
- Pad for Percolator, 377
- Paddle-Wheel Boat, How to Build, 105
- Pagoda, Chinese, 278
- Pail Cover Handle, New, 177
- Pail Hook for Pitcher Pump, 245
- Pail, Live-Bait, 178
- Pails, Carrying Two in One Hand, 382
- Paint Brushes, Care of, 189
- Paint,
- Painted or Frescoed Walls, To Clean, 187
- Painting Lead Pipe, 175
- Paints and Pastes, Preserving, 418
- Palette Knife, Homemade, 211
- Pan, Egg-Frying, 388
- Panels,
- Pantograph, Homemade, 142
- Paper, Carbon, Renewing, 34
- Paper Drinking Cup, 188
- Paper Drinking Cup, How to Make, 346
- Paper Gas Pipe, 262
- Paper Glider That Loops the Loop, 109
- Paper, Large Hole in Small Piece of, 317
- Paper Perforator, 400
- Paper Shades for Electric-Light Globes, 316
- Paper Smoother and Penwiper, 345
- Paper Transparent, To Make, 11
- Paper-Bag Holder, 274
- Paper-Pulp Utensils, Mending, 375
- Papers, Addressing Roll of, 369
- Papers in Mailing Tube, Securing, 187
- Parachute Cut-Away for Kite Lines, Toy, 372
- Partitions, Box, 454
- Pearl Articles, Cleaning, 133
- Pea-Shooting Gun, 438
- Pedestal, Jardinière, 255
- Peeler, Potato, 425
- Pen and Brush Holder, 287
- Pen,
- Pen Rack on an Ink Bottle, 143
- Pencil Compass, Emergency, 34
- Pencil Holder, 290
- Pencil Rack, 132
- Pencil Sharpener, 237
- Pencil Sharpener Stick, 446
- Pencil Sharpening Guide, 358
- Pencil Stubs, Use for, 104
- Pendulum, Magnetic-Suspension, 104
- Penholder, Inkwell and, 283
- Penholder, Substitute, 252
- Penwiper, Paper Smoother and, 345
- Percolator, Pad for, 377
- Perforator, Paper, 400
- Perspiration Stains, Removing from Delicate Cloth, 414
- Photo Printing, Timing, 245
- Photo Vignetter, 238
- Photograph Prints, Timing, 371
- Photograph, Radium, How to Make, 172
- Photographer's Dark Room, Drying Towels in, 331
- Photographic Appliances and Processes—
- Brush Hanger for Dark Room, 156
- Camera Support, 324
- Developing Machine, 236
- Developing Tray Made of Tin Can, 121
- Developing Tray Rocker, 224
- Dull Black for Cameras, 163
- Easy Way to Develop Roll Film, 425
- Electric Stirring Machine, 165
- Electrically Operated Camera Shutter, 234
- Film-Developing Machine, Adjustable, 208
- Frame for Printing Post Cards from Negatives, 170
- Holding Prints in a Liquid-Filled Tray, 33
- Homemade Enlarging Camera, 219
- Homemade Motion-Picture Camera and Projector, 198, 202, 204
- Lighting a Room for Making Photographs, 123
- Mile-O-View Camera, 213
- Multiplying Attachment for Camera, 221
- Photographic Print Washer, 97
- Slide-Opening Cover for Plate Holder, 104
- Stereoscopic Pictures with, Ordinary Camera, 346
- Tank Development Methods Used in Tray Development, 428
- Telephoto Attachment for Hand Camera, 136
- To Hold Negative in Printing Frame, 241
- Trimming Photographs, 68
- View Finder, Direct, for Cameras, 54
- Washing Photographic Prints, 92, 168
- [469] Photographic,
- Photographs,
- Picture Frame and Triangle Clamp, 230
- Picture-Frame Corner Joints, 176
- Picture-Frame Miter Box, Homemade, 428
- Picture Frames, Mantel, Made in Plaster, 226
- Pictures,
- Pin Tray, Brass, 299
- Pincushion for the Arm, 288
- Pip, Changing, on Card, 67
- Pipe Caps Used as Castings for Engine Pistons, 408
- Pipe, Connecting to Sheet Metal, 222
- Pipe Used as Leather Punch, 138
- Pipes, Frozen, Thawing Out, 387
- Pistol, Disk-Throwing, 244
- Pitter, Cherry, 309
- Plane Iron, Guide for Grinding, 279
- Plane, Rabbet, How to Make, 152
- Plane-Table Surveying, 1
- Planing,
- Plant Shelf for Window, 324
- Planting Seeds in Egg Shells, 307
- Plants,
- Plaster, Mantel Picture Frames, Made in, 226
- Plaster of Paris, Retarder of, 195
- Plate Hangers, 233
- Plates, Heel, 250
- Platinum, Gold and, Cleaning, 191
- Playground Ferris Wheel, 161
- Playhouse, Child's, 265
- Plots, To Enlarge or Reduce, 22
- Pocket for Inside of Book Cover, 238
- Pocket Memorandum, Homemade Loose-Leaf, 283
- Pocket Rule, Gauge Attachment for, 233
- Pocket, Utility Bed, Home or Traveling, 400
- Pointed End on Hoe, 458
- Poison Bottles, Simple Way to Mark, 126
- Polarity Indicator, 396
- Pole, Bamboo, Uses for, 173
- Pole, Merry-Go-Round, 162
- Poles, Houses Made of, 85
- Polish,
- Polisher, Floor, Homemade, 125
- Polishing Gunstocks, 452
- Pop-Corn Popper, 125
- Popgun, Toy, 240
- Porch Swing, Springs on Chains of, 47
- Portable and Folding Bookcase or Closet, 296
- Portière Pole, Fastening in Doorway, 227
- Post Cards, Frame for Printing from Negatives, 170
- Post, Removable, 273
- Postal Cards, Wood, 292
- Potato Peeler, 425
- Potted Plants, Adjustable Rod for, 379
- Poultry Coop, 247
- Poultry Fencing, Stretching, 253
- Poultry-Food Chopper, 291
- Poultry Roost, Insect-Proof, 422
- Poultry Shade, 211
- Poultry Water, To Prevent from Freezing, 355
- Poultry Yards, Automatic Watering System for, 66
- Powder, Bug, 457
- Power, Light, Windmill for, 307
- Power Plant, Small Hydroelectric, 314
- Power, Revolving Shaft Without, 274
- Power Windmill, 311
- Preserving Flowers in Color and Form, 127
- Preserving Paint in Open Cans, 382
- Preserving Paints and Pastes, 418
- Press, Homemade Cut, 327
- Presser, Lard and Fruit, 279
- Pressure, Relieving,, on Heated Canned Foods for Opening, 42
- Prick-Punch Center Gauge, 453
- Printing Frame, To Hold Negative in, 241
- Prints,
- Profiles, Aid in Sketching, 314
- Projecting Protractor Readings, 157
- Prony Brake for Testing Small Motors, 32
- Propeller Wheel Attachment, Hand, for Rowboat, 413
- Propellers for Hand Sled, 334
- Protection, Finger, on Laboratory Vessels, 170
- Protector Cap for Chisel Handle, 430
- Protractor Readings, Projecting, 157
- Provision Box, Camp, 95
- Pruning-Saw Guard, 197
- Puller, Staple, 196, 271
- Pulling Nails Straight, Double-Claw Hammer for, 134
- Pulling Wire through Curved Electric Fixtures, 173
- Pulse Beats, Reading, With Sun's Rays, 128
- Pump, Pitcher, Pail Hook for, 245
- Pump Spout, Filter in, 189
- Punch, Homemade Leather, 452
- Purse, Puzzle, 236
- Push Button, Floor, 144
- Pushmobile Race, 130
- Pushmobile Racer for Ice, 428
- Putty,
- Puzzle,
- "Q" Trick, 360
- Rabbet Plane, How to Make, 152
- Race, Pushmobile, 130
- Rack,
- Radium Photograph, How to Make, 172
- Raft, Swimming, 200
- Rake,
- Razor Blade, Wafer, Cutter Made of, 240
- Razor Blades, Discarded Wafer, Use for, 124
- Reading Date of Worn Coin, 347
- Reducing Amperage of Fuse Wire, 322
- Reed Furniture—A Reed Basket, 257
- Reel,
- Refinishing Chairs, 376
- Reflector, Electric Lamp, for Target, 196
- Reflector for Viewing Scenery from Car Window, 212
- Refrigerator for Dry and Warm Climates, 357
- Refrigerator, Locating Drip Pan under, 307
- Reinforcing Chair Bottoms, 191
- Removable Post, 273
- Removing Basketball from Closed-Bottom Receptacle, 266
- Removing Tight-Fitting Can Covers, 391
- Renewing Dry Batteries, 382
- Repair for Broken Lock Keeper, 208
- Repairing,
- Resistance-Wire Connections, Small, Welding, 158
- Retarder for Plaster of Paris, 195
- Reversing Switch for Small Motors, 378
- Revolving Shaft Without Power, 274
- Revolving Wheel, Mysterious, 152
- Rheostat,
- Ring, Flutter, How to Make, 100
- Ring-Throwing Game, 287
- Ring Trick, 300
- Rings, Brass, Turning, 400
- Rivet Set, Homemade, 457
- Riveting, Soldering and, 40
- Robe, Automobile, How to Make, 122
- Rocker, Developing-Tray, 224
- Rocker on Chair, Repairing, 196
- Rod, Adjustable, for Potted Plants, 379
- Rod, Casting, One-Piece, 59
- Rods, Small, Filing in Lathe, 414
- Rods, Various Two and Three-Piece, 69
- Roll of Papers, Addressing, 369
- Roller Coaster, Homemade, 159
- Roller, Garden, 293
- Roller, Homemade Towel, 249
- Roller Skate on Bicycle Wheel, 201
- Roller Skating, Beginner's Helper for, 120
- Rope Oarlocks, 201
- Rosette, Tying, in Couch-Cover Corner, 310
- Rotary Tuning Coil, 372
- Rowboat, Hand Propeller-Wheel Attachment for, 413
- Rowing a Boat, Mirror an Aid in, 121
- Rubber-Band-Change Trick, 284
- Rubber Stamp, Substitute for, 102
- Rubber, White, on Croquet Arches, 121
- Rubbing Slats for Washing Board, 263
- Rudder, Dory, Holder for, 68
- Rule Gauge, 459
- Ruler, Maulstick Used as, 451
- Ruling Blank Books, 290
- Runner for Go-Cart, 287
- Rust and Corrosion, Preserving Shafting from, 256
- Rust Stains, To Remove from Clothing, 174
- Sack Holder, 137
- Sadirons, Holder for Set of, 293
- Safety Catch for Flour Bin, 454
- Safety Pin, Anti-Tangle, 272
- Safety Tips on Chair Rockers, 296
- Safety Match-Box Holder, 418
- Sail for a Boy's Wagon, 134
- Sander Mandrel for Lathe, 388
- Sandpapering Machine, Emergency, 236
- Saw and Knife, Combination Meat, 409
- Saw Cut, Starting, 252
- Sawbuck, Holding Wood in, 177
- Scale, Letter, How to Make, 356
- Scales, To Hold Fish while Removing, 309
- Scarecrow, Garden-Bed, 365
- Scene, Theatrical Night, With Appearance of Fireflies, 162
- Scenery, Reflector for Viewing from Car Window, 212
- Scissors, Grinding, 148
- Scissors Sharpener, 143
- Sconce, Horn Candle, 298
- Scorching, To Prevent Baking Ovens from, 298
- Score Board, Electric, for Indoor Games, 277
- Scraper,
- Scratch Pads of Old Labels, To Make, 406
- Screen and Storm-Door Cushion, 422
- Screen, Crystallization Shown on, 216
- Screen-Door Spring, Homemade, 218
- Screen, Fly, Exterior Sliding, 231
- Screen, Tacking on Frame, 296
- Screens, Needle for Repairing, 206
- Screw, Broken, Extracting, 134
- Screw, Small Vise, How to Make, 295
- Screweye Driver, 231
- Screws,
- Scrubbing Brush, Corner Cleaner Attachment for, 12
- Secret Compartment in Ordinary Table Drawer, 364
- Seed Receptacle for Bird Cages, 147
- Seeds,
- Self-Feeding Match Box, 335
- Settee Rocker and Cradle, Combination, 46
- Setting Colors in Fabrics, 223
- Sewing-Box, Window-Seat, 186
- Sewing Burlap, Needle for, 151
- Sextant, Simple, 380
- Shade and Awning, Combined, 164
- Shade,
- Shade Roller,
- Shaft Coupling, 347
- Shaft, Revolving, Without Power, 274
- Shafting, Preserving from Rust and Corrosion, 256
- Sharpener, Pencil, 237
- Sharpener, Scissors, 143
- Shaving Cabinet Mounted on Adjustable Pedestal, 23
- Shaving-Mug, Electric, 385
- Sheet Metal, Connecting Pipe to, 222
- Sheet Music, Preparing for Turning, 372
- Shelf,
- Shellac Cement, 50
- Shellac, Stick, How to Make, 369
- Shellac, To Clean from Brush, 319
- Shocking Machine, Small, 363
- Shoe Dressing, Waterproof, 325
- Shoe Hanger, 425
- Shoe Heels, Ice Creeper for, 124
- Shoe Pull Made of Eyelet, 292
- Shoe Scraper, 254
- Shoes, Cleaning and Polishing, 23
- Shoes, Stretching Tight-Fitting, 377
- Shoe-Shining Stand, 240
- Shoestring End, 291
- Show-Window Attraction, Novel, 171
- Show Window, Electric Display for, 52
- Sickle, Handle Attachment for, 194
- Signal, Electric Fishing, How to Make, 98
- Silverware, Cleaning Bath for, 355
- Singers, Mechanical Aid to, 206
- Sink a Substitute for Dishpan, 197
- Siphon,
- Skates, Holder for While Sharpening, 54
- Skates Made of Wood, 30
- Skating Merry-Go-Round, 57
- Sketching Pictures, Machine for, 6
- Sketching Profiles, Aid in, 314
- Ski Staff, How to Make, 51
- Skiff, How to Build, 18
- Skimmer for Bottled Milk, 358
- Skimming Spoon, 391
- Skis,
- Sled,
- Sleepwalker, Alarm for, 297
- Slicer, Vegetable, 254
- Slide-Opening Cover for Plate Holder, 104
- Sliver Extractor, 250
- Smoking, To Prevent Torch Lights from, 279
- Snap Hooks, Homemade, 248
- Snowball Maker, 48
- Snowball Thrower, 47
- Snowshoes, How to Make and Use Them:
- Snowshoes, Shapes of, 35
- Soap Shake, 175
- Soft Hat, To Keep Crease in, 254
- Softening Tone of Talking Machine, 328
- Soldering Acid, Brush for Applying, 283
- Soldering and Riveting, 40
- Soldering Small Work, Burner for, 418
- Sounder for Wireless-Telegraph Messages, 384
- Sounder, Telegraph, Homemade, 119
- Spark Coil, Vibrator for, 309
- Spice-Box Shelf, Cupboard-Door, 185
- Spirit Photographs, 351
- Splice for Round Belts, 446
- Splinter, To Remove from Flesh, 319
- Spool and Ball Puzzle, 446
- Spool,
- [471] Spoon, Skimming, 391
- Spot and Colored Lights, Lantern for, 209
- Spring Hinge, Small, 291
- Spring, Homemade Screen-Door, 218
- Springboard, 235
- Springs on Chains of Porch Swing, 47
- Springs, Small Coil, How to Make, 197
- Sprinkler, Homemade Lawn, 366
- Sprocket, Rear Bicycle, Removing, 413
- Squaring Wood Stock, 99
- Stain,
- Stains,
- Stairway Handrails, Detachable Clamp for, 452
- Stamp, Electrotype, How to Make, 419
- Stamp Moistener, 320
- Stand,
- Staple Puller, 196, 271
- Star, Five-Pointed, 226
- Start Small Machine Screws, How to, 169
- Stationery, How to Emboss, 454
- Steam-Engine Cylinders, Small, Made from Seamless Brass Tubing, 396
- Steam-Turbine Boat, Model, 323
- Steam-Turbine Engine, Homemade, 180
- Steel, Cleaning of Grease and Stains, 239
- Steering Sled, A, 57
- Stemmer, Fruit, 94
- Stencil, Copper, for Marking Laundry, How to Make, 299
- Stereoscopic Pictures with an Ordinary Camera, 346
- Stick for Lowering Top Sash of Window, 162
- Stick Holder for Chopping Block, 191
- Stick Shellac, How to Make, 369
- Still, Laboratory, Cooling Tube for, 187
- Stilts, Adjustable, 11
- Stirring Machine, Electric, 165
- Stirring Stick, 456
- Stocking-Stretcher Form, 190
- Stone Jars, Carrying, 309
- Stool, Milk, 384
- Stool, Woven-Top, 256
- Stop Cock, Worn, Repairing, 414
- Stop, Curtain, 296
- Stop, Door, 157
- Stop on Chair Rocker for Baby, 153
- Stopper, Inkwell, 196
- Storage Battery, Filled, Alarm to Designate, 253
- Stove,
- Stovepipe, Bushing in Chimney Hole, 231
- Stove-Wood Carrier, 237
- Strainer, Cover, 149
- Strainer for Milk Pail, 53
- Strap Hinge, Applying, 280
- Straw Hat, To Hold on Head, 58
- Strawberries, Clean, Growing, 133
- Stretching a Curtain without a Frame, 158
- Stretching Poultry Fencing, 253
- Stretching Tight-Fitting Shoes, 377
- String and Ball Trick, 273
- String, Magic, 165
- Stringer, Fish, 146
- Submarine Photographs, 375
- Substitute for,
- Suitcase, Carrier for, 114
- Sulphuric Acid, Mixing, 278
- Summer Dish Washing, 356
- Sunlight Flasher for Garden, 179
- Support, Kettle-Handle, 49
- Support, Telescoping, for Hinged Shelf, 457
- Supporter for Double Clothesline, 288
- Supports for Camp-Fire Utensils, 371
- Surprise Water Bottle, 218
- Survey, Camera, Plotting a, 13
- Surveying, Camera, 7
- Surveying, Plane-Table, 1
- Surveyor, Boy, 1, 7, 13
- Surveyor's Transit, How to Make, 20
- Sweatband, Hat, Reducing Size of, 132
- Sweeping Compound, 430
- Swimming Raft, 200
- Swimming—Springboard, 235
- Swing, Chair, 98
- Swinging-Pendulum Trick, 280
- Switches, Electric Lights Controlled from Two or More, 276
- Table, Double Top for, 78
- Table Legs, Loose, Fastening, 289
- Table, Old, Use for, 392
- Table Top, Workbench Equipment for, 383
- Tablespoon End Used as Lemon Squeezer, 225
- Tack Puller, Emergency, 289
- Tack Puller, Homemade, 172
- Tacking a Screen on Frame, 296
- Talking Machine,
- Tan Leather, To Color Black, 174
- Tank-Development Methods Used in Tray Development, 428
- Tannin Stains, Removing from Teacups, 255
- Taper Ferrule, How to Make, 380
- Taps, Small, Making, 197
- Target, Electric-Lamp Reflector for, 196
- Teacups, Removing Tannin Stains from, 255
- Telegraph Code on Typewriter Keys, 313
- Telegraph, Flash-Light, on Kite Line, 155
- Telegraph Sounder, Homemade, 119
- Telephone Stand for Sloping Desk, 112
- Telephoto Attachment for Hand Camera, 136
- Temperature Alarm, 345
- Tennis Net, Tightening, 200
- Tenon on Chair Post, Repairing Broken, 388
- Tenoned Joint, How to Lock, 339
- Tent, Wall Pockets in, 97
- Testing Dry Batteries, 266
- Testing Instrument, Electrical, for Experimenters, 328
- Thawing Out Frozen Pipes, 387
- Theaters, Child's Seat for, 437
- Theatrical Night Scene with Appearance of Fireflies, 162
- Thermo Engine, Atmospheric, 120
- Thermometer, Outside, Illuminating, 122
- Thimble, Repairing Worn, 326
- Thread Spool, Non-Rolling, 240
- Threads on Wood Shafts, 291
- Tie a Hammock, To, 286
- Tie Rack and Collar Holder, Combination, 30
- Tie-Pin Holder, 294
- Tightening a Tennis Net, 200
- Tilting Inkstand, 300
- Time Chart, Compass, 378
- Time Indicator for Medicine Bottles, 138
- Time Light, Electric, 362
- Timing Photo Printing, 245
- Timing Photograph Prints, 371
- Tin Ball, Cutting from Child's Finger, 436
- Tin Can Used for Watering Chickens, 144
- Toasting Bread Over an Open Fire, 11
- Tone of Talking Machine, Softening, 328
- Tongue Holder for Boy's Wagon, 193
- Tongue of a Shoe, Holding in Place, 238
- Tongues, Buckle, Replacing, 331
- Tool for Amateur Draftsmen, Combination, 324
- Tool Holders Made of Brass Clips, 414
- Tools, Homemade Graining, 206
- Top, Double, for Table, 78
- Torch Lights, To Prevent from Smoking, 279
- Torch, Small, 326
- Tourniquet, Emergency, 206
- Towel Roller, 384
- Towel Roller Brackets, 223
- Towel Roller, Homemade, 249
- Towels, Drying, in Photographer's Dark Room, 331
- Toy Balloons, Inflating, 167
- Toy Bank, Homemade, 366
- Toy Parachute Cut-Away for Kite Lines, 372
- Toy Parachutes, Kite-Line Cutaway for, 308
- Toy Popgun, 240
- Transferring Magazine Pictures, 153
- Transformer, Small Bell-Ringing, Construction of, 348, 352
- Transit, Surveyor's, How to Make, 20
- Transparent Paper, To Make, 11
- Trap,
- Traveler, Kite-Line, 228
- Tray,
- Tray Development, Tank-Development Methods Used in, 428
- Tray-Rocking Stand, Photographic, 228
- Trellis, Flower, Umbrella Used as, 164
- Trellis, Raising Cucumbers on, 445
- Trick,
- Trick Bottles and Glasses, 460
- Trick with Knives and Glasses, 227
- Tricks Performed with Thumbs Tied Together, 281
- Trousers Hanger, 391
- Trout Fishing with Fly and Bait, 73, 79
- Trunk Mystery, 267
- Tube, Drinking, 92
- Tuning Coil, Rotary, 372
- Turning Brass Rings, 400
- Twine Ball Holder, Simple, 239
- Twine Cutter for Use at Wrapping Counter, 185
- Twine Spool, 191
- Typewriter Keys, Telegraph Code on, 313
- Typewriting on Card Stock, 458
- Umbrella Holder for Display Purposes, 170
- Umbrella Used as Flower Trellis, 164
- Upholstered Furniture, Homemade Brush for Cleaning, 188
- Upholstering, Cleaning Dirt from Tufts in, 175
- Utensil Cover, Opening for Steam in, 288
- Utensils,
- Vacuum Experiment, Interesting, 250
- Valve, Automatic, for Funnel, 317
- Vane, Wind, 99
- Varnish, Removing, 126
- Varnished Candles Burn Longer, 321
- Varnishing Bases for Electric Apparatus, 324
- Vase, Hanging, 102
- Vaulting-Pole Attachments, 164
- Vaulting-Pole Holder, 361
- Vegetable Slicer, 254
- Vegetable Stains, Removing, 176
- Vent for Pouring Heavy Liquids, 387
- Ventilator, Window, to Prevent Drafts, 248
- Vessels, Laboratory, Finger Protection on, 170
- Vibrator for Spark Coil, 309
- Vignetter, Photo, 238
- Vise,
- Vise Screw, Small, How to Make, 295
- Vise Used as Caliper Gauge, 172
- Voltmeter, Pocket Direct-Current, 397
- Wagon, Boy's,
- Wall Pockets in Tent, 97
- Wall-Paper Cleaner, 266, 273
- Walls,
- Walnuts, Hulling, 162, 295
- War Kite, How to Make, 108
- Wash Bottle for Laboratory Use, 458
- Washbasin Bottom, To Prevent from Wearing Out, 34
- Washbasin Holder, 289
- Washboard, To Prevent from Slipping in Tub, 103
- Washer, Simple Photographic-Print, 97
- Washing Board, Rubbing Slats for, 263
- Washing Photographic Prints, 168
- Washtub Stand, 138
- Wastebasket, Wire, Rim of Wrapped with Felt, 158
- Waste-Paper Basket, 320
- Watch Demagnetizer, How to Make, 150
- Watch, How to Demagnetize, 290
- Water Bottle, Surprise, 218
- Water, Distilling Apparatus for, 112
- Water Filter, 109
- Water Heater, Electric, 89, 243
- Water Heating Coil in Furnace Pipe, 294
- Water Meter, Homemade, 48
- Water Motor, How to Make, 303
- Water, Surplus, Scraping Off on Grindstone, 188
- Water Wheel, How to Make, 301
- Watering Plants at Roots, 286
- Watering System, Automatic, for Poultry Yards, 66
- Watering Window Plants, Hose Attachment for, 298
- Waterproof Shoe Dressing, 325
- Welding Small Resistance-Wire Connections, 158
- Wet Batteries, Protecting Binding Posts on from Corrosion, 252
- Wet Battery, Homemade, 340
- Wheel, Mysterious Revolving, 152
- Whetting Block, 375
- Whetting, Chisel Holder for, 317
- Whip, Repairing Broken, 326
- Whirligig Clapper, 453
- Whistle, 41
- Whistle, Homemade, 454
- Whitewash, To Make Stick to Surfaces Coated, 233
- Wind Vane, 99
- Wind Vane with Electric Indicator, How to Build, 305
- Winding, Holding Small Armatures for, 118
- Windmill for Light Power, 307
- Windmill, Power, 311
- Window Casing, Mirror Hinged to, 355
- Window Catch Used for Locking Extension Table, 42
- Window Glass, Loose, Holder for, 149
- Window Lock, 320
- Window, Plant Shelf for, 324
- Window Sash, To Prevent from Freezing to Sill, 101
- Window Sash, Upper, Shade Roller Attached to, 246
- Window-Seat Sewing Box, 186
- Window-Shade Guides, 286
- Window, Stick for Lowering Top Sash of, 162
- Window Ventilator to Prevent Drafts, 248
- Wing Nut, How to Make, 182
- Wing Nuts, Homemade, 446
- Winter Sports, Devices for—
- Bobsled, Coasting, Four-Passenger, 24
- Bobsled, Guide Ropes on, 155
- Bobsled, Inexpensive, 49
- Game Played on Ice, 52
- Ice Boat and Catamaran, 27
- Ice Glider, 31
- Monorail Sled, 50
- Propellers for Hand Sled, 334
- Pushmobile Racer for Ice, 428
- Skates Made of Wood, 30
- Skating Merry-Go-Round, 57
- Ski Staff, 51
- Skis, Back Thrust Prevented on, 216
- Skis, Homemade, 420
- Snowball Maker, 48
- Snowball Thrower, 47
- Snowshoes, How to Make and Use Them, 35, 43
- Steering Sled, 57
- Wire Clothespin, 387
- Wire Expansion Meter, 410
- Wire Mesh Used as Shelf, 250
- Wire, Pulling through Curved Electric Fixtures, 173
- Wire Wound on Spool, Measuring Length of, 365
- Wireless-Lighted Lamp Deception, 260
- Wireless Stations, Distance Chart for, 269
- Wireless Telegraph Messages, Sounder for, 384
- Wireless Telephone Set, Simple, Construction of, 337, 341
- Wood, Brown Stain for, 189
- Wood Clothes Peg, 406
- [473]Wood, Holding in Sawbuck, 177
- Wood, Homemade Countersink for, 154
- Wood Lathe, How to Make, 434
- Wood Panels, Decorative, 58
- Wood Postal Cards, 292
- Wood, Raising Dents in, 381
- Wood Scraper Handle, 452
- Wood Shafts, Threads on, 291
- Wood, Skates Made of, 30
- Wood Stock, Squaring, 99
- Wood, To Harden Small Blocks of, 423
- Wood Turning, Artistic, 128
- Woods, Fine, Furniture Polish for, 216
- Workbench, Back Stop for, 225
- Workbench Equipment for Table Top, 383
- Worktable, Photographic, for Small Quarters, 215
- Wounds, Small, Application for, 304
- Woven-Top Stool, 256
- Wrench for Different-Size Nuts, 379
- Wringer, Mop, How to Make, 171
- Wrist Brace, 144
- Writing Board for Children, 325
- Writing Name Reversed on Paper Placed on Forehead, 392

Do You Know a Boy Who is Waiting for this Book?

He may have the few tools and materials to be found in every household, or he may possess his own complete chest of tools and well-equipped workshop, but something is lacking—He needs ideas—suggestions of things to make or do. He is tired of all the things that he and his companions have been able to think of. Now there are hundreds of other boys scattered all over this big country who have many new and interesting ideas he has never thought of, but how can this one boy ever get in touch with all these others? In just one way—through the pages of
He might have the few tools and materials found in every home, or he could own a complete set of tools and a well-equipped workshop, but something is missing—he needs ideas—suggestions for things to make or do. He’s bored with everything he and his friends have come up with so far. Right now, there are hundreds of other boys spread across this vast country who have fresh and exciting ideas he’s never considered, but how can this one boy connect with all these others? There’s only one way—through the pages of
Book I
The Boy Mechanic
Book I
The Boy Engineer
A Few Practical Features:
Some Useful Features:
¶ A large number of the things described may be made from old cast-off articles which the average boy has at his disposal.
¶ A lot of the things mentioned can be made from old discarded items that the typical boy has on hand.
¶ Many articles involving the purchase of only a few cents worth of material will be found fully as serviceable as similar ones costing several dollars.
¶ Many articles that cost just a few cents will prove to be just as useful as similar ones that cost several dollars.
¶ Scores of handy things the family can use in the home are described.
¶ Many useful items the family can use at home are described.
¶ Finally, this book will develop and interest the boy along mechanical lines and educate him at his play.
¶ Finally, this book will engage the boy and spark his curiosity about mechanics while also teaching him through play.
The Great Book of 700 Things For Boys To Do
The Awesome Book of 700 Activities for Boys
These original, practical suggestions have been furnished by hundreds of boys who have actually built and experimented with the devices they are now telling other boys how to build. In no other way could a book containing such a wide and interesting variety of contents have been prepared, for no one author or staff of writers, for that matter, could have possibly gleaned such a wealth of ideas from their own observation and experience.
These practical suggestions come from hundreds of boys who have actually built and tested the devices they are now showing other boys how to make. There’s no other way a book with such a diverse and interesting range of content could have been created, because no single author or group of writers could have gathered such an abundance of ideas from their own observations and experiences.
BOOK I—THE BOY MECHANIC
Represents the Best Accomplishments of
the Mechanical Genius of Young America
BOOK I—THE KID MECHANIC
Showcases the Greatest Achievements of
the Mechanical Talent of Young America
for the material used in the book is a careful selection of only those articles which are new, practical and of more than ordinary interest; the selection having been made by mechanical experts who still have active recollections of their boyhood interests. It gives complete directions for making all the things boys love to build and experiment with in the fields of electricity, mechanics, sports, arts and crafts work, magic, etc., such as Electrical Appliances—Steam and Gas Engines—Turbines—Motors—Wireless and Morse Telegraph—Self-Propelled Vehicles—Toboggans—Ice Boats—Canoes—Paddle Boats—Punts—Camping Outfits—Tents—Fishing Tackle—Magic Lanterns—Searchlights—Cameras—Telescopes—Gliders, Kites and Balloons—Electric Furnaces—Lathes—Pottery Kilns. A boy would be an old man before he could make half the things described in this wonderful book. It is entirely different from any other published and has
for the material used in the book is a careful selection of only those articles which are new, practical, and of more than ordinary interest; the selection having been made by mechanical experts who still have active memories of their boyhood interests. It provides complete directions for making all the things boys love to build and experiment with in fields like electricity, mechanics, sports, arts and crafts, magic, etc., such as Electrical Appliances—Steam and Gas Engines—Turbines—Motors—Wireless and Morse Telegraph—Self-Propelled Vehicles—Toboggans—Ice Boats—Canoes—Paddle Boats—Punts—Camping Outfits—Tents—Fishing Tackle—Magic Lanterns—Searchlights—Cameras—Telescopes—Gliders, Kites, and Balloons—Electric Furnaces—Lathes—Pottery Kilns. A boy would be an old man before he could make half the things described in this incredible book. It is completely different from anything else published and has

"Wish I knew what to make"
"I wish I knew what to create"
700 Articles—480 Pages—800 Illustrations
(7 x 10)
Price $2.00 Postpaid
700 Articles—480 Pages—800 Illustrations
(7 x 10)
Price $2.00 Postpaid
It is clearly printed on high-grade book paper and durably bound in cloth. The cover is of an attractive design in four colors showing a boy building a small boat. There are ten solid pages of index alone. Neither care nor expense have been spared to make this the greatest boys' book published, and to enable as many boys as possible to have one, the price has been made absolutely as low as possible. It would be difficult to think of a way of investing $2.00 that would benefit a boy as much as through the purchase of one of these books.
It’s printed on high-quality paper and has a durable cloth binding. The cover features an appealing design in four colors, depicting a boy building a small boat. There are ten solid pages dedicated to the index alone. No effort or cost has been spared to make this the best boys' book available, and to ensure that as many boys as possible can own one, the price has been set as low as it can be. It would be hard to think of a better way to spend $2.00 that would benefit a boy as much as buying one of these books.
POPULAR MECHANICS
BOOK DEPARTMENT
6 North Michigan Ave.
CHICAGO
POPULAR MECHANICS
BOOK SECTION
6 N Michigan Ave.
CHICAGO
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!